JP7765033B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

In the past, there have been known gaming machines that draw a lottery to determine whether a jackpot will be awarded based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting hole, and if the lottery results in a jackpot, a jackpot symbol is statically displayed on a display device to trigger a jackpot game. In addition, some of these gaming machines have been known to display an image on a display device to notify players of an abnormal state when an abnormal state occurs (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2021-049446

However, the gaming machines described in the above patent documents still have room for improvement in order to ensure that abnormality notifications are properly executed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately execute an abnormality notification .

Effective solutions for achieving the above-mentioned objectives are presented below. Where necessary, explanations of their operation will be provided. For ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations will also be shown in the embodiments of the invention, but are not intended to be limiting.

The present invention provides
A gaming machine that awards a benefit based on the result of a predetermined lottery,
image display means capable of displaying an image;
a performance control means for controlling a display related to the performance performed by the image display means;
A specific operation means operable by a player,
The performance control means
A specific effect that is performed when there is no possibility of granting the benefit;
A special performance that is performed when there is a possibility of granting the benefit;
and an abnormality notification that displays abnormality notification information when a specific abnormal state occurs.
The display regarding the specific effect and the display regarding the special effect are not the same or similar displays, but are different displays,
The specific effects and the special effects can be executed even when a specific abnormal state occurs,
When the specific operation means is operated during the execution of the specific effect and the abnormality notification, it is possible to terminate only the specific effect being executed and continue the abnormality notification,
When the specific operation means is operated during the execution of the special effect and the abnormality notification, the special effect and the abnormality notification can be continued without terminating the special effect currently being executed,
Furthermore, when the specific performance and the abnormality notification are being performed, if the specific performance is terminated based on the operation of the specific operation means and then the specific performance is executed again, the specific performance that is executed again is configured to be executed from the beginning, rather than being resumed from the point at which it was terminated based on the operation of the specific operation means,
Furthermore, at least when the specific performance is not being performed, based on the operation of the specific operation means, the specific performance can be performed at a timing later than the execution timing of the specific performance when the specific operation means is not operated.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, abnormality notification can be appropriately executed.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a left side view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from behind. This is a front view of a pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. This is an oblique view of the pachinko machine from the front right when the pressing operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame open from the main frame and the main frame open from the outer frame. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, viewed from the rear. FIG. 2 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. This is a perspective view of the outer frame from the front. This is a perspective view of the outer frame from behind. This is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into its main components as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the lower outer frame assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front. 1A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as viewed from above the front, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 1A as viewed from below the front. FIG. 2 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. 10 is a left side view of the door frame. FIG. 10 is a right side view of the door frame. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front right. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front left. This is a perspective view of the door frame from behind. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame, broken down into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. FIG. 1A is a perspective view of a door frame base unit of a door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as seen from the rear-front, (c) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of a conventional pachinko machine as seen from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as seen from the rear. 34(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) as seen from the front, and FIG. 34(b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) as seen from the rear. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock in Figure 34(a) from the front, (b) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state in (a). (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit from the back. (a) is an exploded oblique view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded oblique view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case and anti-tamper member removed. (a) is a perspective view of the fall cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the fall cover unit as seen from the back. FIG. 10 is a front view of the fall cover unit with the lid member removed. 1A is an enlarged front view showing the handle unit and handle cover unit portions of the door frame, and FIG. 1B is an enlarged perspective view showing the handle unit and handle cover unit portions of the door frame. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line I-I in Figure 41(a). FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A in FIG. 1. This is an oblique view of the tray unit of the door frame. This is a perspective view of the plate unit from behind. (a) is a cross-sectional view showing the key parts of the door frame cut horizontally at the lower tray ball supply port, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing the key parts of a conventional door frame cut at the same location as (a). This is an enlarged plan view showing the ball lending operation unit portion in the tray unit of the door frame. (a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front with the performance operation button facing upward, and (b) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit of (a) seen from the back. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from above and the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from below and in the front. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit when the performance operation unit is in a lowered position and the lower holding member of the lifting spring is at the upper end of its travel, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit when the performance operation unit has moved from the position in (a) to the raised position. This is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit when the performance operation unit is in a lowered position and the lifting spring lower holding member is at the downward end of its travel position. This is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the decorative board on the outer periphery of the performance operation unit, the decorative board on the outer side of the button, and the decorative board inside the button in a plan view of the performance operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. (a) is a front view of the dish unit in its normal state, and (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the performance control unit is in the raised position. This is a plan view of a performance operation unit showing an example in which multiple contact detection bodies are provided in the performance operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic example of an example in which multiple contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic example in which a switching unit is provided between the contact detection sensor main body and multiple contact detection bodies in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the left dish decorative unit, right dish decorative unit, and performance operation unit of the dish unit can be moved forward and backward, and contact detection bodies are provided on the front and rear of the performance operation unit, etc. FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative contact detection body, and FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the performance operation unit. (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit from the back. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit as seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line U-U in Figure 62(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, (c) is an oblique view of the door frame right side unit from the front, and (d) is an oblique view of the door frame right side unit from the back. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit as seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 66(a). This is a cross-sectional view taken along line O-O in Figure 66(a). (a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, showing the two-color molded outer layer of the door frame in an opaque state, and (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit in (a), showing the outer layer in a transparent state while leaving the inner layer intact. A front view showing each decorative substrate of the door frame. This is a plan view showing the decorative board in the part of the door frame's performance operation unit. A rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view of the main body frame from the front right. This is an oblique view of the main body frame from the front left. This is an oblique view of the main body frame as seen from behind. This is an exploded oblique view of the main body frame disassembled into its main components as seen from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. (a) is an enlarged oblique view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged oblique view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame when the door frame is opened relative to the main body frame. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed relative to the main body frame. 1A is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the ball launcher as seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit as seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as seen from the back. FIG. 1A is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, with the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the rear, with the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components. This is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit, cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-to-rear direction. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-to-back direction when the ball removal movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line A-A in (a). An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the door frame fall cover unit and the lower full ball path unit. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. 1A is a perspective view of a board unit of a main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from below and behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, seen from the front, disassembled into its main components. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. This is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut in the center in the left-right direction. 1A is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. 1A is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. This is an enlarged view showing the upper part of the main body frame in a perspective view seen from behind. 1A is a perspective view of the spherical tank with tank rails and the like assembled thereto, as seen from above the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of FIG. 1A from below the front. 100(a) is an exploded perspective view seen from the front. FIG. An explanatory diagram showing the area where game balls that overflow from the ball tank at the top of the main body frame circulate. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls that have overflowed from the ball tank at the top of the main body frame. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls into the bypass passage at the top of the main body frame. FIG. 10 is an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame as seen from behind the hinge side, showing the tank rail and its surroundings. This is an oblique view showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail as viewed from behind of a pachinko machine equipped with a tank rail of another embodiment. 106 in assembled state with the spherical tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) seen from the rear. 107, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rails and the like of FIG. 107, as seen from the rear. FIG. This is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail etc. taken along the kerch line in Figure 107(a). An explanatory diagram showing a cross section of the flow of game balls within the tank rail of Figure 107. (a) is a front view of a board unit of another embodiment, (b) is an oblique view of the board unit of (a) seen from the front right, and (c) is an oblique view of the board unit of (a) seen from the front left. 111(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 111(a) seen from the upper right rear, and FIG. 111(b) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 111(a) seen from the lower right rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the substrate unit of Figure 111(a) as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the substrate unit of Figure 111(a) as seen from behind. (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line K-K in Figure 111(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line K-K in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line K-K in (a). This is a bottom view showing the area behind the door frame in a pachinko machine equipped with the board unit of Figure 111(a). An explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out ball discharge outlet of the out ball passage. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out-sensor is detachable, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out-sensor in FIG. 1A has been detached. (a) is an oblique view of the board unit of the third embodiment, showing the power supply unit, dispensing control unit, and interface unit omitted, viewed from the front right, and (b) is an oblique view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the front left. 119 from the rear right and top right, and FIG. 120 is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119 from the rear right and bottom right. 119A is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119, FIG. 119B is a cross-sectional view taken along line KO-KO in FIG. 119A, and FIG. 119C is a cross-sectional view taken along line SA-SA in FIG. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-C in Figure 121(a). This is an exploded oblique view of the substrate unit of Figure 119 as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the board unit of Figure 119, seen from the rear. 120A is a perspective view of the ball path member of the base unit of FIG. 119 as seen from the front, and FIG. 120B is a perspective view of the ball path member of the base unit of FIG. 119 as seen from the back. An explanatory diagram showing the elimination of ball clogging in the board unit of Figure 119. An explanatory diagram showing the prevention of intrusion of linear illegal tools into the board unit of Figure 119. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing how to remove dust from the board unit of FIG. 119. This is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine, with the center gimmicks and other parts made opaque. This is an oblique view of the game board of Figure 129 seen from the front right. FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 129 as seen from the front left. This is a perspective view of the game board from behind. FIG. 4 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. This is a front view of the game board with the center gimmick and other features made transparent. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. This is a front view of the game board, showing the front unit cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the game area where game balls circulate and the obstacle pins. FIG. 2A is a perspective view of the front components and game panel of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 2B is a perspective view of the front components and game panel as seen from the back. (a) is a front view showing an enlarged view of the upper right corner of the front component and the game panel, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the soot line in (a), and (c) is an exploded oblique view of (a) broken down into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 1A is a perspective view of the front unit of the gaming board as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the front unit of the gaming board as seen from the back. (a) is an exploded oblique view of the lower right guide passage in the center gimmick as seen from the front, and (b) is a side cross-sectional view of the center gimmick cut left and right at the separation hole in the front member in front of the lower right guide passage, as seen from the right. 1A is a perspective view of the gate member as seen from the front, FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of the gate member as seen from the front, and FIG. 1C is an exploded perspective view of the gate member as seen from the rear. 1A is a front view of the gate member, and FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line SEC in FIG. An explanatory diagram showing the flow path of the game ball on the right side of the front unit. An explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the first attacker unit and second attacker unit in Figure 144. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing the placement of magnetic sensors. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that can detect magnetic field lines from a magnet, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that cannot detect magnetic field lines from a magnet, (c) is an explanatory diagram that shows a schematic perspective view of the detection range of a magnetic sensor, (d) is an explanatory diagram that shows the positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic body that cannot detect magnetic field lines from a magnet, and (e) is an explanatory diagram that shows the positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic body that can detect magnetic field lines from a magnet. (a) is an oblique view showing the state in which a magnetic sensor is held by a holding member, (b) is an exploded oblique view showing the state in which the holding member and the magnetic sensor are separated, and (c) is an exploded view showing the holding member in cross section. FIG. 1A is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the back. This is a front view of the back front performance unit in the back unit. (a) is an oblique view of the back front performance unit in the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is an oblique view of the back front performance unit in the back unit seen from the back. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the front performance unit cut near the center in the vertical direction and viewed from above, (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the left part of (a), and (c) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the right part of (a). This is an exploded oblique view of the rear front left decorative unit of the rear front performance unit, viewed from the front together with the light guide plate. This is an exploded oblique view of the rear front left decorative unit, showing only the rear front left first decorative body, rear front left second decorative body, rear front left third decorative body, and rear front left decorative body base. (a) is a front view of the first decorative body on the front left shown in a transparent state, (b) is a front view of the second decorative body on the front left shown in a transparent state, (c) is a front view of the third decorative body on the front left shown in a transparent state, and (c) is a front view of the base of the front left decorative body shown in a transparent state. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide plate in the back front performance unit and the decorative substrate for illuminating and decorating the light guide plate and the back front left decorative unit from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide plate in the back front performance unit and the decorative substrate for illuminating and decorating the decorative body of the back front lower performance unit from the front. A front view showing the back front left decorative unit illuminated and decorated. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which a first pattern on the light guide plate is illuminated, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which a second pattern on the light guide plate is illuminated. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the light-emitting configuration of the second pattern of the light guide plate. FIG. This is a front view of the back front performance unit showing the second image on the light guide plate illuminated. This is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the rear upper first decorative part of the rear upper movable decorative body in the rear upper performance unit of the rear unit has been moved to a lowered position facing forward. This is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the rear upper movable decorative body in the rear upper performance unit of the rear unit has been moved to a lowered position and the rear upper second decorative part is facing forward. This is a front view of the game board showing the rear left movable decoration and the rear right movable decoration in the rear lower performance unit of the rear unit moved to their appearance positions. This is a front view of the game board showing the back front lower middle decorative body in the back front lower performance unit of the back unit's back front performance unit in the raised state. This is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the back front left logo decoration, back front upper left logo decoration, back front left sub decoration, and back front left band decoration of the back front left decorative unit 3120 in the back front performance unit of the back unit are illuminated. This is a front view of the game board showing the first image on the light guide plate in the back front performance unit of the back unit illuminated and decorated. This is a front view of the game board showing the first image on the light guide plate in the back front performance unit of the back unit illuminated and the back left movable decorative body and the back right movable decorative body in the back lower performance unit moved to their appearance positions. This is a front view of the game board showing the second image on the light guide plate in the back front performance unit of the back unit illuminated and decorated. FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the peripheral control unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit. FIG. 2 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. 1A is a perspective view of a ROM socket having a conversion board, and FIG. 1B is a top view of a control ROM having a leadless package attached to the ROM socket. This is a view taken along the arrow P in Figure 173(a). 10 is a cross-sectional view of a through hole showing an outline of the positional relationship between a through hole formed in a peripheral control board and a through hole formed in a conversion board. FIG. 1A is a perspective view of a control ROM having a leadless package and a ROM socket mounted on a conversion board, and FIG. 1B is a top view of the control ROM having a leadless package attached to the ROM socket. 10A to 10C are schematic diagrams showing the board management numbers of peripheral control boards. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a schematic circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a main control input circuit with an error detection function. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a power outage monitoring circuit. This is a schematic circuit diagram showing the circuit of the dispensing control board. FIG. 1A is an oblique view of the main control board box showing the state before the main control board is attached to the cover body and the base body is slid to cover the opening side of the cover body; and FIG. 1B is an oblique view of the main control board box with the cover body and base body sealed by a sealing mechanism. 1A is a perspective view of the setting key switch as seen from the diagonal front right, FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the setting key switch as seen from the diagonal front left, and FIG. 1C is a top view of the setting key switch. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the setting key switch and the cover body of the main control board box. FIG. FIG. 1(a) is a diagram showing the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted; FIG. 1(b) is a diagram showing the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted and the corresponding solder surface (back surface) of the main control board; and FIG. 1(c) is a diagram showing the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted and the corresponding solder surface (back surface) of the main control board. This is a continuation of Figure 186, and is a diagram (part 3) (d) showing the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted and the corresponding solder surface (back surface) of the main control board, and a diagram (part 4) (e) showing the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted and the corresponding solder surface (back surface) of the main control board. 1 is a schematic diagram illustrating an outline of the layout of various electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board. FIG. This is a schematic diagram of the solder side (back side) of the main control board, explaining an overview of various wiring patterns to the main control MPU of the main control board. FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration for covering an insulating coating on the land of a through-hole for an input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment formed on the mounting surface (front surface) of a main control board; FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of a cross section taken along line X-X in FIG. 1A; and FIG. 1C is a schematic diagram of a modified example of FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration for covering an insulating coating on the land of a through-hole for an input signal wiring pattern according to the second embodiment formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310; FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram of a cross section along line X-X in FIG. 13A; and FIG. 13C is a schematic diagram of a modified example of FIG. FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration for covering an insulating coating on the land of a through-hole for an input signal wiring pattern according to the third embodiment formed on the mounting surface (front surface) of a main control board; FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram of a cross section along line X-X in FIG. 10A; and FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram of a modified example of FIG. FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration for covering an insulating coating on the land of a through hole for an input signal wiring pattern according to a fourth embodiment formed on the mounting surface (front surface) of a main control board; FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram of a cross section along line X-X in FIG. 10A; and FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram of a modified example of FIG. 1A is a front view showing an enlarged portion of the game board of the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a front view showing an enlarged portion of the game board of the second embodiment in the same area as in FIG. 1A. (a) is a front view showing an enlarged portion of the game board of the second embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the back front left decorative unit of the back front performance unit in (a) in an illuminated state. Figure 195(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the panel board of the game panel in a luminous decorated state. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of a game board according to a third embodiment, showing the panel board and cells disassembled and viewed from the front. (a) is a front view of the function display unit of the second embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view along the So-So line in (a), (c) is an oblique view of the function display unit of (a) seen from the front, and (d) is an oblique view of the function display unit of (a) seen from the back. This is an exploded oblique view of the function display unit of Figure 198 when viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the function display unit of Figure 198, seen from the rear. An explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the function display unit of Figure 198 and the player. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the function display unit and the player in the third embodiment. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of a function display unit according to a fourth embodiment. (a) is a cross-sectional view showing a second embodiment of the mounting of a magnetic sensor, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the mounting of the magnetic sensor in (a) in an oblique view, (c) is an exploded oblique view showing the mounting of the magnetic sensor in (b) in an exploded manner, and (d) is an exploded oblique view of the mounting of a magnetic sensor shown with a holding member different from that in (c). (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decorative body also serves as a positioning hole for the second member, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of an example in which a closed space is formed by the second member behind the separation hole of the first member for removing the decorative body, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of the state in (b) in which decorative bodies of different thicknesses are attached, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decorative body also serves as an attachment hole for the decorative body. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the first member from the front with a decorative body attached, (b) is a cross-sectional view of (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the first member from the front with a decorative body different from that of (a) attached. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a horizontally elongated rectangular decorative body and a first member, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a circular decorative body and a first member, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a symmetrically arranged decorative body and a first member, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a symmetrically arranged decorative body with a different shape from (c) and a first member. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the decorative body and the movable first member from the front, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line T-T-A in (a), (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the decorative body and the first member in (a) and (c), (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a decorative body of a different form to (a) and the movable first member from the front, and (e) is a cross-sectional view taken along line T-T-A in (d). FIG. 1 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process when the main control side power is turned on. This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing when the main control side power is turned on in Figure 210. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting value confirmation display process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an error display process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when the dispensing control unit is powered on. This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing of the dispensing control unit in Figure 216. Following Figure 217, this is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing when the dispensing control unit is powered on. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a dispensing control unit timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power-on process; 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric device control processing (step S114). A flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S232). 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the performance pre-determination process (step S245). A flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S234). 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process processing (step S238). 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S280). 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for hit determination processing (step S305). Various tables showing a hit determination table (A), a big hit pattern determination table (B), and a small hit pattern determination table (C). 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281). A flowchart showing the procedure for the first variation pattern setting process (step S282). This is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern change processing (step S283). 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S284). This is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control processing (step S235A). FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a rainbow-colored effect. An explanatory diagram showing the grouping of multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing groupings of multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame. FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing diagram showing an example of a rainbow effect. FIG. 10 is a timing diagram showing an example of a rainbow effect during an abnormality. (A) is a front oblique view of the upper rear movable decorative body, and (B) is a cross-sectional view of the upper rear movable decorative body cut along line A-A. FIG. 10 is a timing diagram showing a first modified example of the rainbow effect. FIG. 10 is a timing diagram showing a first modified example of the rainbow effect. FIG. 10 is a timing diagram showing a second modified example of the rainbow effect. FIG. 10 is a timing diagram showing a second modified example of the rainbow effect. 1A is a schematic front view of a divided game board, and FIG. 1B is a schematic back view of the divided game board. (a) is a rear perspective view of the split game board as seen from the lower left rear before the right game board and left game board that make up the split game board are combined, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the split game board as seen from the lower left rear. This is a schematic front view of the split game board in Figure 248 (a) after the decoration has been changed. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example of an ID output circuit. FIG. 10 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example of a photosensor information serial output circuit. FIG. 10 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a plurality of ID output circuits. 10 is a list showing a match/mismatch table of combinations. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power-on process capable of performing ID determination. 10 is a table showing how to deal with various errors when power is turned on (specific example 1); This is a table showing various error responses (specific example 1) that do not involve magnetic detection when a performance is in progress after the power is turned on or while waiting for customers. This is a table showing how to deal with various errors (specific example 1) that involve magnetic detection when a performance is in progress after the power is turned on or while waiting for customers. 10 is a table showing how to deal with various errors when power is turned on (specific example 2); This is a table showing various error responses (specific example 2) that do not involve magnetic detection when the performance is in progress after the power is turned on or while waiting for customers. This is a table showing how to deal with various errors (specific example 2) that involve magnetic detection when a performance is in progress after the power is turned on or while customers are waiting. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example of an ID comparison circuit. 10 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a circuit of a relay board provided in a tray unit. FIG. This is a circuit showing an example of a modified example of FIG. 262. This is a circuit diagram showing an example of replacing the LED driver that constitutes the ID comparison circuit provided on the frame side decorative board shown in Figure 262 with a serial-parallel conversion circuit. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing an outline of allocation of each unit. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing an example of an ID output circuit in each unit. This is a circuit diagram showing an example of a circuit that further includes a manufacturer identification code (manufacturer identification value) in the ID output circuit in each unit of Figure 267. 1A is a schematic front view of a divided game board on which an ID error determination switch is provided, and FIG. 1B is a schematic rear view of the divided game board on which an ID error determination switch is provided. This is a schematic exploded oblique view of the right-side game board disassembled into the right-side game panel and the right-side back box, viewed from the front. This is a schematic oblique view of a portion of the right rear box of the rear unit of the right-side game board, seen from the front. This is a schematic exploded oblique view of a portion of the right-side game board disassembled into a right-side game panel and a right-side back box, as viewed from the front. This is an example of behavior when changing the setting value when the divided game board 5A, which is composed of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR, is in a compatible (matched) state. This is an example of behavior when changing the setting value when the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent). This is an example of behavior when an illegal magnetism occurs during the execution of the setting change process when the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent). This is an example of behavior when an unauthorized magnetism occurs during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting change process is completed when the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent). This is an example of behavior when changing the setting value when the right game board 5AR is not connected. This is an example of behavior when unauthorized magnetism occurs while the setting change process is being executed while the right-side game board 5AR is not connected. This is an example of behavior when unauthorized magnetism occurs during the power-on operation check that is performed after the setting change process is completed when the right-side game board 5AR is not connected. This is an example of behavior when a setting value confirmation display is performed when the divided game board 5A, which is composed of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR, is in a compatible (matched) state as a combination of the divided game board 5A. This is an example of behavior when a setting value confirmation display is performed when the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent). This is an example of behavior when an illegal magnetism occurs during execution of the setting value confirmation display process when the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent). This is an example of behavior when an unauthorized magnetism occurs during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed when the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent). This is an example of behavior when a setting value confirmation display is performed when the right-side game board 5AR is not connected. This is an example of behavior when unauthorized magnetism occurs while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed when the right-side game board 5AR is not connected. This is an example of behavior when unauthorized magnetism occurs during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed when the right-side game board 5AR is not connected. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a modified example of the main control board. This is an example of behavior when the transition to confirmation mode is controlled when the combination of the divided game board 5A, which is composed of the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR, is compatible (aligned). This is an example of behavior when the transition to confirmation mode is controlled when the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent). This is an example of behavior when controlling the transition to confirmation mode when the right-side game board 5AR is not connected. This is a time chart showing the start timing of a specific effect. This is a time chart for ending a specific effect. This is a time chart showing the start timing of a specific effect in an abnormal state. This is a time chart for ending a specific effect in an abnormal state. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a display mode of a performance display device. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display mode of a performance display device. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of a presentation mode during the second specific presentation, and (B) is a timing chart showing an example of a presentation mode during the first specific presentation. (C) is a timing chart showing an example of a presentation pattern during the second specific presentation. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of a presentation mode during the second specific presentation, and (B) is a timing chart showing an example of a presentation mode during the first specific presentation. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display mode of a performance display device.

[1. Overall structure of a pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the right front when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. Furthermore, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. Figure 11 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, as seen from the front, and Figure 12 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, as seen from the back.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 that is installed in an island facility (not shown) in an amusement hall; a door frame 3 that opens and closes the front of the outer frame 2; a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and is attached to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed; and a game board 5 that is detachably attached to the main frame 4 from the front and is visible to the player through the door frame 3, and has a game area 5a into which the player shoots a game ball B (see Figure 89).

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 comprises a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart laterally and extend vertically; an upper outer frame member 30 that connects the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; a lower outer frame assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; an upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end of the upper surface of the upper outer frame member 30; and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and outer frame lower hinge member 60 coaxially support the main frame upper hinge member 510 and main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4, allowing the main frame 4 to be mounted so that it can be opened and closed forward around the left side when viewed from the front.

In addition, when the door frame 3 and the main frame 4 are closed, the lower outer frame assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 to form part of the enclosure 624 for the main frame speaker 622, and by inverting the phase of the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 and radiating it forward, the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the play area 5a of the play board 5 into which the game balls B are shot so that it can be seen from the front, stores the game balls B to be shot into the play area 5a, and is equipped with a handle 195 that the player operates to shoot the stored game balls B into the play area 5a. The door frame 3 also decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the door frame 3 is equipped with a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, separate from the handle 195. When a player-participation performance is executed, the player can participate in the performance by operating the performance operation unit 301, allowing the player to enjoy the game not only with the game ball B, but also by operating the performance operation unit 301.

The main frame 4 comprises a frame-shaped main frame base unit 500 whose rear can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5; an upper main frame hinge member 510 and a lower main frame hinge assembly 520 for opening and closing the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 and for opening and closing the door frame 3; a main frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main frame base unit 500; a ball launcher 540 for shooting game balls B into the game area 5a of the game board 5; and a game ball supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. It comprises a payout base unit 550 that receives game balls B, a payout unit 560 that pays out the game balls B received by the payout base unit 550 to the player, a board unit 620 that has a power supply board 630 equipped with a power switch 630a that can turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 as well as a payout control board 633, a back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 501, and a locking unit 650 that locks the outer frame 2 and main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and main frame 4.

The main frame 4 holds the game board 5, which has a play area 5a where play is carried out by hitting game balls B, and is used to pay out game balls B to the player and eject used game balls B to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the island equipment of the amusement hall). The main frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is removably stored inside from the front. The main frame 4 is openably attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2, which is attached to the island equipment of the amusement hall, at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front, and a door frame 3 is openably attached to close the open front side.

The game board 5 comprises a game area 5a where the game ball B is thrown by the player, a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a main control unit attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and having a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311. The gaming panel 1100 is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1300, a functional display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310, a peripheral control unit 1500 (see Figure 12) located on the rear of the gaming panel 1100, an effect display device 1600 that is located in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying specified effect images, a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, and a rear unit 3000 attached to the rear of the gaming panel 1100. The rear unit 3000 is equipped with various effect units that are capable of performing movable effects and light-emitting effects depending on the game status.

The game area 5a of the game board 5 is provided with a plurality of obstacle pins N that come into contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, as well as a general prize opening 2001, a first start opening 2002, a gate 2003, a second start opening 2004, and a special prize opening 2005 that grant a player a predetermined benefit (e.g., the payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) when a game ball B is accepted or passes through them. The obstacle pins N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The general prize opening 2001, the first start opening 2002, the gate 2003, the second start opening 2004, and the special prize opening 2005 are provided in the front unit 2000.

A player can shoot a game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. This allows the player to enjoy operating the handle 195 so that the game ball B is accepted into or passes through the general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, gate 2003, second starting opening 2004, and big winning opening 2005, etc., within the game area 5a.

In addition, the game board 5 can entertain players by displaying predetermined effect images on the effect display device 1600 in response to the game state that changes when the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a, and by performing light-emitting effects and moving effects using the back-front effect unit 3100, back-upper effect unit 3200, back-lower effect unit 3300, etc.

[2. Overall structure of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 13 to 18. Figure 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, Figure 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and Figure 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Figure 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and Figure 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. Figure 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, broken down into its main components, as seen from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in an amusement hall or the like on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. When viewed from the front, the outer frame 2 is formed into a rectangular frame that extends vertically.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 comprises a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart laterally and extend vertically; an upper outer frame member 30 that connects the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; a lower outer frame assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; an upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end of the upper surface of the upper outer frame member 30; and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40.

When the main frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 to form part of the enclosure 624 for the main frame speaker 622, and is able to invert the phase of sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 and radiate it forward.

The outer frame 2 has an upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 that can detachably support the upper main frame hinge member 510 of the main frame 4. The outer frame 2 can coaxially rotatably support the upper main frame hinge member 510 and the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 using the upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 and the lower outer frame hinge member 60, allowing the main frame 4 to be attached so that it can be opened and closed forward around the left side when viewed from the front.

[2-1. Left outer frame assembly and right outer frame assembly]
The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 19. Figure 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, as seen from the front. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 each extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other on the left and right. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 coaxially support the upper main frame hinge member 510 and the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 so that they can rotate about the same axis, thereby attaching the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 comprises a left outer frame member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-to-rear direction, an upper-left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11, and a lower-left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11.

The left outer frame member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape and is formed from an extruded aluminum alloy. The left outer frame member 11 has a recess 11a that is flat and recessed to the right in the rear section of the left side surface, which is one of the three equal sections in the front-to-rear direction; a bulge 11b that bulges to the right from the section on the right side surface opposite the recess 11a; and a hollow 11c that runs vertically through the bulge 11b. The recess 11a and bulge 11b increase the strength and rigidity of the left outer frame member 11, while the hollow 11c reduces its weight.

Furthermore, the left outer frame member 11 has multiple grooves extending vertically formed on both the left and right side surfaces. The multiple grooves on the left side surface are V-shaped, while the multiple grooves on the right side surface are semicircular. The left outer frame member 11 is formed in a symmetrical shape to the right outer frame member 21 of the right outer frame assembly 20, which will be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 connects the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 comprises a flat horizontal fixing portion 12a extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left edge of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the fore-and-aft direction, and a pair of flat lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both the front and rear of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left edge of the horizontal fixing portion 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 is attached to the left outer frame member 11 by inserting the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c into the hollow portion 11c of the left outer frame member 11, abutting the horizontal fixing portion 12a against the upper end of the left outer frame member 11, and abutting the front and rear lower horizontal fixing portions 12c against the right side of the left outer frame member 11, and then screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side of the left outer frame member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 is also attached to the upper outer frame member 30 by abutting the horizontal fixing portion 12a against the underside of the left end of the upper outer frame member 30, inserting the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the cutout portion 30a on the left side of the upper outer frame member 30, and then screwing a screw into the upper outer frame member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 connects the lower end of the left outer frame member 11 to the left end of the lower outer frame assembly 40 (lower outer frame member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 comprises a flat horizontal fixing portion 13a extending horizontally, a flat upper lateral fixing portion 13b extending upward from the left edge of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward beyond the horizontal fixing portion 13a, a flat lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from a position on the lower edge of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b rearward of the horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat abutment portion 13d extending shortly to the right from the rear edge of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 is attached to the left outer frame member 11 by abutting the rear surface of the abutment portion 13d against the front surface of the bulge portion 11b of the left outer frame member 11, abutting the left surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b against the right surface of the left outer frame member 11, and aligning the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a with the lower end of the left outer frame member 11, and then screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side of the left outer frame member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 is also attached to the lower outer frame member 41 by abutting the horizontal fixing portion 13a against the upper surface of the left end of the lower outer frame member 41, and inserting the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c into the notch 41a on the left side of the lower outer frame member 41, and then screwing a screw into the lower outer frame member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the right outer frame assembly 20 comprises a right outer frame member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-to-rear direction, a right upper connecting member 22 attached to the upper end of the left side of the right outer frame member 21, a right lower connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side of the right outer frame member 21, an upper hook member 24 attached to the upper end of the left side of the right outer frame member 21, and a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower end of the left side of the right outer frame member 21.

The right outer frame member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape and is formed from an extruded aluminum alloy. The right outer frame member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface, which is one of the three equal parts in the front-to-rear direction; a bulge 21b that bulges leftward from the portion of the left side surface opposite recess 21a; and a hollow portion 21c that runs vertically through bulge 21b. The recess 21a and bulge 21b increase the strength and rigidity of the right outer frame member 21, while the hollow portion 21c reduces its weight.

The right outer frame member 21 also has multiple grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The multiple grooves on the right side surface are V-shaped, while the multiple grooves on the left side surface are semicircular. The right outer frame member 21 is formed in a symmetrical shape to the left outer frame member 11 of the left outer frame assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 connects the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 comprises a flat horizontal fixing portion 22a extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle of the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a in the fore-and-aft direction, and a pair of flat lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both the front and rear of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 is attached to the right outer frame member 21 by inserting the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the right outer frame member 21, abutting the horizontal fixing portion 22a against the upper end of the right outer frame member 21, and abutting the front and rear lower horizontal fixing portions 22c against the left side of the right outer frame member 21, and then screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side of the right outer frame member 21. The upper right connecting member 22 is also attached to the upper outer frame member 30 by abutting the horizontal fixing portion 22a against the underside of the right end of the upper outer frame member 30, inserting the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the notch 30a on the right side of the upper outer frame member 30, and then screwing a screw into the upper outer frame member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 connects the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 to the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (lower outer frame member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 comprises a flat horizontal fixing portion 23a extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 23b extending upward from the right edge of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward beyond the horizontal fixing portion 23a, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a position on the lower edge of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b rearward of the horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat abutment portion 23d extending a short distance to the left from the rear edge of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 is attached to the right outer frame member 21 by screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side of the right outer frame member 21, with the rear surface of the abutment portion 23d abutting against the front surface of the bulge portion 21b of the right outer frame member 21, the right side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b abutting against the left side of the right outer frame member 21, and aligning the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the right outer frame member 21. The lower right connecting member 23 is also attached to the lower outer frame member 41 by screwing a screw into the lower outer frame member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c with the upper surface of the right end of the lower outer frame member 41 abutting against the upper surface of the right end of the lower outer frame member 41 and inserting the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the notch 41a on the right side of the lower outer frame member 41.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 hook onto the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main frame 4 (described below). The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-to-rear direction and includes a flat mounting portion 24a that is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and a flat hook piece 24b that extends leftward from the front edge of the mounting portion 24a and onto which the upper outer frame hook 653 hooks.

The lower hook member 25 has a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-to-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21; a flat hooking piece 25b that extends leftward from the front edge of the mounting portion 25a and into which the lower outer frame hook 653 is attached; and an insertion opening 25c that passes through the hooking piece 25b in the front-to-rear direction and through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted.

[2-2. Upper outer frame member]
The upper outer frame member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 18. The upper outer frame member 30 connects the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are spaced apart laterally. The upper outer frame member 30 has a width in the front-to-rear direction that is approximately the same as the width of the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21 in the front-to-rear direction, a constant thickness in the up-down direction, extends in the left-to-right direction, and is made of wood. The upper outer frame member 30 is formed so that its length in the left-to-right direction is the same as the length in the left-to-right direction of the lower outer frame member 41 of the lower outer frame assembly 40, which will be described later.

The upper outer frame member 30 has cutouts 30a at the center of the front-to-rear direction on both the left and right sides, which penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-to-right direction. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are inserted into these cutouts 30a on both ends.

The upper outer frame member 30 also has a mounting step 30b at its left end, with the top and front surfaces recessed from the general surface. The upper outer frame hinge assembly 50, described below, is attached to this mounting step 30b.

[2-3. Lower outer frame assembly]
The lower frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 20. Figure 20 is an exploded perspective view of the lower frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. The lower frame assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the left and right frame assemblies 10 and 20, which are spaced apart on the left and right, and serves to close off and decorate the area below the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1.

The lower frame assembly 40 comprises a lower frame member 41 that extends laterally and connects the lower ends of the left and right outer frame assemblies 10 and 20, which are spaced apart laterally; a box-shaped front panel member 42 that is positioned in front of the lower frame member 41, extends laterally along the lower frame member 41, and is open at the rear; a box-shaped rear panel member 43 that is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42 and to the top surface of the lower frame member 41, extends laterally, and is open at the front; and a ball-jamming prevention mechanism 44 formed at the left end of the top surface of the rear panel member 43.

The lower outer frame member 41 has a width in the front-to-rear direction that is approximately the same as the width of the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21 in the front-to-rear direction, a constant thickness in the up-down direction, extends in the left-to-right direction, and is made of wood. The lower outer frame member 41 is formed so that its length in the left-to-right direction is the same as the length of the upper outer frame member 30 in the left-to-right direction.

The lower outer frame member 41 has cutouts 41a at the center of the front-to-rear direction on both the left and right sides, which penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-to-right direction. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted into these cutouts 41a on both ends. This allows the lower ends of the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21 to be connected to each other.

The outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the top surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower part of the back panel member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends left and right and extends from a position toward the rear of the center in the front-to-rear direction to the front end. This recess 41b maximizes the volume of the back panel internal space 40a formed by the front panel member 42 and the back panel member 43.

The front panel member 42 has the same left-right length as the outer frame lower member 41 and is formed like a horizontally long rectangular box with a short front-to-back depth relative to its height, with the entire rear side open. The open rear side of the front panel member 42 is closed by the rear panel member 43, which cooperates with the rear panel member 43 to form the front panel internal space 40a that forms part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The front panel member 42 has a long hole-shaped opening 42a on the front surface near the right end that penetrates from front to back and extends left to right.

The rear panel member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41 and is box-shaped with an open front. By attaching the front panel member 42 to its front surface, the rear panel member 43 cooperates with the front panel member 42 to form the panel internal space 40a, which is part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The rear panel member 43 has a cylindrical connecting tube portion 43a in the center of the left-right direction on its top surface, which extends left and right and protrudes upward, communicating with the panel internal space 40a. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined so that its upper end is positioned higher from the front end, which is flush with the general top surface of the rear panel member 43, toward the rear. In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is inclined at a 45-degree angle.

The connecting tube portion 43a has a length in the left-right direction that is approximately one-third the length of the entire rear header panel member 43, and a depth in the front-to-rear direction that is slightly shorter than the depth of the entire rear header panel member 43. The connecting tube portion 43a is provided with multiple ribs 43b that connect the front and rear ends. When the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is connected to the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4, thereby communicating with the internal space of the speaker unit 620a and forming an enclosure 624.

The ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 prevents the game ball B from becoming trapped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 by retaining the game ball B at the left end of the top surface of the rear panel member 43, in the area of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

The ball jam prevention mechanism 44 is formed on the left end of the top surface of the rear panel member 43 and includes a flat mounting portion 44a that is designed to accommodate the lower outer frame hinge member 60 (described below), a first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting portion 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b on the mounting portion 44a, a standing wall portion 44d that extends upward from the rear and right sides of the mounting portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion 44e that protrudes forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and is sloped so that its upper surface is positioned upward as it extends rearward.

The first discharge opening 44b is formed in a position that coincides with the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge opening 44b and the second discharge opening 44c are formed to a size that allows game balls B to pass through. The first discharge opening 44b and the second discharge opening 44c do not communicate with the panel internal space 40a, but open to the rear surface of the panel rear member 43. Therefore, game balls B that enter the first discharge opening 44b and the second discharge opening 44c can be discharged to the rear of the panel rear member 43.

If an unauthorized tool such as piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 (described below), the ball-jamming prevention mechanism 44 can prevent the unauthorized tool from entering by using the upright wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a. Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the upright wall portion 44d and bends upward, it will abut against the upper end protrusion 44e that protrudes forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d, preventing further entry. This prevents unauthorized activity from being carried out through the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

However, if the rear end of the mounting portion 44a is provided with a standing wall portion 44d, when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, if a game ball B falls onto the mounting portion 44a for some reason, the standing wall portion 44d will prevent it from moving rearward from the outer frame 2, making it easier for the game ball B to remain on the mounting portion 44a. If a game ball B remains on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B will become trapped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2, causing the main frame 4 to be unable to close.

In contrast, the ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 of this embodiment allows game balls B that have fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a to be discharged to the rear of the curtain board rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first discharge outlet 44b, or through the second discharge outlet 44c, thereby preventing game balls B from becoming trapped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 comprises a pair of guide members 45 arranged spaced apart on the left and right sides of the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43; a flat grill member 46 that closes the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear; a port member 47 with two cylinders extending forward and backward and attached to the inside of the front panel member 42 so as to sandwich the grill member 46 and close the opening 42a; and a frame-shaped seal member 48 that is arranged at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43.

The pair of guide members 45 are against which the lower end of the door frame 3 abuts when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2. The guide members 45 are made of a low-friction material, which allows the lower end of the main frame 4 to slide easily, making opening and closing easier.

The grill member 46 is a strip-like member extending in the left-right direction and has multiple blades 46b spaced apart in the up-down direction. The blades 46b are inclined so that their front ends are higher than their rear ends (see Figure 47). This grill member 46 allows ventilation between the interior of the front panel member 42 (the panel internal space 40a) and the outside through the gaps between the blades 46b.

The port member 47 uses two cylinders to connect the interior space 40a of the panel (enclosure 624) to the front of the outer frame 2 via the gap between the blades 46b of the grill member 46. The port member 47 is made up of two cylinders with a specified inner diameter and length, and uses the principle of Helmholtz resonance to resonate and amplify the bass sounds emitted rearward (inside the enclosure 624) from the main frame speaker 622, radiating rich bass sounds forward (toward the player) of the outer frame 2. In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, allowing players to hear deep bass sounds.

When the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the sealing member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a and the lower end of the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 on the main frame 4, preventing sound from leaking from inside the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

The grill member 46 of this embodiment allows the inclined blades 46b to direct air vibrations emitted from the main frame speaker 622 to the outside from the panel interior space 40a, through the notched opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 diagonally upward and forward, into the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 housing the handle unit 180. As a result, when a player inserts their fingers inside the handle cover 295 (front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the device for striking the game ball B), the main frame speaker 622 vibrates, blowing air into the front tube portion 291a, surprising the player and providing an unprecedented performance.

Furthermore, because the port member 47 opens forward, a portion of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the multiple blades 46b of the grill member 46 is released forward. As a result, the sound effects emitted from the port member 47 can be heard by players seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and other players wandering around the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. This sound effect also attracts the attention of players, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, since the port member 47 is provided in the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622, which is provided in the main frame 4, can be increased, allowing for the output of a deeper bass sound effect, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 21. Figure 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper hinge assembly of the outer frame when viewed from above the front, and Figure 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of Figure 21(a) when viewed from below the front. The upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper outer frame member 30, and is used to attach the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that it can rotate about a hinge. The upper hinge assembly 50 includes an upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the left outer frame member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the upper outer frame member 30, a locking member 52 attached to the upper hinge member 51, and a mounting screw 53 that attaches the locking member 52 to the upper hinge member 51.

The upper outer frame hinge member 51 comprises a horizontally extending, flat upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the upper outer frame member 30; a flat forward extension portion 51b extending forward from the front edge of the upper fixing portion 51a; a bearing groove 51c extending forward from the middle of the right edge of the forward extension portion 51b to the center of the forward extension portion 51b and penetrating it vertically; a flat horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left edge of the upper fixing portion 51a; and a flat edge wall portion 51e extending downward from the edge of the forward extension portion 51b from the left edge around the front edge to the opening of the bearing groove 51c and continuing to the horizontal fixing portion 51d. The upper outer frame hinge member 51 is formed by stamping and bending a metal plate using a press molding process. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 (described below) of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 within the bearing groove 51c.

The locking member 52 comprises a strip-shaped locking body 52a extending forward and backward, an operating piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the locking body 52a, a resiliently deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending left from the rear end of the locking body 52a and then diagonally forward and left, and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the locking body 52a. The locking member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached by mounting screws 53 to the underside of the forward extension portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51, at a position rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

When the locking member 52 is attached to the upper hinge member 51, the locking body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and extends forward so that the right side surface near the front end can abut against the portion of the edge wall 51e of the upper hinge member 51 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. The tip of the elastic portion 52c, which extends leftward from the rear end of the locking body 52a, abuts against the inner circumferential surface of the edge wall 51e of the upper hinge member 51. The elastic portion 52c biases the locking member 52 in a direction that causes the front end to rotate leftward around the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, under normal conditions, the right side surface near the front end of the locking body 52a of the locking member 52 abuts against the edge wall 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the upper body frame hinge pin 512 of the upper body frame hinge member 510 is formed in the bearing groove 51c in a position forward of the lock body 52a.

By operating the operating piece 52b of this locking member 52, the locking body 52a can be rotated against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. By operating the operating piece 52b, the locking body 52a can be rotated in a direction that moves its front end to the left, thereby retracting the locking body 52a from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, thereby fully opening the bearing groove 51c. This allows the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 to be inserted into or removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Lower outer frame hinge member]
The lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 18. The lower outer frame hinge member 60 has a flat horizontal portion 60a extending horizontally, a flat raised portion 60b rising upward from a position on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a rearward of the center in the front-to-rear direction, a lower outer frame hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d that penetrates the horizontal portion 60a from top to bottom and is large enough to allow the passage of only one game ball B. This lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate using press molding.

In plan view, the horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is trapezoidal, with the left edge as the base. The lower outer frame hinge pin 60c is cylindrical and has a truncated cone shape with a narrowed top above the vertical center. This lower outer frame hinge pin 60c is attached to the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so that it contacts the center of the rising portion 60b in the front-to-rear direction and extends in an inverted U shape from the left edge of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. This discharge hole 60d is formed to be approximately the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40.

When assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear of the horizontal section 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 rests on the mounting section 44a of the rear header panel member 43 of the lower outer frame assembly 40 and is fixed to the rear header panel member 43 with screws (not shown). The raised section 60b is also attached with screws (not shown) to a position forward of the bulge section 11b on the right side of the left outer frame member 11. By inserting the lower outer frame hinge pin 60c into the lower outer frame hinge hole 521a in the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4, the lower outer frame hinge member 60 can cooperate with the upper outer frame hinge member 51 to attach the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

Furthermore, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d is aligned with the first discharge opening 44b of the ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. This allows the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a to fall (discharge) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge opening 44b. In more detail, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that falls between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 rolls toward the rear where the gap is wider, as the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 gradually narrows as the main frame 4 is closed, allowing it to be discharged through the discharge hole 60d. In this case, when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 while assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge hole 60d is formed in a position that is approximately flush with the rear end of the main frame 4. Therefore, game balls B that fall between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling rearward beyond the main frame 4 by being discharged through the discharge hole 60d, making it less likely that game balls B will become trapped in the area of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 22 to 30. Figure 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, Figure 23 is a rear view of the door frame, Figure 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and Figure 25 is a right side view of the door frame. Figure 26 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the front right, Figure 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the front left, and Figure 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the rear. Figure 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main components as seen from the rear.

The door frame 3 is formed in a rectangular shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is roughly the same size as the interior of the outer frame 2. It is attached to the interior of the outer frame 2 via the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed from the front. The door frame 3 closes the play area 5a of the play board 5 into which game balls B are dropped so that it is visible from the front, stores game balls B to be dropped into the play area 5a, and is equipped with a handle 195 that the player operates to shoot the stored game balls B into the play area 5a. The door frame 3 also decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 comprises a door frame base unit 100, which has a rectangular, frame-like shape extending vertically when viewed from the front; a glass unit 160 that is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and closes the playing area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 so that it can be seen from the front; a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear; a handle unit 180 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front of the door frame base unit 100; and a handle that covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180. It comprises a cover unit 290, a tray unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, a left side unit 420 attached to the left front of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit 200, a right side unit 430 attached to the right front of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit, and a top unit 450 attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 above the left side unit 420 and right side unit 430.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a vertically elongated quadrilateral (rectangle) exterior shape in front view and a door window 101a that runs through from front to back; a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner as viewed from the rear; a main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right edge as viewed from the rear; a sub-relay board 105 attached to the left of the main relay board 104 as viewed from the rear; a rear-handle relay board 106 attached to the left of the sub-relay board 105 as viewed from the rear; a relay board cover 107 that covers the main relay board 104 and part of the sub-relay board 105 from the rear; a rear-handle relay board cover 108 that covers the rear-handle relay board 106; and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, an upper door frame hinge assembly 120 and a lower door frame hinge member 125 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 on the right side when viewed from behind.

The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce and rigidify the door frame base 101. The upper door frame hinge assembly 120 and lower door frame hinge member 125 are used to attach the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The cylinder lock 130 works in conjunction with the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 to lock and open the door frame 3 and main frame 4, and to lock and open the outer frame 2 and main frame 4.

The ball feeding unit 140 is used to supply game balls B in the upper tray 201 one by one to the ball launcher 540 on the main frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 is used to guide game balls B (foul balls) that are launched by the ball launcher 540 but do not reach the play area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and to guide game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 has a handle 195 that can be rotated by the player, and by operating the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180, the game is played by shooting the game ball B in the upper tray 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 using the ball launcher 540.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. Figure 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and Figure 31(b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. Figure 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the rear.

The door frame base unit 100 is hingedly attached to the main frame 4 on its left side when viewed from the front, allowing it to open and close the front of the main frame 4 and making the playing area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 comprises a flat, rectangular door frame base 101 with an elongated vertical outline, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner when viewed from behind.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right edge when viewed from behind; a door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left of the door frame main relay board 104 when viewed from behind at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101; a handle rear relay board 106 attached to the left of the handle rear relay board 105 when viewed from behind at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101; a handle rear relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the handle main relay board 104 and part of the handle rear relay board 105 from the rear; a handle rear relay board cover 108 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear; and a cable cover 109 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable.

The door frame base unit 100 further includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, an upper door frame hinge assembly 120 and a lower door frame hinge member 125 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 on the right side when viewed from behind.

This door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 attached to the lower front corners, a tray unit 200 attached to the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 420 attached to the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame right side unit 430 attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame top unit 450 attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

In addition, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 has a square (rectangle) outer shape extending vertically in a front view. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates from front to back and has an inner periphery that is approximately square and extends vertically in a front view. The upper and left and right sides of the door window 101a that form the inner periphery are respectively close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, and the lower side that forms the inner periphery is located approximately one-third of the height in the vertical direction from the bottom end of the door frame base 101. In this way, the door frame base 101 is formed into a frame shape as a whole by the door window 101a that penetrates from front to back. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is provided with a handle mounting surface 101b (see Figure 42, etc.) formed in the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and inclined so that the left end protrudes slightly forward more than the right end; a cylinder insertion hole 101d that penetrates front to back between the handle mounting surface 101b and the door window 101a and into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is inserted; and a ball feed opening 101e that penetrates front to back on the left side of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting surface 101b when viewed from the front, allowing the entrance opening 141a and ball removal opening 141b of the ball feed unit 140 to be seen forward.

The door frame base 101 also has a lower tray ball passage port 101f that penetrates front to back, located to the left of the center in the left-right direction and at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and exposes the ball discharge port 150d of the fall cover unit 150 to the front; an upper tray ball passage port 101g that penetrates front to front adjacent to the lower edge of the door window 101a near the left end when viewed from the front, and exposes the through ball passage 150a of the fall cover unit 150 to the front; and a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear to the front along the inner periphery of the door window 101a, and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

The door frame base 101 also has multiple vertical slits 101i formed in the lower left corner when viewed from the front (below the ball passage port 101g for the upper tray) that run from front to back. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear of the multiple slits 101i. When the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the multiple slits 101i have the speaker port 211b of the tray unit base 211 of the tray unit 200 located in front of them, and the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 located behind them, allowing sound from the main body frame speaker 622 to be emitted forward.

Furthermore, the door frame base 101 has a through-hole 101j that penetrates from front to back below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting surface 101b. This through-hole 101j is for inserting a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the tray unit 200 side, and is formed to match the through-hole 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, which will be described later.

[3-1b. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion of the rear side of the door frame base 101 where multiple slits 101i are formed. When the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the cylindrical portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4. This allows sound radiated (output) from the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4 to be guided forward without being diffused, and can be effectively guided to the front of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the player) through the multiple slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the speaker port 211b in the plate unit base 211 of the plate unit 200.

The speaker duct 103 also has a cable holder 103a on the rear surface below the cylindrical section that holds the connection cable 503. The cable holder 103a is located to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and holds the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub-relay board 105 so that it extends to the left end of the door frame 3.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, door frame sub-relay board 105, and handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular shape that extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 when viewed from behind. The door frame main relay board 104 serves to relay the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and is connected to a portion of the connection cable 503 (see Figures 82 and 83) extending from the main body frame 4.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an inverted L-shaped exterior, with a vertically extending rectangle joined to the right of the upper part of the rectangle when viewed from the front. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the vertically extending portion is adjacent to the left of the door frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 relays connections between the interface board 635 of the main frame 4 and the handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, the tray unit relay board 214 of the tray unit 200, the upper left-side decorative board 422 and lower left-side decorative board 423 of the left-side unit 420, the upper right-side decorative board 432 and lower right-side decorative board 433 of the right-side unit 430, and the door frame top relay board of the top unit 450. The remainder of the connection cable 503 extending from the main frame 4 is connected to this board.

The door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub-relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the rear sides of the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending up and down of the door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub-relay board 105 are covered by the door frame relay board cover 107, and the rear side of the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the fall cover unit 150.

The rear handle relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape that extends left and right, and is attached to the rear of the handle mounting surface 101b below the ball feed opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear handle relay board 106 relays the connection between the door frame main relay board 104 and the handle rotation detection sensor 189, handle touch sensor 192, single button operation sensor 194 of the handle unit 180, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the rear side of the rear handle relay board 106 is covered by the rear handle relay board cover 108.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The frame relay board cover 107, the handle rear relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear of the frame base 101 to cover the rear sides of the frame main relay board 104 and part of the frame sub-relay board 105 (the inverted L-shaped portions extending up and down). The frame relay board cover 107 is box-shaped and open on the front and left sides when viewed from the front. When assembled to the frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the frame main relay board 104 and the frame sub-relay board 105, which cover the rear sides, are exposed inside the frame relay board cover 107, and a connection cable 503 can be inserted into the open left side and connected to these terminals.

The handle rear relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear of the handle rear relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and is intended to cover the wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball dispensing operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape that extends left and right, and has openings near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction for passing the wiring cable through.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and provide rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 comprises a left reinforcement frame 111 and a right reinforcement frame 112 which extend vertically and are arranged at a distance from each other on the left and right, an upper reinforcement frame 113 which extends horizontally and connects the upper ends of the left reinforcement frame 111 and the right reinforcement frame 112, an intermediate reinforcement frame 114 whose left end is attached at a position above the lower end of the left reinforcement frame 111 and extends to the right near the right reinforcement frame 112, a cylinder mounting frame 115 which connects the right end of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 to the right reinforcement frame 112, and multiple hook hook members 116 which are attached at a distance from each other on the rear side of the right reinforcement frame 112 on the left and right sides and on which door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 are hooked.

The left reinforcement frame 111 and right reinforcement frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically for a length approximately equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcement frame 112 has multiple insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-to-rear direction. The tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted into these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4. The upper reinforcement frame 113 has a constant width in the up-down direction and extends horizontally for a length approximately equal to the left-to-right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcement frame 114 extends left and right with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcement frame 113. The intermediate reinforcement frame 114 has a square cutout 114a cut downward from the top near the left end, and a through-hole 114b that penetrates from front to back near the right end. The cutout 114a is formed in a position that coincides with the upper tray ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the through-hole 114b is formed in a position that coincides with the through-hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 comprises a pair of rear pieces arranged laterally and spaced apart, each formed as a rectangular flat plate extending up and down in front view; a pair of side pieces extending forward in a flat plate shape from each of the opposing edges of the pair of rear pieces; and a flat front piece connecting the front end edges of the pair of forward extending pieces. This cylinder mounting frame 115 has a convex shape that protrudes forward in plan view. The left rear piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of this cylinder mounting frame 115.

The hook members 116 are attached to the rear side of the right reinforcement frame 112 in the areas of the insertion holes that penetrate from front to back. These hook members 116 are hooked by the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650.

The left reinforcement frame 111, right reinforcement frame 112, upper reinforcement frame 113, middle reinforcement frame 114, cylinder mounting frame 115, and hook member 116 that make up the door frame reinforcement unit 110 are formed by stamping and bending metal plates using a press molding process. They are assembled with rivets.

The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is composed of a left reinforcement frame 111, a right reinforcement frame 112, and an upper reinforcement frame 113 assembled along the left, right, and upper edges of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcement frame 114 assembled so as to be positioned below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with multiple screws (not shown). When this door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout 114a and through-hole 114b of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 are aligned with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and through-hole 101j of the door frame base 101, and the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101d of the door frame base 101.

[3-1f. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 when viewed from the front. The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 is used to attach the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so that the door frame 3 can rotate about a hinge in cooperation with the lower door-frame hinge member 125. The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a upper door-frame hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, a flange member 123 attached to the upper door-frame hinge pin 122, and a lock spring 124 that biases the upper door-frame hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 has a flat mounting piece 121a that is rectangular when viewed from the front, and flat protruding pieces 121b that extend forward from the upper and lower edges of the mounting piece 121a. The mounting piece 121a of the hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The upper door frame hinge pin 122 is a cylindrical metal rod bent into an L-shape. When assembled into the upper door frame hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 penetrates from below near the front ends of a pair of protruding pieces 121b on the hinge bracket 121, with the upper end extending upward beyond the upper protruding piece 121b, and the horizontally extending portion abutting the underside of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the upper door frame hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the upper main frame hinge member 510 of the main frame 4.

The flange member 123 is an E-ring and is attached to the upper door frame hinge pin 122 at a location between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape and is placed around the portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 that extends vertically between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the upper door frame hinge pin 122 upward via the flange member 123.

In the upper door frame hinge assembly 120, the upper door frame hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 abuts against the underside of the lower protruding piece 121b, restricting further upward movement. In this state, the upper end of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 protrudes a predetermined amount above the top surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the upper door-frame hinge pin 122 of the upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the entire upper door-frame hinge pin 122 can be moved downward, and the upper end of the upper door-frame hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper protrusion 121b. Therefore, the upper end of the upper door-frame hinge pin 122 of the upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 can be inserted from below into the upper door-frame hinge hole 511a of the upper main-frame hinge member 510, and removed downward. By inserting the upper end of the upper door-frame hinge pin 122 into the upper door-frame hinge hole 511a of the upper main-frame hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view can be supported so as to be hinged and rotatable relative to the main frame 4.

In addition, the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 has a vertically extending portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 positioned coaxially with the lower door frame hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 (described below). This allows the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 to hinge rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 in a favorable condition.

[3-1g. Door frame bottom hinge member]
The lower door frame hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The lower door frame hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 when viewed from the front. The lower door frame hinge member 125 cooperates with the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 to attach the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so that the door frame 3 can rotate about the hinge.

The lower door frame hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110 and comprises a flat mounting piece 125a that is rectangular in front view, a flat protruding piece 125b that extends forward from the lower edge of the mounting piece 125a, and a lower door frame hinge pin 126 (see Figure 22, etc.) that protrudes downward from the underside near the front end of the protruding piece 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and protruding piece 125b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The lower door frame hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod with a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of its lower end. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, this lower door frame hinge pin 126 is attached to a portion of the protruding piece 125b that is coaxial with the portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 of the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 that extends vertically.

This door frame lower hinge member 125 can support the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 so that the door frame can rotate along the hinge by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522a of the main frame lower hinge assembly 520.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 34 to 36. Figure 34(a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as seen from the rear-front, (c) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock in a conventional pachinko machine as seen from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as seen from the rear. Figure 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of Figure 34(a) as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of Figure 34(a) as seen from the rear. Figure 36(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of Figure 34(a) from the front, (b) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of (a).

The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 and works in conjunction with the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and main frame 4, and to lock and open the outer frame 2 and main frame 4. The cylinder lock 130 comprises a cylindrical cylinder body 131 that extends forward and backward, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end face of the cylinder body 131, and a rotation transmission member 133 located at the rear of the cylinder body 131 that rotates when a regular key inserted in the keyhole 132 is rotated.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, with its rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is cylindrical (more specifically, a conical cylinder with a diameter that increases toward the rear) with an open rear, and has a pair of notches cut from the rear end toward the front at opposing positions across the central axis. The rotation transmission member 133 is configured so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main frame 4 can be inserted from the rear; by inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654, causing it to rotate.

More specifically, the cylinder lock 130 comprises a first cam member 134 located at the rear end of the cylinder body 131 and which rotates when a genuine key inserted in the keyhole 132 is rotated; a second cam member 135 which is rotatably attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 below the cylinder body 131 around an axis in the front-to-rear direction; a strip-shaped first arm 136 which has its upper end rotatably attached to the first cam member 134 at a position to the right of the center of rotation and its lower end rotatably attached to the second cam member 135 at a position to the right of the center of rotation; and a strip-shaped second arm 137 which has its upper end rotatably attached to the first cam member 134 below the center of rotation and its lower end rotatably attached to the second cam member 135 below the center of rotation.

The cylinder lock 130 also includes a rear cover 138 attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 so as to cover the cylinder body 131, first cam member 134, first arm 136, and second arm 137 from the rear, excluding the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133), and rivets 139 that attach the upper and lower ends of each of the first arm 136 and second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and second cam member 135, respectively, so that they can rotate.

The first cam member 134 has the upper end of the first arm 136 attached to the rear side, and the upper end of the second arm 137 attached to the front side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably attached from the rear side by the cylinder mounting frame 115, and a rotation transmission member 133 is attached to the rear side of the front side of the cylinder mounting frame 115 so as to be rotatable integrally with it. The second cam member 135 has the lower end of the first arm 136 attached to the front side, and the lower end of the second arm 137 attached to the front side, forward of the first arm 136.

For each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion where the first arm 136 is attached and the portion where the second arm 137 is attached are separated by a 90-degree angle around the respective rotation axes. Furthermore, for each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion where the first arm 136 is attached is located farther from the center of rotation than the portion where the second arm 137 is attached.

The rear cover 138 is removably attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 at its upper end with screws (not shown), with cylindrical shafts 138a that protrude outward from the lower ends of both the left and right sides engaging with L-shaped locking slits 115b in the cylinder mounting frame 115.

This cylinder lock 130 has a cylinder mounting frame 115, cylinder body 131, rotation transmission member 133, first cam member 134, second cam member 135, first arm 136, and second arm 137, all of which are made of metal.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is approximately aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the door frame right side unit 430.

Here, we will explain the conventional cylinder lock 130A. As shown in Figures 34(c) and (d), the conventional cylinder lock 130A has a cylinder body 131 that passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear, with its rear end attached to the front piece. This cylinder lock 130A has a rotation transmission member 133 mounted on the axis of the cylinder body 131.

Next, we will explain the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment. In a conventional cylinder lock 130, as shown in Figures 34(c) and (d), the rotation transmission member 133 is provided on the axis of the cylinder body 131, whereas in the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, as shown in Figures 34(a) and (b), the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position spaced downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131.

In the normal state of this cylinder lock 130, as shown in Figure 36(a), the upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 are attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively, and the upper and lower ends of the second arm 137 are attached to the lower of the rotation center of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The cylinder body 131 can be rotated 90 degrees clockwise and counterclockwise from the normal state using a genuine key.

In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated counterclockwise via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 using a key inserted into the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. At this time, because the upper end of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, a large force acts from the first arm 136 to rotate the second cam member 135 counterclockwise. However, because the upper end of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, almost no force acts from the second arm 137 to rotate the second cam member 135 counterclockwise.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from its normal state, force is transmitted mainly via the first arm 136, causing the second cam member 135 to rotate counterclockwise, and the rotation transmission member 133 to rotate together with the second cam member 135. The upward force acting due to this counterclockwise rotation of the first cam member 134 is proportional to the left-right distance between the positions where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the center of rotation of the first cam member 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from its normal state, the upward force acting on the first arm 136 decreases, while the upward force acting on the second arm 137 increases.

Therefore, when the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from its normal position by more than 45 degrees, the upward force acting on the second arm 137 becomes greater than that on the first arm 136, causing the second cam member 135 to rotate counterclockwise primarily via the second arm 137. This allows the key inserted into the keyhole 132 to be rotated counterclockwise up to 90 degrees from its normal position (see Figure 36(b)).

When using the key to rotate the key counterclockwise 90 degrees from its normal state and then clockwise 90 degrees to return it to its normal state, the operation is the reverse of the above.

On the other hand, when, from the normal state, the first cam member 134 is rotated clockwise via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 using a key inserted into the keyhole 132, the first arm 136, whose upper end is attached to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, moves downward, and the second arm 137, whose upper end is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, moves upward. Because the upper end of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, a large force acts on the first arm 136 to rotate the second cam member 135 clockwise. However, because the upper end of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, almost no force acts on the second arm 137 to rotate the second cam member 135 clockwise.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from its normal state, force is transmitted mainly via the first arm 136, causing the second cam member 135 to rotate clockwise, and the rotation transmission member 133 to rotate together with the second cam member 135. The force transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is proportional to the left-right distance between the positions where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the center of rotation of the first cam member 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from its normal state, the force of the first arm 136 attempting to rotate the second cam member 135 decreases, while the force of the second arm 137 attempting to rotate the second cam member 135 increases.

Therefore, when the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise beyond 45 degrees from its normal position, the force tending to rotate the second cam member 135 from the second arm 137 becomes greater than that from the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates clockwise primarily via the second arm 137. This allows the key inserted into the keyhole 132 to be rotated clockwise up to 90 degrees from its normal position (see Figure 36(c)).

Note that when the key is used to rotate the lock 90 degrees clockwise from its normal position and then rotate it 90 degrees clockwise to return it to its normal position, the operation is the reverse of the above.

In this way, with the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are connected by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, which are attached at a 90-degree angle from each other, to transmit rotation. Therefore, regardless of the rotational position of the first cam member 134 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132), rotation can be transmitted by at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, rotating the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133), thereby enabling smooth locking and unlocking of the door frame 3 and main frame 4.

Furthermore, with the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, rotation is transmitted by the first arm 136 and second arm 137 as a rotation transmission mechanism, so the axis of the rotation transmission member 133 (transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4) can be positioned differently relative to the axis of the cylinder body 131. This makes it possible to change the position of the cylinder body 131 in the door frame 3 to any position without changing the locking unit 650. This allows the cylinder body 131 (keyhole 132) to be positioned in a location that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a highly decorative door frame 3.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, even if the position of the cylinder body 131 is changed in the door frame 3, there is no need to change the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, so the locking unit 650 can be reused, thereby suppressing increases in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1.

In conventional cylinder locks 130A, the rotation transmission member 133 is located at the rear of the cylinder body 131, which could allow a fraudulent individual who is aware of this configuration to insert a tool into the rear of the cylinder body 131 from the front and use the tool to fraudulently rotate the rotation transmission member 133, thereby opening the door frame 3 and committing fraud. In contrast, the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment has the rotation transmission member 133 located away from the axis (rear) of the cylinder body 131. Therefore, even if an individual inserts a tool into the rear of the cylinder body 131 to rotate the rotation transmission member 133, the rotation transmission member 133 cannot be rotated because it is not located in that position, preventing fraudulent activity such as opening the door frame 3 or main frame 4.

Furthermore, in the cylinder lock 130, the second arm 137 connects portions of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 that are spaced apart by a 90-degree rotational angle relative to the first arm 136. Therefore, even if the portions of either the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are positioned on a line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the portions that are furthest from the line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. Therefore, even if one of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 is positioned at the dead center of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 and therefore cannot transmit the rotation from the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 can transmit the rotation from the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. As a result, there is no significant resistance to the rotation of the first cam member 134 and the key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be rotated smoothly, making it easy to lock and unlock the door. It is also possible to prevent the key inserted in the keyhole from being forced to rotate, preventing damage to the key.

Furthermore, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133, which is located in an eccentric position, by two arms, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137. Therefore, even if one arm is damaged for some reason, the rotation can be transmitted by the remaining arm, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a highly reliable cylinder lock 130.

Furthermore, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133, which is located at an eccentric position, by the smooth, rod-shaped (strip-shaped) first arm 136 and second arm 137. If rotation were transmitted by a gear, there is a risk that catching the tip of a tool on the gear teeth would cause the gear to rotate and rotate the rotation transmission member 133. However, by making the first arm 136 and second arm 137 rod-shaped with smooth surfaces, it is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a tool to become caught on the first arm 136 or second arm 137, preventing the rotation transmission member 133 from being rotated by moving the first arm 136 or second arm 137. This reliably prevents the door frame 3 or main frame 4 from being unlocked through unauthorized operation of the locking unit 650.

In the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the first arm 136 and second arm 137 are used as the rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. However, this is not limited to this. For example, a rotation transmission mechanism using multiple gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using a gear and rack gear, a rotation transmission mechanism using a sprocket and chain, a rotation transmission mechanism using a pulley and belt, etc. may also be used.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 37 and 38. Figure 37(a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear. Figure 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and anti-tamper member removed. The ball feeding unit 140 can feed game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 one by one to the ball launcher 540 of the main frame 4, and can also eject game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 into the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 comprises a box-shaped front cover 141 that is open at the rear and has an entrance 141a that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction and through which game balls B are supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200, and a ball ejection port 141b that opens below the entrance 141a; a rear cover 142 that is box-shaped and has an open front and closes the rear end of the front cover 141, and has a ball supply port 142a that supplies game balls B that enter through the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction to the ball launching device 540; The ball removal member 143 is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the front cover 141, and has a partition 143a that separates the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b on the rear side of the front cover 141; a ball feeding member 144 is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the up-down direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and sends the game balls B on the partition 143a of the ball removal member 143 one by one to the ball supply port 142a of the rear cover 142; and a ball feeding solenoid 145 that rotates the ball feeding member 144.

As shown in the figure, when viewed from the front, this ball feeding unit 140 has the ball feeding member 144 located to the right of the entrance 141a, the ball removal member 143 located to the left of the ball feeding member 144, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 located to the right of the ball feeding member 144.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the center of rotation of the ball removal member 143 to the left of the ball removal opening 141b when viewed from the front, and the operating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143, described below, extends forward from this slit 141c. The upper side of the front cover 141 also extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and is formed so that when the door frame 3 is assembled, it closes from the rear the rear-open portions of the ball feeding guide path 241b and ball removal guide path 241c on the upstream end of the rear of the rear base 241 of the upper tray ball removal unit 240.

The ball removal member 143 comprises a partition section 143a that is located below the entrance 141a and acts as a partition between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b, with the upper surface decreasing in size toward the ball feeding member 144; a pivoting rod section 143b that extends downward from the end of the partition section 143a opposite the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a V-shape from approximately the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball removal opening 141b, with the lower end supported for rotation around an axis extending in the front-to-back direction; a rod-shaped operating rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod section 143b; and a weight section 143d that protrudes below the operating rod 143c from the side of the rotating rod section 143b on the side opposite the partition section 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 is formed to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see Figure 37(a)). The operating rod 143c abuts against the upper end (top surface) of the operating transmission part 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242, which moves downward when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 is pressed through the ball feed opening 101e of the door frame base 101.

The ball feeding member 144 includes a fan-shaped blocking portion 144a in a plan view, centered on the rotation axis and extending vertically toward the entrance 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball extracting member 143; a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc from the rear end of the blocking portion 144a toward the rotation axis; and a rod-shaped shaft portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are adjacently formed within an angular range of approximately 180° centered on the rotation axis. Furthermore, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 is sized to hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis when the shaft portion 144c, which is positioned eccentrically from the rotation axis, is moved left and right by the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145.

This ball feeding member 144 is designed to rotate between a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces toward the partition portion 143a and the ball holding portion 144b faces in a direction communicating with the ball supply port 142a, and a holding position in which the ball holding portion 144b faces toward the partition portion 143a. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held in the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the ball supply port 142a, and the game ball B that has entered the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a is prevented from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the shaft portion 144c side closes the ball supply port 142a, so that only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held within the ball holding portion 144b.

The ball feeding unit 140 also includes a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings up and down when driven (energized) by the ball feeding solenoid 145, and a ball feeding crank 147 which rotates around an axis extending in the front-to-back direction due to the movement of the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 swinging up and down, and which also rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the up and down direction.

The ball feed operating rod 146 is equipped with an iron plate 146a below the ball feed solenoid 145. The ball feed operating rod 146 extends left and right, and its end opposite the ball feed crank 147 (the right end) is attached to the front cover 141 and rear cover 142 so that it can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward. When the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven, the generated magnetic force pulls the iron plate 146a toward the ball feed solenoid 145 (upward), causing the ball feed operating rod 146 to rotate around the right end so that the left end closest to the ball feed crank 147 moves upward. When the ball feed solenoid 145 is then deactivated, the magnetic force disappears, causing the weight of the iron plate 146a to rotate around the right end so that the left end closest to the ball feed crank 147 moves downward, returning the rod to its original position. As a result, the ball feeding operating rod 146's left end (tip) closest to the ball feeding crank 147 swings up and down due to the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 comprises an engagement portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and capable of engaging with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146, which moves up and down; a shaft portion 147b located on the opposite side of the engagement portion 147a from the side that engages with the ball feeding operating rod 146 and rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142; and a transmission portion 147c extending upward from the shaft portion 147b and engaging with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see Figure 38 (b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center of the ball feeding member 144.

This ball feeding unit 140 can rotate the ball feeding crank 147 around an axis extending forward and backward via the ball feeding operating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward through the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145.

When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normally), the ball feeding unit 140 is in a state where the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and its tip is positioned downward, and in this state the ball feeding member 144 is positioned in the feeding position. Furthermore, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and its tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position. In other words, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is deactivated (OFF state), the game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 540. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in this ball feed unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542 by the launch control unit 633b (see Figure 169) of the payout control board 633.

The ball feeding unit 140 is also rotatably supported by the ball removal member 143 or the weight portion 143d, which applies a moment that rotates it counterclockwise when viewed from the front. However, the rotation of the ball removal member 143 is restricted when the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removal member 143 abuts against the upper end of the operating transmission portion 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242, which operates when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 is pressed. Therefore, under normal conditions, the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b, separating them, and game balls B cannot enter the ball removal opening 141b side.

When the player presses the upper tray ball removal button 222 on the tray unit 200 downward, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the actuation transmission unit 242b, and as the actuation transmission unit 242b moves downward, the actuation rod 143c also moves downward relatively. When the actuation rod 143c moves downward together with the actuation transmission unit 242b, the ball removal member 143 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition unit 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b, releasing the partition. As a result, the game ball B that entered through the entrance 141a falls toward the ball removal opening 141b, is discharged from the ball removal opening 141b into the ball removal guide path 241c of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 in the tray unit 200, and can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 via the lower tray ball supply opening 211c.

The upper tray ball removal slider 242, which is formed with the actuation transmission part 242b that contacts the actuation rod 143c of the ball removal member 143, is biased upward by a spring. Therefore, even if a game ball B is supplied forcefully onto the partition part 143a, the impact can be absorbed by the spring via the actuation rod 143c, preventing damage to the ball removal member 143 and other components, and preventing the game ball B from bouncing off the partition part 143a.

The ball feeding unit 140 also has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see Figure 38(b), etc.) recessed forward at the upper right when viewed from behind the ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, and an anti-tampering member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b. The anti-tampering member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed from a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The anti-tamper element 148 has a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. It comprises an upper piece 148a and a lower piece 148b that are separated vertically at approximately the center a predetermined distance to the left of the right edge, and inclined portions 148c that are C-chamfered at the tip ends (right ends when viewed from the front) of the opposing edges of the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. The upper piece 148a of the anti-tamper element 148 is bent relative to the general surface of the anti-tamper element 148 so that its right end when viewed from the front protrudes rearward. The lower piece 148b extends flush with the general surface of the anti-tamper element 148. As a result, in a plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

When the anti-tampering member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b is in communication with the inside of the ball supply port 142a.

This anti-fraud device 148 prevents fraudulent acts using illegal game balls B with strings attached by using the ball launcher 540 to launch an illegal game ball B from the upper tray into the game area 5a via the ball feeding unit 140, and then manipulate the string attached to the illegal game ball B to insert or remove it from the first starting hole 2002, etc. When such acts are committed, the momentum of the illegal game ball B launched (hit) by the ball launcher 540 causes the string attached to the illegal game ball B to be inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and the string is then cut by the narrow V-shaped portion formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, thereby preventing fraudulent acts using illegal game balls B with strings attached.

[3-1j. Foul Cover Unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 39 and 40. Figure 39(a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and Figure 39(b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. Figure 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 on the right side as viewed from the rear. The foul cover unit 150 guides game balls B (foul balls) that are launched by the ball launcher 540 but do not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and also guides game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. As shown in the figure, the fall cover unit 150 comprises a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and open at the front, and a flat lid member 152 attached to the front of the unit body 151.

The fall cover unit 150 has a through-ball passage 150a that penetrates from front to back at the upper left corner when viewed from the front and connects the lower normal dispensing passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main frame 4 with the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit 200, and a full ball receiving port 150b that opens toward the rear on the lower right side when viewed from the front of the through-ball passage 150a and can connect with the lower full dispensing passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main frame 4.

The foul cover unit 150 also has a foul ball receiving port 150c, which opens upward on the right side of the full ball receiving port 150b when viewed from the front, and receives game balls B (foul balls) that have been launched by the ball launcher 540 of the main frame 4 but have not reached the game area 5a; and a ball discharge port 150d, which opens forward near the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and discharges game balls B received in the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c forward, and which communicates with the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit 200.

Furthermore, the foul cover unit 150 is provided with a storage passage 150e formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full ball receiving port 150b, the foul ball receiving port 150c, and the ball discharge port 150d, and which is large enough to store a predetermined amount of game balls B.

The through-ball passage 150a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152. The full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152.

The fall cover unit 150 also includes a flat movable piece 153 that forms part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit body 151 and the cover member 152, a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects the rotation of the movable piece 153 away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is filled with game balls B and game balls B are no longer released toward the lower tray 202 from the ball release port 150d, this foul cover unit 150 can store a certain number of game balls B in the storage passage 150e. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the movable piece 153 to rotate so that the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155, and this rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. This allows it to be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower tray 202 is full, the payout of any more game balls B is stopped and a notification of this fact is sent to the player, amusement hall staff, or the like, urging them to unclog the lower tray 202.

The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear of the unit body 151, below the through-ball passage 150a, and is equipped with a door opening/closing abutment 150f against which the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 of the lower full ball passage unit 610 in the dispensing unit 560 of the main body frame 4 (described later) can abut (see Figure 90). The door opening/closing abutment 150f is inclined so that it moves forward as its rear surface faces downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 abuts against this door opening/closing abutment 150f, the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 can be rotated to open the downstream ends (front openings) of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 29 and 30. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and removably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4, this glass unit 160 makes the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 attached to the main frame 4 visible from the player's side (front) and also closes off the front of the playing area 5a.

The glass unit 160 comprises a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner periphery of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h; two transparent glass plates 162 that enclose the interior of the glass frame 161 and have their outer peripheries attached to the glass frame 161; and a pair of glass unit mounting members 163 that are rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 and are used to mount the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101.

The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a that extend outward in a flat plate shape from positions below the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a band-like locking piece 161b that protrudes downward from the bottom end and extends along the bottom edge. The mounting pieces 161a of the glass frame 161 can abut against the protrusions 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 (see Figure 96). Two glass plates 162 are attached to the front and rear ends of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other so that a space is formed between them (see Figure 96).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably attached around an axis extending forward and backward on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion 163b that protrudes from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of rotation. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of each of the two upper corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first rotate the glass unit mounting member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 so that the protrusion 163b is positioned above the base 163a. Then, from the rear of the door frame base 101, insert the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and abut the front end of the glass frame 161 against the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. Then, rotate the glass unit mounting member 163 so that the protrusion 163b is positioned below the base 163a, and abut the protrusion 163b against the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. This attaches the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101.

To remove the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, follow the steps above in reverse. This makes the glass unit 160 detachable from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, when the protrusion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in a rotational position where it is positioned lower than the base 163a, the protrusion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protrusion 163b will not rotate to a position where it is higher than the base 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 will not be released naturally, and the glass unit 160 will not naturally come off the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 for the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 includes a flat main body 171 having a predetermined outer periphery, a flat rear projection 172 that projects rearward along the outer periphery of the main body 171, and a pair of locking projections 173 that are spaced apart on the left and right, project forward beyond the main body 171, and are capable of being locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that its lower end protrudes downward below the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Furthermore, the upper end of the main body 171 is shaped to fit the lower edge of the playing area 5a on the playing board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is shaped to fit a portion of the inner rail 1002, the out guide portion 1003, a portion of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the component 1000 described below, and is formed so as not to protrude into the playing area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.

The rear protrusion 172 is formed around almost the entire outer periphery of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed by the main body 171 and the rear protrusion 172 into a shallow box shape that is open to the rear, giving it high strength and rigidity. The rear protrusion 172 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body 171 that is different from the outer periphery of the main body 171. This rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed so as to align with a portion of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

When assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the rear protrusion 172 is not formed in the area of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. As a result, game ball B (game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170, and does not hinder the game ball B from being shot into the game area 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). This allows the security cover 170 to be easily attached and detached to the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts against the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the rear projection 172, excluding the portion that protrudes rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 171, is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the component 1000. Furthermore, the security cover 170 is in a state where the rear projection 172 that protrudes rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 171 protrudes rearward beyond the front surface of the component 1000 so as to contact the underside of the component 1000. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to insert an illegal tool such as piano wire into the game area 5a between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, the attempt will be blocked by the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 41 to 47. Figure 41(a) is an enlarged front view showing the handle unit and handle cover unit portions in the door frame, and Figure 41(b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the handle unit and handle cover unit portions in the door frame. Figure 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled from the front, and Figure 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled from the rear. Figure 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled from the front, and Figure 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled from the rear. Figure 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along line E-I in Figure 41(a). Figure 47 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 1. Note that Figure 46 shows a cross-sectional view of only the door frame 3, omitting the outer frame 2 and main frame 4.

The handle unit 180 of this embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and tray unit 200 together with the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery, and when operated by a player, it allows the game ball B in the upper tray 201 to be shot into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

First, we will explain the handle unit 180. The handle unit 180 comprises a handle base 181, the rear end of which is attached to the handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover base 291 of a handle cover unit 290 (described below); a handle 195 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181; multiple handle guides 196 attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by the handle cover base 291 (described below); a disc-shaped cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the center of the front end of the handle 195; a handle decoration board 184 attached to the front side of the cover base 183 and having multiple LEDs 184a mounted on its front surface; and a handle front lens 185 attached to the cover base 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration board 184.

The handle unit 180 also includes an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 behind the handle 195, a shaft member 187 having the handle 195 attached to its front end and rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181, and having a drive gear portion 187a on its outer periphery, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a handle rotation detection sensor 189 having a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188 and is sandwiched between the handle base 181 and the inner base 186.

Furthermore, the handle unit 180 is equipped with a handle return spring 190, one end of which is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end of which is attached to the handle 195, biasing the handle 195 to return it to its initial rotation position (the end of rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front), and an auxiliary spring 191, one end of which is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end of which is attached to the transmission gear 188, biasing the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front via the transmission gear 188.

The handle unit 180 also includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, a single button 193 whose tip end protrudes outward from the left side of the outer periphery of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front and whose base end is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 around an axis extending forward and backward, and a single button operation sensor 194 attached to the handle base 181 and detects when the single button 193 is pressed.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 comprises a cylindrical base 181a extending longitudinally, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and three grooves 181c recessed from the outer surface of the cylindrical base 181a, extending axially, and formed at uneven intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. The three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to three ridges 291d of the handle cover base 291, which will be described later. Therefore, with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 291d, the base 181a can be inserted into the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handle cover base 291, and by inserting the protrusions 291d into the three grooves 181c, the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle cover base 291.

The handle 195 comprises a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, multiple (here, three) spokes 195b extending radially outward at intervals circumferentially from the central hub portion 195a, an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the multiple spokes 195b, two slits 195d extending in an arc around the rotation axis (shaft member 187) and penetrating the central hub portion 195a in the front-to-rear direction, and a locking protrusion 195e that protrudes rearward from a position inward of the slits 195d relative to the center of rotation and engages with the other end of the handle return spring 190. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the general outer surface of the handle of a conventional pachinko machine.

When the handle 195 is free (not rotating), one spoke 195b extends horizontally to the left from the central hub 195a, and two spokes 195b extend clockwise and counterclockwise from the center at angles of 120 degrees each. The three spokes 195b extend to such a length that a gap is formed between the central hub 195a and the outer ring 195c so that a player's fingers can be inserted.

The outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is located coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer ring portion 195c is formed in a circular ring shape with a constant cross-sectional shape, with the U-shaped radius facing forward.

The handle 195 is formed to be translucent throughout, and is partially plated with an electrically continuous plating from the central hub portion 195a to the outer ring portion 195c. This allows the handle touch sensor 192 to detect touches to the handle 195 even when only the outer ring portion 195c is being touched. Therefore, the game ball B can be shot in by turning the outer ring portion 195c.

The handle guide 196 has a U-shaped guide portion 196a that opens toward the center of the handle 195, and a flat mounting stay 196b that extends toward the center from the front end of the guide portion 196a. The three handle guides 196 are attached with the mounting stay 196b attached to the rear side of the spoke portion 195b of the handle 195 so that the guide portion 196a is located behind the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195. The handle guide 196 is restricted from moving in the fore-and-aft direction by inserting a guide piece 291g of the handle cover base 291 (described below) into the guide portion 196a.

The cover base 183 is formed in a disk shape with a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and is equipped with three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from its rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate slits 195d in the handle 195 from the front and are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181. Because the mounting bosses 183a of the cover base 183 penetrate the slits 195d in the handle 195, the mounting bosses 183a abut against the circumferential ends of the slits 195d, restricting the rotation angle of the handle 195. In this example, the handle 195 can be rotated within a range of approximately 120 degrees.

The handle decoration board 184 is equipped with a total of 10 LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) mounted in triple concentric circles: one in the center, three at regular intervals around the middle, and six at regular intervals around the outer periphery. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: one in the center, three in the middle, two at the top left of the outer periphery, two at the top right, and two at the bottom of the outer periphery (see Figure 72). The handle decoration board 184 is equipped with a 24-bit LED driver 184b with a unique address for illuminating each LED 184a. This LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems, and controls 15 systems in total, with three systems per group, so that the five groups of 10 LEDs 184a can each emit full-color light.

Although not shown, this handle decoration board 184 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four wires: two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the LEDs 184a and LED driver 184b; one control signal line that receives signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510; and one clock line that synchronizes the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 184b of this handle decoration board 184 receives a command addressed to that address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal line, it can cause the 10 LEDs 184a, divided into five groups, to emit light in the appropriate color and intensity for each group in accordance with the command.

As such, because this handle decorative board 184 has an LED driver 184b, it is possible to individually (here, by group) control the illumination of a greater number of LEDs 184a than the number of wires that make up the connected wiring cable, thereby reducing the number of wires and simplifying the electrical wiring configuration.

The front surface of the handle front lens 185 bulges forward in a rounded shape and is translucent. Inside the handle front lens 185, a three-dimensional lens element made of transparent material is provided. This handle front lens 185 can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately illuminating the LED on the front surface of the handle decorative board 184.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes depending on the rotation angle of this detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the launch solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540 (described below) changes depending on that internal resistance, allowing the game ball B to be shot into the game area 5a with a strength depending on the rotation angle of the handle 195.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 195, it detects the static electricity acting from the player and detects the player's contact with the handle 195. If the handle 195 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects the player's contact, the detection is accepted by the handle rotation detection sensor 189, and the drive of the launch solenoid 542 is controlled with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195, allowing the game ball B to be shot into the ball.

Therefore, even if a player attempts to rotate the handle 195 in some way to launch game ball B into the game area 5a without touching it, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact, so the launch solenoid 542 is not activated and game ball B cannot be launched. This prevents players from rotating the handle 195 in ways other than those intended and reduces the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

The single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the pressing of the single-shot button 193 by the player. When this single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 stops the operation of the firing solenoid 542. Therefore, if the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 195, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation of the handle 195. Furthermore, by releasing the pressing of the single-shot button 193, the game ball B can be again fired into the game area 5a with the same impact strength as before the single-shot button 193 was operated.

Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be described. The handle cover unit 290 comprises a handle cover base 291 that covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 behind the handle 195 and has its rear end attached to the handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101; an inner 292 that covers the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291 and has its rear end attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200; a circular handle cover decorative board 293 that is provided in front of the inner 292 and has multiple LEDs 293a mounted on its front surface; a circular board cover 294 that covers the handle cover decorative board 293 from the front; and a handle cover 295 that covers the outer periphery of the inner 292 and has its rear end attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200.

The handle cover base 291 comprises a cylindrical front tube portion 291a extending forward and backward with an inner diameter approximately the same as the inner diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195; a middle wall portion 291b extending forward from the rear end of the front tube portion 291a so that its inner diameter decreases as it extends forward; a cylindrical rear tube portion 291c penetrating the middle wall portion 291b and extending forward and backward with an inner diameter that allows the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 to be inserted; and multiple (here, three) ridges 291d protruding inward from the inner periphery of the rear tube portion 291c and extending forward and backward, at positions corresponding circumferentially to the grooves 181c of the handle base 181.

The handle cover base 291 also includes a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion rearward of the front end of the outer periphery of the front tube portion 291a, a cylindrical outer tube portion 291f protruding forward from the middle of the flange portion 291e to the same position as the front end of the front tube portion 291a, a guide piece 291g protruding outward from the front tube portion 291a between the front end of the front tube portion 291a and the flange portion 291e, and an opening 291h penetrating the lower part of the front tube portion 291a.

The middle wall portion 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends from the rear end of the front tubular portion 291a to near the center in the fore-and-aft direction, with a cross section bulging outward in an arc shape. The rear end of the rear tubular portion 291c is attached to the handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101. This rear tubular portion 291c is formed to the same length as the base 181a of the handle base 181, and the base 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted into it. The three protrusions 291d correspond to the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181, and by inserting them into the grooves 181c, the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the flange portion 291e. The outer tubular portion 291f extends forward from a position outside the radial center of the flange portion 291e. This handle cover base 291 has multiple triangular ribs arranged circumferentially to connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylinder portion 291f.

The guide piece 291g protrudes from the outer periphery of the front tubular portion 291a from the center between the outer periphery of the front tubular portion 291a and the inner periphery of the outer tubular portion 291f to a position close to the front tubular portion 291a. The guide piece 291g extends circumferentially over a length ranging from approximately 110 degrees, and three guide pieces 291g are provided circumferentially, spaced 10 degrees apart. By inserting the rear end of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 of the handle unit 180 between the guide pieces 291g and rearwardly beyond the guide piece 291g, and rotating the handle 195, the guide piece 291g is positioned within the U-shaped guide portion 196a, restricting the forward/rearward movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195).

The opening 291h penetrates the front tubular portion 291a, with a length in the front-to-rear direction from the rear end of the front tubular portion 291a to near the flange portion 291e, and a circumferential range of approximately 90 degrees.

The inner 292 has an annular base 292a with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter larger than the flange portion 291e; legs 292b extending rearward from the outer periphery of the base 292a; and multiple (four in this case) notches 292c cut out from the rear end of the legs 292b to near the base 292a and spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 is inserted into the base 292a from the front, and the base 292a is positioned rearward of the flange portion 291e. The legs 292b extend in a curved manner that bulges outward, and their rear ends are attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200. The notches 292c are provided at the top, bottom, left, and right ends of the legs 292b.

The handle cover decorative board 293 is annular in shape, with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange portion 291e. The handle cover decorative board 293 is equipped with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b with a unique address for illuminating each LED 293a. The 12 LEDs 293a (full-color LEDs) are arranged in a row with intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into six groups: two at the bottom left, two on the left, two at the top left, two at the top right, two at the right, and two at the bottom right (see Figure 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and controls six groups of 10 LEDs 293a, each with three systems for full-color illumination, for a total of 18 systems.

Although not shown, this handle cover decorative board 293 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four wires: two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the LEDs 293a and LED driver 293b; one control signal line that receives signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510; and one clock line that synchronizes the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 293b of this handle cover decorative board 293 receives a command addressed to that address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal line, it can cause the 12 LEDs 293a, divided into six groups, to emit light in the appropriate color and intensity for each group in accordance with the command.

The board cover 294 has an annular front plate 294a with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter approximately the same as the outer diameter of the base portion 292a of the inner casing 292, and a cylindrical side plate 294b with the outer edge of the front plate 294a extending slightly rearward. The front plate 294a of this board cover 294 is located between the flange portion 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative board 293, and the side plate 294b extends to the base portion 292a of the inner casing 292.

The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a at its front end with an inner diameter the same as the outer diameter of the outer cylindrical portion 291f of the handle cover base 291, and is formed in a cylindrical shape resembling a spindle truncated shape (snow igloo-shaped, bowl-shaped, etc.) that bulges out towards the rear, with multiple (four in this case) cutout openings 295b cut out from the rear end towards the front in the circumferential direction. The handle cover 295 is formed to cover the outer periphery of the inner casing 292, and the multiple cutout openings 295b are formed to coincide with the cutouts 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200 via the inner casing 292.

The handle cover 295 is two-color molded using synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). Specifically, the handle cover 295 is two-color molded using two types of resin: the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b. A portion of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, forming the circular and radial patterns. In other words, the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see Figure 71(a)). When molding the handle cover 295, either the inner layer 3a or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

As shown in Figure 46 and other figures, when the handle unit 180 and handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment are assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the portion of the handle unit 180 rearward of the handle 195 is inserted inside the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291, with the handle 195 and handle front lens 185 positioned forward of the handle cover unit 290. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101, sandwiching the portion that closes the rear end of the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 of the handle cover unit 290.

The handle 195 of this handle unit 180 has a central hub portion 195a rotatably supported by the handle base 181. The outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 is rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 via a handle guide 196 attached to the rear side. The rear end of the guide portion 196a of this handle guide 196 is inserted (engaged) between the front cylinder portion 291a and the outer cylinder portion 291f of the handle cover base 291, and between the flange portion 291e and the guide piece 291g, and is rotatably supported with movement in the fore-and-aft direction (axial direction) restricted.

The handle 195, and the handle cover base 291, inner 292, base cover 294, and handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 are formed to be translucent. By illuminating the LED 293a on the handle cover decorative base 293, the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be illuminated and decorated, and the inside of the handle cover base 291 (front tubular portion 291a), the handle cover 295, etc. can also be illuminated and decorated.

The handle cover unit 290 has matching cutout openings 295b and cutouts 292c in the handle cover 295 and inner liner 292, so when viewed from the outside, it appears as if there are holes on both the left and right sides and the bottom that connect to the inside of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291. This helps to ease the player's anxiety about sticking their hand (fingers) into the inside of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195.

The upper cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 (the upper cutout 292c of the inner cover 292) is closed by the right-side decorative unit 275 and the right-side door frame unit 430.

In the handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment, the interior of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291, into which the rear of the handle unit 180 is inserted, is connected through the opening 291h to the lower notch 292c and notch opening 295b of the inner liner 292 and handle cover 295, respectively (see Figure 47). As a result, even if liquid such as a drink or game ball B enters the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, it can be discharged downward through the lower opening 291h, notch 292c, and notch opening 295b to the bottom of the handle cover unit 290.

In addition, if liquid or game balls B enter the cutout openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, they can pass through the gap between the front tubular portion 291a and the leg portions 292b of the inner casing 292 and be discharged downward through the lower cutout opening 295b.

In addition, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the notch 292c on the lower side of the inner 292, and the notch opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 are located on an extension of the inclination direction of the blade portion 46b of the grill member 46 in the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, as shown in Figure 47. This allows the wind (wind pressure) emitted diagonally upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the blade portion 46b due to vibration of the main frame speaker 622 to enter the front tubular portion 291a through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b. Therefore, when a player inserts their fingers inside the handle cover 295 (front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the device for striking the game ball B), the main frame speaker 622 vibrates and sends air into the front cylindrical portion 291a, surprising the player and providing an unprecedented performance.

Furthermore, the handle cover 295 has a cutout opening 295b, so when opening the door frame 3 or main frame 4, you can hook your finger into the cutout opening 295b on the right side and pull it, which can be used as a handle when opening the door frame 3, etc.

In addition, the handle 195 is plated all the way up to the outer ring portion 195c, so the handle touch sensor 192 can detect touches to the handle 195, and the game ball B can be hit even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched.

Furthermore, because the handle cover 295 has a cutout opening 295b, the rotational position of the handle 195 can be easily fixed by gripping the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 and the cutout opening 295b with the fingers, allowing the game ball B to be continuously shot into the game area 5a with a constant force without having to keep twisting the hand. In this way, the handle 195 can be rotated in a variety of ways to shoot the game ball B, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that allows the player to select the shooting operation that is most suitable for them.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end is located further back than the left end in a plan view, and faces outward (toward the open side). Therefore, the handle unit 180 attached via the handle cover base 291 is also inclined outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 relative to a line perpendicular to the front of the pachinko machine 1). This makes it easy for the player to grip the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, allowing for a comfortable rotation operation.

In this way, according to the handle unit 180 and handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment, a handle 195 having a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, multiple spoke portions 195b protruding radially from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the multiple spoke portions 195b is provided at the lower right corner of the door frame 3, which is arranged to be openable and closable around the left side as an axis and closes the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 so that it can be seen from the front, and a cylindrical handle cover unit 290 is provided extending rearward from the outer ring portion 195c. Because the handle cover unit 290 is provided, a handle 195 and handle cover unit 290 with a never-before-seen form can be seen in the area where a handle is usually provided on conventional pachinko machines, making a strong impact on the player and attracting the player's attention, as well as increasing the player's desire to play with the pachinko machine 1, making it easier for players wandering around the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to select the pachinko machine 1 as the machine to play.

In addition, the player's fingers can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. Therefore, when the player operates the handle 195 to shoot the game ball B into the play area 5a, if the player grasps the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, the player's fingers become inserted into the handle cover unit 290. This gives the player a different feeling when operating the handle 195 than with the handles of conventional pachinko machines, and the new sensation of shooting the game ball B can be enjoyed by the player, preventing a decline in interest.

When the player operates the handle 195 and causes the main frame speaker 622 mounted on the speaker unit 620a in the base unit 620A of the main frame 4 to output a sound effect, the vibration of the main frame speaker 622 causes the air in the enclosure 624 formed by the speaker box 623 to vibrate, and the vibration of the air in the enclosure 624 is released forward as sound pressure (sound wind) through the internal space 40a of the curtain board of the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2, which is connected to the enclosure 624, and the port member 47. At this time, the multiple blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47 can guide the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main frame speaker 622 into the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, and the sound pressure can stimulate the fingers of the player who is operating the handle 195 with their fingers inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c. Therefore, by supplying sound pressure from the port member 47 through the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h to the player's fingers inserted into the handle cover unit 290 according to the game status within the game area 5a, it is possible to surprise the player, give them a sense of an upcoming opportunity, or change the amount of handle operation, thereby entertaining the player and preventing them from becoming bored and losing interest in the game.

In addition, sound pressure (sound wind) from the main frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylindrical portion 291a of handle cover base 291) through the cutout opening 295b and opening 291h, making it possible to cool the inside of the handle cover unit 290 and creating a comfortable environment around the player's fingers as they operate the handle 195, thereby easing stress on the player and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as described above, when a player operates the handle 195 with their fingers inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c, the sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided on the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, which is different from the door frame 3 on which the handle 195 and handle cover unit 290 are attached, is guided by the multiple blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 to stimulate the player's fingers. Therefore, compared to a case in which a vibration device is provided on the handle 195, there is no damage to the various sensors (handle rotation detection sensor 189, handle touch sensor 192, single button operation sensor 194, etc.) and bearing mechanism provided on the handle 195, making it possible to make the handle unit 180 less susceptible to damage, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable due to damage to the handle unit 180 and suppressing a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, because the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle 195 has an appearance similar to that of a car steering wheel. Therefore, even though the handle 195 looks significantly different from the handles of conventional pachinko machines, players can intuitively recognize that operating the handle 195 is the same as with conventional pachinko machines. Therefore, even players who are seeing this pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of this pachinko machine 1 without any confusion, making it easier for players to choose this pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play without hesitation.

In addition, cutout opening 295b and opening 291h are provided on the downward-facing portion of the outer surface of the handle cover unit 290, where a player can insert their fingers between the central hub portion 195a and outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195.This means that when looking inside the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) from the front, the area below the handle cover unit 290 can be seen through opening 291h and the lower cutout opening 295b, giving the cylindrical handle cover unit 290 a sense of openness, reducing the player's anxiety about inserting their fingers into the handle cover unit 290 and allowing the player to operate the handle 195 without hesitation.

In addition, the handle cover unit 290 has through-hole cutout openings 295b and openings 291h in the downward-facing portions of its outer peripheral surface, and the port member 47 of the outer frame 2 (lower outer frame assembly 40) opens forward. This means that even if liquids such as drinks or game balls B enter the handle cover unit 290, they can be discharged downward through the lower cutout openings 295b and openings 291h, and liquids discharged downward through the cutout openings 295b and openings 291h are less likely to enter the port member 47.

Furthermore, the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer peripheral ring portion 195c, and the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290, which has the same diameter at the front end as the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, is provided with multiple cutout openings 295b.As a result, the central hub portion 195a can be used to grasp and operate the handle in the same way as the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, the spoke portions 195b can be used to operate the handle with just the fingers, the outer peripheral ring portion 195c can be used to operate the handle like a steering wheel of a car, the outer peripheral ring portion 195c can be used to grasp the handle by hooking the fingers between the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the cutout openings 295b, or the outer peripheral ring portion 195c can be straddled to pinch the inside and outside of the handle cover unit 290 with the fingers, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that allows for a variety of operations (handle operations) to shoot game balls B. Therefore, depending on the game situation and the player's condition, the player can shoot the game ball B into the game area 5a in a way that is easy for the player to operate, which prevents the player from getting bored and allows the player to enjoy the operation of shooting the game ball B, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, the operating position of the handle 195 can be fixed by hooking and gripping the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 and the notched opening 295b, or by straddling the outer ring portion 195c and pinching the inside and outside of the handle cover unit 290 with your fingers. Therefore, in addition to handle operations similar to those of conventional pachinko machines, handle operations that are not possible with conventional pachinko machines can also be performed, providing players with a variety of handle operations that make handle operation enjoyable and less likely to bore them.

In addition, because the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 extends rearward from the outer ring portion 195c, giving the handle cover unit 290 the appearance of being integrated with the handle 195, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that looks good and is able to attract the attention of players.

In addition, because the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, it is possible to prevent the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from becoming larger than necessary. This prevents the handle cover unit 290 from compressing the play area 5a (door window 101a) upward, preventing the play area 5a from becoming narrower. This allows the play area 5a to be relatively larger, and the large play area 5a makes the pachinko machine 1 stand out, resulting in a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that strongly attracts the attention of players.

Furthermore, by appropriately illuminating the LEDs 293a on the handle cover decorative board 293, the handle cover unit 290 (the interior of the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be illuminated and decorated. Therefore, even when a player is operating the handle 195, the illuminated decoration of the handle cover 295 and outer ring portion 195c is not obstructed by the player's hand, making the handle cover 295 and outer ring portion 195c stand out, providing a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that is capable of strongly attracting the player's attention.

In addition, a handle 195 is provided in the lower right corner of the door frame 3, opposite the hinge side, and a cutout opening 295b is provided in the part of the outer surface of the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 facing right, so that the cutout opening 295b can be used as a handle when opening and closing the door frame 3. This eliminates the need to provide a handle that would unsightly the door frame 3, and improves the appearance of the door frame 3.

In addition, the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports the outer ring portion 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so that it can rotate circumferentially, and is equipped with flange portions 291e and guide pieces 291g that restrict movement in the front-to-rear direction. Even if the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the guide pieces 291g and other components can restrict the forward movement of the outer ring portion 195c. This prevents deformation of the outer ring portion 195c or the spokes 195b connecting the outer ring portion 195c to the central hub portion 195a, preventing damage to the handle 195.

In addition, the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the player is touching the handle 195, and then accepts the operation of the handle 195 to shoot the game ball B. Therefore, the game ball B can be shot even if the handle 195 is operated while touching only the spoke portion 195b or the outer ring portion 195c. This allows the pachinko machine 1 to perform a variety of shooting operations (handle operations) as described above, and also prevents the game ball B from being shot when the player is not touching the handle 195, preventing the handle from being operated using tools and reducing the burden on the gaming hall.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the plate unit]
The tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. Figure 48 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and Figure 49 is a perspective view of the tray unit from behind. The tray unit 200 is attached to a portion below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The tray unit 200 comprises an upper tray 201 that stores game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and a lower tray 202 that is positioned below the upper tray 201 and can store game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 and the foul cover unit 150.

The dish unit 200 comprises a dish base unit 210 having an upper dish 201 and attached to the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, a dish decoration unit 250 having a lower dish 202 attached to the front of the dish base unit 210, and a performance operation unit 300 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250 and dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The tray base unit 210 comprises a flat tray unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper tray main body 212 attached to the upper front of the tray unit base 211 and holding an upper tray 201, a mounting base (not shown) attached to the right of the upper tray main body 212 and protruding forward, a tray unit relay board (not shown) attached to the right of the mounting base, a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the top surface of the mounting base, an upper tray pre-ball removal unit (not shown) attached below the mounting base, and an upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear of the upper tray pre-ball removal unit.

The dish decoration unit 250 comprises a lower dish main body 251 that is attached to the lower front of the dish unit base 211 and holds a lower dish 202; a dish unit main body 252 that is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251; a lower dish ball removal unit 260 that is attached to the underside of the lower dish main body 251; and a left dish decoration unit 270 and a right dish decoration unit 275 that are attached to the upper front of the dish unit main body 252, spaced apart from each other on the left and right.

The performance operation unit 300 is equipped with a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player, which includes a touch operation section 302 that can be operated by the player through touch, and a press operation section 303 that can be operated by the player through pressure. The performance operation unit 300 is equipped with a performance operation section cover unit 310 with a spherical outer surface, an operation section base 315 that is housed within the performance operation section cover unit 310 and attached to the front of the plate decoration unit 250, a circular performance operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320 attached to the top surface of the operation section base 315, an outer peripheral board cover 325 that covers the top of the performance operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320, and an operation section relay board unit 330 attached to the rear of the operation section base 315.

The performance operation unit 300 also includes a performance operation unit unit 350 that can protrude upward from the performance operation unit cover unit 310 and is provided with the performance operation unit 301; a performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 that is attached to the operation unit base 315 and supports the performance operation unit unit 350 so that it can be raised and lowered; and a protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the upward protrusion force of the performance operation unit unit 350 caused by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360.

The tray unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, with the performance operation unit 300 positioned in the center left-right so that the top surface of the performance operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward. The upper tray 201 is positioned to the left of the performance operation unit 300 on the top surface, and the ball dispensing operation unit 220 is positioned to the right of the performance operation unit 300, while the lower tray 202 is positioned below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the performance operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 will be described in detail, primarily with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The upper tray 201 is formed by a tray unit base 211 and an upper tray body 212. The left side of the upper tray 201 bulges forward more than the center when viewed from the front, forming an upwardly open container shape. The upper tray 201 (upper tray body 212) bulges forward most from the left end to the right, approximately one-third of the width of the door frame 3. The front end of the upper tray 201 recedes backward from the most bulging portion toward the right when viewed from the front, and includes a guide passage 201a (see Figure 73) whose depth in the front-to-back direction is slightly greater than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The entire bottom surface of the upper tray 201, including the guide passage 201a, is inclined so that the right end is lower, and the right end of the guide passage 201a when viewed from the front is recessed below the ball dispensing operation unit 220.

When assembled into the tray unit 200, the upper tray 201 has a bottom surface that slopes downward from a position below the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 to a position slightly below the outer diameter of the game ball B relative to the upper end of the upper tray ball delivery port (not shown). This allows game balls B released forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a to be received and stored within the upper tray 201, and the received game balls B can be supplied from the right end of the guide passage portion 201a through the upper tray ball delivery port to the ball delivery unit 140 side.

In addition, the guide passage section 201a is equipped with a metal earthing fixture that is electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls around) this, the static electricity charged to the game ball B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 50. Figure 50(a) is a horizontal cross-sectional view of the door frame at the lower tray ball supply port, showing the key parts, and Figure 50(b) is a cross-sectional view of a conventional door frame at the same location as Figure 50(a), showing the key parts. The lower tray 202 is located below the upper tray 201, to the left of the center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. The lower tray 202 is formed by a lower tray main body 251 and a tray unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing game balls B and has a lower tray ball removal hole 202a that penetrates the bottom wall vertically and allows game balls B to be removed. The lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is closed and closable by a lower tray ball removal cover 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260.

The lower tray 202 has a roughly rectangular shape extending left and right in plan view, with the front end on the left side protruding further forward than the right side from the center in the left-right direction. The lower tray 202 has a lower tray ball removal hole 202a that penetrates from top to bottom, located near the front end near the right end. The bottom surface of the lower tray 202 is inclined so that it slopes lower toward the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. When assembled into the tray unit 200, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is located below the performance operation unit 300, to the left of the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

When the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed, the lower tray 202 can store game balls B released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and by opening the lower tray ball removal hole 202a, the stored game balls B can be discharged below the tray unit 200 (e.g., to a cash box). Furthermore, when the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is open, since the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is located in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, game balls B released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be quickly discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

In conventional pachinko machines, as shown in Figure 50 (b), a lower tray ball ejection hole 202b in the lower tray 202 is provided in front of the central axis of the lower tray ball supply port 211j of the tray unit base 211 in the tray base unit 210, which is connected to the ball ejection port 150d of the far cover unit 150. The lower tray ball supply port 211j is cylindrical and extends straight forward so that a game ball B released forward from the ball ejection port 150d will head straight toward the lower tray ball ejection hole 202b. This allows a game ball B released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211j to be quickly ejected downward from the lower tray ball ejection hole 202b by moving the shortest distance.

However, if the lower tray ball supply port 211j is designed to guide game balls B straight toward the lower tray ball removal hole 202b, and the lower tray ball removal hole 202b is closed by the lower tray ball removal cover 265, there is a risk that game balls B will accumulate in the area to the right of the center of the lower tray 202, since the lower tray ball removal hole 202b and the lower tray ball supply port 211j are located near the right end of the lower tray 202. If game balls B concentrated in the right area of the lower tray 202 block the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, game balls B will no longer be released toward the lower tray 202 from the storage passage 150e of the fall cover unit 150, which may activate the full tank detection sensor 154 and determine that the lower tray 202 is full, even though there is still space in the left area of the lower tray 202.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 50(a), the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is inclined so that it extends diagonally forward to the left. In more detail, the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is inclined diagonally forward to the left at the location directly behind the lower tray ball removal hole 202a so that the distance between it and the front of the tray unit base 211 is long enough to allow at least one game ball B to circulate.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 50, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is moved to the left of the central axis (line shown by the dashed dotted line) of the rear end of the lower tray ball supply port 211c (ball discharge port 150d).

As a result, by moving the lower tray ball removal hole 202a to the left, the lowest part of the lower tray 202 (the part of the lower tray ball removal hole 202a) moves to the left, thereby reducing the concentration and accumulation of game balls B on the right side of the lower tray 202 when the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed. Furthermore, even if multiple game balls B accumulate in the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball removal hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front of the tray unit base 211), the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c extends diagonally, forming a gap between it and the rear end of the lower tray 202 through which game balls B can flow.As a result, game balls B released from the foul cover unit 150 (ball release port 150d) or the upper tray ball removal unit 240 (ball removal guide path 241c) toward the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be guided along the diagonally extending left side wall to the left side of the lower tray 202 and released, allowing game balls B to be neatly stored throughout the entire lower tray 202.

This prevents the full tank detection sensor 154 from activating and reporting a full tank even when there is sufficient space remaining in the lower tray 202 to store game balls B.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The dish base unit 210 comprises a flat dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, an upper tray body 212 attached to the upper front of the dish unit base 211 and holding the upper tray 201, and a dish unit relay board 214 attached to the rear of the dish unit base 211 near the lower right corner.

The tray base unit 210 also includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper front of the tray unit base 211, an upper tray pre-ball removal unit (not shown) attached to the front of the tray unit base 211 below the ball lending operation unit 220, and an upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear of the tray unit base 211 behind the upper tray pre-ball removal unit.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed in the shape of a flat plate (a shallow box shape with an open rear) extending left and right across the entire width of the door frame base 101.

The tray unit base 211 is equipped with an upper tray ball supply port 211a that penetrates from front to back near the upper left corner when viewed from the front and extends cylindrically to the rear; a speaker port 211b that penetrates from front to back below the upper tray ball supply port 211a and has punched metal attached to the front; a lower tray ball supply port 211c that penetrates from front to front at the lower part to the left of the center when viewed from the front and extends cylindrically to the rear; a notch 211d that is cut out in the right wall of the part that extends cylindrically to the rear of the lower tray ball supply port 211c to a size that allows game ball B to pass through; and an upper tray ball delivery port (not shown) that penetrates from front to front on the upper right side of the lower tray ball supply port 211c when viewed from the front and extends vertically, with its upper part located at the right end of the upper tray main body 212.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 has its front end opening into the rear wall of the upper tray 201, and its cylindrical rear end passes through the upper tray ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101 from the front and connects to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. This allows game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 to be supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the lower tray ball supply port 211c has its front end opening into the rear wall of the lower tray 202, and its cylindrical rear end passes through the lower tray ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front and connects to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. This allows game balls B circulating through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to be supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. In addition, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. As a result, by operating the upper tray ball removal button 222, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202 via the upper tray ball supply port, the entrance 141a and ball removal port 141b of the ball supply unit 140, the ball supply guide path 241b and ball removal guide path 241c of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240, and the cutout portion 211d.

When assembled to the tray base unit 210, the upper tray ball supply port is located in front of the ball receiving port (not shown) of the rear base 241 of the upper tray ball removal unit 240, and game balls B in the upper tray 201 are supplied from the ball receiving port of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 to the ball supply guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper tray body]
The upper tray body 212 of the tray base unit 210 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The upper tray body 212 is attached to the front of the tray unit base 211 and cooperates with the tray unit base 211 to form the upper tray 201. The upper tray body 212 is formed in a container-like (dish-shaped) shape with an open top and rear. The upper tray body 212 extends left and right, with the left side bulging forward more than the center when viewed from the front. The front end of the upper tray body 212 recedes rearward from the most forward-bulging part toward the right when viewed from the front, and the depth in the front-to-back direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the upper tray body 212 is inclined so that the right end is lowest. The upper part of the upper tray body 212 near the right end is closed.

When the upper tray body 212 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the section that is closed at the top near the right end is attached so that it fits under the ball dispensing operation unit 220. Furthermore, the upper tray body 212 has a performance operation unit attachment portion 212a formed in the middle of the upper part in the left-right direction, and part of the performance operation unit 300 is attached to this performance operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 is intended to relay the connection between the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100 and the left dish decorative board 273, the right dish decorative board 278, and the operation unit relay board 332. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner of the rear surface of the dish unit base 211. When attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface of this dish unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-4. Ball lending operation unit]
The ball dispensing operation unit 220 of the tray base unit 210 will be described mainly with reference to Figure 51. Figure 51 is an enlarged plan view showing the ball dispensing operation unit portion of the tray unit of the door frame. This ball dispensing operation unit 220 is used to discharge game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, to dispense a predetermined number of game balls B into the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 after inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball dispensing machine (not shown) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, to display the remaining amount of cash or a prepaid card inserted into the ball dispensing machine, to return the cash or a prepaid card inserted into the ball dispensing machine minus the amount of dispensed game balls B, to adjust the volume, and to adjust the amount of light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 comprises a base 221 attached to the upper front of the tray unit base 211, an upper tray ball removal button 222 located near the left edge of the top surface of the base 221, a translucent, disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 located to the right of the upper tray ball removal button 222 on the top surface of the base 221, a ball lending button 224 located on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, a return button 225 located on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, a ball lending display unit 226 located at the rear lower part of the ball lending operation base 223, a volume adjustment button 227 located in front of the ball lending button 224 on the outside of the base 221, and a light intensity adjustment button 228 located to the left of the volume adjustment button 227.

The upper tray ball removal button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the top surface of the base 221, and can be moved downward by the player pressing it. The ball lending button 224 is circular and has the character "ball" (ball) printed on its top surface. The return button 225 is triangular. The ball lending display 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one bullet-shaped LED, and can be easily seen by the player through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 when illuminated.

By pressing the upper tray ball removal button 222, the ball lending operation unit 220 can eject game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 into the lower tray. Furthermore, by inserting cash or a prepaid card with remaining balance into the ball lending machine and then pressing the ball lending button 224, a predetermined number of game balls B will be supplied to the upper tray 201. By pressing the return button 225, the amount of game balls B loaned will be deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display unit 226 displays the remaining balance of the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. Furthermore, the ball lending display unit 226 also displays an error code if the ball lending machine malfunctions.

The volume adjustment button 227 is used to adjust the volume of music, voice, sound effects, and other sound effects output from the top center speaker and top side speakers of the door frame 3 and the bass main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4. This volume adjustment button 227 is shaped like a gourd, with two circles combined. The volume adjustment button 227 has the letter "+" in the center of one (upper) circle and the letter "-" in the center of the other (lower) circle, and the area between the two circles has an image of sound coming from a speaker. The diameter of the circle on the "+" side of the volume adjustment button 227 is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. Pressing the "+" side of this volume adjustment button 227 increases the volume, and pressing the "-" side decreases the volume.

The light intensity adjustment button 228 is used to adjust the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. This light intensity adjustment button 228 is shaped like a gourd, with two circles combined. The light intensity adjustment button 228 has the letter "+" in the center of one (upper) circle and the letter "-" in the center of the other (lower) circle, and the area between the two circles has an image of a light bulb. The diameter of the circle on the "+" side of the light intensity adjustment button 228 is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. Pressing the "+" side of this light intensity adjustment button 228 makes it brighter, and pressing the "-" side makes it darker. Note that in addition to adjusting the brightness of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the brightness of the display screen of the performance display device 1600 may also be adjusted.

The volume adjustment button 227 and the light adjustment button 228 are different colors (for example, the volume adjustment button 227 is white and the light adjustment button 228 is black) to make it difficult for players to confuse them.

However, if the volume or light intensity is adjusted using the touch operation unit 302 or press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301, when a player-participation effect that requires operation of the effect operation unit 301 is not being executed, the player must operate the effect operation unit 301 appropriately to display a settings menu on the effect display device 1600 for adjusting the volume or light intensity, select the item to be adjusted, and then operate the touch operation unit 302 to change the volume or brightness of the light intensity, etc., which can be time-consuming. In contrast, according to this embodiment, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted directly by operating the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that simplifies the effort required to adjust the volume and light intensity and allows adjustments to be made in a short amount of time.

[3-5c-5. Upper tray ball removal unit]
The upper tray pre-ball removal unit and upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the tray base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 49. The upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 cooperates with the ball feeding unit 140 to eject the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202 when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed.

The upper tray ball removal unit 240 comprises a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball supply port from the rear, an upper tray ball removal slider 242 attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 so as to be able to slide up and down, a spring (not shown) that biases the upper tray ball removal slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241.

The rear base 241 is equipped with a ball receiving opening (not shown) that protrudes upward from the portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and opens toward the front, allowing game ball B to pass through; a ball feed guide path 241b that guides game ball B received in the ball receiving opening downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then rearward; and a ball removal guide path 241c that guides game ball B downward from a position lower than the ball feed guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then to the right when viewed from behind.

When assembled to the tray base unit 210, the ball receiving port is formed at the downstream end (right end when viewed from the front) of the guide passage section 201a of the upper tray 201, in a position that opens forward through the upper tray ball supply port of the tray unit base 211. When assembled to the door frame 3, the ball supply guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball supply unit 140 is located at the rear of the lower part. This allows game balls B supplied to the upper tray 201 to pass through the ball receiving port and ball supply guide path 241b and enter the entrance 141a of the ball supply unit 140.

The portion of the ball removal guideway 241c extending to the left and right protrudes further to the right as viewed from the rear than the portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably mounted, is inclined so that the right end is lower as viewed from the rear, and opens to the right side as viewed from the rear. The rear side of the portion of the ball removal guideway 241c extending to the left and right is closed by a rear cover 244. When assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feeding guideway 241b is located in front of the ball removal opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, and the right end of the portion extending to the left and right as viewed from the rear is connected to the cutout 211d of the lower tray ball supply opening 211c in the tray unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is released into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball ejection guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper tray ball removal slider 242 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is equipped with an actuation receiving part (not shown) that protrudes forward from the upper left corner, and an actuation transmitting part 242b that protrudes rearward from the rear surface behind the actuation receiving part. The actuation receiving part has a flat upper surface. The actuation transmitting part 242b is inclined so that its upper surface is positioned downward as it extends rearward, and its lower surface extends horizontally to connect with the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the actuation receiving part protrudes forward through the tray unit base 211 from the rear, with the lower end of the upper tray ball removal button 222 abutting against the upper surface of the actuation receiving part. Furthermore, when the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the actuation transmission part 242b protrudes rearward from the rear base 241, with the actuation rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 abutting against its upper surface.

The spring has its upper end attached to the rear base 241 and its lower end attached to the upper tray ball removal slider 242, urging the upper tray ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upper limit of its upward movement due to the spring's urging force, and can move downward by resisting the spring's urging force.

The upper tray ball removal unit 240 positions the upper tray ball removal slider 242 at its upper end of movement due to the spring force, and positions the upper tray ball removal button 222 at its upper end of movement via the actuation receiving part of the upper tray ball removal slider 242. Furthermore, because the spring force positions the upper tray ball removal slider 242 at its upper end of movement, the actuation rod 143c, which abuts the upper surface of the actuation transmission part 242b, is prevented from moving downward, and the partition part 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b, separating the two.

Therefore, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b in the ball feeding unit 140 are partitioned, and the game ball B sent from the upper tray 201 to the ball receiving port can be sent from the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144 to the ball supply port 142a and to the ball launching device 540 side.

On the other hand, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the spring force, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves downward, allowing the operating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143, which abuts the upper surface of the operating transmission part 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242, to move downward.The load of the weight part 143d of the ball removal member 143 causes the ball removal member 143 to rotate, and the partition part 143a moves back from between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b.As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper tray 201 through the ball receiving opening and ball feed guide path 241b is ejected forward from the ball removal opening 141b, which opens below the entrance 141a. The game ball B discharged forward from the ball discharge port 141b passes through the ball discharge guide path 241c and is guided through the cutout 211d into the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and is then released from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202, resulting in the game ball B in the upper tray 201 being discharged into the lower tray 202.

When the downward pressure on the upper tray ball removal button 222 is released, the spring force causes the upper tray ball removal slider 242 to move upward, causing the upper tray ball removal button 222 to rise, and the ball removal member 143 rotates due to the operating rod 143c abutting the operating transmission part 242b, positioning the partition part 143a between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b, returning to its original state.

In this way, the upper tray ball removal unit 240 can feed the game ball B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launcher 540 via the ball feeding unit 140, or eject it to the lower tray 202.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 22 to 48. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front of the plate base unit 210, with the performance operation unit 300 attached from the front in the center in the left-right direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates almost the entire plate unit 200.

The dish decoration unit 250 comprises a lower dish main body 251 attached to the lower front of the dish unit base 211 and working together with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish 202, a dish unit main body 252 attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251, a lower dish ball removal unit 260 attached to the underside of the lower dish main body 251, and a left dish decoration unit 270 and a right dish decoration unit 275 attached to the upper front of the dish unit main body 252, spaced apart from each other on the left and right.

[3-5d-1. Lower tray body]
The lower tray body 251 in the tray display unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 50. The lower tray body 251 cooperates with the tray unit base 211 of the tray base unit 210 to form the lower tray 202. The lower tray body 251 extends left and right and is formed in a container shape (dish-like) with open top and rear ends. This lower tray body 251 is attached to the lower front of the tray unit base 211, to the left of the center in the left-right direction, so that the open rear end is closed.

The lower tray body 251 has a generally rectangular shape extending left and right in plan view, with the front end on the left side protruding further forward than the right side from the center in the left-right direction. A lower tray ball removal hole 202a that penetrates vertically is formed near the front end of the right end of the lower tray body 251 in plan view. The bottom surface of the lower tray body 251 is inclined so that it slopes lower toward the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. The lower tray ball removal hole 202a is openably and closably closed by the lower tray ball removal cover 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260.

When the lower tray body 251 is assembled to the tray decoration unit 250, the outer periphery and part of the underside are covered by the tray unit body 252. Furthermore, when the lower tray body is assembled to the tray unit 200, the bottom surface is located lower than the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211, and the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is located in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. This allows game balls B released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c to be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges out so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and bulges out so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. In addition, the top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has upper side bulges 252a at the top that bulge forward from both the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extend downward, spaced apart on the left and right, and a lower front decorative portion 252b at the bottom that bulges forward on the left side of the center in the left-right direction to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251.

The left and right upper side bulges 252a have a left dish decorative unit 270 and a right dish decorative unit 275 attached to their respective front surfaces.

The tray unit main body 252 has a lower tray opening 252d that penetrates from front to back between the upper side bulge 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower tray opening 252d is large enough to allow a player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so that it becomes wider from top to bottom as it extends to the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed into a cylindrical shape that extends from front to back by the lower tray main body 251 and the underside of the upper side bulge 252a on the left side.

Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, the dish unit main body 252 is provided with a performance operation unit mounting portion formed between a pair of upper side bulges 252a in the center in the left-right direction, to which the performance operation unit 300 is attached. The performance operation unit mounting portion is formed with a width that is approximately 1/3 of the left-right width of the dish unit main body 252.

When assembled to the dish unit 200, the dish unit main body 252 is formed to completely cover the front of the dish base unit 210, with the speaker port 211b facing forward through the lower dish opening 252d.

[3-5d-3. Bottom tray ball removal unit]
The lower tray ball removal unit 260 in the tray decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 27 and 50. The lower tray ball removal unit 260 is attached to the underside of the lower tray body 251, and is used to store game balls B in the lower tray 202 or discharge game balls B from the lower tray 202 by opening and closing the lower tray ball removal hole 202a.

The lower tray ball removal unit 260 is equipped with a lower tray ball removal button 263 and a lower tray ball removal cover 265 that opens and closes the through hole by operating the lower tray ball removal button 263.

When the lower tray ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the tray decoration unit 250, the lower tray ball removal button 263 is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decorative part 252b of the tray unit main body 252, and the lower tray ball removal lid 265 closes the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball removal lid 265, allowing game balls B to be stored in the lower tray 202.

In the normal state, when the lower tray ball removal button 263 is pressed backward, the lower tray ball removal cover 265 moves, opening the lower tray ball removal hole 202a, allowing the game ball B in the lower tray 202 to be ejected below the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball removal hole 202a.

Furthermore, when the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is moved by pressing the lower tray ball removal button 263, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 remains in the moved position, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is kept open, and the game balls B in the lower tray 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

To close the lower tray ball removal hole 202a from this state, press the lower tray ball removal button 263, which is set back from the front of the lower front decorative part 252b, backward and then release the pressure. The lower tray ball removal cover 265 will return to its normal position and the lower tray ball removal hole 202a will be closed. This allows game balls B to be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5d-4. Left and right decorative units]
The left dish decorative unit 270 and right dish decorative unit 275 of the dish decorative unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 48 etc. The left dish decorative unit 270 and right dish decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The left dish decorative unit 270 and right dish decorative unit 275 are located at the top of the dish unit 200 and decorate both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 300.

The left-side decorative unit 270 comprises a semi-cylindrical left-side decorative body 271 that is translucent and extends left and right, a translucent left-side decorative lens 272 that passes through the left-side decorative body 271, and a left-side decorative substrate 273 that is located behind the left-side decorative lens 272 and has multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface.

The left decorative element 271 extends in a curved shape, moving forward and downward as it moves from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the top of the upper left side bulge 252a. The left decorative element 271 is formed as a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally upward and left at the left end and the central axis extending left and right at the right end, giving it the shape of a twisted semicylinder. The left decorative element 271 is milky white in color.

The left-hand decorative lens 272 extends longitudinally, coinciding with the front surface of the left-hand decorative body 271. The multiple LEDs mounted on the left-hand decorative board 273 are full-color LEDs, and when illuminated, can illuminate and decorate the left-hand decorative body 271.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the left end of the left decorative unit 270 is continuous with the bottom end of the left door frame unit 420. The left decorative unit 270 does not have ribs along the length of the left decorative body 271. Therefore, when the multiple LEDs on the left decorative board 273 are illuminated, the entire front of the left decorative body 271 can be illuminated and decorated in a generally uniform manner, giving the appearance of embedded fluorescent lights.

The right-hand dish decorative unit 275 comprises a translucent right-hand dish decorative body 276 that is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right, a translucent right-hand dish decorative lens 277 that passes through the right-hand dish decorative body 276, and a right-hand dish decorative substrate 278 that is provided behind the right-hand dish decorative lens 277 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The right decorative element 276 extends in a curved shape, moving forward and downward as it moves from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the top of the upper right side bulge 252a. The right decorative element 276 is formed as a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally upward and to the right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, giving it the shape of a twisted semicylinder. The right decorative element 276 is milky white in color.

The right-hand decorative lens 277 extends longitudinally, coinciding with the front surface of the right-hand decorative body 276. The multiple LEDs mounted on the right-hand decorative board 278 are full-color LEDs, and when illuminated, can illuminate and decorate the right-hand decorative body 276.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the right end of the dish right decorative unit 275 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430. Because the dish right decorative unit 275 does not have ribs along the length of the dish right decorative body 276, when the multiple LEDs on the dish right decorative board 278 are illuminated, the entire front of the dish right decorative body 276 can be illuminated and decorated in a generally uniform manner, giving the appearance of embedded fluorescent lights.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the left and right tray decorative units 270 and 275 protrude upward in part beyond the front end of the upper side bulge 252a of the tray unit main body 252 of the tray decorative unit 250, forming a step between them that makes the left and right tray decorative units 270 and 275 higher. This allows players to use the step between the left and right tray decorative units 270 and 275 and the upper side bulge 252a to hook their fingers, providing a fingerhold when leveling the game balls B in the upper tray 201 or operating the performance operation unit 301, described below. Furthermore, the step between the left and right tray decorative units 270 and 275 and the upper side bulge 252a prevents game balls B on the upper side bulge 252a from spilling forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the performance operation unit 300 in the tray unit 200 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 52 to 56. Figure 52(a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit as seen from the front with the performance operation button facing upward, and (b) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit of (a) as seen from the back. Figure 53 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into its main components as seen from above the front, and Figure 54 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into its main components as seen from below the front. Figure 55(a) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit when the performance operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting spring retainer is at its uppermost position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit when the performance operation unit has moved from the position of (a) to the upper position. Figure 56 is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit when the performance operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting spring retainer is at its lowermost position.

The performance operation unit 300 is located in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction. It not only decorates the plate unit 200, but also allows players to operate it to participate in the performance when a player-participation performance is executed. The performance operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The presentation operation unit 300 is equipped with a presentation operation section 301 that can be operated by the player. The presentation operation section 301 is composed of a touch operation section 302 that can be operated by the player through contact, and a pressure operation section 303 that can be operated by the player through pressure. The section 301 can accept player operations and move (vibrate) the presentation operation section 301, allowing the player to not only shoot the game ball B, but also to participate in the presentation during play. The presentation operation section 301 has the touch operation section 302 located above the pressure operation section 303. The presentation operation section 301 has the touch operation section 302 and pressure operation section 303 formed in a circular shape with a diameter that is approximately 5/8 the outer diameter of the presentation operation unit 300.

The performance operation unit 300 comprises a spherical performance operation cover unit 310 located on the front of the dish unit 200 in the center of the left-right direction; an operation unit base 315 to which the performance operation cover unit 310 is attached on the outside and which is attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250; a performance operation outer peripheral decorative board 320 located on the top surface of the operation unit base 315 and equipped with multiple LEDs 320a for illuminating and decorating the upper part of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 (unit upper cover 312); an outer peripheral board cover 325 attached to the operation unit base 315 so as to cover the performance operation outer peripheral decorative board 320 from above; and an operation unit relay board unit 330 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315.

The performance operation unit 300 also includes a performance operation unit 350 having a performance operation unit 301, a performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 that raises and lowers the performance operation unit 350, and a protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the protrusion force of the performance operation unit 350. The performance operation unit 350 is arranged so that it can be advanced and retreated upward from the top surface of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360.

[3-5e-1. Cover unit for performance operation]
The performance operation unit cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The performance operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250 via the operation unit base 315. The performance operation unit cover unit 310 decorates the outer periphery of the performance operation unit 300 (the periphery of the performance operation unit 350) at the center of the dish unit 200 in the left-right direction.

The performance operation unit cover unit 310 comprises a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is open upward and backward, and a circular unit upper cover 312 that is provided above the unit lower cover 311 and has an insertion opening 312a through which the performance operation unit 301 is inserted. The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape to cover the front and bottom of the operation unit base 315. The unit upper cover 312 is formed to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311. In other words, the outer surface of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a roughly spherical shape. Incidentally, the performance operation unit cover unit 310 in this embodiment is spherical in shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

The performance control unit cover unit 310 is installed at an angle so that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is positioned forward as it extends upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of approximately 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) relative to the vertical.

When the performance operation unit cover unit 310 is assembled to the door frame 3, its front end becomes the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is approximately half the total width of the door frame base 101 in the left-right direction.

At least the upper cover 312 of the performance control unit cover unit 310 is translucent, and can be illuminated by the multiple LEDs on the performance control unit outer periphery decorative board 320 (described below).

When assembled to the tray unit 200, the front end of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 protrudes further forward than the upper tray 201 and lower tray 202. The performance operation unit cover unit 310 is also connected so that the left tray decorative body 271 and the right tray decorative body 276 extend outward from both the left and right sides of the unit lower cover 311. This makes the performance operation unit 300 stand out, and the integrated decoration gives it a nice appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 315 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The rear side of the operation unit base 315 is attached to the performance operation unit mounting portion 212a of the upper tray body 212 in the tray base unit 210. The front and bottom of the operation unit base 315 are covered by the unit lower cover 311, and the top is covered by the unit upper cover 312 and the performance operation unit 301. The operation unit base 315 is formed in the shape of a container with an open top.

The operation unit base 315 comprises a main body 315a, which is roughly a cubic box with an open top, and a flange 315b, which extends outward from the top end of the main body and has a circular outer periphery. The main body 315a houses the performance operation unit 350. The bottom wall of the main body 315a is also fitted with the lower ends of a pair of guide shafts 362 and a central shaft 366 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 in the performance operation unit 350, which will be described later. The main body 315a also rotatably supports the lower end of the adjustment screw 384 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 on the upper surface of the bottom wall. The board base 331 of the operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the main body 315a.

The performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 is placed on the upper surface of the flange portion 315b. The annular outer peripheral board cover 325 is attached to the flange portion 315b so as to sandwich the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320. The unit upper cover 312 is attached to the outer peripheral board cover 325.

When the operation unit base 315 is assembled to the performance operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 315b is positioned approximately flush with the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311.

[3-5e-3. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 330 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315. The operation unit relay board unit 330 includes a board base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315, an operation unit relay board 332 attached to the rear surface of the board base 331, and a board cover 333 attached to the board base 331 so as to cover the operation unit relay board 332 from behind.

The operation unit relay board 332 relays the connection between the performance operation unit outer decorative board 320 (front decorative board 321 and rear decorative board 322), button outer decorative board 355, vibration motor 356, contact detection sensor main body 358, button middle decorative board 364, operation button lifting drive motor 367, pressure detection sensor 373, lifting detection sensor 374, protrusion force detection sensor 375, and protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 and the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210.

[3-5e-4. Production operation unit]
The performance operation unit 350 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The performance operation unit 350 is provided so as to face outward from the insertion opening 312a of the unit upper cover 312 in the performance operation unit cover unit 310, and can function as the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303.

The performance operation unit 350 comprises a cylindrical button body 351 with a closed top end, a disk-shaped contact detector 352 attached to the top of the button body 351, a cylindrical button sleeve 353 inserted into the button body 351 from below, a disk-shaped button base 354 attached to the bottom of the button sleeve 353 and supported so that it can be raised and lowered by a performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, and an annular outer button decorative board 355 positioned above the button base 354 and with multiple LEDs 355a mounted on its top surface.

The performance operation unit 350 also includes a vibration motor 356 located between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 that attaches the vibration motor 356 to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detection sensor body 358 that is connected to the contact detection body 352 and attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353.

The button body 351 is entirely transparent. It has a disk-shaped upper surface 351a that curves upward to bulge, a cylindrical portion 351b that extends downward from the outer periphery of the upper surface 351a, and a locking portion 351c that protrudes downward from the lower end of the cylindrical portion 351b. The upper surface 351a is shaped to form part of a sphere with the same diameter as the spherical surface of the performance operation unit cover unit 310. This upper surface 351a is decorated with a circular ornament that is approximately half the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface 351a (cylindrical portion 351b) is approximately 5/8 the diameter of the performance operation unit cover unit 310. The length (height) of the cylindrical portion 351b is approximately 5/8 the diameter of the upper surface 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals around the circumference of the cylindrical portion 351b. The locking portions 351c are locked to the button base 354. In this embodiment, the button body 351 has a diameter of approximately 127 mm.

The contact detector 352 has a circular outer periphery and is formed in a dish-like shape with a certain width of inner bulge upward from the outer periphery. The contact detector 352 is located below the circular decoration on the top surface 351a of the button body 351, and bulges upward at an angle with a flat inner surface. This makes the contact detector 352 appear to be part of the decoration on the button body 351. The contact detector 352 has flat downward extension pieces 352a that extend downward from both the left and right ends of the outer periphery and the rear end. The contact detector 352 is attached to the underside of the top surface 351a of the button body 351. The contact detector 352 is made of punched metal. The multiple holes in the punched metal reduce the capacitance of the contact detector 352 relative to its overall area, preventing false detection. Additionally, because the contact detector 352 is made of perforated metal, light from the LED 364a on the button center decorative substrate 364 located below can be transmitted upward, allowing the center of the top surface 351a of the button body 351 to be illuminated and decorated in excellent condition.

The contact detector 352 is connected to the external electrode terminal of the connector in the contact detection sensor main body 358. This allows the contact detector 352 to function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, and to detect contact or approach of a detection target (the player's hand) with the top or side surface of the button main body 351. In other words, the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 allow the button main body 351 to function as the contact operation unit 302.

The button sleeve 353 has a cylindrical sleeve body 353a that extends vertically, and an annular flange portion 353b that extends outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is formed to be entirely transparent. The outer diameter of the sleeve body 353a is approximately 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351, and its length is approximately the same as the length of the cylindrical portion 351b of the button body 351. The button sleeve 353 allows light from the multiple LEDs 355a on the button outer decorative substrate 355 to pass upward through the flange portion 353b.

The button base 354 is disk-shaped and has approximately the same diameter as the outer diameter of the button body 351. It is attached to the lower end of the button body 351 so as to close the open lower end of the button body 351. The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a that penetrate vertically at positions symmetrical about the center, a central hole 354b that penetrates vertically at the center, and a pair of guide pins 354c that protrude from the inner surface of the central hole toward the center. The guide shafts 362 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 are slidably inserted into the pair of guide holes 354a. The central hole 354b has an inner diameter large enough to allow the lifting cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c face each other on the same axis and are attached so that they can rotate around the axis.

The button base 354 extends downward and further has a flat detection piece 354d that is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373 of the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360. The locking portion 351c of the button body 351 is locked to the outer peripheral surface of the button base 354. A pair of guide shafts 362 is inserted into a pair of guide holes 354a, thereby guiding the button base 354 so that it can be raised and lowered in the vertical direction. Furthermore, the button base 354 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 354c being guided by the cam portion 371a of the lifting cam member 371. The upper ends of a pair of lifting springs 365 of the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360 abut against the underside of the button base 354, and the button base is biased upward by the pair of lifting springs 365.

The button exterior decorative substrate 355 has multiple LEDs 355a mounted on its top surface. The multiple LEDs 355a are arranged in a row on two concentric circles. More specifically, the multiple LEDs 355a are provided in a section slightly outside the sleeve body 353a of the button sleeve 353 and in a section near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 355a on the button exterior decorative substrate 355, the section on the top surface of the button body 351 outside the contact detector 352 and the side (circumferential surface) of the button body 351 can be illuminated and decorated.

The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to its rotation shaft, and can generate vibrations by rotating the weight. The vibration motor 356 is positioned so that its rotation shaft extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is positioned so that its rotation shaft extends in a direction perpendicular to the forward and backward movement direction of the performance operation unit 301. The vibration motor 356 is also located on a straight line that passes through a pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the performance operation unit 301 (performance operation unit 350) in the up-down direction. This allows vibrations from the vibration motor 356 to be efficiently transmitted to the performance operation unit 301. The impact of vibrations from the vibration motor 356 on the pair of guide holes 354a (pair of guide shafts 362) can also be reduced.

The contact detection sensor body 358 is a capacitance sensor. While not shown in detail, the contact detection sensor body 358 includes a sensor IC with a surge protection circuit, a transmitter circuit, a detection and smoothing circuit, and a comparison circuit, an output circuit, a constant-voltage circuit that supplies power to the sensor IC and output circuit, sensor electrodes, and a connector. The contact detection sensor body 358 can detect the capacitance of the internal sensor electrode. The connector of the contact detection sensor body 358 also includes an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, which is connected to the contact detection element 352. In other words, the contact detection sensor body 358 allows the contact detection element 352 to function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor body 358 detects capacitance with the sensor electrode and outputs an ON signal when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined capacitance set by an external resistor. In this embodiment, the contact detection sensor body 358 outputs an ON signal when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined capacitance, but it may also output multiple signals depending on the capacitance.

In this embodiment, the effect operation unit 350 is provided with a contact detector 352 on the underside of the upper surface 351a of the button body 351. The contact detector 352 functions as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance using the contact detection sensor body 358. This allows the contact detector 352 to detect contact or approach of a detectable object (a player's hand) with the top surface of the button body 351. Furthermore, the contact detector 352 of the effect operation unit 350 has multiple downward extension pieces 352a that extend downward. This allows the effect operation unit 350 to detect contact or approach of a detectable object (a player's hand) with the side of the button body 351 when the effect operation unit 350 is protruding upward. Therefore, the effect operation unit 350, together with the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358, allows the button body 351 to function as the contact operation unit 302.

This performance operation unit 350 is supported by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 so that it can be raised and lowered in the vertical direction. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved to its lowest position (normal state), the upper surface 351a of the button body 351 is flush with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the performance operation unit cover unit 310, making the performance operation unit 300 appear as a single sphere. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved upward from its normal position by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the upper surface 351a of the button body 351 protrudes above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and can function as the pressing operation unit 303 by pressing downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365.

More specifically, when the performance operation unit 350 is in its lowest position (normal state), it will not move any further downwards even if pressed, and no pressing operation can be performed. In this normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved higher than its normal position by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 moves away from the pressure detection sensor 373 and becomes undetectable. When the top surface of the performance operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the performance operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower limit of movement against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373. This detects the pressing operation of the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303).

In addition, the effect operation unit 350 has the button body 351 covering the top of the contact detection element 352, which is made of perforated metal. Therefore, when operating the contact operation element 302, the player comes into contact with the smooth, spherical top surface of the button body 351. Instead, the player does not directly touch the surface of the perforated metal, which has irregularities caused by the multiple holes, allowing the player to smoothly operate the contact operation element 302. Furthermore, because the contact detection element 352 is covered by the button body 351, it is possible to impart any desired tactile sensation to the contact operation element 302 by forming fine irregularities or multiple ridges on the surface (top) of the button body 351. This increases the design freedom for the contact operation element 302, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is even more enjoyable for players.

In the above, the button body 351 is transparent, but this is not limiting. The button body 351 may be opaque or translucent, so that the lower side is difficult to see through. This makes it difficult to see the contact detection body 352 made of punched metal through the button body 351, improving the appearance of the effect operation unit 350. Furthermore, if the button body 351 is opaque, it is desirable to make it translucent. This allows the button body 351 to be illuminated and decorated by light from the LED 355a on the outer button decorative board 355 and the LED 364a on the inner button decorative board 364 located below, and the player can be entertained by the illuminated effect of the button body 351.

[3-5e-5. Performance operation unit lifting mechanism]
The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 is attached to the operation unit base 315 and can raise and lower the performance operation unit 350. The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 comprises a lifting mechanism base 361 having an approximately circular outer periphery and attached within the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 below the performance operation unit unit 350; a pair of cylindrical guide shafts 362 arranged symmetrically about the central axis of the lifting mechanism base 361, with their lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and their upper ends extending upward through the operation unit base 315 and the button base 354; a disk-shaped upper base 363 connecting the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and having an outer periphery smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353; and a button interior decorative board 364 attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363 and equipped with a plurality of LEDs 364a capable of emitting light upward.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 also includes a pair of lifting springs 365, through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted, and which urge the button base 354 upward, and a central shaft 366 that passes vertically through the center of the lifting mechanism base 361 and the button base 354, with its lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a and its upper end attached to the upper base 363.

Furthermore, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 comprises an operation button lifting drive motor 367 attached to the underside of the lifting mechanism base 361 so that its rotation shaft protrudes upward; a spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367; a spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 meshing with the lifting drive gear 368 and rotatably attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361; and a lifting cam drive gear member 370 rotated by the driven gear 369 and rotatably attached with the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 also includes a lifting cam member 371, the lower end of which is connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 and to which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached, which lifts and lowers the button base 354 by rotating, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the top of the lifting mechanism base 361 so as to cover the lifting drive gear 368, driven gear 369, and lifting cam drive gear member 370 from above.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 also includes a pressure detection sensor 373 attached to the lifting mechanism base 361 that detects the pressing operation of the pressure operation unit 303, a lifting detection sensor 374 attached to the lifting mechanism base 361 that detects the lifting of the performance operation unit 350 by detecting the rotational position of the lifting cam drive gear member 370 (lifting cam member 371), and a protruding force detection sensor 375 attached to the lifting mechanism base 361 that detects the lifting force of the performance operation unit 350 by detecting the lifting of the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380.

The lifting mechanism base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a, multiple legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a, and a pair of through-holes 361c that penetrate the base body 361a and allow the lifting spring 365 to pass through together with a pair of guide shafts 362. The base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315. A driven gear 369, a lifting cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressure detection sensor 373, and an ejection force detection sensor 375 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a. Additionally, an operation button lifting drive motor 367, a lifting detection sensor 374, and an ejection force adjustment drive motor 381 are attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a. The lower ends of the legs 361b of the lifting mechanism base 361 are attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315. This forms a space in which the ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 is disposed between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. A pair of through holes 361c are provided in the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361, respectively, at positions half the diameter of the base main body 361a toward the front and rear from the center.

The pair of guide shafts 362 pass through a pair of through-holes 361c located at a distance half the diameter of the base body 361a from the center forward and backward in the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The central shaft 366 passes through the center of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 have their respective lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315, and their respective upper ends attached to the upper base 363. The pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 are formed from metal rods.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The upper base 363 has a lower protrusion that protrudes downward. By abutting the lower protrusion of the upper base 363 against the upper protrusion of the gear cover 372, a space capable of accommodating the lifting cam member 371 can be formed between the upper base 363 and the lifting mechanism base 361.

The button center decorative substrate 364 has multiple full-color LEDs 364a mounted on its top surface. By appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 364a, the button center decorative substrate 364 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the top surface of the button body 351.

The pair of lifting springs 365 are coil springs, each having a guide shaft 362 inserted therethrough. The lower ends of the pair of lifting springs 365 abut against the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the ejection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the upper ends abut against the button base 354.

The lifting cam drive gear member 370 comprises a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the lifting cam member 371, and a lifting detection piece 370c that protrudes downward from the gear portion 370a in a cylindrical shape, has two opposing notches cut out, and is detected by the lifting detection sensor 374. The lifting cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The lifting cam member 371 is cylindrical and rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 through its center. The lifting cam member 371 passes through the gear cover 372 and is located between the upper base 363 and the lifting mechanism base 361. The lifting cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that protrude outward and are spaced 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer surface. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending perpendicular to the axis near its lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, a second cam 371d extending upward parallel to the axis from one end of the first cam 371b, and a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite the second cam 371d (see Figure 55, etc.). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and adjacent cam portions 371a are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

The lifting cam member 371 also has a connected portion 371f at its lower end that connects to the connecting portion 370b of the lifting cam drive gear member 370.

The lifting/lowering cam member 371 is formed so that the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a extends upward from the rear end of the first cam 371b when the lifting/lowering cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view. By rotating, the lifting/lowering cam member 371 can guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 with the cam portion 371a, thereby raising and lowering the button base 354 (performance operation unit 350), which is biased upward by the lifting spring 365.

The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the lifting spring 365 and lifting cam member 371 can pass. The gear cover 372 also has an upper protrusion that protrudes upward at a location facing the lower protrusion of the upper base 363. By abutting the upper protrusion of the gear cover 372 against the lower end of the lower protrusion of the upper base 363, a space capable of accommodating the lifting cam member 371 can be formed between the upper base 363 and the lifting mechanism base 361.

The pressure detection sensor 373 detects the pressure operation of the performance operation unit 350 (pressure operation unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the performance operation unit 350. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), the pressure detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved upward by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 from the normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 moves away, and this pressure detection sensor 373 enters a non-detecting state. When the top surface of the performance operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the performance operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower limit of movement against the biasing force of the lift spring 365, the pressure detection sensor 373 detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 and can detect a pressure operation on the performance operation unit 350 (pressure operation unit 303).

The lifting/lowering detection sensor 374 detects the lifting/lowering detection piece 370c of the lifting/lowering cam drive gear member 370, thereby detecting the rotational position of the lifting/lowering cam member 371 via the connected portion 371f, which is connected to the connecting portion 370b of the lifting/lowering cam drive gear member 370.

The protrusion force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d of the lifting spring lower holding member 385 in the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 can support the performance operation unit unit 350 so that it can be raised and lowered via the button base 354 using a pair of guide shafts 362 aligned front to back, and can urge the performance operation unit unit 350 upward via the button base 354 using a pair of lifting springs 365. The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 can also raise and lower the performance operation unit unit 350 (performance operation unit 301) relative to the performance operation unit cover unit 310 by rotating the lifting cam member 371 using the operation button lifting drive motor 367. The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 can also illuminate and decorate the central portion of the top surface of the button body 351 by appropriately illuminating multiple LEDs 364a mounted on the button inner decorative board 364.

In the normal state of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is engaged with the engagement portion 371c provided on the lower end of the lifting cam member 371 (see Figure 55 (a)). In this normal state, the performance operation unit 350 is positioned at the downward end of its travel via the button base 354, and even if the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed downward, the performance operation unit 350 will not move downward. Therefore, in the normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected. Also, in the normal state, the surface (top surface) of the unit upper cover 312 of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 and the top surface of the button body 351 of the performance operation unit unit 350 are aligned, and the performance operation unit cover unit 310 and the button body 351 form a single sphere.

When the operation button lift drive motor 367 rotates the lift drive gear 368 counterclockwise in a plan view in the normal state (when the performance operation unit 350 is in the lowered position), the lift cam drive gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in a plan view via the driven gear 369 that meshes with the lift drive gear 368, and the lift cam member 371 connected to the lift cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When this lift cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a visible from the front in Figure 55(a) moves to the right, and the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 rolls from the locking portion 371c to the portion of the first cam 371b to the left of the locking portion 371c. At the same time, the button base 354 moves slightly downward via the guide pin 354c against the biasing force of the lift spring 365.

As the lifting cam member 371 rotates, the guide pin 354c, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b, moves from the left end of the first cam 371b toward the second cam 371d. Because the second cam 371d extends upward perpendicularly to the first cam 371b, the force of the lifting spring 365 causes the guide pin 354c to move upward along the second cam 371d, and the button base 354 rises together with the guide pin 354c, bringing the performance operation unit 350 into its raised position. In this state, the detection piece 354d moves away from the pressure detection sensor 373, so the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detecting state.

The lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, which the lower end of the lifting spring 365 abuts, can be moved to various positions in the vertical direction by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381, as will be described in detail below. The amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 can be changed depending on the vertical position of the lifting spring lower holding member 385, so the performance operation unit 350 can be protruded to the raised position with a protruding force that corresponds to the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365.

When the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in Figure 55 (b), the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. In this state, the operation of the operation button lifting drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

When the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 abuts against the lower surface of the upper base 363, restricting further upward movement of the button base 354. Furthermore, when the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire performance operation unit 350 (performance operation unit 301) moves upward, and the upper surface 351a of the button main body 351 protrudes above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312.

When the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) of the performance operation unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in this raised position, the performance operation unit 350 moves downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372. When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 moves to the lowered position, and together with the button base 354, the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) also moves to the lowered position.

In this way, when the button base 354 abuts against the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373, and pressure on the button body 351 (pressure operation unit 303) of the performance operation unit is detected.

To return the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 rotates the lifting/lowering cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. In Figure 55(b), the third cam 371e, which abuts the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354, moves to the right (towards the guide pin 354c). As a result, the guide pin 354c is pressed downward by the third cam 371e, and the button base 354 moves downward via the guide pin 354c against the biasing force of the lifting/lowering spring 365.

When returning the performance operation unit 350 to the lowered position, the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 moves the lifting spring lower holding member 385 downward, reducing the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 (see Figure 56). This weakens the force of the lifting spring 365 that urges the performance operation unit 350 upward, and therefore weakens the force acting on the third cam 371e of the lifting cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354. This reduces the load on the operation button lifting drive motor 367 that rotates the lifting cam member 371, reducing damage (failure) of the operation button lifting drive motor 367. Furthermore, an inexpensive motor with low torque can be used as the operation button lifting drive motor 367.

When the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b as the lifting cam member 371 rotates, the downward movement of the button base 354 stops and the guide pin 354c rolls along the first cam 371b. When the guide pin 354c subsequently reaches the locking portion 371c midway along the first cam 371b, the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 inserts the guide pin 354c into the upwardly recessed locking portion 371c, and the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 is stopped, causing the performance operation unit 350 to return to its original lowered position.

In the above example, the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 counterclockwise in the performance operation unit lifting/lowering mechanism 360, moving the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d and causing the button base 354 (button body 351) to immediately protrude from the lowered position to the raised position. However, in the normal state where the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked with the locking portion 371c of the lifting cam member 371 and the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 may also rotate the lifting cam member 371 clockwise in a plan view. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the lifting distance of the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) by the performance operation unit lifting/lowering mechanism 360 is approximately 40 mm.

When the lift-down cam member 371 is rotated clockwise under normal conditions, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the urging force of the lift-down spring 365 causes the guide pin 354c to move upward along the third cam 371e. Then, by stopping the rotation of the lift-down cam member 371 when the guide pin 354c is halfway along the third cam 371e, the upward protrusion of the button body 351 can be stopped at any position between the lowered and raised positions. Then, by protruding the button body 351 to a position above the lowered position, it becomes possible to press the button body 351 downward against the urging force of the lift-down spring 365, allowing the button body 351 to function as the pressing operation unit 303.

When the third cam 371e is used to protrude the button body 351 upward, it is desirable to move the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365. This reduces the load on the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 (operation button lifting drive motor 367) and also makes the button body 351 feel lighter when pressed.

In this way, the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) can be changed depending on the rotational position of the lifting cam member 371. Therefore, by varying the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 depending on the game status (for example, depending on the result of a special lottery drawn when game ball B is received in the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004), it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the game.

In addition, at least one shallow recess in which the guide pin 354c can be engaged may be provided midway on the third cam 371e of the lifting cam member 371. This allows the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) to be stably protruded to a position with the same amount of protrusion, preventing variations in the amount of protrusion. Furthermore, if a recess is provided in at least one location midway on the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c can be engaged in the recess, eliminating the need to keep the lifting cam member 371 stopped from rotating by the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and reducing the load on the operation button lifting drive motor 367.

[3-5e-6. Ejection force adjustment mechanism]
The protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can change the momentum (protruding force) with which the performance operation unit 350 (pressure operation unit 303) protrudes upward by changing the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 that urges the performance operation unit 350 upward. The protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 is provided between the bottom wall of the main body 315a in the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361.

The ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 includes an ejection force adjustment drive motor 381 attached to the underside of the base body 361a of the elevator mechanism base 361; a spur gear-shaped pinion gear 382 attached to the rotation shaft of the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381; a transmission gear 383 meshed with the pinion gear 382 and rotatably attached to the underside of the base body 361a; an adjustment screw 384 having a spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a meshed with the transmission gear 383 and a screw portion 384b extending cylindrically downward from the gear portion 384a and having a spiral groove formed on its outer periphery, through which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably supported; and an elevator spring lower retaining member 385 meshed with the screw portion 384b of the adjustment screw 384, through which a pair of guide shafts 362 pass and against which the lower ends of a pair of elevator springs 365 abut.

The protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 is attached to the underside of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 so that a gap is formed between it and the underside of the base body 361a. The protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 has a rotation shaft that protrudes into the gap between it and the base body 361a.

The adjustment screw 384 is formed with a length that extends from the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation unit base 315 to the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The screw portion 384b of the adjustment screw 384 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a larger diameter than the gear portion 384a.

The lifting spring lower holding member 385 has a main body portion 385a extending forward and backward, a screw hole 385b that penetrates vertically in the center of the main body portion 385a and screws into the screw portion 384b, downwardly recessed spring holding recesses 385c provided at both the front and rear ends of the main body portion 385a and capable of accommodating the lower end of the lifting spring 365, and a flat detection piece 385d extending upward from the front end of the main body portion 385a. The guide shafts 362 pass through the center of each of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c of the lifting spring lower holding member 385. The detection piece 385d is detected by the protrusion force detection sensor 375 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360.

When the pinion gear 382 is rotated by the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381, the ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 can rotate the adjustment screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and gear portion 384a. Then, by rotating the adjustment screw 384 using the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381, the ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 can move the lifting spring lower holding member 385 up and down via the threaded hole 385b that engages with the screw portion 384b.

When the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the lower end of the lifting spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves upward, increasing the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365. On the other hand, when the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the lifting spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves downward, decreasing the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 (see Figure 56). In other words, moving the lifting spring lower holding member 385 upward increases the force exerted by the lifting spring 365 on the performance operation unit 350, while moving the lifting spring lower holding member 385 downward decreases the force exerted by the lifting spring 365 on the performance operation unit 350. This allows the lifting force adjustment mechanism 380 to adjust the upward protruding force of the performance operation unit 350.

The detection piece 385d of the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is detected by the protruding force detection sensor 375 when the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is raised to its highest position. In other words, the detection piece 385d is detected by the protruding force detection sensor 375 when the lifting spring 365 is compressed to its greatest extent. As a result, if the protruding force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d while the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is being moved upward by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381, the upward movement of the lifting spring lower holding member 385 by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 is stopped, thereby preventing further compression of the lifting spring 365 and damage to the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380.

Furthermore, as described above, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can appropriately adjust the protruding force of the effect operation unit 350. Therefore, when the effect operation unit 350 is in the lowered position, the contact detector 352 detects contact or proximity of a detectable object (e.g., a player's finger) with the button body 351, and the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360 is used to protrude the effect operation unit 350 so that it abuts against the detectable object, the vertical position of the lifting spring lower retaining member 385 can be appropriately selected to vary the protruding force of the button body 351. This makes it possible to vary the strength of the force applied to the player's finger when the button body 351 protrudes upward. Therefore, when the button body 351 abuts strongly, the player can be made to believe that something good is about to happen, heightening the player's anticipation for the game. Therefore, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can indicate to the player the degree of expectation for the game by increasing or decreasing the protruding force of the button body 351 depending on the game status (for example, depending on the result of a special lottery drawn when game ball B is received in the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004).

One way to change the spring's biasing force is to twist the spring. However, to protrude the performance operation unit 350, a compressed spring (compression coil spring) must be used, and twisting the compression coil spring to change the biasing force would apply excessive stress to the compression coil spring, which could cause premature deterioration and damage to the internal structure. In contrast, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 of this embodiment adjusts the protrusion force (biasing force) of the performance operation unit 350 by changing the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 through vertical movement of the lifting spring lower holding member 385. This prevents excessive stress from being applied to the lifting spring 365, reduces premature deterioration of the lifting spring 365, and allows the performance operation unit 350 to protrude stably over the long term.

[3-5e-7. Action of the Production Operation Unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 57 and 58. Figure 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship of the effect operation unit outer decorative board, the button outer decorative board, and the button inner decorative board in a plan view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. Figure 58(a) is a front view of the turntable unit shown in its normal state, and (b) is a front view of the turntable unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation unit 300 is formed spherically as a whole and is equipped with an effect operation unit 301 on its top surface that can be operated by a player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a touch operation unit 302 that can be operated by contact or approach with the player's hand, etc., and a press operation unit 303 that can be pressed. The touch operation unit 302 is provided on the top of the press operation unit 303 (button body 351).

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the tray unit 200 with the protruding direction of the upwardly protruding pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) tilted so that the top is positioned forward relative to the vertical direction. In other words, the center of the effect operation unit 301 is located forward of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300. This makes the effect operation unit 301 easier to see for players seated in front of the pachinko machine 1.

In the normal state of the performance operation unit 300, the pressing operation unit 303 (performance operation unit 350) is in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350 is aligned with the spherical surface of the performance operation unit cover unit 310. Furthermore, in the normal state, pressing the pressing operation unit 303 downward does not cause the pressing operation unit 303 (performance operation unit 350) to move downward. Therefore, in the normal state, the performance operation unit 300 appears to the player as simply a spherical decorative object, making it difficult for the player to recognize that it can be operated.

As shown in Figure 57, the performance operation unit 300 has a performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 arranged below the unit upper cover 312 that surrounds the outer periphery of the pressing operation unit 303 (performance operation unit 350). A circular button outer decorative board 355 is arranged inside the outer edge of the pressing operation unit 303, and a button inner decorative board 364 is arranged further inside that. The performance operation unit 300 is arranged with the button outer decorative board 355 and the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 arranged outward from the button inner decorative board 364 in that order. The LEDs 355a inside the button inner decorative board 364 and the button outer decorative board 355 are arranged below the contact detector 352, but because the contact detector 352 is made of punched metal and is therefore translucent, light from them can be easily transmitted upward (towards the player).

The performance operation unit 300 can illuminate and decorate the annular unit upper cover 312 using the LEDs 320a on the performance operation outer decorative board 320. Additionally, the LEDs 355a on the button outer decorative board 355 can illuminate and decorate the periphery and outer surface of the top surface of the button body 351. Furthermore, the LEDs 364a on the button inner decorative board 364 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the top surface of the button body 351.

The multiple LEDs 320a on the effect operation unit outer decorative board 320, the multiple LEDs 355a on the button outer decorative board 355, and the multiple LEDs 364a on the button inner decorative board 364 are each arranged in a circular row, so by sequentially illuminating them in the circumferential direction, the player can see an illumination effect in which light rotates around the center of the pressing operation unit 303. Furthermore, because the multiple LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, and LEDs 363a are arranged concentrically, the player can see an illumination effect in which light spreads from the center of the pressing operation unit 303 to the outside, or an illumination effect in which light converges from the outside to the center of the pressing operation unit 303.

In the normal state, as shown in Figure 58 (a), the presentation operation unit 300 is in a lowered position with the pressing operation unit 303 (presentation operation unit 350) in such a way that its upper surface is flush with the surface of the unit upper cover 312. In this state, the pressing operation unit 303 cannot be pressed. On the other hand, the touch operation unit 302 can be touched depending on the player participation presentation being executed.

In the normal state when the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) is not protruding, an effect (player participation effect) may be produced by, for example, displaying an effect image on the effect display device 1600 encouraging the player to touch the top surface of the effect operation unit 300, or outputting voice or sound effects. When the contact detector 352 detects contact with (or proximity to) the button body 351, the effect proceeds to the next stage. When contact is detected, the button body 351 may be illuminated by the LED 355a on the outer button decorative board 355 or the LED 364a on the inner button decorative board 364, thereby allowing the player to recognize that a touch operation has been accepted and providing a sense of operation of the touch operation unit 302. The color, brightness, and pattern of the light emitted by the button body 351 may be used to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the game (for example, the occurrence of a favorable game state that gives the player an advantage, such as a "jackpot" game).

Alternatively, when the contact detector 352 detects contact with (or proximity to) the button body 351, the vibration motor 356 may be driven to vibrate the button body 351. This provides a sense of operation to the contact operation unit 302, making the player more aware that their contact operation has been accepted. At this time, the vibration motor 356 may impart strong vibrations, weak vibrations, or vibrations with a predetermined rhythm to indicate to the player how excited they are about the game.

In addition, in the normal presentation (player participation type presentation), a presentation image encouraging the player to touch the top surface of the presentation operation unit 300 is displayed on the presentation display device 1600, and voice, sound effects, etc. are output, and then when the contact detector 352 detects contact of the player (hand or fingers) with the top surface of the button body 351, the presentation operation unit lifting mechanism 360 causes the button body 351 (presentation operation unit 350) to protrude upward (pop up) due to the force of the lifting spring 365. More specifically, when the operation button lifting drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 counterclockwise in a plan view under normal conditions, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 disengages from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b), and the biasing force of the pair of lifting springs 365 causes the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351, pressing operation portion 303) together with the button base 354 to vigorously project upward into the raised position (see FIG. 55(b)). In this raised position, the top surface of the button body 351 is positioned significantly higher than the top surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button body 351 projects upward. As the button body 351 projects upward as described above, fingers touching the button body 351 are pushed upward along with the button body 351, greatly surprising the player and strongly attracting their attention.

Then, the device transitions to an effect in which the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed, allowing the player to enjoy pressing the pressing operation unit 303. More specifically, when the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is in the raised position and the button body 351 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) moves downward, so that the top surface of the button body 351 is flush with the top surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373. This detects the pressing of the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303), and the pressing operation is used as an opportunity to change the effect, allowing the player to enjoy a player-participation effect.

In addition, during the above-mentioned effects, the protruding force (momentum) with which the button body 351 is protruded may be increased or decreased using the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, thereby suggesting to the player the degree of expectation for the game depending on the strength of the protruding force. In addition, when the button body 351 pops up or is pressed, the vibration motor 356 may vibrate the button body 351.

In an effect in which the effect operation unit 350 is protruded, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be made to protrude upward when the contact detector 352 detects that the player's fingers or the like have approached within the movement range (protrusion range) of the upward-protruding button body 351. This causes an impact when the button body 351 comes into contact with the player's fingers or the like, surprising the player and strongly attracting their attention. Even in this case, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the protrusion force with which the button body 351 protrudes, allowing the player to indicate their level of anticipation for the game based on the strength of the protrusion force.

In addition, in an effect in which the effect operation unit 350 is protruded, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be made to protrude upward when the contact detector 352 detects that the player's fingers, etc., have approached within a predetermined distance of the protruding button body 351, outside the protruding range of the upwardly protruding button body 351. This allows the wind pressure generated by the protruding button body 351 to hit the player's fingers, etc., surprising the player and strongly attracting their attention. Even in this case, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the force with which the button body 351 protrudes, so that the strength of the wind pressure hitting the player's fingers, etc., can suggest to the player how excited they are about the game.

Furthermore, as an effect of protruding the effect operation unit 350, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be protruding upward regardless of the detection of the player's finger or the like by the contact detector 352. In this case, if the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 causes the button body 351 to protrude with a strong protruding force, the button body 351 will protrude forcefully, generating a sound (protruding sound), which can surprise the player. Also, if the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 causes the button body 351 to protrude with a weak protruding force, the button body 351 will protrude quietly, making it difficult for the player to notice that the button body 351 has protruded, and the player can be surprised by the button body 351 protruding without them noticing.

As an effect after the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is protruded, the force of the lifting spring 365 may be weakened by the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, so that the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed in the same way as a regular press button. Alternatively, the force of the lifting spring 365 may be increased by the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, so that the effect is such that the player is forced to press the button body 351 with a strong force.

Furthermore, after the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is protruded, an effect may be executed in which the protruding button body 351 is touched. In this case, since the contact detection body 352 has a downward extension piece 352a that extends downward, the side of the button body 351 may be touched. In this case, it is also desirable to increase the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 using the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, which makes it difficult for the protruding button body 351 to move and makes it easier to touch the button body 351 (touch operation unit 302).

In the above example, the effect of protruding the effect operation unit 350 is achieved by rotating the lifting cam member 371 counterclockwise using the operation button lifting drive motor 367 in the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360, thereby moving the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d, causing the button base 354 (button body 351) to protrude from the lowered position to the raised position in one go, but this is not limited to this example.

For example, in the normal state where the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is engaged with the engagement portion 371c of the lifting cam member 371 and the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 can rotate the lifting cam member 371 clockwise in a plan view, moving the guide pin 354c from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, stopping the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 midway through the third cam 371e and stopping the button body 351 from protruding upward at a position between the lowered and raised positions. At this time, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 can be moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365.

In this way, even when the third cam 371e of the lifting cam member 371 causes the button body 351 to protrude partway, the button body 351 can be pressed, and the button body 351 can function as the pressing operation unit 303, allowing the player to enjoy a player-participation presentation. In this case, the amount by which the button body 351 protrudes upward can be varied depending on the rotational position of the lifting cam member 371, so the degree of expectation for the game can be suggested depending on the amount by which the button body 351 protrudes, entertaining the player.

Furthermore, to produce an effect in which the protruding effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is pressed, after the effect operation unit 350 is protruding, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward to minimize the compression of the lifting spring 365. This results in the lifting spring 365 having its spring force at its weakest, allowing the effect operation unit 350 to be pressed with a light (weak) force, improving the operability of the pressing operation and making the pressing operation more enjoyable. Furthermore, to produce an effect in which the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is pressed, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 may be positioned appropriately in the vertical direction depending on the results of a special lottery, so that the force of the lifting spring 365 can be set to any strength between strongest and weakest. This allows the player to press the effect operation unit 350 firmly or lightly, which allows the player to enjoy different effects depending on the operating force of the effect operation unit 350, and also makes it possible to present a wider variety of effects, making it less likely that the player will get bored.

Furthermore, as an effect using the effect operation unit 300, multiple threshold levels may be set according to the capacitance of the contact detector 352 so that contact of the player's finger, etc. with the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351) can be detected at multiple contact stages (approach stages), and the effect may be changed according to each stage. In other words, by focusing on the fact that the capacitance of the contact detector 352 increases as the player's finger, etc. approaches the button body 351 (contact detector 352), multiple threshold levels may be set for the magnitude of that capacitance to enable multi-stage detection and use in the effect. Specifically, by dividing the stage into stages such as when the player's fingers are more than a predetermined distance away from the button body 351, when the player's fingers are within a predetermined distance from the button body 351 but are not in contact with the button body 351, and when the player's fingers are in contact with the button body 351, and changing the presentation according to each stage, it is possible to present a variety of presentations to the player with just one contact detection sensor body 358, making it less likely that the player will get bored and preventing a decline in interest.

In the above embodiment, the normal state of the performance operation unit 300 is shown as being in a state in which the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is in the lowered position and the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, as shown in FIG. 55(a). However, this is not limited to this, and the performance operation unit 350 may be in the lowered position and the lifting spring lower holding member 385 may be moved downward, as shown in FIG. 56(a). As a result, in the normal state, the lifting spring 365 is not strongly compressed, and early deterioration (fatigue) of the lifting spring 365 can be suppressed. Furthermore, the biasing force of the strongly compressed lifting spring 365 can suppress early deterioration (fatigue) of the button base 354 and the lifting spring lower holding member 385.

In this way, the presentation operation unit 300 of this embodiment can be used for a variety of patterns of player participation presentations, allowing players to enjoy a wide variety of presentations, preventing players from getting bored and preventing a decline in interest.

The performance operation unit 300 has a circular (two arcs joined together) performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 mounted on top of the spherical performance operation unit cover unit 310, and a contact detection sensor main body 358 mounted on the performance operation unit unit 350, which rises and falls inside the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320. A fixed-positioned button middle decorative board 364 is also mounted inside the button sleeve 353 of the performance operation unit 350. This contact detection sensor main body 358 is equipped with a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance. Therefore, when the performance operation unit 350 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the contact detection sensor main body 358 (sensor electrode) approaches the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 and the button middle decorative board 364. This proximity of the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 and the button middle decorative board 364 changes the capacitance of the sensor electrode, which could result in a false detection by the contact detection sensor main body 358.

Conductive shields (e.g., punched metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) connected to ground (GND) may be provided between the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and between the button inner decorative board 364 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. As a result, even if the distance between the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 and the button inner decorative board 364 changes when the performance operation unit unit 350 is moved up and down, the distance between the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 or the button inner decorative board 364 does not change. The shields connected to ground (GND) between the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 or the button inner decorative board 364 do not change, reducing the effect of changes in capacitance due to the proximity of the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 or the button inner decorative board 364, and preventing false detection by the contact detection sensor main body 358.

[3-5f. Another embodiment of the tray unit]
Next, a different embodiment of the plate unit 200 will be described, mainly with reference to Figures 59 to 61. Figure 59 is a plan view of a performance operation unit showing an example in which multiple contact detectors are provided in the performance operation unit of the performance operation unit. Figure 60(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which multiple contact detectors are connected to a single contact detection sensor body, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a switching unit is provided between the contact detection sensor body and the multiple contact detectors in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the left plate decorative unit, right plate decorative unit, and performance operation unit of the plate unit can be moved forward and backward, and contact detectors are provided on the front and rear sides of the performance operation unit. Figure 61(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative contact detector, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing another embodiment of the performance operation unit. Note that in Figures 59 to 61, components similar to those described above are designated by the same reference numerals.

In the embodiment shown in Figure 59, the contact detector 352 is divided into a left contact detector 390L and a right contact detector 390R on the underside of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350, and a left contact detection sensor main body 391L and a right contact detection sensor main body 391R are connected to the left contact detector 390L and the right contact detector 390R, respectively. According to this embodiment, if a player moves a finger or the like from left to right on the top surface of the button body 351, when the player's finger or the like is positioned on the left side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the left contact detector 390L changes, causing the left contact detection sensor main body 391L to become detected, while the capacitance of the right contact detector 390R does not change, causing the right contact detection sensor main body 391R to remain undetected. When the player's finger or the like moves to the center of the button body 351, the capacitance of both the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R changes, causing both the left contact detection sensor body 391L and the right contact detection sensor body 391R to detect. Furthermore, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the left contact detection body 390L returns to its original state, causing the left contact detection sensor body 391L to become non-detecting, while the capacitance of the right contact detection body 390R changes, causing the right contact detection sensor body 391R to remain detecting.

In this way, the movement of the player's fingers, etc. can be detected by the combination of detection/non-detection by the left contact detection element 390L and the right contact detection element 390R of the left contact detection sensor main body 391L and the right contact detection sensor main body 391R, and the pattern of these changes. This makes it possible to detect a wider variety of contact operations, presenting the player with a player-participation presentation that allows them to perform a wider variety of contact operations on the contact operation unit 302, and making the player-participation presentation of operating the contact operation unit 302 even more enjoyable. Furthermore, by adding more contact detection elements, even more complex movements can be detected.

The embodiment shown in Figure 60 (a) is an example in which multiple contact detection bodies 393 are connected to one contact detection sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, with multiple contact detection bodies 393 provided at multiple different locations, one contact detection sensor main body 392 can detect contact with a human body or the like at any of the contact detection bodies 393.

For example, by distributing multiple contact detectors 393 on the inside (underside) of the button body 351, even if the player's fingers or the like come into contact with any part of the surface of the button body 351, the contact can be detected by any of the contact detectors 393, thereby improving the detection accuracy for contact with the contact operation unit 302.

In addition, multiple contact detectors 393 may be provided in areas of the pachinko machine 1 that should not be touched by players (for example, areas where a player may be injured, areas where a player may be inconvenienced by other players, areas where fraudulent activity may occur, etc.), and when any of the contact detectors 393 detects a human body or the like, a caution or warning may be issued.

The embodiment shown in Figure 60(b) is an example in which a switching unit 394 is provided between one contact detection sensor main body 392 and multiple contact detection bodies 393, connecting only one of the contact detection bodies 393 to the contact detection sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, by switching the connection to one of the multiple contact detection bodies 352 using the switching unit 394, it is possible to detect contact by a human body or the like only at the desired location (contact detection body 352). Examples of switching units 394 include those that "switch using a switching circuit using a relay or transistor," "those that switch using other electronic circuits," and "those that switch in response to the movement of a movable member (for example, the movable left plate decorative unit 270, right plate decorative unit 275, and performance operation unit 300 as shown in Figure 60(c))."

For example, when a player participation type effect is executed in which multiple contact detectors 393 are dispersed in the effect operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302) and the player touches the areas detected by each contact detector 393 in sequence, the contact detectors 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 can be switched in touch order by the switching unit 394, and the contact detector 393 can detect whether or not the player's fingers or the like have made contact. This makes it possible to present the player with a highly game-like player participation type effect using multiple contact detectors 393, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 60 (c), if the left dish decorative unit 270, right dish decorative unit 275, and performance operation unit 300 are able to move forward and backward, a first contact detection body 393a can be provided on the front side of the performance operation unit 300, and a second contact detection body 393b can be provided on the rear side of the left dish decorative unit 270, right dish decorative unit 275, and performance operation unit 300.When the performance operation unit 300, etc. is extended forward, the first contact detection body 393a can be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 by the switching unit 394, and when the performance operation unit 300, etc. is retracted, the switching unit 394 can be switched to connect the second contact detection body 393b to the contact detection sensor main body 392.

As a result, when the presentation operation unit 300 etc. is protruded (moved) forward, the first contact detector 393a detects contact or approach by the player, and the forward movement of the presentation operation unit 300 etc. is stopped. This prevents the presentation operation unit 300 etc. from unnecessarily pressing on a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and avoids causing discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, when the presentation operation unit 300, etc., is extended forward, a gap may be formed behind the presentation operation unit 300, etc. If a player's fingers, etc., are inserted into this gap and the presentation operation unit 300, etc. is then retracted to its original position, there is a risk that the player's fingers, etc., may become trapped and be injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the presentation operation unit 300, etc., which has been moved forward, is moved backward, the switching unit 394 switches the second contact detection body 393b so that it is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. Then, if the second contact detection body 393b detects the player's fingers, etc., the backward movement of the presentation operation unit 300, etc. is stopped, and a message is sent to the player instructing them to remove their fingers, etc. from the rear of the presentation operation unit 300, etc. Only when the second contact detection body 393b is not detecting the player's fingers, the presentation operation unit 300, etc. is moved backward to return to its initial state. This prevents players from being injured by gaps behind the performance operation unit 300, etc., and improves the safety of the pachinko machine 1.

In the embodiment shown in Figure 61(a), the contact detector 395 that detects contact with a player's finger or the like has a star-shaped outer shape, giving it decorativeness (design). The shape of the decorative contact detector 395 is not limited to a star, and may be a circle, a polygon, a geometric pattern, a shape imitating a specific character, a shape imitating a specific item, a shape imitating a specific logo, a picture frame, or the like. As a result, the contact detector 395 visible through the transparent button body 351 has decorativeness (design), and the contact detector 395 itself can improve the appearance of the button body 351 and, ultimately, the pachinko machine 1, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment shows the contact detector 352 formed from punched metal, this is not limited to this, and the contact detector may be formed from metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, plating, metal vapor deposition, foil stamping, etc., and the same effects as those described above can be achieved. It is desirable to provide the contact detector on the back side of a transparent surface member so that it does not come into direct contact with the player's fingers, etc. This prevents wear on the contact detector and also makes the surface member smooth to the touch.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment shows an in-button decorative substrate 364 (LED 364a) provided below the contact detector 352, this is not limited to this. As shown in Figure 61 (b), a contact detector 397 may be provided below a transparent surface member 396, with a decorative body 398 provided below that. This allows the decorative body 398 to be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detector 397, thereby enhancing the decorativeness of the performance operation unit on which the surface member 396 is provided and improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In the embodiment of Figure 61 (b), the contact detector 397 is formed by metal vapor deposition, and under normal conditions, the metallic luster of the contact detector 397 makes the decorative element 398 located below it invisible. However, when contact with the surface member 396 is detected, the decorative element 398 is illuminated by an LED located below the contact detector 397, making it possible to make the decorative element 398 visible through the surface member 396 and the contact detector 397.

The contact detector 352 may also be formed so as to be unnoticeable to the player. Examples of unnoticeable contact detectors include those formed from a transparent material and those formed to appear integrated with the decoration of the surface of the button body, etc. This makes the contact detector 352 unnoticeable to the effect operation unit 301 on which the contact detector 352 is mounted, giving the player the illusion that it does not detect or operate contact with fingers, etc. For example, when a specified player-participation effect is executed and the player's finger, etc., touches or approaches the button body 351, the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360 causes the button body 351 to protrude upward, allowing the player to become aware of the presence of the contact detector 352 (touch operation unit 302) for the first time, greatly surprising the player and entertaining them while preventing a decline in interest.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 62 to 65. Figure 62(a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the rear. Figure 63 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and Figure 64 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the rear. Figure 65 is a cross-sectional view taken along line U-U in Figure 62(a). The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the left front part of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit 200 and decorates the left outer side of the play area 5a when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 420 comprises a door frame left side base 421 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, a door frame left side upper decorative board 422 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421 and equipped with a plurality of first LEDs 422a arranged vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, and a door frame left side upper decorative board 422 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421 and equipped with a plurality of first LEDs 423a arranged vertically at regular intervals on the front surface. The door frame includes a lower left side decorative board 423 mounted on the left side of the door frame, an upper left side reflector 424 attached to the left side base 421 of the door frame so as to cover the front side of the upper left side decorative board 422, a lower left side reflector 425 attached to the left side base 421 of the door frame so as to cover the front side of the lower left side decorative board 423, and a left side decorative body 426 attached to the left side base 421 of the door frame so as to cover the front sides of the upper left side reflector 424 and lower left side reflector 425.

The door frame left side unit 420 also includes an upper left side light-guiding member 427 that guides light forward from the first LED 422a on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, a middle left side light-guiding member 428 that guides forward light from the first LED 423a above the vertical center on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, and a lower left side light-guiding member 429 that guides forward light from the first LED 423a below the vertical center on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame.

The door frame left side base 421 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is open to the front. The door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded using synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, like the handle cover 295 described above, the door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded using two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b. A portion of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, forming a circular or radial pattern. In other words, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame left side base 421 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see Figure 71 (a)). When molding the door frame left side base 421, either the inner layer 3a or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is formed in the shape of a strip that extends vertically. Multiple first LEDs 422a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame upper left side decorative board 422 at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and second LEDs 422b are mounted two by two, vertically aligned between the first LEDs 422a. The door frame upper left side decorative board 422 also has a 24-bit LED driver 422c with a unique address for illuminating the first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b.

This door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is equipped with a total of 12 full-color LEDs: four first LEDs 422a and eight second LEDs 422b. The first LEDs 422a, which have second LEDs 422b on both the top and bottom, are located in the center (the center between) of the second LEDs 422b. At least the second LEDs 422b are wide-angle, top-view LEDs capable of emitting light within a 130-degree angle around an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in Figure 72, on the decorative board 422 on the upper left side of the door frame, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two groups: the top two and the remaining two. The eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three groups: the top two, the third to fifth three from the top, and the sixth to eighth three from the top. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and controls the two groups of four first LEDs 422a and the three groups of eight second LEDs 422b with three systems per group, for a total of 15 systems, so that they can each emit full color light.

Although not shown, this door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four wires: two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 422a, second LED 422b, and LED driver 422c; one control signal line that receives signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510; and one clock line that synchronizes the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 422c on this door frame upper left side decorative board 422 receives a command addressed to that address via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board), it can, in accordance with the command, cause two sets of four first LEDs 422a and three sets of eight second LEDs 422b to emit light of the appropriate color and intensity for each set.

The door frame left-side lower decorative board 423 is shaped like a strip extending vertically, with an uneven right edge. Multiple first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame left-side lower decorative board 423 at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and second LEDs 423b are mounted two by two, vertically aligned between the first LEDs 423a. The door frame left-side lower decorative board 423 also has a 24-bit LED driver 423c with a unique address for illuminating the first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b.

This door frame lower left side decorative board 423 is equipped with a total of 18 full-color LEDs: six first LEDs 423a and 12 second LEDs 423b. The first LEDs 423a, which have second LEDs 423b on both the top and bottom, are located in the center (the center between) of the second LEDs 423b. At least the second LEDs 423b are wide-angle, top-view LEDs capable of emitting light within a 130-degree angle around an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in Figure 72, on the decorative board 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three groups, with two LEDs in each group starting from the top. The 12 second LEDs 423b are divided into four groups: three from the top (1st to 3rd), three from the top (4th to 6th), three from the top (7th to 9th), and three from the top (10th to 12th). The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and controls the three groups of six first LEDs 423a and the four groups of 12 second LEDs 423b with three systems per group, for a total of 21 systems, so that they can each emit full color light.

Although not shown, this decorative board 423 on the lower left side of the door frame is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four wires: two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 423a, second LED 423b, and LED driver 423c; one control signal line that receives signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510; and one clock line that synchronizes the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 423c on this decorative board 423 on the lower left side of the door frame receives a command addressed to that address via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board), it can, in accordance with the command, cause three sets of six first LEDs 423a and four sets of twelve second LEDs 423b to emit light of the appropriate color and intensity for each set.

The upper left side reflector 424 has a through-hole 424a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, and a cylindrical retaining tube 424b that extends from front to back at a position corresponding to the first LED 422a. The upper left side reflector 424 is formed so that the rear end around the through-hole 424a abuts against the front surface of the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, and the area around the front side of the through-hole 424a is formed in a dish shape that widens forward. This allows the light from the second LED 422b to be diffused widely forward.

The retaining tube 424b of the upper left side reflector 424 holds the cylindrical light guide shaft 427a of the upper left side light guide member 427 (described later) in a straight position in the front-to-rear direction by inserting it into the retaining tube 424b. This retaining tube 424b is located in the center between the through-holes 424a. As a result, the light guide shaft 427a of the upper left side light guide member 427 protrudes forward through the retaining tube 424b. Light from the second LED 422b on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, which is exposed through the through-holes 424a on both the top and bottom, is irradiated with an equal amount of light from above and below onto the light guide shaft 427a, preventing the shadow of the light guide shaft 427a from being cast on the back side of the left side door frame decorative body 426.

In addition, the upper left side reflector 424 has a mounting hole in the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a for mounting to the left door frame base 421. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from being cast on the back side of the left door frame decorative body 426.

The lower left side reflector 425 has a through-hole 425a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, and a cylindrical retaining tube 425b that extends from front to back at a position corresponding to the first LED 423a. The lower left side reflector 425 is formed so that the rear end around the through-hole 425a abuts against the front surface of the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, and the area around the front side of the through-hole 425a is formed in a dish shape that widens forward. This allows the light from the second LED 423b to be diffused widely forward.

The retaining tube 425b of the lower left side reflector 425 receives the cylindrical light guide shaft 428a of the middle left side light guide member 428 and the cylindrical light guide shaft 429a of the lower left side light guide member 429 (described later), thereby holding the light guide shaft 428a and the light guide shaft 429a straight in the front-to-rear direction. This retaining tube 425b is located in the center between the through holes 425a. As a result, light from the second LED 423b on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, which is visible through the through holes 425a on both the upper and lower sides of the light guide shaft 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 that protrude forward through the retaining tube 425b, is irradiated with an equal amount of light from both the top and bottom onto the light guide shaft 428a and light guide shaft 429a, preventing the shadow of the light guide shaft 428a and light guide shaft 429a from being cast on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

In addition, the left side lower reflector 425 has a mounting hole in the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a for mounting to the door frame left side base 421. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from being cast on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a translucent milky white color. It is formed in the shape of a semicircular arc that bulges forward and extends vertically. This gives the door frame left side decorative body 426 a semi-tubular shape that opens to the rear. This door frame left side decorative body 426 has multiple openings 426a that penetrate from front to back at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of its width in the left-right direction. The multiple openings 426a are located in positions corresponding to the retaining tube 424b of the upper left side reflector 424 and the retaining tube 425b of the lower left side reflector 425. The respective tips of the light guide shaft 427a of the upper left side light guide member 427, the light guide shaft 428a of the middle left side light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft 429a of the lower left side light guide member 429 are inserted into these openings 426a from the rear. This door frame left side decorative body 426 is made of a synthetic resin with higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421. The door frame left side decorative body 426 also has a decorative portion 426b that is recessed in an arc shape to avoid the multiple openings 426a and extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction.

The upper left-side light-guiding member 427 is made of a transparent material and has four cylindrical light-guiding shafts 427a extending forward and backward, and a runner 427b connecting the lower ends of the four light-guiding shafts 427a. The four light-guiding shafts 427a are spaced apart vertically to correspond to the four retaining tubes 424b of the upper left-side reflector 424. Furthermore, the light-guiding shafts 427a extend forward and backward with a diameter roughly equal to the inner diameter of the retaining tubes 424b. Each light-guiding shaft 427a passes through the retaining tubes 424b of the upper left-side reflector 424 from the rear and is inserted into a corresponding opening 426a in the left-side door frame decorative body 426, with its tip flush with the surface of the left-side door frame decorative body 426. This left side upper light guiding member 427 uses the light guiding shaft 427a to guide light from the first LED 422a on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 forward and radiate it outward from the tip, allowing the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 to glow brightly.

The left-side central light-guiding member 428 is made of a transparent material and has three cylindrical light-guiding shafts 428a extending forward and backward, and a runner 428b connecting the lower ends of the three light-guiding shafts 428a. The three light-guiding shafts 428a are spaced apart vertically to correspond to the three upper retaining tubes 425b of the left-side lower reflector 425. Furthermore, the light-guiding shafts 428a extend forward and backward with a diameter roughly equal to the inner diameter of the retaining tubes 425b. Each light-guiding shaft 428a passes through the retaining tube 425b of the left-side lower reflector 425 from the rear and is inserted into a corresponding opening 426a in the left-side door frame decorative body 426, with its tip surface flush with the surface of the left-side door frame decorative body 426. This left side center light-guiding member 428 uses the light-guiding shaft 428a to guide light from the first LED 423a on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 forward and radiate it outward from the tip, brightly illuminating the opening 426a in the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The lower left side light guide member 429 is made of a transparent material and has three cylindrical light guide shafts 429a extending forward and backward, and a runner 429b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shafts 429a. The three light guide shafts 429a are spaced apart vertically to correspond to the three retaining tubes 425b below the lower left side reflector 425. Furthermore, the light guide shafts 429a extend forward and backward with a diameter approximately equal to the inner diameter of the retaining tubes 425b. Each light guide shaft 429a passes through the retaining tube 425b of the lower left side reflector 425 from the rear and is inserted into a corresponding opening 426a in the left side door frame decorative body 426, with its tip surface flush with the surface of the left side door frame decorative body 426. This left-side lower light-guiding member 429 uses the light-guiding shaft 429a to guide light from the first LED 423a on the door frame left-side lower decorative board 423 forward and radiate it outward from the tip, brightly illuminating the opening 426a in the door frame left-side decorative body 426.

In this embodiment, the color of the circular or radial patterned areas on the door frame left side base 421 is the same as the color of the circular or radial patterned areas on the handle cover 295, and the color of the areas outside the circular or radial patterned areas on the door frame left side base 421 is the same as the color of the areas outside the circular or radial patterned areas on the handle cover 295.

In this embodiment, the portion of the door frame left side unit 420 above the vertical center protrudes slightly forward more than the portion below, and the portion near the bottom edge is gently curved to the right. The upper end of this door frame left side unit 420 is located above the door window 101a and below the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, and the lower end is located below the door window 101a and above the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210. The upper portion of the door frame left side unit 420 is located on the left outer side of the door frame top unit 450. When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, giving the appearance of an embedded cylindrical fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are located at a position some distance behind the front of the door frame left side decorative body 426. This allows the light from the second LED 422b and second LED 423b mounted on them to be irradiated to the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 in a sufficiently spread state, allowing the door frame left side decorative body 426 to be uniformly illuminated and decorated.

In addition, light from the first LED 422a on the upper left-side decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a on the lower left-side decorative board 423, which are located away from the front surface of the left-side door frame decorative body 426 and are guided forward (light guided) by the light guide shaft 427a of the upper left-side light guide member 427, the light guide shaft 428a of the middle left-side light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft 429a of the lower left-side light guide member 429, causing the opening 426a of the left-side door frame decorative body 426 to emit light in a spot-like manner that is brighter than other areas.

In addition, the first LED 422a on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the first LED 423a on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the upper left side light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the middle left side light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the lower left side light guide member 429 are arranged in the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 422b and second LEDs 423b. As a result, the light guide shaft 427a, light guide shaft 428a, and light guide shaft 429a are illuminated with an equal amount of light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b on both sides, so even if the shadows of the light guide shaft 427a, light guide shaft 428a, and light guide shaft 429a are cast from behind onto the door frame left side decorative body 426, these shadows are less visible, allowing the door frame left side decorative body 426 to be illuminated and decorated in an even, planar manner.

Furthermore, the door frame left side decorative body 426 has a decorative portion 426b that extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the multiple openings 426a. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, and 429a are projected onto the door frame left side decorative body 426 by the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b, the presence of the decorative portion 426b in the area where the shadows are projected makes the shadows of the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, and 429a less noticeable, improving the appearance of the illuminated decoration of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 66 to 70. Figure 66(a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit from the rear. Figure 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit from the front, and Figure 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit from the rear. Figure 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-E in Figure 66(a). Figure 70 is a cross-sectional view taken along line O-O in Figure 66(a). The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right front part of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit 200, and decorates the outer right side of the play area 5a when viewed from the front.

The right-side door frame unit 430 comprises a right-side door frame base 431 attached to the right outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100; an upper right-side door frame decorative board 432 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the right-side door frame base 431 and equipped with a plurality of first LEDs 432a arranged vertically at regular intervals on the front surface; a lower right-side door frame decorative board 433 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the right-side door frame base 431 and equipped with a plurality of first LEDs 433a arranged vertically at regular intervals on the front surface; a right-side door frame reflector 434 attached to the right-side door frame base 431 so as to cover the front sides of the upper right-side door frame decorative board 432 and the lower right-side door frame decorative board 433; and a right-side door frame decorative body 435 attached to the right-side door frame base 431 so as to cover the front side of the right-side door frame reflector 434.

The door frame right side unit 430 also includes an upper right side light-guiding member 436 that guides light forward from the first LED 423a on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, and a lower right side light-guiding member 437 that guides light forward from the first LED 433a on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a door frame right side left side decorative body 438 that is attached to cover the left side of the door frame right side base 431 and has multiple decorative holes 438a that penetrate from side to side in a predetermined shape; a right side left lens 439 that is provided between the right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side base 431 and has a translucent decorative portion 439a that fits to close the decorative hole 438a in the right side left side decorative body 438; a right side right side decorative body 440 that is attached to cover the right side of the door frame right side base 431 and has multiple decorative holes 440a that penetrate from side to side in a predetermined shape; and a right side right lens 441 that is attached between the right side right side decorative body 440 and the door frame right side base 431 and has a translucent decorative portion 441a that fits to close the decorative hole 440a in the right side right side decorative body 440.

The door frame right side base 431 extends vertically with a roughly constant width on both sides. The rear end of the door frame right side base 431 extends vertically across its entire height, and the front end extends roughly straight downward from the top to near the center in the vertical direction, then curves rearward and extends diagonally backward, before curving vertically near the bottom and continuing vertically to the bottom.

The door frame right side base 431 has multiple reflector portions 431a recessed from the left and right side surfaces and extending forward to their front ends at a height where the decorative hole 438a on the left side decorative body 438 of the right side of the door frame and the decorative hole 440a on the right side decorative body 440 of the right side of the door frame (decorative portion 439a on the left lens 439 of the right side and decorative portion 441a on the right lens 441 of the right side) are located. The rear ends of these reflector portions 431a, which are inside the decorative portions 439a and 441a, are inclined toward the side surfaces, and the bottom surfaces are curved.

Furthermore, the door frame right side base 431 has reflector portions 431a that correspond to decorative holes 438a and 440a (decorative portion 439a on the right side left lens 439 and decorative portion 441a on the right side right lens 441) located rearward of the center in the fore-and-aft direction on the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and door frame right side decorative body 440, respectively. The front portions, excluding the portions inside decorative portions 439a and 441a, penetrate in the left-right direction (they are recessed from the left and right side surfaces and connected to each other).

The reflector portions 431a of the door frame right side base 431 reflect light irradiated rearward from the third LED 432c on the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 (described below) in the left and right directions, causing the decorative portion 439a on the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a on the right side right lens 441 to illuminate and decorate (see Figure 70, etc.).

The door frame right-side upper decorative board 432 is formed in the shape of a strip that extends vertically. Multiple first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame right-side upper decorative board 432 at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and second LEDs 432b are mounted two by two, vertically spaced between the first LEDs 432a. Additionally, multiple third LEDs 432c are mounted on the rear surface of the door frame right-side upper decorative board 432 at intervals in the vertical direction. Furthermore, the door frame right-side upper decorative board 432 is equipped with a 24-bit LED driver 432d with a unique address for illuminating the first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, and third LEDs 432c.

This door frame upper right side decorative board 432 is equipped with a total of 16 full-color LEDs: four first LEDs 432a, eight second LEDs 432b, and four third LEDs 432c. The first LED 432a, which has second LEDs 432b on both the top and bottom, is located in the center (the center between) of the second LEDs 432b. At least the second LED 432b and third LED 432c are wide-angle, top-view LEDs capable of emitting light within a 130-degree angle around an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in Figure 72, on the decorative board 432 on the upper right side of the door frame, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two groups: the top two and the remaining two. The eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three groups: the top two, the third to fifth three from the top, and the sixth to eighth three from the top. The four third LEDs 432c are further divided into two groups: the top two and the remaining two.

This door frame upper right side decorative board 432 is divided into two sets of first LEDs 432a, three sets of second LEDs 432b, and two sets of third LEDs 432c, and each of the first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, and third LEDs 432c is illuminated in full color, for a total of 21 systems, with three systems per set. In contrast, the LED driver 432d on the door frame upper right side decorative board 432 can control up to 24 systems, so in addition to the 21 systems mentioned above, it also controls three systems for the upper set of third LEDs 433c, which are divided into two sets on the door frame lower right side decorative board 433 (described below), for a total of 24 systems.

Although not shown, this upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four electrical wires: two power lines (one is an earth wire) that supply power to drive the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, third LED 432c, the two third LEDs 433c on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, and the LED driver 432d; one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510; and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 432d on the upper right door frame decorative board 432 receives a command addressed to that address via a control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board), it can, in accordance with that command, cause the four first LEDs 432a divided into two sets, the eight second LEDs 432b divided into three sets, the four third LEDs 432c divided into two sets, and the two third LEDs 433c in the upper set of two sets on the lower right door frame decorative board 433 to emit light in the appropriate color and intensity for each set.

The door frame right-side lower decorative board 433 is formed in the shape of a strip that extends vertically. Multiple first LEDs 433a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame right-side lower decorative board 433 at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and second LEDs 433b are mounted two by two, vertically spaced between the first LEDs 433a. Additionally, multiple third LEDs 433c are mounted on the rear surface of the door frame right-side lower decorative board 433 at intervals in the vertical direction. Furthermore, the door frame right-side lower decorative board 433 is equipped with a 24-bit LED driver 433d with a unique address for illuminating the first LEDs 433a, second LED 433b, and third LED 433c.

This door frame lower right side decorative board 433 is equipped with a total of 22 full-color LEDs: six first LEDs 433a, 12 second LEDs 433b, and four third LEDs 433c. The first LEDs 433a, which have second LEDs 433b on both the top and bottom, are located in the center (the center between) of the second LEDs 433b. At least the second LEDs 433b and third LEDs 433c are wide-angle, top-view LEDs capable of emitting light within a 130-degree angle around an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in Figure 72, on the decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three groups, with two LEDs in each group starting from the top. The 12 second LEDs 433b are divided into four groups: three from the top (1st to 3rd), three from the top (4th to 6th), three from the top (7th to 9th), and three from the top (10th to 12th). The four third LEDs 433c are further divided into two groups: the top two and the remaining two.

This door frame right-side lower decorative board 433 is divided into three sets of first LEDs 433a, four sets of second LEDs 433b, and two sets of third LEDs 433c. Each first LED 433a, second LED 433b, and third LED 433c is illuminated in full color, for a total of 27 systems (three systems per set). However, the LED driver 433d of the door frame right-side lower decorative board 433 can only control a maximum of 24 systems. Therefore, the upper set of three systems of the third LEDs 433c, which are divided into two sets, is controlled by the LED driver 432d of the door frame right-side upper decorative board 432, and the remaining 24 systems (all of the front first LEDs 433a and second LEDs 433b and the lower two rear third LEDs 433c) are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the door frame right-side lower decorative board 433. This helps prevent an increase in the number of LED drivers.

Although not shown, this decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four wires: two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 433a, second LED 433b, two lower third LEDs 433c, and LED driver 433d; one control signal line that receives signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510; and one clock line that synchronizes the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 433d on this decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame receives a command addressed to that address via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board), it can, in response to that command, illuminate the six first LEDs 433a divided into three groups, the twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four groups, and the two third LEDs 433c in the lower group of two groups with the appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The right side reflector 434 has a through-hole 434a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the second LED 432b on the upper right door frame decorative board 432 and the second LED 433b on the lower right door frame decorative board 433, and a cylindrical retaining tube 434b that extends from front to back at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed so that the rear end around the through-hole 434a abuts against the front surface of the upper right door frame decorative board 432 and the lower right door frame decorative board 433, and the area around the front side of the through-hole 434a is formed in a dish shape that widens forward. This allows the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b to be diffused widely forward.

The retaining tube 434b of the right side reflector 434 receives the cylindrical light guide shaft 436a of the upper right side light guide member 436 and the cylindrical light guide shaft 437a of the lower right side light guide member 437 (described later), thereby holding the light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a straight in the front-to-rear direction. This retaining tube 434b is located in the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, light from the second LED 432b on the upper right door frame decorative board 432 and the second LED 433b on the lower right door frame decorative board 433, which are visible through the through holes 434a on both the top and bottom of the light guide shafts 436a and 437a that protrude forward through the retaining tube 434b, is irradiated onto the light guide shafts 436a and 437a with an equal amount of light from both the top and bottom, preventing the shadow of the light guide shafts 436a and 437a from being cast on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The right side reflector 434 also has a mounting hole in the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a for mounting to the door frame right side base 431. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from being cast on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The door frame right-side decorative body 435 is formed in a translucent milky white color. It is formed in the shape of a semicircular arc that bulges forward and extends vertically. This gives the door frame right-side decorative body 435 a semi-tubular shape that opens rearward. The door frame right-side decorative body 435 has multiple openings 435a that penetrate the center of its width in the left-right direction at regular intervals. The multiple openings 435a are located in positions corresponding to the retaining tube 434b of the right-side reflector 434. The respective tips of the light-guiding shaft 436a of the upper right-side light-guiding member 436 and the light-guiding shaft 437a of the lower right-side light-guiding member 437 are inserted into these openings 435a from the rear. The door frame right-side decorative body 435 is formed from a synthetic resin with higher light transmittance than the door frame left-side decorative body 438 and the door frame right-side decorative body 440. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decorative body 426. In addition, the door frame right side decorative body 435 further has a decorative portion 435b that is recessed in an arc shape to avoid the multiple openings 435a and extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction.

The upper right-side light-guiding member 436 is made of a transparent material and has four cylindrical light-guiding shafts 436a extending forward and backward, and a runner 436b connecting the lower ends of the four light-guiding shafts 436a. The four light-guiding shafts 436a are spaced apart vertically from the top of the right-side reflector 434, corresponding to the four retaining tubes 434b. Furthermore, the light-guiding shafts 436a extend forward and backward with a diameter roughly equal to the inner diameter of the retaining tubes 434b. Each light-guiding shaft 436a passes through the retaining tube 434b of the right-side reflector 434 from the rear and is inserted into a corresponding opening 435a in the right-side door frame decorative body 435, with its tip flush with the surface of the right-side door frame decorative body 435. This right-side upper light-guiding member 436 uses the light-guiding shaft 436a to guide light from the first LED 432a on the door frame right-side upper decorative board 432 forward and radiate it outward from the tip, brightly illuminating the opening 435a in the door frame right-side decorative body 435.

The lower right-side light-guiding member 437 is made of a transparent material and has six cylindrical light-guiding shafts 437a extending forward and backward, and runners 437b connecting the lower ends of the six light-guiding shafts 437a. The six light-guiding shafts 437a are spaced apart vertically from below the right-side reflector 434, corresponding to the six retaining tubes 434b. Furthermore, the light-guiding shafts 437a extend forward and backward with a diameter roughly equal to the inner diameter of the retaining tubes 434b. Each light-guiding shaft 437a passes through the retaining tubes 434b of the right-side reflector 434 from the rear and is inserted into a corresponding opening 435a in the right-side door frame decorative body 435, with its tip flush with the surface of the right-side door frame decorative body 435. This right-side lower light-guiding member 437 uses the light-guiding shaft 437a to guide light from the first LED 433a on the door frame right-side lower decorative board 433 forward and radiate it outward from the tip, brightly illuminating the opening 435a in the door frame right-side decorative body 435.

The door frame right-side left-side decorative body 438 is formed as a plate extending vertically, with multiple decorative holes 438a penetrating left and right in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). The front end of the door frame right-side left-side decorative body 438 is formed in a shape that follows the rear end of the door frame right-side decorative body 435. The door frame right-side left-side decorative body 438 is molded in two colors using synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, like the handle cover 295 and door frame left-side base 421 described above, the door frame right-side left-side decorative body 438 is molded in two colors using two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, and a portion of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, forming a circular or radial pattern. In other words, part of the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the door frame right-side left-side decorative body 438 are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see Figure 71 (a)). When molding the door frame right-side left-side decorative body 438, either the inner layer 3a or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right-side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape that conforms to the inner (right) surface of the door frame's right-side left-side decorative body 438, and has a decorative portion 439a that protrudes to the left and fits into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame's right-side left-side decorative body 438 from the inside (right side). When fitted into the decorative hole 438a, the surface of the decorative portion 439a coincides with the outer (left) surface of the door frame's right-side left-side decorative body 438 (see Figure 70). This right-side left lens 439 is formed from a synthetic resin with higher light transmittance than the door frame's right-side left-side decorative body 438. The decorative portion 439a of this right-side left lens 439 is located to the left of the reflector portion 431a on the door frame's right-side base 431, and can be illuminated and decorated with light from the third LED 432c on the door frame's right-side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c on the door frame's right-side lower decorative board 433.

The right-side left lens 439 is also formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the door frame right-side left-side decorative body 438. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 439a visible through the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right-side left-side decorative body 438 looks the same as the radial pattern molded in two colors on the door frame right-side left-side decorative body 438, making it difficult to distinguish from the decorative portion 439a illuminated by the third LED 432c and third LED 433c.

The right-side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is formed as a plate that extends vertically and has multiple decorative holes 440a that run horizontally in a predetermined shape (radial pattern). The right-side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame also has a cylinder insertion opening 440b into which a cylindrical portion with a keyhole 132 at the front end of the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted. The right-side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be approximately the same height as the door frame 3 in the vertical direction. The front end of the right-side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, from its top end to the cylinder insertion opening 440b, is shaped to follow the rear end of the right-side decorative body 435 on the right side of the door frame.

The door frame right side decorative body 440 is molded in two colors using synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, like the handle cover 295, door frame left side base 421, and door frame left side decorative body 438, the door frame right side decorative body 440 is molded in two colors using two types of resin: an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b. A portion of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, forming a circular or radial pattern. In other words, part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side decorative body 440 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see Figure 71(a)). When molding the door frame right side decorative body 440, either the inner layer 3a or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right-side lens 441 is formed in a flat plate shape that conforms to the inner (right) surface above the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the right-side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, and has a decorative portion 441a that protrudes to the right and fits into the decorative hole 440a of the right-side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame from the inside (left side). When fitted into the decorative hole 440a, the surface of the decorative portion 441a coincides with the outer (right) surface of the right-side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame (see Figure 70). This right-side lens 441 is formed from a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the right-side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame. The decorative portion 441a of this right lens 441 on the right side is located to the right of the reflector portion 431a on the right side base 431 of the door frame, and can be illuminated and decorated with light from the third LED 432c on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the third LED 433c on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame.

The right lens 441 on the right side is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 441a visible through the decorative hole 440a on the decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame looks the same as the radial pattern molded in two colors on the decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, making it difficult to distinguish from the decorative portion 441a illuminated by the third LED 432c and third LED 433c.

In this embodiment, the door frame right side unit 430 has the circular or radial patterned parts on the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame formed in the same color as the circular or radial patterned parts on the handle cover 295 and the left side base 421 of the door frame, and the parts outside the circular or radial patterned parts on the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame formed in the same color as the parts outside the circular or radial patterned parts on the handle cover 295 and the left side base 421 of the door frame.

In this embodiment, the portion of the door frame right side unit 430 above the vertical center protrudes further forward than the portion of the opposite door frame left side unit 420 at the same height. This door frame right side unit 430 is formed at approximately the same height as the door frame 3 from its top to bottom. The upper part of the door frame right side unit 430 is located on the outer right side of the door frame top unit 450.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame right side unit 430 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the door frame right side decorative body 435 appears to have a cylindrical fluorescent lamp embedded in it.

The door frame right side unit 430 protrudes forward from the top to roughly half its height, forming a screen. This makes it difficult for players seated in front of the pachinko machine located adjacent to the right side of the island equipment in the gaming hall to see inside the door window 101a (playing area 5a). Therefore, because the door frame right side unit 430 is shaped like a screen, it can block the line of sight of nearby players, making it difficult for other players to see the entire playing area 5a. This reduces the feeling that other players are watching, allowing players to play without worrying about other players.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are located at a position some distance behind the front of the door frame right side decorative body 435. This allows the light from the second LEDs 432b and 433b mounted on them to be irradiated to the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 in a sufficiently spread state, allowing the door frame right side decorative body 435 to be uniformly illuminated and decorated.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 guides (guides) light forward from the first LED 432a on the upper right side decorative board 432 and the first LED 433a on the lower right side decorative board 433, which are located away from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435, using the light guiding shaft 436a of the upper right side light guiding member 436 and the light guiding shaft 437a of the lower right side light guiding member 437, causing the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 to emit light in a spot-like manner that is brighter than other areas.

Furthermore, by illuminating the third LED 432c on the upper right door frame decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c on the lower right door frame decorative board 433, the door frame right side unit 430 can illuminate the decorative portion 439a of the left right lens 439 fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame, and the decorative portion 441a of the right right lens 441 fitted into the decorative hole 440a of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, via the reflector portion 431a of the right side door frame base 431. Furthermore, because portions of the left and right sides of the screen-shaped door frame right side unit 430 (the areas of decorative portion 439a and decorative portion 441a) can be illuminated, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out to other players, providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, according to the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, the first LED 432a and second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the first LED 433a and second LED 433b on the front side of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 illuminate and decorate the front end side door frame right side decorative body 435, and the third LED 432c on the rear side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c on the rear side of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 illuminate and decorate the door frame right side left side decorative body 435 behind the door frame right side decorative body 435. 8 and the right-side door frame decorative element 440 on the right side are illuminated, and therefore the presence of the upper right-side door frame decorative board 432 and the lower right-side door frame decorative board 433 prevents light from the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b from illuminating the rear left-side door frame decorative element 438 and the right-side door frame decorative element 440, causing them to be illuminated, or light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c from illuminating the front right-side door frame decorative element 435, causing them to be illuminated. This allows the right-side door frame decorative element 435 and the rear left-side door frame decorative element 438 and the right-side door frame decorative element 440 to be illuminated completely independently, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can present players with more effective illumination effects.

In addition, the door frame right-side unit 430 has the first LED 432a on the door frame right-side upper decorative board 432 and the first LED 433a on the door frame right-side lower decorative board 433, and the light guide shaft 436a of the right-side upper light-guiding member 436 and the light guide shaft 437a of the right-side lower light-guiding member 437, located in the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 432b and 433b. This allows the light guide shaft 436a and light guide shaft 437a to be irradiated with an equal amount of light from the second LEDs 432b and 433b on both sides. Therefore, even if a shadow of the light guide shaft 436a and light guide shaft 437a is cast from behind onto the door frame right-side decorative body 435, the shadow is less visible, allowing the door frame right-side decorative body 435 to be illuminated in an even, planar manner.

Furthermore, the door frame right-side unit 430 is configured so that the door frame right-side decorative body 435 has a decorative portion 435b that extends along the center of the left-right width so as to connect the multiple openings 435a. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shafts 436a and 437a are projected onto the door frame right-side decorative body 435 by the light from the second LEDs 432b and 433b, the presence of the decorative portion 435b in the area where the shadows are projected makes the shadows of the light guide shafts 436a and 437a less noticeable, thereby improving the appearance of the illuminated decoration of the door frame right-side decorative body 435.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 29 and 30. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper portions of the left and right side units 420, 430.

The door frame top unit 450 comprises a door frame top base 451 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, above the door window 101a; a top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451 so as to cover both the left and right sides and the upper front surface of the door frame top base 451; a door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452; and a door frame top bottom plate (not shown) connecting the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 to the lower end of the door frame top base 451.

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a door frame top central decorative board 455 that is attached to the center of the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface; a door frame top left decorative board 456 that is attached to the left of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface; and a door frame top right decorative board 457 that is attached to the right of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface (see Figure 72).

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) mounted on the front of the door frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers (not shown) mounted on the left and right outer sides of the pair of top center speakers, a top lower cover 465 attached to the underside of the door frame top decorative body 453 so as to cover the front of the top center speakers and top side speakers, a door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end of the front of the door frame top base 451, and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the top of the door frame top base 451.

The door frame top base 451 extends left and right for a length approximately equal to the distance between the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430. The top upper cover 452 protrudes forward in a semicircular arc shape in a plan view, and has an opening 452a that is cut out significantly from the rear end toward the front. This opening 452a is closed by the door frame top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a translucent milky white color. In a plan view, the door frame top decorative body 453 extends left and right in a semicircular arc shape along the front edge of the top upper cover 452. The front surface of the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semicircular arc shape so that the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top central decorative board 455 has multiple full-color LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface. By appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 455a, this door frame top central decorative board 455 can illuminate and decorate the center of the door frame top decorative body 453.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top left decorative board 456 has multiple full-color LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface. By appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 456a, this door frame top left decorative board 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top right decorative board 457 has multiple full-color LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface. By appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 457a, this door frame top right decorative board 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453.

A pair of top center speakers are located on the left and right, spaced apart. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers that output sounds such as voice and music over a wide frequency range. The pair of top side speakers are tweeters that output high-frequency sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of punched metal, a metal plate with numerous through-holes. Sound output from the top center speaker and top side speakers is emitted forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

The door frame top relay board is used to relay the connection between the door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, top center speaker, and top side speaker and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top upper cover 452, and its front end is engaged with the top upper cover 452 while its rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The door frame top unit 450 is connected so that both the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 sink from the front to a position rearward of the inside of the upper part of the left door frame side decorative body 426 and the right door frame side decorative body 435. The door frame top unit 450 can also output sounds such as voice and music to the player using a pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 22 to 28 and Figure 71. Figure 71(a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, showing the two-color molded outer layer of the door frame in an opaque state, and Figure 71(b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit in Figure 71(a), showing the outer layer in a transparent state while the inner layer remains the same. As shown in the figures, the door frame 3 has a generally rectangular door window 101a extending vertically in the center when viewed from the front, which is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160. The door frame 3 is surrounded on the entire periphery of the door window 101a by the left dish decorative body 271 and right dish decorative body 276 of the dish unit 200, the unit upper cover 312 and button body 351 of the performance operation unit 300, the left door frame side decorative body 426 of the left door frame unit 420, the right door frame side decorative body 435 of the right door frame unit 430, and the top door frame decorative body 453 of the top door frame unit 450.

The left dish decorative body 271, right dish decorative body 276, left door frame decorative body 426, right door frame decorative body 435, and top door frame decorative body 453 that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed in a semi-tubular shape, allowing players to see the entire periphery of the door window 101a as if it were surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, behind or below the left dish decorative body 271, right dish decorative body 276, upper unit cover 312, left door frame decorative body 426, right door frame decorative body 435, and top door frame decorative body 453 that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a, are the left dish decorative board 273, right dish decorative board 278, outer effect control unit decorative board 320, upper left door frame decorative board 422 and lower left door frame decorative board 423, upper right door frame decorative board 432 and lower right door frame decorative board 433, center top door frame decorative board 455, top left door frame decorative board 456, and top right door frame decorative board 457. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs on these decorative boards, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated, or the player can be shown an illuminated effect as light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

A spherical performance operation unit 300 with a diameter larger than the front-to-back distance of the upper tray 201 is attached to the left-to-right center of the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3. This increases the visual impact of the large spherical performance operation unit 300, as it is positioned in the center of the tray unit 200, and makes the performance operation section 301 (touch operation section 302 and pressing operation section 303) of the performance operation unit 300 stand out.

In addition, under normal conditions, the top surface of the button body 351 serving as the effect operation unit 301 is flush with the top surface of the unit upper cover 312, forming a single sphere. This makes it difficult for players to recognize that the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) is operable, and the effect operation unit 300, which is a giant sphere, makes it possible for players to recognize at a glance that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines, strongly attracting the player's attention and increasing its appeal to players, making it easier for them to select this pachinko machine 1 as the machine to play.

In addition, in the spin unit 200, the center (centre) of the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 is positioned forward of the apex of the spherical performance operation unit 300, so that the top surface of the performance operation section 301 (touch operation section 302 and pressing operation section 303) faces towards the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, for a player who recognizes that the giant sphere located in the center of the spin unit 200 is the performance operation section 301, the entirety of the performance operation section 301 can be easily seen, making the performance operation section 301 appear larger. Furthermore, this can make the player want to try operating the giant spherical effect operation unit 301, heightening their anticipation for the execution of a player-participation effect in which they operate the effect operation unit 301, and when a player-participation effect is executed, it can make the player actively operate the effect operation unit 301, allowing them to enjoy the player-participation effect by operating the effect operation unit 301 and preventing a decline in interest.

Next, as shown in Figures 2 to 5, the exterior of the door frame 3 in this embodiment has multiple circular and radial patterns on its outer surface. Figure 71 shows the door frame right side unit 430 as an example of part of the exterior of the door frame 3.

More specifically, the multiple circular and radial patterns on the exterior surface of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding using two types of synthetic resin with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). The patterned exterior portion of the door frame 3 is two-color molded using two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and the circular and radial patterns are formed by portions of the inner layer 3a penetrating the outer layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface.

For example, taking the door frame right side unit 430 as an example, as shown in Figure 71(a), if a honeycomb pattern is applied to the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b is made opaque, the honeycomb pattern of the inner layer 3a will be visible in the circular patterned areas, and the opaque outer layer 3b will be visible in areas other than the pattern, resulting in an exterior appearance that emphasizes the circular and radial patterns.

In contrast, as shown in Figure 71(b), if the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb pattern on the inner layer 3a can be seen through the outer layer 3b, making the circular and radial patterns relatively difficult to see. In other words, the exterior has an appearance that emphasizes the honeycomb pattern on the inner layer 3a.

In Figure 71, the decorative element 441a fitted into the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative element 440, which is molded in two colors as part of the exterior, is part of the right lens 441 on the right side and is a separate component from the door frame right side right side decorative element 440. Therefore, even if the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the pattern of the decorative hole 440a (decorative element 441a) does not change.

As such, according to this embodiment, the main components that make up the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed using two-color molding. By appropriately selecting and combining the colors and light transmittance of the materials (synthetic resins) used for the inner layer 3a and outer layer 3b, the appearance can be significantly different even if the shape remains the same.

Therefore, for example, when making minor changes, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed at no additional cost by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern on the inner layer 3a is visible.

Alternatively, by changing the color of the inner layer 3a and outer layer 3b for each production lot and shipping pachinko machines 1 from different lots to the same gaming hall and installing them in island equipment, it is possible to create a colorful look that will increase their appeal to players.

In the above embodiment, two-color molding is shown, but this is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may also be used. Specifically, in the above embodiment, the exterior is formed by combining a two-color molded door frame right side decorative body 440 with a right side lens 441, but three-color molding may be used, in which the door frame right side decorative body 440 and the right side lens 441 are formed as a single unit.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment shows circular and radial patterns, this is not limited to these and patterns of various shapes may be formed.

In this way, with the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the decorative elements, such as the handle cover 295, door frame left side base 421, door frame right side left side decorative element 438, and door frame right side right side decorative element 440, which are located on the outside of the door window 101a through which the game area 5a of the door frame 3 faces forward, are molded in two colors (multi-color molding) using two synthetic resins with different light transmittances, and the polka dot decoration is applied using this two-color molding.As a result, the decorative elements are formed into the desired shape and the desired decoration is applied to them at the same time, eliminating the need to form the decorative elements into the desired shape and then apply the desired decoration by painting, etc., as is the case with decorative elements in conventional pachinko machines.This eliminates the effort required for decoration and reduces costs.

Furthermore, because the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. Specifically, when forming a polka dot decoration using two-color molding, if the inner layer 3a constituting the inside of the polka dot circles and the outer layer 3b constituting the outside of the circles are formed using the same color but with different light transmittances, the polka dot circles will be difficult to see because the inner layer 3a and outer layer 3b are the same color, resulting in an appearance that appears as if the polka dots are not present. On the other hand, if the inner layer 3a constituting the inside of the polka dot circles is white and the outer layer 3b constituting the outside of the circles is pink, the polka dot circles will be clearly visible due to the difference in color between the inner layer 3a and outer layer 3b, resulting in an appearance of white polka dots on a pink background. In this way, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used when forming the decorative body, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed, thereby reducing the costs associated with changing the appearance.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, when forming the decorative body, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used. Therefore, if the combination of synthetic resins used is changed for each production lot and different lots of this pachinko machine 1 are shipped to the same gaming hall and installed in a row in an island facility, the island facility can be made to have a colorful feel, which can make a strong impact on players wandering around the gaming hall and provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing and can attract players.

Furthermore, the area of the door frame 3 outside the door window 101a facing the play area 5a is provided with decorative elements such as a handle cover 295, a door frame left side base 421, a door frame right side left side decorative element 438, and a door frame right side right side decorative element 440, which are two-tone molded from multiple synthetic resins with different light transmittances, allowing the exterior of the door window 101a to be decorated with these decorative elements, improving its appearance.

In addition, the outer layer 3b of the two-color molded decorative body is made of a synthetic resin with lower light transmittance than the remaining inner layer 3a, making it difficult to see the inner layer 3a through the outer layer 3b. This makes the boundaries of the decoration (polka dot pattern) made up of the inner layer 3a relatively clear, making the decoration clearly visible.

Furthermore, by making the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inner layer 3a through the outer layer 3b. Therefore, in the initial model, the outer layer 3b has a low light transmittance so that the inner layer 3a cannot be seen from the outside. When changing the model, a synthetic resin with a high light transmittance is used for the outer layer 3b, allowing the inner layer 3a to be seen through. This allows for a significant change in the way the decoration of the decorative body is viewed, and makes it easy to change the appearance (decoration) without changing the shape of the decorative body.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the outer layer 3b with low light transmittance makes it difficult to see the inner layer 3a, so a pattern (a pattern based on shape, or a pattern created by painting, printing, or applying a sticker, etc.) can be applied to the surface of the inner layer 3a. In the initial model, the opaque outer layer 3b with low light transmittance prevents the pattern of the inner layer 3a from being visible through the outer layer 3b. When a model change is made, a transparent synthetic resin can be used for the outer layer 3b, allowing the pattern of the inner layer 3a to be visible through the outer layer 3b. This allows the appearance (decoration) of the decorative body to be significantly changed without changing the shape of the decorative body, thereby minimizing the increase in costs associated with model changes.

Furthermore, the left-side decorative element 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right-side decorative element 440 on the right side of the door frame are provided with a third LED 432c on the upper decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame and a third LED 433c on the lower decorative substrate 433 on the right side of the door frame, which are capable of emitting light. The inner layer 3a is made of a synthetic resin with higher light transmittance than the other layers, so that the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided on the inside of the left-side decorative element 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right-side decorative element 440 on the right side of the door frame are illuminated. This allows the inner layer 3a (polka dot area) of the decorations formed on the surface of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame to be brightly illuminated, and by illuminating the outside of the door window 101a overlooking the playing area 5a, it not only improves the appearance but also allows players to enjoy the illuminated decorations on the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, preventing a decline in player interest.

Furthermore, depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c that is irradiated onto the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a can also be used to illuminate the outer layer 3b, making it possible to illuminate the entire left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, making the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 look beautiful and creating a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of players.

Furthermore, as described above, the decorations of the decorative elements, such as the door frame right-side left-side decorative element 438 and the door frame right-side right-side decorative element 440, are formed by two-color molding (multicolor molding) using multiple synthetic resins with different light transmittances. Therefore, depending on the number of layers up to the surface and the light transmittance of the synthetic resins used, the decorations visible when the LEDs (light-emitting means), such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c, are not illuminated can be made different from the decorations visible when the LEDs are illuminated. The change in decorations can strongly attract the player's attention. To explain in more detail, taking two-color molding as an example of multicolor molding, if a hole of a predetermined shape is formed in the inner layer 3a in a portion covered by the outer layer 3b, only the portion of the inner layer 3a exposed to the surface will be visible when the LEDs are not illuminated. On the other hand, when the LED is illuminated, the light from the LED is irradiated directly onto the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a in the areas where holes are formed in the inner layer 3a, making the shape of the holes in the inner layer 3a visible on the surface of the outer layer 3b. This allows the exposed areas of the inner layer 3a and the holes to be seen, resulting in a different appearance of the decoration than when the LED is not illuminated. For example, if the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, illuminating the LED yellow will illuminate only the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration. On the other hand, illuminating the LED green (or white) will illuminate both the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b. Therefore, the illuminated areas of the decoration can be varied by changing the color of the light emitted by the LED, thereby changing the illuminated decoration. In this way, the illumination of the LED can be varied to attract and entertain players. Furthermore, by making the LEDs illuminate according to the game status, changes in the decoration of the decorative body can suggest to the player that an opportunity has arrived or that the player's hitting operation has changed (for example, "hit to the right"), making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of a variety of presentations.

Furthermore, the left door frame decorative body 426 and the right door frame decorative body 435, which are located on the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (play area 5a), have different amounts of protrusion in the front-to-rear direction, which makes it possible to create different impressions (appearances) when viewed from the front left and front right of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, even if a player wandering around the gaming hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed passes in front of the pachinko machine 1, when they approach the pachinko machine 1 from the opposite side, the machine will look different from when they last walked around, attracting the player's attention to the pachinko machine 1. This makes the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing, capable of luring players wandering around the gaming hall to choose which pachinko machine to play.

[3-10. LED placement and system on door frame]
Next, the arrangement and control system of each LED provided on the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 72 and 73. Figure 72 is a front view showing each decorative board of the door frame, and Figure 73 is a plan view showing the decorative board of the part of the door frame's performance operation unit. As shown in Figure 72, the door frame 3 has a handle 195 in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, which the player rotates to launch the game ball B into the play area 5a of the game board 5. This handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b extending outward from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of each spoke portion 195b, and has an appearance similar to an automobile steering wheel.

The front side of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 is covered by a handle front lens 185, and a handle decoration board 184 with multiple LEDs 184a mounted on its front surface is provided between the handle front lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a. Additionally, a handle cover decoration board 293 with multiple LEDs 293a mounted on its front surface is provided behind the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195.

The handle decorative board 184 has a total of 10 LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) mounted in triple concentric circles: one in the center, three in the middle spaced at regular intervals around the circumference, and six spaced at regular intervals around the outer periphery. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: the central one, three in the middle connected by dashed lines in Figure 72, and two at the top left of the outer periphery, two at the top right, and two at the bottom of the outer periphery, all connected by dashed lines. These five groups of LEDs 184a are controlled by an LED driver 184b in 15 systems, allowing each group of LEDs 184a to emit full-color light as appropriate.

On the other hand, twelve LEDs 293a are arranged in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction on the handle cover decorative substrate 293. These twelve LEDs 293a are divided into six groups, as connected by dashed lines in Figure 72, with two LEDs from the center at the bottom left, two on the left, two at the top left, two at the top right, two at the right, and two at the bottom right. These six groups of LEDs 293a are controlled by an LED driver 293b in 18 systems, allowing each group of LEDs 293a to emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

In this way, the handle 195 is provided with the handle decoration board 184 and the handle cover decoration board 293, allowing the player to see illumination effects such as light rotating around the handle 195, light concentrating toward the center of the handle 195, and light spreading toward the outside of the handle 195. Furthermore, the LEDs 293a on the handle cover decoration board 293 can be used to illuminate and decorate the outside and inside of the handle cover 295.

As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a generally rectangular door window 101a extending vertically in the center when viewed from the front, which is closed by the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160. The door frame 3 has the door window 101a completely surrounded by the left dish decorative body 271 and right dish decorative body 276 of the dish unit 200, the performance operation unit 300, the left door frame decorative body 426 of the left door frame unit 420, the right door frame decorative body 435 of the right door frame unit 430, and the top door frame decorative body 453 of the top door frame unit 450.

The left dish decorative body 271, right dish decorative body 276, left door frame decorative body 426, right door frame decorative body 435, and top door frame decorative body 453 that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed in a semi-tubular shape, allowing players to see a decoration that looks as if the door window 101a is surrounded almost entirely by fluorescent lights.

As shown in Figure 72, in this door frame 3, the following are arranged facing forward: a left-hand decorative board 273 behind the left-hand decorative body 271 that surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a; a right-hand decorative board 278 behind the right-hand decorative body 276; an upper left-hand decorative board 422 and a lower left-hand decorative board 423 behind the left-hand side decorative body 426; an upper right-hand decorative board 432 and a lower right-hand side decorative board 433 behind the right-hand side decorative body 435; and a central top-hand decorative board 455, a top-left decorative board 456, and a top-right decorative board 457 behind the top decorative body 453.

More specifically, the left-hand dish decorative board 273 is equipped with four LEDs 273a mounted on the front surface in a row running horizontally, and an LED driver (not shown) for illuminating the LEDs 273a and the LEDs 273a on the right-hand dish decorative board 278 (described below). These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets of two on the left and two on the right, as connected by dashed lines in Figure 72. These two sets of LEDs 273a are controlled by an LED driver in six systems, and each set of LEDs 273a can emit light in a full range of colors as appropriate.

The right-hand plate decorative board 278 is equipped with four LEDs 278a mounted on the front surface in a row running left to right. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets of two on the left and two on the right, as connected by dashed lines in Figure 72. These two sets of LEDs 278a are controlled by six LED drivers on the left-hand plate decorative board 273, allowing each set of LEDs 278a to emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is equipped with four first LEDs 422a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, eight second LEDs 422b mounted in pairs vertically between the first LEDs 422a, and an LED driver 422c for illuminating the 12 first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b. The first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a on the door frame upper left side decorative board 422 are divided into two sets of two: the top two and the remaining two, as connected by the two-dot chain line in Figure 72. The eight second LEDs 422b are also divided into three sets: the top two, the third through fifth LEDs from the top, and the sixth through eighth LEDs from the top, as connected by the dash-dot line in Figure 72. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups are controlled by an LED driver 422c in 15 systems, allowing each group of first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b to emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The decorative board 423 on the lower left side of the door frame is equipped with six first LEDs 423a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, twelve second LEDs 423b mounted in pairs vertically between the first LEDs 423a, and an LED driver 423c for illuminating a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b. The first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted on the front surface. The six first LEDs 423a are divided into three groups, with two LEDs in each group starting from the top, as connected by the two-dot chain lines in Figure 72. The twelve second LEDs 423b are also divided into four groups, with three LEDs from the top (first to third), three LEDs from the top (fourth to sixth), three LEDs from the top (seventh to ninth), and three LEDs from the top (tenth to twelfth). The six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups are controlled by an LED driver 423c in 21 systems, allowing each group of first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b to emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame right-side upper decorative board 432 is equipped with four first LEDs 432a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, eight second LEDs 432b mounted on the front surface in pairs vertically spaced apart, and four third LEDs 432c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction. The door frame right-side upper decorative board 432 is also equipped with an LED driver 432d for illuminating a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, and third LEDs 432c, as well as the two third LEDs 433c on the door frame right-side lower decorative board 433. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two groups: the top two and the remaining two, as connected by the dashed double-dashed line in Figure 72. The eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three groups: the top two, the third through fifth, and the sixth through eighth, as connected by dashed lines in Figure 72. The four third LEDs 432c are divided into two groups: the top two and the remaining two, as connected by dashed lines in Figure 72. The two groups of first LEDs 432a, the three groups of second LEDs 432b, the two groups of third LEDs 432c, and the upper group of third LEDs 433c on the lower right door frame decorative board 433 are controlled by an LED driver 432d in 24 systems, allowing each group of first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, third LEDs 432c, and third LEDs 433c to emit light in a full color as appropriate.

The door frame right lower decorative board 433 is equipped with six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, twelve second LEDs 433b mounted on the front surface in pairs vertically spaced apart between the first LEDs 433a, four third LEDs 433c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction, and an LED driver 433d for illuminating the first LEDs 433a, second LEDs 433b, and the two lower third LEDs 433c. The six first LEDs 433a are divided into three groups, with two LEDs in each group arranged in order from the top, as connected by dashed double-dashed lines in Figure 72. The 12 second LEDs 433b are divided into four groups of three from the top, as connected by dashed lines in FIG. 72: the first to third LEDs (three), the fourth to sixth LEDs (three), the seventh to ninth LEDs (three), and the tenth to twelfth LEDs (three). The four rear third LEDs 433c are divided into two groups, consisting of the top two and the remaining two, as connected by dashed lines in FIG. 72. The three groups of six first LEDs 433a, the four groups of 12 second LEDs 433b, and the lower group of two third LEDs 433c are controlled by an LED driver 433d in 24 systems, allowing each group of first LEDs 433a, second LEDs 433b, and third LEDs 433c to emit light in a full color as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the upper left-side decorative board 422 and lower left-side decorative board 423, which are provided on the left side of the door window 101a, and the upper right-side decorative board 432 and lower right-side decorative board 433, which are provided on the right side of the door window 101a, are formed in asymmetric shapes with the center of the door window 101a in the left-right direction as the boundary. Furthermore, the upper left-side decorative board 422 and lower left-side decorative board 423, and the upper right-side decorative board 432 and lower right-side decorative board 433 also have different shapes in the front-to-back direction.

The door frame left-side upper decorative board 422 and left-side lower decorative board 423, and the door frame right-side upper decorative board 432 and right-side lower decorative board 433, respectively, have the same number of first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LEDs 423a, second LEDs 423b, and first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, first LEDs 433a, second LEDs 433b mounted on their front surfaces, and their arrangement and systems (systems connected by dashed lines and dashed double-dot lines in Figure 72) are symmetrical. This makes it easy to create data for the LED lighting patterns used to create light-emitting effects.

The door frame top center decorative board 455 is equipped with six LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface at intervals in the left-right direction, and an LED driver (not shown) for illuminating the LEDs 455a, the LEDs 456a on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the LEDs 457a on the door frame top right decorative board 457. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three groups of two from the left, as connected by dashed lines in Figure 72. The six LEDs 455a divided into three groups are controlled by the LED driver in nine systems, and each group of LEDs 455a can emit light in a full range of colors as appropriate.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is equipped with four LEDs 456a mounted on the front, spaced apart in the left and right directions. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets of two on the left and two on the right, as connected by dashed lines in Figure 72. The four LEDs 456a divided into two sets are controlled in six systems by the LED driver on the door frame top center decorative board 455, allowing each set of LEDs 456a to emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is equipped with four LEDs 457a mounted on the front, spaced apart in the left and right directions. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets of two on the left and two on the right, as connected by dashed lines in Figure 72. The four LEDs 457a divided into two sets are controlled in six systems by the LED driver on the door frame top center decorative board 455, and each set of LEDs 457a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

According to the door frame 3 of this embodiment, light from the first LED 422a on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 423a on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 432a on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the first LED 433a on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame is guided by the light guiding shaft 427a of the upper left side light guiding member 427, the light guiding shaft 428a of the middle left side light guiding member 428, the light guiding shaft 429a of the lower left side light guiding member 429, the light guiding shaft 436a of the upper right side light guiding member 436, and the light guiding shaft 437a of the lower right side light guiding member 437 to the opening 426a in the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the opening 435a in the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame, and is irradiated outward (forward). This allows players to see bright, dot-like light-emitting effects on the front of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and door frame right side decorative body 435, and the dot-like, sparkling spot-like light-emitting effects that have not been seen in previous pachinko machines can take players by surprise.

In addition, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a on the left dish decorative board 273, the LED 278a on the right dish decorative board 278, the second LED 422b on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, the second LED 423b on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, the second LED 432b on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, the second LED 433b on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame, the LED 455a on the top center decorative board 455 of the door frame, the LED 456a on the top left door frame decorative board 456, and the LED 457a on the top right door frame decorative board 457, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a, can be appropriately illuminated to illuminate the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a, or the player can be shown a lighting effect as light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In other words, in the door frame 3, the LED system connected by the two-dot chain line in Figure 72 can produce a lighting effect in which spots are emitted on the front of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the LED system connected by the one-dot chain line in Figure 72 can produce a lighting effect in which the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 emit light in a planar manner (surface emission).

In addition, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is guided by the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the light guide shaft 437a to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the left side door frame decorative body 426 and the opening 435a of the right side door frame decorative body 435, and is then irradiated forward from there.Therefore, compared to the general surfaces of the left side door frame decorative body 426 and the right side door frame decorative body 435, the areas of the opening 426a and the opening 435a can be illuminated with high brightness and spot light. In this case, because the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are positioned outside the door window 101a overlooking the game area 5a, even if the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 are illuminated with high brightness spot light, the glare does not make it difficult to see inside the game area 5a as seen through the door window 101a, and the game ball B, effect images, decorative bodies, etc. within the game area 5a can be clearly seen through the door window 101a.

Furthermore, according to the door frame 3, the left-side door frame decorative body 426 and the right-side door frame decorative body 435 protrude forward beyond the door window 101a (play area 5a), and the openings 426a and 435a that emit high-brightness spot light are located at the ridges that form the front ends of the forward-protruding left-side door frame decorative body 426 and right-side door frame decorative body 435 (on the vertical line connecting the front ends that protrude forward in an arc shape in a plan view). This prevents the spot light from being irradiated rearward (toward the door window 101a). Therefore, the spot light from the left-side door frame decorative body 426 and the right-side door frame decorative body 435 is reflected toward the player by the glass plate 162 provided in the door window 101a, preventing it from obscuring the view of the play area 5a behind the door window 101a, and the high-brightness spot light can attract the attention of other players to the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, according to the door frame 3, the spot-emitting portions are located on the left-side door frame decorative body 426 and the right-side door frame decorative body 435, which protrude forward outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3, so the spot-emitting portions are located approximately at the same position as the outer periphery of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, even if a player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the spot-emitting portions are located outside the player, so the player does not block the spot-emitting light. As a result, when the left-side door frame decorative body 426 and the right-side door frame decorative body 435 are illuminated, the high-brightness spot-emitting light is visible to other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, making the presence of the pachinko machine 1 appealing to other players and attracting their attention. This also makes the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing, as it can attract players wandering around the gaming hall looking for a pachinko machine to play.

It is desirable that the surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) on both sides of the spot LEDs (first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a) for spotlighting the front of the left door frame decorative body 426 and the right door frame decorative body 435 belong to the same family. This ensures that the surface LEDs on both sides of the light guide pin (light guide shaft 427a, light guide shaft 428a, light guide shaft 429a, light guide shaft 436a, light guide shaft 437a) that guides the light of the spot LEDs will be illuminated in the same manner, resulting in the same amount of light being emitted from both sides of the light guide pin at the same time, making the shadow of the light guide pin less visible on the left door frame decorative body 426 and the right door frame decorative body 435.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the touch operation section 302 of the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300, and is equipped with a circular performance operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 with 31 LEDs 320a mounted on its top surface. This performance operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 is equipped with two LED drivers for illuminating the 31 LEDs 320a. The performance operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 is divided into two parts: a front decorative board 321 and a rear decorative board 322.

Eighteen of the 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decorative board 321 of the performance operation unit outer decorative board 320. Of the 18 LEDs 320a on the front decorative board 321, six are spaced apart on a circumference close to the inner circumference, three are spaced apart on a circumference midway between the inner and outer circumferences, and the remaining nine are spaced apart on a circumference close to the outer circumference.

The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decorative board 322 of the performance operation unit outer decorative board 320. Of the 13 LEDs 320a on the rear decorative board 322, four are arranged in pairs spaced apart near both ends of the arc on a circumference close to the inner circumference, three are arranged in pairs spaced apart on a circumference midway between the inner and outer circumferences, and the remaining six are arranged in pairs spaced apart near both ends of the arc on a circumference close to the outer circumference.

The 18 LEDs 320a on the front decorative board 321 are divided into nine groups, as shown by the dashed lines in Figure 73: six LEDs on the inner circumference are divided into three groups of two each, three LEDs on the middle circumference are divided into three groups of one each, and nine LEDs on the outer circumference are divided into three groups of three each, for a total of nine groups. Also, the 18 LEDs 320a on the rear decorative board 322 are divided into seven groups, as shown by the dashed lines in Figure 73: four LEDs on the inner circumference are divided into two groups of two each near both ends, three LEDs on the middle circumference are divided into three groups of one each, and nine LEDs on the outer circumference are divided into two groups of three each near both ends. In other words, on the performance control unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, the 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 groups. These 16 sets of LEDs 320a are controlled by two LED drivers in 48 systems, allowing each set of LEDs 320a to emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

This decorative board 320 around the outer periphery of the effect operation unit can appropriately illuminate 31 LEDs (48 systems) 320a, allowing players to see light-emitting effects such as rotating light in the effect operation unit 301, light-emitting effects where light is concentrated at the center, and light-emitting effects where light spreads outward.

Furthermore, according to the door frame 3, a door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and a door frame right side decorative body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided on the outside of one side and the other side of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, extending up and down along the door window 101a so that the amount of protrusion in the front-to-back direction differs. Behind the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, respectively, there is a door frame left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are mounted, a door frame left side lower decorative board 423 on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted, and The door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 432a and second LEDs 432b mounted thereon, and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 433a and second LEDs 433b mounted thereon. The door frame left side upper decorative board 432 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 432a and second LEDs 432b mounted thereon, and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is provided with a light guide shaft 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, a light guide shaft 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, a light guide shaft 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, and a light guide shaft 429b of the right side upper light guide member 436, which guide the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a, 432a, and 433a to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 and irradiate it forward. The light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right-side light guide member 437 is provided, so that the first LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b of the upper left-side door frame decorative board 422, the lower left-side door frame decorative board 423, the upper right-side door frame decorative board 432, and the lower right-side door frame decorative board 433 can be illuminated to illuminate the left-side door frame decorative body 426 and the right-side door frame decorative body 435 in a planar light-emitting decoration (surface emission). When first LED 432a, first LED 433a are illuminated, the light emitted forward is guided by columnar light guiding shaft 427a, light guiding shaft 428a, light guiding shaft 429a, light guiding shaft 436a, light guiding shaft 437a to the front of the left door frame decorative body 426 and right door frame decorative body 435, and then radiated forward from their front ends (front end surfaces), causing the areas on the left door frame decorative body 426 and right door frame decorative body 435 corresponding to the tips of light guiding shaft 427a, light guiding shaft 428a, light guiding shaft 429a, light guiding shaft 436a, light guiding shaft 437a to emit point-like illuminated decoration (spot illumination).

Therefore, by appropriately illuminating the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, the left side decorative body 426 and the door frame, which are located outside the play area 5a (door window 101a), The entire right-side frame decorative body 435 can be decorated with a surface-like illuminating effect, or parts of the left-side door frame decorative body 426 and the right-side door frame decorative body 435 can be decorated with point-like illuminating effect, or the entire left-side door frame decorative body 426 and the right-side door frame decorative body 435 can be decorated with a surface-like illuminating effect while parts can be decorated with point-like illuminating effect, allowing players to see a variety of illuminating effects, preventing players from getting bored and keeping them entertained, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In this case, the system in which the multiple first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LEDs 423a, and second LEDs 423b on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are separated is symmetrical to the system in which the multiple first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, first LEDs 433a, and second LEDs 433b on the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are separated, and in each system, the multiple first LEDs 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a and the multiple second LEDs 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b are separated from each other. Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LED 423a, and second LED 423b on the door frame left side decorative body 426 side and the first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 422b, first LED 423a, and second LED 423b on the door frame right side decorative body 435 side are separated from each other. When creating data for the lighting patterns of ED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b, for example, data for the left door frame decorative body 426 can be reused as data for the right door frame decorative body 435, or the data flow can be made similar for the left door frame decorative body 426 and the right door frame decorative body 435. This reduces the effort required to create lighting pattern data and makes it easier to create more complex lighting pattern data (with the same creation time), allowing players to see a variety of lighting patterns with a variety of lighting effects that have a high performance effect, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that can demonstrate sufficient performance effects for the lighting effects on the left door frame decorative body 426 and right door frame decorative body 435 on both the left and right sides of the door window 101a.

In addition, since the two second LEDs 422b, 423b, 432b, and 433b, which are arranged between the first LED 422a, 423a, 432a, and 433a, are in the same system, the two second LEDs 422b, 423b, 432b, and 433b, which are arranged to sandwich the first LED 422a, 423a, 432a, and 433a (light guide axis portion 427a, light guide axis portion 428a, light guide axis portion 429a, light guide axis portion 436a, light guide axis portion 437a), are always lit at the same time. By irradiating light from both sides of light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, and light guide shaft portion 437a, the shadows of light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, and light guide shaft portion 437a cast by light from second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b are canceled out and become thinner, making it difficult to see the shadows of light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, and light guide shaft portion 437a projected onto left door frame decorative body 426 and right door frame decorative body 435, and allowing the left door frame decorative body 426 and right door frame decorative body 435 to be illuminated and decorated in an even, planar manner.

Furthermore, the left door frame decorative body 426 and the right door frame decorative body 435, which are illuminated in a planar manner using the second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b, can illuminate the areas corresponding to the front ends of the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, 429a, 436a, and 437a in a point-like manner using the first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, and first LED 433a. This allows players to see illumination effects that have not been seen in previous pachinko machines, such as surface illumination with partial point illumination. This can strongly attract the player's attention with illumination effects that emit bright point-like illumination, and can startle players with illumination effects that emit sparkling point-like illumination, not available in previous pachinko machines, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, the door frame upper left side decorative board 422 and door frame lower left side decorative board 423 on one side (left side) in the left-right direction, and the door frame upper right side decorative board 432 and door frame lower right side decorative board 433 on the other side (right side) are asymmetrical in shape relative to each other. This makes it possible to distinguish between the door frame upper left side decorative board 422, door frame lower left side decorative board 423, door frame upper right side decorative board 432, and door frame lower right side decorative board 433 at a glance. This prevents mistakes when assembling the pachinko machine 1, thereby improving assembly workability and suppressing increases in costs.

[3-11. Identification of decorative substrate]
Next, the identification of the various decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted in this pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail, using the door frame 3 as an example, mainly with reference to Figure 74 etc. Figure 74 is a rear view showing the decorative boards provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the left dish decorative board 273, the right dish decorative board 278, the upper left door frame decorative board 422, the lower left door frame decorative board 423, the upper right door frame decorative board 432, the lower right door frame decorative board 433, the top center door frame decorative board 455, the top left door frame decorative board 456, and the top right door frame decorative board 457, which are provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3, will be described in detail as examples.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a white board is used for the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted, and the non-white LED drivers, connection connectors, etc. attached to the decorative board are attached to the rear side of the board. This allows the light from the LEDs mounted on the front side of the decorative board to be reflected forward, making the front decorations and other objects more brightly illuminated and decorative, while also making the decorative board less noticeable from the front (player's side).

The white decorative board may be coated with white solder resist (protective material), or the board material itself may be white.

Since pachinko machine 1 has many decorative boards, a different identification section 7 is provided on the rear surface of each decorative board to make it easy to identify each one (see Figure 74). This identification section 7 has a character identification section 7a with characters such as kanji, kana, alphabet, symbols, numbers, model numbers, etc., and a color identification section 7b with different colors (shown in Figure 74 with different shades of shading).

More specifically, the character identification section 7a has the characters "bottom left" on the left decorative board 273, "bottom right" on the right decorative board 278, "top left" on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, "bottom left" on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, "top right" on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, "bottom right" on the lower right side decorative board 433, "top center" on the top center decorative board 455 of the door frame, "top left" on the top left decorative board 456 of the door frame, and "top right" on the top right decorative board 457 of the door frame.

The color identification portion 7b is a different color for each decorative board and is applied across almost the entire front surface of the rear surface. In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 74, the color identification portion 7b is applied only partially, rather than across the entire rear surface, so as not to interfere with the soldering of LEDs and other components mounted on the decorative board.

The identification portion 7 is applied to the decorative substrate by printing (silk printing), attaching a sticker, applying paint, etc.

In the above, we have used the decorative board provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 as an example, but identification units 7 such as character identification units 7a and color identification units 7b may also be provided on various decorative boards provided on the handle unit 180, the performance operation unit 300, the game board 5, etc.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the identification unit 7 is shown to have both a character identification unit 7a and a color identification unit 7b, but this is not limited to this, and it may also be the character identification unit 7a only, or the color identification unit 7b only.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted is provided with an identification section 7 (character identification section 7a and color identification section 7b), making it easy to distinguish between decorative boards of similar shapes, preventing the wrong decorative board from being installed during assembly work and improving assembly workability.

Furthermore, with the pachinko machine 1, the identification unit 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decorative board, allowing the front side of the decorative board to be as white as possible. This allows the light from the LEDs mounted on the front side of the decorative board to be reflected forward by the front surface of the decorative board, making the decorative objects in front more brightly illuminated and decorative, and also makes the decorative board less noticeable from the front (player's side), improving its appearance.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, the color identification portion 7b serving as the identification portion 7 is applied over almost the entire decorative board, so it is possible to determine whether the decorative board is the desired one (desired color) just by looking at a portion of the decorative board. Therefore, even when multiple types of decorative boards are stacked on top of each other during assembly, the desired decorative board can be easily found as long as a portion of the decorative board is visible, simplifying the effort required for assembly.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, the color of the color identification portion 7b is different for each decorative board. Therefore, when preparing the decorative boards required for one pachinko machine 1 during assembly, if there are decorative boards with the same color identification portion 7b, it is easy to recognize that duplicate decorative boards have been prepared. Alternatively, if there are not enough colors in the color identification portion 7b of the prepared decorative boards, it is easy to recognize that there are decorative boards that have not been prepared. Therefore, when preparing the decorative boards required for assembling the pachinko machine 1, it is easy to recognize whether excess decorative boards have been prepared or if the prepared decorative boards are insufficient. This allows for reliable preparation of only the necessary number of decorative boards, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is easy to set up during assembly. Therefore, the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be carried out smoothly, shortening the assembly time and suppressing increases in costs.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, the rear surface of the decorative board is provided with a character identification section 7a as an identification section 7 to distinguish it from other boards. By reading the characters on the character identification section 7a, an operator can easily determine which part the decorative board belongs to, achieving the same effect as described above.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, the front and back of each decorative board are white, and an identification part 7 is provided on the back. This makes the decorative board less noticeable from the front (player's side) even if the decorative body provided in front of the decorative board is highly transparent, improving the appearance of the decorative body. In addition, the white front of the decorative board allows the light from the LED to be reflected forward, allowing the decorative body to emit more bright light, and the highly effective light-emitting effect entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

Furthermore, with the pachinko machine 1, functional components such as LED drivers are mounted on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, making them invisible from the front (player side). This prevents the functional components from being visible through the decorative body, which would otherwise spoil the appearance, and improves the appearance of the decorative body (gaming machine). Furthermore, because the functional components are hidden by being mounted on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, there is no need to color the functional components white (or yellow) to make them less noticeable, and the functional components can be used as is, eliminating the need to color the functional components and reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

[3-12. Action and effect of door frame]
According to this embodiment, the switching unit 394 is used to switch between a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at different positions in the pachinko machine 1 so that the contact detection body 393 provided at the desired location where it is desired to detect the player's approach or contact is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. When a player approaches or contacts the contact detection body 393 at the desired location, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 changes, and the change in capacitance can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393. As a result, the player's approach to or contact with the desired location can be detected, and predetermined control can be performed by control means such as the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control unit 1511, and performance display control unit 1512 in accordance with the detection by the contact detection sensor main body 392. On the other hand, when the contact detection element 393 at the desired location is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 by the switching unit 394, the connection between the contact detection elements 393 at other locations and the contact detection sensor main body 392 is severed. Therefore, even if the capacitance of the contact detection elements 393 at other locations changes when a player approaches or touches the other locations, the change in capacitance of the contact detection element 393 is not detected because the connection of the contact detection element 393 has been severed by the switching unit 394, and only the capacitance of the contact detection element 393 at the desired location can be reliably detected, preventing erroneous detection.

In this way, the switching unit 394 appropriately selects and switches the contact detection element 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 for multiple contact detection elements 393 located in different positions. This makes it possible to detect the capacitance of multiple contact detection elements 393 with a single contact detection sensor main body 392. This reduces the number of channels required to detect the player's approach or contact in control means such as the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control unit 1511, and effect display control unit 1512, thereby increasing the number of channels available for effect presentation. Therefore, since more effect presentation means (e.g., movable decorative elements, luminous decorative elements, effect display devices, etc.) can be controlled by the control means, the increased number of effect presentation means allows for a wider variety of presentations to be presented to players, preventing players from becoming bored and providing sufficient enjoyment, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, contact detectors 393 can be provided in multiple locations on the pachinko machine 1 that should not be touched by the player, and the contact detectors 393 provided in the desired locations can be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 by the switching unit 394 depending on the game status. This detects the player's approach to or contact with the desired location, and control means such as the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control unit 1511, and effect display control unit 1512 can then issue a specified warning or alarm. This allows a single contact detection sensor main body 392 to monitor a wide area of the pachinko machine 1, while relatively increasing the number of channels available for effects, achieving the same effects as those described above.

Furthermore, because the capacitance of multiple contact detectors 393 is detected by a single contact detection sensor main body 392, each contact detector 393 is located at a distance from the contact detection sensor main body 392. This means that the sensor main body, which contains electronic components such as the sensor IC and output circuit, can be located in a location that is difficult for players to see, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing its appeal to players.

Furthermore, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is pre-equipped with connection terminals for electrically connecting multiple contact detection bodies 393. Therefore, simply by connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminals of the contact detection sensor main body 392, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392. This simplifies the assembly of the pachinko machine 1 and helps prevent increases in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with a connection terminal in advance, and the contact detection sensor main body 392 and the contact detection body 393 can be connected simply by connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392.This reduces the number of parts compared to when a conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode of the contact detection sensor main body 392 and connected to the contact detection body 393 via the conductive member, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1 and eliminating the need to design the routing of the conductive member for connection to the contact detection body 393.This increases the degree of freedom in the placement of the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392, making it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, a switching unit 394 is provided that switches the contact detectors 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392, and the switching unit 394 can be used to select the contact detector 393 to be detected.For example, when a player-participation effect is performed in which multiple contact detectors 393 are dispersed and the dispersed contact detectors 393 are touched in a predetermined order, the switching unit 394 switches the contact detectors 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 when the player touches them in order, making it possible to detect whether the player touched the contact detectors 393 in the correct order.This makes it possible to realize a highly game-like player-participation effect using a single contact detection sensor main body 392, and provides a pachinko machine 1 that is even more enjoyable for players.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, when a player's finger or the like approaches or comes into contact with the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350, which can be pressed by the player, the player approaches the contact detection body 352, which is made of a punched metal plate and whose player-side is covered by the button body 351, causing a change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352. Because the capacitance of this contact detection body 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358, it is possible to detect changes in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, and therefore it is possible to detect the player's approach to or contact with the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) via the contact detection body 352.

In this way, when the contact detector 352 and contact detection sensor main body 358 detect the player's approach to or contact with the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is output to the player through the contact detector 352 and button main body 351 by effect means such as the outer button decorative board 355, vibration motor 356, effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360, inner button decorative board 364, and protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, thereby entertaining the player and preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game. In this case, when the player approaches or contacts the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is output, allowing the effect operation unit 350 to function as a non-contact operation unit or a contact operation unit using the contact detector 352 and contact detection sensor main body 358. Furthermore, because the effect operation unit 350, which functions as a non-contact operation unit and a contact operation unit, can be pressed by the player when it is extended, a variety of effect operations such as non-contact operation, contact operation, and press operation can be performed with the effect operation unit 350. This makes it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 with an appearance that differs from conventional pachinko machines that have operation buttons that can only be pressed, and by differentiating it from other pachinko machines, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, a predetermined effect is output to the player in response to the detection of the capacitance of the contact detector 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358. Because the capacitance varies depending on the distance between the contact detector 352 (button main body 351) and the player, multiple capacitance thresholds can be set and different effects can be output for each threshold. Therefore, the time (distance) from when the player approaches the button main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) to when they make contact can be detected in multiple stages, and by outputting effects according to each stage, a wider variety of effects can be presented to the player, preventing the player from becoming bored and reducing a decline in interest.

In addition, because the contact detection sensor main body 358, which detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, is located away from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection sensor main body 358, which contains electronic components such as a sensor IC and output circuit, can be located in a part of the performance operation unit 350 that is difficult for players to see, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing its appeal to players.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the operation unit can perform a variety of presentation operations such as non-contact operations, contact operations, and pressing operations. By implementing player-participation presentations that allow players to control the presentations, it is possible to enjoy a variety of presentation operations, making it less likely for players to become bored, and allowing players to enjoy player-participation presentations, which can prevent players from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, the contact detection body 352, whose capacitance is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358, is made of a perforated metal consisting of a metal plate with multiple holes formed therein. This reduces the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 when the player is not approaching or touching the button main body 351 due to the multiple holes, thereby preventing false detection by the contact detection sensor main body 358. Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, and arrangement of the multiple holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact detection body 352 while suppressing an increase in capacitance, thereby widening the range over which the contact detection body 352 detects the player's approach to or contact with the button main body 351 (effect operation unit 350). This allows the contact detector 352 to be made larger and the detection range to be wider. Therefore, if the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) that the player can press is made larger and the contact detector 352 is made the same size as the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, as in the above embodiment, when the player is required to approach or contact the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) to execute a player participation effect, the contact detector 352 covered by the button body 351 is as large as the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, so the movement distance required for the player's fingers to approach or contact the effect operation unit 350 is shorter, allowing the effect operation unit 350 to be operated quickly, making it less likely that the timing for operation will be missed in a player participation effect and ensuring that the player can participate in the player participation effect. This entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

In addition, because the contact detector 352 is made of perforated metal, the LEDs 364a on the decorative button board 364, which acts as a presentation device and is located on the opposite side of the contact detector 352 from the player side, can be output to the player through the multiple holes formed in the contact detector 352, ensuring that the player can enjoy the light-emitting effects and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351), which can be operated by pressing, is provided with a contact detector 352, which is made of punched metal, a metal plate with a certain degree of strength and rigidity, the effect operation unit 350 can be reinforced, making the effect operation unit 350 less likely to deform or break even if the player presses or hits the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) hard when performing a pressing operation. Therefore, because the contact detector 352 makes the effect operation unit 350 less likely to be damaged, the player can press the effect operation unit 350 without any worries, making the player-participation type effect of operating the effect operation unit 350 more enjoyable and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the contact detector 352 is made of punched metal, which allows the plate thickness of the contact detector 352 to be thinner than when the contact detector 352 is made of expanded metal processed from a metal plate of the same plate thickness. This makes it easier to secure space for the contact detector 352, facilitating the installation of the contact detector 352 and increasing design freedom, making it easier to design a pachinko machine 1 that is more appealing to players.

Furthermore, because the contact detector 352 is made of punched metal, it has a consistent thickness compared to expanded metal, making it easy to process the contact detector 352 into the desired three-dimensional shape by pressing. This makes it easier to create a shape that is optimal for detecting a player's approach to or contact with the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350), ensuring the above-mentioned effects are realized.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 350, the button body 351 covers the player side of the contact detector 352, which is made of punched metal with multiple holes formed in it. This prevents the player from directly touching the contact detector 352, which is made of punched metal with multiple holes formed in it. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable when touching the contact detector 352 with multiple holes formed in it, and also allows the button body 351 to be operated without any discomfort in player-participation effects that use the button body 351 as an operation unit, allowing the player to enjoy the effect and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, because the player side of the contact detector 352, which is made of punched metal, is covered by the button body 351, the multiple holes formed in the contact detector 352 do not become contaminated with dust, food, drink, or other contaminants, making cleaning easier and reducing the burden on the gaming hall that installs the pachinko machine 1 as an easy-to-clean pachinko machine 1.

In addition, presentation means such as the outer button decorative board 355, vibration motor 356, presentation operation unit lifting mechanism 360, inner button decorative board 364, and protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 are provided on the opposite side of the contact detector 352 from the player side, allowing predetermined presentations to be output to the player through the contact detector 352 and button body 351. When the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the player's approach to or contact with the button body 351 (presentation operation unit 350), the predetermined presentation is output through the multiple holes formed in the contact detector 352 and the transparent button body 351, strongly attracting the player's attention to the presentation operation unit 350 and ensuring that the player enjoys the presentation output through (via) the presentation operation unit 350, preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, because the presentation means, such as the outer button decorative board 355, vibration motor 356, presentation operation unit lifting mechanism 360, inner button decorative board 364, and protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, are located on the side of the contact detector 352 opposite the player, the presentation means are covered by the contact detector 352, and the contact detector 352 (presentation operation unit 350) and presentation means can be compactly combined. This makes it easier to install the presentation operation unit 350 and presentation means, which have the above-mentioned effects, in the desired location on the pachinko machine 1, making it easier to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing and can be differentiated from other pachinko machines.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when a player approaches or comes into contact with the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351), which is mounted on the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 and is movable up and down, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 of the effect operation unit 350 changes. Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the capacitance of the contact detector 352, thereby detecting the player's approach to or contact with the effect operation unit 350. When the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the player's approach to or contact with the effect operation unit 350, the force of the lifting spring 365 of the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360 causes the effect operation unit 350 to protrude upward. Therefore, if the effect operation unit 350 protrudes when the player is not in contact with the effect operation unit 350, it will abut (collide) with the player. If the effect operation unit 350 protrudes when the player is in contact with the effect operation unit 350, it is possible to present the player with an effect created by a physical force pushing the player. This makes a strong impact on players with effects not seen in previous pachinko machines, strongly drawing the player's attention to the effect operation unit 350 and ensuring that the player notices that the effect operation unit 350 is protruding.

When protruding this effect operation unit 350, moving the lift spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 toward the upper end of the lift spring 365 (upward) increases the compression of the lift spring 365, thereby increasing the biasing force; moving it away from the upper end of the lift spring 365 (downward) decreases the compression of the lift spring 365, thereby decreasing the biasing force. By moving the lift spring lower holding member 385 to an appropriate position, the biasing force of the effect operation unit 350 by the lift spring 365 can be changed. In this way, because the effect operation unit 350 can be protruded with various protrusion forces, the variety of effects created by physical force can be increased, preventing players from getting bored, and allowing players to enjoy the effects created by the protrusion of the effect operation unit 350, preventing a decline in player interest in the game.

In addition, the thrust force of the effect operation unit 350 is changed depending on the game state. Therefore, when a player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350 with their fingers, etc., and the effect operation unit 350 makes contact with the force, a strong impact is given to the player, making them feel strongly that something good is about to happen (for example, the occurrence of a favorable game state that gives the player an advantage), increasing anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, because the effect operation unit 350 is a pressure operation unit 303 that can be pressed, when a player-participation effect is executed, the player can be made to press the effect operation unit 350, allowing the player to participate in the player-participation effect, and allowing the player to enjoy pressing the effect operation unit 350, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, because the effect operation unit 350 can be operated by pressing it, players who place their fingers or the like on the effect operation unit 350 (the top surface of the button body 351) can operate it at any time. When a player-participation effect is executed by pressing the effect operation unit 350, the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360 causes the effect operation unit 350 to protrude, allowing the player to quickly recognize the start of the player-participation effect without having to be notified by effect images, sounds, etc., which increases the player's motivation to press the effect operation unit 350 and makes the player-participation effect even more enjoyable.

Furthermore, because the performance operation unit 350 is caused to protrude by the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the performance operation unit 350 can be easily and forcefully protruded compared to when the performance operation unit 350 is protruded using a drive motor, making it easier to achieve the effects described above.

Furthermore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, thereby detecting the player's approach to or contact with the effect operation unit 350. Because the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 varies depending on the distance between the effect operation unit 350 and the player, multiple capacitance thresholds can be set, making it possible to protrude the effect operation unit 350 with a different protrusion force for each threshold. Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the distance from when the player's fingers, etc., approach the effect operation unit 350 to when it makes contact in multiple stages, and by protruding with a protrusion force appropriate for each stage, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, preventing the player from becoming bored and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 is caused to pop up by executing a player participation effect, and the effect operation unit 350, which is arranged so that the player can move forward and backward, approaches or comes into contact with the effect operation unit 350, causing a change in the capacitance of the contact detection element 352 located on the back side of the button main body 351 that the player touches on the effect operation unit 350. Meanwhile, the contact detection sensor main body 358, which is located away from the contact detection element 352 on the effect operation unit 350, detects the capacitance of the contact detection element 352 and can therefore capture the change in capacitance of the contact detection element 352 due to the player's approach or contact, thereby detecting the player's approach to or contact with the button main body 351 on the effect operation unit 350, and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the player by capacitance. Then, when the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects a situation or the player moves the effect operation unit 350 forward or backward (presses it), a predetermined effect is executed by effect means such as the effect operation unit outer decorative board 320, the button outer decorative board 355, the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the button inner decorative board 364, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. In other words, a predetermined effect is executed when the player moves the effect operation unit 350 forward or backward or approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350, so that the player can be entertained by this effect and prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In this case, when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350, an effect is executed, allowing the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) to function as an effect operation unit (non-contact operation unit, contact operation unit). On the other hand, when the player moves the effect operation unit 350 forward or backward (presses), an effect is executed, allowing the effect operation unit 350 to function as an effect operation unit (press operation unit). As a result, players can perform a variety of effect operations, and by executing player-participation effects that allow players to operate the effects, they can enjoy a variety of effect operations, making it less likely that players will get bored, and allowing players to enjoy player-participation effects, which can prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game.

The player is detected by the capacitance of the contact detector 352, which is located near the part of the button body 351 on the effect operation unit 350 that the player touches (below the upper surface 351a). The capacitance of the contact detector 352 varies depending on the distance between the contact detector 352 (button body 351) and the player. Therefore, it is possible to set multiple capacitance thresholds for executing a specific effect, and to execute a different effect for each threshold. Therefore, it is possible to detect the time (distance) between the approach of the player's finger or other object to the effect operation unit 350 and contact, in multiple stages. By presenting effects according to each stage, a wider variety of effects can be presented to the player, preventing players from becoming bored and reducing a decline in interest.

In addition, a predetermined effect is executed when the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 detect the player, and this effect can impart a sense of control to the effect operations (non-contact operations, contact operations) using the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, allowing the player to enjoy the effect operations even more.

Furthermore, the device is equipped with a presentation operation unit 350 that can be advanced and retreated (pressed) by the player, and a contact detector 352 and contact detection sensor main body 358 that can detect the player's approach or contact with the presentation operation unit 350. This allows the player to perform a variety of operations during player participation-type presentations, such as moving the presentation operation unit 350 forward and backward (pressing operations) or bringing their fingers or other objects close to or into contact with the presentation operation unit 350 (non-contact operations, contact operations). These various operations can increase the player's motivation to participate in player participation-type presentations, making it easier for them to participate in player participation-type presentations. Furthermore, when a player participates in a player participation-type presentation, the various operations using the presentation operation unit 350, contact detector 352, and contact detection sensor main body 358 can prevent the player from becoming bored and allow them to enjoy the player participation-type presentation, preventing a decline in the player's interest.

Furthermore, by engaging the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the effect operation unit 350 with the locking portion 371c of the lifting cam member 371 of the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the effect operation unit 350 can be locked so that it cannot move forward or backward. Therefore, by keeping the effect operation unit 350 immovable by the guide pin 354c and the lifting cam member 371 until an effect is executed that moves the effect operation unit 350 forward or backward, it is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 350 from moving or shaking on its own. This makes it possible to avoid the effect operation unit 350 moving or shaking on its own, which could cause distrust or anxiety in the player, and makes the effect produced by the effect operation unit 350 more enjoyable.

Furthermore, in the performance operation unit 350, the contact detection sensor main body 358 is located away from the contact detection body 352. This allows the contact detection sensor main body 358, which contains electronic components such as a sensor IC and output circuit, to be located in a location that is difficult for players to see, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, because the contact detector 352 for detecting capacitance and the contact detector sensor main body 358, which has a sensor IC and output circuit that detects the capacitance of the contact detector 352, are separate entities, the shape and material of the contact detector 352 can be selected as appropriate, regardless of the contact detector sensor main body 358. This allows the contact detector 352 to be made to optimally match the shape, form, and specifications of the button main body 351 of the performance operation unit 350, ensuring the realization of a pachinko machine 1 that provides the effects described above.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, when a player approaches or touches the button body 351 or surface member 396 covering the outer button decorative substrate 355, inner button decorative substrate 364, or decorative body 398 with their fingers, etc., the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 located between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the outer button decorative substrate 355, inner button decorative substrate 364, or decorative body 398 changes, and in response to this change, a predetermined effect is executed in which light is irradiated towards the player by the outer button decorative substrate 355, inner button decorative substrate 364, or decorative body 398.Therefore, the light irradiated towards the player can strongly attract the player's attention to the outer button decorative substrate 355, inner button decorative substrate 364, or decorative body 398, and the executed effect can entertain the player. In this case, the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 located between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the outer button decorative substrate 355 or inner button decorative substrate 364 or decorative body 398 is formed to fit the decorative portion located on the button body 351 or surface member 396, giving the player the illusion that the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 is part of the decorative portion, making it impossible for the player to recognize that the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 is intended to detect the player.

In this way, because the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 is not visible to the player, even if the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 blocks part of the outer button decorative board 355, inner button decorative board 364, or decorative body 398 (effect), the player will not be bothered by the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397. Furthermore, even if the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 is located in front of the outer button decorative board 355, inner button decorative board 364, or decorative body 398, the presence of the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 will not cause the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the effect of the outer button decorative board 355, inner button decorative board 364, or decorative body 398 can be clearly seen by the player, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like to the button body 351 or surface member 396 using the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397, an effect is executed in which light is irradiated towards the player on the outer button decorative substrate 355, inner button decorative substrate 364 or decorative body 398, which are covered by the button body 351 or surface member 396. This allows the button body 351 or surface member 396 to function like an effect operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302), and also gives the player the feeling of operating using light. Therefore, for example, when a player participation type effect is executed, the player's fingers or the like approach or contact the button body 351 or surface member 396, and when the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 detects the approach or contact of the fingers or the like, an effect is executed by the outer button decorative board 355, inner button decorative board 364 or decorative body 398, allowing the player to take part in the player participation type effect and enjoy it.

Furthermore, since the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 detects the player's approach to or contact with the button body 351 or surface member 396, it is possible to vary the presentation of the button outer decorative board 355, button inner decorative board 364 or decorative body 398 depending on the distance between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the player's fingers, etc., so the presentation of the button outer decorative board 355, button inner decorative board 364 or decorative body 398 can be changed depending on the movement (position) of the player's fingers, etc., allowing the player to see a more diverse presentation, which makes it less likely that the player will tire of the game and prevents the player's interest from declining.

In addition, changes in the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 are detected, and when a player approaches or touches the button body 351 or surface member 396, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397, which is located between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the outer button decorative substrate 355, inner button decorative substrate 364, or decorative body 398, changes. This makes it easy to detect the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., with the button body 351 or surface member 396, thereby reliably realizing a pachinko machine 1 that provides the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, because contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 detects changes in capacitance, contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 can be made of a conductive material. For example, if contact detector 397 is made of a metal vapor-deposited film, the vapor-deposited film can be made thin to make it transparent, or thickened to give it a metallic luster, making it appear as if it were part of the decoration. Alternatively, if contact detector 352 and contact detector 395 are made of punched metal with a decorative outer shape such as a star or heart, contact detector 352 and contact detector 395 can be made to appear as if they were part of the decoration. As a result, contact detector 352, contact detector 395, and contact detector 397 can be made invisible to the player, ensuring the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the capacitance changes when the player's fingers or the like approach or touch the transparent button body 351 covering the top side (surface side), and this change causes the contact detectors 395 etc. (including contact detector 352, left contact detector 390L, right contact detector 390R, contact detector 393, contact detector 397, etc.) to present a predetermined effect using effect presentation means such as the outer button decorative board 355, vibration motor 356, effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360, inner button decorative board 364, protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, and effect display device 1600.Since these contact detectors 395 etc. are formed into a predetermined outer peripheral shape with a design feature, the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated with the contact detectors 395 themselves, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that looks good and is highly appealing to players. Furthermore, the surface side of the contact detector 395 etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351, and a predetermined effect is presented by the effect presenting means via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 etc. in response to a change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 etc. due to the approach of the player's finger or the like to the contact detector 395, so that a predetermined effect is presented in response to the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351, allowing the button body 351 to function as the effect operation unit 301. And, because the contact detector 395 etc. visible through the button body 351 have a design feature, the effect operation unit 301 appears to have a design feature, making a strong impact on players as a pachinko machine 1 equipped with an effect operation unit 301 not found in previous pachinko machines, and making it possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the design of the contact detector 395 etc. can make a strong impact on the player, thereby generating a strong interest in the contact detector 395 etc. (button body 351), heightening anticipation for operating the button body 351 (effect operation unit 301), and also making it fun to operate the button body 351 when a player-participation effect in which the player operates the button body 351 is executed, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, the contact detector 395, which detects the approach or contact of a player's fingers or the like with the button body 351, is formed into an outer periphery with a design that makes it difficult for some players to notice, at first glance, the presence of the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) that presents effects using the effect presentation means. Therefore, when a player-participation effect is executed by operating the effect operation unit 301, the player is prompted to approach or touch the button body 351, which makes it clear for the first time that the button body 351 is the effect operation unit 301 using the contact detector 395, etc., adding an element of surprise to the player and making the player-participation effect more enjoyable. Alternatively, when a player-participation effect is being executed by operating the effect operation unit 301, if the player approaches or touches the button body 351 with a finger or the like without realizing that it is the effect operation unit 301, the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like will change and an effect will be presented by the effect presentation means, surprising the player and entertaining the player with the presented effect, preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, because effects are presented by the effect presentation means in response to changes in the capacitance of the contact detector 395, etc., it is possible to easily detect the approach or contact of a player's fingers, etc. with the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395, etc., making it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects. Also, because effects are presented in response to changes in the capacitance of the contact detector 395, etc., it is possible to detect the time (distance) from when a player's fingers, etc. approach the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395, etc., to when they make contact in multiple stages. By presenting effects according to each stage, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, preventing the player from becoming bored and reducing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, because the outer periphery of the contact detector 395, etc. is formed into a predetermined shape, even if inorganic materials such as punched metal, expanded metal, or wire mesh are used as the conductive contact detector 395, etc., it is possible to impart design features to the contact detector 395, etc., preventing the contact detector 395, etc. from compromising the appearance and making the contact detector 395, etc. more noticeable, making it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, because the outer periphery of the contact detector 395 and other elements is formed into a predetermined shape, it is possible to create an aesthetically pleasing design without forming the contact detector 395 and other elements into a three-dimensional shape. Therefore, the contact detector 395 and other elements can be formed into a flat shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, reducing the cost of manufacturing the contact detector 395 and other elements.

Furthermore, because the surface side of the contact detector 395, etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351, dirt such as dust and food and drink does not adhere to the contact detector 395, etc., making cleaning easier. More specifically, because the contact detector 395, etc., is made of an uneven material such as punched metal, dirt such as dust and food and drink easily adheres to the unevenness, making cleaning of the dirt more difficult. However, because the surface side of the contact detector 395, etc. is covered with the button body 351, even if the contact detector 395, etc., is made of an uneven material such as punched metal, the button body 351 prevents dirt from adhering, making the machine easier to clean and reducing the burden on the gaming hall that installs the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the surface of the contact detector 395, etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351 to prevent the player from touching the contact detector 395, etc. Therefore, if the contact detector 395, etc., is made of a material with a high design quality, such as a metal vapor deposition film or foil stamping, it is possible to prevent premature wear due to contact by the player, thereby increasing the durability of the contact detector 395, etc.

Furthermore, the surface side of the contact detector 395, etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351. As described above, the transparent button body 351 prevents the player from directly touching the contact detector 395, etc., so it is possible to use contact detectors 395, etc. that are unpleasant to the touch or that may cause discomfort to the player. This increases the degree of freedom in the materials used for the contact detector 395, etc., and allows the contact detector 395, etc. to be formed from materials tailored to needs.

Furthermore, when the capacitance of the contact detector 395 etc. is changed by bringing the player's finger etc. close to or into contact with the button body 351 which covers the contact detector 395 etc., a predetermined effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 etc. The effect presented via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 etc. allows the player to intuitively recognize that the player has brought their finger etc. close to or into contact with the button body 351, allowing the player to enjoy the movement of their finger etc.

In addition, effects are presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, etc., and when the player's fingers, etc., approach or touch the button body 351, which covers the contact detector 395, etc., the effects presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, etc. are executed. This allows the button body 351 to function like a touch operation unit, and the presented effects can give the player a sense of operation, allowing the player to enjoy operations using the button body 351 (player-participation effects).

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in order to operate the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350, which is capable of multiple operations, the player approaches or touches the button body 351 with their fingers, etc., and when the contact detector 352 (contact detection sensor body 358) detects that the fingers, etc. have entered the detection area, various effects are executed, such as a light-emitting effect in which light is irradiated onto the player through the button body 351 by the multiple LEDs 355a on the outer button decorative board 355 and the multiple LEDs 364a on the inner button decorative board 364, a vibration motor 356 vibrating the player's fingers, etc. that are in contact through (via) the button body 351, and an effect in which the button body 351 is protruded upward by the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360, thereby applying impact, upward pressure, wind pressure, etc. to the player through (via) the button body 351, allowing the button body 351 to function as the contact operation unit 302, providing entertainment to the player. At this time, effects such as light, vibration, impact, upward pressure, and wind pressure are imparted to the player through the button body 351, which can surprise and entertain the player and increase their enthusiasm for operating the button body 351. When the player's fingers or the like are in contact with the button body 351 and they move their fingers or the like appropriately to press the button body 351 downward, the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, the contact operation caused by the contact detector 352 detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like, and the pressing operation of the button body 351, can provide the player with a variety of exciting operations, preventing the player from becoming bored and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of a player's fingers, etc., is composed of the contact detection element 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the contact detection element 352 is located near the back surface of the top surface 351a of the button main body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor main body 358, which has a detection circuit, is located on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353, away from the top surface 351a of the button main body 351, the contact detection element 352 can detect the approach or contact of a player's fingers, etc., with the top surface 351a of the button main body 351, achieving the same effects as those described above.

Furthermore, the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of a player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358, which is equipped with a detection circuit, can be positioned on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353, away from the top surface portion 351a (contact detection body 352) of the button main body 351. This allows the contact detection sensor main body 358 to be positioned in a less noticeable location, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the back (bottom) of the button body 351 is provided with an outer button decorative board 355, an inner button decorative board 364, and an effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360, which make it easier for the player to experience effects such as light, vibration, impact, lifting, and wind pressure through the button body 351, achieving the same effects as those described above.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 75 to 81. Figure 75 is a front view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine, and Figure 76 is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. Figure 77 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front right, Figure 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front left, and Figure 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. Figure 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main components as seen from the rear.

The main frame 4 holds the game board 5, which has a play area 5a where play is carried out by hitting game balls B, and is used to pay out game balls B to the player and eject used game balls B to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the island equipment in the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is removably stored inside from the front. The main frame 4 is openably attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2, which is attached to the island equipment in the game hall, at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front, and a door frame 3 is openably attached to close the open front side.

The main frame 4 comprises a frame-shaped main frame base unit 500 whose rear can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5; an upper main frame hinge member 510 attached to the upper left end of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, which is rotatably attached to the upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; and a lower main frame hinge assembly 520 attached to the lower left end of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, which is rotatably attached to the lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and to which the lower door frame hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached.

The main frame 4 also includes a main frame reinforcement frame 530 attached to the left side of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front; a ball launcher 540 attached to the lower front side of the main frame base unit 500 for shooting game balls B into the game area 5a of the game board 5; an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached to the rear side of the main frame base unit 500 along the upper and left sides when viewed from the front; a payout unit 560 attached to the rear side of the payout base unit 550 for paying out game balls B to the player; a base unit 620 attached to the lower rear side of the main frame base unit 500; a back cover 640 attached to the rear side of the main frame base unit 500 in an openable and closable manner to cover the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 501; and a locking unit 650 attached to the right side of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, for locking the outer frame 2 and main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and main frame 4.

The main frame base unit 500 includes a main frame base 501, which is formed into a vertically extending rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front, a connection cable guide member 502 that guides a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3, and a game board locking member 505 that detachably holds the game board 5.

The dispensing base unit 550 comprises a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500; a ball tank 552 attached to the dispensing base 551, shaped like a box extending left and right and open at the top; a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in the shape of a groove open at the top; a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553; a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left when viewed from the front; a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555; and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 comprises a ball guiding unit 570 that guides game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a serpentine manner, a payout device 580 that pays out game balls B guided by the ball guiding unit 570 one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward, and a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides game balls B that have passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 toward the door frame 3 or the board unit 620.

The board unit 620 comprises a speaker unit 620a attached to the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a dispensing control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 comprises a unit base 651 attached to the main frame base 501, multiple door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the door frame 3, multiple outer frame hooks 653 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hooks 652 or outer frame hooks 653 up and down, a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hooks 652 downward and the outer frame hooks 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hooks 653 downward.

[4-1. Main frame base unit]
The main frame base unit 500 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 75 to 83. Figure 82(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main frame when the door frame is opened relative to the main frame. Figure 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main frame when the door frame is opened or closed relative to the main frame. The main frame base unit 500 has its rear inserted into the outer frame 2 from the front, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main frame base unit 500 comprises a main frame base 501, which is formed into a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front; a connection cable guide member 502 attached to the lower left corner of the front of the main frame base 501 to guide the connection cable 503; and a game board locking member 505 rotatably attached to the lower front of the main frame base 501 around an axis extending forward and backward to detachably hold the game board 5.

The main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 comprises a base body 501a which has a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front; a game board insertion opening 501b which penetrates the base body 501a from a position slightly below the top end to a height of approximately 3/4 of the total height and through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front; a game board placement section 501c which forms the lower edge of the game board insertion opening 501b and on which the game board 5 is placed; and a game board restriction section 501d which protrudes upward from the center of the game board placement section 501c in the left-right direction and restricts left-right and rearward movement of the bottom end of the game board 5.

The main frame base 501 also has a launcher mounting section 501e, which is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the game board mounting section 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, for mounting the ball launcher 540; a cylinder insertion port 501f, which penetrates from front to back on the right side of the launcher mounting section 501e when viewed from the front, and through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted; a circular speaker opening 501g, which penetrates from front to back on the lower left side of the game board mounting section 501c when viewed from the front, and which allows the main frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in the board unit 620 to face forward; a cable mounting recess 501h, which is recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extends left and right, and into which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached; and a cable insertion port 501i, which penetrates from front to back at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, the main body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate-like shape from the right edge of the game board insertion slot 501b of the base main body 501a when viewed from the front. The locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and the rear extension portion 501j has a rear end to which the rear cover 640 is rotatably attached. Also, an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l are formed near the upper and lower ends of the left end of the rear surface of the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, and are used to mount the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520.

The main frame base 501 is also equipped with a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, mounted on the front surface of the base body 501a below the cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. When the door frame 3 is opened (released) relative to the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch is released, allowing the opening of the door frame 3 to be detected. The detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633. The main frame base 501 is also equipped with a main frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, mounted on the rear surface of the base body 501a below the position where the door frame opening switch is mounted. When the main frame 4 is opened (released) relative to the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch is released, allowing the opening of the main frame 4 to be detected. The detection signal from the main frame open switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633.

A game board locking member 505 is rotatably attached to the main frame base 501 around an axis extending forward and backward, below the game board placement portion 501c on the front side and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board locking member 505 restricts the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b, thereby allowing the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b to be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main frame base 501 extends laterally from the right end of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to a position below the portion where the game board locking member 505 is mounted, to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The cable mounting recess 501h is sized to accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached to it so that it can rotate around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame base unit 500 comprises a flat guide body 502a extending laterally, a pair of band-like frame pieces 502b that protrude forward from the upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a and extend further to the right than the right end of the guide body 502a, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a plurality of through-holes 502d that penetrate the guide body 502a from front to back at both the upper and lower ends and are arranged in a row in the left-right direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a left-right length that is slightly shorter than the left-right length of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main frame base 501, and is sized to fit within the cable mounting recess 501h. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached so that its mounting shaft 502c can rotate around an axis extending vertically near the right end within the cable mounting recess 501h. This allows the connection cable guide member 502 to rotate (hinge rotate) so that the left end protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is used to guide the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 consists of multiple wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the opposite end of which is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3.

Next, we will explain the effect of the connection cable guide member 502. As shown in Figure 83, etc., the connection cable guide member 502 is attached to the main frame base 501 so that its end (right end) opposite the side (left side) where the door frame 3 is hingedly rotatably attached in the left-right direction is rotatable around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 connecting the interface board 635 of the main frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is attached to the guide body 502a by fastening it together with the guide body 502a with a cable tie 504 inserted through a pair of through holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a that are in the same position left and right, with the side connected to the interface board 635 abutting the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from right to left of the guide body 502a.

When the door frame 3 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and closed relative to the main frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame 4 is located behind the main relay board 104 and the auxiliary relay board 105 of the door frame 3 (see Figure 83 (a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, then bends back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and extends into the relay board cover 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is positioned to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hingedly rotated so as to open relative to the main frame 4, the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, causing the connection cable guide member 502 to rotate around the attachment shaft 502c at the right end. In this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2 ≧ β (preferably α/3 ≧ β) (see Figure 83 (b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but once the opening angle α exceeds a certain value (for example, approximately 90 degrees), the increase stops. In this embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main frame base 501. The connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, preventing the connection cable 503 from dangling between the door frame 3 and the main frame 4.

When closing the open door frame 3, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively backward, causing the connection cable 503 to press the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 backward, causing the connection cable guide member 502 to rotate around the mounting axis 502c so that the left end moves backward. Because the connection cable guide member 502 opens at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not impede the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, allowing the door frame 3 to close smoothly. Furthermore, because the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 will not become pinched between the door frame 3 and the main frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, preventing any malfunction of the connection cable 503.

In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees, creating a crease in the folded portion of the connection cable 503. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the 180-degree folded portion of the connection cable 503 changes to open, the crease acts on the connection cable 503 to close it. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the crease prevents the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction and also guides the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) in the closing direction, allowing the door frame 3 to close smoothly.

Furthermore, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is held by the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axial core) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a can pull the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 toward the central axis (axial core) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126.

In addition, in this embodiment, the angle between a tangent to a circle that passes through the center of rotation of the connection cable guide member 502, is centered on the central axis (axial core) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126, and passes through a portion (pressing portion) of the speaker duct 103 that protrudes rearward on the central axis (axial core) side of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 relative to the cable holder 103a, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees or less. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts against the connection cable 503, thereby pressing the tip of the open connection cable guide member 502 in the closing direction via the connection cable 503. This allows the connection cable guide member 502 to close smoothly as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, ensuring reliable closure of the door frame 3. Furthermore, the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502, which rotates (opens and closes) as the door frame 3 opens and closes, can be set to 45 degrees or less, so when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, achieving the same effects as described above.

[4-2. Main body frame upper hinge member]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 80 and 81. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k in the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and also rotatably attaches the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3.

The main frame upper hinge member 510 comprises an upper hinge body 511, which is a horizontally extending flat plate material with the rear portion bent downward in an L-shape, and a main frame upper hinge pin 512 that protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the front end of the upper hinge body 511 and is journaled on the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a that penetrates vertically on the left side of the main frame upper hinge pin 512 in a front view at the horizontally extending portion and journals the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

The upper hinge body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 is bent downward and attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 at its portion that extends vertically. The upper hinge body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 is supported by its upper hinge pin 512, which is inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the upper hinge member 51 of the upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge pin 122 of the upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the upper hinge body 511.

This upper main frame hinge member 510 cooperates with the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 to attach the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinged manner, and also to attach the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 in a hinged manner.

[4-3. Main body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 80 and 81. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l in the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to it.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 comprises a lower hinge first body 521, which is a horizontally extending, flat plate-like material with its rear portion bent upward into an L-shape, and a lower hinge second body 522, which is arranged above the lower hinge first body 521 and is a horizontally extending, flat plate-like material with its rear portion bent upward into an L-shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 arranged at a distance above the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, and the vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 abuts against the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521.

The lower hinge first body 521 has a lower hinge hole 521a for the outer frame that penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion and into which the lower hinge pin 60c of the lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. The lower hinge hole 521a for the outer frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge pin 512 of the upper hinge member 510 of the main frame.

The second lower hinge body 522 has a lower door frame hinge hole 522a that penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion and into which the lower door frame hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above, and a restriction piece 522b that extends upward from a position rearward of the lower door frame hinge hole 522a on the left edge of the horizontally extending portion and restricts the rotation range of the door frame 3. The lower door frame hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the upper door frame hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 at the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that it can rotate about a hinge, and to attach the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so that it can rotate about a hinge.

[4-4. Main body reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 80 and 81. The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 has a U-shaped cross section in plan view that is open on the right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross section. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is formed from an extruded metal profile.

Two left position restriction members 531 are attached to the main frame reinforcement frame 530, spaced apart vertically, at the rear of the section extending rightward from the front end. These members restrict the forward and vertical movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main frame base 501.

The main frame reinforcement frame 530 has a U-shaped front side that is open on the right side in plan view. It has a groove 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically. The rear left end of the left reinforcement frame 111 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into this groove 530a when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4. By inserting the left reinforcement frame 111 into the groove 530a, the gap between the main frame reinforcement frame 530 and the left reinforcement frame 111 becomes serpentine in plan view, preventing the insertion of illegal tools into the pachinko machine 1 from the left side. The main frame reinforcement frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 and prevents the insertion of illegal tools into the main frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side through the gap between the outer frame 2 and main frame 4.

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 84 and other figures. Figure 84(a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher as seen from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower front of the main body frame base unit 500 and is used to shoot game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. The ball launcher 540 can shoot game balls B with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 in the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 540 comprises a flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher mounting portion 501e of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500; a launch solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid attached to the rear surface of the right part of the launch base 541 when viewed from the front, with the rotation axis passing through the launch base 541 and extending forward; a striking hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation axis of the launch solenoid 542; and a launch rail 544 attached to the front of the launch base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left from near the tip of the striking hammer 543, along which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is designed so that game ball B is supplied from the ball supply unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the launching rail 544. When the handle 195 is rotated while game ball B is supplied to the right end of the upper surface of the launching rail 544, the launch solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the angle of rotation, causing the striking hammer 543 to strike the game ball B. The game ball B struck by the striking hammer 543 then travels through the launching rail 544 and is guided to the outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and is then struck into the play area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the play area 5a due to factors such as the impact strength of the game ball B, it will fall from between the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) into the foul ball receiving port 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, pass through the foul cover unit 150, and be ejected into the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Dispense base unit]
The dispensing base unit 550 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 85 etc. Figure 85(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit as seen from the rear. The dispensing base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main frame base unit 500.

The dispensing base unit 550 is equipped with a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 comprises a top panel 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-to-back direction, a left panel 551b extending downward from the left edge of the top panel 551a when viewed from the front with a length that is substantially the same width as the top panel, a right panel 551c extending downward from the right edge of the top panel 551a when viewed from the front with a short length that is substantially the same width as the top panel 551a, an upper back panel 551d extending downward from the rear edge of the top panel 551a to the same position as the bottom edge of the right panel 551c, and a left panel 551b extending downward from the right edge of the top panel 551a when viewed from the front with a short length that is substantially the same width as the top panel 551a. The dispensing base 551 comprises a left back panel 551e extending to the right from a position forward of the rear edge of 551b at a substantially constant width to the bottom, an inner panel 551f extending rearward from the right edge of the left back panel 551e to the same position as the rear edge of the left side panel 551b, a bottom panel 551g extending rightward from the front of the lower edge of the left side panel 551b to a position substantially coincident with the right edge of the left back panel 551e, and a connecting panel 551h connecting the right edge of the bottom panel 551g to the lower edge of the inner panel 551f. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed like a box that is open forward and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate 551a that extends left and right with a length approximately equal to the left-right width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main frame base 501, and a left plate 551b that extends up and down with a length approximately equal to the up-down height of the game board insertion opening 501b. The front ends of the top plate 551a, left plate 551b, and right plate 551c of the payout base 551 are attached to the rear side of the main frame base 501.

The dispensing base 551 also has a shallow recessed area that is open to the rear and extends vertically, defined by the left side plate 551b, the left back plate 551e, and the inner plate 551f, to which the dispensing unit 560 is attached. The dispensing base 551 also has a rear cover attachment portion 551i that protrudes to the right at the top of the right side of the inner plate 551f when viewed from the front, and to which the rear cover 640 is attached.

The dispensing base unit 550 comprises a ball tank 552, which is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, is box-shaped and extends left and right, and is open at the top, and a tank rail 553, which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 above the part of the dispensing base 551 that extends leftward and is groove-shaped and open at the top.

The dispensing base unit 550 also includes a first rail cover 554 attached midway in the left-right direction at the top end of the tank rail 553, a second rail cover 555 attached to the top end of the tank rail 553, spaced to the left of the first rail cover 554 when viewed from the front, and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, a ball straightening member 556 attached to the top end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and a ball stop member 557 attached to the bottom end of the tank rail 553 near the left end when viewed from the front.

The ball tank 552 is formed with a length in the left-right direction that is approximately half the left-right width of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-to-back direction that is shorter than the front-to-back depth of the top plate portion 551a. The ball tank 552 is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a, at a position towards the right in the left-to-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end is lower. The left end of the ball tank 552 is connected to the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the top surface of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551, near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. In a plan view, the tank rail 553 extends diagonally left and rearward from the right end, which is connected to the ball tank 552, so that its front-to-rear depth changes from several times the outer diameter of the game ball B to approximately one time, and then extends straight to the left, with its front-to-rear depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom of the tank rail 553 is sloped so that the left end is lower, and the left end of the bottom opens downward and is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

The upper end of the tank rail 553, which extends straight to the left, is inclined at a steeper angle to the horizontal than the bottom, so that the left end is lower at a height slightly greater than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left roughly coincides with the rear edge of the top plate 551a. A first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are intended to prevent the front-to-rear depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B inside the tank rail 553.

The ball straightening member 556 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, so that its end on the first rail cover 554 side can rotate around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction. The ball straightening member 556 is equipped with a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-to-right direction (see Figure 91). This straightening piece 556a slows the flow of game balls B on the upper tier of game balls B circulating in two tiers, and straightens them so that they flow in a single tier on the downstream side, preventing ball clogging even when the height inside the tank rail 553 is low.

The ball stopping member 557 is attached to the underside of the tank rail 553 near the left end when viewed from the front, so that it can slide left and right. By sliding it to the left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, preventing game balls B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit.

The payout base unit 550 also includes an external terminal board 558 attached to the left of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front, on the upper surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal board 558 is used to make an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the gaming hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 includes an earth connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b of the main frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 is connected to the earth connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. Figure 86(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as seen from the rear. Figure 87(a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit as seen from the front, with its main components disassembled, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit as seen from the rear, with its main components disassembled. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the left portion 551e of the back panel of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 comprises a ball guide unit 570 that guides game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a serpentine manner, a payout device 580 that is arranged below the ball guide unit 570 and pays out game balls B guided by the ball guide unit 570 one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward, and a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides game balls B that have passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 toward the door frame 3 or the board unit 620.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies game balls B, aligned in a row by the tank rail 553, to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball removal passage 580b that branches off from the payout passage 580a. Under normal conditions, game balls B are released from the payout passage 580a toward the upper full ball path unit 600 based on instructions from the payout control board 633, and are released from the ball removal passage 580b toward the upper full ball path unit 600 when the ball removal lever 593 is operated.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides downward game balls B released from the payout path 580a of the payout device 580 and game balls B released from the ball removal path 580b. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides game balls B released from the payout path 580a of the payout device 580 toward the door frame 3 via the upper full ball path unit 600, and guides game balls B released from the ball removal path 580b toward the base unit 620.

[4-7a. Ball Guidance Unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the left part 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is for receiving the game ball B from the tank rail 553 and guiding the game ball B toward the payout device 580.

The ball guide unit 570 comprises a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open to the front and has a meandering guide passage 570a through which game balls B can flow, a flat guide passage front cover 572 that closes the front of the guide unit base 571, a movable piece member 573 that is movable by game balls B flowing through the guide passage 570a, and a ball out detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of game balls B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573 (see Figure 91).

The ball guide unit 570 has a guide unit base 571 and guide path front cover 572 that are shaped like a rectangle extending vertically when viewed from the front. The guide path 570a opens upward near the left edge of the top surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the top edge to near the center of the height of the guide unit base 571, then bends to the right and extends downward in a serpentine manner, repeatedly folding back across the width of the guide unit base 571, before opening downward near the left edge of the bottom surface of the guide unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a is formed so that its depth in the front, back, right, and left directions and its width in the left and right directions are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game balls B, allowing the game balls B to be guided in a single file.

A movable piece member 573 is attached near the top of the ball guide unit 570 so that it can move forward and backward into the guide passage 570a. More specifically, the upper part of the movable piece member 573 is attached to the outer right part of the guide passage 570a when viewed from the front so that it can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward, and is formed so that a portion of its lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. When the game ball B abuts against the part of this movable piece member 573 that protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retracts from the guide passage 570a, so that it no longer protrudes.

The out-of-ball detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, but detects the movable piece member 573 when part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. Therefore, the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is in a detecting state when a game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detecting state when a game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

When the ball guide unit 570 is assembled to the main frame 4, the upstream end of the guide passage 570a is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guide passage 570a is connected to the upstream end of the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580. The ball guide unit 570 has a serpentine guide passage 570a that guides game balls B, so the guide passage 570a extends longer than the overall height of the ball guide unit 570, allowing many game balls B to be stored within the guide passage 570a. Furthermore, the ball guide unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of game balls B in the guide passage 570a using the ball out detection sensor 574, and can therefore detect the presence or absence of game balls B in the ball tank 552 via the guide passage 570a.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The dispensing device 580 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 to 89. Figure 88 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit, cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the fore-and-aft direction. Figure 89(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the fore-and-aft direction when the ball removal movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line A-A in (a). The dispensing device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the underside of the ball guide unit 570 on the rear surface of the left part 551e of the back panel of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The payout device 580 comprises a payout device main body 581, which is box-shaped and open to the rear, and has a payout passage 580a through which game balls B can flow and a ball removal passage 580b that branches off midway from the payout passage 580a; a flat payout device rear cover 582 that closes the payout device main body 581 from the rear; and a shallow, box-shaped payout device front cover 583 that is attached to the front of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear.

The dispensing device 580 also includes a dispensing motor 584 attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581, with its rotation shaft protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583; a spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached to the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584; a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583; a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 meshing with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583; The device comprises a dispensing gear member 588 which has a spur gear-shaped dispensing gear 588a meshing with the transmission gear 587 and multiple detection pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a and is rotatably attached between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, a dispensing blade 589 which rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear cover 582 and has multiple blade pieces 589a which protrude into the dispensing passage 580a, and a blade rotation detection sensor 590 which is attached to the rear side of the dispensing device main body 581 and detects the detection pieces 588b of the dispensing gear member 588.

Furthermore, the payout device 580 is equipped with a payout detection sensor 591 that detects game balls B and is attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, a ball removal movable piece 592 that is attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 at the point where it branches off from the payout passage 580a and can open and close the ball removal passage 580b, and a ball removal lever 593 that is attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 so that it can slide up and down and can be held in a position where the ball removal movable piece 592 closes the ball removal passage 580b.

The dispensing device 580 has a rectangular shape that extends vertically in a plan view. The width of the dispensing device 580 in the left-right direction is greater to the right when viewed from the front than the width of the ball guiding unit 570 in the left-right direction.

As shown in Figure 88, when viewed from behind, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens downward at a position near the right edge in the left-right direction. The dispensing passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top for about one-third of its total height, gradually moving leftward as it moves downward from the upstream end, then bending slightly diagonally downward to the right, before bending at about one-third of its width and extending approximately vertically downward toward the center (axis of rotation) of the dispensing blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, it bends to the right when viewed from behind at a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, then extends downward in an arc concentric with the payout blade 589 so that a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is formed between it and the outer periphery of the payout blade 589, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the payout blade 589 when viewed from behind.

A dispensing detection sensor 591 is located within the dispensing passage 580a, below the dispensing blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball removal passage 580b extends diagonally downward from the upstream end of the dispensing passage 580a, branches off at a point where it bends to the right, extends vertically along the left edge as viewed from the rear, and opens downward near the left end of the bottom as viewed from the rear.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 face each other at the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the point where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b branch off, protruding rearward and forward from each other to form a gap narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. They are each equipped with a main body guide wall 581a and a rear cover guide wall 582a that are formed to connect with the left side walls of the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b in a rear view. The main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a are formed to the left of the point where the payout passage 580a branches off from the ball removal passage 580b and extends to the right in a rear view at a height approximately one-third of the way up. The main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a are curved diagonally upward and left in a rear view, and are formed to mainly constitute the side walls of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball removal movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a.

The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right side of the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device main body 581 when viewed from behind, at the point where it extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, first transmission gear 586, second transmission gear 587, and dispensing gear member 588 are located in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered by the dispensing device front cover 583. The dispensing gear member 588 has three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward, spaced circumferentially at 120-degree intervals.

The payout blade 589 is positioned between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582. The payout blade 589 has three blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape, spaced circumferentially at 120-degree intervals. The blade pieces 589a extend from above within the payout passage 580a toward the rotation axis, and then extend to the right when viewed from behind, protruding into the payout passage 580a so that the distance between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Between the three blade pieces 589a, the payout blade 589 has a ball containing portion 589b recessed toward the center in the shape of an arc with a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B. This ball containing portion 589b is designed to contain only one game ball B. As a result, the vane 589 can restrict the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving downstream of the payout vane 589 by using the vane piece 589a, and can also move the game ball B contained in the ball container 589b downstream by rotating clockwise when viewed from the rear.

The dispensing gear member 588 and dispensing blade 589 are attached to the dispensing device rear cover 582 and the dispensing device front cover 583 so that they can rotate together on the same axis. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is located to the left of the rotation axis of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588, which rotates together with the dispensing blade 589, thereby detecting the rotation of the dispensing blade 589.

The upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending forward and backward at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a. The ball removal movable piece 592 is bent in an L-shape and is attached so that its recessed side faces into the dispensing passage 580a. The ball removal movable piece 592 is formed so that its depth in the forward and backward directions is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, and it can pass through the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a and protrude into or retract out of the ball removal passage 580b.

The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear cover 582 so that it can slide up and down near the top end of the ball removal movable piece 592, to the left when viewed from behind. A portion of the ball removal lever 593 protrudes rearward, penetrating the dispensing device rear cover 582, and can be slid by operating this protruding portion. When the ball removal lever 593 is positioned at its lower end, its lower portion can abut against the ball removal movable piece 592, restricting the ball removal movable piece 592 from rotating clockwise when viewed from behind, allowing the ball removal movable piece 592 to close the ball removal passage 580b. When the ball removal lever 593 is positioned at its upper end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated outward from the ball removal passage 580b, opening the ball removal passage 580b (see Figure 89).

When the ball removal lever 593 is raised and the ball removal movable piece 592 is made rotatable, the game balls B that had been strung together upstream of the ball removal movable piece 592 pass over the ball removal movable piece 592 and flow down toward the ball removal passage 580b. At this time, because the ball removal passage 580b extends in a straight line from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game balls B that have flowed down from upstream of the payout passage 580a flow straight down toward the ball removal passage 580b. Furthermore, because the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b is connected to the island equipment, there is nothing to restrict the flow of the game balls B, such as the payout vane 589, so the game balls B flow down faster than toward the payout passage 580a.

In this way, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down the ball removal passage 580b at high speed, causing the game ball B to forcefully abut against the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b. However, since the ball removal movable piece 592 can move outside the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582, the force of this abutment causes the ball removal movable piece 592 to move outside the ball removal passage 580b. Therefore, the ball removal movable piece 592 will not be pinched between the wall surface of the ball removal passage 580b and the game ball B. This prevents the game ball B from acting with strong force on the ball removal movable piece 592, and suppresses a decrease in durability or damage to the ball removal movable piece 592 due to a collision with the game ball B.

As a result, the ball removal movable piece 592 is less likely to be damaged, allowing more game balls B to be discharged more quickly to the island equipment downstream of the ball removal passage 580b, thereby minimizing the increase in time required for replacement and maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 and reducing the burden on the gaming hall.

In addition, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, it moves out of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, which is spaced closer than the game ball B. Therefore, when the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b and the ball removal movable piece 592 moves outward through the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, even if the game ball B moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a along with the ball removal movable piece 592, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, which is spaced closer than the game ball B.

The game ball B is prevented from moving outward by the gap between the main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a, causing the game ball B to separate from the ball removal movable piece 592. The subsequent movement of the ball removal movable piece 592 is due to inertial force, so no strong force acts on the ball removal movable piece 592, making it less likely to be damaged. Furthermore, the game ball B will not fly out of the ball removal passage 580b from between the main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a, ensuring that the game ball B can flow reliably downstream of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the underside of the payout device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left part 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full ball path unit 600 is used to guide game balls B released downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610. The upper full ball path unit 600 is formed in a rectangular shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full ball path unit 600 comprises a box-shaped upper full base 601 attached to the dispensing base 551 and open at the rear, a box-shaped upper full cover 602 attached to the rear of the upper full base 601 and open at the front, and a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the top end of the upper full cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full base 601 protrudes to the right from the right edge when viewed from the front, and comprises a rear cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the rear cover.

The upper full-ball path unit 600 also has an upper payout ball receiving passage 600a that opens upward near the left end of the top surface when viewed from the front and extends downward along the left edge from the bottom to a height of approximately 2/3 of the total height, an upper ball storage passage 600b that is connected to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, extends to the right when viewed from the front to about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to a height of approximately 1/6 of the total height, and an upper ball storage passage 600b that is connected to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and extends to the right when viewed from the front to about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to a height of approximately 1/6 of the total height, and an upper ball storage passage 600b that is connected to the left side of the center of the left-right direction of the upper ball storage passage 600b when viewed from the front. It is equipped with an upper normal dispensing passage 600c that extends downward and opens downward at the underside, an upper full-tank dispensing passage 600d that is adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c and extends downward from the right side of the center of the upper ball storage passage 600b when viewed from the front and opens downward at the underside, and an upper ball removal passage 600e that opens upward near the right end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, extends downward approximately vertically, and then opens downward near the right end of the lower surface (see Figure 91).

On the underside of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side when viewed from the front, the upper normal payout path 600c, the upper full payout path 600d, and the upper ball removal path 600e are lined up in this order and open downward. When the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving path 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the payout path 580a in the payout device 580, and the upstream end of the upper ball removal path 600e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal path 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, game balls B released (paid out) from the payout path 580a of the payout device 580 pass through the upper payout ball receiving path 600a and the upper ball storage path 600b, and are released downward from either the upper normal payout path 600c or the upper full payout path 600d. In addition, game balls B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 are released downward through the upper ball removal passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 toward the door frame 3 or toward the base unit 620. The lower full ball path unit 610 extends in the front-to-rear direction so that the front end is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full ball path unit 610 is equipped with a lower full base 611 that has a lower normal dispensing path 610a, a lower full dispensing path 610b, and a lower ball removal path 610c, extends in the front-to-back direction, and is open upward; a lower full cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full base 611; a dispensing path opening/closing door 613 that is rotatably attached to the front end of the lower full base 611 around an axis extending front-to-back and that can open and close the downstream end openings of the lower normal dispensing path 610a and the lower full dispensing path 610b; and a closing spring 614 that biases the dispensing path opening/closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end openings of the lower normal dispensing path 610a and the lower full dispensing path 610b.

The lower full ball path unit 610 has, on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end, the lower normal dispensing path 610a, the lower full dispensing path 610b, and the lower ball removal path 610c, lined up in order from left to right when viewed from the front, with their upstream ends opening upward. The lower normal dispensing path 610a and the lower full dispensing path 610b extend forward side by side and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full dispensing path 610b extends forward slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing path 610a. The lower ball removal path 610c extends forward along the right side of the lower full dispensing path 610b when viewed from the front, and opens to the right halfway in the fore-and-aft direction.

The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is pivotally mounted between the front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b. This dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is biased in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 614, and in its normal state closes the front end openings (downstream end openings) of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is equipped with an operating protrusion 613a that protrudes forward. When viewed from the front, the operating protrusion 613a is shaped like a short arc centered on the rotation center of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613, and its front end surface is inclined so as to protrude forward as it approaches the counterclockwise end. This operating protrusion 613a is formed to abut against the door opening/closing abutment 150f of the door cover unit 150 on the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout path 610a, lower full payout path 610b, and lower ball removal path 610c, which open upward at the upper rear end, are located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout path 600c, upper full payout path 600d, and upper ball removal path 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600, respectively. As a result, game balls B released downward from the upper normal payout path 600c flow through the lower normal payout path 610a, game balls B released downward from the upper full payout path 600d flow through the lower full payout path 610b, and game balls B released downward from the upper ball removal path 600e flow through the lower ball removal path 610c.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b open immediately after the through ball passage 150a and full ball receiving port 150b of the fall cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. The downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c opens to face the ball removal guide section 627, which opens to the left in the base unit 620b of the board unit 620.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is in its normal state (when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4), the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing path opening/closing door 613 abuts against the door opening/closing abutment 150f of the fall cover unit 150, causing it to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing path 610a and the lower full dispensing path 610b are open, and they are connected to the through ball path 150a and full ball receiving port 150b of the fall cover unit 150.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 moves away from the door opening/closing abutment 150f of the fall cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front due to the biasing force of the closing spring 614, closing the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b. In this state, game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b can no longer move forward from their respective front-end openings. As a result, even when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4, game balls B will not spill out of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of gaming ball B in the payout unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 91. Figure 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the main frame. When assembled to the main frame 4, the payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551. In the normal state, the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is positioned at the lower end, closing the ball removal path 580b branching off from the payout path 580a at the branching point. In addition, in the lower full-ball path unit 610, the payout path opening/closing door 613 is in the open state.

A predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the ball tank 552, which is open upward, from the gaming hall island equipment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the detection of a ball shortage by the ball exhaustion detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are aligned in a row by the tank rail 553 and sent through the guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game balls B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout blade 589, and multiple game balls B become trapped upstream of the payout blade 589.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 presses against the movable piece member 573, causing the ball cut detection sensor 574 to detect the movable piece member 573. This indicates that the game ball B is stored at least in the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the dispensing blade 589.

In this state, when the payout motor 584 rotates the payout blade 589 in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, the game ball B stored in the ball storage section 589b moves in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear and is released downstream of the payout blade 589 in the payout passage 580a. The game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball storage section 589b) is then detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball passage unit 600.

Under normal conditions, game balls B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 flow through the upper ball storage passage 600b and down to the upper normal payout passage 600c located directly below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a. Game balls B that flow down to the upper normal payout passage 600c then pass through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the fall cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, before being released into the upper tray 201 from the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 in the tray unit 200.

When a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the upper tray 201 becomes full of game balls B, it becomes impossible to release the game balls B forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, and the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 become stuck in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610.As more game balls B are paid out, they also become stuck in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full ball path unit 600, which is connected upstream to the lower normal payout passage 610a. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with game balls B and more game balls B are paid out, the game balls B begin to accumulate in the upper ball storage passage 600b, which is connected to the upper normal payout passage 600c on the upstream side, and begin to flow down the upper full payout passage 600d, which is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

The game balls B that flow down the upper full payout passage 600d then pass through the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 and are received by the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. The game balls B received in the full ball receiving port 150b are then released into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, ball discharge port 150d, and lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211. This means that if the upper tray 201 is full of game balls B and more game balls B are paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower tray 202.

When the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B and further game balls B cannot be released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, if more game balls B are dispensed, the game balls B will become trapped and stored in the storage passage 150e of the far cover unit 150 upstream of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B have accumulated in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. This notifies the player by voice (e.g., "Please remove the balls!") that the upper tray 201 and lower tray 202 are full of game balls B, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is no longer in detection mode.

When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 need to be removed from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement, the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is slid upward from its lowest position to its highest position. The lower end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is then pushed by the game ball B, causing it to rotate clockwise when viewed from the rear, and the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a and is pushed out of the ball removal passage 580b. This allows the game ball B to enter the ball removal passage 580b, which branches off from the payout passage 580a, and the game balls B on the upstream side are released downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, the game ball B flowing down contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a more strongly than it does the ball removal movable piece 592, making the ball removal movable piece 592 less likely to be damaged.

The game ball B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, and is released from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide section 627 of the base unit 620, and then passes through the discharged ball receiving section 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to be discharged to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the island equipment of the gaming hall).

[4-8. Board unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 92 to 96. Figure 92(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the rear. Figure 93 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from below and behind. Figure 94 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as seen from the front, with each main component disassembled, and Figure 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as seen from the rear, with each main component disassembled. Figure 96 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the lower part of the pachinko machine, cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 comprises a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, below the game board mounting portion 501c; a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker unit 620a from behind; a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b; a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c; and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover part of the payout control unit 620d from behind.

The speaker unit 620a comprises a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, below the game board mounting section 501c; a main frame speaker 622 attached to the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 near the left edge when viewed from the front, facing forward; and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main frame speaker 622, and open to the front.

The speaker cover 621 extends left and right and is equipped with a circular speaker mounting portion 621a that penetrates from front to back near the left edge when viewed from the front and is composed of multiple slits that extend up and down; a front space recess 621b that is recessed so that it bulges forward from the rear on the right side of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front; and a connection portion 621c that protrudes downward from the underside of the front space recess 621b, extends left and right, and opens diagonally downward and rearward.

The main frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side, facing forward. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at a 45-degree angle so that its lower end coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. The main frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs low-frequency sounds.

The speaker box 623 is shaped like a container that is open to the front, with the part behind the main frame speaker 622 protruding rearward the most, and is formed so that the protrusion decreases in a stepped manner toward the right as viewed from the front. This ensures that there is sufficient space behind the speaker box 623 to the right of the center as viewed from the front, allowing the placement of the base unit 620b, power supply unit 620c, etc. The speaker box 623 is formed to cover (close) the entire rear surface except for the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621.

The speaker unit 620a, together with the speaker cover 621 and speaker box 623, forms part of an enclosure 624 that contains the sound output rearward from the main frame speaker 622. This enclosure 624 has a front recessed space 621b formed in the speaker cover 621 that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front. Therefore, even though the speaker box 623 is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount of rearward protrusion decreases as it moves to the right, a sufficiently large space is secured to the right of the main frame speaker 622.

When the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a is connected to the connecting tube portion 43a with the sealing member 48 sandwiched therebetween, thereby connecting the space behind the main frame speaker 622 with the interior space 40a of the outer frame 2's curtain board. Therefore, a spacious enclosure 624 can be formed behind the main frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, speaker box 623, front curtain board member 42, and rear curtain board member 43, allowing sound output rearward from the main frame speaker 622 to be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a in the front curtain board member 42.

In more detail, as described above, in speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main frame speaker 622 (part of the enclosure 624) extends to the right when viewed from the front with a relatively wide depth and is connected to the lower frame assembly 40 via the connection portion 621c and the connecting tube portion 43a. This means that sound output rearward from the main frame speaker 622 can be transmitted to the lower frame assembly 40 without attenuation, particularly in the low-frequency range. The transmitted low-frequency range can then be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a in the front panel member 42.

In this case, the sound emitted forward from the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 is emitted in an inverted phase, so that it resonates to amplify the sound output from the front of the main frame speaker 622 and emitted from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200. This allows for the output of a loud sound with deep bass even though the diameter of the main frame speaker 622 is small.

In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, allowing the player to hear deep bass sounds. This allows the player to hear a rich bass sound from the sound output from the front of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the platter unit 200, and the sound output from the rear of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2.

The speaker unit 620a also has a through hole 621d formed in the speaker cover 621, penetrating in the front-to-rear direction at a position between the lower part of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recessed portion for space 621b, and a through tube 623a formed in the speaker box 623, which extends cylindrically and penetrates in the front-to-rear direction, communicating with the through hole 621d. When assembled into the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other, and the enclosure 624 is independent. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 comprises a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a rear base 626 attached to the rear side of the front base 625, with the power supply unit 620c attached to its rear surface.

The base unit 620b is formed by the front base 625 and rear base 626 working together, and is equipped with a ball removal guide section 627 that receives game balls B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and guides them to the right when viewed from the front, a discharged ball receiving section 628 that opens upward to the right when viewed from the front, downstream of the ball removal guide section 627, and receives game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5, and a ball discharge outlet 629 that discharges game balls B downward after passing through the ball removal guide section 627 and the discharged ball receiving section 628.

The upstream end of the ball removal guide section 627 opens to the left at the top of the left side when viewed from the front, and the downstream end opens to the left end of the discharged ball receiving section 628. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the opening of the upstream end of the ball removal guide section 627 faces and coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, and can receive game balls B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c and guide them to the discharged ball receiving section 628.

The ejected ball receiving section 628 is open upward and extends left and right. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving section 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball removal guide section 627 at the left end when viewed from the front, and is sloped downward toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides game balls B removed from the ball tank 552 and game balls B ejected from the game board 5 to the right when viewed from the front using the ball guide section 627 and ejected ball receiver 628, before ejecting them downward from the ball ejection port 629, making it easier to secure a larger space to the left of the center when viewed from the front. This allows for a larger space in the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a, allowing players to hear a sound with richer bass than conventional pachinko machines.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover 631 attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630.

The payout control unit 620d comprises a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (see Figure 96) housed within the payout control board box 632. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to payout commands from the main control board 1310 of the gaming board 5, such as pressing the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 of the tray unit 200, to pay out the specified number of game balls B to the player (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The payout control board box 632 is designed to leave traces of opening and closing. This makes it possible to detect any unauthorized modifications to the payout control board 633, thereby providing a greater deterrent to fraudulent activity.

The interface unit 620e comprises a board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634 so as to cover the rear side of the interface board 635.

The board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at the portion that protrudes furthest to the rear, behind the main frame speaker 622. One end (on the main frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 is connected to the interface board 635. The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, etc., as well as to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right of the board base 634 (interface board 635) when viewed from the front, covering part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The rear cover 640 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 75 to 81. The rear cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached. The right side of the rear cover 640 in a front view is rotatably attached around an axis that extends vertically to the rear end that extends vertically of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501, and the left side is attached to the rear cover attachment portion 551i of the payout base 551 and the rear cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The rear cover 640 is formed in the shape of a flat plate that extends vertically and horizontally, with the right edge bent forward when viewed from the front. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the rear surface is positioned approximately flush with the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d of the payout base 551. The rear cover 640 has multiple slits 641 that penetrate from front to back and extend vertically. In this embodiment, the rear cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, allowing the interior of the main body frame 4 to be seen from the rear of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 97. Figure 97(a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main frame base 501 of the main frame 4 and locks the main frame 4 and the door frame 3, and the main frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 comprises a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side of the rear extension 501j of the main frame base 501 and extends vertically; multiple door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the door frame 3; multiple outer frame hooks 653 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the outer frame 2; and a transmission cylinder 654 that protrudes forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 and moves the door frame hooks 652 or outer frame hooks 653 up and down depending on the direction of rotation.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from a position above the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651 and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main frame 4, the multiple (three) door frame hooks 652, transmission cylinder 654, and outer frame unlocking lever 656 protrude forward from the front surface of the main frame base 501. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main frame base 501, and when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4, its front end engages with the rotation transmission member 133 of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3, transmitting the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 and causing it to rotate.

The locking unit 650 has multiple (three) door frame hooks 652 that engage with the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and multiple (two) outer frame hooks 653 that engage with the upper hook member 24 and lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, inserting a key that corresponds to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 and rotating it counterclockwise as viewed from the front causes the multiple door frame hooks 652 to move upward via the transfer cylinder 654, unlocking the door frame 3 from the main frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the multiple outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transfer cylinder 654, unlocking the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2. With the door frame 3 open relative to the main frame 4, sliding the outer frame unlock lever 656 downward causes the multiple outer frame hooks 653 to move downward, unlocking the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2. In this way, the lock between the main frame 4 and door frame 3, or between the main frame 4 and outer frame 2, can be unlocked.

When locking the gap between the main frame 4 and the door frame 3, or between the main frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are tapered at their tips. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4, or the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 move downward or upward to overcome the hook member 116, upper hook member 24, and lower hook member 25, and then enter a locked state due to the biasing force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 98 to 105. Figure 98(a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line B-B in (a). Figure 99 is an enlarged view of the upper part of the main body frame in a perspective view from the rear. Figure 100(a) is a perspective view of the ball tank assembled with the tank rail, etc., as seen from the front and bottom, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) as seen from the front and bottom. Figure 101 is an exploded perspective view of Figure 100(a) as seen from the front. Figure 102 is an explanatory diagram showing the area through which game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame flow. Figure 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. Figure 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls into the bypass passage in the upper part of the main body frame. Figure 105 is an enlarged view of the tank rail area in a perspective view of the main body frame seen from the rear of the hinge side.

As described above, the main frame 4 comprises a frame-shaped main frame base 501 whose rear portion can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and which is detachably and hinge-rotatably attached to the outer frame 2 by the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520, and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5; an inverted L-shaped payout base 551 attached along the upper and left edges of the rear side of the main frame base 501 when viewed from the front; a box-shaped (container-shaped) ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551, extending left and right, and open upward; and a groove-shaped tank 552 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552, extending leftward and open upward. It comprises a tank rail 553, a first rail cover 554 attached to part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 spaced to the left of the first rail cover 554 when viewed from the front, a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 for paying out game balls B to the player.

The ball tank 552 has a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from above, a bottom wall 552a that slopes so that the left side is lower when viewed from the front, a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c that extend upward from the front and rear edges of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e that extend upward from both the left and right edges of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed like a container with an open top. The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from island facilities such as an amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

The spherical tank 552 also has an overflow section 552f that is cut out from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining upper outer edge. This overflow section 552f is formed over approximately three-quarters of the left-right length of the front wall 552b, from the end of the left side wall 552d to the end on the opposite side (the right side wall 552e).

When viewed from the front, the right end (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the interior of the ball tank 552, and the downstream side extends to one side (left) in the left-right direction, away from the ball tank 552. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guide section 553a that extends from the upstream side to the downstream end at its bottom and is shaped so that only one game ball B can pass through in the width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game ball B. The main guide section 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the left when viewed from the front. In plan view, the main guide section 553a extends parallel to an axis extending leftward from the right end to a position that is approximately 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction, then extends diagonally from the right end to a position that is approximately 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction, moving rearward as it moves leftward, and then extends from there in a crank shape that extends parallel to the axis extending left-right to the left end. In the main guide section 553a of the tank rail 553, a section extending parallel to the axis extending laterally from the left end to the right extends to the top end with the same width, and the upper side is closed off by attaching a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, and a ball rectifying member 556 to the upper end of this section. Furthermore, in the section where the upper side is closed off, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which game ball B flows decreases toward the downstream end (left end), and at the downstream end it is formed to a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of game ball B) that allows the flow of only one game ball B.

The tank rail 553 extends from its upstream end above the main guide section 553a to a location where the upper side is closed. It bulges out wider than the width of the main guide section 553a so that multiple game balls B are lined up in a width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game balls B, and has a bulging section 553b that narrows in width from the upstream end toward the downstream side to match the width of the main guide section 553a. This bulging section 553b allows multiple game balls B, which are spread out in width on the upstream side, to be aligned in width so that the width is the width of a single game ball B as they move downstream. The bulging section 553b is also formed so that its width narrows from the upper end toward the lower main guide section 553a. As a result, the tank rail 553 can align multiple game balls B flowing through the bulging section 553b in a single line in the width direction as they move downstream and downward.

The bulge portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a three-dimensionally curved shape with its center of curvature located on the inner side. Because the center of curvature of the bulge portion 553b is located higher than the main guide portion 553a, a slightly chamfered corner is formed at the boundary between the main guide portion 553a and the bulge portion 553b on the tank rail 553. Furthermore, the bulge portion 553b is curved with a greater curvature downstream than upstream. For this reason, when a game ball B flows through the three-dimensionally curved bulge portion 553b, the direction of the reaction force from the bulge portion 553b acting on it changes depending on the position of the bulge portion 553b it abuts, thereby suppressing ball jamming within the bulge portion 553b. In more detail, if bulge portion 553b were formed into a shape that extends uniformly, a reaction force would always act in a constant direction from the inner surface of bulge portion 553b on game balls B circulating within bulge portion 553b, making it difficult for the reaction force to disperse. As a result, game balls B inside are always pushed in a constant direction, making it difficult for the game balls B to escape and making ball jamming more likely to occur. In contrast, because bulge portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of bulge portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. This distributes the pushing direction of multiple game balls B circulating inside, making it easier for the pushed game balls B to escape and making ball jamming less likely to occur.

The tank rail 553 is also made of a transparent material, allowing the interior to be viewed from the outside. This means that even if ball jamming occurs within the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B within the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, allowing the location of the jammed balls to be quickly identified. This allows ball jamming within the tank rail 553 to be quickly resolved, minimizing interruptions to gameplay due to ball jamming and preventing a loss of interest in the game due to interruptions. Furthermore, because the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 can be viewed from behind through the tank rail 553. Therefore, if a malfunction occurs in the movable presentation unit of the game board 5, the status of the transmission mechanism, such as the drive motor, gears, and belts, can be confirmed while the game board 5 is still attached to the main frame 4, achieving the same effects as those described above.

The main frame 4 is provided in front of the ball tank 552, extending in the front-to-rear direction, and extending outward (to the left) from the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-to-right direction (the left side when viewed from the front).It is equipped with an overflow surface portion 501m, whose rear end is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and whose front end is higher in order to return game balls B that have overflowed forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, and a bypass passage 552g, which extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to above the bulge portion 553b on the tank rail 553, whose upper side is open, and which is sloped so that its rear end is lower and also sloped so that the side facing away from the ball tank 552 (the left side) is lower in the left-to-right direction, and which guides some of the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m.

The main body frame 4 also includes a discharge section 551j, which is located on either the left or right outer side of the bypass passage 552g, opposite the left wall 552d of the ball tank 552, and has a width greater than the outer diameter of the game ball B and a bottom surface lower than the open upper portion of the tank rail 553; an external terminal board 558, which is located on the opposite side of the bypass passage 552g across the discharge section 551j and lower than the overflow surface 501m, and has multiple wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear; and a terminal cover 551k which covers the upper sides of the multiple wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558) and has an upper surface which extends horizontally at a position higher than the overflow surface 501m.

The overflow surface 501m is formed on the main frame base 501. The overflow surface 501m extends rearward in a flat plate shape from a position two to four times the outer diameter of the game ball B below the upper edge of the rear surface of the base main body 501a, which has a vertically extending rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The overflow surface 501m is formed with a left-right length that is approximately one-third of the left-right length of the main frame base 501, and its left end when viewed from the front is located to the right of one-third of the total left-right length from the left end of the main frame base 501. The overflow surface 501m is formed so that its height from the front end to the rear end is approximately one-half the outer diameter of the game ball B. When the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, a gap approximately twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between this overflow surface 501m and the outer frame upper member 30.

The main frame base 501 is located on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m and has flat left and right step portions 501n and 501o that extend approximately horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface 501m, and a plurality of ribs 501p that extend in the front-to-rear direction on both the left and right outer sides of the left and right step portions 501n and 501o, with their upper ends higher than those of the left and right step portions 501n and 501o, and are arranged in a row in the left-to-right direction at intervals narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The left step portion 501n is shorter in the left-to-right direction than its length in the front-to-rear direction. Furthermore, the left step portion 501n is inclined so that the rear right corner is slightly lower than the horizontal plane when viewed from the front. The right step portion 501o is longer in the left-to-right direction than its length in the front-to-rear direction. Additionally, the right step 501o is inclined so that the rear left corner is slightly lower than the horizontal plane when viewed from the front.

The multiple ribs 501p on the main frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the gap between the outer frame 2 and the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 is formed at a height narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the main frame base 501 is assembled to the main frame 4, in a front view, the right end of the overflow surface 501m is aligned left-right with the right end of the overflow section 552f of the spherical tank 552, the left end of the overflow surface 501m is aligned left-right with the left end of the bypass passage 552g, and the right end of the right step 501o is aligned left-right with the right side wall 552e of the spherical tank 552.

The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the spherical tank 552. Note that, below, the container-like area surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, front wall 552b, rear wall 552c, left side wall 552d, and right side wall 552e will be referred to simply as the spherical tank 552. The bypass passage 552g has a passage surface 552h that extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552 in a flat plate-like shape. The passage surface 552h is sloped so that its front end is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and its rear end is lower, and a weir portion that extends upward from the edge of the passage surface 552h opposite the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear edge of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g extends rearward at its left end (toward the weir portion 552i) in a front view to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the spherical tank 552, and extends obliquely forward from the left end to the right end. Note that the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may be horizontal rather than inclined left and right.

When assembled to the main frame 4, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends along the front end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends diagonally in the left-right direction, in a crank-like shape. In other words, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends diagonally in the left-right direction. As a result, the flow direction of the game ball B guided rearward by the bypass passage 552g changes from the diagonal rear end to a direction perpendicular to the diagonal rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends approximately parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the flow direction of the game ball B within the tank rail 553). Therefore, the game ball B is released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction approximately perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, allowing the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g to be received by a wider portion of the tank rail 553. Furthermore, because game balls B are supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction approximately perpendicular (perpendicular to) the direction in which the game balls B flow, it is less likely that game balls B from the bypass passage 552g will clog the tank rail 553.

The bypass passage 552g extends diagonally from left to right so that its rear end moves rearward as it approaches the downstream side of the tank rail 553. Therefore, when a game ball B is released from the bypass passage 552g toward the tank rail 553, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be released toward the upstream side, where the tank rail 553 is wider, rather than the downstream side, where the tank rail 553 is narrower. By releasing the game ball B into the wider section, it is possible to prevent ball jamming within the tank rail 553.

In addition, the area on the tank rail 553 where the game balls B are guided by the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the rear of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the left part of the rear wall 552c when viewed from the front. Game balls B that pass under the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) from inside the ball tank 552 flow through this area. For this reason, in the area behind the bypass passage 552g on the tank rail 553, the height of multiple game balls B stacked vertically does not exceed the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). Therefore, space (empty space) can be secured downstream of the ball tank 552 on the tank rail 553, that is, at the rear end of the bypass passage 552g, allowing game balls B to be stacked upward. As a result, game balls B guided rearward by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and game balls B will not spill rearward from the tank rail 553.

The spherical tank 552 has a flat guide surface 552j that extends downward to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow section 552f on the left wall 552d within the area surrounded by the front wall 552b, rear wall 552c, and left side wall 552d. The guide surface 552j extends from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c in the front-to-rear direction. Additionally, the guide surface portion 552j is formed in such a way that, in a front view, its right edge extends diagonally rearward from a position approximately one-third of the total length of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b, to a position approximately one-ninth of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction, and to a position approximately one-half of the total length of the front wall 552b from the front wall 552b to the left side wall 552d, and then extends parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, and from there extends parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-to-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position approximately one-third of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-to-right direction.

In plan view, the spherical tank 552 has an opening 552k formed vertically in an area enclosed by the right edge of the guide surface portion 552j, which is shaped as described above, and a straight line connecting the end of the right edge on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The spherical tank 552 also has flat flange portions 552l extending outward in the left-right and up-down directions on the same plane as the front wall 552b at the front end of the right wall 552e and at the front end of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. The upper edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edges of the two flange portions 552l are higher than the upper edges of the left wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the upper surfaces of the left step 501n and right step 501o of the main frame base 501).

When the spherical tank 552 and tank rail 553 are assembled, the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the spherical tank 552. Furthermore, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends left and right in a crank-like shape in a plan view, and the portion to its left that extends straight left and right, are located rearward (protruding) from the spherical tank 552. The rear end edge of the left-hand bypass passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends left and right in a crank-like shape.

The discharge section 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the discharge section 551j extends rearward from the rear side of the flange section 552l on the left side of the spherical tank 552 (as viewed from the front) to the tank rail 553, so that it descends in a stepped manner rearward from a height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the spherical tank 552. Then, it extends leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (a position near the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction), and then extends rearward.

The external terminal board 558 has multiple wire connection terminals 558a attached to its rear surface, lined up in the left-right direction. These wire connection terminals 558a are one-touch terminals whose gripping portion opens by operating a lever to grasp the tip of an electrical wire. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the external terminal board 558 is located in front of the area on the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed by the first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, and ball straightening member 556. A terminal cover 551k, which covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558 (multiple wire connection terminals 558a), is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at approximately the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the effects of the upper part of the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained. First, as shown by the white arrows in Figure 102, the overflow surface 501m, left step 501n, right step 501o, and bypass passage 552g are inclined so that the rear ends of the overflow surface 501m and bypass passage 552g are lower, and the rear right corner of the left step 501n and the rear left corner of the right step 501o are respectively lower. Furthermore, the bottom wall 552a and tank rail 553 (main guide section 553a) of the ball tank 552 are inclined so that the left end is lower when viewed from the front. Furthermore, the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end, opposite the bottom wall 552a, is lower.

As the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases due to supply from the island equipment, they first flow out over the overflow section 552f, which is the lowest part of the outer periphery's upper edge, and out the outside (front) of the ball tank 552. The game balls B that overflow from the ball tank 552 can escape into the overflow surface section 501m, and the game balls B that flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface section 501m can be returned into the ball tank 552 due to the slope of the overflow surface section 501m (see Figure 103). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent any further increase in game balls B within the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress game balls B from pressing against each other strongly within the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure), and it is possible to prevent blockages (so-called ball jamming) caused by game balls B interlocking with each other within the ball tank 552.

In addition, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 onto the overflow surface 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. This prevents the game balls B in the ball tank 552 from exerting a strong backward pressure on them due to the game balls B that have accumulated on the overflow surface 501m, preventing the game balls B from clogging inside the ball tank 552. In addition, since the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to prevent game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m from spilling outside (to the rear) of the main body frame 4. This prevents game balls B that have spilled outside the main body frame 4 from becoming trapped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, preventing the main body frame 4 from opening or closing.

Furthermore, some of the game balls B that overflow from the ball tank 552 onto the overflow surface 501m can be guided downstream of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position along the left side away from the ball tank 552.This means that the flow (pressure) of the game balls B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g can be directed downstream of the tank rail 553, preventing the game balls B from pressing against each other too strongly within the tank rail 553 and preventing the game balls B from clogging.

In addition, the height of the remaining upper edge of the outer periphery of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow section 552f is made higher than the overflow section 552f, so that the upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is higher than the overflow section 552f, i.e., the rear end of the overflow surface 501m. As a result, game balls B that overflow from the ball tank 552, overflow into the overflow surface 501m, and then flow from the overflow surface 501m to the bypass passage 552g are blocked by the left side wall 552d on one side of the ball tank 552, preventing them from returning from the bypass passage 552g to the ball tank 552 side. This prevents the game balls B on the bypass passage 552g side from pressing against the game balls B inside the ball tank 552 and causing clogging of the game balls B inside the ball tank 552.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is higher than the rear end of the overflow surface 501m (the passage surface 552h along which the game balls B roll in the bypass passage 552g), preventing the game balls B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 into the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface 501m. This prevents the game balls B from flowing into the bypass passage 552g from the side (ball tank 552), allowing the flow of the game balls B in the bypass passage 552g to flow in a fixed direction from the overflow surface 501m at the front end toward the tank rail 553 at the rear end, thereby ensuring a fixed pressure on the game balls B guided from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553. Therefore, the direction of pressure applied to the game balls B within the tank rail 553 varies, preventing the game balls B from pushing against each other and becoming stuck, and preventing the game balls B from becoming jammed.

In addition, the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with a main guide section 553a that extends to the downstream end. When the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide section 553a, they line up in a row in the left-right direction. This allows the game balls B in the tank rail 553 to be aligned, ensuring that the game balls B can be reliably guided to the downstream payout device 580. Furthermore, the open upper section of the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulge section 553b that can accommodate multiple game balls B. Therefore, game balls B released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received, ensuring the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the closed-top portion, and narrows in width from the upstream end toward the downstream side to match the width of the main guide portion 553a. This allows multiple game balls B to be aligned in a single line in the width direction as they move downstream within the bulging portion 553b. Furthermore, the closed-top portion of the tank rail 553 is configured so that the height of the flow path through which the game balls B flow decreases toward the downstream end. This allows multiple game balls B that are stacked in multiple layers in the height direction on the upstream side (toward the ball tank 552) to flow downstream through the closed-top portion of the tank rail 553, reducing the number of layers in the height direction and aligning them in a single line. Therefore, the tank rail 553 allows multiple game balls B to be guided downstream (toward the payout device 580) in a single line.

Furthermore, since it is equipped with an overflow surface portion 501m and a bypass passage 552g, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and since the tank rail 553 is equipped with a bulge portion 553b, the volume within the tank rail 553 can be increased, so that, together with the ball tank 552, a larger number of game balls B can be stored.

In addition, on the opposite side of the ball tank 552, with the bypass passage 552g and discharge section 551j in between, there is an external terminal board 558 equipped with multiple wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the multiple wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558). Therefore, the wire connection terminals 558a and terminal cover 551k can be positioned farther away from the ball tank 552 to which game balls B are supplied from the island equipment. Therefore, even if the game balls B supplied from the island equipment bounce or are supplied with force at the ball tank 552 or overflow surface section 501m, they are less likely to reach (contact) the wire connection terminals 558a, etc., and problems such as short circuits or loose electrical wiring due to the game balls B contacting them will not occur.

In addition, by directing the multiple wire connection terminals 558a toward the rear and making the top surface of the terminal cover 551k higher than the overflow surface 501m, even if game balls B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounce off the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m, they are less likely to land on the top surface of the terminal cover 551k. Even if game balls B land on the top surface of the terminal cover 551k, they are less likely to fall off the rear side, making it easier to avoid the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

Furthermore, game balls B returned from the overflow surface 501m to the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 are sent upstream of the ball tank 552 (to the right in Figure 103) due to the inclination of the guide surface 552j. This prevents the game balls B on the guide surface 552j from pressing downstream against the game balls B in the ball tank 552, preventing clogging of the game balls B within the ball tank 552.

In addition, even if game balls B supplied to the ball tank 552 from the island equipment bounce off the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m and land on the left step 501n or right step 501o on both sides of the overflow surface 501m, as shown in Figure 103, the slope of these elements can guide the game balls B to the overflow surface 501m or the bypass passage 552g, preventing problems caused by game balls B spilling outside the main frame 4.

In addition, because the game balls B pass under the guide surface 552j when they flow from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553, the guide surface 552j can regulate the amount (height) of game balls B stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 so that it does not exceed the lower surface of the guide surface 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface 552j) on the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, space (empty space) can be secured in which game balls B can be stacked on the upper side, and game balls B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a and terminal cover 551k are positioned in front of the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, even if a game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, the game ball B will not be received by the tank rail 553, preventing the game ball B from affecting the game ball B inside the tank rail 553 and causing malfunctions.

[4-12. Other embodiments of tank rails, etc.]
Next, another embodiment of the tank rail 553 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 106 to 110. Figure 106 is an enlarged perspective view of the tank rail portion of a pachinko machine equipped with a tank rail of another embodiment, viewed from the rear. Figure 107(a) is a plan view showing the tank rail of Figure 106 assembled with a ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail of (a) viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the tank rail of (a) viewed from the rear. Figure 108(a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail of Figure 107 viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail of Figure 107 viewed from the rear. Figure 109 is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail taken along the kercher line in Figure 107(a). Figure 110 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the tank rail of Figure 107 in cross section. In a tank rail 553A etc. of another embodiment different from the above, in addition to the tank rail 553A, a first rail cover 554A, a second rail cover 555A, and a ball straightening member 556A are different from the tank rail 553, first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, and ball straightening member 556 of the above embodiment, and similar configurations will be described using the same symbols.

In this embodiment, the tank rail 553A rectifies the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivers them to the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560. This tank rail 553A extends to the left in the shape of a groove that is open upward. Attached to the tank rail 553A are a first rail cover 554A that closes the upper end, a second rail cover 555A that is located to the left of the first rail cover 554A when viewed from the front, and a ball rectifying member 556A that is located above the second rail cover 555A. Attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A is a ball stopping member 557 that can prevent the flow of game balls B.

As shown in Figure 107(a) and other figures, the tank rail 553A has a serpentine portion 553c that snakes back and forth downstream of the bulge portion 553b. This serpentine portion 553c serves to reduce the circulation speed of the game balls B. The first rail cover 554A is attached upstream of the serpentine portion 553c (towards the ball tank 552).

The second rail cover 555A extends laterally from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in front view) of the open upper end of the tank rail 553A, including the serpentine portion 553c. The second rail cover 555A has a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 553A, a pair of protective walls 555b that extend upward from the front and rear ends of the cover portion 555a upstream of the center in the lateral direction, and an opening 555c that penetrates the cover portion 555a between the pair of protective walls 555b. At the location of the serpentine portion 553c of the tank rail 553A, the pair of protective walls 555b are formed in a serpentine shape that mimics the serpentine portion 553c. A flow straightening piece 556a of the spherical flow straightening member 556A (described later) is inserted into the opening 555c from above.

The ball straightening member 556A has an upstream end that extends forward and backward and is mounted rotatably around an axis. The ball straightening member 556A is located above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A, between a pair of protective walls 555b, and has a flat straightening piece 556a that penetrates the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A and protrudes into the tank rail 553A. This ball straightening member 556A abuts from above against game balls B stacked in multiple layers within the tank rail 553A, breaking up the layers of game balls B and making it easier to align them in a single row. It also prevents the uppermost game ball B from moving downstream too quickly, preventing ball jamming on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

In the tank rail 553A and other components of this embodiment, when assembled, the ball rectifying member 556A is located between a pair of protective walls 555b on the second rail cover 555A and below the upper ends of the protective walls 555b. This prevents the electric wire (shown by a dashed line in FIG. 106 ) connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558, which is located on the upper front side of the portion of the tank rail 553A where the ball rectifying member 556A is attached, from contacting the ball rectifying member 556A from above. However, if the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a contacts the ball rectifying member 556A from above, the weight of the electric wire may prevent the ball rectifying member 556A from rotating upward even when the game ball B abuts the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A. This may prevent the ball rectifying member 556A from fully rectifying the game ball B. In contrast, in this embodiment, the pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A prevent the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A. Therefore, when a game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A, the ball rectifying member 556A can rotate upward, fully exerting its rectifying effect and preventing ball jamming or clogging within the tank rail 553A.

Furthermore, since the tank rail 553A is provided with a serpentine portion 553c, the serpentine portion 553c can suppress the flow speed of the game balls B. However, in the tank rail 553A, which narrows in height toward the downstream side, if the upper game balls B of the game balls B stacked in multiple layers move downstream first, ball jamming is likely to occur. In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the serpentine portion 553c can suppress the flow speed of the game balls B, preventing the upper game balls B from moving downstream first, thereby reducing the occurrence of ball jamming.

Furthermore, as described above, the protective wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A prevents the electric wires from coming into contact with the ball straightening member 556A, preventing ball clogging. This allows the tank rail 553A to be positioned near a terminal board (e.g., external terminal board 558) or control board to which many electric wires are connected, or a terminal board or control board to which many electric wires are connected to be positioned near the tank rail 553A, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high degree of freedom in the placement of the tank rail 553A (ball tank 552), terminal board, etc.

[4-13. Another embodiment of the board unit]
Next, a board unit 620A of another embodiment (second embodiment) different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 111 to 116, etc. Figure 111(a) is a front view of the board unit of the other embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) seen from the right front, and (c) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) seen from the left front. Figure 112(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of Figure 111(a) seen from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of Figure 111(a) seen from the lower right rear. Figure 113 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of Figure 111(a) seen from the front, and Figure 114 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of Figure 111(a) seen from the rear. Fig. 115(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line KII in Fig. 111(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line KII in Fig. 111(a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line KII in Fig. 111(a). Fig. 116 is a bottom view showing the area behind the door frame in a pachinko machine equipped with the board unit of Fig. 111(a).

The board unit 620A of this embodiment replaces the board unit 620 described above and is attached to the lower rear surface of the main frame base unit 500. In the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is significantly different from the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 described above. Here, components similar to those of the board unit 620 described above are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions are omitted.

The board unit 620A comprises a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, below the game board mounting portion 501c; a base unit 660 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker unit 620a from behind; a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 660; a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c; and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover part of the payout control unit 620d from behind.

The base unit 660 is comprised of a front base 661 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, a rear base 662 attached to the rear side of the front base 661 and having the power supply unit 620c attached to its rear surface, and an out ball passage 663 provided between the front base 661 and the rear base 662, through which game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5 flow, and a detection unit 664 for detecting game balls B flowing through the out ball passage 663 one by one. an out sensor 664 that detects the presence of a ball; a ball removal guide section 627 that receives game balls B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and guides them to the right when viewed from the front; a ball removal and discharge passage 665 that is located behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662 and through which game balls B guided by the ball removal and discharge section 627 flow; and a passage wall member 666 that is attached to the rear base 662 so as to close the rear side of the ball removal and discharge passage 665.

The front base 661 is formed in a box shape that is long from side to side and open to the front. The rear base 662 has a flat partition wall portion 662a that extends left and right at a roughly constant height in the vertical direction. An out ball passage 663 and a ball removal guide portion 627 are formed in front of the partition wall portion 662a, and a ball removal discharge passage 665 is formed behind the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear behind the partition wall portion 662a.

The base unit 660 has a front base 661, a rear base 662, and a passage wall member 666 formed from transparent materials. Therefore, the ball removal guide section 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal and discharge passage 665 are also formed transparent. Therefore, the inside of the ball removal guide section 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal and discharge passage 665 can be clearly seen from the top and bottom of the base unit 660, making it easy to check for clogging balls, etc.

The out-ball passage 663 is formed in front of a flat partition wall portion 662a on the rear base 662, which extends left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction, with the front end open, and the open front end is closed by the front base 661.

The out-ball passage 663 has a ball discharge receiving portion 663a that opens upward and extends left and right at approximately the center of the pachinko machine 1 in the left-right direction; an out-ball rectifying portion 663b that straightens the game balls B received in the ball discharge receiving portion 663a into a single line while causing them to snake widely left and right; a downward guide portion 663c that guides the game balls B straightened into a single line by the out-ball rectifying portion 663b downward; and an out-ball discharge port 663d that opens downward at the lower end of the downward guide portion 663c and discharges the game balls B downward from the underside of the base unit 660. The out-ball discharge port 663d of the out-ball passage 663 is located rearward of the outer frame 2 (see Figure 116).

The ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed so that its depth in the front-to-rear direction is approximately 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving portion 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end is lower.

The out ball rectification section 663b is inclined at a gentle angle from a position to the right of the right end of the ball discharge receiving section 663a toward the bottom of the ball discharge receiving section 663a, with the left end becoming lower. Furthermore, the front-to-back depth of the out ball rectification section 663b narrows as it moves downstream (to the left), with the depth near the downstream end below the ball discharge receiving section 663a being slightly larger than the diameter of game ball B. Furthermore, the height of the portion of the out ball rectification section 663b to the left of the right end of the ball discharge receiving section 663a decreases as it moves downstream (to the left), with the height near the downstream end being slightly larger than the diameter of game ball B. This allows game balls B to be aligned in a row in the out ball rectification section 663b.

The downward guide section 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out-ball straightening section 663b, which is below the ball discharge receiving section 663a. Midway up and down, it curves rearward in a small crank shape so that its front wall is flush with the rear wall (compartment wall). As a result, the downstream end of the downward guide section 663c (out-ball discharge port 663d) is located rearward of the front surface of the partition wall 662a of the rear base 662. An out-sensor 664 is located upstream of the cranked portion of the downward guide section 663c. The cranked portion of the downward guide section 663c is curved so that it does not have a horizontally extending portion. Therefore, even if a game ball B passes through the out-sensor 664 and hits the cranked portion, it will not bounce up toward the out-sensor 664 above. This prevents the out-sensor 664 from detecting a single game ball B twice.

Out sensor 664 uses a non-contact electromagnetic proximity switch that is highly durable and has a long lifespan, as game ball B passes through it frequently.

The ball removal guide section 627 is located to the left of the ball discharge receiving section 663a in the out ball passage 663. The upstream end of the ball removal guide section 627 opens to the left at the top of the left side when viewed from the front, and the downstream side bends rearward and extends to the rear side of the partition wall section 662a of the rear base 662, where it is connected to the upstream end of the ball removal and discharge passage 665 (see Figure 115(a), etc.).

The ball ejection/discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. The ball ejection/discharge passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 in a state that is open to the rear, and its rear end is closed by a passage wall member 666. The rear end of this ball ejection/discharge passage 665 is located approximately one outer diameter of a game ball B forward of the rear end of the rear base 662. In other words, a gap of at least one game ball B is formed between the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662.

The ball removal and discharge passage 665 has its upstream end (left end) connected to the downstream end of the ball removal and discharge guide section 627, and is equipped with a horizontal guide section 665a that extends to the right of the ball discharge receiving section 663a at the same inclination as the ball discharge receiving section 663a of the out ball passage 663, a vertical guide section 665b that extends vertically downward from the downstream end (right end) of the horizontal guide section 665a to the underside of the rear base 662, and a ball removal and discharge outlet 665c that opens downward at the downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guide section 665b. The ball removal and discharge outlet 665c is located slightly rearward of the out ball discharge outlet 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see Figure 116).

The ball ejection/discharge passage 665 also has multiple protrusions 665d that protrude inward alternately at regular intervals in the vertical direction on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guide section 665b. The ball ejection/discharge passage 665 allows game balls B flowing through the vertical guide section 665b, which extends vertically downward, to alternately come into contact with the multiple protrusions 665d, causing the game balls B to flow downward in a zigzag pattern, suppressing an increase in their flow speed and suppressing the speed of the game balls B as they are discharged downward from the ball ejection/discharge opening 665c.

This ball removal and discharge passage 665 is a simple L-shaped passage consisting of a horizontal guide section 665a and a vertical guide section 665b, so when the ball removal lever 593 is operated to discharge the game balls B in the ball tank 552, many game balls B can be smoothly guided and discharged.

In this embodiment of the board unit 620A, a game ball B that is shot into the game area 5a and ejected from the game board 5 is received by the ball ejection receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, detected by the out sensor 664, and ejected to the island equipment side of the game hall. Meanwhile, to eject (remove) a game ball B from the ball tank 552, etc., the ball ejection lever 593 of the payout device 580 is operated to eject the game ball B to the ball ejection passage 580b side, and the game ball B is then ejected to the island equipment side of the game hall through the ball ejection guide portion 627 and ball ejection ejection passage 665, which are separate and independent from the out ball passage 663. This allows only game balls B ejected from the game board 5 to be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so that only game balls B ejected from the game board 5 can be accurately counted. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can calculate an accurate payout rate (ball output rate) for game balls B based on the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664.

The number of game balls B (number of out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 is the sum of the number of game balls B that were shot into the game area 5a and received by a prize opening such as the general prize opening 2001, the first start opening 2002, the gate 2003, the second start opening 2004, the big prize opening 2005, and the special prize opening 2006, and then discharged from the game board 5, and the number of game balls B that were shot into the game area 5a and then received by the out opening 1008 without being received by any prize opening, and then discharged from the game board 5. This is the number of game balls B shot into the game area 5a (number of fired balls).

Note that the payout rate (ball output rate) changes depending on the game status, so the payout rate within a specified period (for example, per unit time, per specified time, per day, etc.) is calculated as follows: "Number of payouts within specified period ÷ Number of balls out within specified period = Payout rate within specified period."

In addition, according to this embodiment, the base unit 620A of the main frame 4, to which the game board 5 is detachably attached, is provided with an out ball passage 663 through which game balls B ejected from the game board 5 flow, and the out sensor 664 detects game balls B flowing through the out ball passage 663.Since game balls B ejected from the game board 5 can be detected, there is no need to provide an out ball detection unit on the game board 5 to detect "out balls," simplifying the configuration of the game board 5 and reducing costs.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, a gap larger than the outer diameter of a game ball B is formed between the rear end of the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662. This means that the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 are located away from the power supply board 630 and payout control board 633, etc. This reduces the impact on the power supply board 630 and payout control board 633, etc., of electrical noise caused by static electricity and induced currents generated by the flow of many game balls B through the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection/discharge passage 665, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is less likely to malfunction due to the flow of game balls B.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the out sensor 664 detects the game ball B, whose circulation speed has been suppressed by the out ball straightening section 663b of the out ball passage 663. This reduces the impact on the out sensor 664 caused by the circulation of the game ball B, thereby reducing the risk of the out sensor 664 being worn out and damaged early.

Furthermore, if the payout rate (ball payout rate) per specified time calculated from the number of safe balls per specified time and the number of out balls per specified time is displayed so that it can be seen by the player, players will want many game balls B paid out, so if the displayed payout rate is high, they will immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out many game balls B, making it easier for them to select the pachinko machine 1 to play on. Furthermore, if the payout rate is displayed so that it can be seen by the player, if a player commits fraudulent acts that result in many game balls B being paid out, the displayed payout rate will be higher than usual, making it easier for other players and staff at the amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to notice the fraudulent acts, which will discourage players from committing fraudulent acts and result in the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

Furthermore, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a location that is not visible to the player, amusement hall staff can see it and detect fraudulent activity for the same reasons as above. Furthermore, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate differs from the normal value, this may indicate a malfunction within the pachinko machine 1 (for example, with the obstructing nail N, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc.), which allows for early response to the malfunction and reduces the burden on the amusement hall.

Furthermore, because an out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 through which game balls B ejected from the game board 5 flow, there is no need to provide a structure (e.g., an out ball detection unit) for detecting game balls B ejected onto the game board 5, which reduces the cost of the game board 5 and makes it possible to secure space on the game board 5 for the structure for detecting ejected game balls B. By providing a presentation device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be made even more entertaining to players.

In addition, the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 has a vertical guide section 665b with multiple protrusions 665d protruding alternately, and as the game balls B flow through this vertical guide section 665b, the speed at which the game balls B flow can be reduced, preventing damage to the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 caused by the impact of the circulating game balls B, as well as damage to the island equipment in the amusement hall that receives the game balls B discharged from the ball ejection/discharge passage 665.

In addition, the out ball passage 663 is provided with a serpentine out ball straightening section 663b, and the ball removal and discharge passage 665 is provided with a vertical guide section 665b with multiple protrusions 665d protruding from it. These features enable the circulation speed of game balls B to be suppressed, thereby reducing the electrical noise emitted from game balls B circulating within the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal and discharge passage 665. This reduces the impact on nearby power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc., and results in a pachinko machine 1 that is less likely to malfunction due to the circulation of game balls B.

In addition, because the out ball discharge port 663d and the ball ejection/discharge port 665c of the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection/discharge passage 665, respectively, are designed to open downward, game balls B are discharged downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection/discharge passage 665, making it less likely that game balls B will collide with other pachinko machines or walls located behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment, preventing damage to the other pachinko machines or walls. In addition, because game balls B are discharged downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection/discharge passage 665, discharged game balls B are less likely to scatter, making it easier for the island equipment to collect game balls B discharged from the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection/discharge passage 665.

Furthermore, a base unit 660 having a ball ejection passage 665 and an out ball passage 663 is provided below the portion of the main frame 4 where the game board 5 is attached. Therefore, game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a on the game board 5 can be handed over to the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660 simply by ejecting them downward. This allows for a simple (easy) configuration for ejecting game balls B from the game board 5, thereby reducing the cost of the game board 5.

In addition, by providing the ball ejection/discharge opening 665c of the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 and the out ball discharge opening 663d of the out ball passage 663 behind the outer frame 2, game balls B discharged from the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 or the out ball passage 663 can be prevented from colliding with the outer frame 2. This prevents game balls B flowing forcefully through the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 or the out ball passage 663 from colliding with the outer frame 2, which could result in damage to the outer frame 2, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is less likely to be damaged.

In addition, because the ball ejection/discharge opening 665c of the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 and the out ball discharge opening 663d of the out ball passage 663 are located behind the outer frame 2, there is no need to advance the part of the island equipment that collects game balls B (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) to a position that overlaps with the outer frame 2, reducing the effort required to install and move the pachinko machine 1.

[4-13a. Another embodiment of ball discharge in the base unit]
Next, another embodiment of ball discharge in the above-mentioned substrate unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to Figures 117 and 118. Figure 117 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out-ball discharge port of the out-ball passage. Figure 118(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and Figure 118(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in Figure 118(a) with the out sensor removed.

The embodiment shown in Figure 117 has a guide piece 667 that guides the game ball B rearward, located at the out ball discharge port 663d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660. In more detail, in this embodiment, the out ball passage 663 has a junction 663e near the downstream end where it merges with the ball removal and discharge passage 665. The junction 663e opens downward, and its open end forms the out ball discharge port 663d (ball removal and discharge port 665c). The guide piece 667 protrudes rearward a short distance from the front wall of the out ball discharge port 663d.

According to the embodiment shown in Figure 117, when a game ball B is discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d, it comes into contact with the guide piece 667, causing the discharge direction of the game ball B to be directed diagonally downward and rearward. This makes it easier for the game ball B to be released toward the area for collecting the game ball B (out receiver, bucket, etc.) located behind the front of the island equipment (inside the island equipment) when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an amusement hall, allowing the game ball B to be reliably collected on the island equipment side.

In addition, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 117, the guide piece 667 can direct the release direction of the game ball B diagonally downward and rearward, so even if the out-ball discharge port 663d of the out-ball passage 663 is located close to directly below the playing area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 (close to the front of the island equipment), the game ball B can be reliably received in a bucket or the like within the island equipment. Therefore, since the out-ball passage 663 (out-ball discharge port 663d) can be located as far forward as possible, the space behind the out-ball passage 663 on the main body frame 4 can be made larger. Therefore, the out-ball passage 663 is located farther away from the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc., which reduces the impact on the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc. of electrical noise caused by static electricity and induced currents generated by the flow of many game balls B through the out-ball passage 663, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is less prone to malfunction due to the flow of game balls B.

Next, in the embodiment shown in Figure 118, the out sensor 664 is attachable and detachable from below at the out ball discharge port 663d in the out ball passage 663. This embodiment includes a sensor mounting recess 663f formed at the downstream end of the downward guide section 663c in the out ball passage 663, which is open downward and can accommodate the out sensor 664, and a sensor cover 668 which restricts downward movement of the out sensor 664 accommodated in the sensor mounting recess 663f.

The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end of the downward guide section 663c, which is connected to the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying section 663b in the out-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. In this embodiment, the base unit 660 is also made of a transparent material, so that the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be seen from above and below the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 has a main body 668a that extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and whose base end is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, a through-hole 668b that passes through the game ball B at a position that coincides with the detection hole of the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f in the main body 668a, and an elastically deformable locking claw 668c that is provided on the opposite side of the base end of the main body 668a.

The base end of this sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the outer side of the sensor mounting recess 663f on the base unit 660, opposite the outgoing ball rectification section 663b. The locking claw 668c of the sensor cover 668 is engaged with the locking section 663g located on the outer side of the outgoing ball rectification section 663b side of the sensor mounting recess 663f on the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 is rotated so that the locking claw 668c moves upward and engages with the locking portion 663g, closing the sensor cover 668 with the out sensor 664 housed within the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out sensor 664 is aligned with the out ball passage 663. The main body 668a contacts the underside of the out sensor 664, restricting its downward movement and allowing the out sensor 664 to be attached to the base unit 660 (see Figure 118(a)). In this state, the through-hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 is aligned with the detection hole of the out sensor 664. After being detected by the out sensor 664, the game ball B that has flowed through the out ball passage 663 is discharged downward through the through-hole 668b. The through-hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 also serves as the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663.

To replace (remove) the out sensor 664, the locking claw 668c of the sensor cover 668 is operated to elastically deform the locking claw 668c and release it from the locking portion 663g. Then, by rotating the sensor cover 668 around the base end of the main body 668a and opening it so that the locking claw 668c moves downward, the main body 668a of the sensor cover 668 moves away from the underside of the out sensor 664, allowing the out sensor 664 to be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see Figure 118(b)).

As shown in Figure 118(b), in this embodiment, when the sensor cover 668 is rotated open, there is a certain amount of gap between the bottom end of the sensor cover 668 and the top end of the object at risk of contact, as indicated by the two-dot chain line (for example, the top surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, the top end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43, etc.), or between the sensor cover 668 and the bottom end of the main frame 4. As a result, even if the main frame 4 is opened or closed relative to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 will not come into contact with the object at risk of contact, preventing damage to the sensor cover 668.

In the embodiment shown in Figure 118, the out sensor 664 detects all game balls B that are shot into the game area 5a of the game board 5, so there is a risk that the out sensor 664 will wear out quickly and become damaged as a large number of game balls B are circulated. However, as described above, the out sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below by opening the sensor cover 668, making it easy to replace the out sensor 664.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, even if the main frame 4 is opened or closed relative to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 will not come into contact with objects that may come into contact with it, such as the outer frame 2, preventing damage to the sensor cover 668. Specifically, the sensor cover 668 supports the out sensor 664 from below. However, since many game balls B come into contact with the out sensor 664 from above, there is a risk that the vibrations caused by the contact of many game balls B may cause the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 to come loose, causing the sensor cover 668 to open. If the sensor cover 668 opens during play and the out sensor 664 falls downward, the out sensor 664 will no longer detect the game ball B, even though the game ball B has been shot into the play area 5a. This will result in the main control board 1310 or the like reporting an abnormality. When this abnormality is reported, an amusement hall attendant will open the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 to check for the abnormality. However, because there is a gap between the bottom end of the open sensor cover 668 and objects that could come into contact with it, such as the outer frame 2, the main frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with those objects, preventing damage to the sensor cover 668.

Furthermore, according to the embodiment of Figure 118, the base end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at the outer portion of the sensor mounting recess 663f opposite the out ball straightening portion 663b, and since the base unit 660 is transparent, by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out sensor 664, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be clearly seen from below. Therefore, when game ball B becomes stuck in the out ball passage 663, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be seen from the outside, so the location where game ball B is stuck can be identified at a glance and the jammed game ball B can be quickly resolved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 of the door frame 3 is formed so as to be approximately flush with the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2. This means that the pachinko machine 1 can be turned upside down and stood upright, making it easy to replace the out sensor 664 by opening and closing the sensor cover 668, and to check the inside of the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal and discharge passage 665 from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, even if the out sensor 664 is damaged, it can be easily replaced, allowing play that was interrupted due to damage to the out sensor 664 to be resumed quickly, thereby easing the player's frustration due to the interruption of play and preventing a decline in interest, as well as preventing a decline in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1, thereby reducing the burden on the gaming hall.

Furthermore, one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660. Therefore, even if the sensor cover 668 is opened when replacing the out sensor 664, the sensor cover 668 remains suspended from the base unit 660 and will not fall off, preventing the sensor cover 668 from being lost.

Furthermore, the sensor cover 668, which holds the out sensor 664 from below, is rotatably attached around a longitudinal (horizontal) axis at an outer portion of the base unit 660 near the out ball passage 663 through which many game balls B pass. Therefore, the distribution of the downward force exerted on the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 due to the flow of game balls B is greater on the side rotatably attached to the base unit 660 (one end) and relatively smaller on the side of the locking claw 668c that is locked to the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660 (the other end). Therefore, even if a downward force acts on the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 as many game balls B pass through the out sensor 664, most of the force can be received by the rotatably attached one end, making it difficult for the locking claw 668c on the other end to be released, reducing the likelihood of the sensor cover 668 opening and the out sensor 664 falling off.

[4-14. Third embodiment of board unit]
Next, a third embodiment of the board unit 700, which differs from the above, will be described in detail with reference to Figures 119 to 128. Figure 119(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment, with the power supply unit, dispensing control unit, and interface unit omitted, as seen from the front right, and Figure 119(b) is a perspective view of the board unit of Figure 119 as seen from the front left. Figure 120(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of Figure 119 as seen from the rear right above, and Figure 120(b) is a perspective view of the board unit of Figure 119 as seen from the rear right below. Figure 121(a) is a plan view of the board unit of Figure 119, Figure 121(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line KO-KO in Figure 119(a), Figure 121(c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line SA-SA in Figure 119(a), and Figure 122 is a cross-sectional view taken along line SI-SH in Figure 121(a).

Figure 123 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of Figure 119 when disassembled and viewed from the front, and Figure 124 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of Figure 119 when disassembled and viewed from the rear. Figure 125 (a) is an oblique view of the ball path member of the board unit of Figure 119 when viewed from the front, and (b) is an oblique view of the ball path member of the board unit of Figure 119 when viewed from the rear. Figure 126 is an explanatory diagram showing how ball jams are cleared in the board unit of Figure 119. Figure 127 is an explanatory diagram showing how linear illegal tools are prevented from entering the board unit of Figure 119. Figure 128 is an explanatory diagram showing how to remove debris from the board unit of Figure 119.

The board unit 700 of the third embodiment differs from the above-described board unit 620 and board unit 620A only in the configuration of the base unit 710, and is otherwise identical in configuration. Therefore, here, the same components as those of the above-described board unit 620 and board unit 620A are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions are omitted. Also, in Figures 119 to 128, the power supply unit 620c, dispensing control unit 620d, and interface unit 620e are not shown.

The board unit 700 of this embodiment replaces the board unit 620 or board unit 620A described above and is attached to the lower rear surface of the main frame base unit 500. The board unit 700 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, below the game board mounting portion 501c; a base unit 710 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a portion of the speaker unit 620a from behind; a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 710; a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c; and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a portion of the payout control unit 620d from behind.

This base unit 700 is equipped with a first ball path 701 through which game balls B released downward from the game board 5 can pass, a second ball path 702 located behind the first ball path 701 and through which game balls b released downward from the game board 5 can pass, a first ball sensor 703 that detects game balls B passing through the first ball path 701, a second ball sensor 704 that detects game balls b passing through the second ball path 702, and a ball removal path 705 through which game balls B released from the lower ball removal path 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 pass. The first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 each have an entrance that opens upward, and the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 detect game balls B one by one before discharging them downward.

In this embodiment, the game board 5 is configured so that game balls B received in the out port 1008, first sub-out port 2021, and second sub-out port 2022 circulate through the first ball path 701, and game balls B received in the general prize port 2001, first start port 2002, second start port 2004, large prize port 2005, and special prize port 2006 circulate through the second ball path 702. In other words, the game board 5 is configured so that out balls circulate through the first ball path 701 and safe balls circulate through the second ball path 702, and the first ball sensor 703 can count the number of all out balls, while the second ball sensor 704 can count the number of all safe balls. As a result, if fraudulent activity is committed against a prize slot (prize slot sensor) on the game board 5, such as the general prize slot 2001, first start slot 2002, second start slot 2004, large prize slot 2005, or special prize slot 2006, the number of safe balls on the game board 5 side will differ from the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704, making it possible to detect fraudulent activity against a prize slot.

In more detail, the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 comprises a front base 711 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover part of the speaker box 623 from the rear; a rear base 712 attached to the rear side of the front base 711 and having a power supply unit 620c attached to its rear surface and a ball removal passage 705; a ball path member 713 provided between the front base 711 and the rear base 712 and having a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702; a security cover 714 provided on the front base 711 and the rear base 712 in an openable and closable manner to eliminate clogging of game balls B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 and to prevent the intrusion of illegal tools; a passage wall member 715 attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closing the rear end of the ball removal passage 705; and a frame relay board 716 attached to the rear side of the rear base 712. In the base unit 710, the front base 711, rear base 712, ball path member 713, and passage wall member 715 are made transparent.

The front base 711 is shaped like a long box that is open rearward and upward. The ball path member 713 is housed inside the front base 711 from the rear. The front wall of the front base 711 closes the front end of the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713. The front base 711 has a ball receiving opening 711a that opens long in the left-right direction on the upper peripheral wall, and a release opening 711b that opens at a position to the right of the left-right center on the lower peripheral wall. When the ball path member 713 is housed inside the front base 711, the first ball path 701 and second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 face upward from the ball receiving opening 711a. The front base 711 also supports a security cover 714 at the front end of the release opening 711b so that it can rotate around an axis extending left-right.

The rear base 712 is shaped like a long box that is open to the rear. The rear base 712 closes the rear end of the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 with its front wall. The rear base 712 has a ball removal path 705 that receives game balls B released from the lower ball removal path 610c of the lower full-ball path unit 610, guides them to the right when viewed from the front, and then guides them downward for discharge. The ball removal path 705 is located within the box-shaped rear base 712 and is entirely open to the rear. The rear end of the ball removal path 705 is closed by a path wall member 715. The portion of the ball removal path 705 of the rear base 712 located above the speaker box 623 (the portion on the left end when viewed from the front) is perforated in the front-to-rear direction, and is closed at the front end by the front base 711 and at the rear by the path wall member 715.

The rear base 712 also has a first discharge guide section 712a that receives a game ball B that has flowed through the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713, guides it rearward, and then discharges it downward, and a second discharge guide section 712b that receives a game ball B that has flowed through the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713, guides it rearward, and then discharges it downward. The inlet sides of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b protrude forward beyond the front wall of the rear base 712, with the inlet of the first discharge guide section 712a opening forward and the inlet of the second discharge guide section 712b opening upward. The outlets of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b are located at the same position in the front-to-back direction. The rear sides of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b are open rearward beyond the front wall, and the rear ends are closed by the passage wall member 715.

In the rear base 712, the outlets of the ball removal passage 705, first discharge guide section 712a, and second discharge guide section 712b are located to the left of the discharge opening 711b of the front base 711 when viewed from the front, and are arranged in order from left to right. Compared to the outlets of the first discharge guide section 712a and second discharge guide section 712b, the outlet of the ball removal passage 705 is wider forward at the front end and narrower rearward at the rear end (see Figure 120(b)). In other words, the outlet of the ball removal passage 705 is wider in the front-to-rear direction than the outlets of the first discharge guide section 712a and second discharge guide section 712b.

The ball path member 713 is inserted into the box-shaped front base 711 from the rear and accommodated therein. The ball path member 713 has a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702. The ball path member 713 comprises a left wall portion 713a extending vertically downward from the upper end at the right end, an upper left shelf portion 713b sloping downward from the lower end of the left wall portion 713a toward the right, a stepped wall portion 713c extending vertically downward from the right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b, an upper right shelf portion 713d sloping downward from the lower end of the stepped wall portion 713c toward the right, a straightening wall portion 713e extending diagonally downward and left from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and a straightening wall portion 713e extending diagonally downward and left from the lower end of the straightening wall portion 713e. It has a lower shelf 713f that increases in height toward the right from a position spaced to the right of the upper right shelf 713d and extends further to the right than the upper right shelf 713d, a right wall 713g that extends vertically upward from the right end of the lower shelf 713f to approximately the same height as the upper end of the left wall 713a, an upper wall 713h that extends leftward from the upper end of the right wall 713g to the same position as the right end of the upper right shelf 713d, and a U-shaped groove wall 713i that is connected to the left end of the upper wall 713h and opens upward. The left end of groove wall 713i is located to the right of the center of the upper right shelf 713d in the left-right direction.

The ball path member 713 also has an upper lower wall portion 713j extending leftward from the lower end of the straightening wall portion 713e, a middle wall portion 713k extending vertically upward from the left end of the upper lower wall portion 713j to the underside of the upper left shelf portion 713b, a visor portion 713l extending leftward from the middle of the left side of the middle wall portion 713k, a hanging wall portion 713m extending vertically downward from near the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f, and a lower lower wall portion 713n extending leftward from the lower end of the hanging wall portion 713m parallel to the upper lower wall portion 713j. The portion of the lower lower wall portion 713n located below, between the lower end of the straightening wall portion 713e and the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f, is notched at the top and bottom to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through.

Furthermore, the ball path member 713 has multiple obstruction ribs 713o that extend downward from the underside of the upper left shelf portion 713b, lower shelf portion 713f, and upper wall portion 713h and are spaced apart in the left-right direction. The ball path member 713 also has a flat partition wall portion 713p that separates the space surrounded by the left wall portion 713a, upper left shelf portion 713b, step wall portion 713c, upper right shelf portion 713d, straightening wall portion 713e, lower shelf portion 713f, right wall portion 713g, groove wall portion 713i, upper lower wall portion 713j, middle wall portion 713k, hanging wall portion 713m, and lower lower wall portion 713n into front and rear portions.

Furthermore, the ball path member 713 has multiple notches 713q in the upper left shelf portion 713b, upper right shelf portion 713d, and lower shelf portion 713f, which are recessed from the front and rear ends of each toward the partition wall portion 713p. Each notch 713q is arranged so that when assembled to the board unit 700, a gap smaller in the front-to-rear direction than the radius of the game ball B is formed between the front base 711 and the rear base 712, and dirt and dust from within the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be discharged downward through this gap.

The ball path member 713 is located on the front surface of the partition wall portion 713p, between the flow straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and has multiple guide ridges 713r extending to the left and right.

Furthermore, the ball path member 713 has a front sensor housing section 713s, which is surrounded by an upper lower wall section 713j, a hanging wall section 713m, and a lower lower wall section 713n, in front of the partition wall section 713p, and houses the first ball sensor 703; and a rear sensor housing section 713t, which is surrounded by an upper lower wall section 713j, a hanging wall section 713m, and a lower lower wall section 713n, in back of the partition wall section 713p, and houses the second ball sensor 704.

The first and second ball sensors 703 and 704 are housed in the front and rear sensor housing sections 713s and 713t, respectively, with their detection holes positioned below the area between the straightening wall section 713e and the lower shelf section 713f, i.e., with the detection holes facing right. Although not shown, the wiring cables extending from the first and second ball sensors 703 and 704 extend from the front and rear sensor housing sections 713s and 713t to the left of the middle wall section 713k.

The ball path member 713 is provided on the underside of the lower wall portion 713n in a position forward of the partition wall portion 713p and has a first ball guide portion 713u that protrudes downward and is open to the rear. When assembled to the base unit 700, the right half of the rear end of the first ball guide portion 713u is closed by the front face of the rear base 712, and the left half faces the entrance side of the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712. The first ball guide portion 713u can guide a game ball B that flows downward from between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f in front of the partition wall portion 713p to the right and then rearward, where it can be delivered to the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712.

On the other hand, behind the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713, below the portion of the lower wall portion 713n that opens downward (the portion of the detection hole of the second ball sensor 704 housed in the rear sensor housing portion 713t), there is an inlet that opens upward to the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712. This allows game balls B that flow downward from between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f behind the partition wall portion 713p to be handed over to the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712.

The right end of the upper left shelf 713b is located slightly to the right of the left end of the dissolving opening 711b in the front base 711. The right end of the upper right shelf 713d is located to the right of the right end of the dissolving opening 711b in the front base 711. The left end of the lower shelf 713f is located to the left of the left end of the dissolving opening 711b in the front base 711. Therefore, the area directly above the dissolving opening 711b in the front base 711 is covered by the flow-straightening wall 713e. The upper left shelf 713b, upper right shelf 713d, and lower shelf 713f are linearly inclined. On the other hand, the flow-straightening wall 713e is inclined in a curved manner, with its left end pointing vertically downward. The distance (height) between the flow-regulating wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is sloped to narrow as it goes to the left, so that the left end is high enough for a single game ball B to pass through. This flow-regulating wall portion 713e and lower shelf portion 713f allows multiple game balls B to be regulated in a single line and guided downward.

As mentioned above, the vertical dimension between the flow straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f narrows toward the left (the downstream direction of the flow of game balls B). Depending on the volume of game balls B circulating, multiple game balls B may become caught between the flow straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, resulting in a ball jam (see Figure 126). Because the flow straightening wall portion 713e is located above the release opening 711b, if a ball jam occurs between the flow straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the security cover 714 can be opened to open the release opening 711b. A rod-shaped tool can be inserted from below between the flow straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the release opening 711b and the notch 713q in the lower shelf portion 713f, and the tool can be used to poke the trapped game ball B and release the ball jam.

However, since the lower shelf portion 713f is provided with a notch 713q for clearing jammed balls and allowing dirt and dust to fall downward, there is a risk that a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire or catheter could be inserted from below through the notch 713q into the upper part of the lower shelf portion 713f (first ball path 701 or second ball path 702), and the tip of the illegal tool could then be extended upward from the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 or second ball path 702), thereby committing an illegal act on the game board 5 located above. The insertion of such illegal tools is not limited to the lower shelf portion 713f, and there is a similar risk in the upper left shelf portion 713b and upper right shelf portion 713d, which are also provided with the notch 713q.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the undersides of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h are provided with multiple flat, downward-extending blocking ribs 713o spaced apart in the left-right direction. Therefore, even if the tip of a linear illegal tool attempts to move along the undersides of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it abuts against the blocking ribs 713o, preventing the tip from moving and preventing further insertion of the illegal tool (see FIG. 127). This prevents the execution of illegal acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702), reducing the burden on the amusement hall that installs this pachinko machine 1 and providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly deterrent to illegal acts.

In addition, the areas to the right of the middle wall 713k on the upper right shelf 713d and upper left shelf 713b are closed off below and on both sides by the flow-regulating wall 713e, the upper lower wall 713j, and the middle wall 713k, which do not have the notch 713q. Therefore, unauthorized tools cannot be inserted from below through the notch 713q in the corresponding areas of the upper right shelf 713d and upper left shelf 713b, and unauthorized acts cannot be committed through the notch 713q in these areas.

As described above, the ball path member 713 has multiple notches 713q in the upper left shelf portion 713b, upper right shelf portion 713d, and lower shelf portion 713f, allowing debris and dust to be discharged downward through the notches 713q (see Figure 128). Debris and other debris discharged downward through the notches 713q located above the front sensor housing portion 713s and rear sensor housing portion 713t in the upper left shelf portion 713b is contained within the space surrounded by the straightening wall portion 713e, the upper lower wall portion 713j, and the middle wall portion 713k. This prevents debris and other debris from adhering to the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the front sensor housing portion 713s and rear sensor housing portion 713t.

In addition, a wiring cable is connected by a connector to the left end of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the front sensor housing section 713s and the rear sensor housing section 713t, and the wiring cable and connector protrude to the left from the front sensor housing section 713s and the rear sensor housing section 713t. In other words, the wiring cable and connector of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 protrude to the left beyond the middle wall section 713k. In this middle wall portion 713k, a visor portion 713l extends to the left from above the front sensor housing portion 713s and the rear sensor housing portion 713t on the left side surface. Therefore, dirt and dust that falls downward through the cutout portion 713q formed in the upper left shelf portion 713b is guided to the left by the slope of the visor portion 713l, preventing it from falling onto the wiring cables and connectors of the first ball sensor 703 and second ball sensor 704, which protrude further to the left than the middle wall portion 713k, thereby avoiding problems caused by dirt, etc.

The base unit 710 forms a first ball path 701 by the left wall portion 713a, upper left shelf portion 713b, step wall portion 713c, upper right shelf portion 713d, straightening wall portion 713e, lower shelf portion 713f, right wall portion 713g, groove wall portion 713i, first ball guide portion 713u on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713, and the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712. The base unit 710 also forms a second ball path 702 by the left wall portion 713a, upper left shelf portion 713b, step wall portion 713c, upper right shelf portion 713d, straightening wall portion 713e, lower shelf portion 713f, right wall portion 713g, groove wall portion 713i on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713, and the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712.

The security cover 714 is formed in a flat plate shape and is attached near the front end of the removal opening 711b of the front base 711, with its front end rotatable around a left-right axis. The security cover 714 also has an elastic locking portion 714a at its rear end that locks to the rear base 712. As shown in Figure 122, when the security cover 714 is in a horizontal position with the elastic locking portion 714a locked to the rear base 712, it closes the removal opening 711b. However, when the elastic locking portion 714a is released and the security cover 714 is rotated so that its rear end is positioned downward and it is in a vertical position, it opens the removal opening 711b. In other words, the security cover 714 can open and close the removal opening 711b.

When the security cover 714 is closed, it can close the clearance opening 711b in the front base 711, preventing a linear illegal tool from being inserted into the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 or second ball path 702) through the clearance opening 711b. Furthermore, when a ball jam occurs between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f of the ball path member 713, the security cover 714 can be opened to open the clearance opening 711b in the front base 711. Therefore, a rod-shaped tool can be inserted from below through the clearance opening 711b and the notch 713q in the lower shelf portion 713f between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f to clear the jammed game ball B. This ball jam clearing operation is performed with the main frame 4 open forward relative to the outer frame 2.

When the release opening 711b is open (vertical), the lower end (the end on the elastic locking portion 714a side) of this security cover 714 is located below the height (here, the height indicated by the dashed line in Figure 122) of the object at risk of contact (here, the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the outer frame 2). Therefore, even if the main frame 4 is opened forward relative to the outer frame 2 to release game balls B stuck in the ball path member 713, and then an attempt is made to close the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 while the security cover 714 is still open, the open security cover 714 will come into contact with the object at risk of contact (the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43), preventing the main frame 4 from being closed. This prevents the security cover 714 from being left unclosed, ensuring that the security cover 714 is reliably closed and providing its security function.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the security cover 714 opens for some reason while the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2, opening the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 in that state will result in a hazardous object coming into contact with the open security cover 714 from the front. However, because the front end of the security cover 714 is attached so that it can rotate about a left-right axis, when a hazardous object comes into contact with it from the front, the security cover 714 rotates in the closing direction. This allows the main frame 4 to be opened without the security cover 714 getting caught on a hazardous object, preventing damage to the security cover 714 or the hazardous object.

In addition, in this embodiment, the security cover 714 is designed to remain closed because it is rare for game balls B to become stuck between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f. Therefore, the elastic locking portion 714a is designed to lock tightly to make it difficult to open.

The passage wall member 715 is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closes the rear end of the ball removal passage 705, which is open to the rear. The passage wall member 715 also closes the rear-open portions of the rear base 712 at the outlet sides of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b, allowing game balls B that have circulated through the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b to be discharged downward. Furthermore, the passage wall member 715 and the rear base 712 sandwich the frame relay board 716 and cover the rear side of the frame relay board 716.

The frame relay board 716 is sandwiched between the rear base 712 and the passage wall member 715. The frame relay board 716 relays the connections between the handle touch sensor 192, single button operation sensor 194, first ball sensor 703, and second ball sensor 704 of the door frame 3 and the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 121(a), in the base unit 710 of this embodiment, the upper left shelf 713b and a portion of the upper right shelf 713d of the ball path member 713 face upward from the ball receiving opening 711a of the front base 711, and all game balls B released downward from the game board 5 can be received. Game balls B that fall onto the upper left shelf 713b or upper right shelf 713d through the ball receiving opening 711a roll to the right and flow down from the right end of the upper right shelf 713d onto the lower shelf 713f. Game balls B that flow down to the lower shelf 713f then roll leftward across the lower shelf 713f. At this time, if multiple game balls B are stacked vertically on the lower shelf 713f, they are broken up by the upper straightening wall 713e so that they form a single line as they move to the left.

After rolling leftward on the lower shelf 713f, the game ball B falls downward from the left end of the lower shelf 713f. If the game ball B is in front of the partition wall 713p, it is detected by the first ball sensor 703 housed in the front sensor housing 713s, passes through the first ball guide 713u, and is then discharged downward through the first discharge guide 712a of the rear base 712. On the other hand, if the game ball B is behind the partition wall 713p, it is detected by the second ball sensor 704 housed in the rear sensor housing 713t, and is then discharged downward through the second discharge guide 712b of the rear base 712.

In this way, in the base unit 710 of this embodiment, the game ball B flows through separate paths in front of and behind the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 and is discharged downward, with the portion in front of the partition wall portion 713p being the first ball path 701 and the portion behind the partition wall portion 713p being the second ball path 702. Therefore, a game ball B that falls from the game board 5 forward of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 flows through the first ball path 701, is detected by the first ball sensor 703, and can be discharged downward. On the other hand, a game ball B that falls from the game board 5 behind the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 flows through the second ball path 702, is detected by the second ball sensor 704, and can be discharged downward.

In addition, the base unit 710 can discharge game balls B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full-tank ball path unit 610 to remove game balls B from the ball tank 552, etc., downward through the ball removal passage 705 of the rear base 712. Game balls B discharged downward from the first discharge guide section 712a (first ball path 701), second discharge guide section 712b (second ball path 702) of the base unit 710, and the ball removal passage 705 are delivered to a section on the island equipment side that collects game balls B (out receiving section, bucket, etc.).

In the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 of this embodiment, multiple notches 713q are provided in the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f, allowing debris and dust to fall through the notches 713q and be removed from the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702. This prevents debris and the like from interfering with the flow of the game ball B and reduces the occurrence of ball jams, etc.

In addition, since the front base 711, rear base 712, ball path member 713, and passage wall member 715 are made transparent, by opening the door frame 3 forward relative to the main body frame 4 and removing the game board 5 from the main body frame 4, it is possible to easily check from above the base unit 710 (board unit 700) whether or not game ball B is stuck in the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702). Furthermore, in the area of the ball path member 713 where the straightening wall portion 713e and lower shelf portion 713f align the game balls B in a row, a notch 713q is provided in the lower shelf portion 713f. Therefore, if balls become jammed between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, by opening the main frame 4 forward relative to the outer frame 2 and opening the security cover 714, a rod-shaped tool can be inserted from below between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the release opening 711b and the notch 713q, and the balls can be used to release the jam.

Furthermore, a downwardly open release port 711b is provided in the lower shelf portion 713f below the straightening wall portion 713e, and a security cover 714 is provided to close the release port 711b. As a result, ball jams can be cleared through the release port 711b as described above, and by keeping the release port 711b closed by the security cover 714 under normal conditions, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools from being inserted into the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 through the release port 711b, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal activity.

In addition, the security cover 714, which opens and closes the release opening 711b, is opened and closed by rotating it around a left-right axis at the front end. Therefore, if an attempt is made to close the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2 while forgetting to close the security cover 714, the security cover 714 will come into contact with a hazardous object (the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43), making it impossible to close the main frame 4. This makes it clear that the security cover 714 has been left closed, allowing the security cover 714 to be closed reliably and providing its security function.

Furthermore, the undersides of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h are provided with multiple flat blocking ribs 713o that are spaced apart in the left-right direction and extend downward. Therefore, even if the tip of a linear illegal tool attempts to move along the undersides of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it will come into contact with the blocking rib 713o, preventing the tip from moving, thereby preventing further insertion of the illegal tool. This prevents the execution of illegal acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702), reducing the burden on the gaming hall that installs this pachinko machine 1 and providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly deterrent to illegal acts.

Furthermore, as described above, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are configured to form a complex circulation path that meanders and cranks due to the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b of the rear base 712 and the ball path member 713. Therefore, even if a linear illegal tool is inserted from the exit side of the first discharge guide section 712a or the second discharge guide section 712b, the complex path can prevent the tool from entering the game board 5, thereby preventing the illegal tool from entering the game board 5 through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702.

Furthermore, because the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can detect (count) all game balls B released from the game board 5, there is no need to provide a structure for detecting game balls B discharged onto the game board 5 (for example, an out ball detection unit), which reduces the cost of the game board 5 and makes it possible to secure space on the game board 5 for the structure for detecting game balls B being discharged.By providing a presentation device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be made even more entertaining to players.

In addition, because out balls circulate along the first ball path 701 and safe balls circulate along the second ball path 702, by comparing the number of safe balls counted on the game board 5 with the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704, it is possible to determine whether or not fraudulent activity is being committed on the game board 5, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that has a strong deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, if the payout rate (ball payout rate) per specified time calculated from the number of safe balls per specified time and the number of out balls per specified time is displayed so that it can be seen by the player, players will want many game balls B paid out, so if the displayed payout rate is high, they will immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out many game balls B, making it easier for them to select the pachinko machine 1 to play on. Furthermore, if the payout rate is displayed so that it can be seen by the player, if a player commits fraudulent acts that result in many game balls B being paid out, the displayed payout rate will be higher than usual, making it easier for other players and staff at the amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to notice the fraudulent acts, which will discourage players from committing fraudulent acts and result in the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

Furthermore, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a location that is not visible to the player, amusement hall staff can see it and detect fraudulent activity for the same reasons as above. Furthermore, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate differs from the normal value, this may indicate a malfunction within the pachinko machine 1 (for example, with the obstructing nail N, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc.), which allows for early response to the malfunction and reduces the burden on the amusement hall.

In addition, since the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are separate from the ball removal passage 705 for discharging game balls B from the ball tank 552, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 do not count removed game balls B. Therefore, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can accurately count only game balls B released from the game board 5.

In the above embodiment, out balls circulate along the first ball path 701 and safe balls circulate along the second ball path 702, but this is not limited to this. Safe balls may circulate along the first ball path 701 and out balls may circulate along the second ball path 702, or game ball B ejected from the game board 5 may circulate along either the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, regardless of whether it is a safe ball or an out ball.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the release opening 711b is opened and closed by rotating the security cover 714, but this is not limited to this, and the release opening 711b may also be opened and closed by sliding it back and forth or left and right.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a single partition wall portion 713p is used to separate the game ball B released downward from the game board 5, allowing it to be discharged through one of two ball paths separated into the front and rear of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702. However, this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to have three or more ball paths separated into the front and rear by multiple partition wall portions, and to discharge the game ball B released from the game board 5 downward through one of the ball paths.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 129 to 137. Figure 129 is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine with the center gadgets and other features rendered opaque. Figure 130 is a perspective view of the game board in Figure 129 as seen from the front right, Figure 131 is a perspective view of the game board in Figure 129 as seen from the front left, and Figure 132 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear. Figure 133 is a schematic explanatory diagram of the routing of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. Figure 134 is a front view of the game board with the center gadgets and other features rendered transparent. Figure 135 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 136 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components as seen from the rear. Figure 137 is a front view of the game board with the front unit cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the play area through which game balls circulate and the obstacle pins.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is inserted by the player operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. The game area 5a is equipped with a general prize opening 2001, a first start opening 2002, a gate 2003, a second start opening 2004, a large prize opening 2005, and a special prize opening 2006, which grant a player a predetermined benefit (e.g., the payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) when a game ball B is accepted or passes through the game area 5a. This game board 5 is designed for entertaining players to operate the handle 195 and circulate game balls B within the game area 5a so that the game balls B are accepted into or pass through the general prize opening 2001, first start opening 2002, gate 2003, second start opening 2004, large prize opening 2005, and special prize opening 2006 within the game area 5a.

The game board 5 comprises a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the play area 5a and has a generally rectangular outline when viewed from the front; a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the play area 5a; and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 that detect any illicit magnetic fields within the play area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see Figure 137, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a location that is within the play area 5a.

The game board 5 also includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear of the game panel 1100, and a main control unit 1300 attached to the rear of the board holder 1200 and having a main control board 1310 (see Figure 169, etc.) that controls the game content played by shooting game ball B into the game area 5a.

The gaming board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player; a peripheral control unit 1500 that is located behind the gaming panel 1100; an effect display device 1600 that is located in the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying specified effect images; a panel relay board 1710 that is located behind the gaming panel 1100 and relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510; a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100; and a rear unit 3000 that is attached to the rear of the gaming panel 1100.

The performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear face of the rear unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear face of the performance display device 1600. A panel relay board 1710 is attached behind the performance display device 1600 on the rear face of the rear unit 3000. The panel relay board 1710 relays the connections between the main control board 1310 and the general prize opening sensor 3001, first start opening sensor 3002, second start opening sensor 2401, gate sensor 2801, large prize opening sensor 2402, special prize opening sensor 2601, V prize opening sensor 3003, losing opening sensor 3004, start opening solenoid 2412, attacca solenoid 2414, special prize opening solenoid 2612, V distribution solenoid 3007, magnetic sensor 1050, etc.

The front unit 2000 comprises a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to receive game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a, a first starting opening 2002 that is always open to receive game balls B at a different position in the game area 5a from the plurality of general winning openings 2001, a gate 2003 that is always open to receive game balls B at a different position in the game area 5a, a second starting opening 2004 that can receive game balls B depending on the result of a regular lottery that is drawn when game balls B are received by gate 2003, and a gate 2004 that can receive game balls B at the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. a large prize opening 2005 that can accept game ball B depending on the result of a first or second special lottery drawn by accepting game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004; a special prize opening 2006 that can accept game ball B depending on the result of a first or second special lottery drawn by accepting game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004; a V prize opening 2007 and a losing opening 2008 that give the game ball B accepted into the special prize opening 2006 an opportunity to be accepted; and multiple magnetic sensors 1050 that detect magnetic fields acting fraudulently within the game area 5a.

The front unit 2000 also includes a start port unit 2100 which is attached directly above the bottom end of the play area 5a in the horizontal center of the play area 5a and has a first start port 2002; a side unit 2200 which is attached to the left of the start port unit 2100 as viewed from the front, along the inner rail 1002, and has three general winning ports 2001; an upper left side unit 2300 which is attached slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 as viewed from the front; a first attacker unit 2400 which is located to the right of the start port unit 2100 as viewed from the front, in the lower right corner of the play area 5a as viewed from the front, and has a second start port 2004, a large winning port 2005, and a first sub-out port 2021; and a frame-shaped center device 2500 which is located above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and slightly above the center of the play area 5a as viewed from the front.

The front unit 2000 also includes a second attacca unit 2600, which is located above the first attacca unit 2400 to the right of the center reel 2500 and has a reel winning opening 2006; a side right middle unit 2700, which is located above the second attacca unit 2600 and has one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2022; and a gate member 2800, which is located above the side right middle unit 2700 and has a gate 2003.

The first attacker unit 2400 is equipped with a second start opening sensor 2401 that detects game ball B received in the second start opening 2004, and a large prize opening sensor 2402 that detects game ball B received in the large prize opening 2005. The second attacker unit 2600 is equipped with a special prize opening sensor 2601 that detects game ball B received in the special prize opening 2006. The gate member 2800 is equipped with a gate sensor 2801 that detects game ball B passing through the gate 2003.

The rear unit 3000 comprises a rear box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 on the gaming panel 1100, is box-shaped with an open front and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a locking mechanism (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 for detachably attaching the performance display device 1600. The rear unit 3000 also has a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects game balls B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the front unit 2000, a first starting opening sensor 3002 that detects game balls B received in the first starting opening 2002, a V winning opening sensor 3003 that detects game balls B that are received in the special winning opening 2006 and then allocated to the V winning opening 2007, and a losing opening sensor 3004 that detects game balls B that are received in the special winning opening 2006 and then allocated to the losing opening 2008 (see Figure 145, etc.).

The rear unit 3000 also includes a V prize opening door 3006 that can move back and forth to open and close the V prize opening 2007, and a V distribution solenoid 3007 that moves the V prize opening door 3006 back and forth to distribute game balls B received in the special prize opening 2006 to either the V prize opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008.

Furthermore, the rear unit 3000 comprises a rear front performance unit 3100 located near the front end of the rear box 3010, a rear upper performance unit 3200 located at the top of the rear box 3010 behind the rear front performance unit 3100, and a rear lower performance unit 3300 located at the bottom of the rear box 3010 below the rear upper performance unit.

[5-1. Front components]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 138 and 139. Figure 138(a) is a perspective view of the front component and game panel of the game board as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component and game panel as seen from the back. Figure 139(a) is a front view showing an enlarged view of the upper right corner of the front component and game panel, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the soot line in (a), and (c) is an exploded perspective view of (a) disassembled into its main components as seen from the front.

The front component 1000 is formed to be entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has an approximately square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an approximately circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction, with the inner periphery of the inner shape defining the outer periphery of the play area 5a. The front component 1000 is equipped with an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc from the lower end toward the left of the center in the left-to-right direction in a front view, passing the upper center in the left-to-right direction in a front view, in a clockwise circumferential direction, an inner rail 1002 that is positioned inside the front component 1000 approximately along the outer rail 1001, and extends in an arc from the lower center in the left-to-right direction in a front view to the upper left diagonal direction in a front view, and an out guide portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the play area 5a on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front, and is sloped downward toward the rear.

The component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that slopes linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 when viewed from the front to near the right edge of the component 1000, with the right end being slightly higher; a right rail 1005 that extends from the right end of the lower right rail 1004 along the right edge of the component 1000 to below the upper end of the outer rail 1001, with the upper part curved inward of the component 1000; and a collision stop section 1006 that connects the upper end of the right rail 1005 to the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and against which a game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact.

The component 1000 also includes a backflow prevention member 1007 that is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and can rotate only between a closed position in which it extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 to close the gap between it and the outer rail 1001, and an open position in which it rotates clockwise when viewed from the front to open the gap between it and the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 is provided with an outlet 1008 that penetrates from front to back at the rear end of the out guide section 1003, located at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front within the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide section 1003 passes through the outlet 1008 and is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100).

The component 1000 also has security recesses 1009 recessed rearward from the front end at the outside of the areas extending approximately perpendicularly from the lower ends of the outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002, the underside of the out guide section 1003 and lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4, the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 on the door frame 3 is inserted into this security recess 1009. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to insert an illegal tool such as piano wire into the game area 5a between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, the attempt will be blocked by the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

The component 1000 also has a notch 1010 cut upward from the bottom end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the gaming panel 1100, so that when the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 pass through the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 and face forward.

Furthermore, the component 1000 is provided with a function display unit mounting portion 1011 formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a stamp attachment portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner.

In addition, the front component 1000 is almost entirely transparent, allowing the game panel 1100 located at the rear to be seen from the front.

As shown in FIG. 139, the component 1000 is recessed rearward from the front surface in a predetermined area along the right rail 1005 from the impact stopper 1006 at the upper right corner when viewed from the front, and is equipped with a spec sticker attachment section 1021 to which a spec sticker 1020 displaying the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 is affixed. ...

The spec sticker attachment section 1021 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the spec sticker 1020, and is recessed rearward to a depth (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) greater than the thickness of the spec sticker 1020 (see Figure 139 (b)). The spec sticker attachment section 1021 has a horizontally extending portion at the bottom end and a straight portion extending vertically upward from the right end of the horizontally extending portion, which are set as contact surfaces for attaching the spec sticker 1020.

The insertion pin 1022 extends rearward from the rear surface of the spec sticker attachment portion 1021 to the same position as the rear end of the front component 1000. The impact stop portion 1006 is positioned by inserting the insertion pin 1022.

The separation hole 1023 penetrates the component 1000 from the front to the rear. The separation hole 1023 is circular and extends front to back with a constant inner diameter. When assembled to the gaming board 5, the front side of this separation hole 1023 is closed by the spec sticker 1020 affixed to the spec sticker attachment portion 1021, and the rear side is closed by the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, forming a closed space within the separation hole 1023. As shown in the figure, the separation hole 1023 is located near the edge of the spec sticker attachment portion 1021 (spec sticker 1020).

In this embodiment, the separation hole 1023 has an inner diameter within the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1023 were any smaller, the diameter of the rod-shaped separation member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1023 would be smaller, making it more likely to bend and potentially unable to sufficiently press against the spec seal 1020. On the other hand, if the separation hole 1023 were any larger, the spec seal 1020 would bend at the separation hole 1023, potentially deteriorating the appearance of the spec seal 1020.

With the preceding component 1000 of this embodiment, if the spec sticker 1020 cannot be properly attached to the spec sticker attachment portion 1021 during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1023 from the rear of the preceding component 1000 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the spec sticker 1020 from rear to front, causing the edge of the spec sticker 1020 to curl forward and be removed. The worker can then pull the curled portion to easily remove the spec sticker 1020 from the spec sticker attachment portion 1021, allowing the spec sticker 1020 to be reattached.

In addition, with the component 1000 and the gaming panel 1100 separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1023 from the rear of the component 1000 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the spec sticker 1020 from behind, making it easy to remove the spec sticker 1020 from the spec sticker attachment portion 1021, thereby facilitating the replacement of the spec sticker 1020 when changing models.

Furthermore, as described above, when the component 1000 and the gaming panel 1100 are separated, the specification sticker 1020 can be easily removed from the specification sticker attachment portion 1021 using the separation hole 1023, making it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, and reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by attaching the spec sticker 1020 to the spec sticker attachment section 1021, the separation hole 1023 can be hidden from the front, which prevents the separation hole 1023 from spoiling the appearance and makes it difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole 1023, making it difficult for players to plot fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1023.

In addition, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1023 is closed from the rear by the game panel 1100 attached to the rear of the front component 1000 to which the specification sticker 1020 is affixed. As there is no hole that passes all the way to the rear as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools such as piano wire from being inserted into the game board 5 through the hole, thereby preventing illegal acts.

In addition, because the separation hole 1023 is closed from the rear by the gaming panel 1100, even if an illegal tool is inserted from the front through the specification seal 1020 and into the separation hole 1023, the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110) can prevent it from being inserted (entered) any further rearward. This prevents the illegal tool from entering the gaming board 5 from the front through the separation hole 1023, preventing illegal acts from being committed. In addition, because an illegal tool pierces the specification seal 1020 and leaves a mark on it, illegal acts can be discouraged, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal acts.

In the above embodiment, the separation hole 1023 is provided in the spec sticker attachment section 1021, but this is not limited to this. The separation hole may also be provided in the area where a sticker is attached, such as the certificate stamp attachment section 1012.

[5-2. Game Panel]
The game panel 1100 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 138 etc. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and a front unit 2000 and a rear unit 3000 are attached to it. The game panel 1100 comprises a flat panel board 1110 made of transparent synthetic resin and having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110, is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and has the rear unit 3000 attached to its rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see Figure 137 etc.).

The panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 is formed from a synthetic resin board such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic board such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) to be able to sufficiently hold the obstacle nails N planted on the front surface and the front unit 2000 attached. In this embodiment, the panel board 1110 is formed from a transparent synthetic resin board.

The panel board 1110 is located at the lowest position within the play area 5a, and is recessed upward from the bottom end at a position corresponding to the outlet 1008 of the front component 1000. The panel board 1110 also has multiple openings 1112 that penetrate from front to back and are used to attach the front unit 2000.

Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is equipped with multiple positioning holes formed as round holes and short elongated holes that penetrate from front to back, and multiple engagement steps that are spaced apart in the left-right direction on the upper and lower edges and are formed with a thin plate thickness. The positioning holes are used to position the panel with the panel holder 1120 by inserting protruding pins (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement steps are used to engage with engagement claws (not shown) or engagement pieces (not shown) of the panel holder 1120, allowing the panel plate 1110 to be detachably attached to the panel holder 1120.

As shown in Figure 138, the panel board 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center gadget 2500, which is offset to the upper right of the center when viewed from the front. This gives the panel board 1110 a frame-like shape, and the width perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls B flow (the circumferential direction of the frame) when viewed from the front is wide enough to accommodate multiple game balls B on the left and below the center, and narrow enough to accommodate multiple game balls B on the upper side.

The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 has a roughly rectangular outer shape large enough to encompass the panel board 1110, and is thicker than the panel board 1110 (approximately 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (e.g., thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step (not shown) that is roughly the same size as the panel board 1110 and recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a through hole 1121 that penetrates the holding step in the front-to-rear direction and is roughly the same size as the gaming area 5a.

The panel holder 1120 also has a notch 1122 cut upward from the bottom end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1122 is formed to match the notch 1010 of the previous component 1000, so that when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 pass through the notch 1010 and the notch to face forward.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 has an outlet recess 1123 that extends upward from the bottom end to a position corresponding to the outlet 1008 and is recessed from the rear surface toward the front. The upper part of the outlet recess 1123 is connected to the outlet 1008.

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 also includes a plurality of protruding pins that protrude forward from the holding step and are inserted into a plurality of positioning holes in the panel plate 1110, three engagement claws that are positioned outside the holding step and elastically engage with engagement step sections on the upper and lower left sloping portions of the panel plate 1110, and a pair of engagement pieces that protrude upward from the lower outer side of the holding step and respectively engage with two engagement step sections on the lower edge of the panel plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 can be removably attached with the panel plate 1110 housed in the holding step by engaging the engagement step sections on the lower edge of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement pieces from an upper front diagonal, and then moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 rearward to elastically engage the engagement step sections on the upper and lower left sloping portions with the engagement claws. At this time, the protruding pins of the panel holder 1120 are inserted into the positioning holes of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position relative to the panel holder 1120.

This gaming panel 1100, along with the front component 1000 attached to the front, is formed transparently. This reduces the visibility of the boundaries of the gaming area 5a when assembled to the gaming board 5, giving the player a sense of openness, and while the actual size of the gaming area 5a remains unchanged, it makes the gaming area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player.

In addition, because the gaming panel 1100, along with the front component 1000, is transparent, light from the effect display device 1600, front unit 2000, rear unit 3000, etc. can be reflected or refracted forward (towards the player) to appear to be emitting light, further enhancing the overall decorativeness of the gaming board 5.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the gaming board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 135 and 136. The board holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally elongated box shape that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 has an ejection section 1201 that is cut out from the front end toward the rear in the center of the left-right direction on the bottom surface. When assembled to the gaming board 5, this board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear of the gaming panel 1100 from the bottom and rear, and a main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the discharge section 1201 is located directly above the discharged ball receiving section 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. This allows it to receive all game balls B discharged to the rear of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1008, as well as game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and rear unit 3000, and discharge them from the discharge section 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharged ball receiving section 628 below or the out ball passage 663 (see Figure 115). Game balls B discharged to the out ball passage 663 are detected (counted) one by one by the out sensor 664.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 135 and 136. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see Figure 169) that controls the game content and the payout of game balls B, a setting change board 1311 (see Figure 133) that can set game performance, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 and is attached to the board holder 1200.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover and a base. The cover and base are made of polycarbonate resin and molded to be transparent. The internal space formed by the cover and base can accommodate the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311. Because the cover and base are molded from polycarbonate resin and are transparent, the condition of the front and back sides of the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 (whether or not unauthorized tampering has occurred or whether or not a malicious IC is installed) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. In addition, the main control board box 1320 is equipped with multiple sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover and base, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism must be destroyed to open the main control board box 1320, leaving traces of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by checking the traces of opening and closing, unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be detected, providing a strong deterrent against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, peripheral control board 1510, and setting change board 1311. The main control board 1310 is also connected to the function display unit 1400, general prize opening sensor 3001, first start opening sensor 3002, gate sensor 2801, second start opening sensor 2401, large prize opening sensor 2402, special prize opening sensor 2601, V prize opening sensor 3003, loss opening sensor 3004, start opening solenoid 2412, attacca solenoid 2414, special prize opening solenoid 2612, V distribution solenoid 3007, magnetic sensor 1050, etc.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is equipped with a setting key switch 1311a that can change and confirm the setting values of the pachinko machine 1, a setting switch button 1311b that can select and switch setting values, and a setting change permission lamp 1311c that indicates when changing the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected (inter-board connection) to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (the connectors SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 may also be electrically connected via a harness). This connector connection (inter-board connection) allows signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switch button 1311b to be electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The vertical distance between the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311 is approximately the same as the vertical distance between the right and left sides of the main control board 1310, and its horizontal distance is shorter than the horizontal distance of the main control board 1310, and the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 coincides with the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311.

Connector SMCN of setting change board 1311 is located along the right edge of setting change board 1311, with the center of its vertical distance dimension on the center line, while connector MSCN of main control board 1310 is located along the left edge of main control board 1310, with the center of its vertical distance dimension on the center line. Located below the center line of setting change board 1311 is setting key switch 1311a, which has a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated; located above the center line of setting change board 1311 is setting switch button 1311b, which has a pressable operation portion; and located on the center line of setting change board 1311 and to the upper left of setting key switch 1311a (below and left of setting switch button 1311b) is setting change permission lamp 1311c, which can emit light in a single color (e.g., red), located above the center line of setting change board 1311 and to the upper left of setting key switch 1311a (below and left of setting switch button 1311b). A setting display 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is located above the center line of the main control board 1310 near the connector MSCN. A base monitor 1310h consisting of a row of six 7-segment LED displays with a decimal point (so-called dot) is located below the center line of the main control board 1310 from the center to the right edge. A RAM clear switch 1310f having a push-button is located near the center of the bottom edge of the main control board 1310. Note that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not limited to being installed on the main control board 1310, and may also be located on the dispensing control board 633 or the power supply board 630. In other words, the RAM clear switch 1310f may be located on any one of the main control board 1310, the dispensing control board 633, or the power supply board 630.

In this embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is in its OFF initial position when it is ready to insert a setting key into the socket formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, a position where the length of the rectangular socket is aligned vertically). When the setting key cylinder is in its initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the socket and removed from the socket. Note that in this embodiment, the depth dimension of the setting key switch 1311a is designed to prevent the setting key from interfering with or being damaged by components of other pachinko machines (or components of the island equipment) installed back-to-back on the island equipment of the amusement hall, even if the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 with the setting key still inserted in the socket.

The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON position, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a to the determination key ON position, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can also be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the enter key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this embodiment, the two completely different functions of the setting key ON function and the decision key ON function can be achieved by the setting key switch 1311a alone, depending on the direction in which the setting key cylinder is rotated, and the setting key ON operation and the decision key ON operation can be performed together using the setting key switch 1311a alone.

The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switch button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f are exposed through openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320, respectively. However, to prevent wires or the like from entering through the "gaps" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switch button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f and their corresponding openings, wire intrusion prevention portions are molded into the cover body for each of these openings to prevent wires or the like from entering through the "gaps" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switch button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f and their corresponding openings, and thereby tampering with the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. The setting display 1310g and base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space formed by the cover and base and cannot be touched at all, but because the cover is molded transparent as described above, the setting value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be seen through the cover.

In order to prevent unauthorized tampering, the wiring pattern through which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switch button 1311b is transmitted are routed so that they are not close to each other (are spaced apart from each other) on the setting change board 1311, and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also spaced apart, so that on the main control board 1310 In addition, the wiring patterns through which various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are transmitted (i.e., the wiring pattern through which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern through which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted) and the wiring pattern through which signals from the setting switching button 1311b are transmitted are also formed so that they do not come close to each other (are spaced apart from each other), and the wiring patterns through which signals from the RAM clear switch 1310f are also formed so that they do not come close to each other (are spaced apart from each other).

A brief explanation of the setting key switch 1311a, setting switch button 1311b, and setting display 1310g will be provided below. First, a brief explanation of changing the setting value will be provided, followed by a brief explanation of displaying and confirming the current setting value. Note that the setting key is an important key that can be used to change the setting value as well as check the current setting value. Therefore, only a limited number of people, including the arcade manager, are permitted to possess it, and it is limited to two or three people.

When changing the setting value, the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" must be met: when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main frame 4 must be open relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key must be inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder must be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON position. In other words, the person actually changing the setting value must first ensure that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON position, and powering on the pachinko machine 1. The above-mentioned "predetermined setting value change permission condition" may further include an operation signal being input by operating the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f. In other words, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, a setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a into setting key ON mode, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated. This "predetermined setting value change permission condition" may be met to allow a change to the setting value.

The person changing the setting value must first ensure that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate the setting key cylinder clockwise 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a to setting key ON. Next, the power switch 630a in Figure 7 is operated to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1. This causes a setting key ON signal to be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON for the first time) on the setting display 1310g, and switches the setting change permission lamp 1311c from off to on.

When a person changing the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the setting switch button 1311b, a detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b on the setting change board 1311 is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310. Each time a person changing the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the setting switch button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a increases the current setting value by one based on the detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b on the setting change board 1311. When it reaches the maximum setting value of 6, it returns to the initial setting value of 1, increases the value by one again, and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g. Alternatively, the setting value may be changed using the RAM clear switch 1310f without providing the setting change switch button 1311b. In this case, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, a detection signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the main control MPU 1310a. Each time the person changing the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a increases the current setting value by one based on the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. When the maximum setting value of 6 is reached, the setting value returns to the initial value of 1, and then increases by one again, and the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g.

When a person changing a setting value decides on a setting value, they rotate the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise (i.e., rotate the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) to turn it OFF, and then rotate it another 60 degrees counterclockwise) to perform a second ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a to the enter key ON. This enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the changed and decided setting value in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, when the setting key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (i.e., when the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), a confirmation key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.In this case, after pressing the pressing operation section of the setting switch button 1311b to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g, the setting value can be confirmed and the setting key can be removed from the setting key cylinder simply by turning the setting key switch 1311a OFF, improving operability.

The person changing the setting value turns off the setting key switch 1311a by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key was pressed back to its original position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. This causes the main control MPU 1310a to switch the setting display 1310g from displaying the setting value to not displaying it, and switch the setting change permission lamp 1311c from lit to extinguished. In other words, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so that it returns from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the Enter key is pressed to its original position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This fulfills the "predetermined setting value change termination condition" of turning the setting key switch 1311a OFF, thereby ending the period during which the setting value can be changed (the period during which the setting value can be changed).

The person changing the setting value removes the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and closes the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2, completing the setting value change procedure.

To display the currently set values, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main frame 4 must be open from the outer frame 2, a setting key must be inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder must be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON position, thereby fulfilling the "predetermined setting value display permission condition." In other words, the person actually displaying the currently set values must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (a state in which power has been restored after a power outage or momentary interruption), then open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, and turn the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON position.

The person checking and displaying the currently set setting value must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (a state in which power has been restored after a power outage or momentary power outage), then release the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2. Next, they insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a setting key ON. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the setting change permission lamp 1311c remains off, and even if a person who wants to confirm and display the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation section of the setting switch button 1311b, the setting value will not change at all in response to this pressing operation, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310g will not change either.

When the person checking and displaying the currently set values has finished checking the currently set values, they turn the setting key switch 1311a OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from a display state of the setting value to a non-display state. That is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so that the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the Enter key was pressed to its original position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a), thereby fulfilling the "predetermined setting value display termination condition" of turning OFF the setting key switch 1311a, thereby ending the period during which the setting value can be confirmed (the period during which the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g).

The person who wishes to confirm and display the currently set value removes the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and closes the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2, completing the process of confirming and displaying the currently set value.

As described above, the predetermined conditions for allowing setting values to be changed require that, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main frame 4 be opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key be inserted into the socket of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation to turn the setting key ON, and the pressing operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f be operated to input an operation signal. Meanwhile, the predetermined conditions for allowing setting values to be displayed require, as described above, that, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main frame 4 be opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key be inserted into the socket of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation to turn the setting key ON. In this way, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the predetermined setting value display permission condition have a common requirement in that the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. The setting value change permission conditions are that when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, a setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON, and the pressing operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated to input an operation signal. The setting value display permission conditions are that when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, a setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON; and the main frame 4 being open relative to the outer frame 2 may not be included in the setting value change permission conditions and setting value display permission conditions.

To briefly explain the setting values, "setting values" can change the probability for determining whether or not a jackpot has been won by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not a small jackpot has been won by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not a jackpot has been won by lottery when transitioning from a special mode to a normal mode, the allocation rate to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc., and are preset probabilities (degrees of advantage) that are advantageous to the player (i.e., that increase the number of game balls B that the player can acquire). In this embodiment, setting values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are prepared in advance as setting values, and the probabilities (degrees of advantage) that are advantageous to the player are preset from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values (for example, a jackpot determination table that specifies the ratio of jackpot determination values indicating a jackpot win, a jackpot pattern determination table that specifies the ratio of determination values for determining a jackpot pattern, a small win determination table that specifies the ratio of small win determination values indicating a small win, a small win pattern determination table that specifies the ratio of determination values for determining a small win pattern, a normal mode transition determination table that specifies the ratio of determination values for transitioning from a special mode to a normal mode, etc.), or selects various tables used in various allocation rates associated with set values (for example, an allocation table that specifies the allocation time, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid, etc.). In the various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values, various determination values are allocated at a predetermined ratio. The various tables used in the various lottery determinations are set so that at least some of the values differ from each other, and the various tables used in the various allocation rates are set so that at least some of the values differ from each other, or so that the values differ based on the relationship between a table corresponding to a block that manages the drive of one electric drive source and a table corresponding to a block that manages the drive of another electric drive source. Furthermore, while the above-mentioned setting values are six setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, the range may be smaller or larger. For example, there may be four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4, or eight setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8.

In addition to displaying the setting values as described above, the setting display 1310g also checks the contents of its own built-in RAM when the main control MPU 1310a restores power to determine whether there is an abnormality. If it determines that there is an abnormality, and if the main control side power-off processing did not end normally when the power was cut off, it displays an error message indicating that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in its own built-in RAM are unreliable). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error message.

Next, to briefly explain the base monitor 1310h, the base monitor 1310h displays the number of game balls B that have been fired into the game area 5a and collected by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a, which is partitioned and formed on the game board 5. Of the game balls B that have been fired into the game area 5a, the game balls B that have been collected by the outlet 1008 are detected by the out sensor 664 (see Figure 169, etc.), and this detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 1710.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of its built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.However, the setting key switch 1311a may also be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON position. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a' can be turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and this decision key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (this aspect of the setting key switch 1311a' is sometimes referred to as "decision key variation (1)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, a decision key button with a press operation portion may be provided on the setting change board 1311. In this case, the pressing portion of the Enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover of the main control board box 1320 that corresponds to the Enter key button, and a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover to prevent a wire or the like from entering through the gap formed between the pressing portion of the Enter key button and the corresponding opening and tampering with the setting change board 1311 and main control board 1310. When the pressing portion of the Enter key button is pressed, an operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Based on the detection signal from the Enter key button, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the Enter key is ON when the pressing portion of the Enter key button is pressed, and can determine that the Enter key is not ON when the pressing portion of the Enter key button is not pressed.

The position where the enter key button is placed on the setting change board 1311 may be near the setting key switch 1311a or near the setting switch button 1311b. To prevent confusion between the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b, stickers with the names of each button printed on them are affixed to the cover of the main control board box 1320 at positions corresponding to the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b (instead of stickers, the names of each button may be molded into the cover). In addition, to prevent confusion between the Enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation portion of either the Enter key button or the setting switching button 1311b (the cover must be opened to press the pressing operation portion) may be used, the pressing operation portions may be different in color, the Enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b may have different outer shapes or different shapes of the pressing operation portion, or another type of switch not having a pressing operation portion may be used as the Enter key button. Examples of other types of switches not having a pressing operation portion as the Enter key button include various switches such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotation operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Furthermore, when the setting change board 1311 is provided with a decision key button and a setting switch button 1311b, in order to prevent unauthorized modifications, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the setting switch button 1311b are routed so that they are not close to each other (spaced apart) on the setting change board 1311, and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also spaced apart, and on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern through which the detection signal from the decision key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b is transmitted are also routed so that they are not close to each other (spaced apart). Furthermore, if a confirmation key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a may be replaced with a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (this form of the confirmation key button (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified form of the confirmation key (2)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON state by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON. Then, by rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise, a second ON operation can be performed. This decision key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 13 on the main control board 1310. 10a, but instead, a detection signal from a handle touch sensor 192 in the handle unit 180, which detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195, and a detection signal from a single button operation sensor 194, which detects whether the player wants to forcibly stop the shooting of the game ball B, may be branched in the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and it may be determined whether the decision key is ON or not based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine, based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, that the decision key is ON when the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195, but can determine that the decision key is not ON when the palm or fingers are not touching the handle 195, and/or can determine, based on the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194, that the decision key is ON when the shooting of game ball B is forcibly stopped, but can determine that the decision key is not ON when the shooting of game ball B is not forcibly stopped (the aspect of the handle touch sensor (which may include the aspect of the single button operation sensor) may be described as "variant example of the decision key (3)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.However, instead of this, a firing reference pulse from a firing timing control circuit provided in the firing control unit 633b of the dispensing control board 633 described below can be branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and the presence or absence of the decision key ON can be determined based on these firing reference pulses. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse that allows 100 game balls B to be fired toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on a clock signal from the oscillator circuit. In this case, when the firing reference pulse is input from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON, but when the firing reference pulse is not input, it can determine that the decision key is not ON (the form of the firing reference pulse is sometimes referred to as "variant example of the decision key (4)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned to the determination key ON state by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON. Then, by rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise, a second ON operation can be performed to turn the setting key switch 1311a to the determination key ON state. This determination key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to However, if a distance measuring sensor capable of detecting the movements of a player seated opposite the pachinko machine 1 is provided on the game board 5 and a detection signal from this distance measuring sensor is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via a relay board, the detection signal from this distance measuring sensor may be branched at the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and the presence or absence of the enter key ON may be determined based on this detection signal. The distance measuring sensor detects the movements of a player by transmitting light from a light emitting unit that passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and reflects off the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance, and this reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving unit. In this case, when the main control MPU 1310a receives a detection signal from the distance sensor via the relay board, it determines whether or not there is movement based on this detection signal, and if it determines that there is movement, it can determine that the Enter key is ON, but if it determines that there is no movement, it can determine that the Enter key is not ON (this aspect of the distance sensor is sometimes referred to as "variant example of the Enter key (5)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON state by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON state by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. This determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the key cylinder counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn it OFF, and also by rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise 60 degrees to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the Enter key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a may be provided with a serial output circuit that can serially output information indicating the setting key ON, Enter key ON, and OFF to the outside as serial information. This improves security against signals from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a equipped with this serial output circuit was previously provided on the setting change board 1311, but instead it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or the dispensing control board 633. When the serial information serially output from this serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine from the received serial information whether the setting key is ON, the enter key is ON, or the enter key is OFF (the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit is sometimes referred to as "Enter key variant (6)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON state by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON state by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation, and this determination ... initial position, which is the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON, to its original position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn it OFF, and the setting key cylinder can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the enter key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a may be provided with a pulse output circuit that can output information indicating the setting key ON, enter key ON, and OFF as a pulse signal to the outside. This improves security against signals from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a equipped with this pulse output circuit was previously provided on the setting change board 1311, but it may instead be provided on the main control board 1310 or the dispensing control board 633. The pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit has a pulse width set to 1 ms if the information conveys setting key ON, 3 ms if the information conveys enter key ON, and 5 ms if the information conveys OFF. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine from the input pulse signal whether the information conveys setting key ON, enter key ON, or OFF (the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit is sometimes referred to as "Enter key variation (7)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON state. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON state. A setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return it from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the Enter key is turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), thereby turning OFF the setting key switch 1311a. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the voltage level of the setting key ON signal, the Enter key ON signal, The voltage levels of the ON signal and the OFF signal can be set at an intermediate potential (for example, a potential of 2V to 3V out of a range of 0V to 5V) between the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. A comparator circuit can be provided on the main control board 1310, and the comparison results from the comparator circuit can be input to the main control MPU 1310a, allowing the main control MPU 1310a to determine the ON/OFF status of the setting key ON signal, the enter key ON signal, and the OFF signal. This improves security for signals from the setting key switch 1311a (a setting key switch using an intermediate potential is sometimes referred to as "Enter key variant (8)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, a decision key button with a press operation portion may be provided on the dispensing control board 633. In this case, the pressing operation portion of the Enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the dispensing control board box 632 corresponding to the Enter key button, and a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body for the opening to prevent a wire or the like from entering through the "gap" formed between the pressing operation portion of the Enter key button and the corresponding opening and tampering with the dispensing control board 633. When the pressing operation portion of the Enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the dispensing control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Based on the detection signal from the Enter key button, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the Enter key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the Enter key button is pressed, and can determine that the Enter key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the Enter key button is not pressed.

The position where the Enter key button is located on the dispensing control board 633 may be near the error reset switch having a press operation unit, which will be described later. Stickers with the names of each button printed on them are affixed to the cover of the dispensing control board 633 at positions corresponding to the Enter key button and the error reset switch, respectively, to prevent confusion between the Enter key button and the error reset switch (instead of stickers, the names of each button may be molded into the cover). Also, to prevent confusion between the Enter key button and the error reset switch, a button with a cover that covers the press operation unit of either the Enter key button or the error reset switch (the cover must be opened to press the press operation unit) may be used, the press operation unit may be a different color, the Enter key button and the error reset switch may have different external shapes or press operation unit shapes, or another type of switch that does not have a press operation unit may be used as the Enter key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the decision key button include various switches such as a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a slide portion, a rotary switch with a rotation operation portion, a rocker switch, a touch switch, etc. In addition, when the decision key button and the error reset switch are provided on the dispensing control board 633, in order to prevent unauthorized tampering, the wiring patterns to the decision key button and the wiring patterns to the error reset switch are formed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other) on the dispensing control board 633, and the connections to the connector terminals of the dispensing control board 633 (the connector terminals of the main control board 1310) are also formed so that they are not close to each other, and in the main control board 1310, the wiring patterns to which the detection signals from the decision key button are transmitted and the wiring patterns to which the detection signals from the error reset switch are transmitted are also formed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other). Furthermore, if a confirmation key button is provided on the dispensing control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a may be replaced with a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the form of the confirmation key button (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "variant form of the confirmation key (9)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.However, instead of this, a signal from an error release switch having a pressing operation unit on the dispensing control board 633 can be branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and the presence or absence of the decision key ON can be determined based on this signal. As described above, the error reset switch is used to reset the error displayed on the error LED indicator. After power is restored, if the pachinko machine 1 system has completed startup (the various control boards have completed their power-on processing and are performing interrupt processing) and the pachinko machine 1 is in an error-free state, the pressing operation portion of the error reset switch is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the Enter key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the error reset switch is operated based on a signal from the error reset switch, and can determine that the Enter key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the error reset switch is not operated based on a signal from the error reset switch. This improves security regardless of whether the Enter key is ON (this version of the error reset switch is sometimes referred to as "variant example of the Enter key (10)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON state by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON. Then, by rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise, a second ON operation can be performed to set the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON state. This decision key ON signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. Alternatively, the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 may monitor the logic of a signal from an error release switch having a push operation unit on the payout control board 633 in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described below, create a command, and send the created command to the main control board 1310 in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described below, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, which receives this command, may determine whether the Enter key is ON. As described above, the error release switch is used to release an error displayed on the error LED indicator, and after power is restored, if the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup (the power-on process of various control boards has been completed and interrupt processing is being performed) and no error has occurred in the state of the pachinko machine 1, the push operation unit of the error release switch does not need to be operated at all. Therefore, in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described below, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the Enter key is ON when the dispensing control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit has been operated based on a signal from the error release switch and receives a command to that effect, while it can determine that the Enter key is not ON when the dispensing control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit has not been operated based on a signal from the error release switch and receives a command to that effect. This improves security regardless of whether the Enter key is ON (mode 2 of the error release switch is sometimes referred to as "variant example of the Enter key (11)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON, and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation. In the past, the signal was input from the constant change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f can be provided on the dispensing control board 633, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f can be input to the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633, and also branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a can determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on the operation signal input. As will be described later, if the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when power is restored (more precisely, if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), or if a setting change is made that can change and determine the setting value (if the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a will always clear a specified area of the RAM built into it (the area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area). Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a specified area of its built-in RAM, so the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a confirmation key.The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the confirmation key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, but can determine that the confirmation key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633.This improves security regardless of whether the confirmation key is ON or not.

The pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the dispensing control board 633 is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the dispensing control board box 632 that corresponds to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body to prevent wires or other objects from entering through the "gap" formed between the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the corresponding opening to tamper with the dispensing control board 633.

The RAM clear switch 1310f may be located on the dispensing control board 633 near the error reset switch having a push-button operation unit, which will be described later. To prevent confusion between the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error reset switch, stickers with the names of each button printed on them are affixed to the cover of the dispensing control board 633 in positions corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error reset switch (the names of each button may be molded into the cover instead of stickers). To prevent confusion between the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error reset switch, a button with a cover covering the push-button operation unit of either the RAM clear switch 1310f or the error reset switch (the cover must be opened to operate the push-button operation unit) may be used, the push-button may have a different color, the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error reset switch may have different external shapes or push-button shapes, or another type of switch that does not have a push-button may be used as the RAM clear switch 1310f. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the RAM clear switch 1310f include various switches such as a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a sliding portion, a rotary switch with a rotating operation portion, a rocker switch, a touch switch, etc. In addition, when the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error reset switch are provided on the dispensing control board 633, in order to prevent unauthorized tampering, the wiring patterns to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring patterns to the error reset switch are formed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other) on the dispensing control board 633, and the connections to the connector terminals of the dispensing control board 633 (the connector terminals of the main control board 1310) are also formed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other).In the main control board 1310, the wiring patterns through which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted and the wiring patterns through which the detection signal from the error reset switch is transmitted are also formed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other). Furthermore, if a RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the dispensing control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a may be replaced with a setting key switch 1311a' that can only be rotated within a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the form of the RAM clear switch (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "variant example of the determination key (12)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON position. This decision key ON signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 13 10 and input to the main control MPU 1310a, but instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f can be provided on the dispensing control board 633, and the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633 can monitor the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f in the port input processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below, create a command, and send the created command to the main control board 1310 in the command sending processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that receives this command can determine whether the decision key is ON or not. As will be described later, if the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when power is restored (more precisely, if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), or if a setting change is made that can change and determine the setting value (if the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a will always clear a specified area of the RAM built into it (the area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area). Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a will always clear a specified area of its built-in RAM, so the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a confirmation key, and in the frame command receiving process in the main control timer interrupt process described below, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the confirmation key is ON when the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 and receives a command to that effect, while it can determine that the confirmation key is not ON when the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f has not been operated based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 and receives a command to that effect. This improves security regardless of whether the Enter key is turned on (RAM clear switch mode 2 (which may include the setting key switch 1311a' mode) may be referred to as "Decision key variation (13)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation.This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or dispensing detection sensor 591 is input to the dispensing control board 633. The signal is input to the MPU, and is branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on these detection signals, or the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633 may monitor the logic of the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or dispensing detection sensor 591 in the port input processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below, create a command, and send the created command to the main control board 1310 in the command sending processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receiving this command may determine whether the decision key is ON or not. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be replaced with a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (this aspect of the dispensing unit (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "variant example of the determination key (16)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.However, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the main frame 4 remains open relative to the outer frame 2. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be replaced with a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the form of the main body frame opening switch (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "variant example (17) of the determination key"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must close the main body frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 to turn ON the determination key, and after turning ON the determination key, must again open the main body frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and again close the main body frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.However, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the door frame 3 remains closed relative to the main frame 4. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be replaced with a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the door frame opening switch configuration (which may include the setting key switch 1311a' configuration) may be referred to as "modified enter key (17)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 in order to turn ON the enter key, and after turning ON the enter key, must close the door frame 3 again relative to the main frame 4, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 can be turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to the determination key ON.This determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a may also be provided on the main control board 1310 (this aspect of the setting key switch may be described as "variant example of the determination key (18)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 can be turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then by rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, this setting key switch 1311a is provided on the main control board 1310, and can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key ON to the initial position, and turning it OFF. This OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the Enter key is ON when the OFF signal is input, and can determine that the Enter key is not ON when the OFF signal is not input. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be changed to a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a ON (setting key switch aspect 2 (which may include setting key switch aspect 1311a') may be referred to as "Decision key variation (19)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, a decision key button with a press operation portion may be provided on the main control board 1310. In this case, the pressing portion of the Enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover of the main control board box 1320 that corresponds to the Enter key button, and a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover to prevent a wire or the like from entering through the gap formed between the pressing portion of the Enter key button and the corresponding opening and tampering with the main control board 1310. When the pressing portion of the Enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Based on the detection signal from the Enter key button, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the Enter key is ON when the pressing portion of the Enter key button is pressed, and can determine that the Enter key is not ON when the pressing portion of the Enter key button is not pressed.

The Enter key button may be located on the main control board 1310 near the RAM clear switch 1310f. Stickers with the names of each button printed on them are affixed to the cover of the main control board box 1320 at positions corresponding to the Enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f to prevent confusion between the two. (Instead of stickers, the names of each button may be molded into the cover.) To prevent confusion between the Enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation portion of either the Enter key button or the RAM clear switch 1310f may be used (the cover must be opened to press the pressing operation portion), the pressing operation portion may be a different color, the outer shape or the pressing operation portion may be different from the Enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be used as the Enter key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the enter key button include toggle switches with a lever, slide switches with a sliding portion, rotary switches with a rotating operation portion, rocker switches, touch switches, and other switches. Furthermore, when the enter key button and RAM clear switch 1310f are provided on the main control board 1310, the wiring patterns to the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are routed so that they do not come close to each other (are spaced apart) on the main control board 1310 to prevent unauthorized tampering. Furthermore, when the enter key button is provided on the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a may be replaced by a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the enter key button variation 2 (which may include the setting key switch 1311a' variation) is sometimes referred to as "the enter key variation (20)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.However, instead of this, the presence or absence of the decision key ON can be determined based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f to which the main control MPU 1310a is input. As will be described later, if the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when power is restored (more precisely, if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), or if a setting change is made that can change and determine the setting value (if the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a will always clear a specified area of the RAM built into it (the area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area). Therefore, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of its built-in RAM, so the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f, but can determine that the determination key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. This makes it possible to improve security in relation to whether the determination key is ON or not. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be replaced with a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (RAM clear switch mode 3 (which may include the setting key switch 1311a' mode) may be referred to as "modified enter key (21)"). Note that the period during which the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, as described below. Therefore, if the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to also function as an error reset switch, described below, then an error reset switch is not required on the payout control board 633.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned ON the setting key, and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to the determination key ON position. This determination key ON signal is then transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main Alternatively, the main control MPU 1310a may receive detection signals from the gate sensor 2801 of the gate 2003, various sensors of the various winning openings (e.g., second start opening sensor 2401, large win opening sensor 2402, accessory winning opening sensor 2601, general win opening sensor 3001, first start opening sensor 3002), and out sensor 664 of the main frame 4, and determine whether the Enter key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a ON (the aspects of the various sensors (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "various embodiments of the Enter key (22)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 and send a game ball B to the gate 2003, to various winning holes, or to the outlet 1008 in order to turn on the decision key.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON state by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON, and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation. This determination key ON signal is then sent to the setting change board 1311. Alternatively, if the main control MPU 1310a controls the operation of the movable body (gimmick) by controlling the drive of an electric drive source such as a stepping motor, a DC motor, or a solenoid, and determines the original position or operating position of the movable body (gimmick) based on a detection signal from an optical sensor (photo sensor, distance sensor, etc.), the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the Enter key is ON or not based on the detection signal from the optical sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a ON (the aspect of the optical gamble sensor (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "variant example of the Enter key (23)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 in order to turn on the enter key, and move the movable object (gimmick) so that the optical sensor can detect the original position, operating position, etc. of the movable object (gimmick).

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.However, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a, which receives a detection signal from a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects illegal magnetism within the game area 5a, may determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be replaced with a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the magnetic sensor configuration (which may include the configuration of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified enter key (24)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must bring a magnet from the front of the pachinko machine 1 toward the front of the game board 5 in order to turn ON the enter key.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON state by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation. This decision key ON signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU of the main control board 1310. However, instead of this, if a vibration sensor is provided on the game board 5 that detects fraudulent activity by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 to vibrate the pachinko machine 1 and change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 to cause the ball to enter various winning holes or gates (gates) provided on the game board 5, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not there is fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor, and may also determine whether or not the enter key is ON based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the aspect of the vibration sensor (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as a "variant example of the enter key (25)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 to turn on the confirmation key.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned ON the setting key, and then by rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by the determination key, and this determination key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1 However, instead of this, if a radio wave sensor that irradiates radio waves to the pachinko machine 1 to detect fraudulent behavior such as fraudulently acquiring game balls B by causing malfunctions of various sensors in various winning slots on the game board 5 or various sensors on the payout device 580 is provided on the game board 5 or the payout device 580, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not fraudulent behavior has occurred based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and may also determine whether or not the Enter key has been turned on based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the form of the radio wave sensor (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "variant embodiment of the Enter key (26)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to turn on the confirm key.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON, and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation. This decision key ON signal is then sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MP of the main control board 1310. Alternatively, a detection signal from a pressure detection sensor 373 that detects a pressure operation on the pressure operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 350 and a detection signal from a contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects contact with the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 350 may be input to the peripheral control board 1510, branched at the peripheral control board 1510, and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, with the main control MPU 1310a determining whether the Enter key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a ON (this aspect of the performance operation button unit (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as a "variant of the Enter key (27)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311 were housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320, which was composed of a cover body and a base body. However, the setting change board 1311 may be housed in a separate setting change board box and placed around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 has a cover body and a base body crimped together with a one-way screw or the like at the crimping portion. This crimping portion is a sealing mechanism, and multiple crimping portions are provided. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body and base body with a one-way screw or the like at the crimping portion using one sealing mechanism. Next, to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism must be destroyed. In other words, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. This structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of a setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the enter key button are exposed through openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320, respectively. However, a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body to prevent a wire or the like from entering through the "gaps" formed between the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the enter key button and the corresponding openings to alter the setting change board 1311. Note that if the setting change board box is configured such that the cover can be opened or closed from the base body, unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, a setting change board cover opening/closing switch that can detect the opening of the cover may be provided on the base body. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover opening/closing switch may be configured to be input directly to the main control board 1310, or may be input (indirectly) to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. The above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission conditions can include the case where the cover body is released from the base body based on a detection signal from the setting change board cover body opening/closing switch (the aspect of the setting change board box may be referred to as "variant embodiment of the enter key (28)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are configured to be connected, and in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern through which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the setting key OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switch button 1311b is transmitted are configured. The wiring for the setting change board 1311 and the setting change board 1311a is formed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed so as to be separated from each other. Also on the main control board 1310, a wiring pattern for transmitting various signals from the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the enter key of the setting key switch 1311a, The wiring pattern through which the ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting changeover button 1311b is transmitted are also formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other). However, for either the wiring pattern through which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, The connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 may be connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 separately from the connector SMCN of the board 1311 (inter-board connection) via another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately, and this other connector provided on the setting change board 1311 may be electrically connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 via a harness (the manner in which the wiring pattern is routed may be described as "variant example of the enter key (29)").

In addition, any of the above-mentioned Confirm key variations (1) to (29) may be appropriately selected and combined to adopt the above-mentioned configuration (this selected and combined configuration may be referred to as "Confirm key variation (30)").

The above-mentioned setting values can be used to change the probability for determining whether a jackpot or small jackpot has been achieved, the probability for determining whether a jackpot or small jackpot has been achieved, the probability for determining whether a jackpot or small jackpot has been achieved, the allocation rate to areas that are advantageous to the player, and other factors. The setting values can be preset to provide a probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player (i.e., to increase the number of game balls B that the player can acquire). In this embodiment, setting values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are provided as setting values, and the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is preset from setting value 1 to setting value 6. While the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has multiple setting values ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, other pachinko machines may have a single setting value that presets a probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player. That is, there are gaming specifications, such as the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in which the probability (degree of advantage) that will be advantageous to the player is preset as multiple set values, requiring setting changes, and gaming specifications in which the probability (degree of advantage) that will be advantageous to the player is preset as a single set value, requiring no setting changes at all. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is redesigned to suit such gaming specifications, while the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is redesigned or not used, the main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311 will be dependent on the gaming specifications, resulting in main control boards 1310 and setting change boards 1311 with similar or different hardware configurations depending on the gaming specifications. Therefore, there is a need for a main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311 that can be used in common without being dependent on the gaming specifications, i.e., without requiring design changes to the hardware configuration.

For example, in game specifications where the probability (degree of advantage) that a player will have is preset to a single value and no setting changes are required, there is no need to use a setting value as the probability (degree of advantage) that a player will have an advantage, so this can be addressed by changing the software design to assign setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 as follows:

For example, the main control MPU 1310a can use these as setting values to set multiple actual machine confirmation operation patterns (allowing for variations in the way the pachinko machine 1 is started up after the RAM is cleared) after clearing a specified area of its own built-in RAM (the area of the entire RAM excluding specific areas). In this case, for the operation of the movable body (gimmick element) and the lighting of light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs that are the objects of control by the main control MPU 1310a, actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 specifying "all operations (movement of movable body (gimmick element) and lighting of light-emitting elements)" is assigned as setting value 1, actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2 specifying "movement of movable body (gimmick element)" is assigned as setting value 2, actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 specifying "light-on of light-emitting elements" is assigned as setting value 3, and actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 specifying "detailed operation of movable body (gimmick element) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operating area, movement with other structures and other movable elements)" is assigned as setting value 4. An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 is assigned which specifies "operations such as checking for interference with moving bodies (gimmicks), and the order of operation with other moving bodies (gimmicks)," an actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 is assigned which specifies "lighting of light-emitting bodies per port (lighting of light-emitting bodies per predetermined output port unit of the main control MPU 1310a (i.e., per output port))" as setting value 5, and an actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 is assigned which specifies "no operation" as setting value 6 (the manner of changing the setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing is sometimes referred to as "variant example (1) based on common hardware configuration"). Note that the main control MPU 1310a performs the actual machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing by repeatedly performing main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to operate moving bodies (gimmicks) and light-emitting bodies such as lamps and LEDs. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, can operate the movable body (gimmick) and light the light emitter that are the object of control by the peripheral control board 1510 according to the setting value (actual machine confirmation operation pattern) included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner in which the actual machine confirmation operation is changed after this RAM clear, it is possible to provide a variety of methods for starting up the pachinko machine 1 after the RAM is cleared.

Also, for example, it can be used as a setting value that allows multiple settings for the time from when the symbol changes to when the demonstration (a demonstration effect performed while the player is waiting) begins. In this case, time setting pattern 1 specifying "10 seconds" is assigned as setting value 1, time setting pattern 2 specifying "15 seconds" is assigned as setting value 2, time setting pattern 3 specifying "20 seconds" is assigned as setting value 3, time setting pattern 4 specifying "25 seconds" is assigned as setting value 4, time setting pattern 5 specifying "30 seconds" is assigned as setting value 5, and time setting pattern 6 specifying "35 seconds" is assigned as setting value 6 (the manner in which the time from when the symbol changes to when the player is waiting is sometimes referred to as "variant example (2) based on the common hardware configuration"). The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing the setting for the time between when the symbol changes and when the player waits, it is possible to vary the time between when the symbol changes and when the demonstration begins.

Also, for example, it can be used as a setting value that allows multiple settings to be made for the content of the demonstration (demo effect performed while waiting for the player) that is performed after the symbol changes have finished. In this case, demo effect setting pattern 1 specifying "comical effect" is assigned as setting value 1, demo effect setting pattern 2 specifying "comical effect, moving object (gimmick) movement effect" is assigned as setting value 2, demo effect setting pattern 3 specifying "serious effect" is assigned as setting value 4, demo effect setting pattern 4 specifying "serial effect, moving object (gimmick) movement effect" is assigned as setting value 5, demo effect setting pattern 5 specifying "period drama-style effect" is assigned as setting value 5, and demo effect setting pattern 6 specifying "period drama-style effect, moving object (gimmick)" is assigned as setting value 6 (the manner in which the content of the demo effect is changed is sometimes referred to as "variant example (3) based on the common hardware configuration"). The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, can perform a demonstration using a demo effect (demo effect setting pattern) that corresponds to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on how the content of this demo effect is changed, it is possible to vary the content of the demo effect that is performed after the pattern change has finished.

Also, for example, the volume control switch on the peripheral control board 1510 can be used as a setting value to set multiple default volumes to be adjusted using the switch. Rotating the switch allows the volume to be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, volume setting pattern 1, which specifies "volume 1," is assigned as setting value 1; volume setting pattern 2, which specifies "volume 2," is assigned as setting value 2; volume setting pattern 3, which specifies "volume 3," is assigned as setting value 3; volume setting pattern 4, which specifies "volume 4," is assigned as setting value 4; volume setting pattern 5, which specifies "volume 5," is assigned as setting value 5; and volume setting pattern 6, which specifies "volume 6," is assigned as setting value 6 (this mode of changing the default volume may be referred to as "variant example (4) based on the common hardware configuration"). Note that the volume is set to increase from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, sets the default volume to a volume (volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. Furthermore, the default volume of "Volume 1" assigned to setting value 1 may be muted when the volume adjustment switch is moved in the direction to decrease the volume (opposite the direction to increase the volume) and has been moved to the minimum volume end and adjusted to the minimum volume, or may be set to a volume that can be heard when standing in front of the pachinko machine. Furthermore, the default volume of "Volume 6" assigned to setting value 6 may be set to the maximum volume when the volume adjustment switch is moved in the direction to increase the volume (opposite the direction to decrease the volume) and has been moved to the maximum volume end and adjusted to the maximum volume, or may be set to a volume that is a predetermined percentage of the maximum volume (e.g., 85%). This manner of changing the default volume allows for variation in the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510.

It can also be used, for example, as a setting value that allows multiple settings to be made for the volume of error alert sounds for various malfunctions, goto, errors, and other error alerts. The various error alert sounds cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (i.e., they are not dependent on it), and while setting them to maximum volume makes it easier for game parlor staff and other attendants to notice pachinko machines that emit error alert sounds, they may be irritating to players playing other pachinko machines. Therefore, there is also a demand for something that allows the volume of the various error alert sounds to be adjusted. In this case, error alert volume setting pattern 1 specifying "error alert volume 1" is assigned as setting value 1, error alert volume setting pattern 2 specifying "error alert volume 2" is assigned as setting value 2, error alert volume setting pattern 3 specifying "error alert volume 3" is assigned as setting value 3, error alert volume setting pattern 4 specifying "volume 4" is assigned as setting value 4, error alert volume setting pattern 5 specifying "error alert volume 5" is assigned as setting value 5, and error alert volume setting pattern 6 specifying "error alert volume 6 (maximum volume)" is assigned as setting value 6 (the manner of changing the volume of the error alert sound may be described as "variant example (5) using a common hardware configuration"). The volume of the error alert sound is set to increase from setting value 1 (a volume that does not mute the sound and allows the error alert sound to be heard when standing in front of the pachinko machine that emits the error alert sound) to setting value 6 (maximum volume that allows the error alert sound to be fully heard even when several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error alert sound). The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, controls the error alert sound to be emitted at a volume (error alert volume setting pattern) that corresponds to the setting value included in the setting change command. This change setting for the volume of the error alert sound allows for variation in the volume of the error alert sound when an error is announced.

It can also be used as a setting value to set multiple default brightnesses for light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs. The brightness of the light-emitting elements controlled by the main control MPU 1310a can be increased or decreased from the default brightness. In this case, default brightness setting pattern 1 specifying "Brightness 1" is assigned as setting value 1, default brightness setting pattern 2 specifying "Brightness 2" is assigned as setting value 2, default brightness setting pattern 3 specifying "Brightness 3" is assigned as setting value 3, default brightness setting pattern 4 specifying "Brightness 4" is assigned as setting value 4, default brightness setting pattern 5 specifying "Brightness 5" is assigned as setting value 5, and default brightness setting pattern 6 specifying "Brightness 6" is assigned as setting value 6 (this mode of changing the default brightness may be referred to as "variant example (6) based on the common hardware configuration"). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light-emitting elements by repeatedly performing the main control timer interrupt process described below, thereby lighting, blinking, and controlling the gradation points of the light-emitting elements. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, can adjust the brightness of the light-emitting element that is the target of control by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command, and can turn the light-emitting element on, blink, or set a gradation point. Depending on how the content of this default brightness is changed, it is possible to provide variation in the default brightness of light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs.

Furthermore, for example, they can be used as setting values to set multiple brightness levels for light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs for error notifications of various malfunctions, glitches, and errors. For the lamps controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, Error Alert Brightness Setting Pattern 1, which specifies "Error Alert Brightness 1," is assigned as setting value 1; Error Alert Brightness Setting Pattern 2, which specifies "Error Alert Brightness 2," is assigned as setting value 2; Error Alert Brightness Setting Pattern 3, which specifies "Error Alert Brightness 3," is assigned as setting value 3; Error Alert Brightness Setting Pattern 4, which specifies "Error Alert Brightness 4," is assigned as setting value 4; Error Alert Brightness Setting Pattern 5, which specifies "Error Alert Brightness 5," is assigned as setting value 5; and Error Alert Brightness Setting Pattern 6, which specifies "Error Alert Brightness 6 (maximum brightness)," is assigned as setting value 6. (The manner in which the brightness levels of light-emitting elements for error notifications are changed is sometimes referred to as "variant example (7) based on the common hardware configuration.") The lamp brightness is set to increase from setting value 1 (a lamp brightness that does not go out but is low enough that an error alert can be recognized by standing in front of the pachinko machine) to setting value 6 (maximum brightness). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitters for error alerts by repeatedly performing the main control timer interrupt process described below, thereby turning the light emitters on, blinking, or setting gradation points. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, can adjust the brightness of the light emitters controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error alert brightness (error alert brightness setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command, thereby turning the light emitters on, blinking, or setting gradation points. Depending on the manner in which the brightness of the light emitters for error alerts is changed, it is possible to vary the brightness of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs for error alerts.

In addition, the various setting values assigned to the above-mentioned common hardware configuration variants (1) to (7) are displayed on the setting display 1310g when predetermined setting value display permission conditions are met in the setting value confirmation and display process performed by the main control MPU 1310a (described below). However, they may also be displayed on the setting display 1310g at all times from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on until it is powered off (this mode of setting value display may be referred to as "common hardware configuration variant (8)").

Furthermore, any one of the above-mentioned variations (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration may be appropriately selected and adopted as the above-mentioned determination key variation (30).

Furthermore, the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission conditions required that when the pachinko machine 1 was powered on or when power was restored after a power outage, the main frame 4 be opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key be inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. When the pachinko machine 1 was powered on while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a cleared all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for specific areas in the main control power-on processing described below, and then proceeded with the game by performing interrupt permission settings, etc. Furthermore, when the power is restored to the pachinko machine 1 and the above-mentioned predetermined condition for permitting a change in setting value is met, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on process described below, clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. In other words, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f, if the above-mentioned predetermined condition for permitting a change in setting value is met when the power is restored to the pachinko machine 1, in either case the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on process described below, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. Therefore, the above-mentioned predetermined condition for allowing a change to a setting value may be that when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is also pressed (sometimes referred to as a "variant of the predetermined condition for allowing a change to a setting value").

In addition, the above-mentioned predetermined setting value display permission conditions required that when the pachinko machine 1 was powered on or when power was restored after a power outage, the main frame 4 was open relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key was inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder was rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f was not operated. In addition, when a modified example of the predetermined setting value display permission condition is met and the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting value confirmation display processing, the interrupt permission setting has not yet been made, so the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the main control side timer interrupt processing, and does not read the detection signal from the main frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a) to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a to setting key ON, and does not store these in the input information memory area of the main control built-in RAM as input information described later. Therefore, when a variation of the predetermined setting value display permission condition is met and the setting value confirmation display process is performed, the main control MPU 1310a reads a detection signal from the main frame open switch, which detects the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and a setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a.

By adopting both the above-mentioned modified pre-determined setting value change permission conditions and the above-mentioned modified pre-determined setting value display permission conditions, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. When the pressing operation unit is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process during the main control power-on process described below, clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. On the other hand, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting value confirmation display process during the main control power-on process described below, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. By adopting this configuration, the main control MPU 1310a never performs the setting value confirmation display process once the game begins. In other words, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the game by setting interrupt permission, etc., it never displays the current setting value on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B collected by the outlet ball passage 663 of the main frame 4 through the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 in the ball counting process of the main control side power-on process described below, and outputs the count to the base monitor 1310h in the port output process of the main control side power-on process described below, and displays the number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008 on the base monitor 1310h. Therefore, the current setting value displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h (sometimes referred to as a "variant example of the method of using the base monitor"). As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can use the base monitor 1310h to display the current setting values that have been set during the period from when power is restored until the game begins to progress by setting interrupt permission, etc., and once power is restored and the game begins to progress by setting interrupt permission, etc., the number of game balls B that have been collected by the outlet 1008 (out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4) can be displayed, eliminating the need to provide a setting display 1310g and contributing to cost reductions.

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned variations of the predetermined setting value change permission conditions, the above-mentioned variations of the predetermined setting value display permission conditions, and the above-mentioned variations of the base monitor usage method may be appropriately selected and adopted as the above-mentioned variation of the enter key (30).

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned variations of the predetermined setting value change permission conditions, the above-mentioned variations of the predetermined setting value display permission conditions, and the above-mentioned variations of the base monitor usage method may be appropriately selected and adopted in variations (1) to (8) based on the above-mentioned common hardware configuration.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 129 etc. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. When assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the function display unit 1400 can be seen from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. This function display unit 1400 uses multiple LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game status (game situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc.

The functional display unit 1400, although not shown in detail, is equipped with a status indicator consisting of three LEDs that displays the game status, a normal pattern indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the normal lottery result drawn when game ball B is received by gate 2003, and a normal hold indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of holds related to the reception of game ball B by gate 2003.

The function display unit 1400 also includes a first special pattern display consisting of eight LEDs that displays the result of a first special lottery drawn upon the acceptance of game ball B into the first starting port 2002, a first special reserve number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reserves related to the acceptance of game ball B into the first starting port 2002, a second special pattern display consisting of eight LEDs that displays the result of a second special lottery drawn upon the acceptance of game ball B into the second starting port 2004, and a second special reserve number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reserves related to the acceptance of game ball B into the second starting port 2004.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 is equipped with a round display consisting of five LEDs that displays the number of times (number of rounds) the opening and closing pattern of the large prize opening 2005 is repeated when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "win" or the like.

This functional display unit 1400 can display the number of reserved items, designs, etc. by turning on, off, blinking, etc. the LEDs provided as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the gaming board 5 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 132 and 136. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600, which is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see Figure 169) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light-emitting effects, sound effects, moving effects, etc., and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the performance operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the performance display device 1600, etc. (See Figure 169).

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the gaming board 5 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 135 and 136. The effect display device 1600 is located in the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 via the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at approximately the center of the rear wall of the rear box 3010. When the gaming board 5 is assembled, the effect display device 1600 can be seen from the front (player's side) through the transparent gaming panel 1100 and the frame of the frame-shaped center device 2500.

The performance display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color LCD display device with a white LED backlight, and is installed in a portrait orientation. The performance display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display specified still images and videos.

The performance display device 1600 has one left fixed piece 1601 protruding leftward from the left side and two right fixed pieces 1602 protruding rightward from the right side. With the LCD screen facing forward, the performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear box 3010 by inserting the two right fixed pieces 1602 from diagonally behind the rear box 3010 into two fixing grooves 3010c opening into the right inner surface of the frame-shaped LCD mounting portion 3010b of the rear box 3010 (described below). The left fixed piece 1601 is then moved forward to insert the left fixed piece 1601 into the opening of the locking mechanism, which is then slid upward in rear view.

[5-8. Overall structure of the table unit]
The front unit 2000 of the gaming board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 140 and 144. Figure 140(a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the gaming board as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the gaming board as seen from the back. Figure 144 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow path of the gaming balls on the right side of the front unit. Figure 145 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the first attacker unit and the second attacker unit in Figure 144. The front unit 2000 is attached to the gaming panel 1100 from the front, with its front end protruding forward beyond the front surface of the gaming panel 1100 and its rear end partially protruding into the opening 1112 of the gaming panel 1100.

The front unit 2000 comprises a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can accept game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a; a first starting opening 2002 that is always open and can accept game balls B at a different position in the game area 5a from the plurality of general winning openings 2001; a gate 2003 that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of game ball B; a second starting opening 2004 that can accept game ball B depending on the result of a regular lottery that is drawn when game ball B passes through gate 2003; and a first starting opening 2004. a large prize opening 2005 that can receive game ball B depending on the result of a first or second special lottery drawn by receiving game ball B into first starting opening 2002 or second starting opening 2004; a bonus prize opening 2006 that is located in a different position from the large prize opening 2005 and can receive game ball B depending on the result of a first or second special lottery drawn by receiving game ball B into first starting opening 2002 or second starting opening 2004; and a V prize opening 2007 that gives the game ball B received into bonus prize opening 2006 an opportunity to be received.

Of the multiple (four in this example) general winning openings 2001, three are located to the left of the horizontal center at the bottom of the play area 5a, and the remaining one is located above the vertical center at the right of the play area 5a. The first starting opening 2002 is located directly above the lowest outlet opening 1008 in the horizontal center of the play area 5a. The gate 2003 is located approximately three-quarters of the way up from the bottom in the vertical direction near the right edge of the play area 5a when viewed from the front. The second starting opening 2004 is located in the lower right corner of the play area 5a, slightly higher than the leftmost general winning opening 2001. The large winning opening 2005 is located between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. The special winning opening 2006 is located above the second starting opening 2004 and directly below the general winning opening 2001 on the right side. The V winning slot 2007 is located at the rear of the gaming panel 1100, at a height between the special winning slot 2006 and the second starting slot 2004.

The first sub-outlet 2021 is located below the second starting port 2004, and the second sub-outlet 2022 is located to the right of the general winning port 2001 on the right side.

The front unit 2000 comprises a start port unit 2100 which is attached directly above the bottom end of the play area 5a in the horizontal center of the play area 5a and has a first start port 2002; a side unit 2200 which is located to the left of the start port unit 2100 as viewed from the front, along the inner rail 1002, and has three general winning ports 2001; an upper left side unit 2300 which is located slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 as viewed from the front; a first attacker unit 2400 which is located to the right of the start port unit 2100, which is in the lower right corner of the play area 5a as viewed from the front, as viewed from the front, and has a second start port 2004, a large winning port 2005, and a first sub-out port 2021; and a frame-shaped center device 2500 which is located above the start port unit 2100 and side unit 2200, and slightly above the center of the play area 5a as viewed from the front.

The front unit 2000 also includes a second attacca unit 2600, which is located above the first attacca unit 2400 to the right of the center reel 2500 and has a reel winning opening 2006; a side right middle unit 2700, which is located above the second attacca unit 2600 and has one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2022; and a gate member 2800, which is located above the side right middle unit 2700 and has a gate 2003.

[5-8a. Starting unit]
Next, the start opening unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Figure 140 etc. The start opening unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is located in the gaming area 5a, near the lower end in the center in the left-right direction, directly above the outlet 1008, and is attached from the front to the gaming panel 1100. The start opening unit 2100 has a first start opening 2002 that is always open upward and wide enough to receive only one gaming ball B.

When the start opening unit 2100 is attached to the gaming panel 1100, the first start opening 2002 protrudes forward from the front of the gaming panel 1100, opens upward, and is located directly below the center of the center device 2500 in the left-right direction.

When attached to the gaming panel 1100, the starting port unit 2100 can guide the gaming ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the gaming panel 1100 and deliver it to the second discharge passage 3182 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160 in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Figure 140 etc. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 within the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 has three general winning ports 2001 that are open so that they can always receive game balls B. The three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 are aligned in an arc along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning ports 2001 on the right side open upward, and the general winning port 2001 on the left side opens to the upper left.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the gaming board 5, the three general winning openings 2001 protrude forward beyond the front surface of the gaming panel 1100. This side unit 2200 can guide a gaming ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the gaming panel 1100 and deliver it to the first discharge passage 3181 of the back-front lower performance unit 3160 in the back-front performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000.

[5-8c. Upper left side unit]
Next, the upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Figure 140 etc. The upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the gaming panel 1100 from the front, within the gaming area 5a, so as to contact the inner rail 1002 to the left of the side unit 2200. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 that is inclined so as to be lower to the right.

When the upper left side unit 2300 is assembled to the game board 5, the shelf portion 2301 protrudes forward beyond the front surface of the game panel 1100. The upper left side unit 2300 can use the shelf portion 2301 to guide the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the center device 2500 to the right side, below the center device 2500.

[5-8d. First Attacker Unit]
Next, the first attacca unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 140 to 145. The first attacca unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is located in the gaming area 5a, to the right of the starting gate unit 2100 as viewed from the front, which is in the lower right corner as viewed from the front, and is attached from the front to the front of the gaming panel 1100. This first attacca unit 2400 has a gate 2003, a second starting gate 2004, and a big prize gate 2005 (see Figure 144, etc.).

When viewed from the front, the first attacker unit 2400 has the second starting opening 2004 located at the top and to the right of the center in the left-right direction, the large prize opening 2005 located to the left of the center in the left-right direction and lower than the second starting opening 2004, and the first sub-out opening 2021 located below the second starting opening 2004 and lower than the large prize opening 2005.

The first attacker unit 2400 also includes a second start opening sensor 2401 that detects game ball B received in the second start opening 2004, a special prize opening sensor 2402 that detects game ball B received in the special prize opening 2005, and a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects unauthorized magnetism (see Figure 169, etc.). Two special prize opening sensors 2402 are provided in parallel.

The first attacker unit 2400 is equipped with a second starting gate door 2411 capable of guiding game ball B to the second starting gate 2004, a starting gate solenoid 2412 that opens and closes the second starting gate door 2411 depending on the result of a regular lottery drawn when game ball B passes through gate 2003, a large prize gate door 2413 that can open and close the large prize gate 2005, and an attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the large prize gate door 2413 depending on the result of a first special lottery or a second special lottery drawn when game ball B is received at first starting gate 2002 or second starting gate 2004.

As shown in FIG. 144, the first attacker unit 2400, when viewed from the front, consists of a first shelf 2421 extending from near the upper right corner to the left, and a second shelf 2422 extending from the left end of the first shelf 2421 to the left at a distance slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B, and extending from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf 2421 to the left, but shorter than the first shelf 2421, forming a second starting hole 2004 between itself and the first shelf 2421. a third shelf 2423 extending leftward from the left end of the second shelf 2422, from a position lower than the diameter of game ball B, and shorter than the second shelf 2422; and a fourth shelf 2424 extending leftward from the left end of the third shelf 2423, at a distance four to six times the diameter of game ball B, from a position lower than the third shelf 2423, and lowering to the left, forming a large prize opening 2005 between itself and the third shelf 2423.

The right end of the first shelf 2421 is located to the left of the right edge of the first attacker unit 2400 by a distance slightly longer than the diameter of game ball B. The first shelf 2421, second shelf 2422, and third shelf 2423 are all inclined at the same angle, while the fourth shelf 2424 is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf 2421, etc.

The first attacker unit 2400 also includes a first standing wall portion 2425 extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf portion 2421, a second standing wall portion 2426 extending vertically downward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2421 to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2425, and a third standing wall portion 2427 extending vertically downward from the right end of the second shelf portion 2422 to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2425. 7, a fourth standing wall portion 2428 extending vertically downward from the right end of the third shelf portion 2423 to the bottom edge of the first attacker unit 2400, a fifth standing wall portion 2429 extending downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2423, a sixth standing wall portion 2430 extending downward from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2424, and a seventh standing wall portion 2431 extending downward from the left end of the fourth shelf portion 2424.

The fifth standing wall portion 2429 extends downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2423 to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2424, then extends slightly longer than the diameter of game ball B so as to become lower to the left, and then extends further downward to the bottom edge of the first attacca unit 2400. The sixth standing wall portion 2430 extends downward from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2424 to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2424, then extends slightly longer than the diameter of game ball B so as to become lower to the right, and then extends further downward to the bottom edge of the first attacca unit 2400. The left-right distance between the bottom of the fifth standing wall portion 2429 and the sixth standing wall portion 2430 is longer than twice the diameter of game ball B.

Furthermore, the first attacker unit 2400 has a first horizontal wall portion 2432 connecting the lower ends of the first vertical wall portion 2425, the second vertical wall portion 2426, and the third vertical wall portion 2427, and a second horizontal wall portion 2433 that slopes downward to the left from a position lower than the lower end of the first vertical wall portion 2425 on the right side of the first attacker unit 2400, leaving a gap between it and the first horizontal wall portion 2432 that allows the game ball B to pass through, and then slopes upward toward the middle of the fourth vertical wall portion 2428 on the left. The second horizontal wall portion 2433 is formed so that the portion of the first sub-outlet 2021 below the second starting port 2004 is its lowest.

The first attacker unit 2400 also has a third horizontal wall portion 2434 that extends from near the bottom of the fifth vertical wall portion 2429 and the sixth vertical wall portion 2430 in a direction toward each other, to near the center between the fifth vertical wall portion 2429 and the sixth vertical wall portion 2430, and a partition portion 2435 that connects the opposing ends of the two third horizontal wall portions 2434 and extends upward.

Furthermore, the first attacker unit 2400 has an upper shelf 2436 that extends in a stepped manner along its top edge, descending to the left, and is spaced apart between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423 to allow game balls B to flow through. The right end of the upper shelf 2436 is located directly above the left end of the first shelf 2421, and its left end is located slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf 2424. The upper shelf 2436 is also inclined so that the area near its right end is lower to the right.

In addition, although detailed illustrations are omitted, the first attacker unit 2400 has a plurality of abutment parts that are triangular in plan view and protrude into the space between the upper shelf 2436 and the large prize opening 2005, where game balls B can flow to the left, so that they are staggered left and right from the front and rear walls that form the space. These abutment parts allow game balls B rolling on the large prize opening door 2413 to flow in a large zigzag pattern back and forth when the large prize opening 2005 is closed.

This second starting port door 2411 is designed to move forward and backward. When the starting port solenoid 2412 is not energized, the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2412 protrudes due to the spring force, causing the second starting port door 2411 to move forward and close the second starting port 2004. When the starting port solenoid 2412 is energized, the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2412 retracts against the spring force, causing the second starting port door 2411 to move backward and open the second starting port 2004.

When the starter solenoid 2412 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and when energized, the plunger retracts.

The large prize opening door 2413 is a long, flat plate that is designed to move back and forth. The large prize opening door 2413 can open and close the large prize opening 2005 by moving the plunger of the attacca solenoid 2414 back and forth. When the attacca solenoid 2414 is not energized, the plunger of the attacca solenoid 2414 protrudes due to the spring force, causing the large prize opening door 2413 to move forward and close the large prize opening 2005. When the attacca solenoid 2414 is energized, the plunger of the attacca solenoid 2414 retracts against the spring force, causing the large prize opening door 2413 to move backward and open the large prize opening 2005.

When the Attacka solenoid 2414 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and when energized, the plunger retracts.

In the normal state of the first attacca unit 2400, the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacca solenoid 2414 are both de-energized (OFF). In this normal state, the plunger of the start port solenoid 2412 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the second start port door 2411 protrudes forward. In this state, the second start port door 2411 is located above the second start port 2004, preventing the second start port 2004 from receiving a game ball B. In other words, the second start port 2004 is closed by the second start port door 2411 (see Figures 144 and 145).

In addition, under normal conditions, the plunger of the attacca solenoid 2414 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the large prize opening door 2413 also protrudes forward. In this state, the large prize opening door 2413 is located above the large prize opening 2005, making it impossible for the large prize opening 2005 to receive game ball B. In other words, the large prize opening 2005 is closed by the large prize opening door 2413 (see Figures 144 and 145).

In this normal state, when a game ball B flows down onto the first shelf 2421, the tilt of the first shelf 2421 causes the game ball B to roll to the left, rolling over the top surface of the second starting gate door 2411 and the second shelf 2422 before being released to the left from the left end of the second shelf 2422. The game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2422 will, depending on its momentum, fall onto the third shelf 2423 or the large prize gate door 2413, and roll to the left due to the tilt of these. Note that if a game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2422 hits the underside of the upper shelf 2436 and bounces off to the right, it may enter the gap between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423.

At this time, game ball B rolling on the large prize opening door 2413 that closes the large prize opening 2005 alternately abuts against multiple abutment sections provided in the space between the upper shelf 2436 and the large prize opening 2005, causing it to roll to the left in a zigzag pattern back and forth. After rolling to the left on the large prize opening door 2413, game ball B rolls over the fourth shelf 2424 and is then released from its left end out of the first attacker unit 2400.

In this first attacker unit 2400, when a game ball B flows down to the right of the first shelf portion 2421, it passes along the right side of the first upright wall portion 2425, falls near the right end of the second horizontal wall portion 2433, and rolls to the left due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2433, entering the first sub-outlet 2021. Furthermore, when a game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf portion 2422 and the third shelf portion 2423, it passes between the third upright wall portion 2427 and the fourth upright wall portion 2428, falls near the left end of the second horizontal wall portion 2433, and rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2433, entering the first sub-outlet 2021.

A game ball B that enters the first sub-outlet 2021 is passed to the fifth outlet passage 3185 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160 in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a, and is then discharged from the fifth outlet passage 3185 onto the lower board holder 1200. This first attacca unit 2400 is configured so that both game balls B that have circulated along the right side of the first shelf 2421 and game balls B that have passed through the gap between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423 enter the first sub-outlet 2021, and essentially two first sub-outlets 2021 are provided.

In this normal state, when the start port solenoid 2412 is energized (ON) in accordance with the result of the normal lottery drawn when game ball B passes through gate 2003, the plunger retracts against the spring force, and the second start port door 2411 moves rearward. Then, as the second start port door 2411 moves rearward, the top of the second start port 2004 becomes open, allowing game ball B to be received into the second start port 2004. In other words, the second start port 2004 is in an open state.

When game ball B is received into second starting port 2004 while the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, it flows down between the second standing wall portion 2426 and the third standing wall portion 2427, is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401, and is then released rearward from the first attacca unit 2400. Game ball B received into second starting port 2004 and released rearward from the first attacca unit 2400 is passed to the third discharge passage 3183 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160 in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, and is discharged from the third discharge passage 3183 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

On the other hand, under normal conditions, when the attacca solenoid 2414 is energized (ON) in accordance with the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) determined by receiving a game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the plunger retracts against the spring force, and the large prize opening door 2413 moves rearward. As the large prize opening door 2413 moves rearward, the large prize opening 2005 is opened upward, allowing the large prize opening 2005 to receive a game ball B. In other words, the large prize opening 2005 is in an open state.

When game ball B is received into the large prize opening 2005 while the large prize opening 2005 is open, it passes between the fifth vertical wall 2429 and the sixth vertical wall 2430, then passes between the fifth vertical wall 2429 and the partition 2435, or between the sixth vertical wall 2430 and the partition 2435, is detected by one of the two large prize opening sensors 2402, falls onto the third horizontal wall 2434, and is released rearward from the first attacca unit 2400. Game ball B received into the large prize opening 2005 and released rearward from the first attacca unit 2400 is handed over to the fourth discharge passage 3184 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160 in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, and is discharged from the fourth discharge passage 3184 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

In this way, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of this embodiment, the game ball B received by the large prize opening 2005 is divided into two by the partition 2435, and each is detected by a different large prize opening sensor 2402 before being released to the rear. This prevents game balls B from becoming stuck between the large prize opening 2005 and the large prize opening sensor 2402, and allows a large number of game balls B to be received in a short period of time.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 140 and 141. Figure 141(a) is an exploded perspective view of the lower right guide passage of the center role, as seen from the front, and Figure 141(b) is a side cross-sectional view of the center role, cut left and right at the separation hole in the front member in front of the lower right guide passage, as seen from the right. The center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 is located within the game area 5a, above the starting hole unit 2100 and slightly above the center as viewed from the front, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. The center role 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, allowing the performance display device 1600 located behind the game panel 1100 and various performance units provided in the back unit 3000 to be seen from the front.

The frame-shaped center device 2500 has a portion that protrudes forward from the front of the game panel 1100 along its entire periphery, preventing game ball B shot into the game area 5a from entering the frame.

The center role device 2500 has a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-to-rear direction, a flat flange portion 2502 protruding from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and abutting the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, and a flat support portion 2503 protruding from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501. When assembled to the gaming board 5, the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where its rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. In addition, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape that follows the inner periphery of the opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110 through which the center role device 2500 is inserted. When assembled to the gaming board 5, this peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent game ball B from entering the frame from the outside of the center role device 2500.

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 protrude from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-to-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

Multiple support portions 2503 are provided on the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The support portions 2503 are provided in areas of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude, reinforcing the peripheral wall portion 2501. The edges of the support portions 2503 that protrude from the peripheral wall portion 2501 are formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or in a straight line, preventing the support portions 2503 from standing out. The amount of protrusion of the support portions 2503 from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is within the range between the thickness of the support portions 2503 and the thickness of the panel board 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), ensuring that the support portions 2503 are not noticeable to players while still providing a reinforcing effect.

The center device 2500 also has a transparent, flat closing plate 2505 that closes the rear end of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501. This closing plate 2505 prevents the game ball B from passing through the frame of the center device 2500 and entering the rear (back unit 3000).

The center device 2500 includes a warp entrance 2511, located on the left side of the peripheral wall 2501 when viewed from the front, in front of the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), that allows game balls B within the game area 5a to enter; a warp exit 2512 that opens into the frame behind the front of the game panel 1100 and that allows game balls B that have entered the warp entrance 2511 to be released; a stage 2513 that can release game balls B released from the warp exit 2512 into the game area 5a after rolling them left and right; and a stage cover 2515 that covers the top of the stage 2513 (see Figure 138, etc.). The stage cover 2515 prevents game balls B from entering the frame of the center device 2500 from outside by bouncing game balls B that bounce off the stage 2513 back toward the stage 2513.

The stage 2513 of the center role device 2500 is curved with a recessed central portion in the left-right direction, and is formed in a wavy (W-shaped) shape so that the position corresponding to directly above the first starting hole 2002 of the starting hole unit 2100, that is, the approximate center position in the left-right direction when the center role device 2500 is attached to the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, is slightly higher than either side. This stage 2513 has a section (center release section 2513a) that is slightly higher than either side in the left-right center, and the lowest section on either side (side release section 2513b) that are inclined so that they become lower toward the front, and game balls B can be released into the gaming area 5a from these sections.

When the center device 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the elevated portion in the center of the stage 2513 in the left-right direction (central release section 2513a) is located directly above the first starting hole 2002 of the starting hole unit 2100. As a result, when game ball B is released from the central release section 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, there is an extremely high probability that it will be received by the first starting hole 2002.

The center device 2500 also has a guide passage group 2520 located in the upper right corner, which consists of two passages through which game ball B can pass. When this center device 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the end of the upper right corner of the center device 2500) roughly contacts the inner peripheral edge of the play area 5a (the right rail 1005 near the impact stop portion 1006 of the previous component 1000), and is formed so that game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center device 2500 will always pass through the guide passage group 2520.

The vertical length of the guide passage group 2520 is approximately 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. Each guide passage group 2520 is formed as a groove that opens to the front, allowing good visibility of the game balls B flowing through them from the front.

The guide passage group 2520 is located outside the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role-piece 2500, and is composed of a first guide passage 2521 that is separated from the peripheral wall portion 2501, and a second guide passage 2522 that extends along the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the right of the first guide passage 2521. The entrances to the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are spaced apart on the left and right. The exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent on the left and right, and open diagonally downward and to the right, following the arc of the upper part of the right rail 1005.

The guide passage group 2520 is located above the gate 2003 when the center device 2500 is assembled to the game board 5. The right end of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is located directly below the lower end of the impact stopper 1006 of the previous component 1000, and is configured so that most of the game balls B that come into contact with the impact stopper 1006 enter the first guide passage 2521.

The center device 2500 also has a lower right guide passage 2530 that protrudes to the right from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall 2501 and guides the game ball B from above to the right before releasing it downward. The lower right guide passage 2530 has an entrance that opens upward across the entire width of the front in the left-right direction, and an exit that opens diagonally downward to the left and has a width equivalent to one game ball B.

When assembled to the game board 5, the right end of this lower right guide passage 2530 roughly contacts the right rail 1005, and it is located between the first attacca unit 2400 and the second attacca unit 2600. Therefore, the second attacca unit 2600, the side right center unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are positioned between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530.

To go into further detail about the center feature 2500, the center feature 2500 comprises a frame-shaped transparent center base plate 2540 having a peripheral wall portion 2501, a flange portion 2502, a support portion 2503, etc., a transparent, flat front member 2531 attached to the center base plate 2540 so as to close the front side of the lower right guide passage 2530, and a lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 affixed to the front surface of the front member 2531 and printed with a predetermined decoration (see Figure 141).

The center base plate 2540 has a guide passage flange portion 2540a, which forms part of the flange portion 2502 at the lower right corner when viewed from the front and extends flat to the right; a guide passage wall 2540b, which extends along the lower edge of the guide passage flange portion 2540a from a position on the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2501 forward of the flange portion 2502 and is shorter than the guide passage flange portion 2540a so that the right end is lower; a flat standing wall portion 2540c, which extends vertically along the right edge near the right end of the guide passage flange portion 2540a and extends forward to the same position as the front of the guide passage wall 2540b; and a left guide portion 2540d, which is continuous with the lower edge of the standing wall portion 2540c, extends diagonally downward to the left, then extends diagonally downward to the right, and bends. A gap is formed between the guide passage wall 2540b and the standing wall portion 2540c, allowing one game ball B to pass through.

The center base plate 2540 can guide game ball B that has flowed down from above onto the guide passage wall 2540b to the right using the guide passage wall 2540b, then cause it to flow downward between the guide passage wall 2540b and the standing wall portion 2540c, and then release it diagonally downward and to the left using the left guide portion 2540d. The center base plate 2540 forms most of the lower-right guide passage 2530 with the guide passage flange portion 2540a, guide passage wall 2540b, standing wall portion 2540c, and left guide portion 2540d.

The front member 2531 extends laterally from the same position as the inner circumferential surface of the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the same position as the right edge of the guide passage flange portion 2540a, with its upper edge positioned higher than the upper edge of the guide passage flange portion 2540a and its lower edge positioned lower than the guide passage wall 2540b.

The front member 2531 has an attachment recess 2531a recessed rearward from the front surface to follow the outer periphery, a separation hole 2531b penetrating the attachment recess 2531a from front to rear at a location that coincides with the guide passage wall 2540b in a front view, and multiple mounting bosses 2531c that protrude rearward in a cylindrical shape from the rear surface for mounting to the center base plate 2540.

The attachment recess 2531a is recessed rearward to a depth (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) greater than the thickness of the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 (see Figure 141 (b)). The left edge of the attachment recess 2531a and the area of the upper edge adjacent to the left edge are set as contact surfaces for attaching the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532.

The separation hole 2531b is a circular hole with a circular interior. When assembled into the center role piece 2500, the front side of this separation hole 2531b is closed by the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 affixed to the attachment recess 2531a, and the rear side is closed by the front surface of the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540, creating a closed space inside the separation hole 2531b.

In this embodiment, the separation hole 2531b has an inner diameter within the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 2531b were any smaller, the diameter of the rod-shaped separation member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 2531b would be smaller, making it more likely to bend and potentially unable to sufficiently press against the lower right guide path decorative seal 2532. If the separation hole 2531b were any larger, the lower right guide path decorative seal 2532 would bend at the separation hole 2531b, potentially compromising the appearance of the lower right guide path decorative seal 2532.

With the center feature 2500 of this embodiment, if the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 cannot be properly attached to the attachment recess 2531a of the front member 2531 during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 2531b from the rear of the front member 2531 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 from rear to front, causing the edge of the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 to curl forward and be removed. The worker can then pull the curled portion to easily remove the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 from the attachment recess 2531a, allowing the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 to be reattached.

In addition, with the front member 2531 and center base plate 2540 separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 2531b from the rear of the front member 2531 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 from behind, making it easy to remove the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 from the attachment recess 2531a, thereby facilitating the replacement of the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 when changing models.

Furthermore, as described above, when the front member 2531 and the center base plate 2540 are separated, the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 can be easily removed from the attachment recess 2531a using the separation hole 2531b, making it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, and reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by attaching the lower right guide path decorative sticker 2532 to the attachment recess 2531a, the separation hole 2531b can be hidden from the front, which prevents the separation hole 2531b from spoiling the appearance and makes it difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole 2531b, making it difficult for players to plot fraudulent acts using the separation hole 2531b.

In addition, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 2531b is closed from the rear by the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540, which is attached to the rear of the front member 2531 to which the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 is affixed. As there is no hole that passes all the way to the rear, as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools such as piano wire from being inserted through the hole into the game board 5 or areas where game balls B are circulated, thereby preventing illegal acts.

In addition, because the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540 closes the separation hole 2531b from the rear, even if an illegal tool is inserted from the front through the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 and into the separation hole 2531b, the guide passage wall 2540b prevents it from being inserted (entered) any further rearward. This prevents the illegal tool from entering the game board 5 or the area where game balls B circulate from the front through the separation hole 2531b, preventing illegal acts from being committed. Furthermore, because an illegal tool piercing the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 leaves a mark on the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, it discourages illegal acts, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal acts.

Furthermore, according to the center reel 2500 of this embodiment, a support portion 2503 is provided that protrudes inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501. Therefore, at the location where the support portion 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 becomes the outer edge of the center reel 2500. This allows the inside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (within the frame of the center reel 2500) to be relatively wider, making it easier to see the performance image from the performance display device 1600 behind, the decorations of the back unit 3000, etc. through the frame of the center reel 2500.

In addition, support portions 2503 that protrude inward are provided in areas of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where flange portions 2502 are not provided, thereby reinforcing the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501. This prevents the peripheral wall portion 2501 from deforming or being damaged even if game ball B hits the outside of the area of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where support portions 2503 are provided. Furthermore, because support portions 2503 can increase the strength of the center role piece 2500, the center role piece 2500 can be removed from the injection molding die without being deformed.

In addition, the transparent support portion 2503 protrudes slightly from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is provided partially around the entire periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501, thereby reducing the obstruction of visibility of the decorative elements of the rear unit 3000 provided at the rear, the performance images of the performance display device 1600, etc.

Furthermore, by providing the support portion 2503, there are areas where the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided. Therefore, in areas of the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110) close to the support portion 2503, the obstacle nails N can be planted as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. This makes it possible to maximize the playing area within the playing area 5a using multiple obstacle nails N, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that allows players to enjoy the original gameplay.

In addition, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape similar to the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is flush with the rear surface of the panel board 1110. Furthermore, the support portion 2503 is provided on approximately the same surface as the front surface of the panel board 1110. This makes the support portion 2503 less noticeable to the player, and also makes it appear as if the center gimmick 2500 is integrated with the panel board 1110.

Furthermore, because the support portion 2503 is provided on a portion of the entire circumference of the center reel 2500, the frame of the center reel 2500 can be made wider than if the support portion 2503 were provided around the entire circumference, making it easier to see the display screen of the performance display device 1600 located at the rear. In other words, if you want to make the non-circulating area (inside the frame) defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center reel 2500 appear larger, the support portion 2503 can be provided on a portion of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 extend out to an extent that it does not overlap with the display screen of the performance display device 1600 located at the rear when viewed from the front.

In the above embodiment, one separation hole 2531b is provided in the front member 2531, but this is not limited to this. Multiple separation holes 2531b may be provided in a location that coincides with the guide passage wall 2540b when viewed from the front.

Alternatively, the separation hole 2531b may be provided in a location on the center base plate 2540 that is more inward (to the right in a front view) than the curved left guide portion 2540d. If the separation hole 2531b is provided in this location, the rear side of the separation hole 2531b is not directly blocked by the center base plate 2540. However, because the guide passage flange portion 2540a and the gaming panel 1100 are located behind the separation hole 2531b, the hole connected to the separation hole 2531b does not extend all the way to the rear of the gaming board 5, thereby achieving the same effect as described above. Furthermore, in this case, even if an illegal tool is inserted from the front through the lower-right guide passage decorative seal 2532 and into the separation hole 2531b, the left guide portion 2540d can prevent the tip of the illegal tool from entering an area where game balls B are circulating, such as the lower-right guide passage 2530. Furthermore, in this case, because the right side of the left guide section 2540d is open, by using a linear tool bent in a J shape, it is possible to insert the tool into the separation hole 2531b from the rear even when the front member 2531 is still assembled, and remove the lower right guide path decorative seal 2532.

[5-8f. Second Attacker Unit]
Next, the second attacca unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 140 to 145. The second attacca unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is located to the right of the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role device 2500, between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. The second attacca unit 2600 has a role device winning opening 2006 that opens and closes toward the left.

The second attacca unit 2600 is equipped with a prize winning opening sensor 2601 that detects game ball B received in the prize winning opening 2006, and a magnetic sensor 1050 (see Figure 146) that detects unauthorized magnetism acting near the prize winning opening 2006. The second attacca unit 2600 also has a prize winning opening door 2611 for closing the prize winning opening 2006, a prize winning opening solenoid 2612 for moving the prize winning opening door 2611 to open and close the prize winning opening 2006, a transmission member (not shown) that transmits the forward and backward movement of the plunger of the prize winning opening solenoid 2612 to move the prize winning opening door 2611, and a guide passage 2613 that guides the game ball B received in the prize winning opening 2006 and releases it rearward.

The second attacca unit 2600 has a prize winning opening 2006 that opens to the left at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction, and a prize winning opening door 2611 is provided to close the prize winning opening 2006 from the left.

The prize winning door 2611 is formed in a so-called wing shape, consisting of a semicircular lower edge that bulges downward, a right edge that contacts the right end of the lower edge and extends linearly upward, and an arc-shaped left edge that contacts the left side of the lower edge and bulges leftward from the top end of the right edge. The prize winning door 2611 has a cylindrical rotation shaft 2611a that extends in the front-to-rear direction with the center of the semicircular lower edge as its axis, and a link pin (not shown) that protrudes cylindrically rearward from a position away from the rotation shaft. The lower rotation shaft of the prize winning door 2611 is rotatably attached so that the upper end can move to the left.

The special prize opening solenoid 2612, not shown in detail, is attached with its plunger protruding downward. The transmission member (not shown) has a base attached to the tip of the plunger of the special prize opening solenoid 2612, and a slit that penetrates in the front-to-back direction and extends left-to-right, into which the link pin of the special prize opening door 2611 is slidably inserted, and is attached so as to be able to slide up and down.

When assembled to the gaming board 5, the second attacca unit 2600 is positioned so that its right edge is approximately in contact with the right rail 1005 of the previous component 1000, forming a space between the device winning opening 2006 and the right edge of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center device 2500 through which the gaming ball B can circulate. Furthermore, when assembled to the gaming board 5, the rear surface of the second attacca unit 2600, including the rear end of the guide passage 2613, protrudes further rearward than the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100.

In the normal state of this second attacca unit 2600, the prize winning port solenoid 2612 is de-energized (OFF), and the plunger protrudes downward due to its own weight and the weight of the transmission member. In this state, the prize winning port door 2611 is upright, and the prize winning port 2006 is closed by the prize winning port door 2611. In other words, in the normal state, game ball B cannot be received by the prize winning port 2006.

In this normal state, when the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) is determined by receiving game ball B into first starting hole 2002 or second starting hole 2004, and the special prize opening solenoid 2612 is energized (ON), the transmission member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the special prize opening door 2611 inserted into the slit of the transmission member is pulled upward and slides within the slit, causing the special prize opening door 2611 to rotate counterclockwise around rotation axis 2611a.

As a result, the upper end of the device prize winning door 2611 moves to the left, opening the device prize winning door 2006 to the left, and the device prize winning door 2611 tilts so that the right end is lower. In other words, the device prize winning door 2006 is in an open state. In this state, when game ball B flowing down hits the device prize winning door 2611, it rolls to the right due to the tilt and is accepted by the device prize winning door 2006. After being detected by the device prize winning door sensor 2601, game ball B is guided by the guide passage 2613 and released to the rear. Game ball B released rearward from the guide path 2613 is handed over to the distribution path 3158 of the rear front right decorative unit 3140 in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, and is then distributed to either the V winning port 2007 or the losing port 2008, before being ejected onto the lower board holder 1200 via the rear front lower performance unit 3160.

[5-8g. Side right center unit]
Next, the side right center unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 140 and 144. The side right center unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 is located directly above the second attacker unit 2600 within the gaming area 5a, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. This side right center unit 2700 has one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2022.

The side right center unit 2700 has a general winning opening 2001 that is always open facing upward and has a width equivalent to one game ball B in the left-right direction, and a second sub-outlet 2022 that is always open facing upward and has a width equivalent to two game balls B in the left-right direction adjacent to the right of the general winning opening 2001.

The side right center unit 2700 also has a first guide passage 2701 that guides game balls B received in the general winning opening 2001 rearward, and a second guide passage 2702 that guides game balls B received in the second sub-outlet 2022 rearward. The first guide passage 2701 is formed in a crank shape, extending rearward from the general winning opening 2001, then bending to the right and then bending further rearward. The second guide passage 2702 extends from the second sub-outlet 2022 below the first guide passage 2701, then bending rearward. The exits of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 are lined up one above the other.

When this side right center unit 2700 is assembled to the gaming board 5, the rear ends of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 protrude further rearward than the rear surface of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100.

When assembled to the gaming board 5, the right-center side unit 2700 has its right end approximately in contact with the right rail 1005 of the previous component 1000, its bottom end approximately in contact with the top end of the second attacker unit 2600, and a space through which the gaming ball B can pass is formed between its left end and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role device 2500. In this right-center side unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 opens upward slightly to the left of the role device winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2022 opens upward over almost the entire area between the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005 (see Figure 144).

The side right center unit 2700 can guide a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 via the first guide passage 2701, and then deliver it to the first back guide passage 3156 of the back front right decorative unit 3140 in the back front performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 located at the rear. The game ball B delivered to the first back guide passage 3156 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and then ejected onto the board holder 1200 below through the back front lower performance unit 3160. In addition, the side right center unit 2700 can guide the game ball B received in the second sub-outlet 2022 rearward beyond the panel board 1110 via the second guide passage 2702, and then deliver it to the second rear guide passage 3157 of the rear front right decorative unit 3140 in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 located behind it. The game ball B delivered to the second rear guide passage 3157 passes through the rear front lower performance unit 3160 and is discharged onto the board holder 1200 below.

[5-8h. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 142 and 143. Figure 142(a) is a perspective view of the gate member as seen from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the gate member as seen from the front, and (c) is an exploded perspective view of the gate member as seen from the rear. Figure 143(a) is a front view of the gate member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line - in (a).

The gate member 2800 of the front unit 2000 is located within the gaming area 5a, between the guide passage group 2520 of the center device 2500 and the side right center unit 2700, and is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. The gate member 2800 has a gate 2003 where the regular lottery result is drawn, and which opens and closes the second starting opening 2004 when gaming ball B passes through, and a gate sensor 2801 for detecting that gaming ball B has passed through the gate 2003. The detection hole in the gate sensor 2801 for detecting gaming ball B is designated as gate 2003.

The gate member 2800 has a guide piece 2802 that protrudes diagonally downward and left from near the right edge of its underside. The guide piece 2802 is intended to guide game ball B that has passed through gate 2003 downward and left. This guide piece 2802 is inclined so that, when assembled to the game board 5, its extension passes near the left edge of the general winning opening 2001 in the side right center unit 2700.

When assembled to the gaming board 5, the gate member 2800 is located approximately in the center between the right rail 1005 of the previous component 1000 and the right edge of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role device 2500, forming gaps on both the left and right sides through which the game ball B can pass. This gate member 2800 is located slightly to the left of directly below the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center role device 2500, and is located to the right of directly above the general winning opening 2001 of the side right center unit 2700.

More specifically, the gate member 2800 comprises a gate body 2810 that is attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110) and holds a gate sensor 2801, and a gate seal 2811 that is attached to the front of the gate body 2810 and has a predetermined decoration printed on it. The gate body 2810 is formed to be transparent.

The gate body 2810 comprises a flat front plate 2810a that is long from side to side; a horizontally elongated, approximately rectangular attachment recess 2810b that is recessed rearward on the front surface of the front plate 2810a; an erroneous attachment prevention portion 2810c located in the upper left corner of the attachment recess 2810b; a separation hole 2810d that penetrates the front plate 2810a from front to rear near the right end of the attachment recess 2810b; a pair of arms 2810e that extend rearward from both left and right edges of the front plate 2810a; and flat flanges 2810f that extend outward in the left-right direction from the rear ends of the pair of arms 2810e and are connected to each other below the front plate 2810a.

The opposing surfaces of the pair of arm portions 2810e are spaced apart by a distance greater than the diameter of the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801. Furthermore, the flange portion 2810f is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 with its rear surface abutting against the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

The gate main body 2810 also has a storage groove 2810g recessed at a fixed height in the vertical direction on the rear surface of the front plate portion 2810a and on each of the opposing surfaces of the pair of arm portions 2810e for storing the gate sensor 2801, a rearward extension portion 2810h extending rearward from the rear end of the left arm portion 2810e to extend the arm portion 2810e and the storage groove 2810g, and a locking portion 2810i extending rearward from the rear end of the right arm portion 2810e beyond the rearward extension portion 2810h, with its rear end bent leftward, for locking the gate sensor 2801 stored in the storage groove 2810g.

Furthermore, the gate body 2810 has a protrusion 2810j that protrudes into the storage groove 2810g where the front plate 2810a and the left arm 2810e intersect. The protrusion 2810j is formed in a shape that corresponds to the notch 2801a of the gate sensor 2801. The gate body 2810 also has an induction piece 2802 that extends downward from the underside of the right arm 2810e.

The attachment recess 2810b of the gate body 2810 is recessed rearward to a depth (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) greater than the thickness of the gate seal 2811 (see Figure 143 (b)). The mis-attachment prevention portion 2810c is formed with a C-chamfer that is larger than the chamfers at the other corners of the attachment recess 2810b. In this gate member 2800, the gate seal 2811 (attachment recess 2810b) is rectangular in shape, which is long from side to side, making it difficult to determine the upside-down orientation of the gate seal 2811, and there is a risk that the gate seal 2811 will be attached upside down. However, the mis-attachment prevention portion 2810c makes it possible to identify the attachment orientation of the gate seal 2811, allowing the gate seal 2811 to be attached in the correct orientation (the notch 2811a of the gate seal 2811 aligns with the mis-attachment prevention portion 2810c). Furthermore, if an attempt is made to attach the gate seal 2811 upside down to the attachment recess 2810b, the incorrect attachment prevention section 2810c will cause part of the gate seal 2811 to protrude from the attachment recess 2810b, alerting the worker that the gate seal 2811 has been attached incorrectly.

In this application recess 2810b, the left edge and the diagonal portion of the misapplication prevention portion 2810c are set as contact surfaces for applying the gate seal 2811. This ensures clearance for applying the gate seal 2811 not only in the up-down and left-right directions, but also in the vertical direction of the diagonally extending portion of the misapplication prevention portion 2810c. In other words, there are three effective clearance directions when applying the gate seal 2811: up-down, left-right, and diagonal, making application easier (see Figure 207(a)).

The separation hole 2810d is a rectangular hole that extends vertically. When assembled to the gate member 2800, the front side of this separation hole 2810d is closed by the gate seal 2811 affixed to the attachment recess 2810b, and the rear side is closed by the front surface of the gate sensor 2801 housed in the housing groove 2810g, creating a closed space inside the separation hole 2810d.

In this embodiment, the lengths of the long and short sides of the separation hole 2810d are within the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 2810d were any smaller, the diameter of the rod-shaped separation member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 2810d would be smaller, making it more likely to bend and potentially unable to sufficiently press against the gate seal 2811. If the separation hole 2810d were any larger, bending would occur in the area of the separation hole 2531b in the gate seal 2811, potentially detracting from the appearance of the gate seal 2811.

The right-side inner circumferential surface of this separation hole 2810d is flush with the bottom surface (surface facing left) of the storage groove 2810g formed in the right-side arm portion 2810e. Furthermore, the vertical dimension of the locking portion 2810i is smaller than the vertical dimension of the separation hole 2810d, and the rear end (claw portion) of the locking portion 2810i protrudes slightly to the left compared to the horizontal dimension of the separation hole 2810d.

In addition to its function of allowing the gate seal 2811, which will be described later, to be removed, this separation hole 2810d can also function as an insertion hole through which a core is inserted to form the rear end of the lower locking portion 2810i when injection molding the gate body 2810, thereby facilitating the injection molding of the gate body 2810.

The gate seal 2811 is offset inward a certain distance from the outer shape of the attachment recess 2810b, and is slightly longer in the left-right direction. The upper left corner of the gate seal 2811 has a C-chamfered notch 2811a that corresponds to the mis-attachment prevention section 2810c, allowing the correct orientation (up and down in this case) for attachment to the attachment recess 2810b to be determined. The entire back surface of this gate seal 2811 is an adhesive surface with adhesive properties.

With the gate member 2800 of this embodiment, if the gate seal 2811 cannot be properly attached to the attachment recess 2810b of the gate main body 2810 during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 2810d from the rear of the gate main body 2810 (front plate portion 2810a) and the tip of the rod can be used to press the gate seal 2811 from rear to front, causing the edge of the gate seal 2811 to curl forward and be removed. The worker can then pull the curled portion, easily removing the gate seal 2811 from the attachment recess 2810b and re-attaching the gate seal 2811.

In addition, with the gate body 2810 and gate sensor 2801 separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 2810d from the rear of the gate body 2810 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the gate seal 2811 from behind, making it easy to remove the gate seal 2811 from the attachment recess 2810b, thereby facilitating the replacement of the gate seal 2811 when changing models.

Furthermore, as described above, when the gate body 2810 and gate sensor 2801 are separated, the gate seal 2811 can be easily removed from the attachment recess 2810b using the separation hole 2810d, making it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, and reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by attaching the gate seal 2811 to the attachment recess 2810b, the separation hole 2810d can be hidden from the front, which prevents the separation hole 2810d from spoiling the appearance and makes it difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole 2810d, making it difficult for players to plot fraudulent acts using the separation hole 2810d.

In addition, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 2810d is closed from the rear by the front surface of the gate sensor 2801, which is housed in the housing groove 2810g of the gate body 2810 to which the gate seal 2811 is affixed. As there is no hole that passes through to the rear as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools such as piano wire from being inserted through the hole into the game board 5 or the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801, thereby preventing illegal acts.

In addition, because the front surface of the gate sensor 2801 closes the separation hole 2810d from the rear, even if an illegal tool is inserted from the front through the gate seal 2811 and into the separation hole 2810d, the front surface of the gate sensor 2801 prevents it from being inserted (entered) any further rearward. This prevents the illegal tool from entering the game board 5 or the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801 from the front through the separation hole 2810d, preventing illegal acts from being committed. In addition, because illegal tools leave traces on the gate seal 2811 when they penetrate it, people will hesitate to commit illegal acts, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal acts.

Furthermore, the attachment recess 2810b to which the gate seal 2811 is attached is provided with an incorrect attachment prevention section 2810c. This prevents the gate seal 2811 from being attached correctly if the gate seal 2811 is attached upside down. This not only alerts the worker that the gate seal 2811 has been attached incorrectly, but also allows the worker to attach the gate seal 2811 in the correct orientation, preventing the gate seal 2811 from being shipped with the seal attached upside down.

In addition, since the gate main body 2810 has a protrusion 2810j provided in the storage groove 2810g, if the gate sensor 2801 is inserted into the storage groove 2810g from the rear in an orientation where the protrusion 2810j and the notch 2801a of the gate sensor 2801 do not match, the front surface of the gate sensor 2801 will abut against the protrusion 2810j before abutting against the rear surface of the front plate portion 2810a, making it impossible to engage the locking portion 2810i with the rear surface of the gate sensor 2801. In other words, only when the gate sensor 2801 is inserted into the storage groove 2810g with the projection 2810j and the notch 2801a of the gate sensor 2801 aligned will the locking portion 2810i lock onto the rear end of the gate sensor 2801, holding the gate sensor 2801 in place. This prevents the gate sensor 2801 from being assembled in the wrong orientation, reducing the occurrence of problems with the gate sensor 2801.

Furthermore, by accommodating the gate sensor 2801 from the rear in the accommodation groove 2810g of the gate main body 2810 and engaging the locking portion 2810i with the gate sensor 2801, the accommodation groove 2810g, the locking portion 2810i, and the rear side of the attachment recess 2810b can restrict and position the gate sensor 2801 from moving up and down, left and right, and front and rear, facilitating assembly of the pachinko machine 1 (gate member 2800) and reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1. In this case, because the separation hole 2810d is located in the front portion of the accommodation groove 2810g in the gate main body 2810, when the gate sensor 2801 is accommodated in the accommodation groove 2810g, the separation hole 2810d is closed from behind by the front end of the gate sensor 2801. Therefore, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 2810d is closed from behind by the gate sensor 2801 attached to the rear of the gate main body 2810 to which the gate seal 2811 is attached (pasted), and because there is no hole that passes all the way to the rear as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools such as piano wire from being inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the hole, thereby preventing illegal acts.

Furthermore, as described above, by engaging the gate sensor 2801 with the engaging portion 2810i of the gate main body 2810, movement in the forward and backward directions can be restricted. Therefore, even if the gate sensor 2801 is pressed backward by an illegal tool that has penetrated the gate seal 2811 and separation hole 2810d from the front, the backward movement of the gate sensor 2801 can be prevented by the engagement of the engaging portion 2810i. This maintains the closure of the separation hole 2810d from the rear by the gate sensor 2801, preventing illegal activity.

In addition, because the locking portion 2810i of the gate body 2810 protrudes within the front projection range of the separation hole 2810d, the separation hole 2810d can also be used as an insertion hole through which a core for forming the locking portion 2810i is inserted, allowing the gate body 2810 to be formed by injection molding.

From the above, we can understand the following technical concepts A to C.

[Technical philosophy A]
In gaming machines,
"A decorative body with a specified decoration,
a front member having a decorated portion to which the decorative body is attached from the front, and a separation hole that penetrates the decorated portion from front to back and allows the attached decorative body to be separated by pressing from the rear;
a passage member provided on the rear side of the front member so as to close the separation hole of the front member from the rear, the passage member having a passage portion through which the game medium can flow;
The front member is
The decorative portion extends rearward from the rear side of the decorative portion, is recessed from the rear end toward the front, and the separation hole is located on the front end side, and further has a storage portion that can store at least a portion of the passage member from the rear.

Here, the gate seal 2811 corresponds to the decorative body, the gate body 2810 corresponds to the front member, the attachment recess 2810b corresponds to the part to be decorated, the gate 2003 (detection hole of the gate sensor 2801) corresponds to the passage part, the gate sensor 2801 corresponds to the passage member, and the storage groove 2810g corresponds to the storage part.

As a result, the separation hole is located in the front part of the storage section in the front member, so when at least a portion of the passage member is stored in the storage section, the front end of the passage member can close the separation hole from behind, providing a gaming machine with the same functional effects as those described above.

Furthermore, because the front member has a storage section, by storing at least a portion of the passage member in the storage section from the rear, the storage section can restrict and position the passage member's movement in the up/down, left/right, and forward directions, making it easier to assemble the gaming machine and reducing the costs associated with the machine.

[Technical philosophy B]
In gaming machines,
"A decorative body with a specified decoration,
a front member having a decorated portion to which the decorative body is attached from the front, and a separation hole that penetrates the decorated portion from front to back and allows the attached decorative body to be separated by pressing from the rear;
a passage member provided on the rear side of the front member so as to close the separation hole of the front member from the rear, the passage member having a passage portion through which the game medium can flow;
The front member is
The present invention is characterized in that it further has a locking portion that protrudes rearward of the decorated portion within the front projection range of the separation hole and that is used to lock the passage member.

Here, the gate seal 2811 corresponds to the decorative body, the gate body 2810 corresponds to the front member, the attachment recess 2810b corresponds to the part to be decorated, the gate 2003 (detection hole of the gate sensor 2801) corresponds to the passage part, the gate sensor 2801 corresponds to the passage member, and the locking part 2810i corresponds to the locking part.

As a result, the locking portion that locks onto the passage member protrudes within the front projection range of the separation hole. When the passage member is locked onto the locking portion, the passage member is sandwiched between the rear side of the decorative covering portion and the locking portion so as to close the separation hole from behind. This allows the passage member to close the separation hole and also restricts movement of the passage member in the front-to-rear direction.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, by engaging the passage member with the locking portion, movement in the forward and backward directions can be restricted. Therefore, even if the passage member is pushed backward by an illegal tool that penetrates the ornament and separation hole from the front, the locking portion can prevent the passage member from moving backward, maintaining the passage member's closure of the separation hole from the rear, preventing illegal acts.

Furthermore, because the locking portion of the front member protrudes within the front projection range of the separation hole, the separation hole can also be used as an insertion hole through which a core for forming the locking portion is inserted, allowing the front member to be formed by injection molding.

[Technical philosophy C]
In gaming machines,
"A decorative body with a specified decoration,
a front member having a decorated portion recessed rearward relative to the front-to-rear depth of the decorative body and to which the decorative body is attached from the front, a separation hole penetrating the decorated portion from front to back and allowing the attached decorative body to be separated by pressing from the rear, a storage portion extending rearward from the rear side of the decorated portion and recessed from the rear end toward the front, with the separation hole located on the front end side; and a locking portion protruding rearward from the decorated portion within the front projection range of the separation hole.
The device is characterized by being equipped with a passage member that is at least partially accommodated in the accommodation portion from the rear so as to close the separation hole of the front member from the rear, and that is engaged with the engagement portion and has a passage portion through which the game medium can flow.

Here, the gate seal 2811 corresponds to the decorative body, the gate body 2810 corresponds to the front member, the attachment recess 2810b corresponds to the part to be decorated, the gate 2003 (detection hole of the gate sensor 2801) corresponds to the passage part, the gate sensor 2801 corresponds to the passage member, the storage groove 2810g corresponds to the storage part, and the locking part 2810i corresponds to the locking part.

As a result, a decorative body with a specified decoration is attached to the decorated portion, which forms the front surface of the front member located in front of the passage member having a passage section through which gaming media flows, and the decorative body decoration improves the appearance of the passage member. Furthermore, the decorated portion to which the decorative body is attached is recessed further rearward than the front-to-back depth of the decorative body. Therefore, when the decorative body is attached to the decorated portion, the surrounding portion of the front member around the decorated portion protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative body. Therefore, the decorative body is highlighted by being framed by the forward-protruding portion of the front member, making it easier to achieve the decorative effect of the decorative body's decoration and improving the appearance of the gaming machine.

In addition, because the decorated portion to which the decorative body is attached is recessed toward the rear, the decorative body can be attached using the protruding periphery of the decorated portion on the front member as a guide, making it easier to attach the decorative body in the correct position, reducing the number of failed attachments of the decorative body and suppressing increases in the costs of the gaming machine.

In this gaming machine, the decorated portion of the front member is recessed toward the rear. Therefore, when the decorative body is attached to the decorated portion, the contact surface between the decorative body and the decorated portion is recessed. Therefore, even if you try to remove the decorative body attached to the decorated portion, it is difficult to hook the decorative body from the front, making removal time-consuming. In contrast, a separation hole is provided in the decorated portion. By inserting a rod-shaped member into the separation hole from the rear of the front member and pushing the decorative body forward, the attachment to the decorated portion can be easily released, and the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated portion. Therefore, if the decorative body cannot be properly attached to the decorated portion of the front member during manufacturing, the attachment to the decorated portion can be easily released by inserting a rod-shaped member into the separation hole from the rear of the front member and using the tip of the rod to press the decorative body from behind. This allows the decorative body to be easily removed from the decorated portion and reattached. Furthermore, with the front member and the passage member separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole from the rear of the front member and the tip of the rod can be used to press the decorative body from behind, easily releasing it from the decorated part. This allows the decorative body to be easily removed from the decorated part, facilitating the replacement of the decorative body when changing models. Furthermore, as mentioned above, with the front member and the passage member separated, the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated part using the separation hole, making it easier to separate the components of the gaming machine by material, reducing the cost of disposing of the gaming machine.

In addition, because a separation hole is provided in the decorated part, the separation hole can be made less visible or hidden from the front by attaching a decorative body to the decorated part, which prevents the separation hole from spoiling the appearance and makes it more difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole, making it more difficult for them to plot fraudulent acts through the separation hole.

By storing at least a portion of the passage member in the storage section of the front member from the rear and engaging the locking section with the passage member, the storage section, the locking section, and the rear side of the decorated section can restrict and position the passage member's movement in the up-down, left-right, and front-to-back directions, simplifying assembly of the gaming machine and reducing costs. In this case, because the separation hole is located in the front portion of the storage section in the front member, when at least a portion of the passage member is stored in the storage section, the front end of the passage member closes the separation hole from the rear. Therefore, when assembled into the gaming machine, the separation hole is closed from the rear by the passage member attached to the rear side of the front member to which the ornament is attached. Unlike conventional gaming machines, there is no hole that penetrates to the rear, which prevents linear cheating tools, such as piano wire, from being inserted into the gaming machine through the hole, thereby preventing cheating.

In addition, because the separation hole is closed from the rear by the passage member, even if an illegal tool is inserted through the decoration from the front and into the separation hole, the passage member prevents it from being inserted further rearward (entering). This prevents the illegal tool from entering the passage from the front through the separation hole, preventing illegal acts from being committed. In addition, because the illegal tool leaves a mark on the decoration when it penetrates the decoration, it discourages people from committing illegal acts, providing a gaming machine with a strong deterrent against illegal acts.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, by engaging the passage member with the locking portion, movement in the forward and backward directions can be restricted. Therefore, even if the passage member is pushed backward by an illegal tool that penetrates the ornament and separation hole from the front, the locking portion can prevent the passage member from moving backward, maintaining the passage member's closure of the separation hole from the rear, preventing illegal acts.

In addition, because the locking portion of the front member protrudes within the front projection range of the separation hole, the separation hole can also be used as an insertion hole through which a core for forming the locking portion is inserted, allowing the front member to be formed by injection molding.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls within the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B within the play area 5a will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 137, 144, and 145. When assembled on the play board 5, the center device 2500 is located approximately in the center of the play area 5a. Within the play area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on both the left and right outer sides and the lower part of the center device 2500. In addition, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is located above the upper left side unit 2300 on the left side of the center device 2500.

The multiple obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center device 2500 are adjusted so that game balls B driven into the left side of the center device 2500 will mainly enter the area to the right of the center of the windmill W, and are also adjusted so that they will enter the area to the left of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability. This means that by driving game balls B so that they flow down the left side of the center device 2500, there is a certain degree of probability that they will enter the warp entrance 2511 of the center device 2500.

The multiple obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 of the center device 2500 and the gate member 2800 are adjusted so that a game ball B that has passed through the second guide passage 2522 on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 has a higher probability of passing through the gate 2003 than a game ball B that has passed through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. Furthermore, the multiple obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are adjusted so that a game ball B will mainly pass through the left side of the gate member 2800 rather than the right side.

The multiple obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right center unit 2700 are adjusted so that the game ball B flows mainly to the left of the side right center unit 2700.

In the play area 5a, a game ball B is guided by the outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002 and shot upward from the left side along the periphery of the play area 5a. When a game ball B is shot into the play area 5a so that it flows along the left side of the center device 2500, as shown in Figure 137, multiple obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center device 2500 will guide the game ball B to enter either the warp entrance 2511 of the center device 2500 or a section to the right of the center of the windmill W, and with a lower probability of being guided to enter a section to the left of the center of the windmill W.

A game ball B guided to the left of the center of the windmill W is guided to the right by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. It may then be accepted by one of the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200. A game ball B accepted by the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then handed over to the first discharge passage 3181 of the lower back front performance unit 3160 in the back front performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, where it is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and discharged onto the board holder 1200. When a game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, a bonus of a predetermined number of game balls B is awarded. A game ball B guided to the left of the center of the windmill W is almost never accepted by the first starting opening 2002. Any game balls B that are not accepted by the general winning opening 2001 are discharged from the outlet 1008 outside the game area 5a.

A game ball B guided to the right of the center of the windmill W may be guided toward the center in the left-right direction (first starting hole 2002) by multiple obstacle nails N arranged diagonally along the bottom edge of the center device 2500, and may be accepted into the first starting hole 2002. Furthermore, a game ball B guided to the right of the center of the windmill W may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through the multiple obstacle nails N arranged diagonally, and may be accepted into the general winning hole 2001 of the side unit 2200.

Game ball B that enters (is accepted by) the warp entrance 2511 of the center device 2500 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. Game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls back and forth on the stage 2513 and is released forward from the center in the left-right direction. When game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the central release section 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, there is a high probability that it will be accepted by the first starting opening 2002, as the central release section 2513a is located directly above the first starting opening 2002. When game ball B is released from the side release sections 2513b on either side of the central release section 2513a, there is a certain probability that it will be accepted by the first starting opening 2002.

A game ball B received by the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then handed over to the second discharge passage 3182 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160 in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, where it is detected by the first starting port sensor 3002 and discharged onto the board holder 1200. When a game ball B is detected by the first starting port sensor 3002, a first special lottery result is drawn and a bonus is awarded, such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls B. Game balls B released from the stage 2513 and not received by the first starting port 2002 are discharged from the outlet 1008 outside the game area 5a.

In addition, game ball B that circulates to the left of the center device 2500 within the game area 5a has no chance of passing through gate 2003 or being accepted into the second starting gate 2004, the large prize gate 2005, or the device prize gate 2006.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, the probability that a game ball B shot into the right side of the center device 2500 will be accepted into the second starting hole 2004 is higher than the probability that a game ball B shot into the left side of the center device 2500 will be accepted into the first starting hole 2002. This encourages the player to shoot game ball B into the left side of the center device 2500 ("hit to the left") when the large prize hole 2005 or the device prize hole 2006 is not open.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, when game ball B is hit with enough force to penetrate above the portion of the upper edge of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role device 2500 that slopes downward from near the center in the left-right direction to the right, game ball B flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

Specifically, when game ball B is hit with enough force to strike impact stop 1006 protruding inward from outer rail 1001, which forms part of the periphery of play area 5a (i.e., a right-handed hit), game ball B that strikes impact stop 1006 enters first guide passage 2521. Game ball B that enters first guide passage 2521 is released downward at a position slightly to the right of directly above gate 2003.

The game ball B released downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is guided by multiple obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 to the left side of the gate member 2800, gate 2003, and the right side of the gate member 2800 in order of decreasing probability, and flows down toward the side right center unit 2700.

On the other hand, when game ball B is shot into the upper right side of center device 2500, enters the entrance to second guide passage 2522, and flows through second guide passage 2522, it is released downward from the left side of the exit of first guide passage 2521. Game ball B released downward from the exit of second guide passage 2522 is guided so that it has approximately the same probability of landing on gate 2003 and the left side of gate member 2800, and a lower probability of landing on the right side of gate member 2800, and flows down toward side right center unit 2700.

Game ball B that passes through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received by the second sub-outlet 2022. Game ball B received by the second sub-outlet 2022 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and handed over to the second back guide passage 3157 of the back front right decorative unit 3140 in the back front performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then discharged outside the game area 5a through the back front lower performance unit 3160. In addition, game ball B that passes through the gate 2003 is detected by the gate sensor 2801 and then released toward the side right center unit 2700. Detection of game ball B by this gate sensor 2801 results in a regular lottery result being drawn, which opens and closes the second start port 2004.

A game ball B that passes through the left side of the gate 2003 and gate member 2800 is likely to flow down the left side of the side-right center unit 2700 due to the multiple obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side-right center unit 2700. It is occasionally accepted by the general winning opening 2001 of the side-right center unit 2700, and rarely by the second sub-outlet 2022. A game ball B accepted by the general winning opening 2001 of the side-right center unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then handed over to the first back guide passage 3156 of the back-front right decorative unit 3140 in the back-front performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. After being detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, it is ejected onto the board holder 1200 through the back-front lower performance unit 3160. At this time, a bonus of a predetermined number of game balls B is awarded.

The game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right center unit 2700 is guided by multiple obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right center unit 2700, and flows down to the left of the special prize winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600.

At this time, if game ball B is received by first start opening 2002 or second start opening 2004 and a "perfect prize" is drawn as the first or second special lottery result, the prize winning opening 2006 will open and close in a predetermined pattern, so that game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the side right center unit 2700 will be received by the prize winning opening 2006 with a high probability.

A game ball B received in the bonus prize opening 2006 is detected by the bonus prize opening sensor 2601 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, outside the play area 5a, before being handed over to the distribution passage 3158 of the rear front right decorative unit 3140 in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000. When the bonus prize opening sensor 2601 detects the game ball B, a bonus of a predetermined number of game balls B is awarded.

The game ball B delivered to the distribution passage 3158 is then distributed to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008 by the activation of the V distribution solenoid 3007. The game ball B distributed to the V winning opening 2007 is detected by the V winning opening sensor 3003 and discharged onto the board holder 1200. On the other hand, the game ball B distributed to the losing opening 2008 is not detected by the V winning opening sensor 3003, but is detected by the losing opening sensor 3004 and discharged onto the board holder 1200. When the game ball B is received by this V winning opening 2007, a special bonus is awarded in which the large winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern.

In addition, game ball B that is not accepted by the device winning opening 2006 and flows down to the left of the device winning opening 2006 enters the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center device 2500 and is released from the exit of the lower right guide passage 2530 toward the first attacker unit 2400.

Game ball B, released downward (diagonally downward left) from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center device 2500, flows down onto the first shelf 2421 of the first attacca unit 2400. Note that, because multiple obstacle nails N are planted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacca unit 2400, game ball B does not flow down from the lower right guide passage 2530 directly to the right of the first standing wall 2425 of the first attacca unit 2400.

A game ball B that flows down onto the first shelf 2421 of the first attacca unit 2400 rolls to the left due to its inclination, rolls over the top surface of the second starting gate door 2411 and the second shelf 2422, and is then released to the left from the left end of the second shelf 2422. Then, depending on its momentum, the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2422 falls onto the third shelf 2423 or the large prize gate door 2413, rolls to the left due to their inclination, rolls from the large prize gate door 2413 onto the fourth shelf 2424, and is then released from the fourth shelf 2424 to the left, outside the first attacca unit 2400.

Depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center device 2500, it may come into contact with multiple obstacle pins N and flow down to the upper shelf 2436 instead of the first shelf 2421. The game ball B that flows down to the upper shelf 2436 then rolls to the left due to its inclination and is released to the left from the left end of the upper shelf 2436, where it then comes into contact with an obstacle pin N planted on the left, changes direction downward, and flows down near the left end of the top surface of the large prize opening door 2413. It then rolls left across the large prize opening door 2413 and the fourth shelf 2424 and is released out of the first attacker unit 2400. Therefore, even if game ball B rolls on the upper shelf 2436, it may be accepted by the large prize opening 2005 depending on the timing when game ball B is released from the upper shelf 2436 and the timing when the large prize opening 2005 opens.

Furthermore, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center device 2500, it may bounce to the right by hitting the obstacle nail N or the right end of the upper shelf portion 2436, causing it to flow down onto the first shelf portion 2421, rolling to the right against the inclination of the first shelf portion 2421 and being released to the right (downward) from the right end of the first shelf portion 2421. The game ball B released to the right from the right end of the first shelf portion 2421 passes between the first vertical wall portion 2425 and the right rail 1005 of the previous component 1000, flows down near the right end of the second horizontal wall portion 2433, and rolls to the left due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2433 to be received by the first sub-outlet 2021. The game ball B received by the first sub-outlet 2021 is not returned to the game area 5a but is handed over to the fifth discharge passage 3185 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160 in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, and is discharged from the fifth discharge passage 3185 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

When game ball B is released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center device 2500, if a "normal win" is drawn as the normal lottery result due to game ball B's passage through gate 2003, the second start gate door 2411 will move and the second start gate 2004 will open in a predetermined pattern, so game ball B rolling to the left on the first shelf section 2421 may be received by the second start gate 2004. When game ball B is received by the second start gate 2004, it will be detected by the second start gate sensor 2401 and then ejected onto the board holder 1200 outside the play area 5a. When game ball B is detected by the second start gate sensor 2401, a second special lottery result will be drawn and a bonus will be awarded, such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out.

Furthermore, when a game ball B is released to the left from the second shelf 2422, if the game ball B is received by the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 and a "jackpot" is drawn as the first or second special lottery result, the large prize opening door 2413 will move and the large prize opening 2005 will open and close in a predetermined pattern, so there is a high probability that the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2422 will be received by the large prize opening 2005. The game ball B received by the large prize opening 2005 is detected by the large prize opening sensor 2402 and ejected onto the board holder 1200 outside the play area 5a. Detection of the game ball B by the large prize opening sensor 2402 grants a bonus in which a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

Depending on the momentum of the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2422, it may come into contact with a step on the underside of the upper shelf 2436, flowing diagonally downward to the right and entering the gap between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423. A game ball B that enters the gap between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423 passes between the third upright wall 2427 and the fourth upright wall 2428, falls near the left end of the second horizontal wall 2433, and rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall 2433, before being received by the first sub-outlet 2021.

If game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center device 2500 toward the first attacker unit 2400 is not accepted by any of the second starting opening 2004, the large prize opening 2005, or the first sub-outlet 2021, it is ejected from the outlet 1008 at the bottom end of the game area 5a to the rear and below of the game panel 1100, outside the game area 5a.

For this reason, in order to open or close the large prize opening 2005 or the special prize opening 2006, it is necessary to receive a game ball B into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 and draw a first or second special lottery result such as a "special prize win" or a "big win." While the first start opening 2002 is always open, the second start opening 2004 requires a game ball B to pass through the gate 2003 to draw (win) a "normal win" as a normal lottery result. Therefore, the opportunity for receiving a game ball B into the second start opening 2004 is lower than for the first start opening 2002.

Therefore, under normal conditions, the player can perform an operation to shoot game ball B so that game ball B flows down the left side of the center device 2500 so that game ball B can be received by the first starting opening 2002. This allows the player to enjoy the original gameplay of the pachinko machine 1 by seeing the movement of game ball B being guided by multiple obstacle pins N, and also heightens the player's anticipation for game ball B to be received by the first starting opening 2002.

When game ball B is received by first starting opening 2002 and a "hit with special feature" or "jackpot" is selected as the first special lottery result, large prize opening 2005 or special feature opening 2006 opens and closes. This allows the player to change the operation for hitting game ball B to a "right hit" so that game ball B can be received by large prize opening 2005 or special feature opening 2006, thereby increasing the expectation of game ball B being received by large prize opening 2005 or special feature opening 2006.

In this case, a guide passage group 2520 consisting of a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided in the upper right corner of the center device 2500. Depending on the guide passage through which the game ball B is circulated, it can be made easier to pass through the gate 2003 or to be accepted by the second sub-outlet 2022. Therefore, the strength of the impact of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B flows through the desired guide passage, allowing the player to enjoy the operation of hitting the game ball B.

In addition, by performing a "right hit," game ball B may be passed through gate 2003, potentially opening second starting gate 2004 and drawing a "normal hit," and by receiving game ball B into the open second starting gate 2004, there is a possibility of drawing a "special hit" or "jackpot." This can heighten anticipation for the game and prevent a decline in interest.

[5-8j. Magnetic Sensor]
Next, the multiple magnetic sensors 1050 on the game board 5 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 146 to 148. Figure 146 is a front view of the game board showing the arrangement of the magnetic sensors. Figure 147(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that can detect magnetic field lines from a magnet, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that cannot detect magnetic field lines from a magnet, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic perspective view of the detection range of the magnetic sensor, (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic body that cannot detect magnetic field lines from a magnet, and (e) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic body that can detect magnetic field lines from a magnet. Figure 148(a) is a perspective view showing the magnetic sensor held by a holding member, (b) is an exploded perspective view showing the holding member and the magnetic sensor separated, and (c) is an exploded view showing a cross-section of the holding member.

Multiple magnetic sensors 1050 are provided on the game board 5 and are intended to detect illicit magnetism (magnetic field lines) acting within the play area 5a. As shown in Figure 148 (c), the magnetic sensor 1050 comprises a sensor body 1051 for detecting magnetism, a white sensor board 1052 on which the sensor body 1051 is mounted, and a transparent sensor case 1053 that covers the sensor board 1052 and the sensor body 1051. Although not shown, in addition to the sensor body 1051, the sensor board 1052 also mounts ICs, transistors, resistors, diodes, connectors, etc.

The magnetic sensor 1050 is rectangular in plan view and is formed as a rectangular parallelepiped with a height shorter than the length of the short side of the rectangle, with one of the height sides chamfered. The internal sensor body 1051 and sensor board 1052 of this magnetic sensor 1050 can be seen from the outside through the transparent sensor case 1053.

The magnetic sensor 1050 can detect the passage of magnetic field lines parallel to the longest side of the rectangular parallelepiped. Therefore, when the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1050 and the positional relationship with the magnet 1055 are as shown in Figure 147(a), the magnetic field lines of the magnet 1055 pass in a direction parallel to the long side, and the magnetism (magnetic field lines) of the magnet 1055 can be detected.

On the other hand, when the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1050 and the positional relationship with the magnet 1055 are as shown in Figure 147 (b), the magnetic field lines of the magnet 1055 pass perpendicular to the long side (perpendicular to the surface of the rectangle formed by the long and short sides), and therefore the magnetism (magnetic field lines) of the magnet 1055 cannot be detected.

For this reason, the magnetic sensor 1050 has a magnetic detection area DA of the magnet 1055 on one side and the other side of the long side of the magnetic sensor 1050, as shown by the hatched area in Figure 147(c). In other words, the magnetic sensor 1050 has a gourd-shaped detection area DA formed by combining two spheres.

In the gaming board 5 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146, multiple magnetic sensors 1050 are provided, each facing in an appropriate direction. Each magnetic sensor 1050 is positioned so that it can detect illegal magnetic fields acting near the general prize opening 2001, first start opening 2002, second start opening 2004, large prize opening 2005, special prize opening 2006, and warp entrance 2511 in the gaming area 5a. In other words, each magnetic sensor 1050 is positioned in an appropriate direction so that areas within the gaming area 5a where illegal activity using magnets is expected to occur are included in the detection area DA of the magnetic sensor 1050 (the area shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 146).

In addition, on the game board 5, each magnetic sensor 1050 is designed so that its detection area DA does not come into contact with the solenoids or drive motors, so that it does not detect magnetism (magnetic field lines) from the start port solenoid 2412, attacca solenoid 2414, bonus prize port solenoid 2612, V-distribution solenoid, and drive motor provided in the back unit 3000.

Next, as shown in Figure 147 (d), if a magnetic body 1056 is placed in parallel with a magnetic sensor 1050 that can detect magnetic field lines from a magnet 1055, the magnetic field lines will be attracted to the magnetic body 1056, reducing the number of magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050, and the magnetic sensor 1050 may no longer be able to detect the magnetic field lines (magnetism) from the magnet 1055.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 147 (e), if a magnetic body 1057 is placed in series with a magnetic sensor 1050 that can detect magnetic lines of force from a magnet 1055, the magnetic body 1057 will attract the magnetic lines of force, increasing the number of magnetic lines of force passing through the magnetic sensor 1050. This makes it possible to detect the magnetic field of a magnet 1055 that is far away or a magnet 1055 with weak magnetic force.

In conventional pachinko machines, magnetic sensors are attached to the game board using screws made of magnetic material. However, depending on the relative positions of the magnetic sensor and the screws, the magnetic field from the magnet used to commit fraud can be attracted to the highly permeable screws, reducing the number of magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor, making it impossible to detect the approach of a magnet. In contrast, in this embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached without using screws.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 148, the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached to the game board 5 via a holding member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material (here, synthetic resin). The holding member 1060 has a storage section 1061 that can store the magnetic sensor 1050 from one side, and an elastic claw 1062 that engages with the magnetic sensor 1050 stored in the storage section 1061. The holding member 1060 also has a protrusion 1063 that protrudes from the leg of the elastic claw 1062 into the storage section 1061. The holding member 1060 is made of transparent synthetic resin.

When the magnetic sensor 1050 is inserted into the storage section 1061 from the outside, the elastic claw 1062 of this holding member 1060 elastically deforms in a direction away from the storage section 1061, and when the magnetic sensor 1050 is stored in the storage section 1061, the elastic claw 1062 returns to its original position and engages with the magnetic sensor 1050. At this time, the protrusion 1063 on the leg of the elastic claw 1062 abuts against the magnetic sensor 1050, pressing the magnetic sensor 1050 against a portion of the inner surface of the storage section 1061 opposite the elastic claw 1062.

The engagement of this elastic claw 1062 prevents the magnetic sensor 1050 from moving in the direction of coming out of the housing portion 1061, preventing the magnetic sensor 1050 from falling out. Furthermore, the abutment of the protrusion 1063 presses the magnetic sensor 1050 into the housing portion 1061, preventing the magnetic sensor 1050 from rattling within the housing portion 1061.

In this way, because the holding member 1060 is made of a non-magnetic material, it is possible to prevent the holding member 1060 from attracting magnetic field lines from the magnet when the magnet is brought close to the play area 5a, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050. This makes it easier to detect magnetism acting on the play area 5a, allowing for early detection of fraudulent activity using magnets, and by reporting the detection of suspicious magnetic fields by the magnetic sensor 1050, it is possible to dissuade players from engaging in fraudulent activity, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

In addition, the retaining member 1060, made of a non-magnetic material, avoids the attraction of magnetic field lines from the magnet and prevents a decrease in the magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050. This makes it possible to effectively detect the magnetic field acting on the play area 5a with fewer magnetic sensors 1050 than in conventional pachinko machines, allowing for a smaller number of magnetic sensors 1050 than conventional pachinko machines, thereby suppressing increases in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by elastically deforming the elastic claws 1062 of the holding member 1060, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached to and detached from the holding member 1060. This means that the magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached using the elastic claws 1062 without using metal screws made of magnetic material, as is the case with conventional pachinko machines. This also simplifies the assembly of the pachinko machine 1, thereby minimizing the increase in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, because the magnetic sensor 1050 is biased (pressed) toward the housing portion 1061 by the protrusion 1063 of the holding member 1060, the biasing force of the protrusion 1063 can be suppressed, which can reduce the likelihood of the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1050 becoming detached or of poor contact occurring due to such vibration, ensuring reliable operation of the magnetic sensor 1050.

Furthermore, because the magnetic sensor 1050 is held by the holding member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material and attached to the game board 5, the portion of the holding member 1060 that is attached to the game board 5 can be located away from the magnetic sensor 1050 or outside the magnetic detection area DA in the play area 5a. This minimizes the influence of magnetic materials such as screws used to attach the holding member 1060 to the game board 5, allowing the magnetic sensor 1050 to reliably detect magnetic fields acting on the play area 5a, providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly deterrent to fraudulent activities using magnets.

Furthermore, the magnetic sensor 1050 is held visibly by a transparent holding member 1060, and the sensor case 1053 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is transparent, so the sensor main body 1051 mounted on the sensor board 1052 can be seen by the player through the transparent sensor case 1053. In this case, because the surface of the sensor board 1052 on which the sensor main body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor main body 1051, which is a different color (e.g., black), can be made to stand out. This makes it clear to the player that the magnetic sensor 1050 is genuine and not a dummy. The visibility of the magnetic sensor 1050 can discourage those who would otherwise commit fraud using magnets, and can increase the deterrent effect against fraudulent activities, thereby reducing the burden on the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, in the magnetic sensor 1050, the surface of the sensor board 1052 on which the sensor main body 1051 is mounted is white, making the sensor board 1052 less noticeable and preventing it from being mistaken for a decorative board on which an LED is mounted. Therefore, even if the sensor board 1052 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is visible, it will not bother a typical player, and it is possible to avoid spoiling the appearance of the play area 5a.

Furthermore, because the sensor body 1051 of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be seen from the outside, it is possible to check from the outside whether the sensor body 1051 is damaged, which simplifies the maintenance work required for the pachinko machine 1 and reduces the burden on the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the rear unit]
The overall configuration of the rear unit 3000 of the gaming board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 149 etc. Figure 149(a) is a perspective view of the rear unit of the gaming board as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rear unit of the gaming board as seen from the back. The rear unit 3000 of the gaming board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The rear unit 3000 comprises a rear box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 and is box-shaped with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a locking mechanism (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

The rear unit 3000 also includes a rear front performance unit 3100 located near the front end of the rear box 3010, a rear upper performance unit 3200 located at the top of the rear box 3010 behind the rear front performance unit 3100, and a rear lower performance unit 3300 located at the bottom of the rear box 3010 below the rear upper performance unit.

The rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 is box-shaped and open at the front, with a square opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall, a flat frame-like LCD mounting section 3010b that protrudes rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed from the inside of the frame toward the right on the right side of the LCD mounting section 3010b into which the right fixing piece 1602 of the performance display device 1600 is inserted, and a cutout 3010d cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 near the vertical center of the left side of the LCD mounting section 3010b, into which a locking mechanism is attached.

The opening 3010a of the rear box 3010 is formed to be approximately the same size as the display screen of the performance display device 1600. The LCD mounting section 3010b is also formed to be large enough to fit the performance display device 1600 into the frame. A locking mechanism is attached to the rear box 3010, slidable up and down, to the left of the cutout section 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from behind.

The rear box 3010 also has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from its front end. This fixing piece 3010e is attached to the gaming panel 1100 with its front surface abutting the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100. The rear box 3010 has bosses and mounting holes formed in appropriate positions for attaching the rear front performance unit 3100, etc.

The rear unit 3000 also has a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects game balls B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the front unit 2000, a first starting opening sensor 3002 that detects game balls B received in the first starting opening 2002, a V winning opening sensor 3003 that detects game balls B that are received in the special winning opening 2006 and then allocated to the V winning opening 2007, and a losing opening sensor 3004 that detects game balls B that are received in the special winning opening 2006 and then allocated to the losing opening 2008 (see Figure 169, etc.).

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is equipped with a V entry door 3006 that can move back and forth to open and close the V entry port 2007, and a V distribution solenoid 3007 that moves the V entry door 3006 back and forth to distribute game balls B received in the special entry port 2006 to either the V entry port 2007 or the losing port 2008. The general entry port sensor 3001, first start port sensor 3002, V entry port sensor 3003, losing port sensor 3004, V entry port door 3006, and V distribution solenoid 3007 are provided in the back front performance unit 3100.

[5-9a. Backstage Production Unit]
Next, the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 150 to 160. Figure 150 is a front view of the rear front performance unit in the rear unit. Figure 151 (a) is a perspective view of the rear front performance unit in the rear unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rear front performance unit in the rear unit seen from the back. Figure 152 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the rear front performance unit cut near the center in the vertical direction and seen from above, (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the left portion in (a), and (c) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the right portion in (a). Figure 153 is an exploded perspective view of the rear front left decorative unit of the rear front performance unit, seen from the front together with the light guide plate. Figure 154 is an exploded perspective view of the rear front left decorative unit, seen from the back, showing only the rear front left first decorative body, rear front left second decorative body, rear front left third decorative body, and rear front left decorative body base. Figure 155 (a) is a front view of the first decorative body on the front left shown in a transparent state, (b) is a front view of the second decorative body on the front left shown in a transparent state, (c) is a front view of the third decorative body on the front left shown in a transparent state, and (c) is a front view of the base of the front left decorative body shown in a transparent state.

Figure 156 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide plate in the back front performance unit and the decorative substrate for illuminating and decorating the light guide plate and the back front left decorative unit from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide plate in the back front performance unit and the decorative substrate for illuminating and decorating the decorative body of the back front lower performance unit from the front. Figure 157 is a front view showing the back front left decorative unit in an illuminating state. Figure 158 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the first pattern on the light guide plate is illuminating, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the second pattern on the light guide plate is illuminating. Figure 159 is an explanatory diagram showing the illuminating configuration of the second pattern on the light guide plate. Figure 160 is a front view of the back front performance unit in a state in which the second pattern on the light guide plate is illuminating.

The rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 is attached to the front end of the rear box 3010. The rear front performance unit 3100 comprises a transparent, flat light guide plate 3110 located in the center when viewed from the front, a rear front left decorative unit 3120 located on the left end side of the light guide plate 3110, a rear front right decorative unit 3140 located on the right end side of the light guide plate 3110, a rear front lower performance unit 3160 located on the lower end side of the light guide plate 3110 and connecting the lower ends of the rear front left decorative unit 3120 and the rear front right decorative unit 3140, and an upper connecting base 3190 connecting the upper ends of the rear front left decorative unit 3120 and the rear front right decorative unit 3140.

The rear front right decorative unit 3140 is equipped with a general prize winning port sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B that has been accepted into the general prize winning port 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, a V prize winning port sensor 3003 that detects a game ball B that has been accepted into the special prize winning port 2006 of the second attacca unit 2600 and then allocated to the V prize winning port 2007, and a loss port sensor 3004 that detects a game ball B that has been accepted into the special prize winning port 2006 of the second attacca unit 2600 and then allocated to the loss port 2008. The rear front right decorative unit 3140 also includes a V winning port door 3006 for allocating game balls B received in the special winning port 2006 of the second attacca unit 2600 to either the V winning port 2007 or the losing port 2008, and a V distribution solenoid 3007 for moving the V winning port door 3006 back and forth (opening and closing).

The rear front lower performance unit 3160 is equipped with a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200, and a first starting opening sensor 3002 that detects a game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100.

[5-9a-1. Light guide plate]
The light guide plate 3110 in the back front performance unit 3100 is equipped with a first pattern 3111 (see Figure 158(a)) that is illuminated by reflecting only light from the left and right toward the front, and a second pattern 3112 (see Figure 158(b)) that is illuminated by reflecting only light from a specific location below toward the front. In other words, the light guide plate 3110 can illuminate the first pattern 3111 when the multiple light guide plate LEDs 3128g of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 in the back front left decorative unit 3120 described below and the multiple light guide plate LEDs of the back front right first decorative substrate 3148, back front right second decorative substrate 3149, and back front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 in the back front right decorative unit 3140 are illuminated. In addition, when the multiple LEDs 3176 on the left decorative board 3174 below the light guide plate and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate of the back front lower performance unit 3160 are illuminated, the second image 3112 can be displayed illuminated.

As shown, the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 is composed of a stylized letter "A" in the center and outstretched "wing" patterns on both sides of it. As shown, this first pattern 3111 is configured so that the shade and brightness of the light-emitting display vary depending on the area of the pattern, enhancing the design and decorativeness of the pattern. More specifically, in Figure 158(a), the darkest shaded areas of the first pattern 3111 are composed of multiple points that emit light in the same color as the light from the LED, the lightest shaded areas are composed of multiple points that emit light by splitting the cocktail light from the LED, and the other shaded areas are composed of multiple lines that emit light in the same color as the light from the LED.

Here, cocktail light refers to light of a color that contains two or more of the three primary colors of light. For example, when cocktail light, i.e., yellow light made by mixing red and green light, is irradiated onto the spectral light-emitting unit, the yellow light components are split into red and green light, resulting in areas that appear red or green. Alternatively, when cocktail light, white light is irradiated onto the spectral light-emitting unit, the white light components are split into red, green, and blue light, resulting in areas that appear red, green, or blue, or light of an appropriate mixture of these colors, resulting in a sparkling rainbow of colors. Furthermore, when light of only one of the three primary colors is irradiated onto this spectral light-emitting unit, that light will emit light of that color because there are no components that are split into separate colors. As a result, the spectral light-emitting unit can emit light of a single color or a sparkling array of multiple colors depending on the color of light it irradiates, allowing for a more diverse range of lighting effects.

LEDs (such as LEDs 3128g for light guide plates) for illuminating and displaying the first pattern 3111 are mounted on the rear front left decorative substrate 3128 of the rear front left decorative unit 3120, and the rear front right first decorative substrate 3148, rear front right second decorative substrate 3149, and rear front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 of the rear front right decorative unit 3140.

The second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is composed of multiple lines 3113 (straight lines) extending radially upward from multiple laterally spaced locations near the bottom edge. Each line 3113 of the second pattern 3112 is composed of multiple dots that emit light in the same color as the light from the LEDs 3176 on the left decorative substrate 3174 and right decorative substrate 3175 below the light guide plate, which will be described later. The multiple lines 3113 that make up the second pattern 3112 are formed to reflect only the light from their corresponding LEDs 3176 forward, and are each formed to be able to emit light independently.

The second pattern 3112 has multiple lines 3113 divided into five line groups 3114: from left to right, first line group 3114a, second line group 3114b, third line group 3114c, fourth line group 3114d, and fifth line group 3114e. Each line group 3114 is made up of five lines 3113: from left to right, first line 3113a, second line 3113b, third line 3113c, fourth line 3113d, and fifth line 3113e. The five lines 3113 in one line group 3114, first line 3113a to fifth line 3113e, have their bottom ends positioned in the same position and extend radially upward from the center of their bottom ends.

The illuminated display of this second image 3112 allows the player to see an illumination effect similar to that of a searchlight shining from below on a concert stage, making the gaming area 5a appear dazzling and entertaining the player, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

The LEDs 3176 for illuminating the second image 3112 are mounted on the left decorative board 3174 below the light guide plate and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate of the lower front back performance unit 3160 in the back front performance unit 3100.

[5-9a-2. Back front left decorative unit]
The back-front left decorative unit 3120 in the back-front performance unit 3100 forms a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) and has a long back-front left logo decorative part 3121 made up of multiple alphabetical characters, a back-front upper left logo decorative part 3122 located above the back-front left logo decorative part 3121 and featuring a stylized letter "A", and a back-front left sub-decorative part 3123 located to the left of the back-front left logo decorative part 3121.

The back front left decorative unit 3120 comprises a transparent back front left first decorative body 3124 which has a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a transparent back front left second decorative body 3125 located behind the back front left first decorative body 3124, a transparent back front left third decorative body 3126 located behind the back front left second decorative body 3125, and a transparent back front left decorative body base 3127 located behind the back front left third decorative body 3126.

The back front left decorative unit 3120 also includes a back front left decorative substrate 3128 for illuminating and decorating the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110, the back front left logo decorative portion 3121, the back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122, and the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123, a back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 for illuminating and decorating the back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122, and a back front lower left decorative substrate 3130 for illuminating and decorating the back front left logo decorative portion 3121 and the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123.

Furthermore, the rear front left decorative unit 3120 is equipped with a rear front left reflector 3131 located on the right side of the rear front left decorative substrate 3128, a rear front upper left reflector 3132 located below the rear front upper left decorative substrate 3129, and a rear front lower left reflector 3133 located above the rear front lower left decorative substrate 3130.

The back front left decorative unit 3120 also includes a left diffusion lens 3134 located between the back front left third decorative body 3126 and the back front left decorative body base 3127.

The rear front left first decorative body 3124 is attached to the front of the rear front left decorative body base 3127 so as to sandwich the rear front left second decorative body 3125, the rear front left third decorative body 3126, the left diffusion lens 3134, and the left end of the light guide plate 3110. The rear front left first decorative body 3124 is formed in the shape of a transparent flat plate, elongated vertically. The rear front left first decorative body 3124 has a partition decorative portion 3124a at a location approximately 3/4 of the height from the bottom that extends left and right and penetrates front and back.

The rear front left first decorative body 3124 also has multiple through decorative portions 3124b that penetrate from front to back. The multiple through decorative portions 3124b are provided near the upper and lower ends, and near the upper right end of the dividing decorative portion 3124a. The through decorative portions 3124b are formed in a diamond shape, like a square with the four sides replaced by arcs bulging inward.

The back front left first decorative body 3124 also has a first front left logo decoration 3124c that is located below the dividing decoration 3124a on the front surface and forms part of the back front left logo decoration 3121, and a relief-shaped first back left logo decoration 3124d that is located in a position on the back surface corresponding to the first front left logo decoration 3124c. The right edge of the back front left first decorative body 3124 is formed in a shape that follows the logo character strings of the first front left logo decoration 3124c and the first back left logo decoration 3124d.

The back front left first decorative body 3124 also has a first upper left logo decorative portion 3124e, which is provided in relief above the dividing decorative portion 3124a on the back surface and forms part of the back front left upper left logo decorative portion 3122, and multiple first left sub-decorative portions 3124f, which are provided in relief to the left of the first back left logo decorative portion 3124d on the back surface and form part of the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123. The first upper left logo decorative portion 3124e forms the outermost part of the back front left upper left logo decorative portion 3122. The first left sub-decorative portion 3124f is formed in a row above and below, with a cloisonné pattern formed by overlapping quarters of the same sized circles and removing a portion of one circle, and a diamond pattern formed by removing the outer circle of the cloisonné pattern.

The rear front left first decorative body 3124 is shown as opaque in Figures 153 and 154, but is actually transparent, so that the first rear left logo decorative part 3124d, first upper left logo decorative part 3124e, and first left sub-decorative part 3124f, which are provided on the rear surface, can be seen from the front, as shown in Figure 155(a).

When assembled to the back-front-left decorative unit 3120, the back-front-left first decorative body 3124 is located in front of the back-front-left second decorative body 3125 and is attached at an angle so that the right side is positioned rearward relative to the left side (see Figure 152). Furthermore, when assembled, the back-front-left first decorative body 3124 is positioned so that its left side is in contact with the right side of the board holder 3125b of the back-front-left second decorative body 3125, with the first lower LED 3128a and first upper LED 3128b of the back-front-left decorative board 3128 located to the left of that. Furthermore, when assembled, the back-front-left first decorative body 3124 has the first LED of the back-front-left upper decorative board 3129 located above the top surface, and the first LED 3130a of the back-front-left lower decorative board 3130 located below the bottom surface.

When the first lower LED 3128a on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED 3130a on the back front left lower decorative board 3130 of the back front left first decorative body 3124 are illuminated, the first front left logo decorative part 3124c, first back left logo decorative part 3124d, and first left sub-decorative part 3124f are illuminated by light entering the interior from a portion below the partition decorative part 3124a on the left side via the board holding part 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125, and light entering the interior from the underside. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decorative part 3124a and the inner surface of the through decorative part 3124b located near the bottom end are also illuminated.

In addition, when light entering the partition decorative portion 3124a from the first lower LED 3128a on the rear front left decorative substrate 3128 or the first LED 3130a on the rear front left lower decorative substrate 3130 reaches the lower inner circumferential surface, a portion of the light is reflected by the inner circumferential surface toward the lower interior of the partition decorative portion 3124a, while the remainder is emitted from the inner circumferential surface toward the inside of the hole in the partition decorative portion 3124a. When the light emitted toward the interior of the partition decorative portion 3124a reaches the inner circumferential surface on the opposite side, a portion of the light is reflected toward the interior of the partition decorative portion 3124a, while the remainder is incident from the inner circumferential surface toward the upper interior of the partition decorative portion 3124a. In this way, the light from the first lower LED 3128a on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED 3130a on the back front left lower decorative board 3130 is greatly dimmed by passing through the dividing decorative part 3124a, so the light from the first lower LED 3128a on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED 3130a on the back front left lower decorative board 3130 hardly causes the first upper left logo decorative part 3124e above the dividing decorative part 3124a to be illuminated (illuminated decoration), and only the first front left logo decorative part 3124c, first back left logo decorative part 3124d and first left sub-decorative part 3124f can be brightly illuminated.

In addition, when the first upper LED 3128b on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED on the back front left upper decorative board 3129 of the back front left first decorative body 3124 are illuminated, the first upper left logo decorative part 3124e is illuminated and decorated by light that enters the interior from a portion above the partition decorative part 3124a on the left side via the board holding part 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125, and light that enters the interior from the top. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decorative part 3124a and the through decorative part located above the partition decorative part 3124a are also illuminated and decorated.

In addition, when light entering the interior of the partition decorative portion 3124a from the first upper LED 3128b on the rear front left decorative substrate 3128 or the first LED on the rear front left upper decorative substrate 3129 reaches the upper inner circumferential surface, a portion of the light that reaches the interior is reflected by the inner circumferential surface toward the upper interior of the partition decorative portion 3124a, while the remainder is emitted from the inner circumferential surface toward the inside of the hole in the partition decorative portion 3124a. When the light emitted toward the interior of the partition decorative portion 3124a reaches the inner circumferential surface on the opposite side, a portion of the light is reflected toward the interior of the partition decorative portion 3124a, while the remainder is incident from the inner circumferential surface toward the lower interior of the partition decorative portion 3124a. In this way, the light from the first upper LED 3128b on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED on the back front upper left decorative board 3129 is greatly dimmed by passing through the dividing decorative part 3124a, so the light from the first upper LED 3128b on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED on the back front upper left decorative board 3129 does not cause the first front left logo decorative part 3124c, first back left logo decorative part 3124d, or first left sub-decorative part 3124f below the dividing decorative part 3124a to emit almost no light (illumination decoration), and only the first upper left logo decorative part 3124e and the upper through decorative part 3124b can be brightly illuminated.

In this way, the rear front left first decorative body 3124 is configured so that the upper and lower sides can be illuminated (illuminated) independently, with the dividing decorative portion 3124a as the boundary.

The rear-front-left second decorative body 3125 is entirely transparent and has a flat decorative plate portion 3125a parallel to the rear-front-left first decorative body 3124, and a board holding portion 3125b provided on the periphery (left, top, and bottom edges) of the decorative plate portion 3125a excluding the right edge. The board holding portion 3125b extends outward beyond the decorative plate portion 3125a, protrudes forward, and is recessed forward from the rear side. The board holding portion 3125b cooperates with the board holding portion 3127b of the rear-front-left decorative body base 3127 to clamp and hold the rear-front-left decorative board 3128, the rear-front-left upper decorative board 3129, and the rear-front-left lower decorative board 3130. The front of the board holding portion 3125b of the rear front left second decorative body 3125 is parallel to the front of the gaming panel 1100, while the decorative plate portion 3125a is inclined so that the right side is positioned further back than the left side.

The rear front left second decorative body 3125 also has a partition decorative portion 3125c that extends left and right and penetrates front and back at a location approximately three-quarters of the height from the bottom of the decorative plate portion 3125a. This partition decorative portion 3125c is the same size and height as the partition decorative portion 3124a of the rear front left first decorative body 3124.

The back front left second decorative body 3125 also has a relief-shaped second back left logo decorative part 3125d that is located below the dividing decorative part 3125c on the rear surface and forms part of the back front left logo decorative part 3121. The right edge of the back front left second decorative body 3125 is formed in a shape that follows the logo text on the second back left logo decorative part 3125d.

The back front left second decorative body 3125 also has a second upper left logo decorative portion 3125e, which is provided in relief above the dividing decorative portion 3125c on the back surface and forms part of the back front left upper left logo decorative portion 3122, and multiple second left sub-decorative portions 3125f, which are provided in relief to the left of the second back left logo decorative portion 3125d on the back surface and form part of the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123. The second upper left logo decorative portion 3125e is formed to be slightly smaller in size than the first upper left logo decorative portion 3124e of the back front left first decorative body 3124. The second left sub-decorative portion 3125f is provided in a position corresponding to the first left sub-decorative portion 3124f and is formed to be similar in shape but slightly smaller.

The back front left second decorative body 3125 is shown as opaque in Figures 153 and 154, etc., but is actually transparent, so as shown in Figure 155(b), the second back left logo decorative part 3125d, second upper left logo decorative part 3125e, and second left sub-decorative part 3125f, which are provided on the back surface, can be seen from the front.

When the rear front left second decorative body 3125 is assembled to the rear front left decorative unit 3120, as shown in Figure 152, etc., the rear front left first decorative body 3124 is located in front of the decorative plate portion 3125a, and the rear front left third decorative body 3126 is located behind it. Furthermore, when the rear front left second decorative body 3125 is assembled, the front end sides of the rear front left decorative board 3128 and rear front left reflector 3131, the front end sides of the rear front left upper decorative board 3129 and rear front left upper reflector 3132, and the front end sides of the rear front left lower decorative board 3130 and rear front left lower reflector 3133 are inserted into the forward-recessed board holding portion 3125b. The second lower LED 3128c and second upper LED 3128d of the rear front left decorative board 3128 are located to the left of the left surface of the decorative plate portion 3125a, the second LED of the rear front upper left decorative board 3129 is located above the top surface, and the second LED 3130b of the rear front lower left decorative board 3130 is located below the bottom surface.

When the second lower LED 3128c on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the second LED 3130b on the back front left lower decorative board 3130 are illuminated, the second back left logo decorative part 3125d and the second left sub-decorative part 3125f are illuminated by light entering the interior from a portion below the dividing decorative part 3125c on the left surface of the decorative plate part 3125a, and light entering the interior from the underside of the decorative plate part 3125a. At this time, the inner surface of the dividing decorative part 3125c is also illuminated.

In addition, when light entering the partition decorative portion 3125c from the second lower LED 3128c on the rear front left decorative substrate 3128 or the second LED 3130b on the rear front left lower decorative substrate 3130 reaches the lower inner circumferential surface, a portion of the light is reflected by the inner circumferential surface toward the lower interior of the partition decorative portion 3125c, while the remainder is emitted from the inner circumferential surface toward the inside of the hole in the partition decorative portion 3125c. When the light emitted toward the interior of the partition decorative portion 3125c reaches the inner circumferential surface on the opposite side, a portion of the light is reflected toward the interior of the partition decorative portion 3125c, while the remainder is incident from the inner circumferential surface toward the upper interior of the partition decorative portion 3125c. In this way, the light from the second lower LED 3128c on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the second LED 3130b on the back front left lower decorative board 3130 is significantly dimmed by passing through the dividing decorative part 3125c, so the light from the second lower LED 3128c on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the second LED 3130b on the back front left lower decorative board 3130 hardly causes the second upper left logo decorative part 3125e above the dividing decorative part 3125c to be illuminated (illuminated decoration), and only the second back left logo decorative part 3125d and the second left sub-decorative part 3125f can be brightly illuminated.

In addition, when the second upper LED 3128d on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the second LED on the back front left upper decorative board 3129 of the back front left second decorative body 3125 are illuminated, the second upper left logo decorative part 3125e is illuminated and decorated by light entering the interior from a position above the dividing decorative part 3125c on the left surface of the decorative plate part 3125a, and light entering the interior from the top surface of the decorative plate part 3125a. At this time, the inner surface of the dividing decorative part 3125c is also illuminated and decorated.

In addition, when light entering the partition decorative portion 3125c from the second upper LED 3128d on the rear front left decorative substrate 3128 or the second LED on the rear front left upper decorative substrate 3129 reaches the upper inner circumferential surface, a portion of the light is reflected by the inner circumferential surface toward the upper interior side of the partition decorative portion 3125c, while the remainder is emitted from the inner circumferential surface toward the inside of the hole in the partition decorative portion 3125c. When the light emitted toward the interior of the partition decorative portion 3125c reaches the inner circumferential surface on the opposite side, a portion of the light is reflected toward the interior side of the partition decorative portion 3125c, while the remainder is incident from the inner circumferential surface toward the lower interior side of the partition decorative portion 3125c. In this way, the light from the second upper LED 3128d on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the second LED on the back front upper left decorative board 3129 is greatly dimmed by passing through the dividing decorative part 3125c, so the light from the second upper LED 3128d on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the second LED on the back front upper left decorative board 3129 does not cause the second back left logo decorative part 3125d and second left sub-decorative part 3125f below the dividing decorative part 3125c to emit almost no light (illuminating decoration), and only the second upper left logo decorative part 3125e can be brightly illuminated.

In this way, the back front left second decorative body 3125 is configured so that the upper and lower sides can be illuminated (illuminated) independently, with the dividing decorative portion 3125c as the boundary.

The rear front left third decorative body 3126 is entirely transparent and has a flat decorative plate portion 3126a parallel to the decorative plate portions 3125a of the rear front left first decorative body 3124 and the rear front left second decorative body 3125, and a flange portion 3126b extending rearward from the periphery (left side, top side, bottom side) of the decorative plate portion 3126a excluding the right side. The rear surface of the flange portion 3126b of the rear front left third decorative body 3126 is parallel to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, while the decorative plate portion 3126a is inclined so that the right side is positioned further rearward than the left side.

The rear front left third decorative body 3126 also has a partition decorative portion 3126c that extends left and right and penetrates front and back at a location approximately 3/4 of the height from the bottom of the decorative plate portion 3126a. This partition decorative portion 3126c is the same size and height as the partition decorative portion 3124a of the rear front left first decorative body 3124.

The back front left third decorative body 3126 also has a relief-shaped third back left logo decorative part 3126d that is located below the dividing decorative part 3126c on the rear surface and forms part of the back front left logo decorative part 3121. The right side of the back front left third decorative body 3126 is formed in a shape that follows the logo text on the third back left logo decorative part 3126d.

The back front left third decorative body 3126 also has a third upper left logo decorative portion 3126e, which is provided in relief above the dividing decorative portion 3126c on the back surface and forms part of the back front left upper left logo decorative portion 3122, and multiple third left sub-decorative portions 3126f, which are provided in relief to the left of the third back left logo decorative portion 3126d on the back surface and form part of the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123. The third upper left logo decorative portion 3126e is formed to be slightly smaller in size than the second upper left logo decorative portion 3125e of the back front left second decorative body 3125. The third left sub-decorative portion 3126f is provided in a position corresponding to the first left sub-decorative portion 3124f, and is formed to be similar in shape and between the size of the first left sub-decorative portion 3124f and the second left sub-decorative portion 3125f.

The rear front left third decorative body 3126 is shown as opaque in Figures 153 and 154, but is actually transparent, so that the third rear left logo decorative part 3126d, the third upper left logo decorative part 3126e, and the third left sub-decorative part 3126f, which are located on the rear surface, can be seen from the front, as shown in Figure 155(c).

When the rear-front-left third decorative body 3126 is assembled to the rear-front-left decorative unit 3120, as shown in Figure 152, the decorative plate portion 3125a of the rear-front-left first decorative body 3124 and the rear-front-left second decorative body 3125 is located in front of the decorative plate portion 3126a, and the light guide plate 3110 and left diffusion lens 3134 are located behind it. Furthermore, when the rear-front-left third decorative body 3126 is assembled, the third lower LED 3128e and third upper LED 3128f of the rear-front-left decorative board 3128 are located to the left of the left surface of the decorative plate portion 3126a, the third LED of the rear-front-left upper decorative board 3129 is located above the top surface, and the third LED 3130c of the rear-front-left lower decorative board 3130 is located below the bottom surface.

When the third lower LED 3128e on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED 3130c on the back front left lower decorative board 3130 are illuminated, the third back left logo decorative part 3126d and the third left sub-decorative part 3126f are illuminated by light entering the interior from a position below the dividing decorative part 3126c on the left surface of the decorative plate part 3126a, and light entering the interior from the underside of the decorative plate part 3126a. At this time, the inner surface of the dividing decorative part 3126c is also illuminated.

In addition, when light entering the partition decorative portion 3126c from the third lower LED 3128e on the rear front left decorative substrate 3128 or the third LED 3130c on the rear front left lower decorative substrate 3130 reaches the lower inner circumferential surface, a portion of the light is reflected by the inner circumferential surface toward the lower interior of the partition decorative portion 3126c, while the remainder is emitted from the inner circumferential surface toward the inside of the hole in the partition decorative portion 3126c. When the light emitted toward the interior of the partition decorative portion 3126c reaches the inner circumferential surface on the opposite side, a portion of the light is reflected toward the interior of the partition decorative portion 3126c, while the remainder is incident from the inner circumferential surface toward the upper interior of the partition decorative portion 3126c. In this way, the light from the third lower LED 3128e on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED 3130c on the back front left lower decorative board 3130 is greatly dimmed by passing through the dividing decorative part 3126c, so the light from the third lower LED 3128e on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED 3130c on the back front left lower decorative board 3130 hardly causes the third upper left logo decorative part 3126e above the dividing decorative part 3126c to be illuminated (illuminated decoration), and only the third back left logo decorative part 3126d and the third left sub-decorative part 3126f can be brightly illuminated.

In addition, when the third upper LED 3128f on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED on the back front left upper decorative board 3129 of the back front left third decorative body 3126 are illuminated, the third upper left logo decorative part 3126e is illuminated and decorated by light entering the interior from a position above the dividing decorative part 3126c on the left surface of the decorative plate part 3126a, and light entering the interior from the top surface of the decorative plate part 3126a. At this time, the inner surface of the dividing decorative part 3126c is also illuminated and decorated.

In addition, when light entering the interior of the partition decorative part 3126c from the third upper LED 3128f on the rear front left decorative board 3128 or the third LED on the rear front left upper decorative board 3129 reaches the upper inner circumferential surface, a portion of the light is reflected by the inner circumferential surface toward the upper interior of the partition decorative part 3126c, while the remainder is emitted from the inner circumferential surface toward the inside of the hole in the partition decorative part 3126c. When the light emitted toward the interior of the partition decorative part 3126c reaches the inner circumferential surface on the opposite side, a portion of the light is reflected toward the interior of the partition decorative part 3126c, while the remainder is incident from the inner circumferential surface toward the lower interior of the partition decorative part 3126c. In this way, the light from the third upper LED 3128f on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED on the back front upper left decorative board 3129 is greatly dimmed by passing through the dividing decorative part 3126c, so the light from the third upper LED 3128f on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED on the back front upper left decorative board 3129 hardly causes the third back left logo decorative part 3126d and the third left sub-decorative part 3126f below the dividing decorative part 3126c to be illuminated (illuminated decoration), and only the third upper left logo decorative part 3126e can be brightly illuminated.

In this way, the rear front left third decorative body 3126 is configured so that the upper and lower sides can be illuminated (illuminated) independently, with the dividing decorative portion 3126c as the boundary.

The rear front left decorative base 3127 is entirely transparent and has a flat decorative plate portion 3127a and a board holding portion 3127b located around the periphery (left side, top side, bottom side) of the decorative plate portion 3127a, excluding the right side. The decorative plate portion 3127a is parallel to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100.

The board holding portion 3127b extends further outward than the decorative plate portion 3127a, and its rear surface is located rearward, recessed rearward from the front side. The board holding portion 3127b cooperates with the board holding portion 3125b of the back-front-left second decorative body 3125 to clamp and hold the back-front-left decorative board 3128, the back-front-left upper decorative board 3129, and the back-front-left lower decorative board 3130. The left end of the upper connecting base 3190 is attached to the upper portion of the board holding portion 3127b, and the left end of the upper end of the unit base 3178 of the back-front-lower performance unit 3160 is attached to the lower portion.

The back front left decorative body base 3127 also has three back front left band decorative parts 3127c that extend across the entire width at a constant vertical height near the vertical center of the rear surface of the decorative plate part 3127a and are spaced apart vertically, and a base upper left logo decorative part 3127d that is provided in relief near the top of the rear surface of the decorative plate part 3127a and forms part of the back front upper left logo decorative part 3122. The base upper left logo decorative part 3127d is formed to be slightly smaller than the third upper left logo decorative part 3126e of the back front left third decorative body 3126.

The back front left decorative body base 3127 is shown as opaque in Figures 153 and 154, but is actually transparent, so as shown in Figure 155(d), the back front left band decorative part 3127c and the upper left logo decorative part 3127d on the base can be seen from the front.

When the rear-front-left decorative body base 3127 is assembled to the rear-front-left decorative unit 3120, the light guide plate 3110 and left diffusion lens 3134 are located in front of the decorative plate portion 3127a, as shown in Figure 152, etc. Furthermore, when the rear-front-left decorative body base 3127 is assembled, the rear ends of the rear-front-left decorative board 3128 and rear-front-left reflector 3131, the rear ends of the rear-front-left upper decorative board 3129 and rear-front-left upper reflector 3132, and the rear ends of the rear-front-left lower decorative board 3130 and rear-front-left lower reflector 3133 are inserted into the rear-rear recessed board holder 3127b. The lower-base LED 3128h and upper-base LED 3128i of the rear-front-left decorative board 3128 are located to the left of the left surface of the decorative plate portion 3127a.

When the LED 3128h below the base of the back front left decorative board 3128 of the back front left decorative body base 3127 is illuminated, the back front left band decorative portion 3127c of the decorative plate portion 3127a can be illuminated and decorated. Each of the three back front left band decorative portions 3127c can be illuminated and decorated independently. In addition, when the LED 3128i above the base of the back front left decorative board 3128 of the back front left decorative body base 3127 is illuminated, the logo decorative portion 3127d at the top left of the base can be illuminated and decorated.

The rear-front-left decorative board 3128 is a long, flat plate with its plate surface facing left and right. The rear-front-left decorative board 3128 is positioned to the left of the decorative plate portion 3125a of the rear-front-left first decorative body 3124, the decorative plate portion 3126a of the rear-front-left second decorative body 3125, the decorative plate portion 3126a of the rear-front-left third decorative body 3126, and the decorative plate portion 3127a of the rear-front-left decorative body base 3127. The rear-front-left decorative board 3128, together with the rear-front-left reflector 3131, is sandwiched between the board holding portion 3125b of the rear-front-left second decorative body 3125 and the board holding portion 3127b of the rear-front-left decorative body base 3127.

The back front left decorative board 3128 is located to the left of the back front left first decorative body 3124 and has a plurality of first lower LEDs 3128a arranged below the dividing decorative portion 3124a, a plurality of first upper LEDs 3128b arranged to the left of the back front left first decorative body 3124 and above the dividing decorative portion 3124a, a plurality of second lower LEDs 3128c arranged to the left of the decorative plate portion 3125a of the back front left second decorative body 3125 and below the dividing decorative portion 3125c, and a back front left second decorative It is equipped with a plurality of second upper LEDs 3128d located to the left of the decorative plate portion 3125a of the body 3125 and arranged higher than the dividing decorative portion 3125c, a plurality of third lower LEDs 3128e located to the left of the decorative plate portion 3126a of the rear front left third decorative body 3126 and arranged lower than the dividing decorative portion 3126c, and a plurality of third upper LEDs 3128f located to the left of the decorative plate portion 3126a of the rear front left third decorative body 3126 and arranged higher than the dividing decorative portion 3126c.

The back-front left decorative substrate 3128 also includes multiple light guide plate LEDs 3128g located to the left of the left diffusion lens 3134 (light guide plate 3110), three below-base LEDs 3128h located to the left of the back-front left band decorative portion 3127c on the decorative plate portion 3127a of the back-front left decorative body base 3127, and multiple above-base LEDs 3128i located to the left of the base upper-left logo decorative portion 3127d on the decorative plate portion 3127a of the back-front left decorative body base 3127.

When the multiple first lower LEDs 3128a on the back front left decorative board 3128 are illuminated, the first front left logo decoration 3124c and the first back left logo decoration 3124d of the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be illuminated and decorated. When the multiple first upper LEDs 3128b on the back front left decorative board 3128 are illuminated, the first upper left logo decoration 3124e of the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be illuminated and decorated. When the multiple second lower LEDs 3128c on the back front left decorative board 3128 are illuminated, the second back left logo decoration 3125d of the back front left second decorative body 3125 can be illuminated and decorated. When the multiple second upper LEDs 3128d on the back front left decorative board 3128 are illuminated, the second upper left logo decoration 3125e of the back front left second decorative body 3125 can be illuminated and decorated.

In addition, when the multiple third lower LEDs 3128e on the back front left decorative board 3128 are illuminated, the third back left logo decorative portion 3126d and the like on the back front left third decorative body 3126 can be illuminated and decorated. When the multiple third upper LEDs 3128f on the back front left decorative board 3128 are illuminated, the third upper left logo decorative portion 3126e and the like on the back front left third decorative body 3126 can be illuminated and decorated.

When the multiple light guide plate LEDs 3128g on the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are illuminated, the first pattern 3111 on the light guide plate 3110 can be illuminated and displayed via the left diffusion lens 3134. When the multiple (three) base-under LEDs 3128h on the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are illuminated, the back front left band decorative portion 3127c on the back front left decorative body base 3127 can be illuminated and decorated. When the multiple base-over LEDs 3128i on the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are illuminated, the base upper left logo decorative portion 3127d on the back front left decorative body base 3127 can be illuminated and decorated.

The first lower LED 3128a, first upper LED 3128b, second lower LED 3128c, second upper LED 3128d, third lower LED 3128e, third upper LED 3128f, light guide plate LED 3128g, lower base LED 3128h, and upper base LED 3128i mounted on the right surface of the rear front left decorative board 3128 are full-color LEDs.

The back-front-left decorative board 3128 is coated on its surface with a white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist makes the back-front-left decorative board 3128 less visible and reflects light from the mounted LEDs, allowing the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110, the back-front-left logo decorative portion 3121, the back-front-left upper logo decorative portion 3122, the back-front-left sub-decorative portion 3123, and other elements to be more brightly illuminated and decorated. Furthermore, the back-front-left decorative board 3128 is screen-printed with letters and symbols in a bright, saturated color (e.g., yellow) to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards. This makes the letters and symbols less noticeable. Furthermore, although not shown, the back-front-left decorative board 3128 is also equipped with connectors, resistors, LED drivers, and other components in addition to the LEDs.

The upper left back front decorative board 3129 is a flat plate that is long from side to side, with the board surface facing up and down. The upper left back front decorative board 3129 is positioned above the decorative plate portion 3125a of the first left back front decorative body 3124, the second left back front decorative body 3125, the decorative plate portion 3126a of the third left back front decorative body 3126, and the decorative plate portion 3127a of the left back front decorative body base 3127. The upper left back front decorative board 3129, together with the upper left back front reflector 3132, is sandwiched between the board holding portion 3125b of the second left back front decorative body 3125 and the board holding portion 3127b of the left back front decorative body base 3127.

The upper left back front decorative board 3129, although not shown, is equipped with a plurality of first LEDs arranged above the first left back front decorative body 3124, a plurality of second LEDs arranged above the decorative plate portion 3125a of the second left back front decorative body 3125, and a plurality of third LEDs arranged above the decorative plate portion 3126a of the third left back front decorative body 3126.

When the multiple first LEDs on the back front upper left decorative board 3129 are illuminated, the first upper left logo decoration 3124e and other parts of the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be illuminated and decorated. When the multiple second LEDs on the back front upper left decorative board 3129 are illuminated, the second upper left logo decoration 3125e and other parts of the back front left second decorative body 3125 can be illuminated and decorated. When the multiple third LEDs on the back front upper left decorative board 3129 are illuminated, the third upper left logo decoration 3126e of the back front left third decorative body 3126 can be illuminated and decorated.

The multiple first, second, and third LEDs mounted on the underside of the upper left decorative board 3129 on the back front are full-color LEDs.

The upper-left back-front decorative board 3129 is coated on its surface with a white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist makes the upper-left back-front decorative board 3129 less visible and also reflects light from the mounted LEDs, allowing the upper-left back-front logo decorative part 3122 and other parts to glow more brightly. Furthermore, the upper-left back-front decorative board 3129 has letters and symbols printed on it using ink in a bright, saturated color (e.g., yellow) to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards. This makes the letters and symbols less noticeable. Furthermore, although not shown, the upper-left back-front decorative board 3129 is also equipped with connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc. in addition to the LEDs.

The rear-front-left lower decorative board 3130 is a flat board that is long from side to side, with the board surface facing up and down. The rear-front-left lower decorative board 3130 is positioned below the decorative board portion 3125a of the rear-front-left first decorative body 3124, the decorative board portion 3126a of the rear-front-left second decorative body 3125, the decorative board portion 3126a of the rear-front-left third decorative body 3126, and the decorative board portion 3127a of the rear-front-left decorative body base 3127. The rear-front-left lower decorative board 3130, together with the rear-front-left lower reflector 3133, is sandwiched between the board holding portion 3125b of the rear-front-left second decorative body 3125 and the board holding portion 3127b of the rear-front-left decorative body base 3127.

The rear front left lower decorative board 3130 is equipped with a plurality of first LEDs 3130a located below the rear front left first decorative body 3124, a plurality of second LEDs 3130b located below the decorative plate portion 3125a of the rear front left second decorative body 3125, and a plurality of third LEDs 3130c located below the decorative plate portion 3126a of the rear front left third decorative body 3126.

When the multiple first LEDs 3130a on the back front left lower decorative board 3130 are illuminated, the first front left logo decoration 3124c and the first back left logo decoration 3124d of the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be illuminated and decorated. When the multiple second LEDs 3130b on the back front left lower decorative board 3130 are illuminated, the second back left logo decoration 3125d of the back front left second decorative body 3125 can be illuminated and decorated. When the multiple third LEDs 3130c on the back front left lower decorative board 3130 are illuminated, the third back left logo decoration 3126d of the back front left third decorative body 3126 can be illuminated and decorated.

The first LED 3130a, second LED 3130b, and third LED 3130c mounted on the underside of the rear front lower left decorative board 3130 are full-color LEDs.

The back-front-left lower decorative board 3130 is coated on its surface with a white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist makes the back-front-left lower decorative board 3130 less visible and also reflects light from the mounted LEDs, allowing the back-front-left logo decorative part 3121 and other parts to be more brightly illuminated. Furthermore, the back-front-left lower decorative board 3130 has letters and symbols printed on it using ink in a bright, saturated color (e.g., yellow) to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards. This makes the letters and symbols less noticeable. Furthermore, although not shown, the back-front-left lower decorative board 3130 is also equipped with connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc. in addition to the LEDs.

The left diffusion lens 3134 is disposed between the light guide plate 3110 and the rear front left decorative substrate 3128 (rear front left reflector 3131), and is sandwiched between the rear front left third decorative body 3126 and the rear front left decorative body base 3127. The left diffusion lens 3134 diffuses light from the multiple light guide plate LEDs 3128g on the rear front left decorative substrate 3128 and irradiates it onto the left side of the light guide plate 3110.

As shown in FIG. 157, the back front left decorative unit 3120 is formed by overlapping the first front left logo decorative portion 3124c and first back left logo decorative portion 3124d of the back front left first decorative body 3124, the second back left logo decorative portion 3125d of the back front left second decorative body 3125, and the third back left logo decorative portion 3126d of the back front left third decorative body 3126, forming a single back front left logo decorative portion 3121. Because the first front left logo decorative portion 3124c and first back left logo decorative portion 3124d, the second back left logo decorative portion 3125d, and the third back left logo decorative portion 3126d are positioned at different positions in the front to back direction, when the player's eyes move, the degree of overlap changes, allowing the specified logo consisting of multiple letters to appear three-dimensional.

In addition, by appropriately illuminating the first lower LED 3128a, second lower LED 3128c, and third lower LED 3128e on the back front left decorative board 3128, and the first LED 3130a, second LED 3130b, and third LED 3130c on the back front left lower decorative board 3130, the back front left decorative unit 3120 can independently illuminate and decorate the first front left logo decoration 3124c, first back left logo decoration 3124d, second back left logo decoration 3125d, and third back left logo decoration 3126d, thereby allowing the back front left logo decoration 3121 to be illuminated and decorated in a variety of lighting modes.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 157, the back front left decorative unit 3120 forms a single back front left upper logo decoration 3122 by overlapping the first upper left logo decoration 3124e of the back front left first decorative body 3124, the second upper left logo decoration 3125e of the back front left second decorative body 3125, the third upper left logo decoration 3126e of the back front left third decorative body 3126, and the base upper left logo decoration 3127d of the back front left decorative body base 3127. Because the first upper left logo decoration 3124e, second upper left logo decoration 3125e, third upper left logo decoration 3126e, and base upper left logo decoration 3127d are positioned at different positions in the front to back direction, when the player's eyes move, the degree of overlap changes, making the logo with a stylized letter "A" appear three-dimensional.

Furthermore, even if the back front left decorative unit 3120 has a logo such as the first upper left logo decoration 3124e, second upper left logo decoration 3125e, third upper left logo decoration 3126e, and base upper left logo decoration 3127d, which are all in approximately the same position when viewed from the front, by sequentially lighting up and decorating the back front left first decoration 3124, back front left second decoration 3125, back front left third decoration 3126, and back front left decoration base 3127, it is possible to present a dynamic pseudo-animation to the player and strongly appeal to the player. This animation-like lighting effect can also be achieved by sequentially lighting up and decorating the first front left logo decoration 3124c, first back left logo decoration 3124d, second back left logo decoration 3125d, and third back left logo decoration 3126d.

In addition, the back front left decorative unit 3120 can illuminate the first upper LED 3128b, second upper LED 3128d, third upper LED 3128f, base upper LED 3128i on the back front left decorative board 3128, and the first LED, second LED, and third LED on the back front left decorative board 3129 as appropriate, thereby independently illuminating and decorating the first upper left logo decoration 3124e, second upper left logo decoration 3125e, third upper left logo decoration 3126e, and base upper left logo decoration 3127d, and can illuminate and decorate the back front upper left logo decoration 3122 in a variety of lighting modes.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 157, the back front left decorative unit 3120 forms a single back front left sub-decorative part 3123 by overlapping the first left sub-decorative part 3124f of the back front left first decorative body 3124, the second left sub-decorative part 3125f of the back front left second decorative body 3125, and the third left sub-decorative part 3126f of the back front left third decorative body 3126 front and back. Because the first left sub-decorative part 3124f, second left sub-decorative part 3125f, and third left sub-decorative part 3126f are positioned at different front and back positions, when the player's eyes move, the degree of overlap changes, making the back front left sub-decorative part 3123 appear three-dimensional.

In addition, the rear front left decorative unit 3120 can illuminate the first lower LED 3128a, second lower LED 3128c, and third lower LED 3128e on the rear front left decorative board 3128, and the first LED 3130a, second LED 3130b, and third LED 3130c on the rear front left lower decorative board 3130, appropriately, to illuminate the first left sub-decorative part 3124f, second left sub-decorative part 3125f, and third left sub-decorative part 3126f independently, thereby allowing the rear front left sub-decorative part 3123 to be illuminated and decorated in a variety of illumination modes.

Furthermore, the back front left decorative unit 3120 is equipped with a dividing decorative portion 3124a of the back front left first decorative body 3124, a dividing decorative portion 3125c of the back front left second decorative body 3125, and a dividing decorative portion 3126c of the back front left third decorative body 3126. Therefore, the dividing decorative portion 3124a, the dividing decorative portion 3125c, and the dividing decorative portion 3126c can clearly separate the luminous decorations on the lower side (back front left logo decoration portion 3121, back front left sub-decorative portion 3123) and the upper side (back front left upper logo decoration portion 3122), thereby further enhancing the decorative effect of the luminous decorations of the back front left logo decoration portion 3121 and back front left sub-decorative portion 3123 and the luminous decoration of the back front left upper logo decoration portion 3122. At this time, the dividing decorative parts 3124a, 3125c, and 3126c are also illuminated, improving the appearance of the dividing decorative parts 3124a, 3125c, and 3126c and allowing people to enjoy the illuminated decorations.

In addition, when the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the back front left lower decorative board 3130 of the back front left decorative unit 3120 are illuminated, the through decorative part 3124b below the dividing decorative part 3124a of the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be illuminated and decorated. In addition, when the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 are illuminated, the through decorative part 3124b above the dividing decorative part 3124a of the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be illuminated and decorated. The illuminated decoration of these through decorative parts 3124b can also improve the appearance.

In addition, the rear front left decorative unit 3120 can illuminate the light guide plate LED 3128g on the rear front left decorative substrate 3128, thereby cooperating with the light guide plate LEDs on the rear front right first decorative substrate 3148, rear front right second decorative substrate 3149, and rear front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 in the rear front right decorative unit 3140 to illuminate and display the first pattern 3111 on the light guide plate 3110.

In this way, the back front left decorative unit 3120 improves the appearance of the gaming area 5a with transparent, three-dimensional decorations such as the back front left logo decoration 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration 3122, and the back front left sub-decorative part 3123, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, the back front left logo decoration 3121, back front upper left logo decoration 3122, and back front left sub-decorative part 3123 can be illuminated in a variety of lighting modes, making it possible to prevent players from getting bored with the diverse lighting effects and preventing a decline in player interest.

In the above, the dividing decorative portions 3124a, 3125c, and 3126c that block light from the LED are shown as penetrating from front to back, but this is not limited to this and they may also be groove-shaped or ridge-shaped. Furthermore, the rear front left second decorative body 3125 may be provided with a protrusion that is inserted into the penetrating decorative portion 3124b of the rear front left first decorative body 3124, so that the rear front left first decorative body 3124 can be positioned by inserting the protrusion. In other words, the penetrating decorative portion 3124b may be used as a positioning hole.

[5-9a-3. Back front right decorative unit]
The back front right decorative unit 3140 in the back front performance unit 3100 has a long back front right logo decorative part 3141 made up of multiple alphabetical characters that forms a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5), a back front right upper logo decorative part 3142 (see Figure 151 (b)) that is located above the back front right logo decorative part 3141 and is a stylized letter "A", and a back front right sub-decorative part (not shown) that is located near the back front right logo decorative part 3141.

The back front right decorative unit 3140 comprises a transparent back front right first decorative body 3144 that is elongated vertically when viewed from the front, a transparent back front right second decorative body 3145 located behind the back front right first decorative body 3144, a transparent back front right third decorative body 3146 located behind the back front right second decorative body 3145, and a transparent back front right decorative body base 3147 located behind the back front right third decorative body 3146 (see Figure 152).

The right end of the upper connecting base 3190 is attached to the top of the back-front right decorative body base 3147, and the right end of the upper end of the unit base 3178 of the back-front lower performance unit 3160 is attached to the bottom. The back-front right decorative body base 3147 also has three back-front right band decorative parts 3147a located near the center in the vertical direction, extending across its entire width at a constant vertical height, and spaced apart vertically (see Figure 151 (b)).

The back front right decorative unit 3140 also includes a back front right first decorative substrate 3148 and a back front right second decorative substrate 3149 for illuminating and decorating the first pattern 3111, back front right logo decorative portion 3141, back front upper right logo decorative portion 3142, and back front right sub decorative portion of the light guide plate 3110, a back front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 for illuminating and decorating the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110, a back front upper right decorative substrate 3151 for illuminating and decorating the back front upper right logo decorative portion 3142, and a back front right lower decorative substrate 3152 for illuminating and decorating the back front right logo decorative portion 3141 (see Figure 156).

The rear front right decorative unit 3140 also includes an upper right diffusion lens 3153 disposed between the light guide plate 3110 and the rear front right first decorative substrate 3148, a middle right diffusion lens 3154 disposed between the light guide plate 3110 and the rear front right second decorative substrate 3149, and a lower right diffusion lens 3155 disposed between the light guide plate 3110 and the rear front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 (see Figure 156). The upper right diffusion lens 3153, middle right diffusion lens 3154, and lower right diffusion lens 3155 are disposed between the rear front right third decorative body 3146 and the rear front right decorative body base 3147.

Furthermore, the rear front right decorative unit 3140 is equipped with a first rear guide passage 3156 that receives and guides downward a game ball B that is received by the general winning opening 2001 of the side right center unit 2700 and guided rearward by the first guide passage 2701, and a second rear guide passage 3157 that receives and guides downward a game ball B that is received by the second sub-outlet 2022 of the side right center unit 2700 and guided rearward by the second guide passage. A general winning opening sensor 3001 is provided within the first rear guide passage 3156. Game balls B guided to the first rear guide passage 3156 and the second rear guide passage 3157 are discharged to the lower board holder 1200 via the rear front lower performance unit 3160.

The rear front right decorative unit 3140 also includes a distribution passage through which game balls B that are received into the special device winning port 2006 of the second attacca unit 2600 and guided rearward by the guide passage 2613 circulate, and in which a V winning port 2007 and a losing port 2008 are provided, a V winning port door 3006 that moves back and forth within the distribution passage to distribute game balls B received into the special device winning port 2006 to either the V winning port 2007 or the losing port 2008, a V distribution solenoid 3007 that moves the V winning port door 3006 back and forth, a V winning port sensor 3003 that detects game balls B that have been distributed to the V winning port 2007, and a losing port sensor 3004 that detects game balls B that have been distributed to the losing port 2008. Game ball B detected by the V winning hole sensor 3003 or the losing hole sensor 3004 is discharged to the lower board holder 1200 via the back front lower performance unit 3160.

The configuration of the back front right logo decoration 3141, back front upper right logo decoration 3142, back front right sub-decorative part, etc. of the back front right decorative unit 3140 is the same as that of the back front left decorative unit 3120, and detailed description will be omitted.

In addition, the back front right first decorative body 3144, back front right second decorative body 3145, and back front right third decorative body 3146 of the back front right decorative unit 3140 have a dividing decorative portion 3144a that extends left and right and penetrates front and back between the back front right logo decorative portion 3141 and the back front right upper logo decorative portion 3142. This dividing decorative portion 3144a allows the back front right logo decorative portion 3141 and the back front right upper logo decorative portion 3142 to be illuminated and decorated independently.

Furthermore, the rear front right first decorative body 3144 has multiple through decorative portions 3144b that penetrate from front to back. These multiple through decorative portions 3144b can achieve the same effects as the through decorative portion 3124b of the rear front left first decorative body 3124.

In this way, the back front right decorative unit 3140, like the back front left decorative unit 3120, can improve the appearance of the gaming area 5a with transparent, three-dimensional decorations such as the back front right logo decoration 3141, the back front upper right logo decoration 3142, and the back front right sub-decorative part, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, the back front right logo decoration 3141, back front right logo decoration 3142, and back front right sub-decorative part can be illuminated in a variety of lighting modes, making it possible to prevent players from getting bored with the diverse lighting effects and preventing a decline in player interest.

In addition, by sequentially lighting up the back front right first decorative body 3144, back front right second decorative body 3145, back front right third decorative body 3146, and back front right decorative body base 3147 in the back front right logo decorative body 3141 and back front right upper logo decorative body 3142, which are located in approximately the same position when viewed from the front, a dynamic pseudo-animation can be shown to the player, making a strong appeal to the player.

[5-9a-4. Back front lower production unit]
The back-front-lower performance unit 3160 in the back-front performance unit 3100 comprises a disk-shaped back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 with the word "SPIN" written at the top center in the left-right direction, a back-front-lower rotation drive motor (not shown) that rotates the back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 around an axis in the front-to-back direction, and a back-front-lower lifting drive motor 3162 that raises and lowers the back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161. The back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 is translucent.

The back-front-lower performance unit 3160 also comprises a disk-shaped back-front-lower left inner decorative body 3163 of the same size and located to the left of the back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161, a disk-shaped back-front-lower left outer decorative body 3164 of the same size and located to the left of the back-front-lower left inner decorative body 3163, a disk-shaped back-front-lower right inner decorative body 3165 of the same size and located to the right of the back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161, and a disk-shaped back-front-lower right outer decorative body 3166 of the same size and located to the right of the back-front-lower right inner decorative body 3165. The back-front-lower left inner decorative body 3163, the back-front-lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back-front-lower right inner decorative body 3165, and the back-front-lower right outer decorative body 3166 are translucent.

In addition, the back front lower performance unit 3160 is located to the left of the back front lower left outer decoration 3164 and is equipped with a back front lower logo decoration 3167 with the word "Queen" engraved on it. The back front lower logo decoration 3167 is translucent.

Furthermore, the back-front-lower performance unit 3160 includes a back-front-lower middle decorative substrate 3168 for illuminating the back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161, a back-front-lower left inner decorative substrate 3169 for illuminating the back-front-lower left inner decorative body 3163, a back-front-lower left outer decorative substrate 3170 for illuminating the back-front-lower left outer decorative body 3164, a back-front-lower right inner decorative substrate 3171 for illuminating the back-front-lower right inner decorative body 3165, a back-front-lower right outer decorative substrate 3172 for illuminating the back-front-lower right outer decorative body 3166, and a back-front-lower logo decorative substrate 3173 for illuminating the back-front-lower logo decorative body 3167 (see Figure 156 (b)).

These back front lower middle decorative board 3168, back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, and back front lower logo decorative board 3173 are located behind the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, and back front lower logo decorative body 3167.

In addition, the back front lower middle decorative board 3168, back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, and back front lower logo decorative board 3173 have multiple full-color LEDs mounted on their front surfaces and are coated with white solder resist (protective material) on their surfaces. This white solder resist reflects light from the LEDs and the front, allowing the decorative elements located in front of each board to be brightly illuminated and decorated.

In addition, the back front lower middle decorative board 3168, back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, and back front lower logo decorative board 3173 have letters and symbols screen printed using ink in a bright, saturated color (e.g., yellow) to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards. This makes the letters and symbols less noticeable through the decorative body installed in front, ensuring the decorative effect of the decorative body is fully realized.

The multiple LEDs mounted on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 are top-view type LEDs. On the other hand, the multiple LEDs mounted on the back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, and back front lower logo decorative board 3173 are side-view type LEDs.

In addition, these decorative boards have non-light-emitting components other than the LEDs (e.g., connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc.) located on the rear (back) side so as not to interfere with the illuminated decoration.

The back front lower middle decorative body 3161, back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, and back front lower logo decorative body 3167 are positioned above the bottom end of the light guide plate 3110, as shown in Figure 156. This makes the bottom end of the light guide plate 3110 invisible to the player (front). Furthermore, the top ends of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 are positioned below the bottom end of the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, as shown in Figure 160, and are arranged left and right at intervals corresponding to the lines 3114 that make up the second pattern 3112.

In more detail, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 corresponds to the third line group 3114c, the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163 corresponds to the second line group 3114b, the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164 corresponds to the first line group 3114a, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165 corresponds to the fourth line group 3114d, and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 corresponds to the fifth line group 3114e. Therefore, when the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 are illuminated (either by illuminating only the upper end or by illuminating the entire body), the player is given the illusion that the line 3113 of the second pattern 3112 is illuminated by light from the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, and the player can be shown an illuminated effect that has not been seen in pachinko machines until now.

In addition, the back front lower performance unit 3160 is located behind the back front lower middle decorative board 3168, the back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, the back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, the back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, the back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, and the back front lower logo decorative board 3173, and is equipped with a light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and a light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175 for illuminating (illuminating decoration) the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 (see Figure 156 (a)).

The left decorative substrate 3174 below the light guide plate and the right decorative substrate 3175 below the light guide plate each have five LED groups 3177 consisting of five LEDs 3176. The five LEDs 3176 included in each LED group 3177 are arranged in the following order from right to left: first LED 3176a, second LED 3176b, third LED 3176c, fourth LED 3176d, and fifth LED 3176e. Furthermore, each LED group 3177 corresponds to each line group 3114 in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, and are arranged in the following order from left to right: first LED group 3177a, second LED group 3177b, third LED group 3177c, fourth LED group 3177d, and fifth LED group 3177e.

LEDs 3176 of the first LED group 3177a and the second LED group 3177b are mounted on the left decorative substrate 3174 below the light guide plate. LEDs 3176 of the third LED group 3177c, the fourth LED group 3177d, and the fifth LED group 3177e are mounted on the right decorative substrate 3175 below the light guide plate.

The multiple LEDs 3176 mounted on the left decorative board 3174 below the light guide plate and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate are side-view full-color LEDs. The surfaces of the left decorative board 3174 below the light guide plate and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate are coated with white solder resist (protective material), which makes the left decorative board 3174 below the light guide plate and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate less noticeable from the front. In addition, letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as the LEDs 3176 and other decorative boards are screen-printed on the left decorative board 3174 below the light guide plate and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate using ink in a bright, saturated color (e.g., yellow). This makes the letters and symbols less noticeable through the decorative body installed in front, ensuring the decorative effect of the decorative body is fully realized.

When the first LED 3176a in each LED group 3177 on the left decorative substrate 3174 below the light guide plate and the right decorative substrate 3175 below the light guide plate is illuminated, the first line 3113a of the corresponding line group 3114 in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is illuminated (decorated). When the second LED 3176b is illuminated, the second line 3113b in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is illuminated (decorated). When the third LED 3176c is illuminated, the third line 3113c in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is illuminated (decorated). When the fourth LED 3176d is illuminated, the fourth line 3113d in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is illuminated (decorated). Furthermore, when the fifth LED 3176e is illuminated, the fifth line 3113e in the second pattern 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 can be illuminated (illuminated decoration).

This allows each of the multiple lines 3113 that make up the second image 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 to be illuminated (illuminated decoration) independently, allowing players to see a variety of illuminated effects, while also preventing players from becoming bored and reducing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the back front lower performance unit 3160 supports the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, the back front lower logo decorative body 3167, the back front lower middle decorative board 3168, the back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, the back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, the back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, the back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, the back front lower logo decorative board 3173, the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174, and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175, etc., and is equipped with a flat unit base 3178 that is long from side to side. The lower ends of the back front left decorative unit 3120 and the back front right decorative unit 3140 are attached near the left and right ends of the upper end of the unit base 3178.

The back front lower performance unit 3160 also has a first discharge passage 3181 that receives game balls B received in the three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 and discharges them to the lower board holder 1200, a second discharge passage 3182 that receives game balls B received in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 and discharges them to the lower board holder 1200, and a It is equipped with a third discharge passage 3183 that receives game balls B and discharges them to the substrate holder 1200 below, a fourth discharge passage 3184 that receives game balls B received by the large prize opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 and discharges them to the substrate holder 1200 below, and a fifth discharge passage 3185 that receives game balls B received by the first sub-out opening 2021 of the first attacker unit 2400 and discharges them to the substrate holder 1200 below.

The first discharge passage 3181 has three delivery ports corresponding to the three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200, and three general winning port sensors 3001 corresponding to each delivery port. In addition, the second discharge passage 3182 has a first starting port sensor 3002.

This back-front-bottom performance unit 3160 decorates the lower part of the game area 5a with the back-front-bottom middle decorative body 3161, back-front-bottom left inner decorative body 3163, back-front-bottom left outer decorative body 3164, back-front-bottom right inner decorative body 3165, back-front-bottom right outer decorative body 3166, and back-front-bottom logo decorative body 3167, improving the appearance and entertaining players with the illuminated effects by making these decorative bodies illuminate. Furthermore, the back-front-bottom middle decorative body 3161 can be rotated by the back-front-bottom rotation drive motor and raised and lowered by the back-front-bottom lift drive motor 3162, entertaining players with the moving effects.

In addition, the back front lower performance unit 3160 can illuminate the second image 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 using multiple LEDs 3176 on the left decorative board 3174 below the light guide plate and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate, allowing players to enjoy the illuminated performance of the second image 3112.

[5-9b. Backstage Upper Stage Unit]
Next, the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 will be explained mainly with reference to Figures 129 and 149. The rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 is attached to the upper rear of the rear front performance unit 3100 inside the rear box 3010. The upper rear performance unit 3200 comprises a movable upper rear decorative body 3210 that is rotatable around an axis extending left and right and that can be raised and lowered, a left rear side decorative body 3220 that has three left rear band decorative parts 3221 that extend in the front-to-back direction so as to be continuous with the three left rear front band decorative parts 3127c on the left rear front decorative body base 3127 of the left rear front decorative unit 3120, and a right rear side decorative body 3230 (see Figure 131) that has three right rear back band decorative parts 3231 that extend in the front-to-back direction so as to be continuous with the three right rear front band decorative parts 3147a on the right rear front decorative body base 3147 of the right rear front decorative unit 3140.

The upper rear movable decorative body 3210 has a first upper rear decorative part 3211 (see Figure 129, etc.) with five 7-segment display parts lined up on the left and right, and a second upper rear decorative part 3212 (see Figure 162) located on the back side of the first upper rear decorative part 3211 and with a row of specified characters (here, "JACKPOT").

The first upper rear decorative part 3211 of the upper rear movable decorative body 3210 has five 7-segment display sections that can each emit light independently, allowing a variety of letters, numbers, pictures, etc. to be displayed by combining the segments. This makes it possible to display the expected results of the first and second special lottery drawn upon receipt of game ball B into the first starting hole 2002 and second starting hole 2004, such as whether the results are a "jackpot." Furthermore, the second upper rear decorative part 3212 has each character that can emit light independently.

In its normal state, the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is in a raised position with the rear upper first decorative part 3211 facing forward. Depending on the results of the first or second special lottery drawn when a game ball B is received at the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, or depending on the reception (allocation) of a game ball B at the V winning opening 2007, this rear upper movable decorative body 3210 rotates 180 degrees around an axis extending left and right to face the rear upper second decorative part 3212 forward or move from the raised position to the lowered position (see Figures 161 and 162).

This rear upper movable decorative element 3210 can rotate and rise and fall, suggesting to the player that an opportunity is on the way, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

The three rear left decorative bands 3221 of the rear left side decorative body 3220 are arranged to extend rearward from the right ends of the three rear left decorative bands 3127c extending left and right from the rear left decorative body base 3127 of the rear left decorative unit 3120. Each rear left decorative band 3221 is capable of emitting light independently, and is also capable of emitting light that flows in the front-to-back direction.

The three rear right band decorative parts 3231 of the rear right side decorative body 3230 are arranged to extend rearward from the right ends of the three rear right band decorative parts 3147a that extend left and right on the rear right decorative body base 3147 of the rear front right decorative unit 3140. Each rear right band decorative part 3231 is capable of emitting light independently, and is capable of emitting light that flows in the front and rear directions.

[5-9c. Backstage Production Unit]
Next, the rear lower performance unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 will be explained mainly with reference to 135 etc. The rear lower performance unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 is attached below the rear upper performance unit 3200 at the lower rear of the rear front performance unit 3100 within the rear box 3010.

The rear lower performance unit 3300 has a rear left movable decorative body 3301 and a rear right movable decorative body 3302, which are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and whose base ends are supported so that they can rotate around axes in the front-to-back direction and can be raised and lowered. The rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 are configured to rotate in opposite directions as the base ends are raised and lowered.

In their normal state, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 rotate at their respective tip ends in directions that move them away from each other, and they are hidden behind the rear front performance unit 3100, in a retracted position that is not visible from the front (player side) (see Figure 129, etc.).

The rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 rotate and rise so that their respective tips move upward around the base end, depending on the results of the first or second special lottery drawn when game ball B is received at the first starting port 2002 or second starting port 2004, until the right edge of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the left edge of the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 come into contact with each other. As a result, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 come together to form a single large decorative body, and are positioned so that they can be seen from the front (see Figure 163).

As a result, a large decorative element with a stylized letter "A" appears in the center of the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear right movable decorative element 3302, surprising the player and making them think that something good is about to happen, preventing a decline in interest. The rear left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear right movable decorative element 3302 are equipped with a decorative board on which multiple LEDs are mounted, and by using multiple LEDs to illuminate the decoration, it looks attractive and attracts the player's attention.

As shown in Figure 167, when in the displayed position, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 are positioned so that they overlap behind the first pattern 3111 on the light guide plate 3110. This allows the large decorative body made up of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 to be illuminated and decorated by the first pattern 3111, so that the player can see a rich decoration due to the three-dimensional decoration made up of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 and the two-dimensional illuminated display made up of the first pattern 3111, which makes a strong impact on the player and strongly attracts the player's attention, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

[5-10. Effects on the game board]
Next, the main effects on the gaming board 5 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 161 to 168. Figure 161 is a front view of the gaming board showing the state in which the first rear-upper decorative part of the rear-upper movable decorative body in the rear-upper decorative unit of the rear unit has been moved to a lowered position while facing forward. Figure 162 is a front view of the gaming board showing the state in which the second rear-upper decorative part of the rear-upper decorative body in the rear-upper decorative unit of the rear unit has been moved to a lowered position while facing forward. Figure 163 is a front view of the gaming board showing the rear-left movable decorative body and the rear-right movable decorative body in the rear-lower decorative unit of the rear unit have been moved to their appearance positions. Figure 164 is a front view of the gaming board showing the rear-front-lower middle decorative body in the rear-front-lower decorative unit of the rear-front decorative unit of the rear unit while being raised.

Figure 165 is a front view of a gaming board showing the back-front-left logo decoration, back-front-upper-left logo decoration, back-front-left sub-decorative part, and back-front-left band decoration of the back-front-left decorative unit 3120 in the back-front performance unit of the back unit illuminated. Figure 166 is a front view of a gaming board showing the first pattern on the light guide plate in the back-front performance unit of the back unit illuminated. Figure 167 is a front view of a gaming board showing the first pattern on the light guide plate in the back-front performance unit of the back unit illuminated and the back-back-left movable decoration and back-back-right movable decoration in the back-back-lower performance unit moved to their appearance positions. Figure 168 is a front view of a gaming board showing the second pattern on the light guide plate in the back-front performance unit of the back unit illuminated.

In the gaming board 5 of this embodiment, the front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the gaming area 5a, the gaming panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the gaming area 5a, the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the upper left side unit 2300, the first attacca unit 2400, the center role 2500, the second attacca unit 2600, the middle right side unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed almost entirely transparent. Therefore, under normal conditions, as shown in FIG. 134, the back front performance unit of the back unit 3000 located behind the gaming panel 1100 can be seen through these components. The left-front decorative unit 3120, right-front decorative unit 3140 of the center gimmick 3100, the middle decorative body 3161, the lower-front left inner decorative body 3163, the lower-front left outer decorative body 3164, the lower-front right inner decorative body 3165, the lower-front right outer decorative body 3166, the lower-front logo decorative body 3167 of the lower-front performance unit 3100, the upper-back movable decorative body 3210, the left-back side decorative body 3220, and the right-back side decorative body 3230 of the upper-back performance unit 3200, etc. can be clearly seen, and the performance image displayed on the performance display device 1600 can be clearly seen through the frame of the center gimmick 2500.

More specifically, the rear front left first decorative body 3124 of the rear front left decorative unit 3120 is located near the left edge of the center role device 2500, with approximately half of it located within the frame of the center role device 2500. Furthermore, the rear front right first decorative body 3144 of the rear front right decorative unit 3140 is located near the right edge of the center role device 2500, with a portion of it located within the frame of the center role device 2500. The rear front lower performance unit 3160 extends left and right below the play area 5a, and can be seen through the transparent game panel 1100 and center role device 2500, with a portion of it being clearly visible within the frame of the center role device 2500.

In addition, the back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the back-front-lower performance unit 3160 is located above the first starting opening 2002 and behind the stage 2513 of the center role device 2500. The back-front-lower left inner decorative body 3163 and the back-front-lower left outer decorative body 3164 are located above the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 and near the bottom edge of the center role device 2500. The back-front-lower right inner decorative body 3165 and the back-front-lower right outer decorative body 3166 are located above the large winning opening 2005 of the first attacca unit 2400 and near the bottom edge of the center role device 2500. The tops of the back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161, the back-front-lower left inner decorative body 3163, the back-front-lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back-front-lower right inner decorative body 3165 and the back-front-lower right outer decorative body 3166 are located within the frame of the center role device 2500. The rear front lower logo decoration 3167 is located outside the center reel 2500 in the lower left corner of the gaming area 5a.

In addition, the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 is positioned in a raised position, so it extends left and right above the gaming area 5a, and the upper part to the left of the center in the left-right direction can be seen through the transparent gaming panel 1100 and the center device 2500, and a portion can be seen well through the frame of the center device 2500. The rear upper movable decorative body 3210 has a rear upper first decorative part 3211, which has multiple seven-segment parts, facing forward.

The rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300 are in a retracted position behind the front-lower performance unit 3160 and cannot be seen from the front (player's side).

Depending on the results of the first and second special lottery drawn when game ball B is received in first and second starting holes 2002 and 2004, the back unit 3000's back front performance unit 3100, back upper performance unit 3200, and back lower performance unit 3300 perform predetermined moving and light-up effects.

Specifically, as a movable performance using the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 161, the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is moved from a raised position to a lowered position while the rear upper first decorative body 3211, which has five 7-segment parts, remains facing forward. As a result, most of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is positioned within the frame of the center role device 2500, allowing the rear upper first decorative body 3211 to be clearly visible. At this time, the five 7-segment parts of the rear upper first decorative body 3211 are displayed in a variable manner, which strongly attracts the player's attention and makes the player feel anxious and excited depending on whether the desired numbers or patterns are displayed in the five 7-segment parts.

In addition, as an example of a presentation using the rear upper movable decorative body 3210, as described above, the rear upper first decorative part 3211 is moved to a lowered position while facing forward, and then, as shown in Figure 162, it is rotated 180 degrees around the left-right axis so that the rear upper second decorative part 3212, which has multiple character strings, faces forward. This causes the letters "JACKPOT" to face forward, making it clear to the player that they have won the jackpot, increasing their anticipation for a favorable gaming state (a "jackpot" gaming state) that gives them an advantage, and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a performance using the rear upper movable decorative body 3210, for example, when rotating around a left-right axis, the part between the rear upper first decorative part 3211 and the rear upper second decorative part 3212 may be rotated forward and backward repeatedly, and either the rear upper first decorative part 3211 or the rear upper second decorative part 3212 may be stopped from rotating forward. This can keep players on the edge of their seats depending on whether the "JACKPOT" on the rear upper second decorative part 3212 faces forward, increasing the player's sense of anticipation and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, as a performance using the rear upper movable decorative body 3210, for example, it may be rotated 180 degrees around a left-right axis while remaining in the raised position, so that the rear upper second decorative part 3212 faces forward.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 163, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower decorative unit 3300 can be used to perform a performance in which, from a retracted position where their respective tips are positioned downward and away from each other, they are rotated in opposite directions around axes extending forward and backward so that their respective tips rise and touch each other at their respective base ends, and are raised and moved to an appearance position where they abut each other. As a result, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and rear right movable decorative body 3302 form a single large decorative body with a stylized letter "A" that appears in the center of the game area 5a in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600, which can greatly surprise the player and strongly attract their attention, as well as make the player think that something good is about to happen, increasing their anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as an effect using the back-front-bottom-middle decorative body 3161 in the back-front-bottom performance unit 3160 of the back-front performance unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. 164, it can be raised or rotated around a front-to-back axis. This causes the back-front-bottom-middle decorative body 3161 to rotate in the lower center of the game area 5a, making the player feel like something good is about to happen and heightening their anticipation for the game. Furthermore, because the back-front-bottom-middle decorative body 3161 is located directly above the first starting hole 2002 and behind the stage 2513, the rotation and raising and lowering of the back-front-bottom-middle decorative body 3161 can encourage the player to shoot the game ball B aimed at the first starting hole 2002, allowing the player to enjoy the original operation of shooting the game ball B of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, as an effect using the back front left decorative unit 3120 of the back front effect unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. 165, by appropriately illuminating the LEDs mounted on the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129, and the back front lower left decorative board 3130, it is possible to create an illumination effect that illuminates and decorates the back front left logo decoration 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration 3122, the back front left sub-decorative board 3123, the back front left band decoration 3127c, etc. For example, in the back front left logo decoration 3121, by illuminating and decorating the first front left logo decoration 3124c, the first back left logo decoration 3124d, the second back left logo decoration 3125d, and the third back left logo decoration 3126d in order, it is possible to create an illumination effect that resembles a neon sign flowing back and forth, which can entertain players.

Although not shown in the figures, the rear front right decorative unit 3140 can also produce lighting effects similar to those of the rear front left decorative unit 3120, providing entertainment for players.

Furthermore, as an example of an effect using the light guide plate 3110 of the rear front effect unit 3100, as shown in FIG. 166, the multiple light guide plate LEDs 3128g of the rear front left decorative board 3128 of the rear front left decorative unit 3120 and the multiple light guide plate LEDs of the rear front right first decorative board 3148, rear front right second decorative board 3149, and rear front right light guide plate decorative board 3150 of the rear front right decorative unit 3140 are illuminated to display the first pattern 3111 (illuminated decoration). As a result, a large first pattern 3111, a stylized letter "A," is illuminated and displayed in the center of the play area 5a in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, which can surprise the player and make them think that something good is about to happen, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, as an example of a performance using the light guide plate 3110, as shown in FIG. 167, the first image 3111 is illuminated and the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and rear right movable decorative element 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300 are moved from their retracted positions to their appearing positions. This causes the first image 3111 and the large decorative element consisting of the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and rear right movable decorative element 3302 to overlap front to back, making a strong impact on the player and entertaining them, while also making them believe that a favorable gaming state (for example, a "jackpot" game) that gives them an advantage may occur, heightening their sense of anticipation for the game.

In addition, as an example of a performance using the light guide plate 3110, as shown in FIG. 168, the multiple LEDs 3176 on the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175 of the back front lower performance unit 3160 are appropriately illuminated to illuminate the second pattern 3112 (illuminated decoration). As a result, multiple lines 3113 extending upward from the upper parts of the five decorative bodies in the back front lower performance unit 3160, namely the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, are illuminated, allowing players to see an illuminated performance that is similar to a searchlight shining from below on a concert stage, entertaining players by making the gaming area 5a look dazzling.

In addition, as an example of a performance using the light guide plate 3110, as shown in Figure 168, while the second pattern 3112 is illuminated, the upper ends or the entire back front lower middle decorative body 3161, back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 in the back front lower performance unit 3160 may be illuminated. Alternatively, the decorative body located below the illuminated group of lines 3114 in the second pattern 3112 may be illuminated. This gives the player the illusion that the lines 3113 making up the second pattern 3112 are illuminated by light from decorative elements such as the back front lower middle decorative element 3161, back front lower left inner decorative element 3163, back front lower left outer decorative element 3164, back front lower right inner decorative element 3165, and back front lower right outer decorative element 3166, providing players with the enjoyment of an unprecedented light-emitting effect.

Furthermore, although not shown in the figures, the second image 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 may be illuminated and the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 may be moved to a lowered position. This allows the player to see an illuminated effect as if the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 were being illuminated by a searchlight from below, making the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 look gorgeous and entertaining.

In addition, the game board 5 of this embodiment can appropriately combine the light-emitting effects and moving effects described above, and can also be combined with the effect images (display effects) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. As a result, by appropriately combining light-emitting effects, display effects, etc., a wide variety of effect patterns can be presented to the player, preventing the player from getting bored and allowing the player to be entertained by various effects, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

6. Control Configuration
Next, the control configuration for various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 169 and other figures. FIG. 169 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main frame 4, with each board performing its own control. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during game play based on commands from the main control board 1310, and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the display of effect images on the effect display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of game balls B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of game balls B by rotating the handle 195.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but includes a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM for storing various processing programs and commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a, a setting display 1310g for displaying setting values and errors, and a base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of game balls B collected through an outlet 1008 provided in a game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5. In addition to its incorporated ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1310a also incorporates a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and functions for preventing fraud.

In addition to its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), the main control MPU 1310a also has built-in functions such as a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

The main control MPU 1310a also has built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code (a code that exists only once in the world) assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a to identify the individual unit. Once assigned, this ID code cannot be rewritten, even using an external device, because it is stored in non-volatile RAM. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve and reference the ID code from the non-volatile RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a also incorporates a circuit that forcibly resets itself via hardware when it is affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as the "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of certain registers in the main control MPU 1310a, and if the register contents change to inconsistent values, it forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a, indicating that it has been affected by electrical noise. This forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be disabled by user program control. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power-off processing described below, and it will again execute the main control side power-on processing described below. In this case, because the main control side power-off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error will inevitably occur in the main control built-in RAM, as described below, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased (cleared). Furthermore, even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by its built-in reset circuit, the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a does not output a reset signal to the dispensing control board 633, so only the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) restarts, and the dispensing control board 633 remains activated.

The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as the "main control built-in hardware random number circuit") that uses hardware to update special random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state or a small jackpot game state, among various random numbers related to gameplay. This main control built-in hardware random number circuit generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65,535 as the maximum value is pre-set), and is configured so that the pre-set value is not fixed as the initial value (i.e., the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as its initial value and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping, based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the main control MPU 1310a). Once all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit again extracts a value within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping, based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit repeatedly performs this rapid lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit at the time it obtains a value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit as a special random number.

The main control input circuit does not have a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input to its various input terminals, which are detection signals from various sensors, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit that does not receive a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown). In other words, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit in which information based on detection signals from various sensors input to its various input terminals is not reset by a main control system reset, and various signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects a game ball B received in the first start opening 2002, a second start opening sensor 2401 that detects a game ball B received in the second start opening 2004, a general prize opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001, a gate sensor 2801 that detects a game ball B that has passed through the gate 2003, a large prize opening sensor 2402 that detects a game ball B received in the large prize opening 2005, and a special prize opening sensor 2402 that detects a game ball B received in the special prize opening 2006. Detection signals from the device winning slot sensor 2601 that detects a game ball B received in the V winning slot 2007, the V winning slot sensor 3003 that detects a game ball B received in the losing slot 2008, the out sensor 664 that detects a game ball B ejected from the game board 5, the magnetic sensor 1050 that detects illegal magnetism within the game area 5a, and the vibration sensor that detects vibrations acting on the game board 5 are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

In addition, the detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a and setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

In addition, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch and the detection signal from the main frame opening switch are input to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633 (i.e., directly, without passing through the dispensing control input circuit and dispensing control output circuit described below), and then input to the input terminals of the specified input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The detection signals from the out sensor 664, first start opening sensor 3002, and second start opening sensor 2401 are input directly to the main control board 1310, without passing through other boards, and are then input to the input terminals of designated input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. In contrast, the detection signals from the general prize opening sensor 3001, gate sensor 2801, special prize opening sensor 2402, bonus prize opening sensor 2601, V prize opening sensor 3003, losing opening sensor 3004, magnetic sensor 1050, and vibration sensor are input indirectly to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, and are then input to the input terminals of designated input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs control signals from the output terminal of its designated output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, which indirectly outputs drive signals from the main control solenoid drive circuit to the start port solenoid 2412, attacca solenoid 2414, bonus prize port solenoid 2612, and V-distribution solenoid 3007 via the panel relay board 1710, and outputs drive signals from the output terminal of its designated output port to the status indicator, normal symbol indicator, normal hold indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special hold number indicator, second special symbol indicator, second special hold number indicator, and round indicator of the function display unit 1400 directly, without going through other boards. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a also outputs drive signals from the output terminal of its designated output port to the setting change permission lamp 1311c on the setting change board 1311.

The main control MPU 1310a also outputs various information related to the game (game information) to the payout control board 633 by outputting it from the output terminal of its specified output port, outputs a signal (power outage clear signal) to the power outage monitoring circuit by outputting it from the output terminal of its specified output port, and outputs a launch permission signal that indicates permission to launch game ball B from the output terminal of its specified output port to the payout control board 633. The logic of this launch permission signal that indicates permission to launch is set to launch permission logic when launch is permitted, and set to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the launch permission logic when launch is not permitted. The logic of the firing permission signal is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the initial value (default) is set to firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the firing permission logic from the time the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (or restored) until the firing permission signal setting process in the main control timer interrupt process described below begins.

In this embodiment, the first start gate sensor 3002, second start gate sensor 2401, gate sensor 2801, large prize gate sensor 2402, special prize gate sensor 2601, V prize gate sensor 3003, loss gate sensor 3004, and out sensor 664 use non-contact electromagnetic proximity switches, while the general prize gate sensor 3001 uses a contact ON/OFF mechanical switch. This is because game ball B frequently enters or passes through first start gate 2002, second start gate 2004, and gate 2003, and therefore game ball B is frequently detected by first start gate sensor 3002, second start gate sensor 2401, and gate sensor 2801. For this reason, highly durable, long-life proximity switches are used for the first start gate sensor 3002, second start gate sensor 2401, and gate sensor 2801.

Furthermore, when a favorable game state (such as a "jackpot" game) occurs that is advantageous to the player, the large prize opening 2005 opens and game ball B frequently enters, so game ball B is also frequently detected by the large prize opening sensor 2402. For this reason, a highly durable, long-life proximity switch is used for the large prize opening sensor 2402. Furthermore, game ball B launched into the game area 5a is collected in large quantities by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a, which is partitioned off on the game board 5, so game ball B is also frequently detected by the out sensor 664. For this reason, a highly durable, long-life proximity switch is also used for the out sensor 664. In contrast, the general prize opening 2001, where game ball B does not frequently enter, is not frequently detected by the general prize opening sensor 3001. For this reason, a mechanical switch, which has a shorter lifespan than a proximity switch, is used for the general prize opening sensor 3001. Furthermore, regardless of whether game balls B frequently enter the general winning slot 2001, a highly durable and long-life proximity switch may be used.

The main control MPU 1310a also transmits various information related to games (game information) and various commands related to payouts to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of game presentations and various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. When the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, it formats these commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511, as will be explained in detail later.

The main control board 1310 receives various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630, which supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310, is equipped with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in RAM during power-off processing, even when the power is cut off. This stored information is completely erased (cleared) from RAM when the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the dispensing control board 633.

The main control board 1310 is also equipped with a power outage monitoring circuit. This power outage monitoring circuit monitors drops in the various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and when these voltages fall below the power outage warning voltage, it outputs a power outage warning signal to warn of a power outage. This power outage warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the dispensing control board 633, etc.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of game balls B, etc., is equipped with a payout control unit 633a which performs various controls related to payout, a launch control unit 633b which controls launch using the launch solenoid 542 and ball supply using the ball supply solenoid 145, an error LED indicator which displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch which has a push operation unit for releasing the error displayed on the error LED indicator, and a ball removal switch which, during maintenance, discharges game balls B in the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guidance unit 570, and payout device 580 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper tray 201) and starts the ball removal operation.

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
The dispensing control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to dispensing on the dispensing control board 633, is not shown in detail, but is equipped with a dispensing control MPU, which is a microprocessor that has built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and RAM for temporarily storing data, a dispensing control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the dispensing control MPU is operating normally, a dispensing motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the dispensing motor 584 of the dispensing device 580, and a dispensing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to dispensing are input. In addition to its built-in ROM and RAM, the dispensing control MPU also has built-in functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various game-related information (game information) and various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 serially via the payout control I/O port, and also receives the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port.It also receives detection signals from the full tank detection sensor 154, and detection signals from the ball out detection sensor 574, payout detection sensor 591, and blade rotation detection sensor 590.

Detection signals from the ball out detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the dispensing control input circuit and input to the dispensing control MPU via the dispensing control I/O port.

In addition, detection signals from the door frame opening switch, which detects the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, and the main frame opening switch, which detects the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, are input to the dispensing control input circuit and input to the dispensing control MPU via the dispensing control I/O port.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the fall cover unit 150, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310, and the error release signal from the error release switch are input to a designated input port of the dispensing control MPU via the dispensing control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal to drive the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O to the payout motor 584, outputs a signal to display the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator via the payout control I/O port to the error LED indicator, serially transmits commands indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port, and outputs the number of game balls B actually paid out to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the gaming hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's play by keeping track of the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information for the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display that displays alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The error LED display may display and notify the following: For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633), when the number "1" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "ball out" (specifically, that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580 based on the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574), when the number "2" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "ball stuck" (specifically, that there is a game ball B stuck between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589 based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, making it difficult for the payout blade 589 to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it indicates that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that there is a game ball B stuck between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589 based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590). When the number "5" is displayed, it indicates a "retry error" (specifically, that the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit); when the number "6" is displayed, it indicates a "full" state (specifically, that the tank is full with game balls B stored in the fault cover unit 150 based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154); when the number "7" is displayed, it indicates a "CR not connected" state (that an electrical connection has been cut somewhere between the payout control board 633 and the CR unit); and when the number "9" is displayed, it indicates a "stocking" state (specifically, that the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a preset number).

The ball loan request signal for game balls B from the ball loan button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls B to be loaned in accordance with the ball loan request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and input to the payout control MPU. The CR unit also updates the remaining balance on the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls B loaned, and outputs a signal displaying the remaining balance to the ball loan operation unit 220. This signal is input to and displayed on the ball loan display unit 226 of the ball loan operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control section]
The launch control unit 633b controls launch by the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery by the ball delivery solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various launch-related detection switches are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching game balls B toward the play area 5a based on this clock signal, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and a ball delivery solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball delivery solenoid 145 based on the launch reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the play area 5a per minute and outputs it to the launch solenoid drive circuit, and also generates a ball delivery reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the launch reference pulse and outputs it to the ball delivery solenoid drive circuit.

With regard to the handle unit 180, the detection signals from the handle touch sensor 192, which detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195, and the single button operation sensor 194, which detects whether the player intends to forcibly stop the launch of game ball B, are input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. Furthermore, when the CR unit and CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the detection signals are input to the launch control input circuit as a CR connection signal and then to the launch timing control circuit. A launch permission signal from the main control board 1310, which indicates permission to launch game ball B, is input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the strength with which game ball B is launched toward the play area 5a depending on the rotation position of the handle 195, is input to the launch solenoid drive circuit.

The launch timing control circuit will not output a launch reference pulse to launch game ball B toward the play area 5a unless launch condition 1 is met, that is, the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192; launch condition 2 is met, that the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected based on the CR connection signal; and launch condition 3 is met, that the launch of game ball B is permitted based on a launch permission signal from the main control board 1310.As a result, for example, the launch solenoid drive circuit will not output a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 and game ball B will not be able to be launched.

Based on a signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, this launch solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive current to the launch solenoid 542 when a launch reference pulse is input, which drives the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength that corresponds to the rotational position of the handle 195. Meanwhile, when a ball delivery reference pulse is input, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 145, thereby receiving one game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 into the ball feed unit 140. When the input of the ball delivery reference pulse ends, the constant current output is stopped, thereby sending the received game ball B to the ball launcher 540. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is controlled to a constant value.

In this embodiment, the launch control unit 633b, which controls launch using the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery using the ball delivery solenoid 145, is provided on the payout control board 633, but it may also be configured to be provided on the power supply board 630. In this case, the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be input directly to the power supply board 630, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board (not shown).

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 169, the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the performance based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a performance display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the performance display device 1600 based on control data from this peripheral control unit 1511.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the performance on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but is equipped with a peripheral control IC in which a CPU, RAM, and various I/O interfaces are integrated on a single semiconductor chip, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC that produces high-quality sound, and a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referenced by this sound source IC.

The peripheral control IC has multiple parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. integrated on a single semiconductor chip. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, based on these commands, sends game board side light emission data from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to each decorative board of the game board 5 to output lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative board of the game board 5, and sends game board side drive data from the serial I/O port for the game board decorative drive board to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5 to output drive signals to the drive motor that operates the various performance units provided on the game board 5. The serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board transmits door-side drive light-emitting data to the door frame 3 side, which is composed of door-side drive data for outputting drive signals to the vibration motor 356, operation button lift drive motor 367, and protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381, etc., which are provided on the door frame 3, and door-side light-emitting data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. The serial I/O port for the display control unit transmits control data (display commands) indicating the screen to be displayed on the performance display device 1600 to the performance display control unit 1512, and also outputs control signals (sound commands) to the sound source IC for extracting sound information from the sound ROM.

Detection signals from the contact detection sensor main body 358, pressure detection sensor 373, lift detection sensor 374, and protrusion force detection sensor 375 of the performance operation unit 300 installed on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also receives a signal (operation signal) from the performance display control unit 1512 indicating that the performance display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and monitors the operation of the performance display control unit 1512 based on this operation signal.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and controls the playback of music, sound effects, and other sounds appropriate for various performances from the top center speaker, top side speakers, and main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4, located on the door frame 3 and main frame 4, respectively. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume control switch that protrudes rearward from the peripheral control board box housing the peripheral control board 1510. In this embodiment, sound signals (e.g., 2-channel stereo signals, 4-channel stereo signals, 2.1-channel surround signals, or 4.1-channel surround signals) are sent as sound information to the top center speaker and top side speakers on the door frame 3 and the main frame speaker 622 for bass sounds on the main frame 4, thereby providing more realistic sound effects (sound performances) than ever before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the peripheral control unit 1511 also has an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses both the built-in WDT and the external WDT to diagnose whether its own system is running out of control.

Display commands output from the CPU of this peripheral control IC to the effect display control unit 1512 are sent via a serial input/output port, and in this embodiment, the bit rate (the amount of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is set to 19.2 kilobits per second (kbps). On the other hand, the initial data, door frame side light flashing commands, game board side light flashing commands, movable body drive commands, etc. output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 are sent via multiple serial input/output ports different from the display commands, and in this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

[6-3b. Production display control section]
The performance display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the performance display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the performance display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (short for Video Display Processor) that controls the display of the performance display device 1600, an image ROM that stores various data for the screen displayed on the performance display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in this image ROM is transferred and copied.

This display control MPU has built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the drawing of the performance display device 1600. When the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to inform the same. The display control MPU also receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of this execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

In addition to various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the performance display device 1600, the display control ROM also stores multiple items such as control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 and corresponding schedule data, as well as non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to that control data (display commands). The schedule data consists of screen data that defines the screen configuration arranged in chronological order, and defines the order in which screens are drawn on the performance display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data consists of non-resident area transfer data arranged in chronological order that defines the order in which various data stored in the image ROM is transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. This non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which various data is transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance, so that the screen data to be drawn on the performance display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is drawn.

The display control MPU extracts from the display control ROM the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 and outputs it to the VDP, and then extracts from the display control ROM the screen data following the first screen data and outputs it to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in chronological order in the schedule data one by one from the display control ROM, starting with the first screen data, and outputs it to the VDP.

When the VDP receives screen data output from the display control MPU, it extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the performance display device 1600, and outputs this generated drawing data to the performance display device 1600. Furthermore, when the performance display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to the display control MPU to inform this fact. The VDP uses a line buffer system. This "line buffer system" is a system in which one line's worth of drawing data for drawing the left and right directions of the performance display device 1600 is stored in a line buffer, and the one line's worth of drawing data stored in this line buffer is output to the performance display device 1600.

Image ROM stores a large amount of sprite data, resulting in a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites to be drawn on the performance display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM becomes significant and affects the speed at which data is drawn on the performance display device 1600. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM, which has a fast access speed, and the sprite data is then extracted from this image RAM. Note that sprite data is the original data, which is the data before the sprite is expanded into bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

To explain what a "sprite" is, a "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the performance display device 1600. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the performance display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite." As a result, when displaying multiple people on the performance display device 1600, multiple sprites are used. In addition to people, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be treated as a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the performance display device 1600 after their positions on the screen and their hierarchical relationship when sprites overlap (hereinafter referred to as the "sprite overlapping order") are set.

A sprite is made up of multiple rectangular areas, each 64 pixels wide and 64 pixels long, glued together. The data used to draw these rectangular areas is called a "sprite character." Small sprites can be represented using a single sprite character, while relatively large sprites such as people can be represented using a total of six sprite characters, arranged, for example, 2 wide and 3 high. Even larger sprites, such as backgrounds, can be represented using even more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be specified freely for each sprite.

The performance display device 1600 is driven by a main scan that sets the display state of each pixel sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front, and a sub-scan that repeats the main scan in a direction that intersects with the one direction. When one line of drawing data output from the performance display control unit 1512 is input to the performance display device 1600, it outputs the data to each of the pixels in one line sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front of the performance display device 1600 as a main scan. Once the output of one line is complete, the performance display device 1600 moves on to the line directly below as a sub-scan, and when the drawing data for the next line is input in the same way, it outputs the data to each of the pixels in one line sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front of the performance display device 1600 as a main scan based on the drawing data for the next line.

[7. Configuration of Peripheral Control Unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 disposed on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 provided on the gaming board 5 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 170 to 172. Figure 170 is an exploded front perspective view of the peripheral control unit, Figure 171 is an exploded rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit, and Figure 172 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. Here, the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500. Note that in Figure 171, terminals of various connectors are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, and the terminals of the various connectors protrude from the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, but this has been omitted for clarity of the drawing.

170 and 171, the peripheral control unit 1500 comprises a cover body 1501 that is open at the rear and has a box shape that is longer left-to-right than up-to-down, a peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of presentations based on commands from the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 that is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, a liquid crystal output board 1530 that is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a base body 1502 that covers the opening of the cover body 1501. Within the internal space of the cover body 1501, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached in predetermined positions, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is covered by the base body 1502, thereby forming a peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) consisting of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

[7-1. Cover body]
The various boards mounted within the interior space of cover body 1501 include peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520 capable of storing various control information (peripheral data) controlled by peripheral control board 1510, and liquid crystal output board 1530 capable of outputting drawing data for drawing images on performance display device 1600. Peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape that occupies approximately two-thirds of the area of cover body 1501 when viewed from the back, and is located on the left side of cover body 1501. When viewed from the back of cover body 1501, peripheral data ROM board 1520 occupies the remaining approximately one-third of the area, with peripheral data ROM board 1520 having a square shape and located on the upper right side of cover body 1501, while liquid crystal output board 1530 having a square shape twice the size of peripheral data ROM board 1520 and located on the lower right side of cover body 1501.

The peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected to each other by a board-to-board connector, which will be described later, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the LCD output board 1530 are electrically connected to each other by a board-to-board connector, which will be described later. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the LCD output board 1530 are electrically connected to the same ground (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the LCD output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4.

The cover body 1501 is made of conductive resin, which is polycarbonate containing carbon, and is molded in an opaque black color. When viewed from the front, it has a box-like shape with an opening, with cover side walls 1501b-1501e protruding rearward (toward the front of the pachinko machine 1) from the top, left, bottom, and right sides of the horizontally long, rectangular cover plate 1501a (plate thickness: 2 mm).

When viewed from the front, cover plate 1501a has a square fan mounting recess 1501aa for mounting an air-cooling fan FAN, which protrudes toward the opening of cover body 1501 at a position slightly above and to the right of the center, corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back side of cover plate 1501a. The bottom surface of fan mounting recess 1501aa has multiple arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed along multiple concentric circles centered at the center of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. Additionally, at the four corners of the bottom surface of fan mounting recess 1501aa, at positions corresponding to through-holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the square-shaped air-cooled fan FAN, cylindrical guide protrusions 1501aab1 to 1501aab4 are formed, each having a predetermined height (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of air-cooled fan FAN) that protrude toward the opposite side from the opening of cover body 1501. Furthermore, by forming these as arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa, it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of various electronic components mounted on peripheral control board 1510 from peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, a pair of diagonal mounting holes 1501aac1, aac2 are formed in the cover plate 1501a near the fan mounting recess 1501aa. When the air-cooled fan FAN is pressed into the fan mounting recess 1501aa to mount it, the front surface of the air-cooled fan FAN and the front surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. In this state, metal pan head screws (screws with a pan head and flat washer integrated into one unit) (not shown) are screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1, aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a. This causes the flat washer that forms the seat of the pan head screw to abut against the front of the air-cooled fan FAN and the front of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, preventing the air-cooled fan FAN from jumping out of the fan mounting recess 1501aa.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, a gap with a specified distance dimension (2.3 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the part number and model number are printed) and the rear surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa.

The cover plate 1501a is connected to the fan mounting recess 1501aa and has a wiring lead-out recess 1501ab that protrudes toward the opening of the cover body 1501 at a position higher than the bottom of the fan mounting recess 1501aa (a position that is shorter than the distance from the front of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom of the fan mounting recess 1501aa). When the air-cooled fan FAN is attached and fixed to the fan mounting recess 1501aa, multiple wires from the air-cooled fan FAN can be pulled out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab.

When viewed from the front, the cover plate 1501a is formed so that along its lower edge, a position corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, is a single closed, approximately horizontally elongated rectangular area (more precisely, a convex area with the volume adjustment switch 1510d and connector CN1 at the top and connectors CN2 to CN7 at the bottom), and the connector recess 1501ac is formed at a position lower than the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa (a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa), protruding toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac occupies mostly the area on the lower right side when viewing the cover plate 1501a from the front. Therefore, to prevent insufficient strength and warping of the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a) caused by the increased area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, two elongated reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, protruding forward at a predetermined distance and spaced apart in a position that does not interfere with the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 and volume adjustment switch 1510d on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 become exposed from the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume adjustment hole 1501ac8, respectively, formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac.

When viewed from the front, the cover plate 1501a is formed so that the connector recess 1501ad is located lower than the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa (at a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa) along its lower edge at a position corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and protrudes toward the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the bottom surfaces of the connector recess 1501ad and connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. Connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad at positions corresponding to connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530.

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 become exposed from the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10, respectively, formed in the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad.

When viewed from the front, cover plate 1501a has a wiring outlet opening 1501ae formed along its left edge at a position corresponding to CN10 provided on surface (mounting surface) 1530x of liquid crystal output board 1530. A mounting recess 1501af, which communicates with this wiring outlet opening 1501ae and is used to attach wiring cover body 1503 having a horizontally elongated rectangular shape that can cover wiring outlet opening 1501ae, is formed at a position higher than the bottom surface of the above-mentioned fan mounting recess 1501aa (at a position having a distance shorter than the distance from the front surface of cover plate 1501a to the bottom surface of fan mounting recess 1501aa), and protrudes toward the opening of cover body 1501. The mounting recess 1501af is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover body 1503, with a cylindrical protrusion 1501afa having a predetermined height (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the wiring cover body 1503) that is inserted into the through hole 1503a and protruding toward the opposite side of the opening of the cover body 1501. Mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 are formed at positions corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503, respectively.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are positioned on the same plane. In this state, metal pan head screws (not shown) can be inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2, respectively, from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, thereby fixing the wiring cover body 1503 to the mounting recess 1501af.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, it closes the wiring pull-out opening 1501ae and functions as a protective cover to prevent contact with the flexible flat cable (FFC (short for Flexible Flat Cable. A flexible flat cable has multiple flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting drawing data to the performance display device 1600, and these multiple flat conductors are covered with an insulator)) connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of conductive resin made of polycarbonate containing carbon, and is molded in an opaque black color.

When viewing cover body 1501 from the front, plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are formed near the opening side of cover body 1501 on left cover side wall 1501c, with a specified central distance between them, and protrude outward. Also formed are hinge hook portion 1501cc, which is located above guide portion 1501ca and protrudes outward, and hinge hook portion 1501cd, which is located below guide portion 1501cb and protrudes outward. The rear surfaces of the left ends of guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are chamfered. L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda, which protrude forward, are formed on the front surfaces of the left ends of hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd. Additionally, a cover-side seal portion 1501ea that protrudes outward is formed in the center of the cover body 1501 on the right cover side wall 1501e.

In order to position the peripheral control board 1510 closely to the left side of the back surface of the cover body 1501, the cover plate 1501a has four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 that protrude from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the back surface. Around the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, circular soldering copper foils (so-called ``lands'') 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, and circular soldering copper foils (so-called ``lands'') 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510, and wiring patterns are formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so that these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are each electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil on their surfaces is not exposed.

When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is faced toward the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a.Metal pan head screws (not shown) are then inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4, thereby fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 abut against the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a, respectively, and lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 abut against the bearing surfaces of the metal pan head screws. Furthermore, the shafts (threaded portions) of the metal pan head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a.

As mentioned above, the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin made of polycarbonate containing carbon, so the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a) is electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via metal pan head screws. This electrically connects the cover body 1501 to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and they share the same ground (GND). Therefore, by electrically connecting the cover body 1501 to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan head screw, the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and share the same ground (GND).

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are positioned inside the opening end faces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 (in other words, so as not to protrude outside the opening end faces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e).

In order to position the peripheral data ROM board 1520 on the upper right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501, when viewed from the back surface, the cover plate 1501a has a pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1, 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1, 1501ai2 formed diagonally at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. These protrude diagonally from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Around the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, circular soldering copper foils (so-called "lands") 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 are formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and circular soldering copper foils (so-called "lands") 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and wiring patterns are formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so that these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4, 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are each electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Furthermore, these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil on their surfaces is not exposed.

When attaching the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is faced toward the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. Metal pan head screws (not shown) are then inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, thereby fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of peripheral data ROM board 1520 abut against the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of mounting boss protrusions 1501i1 and 1501i2 and mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface of cover plate 1501a, respectively. Lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of peripheral data ROM board 1520 also abut against the bearing surfaces of the metal pan head screws. Furthermore, the shafts (threaded portions) of the metal pan head screws are screwed into mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface of cover plate 1501a.

As mentioned above, cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin made of polycarbonate containing carbon, so cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a) is electrically connected to lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4, 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on peripheral data ROM board 1520 via metal pan head screws. This electrically connects cover body 1501 to the ground (GND) of peripheral data ROM board 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and they share the same ground (GND). Therefore, by electrically connecting the cover body 1501 to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan head screw, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and share the same ground (GND).

When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are positioned inside the opening edge of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 (i.e., so as not to protrude outside the opening edge of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and the back side (solder side) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the back side (solder side) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a are positioned on the same plane.

In order to position the liquid crystal output board 1530 on the lower right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501, the cover plate 1501a is formed with a pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1, 1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501an1, 1501an2 that protrude diagonally from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 when viewed from the back surface. Around the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, circular soldering copper foils (so-called "lands") 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 are formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and circular soldering copper foils (so-called "lands") 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and wiring patterns are formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so that these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4, 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are each electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Furthermore, these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil on their surfaces is not exposed.

When attaching the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1530 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is faced toward the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r2, 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1, 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1, 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1, 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, thereby fixing the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 abut against the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 and mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a, respectively. Lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output board 1530 also abut against the bearing surfaces of the metal pan head screws. Furthermore, the shafts (threaded portions) of the metal pan head screws are screwed into mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a.

As mentioned above, the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin made of polycarbonate containing carbon, so the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a) is electrically connected to the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4, 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 via metal pan head screws. This electrically connects the cover body 1501 to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and they share the same ground (GND). Therefore, by electrically connecting the cover body 1501 to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a metal pan head screw, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected and share the same ground (GND).

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 are positioned inside the opening edge of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 (i.e., so as not to protrude outside the opening edge of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and the back side (solder side) 1530y of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the back side (solder side) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the back side (solder side) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a are all positioned on the same plane.

In this way, when various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and LCD output board 1530 are fixed in predetermined positions on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, a space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface of the various boards (the surface facing the back side of the cover plate 1501a) and the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, a gap having the above-mentioned predetermined height (2.3 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the part number and model number are printed) and the rear surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa.

The cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 has multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the right, lower right, lower left, and left sides of the fan mounting recess 1501aa. When the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation forces air from the interior space of the cover body 1501 through the blades toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500. By drawing in air from outside the peripheral control unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the interior space of the cover body 1501 (particularly the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az have a diameter of 3 mm, are spaced at a pitch of 6.5 mm in the left-right direction, and are spaced at a pitch of 6.0 to 6.5 mm in the up-down direction.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, gaps are formed between the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501, as well as between the volume adjustment switch 1510d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501. Furthermore, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, gaps are formed between the two connectors CN8 and CN9 on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501. Therefore, when the blades of the cooling fan F attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades, and air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the above-mentioned ventilation holes 1501az, and air is also taken in through the above-mentioned gaps (between the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the ventilation holes 1501 formed in the cover body 1501). The power is taken in through the gaps formed between the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 on the peripheral control board 1510, the gap formed between the volume adjustment switch 1510d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 on the cover body 1501, and the gaps formed between the two connectors CN8 and CN9 on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 on the cover body 1501.

The total area (addition of the areas of the multiple arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa) is smaller than the sum of the area of the multiple ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the area of the above-mentioned gaps (the gaps formed between the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501, the gaps formed between the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, and the gaps formed between the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501). Therefore, when the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation causes the air in the internal space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled towards the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. As a result, when air is taken in from outside the peripheral control unit 1500 through the multiple ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, the flow rate of the air flowing into each of the multiple ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be kept low.

When the blades of the air-cooled fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled towards the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades.This makes it possible to keep the flow rate of air flowing into each of the multiple ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 low when air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the multiple ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501.However, when the blades of the air-cooled fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation may also cause air to be drawn in through the blades and sent out towards the peripheral control IC 1510a. In other words, the main purpose of the cooling fan FAN may not be to exchange air within the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but may be to simply cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

[7-2. Base body]
The base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin that is polycarbonate containing carbon, and is molded in an opaque black color, and when viewed from the front, it has a box shape with an opening, with base side walls 1502b to 1502e protruding forward (toward the back side of the pachinko machine 1) from the upper, left, lower, and right sides of a horizontally long rectangular base flat plate 1502a. The size of the opening formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is slightly larger than the size of the opening formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. As a result, when the base body 1502 is placed over the cover body 1501 to close the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 fit inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in inscribed (surface contact) with each other.

When viewed from the front, base plate 1502a has vertically elongated breakage prevention ribs 1502aa1-1502aa3 formed at predetermined intervals along the bottom edge at positions that do not interfere with connectors CN2-CN7 on surface (mounting surface) 1510x of peripheral control board 1510 (in other words, the terminals of connectors CN2-CN7 on surface (mounting surface) 1510x of peripheral control board 1510 are inserted from surface (mounting surface) 1510x of peripheral control board 1510x to back surface (solder surface) 1510y of peripheral control board 1510 and protrude from back surface (solder surface) 1510y of peripheral control board 1510), preventing the peripheral control board 1510 from warping due to the force applied when inserting connectors to connect wiring to connectors CN2-CN7, thereby breaking the electrical wiring patterns formed on the peripheral control board 1510.

When viewing the base body 1502 from the front, an outward-protruding engagement portion 1502ca is formed on the left-side base sidewall 1502c near the opening side of the base body 1502. This engagement portion 1502ca is formed with guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad at positions corresponding to the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad have U-shaped groove-shaped pocket portions 1502cae and 1502caf formed therein.

The plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca, 1501cb formed on the above-mentioned cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa, 1502cab, and the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca, 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the above-mentioned cover body 1501 are inserted into the U-groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad. The L-shaped hook portions 1501cca, 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are then wrapped around the U-groove-shaped pocket portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad while they are in contact with them, so that the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca, 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 can be hooked and engaged with the U-groove-shaped pocket portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad.

In addition, a base-side seal portion 1502ea that protrudes outward is formed in the center of the right-side base side wall 1502e at a position corresponding to the cover-side seal portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Furthermore, through-holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 are formed on the upper and lower sides of the right-side base side wall 1502e, respectively, for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the gaming panel 1100 provided on the gaming board 5.

[7-3. Various Connectors]
The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the internal space of the cover body 1501 is provided with a peripheral control IC 1510a in which a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as "SATA controller"), and various I/O interfaces are integrated on one semiconductor chip, a control ROM 1510b in which various programs for controlling the progress of game presentations and demonstrations (demonstration presentations performed while the player is waiting) and various schedule data (presentation data) for defining the progress of presentations are stored in advance, and an SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) to which various control information (peripheral data) stored in a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be transferred and stored. The device is equipped with an SDRAM 1510c consisting of SDRAM (SDRAM memory) 1510c1 and 1510c2, a slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d for adjusting the volume, a backup power supply 1510e for supplying power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when the power is cut off, a power supply generating circuit (not shown) for generating various power supply voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7. The backup power supply 1510e is housed in a holder (not shown).

As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 integrates a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, and various I/O interfaces onto a single semiconductor chip, and combines the functions of the peripheral control unit 1511 (excluding the functions of various ROMs) and the performance display control unit 1512 (excluding the functions of various ROMs) described above.

The control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510 includes the functions of the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 described above and the display control ROM functions of the performance display control unit 1512 described above, and has a storage capacity of 256 Mbits (or 128 Mbits). The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbits. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbits.

The various I/O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I/O and various parallel I/O. Examples of various serial I/O include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

In this embodiment, UART communication is used as the communication method for receiving commands from the main control board 1310 (communication takes place via connector CN5), and SPI communication or I2C communication is used as the communication method for transmitting control data to the various boards provided on the game board 5 side and the various boards provided on the door frame side (communication takes place via the corresponding connector from among connectors CN3, CN6, and CN7).

In this embodiment, SPI communication and I2C communication are used to send drive data to the drive control IC that drives the electrical drive sources (e.g., various motors and solenoids, communicating via connector CN6) on the game board 5 and the electrical drive sources (e.g., various motors and solenoids, communicating via connector CN3) on the door frame 3; send light emission data to the LED control IC for the multiple LEDs on the game board 5 (communicating via connector CN7) and the multiple LEDs on the door frame 3 (communicating via connector CN3); receive signals as detection data from the various sensors on the game board 5 (communicating via connector CN6) and the various sensors on the door frame 3 (communicating via connector CN3). Note that in this embodiment, the transfer speed for SPI communication is set to 250 kbps, and the transfer speed for I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

The various parallel I/Os include GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output). In this embodiment, a signal from the air-cooled fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the gaming board 5, which conveys the rotational status of the fan, is input to the GPIO (via connector CN1). Signals from various sensors that check the operation and origin position of control objects (not shown) provided on the gaming board 5 are input to the GPIO (via connector CN6). Control signals for control objects (not shown) provided on the gaming board 5 are output from the GPIO (via connector CN6). A signal is output from the GPIO to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 to indicate that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

In this embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to connector CN1, SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to connector CN3 (i.e., connector CN3 is assigned as a connector where SPI communication and I2C communication coexist), UART communication is assigned to connector CN5, SPI communication and GPIO are assigned to connector CN6 (i.e., connector CN6 is assigned as a connector where SPI communication and GPIO coexist), and SPI communication is assigned to connector CN7.

The SATA controller in peripheral control IC 1510a can establish SATA-compliant communications with peripheral data ROM 1520a on peripheral data ROM board 1520, achieving a high transfer speed of 2 Gbps (up to 3 Gbps). In response to instructions from the CPU in peripheral control IC 1510a, the SATA controller in peripheral control IC 1510a can quickly transfer various control information (peripheral data) from peripheral data ROM 1520a on peripheral data ROM board 1520 to RAM in peripheral control IC 1510a, or to SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2.

SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAM (Double Data Rate 3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) that can achieve high data communication speeds. Various control information (peripheral data) from peripheral data ROM 1520a on peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred to SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed via the SATA controller of peripheral control IC 1510a.

The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 further includes a special connector SCN1 for inter-board connection with the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a special connector SCN2 for inter-board connection with the liquid crystal output board 1530. The surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a special connector SCN3 for inter-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510. The surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 includes a special connector SCN4 for inter-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510.

The peripheral control board 1510 outputs image drawing data to be drawn on a display device such as a performance display device from the special connector SCN2 in multiple video signal formats. These video signal formats include, for example, RGB, LVDS, MIPI (Mobile Industry Processor Interface), eDP (Embedded DisplayPort), and clockless formats. In this embodiment, four formats (four in total) are used: one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system. In addition, in this embodiment, one of the two LVDS systems (e.g., the first LVDS system) is used as the video signal format input to the performance display device 1600. It is also possible to use the eDP method instead of the MIPI method, and create a peripheral control board 1510 with one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and one eDP system.

Furthermore, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with LEDML1 near the control ROM 1510b, LEDML2 near the SDRAM 1510c, LEDML3 near the special connector SCN1, and LEDML4 near the special connector SCN2. The peripheral control board 1510 is supplied with various voltages (+24V, +12V, and +5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 via interface 635. LEDML1 checks (monitors) the state when +5V is being supplied, and remains lit when +5V is being supplied. LEDML2 checks (monitors) the state when +12V is being supplied, and remains lit when +12V is being supplied. LEDML3 monitors the state in which +24V is being supplied, and remains lit while +24V is being supplied. LEDML4 monitors the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and remains lit while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

When various boards, such as the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and LCD output board 1530, are attached and fixed in their predetermined positions on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, as described above, a space with a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface of the various boards (the surface facing the back side of the cover plate 1501a) and the back side of the cover plate 1501a. The space thus formed can be brightly illuminated by lighting the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510.

Special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, special connector SCN3 on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and special connector SCN4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the LCD output board 1530 are equipped with floating mechanisms, and are structurally completely different from connectors CN1 to CN7 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and connectors CN8 to CN10 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the LCD output board 1530. These connectors CN1 to CN10 are each sockets, and the socket and plug are mated by inserting and pushing the corresponding connector plug vertically into the peripheral control board 1510 and LCD output board 1530. The sockets of connectors CN1 to CN10 are designed so that when mated, there is absolutely no vertical movement when viewing the peripheral control board 1510 and the LCD output board 1530 from the front.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are each plugs, and the special connector SCN3 on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the LCD output board 1530 are each sockets.

The socket of special connector SCN3 on surface (mounting surface) 1520x of peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into and pushed into the plug of special connector SCN1 on surface (mounting surface) 1510x of peripheral control board 1510, thereby mating the socket and plug. The socket of special connector SCN3 on surface (mounting surface) 1520x of peripheral data ROM board 1520 is designed with a floating mechanism that, when mated, moves a predetermined distance in the forward and backward directions (from the rear to the front of pachinko machine 1) when viewed from the front of peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510), absorbing any forward and backward errors that occur when the socket is pushed in. Furthermore, when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed in a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between the front (top) surface of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so that the front (top) surface of the socket of the special connector SCN3 does not come into contact with the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, even if the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) moves to the maximum extent within the predetermined distance range described above when viewed from the front.

The socket of the special connector SCN4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby mating the socket and plug. The socket of the special connector SCN4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is designed with a floating mechanism that, when mated, allows the socket to move a predetermined distance in the forward and backward directions (from the back to the front of the pachinko machine 1) when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510), thereby absorbing any forward and backward errors that occur when the socket is pushed in. Furthermore, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached and fixed in a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between the front (top) surface of the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so that the front (top) surface of the socket of the special connector SCN4 does not come into contact with the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, even if the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) moves to the maximum extent within the predetermined distance range described above when viewed from the front.

Here, we briefly explain why the peripheral data ROM board 1520 uses the special connector SCN3 and the LCD output board 1530 uses the special connector SCN4. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is equipped with a peripheral data ROM 1520a (including the image ROM functions of the effect display control unit 1512 described above) that can store various control information (peripheral data) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. Examples of various control information (peripheral data) include image data such as background images, character images, and pattern images used to draw various effect images on the effect display device 1600; light emission data that specifies the light emission modes (on, gradation, flashing, off, etc.) of the various LEDs mounted in multiple locations on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5; sound data such as music, voice, warning sounds, and notification sounds; and drive data for driving and controlling the various movable effect elements provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5.

Peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (non-volatile) memory that is cheaper and has a larger capacity than NOR flash (non-volatile) memory, and can write various data quickly. Peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, which reduces power consumption, and can achieve high transfer speeds through communications that comply with the SATA standard.

In this way, using NAND flash (non-volatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a reduces costs, contributes to reduced power consumption, and allows various stored data to be read at high transfer rates. However, while the peripheral data ROM 1520a reduces power consumption due to its low operating voltage, the low operating voltage also makes it susceptible to noise. Furthermore, the various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a must be accurately and reliably transmitted from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, in this embodiment, rather than electrically connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected using an inter-board connector, thereby reducing the impact of noise entering the inter-board transmission path.

The procedure for installing various boards within the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later. The socket of the special connector SCN3 on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 must be inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, after which the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the LCD output board 1530 must be secured to the back side of the cover plate 1501a along with the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, by using the socket of the special connector SCN3 equipped with the floating mechanism described above, any forward/backward errors that occur when securing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a along with the peripheral control board 1510 can be absorbed, preventing damage to the multiple connection terminals formed on the plug and socket and ensuring the reliable formation of a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520.

As mentioned above, the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and therefore, although within the design dimensional distance tolerance, the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding. Even in such cases, by using the socket of the special connector SCN3 equipped with the floating mechanism described above, the front-to-rear error that occurs when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the warped cover plate 1501a can be absorbed. This prevents damage to the multiple connection terminals formed on the plug and socket, and ensures the reliable formation of a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520.

The LCD output board 1530 is an important board that outputs the image drawing data transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 via connector CN10, thereby displaying images on the effect display device 1600 showing the progress of the game presentation (for example, an image informing the player that a jackpot game state that is more advantageous than the normal state will occur, an image informing the player that a jackpot game state will not occur, an image informing the player that a jackpot game state has not occurred but that the game is getting closer to a jackpot game state compared to the normal state, etc.) and demonstrations (demo presentations that are performed while the player is waiting). For this reason, the image drawing data for the image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 must be transmitted accurately and reliably to the LCD output board 1530. Therefore, in this embodiment, instead of electrically connecting the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected using an inter-board connector, thereby reducing the effects of noise entering the inter-board transmission path.

The procedure for installing various boards within the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later. However, the socket of the special connector SCN4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 must be inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and then the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and liquid crystal output board 1530 must be fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, by using the socket of the special connector SCN4, which is equipped with the floating mechanism described above, any forward/backward error that occurs when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 can be absorbed, preventing damage to the multiple connection terminals formed on the plug and socket and ensuring the reliable formation of a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, because the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin made from polycarbonate containing carbon, the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, even if it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. Even in such cases, by using the socket of the special connector SCN4 equipped with the floating mechanism described above, the front-to-rear error that occurs when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the warped cover plate 1501a can be absorbed. This prevents damage to the multiple connection terminals formed on the plug and socket, and ensures the reliable formation of a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530.

Furthermore, when the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, as described above, the back side of the peripheral control board 1510, the back side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the back side of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the same plane. Therefore, compared to a three-dimensional arrangement in which the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the front side of the peripheral control board 1510, the distance dimension in the front-to-back direction (i.e., the depth direction) of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be made smaller. This can contribute to ensuring the distance dimension in the depth direction for placing, for example, a large movable effect unit (an electrical drive source and drive mechanism that can operate a movable effect body, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and operating position) on the game board 5.

[7-4. How to assemble the peripheral control unit]
Here, we will explain how to assemble the peripheral control unit 1500. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Next, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

Next, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are faced toward the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to correspond to mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are arranged to correspond to mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged to correspond to mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

Next, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed into mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, thereby securing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. Metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 and screwed into mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, thereby securing the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

Next, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 to secure the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this way, of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, LCD output board 1530, and peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is secured last to the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is restricted from moving up, down, left, and right by being inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is restricted from moving up, down, left, and right by being inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, whereas the peripheral control board 1510 does not have any mounting boss protrusions formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a to restrict movement in the up, down, left, and right directions. This is because fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a restricts them in the up, down, left, and right directions, and dimensional errors caused by this restriction can be absorbed by the dimensional margins provided in the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and in the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

Next, with the peripheral data ROM board 1520, LCD output board 1530, and peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engagement portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the U-groove-shaped pouch portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed on the engagement portion 1502ca of the base body 1502.

Next, with the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca, 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 abutting the U-groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad, the base body 1502 is wrapped around to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501, and with the base body 1502 placed over the cover body 1501, a metal one-way screw with a metal anchor rivet (not shown) inserted is inserted into the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and screwed into the base side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward at the base-side seal portion 1502ea, sealing the cover-side seal portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base-side seal portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502.

In this sealed state, cover side walls 1501b-1501e of cover body 1501 fit inside base side walls 1502b-1502e of base body 1502 and are in inscribed contact (surface contact), and the front surfaces of disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1-1502aa3 formed on base body 1502 abut against the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of peripheral control board 1510. As a result, because cover body 1501 and base body 1502 are made of conductive resin, such as polycarbonate containing carbon, as described above, cover body 1501 and base body 1502 are electrically conductive. To release this sealed state, cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on cover body 1501 must be destroyed with a tool. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505, which is made up of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, thereby providing an increased deterrent against unauthorized acts on the peripheral control board box 1505.

Next, the air-cooled fan FAN is pressed into the fan mounting recess 1501aa formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and the multiple wires from the air-cooled fan FAN are pulled out through the wire pull-out recess 1501ab formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Metal washer-equipped pan head screws (screws with a pan head and flat washer integrated into one unit) (not shown) are then screwed into the mounting holes 1501aac1 and 1501aac2, respectively, from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a.

Next, a connector for connecting multiple wires (harnesses) to the performance display device 1600 is inserted and attached to connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 through the wiring pull-out opening 1501ae formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503, and then screwed into mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2, respectively, from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, thereby fixing the wiring cover body 1503 to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the multiple wires are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

When attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this manner to the gaming panel 1100 provided on the gaming board 5, when looking at the peripheral control unit 1500 from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the side of the engagement portion 1502ca formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is inserted into a mounting groove (not shown) provided on the gaming panel 1100, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1502eb1, 1502eb2 formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and screwed into mounting holes (not shown) provided on the gaming panel 1100 to secure the unit in place.

In the assembly method described above, the procedure for installing various boards within the internal space of the cover body 1501 involves, for example, first fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the predetermined position described above on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 (the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is located on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the rear), and then fixing the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the predetermined position described above on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 (the liquid crystal output board 1530 is located on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the rear), The socket of the special connector SCN3 on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the socket of the special connector SCN4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby fixing the peripheral control board 1510 in the above-mentioned predetermined position (the peripheral control board 1510 is positioned to the left of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back). Even in these mounting procedures for various boards, by using the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4, which are equipped with the floating mechanism described above, the forward/backward error that occurs when pushing in can be absorbed, preventing damage to the multiple connection terminals formed on the plug and socket. This makes it possible to reliably form transmission paths between the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510, as well as between the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510.

There are several types of game boards installed in pachinko machines, each with different game specifications. In this embodiment, the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 is configured to be divided into three parts so that various boards, such as the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output board 1530, can be attached separately. The peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common regardless of the game specifications of the game board installed in the pachinko machine, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is a board that is dependent on the game specifications of the game board as peripheral data corresponding to each game board's game specifications is stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a board that is dependent on the type of video signal input to the effect display device 1600.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that is not dependent on the game specifications of the game board, nor on the type of video signal input to the effect display device 1600. Because it is a common board, it can be reused (reused). Furthermore, because the peripheral data ROM board 1520, which is equipped with a peripheral data ROM 1520a that stores peripheral data corresponding to each game board's game specifications, and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the above-mentioned inter-board connector, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced to match the game board's game specifications.

As mentioned above, there are several types of video signal formats input to display devices such as performance display devices, including RGB, LVDS, MIPI, eDP, and clockless formats. The liquid crystal output board 1530 corresponding to these multiple formats and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the board-to-board connector described above. This means that the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be easily replaced to match the format of the video signal input to the performance display device 1600. In this embodiment, as mentioned above, one of the two LVDS systems (e.g., the first LVDS system) is used as the format of the video signal input to the performance display device 1600. Therefore, the liquid crystal output board 1530 that matches the format of the video signal input to the performance display device 1600 (LVDS system) is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the board-to-board connector described above.

In addition, in this embodiment, the cover body 1501, base body 1502, and wiring cover body 1503 are all made of conductive resin, such as polycarbonate containing carbon. When various boards, such as the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and LCD output board 1530, are fixed to the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a) with metal pan-head screws, they are electrically connected to the grounds (GND) of these boards, forming a common ground (GND). This allows noise entering through the cover body 1501, base body 1502, and wiring cover body 1503 to flow to the board ground (the ground (GND) of each board), thereby eliminating the noise (hereinafter, this may be referred to as the "noise suppression effect of the conductive resin peripheral control board box 1505"). This eliminates the need to provide dedicated filters for eliminating such noise on each board, contributing to cost reductions for the various boards.

Here, we will explain the arrangement of the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. As mentioned above, these multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az can cool the interior space of the cover body 1501, and also have the function of checking for the presence or absence of tampering.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 172, the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the right side of the fan mounting recess 1501aa are dispersedly positioned over an area larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b so that the product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b can be visually confirmed, that is, so that the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins can be confirmed from multiple angles. This makes it possible to check any modifications to the control ROM 1510b via the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az. Additionally, LEDML1, located near control ROM 1510b, is designed to remain lit when +5V is being supplied from power supply board 630 of board unit 620 via interface board 635. Therefore, while it originally has the function of checking (monitoring) the status of +5V being supplied, it also functions as a spotlight that brightly illuminates control ROM 1510b, thereby contributing to improved visibility of the surface of control ROM 1510b and the status of the IC pins.

In addition, the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520) so that the connection status of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed, and are furthermore dispersedly arranged so that the product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the status of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a can be visually confirmed, that is, so that the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a and the status of the IC pins can be roughly confirmed from multiple angles. This makes it possible to confirm the modification of the inter-board connectors by the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 through the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az. Furthermore, the LEDML3 located near the special connector SCN1 remains lit when +24V is being supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 via the interface board 635. Therefore, although it originally has the function of checking (monitoring) the state in which +24V is being supplied, it also functions as a spotlight, illuminating the inter-board connector formed by the special connector SCN1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, thereby contributing to improving the visibility of the inter-board connector formed by the special connector SCN1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520.

Furthermore, the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the lower left side of the fan mounting recess 1501aa are each dispersed and arranged to occupy an area larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530) so that the connection status of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be confirmed. This makes it possible to confirm, via the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az, any alteration of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. In addition, the LEDML4 located near the special connector SCN2 remains lit while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. Therefore, although it originally has the function of checking (monitoring) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, it also functions as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector formed by the special connector SCN2 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, thereby contributing to improving the visibility of the inter-board connector formed by the special connector SCN2 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530.

Furthermore, the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the lower right side of the fan mounting recess 1501aa are dispersedly positioned to occupy an area larger than the shape of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 so that the product number and model number printed on the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 can be visually confirmed, as can the state of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, i.e., so that the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the state of the IC pins can be confirmed from multiple angles. This makes it possible to check any modifications to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 through the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az. Furthermore, LEDML2, which is placed near SDRAM 1510c, which is made up of SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, is designed to remain lit when +12V is being supplied from power supply board 630 of board unit 620 via interface board 635. Therefore, while it originally has the function of checking (monitoring) the state in which +12V is being supplied, it also functions as a spotlight that brightly illuminates SDRAM 1510c, thereby contributing to improved visibility of the surface of SDRAM 1510c (i.e., SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2) and the state of the IC pins.

In addition, the product number of the peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed from the gaps between the multiple blades that make up the air-cooling fan FAN (specifically, the gaps between the blades when an inspector rotates the air-cooling fan FAN). This makes it possible to check, via the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az, whether or not a counterfeit board has been placed around the peripheral control IC 1510a.

In this embodiment, LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are surface-mounted, have a wide angle of approximately 120 degrees, and are weakly directional, making them suitable for use as lighting. When various boards, such as the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and LCD output board 1530, are attached and fixed in predetermined positions on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, as described above, a space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surfaces of the various boards (the surfaces facing the back side of the cover plate 1501a) and the back side of the cover plate 1501a. By lighting LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting, the space thus formed can be brightly illuminated.

In addition, in the area on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 facing the light-emitting surfaces of LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and its surroundings, reflective portions (not shown) are formed to reflect the light emitted by LEDML1 to LEDML4 and direct it back toward the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. These reflective portions (not shown) may be made of bright colored paint such as white, or may be made of glossy colored paint, or may have a glossy metal sheet attached.

Furthermore, near the gaming board 5, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are located above the gaming board 5, and a payout unit 560 is located to the side of the gaming board 5. As a result, gaming balls rub against each other along the ball path formed by these components, becoming charged and electrostatically discharged, becoming a noise source. Therefore, the area near the gaming board 5 where the ball path is formed is an environment susceptible to noise due to electrostatic discharge from the gaming balls. Furthermore, because the pachinko machine 1 is installed back-to-back with the island equipment in the gaming hall, other pachinko machines may act as noise sources and cause noise effects. Thus, the area around the gaming board 5 is in an environment extremely susceptible to noise effects. Therefore, in this embodiment, the cover body 1501, base body 1502, and wiring cover body 1503 are made of a conductive resin made of polycarbonate containing carbon, as described above, and are electrically connected to the same ground (GND) as the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and LCD output board 1530. This allows noise that enters through the cover body 1501 and base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear of the gaming panel 1100 of the gaming board 5 to flow to the board grounds (grounds (GND) of various boards) of the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and LCD output board 1530, etc., thereby eliminating the noise.

[7-5. Control ROM Implementation]
Here, a method for mounting the control ROM 1510b on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 to 176. FIG. 173 is a perspective view (a) of a ROM socket having a conversion board, and a top view (b) of a control ROM having a leadless package attached to the ROM socket. FIG. 174 is a view taken along the arrow P in FIG. 173(a). FIG. 175 is a cross-sectional view of the through-holes formed in the peripheral control board and the through-holes formed in the conversion board, showing an overview of the positional relationship between the through-holes formed in the peripheral control board and the through-holes formed in the conversion board. FIG. 176 is a perspective view (a) of a control ROM and ROM socket having a leadless package mounted on a conversion board, and a top view (b) of a control ROM having a leadless package attached to the ROM socket.

First, as shown in Figures 173 to 176, a plurality of rectangular pads 1510v are formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the control ROM 1510b is arranged, and are aligned in two rows spaced a predetermined distance apart. Specifically, the pads 1510v are arranged at positions corresponding to a plurality of lead terminals that protrude outward from both longitudinal sides of a lead-type ROM socket to which the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package (SSOP (Shrink Small Outline Package), hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "lead-type package") is attached and detached. The lead terminals of the lead-type ROM socket are soldered to pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby fixing the lead-type ROM socket to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The pads 1510v are located near the peripheral control IC 1510a described above.

On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the control ROM 1510b, which is a surface-mounted electronic component, there is a surface-side notation portion silk-screened in white paint that stands out against the green on a solid green resist, indicating the attributes of the surface-side electronic component, such as the component number of the surface-side electronic component and an area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component will be placed (which may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component). (For example, in Figure 173(b), the component number 1510v1 of the control ROM 1510b, the position where the control ROM 1510b will be placed (inner area indicated by symbols indicating the four corners (L-shaped symbols)) 1510v2, and the mounting orientation of the control ROM 1510b (mounting direction, symbol indicating the placement position of the first terminal (triangle symbol (△))) 1510v3).

In addition, on the back surface 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 (the surface on which the control ROM 1510b is not mounted, and hence may be referred to as the "non-mounted surface"), in addition to the back surface mounted electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and various ICs, a back surface notation section indicating the attributes of the back surface mounted electronic components, such as the component number of the back surface mounted electronic component and an area indicating the position where the back surface mounted electronic component is to be placed (which may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the back surface mounted electronic component, and model of the back surface mounted electronic component) is silk-screened in white paint, which stands out easily against the green, on a solid green resist.

In this embodiment, the control ROM 1510b, which has a lead-type package, has a memory capacity of 256 Mbits and has 35 lead terminals protruding outward from each of its longitudinal sides (70 lead terminals in total on both sides).

Control ROM 1510b has a lead-type package, but in the event of a supply shortage or discontinuation, it will need to be substituted with one having a different package. However, if the package is changed, in a leadless (so-called LGA (Land Grid Array)) package (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "leadless package"), the lead terminals do not protrude from the side of the leadless package, but the connection terminals are located on the bottom of the leadless package. This means that the shape and arrangement of pad 1510v and the routing of the wiring pattern to pad 1510v must be modified. Therefore, due to the package change, the peripheral control board 1510 must be manufactured even if there are no electrical problems with other circuits.

The pads 1510v are formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 so that they are positioned corresponding to the multiple lead terminals that protrude outward from both longitudinal sides of the lead-type ROM socket to which the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package is attached and detached. By changing the object soldered to these pads 1510v, a system is adopted that can accommodate package changes. In other words, even if the package of the control ROM 1510b is changed, there is no need to modify the shape and arrangement of the pads 1510v on the peripheral control board 1510 or the routing of the wiring pattern to the pads 1510v (the shape and arrangement of the pads 1510v and the routing of the wiring to the pads 1510v remain the same), allowing for common use. The pads 1510v are aligned in two rows, 35 per row, spaced a predetermined distance apart, on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

As mentioned above, the lead-type packaged control ROM 1510b has a total of 70 lead terminals, whereas the leadless packaged control ROM 1510b has a reduced number of connection terminals, with 56 (although the number of connection terminals may be less than 56) located on the bottom surface of the leadless package. This is because there are fewer power supply terminals to which an external control power supply is electrically connected, ground terminals electrically connected to ground (circuit ground) (GND), and NC terminals that are unconnected (non-connected).

When the package of the control ROM 1510b is changed from a leaded package to a leadless package, as shown in Figure 173(a), this can be accommodated by using a ROM socket 1510s that can attach and detach the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package, and a conversion board 1510t that changes the number of terminals. The ROM socket 1510s allows the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package to be attached and detached using a special tool, and is mainly composed of a mounting portion 1510sa, a pair of rotating holding pieces 1510sb, 1510sb, and multiple lead terminals 1510sc. The mounting portion 1510sa is where the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is placed, and the pair of rotating holding pieces 1510sb, 1510sb are in an open state when the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is placed on the mounting portion 1510sa, but when the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is placed and held on the mounting portion 1510sa, they rotate and hold the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package in a closed state, with a force acting on the top surface of the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package toward the bottom surface.

When the pair of rotary holder pieces 1510sb, 1510sb are closed, a force acting on the top surface of the control ROM 1510b with a leadless package toward the bottom surface is maintained, maintaining an electrical connection between the 56 connection terminals on the bottom surface of the control ROM 1510b with a leadless package placed on the mounting portion 1510sa and one end of each of the corresponding lead terminals 1510sc (56 terminals).

The 56 lead terminals 1510sc are soldered and fixed to pads 1510ta (56 pieces) on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t, which is formed to correspond to these lead terminals 1510sc.

The shape of the pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is the same as the shape of the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (e.g., a rectangular shape measuring 2.5 mm x 0.5 mm), and the size is the same, and the distance between the pads (so-called pitch) is also the same (e.g., 0.8 mm). The distance between two rows of pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is smaller than the distance between two rows of pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

The conversion board 1510t has a rectangular plate-like outer shape that is larger than the outer shape of the IC package and is roughly the same as the outer shape of the lead-type ROM socket into which the control ROM 1510b, which has a lead-type package, is attached and detached.

The conversion board 1510t is thinner (0.8 mm or 1.0 mm) than the peripheral control board 1510 (1.6 mm), and a green resist layer is formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x and back surface (solder surface, non-mounting surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, where the pads 1510ta, wiring patterns, and lands are formed. A green resist layer is formed by applying a green resist liquid to the layer (copper plane) on which the pads 1510ta, wiring patterns, and lands are formed. The conversion board 1510t has multiple through holes (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "through holes") with lands that electrically connect to the wiring patterns formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty. The inner walls of the through holes are copper-plated to provide conductivity. The through holes, excluding the end face through holes 1510tb described below, are filled with insulating resin, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin that seals the through holes are processed so that they are flush with the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty, respectively. Together with the lands, one end and the other end of the insulating resin that seals the through holes are completely covered with a green coating (referred to as "resin filling").

As shown in FIG. 174, semicircular end face through holes 1510tb are formed on both longitudinal sides of the conversion board 1510t at positions corresponding to multiple lead terminals protruding outward from both longitudinal sides of the lead-type ROM socket to which the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package is attached and detached. The inner walls 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb are copper-plated to make them conductive. The end face through holes 1510tb are formed in a circular shape during manufacturing, and then shaped into a semicircular shape by router processing. Lands are formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the end face through holes 1510tb, respectively, on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t.

The end face through holes 1510tb formed on both longitudinal sides of the conversion board 1510t are positioned in the same position as the lead terminals of the control ROM 1510b, which has a lead-type package, and are the same distance (e.g., 0.8 mm) as the distance between the pads 1510v (so-called pitch) formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

As mentioned above, the difference between the control ROM 1510b with a lead-type package and the control ROM 1510b with a leadless package is the number of power supply terminals to which an external control power supply is electrically connected, ground terminals to which ground (circuit ground) (GND) is electrically connected, and NC terminals that are unconnected (non-connected). For this reason, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t have wiring patterns routed so that the connection terminals of the control ROM 1510b with a leadless package are electrically connected to the end surface through holes 1510tb in a manner that matches the number of power supply terminals, ground terminals, and NC terminals and matches the arrangement of the lead terminals of the control ROM 1510b with a lead-type package.

Returning to Figure 173, the positional relationship between the 56 pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t and the 70 end face through holes 1510tb formed on both longitudinal side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t is such that, as shown in Figure 173(b), the point (center) where a line connecting the centers of the top and bottom sides of the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t intersects with the point (center) where a line connecting the centers of the top and bottom sides of the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t intersects with the point (center) where a line connecting the centers of the top and bottom sides of the ROM socket 1510s intersects with the line connecting the centers of the left and right sides of the ROM socket 1510s, thereby separating the pads 1510ta and the end face through holes 1510tb by a predetermined distance zd as a clearance to prevent electrical contact.

A total of 70 end face through holes 1510tb are formed on both longitudinal sides of the conversion board 1510t. The inner walls 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb are soldered to the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby fixing the back face (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t in surface contact with the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (i.e., the conversion board 1510t is surface-mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, with no gaps).

The exposed copper surfaces on the front (mounting surface) 1510tx and back (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t have solder applied (coated with solder) using a solder releaser, and are treated to protect the exposed copper surfaces and improve wettability during mounting. The solder releaser for the conversion board 1510t may be a water-soluble flux.

When the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t is soldered to the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the land of the end face through hole 1510tb comes into surface contact with the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby establishing electrical conductivity. This is because the surfaces of the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 have been treated with a solder lifter and have solder already applied thereto (coated with solder), and the lands of the end face through holes 1510tb formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t have also been treated with a solder lifter and have solder already applied thereto (coated with solder).Therefore, when the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb is soldered to the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands of the end face through holes 1510tb formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are in surface contact with the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The solder releaser for the peripheral control board 1510 may be water-soluble flux.

For the end face through holes 1510tb, lands are formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, respectively, but lands may not be formed. In this case, it is preferable that the pads 1510ta formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the end face through holes 1510tb and the end face through holes 1510tb formed on both sides of the end face through holes 1510tb be spaced apart by a predetermined distance zd (e.g., 0.5 mm or more) to prevent electrical contact. In this case, lower pads that are electrically connected to the lower ends of the end face through holes 1510tb may also be formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t. The shape of these lower pads is smaller (e.g., a rectangular shape of 1.5 mm to 1.6 mm x 0.5 mm to 0.55 mm) than the shape (e.g., a rectangular shape of 2.5 mm x 0.5 mm) of pads 1510v formed on surface (mounting surface) 1510x of peripheral control board 1510, and the distance between the pads (so-called pitch) is the same (e.g., 0.8 mm) as pads 1510v formed on surface (mounting surface) 1510x of peripheral control board 1510. As described above, solder has been placed on these lower pads (coated with solder) using a solder releaser, and treatment has been performed to protect the surface of the exposed copper portion and improve wettability during mounting. Even with this configuration, the lower pad electrically connected to the lower end side of the end face through hole 1510tb formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t comes into surface contact with the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby achieving electrical conductivity, when the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb is soldered to the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, by configuring it in this manner, when the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the lower pad formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are soldered to the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the peel strength of the pad 1510v against peeling from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510 can be further increased.

On the surface (mounting surface) 1510t of the conversion board 1510t, in addition to the ROM socket 1510s, which is a surface-mounted electronic component, there are surface-side notations indicating the attributes of the surface-side electronic component, such as the component number of the surface-side electronic component and an area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component will be placed (which may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and model number of the surface-side electronic component). These notations are silk-screened in white paint that stands out against the green color on a solid green resist (for example, the component number 1510s1 of the ROM socket 1510s, the position where the ROM socket 1510s will be placed (inner area indicated by symbols indicating the four corners (L-shaped symbols)) 1510s2, and the mounting orientation of the ROM socket 1510s (mounting direction, symbol indicating the placement position of the first terminal (triangle symbol (△)))) 1510s3).

Note that while there are a total of 56 pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t, there are a total of 70 pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is a larger number than the pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the shape of the pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is the same as the shape of the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and they are also the same size. Furthermore, the contact area (bonding area) between the lead terminals 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is, when compared with the contact area (bonding area) between the inner walls 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb formed on both side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t and the lands (or the above-mentioned lower pads instead of the lands) formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. , the bonding strength between the inner walls 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb formed on both side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t and the lands (or the lower pads described above instead of the lands) formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is higher than the bonding strength between the lead terminals 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t.

For this reason, when the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s is soldered to the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t, the peel strength at which the pad 1510ta peels off from the base material of the conversion board 1510t is smaller than the peel strength at which the pad 1510v peels off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510 when the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the land formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are soldered to the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

In other words, when an external force is applied to the ROM socket 1510s, the peel strength at which the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t peels off from the base material of the conversion board 1510t is smaller than the peel strength at which the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 peels off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t soldered to the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s Because the pads 1510ta can be peeled off from the base material of the conversion board 1510t, the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 soldered to the lands formed on the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t can be prevented from peeling off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby preventing damage to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when force is applied to the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s in the peeling direction, the soldered portion between the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pad 1510ta formed on the conversion board 1510t is easily deformed because it is a thin metal wire, which increases the load on each lead terminal 1510sc and applies a force that peels off the pad 1510ta formed on the conversion board 1510t and the wiring pattern formed on the conversion board 1510t. As a result, the soldered portion on the ROM socket 1510s side, which has a thin metal wire, is likely to experience pattern peeling, but the soldered portion on the peripheral control board 1510 side (the soldered portion between the lands (or the lower pads mentioned above instead of the lands) formed on the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the pads 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510) is likely to experience low pattern peeling.

In this way, by adopting a new configuration in which the ROM socket 1510s is not mounted directly on the peripheral control board 1510 but is instead mounted on the conversion board 1510t, damage to the peripheral control board 1510 caused by external forces applied to the ROM socket 1510s can be reduced. Therefore, a new configuration is provided for the method of mounting the control ROM 1510b, an electronic component, on the peripheral control board 1510, making it more convenient.

Furthermore, as described above, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x and back surface (solder surface, non-mounting surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 and the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are both coated with a green resist layer, giving them a unified color. In this way, by making the resist of the peripheral control board 1510 and the conversion board 1510t the same color (green), the presence of the conversion board 1510t can be made less obvious to the peripheral control board 1510, making it less likely that they will be perceived as a target of fraud.

In addition, on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the mounting orientation of the control ROM 1510b (symbol (triangle symbol (△)) indicating the mounting orientation and the position of the first terminal) 1510v3 is silk-screened on a solid green resist using white paint that stands out against the green of the resist. As a result, if the resists of the peripheral control board 1510 and the conversion board 1510t are the same color (green), it is difficult to determine the orientation of the conversion board 1510t during installation. Therefore, by marking the location of pin 1 (position of the first terminal) in white resist, which is easily recognizable against the green resist, the orientation of the conversion board 1510t can be made easier to determine. In other words, the peripheral control board 1510 has a 1-pin location (location of the first terminal) and the conversion board 1510t also has a 1-pin location (location of the first terminal), so even if the resists of the peripheral control board 1510 and the conversion board 1510t are the same color (green), the orientation of the conversion board 1510t can be easily identified.

In addition, the through-holes of the conversion board 1510t, excluding the end face through-hole 1510tb, are filled with insulating resin, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin sealing the through-holes are processed so that they are flush with the front (mounting surface) 1510tx and back (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, respectively. Together with the through-hole lands, one end and the other end of the insulating resin sealing the through-holes are completely covered with a green coating (resin-filled). This eliminates the exposed metal portions of the through-holes, preventing contact with, for example, the exposed metal portions of through-holes formed on the peripheral control board 1510, thereby preventing electrical problems.

This will be briefly explained with reference to Figure 175. For example, as shown in Figure 175, the through holes formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the through holes formed in the conversion board 1510t may or may not happen to overlap. If they do happen to overlap, the through holes formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the through holes formed in the conversion board 1510t will be electrically connected, resulting in conduction; to prevent this, the holes in the through holes formed in the conversion board 1510t are filled with the resin described above.

Furthermore, for example, if a board on which ROM socket 1510s is mounted is provided with a connector for connecting to peripheral control board 1510, and electrical connection is made through connection with the connector on the peripheral control board 1510, the mounted control ROM would be close to the cover plate 1501a (board case) of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505, increasing the influence of external noise. In contrast, the conversion board 1510t of this embodiment is connected by the above-mentioned soldering with the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t in surface contact. Therefore, the mounted control ROM 1510b can be located away from the cover plate 1501a (board case) of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505, making it less susceptible to external noise.

Furthermore, the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are 70 in number to correspond to the lead terminals of the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package, whereas the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package has 56 connection terminals on the bottom surface of the leadless package (the number of connection terminals may be less than 56). As a result, some of the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 have an excessive number of NC terminals that are pre-assigned to the lead terminals of the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package, resulting in an excessive number of unconnected (non-connected) terminals. The presence of these excess pads 1510v has the effect of reinforcing the soldering portion on the peripheral control board 1510 (the soldering portion between the land formed on the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510), and contributes to the strength of the joint surface of the soldering portion on the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, the number of NC terminals has been intentionally increased to strengthen the joint surface of the soldering portion on the peripheral control board 1510 side (the soldering portion between the lands formed on the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the pads 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510).

In addition, the inner walls 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb formed on both side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t are connected by lands (or the above-mentioned lower pads instead of lands) (copper foil) formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, thereby increasing the bonding strength compared to soldering using a simple pad. The soldering portion on the conversion board 1510t side (the soldering portion between the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pad 1510ta formed on the conversion board 1510t) is a pad only on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t, and the soldering portion on the peripheral control board 1510 side (the inner wall 1510tba of the end surface through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the lands (or the above-mentioned lower pad instead of the lands) formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t) is The soldered portions between the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the pads 1510v formed on the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are connected by lands (or the above-mentioned lower pads instead of lands) (copper foil) formed on the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, so the soldered portions on the peripheral control board 1510 side can be configured to have stronger bonding strength than the soldered portions on the conversion board 1510t side.

Furthermore, the shape of the pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is the same as the shape of the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (e.g., a rectangular shape of 2.5 mm x 0.5 mm), and the sizes are the same. The distance between the pads (so-called pitch) is also the same (e.g., 0.8 mm). The distance between two rows of pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is smaller than the distance between two rows of pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and is longer than the distance between the pads (pitch). The end face through holes 1510tb formed on both side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t are the same (e.g., 0.8 mm) as the distance (so-called pitch) between the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The distance dimension of the end face through holes 1510tb formed on both side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t (i.e., the distance dimension between both side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t) is larger than the inner distance dimension between the two rows of pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, but smaller than the outer distance dimension between the two rows of pads 1510v, and further is longer than the distance dimension between the two rows of pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t. This increases the pitch of the joints between the lands (or the lower pads described above instead of the lands) formed on the inner walls 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, and the pads 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby improving the anti-warping effect of the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, one way to further improve the anti-warping effect of the peripheral control board 1510 is to increase the thickness of the conversion board 1510t, for example.

Furthermore, the soldering portion on the conversion board 1510t side (the soldering portion between the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pad 1510ta formed on the conversion board 1510t) and the soldering portion on the peripheral control board 1510 side (the soldering portion between the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the land (or the above-mentioned lower pad instead of the land) formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510) are configured so that they can be surface-mounted with the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 in surface contact, as described above. This allows the conversion board 1510t and peripheral control board 1510 to be electrically connected without any gaps, allowing for a greater distance to be maintained between them and the cover plate 1501a (board case) of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505, making it a connection method that is resistant to noise.

In addition, the lands (or the lower pads described above instead of the lands) formed on the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are soldered to the pads 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby providing an electrical connection via this solder. This allows the conversion board 1510t and the peripheral control board 1510 to be electrically connected without any gaps, and allows the distance between them to be increased to the cover plate 1501a (board case) of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505, resulting in a connection method that is resistant to noise.

In addition, the through-holes of the conversion board 1510t, except for the end face through-hole 1510tb, are filled with insulating resin, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin sealing the through-holes are processed so that they are flush with the front (mounting surface) 1510tx and back (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, respectively. Together with the through-hole lands, one end and the other end of the insulating resin sealing the through-holes are completely covered (resin-filled) with a green coating, allowing the back (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 to be surface-mounted in face-to-face contact, thereby preventing short circuits between the conversion board 1510t and the peripheral control board 1510, which are connected without any gaps.

In addition, although the control ROM 1510b is attached to and detached from the ROM socket 1510s, there is a risk that human hands may accidentally damage the control ROM 1510b or the wiring pattern during this process. For this reason, if the ROM socket 1510s is mounted on the conversion board 1510t and the control ROM 1510b or the wiring pattern formed on the conversion board 1510t is damaged, the conversion board 1510t can be removed from the peripheral control board 1510 and replaced with a new one, allowing the peripheral control board 1510 to be used as is (the same one).

Furthermore, only the ROM socket 1510s is mounted on the conversion board 1510t. This means that if the ROM socket 1510s or the conversion board 1510t is damaged and needs to be replaced, only the smallest units, the ROM socket 1510s and the conversion board 1510t, are required.

Furthermore, the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which are soldered to the lands (or the lower pads described above instead of the lands) formed on the inner walls 1510tba of the end-face through-holes 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, are located near the peripheral control IC 1510a described above. The peripheral control IC 1510a is an IC with a large package and is a surface-mount type electronic component. Such surface-mount type electronic components are particularly vulnerable to board flexing (the connection terminals and lead terminals of the electronic component may peel off from the surface of the board). Therefore, by mounting the conversion board 1510t near the peripheral control IC 1510a, the peripheral control board 1510 can be reinforced against flexing.

In addition, even if there is a need to change from a control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package to a control ROM 1510b having a leadless package, this can be accommodated by mounting a conversion board 1510t having a ROM socket 1510s to which the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package can be attached on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.Therefore, even if the package of the control ROM 1510b is changed, there is no need to modify the shape and arrangement of the pads 1510v on the peripheral control board 1510 or the routing of the wiring pattern to the pads 1510v (the shape and arrangement of the pads 1510v and the routing of the wiring to the pads 1510v will be the same), and the two can be used in common.

Furthermore, when the control ROM 1510b is removed from the ROM socket 1510s using a special tool during sampling inspection (sample) to check for defects in the manufacturing process when the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, even if the control ROM 1510b gets caught in the ROM socket 1510s and an external force is applied to the ROM socket 1510s, the peel strength at which the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t peels off from the base material of the conversion board 1510t is as low as the peel strength at which the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 peels off from the base material of the conversion board 1510t, as described above. Because the peel strength is smaller than that of the control board 1510, the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t soldered to the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s will peel off from the base material of the conversion board 1510t, preventing the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 soldered to the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t from peeling off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby preventing damage to the peripheral control board 1510. This means that the conversion board 1510t on which the damaged ROM socket 1510s is mounted can be removed from the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and a conversion board 1510t on which a new ROM socket 1510s is mounted can be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, allowing the peripheral control board 1510 itself to be used without having to be replaced with a new peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, because the conversion board 1510t is surface-mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and is fixed in place without any gaps, it is difficult to improperly place electronic components in the gap between the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

Furthermore, when changing from a control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package to a control ROM 1510b having a leadless package, as described above, it is necessary to use a conversion board 1510t. However, as described above, the thickness of the conversion board 1510t is thinner (0.8 mm or 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the peripheral control board 1510 (1.6 mm). Therefore, when the peripheral control board 1510 is housed and sealed in the peripheral control board box 1505 (sealing board box), the specified height distance dimension from the top surface of the control ROM 1510b mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505 is at most about the thickness of the conversion board 1510t, and high noise resistance can be maintained against noise entering through the cover body 1501.

Furthermore, as described above, when the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, the control ROM 1510b is removed from the ROM socket 1510s using a special tool when performing sampling inspections (samples) to check for defects during the manufacturing process. In other words, when the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, the conversion board 1510t on which the control ROM 1510b is mounted is removed from the ROM socket 1510s using a special tool when performing sampling inspections (samples) to check for defects during the manufacturing process. When changing from a control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package to a control ROM 1510b having a leadless package, as described above, it is necessary to use a conversion board 1510t. However, because the lead terminals do not protrude outward from the conversion board 1510t, even if a person using a special tool to remove the conversion board 1510t on which the control ROM 1510b is mounted from the ROM socket 1510s accidentally drops the conversion board 1510t on which the control ROM 1510b is mounted, the lead terminals will not bend as with the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package, and the conversion board 1510t will not become unusable.

Furthermore, as described above, semicircular end face through holes 1510tb are formed on both longitudinal side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t, and the diameter of the end face through holes 1510tb is formed so that it is approximately the same as the width (0.5 mm) of the shape (e.g., a rectangular shape of 2.5 mm x 0.5 mm) of the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t. Alternatively, the diameter of the end face through holes 1510tb may be larger (e.g., 0.6 mm to 0.7 mm) than the width (0.5 mm) of the shape (e.g., a rectangular shape of 2.5 mm x 0.5 mm) of the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t. In this case, the end face through holes 1510tb have an arc shape that is shorter than a semicircle.

In addition, pad 1510v is formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be positioned at positions corresponding to multiple lead terminals that protrude outward from both longitudinal sides of a lead-type ROM socket to which a control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package is attached and detached.A mechanism is adopted in which package changes can be accommodated by changing the object soldered to this pad 1510v, but other mechanisms may also be adopted. For example, as shown in FIG. 176(a), lead terminals 1510sc (70 in total) of a lead-type ROM socket 1510s' to which a control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package is attached and detached are soldered to pads 1510v (i.e., the conventional ROM socket 1510s' is reused as is), and a conversion board 1510t' to which a control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is soldered is placed on the mounting portion 1510sa' of the ROM socket 1510s', and the pair of rotating holding pieces 1510sb', 1510sb' is closed. Note that the mounting portion 1510sa', the pair of rotary holding pieces 1510sb', 1510sb', and the multiple lead terminals 1510sc' have the same functions as the mounting portion 1510sa, the pair of rotary holding pieces 1510sb, 1510sb, and the multiple lead terminals 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s shown in Figure 173 (a), so their description will be omitted here.

In addition, a green resist layer is formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx' and back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty' of the conversion board 1510t' by applying a green resist liquid to the layer (copper plane) on which the pads, wiring pattern, and lands to which the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is soldered, forming a green coating. The conversion board 1510t' is formed with multiple through holes (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "through holes") having lands that electrically connect to the wiring patterns formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty, and the inner walls of the through holes are copper-plated to make them conductive. The through-holes are filled with insulating resin, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin that seals the through-holes are processed so that they are flush with the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx' and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty', respectively. Together with the lands, one end and the other end of the insulating resin that seals the through-holes are completely covered with a green coating (resin-filled).

In addition, downward protrusions are formed on both longitudinal ends of the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty' of the conversion board 1510t', and pads are formed on these protrusions. These pads are arranged in positions corresponding to the lead terminals 1510sc' of the ROM socket 1510s', with a total of 70 pads formed, 35 on one end and 35 on the other end.

When the conversion board 1510t' to which the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is soldered is placed on the mounting portion 1510sa' of the ROM socket 1510s' and the pair of rotational holding pieces 1510sb', 1510sb' is closed, as shown in Figure 176 (b), the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx' of the conversion board 1510t' is positioned so that the point (center) where a line connecting the centers of the top and bottom sides of the surface 1510tx' and a line connecting the centers of the left and right sides of the surface 1510tx' intersects with the point (center) where a line connecting the centers of the top and bottom sides of the ROM socket 1510s intersects with the line connecting the centers of the left and right sides of the surface 1510tx'.

When changing from a control ROM 1510b with a leaded package to a control ROM 1510b with a leadless package, it is necessary to modify the board management number of the peripheral control board 1510. Here, modifying the board management number of the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly explained with reference to Figure 177. Figures 177(a) to (c) are schematic diagrams showing the board management number of the peripheral control board. Note that if the components mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 are changed, it will be necessary to modify the board management number of the peripheral control board 1510.

As shown in FIG. 177(a), a foil cutout area KBRGN (i.e., an area formed by cutting out the copper foil from the copper foil surface on which the wiring pattern is formed, excluding the terminals and wiring patterns) is formed in a predetermined position on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, one of the four corners of the peripheral control board 1510). Within this foil cutout area KBRGN, foil cutout letters KBNUM are formed left-justified in the wiring pattern, with the common part of the control number ("XYZA" in the figure) used as the board control number. The foil cutout area KBRGN and foil cutout letters KBNUM are each covered with a green resist liquid that is applied solid to the surface (mounting surface) 1510 of the peripheral control board 1510.

When changing from a control ROM 1510b with a leaded package to a control ROM 1510b with a leadless package, for example, as shown in FIG. 177(b), a laser marker is used to print the symbol HKBNUM (the letter A in the figure) following the foil-punched letters KBNUM arranged left-justified within the foil-punched area KBRGN (the symbol is dug to a predetermined depth from the surface along the symbol HKBNUM). Each time a conversion board 1510t is replaced (including repaired), the laser marker can be used to print the symbol HKBNUM following the foil-punched letters KBNUM, creating a board control number ("XYZAA" in the figure). The board control number can also be changed by erasing part of the foil-punched letters with a laser marker, or by both erasing part of the foil-punched letters and adding letters.

Furthermore, for example, as shown in Figure 177 (c), the common part of the management number ("XYZ-" in the figure) is used as the board management number to form the foil cut letters KBNUM in the wiring pattern, and foil cut areas RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 are formed in a nearby area separate from the foil cut area KBRGN (directly below the foil cut area KBRGN in the figure), and foil cut letters are formed in the wiring pattern as symbols (the letters A, B, and C in the figure) within the foil cut areas RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3, and the foil cut area KBRGN and areas RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 are each covered with a green resist liquid that is applied solid to the surface (mounting surface) 1510 of the peripheral control board 1510. Perforated holes have been drilled by a router around the periphery of regions RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3, allowing regions RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 to be removed from peripheral control board 1510. When regions RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 are not removed from peripheral control board 1510, the board management number of peripheral control board 1510 is "XYZA-ABC." When changing from control ROM 1510b with a leaded package to control ROM 1510b with a leadless package, the board management number can be determined by removing one, two, or all of regions RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 from peripheral control board 1510.

The peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a power supply circuit (not shown) that generates various power supply voltages. This power supply circuit is a rectangular board on which various electronic components are mounted, and the back side of this board is soldered directly to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 in face-to-face contact. The surface (mounting surface) of this board is covered by a metal cover that is crimped to hold the edge of the board in place. Once mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, the power supply circuit board is not a removable electronic component; therefore, if the power supply circuit is damaged, the power supply circuit board is not replaced and a new board is not soldered directly to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 in face-to-face contact, but rather the peripheral control board 1510 itself is replaced.

Gaming machines equipped with a performance control board on which electronic components such as ROM are mounted have been known for some time (for example, JP 2017-217381 A (paragraph [0061], Figure 5)). However, there is room for improvement in the method for mounting electronic components on the control board in conventional gaming machines.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above is equipped with the peripheral control unit 1500 of FIG. 170, which is an effect control means responsible for controlling effects related to the game. The peripheral control unit 1500 is equipped with the peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 173, which is a control board; the ROM socket 1510s of FIG. 173, which is a ROM socket into which the control ROM 1510b of FIG. 173, which is a ROM storing effect data, is attached; and the conversion board 1510t of FIG. 173, which is a specific board on which the ROM socket 1510s is mounted. The front surface (mounting surface) 1510x, which is the surface portion of the peripheral control board 1510, is formed with a position 1510v2 for placing the control ROM 1510b of FIG. 173, which is a specific board mounting area on which the conversion board 1510t is mounted so as to overlap. Only the ROM socket 1510s is soldered and mounted on the conversion board 1510t.

In this way, by adopting a new configuration in which the ROM socket 1510s is not mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 but is mounted on the conversion board 1510t, damage to the peripheral control board 1510 caused by external forces applied to the ROM socket 1510s can be reduced. Therefore, a new configuration is provided for the method of mounting the control ROM 1510b, an electronic component, on the peripheral control board 1510, making it more convenient.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above, it is equipped with the peripheral control unit 1500 of Figure 170, which is an effect control means that controls the effects related to the game. The peripheral control unit 1500 is equipped with the peripheral control board 1510 of Figure 173, which is a control board; the ROM socket 1510s of Figure 173, which is a ROM socket into which the control ROM 1510b of Figure 173, which is a ROM that stores effect data, is attached; and the conversion board 1510t of Figure 173, which is a specific board on which the ROM socket 1510s is mounted. The surface (mounting surface) 1510x, which is the surface portion of the peripheral control board 1510, is formed with a position 1510v2 for placing the control ROM 1510b of Figure 173, which is a specific board mounting area on which the conversion board 1510t is mounted so as to overlap. The conversion board 1510t has pads 1510ta formed on a surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t shown in FIG. 173, which is a first plate surface portion that can be soldered, and inner walls 1510tba of side through holes 1510tb formed on both side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t shown in FIG. 173, which is a second plate surface portion. The ROM socket 1510s and the conversion board 1510t have lead terminals 1510sc that are lead terminal portions of the ROM socket 1510t and inner walls 1510tba of the first plate surface portion of the conversion board 1510t. The pad 1510ta, which is the plate surface portion, is connected by soldering (electrically connected by soldering), and the peripheral control board 1510 conversion board 1510t is connected by soldering (electrically connected by soldering) to the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 in FIG. 173, which is the plate surface portion of the peripheral control board 1510, and the inner wall 1510tba of the side through hole 1510tb, which is the second plate surface portion of the conversion board 1510t.

In this way, by adopting a new configuration in which the ROM socket 1510s is not mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 but is mounted on the conversion board 1510t, damage to the peripheral control board 1510 caused by external forces applied to the ROM socket 1510s can be reduced. Therefore, a new configuration is provided for the method of mounting the control ROM 1510b, an electronic component, on the peripheral control board 1510, making it more convenient.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above, it is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1500 (Fig. 170) which is an effect control means for controlling effects related to the game. The peripheral control unit 1500 is equipped with a peripheral control board 1510 (Fig. 173) which is a control board, a ROM socket 1510s (Fig. 173) which is a ROM socket into which a control ROM 1510b (Fig. 173) which is a ROM storing effect data is attached, and a conversion board 1510t (Fig. 173) which is a specific board on which the ROM socket 1510s is mounted. The conversion board 1510t is provided with pads 1510ta formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t in FIG. 174, which serve as first terminals for electrically connecting the ROM socket 1510s to the mounting surface on which the ROM socket 1510s is mounted, and inner walls 1510tba of side through holes 1510tb formed on both sides of the conversion board 1510t, which serve as second terminals for electrically connecting the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the mounting surface on which the ROM socket 1510s is mounted. The first and second terminals are different in configuration, and the second terminals are electrically connected via solder to the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x, which is the plate surface of the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, by adopting a new configuration in which the ROM socket 1510s is not mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 but is mounted on the conversion board 1510t, damage to the peripheral control board 1510 caused by external forces applied to the ROM socket 1510s can be reduced. Therefore, a new configuration is provided for the method of mounting the control ROM 1510b, an electronic component, on the peripheral control board 1510, making it more convenient.

8. Power Supply System
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 178. Fig. 178 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. First, the power supply board will be described, followed by the backup power supply and the power supplied to each control board, etc. Note that the board grounds (GND) of the various boards and the board grounds (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board]
The power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the board unit 620 shown in Figures 94 and 95 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into a power outlet in the island equipment of the amusement hall. The island equipment of an amusement hall typically employs a system in which AC power (24V AC) is supplied to each group of, for example, four pachinko machines 1 via one transformer. For example, in the island equipment of an amusement hall where 20 pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row, the four pachinko machines 1 are managed as five groups, and one transformer is provided for each group (a total of five transformers) to supply AC power (24V AC). Therefore, a transformer with a maximum allowable capacity of 1000VA is provided.

When the power switch 630a is turned ON, AC power (24V AC) supplied from the island equipment of the amusement hall is supplied to the power supply board 630, allowing the pachinko machine 1 to be powered on. When the power switch 630a is turned OFF, AC power (24V AC) supplied from the island equipment of the amusement hall is no longer supplied to the power supply board 630, allowing the pachinko machine 1 to be powered off. The power switch 630a is normally kept in the ON position, and when an amusement hall staff member or other attendant opens the amusement hall, they turn ON (turn on) the breakers installed in the amusement hall, thereby simultaneously powering on the multiple pachinko machines 1 installed in the island equipment of the amusement hall. Then, after the amusement hall staff member or other attendant closes the amusement hall, they turn OFF (turn off) the breakers installed in the amusement hall, thereby simultaneously powering off the multiple pachinko machines 1 installed in the island equipment of the amusement hall. For this reason, examples of cases in which the power may be turned on or off individually for pachinko machines 1 among multiple pachinko machines 1 arranged in a row on an island facility in an amusement hall include when an amusement hall staff member or other attendant turns the power switch 630a OFF when performing maintenance and turns the power switch 630a ON again when the maintenance is complete, or when an amusement hall staff member or other attendant turns the power switch 630a OFF to resolve a pachinko machine 1 that has developed some kind of problem and turns the power switch 630a ON again once the problem has been resolved.

As shown in Figure 178, in addition to the power switch 630a, the power supply board 630 is equipped with fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, a noise suppression circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power supply breakdown circuit 630g, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power supply creation circuit 630f, and a backup power supply circuit 630h. Regardless of whether the power switch 630a is turned on or off, the AC power (24V AC (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V")) supplied from the island equipment of the amusement hall is supplied to the interface board 635 via the power supply board 630, and from this interface board 635 to the ball dispensing machine (e.g., CR unit) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1.

When power switch 630a is turned ON, 24V AC supplied from the game hall's island equipment is supplied to noise suppression circuit 630b via fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 and power switch 630a, where noise is removed. The noise-removed 24V AC is then supplied to rectifier circuit 630c, where it is rectified (converted from AC to DC (AC-DC conversion)) to produce DC power. This rectified DC power is then supplied to power factor correction circuit 630d via power supply breakdown circuit 630g, where power factor correction circuit 630d creates DC +35V (hereinafter referred to as "+35V") with a corrected power factor. This created +35V is then supplied to smoothing circuit 630e, where the +35V ripple is removed and smoothed. This smoothed +35V is supplied to the power supply circuit 630f.

When the voltage supplied to the power supply disruption circuit 630g exceeds a predetermined voltage, it passes a large current exceeding the allowable current limit (each with a predetermined cut-off current) through fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, causing them to blow and electrically cut off the 24V AC supplied from the island equipment in the amusement hall. When a large current (abnormal current) exceeding the allowable current limit (cut-off current) flows through fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the element portions of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 blow, cutting off the 24V AC supplied to subsequent equipment via fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2.

The power supply generating circuit 630f, which receives the smoothed +35V, includes a +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa, a +12V power supply generating circuit 630fb, and a +24V power supply generating circuit 630fc. The +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa generates DC +5V (hereinafter referred to as "+5V") from the +35V supplied by the smoothing circuit 630e. The +12V power supply generating circuit 630fb generates DC +12V (hereinafter referred to as "+12V") from the +35V supplied by the smoothing circuit 630e. The +24V power supply generating circuit 630fc generates DC +24V (hereinafter referred to as "+24V") from the +35V supplied by the smoothing circuit 630e. +5V, +12V, and +24V are supplied to the dispensing control board 633 and the interface board 635, respectively. The power supply line (power supply system) created by the power supply board 630 to which +5V is applied and supplied is the +5V power supply line, the power supply line (power supply system) created by the power supply board 630 to which +12V is applied and supplied is the +12V power supply line, and the power supply line (power supply system) created by the power supply board 630 to which +24V is applied and supplied is the +24V power supply line.

[8-2. Backup power supply]
The backup power supply circuit 630h includes capacitors BC0 and BC1. Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") built into the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and capacitor BC1 supplies backup power to the RAM (hereinafter referred to as "dispense control built-in RAM") built into the dispensing control MPU 633aa of the dispensing control unit 633a on the dispensing control board 633.

The +5V generated by the +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa of the power supply generating circuit 630f is supplied to the dispensing control board 633. The +5V supplied to the dispensing control board 633 becomes the +5V power supply line on the dispensing control board 633 via the dispensing control filter circuit 633h, is applied to the power terminal of the dispensing control MPU 633aa, and is also applied to the power terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM via diode PD0. The +12V generated by the +12V power supply generating circuit 630fb of the power supply generating circuit 630f is supplied to the +5V generating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633. This +5V generating circuit 1310g generates +5V from the +12V from the dispensing control board 633 as a local power supply that serves as the control power supply for the main control MPU 1310a. The +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "main control board generated +5V") becomes the main control board generated +5V power line on the main control board 1310 via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is supplied to the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and also to the power terminal of the main control built-in RAM via diode MD0. Note that the +5V generated by the +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa of the power supply generating circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 and the +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310 (main control board generated +5V) are not electrically connected and are independent of each other.

The negative terminal of capacitor BC1 on power supply board 630 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of power supply board 630, while the positive terminal of capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM on dispensing control board 633 and to the cathode terminal of diode PD0 on dispensing control board 633. In other words, the +5V generated by the +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa of the power supply generating circuit 630f on power supply board 630 flows as a current toward the power terminal of the dispensing control MPU 633aa, and also flows in the forward direction via diode PD0 toward the power terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of capacitor BC1.

In this way, capacitor BC1 is electrically connected so that the +5V generated by the +5V power supply circuit 630fa of the power supply circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 is supplied to the dispensing control board 633, and then returned from the dispensing control board 633 to the power supply board 630, allowing it to be charged. As a result, when the +5V generated by the +5V power supply circuit 630fa of the power supply circuit 630f is no longer supplied to the dispensing control board 633, the charge stored in capacitor BC1 is supplied to the dispensing control board 633 as dispensing VBB. Therefore, although current is prevented from flowing to the power terminal of the dispensing control MPU 633aa by diode PD0, preventing the dispensing control MPU 633aa from operating, dispensing VBB is supplied to the power terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM, thereby maintaining the contents stored in the dispensing control built-in RAM.

The negative terminal of capacitor BC0 on the power supply board 630 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, while the positive terminal of capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM on the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of diode MD0 on the main control board 1310. In other words, the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g (+5V generated on the main control board side) flows as a current toward the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and also flows in the forward direction via diode MD0 toward the power terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of capacitor BC0.

In this way, capacitor BC0 can be charged by receiving +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g (+5V generated on the main control board side) via an electrical connection method in which the +5V generated by the main control board side is supplied to the main control board 1310, and then from the dispensing control board 633 to the power supply board 630. As a result, if the +12V generated by the +12V power supply generating circuit 630fb of the power supply generating circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 is no longer supplied to the +5V generating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633 and the +5V generating circuit 1310g is no longer able to generate +5V (+5V generated by the main control board), the charge stored in capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633 as the main VBB. Therefore, since the diode MD0 prevents current from flowing to the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power terminal of the main control internal RAM, thereby maintaining the contents of the main control internal RAM.

[8-3. Power supply to each control board, etc.]
Next, we will provide an overview of the power supply supplied to each control board, etc., and then explain the power supply supplied mainly to the dispensing control board and the power supply supplied to the main control board.

The three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, created respectively by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa, +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb, and +24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630, are supplied to the dispensing control board 633 as shown in FIG. 178, and of these three types of power supplies, two types of power supplies, +12V and +24V, are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633. In addition, the three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, generated respectively by the +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa, +12V power supply generating circuit 630fb, and +24V power supply generating circuit 630fc of the power supply generating circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 are supplied to the interface board 635, and via this interface board 635, are supplied to the peripheral control board 1510, door frame main relay board 104, door frame clothing relay board 105, etc.

In addition, the three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, supplied to the interface board 635, door frame main relay board 104, door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., may be provided with +5V fuses (not shown), +12V fuses (not shown), and +24V fuses (not shown) on the interface board 635, door frame main relay board 104, door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., respectively, which can be blown by an overcurrent flowing through each of these power supply lines.

In particular, as described below, the +12V power line and +24V power line are monitored for a drop in potential by the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e on the main control board 1310. When the potential of the +12V power line or the potential of the +12V power line drops and a power outage warning signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 or the payout control MPU 633aa on the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power outage processing in the main control side power on processing described below to stop the progress of the game, and the payout control MPU 633aa performs the payout control unit power outage processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below to stop the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls).

Therefore, if a +12V fuse (not shown) and a +24V fuse (not shown) are provided on the interface board 635, door frame main relay board 104, door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., respectively, when the main control board 1310 and dispensing control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in the +12V power line or +24V power line of the interface board 635, door frame main relay board 104, door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., causing a leakage current or a short circuit in the interface board 635, door frame main relay board 104, door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., and causing an overcurrent to flow in the interface board 635, door frame main relay board 104, door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., the +12V fuse and +24V fuse provided on the interface board 635, door frame main relay board 104, door frame clothing relay board 105, etc. will blow. This suppresses a drop in the potential of the +12V power line and the +24V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and prevents the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 from outputting a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 633aa. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to continue playing without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa to continue paying out game balls (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

The three types of power supplies supplied to the peripheral control board 1510, +5V, +12V, and +24V, are supplied to subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 via +5V fuses, +12V fuses, and +24V fuses, respectively, not shown.

The +5V fuse (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself and the current used by subsequent boards via the peripheral control board 1510 in the +5V power line of the peripheral control board 1510, and is capable of passing current up to the +5V power line peripheral control board allowable current limit (shutoff current). If an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the +5V power line peripheral control board allowable current limit flows, the +5V fuse element (not shown) will blow, cutting off the +5V power line to subsequent boards supplied via the +5V fuse (not shown).

The +12V fuse (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself in the +12V power line of the peripheral control board 1510, the current used by subsequent boards such as the various decorative boards for the game board 5 via the peripheral control board 1510, and the current used by subsequent devices via the peripheral control board 1510, and is capable of passing current up to the +12V power line peripheral control board allowable current limit (shutoff current). If an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the +12V power line peripheral control board allowable current limit flows, the +12V fuse element (not shown) will melt and shut off the +12V power line to the subsequent line supplied via the +12V fuse (not shown).

The capacity of the +24V fuse (not shown) is preset to take into account the current used by subsequent boards via the peripheral control board 1510 on the +24V power line of the peripheral control board 1510, and is capable of passing current up to the +24V power line peripheral control board allowable current limit (shutoff current). Note that if the peripheral control board 1510 uses +24V to provide a +24V driver circuit for an electrical drive source (e.g., a drive solenoid), the capacity of the +24V fuse (not shown) is preset to take into account the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself on the +24V power line and the current used by subsequent boards via the peripheral control board 1510. If an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the +24V power line peripheral control board allowable current limit flows, the element of the +24V fuse (not shown) will blow, cutting off the +24V power line to subsequent boards supplied via the +24V fuse (not shown).

The +5V fuse, +12V fuse, and +24V fuse (not shown) are the source fuses that supply the +5V, +12V, and +24V power lines from the peripheral control board 1510 to subsequent boards. Because they may generate a large current and generate heat, they are preferably placed away from the electronic components (e.g., microprocessor, VDP, etc.) of the peripheral control unit 1511 and the performance display control unit 1512 to prevent malfunctions caused by thermal shutdown built into the IC due to the heat generated. They are preferably placed near the connectors that supply +5V, +12V, and +24V from the interface board 635 (particularly near the connectors of the terminals to which the power lines that supply +5V, +12V, and +24V from the interface board 635 are connected).

The peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a control power supply generation circuit (not shown) that generates DC 3.3V (hereinafter referred to as "+3.3V") as a local power supply that serves as the control power supply for the peripheral control unit 1511 and the performance display control unit 1512 from the +12V supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown). The +3.3V generated by the control power supply generation circuit (not shown) is supplied to the electronic components of the peripheral control unit 1511 and the performance display control unit 1512 via a control power supply fuse (not shown). The +3.3V generated by the control power supply generation circuit (not shown) becomes the +3.3V power supply line on the peripheral control board 1510 via a control power supply fuse (not shown). Even if an abnormal current flows through the control power supply creation circuit (not shown) and blows the +5V power line (supplied via a +5V fuse (not shown) and/or the +24V power line (supplied via a +24V fuse (not shown)), excluding the +12V power line supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown), the control power supply creation circuit (not shown) can create a local power supply of +3.3V from the +12V from the +12V power line to serve as the control power for peripheral control unit 1511 and performance display control unit 1512. Therefore, peripheral control unit 1511 and performance display control unit 1512 will not stop but will continue to operate, and although it will be difficult to drive the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) if the +24V fuse (not shown) is blown, the performance can continue to proceed.

In addition to +3.3V, the control power supply generation circuit (not shown) may generate multiple control power supplies (e.g., DC 1.5V (hereinafter referred to as "+1.5V"), DC 1.25V (hereinafter referred to as "+1.25V"), etc.) corresponding to each device, such as the control ROM, of the peripheral control board 1510 as local power supplies. In this case, control power supply fuses (not shown) are provided corresponding to each of the multiple control power supplies (e.g., a +3.3V fuse for +3.3V, a +1.5V fuse for +1.5V, and a +1.5V fuse for +1.25V, with the +3.3V power line via the +3.3V fuse, the +1.5V power line via the +1.5V fuse, and the +1.25V power line via the +1.25V fuse).

The control power supply fuse (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself and the current used by subsequent boards via the peripheral control board 1510 on the +3.3V power line, and is capable of passing current up to the maximum allowable current (shutoff current) for the +3.3V power line peripheral control board. If an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the maximum allowable current for the +3.3V power line peripheral control board flows, the element of the control power supply fuse (not shown) will melt and cut off the +3.3V power line to subsequent boards that is supplied via the control power supply fuse (not shown). In addition, when control power supply fuses (not shown) are provided corresponding to multiple control power supplies (for example, a +3.3V fuse for +3.3V, a +1.5V fuse for +1.5V, and a +1.25V fuse for +1.25V), the capacity is preset taking into account the current used by peripheral control board 1510 itself and the current used by subsequent boards via peripheral control board 1510, allowing current to flow up to the maximum allowable current (shutoff current) for the power lines of each of the multiple control power supplies. If an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the maximum allowable current for each of the multiple control power supplies flows, the element portion of the control power supply fuse (not shown) provided corresponding to each of the multiple control power supplies will blow, shutting off the power line of the subsequent control power supplied via the blown control power supply fuse (not shown).

The control power supply fuse (not shown) is the main fuse for the +3.3V power line that serves as the control power supply for the peripheral control unit 1511, the performance display control unit 1512, etc., and as it flows with a large current and may generate heat, it is preferable to place it away from certain electronic components to prevent this heat from causing a malfunction due to thermal shutdown built into certain electronic components in the peripheral control unit 1511 or the performance display control unit 1512, and it is preferable to place it near the control power supply creation circuit (especially near the terminal that creates +3.3V and supplies it as the +3.3 power line).

In this embodiment, the +5V fuse, +12V fuse, +24V fuse, and control power supply fuse (not shown) on the peripheral control board 1510 are surface-mounted (so-called SMD) chip fuses that melt when a current exceeds a predetermined allowable current limit (each with a predetermined cut-off current). Unlike resettable fuses, once they melt, they are electronic components that cannot supply power to subsequent devices, even if the current drops.

In addition, lead-type fuses may be used instead of SMD-type chip fuses for the +5V fuse, +12V fuse, +24V fuse, and control power supply fuse (not shown) on the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, resettable fuses such as SMD-type or lead-type thermistors may be used for the +5V fuse, +12V fuse, +24V fuse, and control power supply fuse (not shown) on the peripheral control board 1510. In this way, when resettable fuses are used, if a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current limit flows, the power line cannot be supplied to subsequent devices, but once the current decreases, the power line can be supplied to subsequent devices again.

Of the three power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, supplied to subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510, +5V is supplied to an input buffer circuit, etc., not shown, via a +5V fuse, not shown; +24V is supplied to a +24V driver circuit, not shown, that drives and controls the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5, via a +24V fuse, not shown; and +12V is supplied to a +12V driver circuit, not shown, that drives and controls the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5, via a +12V fuse, not shown, and is also supplied to each of the multiple decorative boards provided on the game board 5 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "each decorative board of the game board 5").

The +5V fuse (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 in the +5V power line, and is capable of passing current up to the upper limit of the allowable current (shutoff current) for the subsequent board on the +5V power line. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the subsequent board on the +5V power line flows, the element of the +5V fuse (not shown) melts, cutting off the +5V power line to the subsequent board that is supplied via the +5V fuse (not shown).

The capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) is preset based on the current used by the peripheral control board 1510's subsequent boards (excluding the decorative boards on the game board 5) and the current used by each decorative board on the game board 5 in the +12V power line of the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510, and is capable of passing current up to the allowable current limit (shutoff current) of the subsequent board on the +12V power line. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the allowable current limit of the +12V power line of the subsequent board flows, the element of the +12V fuse (not shown) melts, cutting off the +12V power line to the subsequent boards supplied via the +12V fuse (not shown).

The +24V fuse (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 in the +24V power line, and is capable of passing current up to the upper limit of the allowable current (shutoff current) for the subsequent board on the +24V power line. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the subsequent board on the +24V power line flows through the +24V fuse (not shown), the element of the +24V fuse (not shown) melts, cutting off the +24V power line to the subsequent board that is supplied via the +24V fuse (not shown).

The +5V fuse, +12V fuse, and +24V fuse (not shown) are fuses that supply the +5V, +12V, and +24V power lines, and although they pass a smaller current than the original +5V fuse, +12V fuse, and +24V fuse on the peripheral control board 1510, they may generate a larger current and generate heat. Therefore, to prevent a malfunction due to shutdown caused by the thermal shutdown function built into the +12V driver circuit (not shown) due to the influence of this heat, it is preferable to place them away from electronic components such as the +12V driver circuit (not shown), and it is preferable to place them near the connectors that supply +5V, +12V, and +24V from the peripheral control board 1510 (especially near the connectors of the terminals to which the power lines that supply +5V, +12V, and +24V from the peripheral control board 1510 are connected).

The input buffer circuit (not shown) receives a control signal (which may be a serial signal or a parallel signal) transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510, removes noise from the received control signal, and outputs the result to a +24V driver circuit (not shown) and a +12V driver circuit (not shown). Specifically, the input buffer circuit (not shown) is configured as a circuit in which one end of a resistor to which +5V supplied via a +5V fuse (not shown) is applied and one end of a resistor grounded to ground (GND) are electrically connected to multiple wiring (harnesses) electrically connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510. By removing noise that has entered the multiple wiring (harnesses), noise resistance can be improved.

The +24V driver circuit (not shown) is primarily composed of a driver IC that drives the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5, and a fuse (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "the fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit (not shown)") that cuts off overcurrent to this driver IC. The +24V supplied via the +24V fuse (not shown) is then supplied to the driver IC via the fuse.

The fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 and the +24V driver circuit (not shown) on the +24V power line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, and is capable of passing current up to the maximum allowable current limit (shut-off current) of the drive solenoid on the game board side. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the maximum allowable current limit of the drive solenoid on the game board side flows, the element of the fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit (not shown) melts, cutting off the +24V power line to the subsequent line supplied via the fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit (not shown).

The +12V driver circuit (not shown) is primarily composed of a driver IC that drives the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5, and a fuse that cuts off overcurrent to this driver IC (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown)"). The +12V supplied via the +12V fuse (not shown) is then supplied to the driver IC via the fuse.

The fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the +12V driver circuit (not shown) on the +12V power line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, and is capable of passing current up to the upper limit of the allowable current (shut-off current) of the drive motor on the game board side. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the game board side flows, the element of the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) melts, cutting off the +12V power line to the subsequent line supplied via the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown).

In this embodiment, the +5V fuse, +12V fuse, +24V fuse, fuses provided in the +24V driver circuit, and fuses provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) on the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 are surface-mounted (SMD-type) chip fuses that melt when a current exceeds a predetermined allowable current limit (each with a predetermined cut-off current). Unlike resettable fuses, once melted, these electronic components are unable to supply power to subsequent boards, even if the current drops. Note that the +5V fuse, +12V fuse, +24V fuse, fuses provided in the +24V driver circuit, and fuses provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) on the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 may be lead-type fuses instead of SMD-type chip fuses. Additionally, resettable fuses such as SMD or lead type thermistors may be used for the +5V fuse, +12V fuse, +24V fuse, fuses provided in the +24V driver circuit, and fuses provided in the +12V driver circuit of the subsequent boards (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. In this way, when resettable fuses are used, if a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current limit flows, power cannot be supplied to the subsequent boards, but once the current drops, power can be supplied to the subsequent boards again.

The +12V supplied to each decorative board on the gaming board 5 is supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown) to an LED constant current drive circuit that controls the various light emission modes, such as turning on, off, blinking, and gradation lighting, of multiple LEDs, such as full-color LEDs and monochrome LEDs (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "various LEDs of the gaming board 5"). The LED constant current drive circuit is primarily composed of a sink-type constant current drive circuit that can pass a constant current to the various LEDs of the gaming board 5, and a maximum current setting circuit that can set the maximum current to be passed through the various LEDs of the gaming board 5. If the LED constant current drive circuit does not have an input buffer circuit, an input buffer circuit may be provided before the LED constant current drive circuit.

The +12V fuse (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by each decorative board on the game board 5 in the +12V power line, and is capable of passing current up to the maximum allowable current (shut-off current) for the decorative board on the game board. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the maximum allowable current for the decorative board on the game board flows through the +12V fuse (not shown), the element of the +12V fuse (not shown) melts, cutting off the subsequent +12V power line supplied via the +12V fuse (not shown).

The +12V fuse (not shown) is a fuse that supplies the +12V power line, and although it passes a smaller current than the original +12V fuse on the peripheral control board 1510, it does pass a larger current and may generate heat. Therefore, to prevent this heat from damaging the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board, it is preferable to place it away from the various LEDs and LED constant current drive circuit, and it is preferable to place it near the connector that supplies +12V (especially near the connector for the terminal to which the power line that supplies +12V is connected).

In this embodiment, the +12V fuse (not shown) on each decorative board of the gaming board 5 is a surface-mounted (SMD-type) chip fuse that melts when a current exceeds a predetermined allowable current limit (each with a predetermined cutoff current). Unlike resettable fuses, once melted, it is an electronic component that cannot supply power to subsequent devices even if the current drops. Note that the +12V fuse (not shown) on each decorative board of the gaming board 5 may be a lead-type fuse instead of an SMD-type chip fuse. Furthermore, a resettable fuse such as an SMD-type or lead-type thermistor may be used as the +12V fuse (not shown) on each decorative board of the gaming board 5. In this way, when a resettable fuse is used, power cannot be supplied to subsequent devices when a current exceeding the predetermined allowable current limit flows, but power can be supplied to subsequent devices again when the current drops.

The three types of power supplies supplied to the door frame relay board 105, +5V, +12V, and +24V, are supplied to the door frame drive board (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "each drive board of the door frame 3") and the multiple decorative boards (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "each decorative board of the door frame 3") provided on the door frame 3, each of which requires its own power supply. A fuse (not shown) corresponding to the power supply is provided on each board.

Each drive board of the door frame 3 is equipped with fuses (not shown) corresponding to the power supply (e.g., +5V fuse, +24V fuse, +12V fuse), as well as fuses (e.g., fuses in the +24V driver circuit that drives and controls the +24V electrical drive source (e.g., drive solenoid) and fuses in the +12V driver circuit that drives and controls the +12V electrical drive source (e.g., drive motor). The fuses (not shown) corresponding to the power supply have a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by each drive board of the door frame 3 in the power supply and corresponding power line of each drive board of the door frame 3, and can pass current up to the maximum allowable current limit of each power line drive board on the door frame side (e.g., maximum allowable current limit (breaking current) of the +5V power line drive board on the door frame side, maximum allowable current limit (breaking current) of the +24V power line drive board on the door frame side, maximum allowable current limit (breaking current) of the +12V power line drive board on the door frame side). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) flows that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of each power line driver board on the door frame side (for example, the upper limit of the allowable current of the +5V power line driver board on the door frame side, the upper limit of the allowable current of the +24V power line driver board on the door frame side, and the upper limit of the allowable current of the +12V power line driver board on the door frame side), the element of the fuse (not shown) corresponding to the power supply melts down, cutting off the power line to the subsequent power supply supplied via the fuse (not shown) corresponding to the blown power supply.

The fuses in the +24V driver circuit have a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 and the +24V driver circuit in the +24V power line of each drive board in the door frame 3, and are capable of passing current up to the door frame drive solenoid's allowable current limit (shutoff current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the door frame drive solenoid's allowable current limit flows, the fuse element in the +24V driver circuit melts, cutting off the subsequent +24V power line supplied via the fuse in the +24V driver circuit. The fuses in the +12V driver circuit have a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 and the +12V driver circuit in the +12V power line of each drive board of the door frame 3, and can pass current up to the door frame drive motor's allowable current limit (shutoff current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the door frame drive motor's allowable current limit flows, the fuse element in the +12V driver circuit blows, cutting off the +12V power line to the subsequent line supplied via the fuse in the +12V driver circuit.

The fuses (not shown) of each decorative board on the door frame 3 have a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by each decorative board on the +12V power line of the door frame 3, and are capable of passing current up to the maximum allowable current limit (shut-off current) of the decorative board on the door frame side. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the maximum allowable current limit of the decorative board on the door frame side flows through the fuses (not shown) of each decorative board on the door frame 3, the element of the fuse (not shown) of each decorative board on the door frame 3 melts, cutting off the +12V power line to the subsequent line that is supplied via the fuses (not shown) of each decorative board on the door frame 3.

For example, if one, multiple, or all of the drive boards in the door frame 3 require +12V, the power is supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown) to a +12V driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of the drive motor, which serves as the electrical drive source for the door frame 3. The +12V driver circuit is primarily composed of a driver IC (not shown) that drives the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3, and a fuse (not shown) that cuts off overcurrent to this driver IC. The +12V supplied via the +12V fuse is then supplied to the driver IC via the fuse. The capacity of the +12V driver circuit fuse is preset to take into account the current used by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) and +12V driver circuit of the door frame 3 on the +12V power line of the drive board, and is capable of passing current up to the upper limit of the allowable current (cut-off current) of the door frame drive motor. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame drive motor flows, the element of the fuse in the +12V driver circuit melts, cutting off the +12V power line to the subsequent lines that is supplied via the fuse in the +12V driver circuit.

Of the drive boards of the door frame 3, the drive board on which the +12V driver circuit is provided (implemented or mounted) is provided with a +5V fuse (not shown) and an input buffer circuit (not shown). A control signal (which may be a serial signal or a parallel signal) transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 is input, noise is removed from the input control signal, and the signal is output to the +12V driver circuit. Specifically, the input buffer circuit is configured as a circuit that electrically connects one end of a resistor to which +5V supplied via the +5V fuse is applied and one end of a resistor grounded to ground (GND) to multiple wiring (harnesses) electrically connecting the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 and the drive board of the door frame 3. This improves noise resistance by removing noise that has entered the multiple wiring (harnesses). The same effect (i.e., improved noise immunity) can be achieved by supplying +12V via a +12V fuse instead of the +5V supplied to this resistor.

Furthermore, for example, if one, multiple, or all of the drive boards in the door frame 3 require +24V, the power is supplied via a +24V fuse (not shown) to a +24V driver circuit (not shown) that controls the operation of the electrical drive source (e.g., drive solenoid) provided in the door frame 3. The +24V driver circuit is primarily composed of a driver IC (not shown) that drives the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid, drive motor) of the door frame 3, and a fuse (not shown) that cuts off overcurrent to the driver IC. The +24V supplied via the +24V fuse is then supplied to the driver IC via the fuse. The capacity of the +24V driver circuit fuse is preset to take into account the current used by the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid, drive motor) of the door frame 3 and the +24V driver circuit in the drive board's +24V power line, and is capable of passing current up to the upper limit of the allowable current (cut-off current) of the door frame drive solenoid. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame drive solenoid flows, the element of the fuse in the +24V driver circuit melts, cutting off the +24V power line to the subsequent components that is supplied via the fuse in the +24V driver circuit.

Of the drive boards of the door frame 3, those on which a +24V driver circuit is provided (implemented or mounted) are provided with a +5V fuse (not shown) and an input buffer circuit (not shown). A control signal (which may be a serial signal or a parallel signal) transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 is input, noise is removed from the input control signal, and the signal is output to the +24V driver circuit. Specifically, the input buffer circuit is configured as a circuit that electrically connects one end of a resistor to which +5V supplied via the +5V fuse is applied and one end of a resistor grounded to ground (GND) to multiple wiring (harnesses) electrically connecting the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 and each drive board of the door frame 3. This improves noise resistance by removing noise that has entered the multiple wiring (harnesses). Instead of the +5V supplied to this resistor, +24V supplied via a +24V fuse, or if +12V is also being supplied, +12V supplied via a +12V fuse can also be used to achieve the same effect (i.e., improved noise resistance).

Furthermore, for example, if one, multiple, or all of the decorative boards on the door frame 3 require +12V, the power is supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown) to an LED constant current drive circuit that controls the various light emission modes (on, off, blinking, gradation lighting, etc.) of multiple LEDs, such as full-color LEDs and monochrome LEDs (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "various LEDs, etc. on the door frame 3") on the door frame 3. The LED constant current drive circuit is primarily composed of a sink-type constant current drive circuit that can supply a constant current to the various LEDs, etc. on the door frame 3, and a maximum current setting circuit that can set the maximum current to be supplied to the various LEDs, etc. on the door frame 3. The +12V fuse (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by each decorative board on the door frame 3 in the +12V power line of the decorative board, and is capable of passing current up to the maximum allowable current limit (break-off current) of the decorative board on the door frame side. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame side decorative board flows, the element of the +12V fuse (not shown) melts and cuts off the +12V power line to the subsequent line supplied via the +12V fuse (not shown).

In addition, if one of the decorative boards in the door frame 3 is not equipped with an LED constant current drive circuit and the light emission of the multiple LEDs mounted on that decorative board itself is controlled by an LED constant current drive circuit provided on another decorative board in the door frame 3, a +12V fuse (not shown) may or may not be provided on the decorative board. Also, if the LED constant current drive circuit does not have an input buffer circuit provided (mounted or installed) on the drive board of the door frame 3, an input buffer circuit may be provided in front of the LED constant current drive circuit.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned fuses provided on the door frame 3 side are surface-mounted (so-called SMD-type) chip fuses that melt when a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current limit (each with a predetermined cut-off current) flows. Unlike resettable fuses, once they melt, they are electronic components that cannot supply power to subsequent devices even if the current drops. Note that lead-type fuses may be used instead of SMD-type chip fuses as the above-mentioned fuses provided on the door frame 3 side. Furthermore, resettable fuses such as SMD-type or lead-type thermistors may also be used as the above-mentioned fuses provided on the door frame 3 side. In this way, when resettable fuses are used, power cannot be supplied to subsequent devices when a current exceeding the predetermined allowable current limit flows, but power can be supplied to subsequent devices again when the current drops.

[8-3-1. Voltage supplied to the dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 178, the dispensing control board 633 includes a dispensing control MPU 633aa and a dispensing control filter circuit 633h. This dispensing control filter circuit 633h receives +5V from the power supply board 630 and filters out noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 630 via diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the dispensing control MPU 633aa and dispensing control input circuit 633ab of the dispensing control unit 633a. The +12V from the power supply board 630 is supplied to, for example, the dispensing control input circuit 633ab of the dispensing control unit 633a, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 558z of the external terminal board 558 via the dispensing control board 633. The external communication circuit 558z of this external terminal board 558 is a circuit that outputs signals conveying the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in the gaming hall. The hall computer monitors the player's play by understanding the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signals output from the external communication circuit 558z. Note that +24 from the power supply board 630 is not used in the payout control board 633 at all, but is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

[8-3-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in Fig. 178, the main control board 1310 includes, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, etc., a +5V generating circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, etc. The +5V generating circuit 1310g receives +12V from the power supply board 630 via the dispensing control board 633, and generates +5V from this +12V, which is the control power supply for the main control MPU 1310a. In this embodiment, the circuit is configured so that the +5V generated by the +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa of the power supply generating circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 and the +5V generated on the main control board side by the +5V generating circuit 1310g on the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Therefore, the +5V generated by the +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa of the power supply generating circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 are not electrically connected to various electronic components on the main control board 1310, and the +5V generated on the main control board side by the +5V generating circuit 1310g on the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected to various electronic components on other boards, etc. other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V (+5V generated on the main control board) generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to capacitor BC0 on the power supply board 630 via diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a and main control input circuit 1310b. +12V from the dispensing control board 633 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and +24V from the dispensing control board 633 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e receives +12V and +24V from the power supply board 630 via the dispensing control board 633, and monitors these +12V and +24V for signs of a power outage or momentary interruption. When the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e detects signs of a power outage or momentary interruption of +12V and +24V, it outputs a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning. The power outage warning signal is input to the dispensing control MPU 633aa via the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control input circuit 633ab of the dispensing control board 633. The power outage warning signal is also input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310.

In this embodiment, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltages applied to the two power lines, the +12V power line and the +24V power line, respectively, thereby enabling more accurate detection of signs of a power outage or momentary power interruption, compared to monitoring the voltage applied to either the +12V power line or the +24V power line.

As described above, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, of the three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, generated by the +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa, +12V power supply generating circuit 630fb, and +24V power supply generating circuit 630fc of the power supply generating circuit 630f on the power supply board 630, the two types of power supplies, +12V and +24V, are supplied to various boards, such as the payout control board 633, main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, and boards subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the +12V power supply has the same potential on various boards, and the +24V power supply has the same potential on various boards. Furthermore, the +5V generated by the +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa of the power supply generating circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 and the +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected, but are at the same potential.

Furthermore, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, as described above, except for the payout control board 633 and the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided (mounted, equipped) with a +12V fuse (not shown) and a +24V fuse (not shown), and the boards subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510 are provided (mounted, equipped) with a +12V fuse (not shown) and a +24V fuse (not shown).

Furthermore, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, as described above, the +12V power supply and the +24V power supply are both monitored by the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e on the main control board 1310.

In other words, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, the +12V power supply monitored by the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, the +12V fuse (not shown) provided (implemented, mounted) on the peripheral control board 1510, and the +12V fuse (not shown) provided (implemented, mounted) on the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510 are all at the same potential; and the +24V power supply monitored by the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, the +24V fuse (not shown) provided (implemented, mounted) on the peripheral control board 1510, and the +24V fuse (not shown) provided (implemented, mounted) on the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510 are all at the same potential.

In addition, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, if one, multiple, or all of the drive boards of the door frame 3 require +12V, as described above, it is supplied to a +12V driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of the drive motor, which is the electrical drive source provided in the door frame 3, via a +12V fuse (not shown), and if one, multiple, or all of the drive boards of the door frame 3 require +24V, it is supplied to a +24V driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of the electrical drive source (e.g., drive solenoid, drive motor) provided in the door frame 3, via a +24V fuse (not shown), as described above. In this case, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, +12V is a power supply monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, a +12V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, installed) on the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5, a +12V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, installed) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5, and a +12V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, installed) on the drive board of the door frame 3. are at the same potential, and the +24V power supply monitored by the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 of the gaming panel 5, the +24V fuse (not shown) provided (implemented, mounted) on the peripheral control board 1510 of the gaming panel 5, the +24V fuse (not shown) provided (implemented, mounted) on a subsequent board to the peripheral control board 1510 of the gaming panel 5, and the +24V fuse (not shown) provided (implemented, mounted) on the drive board of the door frame 3 are all at the same potential.

[9. Main control board circuit, dispensing control board circuit]
Next, the circuits of the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 will be briefly described with reference to Figures 179 to 182. Figure 179 is a schematic circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, Figure 180 is a circuit diagram showing the main control input circuit with error detection function, Figure 181 is a circuit diagram showing the power outage monitoring circuit, and Figure 182 is a schematic circuit diagram showing the circuit of the dispensing control board. First, the circuit of the main control board 1310 will be described, and then the circuit of the dispensing control board 633 will be described. Here, we will explain an example in which the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 described above is mounted on the main control board 1310, and only the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320. In addition, we will also explain the wiring to the power supply and input signal boards in the circuits of various boards as appropriate.

[9-1. Main control board circuit]
Of the power supplies for the circuits of the main control board 1310, the control power supply for the main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor, is supplied with +12V from the +12V power supply generating circuit 630fb of the power supply generating circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 via the delivery control board 633, and +5V is generated from this supplied +12V in a +5V generating circuit 1310g as a local power supply that serves as the control power supply for the main control board 1310. This local power supply +5V has the same potential as the +5V generated by the +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa of the power supply generating circuit 630f on the power supply board 630.

As shown in Figure 179, the +5V local power supply that serves as the control power supply for the main control board 1310 in the +5V generation circuit 1310g is first input to the main control filter circuit 1310h. This main control filter circuit 1310h is primarily composed of the main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit that is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The +5V from the +5V generation circuit 1310g is applied to terminal 1 of the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, its terminal 2 is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and +5V with noise components removed is output from terminal 3. The +5V applied to terminal 1 is electrically connected to one end of capacitor MC0, the other end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), thereby first removing ripple (AC components superimposed on the voltage) and smoothing the voltage.

The +5V output from terminal 3 is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC1 and electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), which are electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), thereby further removing ripple and smoothing the voltage. This smoothed +5V is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal for the main control MPU 1310a. Note that if a momentary power outage occurs and the power from the gaming hall is cut off, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal for the main control MPU 1310a, for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the momentary power outage.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to one end of capacitor MC3, the other end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal of diode MD0. The +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed and ripple is further removed by capacitor MC3. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground).

The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal for the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of diode MD0. The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal for the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is also electrically connected to one end of capacitor MC4, the other end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and is also electrically connected via resistor MR0 to the positive terminal of capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h on the power supply board 630. As a result, the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h on the power supply board 630 is supplied via resistor MR0 to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal for the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, while diode MD0 prevents the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h on the power supply board 630 from being supplied via resistor MR0 to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal for the main control MPU 1310a.

Of the input signals to the circuit of the main control board 1310, for example, the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d (which may also be the RAM clear switch 1310f) provided on the payout control board 633, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401, and the detection signal from the setting key switch 13100a are input to the main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function and the main control input circuit 1310b2 with an error detection function.

Specifically, for example, the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b (hereinafter simply referred to as "main control input circuit 1310b") without an error detection function, and the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b and the logic inversion circuit 1310iv. In contrast, detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2801, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2401, etc. are input to input terminals PA1 to PA4 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function.

The power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is input to input terminal PB0 of input port PB of main control MPU 1310a via main control input circuit 1310b, and is output to the payout control board 633, performance display device 1600, etc. via main control output circuit 1310c. Input ports PA and PB are composed of 8 bits. In addition, detection signals from other sensors are input to specified input terminals of input ports PA and PB via main control input circuit 1310b or main control input circuit with error detection function 1310b2, and input terminals that become unused terminals are electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground) as a unused terminal treatment.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs various signals from the output terminal of its specified output port via the main control output circuit 1310c. For example, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a power outage clear signal from the output terminal of its specified output port via the main control output circuit 1310c to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, and outputs a drive signal via the main control output circuit 1310c to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

Detection signals from other sensors may be input to specific input terminals of port PC in addition to port PB via the main control input circuit 1310b, and unused input terminals in port PC are electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground) as an unused terminal treatment. Port PC, like input ports PA and PB, is configured with 8 bits.

[9-1-1. Main control input circuit]
Next, the main control input circuit 1310b will be described. Since the main control input circuit 1310b is the same circuit, here we will describe the main control input circuit 1310b to which the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is input, and the main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input.

[9-1-1a. Main RWM signal from RWM switch]
The main control input circuit 1310b, to which the main RWM signal is input from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR2, which is electrically connected to the +12V power line (the other end of the resistor MR2 is electrically connected to the power line (i.e., the +12V power line) created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f, as shown in FIG. 179, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor MTR0 via a resistor MR3. In addition to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR4, which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power supply line created on the main control board (a +5V power supply line created by a +5V power supply circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power supply line (i.e., the +5V power supply line) created and supplied by a +5V power supply circuit 630fa of the power supply circuit 630f), and the other end of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to an input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is input as an RWM signal to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

In addition, the other end of resistor MR2 may be electrically connected to one end of a capacitor electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, in order to adjust the waveform to match that of the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633.

Furthermore, if the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to an internal pull-up resistor electrically connected inside the main control MPU 1310a by a +5V power line created on the main control board (a +5V power line created by the +5V power generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power line created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power line)), the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 may be electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a without mounting resistor MR5 on the main control board 1310.

[9-1-1b. Detection signal from setting key switch]
The setting key switch 1311a has a COM1 terminal, a COM2 terminal, a terminal A, and a terminal B, with the B terminal electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 and the COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, and A terminal electrically connected together. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the A terminal are electrically connected in the internal circuit, and the internal circuits between the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the A terminal are electrically connected, whereas when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the B terminal are electrically connected in the internal circuit, and the internal circuits between the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the B terminal are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the main control board 1310 (board ground).

When the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a electrically connects the COM1 and COM2 terminals to the A terminal in the internal circuit, whereas when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the COM1 and COM2 terminals electrically connect to the B terminal in the internal circuit and are electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 179, the main control input circuit 1310b, to which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR10, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line created on the main control board (this is a +5V power line created by the +5V power generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and is different from the power line (i.e., the +5V power line) created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f). It is also electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC10, which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor MTR10 via a resistor MR11. In addition to the resistor MR11, the base terminal of transistor MTR10 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR12, which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. The emitter terminal of transistor MTR10 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. The collector terminal of transistor MTR10 is electrically connected to one end of resistor MR13, which is electrically connected to the other end of a +5V power line created on the main control board (a +5V power line created by a +5V power generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and is different from the power line created and supplied by a +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power line)), and is also electrically connected to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via a logic inversion circuit 1310iv.

Logic inversion circuit 1310iv inverts the logic of the detection signal from setting key switch 1311a input via main control input circuit 1310b. Logic inversion circuit 1310iv is composed of resistors MR14, MR15, and MR16, and transistor MTR11. The collector terminal of transistor MTR10, which constitutes main control input circuit 1310b, is electrically connected to one end of resistor MR13, which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board (a +5V power supply line created by +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on main control board 1310, which is different from the power supply line created and supplied by +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of power supply creation circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power supply line)), and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor MTR11 via resistor MR14. The base terminal of transistor MTR11 is electrically connected to resistor MR14 and to the other end of resistor MR15, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. The emitter terminal of transistor MTR11 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. The collector terminal of transistor MTR11 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR16, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board (a +5V power supply line created by a +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power supply line created and supplied by a +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power supply line)), and is also electrically connected to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input as a setting key signal to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b and the logic inversion circuit 1310iv.

In addition, if the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to an internal pull-up resistor electrically connected inside the main control MPU 1310a by a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side (a +5V power supply line created by the +5V power supply circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power supply line (i.e., the +5V power supply line) created and supplied by the +5V power supply generation circuit 630fa of the power supply generation circuit 630f), the collector terminal of transistor MTR11 may be electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a without implementing resistor MR16 on the main control board 1310. Furthermore, even if the input terminals PA1-PA4, PA6-PA7 of the input port PA (input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and PA5 (setting key signal input terminal)) are electrically connected to an internal pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +5V power line created by the main control board (a +5V power line created by the +5V power generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power line created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power line)), the collector terminal of the transistor may be electrically connected to the input terminals PA1-PA4, PA6-PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a without being electrically connected to the other end of the resistor electrically connected to the +5V power line created by the main control board, i.e., without mounting this resistor on the main control board 1310.

When the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the COM1 and COM2 terminals are electrically connected to the A terminal in the internal circuit, so the voltage of the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is pulled up to +5V on the main control board side by resistor MR10 in the main control input circuit 1310b, causing the logic to become HI, turning ON transistor MTR10 in the main control input circuit 1310b. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR10 is pulled down toward the ground (GND) (board ground) side of the main control board 1310, turning off transistor MTR11 of logic inverter circuit 1310iv, and the voltage at the collector terminal of this transistor MTR11 is pulled up to the +5V side of the main control board by resistor MR16 of logic inverter circuit 1310iv, causing the setting key signal, whose logic has become HI, to be input to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a. In other words, when setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the logic of the setting key signal becomes HI (logic indicating a setting disabled state) and is input to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a.

In contrast, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal and B terminal are electrically connected in the internal circuit and electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, so the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a has a logic LOW and transistor MTR10 of the main control input circuit 1310b turns OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR10 is pulled up to +5V on the main control board by resistor MR13 of main control input circuit 1310b, turning on transistor MTR11 of logic inversion circuit 1310iv. The voltage at the collector terminal of transistor MTR11 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and the setting key signal, whose logic is now LOW, is input to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. In other words, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the logic of the setting key signal becomes LOW (logic that indicates a setting enabled state) and is input to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the push operation part of the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is not operated, the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is not electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633, as described below. Therefore, the resistor PR50 of the dispensing control input circuit 633ab provided on the dispensing control board 633, described below, pulls it up to the power supply (+5V) created and supplied by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f, turning on the transistor PTR60 of the dispensing control output circuit 633ac provided on the dispensing control board 633, described below. The voltage of the collector terminal of this transistor PTR60 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (board ground) side of the dispensing control board 633, causing the logic of the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d to become LOW and be input to the main control board 1310. When the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d with a logic LOW is input to the main control input circuit 1310b, transistor MTR0 of the main control input circuit 1310b turns OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5V on the main control board by resistor MR5 of the main control input circuit 1310b, causing the RWM signal with a logic HI to be input to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. In other words, when the pressing operation unit of the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is not operated, the logic of the RWM signal becomes HI (logic indicating a non-pressing operation state) and is input to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

In contrast, when the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is operated, the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633 as described below, so that the transistor PTR60 of the dispensing control output circuit 633ac provided on the dispensing control board 633 is turned OFF, and the voltage of the collector terminal of this transistor PTR60 is pulled up to the +5V side on the main control board side by the resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b provided on the main control board 1310, and the logic of the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d becomes HI. As a result, transistor MTR0 of main control input circuit 1310b turns ON, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and the RWM signal, whose logic is now LOW, is input to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a. In other words, when the pressing operation portion of RWM switch 633d provided on dispensing control board 633 is operated, the logic of the RWM signal becomes LOW (logic that conveys the pressing operation status) and is input to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a.

In this way, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the logic of the setting key signal indicating this is set to HI by the logic inversion circuit 1310iv, and when the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d is operated, the logic of the RAW signal indicating this is set to HI. Also, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the logic of the setting key signal indicating this is set to LOW by the logic inversion circuit 1310iv, and when the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d is not operated, the logic of the RAW signal indicating this is set to LOW. In other words, the logic that indicates that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned ON and the logic that indicates that the pressing operation section of the RWM switch 633d has been operated are the same logic (HI), and the logic that indicates that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned OFF (not turned ON) and the logic that indicates that the pressing operation section of the RWM switch 633d has not been operated are the same logic (LOW).

[9-1-2. Main control input circuit with error detection function]
Next, the main control input circuit with error detection function 1310b2 will be described. Since the main control input circuit with error detection function 1310b2 is the same circuit, here, the main control input circuit with error detection function 1310b to which the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input will be described.

The main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function, which receives the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, is primarily composed of a processing circuit 1310b2a, as shown in Figure 180. The processing circuit 1310b2a receives the +5V power line (a +5V power line created by the +5V generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power line (i.e., the +5V power line) created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f) generated by the main control board via the VCC terminal and supplies it to various internal circuits as an internal power source. The grounds (GND) of the various internal circuits are electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 via the GND terminal.

The processing circuit 1310b2a also includes a power supply terminal circuit that monitors the power supply of the +12V power line (the power line generated and supplied by the +12V power supply generating circuit 630fb of the power supply generating circuit 630f (i.e., the +12V power line)) supplied via the VS terminal; a wire break monitoring circuit that monitors for wire breaks based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 input via the input terminal; a short circuit monitoring circuit that monitors for short circuits based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 input via the input terminal; a comparison circuit that compares the presence or absence of a game ball passing through with a predetermined threshold based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 input via the input terminal; an abnormality processing circuit that determines the presence or absence of an abnormality based on the monitoring results from each monitoring circuit, such as the power supply monitoring circuit, wire break monitoring circuit, and short circuit monitoring circuit, and performs processing when an abnormality occurs; an error output circuit that reports the occurrence of an abnormality based on the inspection results from each monitoring circuit; and an output circuit that outputs the comparison result from the comparison circuit.

When the abnormality processing circuit determines that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring results from each monitoring circuit (when an error is detected), it sets and controls the logic for outputting this information (that an abnormality has occurred) from the error output circuit to the outside via the ER terminal, and also sets and controls the logic for outputting the comparison results from the comparison circuit to the outside via the output terminal.

The VS terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to the +12V power line (the power line generated and supplied by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f (i.e., the +12V power line)), as well as to one end of a resistor MR50 and to the other end of a capacitor MC50, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

The input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR50, in addition to being electrically connected to the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801. In order to adjust the waveform of the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a may also be electrically connected to one end of a capacitor whose other end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

The VCC terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC51, the other end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

The output terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR51, which is electrically connected at the other end to the +5V power line created on the main control board (this is a +5V power line created by the +5V power generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and is different from the power line (i.e., the +5V power line) created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f), and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input as a gate signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b2a with error detection function.

The ER terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR52, which is electrically connected at the other end to the +5V power line created on the main control board (a +5V power line created by the +5V power generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power line created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power line)), and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a. The ER terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is also electrically connected to the ER terminals of other main control input circuits 1310b2 with error detection functions. In other words, the signals from the ER terminals of multiple main control input circuits 1310b2 with error detection functions are OR-connected. The signal from the ER terminal of the main control input circuit with error detection function 1310b2 is input as a sensor error signal to the input terminal PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a.

Here, we will explain the state of the input terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a when the abnormality processing circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality has occurred (when an error is detected) based on the monitoring results from each monitoring circuit, such as the power supply monitoring circuit, open circuit monitoring circuit, and short circuit monitoring circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a. When the abnormality processing circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality has occurred (when an error is detected) based on the monitoring results from the power supply monitoring circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a, the logic of the input terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a is undefined, indicating a power supply abnormality. When the abnormality processing circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality has occurred (when an error is detected) based on the monitoring results from the open circuit monitoring circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a, the logic of the input terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a is HI, indicating a open circuit. When the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring results from the short circuit monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a (when an error is detected), the logic of the input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a becomes LOW, indicating that a short circuit has occurred.

In addition, in the abnormality processing circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a, we will explain the state of the output terminal and ER terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred (when an error is detected) based on the monitoring results from each monitoring circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a, such as the power supply monitoring circuit, open circuit monitoring circuit, and short circuit monitoring circuit. When the abnormality processing circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring results from the power supply monitoring circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a (when an error is detected), it sets and controls the output circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a so that the logic of the output terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a is LOW in order to stop the comparison result by the comparison circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a from being output from the output circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a, and also sets and controls the error output circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a so that the logic of the ER terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a is HI to notify that an abnormality has occurred.

When the abnormality processing circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring results from the disconnection monitoring circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a (when an error is detected), the abnormality processing circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a sets and controls the output circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a so that the logic of the output terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a is LOW in order to stop the comparison result by the comparison circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a from being output from the output circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a, and also sets and controls the error output circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a so that the logic of the ER terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a is HIGH in order to notify that an abnormality has occurred.

When the abnormality processing circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring results from the short-circuit monitoring circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a (when an error is detected), the abnormality processing circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a sets and controls the output circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a so that the logic of the output terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a is LOW in order to stop the comparison result by the comparison circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a being output from the output circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a, and also sets and controls the error output circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a so that the logic of the ER terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a is HIGH in order to notify that an abnormality has occurred.

[9-1-3. Power outage monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 178, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltage via the output control board 633: +12V from the +12V power supply generating circuit 630fb of the power supply generating circuit 630f in the power supply board 630, and +24V from the +24V power supply generating circuit 630fc of the power supply generating circuit 630f in the power supply board 630, and +12V and +24V are input to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e.

The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of a power outage or momentary power outage of +12V and +24V, and when it detects signs of a power outage or momentary power outage, it outputs a power outage warning signal as a power outage warning to the main control MPU 1310a, the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510, the performance display device 1600, etc. When a power outage warning signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, for example, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, stopping the progress of the game, the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 performs payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below, stopping the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls), the peripheral control board 1510 performs backup processing of the performance information, and the performance display device 1600 turns off an inverter (not shown) that creates a power source for the backlight to cut power consumption and stop the progress of the performance so that the main control side power off processing by the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control unit power off processing by the payout control 633aa can be completed reliably.

Here, we will first explain the configuration of the power outage monitoring circuit, then explain the monitoring of +24V power outages or momentary power outages, the monitoring of +12V power outages or momentary power outages, and the output of the power outage warning signal.

[9-1-3a. Configuration of power outage monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 181, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is mainly composed of a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open-collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, are electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR20, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line created on the main control board (this is a +5V power line created by the +5V power generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and is different from the power line created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power supply generation circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power line)). The other end of this resistor is connected to apply +5V to the main control board, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (set to 2.495V in this embodiment) that serves as the comparison reference voltage for the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC20, the other end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). The reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is smoothed by the capacitor MC20, removing ripple (AC components superimposed on the voltage). The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground).

The comparator MIC21 has two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitored voltage V1 (hereinafter referred to as "+24V monitored voltage V1") of the +24V power line (the power line (i.e., the +24V power line) generated and supplied by the +24V power supply generation circuit 630fc of the power supply generation circuit 630f) with the reference voltage Vref, and the other (MIC21B) is used to compare the monitored voltage V1 of the +12V power line ( It is used to compare the monitored voltage V2 (hereinafter referred to as "+12V monitored voltage V2") of the power line (i.e., the +12V power line) generated and supplied by the +12V power generating circuit 630fb of the power generating circuit 630f with the reference voltage Vref. A +24V monitored voltage V1 is applied to terminal 3, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to terminal 2, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. A +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied to terminal 5, the positive terminal of MIC21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to terminal 6, the negative terminal of MIC21B. The comparison results are input to D-type flip-flop MIC22. MIC22 has two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which serves as the power supply terminal of comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to one end of capacitor MC21, the other end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). The +5V generated by the main control board and applied to the Vcc terminal, which serves as the power supply terminal of comparator MIC21, is smoothed and ripple-free by capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which serves as the ground terminal of comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground).

[9-1-3b. Monitoring of +24V power outages or momentary power outages]
As described above, the monitoring of a +24V power outage or momentary power outage is performed by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 181, the terminal 3, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the +24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR21 electrically connected to the +24V power line (the power line (i.e., the +24V power line) generated and supplied by the +24V power supply generating circuit 630fc of the power supply generating circuit 630f), the other end of a resistor MR22 electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and a capacitor MC23 electrically connected to the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and to ground (GND) (board ground). The terminals are electrically connected. The +24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to terminal 3, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is divided by the resistance ratio of resistors MR21 and MR22, and ripples are removed and smoothed by capacitor MC23. The values of resistors MR21 and MR22 are set so that, in the event of a power outage or momentary interruption, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes equal to the reference voltage Vref when the voltage starts to drop from +24V to a preset power outage detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in this embodiment).

Terminal 1, the output terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, with one end electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line on the main control board, and one end electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC24, which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 acts as a low-pass filter.

When the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 1, the output terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is pulled up to +5V on the main control board by pull-up resistor MR23, and the signal with a logic HI is input to terminal PR, the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +24V voltage is lower than the power outage detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is pulled down to ground (GND) (board ground), and a signal with a logic LOW is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-1-3c. Monitoring of +12V power outage or momentary power outage]
As described above, the monitoring of a +12V power outage or momentary power outage is performed by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 181, the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR24 electrically connected to the +12V power line (the power line (i.e., the +12V power line) generated and supplied by the +12V power supply generating circuit 630fb of the power supply generating circuit 630f), the other end of a resistor MR25 electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and the other end of a capacitor MC25 electrically connected to the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25 and to ground (GND) (board ground). The terminals are electrically connected. The +12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to terminal 5, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is divided by the resistance ratio of resistors MR24 and MR25, and ripples are removed and smoothed by capacitor MC25. The values of resistors MR24 and MR25 are set so that, in the event of a power outage or momentary interruption, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes equal to the reference voltage Vref when the voltage begins to drop from +12V to a preset power outage detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment).

Terminal 7, the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is an open collector output and is electrically connected to terminal 1, the output terminal of MIC21A mentioned above. As a result, one end is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line on the main control board, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC24, which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and is electrically connected to terminal PR, the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. As mentioned above, capacitor MC24 acts as a low-pass filter.

When the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 7, the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is pulled up to +5V on the main control board by pull-up resistor MR23, and the signal with a logic HI is input to terminal PR, the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +12V voltage is lower than the power outage detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 7, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is pulled down to ground (GND) (board ground), and the signal with a logic LOW is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-1-3d. Power outage warning signal output]
D-type flip-flop MIC22 memorizes the value (logic) of the signal input to its D-input terminal 1D in response to a change in the edge of the clock signal input to its clock input terminal 1CK, and outputs this memorized value (logic) from its output terminal 1Q, as well as outputting the inverse of the memorized value (logic) from its output terminal, negative logic 1Q. When a logic LOW signal is input to its clear terminal CLR, D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latched state and outputs a signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal input to its preset terminal PR from its output terminal 1Q (at this time, a signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q, i.e., a signal with the same logic as the signal input to the preset terminal PR, is output from the negative logic 1Q). On the other hand, when a logic HI is input to its clear terminal CLR, D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets the latched state. Furthermore, when a signal with a logic HI is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal, to set the latch state, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 maintains a state in which it outputs a signal with a logic HI from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, when a signal with a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal (at this time, it maintains a state in which it outputs a signal with the logic of the signal output from 1Q, which is the inverted signal, from the negative logic 1Q terminal).

In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22's D input terminal, terminal 1D, and clock input terminal, terminal 1CK, are electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). Therefore, the circuit is configured so that, even if there is no change in the edge of the clock signal input to terminal 1CK, the clock input terminal, the value (logic) of the signal input to terminal 1D, the D input terminal, is not stored and output from terminal 1Q, the output terminal. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives, at its preset terminal PR, a signal from terminal 1, the output terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, which monitors for power outages or momentary interruptions of +24V, and a signal from terminal 7, the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, which monitors for power outages or momentary interruptions of +12V, and outputs a signal from terminal 1Q, the output terminal, based on these signals. The power supply terminal Vcc terminal is electrically connected to one end of capacitor MC22, the other end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). The +5V generated by the main control board and applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, has ripples removed and smoothed by capacitor MC22. The ground terminal GND terminal is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and the negative logic 1Q terminal, which inverts the logic of the output terminal 1Q, is not electrically connected to the outside.

In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a power outage clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit 1310c at its clear terminal, CLR. This power outage clear signal is output during the main control side power-on process performed by the main control MPU 1310a (described below) and is stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed. Because the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power outage clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310c with its logic set to LOW. When a power outage clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases its latched state. At this time, the logic input to the preset terminal, PR, is inverted and output from the output terminal, 1Q.

On the other hand, when the output of the power outage clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HIGH via the main control output circuit 1310c and is input to the CLR terminal. When the power outage clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is set to a latched state, and the logic becomes LOW at the PR terminal, latching the input state.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310c, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is output from the main control output circuit 1310c to the dispensing control board 633 as a dispensing power outage warning signal and to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal.

The main control input circuit 1310b electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a. As shown in FIG. 181, the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR26, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line on the main control board, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor MTR20 via a resistor MR27. The base terminal of transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to resistor MR27 and also to the other end of a resistor MR28, the other end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to one end of resistor MR29, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line on the main control board, and is also electrically connected to input terminal PB0 of input port PB of main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, if the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to an internal pull-up resistor inside the main control MPU 1310a via a +5V power line created on the main control board (a +5V power line created by the +5V power generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power line created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power line)), the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 may be electrically connected to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a without mounting resistor MR29 on the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, even if the other input terminals PB1 to PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a are electrically connected to an internal pull-up resistor electrically connected to a +5V power line created on the main control board (a +5V power line created by the +5V power generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power line created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power line)) inside the main control MPU 1310a, the collector terminal of the transistor may be electrically connected to the input terminals PB1 to PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a without being electrically connected to the other end of the resistor whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power line created on the main control board, i.e., without mounting this resistor on the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, in addition to the input ports PA and PB of the main control MPU 1310a, if the input terminals PC0 to PC7 of the input port PC of the main control MPU 1310a are electrically connected to an internal pull-up resistor electrically connected within the main control MPU 1310a to a +5V power line created on the main control board (a +5V power line created by the +5V power generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power line created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power line)), the collector terminal of the transistor may be electrically connected to the input terminals PC0 to PC7 of the input port PC of the main control MPU 1310a without being electrically connected to the other end of the resistor whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power line created on the main control board, i.e., without mounting this resistor on the main control board 1310.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR27 and MR28 and transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR20 is pulled down to ground (GND) (board ground), turning transistor MTR20 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5V on the main control board, turning transistor MTR20 ON and the switch circuit ON.

When both the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf and the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf are met, a logic HI signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR20, turning transistor MTR20 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side on the main control board by resistor MR29, and a logic HI power outage warning signal is input to the input terminal of input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a.

On the other hand, when either the +24V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf or the +12V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf is met, a logic LOW signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR20, turning transistor MTR20 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 is pulled down to ground (GND) (board ground), and a logic LOW power outage warning signal is input to the input terminal of input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a.

Furthermore, the main control output circuit 1310c, which outputs the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the dispensing control board 633 as a dispensing power outage warning signal, is configured as an open-collector output type as shown in Figure 181, and terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 via resistor MR30. The base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to resistor MR30 and also to the other end of resistor MR31, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR32, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line on the main control board, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 via a resistor MR33. The base terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR33 and the other end of a resistor MR34, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC26, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and is also electrically connected to the dispensing control board 633 via wiring (harness). Furthermore, when the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the dispensing control board 633 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12V power line (the power line (i.e., the +12V power line) created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f) in the dispensing control input circuit 633ab of the dispensing control unit 633a on the dispensing control board 633, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 633aa.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR30 and MR31 and the front-stage transistor MTR21 is the front-stage switch circuit, and the circuit consisting of resistors MR33 and MR34 and the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is the rear-stage switch circuit, which is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled down to ground (GND) (substrate ground), turning transistor MTR21 OFF and the preceding switch circuit OFF. The voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR22 in the following stage, which is the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage, is pulled up to +5V on the main control board side by resistor MR32, turning transistor MTR22 ON and the following switch circuit ON. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5V on the main control board, turning transistor MTR21 ON and the preceding switch circuit ON. The voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR22 in the following stage, which is the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage, is pulled down to ground (GND) (board ground), turning transistor MTR22 in the following stage OFF and the following switch circuit OFF as well.

When both the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf and the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf are met, a logic HI signal is input to the PR terminal, the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal, the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, turning the preceding transistor MTR21 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5V on the main control board by resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the following transistor MTR22, turning the following transistor MTR22 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the downstream transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (board ground) side on the dispensing control board 633 via the wiring (harness), and a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic LOW is input to the dispensing control board 633.

On the other hand, when either the +24V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf or the +12V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf is met, a logic LOW signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, turning the preceding transistor MTR21 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to ground (GND) (substrate ground) and applied to the base terminal of the following transistor MTR22, turning the following transistor MTR22 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the downstream transistor MTR22 is pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor in the dispensing control input circuit 633ab of the dispensing control unit 633a on the dispensing control board 633 via wiring (harness), and a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to the dispensing control board 633.

Furthermore, the main control output circuit 1310c, which outputs a signal from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, is configured as an open-collector output type as shown in FIG. 181. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above and is electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor MTR23 via resistor MR35. The base terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to resistor MR35 and also to the other end of resistor MR36, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to a +12V power line (a power line (i.e., a +12V power line) created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f) in a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) on the peripheral control board 1510, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control unit 1511.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR35 and MR36 and transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR23 is pulled down to ground (GND) (board ground), turning transistor MTR23 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +5V on the main control board, turning transistor MTR23 ON and the switch circuit ON.

When both the condition that the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf are met, a signal with a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR23, turning transistor MTR23 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of peripheral control unit 4150 on peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), and a peripheral power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either the +24V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf or the +12V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf is met, a logic LOW signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR23, turning transistor MTR23 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is pulled down to ground (GND) (board ground) on the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and a logic LOW peripheral power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b, which transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal, and the main control output circuit 1310c, which outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, each have one transistor, and the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the peripheral control board 1510 While the logic of these signals is the same, the main control output circuit 1310c, which outputs the signal from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the dispensing control board 633 as a dispensing power outage warning signal, has two transistors, one in the front stage and one in the rear stage, and the logic of the dispensing power outage warning signal is the inverse of the logic of the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the peripheral control board 1510, and is different from the logic of the power outage warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal.

In addition, the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to one end of resistor MR29, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line on the main control board side, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a, while the collector terminal of transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310c is electrically connected via wiring (harness) to the other end of a pull-up resistor, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, in the dispensing control input circuit 633ab of the dispensing control unit 633a on the dispensing control board 633, and the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 of the main control output circuit 1310c is electrically connected via wiring (harness) to a pull-up resistor, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, in the dispensing control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 on the peripheral control board 1510. This is because, between the terminals between the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 of main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal of input port PB of main control MPU 1310a, transistor MTR20 of main control input circuit 1310b and main control MPU 1310a are implemented on the main control board 1310, and therefore power outage warning is given by the logic (ON/OFF signal) of the power outage warning signal using +5V created on the main control board side, which is the control power source of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633, and between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, power outage warning is given by the logic (ON/OFF signal) of the power outage warning signal using +12V, which is a DC power source higher than +5V, for example, which is the control power source of the main control MPU 1310a, dispensing control MPU 633aa, and peripheral control unit 1511, in order to suppress the effects of noise that enters the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards.

In this way, the power line (i.e., the +12V power line) created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 is supplied to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, as described above, as well as the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 633, the control power supply creation circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510, the +12V driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board, the LED constant current drive circuit of each decorative board of the game board 5, the LCD panel power supply creation circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600, the LCD panel, backlight, and drive circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600, etc. In other words, the +12V power line is supplied to the main control board 1310, as well as the payout control board 633, peripheral control board 1510, subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board of the game board 5, and performance display device 1600, etc. Therefore, even if the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633 that make up the main board are operating normally, for example, an electrical problem due to some reason in the control power supply creation circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 may cause an overcurrent to flow to the control power supply creation circuit (not shown), which may lower the potential of the +12V power line, or an electrical problem due to some reason in the liquid crystal panel power supply creation circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600, or the liquid crystal panel, backlight, or drive circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600 may cause a power failure of the liquid crystal panel power supply creation circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600, An overcurrent may flow to any of the liquid crystal panel, backlight, drive circuit, etc. (not shown), causing the potential of the +12V power line to drop; when the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is being driven by a +12V driver circuit (not shown) on a subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 (or when the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is waiting to be driven), an overload or electrical problem for some reason may cause an overcurrent to flow to the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 or the +12V driver circuit (not shown), causing the potential of the +12V power line to drop; or an electrical problem for some reason may cause an overcurrent to flow to the LED constant current drive circuit of the decorative board of the game board 5, causing the potential of the +12V power line to drop. Furthermore, if a leakage current or short circuit occurs due to some kind of electrical problem in the wiring patterns formed on boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the boards subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510, the performance display device 1600, and the decorative boards of the gaming board 5, or in the wiring (harnesses) electrically connecting the boards, the potential of the +12V power line will drop due to overcurrent. In this case, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 outputs a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control MPU 1310a will perform the main control side power outage processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and stop the game from progressing.

In addition, the power line (i.e., the +24V power line) created and supplied by the +24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f is supplied, as described above, to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d of the main control board 1310, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, as well as to the dispensing control board 633 (the main control board 1310 is supplied with a +12V power line via the dispensing control board 633), the peripheral control board 1510, and the +24V driver circuit (not shown) on the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, the +24V power line is supplied not only to the main control board 1310, but also to the payout control board 633, peripheral control board 1510, and subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510, etc., so even if the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633 that make up the main board are operating normally, when the +24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is being driven by the +24V system driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 (or when the +24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is waiting to be driven), an overload or electrical problem for some reason may cause an overcurrent to flow to the +24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 or the +24V system driver circuit (not shown), causing the potential of the +24V power line to drop. Additionally, if a leakage current or short circuit occurs due to some kind of electrical problem in the wiring patterns formed on the peripheral control board 1510 that supplies the +24V power line, or on boards subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510, or in the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the boards, the potential of the +24V power line will also drop. In this case, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 outputs a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a, which then performs the main control side power outage processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and stops the game from proceeding.

[9-1-4. Overcurrent protection for +12V power line and +24V power line]
[9-1-4a. Overcurrent protection for +12V power line]
Therefore, in this embodiment, as an overcurrent protection for the +12V power line, a +12V fuse (not shown) that can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the +12V power line peripheral control board is provided in the +12V power line as an overcurrent countermeasure, a +12V fuse (not shown) that can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the +12V power line peripheral control board is provided in the performance display device 1600 as the main fuse for the performance display device 1600, a +12V fuse (not shown) that can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the branch first system that branches off from the +12V fuse (not shown) into two systems is provided in the performance display device 1600, and a +12V fuse (not shown) that can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the branch first system is provided in the performance display device 1600 as the fuse for the branch second system that branches off from the +12V fuse (not shown) into two systems A +12V fuse (not shown) is provided that can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the +12V power line effect drive board, and a +12V fuse (not shown) is provided on a subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, which can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the game board side drive motor, and a +12V fuse (not shown) is provided on a subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, which can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the game board side decorative board, for each decorative board of the game board 5 on which an LED constant current drive circuit is implemented (note that a +12V fuse (not shown) that can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the game board side decorative board may also be provided for all decorative boards of the game board 5 that are supplied with a +12V power line, regardless of whether or not an LED constant current drive circuit is present). The +12V supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown) as the fuse of the first branch system creates a liquid crystal panel power supply in a liquid crystal panel power supply creation circuit (not shown), and this liquid crystal panel power supply is supplied to the liquid crystal panel, backlight, and drive circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600.Therefore, the liquid crystal panel, backlight, and drive circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600 are supplied with the liquid crystal panel power supply created from the +12V supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown) as the fuse of the first branch system, and +12V supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown) as the fuse of the second branch system.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and dispensing control board 633 that make up the main board are operating normally, if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in the control power supply generation circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 in the +12V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510, causing an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current on the +12V power supply line of the peripheral control board to flow to the control power supply generation circuit (not shown), the +12V fuse (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 will blow. In this way, a +12V fuse (not shown) is provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the +12V fuse (not shown) is blown in the event of an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the peripheral control board's allowable current for the +12V power line. This prevents a drop in the potential of the +12V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and prevents the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 from outputting a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to continue playing without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa to continue paying out game balls (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and dispensing control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in the LCD panel power supply circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600 in the +12V power line of the performance display device 1600, causing an overcurrent that exceeds the allowable current limit of the first branch system to flow to the LCD panel power supply circuit (not shown), the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the first branch system of the performance display device 1600, will blow. Furthermore, in this embodiment, if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in the liquid crystal panel, backlight, or drive circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600, causing an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the first branch system to flow to the liquid crystal panel power supply creation circuit (not shown) that creates the liquid crystal panel power supply from +12V supplied via the +12V fuse (not shown) as the fuse of the second branch system, the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the first branch system of the performance display device 1600, will blow.Furthermore, if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in the liquid crystal panel, backlight, or drive circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600, causing an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the second branch system to flow to any of the liquid crystal panel, backlight, drive circuit, etc. (not shown) of the performance display device 1600, the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the second branch system of the performance display device 1600, will blow. Also, in this embodiment, the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the master fuse of performance display device 1600, has a capacity that is greater than the capacity of either the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of branch 1 system, or the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of branch 2 system, and is pre-selected to be smaller than the combined capacity of both. Therefore, even if an overcurrent flows in the +12V power line and blows either the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of branch 1 system, or the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of branch 2 system, if an overcurrent still flows in the system of the blown fuse and exceeds the master allowable current upper limit, the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the master fuse, may blow. Furthermore, if the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the main fuse of the performance display device 1600, is the same as the sum of the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the first branch system, and the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the second branch system, then the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the main fuse, may blow if an overcurrent flows in the +12V power line and blows either the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the first branch system, or the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the second branch system, and if an overcurrent continues to flow in the system of the blown fuse and exceeds the main allowable current upper limit, the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the main fuse, will blow; or if an overcurrent flows in the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the first branch system, or the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the second branch system, and blows both fuses, the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the main fuse. In this way, the performance display device 1600 is provided with a +12V fuse (not shown) which is the main fuse of the performance display device 1600, a +12V fuse (not shown) which is the fuse of the first branch system, and a +12V fuse (not shown) which is the fuse of the second branch system, and an overcurrent causes the main fuse (not shown) which is the +12V fuse (not shown) which is the fuse of the first branch system, and the +12V fuse (not shown) which is the fuse of the second branch system to blow out. This suppresses a drop in the potential of the +12V power line, preventing the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 from outputting a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or payout control MPU 633aa, allowing the main control MPU 1310a to continue playing without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa to continue paying out game balls (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, and the +12V system electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is being driven by the +12V system driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board on the +12V power line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board (or when the +12V system electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is waiting to be driven), if an overload or electrical trouble occurs for some reason and an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the drive motor on the game board side flows to the +12V system electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 or the +12V system driver circuit (not shown), the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit (not shown) will blow. The +12V supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the +12V driver circuit (not shown) as well as to each decorative board on the game board 5. Therefore, the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) is selected in advance based on the maximum allowable current for the game board drive motor of the +12V driver circuit (not shown) and the maximum allowable current for each decorative board on the game board 5.

The +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the gaming board 5 requires a considerable amount of current to operate, so of the effects produced by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the gaming board 5 and the light-emitting effects of the various LEDs on each decorative board of the gaming board 5, the light-emitting effects of the various LEDs on each decorative board of the gaming board 5 are given priority over and continue to be given priority over the effects produced by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the gaming board 5. For this reason, the capacities of the +12V fuses (not shown) of each decorative board of the gaming board 5 and the fuses (not shown) of the +12V driver circuits of the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 are pre-selected so that the fuses in the +12V driver circuits (not shown) of the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 blow before the +12V fuses (not shown) of each decorative board of the gaming board 5 blow. The capacities of the +12V fuses (not shown) of the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 are also pre-set so that the illumination effects of the various LEDs on each decorative board of the gaming board 5 can be given priority over effects produced by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the gaming board 5.

In cases where the lighting effects of the various LEDs on each decorative board of the gaming board 5 are given priority over the effects of the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the gaming board 5, for example, the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 is greater than the capacity selected for each decorative board of the gaming board 5 to use up to the maximum allowable current limit of the decorative board on the gaming board side, and is smaller than the sum of this selected capacity and the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown). If selected in advance, the +12V fuse (not shown) may blow if, when each decorative board on the game board 5 is using up to the maximum allowable current limit for the game board decorative board, an overcurrent exceeding the maximum allowable current limit for the game board drive motor flows to the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 or the +12V driver circuit (not shown), causing the fuse in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) to blow, and if an overcurrent still flows and exceeds the maximum allowable current limit for the +12V power line performance drive board, the fuse may blow. Also, for example, if the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 is pre-selected to be equal to the capacity selected for each decorative board of the game board 5 to use up to the game board decorative board's allowable current limit plus the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown), the +12V fuse (not shown) may blow if an overcurrent exceeding the game board drive motor's allowable current limit flows to the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 or the +12V driver circuit (not shown) when each decorative board of the game board 5 is using up to its allowable current limit for the game board decorative board, even if the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) blows. If an overcurrent continues to flow and exceeds the +12V power line effect drive board's allowable current limit, the +12V fuse may blow.

In addition, when the effects produced by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the gaming board 5 and the various LED light-emitting effects produced by each decorative board of the gaming board 5 are prioritized over the effects produced by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the gaming board 5, and vice versa, when the effects produced by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the gaming board 5 are prioritized over the light-emitting effects produced by each LED of each decorative board of the gaming board 5, the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 will blow. The capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of the gaming board 5 and the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 are selected in advance so that the +12V fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of the gaming board 5 blows first, and the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 is set in advance so that the effects produced by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the gaming board 5 can be given priority over the light-emitting effects of the various LEDs produced by each decorative board of the gaming board 5.

Furthermore, if an overload or electrical trouble occurs for some reason on the 12V power line of the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510, causing an overcurrent to flow through the 12V power line of the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510 and stopping both the effects produced by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the gaming board 5 and the various LED light-up effects produced by each decorative board on the gaming board 5, the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) of the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510 will be pre-set to be equal to or less than the smaller of the fuse capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) of the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510 and the +12V fuse (not shown) of each decorative board on the gaming board 5.

In this way, by providing a +12V fuse (not shown) on the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510 and a fuse in the +12V driver circuit (not shown), an overcurrent will cause the +12V fuse (not shown) and the fuse in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) to blow. This prevents a drop in the potential of the +12V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and prevents the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 from outputting a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to continue playing without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa to continue paying out game balls (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, if an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the decorative board on the gaming board side flows through the +12V power line of each decorative board on the gaming board 5 due to the +12V fuse (not shown) of the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is implemented, the +12V fuse (not shown) of the decorative board on the gaming board 5 will blow. In addition, if a +12V fuse (not shown) is provided that can pass current up to the maximum allowable current limit for the decorative board on the game board side to all decorative boards on the game board 5 that are supplied with a +12V power line regardless of whether an LED constant current drive circuit is present or not, if an overcurrent that exceeds the maximum allowable current limit for the decorative board on the game board side flows through each LED on the game board 5 or all decorative boards on the game board 5, the +12V fuse (not shown) for all decorative boards on the game board 5 will melt. In this way, a +12V fuse (not shown) is provided on the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted among the decorative boards of the game board 5, and the +12V fuse (not shown) is blown by an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current on the decorative board on the game board side (note that, regardless of whether or not there is an LED constant current drive circuit, if a +12V fuse (not shown) that can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current on the decorative board on the game board side is provided on all decorative boards of the game board 5 to which a +12V power line is supplied, the +12V fuse (not shown) is provided on all decorative boards of the game board 5, and the +12V fuse (not shown) is blown by an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current on the decorative board on the game board side This prevents a drop in the potential of the +12V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or payout control MPU 633aa.The main control MPU 1310a can continue playing without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue paying out game balls (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633 that make up the main board are operating normally, if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in the +12V power lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510, the performance display device 1600, the decorative boards of the gaming board 5, etc., causing a leakage current or a short circuit, and causing an overcurrent to flow in the peripheral control board 1510, the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510, the performance display device 1600, the decorative boards of the gaming board 5, etc., the + Since the 12V fuses are designed to blow, a drop in the potential of the +12V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa.As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can continue playing the game without performing the main control side power-off processing in the main control side power-on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the payout process (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing in the payout control unit power-on processing described below. Furthermore, if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in a board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510, causing a leakage current or a short circuit, an overcurrent will flow in the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510, and an overcurrent will also flow in the peripheral control board 1510, which is the upper board of the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510, causing the +12V fuse (not shown) provided on the peripheral control board 1510 to blow.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and dispensing control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, if an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame drive motor flows to the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 or the +12V driver circuit of the door frame 3 due to an overload or electrical problem for some reason in the +12V power line of each drive board of the door frame 3 while the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 is being driven by the +12V driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3 (or while the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 is waiting to be driven), the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit will blow. The capacity of the +12V fuse of each drive board of the door frame 3 is selected in advance based on the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame drive motor of the +12V driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3. The +12V fuses on each drive board of the door frame 3 are designed to blow if an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame side drive motor flows to the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) or +12V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3, causing the fuse in the +12V system driver circuit to blow, but if an overcurrent continues to flow and exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame side +12V power supply line drive board, the fuse will blow. In this way, a +12V fuse is provided on each drive board of the door frame 3, and a fuse is provided in the +12V driver circuit so that the +12V fuse and the fuse in the +12V driver circuit will blow in the event of an overcurrent. This prevents a drop in the potential of the +12V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and prevents the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 from outputting a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to continue playing without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa to continue paying out game balls (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and dispensing control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, if an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the decorative board on the door frame 3 flows through the +12V power line of each decorative board on the door frame 3 due to the +12V fuse of the decorative board on the door frame 3 that is equipped with an LED constant current drive circuit, the +12V fuse of the decorative board on the door frame 3 will blow. Note that if +12V fuses that can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the decorative board on the door frame 3 are provided for all decorative boards on the door frame 3 that are supplied with a +12V power line, regardless of whether an LED constant current drive circuit is installed, the +12V fuses of all decorative boards on the door frame 3 will blow if an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the decorative board on the door frame 3 flows through the LEDs on the door frame 3 or all decorative boards on the door frame 3. In this way, a +12V fuse is provided on the decorative board on the door frame 3 that has an LED constant current drive circuit mounted thereon, and the +12V fuse is blown by an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the decorative board on the door frame side (note that, regardless of whether an LED constant current drive circuit is present or not, if a +12V fuse that can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the decorative board on the game board side is provided for all decorative boards on the door frame 3 that are supplied with a +12V power line, the +12V fuse is provided on all decorative boards on the door frame 3, and the +12V fuse is blown by an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the decorative board on the door frame side. ), a drop in the potential of the +12V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or payout control MPU 633aa. This means that the main control MPU 1310a can continue playing without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue paying out game balls (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and dispensing control board 633 that make up the main board are operating normally, if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in the +12V power lines of each drive board of the door frame 3, each decorative board of the door frame 3, etc., causing a leakage current or a short circuit in each drive board of the door frame 3, each decorative board of the door frame 3, etc., and an overcurrent flows in each drive board of the door frame 3, each decorative board of the door frame 3, etc., the +12V fuse provided on each board will blow, thereby causing the main control board 1310, dispensing control board 6 By suppressing a drop in the potential of the +12V power line supplied to MPU 633aa, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or payout control MPU 633aa, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue playing without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue paying out game balls (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

[9-1-4b. Overcurrent protection for +24V power line]
In addition, in this embodiment, as an overcurrent protection for the +24V power line, as an overcurrent countermeasure, a +24V fuse (not shown) is provided in the peripheral control board 1510, which is capable of passing current up to the maximum allowable current limit for the +24V power line peripheral control board, a +12V fuse (not shown) is provided in the performance display device 1600 as the master fuse for the performance display device 1600, which is capable of passing current up to the maximum allowable current limit for the master fuse, a +24V fuse (not shown) is provided in the succeeding board of the peripheral control board 1510, which is capable of passing current up to the maximum allowable current limit for the +24V power line performance drive board, and a fuse is provided in the +24V driver circuit (not shown) in the succeeding board of the peripheral control board 1510, which is capable of passing current up to the maximum allowable current limit for the game board side drive solenoid.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and dispensing control board 633 that make up the main board are operating normally, if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in the peripheral control board 1510 itself and/or any subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, causing an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current in the +24V power line of the peripheral control board to flow in the +12V power line of the peripheral control board 1510, the +24V fuse (not shown) in the peripheral control board 1510 will blow. In this way, a +24V fuse (not shown) is provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the +24V fuse (not shown) is blown in the event of an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the peripheral control board's allowable current for the +24V power line. This prevents a drop in the potential of the +24V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and prevents the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 from outputting a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to continue playing without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa to continue paying out game balls (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, and the +24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is being driven by the +24V system driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 on the +24V power line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 (or when the +24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is waiting to be driven), if an overload or electrical trouble occurs for some reason and an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the drive solenoid on the game board side flows to the +24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 or the +24V system driver circuit (not shown), the fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit (not shown) will blow. The +24V fuse (not shown) is designed to blow if an overcurrent continues to flow and exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the +24V power line production drive board, even if the fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit (not shown) blows. In this way, by providing a +24V fuse (not shown) on the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510 and providing a fuse in the +24V driver circuit (not shown), the +24V fuse (not shown) and the fuse in the +24V driver circuit (not shown) are blown in the event of an overcurrent. This prevents a drop in the potential of the +24V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and prevents the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 from outputting a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to continue playing without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa to continue paying out game balls (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and dispensing control board 633 that make up the main board are operating normally, if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in the +24V power line of the peripheral control board 1510, the boards subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510, etc., causing a leakage current or a short circuit, and an overcurrent flows in the peripheral control board 1510, the boards subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510, etc., the +24V fuse (not shown) provided on each board will blow, thereby blowing the power to the main control board. By suppressing a drop in the potential of the +24V power line supplied to the board 1310 and payout control board 633, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or payout control MPU 633aa, allowing the main control MPU 1310a to continue playing without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa to continue paying out game balls (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and dispensing control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, and the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 is being driven by the +24V driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3 (or while the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 is waiting to be driven), if an overload or electrical problem occurs for some reason, causing an overcurrent exceeding the allowable current limit for the door frame side drive solenoid to flow to the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 or the +24V driver circuit, the fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit will blow. The capacity of the +24V fuse of each drive board of the door frame 3 is pre-selected based on the allowable current limit for the door frame side drive solenoid of the +24V driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3. The +24V fuses on each drive board of the door frame 3 are designed to blow if an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame side drive solenoid flows to the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) or +24V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3, causing the fuses in the +24V system driver circuit to blow, but if an overcurrent continues to flow and exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame side +24V power supply line drive board, the fuses in the +24V system driver circuit will blow. In this way, a +24V fuse is provided on each drive board of the door frame 3, and a fuse is provided in the +24V driver circuit so that the +24V fuse and the fuse in the +24V driver circuit will blow in the event of an overcurrent. This prevents a drop in the potential of the +24V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and prevents the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 from outputting a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to continue playing without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa to continue paying out game balls (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and dispensing control board 633 that make up the main board are operating normally, if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in the +24V power lines of each drive board, etc. of the door frame 3, causing a leakage current or a short circuit, and an overcurrent flows in each drive board, etc. of the door frame 3, the +24V fuses provided on each board will blow, thereby blowing out the +24V power lines supplied to the main control board 1310 and dispensing control board 633. By suppressing the drop in the input potential, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or payout control MPU 633aa, allowing the main control MPU 1310a to continue playing without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa to continue paying out (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

[9-2. Circuit of the dispensing control board]
Of the power supplies in the circuits of the dispensing control board 633, the control power supply for the microprocessor, the dispensing control MPU 633aa, is supplied with +5V from the +5V power supply generation circuit 630fa of the power supply generation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630, and the backup power supply supplied to the dispensing control built-in RAM of the dispensing control MPU 633aa is supplied as dispensing VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630.

As shown in Figure 182, the +5V from the +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa of the power supply generating circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 is first input to the payout control filter circuit 633h. This payout control filter circuit 633h is primarily composed of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit that is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The +5V from the +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa of the power supply generating circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 is applied to terminal 1 of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0, its terminal 2 is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and +5V with noise components removed is output from terminal 3. The +5V applied to terminal 1 is electrically connected to one end of capacitor PC0, the other end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), thereby first removing ripple (AC components superimposed on the voltage) and smoothing the voltage.

The +5V output from terminal 3 is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor PC1 and electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), which are electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), thereby further removing ripple and smoothing the voltage. This smoothed +5V is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa. In addition, if a momentary power outage occurs and the power from the gaming hall is cut off, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor PC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the momentary power outage. Furthermore, because the power consumption of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310 is greater than the power consumption of the payout control MPU 633aa provided on the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)) is selected to be greater than the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF)). As a result, in the event of a momentary power outage and power cutoff from the gaming hall, the charges stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 are applied as +5V to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, respectively, for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the momentary power outage.

The VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 633aa is electrically connected to one end of capacitor PC3, the other end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal of diode PD0. The +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed and ripples are further removed by capacitor PC3. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the dispensing control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground).

The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal for the dispensing control built-in RAM of the dispensing control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of diode PD0. The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal for the dispensing control built-in RAM of the dispensing control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to one end of capacitor PC4, the other end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and is also electrically connected to the positive terminal of capacitor BC1 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 via resistor PR0. As a result, while the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal for the dispensing control built-in RAM of the dispensing control MPU 633aa, is supplied with VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 via resistor PR0, diode PD0 prevents VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 from being supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal for the dispensing control MPU 633aa, via resistor PR0.

Among the input signals to the circuit of the dispensing control board 633, for example, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the bulb out detection sensor 574, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, and the signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 are each input to the dispensing control input circuit 633ab.

The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the bulb out detection sensor 574, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, and the signal from the RWM switch 633d are each input via the dispensing control input circuit 633ab to input terminals PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) to PA4 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 633aa. This input port PA is composed of 8 bits.

The power outage warning signal, which is a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input to input terminal PB0 of input port PB of the dispensing control MPU 633aa via the dispensing control input circuit 633ab. Input ports PA and PB are composed of 8 bits. In addition, detection signals from other sensors are input to specified input terminals of input ports PA and PB via the dispensing control input circuit 633ab, and input terminals that become unused terminals are electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground) as an unused terminal processing.

[9-2-1. Payout control input circuit]
Next, the dispensing control input circuit 633ab will be described. Since the dispensing control input circuit 633ab is the same circuit, here, the dispensing control input circuit 633ab to which a signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is input, and the dispensing control input circuit 633ab to which a dispensing power outage warning signal, which is a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input will be described.

First, the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 functions as a RAM clear switch (RAM clear button) that can clear (erase) various information (game information) stored (memorized) in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa on the payout control board 633 and the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on; it also functions as a setting switch button that can select and switch setting values for a predetermined period of time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on; and it also functions as an error reset button that can reset an error that is notified after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

[9-2-1a. Signal from RWM switch]
The RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 has terminals 1 to 4, with terminals 1 and 2 electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633, and terminals 3 and 4 electrically connected. When the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d is not pressed, terminals 1 and 2 and terminals 3 and 4 are not electrically connected in the internal circuit, whereas when the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d is pressed, terminals 1 and 2 and terminals 3 and 4 are electrically connected in the internal circuit, and the internal circuits of terminals 1 and 2 and terminals 3 and 4 are conductive and electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633.

When the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d is not pressed, the signal from the RWM switch 633d does not electrically connect terminals 1 and 2 to terminals 3 and 4 in the internal circuit, whereas when the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d is pressed, the internal circuit between terminals 1 and 2 and terminals 3 and 4 is conductive and electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633.

As shown in FIG. 182, the dispensing control input circuit 633ab, which receives a signal from the RWM switch 633d, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR50, which is electrically connected to the power line (i.e., the +5V power line) generated and supplied by the +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa of the power supply generating circuit 630f, and to the other end of a capacitor PC50, which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor PTR50 via a resistor PR51. The base terminal of transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor PR51 and to the other end of a resistor PR52, which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633. The emitter terminal of transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633. The collector terminal of transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to one end of resistor PR53, the other end of which is electrically connected to a power line (i.e., the +5V power line) created and supplied by the +5V power supply circuit 630fa of the power supply circuit 630f, and is also electrically connected to input terminal PA4 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 633aa. A signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is input as RWM signal 2 to input terminal PA4 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 633aa via the dispensing control input circuit 633ab.

The other end of resistor PR50 and the other end of capacitor PC50 are electrically connected to one end of resistor PR51 (opposite the other end of resistor PR51 electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR50) and are also electrically connected to the payout control output circuit 633ac. The payout control output circuit 633ac is composed of resistors PR60, PR61, and transistor PTR60. The other end of resistor PR50 and the other end of capacitor PC50 are electrically connected to one end of resistor PR51 (opposite the other end of resistor PR51 electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR50) and are also electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR60 via resistor PR60. The base terminal of transistor PTR60 is electrically connected to resistor PR60 and the other end of resistor PR61, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633. The emitter terminal of transistor PTR60 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633. The collector terminal of transistor PTR60 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness) and is electrically connected to the main control input circuit 1310b shown in FIG. 179 (one end of resistor MR2 is electrically connected to the +12V power line (the other end of resistor MR2 is electrically connected to the power line (i.e., the +12V power line) created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f). The signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR60 in the dispensing control output circuit 633ac of the dispensing control board 633 is input to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness) as a main RWM signal.

[9-2-1b. Power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit]
The dispensing control input circuit 633ab, to which a dispensing power failure warning signal, which is a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input, as shown in FIG. 182, is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR40, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line (the power line (i.e., the +12V power line) created and supplied by the +12V power supply creating circuit 630fb of the power supply creating circuit 630f), and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via a resistor PR41. In addition to the resistor PR41, the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR42, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633. The terminal is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR43 electrically connected to the power line (i.e., the +5V power line) generated and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f, and to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the dispensing control MPU 633aa. The dispensing power failure warning signal, which is a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the dispensing control MPU 633aa via the dispensing control input circuit 633ab as power failure warning signal 2. The other end of the resistor PR40 may be electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 in order to adjust the waveform of the dispensing power failure warning signal, which is a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

[10. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game will be described with reference to Fig. 183. Here, an example will be described in which the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 described above is mounted on the main control board 1310, and only the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320. Fig. 183 (a) is a perspective view of the main control board box showing the state before the main control board is attached to the cover body and the base body is slid to cover the opening side of the cover body, and (b) is a perspective view of the main control board box with the cover body and base body sealed by a sealing mechanism.

In pachinko machine 1, main control board 1310 is an important board that controls the progress of the game. For this reason, it is necessary to protect main control board 1310 from those who may tamper with it in order to obtain illegal game balls. Therefore, main control board 1310 is housed in main control board box 1320, which is composed of transparent cover body 1301 and transparent base body 1302, and cover body 1301 and base body 1302 are crimped together with crimping section 1303, which serves as a sealing mechanism, for example, a one-way screw.

This crimping portion 1303 is a sealing mechanism, and multiple crimping portions are provided. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body 1301 and base body 1302 using one sealing mechanism with a one-way screw or the like on the crimping portion 1303. Next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism must be destroyed. In other words, the cover body 1301 cannot be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed.

As described above, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded transparent. The internal space formed by the cover body 1301 and the base body can accommodate the main control board 1310. Because the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are molded transparently from polycarbonate resin, the condition of the mounting surface (front surface) and solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 (whether or not tampering has occurred or whether or not a tampered IC is installed) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Furthermore, the main control board box 1320 is equipped with multiple sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism must be destroyed to open the main control board box 1320, leaving traces of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by checking the traces of opening and closing, unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be detected, providing a strong deterrent against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

To briefly explain how to assemble the main control board box 1320, as shown in Figure 183(a), the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310 is placed facing (facing) the bottom surface of the cover body 1301, with the various connectors MCN1 to MCN8 and portions of the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310 exposed from the corresponding openings formed in the cover body 1301. Next, the main control board 1310 can be fixed in the interior space of the cover body 1301 by inserting fixing screws from the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board into the through holes formed in the four corners of the main control board 1310 and screwing them into the mounting boss holes formed in the four inner corners of the cover body 1301. Next, the base body 1302 is positioned in a predetermined position so as to substantially block the opening of the cover body 1301. The base body 1302 is then slid (movement distance sd) along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301 in a specific direction (the direction of the arrow in the figure) until the outer peripheral surface of the base body 1302 fits within the inner peripheral surface of the cover body 1301, completely blocking the opening of the cover body 1301 and accommodating the main control board 1310 in the space formed by the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302. Next, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are fastened together using a one-way screw or the like at the crimping portion 1303, thereby fixing the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 together and sealing the main control board box 1320 (i.e., the main control board box 1320 can be closed).

The inner wall of the cover body 1301 is formed with a plurality of cover body side ribs 1301rb spaced a predetermined distance apart. These ribs can come into contact with the outer periphery of the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310 when the main control board 1310 is attached to the bottom surface of the cover body 1301. The base body 1302 is also formed with a plurality of base body side ribs 1302rb spaced a predetermined distance apart. These ribs can come into contact with the outer periphery of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, the main control board 1310 is positioned (sandwiched) in the gap (space) formed by the plurality of cover body side ribs 1301rb formed on the cover body 1301 and the plurality of base body side ribs 1302rb formed on the base body 1302.

The base body 1302 also has a protrusion 1302p formed thereon that can come into contact with the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310. When a setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a, the force of the insertion causes the main control board 1310 to bend and warp. By coming into contact with the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310, this prevents the main control board 1310 from bending and warping any further, thereby preventing breaks in the wiring pattern formed on the main control board 1310 and peeling of the solder.

[11. Setting key switch]
Next, the setting key switch 1311a will be described with reference to Fig. 184. Fig. 184(a) is a perspective view of the setting key switch as seen from the diagonal front right, Fig. 184(b) is a perspective view of the setting key switch as seen from the diagonal front left, and Fig. 184(c) is a top view of the setting key switch. Here, an example will be described in which the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 described above is mounted on the main control board 1310.

The setting key switch 1311a comes in two types: one in which a resin setting key cylinder is housed inside a resin outer tube, into which a setting key is inserted and turned (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "resin type setting key switch 1311a"), and one in which a metal setting key cylinder is housed inside a metal cylindrical outer tube, into which a setting key is inserted and turned (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "metal type setting key switch 1311a"). The resin type setting key switch 1311a and the metal type setting key switch 1311a have the same structure, but are made of some different materials.

[11-1. Resin type setting key switch]
As shown in Figures 184(a) and (b), the resin type setting key switch 1311a is composed of a cylindrical outer tube 1311aa made of non-conductive resin, a setting key cylinder 1311ab made of non-conductive resin into which a setting key is inserted and turned, a rectangular parallelepiped base body 1311ac made of non-conductive resin that is connected to the outer tube 1311aa and in which a circuit is formed that turns a contact point on or off by turning the setting key cylinder 1311ab, and a metal frame plate 1311ad that has a hole penetrating the outer tube 1311aa at a position corresponding to the outer tube 1311aa, is bent so as to cover the surface and side of the base body 1311ac, and has a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed on both side surfaces (front and rear surfaces in the figure) that protrude rearward from the base body 1311ac.

The front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa is arranged substantially flush with the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. A socket 1311aba for inserting a metal setting key is provided on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. As shown in Figure 184(c), when the rotational position of the setting key cylinder 1311ab is in the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa (i.e., when the setting key is ready to be inserted into the socket 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., when the length of the rectangular socket 1311aba is aligned vertically)), the metal setting key can be inserted into and removed from the socket 1311aba. The base body 1311ac has two brass lead terminals formed on both sides (the right and left sides in the figure) at a predetermined distance from the side surfaces rotated 90 degrees from a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed on the frame plate 1311ad.

In the figure, the COM1 terminal, which is the upper lead terminal on the left side, and the COM2 terminal, which is the lower lead terminal on the left side, are common terminals, and either one or both terminals can be used. When the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated to the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa, the A terminal, which is the upper lead terminal on the right side, and the B terminal, which is the lower lead terminal on the right side, are electrically connected to the COM1 and COM2 terminals and the A terminal for conduction by a circuit formed on the base body 1311ac, and the COM1 and COM2 terminals and the B terminal for electrical disconnection (thereby, the setting key of the setting key switch 1311a (An ON signal is transmitted from the setting key switch 1311a.) Meanwhile, when the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees from the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa, the circuit formed on the base body 1311ac electrically disconnects the COM1 and COM2 terminals from the A terminal, and electrically connects the COM1 and COM2 terminals to the B terminal, establishing conduction (thereby transmitting an ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a). Note that the distance between the COM1 and COM2 terminals is the same as the distance between the A and B terminals.

A pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada extending from the metal frame plate 1311ad to the rear of the base body 1311ac are soldered to the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310, thereby securing the setting key switch 1311a to the main control board 1310. The A terminal, B terminal, COM1 terminal, and COM2 terminal of the base body 1311ac are soldered to the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310. A cylindrical protrusion (not shown) is formed on the back surface of the base body 1311ac to specify the orientation of the setting key switch 1311a so that when the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310, the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa faces upward as shown in the figure. This cylindrical protrusion prevents the setting key switch 1311a from being soldered upside down (by mistake) when a worker at the manufacturer mounts the setting key switch 1311a on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310.

When a metal setting key is inserted into the socket 1311aba formed on the front of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, even if electromagnetic noise enters through this metal setting key, as described above, the resin-type setting key switch 1311a has an outer cylinder 1311aa, setting key cylinder 1311ab, and base body 1311ac molded from non-conductive resin, so there is no effect on the A terminal, B terminal, COM1 terminal, and COM2 terminal.

[11-2. Metal type setting key switch]
Next, the metal-type setting key switch 1311a has the same configuration as the resin-type setting key switch 1311a described above, with the exception that the metal-type setting key switch 1311a is made of different materials, including a cylindrical metal outer tube 1311aa and a metal setting key cylinder 1311ab into which a setting key is inserted and rotated. The outer tube 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are molded from metal, and the outer tube 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are electrically connected. The outer tube 1311aa is connected to a non-conductive resin base body 1311ac, and a metal frame plate 1311ad has holes penetrating the outer tube 1311aa at positions corresponding to the outer tube 1311aa, covering the surface and sides of the base body 1311ac. In other words, when a metal setting key is inserted into the socket 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, if electromagnetic noise enters through this metal setting key, there is a risk that the electromagnetic noise will enter the metal frame plate 1311ad, since, as described above, the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are electrically connected.

[11-3. Relationship between the setting key switch and the cover of the main control board box]
Here, the relationship between the setting key switch 1311a and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 will be described with reference to Fig. 185. Fig. 185 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the setting key switch and the cover body of the main control board box.

As mentioned above, the front of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a has an insertion port 1311aba for inserting a metal setting key. When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., the front surface of the outer tube 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) is exposed from the cover body 1301 of the main control board box, so that, as shown in FIG. 185, the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 is formed with a tubular rib portion 1301za (the thickness of the tubular rib portion 1301za is the same as the thickness of the cover body 1301) having a predetermined distance dimension toward the main control board 1310 along the inner circumference of a through hole 1301z having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the setting key cylinder 1311ab (for example, a diameter 2 mm larger than the outer diameter of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) at a position corresponding to the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a. The inner periphery of the through hole 1301z and the inner periphery of the tubular rib portion 1301za are connected to form the same inner circumferential surface without any steps. This means that the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) and the surface (front surface) of the main control board box cover body 1301 are arranged on the same plane (flush).

Because through-hole 1301z is also the area where the fingers or fists of someone accessing setting key switch 1311a come into contact, rib portion 1301za is designed to increase the strength of the area around through-hole 1301z. This prevents a person from pushing around the area of through-hole 1301z with force, bending the area around through-hole 1301z and widening the gap between through-hole 1301z and setting key cylinder 1311ab, or damaging the area around through-hole 1301z and increasing the outer diameter of through-hole 1301z, widening the gap between through-hole 1301z and setting key cylinder 1311ab. Therefore, even if a person attempting to illegally access setting key switch 1311a intentionally pushes their finger or fist around through-hole 1301z, this helps prevent the insertion of a thin, unauthorized tool such as a wire into the gap between through-hole 1301z and setting key cylinder 1311ab.

The diameter of the through-hole 1301z is designed to fit within the rectangular surface shape of the rectangular base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a. The end of the rib portion 1301za is separated from the surface of the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a by a distance d1 (approximately 2 mm in this embodiment), preventing direct contact with the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a by anyone accessing the setting key switch 1311a.

As a result, even if a thin, tamper-evident tool such as a wire is inserted into the "gap" (in this embodiment, the diameter of the through-hole 1301z is 2 mm larger than the outer diameter of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, resulting in a 1 mm gap) between the through-hole 1301z and rib portion 1310za of the cover body 1301 and the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, the diameter of the through-hole 1301z is formed to fit within the rectangular surface shape of the base body 1311ac, which has a rectangular parallelepiped shape, of the setting key switch 1311a. Therefore, the tip of the thin, tamper-evident tool will hit the surface of the base body 1311ac and bend, preventing it from penetrating toward the main control board 1310. In other words, tampering with the main control board 1310 can be prevented.

In addition, as mentioned above, in the resin type setting key switch 1311a, the outer tube 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are each molded from non-conductive resin, so even if a person with static electricity approaches or touches the front of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., the front of the outer tube 1311aa and the front of the setting key cylinder 1311ab), electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge can be prevented from entering the main control board 1310 via the setting key switch 1311a. Furthermore, the end of the rib portion 1301za formed along the outer periphery of the through hole 1301z in the non-conductive resin cover body 1301 is separated from the surface of the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a by a distance d1 (approximately 2 mm in this embodiment). Therefore, even if a person carrying static electricity approaches or touches the through hole 1301z or its surrounding area in the non-conductive resin cover body 1301, electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge is unlikely to penetrate the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a via the through hole 1301z and rib portion 1301za, and therefore can be prevented from penetrating into the main control board 1310 via the setting key switch 1311a.

In the metal-type setting key switch 1311a, as described above, the outer tube 1311aa and setting key cylinder 1311ab are molded from metal, and the outer tube 1311aa and setting key cylinder 1311ab are electrically connected. The outer tube 1311aa is connected to a non-conductive resin base body 1311ac, but the metal frame plate 1311ad has holes that pass through the outer tube 1311aa at positions corresponding to the outer tube 1311aa and covers the surface and sides of the base body 1311ac. In other words, if a person with static electricity approaches or touches the through-hole 1301z or its surrounding area in the non-conductive resin cover body 1301, electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge may enter the metal frame plate 1311ad because the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are electrically connected. Therefore, if a person with static electricity approaches or touches the through-hole 1301z or its surrounding area in the non-conductive resin cover body 1301, electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge may enter the metal frame plate 1311ad and then enter the main control board 1310 via the setting key switch 1311a.

In addition, since the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., the front surface of the outer tube 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) and the surface (front surface) of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box are arranged on the same plane (flush), when a worker attaches the game board 5 to the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 installed in the island equipment of an amusement hall, the worker first temporarily places the game board 5 on the front surface or around it. Therefore, if the worker accidentally hits this temporarily placed game board 5 with his/her leg during work and causes it to fall over, the setting key switch 1311a can be prevented from colliding with the floor and being damaged. Furthermore, because the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) and the surface (front surface) of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box are arranged on the same plane (flush), even when removing the game board 5 from the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1, the removed game board 5 is temporarily placed in front of or around the pachinko machine 1, so if the worker accidentally hits the temporarily placed game board 5 with their leg during the work and causes it to fall over, it is possible to prevent the setting key switch 1311a from colliding with the floor and being damaged.

In addition, since the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) and the surface (front surface) of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box are arranged on the same plane (flush), a protective cover (made of polycarbonate resin and molded transparent) may be provided on the cover body 1301 to protect the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab).

[11-4. Relationship between the setting key switch and the base body of the main control board box]
The relationship between the setting key switch 1311a and the base body 1302 of the main control board box 1320 will now be described with reference to Figures 185 to 187. Figure 186 (a) is a diagram showing the mounting surface (front side) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted, (b) is a diagram (part 1) showing the mounting surface (front side) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted and the corresponding soldering surface (back side) of the main control board, and (c) is a diagram (part 2) showing the mounting surface (front side) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted and the corresponding soldering surface (back side) of the main control board. Figure 187 is a continuation of Figure 186, and is (part 3) (d) a diagram showing the mounting surface (front side) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted and the corresponding soldering surface (back side) of the main control board, and (part 4) (e) is a diagram showing the mounting surface (front side) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted and the corresponding soldering surface (back side) of the main control board.

When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, as described above, the main control board 1310 is positioned (sandwiched) in the gap (space) formed by the cover body side ribs 1301rb formed in multiple positions on the cover body 1301 and the base body side ribs 1302rb formed in multiple positions on the base body 1302. Furthermore, as described above, the base body 1302 is formed with a protrusion 1302p that can come into contact with the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310. When a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, if the force of the insertion causes the main control board 1310 to bend and warp, the protrusion 1302p comes into contact with the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310, preventing the main control board 1310 from bending and warping any further, and preventing breaks in the wiring pattern formed on the main control board 1310 and peeling of the solder.

When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 and no metal setting key is inserted into the socket 1311aba formed on the front of the setting key cylinder 1311ab (or when the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on, and then the hand is released from the setting key to release the pressure from the setting key), as shown in FIG. 185, the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 and the front surface of the protrusion 1302p are separated by a clearance distance d2 (approximately 1 mm in this embodiment), and when the setting key cylinder 1311ab is not pressed, there is no contact between the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 and the front surface of the protrusion 1302p.

The protrusion 1302p is either cylindrical or has a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 (in this embodiment, the constant width is the same as the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 1302p). Here, we will first explain how to route the wiring pattern to the setting key switch 1311a, and then explain the cylindrical protrusion 1302p and the protrusion 1302p with a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302.

[11-4-1. Wiring to the setting key switch 1311a]
186(a), the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on a mounting surface (surface) 1310x near the bottom edge of the main control board 1310 so that the side of a rectangular parallelepiped base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a (the side opposite to the side below the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa) is parallel to the bottom edge of the main control board 1310. In other words, the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x so that the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa faces the top edge of the main control board 1310.

Specifically, long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 (hereinafter simply referred to as "long through holes SLH1 and SLH2") are formed in the vertical direction of the main control board 1310. These long through holes have a pair of opposing lands that are elongated along the left-right direction (longitudinal direction) of the main control board 1310, through which a pair of protrusions 1311ada and 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted. Furthermore, two lead terminals, A terminal and B terminal, formed on the right side of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted. Through holes SLTH1, SLTH2 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "through holes SLTH1, SLTH2") have a pair of lands through which the COM1 terminal and COM2 terminal, two lead terminals formed on the left side of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a, can be inserted, and through holes SLTH3, SLTH4 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "through holes SLTH3, SLTH4") have a pair of lands through which the COM1 terminal and COM2 terminal, two lead terminals formed on the left side of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a, can be inserted. These are each formed on the main control board 1310 at a 90-degree rotation angle with the pair of opposing long through holes SLH1, SLH2.

In addition, a through hole SSTD, which can be used to insert a cylindrical protrusion (not shown) that specifies the orientation of the setting key switch 1311a and is provided on the back side of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a, is formed on the left-right center line of the setting key switch 1311a when the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, within the area surrounded by through holes SLTH1, SLTH2, SLTH3, SLTH4 and long through holes SLH1, SLH2.

As shown in Figure 186(b), for example, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, a vertical straight wiring pattern SPTN1 is formed by running in a straight line along the vertical direction of the main control board 1310. The vertical straight wiring pattern SPTN1 electrically connects the through hole SLTH4, through which the COM2 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, to the through hole SLTH3, through which the COM1 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered. In other words, because the vertical straight wiring pattern SPTN1 is run in a straight line from through hole SLTH4 to through hole SLTH4, its length is the minimum length.

In addition, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, a horizontal straight wiring pattern SPTN2 is formed in a straight line along the left-right direction (longitudinal direction) of the main control board. The horizontal straight wiring pattern SPTN2 electrically connects the through hole SLTH3, through which the COM1 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, to the through hole SLTH1, through which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered. In other words, the horizontal straight wiring pattern SPTN2 is routed in a straight line from the through hole SLTH3 to the through hole SLTH1, parallel to the bottom edge of the main control board 1310, and therefore its length is the minimum length.

In addition, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, a through-hole SLTH1 through which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered is formed, and a bent wiring pattern SPTN3 is formed by being bent in multiple directions up, down, left, and right on the main control board 1310. The bent wiring pattern SPTN3 electrically connects the main control input circuit 1310b shown in FIG. 179 (one end of the resistor MR10 electrically connected to the +5V power line on the main control board, or the other end of the capacitor MC10 electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground)).

Furthermore, the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 does not have any wiring patterns electrically connected to the through hole SLTH2 through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, and is electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

The various wiring patterns that form the setting signal transmission path extending from the through-hole SLTH1, through which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, to the specified input terminal of the main control MPU 1310a (input terminal PA5 of input port PA), are formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. In other words, the setting signal transmission path does not include through-holes that electrically connect the various wiring patterns on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y, so that even if the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is visible, it is not possible to know how the wiring patterns electrically connected to the various terminals of the setting key switch 1311a are routed.

Furthermore, as described above, the main control board 1310 is attached to the bottom surface of the cover body 1301 and fixed in the interior space of the cover body 1301. The base body 1302 is positioned in a predetermined position so as to substantially block the opening side of the cover body 1301, and the base body 1302 is slid in a specific direction along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301 (movement distance dimension sd) to completely block the opening side of the cover body 1301. Therefore, when the base body 1302 slides in a specific direction along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301, the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 also slides in the specific direction together with the base body 1302. During this sliding movement, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p may come into contact with and rub against the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, potentially damaging the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Therefore, various wiring patterns are arranged so that they are not routed in or around the area where the protrusion 1302p slides. In other words, the various wiring patterns are routed so that the protrusion 1302p does not cross over the various wiring patterns when it slides. This prevents the various wiring patterns from being damaged by the sliding protrusion 1302p when assembling the main control board box 1320.

On the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the copper foil has been removed around the through-hole SLTH4 into which the COM2 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, the through-hole SLTH3 into which the COM1 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, and the through-hole SLTH1 into which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered. The copper foil has also been removed around the various wiring patterns that form the setting signal transmission paths (e.g., the vertical straight wiring pattern SPTN1, the horizontal straight wiring pattern SPTN2, the curved wiring pattern SPTN3, etc.), and the copper foil has been removed around the through-hole SSTD into which a cylindrical protrusion (not shown) that specifies the orientation of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted.

In contrast, the copper foil is removed from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 approximately around the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2, and thermal patterns (cross-shaped patterns) are formed in the areas at both ends of each long hole in the longitudinal direction. The thermal patterns (cross-shaped patterns) electrically connect the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 to the solid ground (board ground) on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solid ground (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Additionally, the copper foil surrounding the through-hole SLTH2, into which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, is removed from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and a thermal pattern (cross-shaped pattern) is formed. The thermal pattern (cross-shaped pattern) electrically connects the through-hole SLTH2 to the solid ground (board ground) on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solid ground (board ground) on the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

As shown in Figures 186(a) and 186(b), the entire mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and soldering surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are provided with various through holes (for example, through holes into which lead terminals of electronic components are inserted and soldered to the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y, through holes that electrically connect the wiring patterns of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y, and through holes that connect the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solid ground (GND) of the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y). Except for certain through-holes (for example, through-holes electrically connecting the wiring patterns of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y) among the through-holes electrically connecting the wiring patterns of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y (board ground), and those for fixing electronic components), a thin copper layer (copper plane) on which various wiring patterns and various through-holes are formed is coated with an insulating resist liquid of a predetermined color (green in this embodiment) to form a mounting surface-side insulating coating 1310xr and a solder surface-side insulating coating 1310yr. Furthermore, on the mounting surface-side insulating coating 1310xr, an area SSLKSW1 indicating the position where the setting key switch 1311a will be placed is printed as a silk screen print with a solid line using insulating paint of a color (white in this embodiment) different from the predetermined color of the resist liquid. Instead of green, the color of the resist liquid may be red, yellow, orange, blue, white, or black, and the color of the silk-screen paint may be any of green, red, yellow, orange, blue, white, or black, as long as it is different from the color of the resist liquid.

The size of area SSLKSW1 is larger than the outline of the setting key switch 1311a, and when the setting key switch 1311a is placed and mounted in area SSLKSW1 (soldered on the solder surface (backside) 1310y of the main control board 1310), the lines of area SSLKSW1 (solid lines in a square) are positioned outside the outline of the setting key switch 1311a. In other words, even when the setting key switch 1311a is mounted, the lines of area SSLKSW1 (solid lines in a square) do not overlap with the lines of area SSLKSW1.

[11-4-2. Cylindrical protrusion]
If the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 has a cylindrical shape, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p will be circular. As described above, the distance between the COM1 terminal and the COM2 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is the same as the distance between the A terminal and the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a. The outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 1302p is smaller than half the distance between the A and B terminals of the setting key switch 1311a, and even if the front surface of the sliding protrusion 1302p comes into contact (abuts) with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 during the work of assembling the main control board box 1320, the front surface of the sliding protrusion 1302p will not come into contact with the land of the through hole SLTH1 through which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, or the land of the through hole SLTH2 through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered.

When a metal setting key is inserted into the socket 1311aba formed on the front of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, the force of the insertion causes the main control board 1310 to bend and deflect, resulting in the front of the circular protrusion 1302p coming into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. When the front surface of the circular protrusion 1302p comes into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr, which is formed by applying an insulating resist liquid of a specific color (green in this embodiment) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, is rubbed by the front surface of the protrusion 1302p, scraping off the solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr and potentially damaging the solid ground (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 186(b), a circular foil cutout area SINSy where the copper foil has been removed is formed in and around the area of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p abuts. This prevents damage to the solid ground (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 by the protrusion 1302p, even if the solder surface insulating coating 1310yr is scraped off by the protrusion 1302p. The circular foil cutout area SINSy where the copper foil has been removed makes safe and effective use of the limited board area.

When assembling the main control board box 1320, as described above, it is necessary to slide the base body 1302 in a specific direction (movement distance sd) along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301. At this time, the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 also slides in the specific direction (movement distance sd) together with the base body 1302.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 186(c), a foil cutout area SINSy having an elongated hole-like shape where the copper foil has been cut out may be formed in and around the area where the protrusion 1302p slides. This prevents damage to the solid ground (board ground) on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 by the protrusion 1302p as it slides (movement distance dimension sd) during assembly of the main control board box 1320. The foil cutout area SINSy having an elongated hole-like shape where the copper foil has been cut out safely and effectively utilizes the limited board area.

[11-4-3. Protrusions having a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body]
When the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 has a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 (in this embodiment, the constant width is the same as the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 1302p), the front surface of the protrusion 1302p is a long rectangle along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302. Note that both ends of the front surface of the protrusion 1302p, which has a long rectangular shape along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302, are rounded to give it a circular shape. As described above, the distance between the COM1 and COM2 terminals of the setting key switch 1311a and the distance between the A and B terminals of the setting key switch 1311a are the same. The outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 1302p is smaller than half the distance between the A and B terminals of the setting key switch 1311a, and even if the front surface of the sliding protrusion 1302p comes into contact (abuts) with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 during the work of assembling the main control board box 1320, the front surface of the sliding protrusion 1302p will not come into contact with the land of the through hole SLTH1 through which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, or the land of the through hole SLTH2 through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered.

When a metal setting key is inserted into the socket 1311aba formed on the front of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, the force of the insertion causes the main control board 1310 to bend and deflect, resulting in the front of the protrusion 1302p, which has a long rectangular shape along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302, coming into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. When the front surface of the protrusion 1302p, which has a long rectangular shape along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302, comes into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr, which is formed by applying an insulating resist liquid of a specific color (green in this embodiment) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, is rubbed by the front surface of the protrusion 1302p, scraping off the solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr and potentially damaging the solid ground (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 187(d), in and around the area of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p abuts, a foil cutout area SINSy is formed, which has been cut out of the copper foil and has a long rectangular shape along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302. Both ends of the foil cutout area SINSy have rounded sections, giving it a circular shape. This prevents damage to the solid ground (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 by the protrusion 1302p, even if the solder surface insulating coating 1310yr is scraped off by the protrusion 1302p. The foil cutout area SINSy, which has been cut out of the copper foil and has a long rectangular shape along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302, safely and effectively utilizes the limited board area.

When assembling the main control board box 1320, as described above, it is necessary to slide the base body 1302 in a specific direction along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301. At this time, the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 also slides in the specific direction together with the base body 1302.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 187(e), a foil cutout area SINSy having an elongated hole-like shape where the copper foil has been cut out may be formed in and around the area where the protrusion 1302p slides. This prevents damage to the solid ground (board ground) on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 by the protrusion 1302p as it slides (movement distance dimension sd) during assembly of the main control board box 1320. The foil cutout area SINSy having an elongated hole-like shape where the copper foil has been cut out safely and effectively utilizes the limited board area.

[11-5. Notification of the location of the RWM switch used to change settings]
The main control board 1310 on which the setting key switch 1311a is mounted is housed in a main control board box 1320, and this main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 of the game board 5. In contrast, the payout control board 633 on which the RWM switch 633d (which may also be the RAM clear switch 1310f) is mounted is housed in a payout control board box 632, and this payout control board box 632 is attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 of the board unit 620 of the main frame 4. In this way, by arranging the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d on separate boards and by arranging the boards to be attached to different targets, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d can be spaced apart. If the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d are arranged together on a single board, unauthorized tampering would only require one board, which is undesirable from a security standpoint. Therefore, in this embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d are placed on separate boards, and a configuration is adopted in which the boards are attached to different objects, thereby improving the security of the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d.

The main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) controls game preparation and game play (game control follows game preparation control). Game preparation control consists of a first process (determination of step S14 and processing of step S16A in the main control side power-on processing described below) that enables setting values to be changed based on a signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310. Following this first process, a second process (determination of step S216 and processing of step S218 in the setting change processing described below) that selects and switches setting values based on a signal from the RWM switch 633d on the payout control board 633 (which functions as a setting switch button for selecting and switching setting values). Following game preparation control, game control consists of main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing described below and main control side timer interrupt processing described below.

While this improves security, by placing the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d on separate boards and adopting a configuration in which the boards are attached to different objects, the setting key switch 1311a is housed in the main control board box 1320, so there is no need to specifically communicate where the setting key switch 1311a is located. However, it may be difficult for the amusement hall manager, amusement hall staff, or other staff to know where the RWM switch 633d, which also functions as a setting change button, is located, as they may be unfamiliar with this.

In this embodiment, therefore, the main control board box 1320 is provided with location information indicating the location of the RWM switch 633d. Specifically, a sticker (not shown) indicating the location of the RWM switch 633d is affixed to the cover 1301 of the main control board box 1320. This sticker is a transparent rectangular sheet, and for example, the following text is printed on this rectangular sheet in translucent red letters (height: 7 mm): "The RWM switch (setting switch button) is located on the payout control board." This allows the location of the RWM switch 633d (setting switch button) to be communicated to the amusement hall manager, amusement hall staff, or other staff member. Therefore, the amusement hall manager, amusement hall staff, or other staff member can easily find the RWM switch 633d when operating it, thereby avoiding dizziness. Therefore, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily determined.

Note that this sticker, even when affixed to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, does not impede the visibility of the main control board 1310. Also, instead of letters printed on the rectangular sheet of this sticker, symbols such as arrows may be used.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d. However, instead of this, when molding the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, concave or convex letters may also be molded in (in other words, the cover body 1301 and the letters may be molded as a single unit). Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily determined.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as location information that could communicate the location of the RWM switch 633d. However, instead of this, the letters (height: 7 mm) "The RWM switch (setting change button) is located on the dispensing control board" could be silk-screened in white on the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310, or the letters (height: 7 mm) "RWM switch (setting change button)" could be silk-screened in white on the mounting surface (surface) of the dispensing control board 633. The silk-screen printing may be the same color or different colors. Furthermore, instead of silk-screened letters, a symbol such as an arrow could be used. This configuration also makes it easy to determine the location of the RWM switch 633d.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as location information that could communicate the location of the RWM switch 633d. However, instead of this, the text may be masked on the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310 and cut-out letters (height: 7 mm) reading "The RWM switch (setting change button) is located on the dispensing control board" may be formed using resist, or the text may be masked on the mounting surface (surface) of the dispensing control board 633 and cut-out letters (height: 7 mm) reading "RWM switch (setting change button)" may be formed using resist. The resist may be the same color, but different colors are preferable to distinguish the boards. Furthermore, instead of cut-out letters, a cut-out symbol such as an arrow may be used. This configuration also makes it easy to determine the location of the RWM switch 633d.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d. However, instead of this, a similar sticker (this sticker is a transparent rectangular sheet on which, for example, the words "The RWM switch (setting change button) is located on the dispensing control board" are printed in red translucent letters (height: 7 mm)) can be affixed to the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310, or a transparent rectangular sheet with the words "RWM switch (setting change button)" in red translucent letters (height: 7 mm) can be affixed to the mounting surface (surface) of the dispensing control board 633. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily determined.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as location information that could convey the location of the RWM switch 633d, but instead, an announcement may be made from various speakers to inform people of where the RWM switch 633d is located, or an announcement image may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, an attendant such as the amusement hall manager or an amusement hall staff member operates the effect operation section 301 of the effect operation unit 300 to display various setting screens on the effect display device 1600 and select an item regarding the location of the RWM switch 633d (setting switch button). As a result, an audio announcement is played from various speakers to inform users of the location of the RWM switch 633d, saying, "The RWM switch is located on the payout control board. The RWM switch also serves as a setting change button," and an image announcement (which may be a photograph) indicating the location of the RWM switch 633d is displayed on the effect display device 1600. After determining the location of the RWM switch 633d from this audio and image announcement, the amusement hall manager, amusement hall staff member, or other attendant can shut off the power to the pachinko machine 1 and smoothly change the setting value. This configuration also makes it easy to find the location of the RWM switch 633d.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as location information that could communicate the location of the RWM switch 633d. However, instead, when changing the setting value, an announcement may be played from various speakers to inform the user of the location of the RWM switch 633d, which also functions as a setting change button. Specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process that can change or determine the setting value, a predetermined command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 controls the device to repeatedly announce from various speakers where the RWM switch 633d is located, such as, "The RWM switch is on the payout control board. The RWM switch also functions as a setting change button. Please operate the RWM switch to change the setting value." When the main control MPU 1310a completes the setting change process, it sends a specified command to the peripheral control board 1510, which causes the peripheral control board 1510 to stop the audio announcement and proceed with various processes (such as proceeding with a performance or a performance showing a customer waiting state (demo performance)) based on the received specified command. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily determined. Following this audio announcement, an audio announcement may be played from the various speakers to explain how to operate the setting keys after the setting value has been determined. Additionally, while the audio announcement is being played, an image saying "Setting in progress" may be displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In the above-described embodiment, a sticker was attached to the cover 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as location information indicating the location of the RWM switch 633d. In addition, when changing the setting value, an audio announcement may be played from various speakers to indicate the location of the RWM switch 633d, which also functions as a setting change button. Specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to change the setting value, a predetermined command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 then controls the device to repeatedly play an audio announcement from various speakers to indicate the location of the RWM switch 633d: "The RWM switch is located on the payout control board. The RWM switch also functions as a setting change button. Please operate the RWM switch to change the setting value." This eliminates the need to search for the sticker attached to the cover 1301 of the main control board box 1320. Although such audio announcements are repeatedly played from the various speakers, in case the content of the announcement is missed, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be determined by visually checking the sticker attached to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 before the next audio announcement begins. In addition to the audio announcement saying, "The RWM switch is located on the dispensing control board. The RWM switch also serves as a setting change button. Please operate the RWM switch to change the setting value," the audio announcement may also include information indicating the location of the sticker indicating the location of the RWM switch. When the RWM switch is operated, the main control MPU 1310a sends a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510, which causes the peripheral control board 1510 to stop the audio announcement. Even if the person changing the setting values becomes accustomed to changing the setting values and finds the sound annoying, they can quickly stop the audio announcement by operating the RWM switch immediately after starting the work. Furthermore, even if the work needs to be performed after the amusement hall has opened for business, operating the RWM switch immediately after starting the work can quickly stop the audio announcement so as not to inconvenience players. Following this audio announcement, an audio announcement explaining how to operate the setting keys after the setting values have been determined may be played from the various speakers. While the audio announcement is being played, an image that reads "Setting in Progress" may also be displayed on the performance display device 1600.

[11-6. Procedures for changing setting values and procedures for confirming and displaying setting values]
Next, we will briefly explain the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310, the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633, and the base monitor 1310h mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310, which also functions as a setting display. Here, we will first briefly explain how to change the setting value, and then how to display and confirm the current setting value. Note that the setting key is an important key that can be used to change the setting value as well as check the current setting value, so only a limited number of people, including the arcade manager, are permitted to possess it, and it is limited to two to three people.

When changing the setting value, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main frame 4 must be opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key must be inserted into the socket 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310, the setting key cylinder 1311ab must be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON, turning the setting key switch 1311a to setting key ON, and the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 must be operated, thereby meeting the ``predetermined setting value change permission conditions.'' In other words, the person actually changing the setting value must first make sure that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert a metal setting key into the socket 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and turn it on by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise to turn the setting key switch 1311a on, and then operate the power switch 630a while operating the pressing section of the RWM switch 633d to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1.

The person changing the setting value must first ensure that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert a metal setting key into the socket 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and turn the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it on, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to setting key ON. Next, while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1. This inputs a setting key ON signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM on the base monitor 1310h, which also functions as a setting display.

As described above, the base monitor 1310h is configured with a row of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) and can display numerical values of up to six digits. When the base monitor 1310h functions as a setting display, the setting value may be displayed on the rightmost 7-segment LED display of the six 7-segment LED displays (i.e., the single digit that displays the ones digit of the six digits) (in this case, the dot may be lit or extinguished. If the dot also functions as a setting change permission lamp, it may be lit when a setting change is being made and extinguished when the setting change is complete). Or, the setting value may be displayed on one, multiple, or all of the six 7-segment LED displays (in this case, the dot may be lit or extinguished. If the dot also functions as a setting change permission lamp, it may be lit when a setting change is being made and extinguished when the setting change is complete).

When a person changing the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633, a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input from the dispensing control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Each time a person changing the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d, the main control MPU 1310a increases the current setting value by one based on the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d. When it reaches the maximum setting value of 6, it returns to the initial setting value of 1, and then increases by one again, displaying the setting value on the base monitor 1310h, which also functions as a setting display.

When changing a setting value, the person who decides on the setting value turns off the setting key switch 1311a by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This setting key OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by the setting change in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, switches the setting value on the base monitor 1310h, which also functions as a setting display device, from a state in which it is displayed to a state in which it is not displayed, and then, or immediately thereafter, controls the base monitor 1310h to display the number (total number) of game balls collected by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 from a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a. In other words, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so that it returns from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the Enter key is pressed to its original position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This fulfills the "predetermined setting value change termination condition" of turning the setting key switch 1311a OFF, thereby ending the period during which the setting value can be changed (the period during which the setting value can be changed).

The person changing the setting value removes the metal setting key from the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and completes the setting value change procedure.

To display and confirm the currently set setting value, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main frame 4 must be opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key must be inserted into the socket 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder 1311ab must be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON, turning the setting key switch 1311a to setting key ON, and the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d must not be operated, thereby meeting the ``predetermined setting value display permission conditions.'' In other words, a person who actually checks and displays the currently set setting value must first make sure that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert a metal setting key into the socket 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and turn it on by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise to turn the setting key switch 1311a on, and then operate the power switch 630a to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 without operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d.

A person checking and displaying the currently set setting values first checks that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then opens the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then inserts a metal setting key into the socket 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and turns the setting key cylinder ON by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise. Next, without operating the pressing portion of the RWM switch 633d, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1. This inputs a setting key ON signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM on the base monitor 1310h, which also functions as a setting display. At this time, even if a person wishing to check and display the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation section of the RWM switch 633d, the setting value will not change at all in response to this pressing operation, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310g will not change either.

As mentioned above, the base monitor 1310h is composed of a row of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots), and is capable of displaying numbers up to six digits. When the base monitor 1310h functions as a setting display, the setting value may be displayed on the rightmost 7-segment LED display of the six 7-segment LED displays arranged in a row (i.e., the single digit that displays the ones digit of the six digits) (in this case, the dot may be lit or extinguished. If the dot also functions as a setting change permission lamp, it may be lit when the currently set setting value is being confirmed and extinguished when confirmation of the currently set setting value is complete).), or the setting value may be displayed on one, multiple, or all of the six 7-segment LED displays arranged in a row (in this case, the dot may be lit or extinguished. If the dot also functions as a setting change permission lamp, it may be lit when the currently set setting value is being confirmed and extinguished when confirmation of the currently set setting value is complete).

Once the person checking and displaying the currently set setting values has finished checking the currently set setting values, they turn the setting key switch 1311a OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This setting key OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches the base monitor 1310h, which also functions as a setting display device, from a state in which the setting values are displayed to a state in which they are not displayed, and then, or immediately afterwards, controls the base monitor 1310h to display, from a specific area of RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, the number (total number) of game balls collected through the outlet 1008 located in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5.

The person who wishes to check and display the currently set value removes the metal setting key from the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and completes the process of checking and displaying the currently set value.

As mentioned above, the predetermined conditions for allowing changes to the setting values are that when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned ON by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise, and the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d is operated. In contrast, the predetermined conditions for allowing the display of setting values are, as described above, that when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the socket 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON, thereby turning the setting key ON, and the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d is not operated. Thus, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the predetermined setting value display permission condition share a common requirement in that, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned ON by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise. However, they differ in that the predetermined setting value change permission condition requires that "the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage," while the predetermined setting value display permission condition requires that "the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d is not operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage."

[12. Wiring pattern of setting key switch and RWM switch on main control board]
Next, the wiring pattern for transmitting a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the wiring pattern for transmitting a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633 will be described with reference to Figures 188 and 189. Figure 188 is a schematic diagram illustrating the layout of various electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board, and Figure 189 is a schematic diagram of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board illustrating the various wiring patterns to the main control MPU of the main control board. Here, an example will be described in which the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 described above is mounted on the main control board 1310, and only the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320.

Mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 are DIP-type electronic components such as connectors MCN1 to MCN8, crystal oscillators, and various ICs, as well as lead-type electronic components such as setting key switches 1311a, resistors, resistor arrays, diodes, capacitors, electrolytic capacitors, and transistors. The lead terminals of the DIP-type electronic components are inserted into through-holes formed in the main control board 1310 from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 toward the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and are soldered and fixed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Each lead terminal of the lead-type electronic component is inserted into a through-hole formed in the main control board 1310 from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 toward the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and is soldered and fixed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

Various detection signals from various sensors input to the main control board 1310 are either input to the main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection via connectors MCN1 to MCN5, or to the main control input circuit 1310b without error detection. Connectors MCN1 to MCN5 are arranged in order near the top edge of the main control board 1310, from the center of the top edge to the left edge, with connector MCN5 being arranged near the top edge of the main control board 1310, near the left edge.

Various detection signals input via connectors MCN1 to MCN3 are input to the main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function, and various detection signals input via connector MCN5 are either input to the main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function or to the main control input circuit 1310b (the circuit composed of resistors and transistors described above) without error detection function. Connector MCN4 is used to output commands to the peripheral control board 1510.

Mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 are a plurality (two in this embodiment) of DIP-type ICs that integrate multiple main control input circuits 1310b2 with error detection (eight main control input circuits 1310b2 with error detection functions). It is also possible to mount multiple individual main control input circuits 1310b2 with error detection on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, rather than as an IC.

Connectors MCN6 to MCN8 are located near the bottom edge of the main control board 1310, arranged in the following order from the left edge toward the center of the bottom edge: connector MCN6, connector MCN7, setting key switch 1311a, and connector MCN8. Connector MCN8 is located near the bottom edge of the main control board 1310, closer to the left side than the center of the bottom edge. Connector MCN6 outputs a signal to drive the electrical drive source (solenoid) provided on the gaming board 5. Connector MCN7 inputs and outputs signals related to the exchange of commands with the payout control board 633, and inputs a detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633"). Connector MCN8 is used to exchange various signals when performing inspection and verification.

The main control MPU 1310a is arranged above the center line connecting the centers of the left and right sides of the main control board 1310 and to the right of the center of the main control board 1310 so as to be parallel to the bottom (top) side of the main control board 1310 (i.e., along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310).
The lead terminals protruding vertically from the bottom surface of the main control MPU 1310a are alternately bent and arranged in two rows along the longitudinal direction of the bottom surface of the main control MPU 1310a. For convenience of explanation, the two rows of lead terminals will be described here as the lead terminals arranged in the upper row and the lead terminals arranged in the lower row.

Above the setting key switch 1311a, which is located near the bottom edge of the main control board 1310, are multiple lead-type resistors, diodes, capacitors, etc., and above these are two lead-type resistor arrays arranged in a row, one on each side, parallel to the bottom edge of the main control board 1310. Above this left-side lead-type resistor array (i.e., away from the main control MPU 1310a), are resistors MR2 and MR5, which constitute the main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d on the dispensing control board 633 is input via connector MCN7. Below this left-side lead-type resistor array (i.e., using the left-side lead-type resistor array as a boundary (protective wall)), are resistors MR3 and MR4 and transistor MTR0, which constitute the main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d on the dispensing control board 633 is input via connector MCN7.

In other words, the main control input circuit 1310b, to which the detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d on the dispensing control board 633 is input via connector MCN7, is configured with the left-side lead-type resistor assembly as its boundary (protective wall). Resistors MR3 and MR4 and transistor MTR0 that make up the main control input circuit 1310b are located below the left-side lead-type resistor assembly, and resistors MR2 and MR5 that make up the main control input circuit 1310b are located above the left-side lead-type resistor assembly. This serves as a protective wall, preventing tampering with resistors MR2 and MR5 located above the left-side lead-type resistor assembly, thereby contributing to improved security. Furthermore, because transistor MTR0 has resistors MR3 and MR4 built in as bias resistors, this also prevents tampering with resistors MR3 and MR4, contributing to improved security.

Above the connector MCN8, located to the right of the setting key switch 1311a, which is located near the bottom edge of the main control board 1310, are resistors MR10-MR13, capacitor MC10, and transistor MTR10, which make up the main control input circuit 1310b, which receives the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a. Transistor MTR10 has resistors MR11 and MR12 built in as bias resistors. This prevents tampering with resistors MR11 and MR12, contributing to improved security.

To the right of the main control input circuit 1310b, which receives the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, are resistors MR14-MR16 and transistor MTR11 that make up the logic inversion circuit 1310iv, which inverts the logic of the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a received via the main control input circuit 1310b. Transistor MTR11 incorporates resistors MR14 and MR15 as bias resistors. This prevents unauthorized tampering with resistors MR14 and MR15, contributing to improved security.

When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, as described above, the connectors MCN1 to MCCN5, which are arranged in a row near the top edge of the main control board 1310 and parallel to the top edge, the connectors MCN6 to MC8, which are arranged in a row near the bottom edge of the main control board 1310 and parallel to the bottom edge, and the setting key switch 1311a, are partially exposed from the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320. This makes it possible to insert an unauthorized tool (e.g., a thin wire) through the gap formed by the cover body 1301, the connectors MCN1 to MCN8, and the setting key switch 1311a, and to misconfigure the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Even if an attempt is made to tamper with the system, electronic components such as electrolytic capacitors, resistors, diodes, capacitors, resistor arrays, various ICs, and transistors are located around connectors MCN1 to MCN8 and setting key switch 13111a, and electronic components such as resistors, diodes, capacitors, a crystal oscillator (located near the bottom of main control MPU 1310a), resistor arrays, and various ICs are located around main control MPU 1310a. These electronic components act as obstacles or protective walls, requiring an unauthorized tool (such as a thin wire) to bend multiple times, making it practically impossible for the unauthorized tool (such as a thin wire) to reach main control MPU 1310a.

The main control board 1310 has multiple through holes formed therein, through which the lead terminals of the ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a are inserted. The lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a are inserted into these through holes from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 toward the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and are then soldered and fixed to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

As shown in Figure 189, on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a that are electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) are electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Also, on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, a +5V power supply wiring pattern is formed that is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board (the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310) and the main VBB power supply line supplied from capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h on the power supply board 630, among the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a. Additionally, the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is formed with an output signal wiring pattern that outputs various signals from the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a, and an input signal wiring pattern that inputs various signals to the lead terminals.

The input signal wiring pattern includes an RWM signal wiring pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "various wiring patterns") that forms an RWM signal transmission path extending from connector MCN7, to which a detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is input, to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a, and a wiring pattern from terminal A of setting key switch 1311a to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a. This includes a setting key signal wiring pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "various wiring patterns") that forms a setting signal transmission path extending from the 1Q terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 (MIC22A) that constitutes the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a, and a power outage warning signal wiring pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "various wiring patterns") that forms a power outage warning signal transmission path extending from the 1Q terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 (MIC22A) that constitutes the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a.

On the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, foil-punched areas are formed where the copper foil is punched out around the through-holes through which the lead terminals of the ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a are inserted, excluding those electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground), around the +5V power supply wiring pattern, around the signal output wiring pattern, around the input signal wiring pattern, and around specific through-holes (for example, through-holes electrically connecting the output signal wiring patterns on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y).

Apart from the areas on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 where various wiring patterns are formed, various through-holes are formed, and foil cutouts are formed, the remaining areas are formed as a solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and an insulating resist liquid of a specific color (green in this embodiment) is applied to cover the base material and thin copper layer (copper plane, copper foil surface) of the main control board 1310, forming a solder side insulating coating film 1310yr over the entire area of the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

In addition, on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the copper foil is cut out around the through-holes through which the lead terminals of the ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a are inserted, excluding those electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground), around the +5V power supply wiring pattern, around the output signal wiring pattern, and around specific through-holes (for example, through-holes electrically connecting the output signal wiring pattern between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y). Although cut-out areas are formed, no foil cut-out areas are formed between the lead terminals arranged in the upper row and the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a along the longitudinal direction of the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a (along the left-right direction of the main control board 1310, along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310, and along the top edge of the main control board 1310 (parallel to the bottom edge or the center line connecting the center of the left edge and the center of the right edge of the main control board 1310), and a solid ground (GND) (board ground) is formed.

Apart from the area on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 where the output signal wiring pattern is formed, the area where various through holes are formed, and the area where foil cutouts are formed, the remaining areas are formed as a solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and an insulating resist liquid of a predetermined color (green in this embodiment) is applied to cover the base material and thin copper layer (copper plane, copper foil surface) of the main control board 1310, forming a mounting surface-side insulating coating film 1310xr over the entire area of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310.

In addition, the copper foil layer (copper plane, copper foil surface) on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 may have a small copper foil area surrounded by the various wiring patterns and the numerous lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a due to the various wiring patterns routed to the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, in order to stabilize the ground in the small copper foil area, a solid ground through hole is formed that electrically connects the solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the mounting side (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

The land size of the solid ground through hole comes in a variety of sizes, including those that are the same size as the land size of the wiring pattern through hole that electrically connects the wiring pattern between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, those that are the same size as the land size of the lead terminal through hole through which the lead terminal of the electronic component is inserted and soldered to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y, those that are larger than the land size of the wiring pattern through hole but smaller than the land size of the lead terminal through hole, and those that are larger than the land size of the lead terminal through hole, and multiple solid ground through holes are scattered across almost the entire surface of the main control board 1310. This stabilizes the solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to be the same ground (GND) (board ground).

Furthermore, the main control board 1310 does not have any wiring pattern through holes formed therein for electrically connecting the wiring patterns on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 for the wiring patterns through which various signals are input, whereas for the wiring patterns through which various signals are output, multiple wiring pattern through holes may be formed therein for electrically connecting the wiring patterns on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to prevent interference between the wiring patterns when routing the wiring patterns.

It is preferable that the main control board 1310 does not have any wiring pattern through holes formed therein that electrically connect the wiring patterns on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 for the wiring patterns through which various signals are input. However, in order to avoid interference with other wiring patterns due to the routing of the wiring patterns, it is sometimes necessary to form wiring pattern through holes that electrically connect the wiring patterns on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 for the wiring patterns through which various signals are input.

However, if the wiring pattern through-holes (hereinafter referred to as "input signal wiring pattern through-holes") formed for the wiring patterns through which various signals are input are tampered with, for example, by electrically switching them to solid ground (GND) (board ground) or the +5V power line created on the main control board, there is a risk that a cheater could obtain illegal game balls, as the main control MPU 1310a is an important electronic component that controls the progress of the game.

Therefore, it is necessary to take security measures for the through holes used for input signal wiring patterns.

[12-1. Security measures for through holes for input signal wiring patterns]
A configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern as a security measure for the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern (hereinafter, "configurations in which an insulating film is applied to the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern according to the first to fourth embodiments") will be described with reference to Figures 190 to 193. Figure 190 is a schematic diagram (a) illustrating a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along line X-X in (a), and a schematic diagram (c) of a modified example of (b). Figure 191 is a schematic diagram (a) illustrating a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern according to the second embodiment formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along line X-X in (a), and a schematic diagram (c) of a modified example of (b). Fig. 192 is a schematic diagram (a) illustrating a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern according to the third embodiment formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along line X-X in (a), and a schematic diagram (c) of a modified example of (b), and Fig. 193 is a schematic diagram (a) illustrating a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern according to the fourth embodiment formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along line X-X in (a), and a schematic diagram (c) of a modified example of (b). Note that in Figs. 190 to 193, parts that perform the same function are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The various through holes are copper-plated on the inner walls of the holes, making them conductive. In addition to through holes, the main control board 1310 also has non-through holes. Non-through holes differ significantly from through holes that have copper-plated inner walls and lands on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 in that they do not have copper plating on the inner walls of the holes and do not have lands on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Non-through holes are formed to attach the board to components or to secure electronic components (such as connectors with wiring that are subject to external force) to the board. Note that the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of through holes can be used for through holes used to mount electronic components (i.e., to insert the lead terminals of electronic components). Furthermore, the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of a through hole may be applied to the land of a wiring pattern through hole (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as an "output signal wiring pattern through hole") formed for a wiring pattern from which various signals are output. Furthermore, the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of a through hole for a solid ground that electrically connects the solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 may be applied to the land of a solid ground through hole.

[12-1-1. Configuration for covering lands of through holes for input signal wiring patterns with insulating coating according to the first embodiment]
190(a) and 190(b), in the configuration in which the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern are covered with an insulating coating, a thin through-hole is formed in the thickness direction of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310 (the direction perpendicular to the front surface (perpendicular to the back surface) of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310), and the copper foil is removed from the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to form a mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and a solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1, each having an outer diameter KTHD1, and a mounting surface (front surface) side wiring pattern SPTN and a solder surface (back surface) side wiring pattern are formed. The through-hole KTH1 is formed by applying a conductive plating process to the entire inner surface of the through-hole. The outer diameter of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the outer diameter of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are the same size, which is outer diameter KTHD1.

The mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to one end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the other end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN is electrically connected to another mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 or a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered.

The solder surface (back surface) land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to one end of the solder surface (back surface) wiring pattern formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and the other end of the solder surface (back surface) wiring pattern is electrically connected to the solder surface (back surface) land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 or a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered.

The mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are electrically connected via the through hole KTH1, and the mounting surface (front) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back) side wiring pattern formed on the solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are electrically connected via the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the through hole KTH1, and the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

A green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, forming a mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr. However, in the area of the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, a mounting surface (surface) side resist opening KBxra is formed, having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1.

In addition, a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to form a solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr, but in the area of the solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1, a solder surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra is formed having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1.

The opening diameter KBxrD1 of the resist opening KBxra on the mounting surface (front side) and the opening diameter KByrD1 of the resist opening KByra on the solder surface (back side) are the same size.

The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single, fixed-length copper-clad laminate (substrate), which is then finally cut out. This single, fixed-length copper-clad laminate (substrate) is fixed to the manufacturing equipment and goes through a painting process, a drying process, a hole-punching process, and other processes before each board is finally cut out.

In this way, on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a mounting surface (surface) resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) land KRDx1 is formed in the region of the mounting surface (surface) insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) land KRDx1. Therefore, the outer periphery of the mounting surface (surface) land KRDx1 is covered with green resist as an insulating coating from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) land KRDx1 toward the center of the mounting surface (surface) land KRDx1. This allows the entire outer periphery of the mounting surface (surface) land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to be covered with green resist as an insulating coating, thereby minimizing the area of the mounting surface (surface) land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed. This makes it difficult to tamper with the input signal wiring pattern through-holes, for example by electrically switching them to a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or the +5V power line on the main control board, and provides security measures for the input signal wiring pattern through-holes. This therefore contributes to improving the security of the input signal wiring pattern through-holes.

In addition, because the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 and the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 both have exposed copper foil, electrical testing of the main control board 1310 (checking operation and abnormal potential) can be performed by contacting the tip of a contact probe with the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 from the mounting surface (front) side of the main control board 1310, or by contacting the tip of a contact probe with the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 from the solder surface (back) side of the main control board 1310. In other words, the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 and the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 can be used as check terminals when performing electrical testing of the main control board 1310. The contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead used to check continuity with a so-called "tester."

In the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment, on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, in the area of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (back side) land KRDy1, a solder side (back side) resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1 is formed, so that the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1 is The outer periphery of the solder side (rear) side land KRDy1 toward the center of the solder side (rear) side land KRDy1 is covered with a green resist as an insulating coating, but as shown in Figure 190 (c), in the area of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (rear) side land KRDy1, a solder side (rear) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD2 (> opening diameter KByrD1) larger than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (rear) side land KRDy1 may be formed. This is because, in the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 and is arranged on the back side of the game board 5, and therefore, if tampering is performed on the main control board 1310 in this state, only the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be visually observed. Furthermore, when an operator inspecting the main control board 1310 determines which of the multiple various through holes formed on the main control board 1310 is a through hole for an input signal wiring pattern, comparing the size of the land on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x with the land on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y can help determine whether or not the through hole is for an input signal wiring pattern.

[12-1-2. Configuration for covering lands of through holes for input signal wiring patterns with insulating coating according to the second embodiment]
191(a) and 191(b), in the configuration in which the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern according to the second embodiment are covered with an insulating coating, a thin through-hole is formed in the thickness direction of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310 (the direction perpendicular to the front surface (perpendicular to the back surface) of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310), and the copper foil is removed from the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to form a mounting surface (front surface) land KRDx1 and a solder surface (back surface) land KRDy1, each having an outer diameter KTHD1, and a mounting surface (front surface) wiring pattern SPTN and a solder surface (back surface) wiring pattern are formed. The entire inner surface of the through-hole is plated with a conductive material to form the through-hole KTH1. The outer diameter of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the outer diameter of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are the same size, which is outer diameter KTHD1, and is the same size as the outer diameter of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 and the outer diameter of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 in the configuration in which an insulating coating is covered on the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern in the first embodiment described above.

The mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to one end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the other end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN is electrically connected to another mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 or a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered.

The solder surface (back surface) land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to one end of the solder surface (back surface) wiring pattern formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and the other end of the solder surface (back surface) wiring pattern is electrically connected to the solder surface (back surface) land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 or a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered.

A green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to form a mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr, but in the area of the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, a mounting surface (surface) side resist opening KBxra is formed, which has an opening diameter KBxrD1 that is smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, is even smaller than the outer diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern in the first embodiment described above, and is larger than the inner diameter of the hole of the through hole KTH1. The inner diameter of this opening diameter KBxrD2 takes into account the resist liquid intrusion prevention area that extends concentrically outward from the inner periphery of through hole KTH1 on the mounting surface (front surface) side, and is sized to be a resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (a distance of at least 0.5 mm is required to prevent green resist liquid from infiltrating through hole KTH1 of main control board 1310; in the configuration in which the lands of the input signal wiring pattern through holes in the second embodiment are covered with an insulating film) from the inner periphery of through hole KTH1 on the mounting surface (front surface). Therefore, the inner diameter of opening diameter KBxrD2 is the inner diameter of through hole KTH1 plus twice the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm), and is 1.0 mm larger than the inner diameter of through hole KTH1.

In contrast, a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, forming a solder side insulating coating 1310yr. However, in the area of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (back side) land KRDy1, a solder side (back side) resist opening KByra is formed, having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1. The outer diameter of opening diameter KByrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of the input signal wiring pattern through hole in the first embodiment described above.

The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single, fixed-length copper-clad laminate (substrate), which is then finally cut out. This single, fixed-length copper-clad laminate (substrate) is fixed to the manufacturing equipment and goes through a painting process, a drying process, a hole-punching process, and other processes before each board is finally cut out.

In this way, on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the area of the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is provided with a mounting surface (front surface) side insulating coating having an opening diameter KBxrD1 that is smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1, and is even smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which the land of the input signal wiring pattern through hole in the first embodiment is covered with an insulating coating, and is larger than the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1. Because the surface (surface) side resist opening KBxra is formed, the outer periphery of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, except for the resist liquid intrusion prevention region of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 (i.e., the region extending from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 toward the center of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 to a position separated by the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm)), is covered with green resist as an insulating coating. This allows the green resist to be covered as an insulating coating from almost the inside to the entire outer periphery of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 (i.e., the entire area of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention area). Therefore, the area where the copper foil is exposed becomes the resist liquid intrusion prevention area, and the area of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed can be made extremely small compared to the configuration in which the lands of the input signal wiring pattern through-holes in the first embodiment are covered with an insulating coating. This makes it difficult to tamper with the input signal wiring pattern through-holes by, for example, electrically switching them to a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or a +5V power line created on the main control board, thereby providing security measures for the input signal wiring pattern through-holes. This contributes to improving security for through-holes for input signal wiring patterns.

In addition, because a resist liquid intrusion prevention area is provided for the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310, when green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, even if the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is fixed to the manufacturing equipment so that it faces vertically upward (because the main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single sheet of standard-length copper-clad laminate (substrate) and ultimately cutting them out, the front surface of the single sheet of standard-length copper-clad laminate (substrate) faces vertically upward), the green resist liquid will infiltrate the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 and dry without blocking the hole.

In addition, because the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 and the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 both have exposed copper foil, electrical testing of the main control board 1310 (checking operation and abnormal potential) can be performed by contacting the tip of a contact probe with the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 from the mounting surface (front) side of the main control board 1310, or by contacting the tip of a contact probe with the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 from the solder surface (back) side of the main control board 1310. In other words, the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 and the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 can be used as check terminals when performing electrical testing of the main control board 1310. The contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead used to check continuity with a so-called "tester."

In the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the second embodiment, on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, in the area of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (back side) land KRDy1, a solder side (back side) resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1 is formed, so that the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1 is The outer periphery of the solder side (rear) side land KRDy1 toward the center of the solder side (rear) side land KRDy1 is covered with a green resist as an insulating coating, but as shown in Figure 191 (c), a solder side (rear) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD2 (> opening diameter KByrD1) larger than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (rear) side land KRDy1 may be formed in the area of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (rear) side land KRDy1. This is because, in the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 and is arranged on the back side of the game board 5, and therefore, if tampering is performed on the main control board 1310 in this state, only the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be visually observed. Furthermore, when an operator inspecting the main control board 1310 determines which of the multiple various through holes formed on the main control board 1310 is a through hole for an input signal wiring pattern, comparing the size of the land on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x with the land on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y can help determine whether or not the through hole is for an input signal wiring pattern.

[12-1-3. Configuration in which an insulating film is covered on the land of the through-hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the third embodiment]
192(a) and 192(b), in a configuration in which the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern according to the third embodiment are covered with an insulating coating, a thin through-hole is formed in the thickness direction of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310 (the direction perpendicular to the front surface (perpendicular to the back surface) of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310), and the copper foil is removed from the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to form a mounting surface (front surface) land KRDx1 and a solder surface (back surface) land KRDy1, each having an outer diameter KTHD1, and a mounting surface (front surface) wiring pattern SPTN and a solder surface (back surface) wiring pattern. The through-hole KTH1 is formed by subjecting the entire inner surface of the through-hole to conductive plating. The outer diameter of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the outer diameter of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are the same size, which is outer diameter KTHD1, and is the same size as the outer diameter of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 and the outer diameter of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 in the configuration in which an insulating coating is covered on the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern in the first embodiment described above.

The mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to one end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the other end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN is electrically connected to another mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 or a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered.

A green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, forming a mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr. Therefore, the area of the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is also coated with green resist liquid as an insulating coating to form the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr.

The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single sheet of fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting it out. The single sheet of fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) is fixed to the manufacturing equipment and goes through a painting process, a drying process, a hole-punching process, and other processes before each board is finally cut out. For this reason, when green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of mounting surface (surface) 1310x of main control board 1310, main control board 1310 is fixed to the manufacturing equipment so that mounting surface (surface) 1310x faces vertically upward (because main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single sheet of fixed-length copper-clad laminate (substrate) and ultimately cutting them out, the front surface of the single fixed-length copper-clad laminate (substrate) faces vertically upward), and the green resist liquid seeps into through hole KTH1 of main control board 1310 from the inner periphery on the mounting surface (surface) side and blocks this hole. The green resist liquid that has seeped into through hole KTH1 of main control board 1310 dries in a recessed state from the inner periphery on the mounting surface (surface) side of through hole KTH1 toward the center of the hole due to its own weight.

In contrast, a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, forming a solder side insulating coating 1310yr. However, in the area of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (back side) land KRDy1, a solder side (back side) resist opening KByra is formed, having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1. The outer diameter of opening diameter KByrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of the input signal wiring pattern through hole in the first embodiment described above.

In this way, on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the area of the mounting surface insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) land KRDx1 is also covered with green resist as an insulating coating, and green resist liquid has seeped into the mounting surface (surface) side of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 from the mounting surface (surface) side inner edge, sealing the hole. This allows the entire mounting surface (surface) land KRDx1 and the hole of the through hole KTH1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to be covered with green resist as an insulating coating. This prevents the copper foil from being exposed on the mounting surface (surface) land KRDx1, and prevents the conductive plating applied to the entire inner surface of the through hole KTH1 from being exposed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Additionally, the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 can be blocked. This makes it difficult to tamper with the input signal wiring pattern through-hole by, for example, electrically switching it to a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or a +5V power line on the main control board, providing security measures for the input signal wiring pattern through-hole. This therefore contributes to improving the security of the input signal wiring pattern through-hole.

In addition, green resist liquid has seeped into the inner periphery of the mounting surface (front surface) side of through hole KTH1 of main control board 1310, sealing the hole, but the solder surface (back surface) side of through hole KTH1 of main control board 1310 is open. In other words, the mounting surface (front surface) side of through hole KTH1 of main control board 1310 is sealed with green resist liquid, while the solder surface (back surface) side is open. This is because if green resist liquid seeps into through hole KTH1 of main control board 1310 from the inner periphery on the mounting surface (front surface) side, and air remains inside through hole KTH1 of main control board 1310 while the solder surface (back surface) of through hole KTH1 of main control board 1310 is blocked, there is a risk that liquid such as resist remover will remain inside through hole KTH1. This liquid may corrode the conductive plating inside through hole KTH1, causing poor contact, or the liquid inside through hole KTH1 may momentarily vaporize and expand (a so-called "vapor explosion") during a soldering process (such as reflow) where heat is applied, damaging the conductive plating inside through hole KTH1 and causing an electrical disconnection of through hole KTH1.

In addition, although the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 and through hole KTH1 holes exist, their presence can be concealed by the green resist, which makes the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 less noticeable against the solid green resist applied to the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and also makes the through hole KTH1 less noticeable. This makes it difficult for a tampering actor attempting to electrically switch the input signal wiring pattern through holes with, for example, a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or a +5V power line created on the main control board side, to find the input signal wiring pattern through holes (mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 and through hole KTH1 holes).

In addition, because the copper foil on both the solder side (back side) land KRDy1 and the solder side (back side) land KRDy1 is exposed, electrical testing (checking operation and abnormal electrical potential) of the main control board 1310 can be performed by contacting the tip of a contact probe with the solder side (back side) land KRDy1 from the solder side (back side) of the main control board 1310. In other words, the solder side (back side) land KRDy1 can be used as a check terminal when performing electrical testing of the main control board 1310. The contact probe may be a dedicated probe, or it may be a test lead used to check continuity with a so-called "tester."

In the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the third embodiment, on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, in the area of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (back side) land KRDy1, a solder side (back side) resist opening KByra is formed having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1, thereby The outer periphery of the solder side (rear) side land KRDy1 toward the center of the solder side (rear) side land KRDy1 is covered with a green resist as an insulating coating, but as shown in Figure 192 (c), a solder side (rear) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD2 (> opening diameter KByrD1) larger than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (rear) side land KRDy1 may be formed in the area of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (rear) side land KRDy1. This is because, in the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 and is arranged on the back side of the game board 5, and therefore, if tampering is performed on the main control board 1310 in this state, only the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be visually observed. Furthermore, when an operator inspecting the main control board 1310 determines which of the multiple various through holes formed on the main control board 1310 is a through hole for an input signal wiring pattern, comparing the size of the land on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x with the land on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y can help determine whether or not the through hole is for an input signal wiring pattern.

[12-1-4. Configuration in which an insulating film is covered on the land of the through-hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the fourth embodiment]
193(a) and 193(b), in the configuration in which the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern according to the fourth embodiment are covered with an insulating coating, a thin through-hole is formed in the thickness direction of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310 (the direction perpendicular to the front surface (perpendicular to the back surface) of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310), and the copper foil is removed from the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to form a mounting surface (front surface) land KRDx1 and a solder surface (back surface) land KRDy1, each having an outer diameter KTHD1, and a mounting surface (front surface) wiring pattern SPTN and a solder surface (back surface) wiring pattern. The through-hole KTH1 is formed by plating the entire inner surface of the through-hole with electrical conductivity. The outer diameter of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the outer diameter of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are the same size, which is outer diameter KTHD1, and is the same size as the outer diameter of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 and the outer diameter of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 in the configuration in which an insulating coating is covered on the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern in the first embodiment described above.

The mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to one end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the other end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN is electrically connected to another mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 or a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered.

A green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, forming a mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr. However, in the area of the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1, a mounting surface (front surface) side resist opening KBxra is formed, having an opening diameter KBxrD1 that is smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1. The outer diameter of opening diameter KBxrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of opening diameter KBxrD1 in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of the input signal wiring pattern through hole according to the first embodiment described above.

In contrast, a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, forming the solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr, and therefore the area of the solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 is also coated with green resist liquid as an insulating coating to form the solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr.

The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single sheet of fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting it out. The single sheet of fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) is fixed to the manufacturing equipment and goes through a painting process, a drying process, a hole-punching process, and other processes before each board is finally cut out. For this reason, when green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of solder side (back side) 1310y of main control board 1310, main control board 1310 is fixed to the manufacturing equipment so that solder side (back side) 1310y faces vertically upward (because main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single, standard-length copper-clad laminate (substrate) and ultimately cutting them out, the rear surface of the single, standard-length copper-clad laminate (substrate) faces vertically upward), and the green resist liquid seeps into through hole KTH1 in main control board 1310 from the inner periphery on the solder side (back side) and blocks the hole. The green resist liquid that has seeped into through hole KTH1 in main control board 1310 dries in a recessed state from the inner periphery on the solder side (back side) of through hole KTH1 toward the center of the hole due to its own weight.

In this way, on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, in the area of the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, a mounting surface (surface) side resist opening KBxra is formed having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, so that the outer peripheral portion of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 is covered with green resist as an insulating coating from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 toward the center of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1. Furthermore, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the area of the solder surface-side insulating coating 1310yr that corresponds to the solder surface (back surface)-side land KRDy1 is also covered with a green resist as an insulating coating, and green resist liquid has entered from the inner peripheral edge of the solder surface (back surface) side of the through hole KTH1 in the main control board 1310, blocking this hole. This allows the entire outer periphery of the mounting surface (front surface)-side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to be covered with green resist as an insulating coating, thereby minimizing the area of the mounting surface (front surface)-side land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed and blocking the hole of the through hole KTH1 in the main control board 1310. This makes it difficult to tamper with the input signal wiring pattern through-holes, for example by electrically switching them to a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or the +5V power line on the main control board, and provides security measures for the input signal wiring pattern through-holes. This therefore contributes to improving the security of the input signal wiring pattern through-holes.

Furthermore, since the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 has exposed copper foil, it is possible to perform an electrical test (check for operation or abnormal potential) of the main control board 1310 by contacting the tip of a contact probe with the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 from the mounting surface (surface) side of the main control board 1310. In other words, when performing an electrical test of the main control board 1310, the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 can be used as a check terminal. The contact probe may be a dedicated probe, or it may be a test lead used to check continuity with a so-called "tester."

In addition, green resist liquid has seeped into the inner periphery of the solder side (back side) of through hole KTH1 in main control board 1310, sealing the hole, but the mounting side (front side) of through hole KTH1 in main control board 1310 is open. In other words, the solder side (back side) of through hole KTH1 in main control board 1310 is sealed with green resist liquid, while the mounting side (front side) is open. This is because if green resist liquid seeps into the inner periphery of the solder surface (back surface) of through hole KTH1 in main control board 1310 and the mounting surface (front surface) of through hole KTH1 of main control board 1310 is blocked while air remains inside through hole KTH1, there is a risk that liquid such as resist remover will remain inside through hole KTH1. This liquid may corrode the conductive plating inside through hole KTH1, causing poor contact, or during a soldering process (such as reflow) where heat is applied, the liquid inside through hole KTH1 may instantaneously vaporize and expand (a so-called "vapor explosion"), damaging the conductive plating inside through hole KTH1 and causing an electrical disconnection of through hole KTH1.

In addition, although the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 hole exist, the presence of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 can be hidden by the green resist on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the presence of the through hole KTH1 hole can be hidden by the green resist on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.Therefore, the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 can be made less noticeable against the solid white resist applied to the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the through hole KTH1 hole can be made less noticeable. This makes it difficult for a tamperer attempting to electrically switch the input signal wiring pattern through-holes with, for example, a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or a +5V power line created on the main control board to find the input signal wiring pattern through-holes (the holes for the land KRDx1 and through-hole KTH1 on the mounting surface (front) side).

In the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes for the input signal wiring pattern according to the fourth embodiment, on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, in the region of the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, a mounting surface (surface) side resist opening KBxra is formed having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1. In the past, the outer periphery of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 toward the center was covered with white resist as an insulating coating, but as shown in FIG. 193(b), in the region of the mounting surface (surface) side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, a mounting surface (surface) side resist opening KBxra may be formed having an opening diameter KBxrD2 that is smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, is even smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1, and is larger than the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1. The inner diameter of this opening diameter KBxrD2 takes into account the resist liquid intrusion prevention area that extends concentrically outward from the inner periphery of through hole KTH1 on the mounting surface (front surface) side, and is sized to be a resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (a distance of at least 0.5 mm is required to prevent white resist liquid from infiltrating through hole KTH1 of main control board 1310; in the configuration in which the lands of the input signal wiring pattern through holes in the fourth embodiment are covered with an insulating film) from the inner periphery of through hole KTH1 on the mounting surface (front surface). Therefore, the inner diameter of opening diameter KBxrD2 is the inner diameter of through hole KTH1 plus twice the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm), and is 1.0 mm larger than the inner diameter of through hole KTH1.

This allows the green resist to be covered as an insulating coating from almost the inside to the entire outer periphery of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 (that is, the entire area of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention area).As a result, the area where the copper foil is exposed becomes the resist liquid intrusion prevention area, and the area of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed can be kept extremely small.

In addition, because a resist liquid intrusion prevention area is provided for the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310, when green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, even if the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is fixed to the manufacturing equipment so that it faces vertically upward (because the main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single sheet of standard-length copper-clad laminate (substrate) and ultimately cutting them out, the front surface of the single sheet of standard-length copper-clad laminate (substrate) faces vertically upward), the green resist liquid will infiltrate the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 and dry without blocking the hole.

In addition, a green resist is applied as an insulating coating from almost the inside to the entire outer periphery of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 (i.e., the entire area of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention area). This reduces the area where the exposed copper foil is located by forming a resist liquid intrusion prevention area. However, electrical testing of the main control board 1310 (checking operation and checking for abnormal potential) can be performed by contacting the tip of a contact probe with the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 from the mounting surface (surface) side of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 can be used as a check terminal when conducting electrical testing of the main control board 1310. The contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead used to check continuity with a so-called "tester."

[12-2. Wiring pattern to input terminal]

The detection signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e on the main control board 1310 is input as a power outage warning signal to input terminal PB0 of input port PB, which is the third lead terminal from the left in the figure among the lead terminals arranged in the upper row of the main control MPU 1310a, via various wiring patterns (power outage warning signal wiring pattern) that transmit this detection signal. The detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d on the dispensing control board 633 is input as an RWM signal to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA, which is the eighth lead terminal from the left in the figure among the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a, via various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern) that transmit this detection signal. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 is input to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA, which is located 20th from the left in the figure (13th from the right in the figure) among the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a, via various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern) that transmit this detection signal.

The various wiring patterns (power outage warning signal wiring pattern) that transmit detection signals from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e on the main control board 1310, the various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern) that transmit detection signals (main RWM signals) from the RWM switch 633d on the dispensing control board 633, and the various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 are arranged close to each other and routed on the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 so that they do not run parallel to each other (do not run side by side).

In addition, the various wiring patterns (power outage warning signal wiring pattern) that transmit detection signals from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310, the various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern) that transmit detection signals (main RWM signals) from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633, and the various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 are routed only to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, without using through holes that electrically connect the wiring patterns on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y.

In this way, various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a, which can change the setting probability of awarding a player a benefit, are formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, making it difficult to see how the various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) are routed when viewed from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, which contributes to making it more difficult to tamper with the various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns). This therefore contributes to improved security. Furthermore, by forming various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals (main RWM signals) from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 used for changing settings on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, it is possible to make it difficult to see how the various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) are routed when viewed from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, which can contribute to making it difficult to tamper with the various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns). Therefore, it can contribute to improving security. Furthermore, by forming the various wiring patterns (power outage warning signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, it is difficult to see how the various wiring patterns (power outage warning signal wiring patterns) are routed when viewed from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, which contributes to making it more difficult to tamper with the various wiring patterns (power outage warning signal wiring patterns). This therefore contributes to improved security.

As mentioned above, when changing the setting value, it is necessary to operate the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d are important signals that allow the setting to be changed to the probability of generating a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and it is necessary to make it difficult for hall staff in the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to fraudulently change the setting to an unintended probability.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a, which allows the probability of awarding a benefit to the player to be changed, and the various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern) that transmit detection signals from the RWM switch 633d, are routed on the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 so that they are not placed close to each other and do not run parallel to each other (do not run side by side). This allows the various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the RWM switch 633d to be separated from each other and input to specified input terminals (PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), PA0 (RWM signal input terminal)) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, making it difficult to simultaneously tamper with the various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the RWM switch 633d. This therefore contributes to improved security when changing settings.

The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input as a setting key signal to a predetermined input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns), and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input as an RWM signal to a predetermined input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns). Input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA is located eighth from the left in the figure among the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a, while input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA is located twentieth from the left in the figure (thirteenth from the right in the figure) among the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a. In this way, the predetermined input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input as a setting key signal and the predetermined input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input as an RWM signal are not arranged adjacent to each other. Other lead terminals (specifically, the 9th to 19th lead terminals from the left in the figure among the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a, a total of 11 lead terminals arranged in the lower row) are arranged between a specified input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA of 1310a and a specified input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a, to which the detection signal from RWM switch 633d is input as an RWM signal.

As described above, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, foil-punched areas are formed in which the copper foil is punched out around the through-holes through which the lead terminals of the ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a are inserted, excluding those electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground), around the +5V power supply wiring pattern, around the signal output wiring pattern, around the input signal wiring pattern, and around specific through-holes (for example, through-holes electrically connecting the output signal wiring patterns on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y). Furthermore, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, as described above, the logic of the setting key signal becomes LOW (logic indicating a setting enabled state) and is input to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is operated, as described above, the logic of the RWM signal becomes LOW (logic indicating a pressing operation state) and is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. This makes it more difficult to tamper with the electrical connection between the input terminals PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and ground (GND) (board ground) by removing foil from the periphery of the input terminals PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), thereby contributing to improved security.

In addition to the terminals between the setting key signal input terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, which is electrically connected to various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the RWM signal input terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, which is electrically connected to various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633, The peripheral terminals (other adjacent terminals) of the setting key signal input terminal and the peripheral terminals (adjacent terminals) of the RWM signal input terminal may be electrically connected to wiring patterns that input other signals or wiring patterns that output other signals so that the logic of the RWM signal that indicates that the pressing operation portion of RWM switch 633d is not being operated is HI (logic that indicates a no-press operation state), and the logic of the setting key signal that indicates that setting key switch 1311a is being turned OFF is HI (logic that indicates a setting disabled state). This makes it more difficult to tamper with the RWM signal input terminal and setting key signal input terminal, contributing to improved security.

In addition, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input as a setting key signal to a predetermined input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns), and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input as an RWM signal to a predetermined input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns).As a result, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d were input to the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a, but for example, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a may be input from the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a to the lead terminals arranged in the upper row. When the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input as a setting key signal to a specific input terminal PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern), the input terminal PB7 of the input port PB is located as the 22nd from the left in the figure (11th from the right in the figure) of the lead terminals arranged in the upper row of the main control MPU 1310a. In this way, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input from the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a to the lead terminals arranged in the upper row, and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input to the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a. This configuration in which two detection signals are input to the lead terminals in the upper and lower rows can contribute to improving the security of setting changes.

The logic states of input ports PA and PB of the main control MPU 1310a are treated as memory information in an address space using the memory-mapped I/O method. For example, for input port PA, the main control MPU 1310a can simultaneously obtain the logic state of each input terminal at the same address. Similarly, for input port PB, the main control MPU 1310a can simultaneously obtain the logic state of each input terminal at the same address (a different address from input port PA). The input ports PA and PB of the main control MPU 1310a are 8-bit input ports, and each of the input terminals PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) to PA7 and PB0 to PB7 of input ports PA and PB is pre-assigned to one of the 0th through 7th bits.

[Summary A]
A1. As described above, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input to input terminal PA5 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, but the wiring patterns electrically connecting the lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a, the lead terminals of the electronic components (resistors MR10 to MR13, capacitor MC10, transistor MTR10) that make up the main control input circuit 1310b, and the lead terminal (input terminal PA5 of the input port PA) of the main control MPU 1310a are all formed on solder surface (back surface) 1310y, which is the surface opposite to mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310.

A2. In the signal transmission path between the lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a and the lead terminal (input terminal PA5 of input port PA) of the main control MPU 1310a, the wiring pattern is routed to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Therefore, as described above, there are no through holes formed in the main control board 1310 for electrically connecting the wiring patterns between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

A3. In the signal transmission path between the lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a and the lead terminal (input terminal PA5 of input port PA) of the main control MPU 1310a, it is difficult to route the wiring pattern only on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and it is necessary to also use the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. In this case, when forming through holes to electrically connect the wiring patterns between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the outer periphery of the through-hole land or the entire surface is covered with a green resist insulating coating on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and/or the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, as shown in Figures 190 to 193.

A4. As described above, the main control board 1310 is housed and sealed in a main control board box 1320 that is composed of a cover body 1301 and a base body 1302 and can be opened and closed by sliding longitudinally. The main control board box 1320 is attached to the back side of the cover body 1301 so that the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 faces the inside of the cover body 1301. In this state, when the base body 1302 is moved longitudinally to align it with a predetermined position on the cover body 1301, the outer peripheral surface of the base body 1302 fits within the inner peripheral surface of the cover body 1301, and the main control board 1310 is housed within the space formed by the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302. Thereafter, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are fixed together by screwing in a one-way screw or the like in the crimped portion 1303, which serves as a sealing portion, and the main control board box is sealed.

A5. As described above, the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is rotated by inserting the setting key into the socket 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. When the setting key is inserted into the socket 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a, if the setting key switch 1311a is pressed and the main control board 1310 bends, there is a risk of the wiring pattern formed on the main control board 1310 being broken. Therefore, to prevent the main control board 1310 from bending, a protrusion 1302p (shown in FIG. 185) is formed on the base body 1302 in an area on the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 that corresponds to the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310.

When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 and the setting key switch 1311a is not pressed (when a setting key is inserted into the socket 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated to release the pressure from the setting key, or when no setting key is inserted into the socket 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a), as described above, a distance dimension d2 (e.g., approximately 1 mm) is provided as a predetermined clearance between the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. When the setting key switch 1311a is pressed, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p abuts against the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, preventing the main control board 1310 from bending.

A6. As described above, a distance dimension d2 (e.g., approximately 1 mm) is provided as a predetermined clearance between the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 and the setting key switch 1311a is not pressed (when a setting key is inserted into the socket 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated to release the pressure from the setting key, or when the setting key is not inserted into the socket 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a in the first place), the front surface of the protrusion 1302p and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 do not come into contact. Furthermore, when the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are slid together when assembling the main control board box 1320, or when the main control board box is released from its sealed state and the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are slid together when removing the main control board 1310, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p abuts against the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, preventing damage to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

The front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 may come into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Therefore, as shown in Figure 186(b), the copper foil portion (copper foil layer, copper plane) is removed from the area of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p may come into contact, and the area corresponding to the surrounding area. The entire area from which the copper foil portion (copper foil layer, copper plane) has been removed is covered with a green resist insulating coating. Even if the green resist insulating coating formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is rubbed off by the front surface of the protrusion 1302p due to repeated pressing of the setting key switch 1311a, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p will not come into contact with the copper foil portion (copper foil layer, copper plane). This prevents the front surface of the protrusion 1302p from coming into contact with the wiring pattern or the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, preventing the wiring pattern from being damaged or broken by the front surface of the protrusion 1302p and preventing damage to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

A7. As described above, the main control board 1310 is housed and sealed in a main control board box 1320 that is composed of a cover body 1301 and a base body 1302 and can be opened and closed by sliding longitudinally. The main control board box 1320 is attached to the back side of the cover body 1301 so that the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 faces the inside of the cover body 1301. In this state, when the base body 1302 is moved longitudinally to align with a predetermined position on the cover body 1301, the outer peripheral surface of the base body 1302 fits within the inner peripheral surface of the cover body 1301, and the main control board 1310 is housed within the space formed by the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302. When the base body 1302 is moved longitudinally to align with a predetermined position on the cover body 1301, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 also moves longitudinally. The solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, which corresponds to the area where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves, is formed so that no wiring pattern is routed around it. This is because, although a distance dimension d2 (e.g., approximately 1 mm) is provided as a predetermined clearance between the front surface of the protrusion 1302p and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, when the base body 1302 is moved longitudinally to align with the predetermined position of the cover body 1301, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 may rub against the green resist insulating coating formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board, and it is therefore necessary to prevent damage or breakage of the wiring pattern.

In addition, the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the area where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 moves may not have a solid ground (GND) (board ground) formed in addition to the wiring pattern. This is because, although a distance dimension d2 (e.g., approximately 1 mm) is provided as a predetermined clearance between the front surface of the protrusion 1302p and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, when the base body 1302 is moved longitudinally to align with the predetermined position of the cover body 1301, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p may rub against the green resist insulating coating formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and therefore it is necessary to prevent damage to the solid ground (GND) (board ground).

A8. The protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 has a cylindrical shape. This allows the area in which the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves to be the area in which the front surface (circular shape) of the cylinder that is the protrusion 1302p moves. Therefore, as the protrusion 1302p slides parallel to the bottom edge of the main control board 1310 (along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310), the left-right distance dimension becomes the length of sliding movement of the protrusion 1302p, and the up-down distance dimension becomes the diameter of the cylinder, thereby making it possible to reduce the area in which the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves. This contributes to increasing the degree of freedom in routing the wiring pattern when routing the wiring pattern to avoid the area in which the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves.

Furthermore, as the protrusion 1302p slides parallel to the bottom edge of the main control board 1310 (along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310), the vertical distance dimension in the area where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves becomes the diameter of a cylinder and is constant.As a result, when the base body 1302 is moved longitudinally to match the predetermined position of the cover body 1301, interference between the side surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the lead terminals of the electronic components soldered to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 (the lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a) can be prevented (suppressed).

A9. The protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 may be formed in a shape having a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 (a shape having a constant width dimension equal to the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 1302p). In this way, the area in which the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves is such that the horizontal distance dimension becomes the length of sliding movement of the protrusion 1302p as the protrusion 1302p slides parallel to the bottom edge of the main control board 1310 (along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310), and the vertical distance dimension becomes the constant width of the protrusion 1302p. As a result, when the wiring pattern is routed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 near the position corresponding to the area where the protrusion 1302p moves, the wiring pattern can be routed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 along the longitudinal shape of the protrusion 1302p, thereby achieving a parallel positional relationship between the wiring pattern and the longitudinal shape of the protrusion 1302p, thereby preventing the front surface of the protrusion 1302p from rubbing against the green resist insulating coating formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and damaging or disconnecting the wiring pattern.

Furthermore, by allowing the protrusion 1302p to slide parallel to the bottom edge of the main control board 1310 (along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310), the vertical distance dimension in the area where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves becomes constant and becomes the fixed width of the protrusion 1302p. Therefore, when the base body 1302 is moved longitudinally to match the predetermined position of the cover body 1301, interference between the side surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the lead terminals of the electronic components soldered to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 (the lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a) can be prevented (suppressed).

A10. The protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 is not formed with a long shape extending perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. If the protrusion 1302p were formed with a long shape extending perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, when the base body 1302 was moved longitudinally to align it with the predetermined position of the cover body 1301, the side of the protrusion 1302p would interfere with the lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the electronic components soldered to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. For this reason, the protrusion 1302p is not formed with a long shape extending perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. In this way, when the base body 1302 is moved longitudinally to align it with the predetermined position of the cover body 1301, interference between the side surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the lead terminals of the electronic components soldered to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 (the lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a) can be prevented (suppressed).

A11. As shown in Figure 184, the setting key switch 1311a is composed of a setting key cylinder 1311ab into which the setting key is inserted and rotated; a rectangular base body 1311ac that is connected to the outer cylinder 1311aa and forms a circuit that turns the contacts ON or OFF when the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated; and a frame plate 1311ad that has a hole penetrating the outer cylinder 1311aa at a position corresponding to the outer cylinder 1311aa, is bent to cover the front and side surfaces of the base body 1311ac, and has a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed on both sides that protrude rearward from the base body 1311ac. The setting key cylinder 1311ab is molded from non-conductive resin, and the frame plate 1311ad is molded from conductive metal. The setting key cylinder 1311ab and frame plate 1311ad are not electrically connected or conductive, and are electrically insulated.

A12. The lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a are inserted into through holes from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and soldered to protrude from the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and are electrically connected by the internal circuit of the setting key switch 1311a to the wiring pattern that forms the signal transmission path to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A pair of protrusions 1311ada, 1311ada is formed on the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a. As shown in FIG. 186, the pair of protrusions 1311ada, 1311ada are inserted into long through holes SLH1, SLH2 from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310 of the main control board 1310 and soldered to protrude from the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, thereby electrically connecting to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 and electrically connecting the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a and the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

The pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada of the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a are inserted into the long through holes SLH1, SLH2 from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and are soldered so as to protrude from the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, but are not electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a may be in an electrically floating state.

A13. The locking unit 650, which locks the outer frame 2 and main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and main frame 4, is made of conductive metal. Unlike the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, the locking unit 650 is earthed to the game hall's island equipment via an earth wire (not shown).

A14. The worker operating the setting key switch 1311a must first release the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and must insert a key (this key is a conductive metal key; hereinafter, this may be referred to as a "metal key") into the keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131 of the locking unit 650 and turn it. Even if the worker is electrically charged, by inserting the metal key into the keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131 of the locking unit 650, the electrically charged potential from the worker can be dissipated by being grounded to the locking unit 650 and then to the island equipment of the amusement hall via an earth wire (not shown), thereby eliminating the electrically charged potential from the worker.

Even if an operator inserts a setting key into the socket 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, any potential charge on the operator has already been grounded to the island equipment of the amusement hall and removed, preventing damage to the setting key switch 1311a due to electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge of the operator's potential. Even if an operator inserts the setting key into the socket 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a while still charged, the setting key cylinder 1311ab and frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a are electrically insulated as described above, so the potential charge on the operator will not penetrate through the setting key cylinder 1311ab to the conductive metal frame plate 1311ad connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, preventing damage to the main control board 1310. (Naturally, the signal terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) that are the lead terminals of the setting key switch 1311a are insulated from the frame plate 1311ad and the setting key cylinder 1311ab.)

Furthermore, the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, so the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a will not remain charged.

In addition, if the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is not connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, together with the frame plate 1311ad, will not be electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. Even if a charged operator inserts the setting key into the socket 1311aba formed on the front of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected (insulated) from either the frame plate 1311ad or the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, so the operator's charged potential does not infiltrate the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 via the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, preventing damage to the main control board 1310. However, because the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, if the setting key switch 1311a becomes charged, it will not be able to discharge.

The long through holes SLH1', SLH2' to which a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada of the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a are soldered are not electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 and are in an electrically floating state. The through hole SLTH4 through which the COM2 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted, the through hole SLTH3 through which the COM1 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted, and the through hole SLTH1 through which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted are electrically connected to the wiring patterns SPTN1 and SPTN2, the through hole SLTH1 is further electrically connected to the wiring pattern SPTN3, and the through hole SLTH2 through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted is electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

In this way, since the wiring patterns SPTN1 to SPTN3 and the through holes SLTH1 to SLTH4 are present around the long through holes SLH1' and SLH2', a solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 is formed between the long through holes SLH1' and SLH2' and the wiring patterns SPTN1 to SPTN3, and a solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 is formed between the long through holes SLH1' and SLH2' and the through holes SLTH1 to SLTH4. By forming a land (land), if the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 and the setting key switch 1311a becomes charged, and discharge is no longer possible, the long through holes SLH1', SLH2' and the wiring patterns SPTN1 to SPTN3 must not be adjacent to each other without the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 in between, to avoid being affected by this. Also, it is necessary to ensure that the long through holes SLH1', SLH2' and the through holes SLTH1 to SLTH4 are not adjacent to each other without the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 in between.

[Summary B]
B1. The setting key signal wiring pattern that transmits a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and the RWM signal wiring pattern that transmits a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633 is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA, which is another lead terminal different from the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

The logical states of input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a and input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a are treated as memory information in an address space using the memory-mapped I/O method, allowing the main control MPU 1310a to simultaneously acquire them at the same address. In other words, as mentioned above, input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a and input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a are each pre-assigned to one of bits 0 through 7 for a given port having 8 bits.

As mentioned above, the IC package of the main control MPU 1310a is a ZIP (Zigzag)
The lead terminals protruding vertically from the bottom surface of the main control MPU 1310a are alternately bent and arranged in two rows along the longitudinal direction. The input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA are not arranged adjacent to each other in one of the two rows.

For example, if input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA are arranged in one of the two columns, other lead terminals are arranged between input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA and input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA so that input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA and input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA are not arranged next to each other.

B2. The setting key signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and the RWM signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633 is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA, which is a lead terminal different from the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Due to the electrical connection, input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA are arranged in one of the two rows, but the setting key signal wiring pattern that transmits detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the RWM signal wiring pattern that transmits detection signals from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633 may also be electrically connected so that they are arranged in separate rows of the two rows.

B3. The setting key signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and the RWM signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633 is another lead terminal that is different from the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and is connected to the input terminal While the setting key signal input terminal 1311a is electrically connected to the setting key signal wiring pattern that transmits a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the RWM signal input terminal 633d is electrically connected to the RWM signal wiring pattern that transmits a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633, the logic states of these terminals may be acquired at different addresses. In other words, the setting key signal input terminal and the RWM signal input terminal may be assigned in advance so that they can be acquired separately from different input ports. If input terminals (lead terminals) are grouped together for each input port of the main control MPU 1310a, the setting key signal input terminal and the RWM signal input terminal can be separated from each other by using different addresses.

B4. The logical state of the operation signal, which is a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and transmitted via the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, has two states: a logic (HI) that indicates a setting disabled state and a logic (LOW) that indicates a setting enabled state. The logic (HI) that indicates a setting disabled state pulls up the voltage of the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) toward the +5V power line created by the +5V generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, while the logic (LOW) that indicates a setting enabled state pulls down the voltage of the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) toward the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

The circuit is therefore configured so that input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and other adjacent input terminals (or other input terminals in the vicinity of input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal)) are electrically connected to the +5V power line created by the +5V generation circuit 1310g on the main control board 1310. As a result, even if unauthorized tampering were to occur, such as shorting out input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and other adjacent input terminals, the voltage of the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) would be pulled up toward the +5V power line created by the +5V generation circuit 1310g on the main control board 1310. This would result in the logical state of the operation signal, which is a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a transmitted via the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), becoming logic HI, indicating a setting disabled state, and preventing setting changes.

The logic state of the operation signal, which is a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633 and transmitted via the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, is either a logic (HI) indicating a non-operated state or a logic (LOW) indicating a pressed state. The logic (HI) indicating a non-operated state raises the voltage of the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) toward the +5V power line created by the +5V generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, while the logic (LOW) indicating a pressed state lowers the voltage of the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) toward the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

Therefore, like input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) is also configured so that other input terminals adjacent to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) (or other input terminals in the vicinity of input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal)) are electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310. As a result, even if unauthorized modification is made to short-circuit another input terminal adjacent to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), the voltage of the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) is pulled up to the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and the logical state of the operation signal, which is a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d transmitted via the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), will ultimately become a logic (HI) that indicates a no-press operation state, making it impossible to change the settings.

In addition to the terminals between the setting key signal input terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, which is electrically connected to various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the RWM signal input terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, which is electrically connected to various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633, The peripheral terminals (other adjacent terminals) of the setting key signal input terminal and the peripheral terminals (adjacent terminals) of the RWM signal input terminal may be electrically connected to wiring patterns that input other signals or wiring patterns that output other signals so that the logic of the RWM signal that indicates that the pressing operation portion of RWM switch 633d is not being operated is HI (logic that indicates a no-press operation state), and the logic of the setting key signal that indicates that setting key switch 1311a is being turned OFF is HI (logic that indicates a setting disabled state). This makes it more difficult to tamper with the RWM signal input terminal and setting key signal input terminal, contributing to improved security.

B5. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, as described above, the logic of the setting key signal becomes LOW (logic that indicates a setting enabled state) and is input to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, no ground (GND) (board ground) is formed around the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and around the setting key signal wiring pattern that is electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), and these are foil-punched areas to prevent the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and the setting key signal wiring pattern from being improperly short-circuited to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. In other words, no ground (GND) (board ground) is formed (arranged) around input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) or around the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), where the logic of the setting key signal that sets the setting key switch 1311a to the ON state is LOW (logic that conveys a setting enabled state). This prevents the voltage applied to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and the setting key signal wiring pattern from being improperly pulled down to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, as described above, when the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is operated, the logic of the RWM signal becomes LOW (logic that conveys the pressing operation status) and is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.Therefore, no ground (GND) (board ground) is formed around the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and around the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), and these are foil-punched areas to prevent the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and the RWM signal wiring pattern from being improperly short-circuited to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. In other words, no ground (GND) (board ground) is formed (arranged) around input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) or around the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), where the logic of the RWM signal that sets the pressing operation part of RWM switch 633d in an operated state is LOW (logic that conveys the pressing operation state). This prevents the voltage applied to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and the RWM signal wiring pattern from being improperly pulled down to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

B6. The logical state of the operation signal, which is a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and transmitted via the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, is a logic (HI) that indicates a setting disabled state and a logic (LOW) that indicates a setting enabled state. Also, the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633 and transmitted via the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, The logical state of a certain operation signal is a logic (HI) that conveys a non-pressed state and a logic (LOW) that conveys a pressed state, and the logic (HI) that conveys a non-setting state and the logic (HI) that conveys a non-pressed state are the same logic (HI), and the logic (LOW) that conveys a settable state and the logic (LOW) that conveys a pressed state are the same logic (LOW).However, instead of this, the logical states of the logic that conveys a non-setting state and the logic that conveys a pressed state may be the same logic (HI or LOW), and the logical states of the logic that conveys a settable state and the logic that conveys a non-pressed state may be the same logic (LOW or HI). Compared to using the same logic for communicating the settable state and the logic for communicating the pressed state, using the same logic for communicating the settable state and the logic for communicating the pressed state makes it difficult for someone attempting to tamper with input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), setting key signal wiring pattern, input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), and RWM signal wiring pattern to understand the logic of this combination, which ultimately results in one being short-circuited to ground (GND) (board ground) and the other to the power supply, which is time-consuming and requires effort. It also makes it more difficult to tamper with the RWM signal input terminal, setting key signal wiring pattern, setting key signal input terminal, and RWM signal wiring pattern, contributing to improved security.

Furthermore, when the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, as described above, the main control board 1310 is placed (sandwiched) in the gap (space) formed by the cover body side ribs 1301rb formed in multiple positions on the cover body 1301 and the base body side ribs 1302rb formed in multiple positions on the base body 1302. Furthermore, as described above, the base body 1302 is formed with a protrusion 1302p that can come into contact with the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310. When a metal setting key is inserted into a socket 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the main control board 1310 is bent and warped by the force of the insertion, the protrusion 1302p comes into contact with the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310, thereby preventing the main control board 1310 from further bending and warping, and preventing breakage of the wiring pattern formed on the main control board 1310 and peeling of the solder. In the region of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 that comes into contact with the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and its periphery, a foil punched area SINSy having a circular shape where the copper foil has been punched out is formed, as shown in FIG. 186(b). This prevents damage to the solid ground (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 by the protrusion 1302p, even if the solder surface insulating coating 1310yr is scraped off by the protrusion 1302p. The circular foil cutout area SINSy where the copper foil has been cut out safely and effectively utilizes the limited board area.

B7. By mounting the setting key switch 1311a on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and mounting the RWM switch 633d on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d are mounted on separate control boards. This means that the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 provided on the gaming board 5 and the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633 provided on the main frame 4 are positioned apart, and any attempt to commit fraud would require tampering with both the setting key switch 1311a side and the RWM switch 633d side, which is an extremely time-consuming process. This discourages fraudsters who see the arrangement of the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d from attempting to tamper, making fraud more difficult.

When actually changing the settings, it is necessary to operate the setting key switch 1311a, then operate the RWM switch 633d while operating the power switch 630a to power on the pachinko machine 1. The power switch 630a is mounted on the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c, which is attached to the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the setting key switch 1311a, RWM switch 633d, and power switch 630a required to change the settings are each mounted on separate boards.

B8. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633 were input to designated input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b (an input circuit mainly composed of resistors and transistors, with a common circuit configuration) without an error detection function mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as shown in Figure 179. However, they may also be input to the designated input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a via dedicated ICs equipped with input circuits (i.e., the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a via a dedicated IC for setting key input, and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d via a dedicated IC for RWM input). This makes it difficult to tamper with the logic state of the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, thereby contributing to improved fraud prevention measures.

Furthermore, the main control input circuit 1310b without error detection function mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is an input circuit mainly composed of resistors and transistors, and since it has a common circuit configuration, it may be configured as a DIP-type transistor array in which the transistors of multiple main control input circuits 1310b are combined into a single IC.

B9. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633 were input to designated input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b (an input circuit mainly composed of resistors and transistors, with a common circuit configuration) without an error detection function mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as shown in Figure 179. However, they may also be input to the designated input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a via dedicated ICs each equipped with an input circuit (i.e., the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a via a dedicated IC for setting key input, and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d via a dedicated IC for RWM input). In this case, the resistors and transistors that make up the main control input circuit 1310b, which does not have an error detection function, are placed between the separate dedicated ICs. This makes it difficult to distinguish which circuit is transmitting the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and which is transmitting the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, contributing to improved fraud prevention measures.

B10. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633 are input to specified input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b without error detection function, as shown in FIG. 179. When using a DIP-type transistor array in which the transistors of multiple main control input circuits 1310b are combined into a single IC, the input terminal of the DIP-type transistor array to which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input and the input terminal of the DIP-type transistor array to which the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input should not be arranged next to each other, or the wiring pattern should be arranged so that the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input to one of the multiple input terminals protruding from one side of the DIP-type transistor array, and the wiring pattern should be arranged so that the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input to one of the multiple input terminals protruding from the other side. This can contribute to improved fraud prevention measures.

B11. As shown in FIG. 179, the voltages of the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633 are pulled up to the power line side by resistors MR16 and MR5. These resistors MR16 and MR5 are pull-up resistors MR16 and MR5, and are located away from the setting key switch 1311a. Specifically, resistor MR16, which constitutes the logic inversion circuit 1310iv, has one end electrically connected to the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and the other end electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and is located to the right of the connector MCN8, which is located to the right of the setting key switch 1311a. Resistor MR2, which constitutes main control input circuit 1310b without error detection function, has one end electrically connected to the +5V power line created by +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on main control board 1310, and the other end electrically connected to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a, and is located above the lead-type resistor array located above setting key switch 1311a. Since RWM switch 633d is mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of dispensing control board 633, resistors MR16 and MR5 are located away from RWM switch 633d. If resistors MR16 and MR5 are tampered with, there is a risk that the logical state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and the logical state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, may be manipulated. Therefore, by separating resistors MR16 and MR5 from the setting key switch 1311a (RWM switch 633d), the resistors MR16 and MR5 can be blended in with other electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, making it possible to conceal the presence of important resistors MR16 and MR5.

Furthermore, by separating resistors MR16 and MR5 from the setting key switch 1311a (RWM switch 633d), even if unauthorized access is attempted by inserting a thin, tamper-evident tool such as a wire through a gap between the setting key switch 1311a and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, it becomes more difficult to tamper with resistors MR16 and MR5, thereby contributing to improved security.

B12. Resistor MR16, which constitutes the logic inversion circuit 1310iv, has one end electrically connected to the +5V power line created by the +5V generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and the other end electrically connected to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. It is located to the right of connector MCN8, which is located to the right of the setting key switch 1311a. Resistor MR2, which constitutes the main control input circuit 1310b without error detection function, has one end electrically connected to the +5V power line created by the +5V generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and the other end electrically connected to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. It is located above the lead-type resistor array located above the setting key switch 1311a. In this way, resistors MR16 and MR5 are located at a distance from each other. This makes resistors MR16 and MR5 blend in with other electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, making it difficult to notice that they are important electronic components related to the logical state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and the logical state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d.

Furthermore, by separating resistors MR16 and MR5 from each other, it becomes more difficult to tamper with resistors MR16 and MR5 simultaneously, which contributes to improved security.

B13. Between the main control input circuit 1310b without error detection function, which receives detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a, other circuits such as various DIP-type ICs, lead-type resistors, lead-type diodes, lead-type capacitors, lead-type electrolytic capacitors, and DIP-type crystal oscillators are arranged as shown in Figure 187. In this way, even if an attempt is made to insert a long, thin illegal tool such as a wire into the main control board box 1320 and short-circuit the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a, the other circuits can prevent the illegal tool from being inserted, and can induce a short circuit to other circuits, preventing the operation of the main control board 1310 and making it impossible to play. Furthermore, even if the main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function, which receives detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the payout control board 633, is replaced with a dedicated IC equipped with an input circuit, another circuit is interposed between the dedicated IC and the main control input circuit. Even with this configuration, even if an attempt is made to insert a long, thin illegal tool such as a wire into the main control board box 1320 and short-circuit the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a, the other circuit can prevent the illegal tool from being inserted, and the short-circuit to the other circuit can be induced, preventing the operation of the main control board 1310 and making it impossible to play.

B14. The detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633 may be configured to be transmitted by coupling the game board drawer connector and the main frame drawer connector. In this case, the wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d from the board on which the game board drawer connector is mounted is formed on the surface opposite to where the game board drawer connector is mounted (or is covered by the drawer connector even if it is formed on the mounting surface on which the game board drawer connector is mounted), making it difficult to see. At the same time, the wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d from the board on which the main frame drawer connector is mounted is formed on the surface opposite to where the main frame drawer connector is mounted (or is covered by the drawer connector even if it is formed on the mounting surface on which the main frame drawer connector is mounted), making it difficult to see.

Now, let's explain the drawer connector. The drawer connector is a connector that automatically electrically connects the main frame 4 and game board 5 simply by attaching the game board 5 to the main frame 4. A game board side drawer connector (convex type) is provided on the game board side relay board located in a predetermined position on the rear of the game board 5, and a main frame side drawer connector (concave type) is provided on the main frame side relay board located in a predetermined position on the front of the main frame 4.

When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is guided into the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main frame 4, electrically connecting the terminals of the game board side drawer connector (concave type) of the game board 5 to the terminals of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main frame 4.

For example, the main frame-side drawer connector (recessed type) of the main frame 4 is made of a non-conductive resin and has a box-shaped main body that is long in the left-right direction and has a rectangular opening on the front side. A plate-shaped base that is long in the left-right direction is integrally formed on the rear side of the box-shaped main body, giving it an overall T-shaped configuration.

Around the opening of the box-shaped main body, inclined portions are formed extending from the front of the opening toward the bottom of the box-shaped main body for a predetermined distance to guide the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 toward the bottom of the box-shaped main body. Grooves are formed on the central portion (one location) and on the left and right portions (one location on the left and one location on the right) of the inside top surface of the opening of the box-shaped main body, extending from near the front of the opening to the bottom of the box-shaped main body. These grooves prevent the game board drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 from being inserted upside down in an orientation different from the correct orientation into the main frame drawer connector (concave type), and prevent left-right misalignment between the game board drawer connector (convex type) and the main frame drawer connector (concave type) when the game board drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is inserted into the main frame drawer connector (concave type) in the correct orientation, thereby improving the fit between the game board drawer connector (convex type) and the main frame drawer connector (concave type).

On the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body, pin-type terminals (six pin-type terminals in one row) are arranged in two rows in the left-right direction, perpendicular to the bottom surface, and penetrate the box-shaped main body and base body.

Mounting through-holes are formed on the left and right sides of the base body. When mounting a main frame side drawer connector (recessed type) to the main frame side relay board, rivets are first inserted into the mounting through-holes from the front of the main frame side drawer connector (recessed type), and the ends are crimped and plastically deformed on the back surface (solder side) of the main frame side relay board. This secures the main frame side drawer connector (recessed type) to the main frame side relay board.

In addition, a cylindrical protrusion is formed on the back surface of the base body to ensure that the main frame side drawer connector (recessed type) is installed in the correct orientation when it is mounted on the main frame side relay board.

In addition to the main frame side drawer connector (concave type), the main frame side relay board is also equipped with a small DIP (Dual Inline Package) type connector that electrically connects to the main frame side drawer connector (concave type), and is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via wiring (harness). When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the gaming board side drawer connector (convex type) of the gaming board 5 is guided into the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main frame 4, and the terminals of the gaming board side drawer connector (concave type) are electrically connected to the terminals of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type). This forms a control signal line that transmits various control signals between the main control board 1310 provided on the gaming board 5 and the payout control board 633 provided on the main frame 4 via the small DIP type connector and wiring (harness).

The main frame-side drawer connector (concave type) electrically connects the main control board 1310 provided on the gaming board 5 to the payout control board 633 provided on the main frame 4, and also electrically connects to various power supply lines (including ground (GND)) that supply various power sources from the power supply board 630 to various boards provided on the gaming board 5. In addition to the main frame-side drawer connector (concave type), another main frame-side drawer connector (concave type) is provided on another main frame-side relay board separate from the main frame-side relay board. In addition to the other main frame-side drawer connector (concave type), this other main frame-side relay board is equipped with a small DIP (Dual Inline Package) type connector that is electrically connected to the other main frame-side drawer connector (concave type), and is electrically connected to the various decorative boards and sensors provided on the door frame 3 via wiring (harness). When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, another game board drawer connector (convex type) other than the game board drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 that is electrically connected to the main frame drawer connector (concave type) is guided to the other main frame drawer connector (concave type) of the main frame 4, and each terminal of the other game board drawer connector (convex type) is electrically connected to each terminal of the other main frame drawer connector (concave type), thereby forming a control signal line that transmits various control signals and detection signals from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 and the various decorative boards, various sensors, various speakers, etc. provided on the door frame 3 via a small DIP type connector and wiring (harness). The structure of the other main frame side drawer connector (concave type) is the same as the main frame side drawer connector (concave type), and the method of fixing the other main frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the other main frame side relay board is the same as the method of fixing the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the main frame side relay board (fixing method using rivets).

In addition, the method of fixing the game board 5's game board side drawer connector (convex type) guided by the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main frame 4 to the game board side relay board, and the method of fixing another game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by another main frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main frame 4 to another game board side relay board (this other game board side relay board is different from the game board side relay board on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main frame 4 is mounted) are the same as the method of fixing the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the main frame side relay board (a fixing method using rivets).

Rivets are used to secure the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the main frame side relay board. Although the drawer connector allows for automatic electrical connection between the main frame 4 and the game board 5 simply by attaching the game board 5 to the main frame 4, when attaching the game board 5 to the main frame 4, a large force may be applied from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 to the box-shaped body of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type). This large force prevents the pin-type terminals of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) from peeling off from the soldered surface on the back surface (solder surface) of the main frame side relay board. However, when using bolts and nuts to secure the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the main frame side relay board or the game board side drawer connector (convex type) to the game board side relay board, there is a drawback in that the nuts may loosen when the game board 5 is attached to or removed from the main frame 4.

In this embodiment, pin-type terminals are used for the main frame-side drawer connector (concave type). However, using a bellows type terminal and contacts presents the following problem. For example, if the terminals of the game board 5's game board-side drawer connector (convex type) are terminals and the terminals of the main frame-side drawer connector (concave type) of the main frame 4 are contacts, and the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4 while the power is on, the contacts between the terminals and the contacts (specifically, the contacts for the various power supply lines through which a large current (inrush current) flows) will weld. If an attempt is made to forcibly insert the game board 5 into the main frame 4 in this welded state, the contacts of the main frame-side drawer connector (concave type) will bend and break, or the contacts will peel off and break when the game board 5 is removed from the main frame 4, rendering the main frame-side drawer connector (concave type) unusable.

Furthermore, if the terminal and contact become welded together, the connector may be damaged, causing various control boards to malfunction or damaging the electronic components mounted on the various control boards, which necessitates the installation of a dedicated circuit to prevent welding.

In this embodiment, by using pin-type terminals for the main frame side drawer connector (concave type), the above-mentioned problems do not occur at all. In other words, even if an operator accidentally attaches the game board 5 to the main frame 4 while the power is on to the pachinko machine 1, the terminals of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) on the game board 5 will not weld to the terminals of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) on the main frame 4, and there is no need to provide a dedicated circuit to prevent welding.

B15. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 may be a pulse signal or a serial signal (command transmission) instead of an ON or OFF signal.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above is equipped with the game board 5 of Figure 11, which defines the game area 5a into which the launched game balls flow, and is equipped with the main control board 1310 of Figure 188, which has a mounting surface (front surface) 1310x through which the lead terminals of electronic components are inserted and onto which the electronic components are mounted, and a soldering surface (back surface) 1310y to which the lead terminals of the electronic components inserted therethrough are soldered.

The mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is equipped with a ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a (Fig. 188) as a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game, and is also equipped with a setting key switch 1311a (Fig. 188) as an operating unit, which is an electronic component that can change the setting of the probability of awarding a benefit to a player electrically connected to the main control MPU 1310a.

The lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a and the setting key switch 1311a are soldered to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. The wiring pattern electrically connecting the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a and the setting key switch 1311a is formed only on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

In this way, the wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, which is an operating unit that can change the setting of the probability of awarding a benefit to a player, is formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, making it difficult to see how the wiring pattern is routed when viewed from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, which contributes to making the wiring pattern more difficult to tamper with. This therefore contributes to improved security.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above is equipped with the game board 5 of FIG. 11, which defines a game area 5a into which fired game balls flow, and is equipped with a setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 of FIG. 188 as a first operation unit that can change the setting of the probability of awarding a profit to the player, a main control built-in RAM of the ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 188 as a memory unit that can store and retain game information, the main control board 1310 of FIG. 188 as a control board on which the ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 188 is mounted as a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game, and an RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board of FIG. 182 as a second operation unit that can clear (erase) the game information stored (retained) in the main control built-in RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a can change the setting of the probability of awarding a profit to a player based on the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d.

The setting key signal wiring pattern serves as the first transmission path through which the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, is input to the main control MPU 1310a, and the RWM signal wiring pattern serves as the second transmission path through which the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, is input to the main control MPU 1310a. These wiring patterns are formed on the main control board 1310 so that they do not run parallel to each other.

In this way, the setting key signal wiring pattern, which is the first transmission path through which an operation signal, which is a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, which is the first operation unit that can change the setting probability of awarding a player, is input to the main control MPU 1310a, and the RWM signal wiring pattern, which is the second transmission path through which an operation signal, which is a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, which is the second operation unit that can clear (erase) game information stored in the main control built-in RAM provided in the main control MPU 1310a, is input to the main control MPU 1310a, are formed on the main control board 1310 so that they do not run parallel to each other. This allows the setting key signal wiring pattern, which is the first transmission path, and the RWM signal wiring pattern, which is the second transmission path, to be input to the main control MPU 1310a at a distance from each other, making it difficult to simultaneously tamper with the setting key signal wiring pattern, which is the first transmission path, and the RWM signal wiring pattern, which is the second transmission path. This therefore contributes to improved security.

[13. Game Contents]
The game content of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 137, 144, and 145. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a player rotates the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 located in the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3, causing a game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 to pass between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and be shot into the upper part of the play area 5a, thereby starting a game with the game ball B. The game ball B shot into the upper part of the play area 5a flows down either the left or right side of the center device 2500 depending on the force of the shot. The force of the shot of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195. The more the handle is rotated clockwise, the stronger the shot. A maximum of 100 game balls B can be shot continuously per minute, that is, at 0.6-second intervals.

In addition, within the game area 5a, multiple obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front of the game panel 1100. When the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N, the speed at which the game ball B flows down is suppressed and various movements are imparted to the game ball B, allowing players to enjoy watching its movements. In addition to the obstacle nails N, within the game area 5a, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is located above the upper left side unit 2300 and to the left of the center device 2500.

When game ball B is shot into the top of center device 2500 and enters the left side of the highest part of the outer periphery of center device 2500 when viewed from the front, it will come into contact with multiple obstacle nails N and flow down the area to the left of center device 2500. Then, when game ball B flowing down the area to the left of center device 2500 enters warp entrance 2511 opening in peripheral wall portion 2501 of center device 2500, it is supplied to stage 2513 from warp exit 2512.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls back and forth on the stage 2513 and is released forward from the center in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the central release section 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, there is a high probability that it will be received by the first starting opening 2002, since the central release section 2513a is located directly above the first starting opening 2002. When a game ball B is received in this first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the main control board 1310 draws a special lottery result (first special lottery result) that will result in a favorable game state advantageous to the player (for example, a "big hit," "medium hit," "small hit," "special feature hit," "probability variable (probability change) hit," or "time shortened (time shortened) hit").

Game ball B released into the play area 5a from the stage 2513 of the center device 2500 may be received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100.

If a game ball B that flows down to the left side of the center device 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it may be pushed toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 or the obstacle nails N, and may be accepted into the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. When a game ball B is accepted into the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (e.g., 10) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

On the other hand, if game ball B is hit into the top of center device 2500 within game area 5a and enters to the right of the highest part of peripheral wall 2501 of center device 2500, it will pass through either first guide passage 2521 or second guide passage 2522 of guide passage group 2520 of center device 2500, be released above gate 2003, come into contact with multiple obstacle nails N planted between guide passage group 2520 and gate 2003, and then pass through gate 2003 with a certain probability.

The guide passage group 2520 of the center device 2500 is composed of a first guide passage 2521, the entrance of which opens near the impact stop 1006, and a second guide passage 2522, the entrance of which opens at a distance to the left of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. As a result, if game ball B is hit with enough force to hit the impact stop 1006 (i.e., a right hit), it will enter the first guide passage 2521, and if game ball B is hit with enough force not to hit the impact stop 1006 (slightly weaker than a right hit), it will most likely enter the second guide passage 2522. In other words, game ball B hit into the upper right side of the center device 2500 will flow through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, depending on the strength of the hit.

In this embodiment, the game ball B is configured to have a higher probability of passing through gate 2003 if it is routed through second guide passage 2522 than first guide passage 2521. Also, the game ball B is configured to have a higher probability of passing through gate 2003 and the left side of gate 2003 if it is routed through second guide passage 2522 than first guide passage 2521.

When game ball B passes through this gate 2003 and is detected by gate sensor 2801, a regular lottery is conducted on main control board 1310, and if the result of the regular lottery is a "regular win," the closed second starting port 2004 in the first attacker unit 2400 opens for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 to 10 seconds), allowing game ball B to be received into second starting port 2004.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery, which is conducted when game ball B passes through gate 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is indicated (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as the normal variation time). This indication of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the gaming board 5. The second starting gate 2004 opens after the normal variation time has elapsed.

If game ball B passes through gate 2003 between the time game ball B passes through gate 2003 and the time the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot begin, so the start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is postponed until the previous suggestion of the normal lottery result has finished. Also, the number of reserved normal lottery results is limited to four, and any more than that are discarded rather than reserved, even if game ball B passes through gate 2003. This prevents the burden on the gaming hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

Gambling ball B that passes through gate 2003 and the left side of gate 2003 is likely to flow down the left side of the side right center unit 2700 due to the multiple obstacle nails N planted between gate 2003 and the side right center unit 2700, and is occasionally accepted into the general winning opening 2001 of the side right center unit 2700, and rarely accepted into the second sub-outlet 2022. When gaming ball B is accepted into the general winning opening 2001 of the side right center unit 2700, a predetermined number of gaming balls B are paid out, just as with the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. On the other hand, when gaming ball B is accepted into the second sub-outlet 2022, it is expelled from the gaming area 5a without having the opportunity to be accepted into the special winning opening 2006, the second starting opening 2004, or the large winning opening 2005.

Furthermore, game ball B that passes through the right side of gate 2003 is received by the second sub-outlet 2022 of the side right center unit 2700, and is discharged outside the game area 5a without having the opportunity to be received by the general winning port 2001, special winning port 2006, second starting port 2004, or large winning port 2005 of the side right center unit 2700.

In this way, when game ball B is received by the second sub-outlet 2022 downstream of the guide passage group 2520, the game ball B is ejected outside the game area 5a, encouraging the player to perform a shooting operation that will prevent game ball B from being received by the second sub-outlet 2022. In this embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520 of the center device 2500, the second guide passage 2522 has a lower probability of receiving game ball B than the first guide passage 2521, encouraging the player to shoot game ball B aimed at the second guide passage 2522. In other words, rather than a "right hit" in which game ball B hits the impact stop 1006, a shooting operation that requires delicate adjustments to the rotation of the handle 182 can be encouraged, allowing the player to enjoy the original gameplay of the pachinko machine 1, which is primarily focused on the shooting operation of game ball B.

The game ball B that passes to the left of the side right center unit 2700 is guided by multiple obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right center unit 2700, passes to the left of the role winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600, and is then released toward the first attacker unit 2400 via the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role 2500.

At this time, if game ball B is received by first start opening 2002 or second start opening 2004 and a "perfect prize" is drawn as the first or second special lottery result, game ball B that flows down the left side of side right center unit 2700 is likely to be received by game ball winning opening 2006, as game ball winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. When game ball B is received by game ball winning opening 2006 while it is open, a predetermined number (e.g., 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from payout device 580 to upper tray 201 by main control board 1310 and payout control board 633.

Game ball B received by special prize opening 2006 and detected by special prize opening sensor 2601 flows through distribution passage 3158 and is distributed to either V prize opening 2007 or losing opening 2008 by V prize opening door 3006, which moves back and forth. When game ball B is distributed to V prize opening 2007, large prize opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern, creating an advantageous game state for the player. On the other hand, when game ball B is distributed to losing opening 2008, an advantageous game state for the player does not occur.

Game ball B, which passes to the left of the special prize opening 2006 and is released toward the first attacker unit 2400, rolls to the left over the first shelf 2421, the second starting opening door 2411, and the second shelf 2422, before being released to the left, and then rolls to the left over the third shelf 2423, the large prize opening door 2413, and the fourth shelf 2424, before being released into the game area 5a.

When game ball B is rolling on second starting gate door 2411, if the normal lottery result drawn when game ball B passes through gate 2003 is a "normal win" and second starting gate door 2411 is retracted, game ball B is accepted into second starting gate 2004. When game ball B is accepted into second starting gate 2004, a predetermined number (e.g., four) of game balls B are paid out from payout device 580 to upper tray 201 via main control board 1310 and payout control board 633, and main control board 1310 draws a special lottery result (first special lottery result) that will result in a favorable game state for the player (e.g., a "jackpot," "medium win," "small win," "special feature win," "probability-varying (probability change) win," or "time-shortening (time-shortening) win").

Furthermore, when game ball B is rolling on the large prize opening door 2413, if the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by the acceptance of game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 is a special lottery result that generates a favorable game state (e.g., a "jackpot"), after the special variable time has elapsed, the large prize opening 2005 will be able to accept game ball B in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. When game ball B is accepted into the large prize opening 2005 while it is in the open state, a predetermined number (e.g., 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Therefore, when the large prize opening 2005 is able to receive game ball B, by receiving game ball B into the large prize opening 2005, many game balls B can be paid out, providing enjoyment to the player.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the main control board 1310 draws a special lottery result that will generate a favorable game state (e.g., "big hit," "medium hit," "small hit," "gift hit," "probability variable (probability change) hit," "time shortened (time shortened) hit") that is advantageous to the player. The drawn special lottery result is then displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 0 The player is prompted for a time period ranging from 1 to 360 seconds (also referred to as the special variable time). The special lottery results that are drawn when game ball B is received by first starting port 2002 and second starting port 2004 include "miss," "small hit," "2R jackpot," "5R jackpot," "15R jackpot," "probability change (changed probability) hit," "time-saving (time-saving) hit," "probability change time-saving hit," "probability change no time-saving hit," "second jackpot," etc.

If the result of the special lottery is a "hit," the special prize opening 2006 repeats an opening/closing pattern multiple times (e.g., twice) in which it opens to a state where it can receive game ball B for a predetermined short time (e.g., between 0.2 and 0.6 seconds) and then closes. On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a "jackpot," after the special prize opening 2005 opens to a state where it can receive game ball B, and either a predetermined time (e.g., approximately 30 seconds) has elapsed, or a predetermined number of game balls B (e.g., 10) have been received by the special prize opening 2005, the opening/closing pattern in which it closes to a state where it cannot receive game ball B (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, a "2R jackpot" will repeat 2 rounds, a "5R jackpot" will repeat 5 rounds, and a "15R jackpot" will repeat 15 rounds, creating an advantageous gaming state for the player.

In addition, with a "jackpot," there are "wins" that change the probability of a special lottery result such as a "jackpot" being drawn after the jackpot game has ended ("probable win"), or that change the display time of the effect image suggesting the special lottery result ("time-saving win").

If the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is a "second jackpot," the big prize slot 2005 becomes capable of receiving game ball B in a predetermined pattern, and then an ST (special time) is generated as a favorable gaming state. This ST maintains the probability change or time-saving state for a predetermined number of fluctuations.

In this embodiment, if a game ball B is received into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 between the start of the special lottery due to the reception of a game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and the time when the special lottery result is indicated, the indication of the special lottery result cannot begin. Therefore, the start of the indication of the special lottery result is suspended until the indication of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. For any number more than this, the special lottery result is not reserved but discarded even if a game ball B is received into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. This prevents the burden on the amusement hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the special lottery result. The function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off multiple LEDs and flashing them for a predetermined period of time, after which the combination of lit LEDs suggests the special lottery result.

Meanwhile, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and suggests the special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 displays three picture rows consisting of multiple pictures lined up horizontally, and changes each picture row, sequentially stopping and displaying the changing picture rows. The three stopped and displayed picture rows are displayed so that the pictures in the three stopped and displayed picture rows form a combination that corresponds to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than a "lose," after the three picture rows have stopped and each picture has been stopped and displayed, a confirmation image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an advantageous game state (for example, a "small win" game, a "big win" game, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result is generated.

The time for which the special lottery result is indicated on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) is different from the time for which the special lottery result is indicated on the performance display device 1600 (the time from when the pattern row changes until the final image is displayed), with the time for which it is indicated on the function display unit 1400 being set to be longer.

In addition to displaying effect images suggesting the results of the special lottery using the effect display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 can also perform player participation effects in which the touch operation unit 302 and press operation unit 303 of the effect operation section 301 in the effect operation unit 300 on the door frame 3 are operated according to the results of the special lottery. In player participation effects, the press operation unit 303 can be raised and made more prominent by the operation button lift drive motor 367, allowing the player to enjoy the player participation effects by operating the effect operation section 301.

In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 can appropriately use the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, the performance display device 1600, and the rear front performance unit 3100, rear upper performance unit 3200, and rear lower performance unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 to produce light-emitting effects, display effects, etc., allowing players to be entertained by various effects and preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in a player-participation presentation in which the player operates the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, if the player makes a mistake or fails to perform the operation that they should perform, the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player so that they can perform the correct operation.

[14. Second embodiment of the game board]
Next, the game board 5A of the second embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 194 to 196. Figure 194(a) is a front view showing an enlarged portion of the game board of the first embodiment, and (b) is a front view showing an enlarged portion of the game board of the second embodiment at the same location as (a). Figure 195(a) is a front view showing an enlarged portion of the game board of the second embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the back-front left decorative unit of the back-front performance unit in (a) is illuminated. Figure 196 is an explanatory diagram showing the panel board of the game panel in Figure 195(a) illuminated.

The gaming board 5A of the second embodiment has the same configuration as the gaming board 5 of the first embodiment, except that the component 1000A and the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100 are made of a translucent, milky white synthetic resin, and detailed descriptions of the parts with the same configuration will be omitted.

In the first embodiment of the gaming board 5, the front component 1000 and gaming panel 1100 (panel plate 1110 and panel holder 1120) are formed from transparent synthetic resin, so that the rear unit 3000 located behind the front component 1000 and gaming panel 1100 can be seen from the front (player side), as shown in Figure 194 (a).

In contrast, in the gaming board 5A of this embodiment, the front component 1000A and panel plate 1110A are formed from a milky white synthetic resin, and therefore, as shown in Figure 194(b), the front component 1000 and the rear unit 3000 provided behind the gaming panel 1100, except for the inside of the opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110A, cannot be seen from the front (player's side).

The front component 1000A and panel plate 1110A are formed from a translucent, milky white, opaque synthetic resin. The panel plate 1110A may be machined from a milky white synthetic resin plate, or it may be injection molded from a milky white synthetic resin.

In the gaming board 5A of this embodiment, the panel plates 1110A, etc. of the gaming panel 1100 are milky white, so part of the rear unit 3000 located at the rear (the part outside the opening 1112 when viewed from the front) can be made invisible through the panel plates 1110A, etc. This panel plate 1110A, etc. is translucent, so when decorative elements, etc. located at the rear are illuminated, light from the decorative elements at the rear passes through the panel plate 1110A, allowing the player to see the illuminated decoration of the decorative elements.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 195(a), in the back front left decorative unit 3120 of the back front performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, which is provided behind the panel board 1110A, etc., the back front upper left logo decoration 3122 and back front left sub-decorative part 3123, etc., which are located outside the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110A, are not visible from the front when viewed from the front. When the back front left logo decoration 3121, back front upper left logo decoration 3122, and back front left sub-decorative part 3123, etc., which are provided behind, are illuminated, light passes through the translucent panel board 1110A, as shown in FIG. 195(b), making the illuminated back front upper left logo decoration 3122, back front left sub-decorative part 3123, etc., visible.

The panel boards 1110A and the like are milky white, allowing the luminous colors of the illuminated decorations, such as the logo decoration 3122 at the top left of the back front and the sub-decorative part 3123 at the left of the back front, to be transmitted in their original colors, allowing players to see a colorful illumination effect.

The translucent, opaque material for panel board 1110A should preferably have a light transmittance of 2% to 80% and a haze value of 80% to 100%. If the transmittance is lower than this, it will be difficult to create a luminous decoration with sufficient brightness, and if the transmittance is higher than this, it will be difficult to obtain an opaque material. Also, if the haze value is lower than this, the shape and decoration of components located behind it will be easy to see, which may prevent the desired effect from being concealed.

In addition, panel board 1110A etc. is milky white (Munsell value (10YR 9.2/0.5)), but there are also other colors such as "White Munsell value (N 9.5)", "Cherry Blossom Munsell value (2.5Y 9.2/0.5)", "Purple Blossom Munsell value (10Y 9/1)", "Natural color Munsell value (10YR 9/1)", "Lead white Munsell value (N 9)", "Oyster white Munsell value (5GY 8.5/0.3)", "Grayish white Munsell value (10YR 9/0.5)", "Indigo blue Munsell value (9.7BG 8.2/1.3)", "Purple color Munsell value (2B 8.5/2)", "Ivory color Munsell value (2.5Y 8.5/1.5)", "Cream yellow Munsell value (5Y 8.5/3.5)", and "Cherry blossom color" It may also be a whitish color such as Munsell value (10RP 9/2.5).

However, since the panel board 1110A and the like are made translucent and milky white, if a colored decorative body such as black, red, or blue is placed behind the panel board 1110A, depending on the color of the decorative body, it may be visible through the panel board 1110A even when the decorative body is not illuminated. Furthermore, if the decorative body can be seen through the panel board 1110A, the player may become aware of the presence of the decorative body behind the panel board 1110A, which may reduce the impact (surprise) on the player when the decorative body is illuminated, and the desired presentation effect may not be achieved.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the rear front left first decorative body 3124, rear front left second decorative body 3125, rear front left third decorative body 3126, and rear front left decorative body base 3127, which constitute the rear front left upper logo decorative body 3122 and rear front left sub-decorative body 3123 of the rear front left decorative unit 3120 provided behind the panel board 1110A, are formed from colorless and transparent materials, so the rear front left upper logo decorative body 3122, rear front left sub-decorative body 3123, etc. cannot be seen through the translucent, milky white panel board 1110A. Therefore, when the rear front left upper logo decorative body 3122, rear front left sub-decorative body 3123, etc. are not illuminated, they are invisible to the player, making it difficult for the player to notice their presence. Furthermore, when the logo decoration 3122 at the top left of the back front and the sub-decorative part 3123 at the back front are illuminated, they can be seen through the translucent milky white panel 1110A, surprising players and allowing them to enjoy the illuminated effect. In addition, the light from the illuminated decorations can be seen through the panel 1110A, making the playing area 5a look bright and beautiful, strongly attracting the player's attention.

The gaming board 5A of this embodiment also includes a panel decoration substrate 1130 mounted on the outside of a translucent, milky-white panel board 1110A. The panel decoration substrate 1130 has multiple LEDs 1130a mounted thereon that emit light onto the outer periphery of the panel board 1110A. The multiple LEDs 1130a are full-color LEDs. When the multiple LEDs 1130a on the panel decoration substrate 1130 are illuminated, the panel board 1110A can be illuminated and decorated, as shown by the shaded area in Figure 196. This causes the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110A) in front of which the gaming ball B circulates to become self-illuminating, thereby brightening the gaming area 5a, making the gaming ball B circulating within the gaming area 5a easier to see, and improving the appearance of the gaming area 5a, thereby strongly attracting the player's attention.

Furthermore, because the game panel 1100 is self-illuminating, the game ball B circulating within the game area 5a appears as a silhouette, making it easier to see the game ball B and making it easier to make subtle adjustments to the launch strength. Furthermore, by providing panel decorative substrates 1130 on both the left and right sides of the panel board 1110A, the player can intuitively understand when being advised to "hit right" or "hit left." Specifically, by illuminating the LEDs 1130a of either the left or right panel decorative substrate 1130 depending on the game situation, and decorating the left or right side of the panel board 1110A with illumination, the player can intuitively understand that they are being advised to "hit left" or "hit right." This allows the player to enjoy the operation of shooting the game ball B, and also entertains the player with a new type of lighting effect not seen in previous pachinko machines.

More specifically, in conventional pachinko machines, when the game board uses opaque plywood as the game panel, the game area is decorated by attaching a decorative film with a predetermined design or the like to the front of the plywood. However, when plywood is used for the game panel, the decorative film decoration does not stand out from other game machines, making it difficult to increase appeal to players. On the other hand, when the panel board 1110 in front of which the game ball B flows is made transparent, as in the game board 5 of the first embodiment, the decoration of the rear unit 3000 located behind and the effect images on the effect display device 1600 are easily visible, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 with a sense of openness. However, the game ball B flowing in front of the transparent panel board 1110 appears to be floating in the air, which may make it difficult for some players to understand the movement of the game ball B.

In contrast, the game board 5A of this embodiment uses multiple LEDs 1130a on the panel decoration substrate 1130 to illuminate and decorate the translucent panel board 1110A. By appropriately combining the light-emitting colors and patterns of the LEDs 1130a, the decoration of the panel board 1110A can be varied in a variety of ways. This allows players to see a self-illuminating game board 5A, something not available in previous pachinko machines, and strongly attracts the player's attention, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players. Furthermore, because the panel board 1110A is self-illuminating due to the multiple LEDs 1130a on the panel decoration substrate 1130, the game ball B circulating in front of the panel board 1110A can be made more visible, allowing players to enjoy the movement of the game ball B and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition to the effects described above, the gaming board 5A of this embodiment uses a milky white synthetic resin for the panel board 1110A, etc., and since it is possible to use a lower grade resin than transparent resin, the cost of the panel board 1110A can be reduced compared to when transparent resin is used.

In the above embodiment, the panel decorative substrate 1130 is provided on the outside periphery of the panel board 1110A, but this is not limited to this, and the panel decorative substrate 1130 may be provided behind the panel board 1110A. This can achieve the same effects as above. Furthermore, compared to when the panel board is transparent, the point-like light from the LEDs 1130a and the like provided at the rear can be diffused by the opalescent panel board 1110A, allowing the panel board 1110A to be softly illuminated and decorated, reducing glare and creating a gaming board 5A that is gentle on the eyes.

In addition, in the gaming board 5A of this embodiment, although not shown, a decorative film (also called a cell) with a predetermined pattern may be attached to the front of the panel board 1110A. This reduces wear on the panel board 1110A due to the circulation of gaming balls B, and improves the appearance by preventing the appearance of the gaming area 5a from deteriorating when the decorative body behind it is not illuminated by the cell pattern. Furthermore, light from an LED located behind the panel board 1110A can illuminate the cell pattern along with the panel board 1110A, making the decoration of the panel board 1110A look even more beautiful.

Furthermore, as described above, if cells are provided on the front surface of panel board 1110A, the pattern on the cells can be used as an outline to highlight the LED illumination decoration (electric decoration) provided on the rear of panel board 1110A, further enhancing the decorative effect of the illumination decoration.

Furthermore, cells may be provided on the rear surface of panel board 1110A. In this way, light from LEDs or the like provided behind panel board 1110A (cells) will cast shadows of the cells (or the images on the cells) on panel board 1110A, allowing the decoration of panel board 1110A to change with the light emitted by the LEDs, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest. The shadows cast on panel board 1110A may be words such as "hit right," "hit left," or "chance," which can entertain the player by suggesting changes in the game situation.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a decorative body (rear front left decorative unit 3120) with a fixed position is provided behind the milky white panel board 1110A, but this is not limited to this. A movable decorative body may also be provided behind the panel board 1110A that can move between a retracted position behind the panel board 1110A in a front view and an emerging position inside the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110A.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment shows panels such as panel 1110A that are entirely milky white, including the interior, this is not limiting and they may be partially milky white, or may be transparent inside with at least one surface milky white. Specific examples include panel panels molded in two colors from a transparent resin and a milky white resin, panel panels made by bonding a transparent resin plate and a milky white resin plate together, panel panels with a milky white film (cell) attached to at least one surface of a transparent resin plate, panel panels with a transparent resin plate whose rear surface has been subjected to shrinkage processing using ultraviolet-curable ink, and panel panels with a transparent resin plate whose rear surface has been sandblasted.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the panel boards 1110A and the like are shown as milky white, but this is not limited to this and the panel boards may be any suitable color, such as red, blue, yellow, etc.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the front component 1000A is shown as being translucent and milky white, but this is not limited to this. The front component 1000 may be transparent like the game board 5 of the first embodiment, or may be a front component of a different color than the panel board 1110A.

[15. Third embodiment of the game board]
Next, a gaming board 5B of a third embodiment in a pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Fig. 197. Fig. 197 is an exploded perspective view of the panel board and cells of the gaming board of the third embodiment, as seen from the front. The gaming board 5B of the third embodiment has the same configuration as the gaming board 5 of the first embodiment, except that cells 1140 are provided behind the panel board 1110, and detailed descriptions of the same components will be omitted.

In the second embodiment, the gaming board 5B has a film-like cell 1140 with a predetermined pattern detachably attached to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 of the transparent gaming panel 1100. The cell 1140 is a synthetic resin film with a thickness of 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm, and the predetermined pattern is printed on it. Examples of materials for the cell 1140 include polyethylene terephthalate resin, polycarbonate resin, ABS resin, AES resin, PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin, polypropylene resin, polyethylene resin, polystyrene resin, high-impact polystyrene resin, and polyvinyl chloride.

The cell 1140 is formed to a size that covers only a portion of the entire surface of the panel plate 1110 (here, the area extending from the left side of the center reel 2500 to the bottom). Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, the cell 1140 is attached to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 using screws with a predetermined amount of play. This simplifies the effort required to attach the cell 1140 compared to attaching it to the entire surface of the panel plate 1110, and also reduces the amount of cell 1140 used, thereby preventing increases in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, because the cells 1140 are provided as part of the panel board 1110, a greater number of cells 1140 can be extracted from the resin sheet compared to conventional cells that are attached to the panel board, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, because the cells 1140 are attached to the panel board 1110 with some play, even if the cells 1140 expand and contract due to changes in temperature, humidity, etc., the play can absorb the difference in expansion and contraction between the cells 1140 and the panel board 1110. This prevents the cells 1140 from wrinkling or cracking even if the cells 1140 shrink relative to the panel board 1110, and allows the decorative effect of the patterns on the cells 1140 to be maintained.

Furthermore, because the cells 1140 are attached to the panel board 1110 with screws, the cells 1140 can be easily attached and detached from the panel board 1110. Therefore, by replacing the cells 1140 with cells with different designs, it is possible to easily accommodate changes in the specifications, model, or design of the pachinko machine 1, thereby suppressing increases in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 and, by replacing the cells 1140 with designs that have a more decorative effect, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, because the cells 1140 are located behind the transparent panel board 1110, the distance from the player to the cells 1140 is greater than if they were located in front of the panel board 1110, reducing the sense of oppression felt by the player.

It is also desirable to make the cells 1140 translucent, so that light from the LEDs located behind the panel board 1110 (cells 1140) can illuminate the images on the cells 1140, improving the appearance of the game area 5a. The illuminated decoration of the cells 1140 can also strongly attract the attention of players, increasing the appeal of the pachinko machine 1.

In the above embodiment, the cell 1140 is attached to the panel plate 1110 using screws, but this is not limited to this. For example, the cell 1140 may be attached by sandwiching it between the panel plate 1110 and the panel holder 1120.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the opening 1112 in which the center feature 2500 of the panel board 1110 is provided is shown to be positioned to the right and to the right (eccentric to the right), but this is not limited to this and it may be positioned to the top (eccentric to the top) or to the left (eccentric to the left).The same effect as above can be achieved by providing the cell 1140 behind the part of the opening 1112 that becomes wider due to being offset (eccentric).

Furthermore, the opening 1112 in which the center device 2500 is provided may be offset from the center or outer edge of the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110), or may be offset from the center or outer edge of the gaming area 5a. Therefore, for example, if the centers of the panel board 1110 and the gaming area 5a do not coincide with each other, the center of the opening 1112 that is offset from the center of the panel board 1110 may coincide with the center of the gaming area 5a, or the center of the opening 1112 that is offset from the center of the gaming area 5a may coincide with the center of the panel board 1110.

16. Another embodiment of the function display unit
Next, another embodiment of the function display unit 1400 provided on the gaming board 5 or the like will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 198 to 203. FIG. 198(a) is a front view of the function display unit of the second embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line S-S in (a), (c) is a perspective view of the function display unit of (a) viewed from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the function display unit of (a) viewed from the rear. FIG. 199 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit of FIG. 198 viewed from the front, and FIG. 200 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit of FIG. 198 viewed from the rear. FIG. 201 is an explanatory diagram schematically illustrating the relationship between the function display unit of FIG. 198 and the player. FIG. 202 is an explanatory diagram schematically illustrating the relationship between the function display unit of the third embodiment and the player. FIG. 203 is a cross-sectional view of the function display unit of the fourth embodiment.

The function display unit 1400A of the second embodiment, like the function display unit 1400 of the first embodiment described above, displays a variable display by flashing multiple LEDs 1401 based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and then turns each LED on or off to form a predetermined combination, thereby displaying the game status (game situation), regular lottery results, special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result), the number of reserved regular lottery results, the number of reserved special lottery results, the number of rounds in the event of a "jackpot", etc.

In more detail, in the game board 5 of the first embodiment, for example, when a game ball B is received in the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, the main control board 1310 internally processes a special lottery result. The main control board 1310 then sends a control signal to the function display unit 1400 to display the special lottery result, and the function display unit 1400 displays the special lottery result using the corresponding LED 1401.

In addition, the control signal for the special lottery result drawn on the main control board 1310 is also sent to the peripheral control board 1510, which then displays a specified effect image on the effect display device 1600 as an effect suggesting the special lottery result. The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is designed to entertain the player, so although the special lottery result drawn on the main control board 1310 can be roughly recognized, the details are difficult to discern. On the other hand, the function display unit 1400 accurately displays the special lottery result drawn, but because it is displayed by illuminating multiple small LEDs 1401, it is difficult to understand what is displayed at a glance.

It is therefore conceivable that by photographing the function display unit 1400 with a digital camera or a camera attached to a mobile phone, the lighting state of the LEDs on the function display unit 1400 can be analyzed, allowing users to quickly find out what is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

However, if the result of the special lottery drawn can be easily determined by the illumination of the LED on the functional display unit 1400, and the special lottery result displayed on the functional display unit 1400 is a "lose," even if an effect image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, knowing the result will prevent the player from enjoying the effect of the effect image, and they may wish the effect image to end quickly, which may irritate some players and reduce their interest in the game.

In contrast, the functional display unit 1400A of the second embodiment allows the player to clearly see the illumination status of the multiple LEDs 1401, but when photographed with a digital camera or the like, the illumination status of the multiple LEDs 1401 becomes unclear, making it impossible to determine the displayed content.

Specifically, the functional display unit 1400A comprises a functional display board 1402 having multiple LEDs 1401 mounted on its front surface, a rear reflector 1403 provided in front of the functional display board 1402 and transmitting light from the LEDs 1401 independently forward, a light-transmitting sheet 1404 provided in front of the rear reflector 1403 and having light-transmitting properties, and a front reflector 1405 provided in front of the light-transmitting sheet 1404 and emitting light from the LEDs 1401 that has passed through the rear reflector 1403 in different directions.

As shown in Figure 199, multiple LEDs 1401 are randomly mounted on the functional display board 1402. The rear reflector 1403 has multiple through-holes 1403a that correspond to each LED 1401 on the functional display board 1402. The multiple through-holes 1403a are arranged perpendicular to the front surface of the functional display board 1402 (see Figure 198(b) etc.).

The front reflector 1405 has multiple display holes 1405a that penetrate in the front-to-rear direction and correspond to the through holes 1403a of the rear reflector 1403. The rear ends of the multiple display holes 1405a are located immediately before the corresponding through holes 1403a of the rear reflector 1403, and the leading ends are located at varying distances from a vertical line to the front surface of the functional display substrate 1402 that passes through the center of the rear end. In other words, the axial directions of the multiple display holes 1405a are oriented in different directions relative to the vertical line to the front surface of the functional display substrate 1402.

The front reflector 1405 also has a dividing recess 1405b that is recessed from the front to the rear to connect the multiple display holes 1405a. The dividing recess 1405b divides the multiple display holes 1405a into two: display holes 1405a (LEDs 1401) related to the first special lottery result, and display holes 1405a (LEDs 1401) related to the second special lottery result.

As shown in Figure 201, the multiple display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 are oriented in three directions so that, when viewed by a player seated 50 to 70 cm away from the functional display unit 1400A at the front of the pachinko machine 1, the light from the LED 1401 is visible only to the left eye, only to the right eye, and visible to both the left and right eyes. In other words, the multiple display holes 1405a are divided into three groups: one for the left eye, one for the right eye, and one for both eyes.

With the function display unit 1400A of this embodiment, the player can see the light from all of the LEDs 1401 by looking with both eyes, so when special lottery results, etc. are displayed, the light emission status of the multiple LEDs 1401 can be clearly seen, and the function can be performed in a manner comparable to that of the function display unit 1400 of the first embodiment.

Furthermore, with the functional display unit 1400A of this embodiment, when photographing with a digital camera or the like, since the digital camera or the like is monocular, only one light for the left eye and one for both eyes, or one light for the right eye and one for both eyes, is photographed, making it difficult to photograph the light emission status (light emission state) of all LEDs 1401. In other words, when photographing with a digital camera or the like, the light emission status of the multiple LEDs 1401 can become unclear, making it difficult to distinguish the display content on the functional display unit 1400A. Therefore, based on the photograph taken, the display content on the functional display unit 1400A becomes clear, and the result of the special lottery drawn can be seen as a "miss," a simple "jackpot," a "probable hit," a "time-saving hit," a "second jackpot (ST hit)," etc. This prevents the player from not being able to enjoy the effects suggesting the special lottery result or from not being able to enjoy an advantageous game state that is currently occurring (for example, a "jackpot" game), thereby keeping the player entertained and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the function display unit 1400A of this embodiment, the orientation of the display hole 1405a on the front of the reflector 1405 is changed, and the display content is designed to be clearly visible according to the position of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the display content of the function display unit 1400A can be seen unclearly from behind the seated player. This makes it difficult for other players to grasp the game situation, reducing the chances of other players peering at the player, allowing the player to enjoy the game without worrying about other players.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the display content is designed to be clearly visible to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, making it more difficult to photograph the display content on the functional display unit 1400A using a digital camera or the like from a position behind the player, thereby ensuring the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, in the functional display unit 1400A, the display holes 1405a on the front of the reflector 1405 are oriented not only left and right but also up and down, so that the display content can be seen clearly when viewed from the eye level of a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. This means that when attempting to take a photograph with a digital camera or the like, it is necessary to adjust the height as well, making it more difficult to photograph the display content on the functional display unit 1400A.

In addition, the display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 are oriented differently for the left eye, right eye, etc., which prevents the horizontal distance between the multiple LEDs 1401 on the functional display board 1402 from becoming too large, thereby reducing the horizontal width of the functional display unit 1400A.

In the above embodiment, the multiple display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 are oriented in different directions to be used for the left eye, right eye, etc. However, this is not limited to this, and a functional display unit 1400B with the configuration shown in Figure 202 may also be used.

The functional display unit 1400B comprises a functional display board 1411 having mounted on its front surface multiple left-right LEDs 1411a and multiple right-left LEDs 1411b spaced a predetermined distance apart (the distance between the player's left and right pupils); a rear reflector 1412 provided in front of the functional display board 1411 and transmitting light from the left-right LEDs 1411a and right-left LEDs 1411b forward independently; a translucent sheet 1413 provided in front of the rear reflector 1412; and a front reflector 1414 provided in front of the translucent sheet 1413 and transmitting light from the left-right LEDs 1411a and right-left LEDs 1411b forward after passing through the rear reflector 1412.

The left LED 1411a and right LED 1411b on the functional display board 1411 are spaced 40 mm to 80 mm apart in the left-right direction. The rear reflector 1412 has multiple through-holes 1412a that correspond to the left LED 1411a and right LED 1411b on the functional display board 1411. The multiple through-holes 1412a are arranged perpendicular to the front surface of the functional display board 1411. The front reflector 1414 has multiple display holes 1414a that correspond to the multiple through-holes 1412a on the rear reflector 1412. The multiple display holes 1414a are arranged perpendicular to the front surface of the functional display board 1411.

This functional display unit 1400B is configured so that, when viewed by a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the light from the left LED 1411a is visible only to the left eye, and the light from the right LED 1411b is visible only to the right eye. Therefore, when the player looks with both eyes, the light from both the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b is visible, so the function can be performed in a manner comparable to that of the functional display unit 1400 of the first embodiment.

Furthermore, with the function display unit 1400B, the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b are separated in the left-right direction, so that only one of them can be photographed with a monocular digital camera or the like, achieving the same effects as the function display unit 1400A of the second embodiment.

Furthermore, according to the functional display unit 1400B, the multiple display holes 1414a on the front of the reflector 1414 are oriented perpendicular to the front surface of the functional display board 1411, so the display content cannot be clearly seen from any position other than the front of the functional display unit 1400B, making it difficult to photograph the display content using a digital camera, etc.

Furthermore, with the functional display unit 1400B, the multiple display holes 1414a on the front reflector 1414 are oriented perpendicular to the front surface of the functional display substrate 1411, and all face the same direction, making it possible to easily mold the front reflector 1414 and suppressing increases in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1.

In the above embodiment, functional display units 1400A and 1400B are shown with configurations that are difficult to capture with a monocular digital camera, etc., but this is not limited to this, and functional display unit 1400C with a configuration such as that shown in Figure 203 may also be used.

This functional display unit 1400C emits invisible light (infrared, ultraviolet, etc.) that can be captured by digital cameras, etc., making the displayed content difficult to discern. Specifically, it comprises a functional display board 1421 with multiple LEDs 1421a mounted on its front surface, a rear reflector 1422 provided in front of the functional display board 1421, a flat light guide plate 1423 provided in front of the rear reflector 1422, an auxiliary board 1424 mounted with invisible light LEDs 1424a that emit invisible light onto the side of the light guide plate 1423, and a front reflector 1425 provided in front of the light guide plate 1423.

The rear reflector 1422 has multiple through-holes 1422a that correspond to the multiple LEDs 1421a on the functional display substrate 1421. When light from the invisible light LEDs 1424a on the auxiliary substrate 1424 enters the light guide plate 1423 from the side, at least the area of the display holes 1425a on the front reflector 1425 emits light.

The invisible light LED 1424a on the auxiliary board 1424 emits either infrared or ultraviolet invisible light. When the multiple LEDs 1421a are displaying special lottery results, etc., the invisible light LED 1424a emits light, radiating invisible light from the light guide plate 1423. The front reflector 1425 has multiple display holes 1425a that correspond to the through holes 1422a in the rear reflector 1422. The multiple through holes 1422a in the rear reflector 1422 and the multiple display holes 1425a in the front reflector 1425 are arranged perpendicular to the front surface of the functional display board 1421.

With this functional display unit 1400C, even if the light guide plate 1423 emits invisible light due to the invisible light LED 1424a, the player cannot see the invisible light. Therefore, the light from the LED 1421a located at the rear can be seen through the light guide plate 1423, allowing the display content to be viewed in good condition.

On the other hand, if this functional display unit 1400C is photographed with a digital camera or other device capable of capturing invisible light, all of the display holes 1425a will appear to be emitting light due to the light guide plate emitting invisible light, making the displayed content unclear and achieving the same effect as above.

In the above embodiment, a reflector back 1403 (reflector back 1412) and a light-transmitting sheet 1404 (light-transmitting sheet 1413) are provided, but this is not limited to this. A reflector front 1405 (reflector front 1414) may also be provided directly on the front surface of the functional display substrate 1402 (functional display substrate 1411).

In addition, configurations that make it difficult to photograph the display contents on the functional display unit with a digital camera or the like may include, for example, distributing LEDs over a wider area than the shooting range of a digital camera or the like, flashing LEDs at a speed that makes them appear to be lit to the player but appear to be off when photographed with a digital camera or the like, or using multiple dummy LEDs that are unrelated to the display and appear to be off to the player but appear to be lit or off when photographed with a digital camera or the like, or placing high-brightness LEDs near the functional display unit may cause halation when photographed with a digital camera or the like, preventing the display contents from being captured.

[17. Second embodiment of mounting of magnetic sensor]
Next, a second embodiment of the attachment of the magnetic sensor 1050, which differs from the above-described game board 5 and the like, will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 204. Fig. 204(a) is a cross-sectional view showing the second embodiment of the attachment of the magnetic sensor, (b) is an explanatory perspective view showing the attachment of the magnetic sensor in (a), (c) is an exploded perspective view showing the attachment of the magnetic sensor in (b), and (d) is an exploded perspective view showing the attachment of the magnetic sensor shown with a holding member different from that in (c).

The second embodiment of the magnetic sensor 1050 mounting method includes a holding member 1071 that is mounted at a predetermined position on the game board 5 and has a pair of locking portions 1071a formed from through-holes, and a holding container 1072 that has elastic claws 1072a that lock into the locking portions 1071a of the holding member 1071 and houses the magnetic sensor 1050. The holding member 1071 is made of synthetic resin. The holding container 1072 is made of transparent synthetic resin, allowing the magnetic sensor 1050 to be seen from the outside. The holding member 1071 and holding container 1072 are also made of non-magnetic materials.

The holding container 1072 also has a hole on the surface opposite the elastic claw 1072a. Through this hole in the holding container 1072, the electrical wires from the magnetic sensor 1050 housed inside the holding container 1072 can be pulled out to the outside.

The holding member 1071 and holding container 1072 are made of non-magnetic material, which prevents the holding member 1071 and other components from attracting magnetic field lines from the magnet when the magnet is brought close to the play area 5a, preventing a decrease in the magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050. This makes it easier to detect magnetism acting on the play area 5a, enabling early detection of fraudulent activity using magnets, and dissuading players from engaging in fraudulent activity by reporting suspicious magnetic activity detected by the magnetic sensor 1050, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 with a strong deterrent against fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, by elastically deforming the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached to and detached from the holding member 1071. This means that the magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached using the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072, without the need for metal screws made of magnetic material as in conventional pachinko machines. This also simplifies the assembly of the pachinko machine 1, thereby minimizing the cost increase associated with the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached by providing a locking portion 1071a that penetrates the holding member 1071 and locking the elastic claw 1072a of the holding container 1072 into the locking portion 1071a. This simplifies the configuration of the holding member 1071 on which the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached, thereby reducing the cost of the holding member 1071.

Furthermore, because the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072 are engaged with the locking portions 1071a of the holding member 1071, as shown in FIG. 204(d), multiple sets of locking portions 1071a can be provided on the holding member 1071 in advance, and the elastic claws 1072a can be engaged with any of the locking portions 1071a, thereby allowing the magnetic sensor 1050 to be attached at any desired position. Alternatively, another locking portion 1071a may be provided on the holding member 1071 at a position different from the locking portion 1071a to which the elastic claws 1072a are engaged. This allows the position of the magnetic sensor 1050 to be changed or additional magnetic sensors 1050 to be added without replacing the holding member 1071 with a new one, reducing costs and increasing the versatility of the holding member 1071.

In addition, the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed in the holding container 1072 and is engaged with the engaging portion 1071a of the holding member 1071 by the elastic claw 1072a, which makes it easier to standardize the mounting structure of the magnetic sensor 1050 and reduces the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by providing the holding member 1071 with multiple locking portions 1071a in advance and locking the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072 containing the magnetic sensor 1050 to the locking portions 1071a at appropriate positions, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be installed in any position or its position can be easily changed. Therefore, since the position of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily changed or additional sensors can be installed, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can easily accommodate design changes and model changes while suppressing increases in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, a biasing portion such as a protrusion that presses against the housed magnetic sensor 1050 may be provided inside the holding container 1072. This can suppress small vibrations of the magnetic sensor 1050, reducing the likelihood of the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1050 coming loose or causing poor contact due to such vibrations, ensuring reliable operation of the magnetic sensor 1050.

In the above embodiment, a through hole was shown as the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071, but this is not limited to this and any shape that can lock the elastic claw 1072a may be used, such as a groove or slit.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the holding container 1072 is shown as one that houses the magnetic sensor 1050 vertically, but this is not limited to this, and the holding container may also house the magnetic sensor 1050 horizontally.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed in a holding container 1072 having elastic claws 1072a and attached to the holding member 1071, but this is not limited to this. Elastic claws may be formed on the sensor case 1053 of the magnetic sensor 1050 and engaged with the engaging portion 1071a of the holding member 1071.

Furthermore, while the above describes the installation of magnetic sensor 1050, this installation structure may also be used to install a vibration sensor. Specifically, the vibration sensor may be housed in a holding container with elastic claws, and the elastic claws may be engaged with engagement portions of the holding member to install the vibration sensor. Vibration sensors are not affected by surrounding magnetic materials, but using an installation structure similar to this magnetic sensor 1050 is effective for changing or moving the installation location and reducing installation costs.

[18. Another embodiment related to attachment of decorative body such as sticker]
Next, another embodiment relating to the attachment of a decorative body such as a sticker, which differs from the above embodiment, will be described in detail with reference to Figures 205 to 208. In this section, the member on which a predetermined decoration is applied will be referred to as the decorative body, the member to which the decorative body is attached on one side will be referred to as the first member, and the member to which the decorative body is attached on the other side of the first member will be referred to as the second member. Note that the decorative body, first member, and second member may be arranged front to back, top to bottom, or left to right.

Figure 205(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of an example in which the separation hole in the first member for removing the decorative body also serves as a positioning hole for the second member, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of an example in which a closed space is formed by the second member behind the separation hole in the first member for removing the decorative body, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of (b) in which decorative bodies of different thicknesses are attached, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of an example in which the separation hole in the first member for removing the decorative body also serves as an attachment hole for the decorative body. Figure 206(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the first member from the front with a decorative body attached, (b) is a cross-section of (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the first member from the front with a decorative body different from (a) attached.

Figure 207(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a horizontally elongated rectangular decorative body and the first member, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a circular decorative body and the first member, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a symmetrically arranged decorative body and the first member, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a symmetrically arranged decorative body and the first member with a different shape from (c). Figure 208(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a decorative body and a movable first member from the front, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line T-T-T in (a), (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the decorative body and the first member in (a) and (c), (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a decorative body and a movable first member with a different shape from (a) from the front, and (e) is a cross-sectional view taken along line T-T-T in (d).

First, the embodiment shown in Figure 205(a) comprises a decorative body 1801 made of a sheet-like sticker on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed, a first member 1821 to which the decorative body 1801 is attached on one side, and a second member 1841 attached to the other side of the first member 1821.

The first member 1821 comprises a flat plate portion 1821a, an attachment recess 1821b recessed into one side of the plate portion 1821a to which the decorative body 1801 is attached, a boss portion 1821c protruding from the other side of the plate portion 1821a opposite the attachment recess 1821b, a separation hole 1821d penetrating the boss portion 1821c and the plate portion 1821a, and a rib 1821e protruding from the other side of the plate portion 1821a to the same position as the tip of the boss portion 1821c. The attachment recess 1821b is recessed deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1801.

The second member 1841 has a base portion 1841a on one surface of which the boss portion 1821c and the tips of the rib 1821e of the first member 1821 abut, and a positioning protrusion 1841b that protrudes from one surface of the base portion 1841a and is inserted into the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821. The first member 1821 and the second member 1841 are positioned relative to each other by inserting the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841 into the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821.

When assembled, the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821 is closed on one side by the decorative body 1801 affixed to the mounting recess 1821b, and on the other side by the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841, creating a closed space inside. The separation hole 1821d is located near the edge of the mounting recess 1821b that is hidden by the decorative body 1801. This separation hole 1821d also serves as a positioning hole for positioning the first member 1821 to the second member 1841.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, if the decorative body 1801 cannot be properly attached to the mounting recess 1821b of the first member 1821 during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1821d from the other side of the first member 1821 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the decorative body 1801 from the other side to one side, causing the edge of the decorative body 1801 to curl up to one side and be removed. The worker can then pull the curled-up portion to easily remove the decorative body 1801 from the mounting recess 1821b, allowing the decorative body 1801 to be reattached.

Furthermore, with the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1821d from the other side of the first member 1821 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the decorative body 1801 from the other side, making it easy to remove the decorative body 1801 from the mounting recess 1821b, thereby facilitating the replacement of the decorative body 1801 when changing models.

Furthermore, as described above, when the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 are separated, the decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1821b using the separation hole 1821d, making it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, and reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by attaching the decorative body 1801 to the mounting recess 1821b, the separation hole 1821d can be hidden from one side, which prevents the separation hole 1821d from spoiling the appearance and makes it difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole 1821d, making it difficult for players to plot fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1821d.

Furthermore, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1821d is closed from the other side by the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841, which is inserted into the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821 to which the decorative body 1801 is affixed. As a result, there is no hole that runs through the entire machine as in conventional pachinko machines. This makes it possible to prevent linear illegal tools such as piano wire from being inserted into the game board 5 through the hole from the other side of the second member 1841, thereby preventing illegal acts.

In addition, because the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841 closes the separation hole 1821d from the other side, even if an illegal tool is inserted from one side through the ornament 1801 and into the separation hole 1821d, the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841 prevents further insertion (penetration) to the other side. This prevents the illegal tool from entering the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1821d, preventing illegal acts from being committed. In addition, because the illegal tool pierces the ornament 1801 and leaves a mark on it, illegal acts can be discouraged, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal acts.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1821 may be the front component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left side unit 2300, first attacca unit 2400, center role 2500, second attacca unit 2600, middle right side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), and the second member 1841 may be the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110, panel holder 1120).

Examples of decorative body 1801 include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (product name), Metaltic Seals (product name), potting seals, aluminum seals, etc.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figure 205(b) comprises a decorative body 1801 made of a sheet-like sticker on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed, a first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1801 is attached on one side, and a second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822. The second member 1842 is attached to the first member 1822 by a structure not shown.

The first member 1822 comprises a flat plate portion 1822a, an attachment recess 1822b recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1822a to which the decorative body 1801 is attached, a separation hole 1822c penetrating the flat plate portion 1822a at the attachment recess 1822b, and multiple ribs 1822d protruding from the other side of the flat plate portion 1822a. The attachment recess 1821b is recessed deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1801. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, at least some of the multiple ribs 1822d are arranged to surround the separation hole 1822c.

When assembled, the separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 is closed on one side by the decorative body 1801 attached to the mounting recess 1822b, and on the other side is open to a space surrounded and closed by multiple ribs 1822d and one surface of the second member 1842, resulting in an entirely closed space. The separation hole 1822c is located near the edge of the mounting recess 1822b that is hidden by the decorative body 1801.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, if the decorative body 1801 cannot be properly attached to the mounting recess 1822b of the first member 1822 during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the decorative body 1801 from the other side to one side, causing the edge of the decorative body 1801 to curl up to one side and be removed. The worker can then pull the curled-up portion to easily remove the decorative body 1801 from the mounting recess 1822b, allowing the decorative body 1801 to be reattached.

Furthermore, with the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the decorative body 1801 from the other side, making it easy to remove the decorative body 1801 from the mounting recess 1822b, thereby facilitating the replacement of the decorative body 1801 when changing models.

Furthermore, as described above, when the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated, the decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b using the separation hole 1822c, making it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, and reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by attaching the decorative body 1801 to the mounting recess 1822b, the separation hole 1822c can be hidden from one side, which prevents the separation hole 1822c from spoiling the appearance and makes it difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole 1822c, making it difficult for players to plot fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1822c.

Furthermore, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1801 is affixed, and as there is no hole that runs through the entire machine as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools such as piano wire from being inserted into the game board 5 through the hole from the other side of the second member 1842, thereby preventing illegal acts.

Furthermore, because the second member 1842 closes the separation hole 1822c from the other side, even if an illegal tool is inserted from one side through the ornamental body 1801 and into the separation hole 1822c, the second member 1842 can prevent it from being inserted (entered) further to the other side. This prevents the illegal tool from entering the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1822c, preventing illegal acts from being committed. In addition, because the illegal tool pierces the ornamental body 1801 and leaves a mark on it, illegal acts can be discouraged, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal acts.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 may be the previous component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left side unit 2300, first attacca unit 2400, center role 2500, second attacca unit 2600, middle right side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), and the second member 1842 may be the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110, panel holder 1120).

Examples of decorative body 1801 include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (product name), Metaltic Seals (product name), potting seals, aluminum seals, etc.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figure 205(c) comprises a decorative body 1802 made of a sticker with a predetermined decoration and a certain thickness (e.g., 0.4 mm to 5 mm), a first member 1822 to one side of which the decorative body 1802 is affixed, and a second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822. The second member 1842 is attached to the first member 1822 by a structure not shown.

The first member 1822 comprises a flat plate portion 1822a, an attachment recess 1822b recessed from one side of the plate portion 1822a to which the decorative body 1802 is attached, a separation hole 1822c penetrating the plate portion 1822a at the attachment recess 1822b, and multiple ribs 1822d protruding from the other side of the plate portion 1822a. The attachment recess 1821b is recessed shallower than the thickness of the decorative body 1802. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, at least some of the multiple ribs 1822d are arranged to surround the separation hole 1822c.

When assembled, the separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 is closed on one side by the decorative body 1802 attached to the mounting recess 1822b, and on the other side is open to a space surrounded and closed by multiple ribs 1822d and one surface of the second member 1842, resulting in an entirely closed space. The separation hole 1822c is located near the edge of the mounting recess 1822b that is hidden by the decorative body 1802.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, if the decorative body 1802 cannot be properly attached to the mounting recess 1822b of the first member 1822 during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the decorative body 1802 from the other side to one side, causing the edge of the decorative body 1802 to curl up to one side and be removed. The worker can then pull the curled-up portion, easily removing the decorative body 1802 from the mounting recess 1822b and re-attaching the decorative body 1802.

Furthermore, with the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the decorative body 1802 from the other side, making it easy to remove the decorative body 1802 from the mounting recess 1822b, thereby facilitating the replacement of the decorative body 1802 when changing models.

Furthermore, as described above, when the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated, the decorative body 1802 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b using the separation hole 1822c, making it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, and reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by attaching the decorative body 1802 to the mounting recess 1822b, the separation hole 1822c can be hidden from one side, which prevents the separation hole 1822c from spoiling the appearance and makes it difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole 1822c, making it difficult for players to plot fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1822c.

In addition, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1802 is affixed, and as there is no hole that runs through the entire machine as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools such as piano wire from being inserted into the game board 5 through the hole from the other side of the second member 1842, thereby preventing illegal acts.

Furthermore, because the second member 1842 closes the separation hole 1822c from the other side, even if an illegal tool is inserted from one side through the decorative body 1802 and into the separation hole 1822c, the second member 1842 prevents it from being inserted (entered) further to the other side. This prevents the illegal tool from entering the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1822c, preventing illegal acts from being committed. In addition, because the illegal tool pierces the decorative body 1802 and leaves a mark on it, it discourages people from committing illegal acts, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal acts.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 may be the previous component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left side unit 2300, first attacca unit 2400, center role 2500, second attacca unit 2600, middle right side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), and the second member 1842 may be the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110, panel holder 1120). Alternatively, the first member 1822 may be a decorative holding member, and the second member 1842 may be a base member or decorative substrate, etc.

Examples of decorative body 1802 include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (product name), Metatic Seals (product name), potting seals, and aluminum seals. Examples of decorative body 1802 include those formed by injection molding, vacuum molding, compressed air molding, high-frequency molding, etc.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figure 205(d) comprises a decorative body 1803 that is thick (e.g., 2 mm to 20 mm) and rigid and has a predetermined decoration, a first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1803 is attached on one side, and a second member 1842 that is attached to the other side of the first member 1822.

The decorative body 1803 has an attachment dowel 1803a protruding to the other side. The decorative body 1803 can be attached to the first member 1822 by press-fitting this attachment dowel 1803a into the separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822, which will be described later.

The first member 1822 comprises a flat plate portion 1822a, an attachment recess 1822b recessed from one side of the plate portion 1822a against which the decorative body 1803 abuts, a separation hole 1822c that penetrates the plate portion 1822a at the attachment recess 1822b and into which the attachment dowel 1803a is press-fitted, and multiple ribs 1822d protruding from the other side of the plate portion 1822a. The attachment recess 1821b is recessed shallower than the thickness of the decorative body 1803. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, at least some of the multiple ribs 1822d are arranged to surround the separation hole 1822c.

When assembled, the separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 is closed on one side by the mounting dowel 1803a protruding from the decorative body 1803, and on the other side is open to a space surrounded and closed by multiple ribs 1822d and one surface of the second member 1842, resulting in an entirely closed space. The separation hole 1822c is located near the edge of the mounting recess 1822b that is hidden by the decorative body 1803.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, if the decorative body 1803 cannot be properly attached to the mounting recess 1822b of the first member 1822 during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822, and the tip of the rod can be used to press the mounting dowel 1803a of the decorative body 1803 from the other side to one side, thereby separating the other side surface of the decorative body 1803 from the surface of the mounting recess 1822b, allowing the decorative body 1803 to be easily removed from the first member 1822 and reattached.

Furthermore, with the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the mounting dowel 1803a of the decorative body 1803 from the other side, making it easy to remove the decorative body 1803 from the first member 1822, thereby facilitating the replacement of the decorative body 1803 when changing models.

Furthermore, as described above, when the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated, the decorative body 1803 can be easily removed from the first member 1822 using the separation hole 1822c, making it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, and reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by pressing the mounting dowel 1803a into the separation hole 1822c and attaching the decorative body 1803 to the first member 1822, the separation hole 1822c can be hidden from one side, which prevents the separation hole 1822c from spoiling the appearance and makes it difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole 1822c, making it difficult for players to plot fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1822c.

In addition, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822, and as there is no hole that runs through the entire machine as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools such as piano wire from being inserted into the game board 5 through the hole from the other side of the second member 1842, thereby preventing illegal acts.

Furthermore, because the mounting dowel 1803a is press-fit into the separation hole 1822c from one side and the decorative body 1803 is rigid, even if an attempt is made to insert an illegal tool through the decorative body 1803 from one side and into the separation hole 1822c, the rigidity of the decorative body 1803 and the mounting dowel 1803a can prevent the tool from penetrating. Even if the decorative body 1803 is penetrated from one side and inserted into the separation hole 1822c, the second member 1842 can prevent further insertion (penetration) to the other side, preventing the illegal tool from penetrating the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1822c and preventing illegal acts. Furthermore, because the illegal tool penetrates the decorative body 1803 and leaves a mark on the decorative body 1803, it discourages people from committing illegal acts, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal acts.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 may be the previous component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left side unit 2300, first attacca unit 2400, center role 2500, second attacca unit 2600, middle right side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), and the second member 1842 may be the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110, panel holder 1120). Alternatively, the first member 1822 may be a decorative holding member, and the second member 1842 may be a base member or decorative substrate, etc.

The decorative body 1803 may be formed by injection molding and have a relief-like decoration. The mounting dowel 1803a of the decorative body 1803 may be molded integrally with the decorative body 1803, may be insert-molded, or may be assembled separately.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figures 206(a) and (b) comprises a decorative body 1804 made of a sheet-like sticker on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed, and a first member 1823 to one side of which the decorative body 1804 is attached. Note that the configuration on the other side of the first member 1823 (including the second member) may have any of the configurations described above.

The decorative body 1804 is a sticker with a predetermined pattern, text, etc. printed on its surface, and is translucent. This decorative body 1804 has an approximately square outer shape, with chamfered portions 1804a of a predetermined radius at three corners. Because the overall shape of this decorative body 1804 makes it difficult to determine its orientation, the shape of one corner is made different from the shape of the remaining corners, making it possible to determine its orientation. Note that while the chamfered portions 1804a shown here are R-chamfered, they may also be C-chamfered.

In addition, decorative body 1804 has an adhesive surface 1804b (the area shown shaded in Figure 206(a)) on the back surface that is provided along the outer periphery with a roughly constant width (within the range of 3mm to 6mm). The width of adhesive surface 1804b is set appropriately depending on the size of decorative body 1804. Limiting adhesive surface 1804b to the outer periphery in this way is often used, especially with transparent stickers (decorative body 1804), when you want to show off LEDs or other decorative elements or designs behind them.

The first member 1823 has a flat plate portion 1823a, an attachment recess 1823b recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1823a to a size slightly larger than the decorative body 1804 and deeper (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the decorative body 1804, to which the decorative body 1804 is attached, and a separation hole 1823c that penetrates the flat plate portion 1823a at the location of the attachment recess 1823b. This first member 1823 is formed to be transparent.

The separation hole 1823c is located close to the corner of the mounting recess 1823b and in a position where it will not be covered by the adhesive surface 1804b when the decorative body 1804 is attached (a position inside the adhesive surface 1804b). This prevents the adhesive surface 1804b from coming into contact with the separation hole 1823c, thereby preventing a decrease in the adhesive strength of the decorative body 1804.

This separation hole 1823c is a circular hole. In this embodiment, the separation hole 1823c has an inner diameter within the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1823c were any smaller, the diameter of the rod-shaped separation member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1823c would be smaller, making it more likely to bend and potentially unable to sufficiently press against the decorative body 1804. If the separation hole 1823c were any larger, bending would occur in the area of the separation hole 1823c in the decorative body 1804, potentially detracting from the appearance of the decorative body 1804.

The first member 1823 is also provided with chamfered portions 1823d formed at three corners of the mounting recess 1823b, which have a larger radius than the chamfered portion 1804a of the decorative body 1804. The remaining corner serves as an anti-misapplication portion 1823e. This gives the mounting recess 1823b a shape similar to that of the decorative body 1804. The two edges that make up the corner of the mounting recess 1823b where the chamfered portion 1823d is not provided are set as contact surfaces that serve as references for attaching the decorative body 1804. This ensures clearance in at least two directions for attaching the decorative body 1804, making the attachment process easier.

The first member 1823 also has an identification portion 1823f in the mounting recess 1823b that indicates the location of the contact surface. The identification portion 1823f is recessed below the surface of the mounting recess 1823b. By looking at this identification portion 1823f, the worker can immediately recognize the position of the contact surface for attaching the decorative body 1804, preventing mistakes in the position of the contact surface and making the attachment work easier.

In addition, it is desirable that the distance from the outer edge of the flat portion 1823a to the outer edge of the mounting recess 1823b of the first member 1823 be 0.5 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, the outer portion of the mounting recess 1823b will be more likely to chip when the game ball B collides with another member.

When attaching decorative body 1804 to mounting recess 1823b, first, the corner of decorative body 1804 that does not have chamfered portion 1804a is brought into contact with the contact surface (misapplication prevention portion 1823e) of mounting recess 1823b indicated by identification portion 1823f, and then the adhesive surface 1804b is gradually brought into contact with the surface of mounting recess 1823b from that point to attach it. Furthermore, when attempting to bring the corner of decorative body 1804 that has chamfered portion 1804a into contact with the contact surface (misapplication prevention portion 1823e), the shape of misapplication prevention portion 1823e is different from that of chamfered portion 1804a, making it clear that decorative body 1804 has been attached in the wrong direction, allowing decorative body 1804 to be attached in the correct direction.

With the configuration of this embodiment, by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1823c from the other side of the first member 1823 and using the tip of the rod to press the decorative body 1804 from the other side to one side, the decorative body 1804 can be removed by being rolled up near its edge to one side. The worker can then pull on the rolled-up portion to easily remove the decorative body 1804 from the mounting recess 1823b (first member 1823), achieving the same effects as the other configurations described above.

In addition, the separation hole 1823c of the first member 1823 is located so that it does not come into contact with the adhesive surface 1804b when the decorative body 1804 is attached to the mounting recess 1823b. This prevents the adhesive surface 1804b from coming into contact with the separation hole 1823c, thereby preventing a decrease in the adhesive strength of the decorative body 1804 and making it more difficult for the decorative body 1804 to come off.

Furthermore, the mounting recess 1823b of the first member 1823 to which the decorative body 1804 is attached is provided with an anti-misapplication feature 1823e. Therefore, if an attempt is made to attach the decorative body 1804 in an orientation other than the correct orientation, the different shape of the chamfered portion 1804a of the decorative body 1804 and the anti-misapplication feature 1823e will alert the user to the incorrect orientation of the decorative body 1804. This allows the decorative body 1804 to be attached to the first member 1823 in the correct orientation and prevents the decorative body 1804 from being shipped with the attachment in the wrong orientation.

In addition, the mounting recess 1823b of the first member 1823 is provided with an identification portion 1823f that indicates the contact surface, allowing the worker to immediately recognize the position of the contact surface that serves as the reference for attaching the decorative body 1804, preventing mistakes in the contact surface position and making the attachment work easier.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1823 may be the front component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left side unit 2300, first attacca unit 2400, center role piece 2500, second attacca unit 2600, middle right side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), or it may be a member (decorative holding member) provided on the front unit 2000 or back unit 3000.

Examples of decorative body 1804 include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (product name), Metaltic Seals (product name), potting seals, aluminum seals, etc.

Next, the embodiment of Figure 206(c) is the same as the embodiment of Figures 206(a) and (b), except that the adhesive surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804 is provided not only along the outer periphery but also on one diagonal line. The rest of the configuration is the same as the embodiment of Figures 206(a) and (b), and a description thereof will be omitted.

In addition to achieving the same effects as above, this embodiment also provides diagonal adhesive surfaces 1804b on the back surface of the decorative body 1804, thereby increasing the adhesive strength and making the decorative body 1804 less likely to come off. Furthermore, even if the decorative body 1804 shrinks at a different rate than the first member 1823 due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity, the central portion is adhered by the diagonal adhesive surfaces 1804b, preventing the decorative body 1804 from swelling or rippling, and preventing the decorative body 1804 from looking unattractive.

Furthermore, because adhesive surface 1804b is provided on a diagonal line, the adhesive surface can be reduced compared to when adhesive surfaces are provided on the entire surface of decorative body 1804, thereby reducing the costs associated with the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, because the adhesive strength of decorative body 1804 is lower compared to when adhesive surfaces are provided on the entire surface, it is possible to easily remove decorative body 1804 using separation hole 1823c.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figure 207(a) comprises a horizontally elongated rectangular decorative body 1805 (shaded area) made of a sheet-like sticker on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed, and a first member 1824 to one side of which decorative body 1805 is affixed. Note that the configuration on the other side of first member 1824 (including the second member) may comprise any of the configurations described above. Also, in this embodiment, the separation hole and identification portion indicating the contact surface in first member 1824 have been omitted.

The decorative body 1805 is a sticker with a predetermined pattern, text, etc. printed on its surface. This decorative body 1805 has a horizontally elongated rectangular shape, with a C-chamfered chamfered portion 1805a cut out at an angle at one corner (the lower left corner in the figure). Because the shape of this decorative body 1805 makes it difficult to determine the up-down orientation, the shape of one corner is made different from the shape of the remaining corners, making it possible to determine the orientation. The adhesive surface of the decorative body 1805 may be provided at a fixed width along the outer edge, as in Figure 206(a), or it may be provided over the entire surface.

The first member 1824 has a flat plate portion 1824a and an attachment recess 1824b that is recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1824a, is slightly larger than the decorative body 1805, and is deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1805 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm), to which the decorative body 1805 can be attached.

The first member 1824 also has a C-chamfered misapplication prevention portion 1824c that protrudes into the mounting recess 1824b at one corner (the lower left corner in the figure). This gives the mounting recess 1824b a shape similar to that of the decorative body 1805. In this first member 1824, the diagonally extending edge of the misapplication prevention portion 1824c and the short side portion connected to the misapplication prevention portion 1824c are set as contact surfaces that serve as references for attaching the decorative body 1805. This ensures clearance for attaching the decorative body 1805 in three directions: the short side direction of the mounting recess 1824b, the long side direction, and the direction perpendicular to the diagonal side of the misapplication prevention portion 1824c, making the attachment process easier.

In addition, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat portion 1824a to the mounting recess 1824b of the first member 1824 be 1 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, the portion outside the mounting recess 1824b will be more likely to chip when the game ball B collides with another member.

When attaching decorative body 1805 to mounting recess 1824b, first bring the oblique side of chamfered portion 1805a of decorative body 1805 and the short side connected to chamfered portion 1805a into contact with the contact surface of mounting recess 1824b (the oblique side of misapplication prevention portion 1824c and the short side connected to misapplication prevention portion 1824c), and then gradually bring the adhesive surface on the back side from this point into contact with the surface of mounting recess 1824b to attach it.

When attempting to abut a corner of decorative body 1805 where chamfered portion 1805a is not provided against the contact surface (misapplication prevention portion 1824c), the shape of misapplication prevention portion 1824c is different from that of chamfered portion 1805a, making it possible to make the worker aware that decorative body 1805 has been applied in the wrong direction, and allowing the worker to apply decorative body 1805 in the correct direction. Furthermore, if decorative body 1805 is applied in the wrong direction to mounting recess 1824b, the right-angled corner of decorative body 1805 will protrude from mounting recess 1824b at the area of misapplication prevention portion 1824c, making it possible to make the worker aware that decorative body 1805 has been applied incorrectly.

In this embodiment, the mounting recess 1824b of the first member 1824 to which the decorative body 1805 is attached is provided with an anti-misapplication feature 1824c. Therefore, if an attempt is made to attach the decorative body 1805 in an orientation other than the correct orientation, the shape of the corner of the decorative body 1805 where the chamfered portion 1805a is not provided is different from the shape of the anti-misapplication feature 1824c, making it possible to make the decorative body 1805 be attached to the first member 1824 in the correct orientation and preventing the decorative body 1805 from being shipped with the attachment in the incorrect orientation.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1824 may be the front component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left side unit 2300, first attacca unit 2400, center role piece 2500, second attacca unit 2600, middle right side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), or it may be a member (decorative holding member) provided on the front unit 2000 or back unit 3000.

Examples of decorative body 1805 include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (product name), Metaltic Seals (product name), potting seals, aluminum seals, etc.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figure 207(b) comprises a circular decorative body 1806 (shaded area) made of a sheet-like sticker on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed, and a first member 1825 to one side of which the decorative body 1806 is attached. Note that the configuration on the other side of the first member 1825 (including the second member) may comprise any of the configurations described above. Also, in this embodiment, the separation hole and identification portion indicating the contact surface in the first member 1825 are omitted.

Decorative body 1806 is a sticker with a predetermined pattern, text, etc. printed on its surface. This decorative body 1806 has a circular outer shape and has a notch 1806a cut out in an arc from the outside (bottom in the figure). Because decorative body 1806 has a shape that makes it difficult to determine its orientation, the notch 1806a makes it possible to determine its orientation. The adhesive surface of decorative body 1806 may be provided at a fixed width along the outer periphery, as in Figure 206(a), or it may be provided over the entire surface.

The first member 1825 has a flat plate portion 1825a and an attachment recess 1825b that is recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1825a, is slightly larger than the decorative body 1806, and is deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1806 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm), to which the decorative body 1806 can be attached.

The first member 1825 also has an arc-shaped anti-application portion 1825c that protrudes from the periphery of the mounting recess 1825b (the lower end of the periphery in the figure) with a radius that matches the notch 1806a of the decorative body 1806. This gives the mounting recess 1825b a shape similar to that of the decorative body 1806. In this first member 1825, the arc-shaped edge of the anti-application portion 1825c is set as the contact surface that serves as the reference for attaching the decorative body 1806. This ensures that there is clearance in at least two directions for attaching the decorative body 1806: along the arc of the anti-application portion 1825c and away from the anti-application portion 1825c (up and down in the figure), making the attachment process easier.

In addition, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat portion 1825a to the mounting recess 1825b of the first member 1825 be 1 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, the portion outside the mounting recess 1825b will be more likely to chip when the game ball B collides with another member.

When attaching the decorative body 1806 to the mounting recess 1825b, first abut the notch 1806a of the decorative body 1806 against the contact surface of the mounting recess 1825b (misapplication prevention portion 1825c), and then gradually bring the adhesive surface on the back side from that point into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1825b to attach it.

If decorative body 1806 is attached by placing it against a peripheral surface other than the contact surface (misapplication prevention portion 1825c) of mounting recess 1825b, decorative body 1806 will protrude from mounting recess 1825b at the area of misapplication prevention portion 1825c, making it possible to alert the worker that decorative body 1806 has been attached incorrectly.

In this embodiment, the mounting recess 1825b of the first member 1825 to which the decorative body 1806 is attached is provided with an incorrect attachment prevention section 1825c. Therefore, if an attempt is made to attach the decorative body 1806 in an orientation other than the correct orientation, the decorative body 1806 will protrude from the area of the incorrect attachment prevention section 1825c, making it possible to notice that the decorative body 1806 is in the wrong orientation. This allows the decorative body 1806 to be attached to the first member 1825 in the correct orientation, and also prevents the decorative body 1806 from being shipped with the wrong orientation attached.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1825 may be the front component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left side unit 2300, first attacca unit 2400, center role piece 2500, second attacca unit 2600, middle right side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), or it may be a member (decorative holding member) provided on the front unit 2000 or back unit 3000.

Examples of decorative body 1806 include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (product name), Metaltic Seals (product name), potting seals, aluminum seals, etc.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figures 207(c) and (d) comprises a pair of decorative body (left) 1807L and decorative body (right) 1807R (shaded areas) arranged symmetrically and made of sheet-like stickers with predetermined decorations, letters, etc. printed on them, and a pair of first members (left) 1826L and first members (right) 1826R to one side of which the decorative body (left) 1807L and decorative body (right) 1807R are attached. Note that the configuration of the other side of the decorative body (left) 1807L and decorative body (right) 1807R (including the second member) may have any of the configurations described above. Also, in this embodiment, the identification parts indicating the separation holes and contact surfaces on the decorative body (left) 1807L and decorative body (right) 1807R have been omitted.

The left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R are stickers with a predetermined pattern, text, etc. printed on their surfaces. The left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R are bilaterally symmetrical to each other. The left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R are formed in a roughly semicircular shape that is long in the vertical direction, with the edges that are close to each other extending linearly up and down, and the upper and lower ends of these edges connected by arc-shaped edges that bulge out in the directions that move away from each other.

The left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R in Figure 207(c) have different radii of the R-chamfers at both longitudinal ends, i.e., the upper and lower ends of the semicircular shapes. On the other hand, the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R in Figure 207(d) have R-chamfers at the upper end (one longitudinal end) of the semicircular shape and a linear notch at the lower end (the other longitudinal end). Both the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R have shapes that make it difficult to distinguish between left-handed and right-handed use when turned upside down, so by making the shapes of the upper and lower ends different, it is possible to identify whether they are for left-handed or right-handed use.

The adhesive surface of the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R may be provided at a fixed width along the outer edge, as in Figure 206(a), or may be provided over the entire surface.

The left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R are formed symmetrically to each other. The left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R have a flat plate portion 1826a, an attachment recess 1826b that is recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1826a and is slightly larger than the decorative body 1806 and deeper (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R, to which the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R are attached, and an incorrect attachment prevention portion 1826c at the bottom end of the attachment recess 1826b.

The misapplication prevention portion 1826c of the left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R in Figure 207(c) is formed as a rounded chamfer with a radius larger than the radius of the rounded chamfer at the bottom end of the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R. On the other hand, the misapplication prevention portion 1826c of the left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R in Figure 207(d) is formed as a horizontally extending linear notch. In both the left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R mounting recess 1826b, the edge of the misapplication prevention portion 1826c is set as a contact surface that serves as a reference for attaching the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R.

As a result, in the embodiment of Figure 207(c), at least two clearance directions are ensured for attaching the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R: the arc direction in which the element rolls along the arc of the misapplication prevention portion 1826c, and the direction away from the misapplication prevention portion 1826c (up and down in the figure). On the other hand, in the embodiment of Figure 207(d), at least two clearance directions are ensured for attaching the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R: the direction along the straight line of the misapplication prevention portion 1826c (left and right in the figure) and the direction away from the misapplication prevention portion 1826c (up and down in the figure). In this way, in both embodiments, at least two clearance directions are ensured, making the attachment process easier.

In addition, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat portion 1826a to the mounting recess 1826b on the left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R be 1 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, the portion outside the mounting recess 1826b is more likely to chip when the game ball B collides with another member.

When attaching the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R to the corresponding mounting recesses 1826b of the left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R, the end of the longitudinal direction of the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R with the larger radius of the R chamfer or the linearly notched end facing downward, and abutting it against the contact surface of the corresponding mounting recess 1826b (the edge of the misapplication prevention portion 1826c), and then gradually bring the adhesive surface on the back side from that point into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1826b to attach it.

Furthermore, if you try to reverse the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R upside down and then paste them with the left and right sides reversed, the shape of the contact surface (misapplication prevention part 1826c) will be different from the shape of the lower end, making it possible to realize that the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R have been pasted in the wrong direction, and allowing you to paste the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R in the correct direction.

In this embodiment, the mounting recesses 1826b of the left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R to which the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R are attached are each provided with an incorrect attachment prevention feature 1826c. Therefore, if an attempt is made to attach the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R in an orientation other than the correct orientation, the difference between the shape of the longitudinal ends of the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R and the shape of the incorrect attachment prevention feature 1826c makes it possible to detect the incorrect orientation of the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R. This allows the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R to be attached to the left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R in the correct orientation, and prevents the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R from being shipped with the decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R attached in the incorrect orientation.

In this embodiment, for example, the first left member 1826L and the first right member 1826R may be members (decorative holding members) provided on the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000.

Examples of decorative body left 1807L and decorative body right 1807R include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (product name), Metatic Seals (product name), potting seals, aluminum seals, etc.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figures 208(a) to (c) comprises a decorative body 1808 made of a sheet-like sticker on which a predetermined pattern, text, etc. is printed, and a movable first member 1827 to one side of which the decorative body 1808 is attached. Note that the configuration on the other side of the first member 1827 (including the second member) may comprise any of the configurations described above. Also, in this embodiment, the illustration of an identification portion indicating the contact surface of the first member 1827 has been omitted.

Decorative body 1808 is a sticker with a predetermined pattern, text, etc. printed on its surface. This decorative body 1808 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, with the two upper corners rounded and the two lower corners chamfered. The difference in the chamfered shape between the upper and lower sides makes it possible to identify the orientation of decorative body 1808. The adhesive surface of decorative body 1808 may be provided at a fixed width along the outer periphery, as in Figure 206(a), or it may be provided over the entire surface.

The first member 1827 comprises a horizontally elongated, rectangular, flat plate portion 1827a, an attachment recess 1827b recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1827a to a size slightly larger than the decorative body 1808 and deeper (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the decorative body 1808, to which the decorative body 1808 is attached, a separation hole 1827c penetrating the flat plate portion 1827a at the attachment recess 1827b, and mis-attachment prevention portions 1827d provided at the two lower corners of the attachment recess 1827b.

The first member 1827 also has a pair of shafts 1827e that protrude cylindrically in the left-right direction from near the lower ends of both left and right side surfaces of the flat plate portion 1827a. As shown in Figure 208 (b), the shafts 1827e are located on the other side of the surface of the mounting recess 1827b. The pair of shafts 1827e of the first member 1827 are rotatably supported by a member (not shown). In other words, the first member 1827 is movable and can rotate (pivot) around the central axis of the pair of shafts 1827e. The shafts 1827e of the first member 1827 may be integrally molded with the flat plate portion 1827a, etc., or may be insert-molded, or may be assembled separately.

The separation holes 1827c are round holes located near the upper corners of the mounting recess 1827b. By locating the two separation holes 1827c far from the axis of the shaft 1827e, the weight of the first member 1827 at the position far from the axis of the shaft 1827e can be reduced. This reduces the rotational moment acting when the first member 1827 is rotated (pivoted), reducing the load on the rotational drive of the first member 1827 and allowing the first member 1827 to move smoothly. Furthermore, by locating the two separation holes 1827c near the upper left and right corners, the force applied to the left and right shafts 1827e can be equalized. By balancing the first member 1827, uneven wear can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the separation hole 1827c has an inner diameter within the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1827c were any smaller, the diameter of the rod-shaped separation member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1827c would be smaller, making it more likely to bend and potentially unable to sufficiently press against the decorative body 1808. If the separation hole 1827c were any larger, the decorative body 1808 would bend at the location of the separation hole 1827c, potentially compromising the appearance of the decorative body 1808.

The misapplication prevention portion 1827d protrudes into the mounting recess 1827b in a shape that corresponds to the C-chamfered corner of the lower corner of the decorative body 1808. In this embodiment, the slanted edge of the misapplication prevention portion 1827d and the lower edge of the mounting recess 1827b are set as contact surfaces that serve as reference points for attaching the decorative body 1808.

Since misapplication prevention portion 1827d protrudes into mounting recess 1827b, the weight of first member 1827 increases. However, because misapplication prevention portion 1827d is located close to the axis of shaft portion 1827e, the effect of the increased rotational moment caused by misapplication prevention portion 1827d can be reduced as much as possible, and the increase in load on rotational drive of first member 1827 can be suppressed. Furthermore, because misapplication prevention portion 1827d is located at each of the two lower corners of mounting recess 1827b, first member 1827 can be balanced, uneven wear of shaft portion 1827e can be reduced, and first member 1827 can be rotated (pivoted) in a stable manner.

In addition, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat portion 1827a to the mounting recess 1827b of the first member 1827 be 1 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, the portion outside the mounting recess 1827b will be more likely to chip when the game ball B collides with another member.

When attaching decorative body 1808 to mounting recess 1827b of first member 1827, first, the C-chamfered corner of decorative body 1808 is brought into contact with the abutting surface of mounting recess 1827b (misapplication prevention portion 1827d), and then the adhesive surface is gradually brought into contact with the surface of mounting recess 1827b from that point to attach it. Furthermore, if an attempt is made to attach decorative body 1808 upside down, the shape of misapplication prevention portion 1827d differs from the shape of the R-chamfered corner of decorative body 1808, making it clear that decorative body 1808 has been attached in the wrong direction, allowing decorative body 1808 to be attached in the correct orientation. Furthermore, if decorative body 1808 is attached to mounting recess 1827b in the wrong orientation, the corner of decorative body 1808 will protrude from mounting recess 1827b at the location of incorrect attachment prevention section 1827d, making the worker aware that decorative body 1808 has been attached incorrectly.

The first member 1827 is recessed near the edge of the mounting recess 1827b and has a separation groove 1827f extending in the left-right direction (see Figure 208 (b)). When the decorative body 1808 is attached to the mounting recess 1827b, the decorative body 1808 straddles this separation groove 1827f, forming a space between the decorative body 1808 and the separation groove 1827f. When the decorative body 1808 is attached to the mounting recess 1827b and the separation groove 1827f is pressed from the outside, a portion of the decorative body 1808 sinks into the separation groove 1827f and the edge side of the decorative body 1808 is raised from the mounting recess 1827b. The raised portion can be pulled to remove the decorative body 1808 from the mounting recess 1827b.

With the configuration of this embodiment, by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1827c from the other side of the first member 1827 and using the tip of the rod to press the decorative body 1808 from the other side to one side, the decorative body 1808 can be removed by being rolled up near its edge to one side. The worker can then pull on the rolled-up portion to easily remove the decorative body 1808 from the mounting recess 1827b (first member 1827), achieving the same effects as the other configurations described above.

In addition, the mounting recess 1827b of the first member 1827 to which the decorative body 1808 is attached is provided with an anti-misapplication feature 1827d. Therefore, if an attempt is made to attach the decorative body 1808 in an orientation other than the correct orientation, the different shapes of the corners of the decorative body 1808 and the anti-misapplication feature 1827d will alert the user to the incorrect orientation of the decorative body 1808. This allows the decorative body 1808 to be attached to the first member 1827 in the correct orientation and prevents the decorative body 1808 from being shipped with the attachment in the wrong orientation.

Furthermore, by providing the separation hole 1827c at a position far from the axis of rotation and the misapplication prevention portion 1827d at a position close to the axis of rotation, the rotational moment acting when the first member 1827 is rotated can be reduced, thereby reducing the load on the rotational drive of the first member 1827 and allowing the first member 1827 to move (rotate) more easily.

In addition, the first member 1827 has two separation holes 1827c and two misapplication prevention sections 1827d, which balances the forces acting on the left and right shaft sections 1827e, reducing uneven wear on the shaft sections 1827e and allowing the first member 1827 to rotate (pivot) in a stable manner.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1827 may be a door member for a variable winning opening such as a large winning opening or a special winning opening, or may be a movable member for effects provided on the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000.

Examples of decorative body 1808 include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (product name), Metaltic Seals (product name), potting seals, aluminum seals, etc.

However, if the first member 1827 is used as a door member for opening and closing the large prize opening 2005 or the special prize opening 2006, etc., the game ball B will come into contact with the decorative body 1808, so it is desirable that the decorative body 1808 and the first member 1827 have the following relationship.

More specifically, as shown in Figure 208 (c), if the distance from the front surface of the flat portion 1827a of the first member 1827 to the front surface of the decorative body 1808 is d, the distance from the upper edge of the mounting recess 1827b of the first member 1827 to the upper edge of the decorative body 1808 is c, and the radius of the game ball B is r, then it is desirable that the distance d be within the range of [0 < d < r], and the distance c be within the range of [0 < c < (2rd^2 - d^2)^0.5]. Note that the above brackets indicate formulas.

This prevents the game ball B from coming into contact with the upper edge of the decorative body 1808, preventing the decorative body 1808 from coming off due to the game ball B coming into contact with it, thereby reducing the occurrence of malfunctions.

It is desirable that distance d be within the range of 0.1 mm to 1 mm. If distance d is smaller than this, depending on the tolerance of decorative body 1808, decorative body 1808 may protrude forward beyond flat plate portion 1827a, potentially allowing game ball B to come into contact with the upper edge. If distance d is larger than this, the shadow cast by the upper edge of mounting recess 1827b may easily fall on decorative body 1808, potentially reducing the decorative effect of decorative body 1808.

The contact surface of the mounting recess 1827b may also be set to the upper edge. This causes the upper edge of the decorative body 1808 to contact the upper edge of the mounting recess 1827b, preventing the game ball B from contacting the upper edge of the decorative body 1808, achieving the same effect as above.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figures 208 (d) and (e) comprises a decorative body 1809 made of a sheet-like sticker on which a predetermined pattern, text, etc. is printed, and a movable first member 1828 to one side of which the decorative body 1809 is attached. Note that the configuration on the other side of the first member 1828 (including the second member) may have any of the configurations described above. Also, in this embodiment, the identification portion indicating the contact surface of the first member 1828 has been omitted.

The decorative body 1809 is a sticker with a predetermined pattern, text, etc. printed on its surface. This decorative body 1809 has a horizontally long rectangular outer shape, with the two upper corners rounded and the two lower corners provided with rectangular cutouts 1809a. These cutouts 1809a are formed in a shape that corresponds to the misapplication prevention section 1828d of the first member 1828, which will be described later. The difference in shape between the upper and lower corners makes it possible to identify the orientation of the decorative body 1809. The adhesive surface of the decorative body 1809 may be provided at a fixed width along the outer periphery, as in Figure 206(a), or it may be provided over the entire surface.

The first member 1828 comprises a horizontally elongated, rectangular, flat plate portion 1828a, an attachment recess 1828b recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1828a to a size slightly larger than the decorative body 1809 and deeper (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the decorative body 1809, to which the decorative body 1809 is attached, a separation hole 1828c penetrating the flat plate portion 1828a at the attachment recess 1828b, and mis-attachment prevention portions 1828d provided at the two lower corners of the attachment recess 1828b.

The first member 1828 also includes semi-cylindrical shaft support portions 1828e that bulge outward in the left-right direction from the axis at the left and right corners of the lower side of the flat plate portion 1827a, shaft holes 1828f provided on each of the outer left-right end faces of the shaft support portions 1828e, and cylindrical shaft portions 1828g inserted into the shaft holes 1828f. The pair of shaft portions 1828g of the first member 1828 are rotatably supported by a member (not shown). In other words, the first member 1828 is movable and can rotate (pivot) around the axis of the pair of shaft portions 1828g. The shaft portions 1828g of the first member 1828 may be inserted during molding of the flat plate portion 1827a, etc., or may be assembled separately.

The shaft support portion 1828e extends up to the mounting recess 1828b, and a portion of the shaft support portion 1828e forms the misapplication prevention portion 1828d. This shaft support portion 1828e (misapplication prevention portion 1828d) forms the left and right corners of the lower side of the mounting recess 1828b into a rectangular cut-out shape.

The separation holes 1828c are round holes located near the upper corners of the mounting recess 1828b. By locating the two separation holes 1828c far from the axis of the shaft 1828g, the weight of the first member 1828 at the position far from the axis of the shaft 1828g can be reduced. This reduces the rotational moment acting when the first member 1828 is rotated (pivoted), reducing the load on the rotational drive of the first member 1828 and allowing the first member 1828 to move smoothly. Furthermore, by locating the two separation holes 1828c near the upper left and right corners, the force applied to the left and right shafts 1828g can be equalized. By balancing the first member 1828, uneven wear can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the separation hole 1828c has an inner diameter within the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1828c were any smaller, the diameter of the rod-shaped separation member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1828c would be smaller, making it more likely to bend and potentially unable to sufficiently press against the decorative body 1809. If the separation hole 1828c were any larger, the decorative body 1809 would bend at the location of the separation hole 1828c, potentially compromising the appearance of the decorative body 1809.

The misapplication prevention portion 1828d protrudes in a square shape from the lower corner of the mounting recess 1828b by the shaft support portion 1828e, and has a shape that corresponds to the notch 1809a in the lower corner of the decorative body 1809. In this embodiment, the upper edge of the misapplication prevention portion 1828d is set as the contact surface that serves as a reference for attaching the decorative body 1809.

Since misapplication prevention portion 1828d protrudes into mounting recess 1828b, the weight of first member 1828 increases. However, because misapplication prevention portion 1828d is located close to the axis of shaft portion 1828g, the effect of the increased rotational moment caused by misapplication prevention portion 1828d can be reduced as much as possible, and the increase in load on rotational drive of first member 1828 can be suppressed. Furthermore, because misapplication prevention portion 1828d is located at each of the two lower corners of mounting recess 1828b, first member 1828 can be balanced, uneven wear of shaft portion 1828g can be reduced, and first member 1828 can be rotated (pivoted) in a stable manner.

In addition, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat portion 1828a to the mounting recess 1828b of the first member 1828 be 1 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, the portion outside the mounting recess 1828b will be more likely to chip when the game ball B collides with another member.

When attaching decorative body 1809 to mounting recess 1828b of first member 1828, first, notch 1809a of decorative body 1809 is brought into contact with the abutting surface of mounting recess 1828b (misapplication prevention portion 1828d), and then the adhesive surface is gradually brought into contact with the surface of mounting recess 1828b from that point to attach it. Note that if an attempt is made to attach decorative body 1809 upside down, the shape of misapplication prevention portion 1828d differs from the shape of the rounded chamfers at the corners of decorative body 1809, making it clear that decorative body 1809 has been attached in the wrong direction, allowing decorative body 1809 to be attached in the correct orientation. Furthermore, if decorative body 1809 is attached to mounting recess 1828b in the wrong orientation, the corner of decorative body 1809 will protrude from mounting recess 1828b at the location of incorrect attachment prevention section 1828d, making the worker aware that decorative body 1809 has been attached incorrectly.

With the configuration of this embodiment, by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1828c from the other side of the first member 1828 and using the tip of the rod to press the decorative body 1809 from the other side to one side, the decorative body 1809 can be removed by being rolled up near its edge to one side. The worker can then pull on the rolled-up portion to easily remove the decorative body 1809 from the mounting recess 1828b (first member 1828), achieving the same effects as the other configurations described above.

In addition, the mounting recess 1828b of the first member 1828 to which the decorative body 1809 is attached is provided with an anti-misapplication feature 1828d. Therefore, if an attempt is made to attach the decorative body 1809 in an orientation other than the correct orientation, the different shapes of the corners of the decorative body 1809 and the anti-misapplication feature 1828d will alert the user to the incorrect orientation of the decorative body 1809. This allows the decorative body 1809 to be attached to the first member 1828 in the correct orientation and prevents the decorative body 1809 from being shipped with the attachment in the wrong orientation.

Furthermore, by providing separation hole 1828c at a position far from the axis of rotation and misapplication prevention portion 1828d at a position close to the axis of rotation, the rotational moment acting when first member 1828 is rotated can be reduced, thereby reducing the load on the rotational drive of first member 1828 and allowing first member 1828 to move (rotate) more easily.

In addition, because the first member 1828 has two separation holes 1828c and two misapplication prevention portions 1828d, the forces acting on the left and right shaft portions 1828g can be balanced, reducing uneven wear on the shaft portions 1828g and allowing the first member 1828 to rotate (pivot) in a stable manner.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1828 may be a door member for a variable winning opening such as a large winning opening or a special winning opening, or may be a movable member for effects provided on the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000.

Examples of decorative body 1809 include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (product name), Metaltic Seals (product name), potting seals, aluminum seals, etc.

[19. Relationship between the present invention and embodiments]
In this embodiment, decorative body 1804, decorative body 1805, decorative body 1806, decorative body 1807L and decorative body 1807R, decorative body 1808, decorative body 1809, and gate seal 2811 correspond to decorative bodies of the present invention, adhesive surface 1804b in this embodiment corresponds to the adhesive surface of the present invention, first member 1823, first member 1824, first member 1825, left first member 1826L and right first member 1826R, first member 1827, first member 1828, and gate body 2810 in this embodiment correspond to base members of the present invention, and flat plate portion 1823a, flat plate portion 1824a, flat plate portion 1825a, flat plate portion 1826a, flat plate portion 1827a, flat plate portion 1828a, and front plate portion 2810a in this embodiment correspond to flat plate portions of the present invention, respectively.

In addition, mounting recess 1823b, mounting recess 1824b, mounting recess 1825b, mounting recess 1826b, mounting recess 1827b, mounting recess 1828b, and attachment recess 2810b in this embodiment correspond to the mounting recesses of the present invention, separation holes 1823c, separation holes 1827c, separation holes 1828c, and separation holes 2810d in this embodiment correspond to the separation holes of the present invention, and misapplication prevention portion 1823e, misapplication prevention portion 1824c, misapplication prevention portion 1825c, misapplication prevention portion 1826c, misapplication prevention portion 1827d, misapplication prevention portion 1828d, and misapplication prevention portion 2810c in this embodiment correspond to the misapplication prevention portion of the present invention.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the contact surface of first member 1823, the contact surface of first member 1824, the contact surface of first member 1825, the contact surfaces of left decorative body 1807L and right decorative body 1807R, the contact surface of first member 1827, the contact surface of first member 1828, and the contact surface of gate body 2810 correspond to the positioning portion of the present invention.

[20. Characteristic Effects of the Present Embodiment]
Next, the characteristic effects of this embodiment will be explained. Note that from here to paragraph [1835], the decorative body will be described as decorative body 1804, the base member as first member 1823, the flat plate portion as flat plate portion 1823a, the mounting recess as mounting recess 1823b, the separation hole as separation hole 1823c, the misapplication prevention portion as misapplication prevention portion 1823e, and the positioning portion as the contact surface of first member 1823 (misapplication prevention portion 1823e), and other components (members) corresponding to the present invention will not be explained here because they have similar effects.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a portion of the peripheral wall of the mounting recess 1823b on which the decorative body 1804 is attached serves as the contact surface (mis-attachment prevention portion 1823e) of the first member 1823. Therefore, when attaching the decorative body 1804 to the mounting recess 1823b of the flat portion 1823a of the first member 1823, the decorative body 1804 can be positioned relative to the first member 1823 by abutting two adjacent sides of the decorative body 1804 against the portion of the peripheral wall of the mounting recess 1823b that serves as the contact surface (mis-attachment prevention portion 1823e) of the first member 1823, thereby aligning the position and attaching the decorative body 1804. This facilitates the positioning of the decorative body 1804 and enables the decorative body 1804 to be attached accurately in the correct position. Therefore, the contact surface of the first member 1823 (misapplication prevention portion 1823e) reduces the chance of the decorative body 1804 being applied tilted or misaligned relative to the first member 1823, which prevents the decorative body 1804 and first member 1823 from looking unattractive. This ensures that the decorative effect of the decorative body 1804 is fully realized, improves the appearance of the pachinko machine 1, and prevents a decline in player interest.

In addition, the contact surface of the first member 1823 (misapplication prevention portion 1823e) allows the decorative body 1804 to be accurately affixed in the correct position, making it easier to affix the decorative body 1804 in the correct position, reducing the number of failures in affixing the decorative body 1804 and preventing increases in the costs of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, because the decorative body 1804 has an asymmetrical shape, it is difficult to get the orientation of the decorative body 1804 wrong, and the decorative body 1804 can be attached in the correct orientation to the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823, ensuring that the decorative effect of the decorative body 1804 is fully realized.

In addition, the first member 1823 has an anti-misapplication section 1823e that protrudes from the peripheral wall of the mounting recess 1823b. If the decorative body 1804 is applied in the incorrect orientation, the decorative body 1804 will be rolled up at the area of the anti-misapplication section 1823e. This makes it clear that the decorative body 1804 has been applied in the wrong orientation, and the decorative body 1804 can be reapplied in the correct orientation, ensuring that the decorative effect of the decorative body 1804 is fully realized.

In addition, the attachment recess 1823b of the first member 1823, to which the decorative body 1804 is attached, has a separation hole 1823c that penetrates the flat portion 1823a. Therefore, when a rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 and the tip of the rod presses against the back surface of the decorative body 1804, a portion of the decorative body 1804 will lift from the flat portion 1823a of the first member 1823 toward the front side against the adhesive force of the adhesive surface 1804b. By pulling on this portion of the decorative body 1804, it can be removed from the flat portion 1823a, and the decorative body 1804 can be easily peeled off.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the decorative body 1804, which is decorated with a predetermined pattern, is affixed to the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823. This allows the decorative body 1804 to improve the appearance of the first member 1823 and also allows the first member 1823 to support the decorative body 1804. Furthermore, since the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 is affixed is recessed from the surface of the flat plate portion 1823a, when the decorative body 1804 is affixed to the mounting recess 1823b, the area surrounding the mounting recess 1823b on the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 surrounds the decorative body 1804, which highlights the decorative body 1804 by framing it, making it easier to achieve the decorative effect of the decoration on the decorative body 1804 and improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the adhesive surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804, which is attached to the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a, is provided only in specific areas consisting of a band-shaped portion around the periphery of the decorative body 1804 and a band-shaped portion diagonally crossing the band-shaped portion, and is not provided on the entire back surface, resulting in a weaker attachment strength than conventional decorative body 1804. Therefore, by inserting a rod-shaped member into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 and pressing the back surface of the decorative body 1804 with its tip, the decorative body 1804 can be removed from the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 with a relatively small force, despite the adhesive strength of the adhesive surface 1804b. Furthermore, even if the decorative body 1804 itself is weak, the decorative body 1804 can be removed without breaking, improving the ease of removal of the decorative body 1804.

Furthermore, for the reasons described above, if the decorative body 1804 cannot be properly attached to the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate portion 1823a by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 and pressing the decorative body 1804 from the back side with the tip of the rod-shaped member, thereby making it easy to re-attach the decorative body 1804. Furthermore, with the first member 1823 removed from the pachinko machine 1, the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 and pressing the decorative body 1804 from the back side with the tip of the rod-shaped member, thereby making it easy to replace the decorative body 1804 when changing models. Furthermore, as described above, the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate portion 1823a using the separation hole 1823c, making it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, and reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, because the separation hole 1823c of the first member 1823 is located in a position that does not contact the adhesive surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804, the entire adhesive surface 1804b can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823. Therefore, while providing the adhesive surface 1804b only on a portion (specific area) of the decorative body 1804 would result in a lower adhesive strength than before, because the entire adhesive surface 1804b is attached to the flat plate portion 1823a, it is possible to avoid an unnecessary decrease in adhesive strength due to the separation hole 1823c overlapping the adhesive surface 1804b, and the decorative body 1804 can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a in good condition while maintaining sufficient adhesive strength.

Furthermore, adhesive surface 1804b of decorative body 1804 is provided in a band-shaped portion on the periphery and in a diagonally crossing band-shaped portion (diagonal portion). This allows the band-shaped portion of adhesive surface 1804b to adhere the periphery of decorative body 1804 to flat portion 1823a, preventing the periphery of decorative body 1804 from lifting off flat portion 1823a and making decorative body 1804 less likely to peel from the periphery. Furthermore, the diagonally crossing band-shaped portion of adhesive surface 1804b allows a portion near the center of decorative body 1804 to be adhered to flat portion 1823a. Therefore, even if the difference in shrinkage between first member 1823 and decorative body 1804 increases due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity, swelling and wrinkling of decorative body 1804 can be reduced, preventing deterioration in the appearance of decorative body 1804. Therefore, the decorative effect of the decoration 1804 can be reliably achieved, and larger decorations 1804 can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a in good condition, providing a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of players.

Furthermore, because adhesive surface 1804b is provided on the periphery of decorative body 1804, decorative body 1804 and first member 1823 are made translucent. Furthermore, if a light source such as an LED that irradiates light toward decorative body 1804 is provided on the back side of first member 1823, band-shaped adhesive surface 1804b will be located in a position that does not obstruct the light from the light source. This reduces the deterioration of the appearance of the luminous decoration of decorative body 1804 due to light diffusion and attenuation by adhesive surface 1804b. Therefore, decorative body 1804 can be illuminated in good condition, and the light source can be clearly seen through decorative body 1804 and first member 1823, providing a pachinko machine 1 with excellent presentation and display effects.

In addition, because a separation hole 1823c is provided in the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823, the separation hole 1823c can be made less visible or hidden from the front by attaching the decorative body 1804 to the mounting recess 1823b. This prevents the separation hole 1823c from spoiling the appearance and makes it more difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole 1823c, making it more difficult for players to plot fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1823c.

Furthermore, because the separation hole 1823c is located in a position close to the periphery of the decorative body 1804, when a rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 and the back surface of the decorative body 1804 is pressed, the portion of the decorative body 1804 pressed by the rod-shaped member is close to the periphery of the decorative body 1804, so the edge side tends to lift away from the portion where the rod-shaped member is in contact, making it easier to remove the attached decorative body 1804.

Furthermore, because the separation hole 1823c is located in a portion close to the periphery of the decorative body 1804, when a rod-shaped member is pressed against the decorative body 1804 from the back side of the first member 1823 through the separation hole 1823c, as described above, the edge side of the decorative body 1804 from the portion where the rod-shaped member is in contact will lift up from the flat plate portion 1823a. Therefore, by grasping and pulling the lifted portion of the decorative body 1804, the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed by rolling it up from the flat plate portion 1823a.

Furthermore, the separation holes 1823c are sized to allow a circle with a diameter of 2 mm to 6 mm to contact them. This provides the same effects as above, and in addition, by setting an upper limit on the size of the separation holes 1823c, it is possible to prevent the adhesive surface of the decorative body 1804 from becoming smaller than necessary due to the presence of the separation holes 1823c, thereby maintaining the desired adhesion strength to the flat plate portion 1823a.

Furthermore, as described above, the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 is attached is recessed from the flat plate portion 1823a. Therefore, by using the boundary between the flat plate portion 1823a and the mounting recess 1823b as a guide when attaching the decorative body 1804, it is easier to attach the decorative body 1804 in the correct position, reducing the chance of failure in attaching the decorative body 1804 and preventing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, because the decorative body 1804 is attached to the mounting recess 1823b recessed from the flat plate portion, even if an attempt is made to insert a tool such as a flathead screwdriver between the decorative body 1804 and the bottom surface of the mounting recess 1823b to remove the decorative body 1804 from the front side, the insertion of the tool will be blocked by the wall around the recessed mounting recess 1823b. However, because the separation hole 1823c of the first member 1823 is located in the area covered by the decorative body 1804, the separation hole 1823c is provided in the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 is attached. Therefore, as described above, by inserting a rod-shaped member into the separation hole 1823c from the back side and pressing the decorative body 1804 toward the front side, the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the recessed mounting recess 1823b, achieving the same effect as described above.

Furthermore, in conventional technology (pachinko machines), the hole for removing the sticker penetrates all the way to the back of the pachinko machine (game board), making it possible for linear tools such as piano wire to reach the passage for game ball B or signal lines through the hole, posing a problem of making cheating easier. Therefore, it is desirable to provide a second member (see second member 1841, second member 1842, etc. in Figure 205) on the back side of first member 1823 that can close separation hole 1823c. As a result, when assembled into pachinko machine 1, the back side of separation hole 1823c is closed from the outside by the second member, so a hole that penetrates all the way to the other side of the game board, as in conventional pachinko machines, is not penetrated. This prevents linear cheating tools such as piano wire from being inserted into game board 5 through the hole, thereby preventing cheating.

Furthermore, when a second member (see second member 1841, second member 1842, etc. in Figure 205) that closes separation hole 1823c is provided on the back side of first member 1823 as described above, even if an illegal tool is inserted through decoration 1804 from the front side and into separation hole 1823c, the tip of the illegal tool will abut against the second member, blocking its insertion (intrusion) into the outside of the second member (into the gaming board 5). This prevents the illegal tool from entering the gaming board 5 from the front side through separation hole 1823c and prevents illegal acts from being committed. In addition, because the illegal tool pierces decoration 1804 and leaves a mark on decoration 1804, it discourages people from committing illegal acts, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal acts.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, if a game ball B released from the game board 5 becomes jammed in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the base unit 710 provided in the base unit 700 below the game board 5 in the main frame 4, the security cover 714 closing the release port 711b of the front base 711 can be opened, and a rod-shaped tool such as a flathead screwdriver can be inserted through the upper notch 713q of the release port 711b among the multiple cutouts 713q to poke the jammed game ball B, breaking up the game ball B and easily clearing the jam. Then, by closing the release port 711b with the security cover 714, the security cover 714 can prevent linear illegal tools such as piano wire from being inserted into the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 through the release port 711b and the cutout 713q. If a fraudulent tool is inserted into the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 through the cutout 713q or the exit of the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, even if the tip of the fraudulent tool is moved while contacting the inner surface of the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 in order to extend from the entrance of the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 (the ball receiving opening 711a of the front base 711) to the game board 5, if the tip of the fraudulent tool comes into contact with one of the multiple blocking ribs 713o extending downward from the ceiling of the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, the blocking rib 713o will block the movement of the fraudulent tool. In this way, the security cover 714 and the multiple blocking ribs 713o can prevent fraudulent acts on the game board 5 via the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly deterrent to fraudulent acts.

Furthermore, because the base unit 710 is made transparent, when a game ball B becomes clogged in the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, the location of the clog can be easily identified simply by looking from the outside, making it easier to resolve the clog and reducing the maintenance burden on the game hall.

In addition, since the base unit 710 has an ejection passage for ejecting game balls B that is composed of independent first ball paths 701 and second ball paths 702, when many game balls B are released from the game board 5 in a short period of time, these game balls B can be distributed and ejected to each of the first ball paths 701 and second ball paths 702. This reduces the concentration of many game balls B in one first ball path 701 or second ball path 702, preventing ball jams that can occur due to the concentration of game balls B, and allows many game balls B released from the game board 5 to be quickly ejected to the island equipment side of the game hall (out receiving section, bucket, etc.).

In addition, since the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can detect game balls B circulating on the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the number of game balls B discharged from the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be counted.By comparing this with the number of game balls B counted on the upstream game board 5, it is possible to determine whether or not there has been any fraudulent activity on the game board 5 or the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, and a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity can be provided.

In addition, since the discharge passage is formed by the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 which are independent in the front-to-back direction, on the game board 5, the game ball B (safe ball) that is accepted into the winning port that awards a bonus and the game ball B (out ball) that is not accepted into the winning port are released to positions that are different in the front-to-back direction, so that the game ball B that is accepted into the winning port and the game ball B that is not accepted into the winning port can be discharged by circulating through the different first ball path 701 and second ball path 702. Furthermore, since the first ball sensor 703 and second ball sensor 704 are provided, which can detect each game ball B circulating on the first ball path 701 and second ball path 702, respectively, it is possible to count, outside the game board 5, the number of game balls B (safe balls) that have been received by the winning openings and the number of game balls B (out balls) that have not been received by the winning openings. By comparing this with the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted on the game board 5, it is possible to determine whether or not there has been any fraudulent activity against the winning openings on the game board 5, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity and can reduce the burden on the gaming hall.

Furthermore, the first ball sensor 703 and second ball sensor 704 provided on the base unit 710 (ball path member 713) can count the number of game balls B released from the game board 5, eliminating the need to provide sensors or electronic circuits on the game board 5 to count the number of game balls B released (discharged) to the outside, thereby reducing the cost of the game board 5.

In addition, the security cover 714, which opens and closes the release port 711b, is attached to the front base 711 so that it can rotate on a hinge. Therefore, even when the security cover 714 opens the release port 711b, the security cover 714 remains attached to the front base 711 via the hinge axis of the hinge rotation. Therefore, even when the security cover 714 is opened to release game balls B jammed in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the security cover 714 remains attached to the front base 711, making it less likely to be lost.

In addition, the security cover 714 is attached to the underside of the base unit 710, and the security cover 714 is attached to the front base 711 so that it can rotate on a hinge.The hinge axis of the security cover 714 is arranged to extend to the left and right (horizontally) at the front end of the security cover 714.Therefore, when clearing a jam of game balls B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the main frame 4 is opened forward relative to the outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall, and then the security cover 714 is opened and a specified tool is inserted into the clearance opening 711b to clear the jammed balls. After that, the security cover 714 is closed and the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2. If the security cover 714 is open at this time, the tip of the security cover 714 will come into contact with the outer frame 2 (a potential contact hazard) and the main frame 4 will not be able to be closed. This alerts the user that the security cover 714 has been left closed, and the security cover 714 can be closed to ensure the release opening 711b is closed. Furthermore, even if the security cover 714 is left open for some reason while the main frame 4 is being closed against the outer frame 2, when the main frame 4 is opened, the security cover 714 will come into contact with the outer frame 2, causing the security cover 714 to rotate in the closing direction. This prevents the main frame 4 from becoming stuck, allowing the main frame 4 to be opened smoothly and preventing damage to the security cover 714 and other components.

Furthermore, since the ball path member 713 forming the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 has multiple notches 713q, debris that has entered the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, or debris attached to the game ball B, can be discharged downward through the notches 713q to the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702. By reducing the amount of debris in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the occurrence of game ball B clogging due to debris can be reduced, and the maintenance burden on the amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

In addition, some of the multiple cutouts 713q also serve as tool insertion ports for inserting a tool to unclog balls, eliminating the need for a separate tool insertion port. This simplifies the configuration of the pachinko machine 1, suppresses cost increases, and provides the same operational effects as those described above.

In addition, the base unit 710 is designed to prevent debris that falls through the cutout 713q from hitting the first ball sensor 703 or the second ball sensor 704, thereby preventing malfunctions in the first ball sensor 703 or the second ball sensor 704 due to debris adhering thereto, and enabling reliable detection of the game ball B circulating along the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the flat plate portion of the first member (front surface of the front component 1000, flat plate portion 1821, front component 2531, gate body 2810, first component 1821, first component 1822, etc.) and the second member (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, second component 1841, second component 1842, etc.) that forms the passage portion (game area 5a, lower right guide passage 2530, gate 2003, etc.) through which the game ball B flows on the game board 5 are formed. Decorative bodies (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate sticker 2811, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.) with predetermined decorations are attached to the attachment portions (spec sticker attachment portion 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, mounting recess 1821b, mounting recess 1822b, etc.) of the first member 2531, flat plate portion 1822a, the front surface of the front member 2531, front plate portion 2810a, etc., so that the decoration of the decorative bodies can improve the appearance of the first member. Furthermore, because the attachment portion where the decorative body is attached is recessed from one side of the flat plate portion, when the decorative body is attached to the attachment portion, the area around the attachment portion on the flat plate portion of the first member surrounds the decorative body, framing it and making the decorative body stand out, making it easier to achieve the decorative effect of the decorative body and improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the attachment portions (spec sticker attachment portion 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, mounting recess 1821b, mounting recess 1822b, etc.) where the decorative bodies (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate sticker 2811, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.) are attached are recessed from the flat plate portion (front surface of front component 1000, flat plate portion 1821a, flat plate portion 1822a, front surface of front member 2531, front plate portion 2810a, etc.). Therefore, by using the boundary between the flat plate portion and the attachment portion as a guide to attach the decorative bodies, it is easier to attach the decorative bodies in the correct position, reducing the number of decorative body attachment failures and suppressing increases in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In this pachinko machine 1, the flat plate portion (front surface of the front component 1000, flat plate portion 1821a, flat plate portion 1822a, front surface of the front component 2531, front plate portion 2810a, etc.) of the first component (front component 1000, front component 2531, gate main body 2810, first component 1821, first component 1822, etc.) has a recessed attachment portion (spec sticker attachment portion 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, mounting recess 1821b, mounting recess 2810b, etc.). Since decorative objects (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, decorative object 1801, decorative object 1802, decorative object 1803, etc.) are attached to recess 1822b, etc., even if an attempt is made to insert a tool such as a flathead screwdriver between the decorative object and the attachment portion to remove the decorative object from one side, the insertion of the tool is prevented by the wall portion around the recessed attachment portion. In contrast, the separation holes (separation holes 1023, 1821d, 1822c, 2531b, 2810d, etc.) in the first member are located in areas that are closed on one side by the decorative object, and therefore separation holes are provided in the attachment portion where the decorative object is attached. Therefore, by inserting a rod-shaped member into the separation hole from the other side and pressing the decorative object toward one side, the attachment of the decorative object to the attachment portion can be easily released, and the decorative object can be easily removed from the recessed attachment portion. Therefore, if the ornament fails to be properly attached to the flat portion of the first member during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, the ornament can be easily released from the flat portion by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole from the other side of the first member and pressing the ornament from the other side with its tip. This allows the ornament to be easily removed from the flat portion of the first member and reattached. Furthermore, with the first and second members separated, passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole from the other side of the first member and pressing the ornament from the other side with its tip allows the ornament to be easily released from the flat portion of the first member. This allows the ornament to be easily removed from the flat portion, facilitating the replacement of the ornament when upgrading models. Furthermore, as described above, with the first and second members separated, the ornament can be easily removed from the flat portion using the separation hole. This facilitates the separation of the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, thereby reducing the cost of disposing of pachinko machines 1.

In addition, separation holes (separation holes 1023, 1821d, 1822c, 2531b, 2810d, etc.) are provided in the flat plate portions (front surface of front component 1000, flat plate portion 1821a, flat plate portion 1822a, front surface of front component 2531, front plate portion 2810a, etc.) of the first component (front component 1000, front component 2531, gate body 2810, first component 1821, first component 1822, etc.), so that decorative bodies (spacing By attaching decorative stickers (such as door sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate sticker 2811, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.), the separation holes can be made less visible or hidden from one side, preventing them from spoiling the appearance and making it more difficult for players to notice the presence of the separation holes, making it more difficult for them to plot fraudulent acts through the separation holes.

When assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the extension portion (insertion pin 1022, boss portion 1821c, rib 1822d, etc.) is attached to the second member (gaming panel 1100, second member 184) from the other side of the flat portion (front surface of previous component 1000, flat portion 1821a, flat portion 1822a, etc.) of the first member (previous component 1000, first member 1821, first member 1822, etc.) to which the decorative body (spec sticker 1020, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.) is attached, surrounding the separation hole (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1821d, separation hole 1822c, etc.). 1, second member 1842, etc.), and the second member is attached to the other side of the first member, and the other side of the separation hole is closed off from the outside by the extension and one surface of the second member, which prevents illegal tools from being inserted into the separation hole from outside the extension or the other side of the second member, and since there is no hole that passes through to the other side like in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools such as piano wire from being inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through this hole, and fraudulent acts can be prevented.

In addition, since the second member (game panel 1100, second member 1841, second member 1842, etc.) makes the other side of the separation hole (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1821d, separation hole 1822c, etc.) a closed space, even if an illegal tool is inserted from one side through the decorative body (spec seal 1020, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.) and into the separation hole, the tip of the illegal tool will be inserted into a closed space that is isolated from the outside, and the extension (insertion) of the first member (previous component member 1000, first member 1821, first member 1822, etc.) The through pin 1022, boss portion 1821c, rib 1822d, etc.) and second member can block insertion (intrusion) into the passageway (play area 5a, etc.) or into the pachinko machine 1, preventing the intrusion of illegal tools into the pachinko machine 1 from one side through the separation hole and preventing illegal acts from being committed via the separation hole or passageway, and because illegal tools pierce the decorative body and leave traces on the decorative body, this discourages people from committing illegal acts, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal acts.

Furthermore, by inserting the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841 into the separation hole 1821d from the other side of the first member 1821, the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 can be positioned relative to each other, thereby simplifying the assembly process and suppressing increases in the costs of the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, by inserting the positioning protrusion 1841b into the separation hole 1821d to position the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 relative to each other, the other side of the separation hole 1821d can be closed by the positioning protrusion 1841b, so the separation hole 1821d itself can be made into the closed space described above, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the same effects as those described above.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, decorative bodies (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate sticker 2811, etc.) with predetermined decorations are attached to the decorated parts (spec sticker attachment part 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, etc.) that form the front surface of the front members (front component member 1000, front member 2531 of center gimmick 2500, gate body 2810 of gate member 2800, etc.) that are provided in front of the passage members (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.) that have passage sections through which game balls B flow (game area 5a, lower right guide passage 2530, and detection hole of gate sensor 2801, etc.), and therefore the appearance of the passage members can be improved by the decoration of the decorative bodies. Furthermore, because the part to be decorated to which the decorative body is attached is recessed further back than the front-to-back depth of the decorative body, when the decorative body is attached to the part to be decorated, the part of the front member surrounding the part to be decorated protrudes forward beyond the front surface of the decorative body, and the decorative body is highlighted by being framed by the forward-protruding part of the front member, making it easier to achieve the decorative effect of the decorative body and improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the decorated parts (spec sticker attachment part 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, etc.) to which the decorative bodies (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate sticker 2811, etc.) are attached are recessed rearward. Therefore, by using the protruding periphery of the decorated part on the front member (front component member 1000, front member 2531 of center role device 2500, gate body 2810 of gate member 2800, etc.) as a guide to attach the decorative bodies, it is easier to attach the decorative bodies in the correct position, reducing the number of failures in attaching the decorative bodies and suppressing increases in the costs of the pachinko machine 1.

In this pachinko machine 1, the decorated parts (spec sticker attachment part 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, etc.) of the front parts (front component part 1000, front part 2531 of center role 2500, gate body 2810 of gate part 2800, etc.) are recessed rearward. Therefore, when a decorative body (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate sticker 2811, etc.) is attached to the decorated part, the contact surface between the decorative body and the decorated part is in a recessed position, so even if you try to remove the decorative body attached to the decorated part, it is difficult to hook the decorative body from the front, and removal is time-consuming. In contrast, because separation holes (separation holes 1023, 2531b, 2810d, etc.) are provided in the decorated portion, the decorative body can be easily released from the decorated portion by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole from the rear of the front member and pressing the decorative body forward, making it easy to remove the decorative body from the decorated portion. Therefore, if the decorative body cannot be properly attached to the decorated portion of the front member during manufacturing, the decorative body can be easily released from the decorated portion by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole from the rear of the front member and pressing the decorative body from behind with the tip of the rod-shaped member, making it easy to remove the decorative body from the decorated portion and reattach it.

In addition, with the front member (front component member 1000, front member 2531 of center gimmick 2500, gate body 2810 of gate member 2800, etc.) and the passage member (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.) separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) from the rear of the front member, and the tip of the rod can be used to press the decorative body (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.) from behind, thereby easily releasing the attachment to the decorated part (spec sticker attachment part 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, etc.), allowing the decorative body to be easily removed from the decorated part, facilitating the work of replacing the decorative body when changing models. Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the front member and the passage member are separated, the decoration can be easily removed from the decorated part using the separation hole, making it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, and reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, because separation holes (separation holes 1023, 2531b, 2810d, etc.) are provided in the decorated parts (spec sticker attachment part 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, etc.), the separation holes can be made less visible or hidden from the front by attaching decorative objects (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate sticker 2811, etc.) to the decorated parts. This prevents the separation holes from spoiling the appearance and makes it more difficult for players to notice the presence of the separation holes, making it more difficult for them to plot fraudulent acts through the separation holes.

When assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation holes (separation holes 1023, 2531b, 2810d, etc.) are closed from the rear by the passage members (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.) attached to the rear of the front members (front component member 1000, front member 2531 of center role device 2500, gate body 2810 of gate member 2800, etc.) to which the decorative elements (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.) are attached. Since there are no holes that extend all the way to the rear as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools such as piano wire from being inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through these holes, thereby preventing illegal acts.

In addition, because the separation holes (separation holes 1023, 2531b, 2810d, etc.) are closed from the rear by the passage members (gaming panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.), even if an illegal tool is inserted from the front through the decoration (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decoration seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.) and into the separation hole, the passage members prevent it from being inserted further rearward (intrusion). This prevents the illegal tool from entering the passage from the front through the separation hole into the passage section (gaming area 5a, lower right guide passage 2530, and detection hole (gate 2003) of gate sensor 2801, etc.), preventing illegal acts. Furthermore, because the illegal tool pierces the decoration and leaves a mark on it, players hesitate to commit illegal acts, providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent against illegal acts.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the back unit 3000 on the game board 5, the back front performance unit 3100 is provided with the light guide plate 3110 and the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175, which are mounted with LEDs 3176 for illuminating and displaying the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, and the back front lower middle decorative board 3168, back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, etc., mounted in the back front lower performance unit 3160. The back front lower middle decorative body 3161, back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, etc. are provided, which can be illuminated and decorated with LEDs, and by providing LEDs 3176 (light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175) behind the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, etc., the LEDs 3176 can be made invisible (hidden) from the player by the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, etc., making it difficult for players to notice the presence of the LEDs 3176, i.e., the light guide plate 3110. In this state, when the second pattern 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 is illuminated by the LED 3176 and the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc. is illuminated and decorated by the light emitted by the LED mounted on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 etc., the light from the LED 3176 is reflected forward by the light guide plate 3110, while the light from the LED on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 etc. is light that is irradiated directly forward, the illuminated back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc. can be made to shine brighter than the second pattern 3112 on the light guide plate 3110, and the player's attention can be strongly drawn to the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc. Furthermore, because the illuminated second pattern 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 extends upward from a predetermined position (slightly above) close to the illuminated decorative back, front, lower, and middle ornaments 3161, etc., the player is strongly misled into thinking that the second pattern 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 is illuminated using the light from the illuminated decorative back, front, lower, and middle ornaments 3161, etc. as a light source. This allows the player to see an illuminated effect using the light guide plate 3110 that has never been seen in pachinko machines before, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, by providing the left decorative board 3174 and right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate, as well as the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, etc., in front of the light guide plate 3110, light from the LEDs mounted on the left decorative board 3174 and right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate illuminates the light guide plate 3110, preventing the transparent light guide plate 3110 from being seen by the player. This allows the dramatic effect of the luminous display of the second pattern 3112, etc. on the light guide plate 3110 to be fully realized, and makes it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, since translucent back-front-lower-middle decorative bodies 3161 and the like are provided in front of the light guide plate lower-left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower-right decorative board 3175, when the LEDs mounted on the light guide plate lower-left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower-right decorative board 3175 are illuminated, the back-front-lower-middle decorative bodies 3161 and the like can be illuminated and decorated.As a result, in addition to the effects produced by the illuminated display of the second pattern 3112 and the like on the light guide plate 3110, players can also see effects produced by the illuminated decoration of the back-front-lower-middle decorative bodies 3161 and the like.This diverse presentation makes it less likely for players to become bored and helps prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, when the second pattern 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 is illuminated and the LEDs mounted on the left decorative board 3174 and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate are illuminated, as described above, the LEDs mounted on the left decorative board 3174 and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate will cause the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc. to shine brightly, thereby attracting the player's attention to the illuminated back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc., and the second pattern 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 extending upward from a predetermined position above close to the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 will direct the player's attention from the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc. via the second pattern 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 to the upward end to which the second pattern 3112 extends. Therefore, at the upper end of the extension of the second pattern 3112, there is provided a part of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 that rises and falls on the rear upper effect unit 3200, etc., so it is possible to create excitement and thrills depending on whether or not further effects (effects using effect images, movable effects, etc.) will be executed at the end of the extension of the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the second pattern 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 is composed of multiple line groups 3114, each consisting of five lines 3113 extending upward from a predetermined position, and each line 3113 can be illuminated independently. LEDs 3176 (first LED 3176a to fifth LED 3176e) are provided to correspond to each line 3113. Therefore, by illuminating the first LED 3176a to fifth LED 3176e of the LED group 3177 in sequence, the illuminated lines 3113 change, creating a pseudo-animation effect. Furthermore, because the back, front, lower, and middle decorative elements 3161 and the like are located below and close to the bottom ends (predetermined positions) of the multiple lines 3113, the second pattern 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 can be made to appear to move using the light from the illuminated back, front, lower, and middle decorative elements 3161 and the like as a light source, making a strong impact on the player and making them think that something good is about to happen, increasing anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the result of the special lottery (special lottery result) is drawn by the establishment of the start conditions by receiving a game ball B into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the special pattern is displayed in a variable manner in the function display unit 1400A or the function display unit 1400B by lighting up or flashing the multiple LEDs 1401 on the function display board 1402 and the left LED 1411a and right LED 1411b on the function display board 1411, and then a special pattern suggesting the special lottery result is displayed by a combination of lighting up and extinguishing the multiple LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a and right LED 1411b. At this time, the light from the plurality of LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a and right LED 1411b is radiated forward independently from the plurality of display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 and the plurality of display holes 1414a in front of the reflector 1414 so that a portion of the light is radiated only to one eye of the player, and at least a portion of the remaining light is radiated only to the other eye of the player. Because the light from the LED 1411a and right LED 1411b can be seen, it is possible to clearly see whether the multiple LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a, and right LED 1411b are on or off, and the special patterns displayed by the multiple LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a, and right LED 1411b can be clearly seen, allowing the display function of the multiple LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a, and right LED 1411b to be performed without any impairment.

When the multiple LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a, and right LED 1411b (functional display unit 1400A and functional display unit 1400B) are photographed with a digital camera or cell phone camera, as described above, the light from all of the LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a, and right LED 1411b is visible when viewed with both eyes of the player. Therefore, a monocular camera can only photograph one of the eyes, making it difficult to accurately photograph the light-emitting status of all of the LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a, and right LED 1411b. Therefore, because it is not possible to accurately photograph the light-emitting status of the multiple LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a, and right LED 1411b, it becomes difficult to easily determine whether a special symbol that will create an advantageous game state (e.g., a "jackpot" game) is being displayed, allowing the player to enjoy the presentation suggesting the result of the special lottery until the end, preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, in the functional display unit 1400A, some of the multiple display holes 1405a on the front of the reflector 1405 are tilted in the front-to-back direction toward the position of one of the player's eyes, while the remaining holes are tilted in the front-to-back direction toward the position of the player's other eye and are oriented straight in the front-to-back direction. This provides the same effect as above, and in addition, the tilt of the display holes 1405a makes it difficult for players other than those seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to clearly see the light from all of the LEDs 1401. This makes it difficult for other players to grasp the game situation, reduces the chance of other players peeking in, and allows players to enjoy the game without worrying about other players.

Furthermore, in the functional display unit 1400B, the multiple left-hand LEDs 1411a and multiple right-hand LEDs 1411b mounted on the functional display board 1411 are spaced a predetermined distance (40 mm to 80 mm) left and right, and a front reflector 1414 with multiple display holes 1414a is provided in front of them. This not only achieves the same effects as above, but also makes it easier to remove the multiple display holes 1414a when molding them, as each display hole 1414a faces straight forward and backward, thereby minimizing the increase in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, in the functional display unit 1400C, the light from the multiple LEDs 1421a mounted on the functional display board 1421 is visible to the player through the transparent light guide plate 1423, allowing the player to clearly see the special symbols displayed by the multiple LEDs 1421a. When invisible light is emitted from the invisible light LED 1424a onto the side of the light guide plate 1423, the invisible light incident from the side is emitted from the light guide plate 1423 forward toward the player. However, since the player cannot see the invisible light emitted from the light guide plate 1423, the special symbols displayed by the multiple LEDs 1421a can be clearly seen through the light guide plate 1423, allowing the display function of the multiple LEDs 1421a to be fully demonstrated. Furthermore, when an image is taken from the front with a digital camera or the like while the invisible light LED 1424a is emitting light, depending on the model of the digital camera, the invisible light emitted forward from the light guide plate 1423 will be captured. This makes the light guide plate 1423 appear bright, making it difficult to capture the light from the multiple LEDs 1421a located at the rear, and making it difficult to determine the light emission status of the multiple LEDs 1421a, thereby reliably realizing a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, in the functional display unit 1400, the main control board 1310 may be configured to flash multiple LEDs at a speed that allows the player to recognize that a special symbol is lit. As a result, even if the main control board 1310 causes the multiple LEDs of the functional display unit 1400 to flash at a predetermined speed, they will appear to the player as lit, making the display of the special symbol by the multiple LEDs clearly visible and fully utilizing the display function of the multiple LEDs. Furthermore, when LEDs flashing at a predetermined speed by the main control board 1310 are photographed with a digital camera, depending on the shutter speed, the LEDs may appear to be off even though they are lit. Therefore, even when multiple LEDs that appear to be in the same state (condition) are photographed, the LEDs may appear lit or off depending on the timing of the shutter release, making it difficult to distinguish the illumination status of the multiple LEDs, thereby reliably realizing the pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects. The predetermined blinking rate for the LEDs set by the main control board 1310 is preferably within the range of 30 Hz to 100 Hz. If the blinking rate is slower than this, the LEDs will not appear to be lit and will appear to be blinking as if the special pattern is fluctuating. If the blinking rate is faster than this, the LEDs will appear lit when photographed.

Also, a high-brightness LED that can project light forward with a higher brightness than the LED of the function display unit 1400, etc., may be provided near the function display unit 1400, etc. In this way, when the high-brightness LED provided near the function display unit 1400, etc. is illuminated, the high-brightness light from the LED may be perceived as dazzling. However, since the dynamic range of brightness perception for players (humans) is wide, the light from the LED of the function display unit 1400, etc. can be seen even when dazzling, allowing the player to recognize the special symbols displayed on the function display unit 1400, etc., and allowing the display function of the function display unit 1400, etc. to be performed without any disadvantage. Furthermore, when the function display unit 1400, etc. is photographed with a digital camera, etc. while the high-brightness LED is illuminated, the digital camera, etc., has a narrower dynamic range for brightness than humans, so the light from the high-brightness LED causes halation, causing the area around the LED to be blown out, thereby obscuring part of the function display unit 1400, etc. Therefore, the lighting status of multiple LEDs in the function display unit 1400, etc. can be made unclear, and a pachinko machine 1 with the same effects as those described above can be realized.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, on the game board 5A, the respective decorative parts (back front left logo decorative part 3121, back front left upper logo decorative part 3122, and back front left sub decorative part 3123) of the multiple decorative parts (back front left first decorative part 3124, back front left second decorative part 3125, back front left third decorative part 3126, and back front left decorative part base 3127) of the back front left decorative unit 3120 of the back front performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 are illuminated by light-emitting means (LEDs mounted on the back front left decorative board 3128, etc.). In its normal, undecorated state, the translucent, opaque white panel 1110A located in front of the back front left decorative unit 3120 makes the back front left upper logo decoration 3122 and other parts of the back front left decorative unit 3120 invisible and difficult to recognize, making it difficult for players to notice the presence of the back front left upper logo decoration 3122 and other parts, and the white color makes the panel 1110A of the gaming panel 1100 appear bright, making the pachinko machine 1 stand out.

Then, as the game progresses, the multiple LEDs of the back front left decorative unit 3120 are used to appropriately illuminate each of the back front upper left logo decorations 3122, etc., and the light from the illuminated decorated back front upper left logo decorations 3122, etc. is irradiated forward through the translucent panel board 1110A, causing the illuminated decorations of the back front upper left logo decorations 3122, etc. to be reflected on the white panel board 1110A, allowing the player to see the illuminated decorations of the back front upper left logo decorations 3122, etc. through the panel board 1110A, allowing the player to enjoy the illuminated decorations of the back front upper left logo decorations 3122, etc., and preventing a decline in interest. Furthermore, by illuminating the logo decoration 3122 and other elements of the back front left decorative unit 3120, the player can be made aware of the presence of the logo decoration 3122 and other elements, the presence of which the player would not have been able to foresee, which can greatly surprise the player and make the player feel strongly that their chance has arrived. In addition, the player can be shown a highly effective illuminated effect, which can entertain the player and prevent a decline in interest.

In addition, since the translucent opaque panel board 1110A is white in color, the decorative parts (first front left logo decorative part 3124c, first back left logo decorative part 3124d, first upper left logo decorative part 3124e, first left sub-decorative part 3124f, second back left logo decorative part 3125d, second upper left logo decorative part 3125e, second upper left logo decorative part 3125f, second upper left logo decorative part 3125d, The luminous colors of the luminous decorations in the decorative portion 3125e, second left sub-decorative portion 3125f, third back left logo decorative portion 3126d, third upper left logo decorative portion 3126e, third left sub-decorative portion 3126f, and base upper left logo decorative portion 3127d can be shown to the player in their original colors through the panel board 1110A, allowing the player to see luminous effects in a variety of colors, and the diverse luminous effects make it less likely that the player will tire of them, preventing a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, multiple decorative bodies (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3124a, back front left second decorative body 3124b) are provided with decorative parts of mutually related shapes ("first front left logo decorative body 3124c, first back left logo decorative body 3124d, second back left logo decorative body 3125d, third back left logo decorative body 3126d", "first upper left logo decorative body 3124e, second upper left logo decorative body 3125e, third upper left logo decorative body 3126e, base upper left logo decorative body 3127d", "first left sub-decorative body 3124f, second left sub-decorative body 3125f, third left sub-decorative body 3126f"). The decorative parts (main body 3125, rear front left third decorative body 3126, and rear front left decorative body base 3127) are stacked in the front-to-back direction, and each decorative part can be illuminated independently using the light-emitting means (LEDs on the rear front left decorative board 3128, rear front left upper decorative board 3129, and rear front left lower decorative board 3130). As the positions of each decorative part in the front-to-back direction are different, when each decorative part is illuminated, the player can see a lighting effect with a sense of depth, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

In addition, each of the multiple decorative bodies (first back front left decorative body 3124, second back front left decorative body 3125, third back front left decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127) has decorative parts associated with each other (first front left logo decorative body 3124c, first back left logo decorative body 3124d, second back left logo decorative body 3125d, third back left logo decorative body 3126d, first upper left logo decorative body 3124e, second upper left logo decorative body 3125e, third upper left logo decorative body 3126e, base upper left logo decorative body 3127d, first left sub-decorative body 3124f, Because the decorative parts are provided with a left sub-decorative part 3125f, a third left sub-decorative part 3126f), the decorative parts can be illuminated in an appropriate order using light-emitting means (LEDs on the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129, and the back front lower left decorative board 3130), allowing the player to see a dynamic light-emitting effect, which not only strongly attracts the player's attention but also makes the player think that something good is about to happen, increasing the player's anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the decorative parts ("first front left logo decorative part 3124c, first back left logo decorative part 3124d, second back left logo decorative part 3125d, third back left logo decorative part 3126d," "first upper left logo decorative part 3124e, second upper left logo decorative part 3125e, third upper left logo decorative part 3126e, base upper left logo decorative part 3127") provided on each of the multiple decorative parts (first back front left decorative part 3124, second back front left decorative part 3125, third back front left decorative part 3126, and back front left decorative part base 3127) d," "first left sub-decorative portion 3124f," "second left sub-decorative portion 3125f," and "third left sub-decorative portion 3126f" can each be illuminated independently using light-emitting means (LEDs on the back front left decorative board 3128, back front upper left decorative board 3129, and back front lower left decorative board 3130). By appropriately combining the illuminated decorative portions, players can be shown a variety of illuminated effects, preventing players from becoming bored and reducing their interest. Furthermore, because each decorative portion can be illuminated independently, the combination of illuminated decorative portions that illuminate as the game progresses can suggest to the player the likelihood of an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "jackpot" gaming state) that will give the player an advantage.

In addition, in each decorative body (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127) of the back front left decorative unit 3120, shading sections (dividing decorative section 3124a, dividing decorative section 3125c, dividing decorative section 3126c) are provided between the decorative sections (back front left logo decorative section 3121, back front left upper logo decorative section 3122, and back front left sub-decorative section 3123) that are arranged in different positions from each other.This means that the shading sections can block the light used to illuminate one decorative section from being irradiated onto the other decorative section, preventing the other decorative section from illuminating and decorating, and only one (desired) decorative section can be illuminated and decorated. Therefore, since multiple decorative elements on a single decorative body can be illuminated independently, appropriate decorative elements can be illuminated as the game progresses, allowing players to see a variety of illuminated effects, preventing players from getting bored and losing interest.

Furthermore, in each of the decorative bodies (first back front left decorative body 3124, second back front left decorative body 3125, third back front left decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127) of the back front left decorative unit 3120, multiple decorative parts (back front left logo decorative part 3121, upper back front left logo decorative part 3122, and sub back front left decorative part 3123) are arranged in different positions, and light-shielding parts (dividing decorative part 3124a, dividing decorative part 3125c, dividing decorative part 3126c) are provided between them, allowing each to be illuminated and decorated independently. Therefore, by making each decorative part of the decorative body decorated in a completely different style, players can see different types of illuminated decoration as the game progresses, which can strongly attract the player's attention and entertain the player with the illuminated effects, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, in each of the decorative bodies (first back-front-left decorative body 3124, second back-front-left decorative body 3125, third back-front-left decorative body 3126, and back-front-left decorative body base 3127) of the back-front-left decorative unit 3120, hole-shaped shading sections (dividing decorative section 3124a, dividing decorative section 3125c, dividing decorative section 3126c) are provided between multiple decorative sections (back-front-left logo decorative section 3121, upper back-front-left logo decorative section 3122, and back-front-left sub-decorative section 3123). Therefore, light used to illuminate one decorative section is emitted to the outside from part of the shading section, allowing part of the shading section to be illuminated. Therefore, by forming the shading section into a predetermined shape, players can see the luminous decoration of both the decorative section and the luminous decoration of the shading section, allowing for more diverse lighting effects to be produced.

In addition, the back front left first decorative body 3124 of the back front left decorative unit 3120 has a through decorative portion 3124b that penetrates from front to back in a predetermined shape. Therefore, when the decorative portions (first front left logo decorative portion 3124c, first back left logo decorative portion 3124d, first upper left logo decorative portion 3124e, first left sub-decorative portion 3124f) are illuminated as the game progresses, the circumferential surface of the through decorative portion 3124b is illuminated, allowing the player to see the illuminated decoration of the through decorative portion 3124b in addition to the illuminated decoration of the decorative portions, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, even if the cell 1140 provided behind the transparent panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 on the gaming board 5B expands or contracts more than the panel board 1110 due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity, the cell 1140 is provided in a state in which it can expand or contract relative to the panel board 1110, so the cell 1140 can expand and contract freely, and wrinkles or cracks will not occur in the cell 1140 even if the environment such as temperature and humidity changes, and the decorative effect of the cell 1140 can be maintained. In this case, the cells 1140 are located behind the part of the panel 1110 opposite to the predetermined direction in which the opening 1112 to which the center gimmick 2500 is attached is biased, i.e., behind the wide part of the panel 1110. This makes it easier for players to see the designs on the cells 1140 that can be seen through the transparent panel 1110, allowing the decorative effect of the cells 1140 to be fully realized, and also improves the appearance of the play area 5a with the designs on the cells 1140 that can be seen through the transparent panel 1110, entertaining players and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the cells 1140 are provided in an expandable state on the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 and are not attached to the gaming panel (panel board) as in conventional methods, the effort required for decorating the transparent panel board 1110 is simplified, and the increase in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1 is suppressed. Specifically, since the cells 1140 can be attached to the cutting-processed panel board 1110 after the cutting process, the cells 1140 are not scratched during the cutting process of the panel board 1110. Furthermore, the cutting surface is not roughened due to differences in the materials of the panel boards 1110 and 1140, and the finishing process after cutting can be omitted. On the other hand, since the cells 1140 are not attached to the gaming panel (panel board) formed by cutting or injection molding to have an opening, the effort required for attachment can be eliminated. Therefore, the cells 1140 can be attached behind the transparent panel board 1110 more easily than with conventional techniques, and the increase in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1 is suppressed.

Furthermore, since the cells 1140 are provided behind a portion of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, the amount of cells 1140 used can be reduced compared to when the cells 1140 are provided on the entire surface of the panel board 1110, thereby reducing the costs associated with the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, because the cells 1140 are detachable from the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, cells 1140 with different designs can be attached or replaced on the panel board 1110, making it easy to accommodate changes in the specifications or model of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5B), thereby minimizing increases in the costs associated with the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the cells 1140 can be illuminated and decorated by the illumination of various LEDs provided in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000. This allows the images of the cells 1140 visible through the panel board 1110 of the transparent game panel 1100 to be illuminated and decorated, improving the appearance of the game area 5a and strongly attracting the player's attention to the game area 5a. This also brightens the game area 5a, making it easier to see the game balls B circulating within the game area 5a.

Furthermore, the various LEDs provided in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 can illuminate and decorate the cells 1140 provided behind the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. The illuminated decoration of the cells 1140 can illuminate the game balls B circulating within the game area 5a from behind, making them appear as silhouettes. This makes the game balls B easier to see, allowing players to enjoy their movement and preventing a decline in interest. Furthermore, by making the game balls B circulating within the game area 5a appear as silhouettes, players can easily make subtle adjustments to the impact strength of the game balls B, allowing players to enjoy the original gameplay of the pachinko machine 1, which is to devise ways to impact the game balls B.

In addition, because the cell 1140 is located behind a portion of the transparent panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, when the player looks into the gaming area 5a, the image in the cell 1140 is more likely to come into focus. Therefore, simply by looking at the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110), the player's focus naturally comes to the gaming ball B circulating within the gaming area 5a, making it easier to see the gaming ball B circulating within the gaming area 5a, allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the gaming ball B and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, a cell 1140 decorated with a predetermined pattern is provided behind a portion of the transparent panel board 1110. This allows the pattern on the cell 1140 to hide the decorations of the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 located behind it from the player. Therefore, when the decorations located behind the cell 1140 are not illuminated, the pattern on the cell 1140 can prevent the player from noticing the presence of the decorations. When the decorations are illuminated as the game progresses, the cell 1140 is illuminated by the light from the decorations, making it possible for the player to notice the presence of decorations whose presence would not have been foreseen, greatly surprising the player and making the player strongly believe that their chance has arrived. This also allows the player to see a more effective illumination effect, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as described above, the rear left movable decorative element 3301 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, which is a movable decorative element located at the rear, can be hidden from view by the player using the cell 1140. As the rear left movable decorative element 3301 moves from an invisible state due to the cell 1140 to a visible state through the opening 1112 that penetrates the front and rear of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 as the game progresses, a movable performance can be shown in which the rear left movable decorative element 3301 appears as the game progresses. Therefore, the appearance of the rear left movable decorative element 3301, etc., can suggest to the player that a chance is approaching, making the player strongly believe that a favorable gaming state (for example, a "jackpot" gaming state) that gives the player an advantage may occur, increasing anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, which has the game area 5a in front of the game board 5A where game balls B circulate, is made of a translucent, opaque milky white color, making the game area 5a appear bright and making the game balls B circulating within the game area 5a easier to see. Furthermore, when light from the LEDs and performance display devices 1600 provided on the pachinko machine 1, light from lighting in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, light from other pachinko machines, slot machines, and other game machines is irradiated onto the game panel 1100, the light is diffused by the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, making the panel board 1110A appear to be dimly lit and self-illuminating. Furthermore, when the multiple LEDs 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130, which can irradiate light onto the periphery of the panel board 1110A, are illuminated, the light is diffused by the opaque, milky-white panel board 1110A, which has translucency, so that the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 can be softly and softly illuminated like fluorescent lamps, which are used for indirect lighting, thereby brightening the game area 5a and reducing the glare caused by the LEDs 1130a, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that is gentle on the player's eyes. Therefore, compared to previous pachinko machines that use plywood or transparent plates as the game panel (panel board), players can see a pachinko machine 1 with a game area 5a that glows like a fluorescent light, something they have never seen before, which strongly attracts the player's attention to the game panel 1100 (game area 5a) and makes them feel like something good is about to happen, increasing their anticipation for the game. In addition, the light from the rear panel board 1110A makes game balls B circulating within the game area 5a look like silhouettes, making game balls B easier to see, allowing players to enjoy the movement of game balls B and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, by attaching a decorative sheet (decorative film) (not shown) to the front of the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100, the milky-white panel board 1110A can enhance the color of the image on the decorative film, improving the appearance of the gaming area 5a through the decorative image. Furthermore, by illuminating the LEDs 1130a on the panel decorative board 1130, the image on the decorative film can be illuminated and decorated through the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100, further improving the appearance of the gaming area 5a and providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, when a decorative film is provided on the front surface of the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100, the areas decorated with LEDs 1130a, etc., can easily become unclear due to the translucent, opaque panel board 1110A. However, by designing the pattern (or by designing the arrangement of LEDs 1130a, etc.) so that the areas where the illuminating decoration is obscured are partially hidden by the decorative film pattern, the illuminating decoration can be made to look clearer, further enhancing the decorative effect.

Furthermore, when a decorative film is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110A of the gaming panel 1100, by using a material with excellent abrasion resistance for the decorative film, the front surface of the panel plate 1110A can be protected from the circulation of the gaming balls B by the decorative film. This means that there is no need to use a material with high abrasion resistance for the panel plate 1110A, and a lower-grade, cheaper material can be used, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, if a decorative film is provided on the rear surface of the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100, light irradiated from the rear to the front of the decorative film will cast a shadow of the image on the decorative film onto the panel board 1110A, allowing the player to see the image. The player can also see an illuminating effect in which the image or text on the light-scratch film is projected onto the panel board 1110A from behind, making the player feel as if something good is about to happen when the effect is executed, heightening the player's anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest. Alternatively, the illuminating effect could involve projecting images or text encouraging a "right hit" or operation of the effect operation unit 301 onto the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100 from behind using the decorative film, allowing the player to enjoy the operation of hitting the game ball B, operating the effect operation unit 301 in a player-participation effect, and preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, if decorative film is provided on both the front and rear of the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100, when light is shone onto the side of the panel board 1110A using LEDs 1130a or the like on the panel decorative substrate 1130, the panel board 1110A will self-illuminate, as described above, causing the decorative film on the front side to be illuminated and decorated, allowing players to enjoy the image on the decorative film on the front side. On the other hand, when light is shone from the rear of the gaming panel 1100 to the front using LEDs or the like, the shadow of the image on the decorative film on the rear side is projected onto the panel board 1110A, and this shadow overlaps with the image on the decorative film on the front side, causing the image on the decorative film on the front side to appear to change. This allows players to see a variety of lighting effects, preventing players from becoming bored and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, when the back front upper left logo decoration 3122 of the back front left decorative unit 3120 and the back front upper right logo decoration 3142 of the back front right decorative unit 3140, which are located behind the translucent, opaque, milky white panel board 1110A, are illuminated and decorated as the game progresses, the light passes to a certain extent forward (towards the player) through the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100, allowing the panel board 1110A to be partially illuminated and decorated in the same manner as the back front upper left logo decoration 3122 and back front upper right logo decoration 3142 located behind, and also making the player aware of the presence of the back front upper left logo decoration 3122 and back front upper right logo decoration 3142 located behind. Therefore, the illuminated decorations of the logo decoration 3122 on the upper left back front and the logo decoration 3142 on the upper right back front are visible through the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100, making the player feel as if something good is about to happen, increasing anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the rear front upper left logo decoration 3122 and rear front upper right logo decoration 3142, which are located at the rear of the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100, are formed from a colorless, transparent material.Since the panel board 1110A is a milky white color, the colors of the rear front upper left logo decoration 3122 and rear front upper right logo decoration 3142 blend in with the color of the panel board 1110A and are therefore invisible from the front, preventing players from noticing the presence of the rear front upper left logo decoration 3122 and rear front upper right logo decoration 3142. Furthermore, when the back front upper left logo decoration 3122 and back front upper right logo decoration 3142 are illuminated, the illuminated decorations of the back front upper left logo decoration 3122 and back front upper right logo decoration 3142 can be seen through the panel board 1110A as described above. Therefore, when the player notices the presence of the back front upper left logo decoration 3122 and back front upper right logo decoration 3142, whose presence he or she would not have foreseen, the player can be greatly surprised, giving the player a strong sense that their chance has arrived and allowing the player to see an illuminated effect with even greater dramatic effect, which can entertain the player and prevent a decline in interest.

In addition, under normal conditions, the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear right movable decorative element 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300 are positioned behind the opaque, milky white panel board 1110A, making them invisible from the front. However, as the game progresses, they move to a position behind the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110A, making them visible through the opening 1112, allowing the player to see a movable performance in which the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear right movable decorative element 3302 appear. Therefore, the appearance of the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear right movable decorative element 3302 can suggest to the player that a chance is approaching, making the player strongly believe that a favorable gaming state (for example, a "jackpot" gaming state) in which the player has an advantage may occur, increasing anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, by making the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 luminous, when the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 are not visible, the luminous decorations of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 (or the rear front upper left logo decoration 3122 and the rear front upper right logo decoration 3142) can be turned on or flashed, making it possible to make the player aware of the presence of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 through the translucent panel board 1110A, and keeping the player on the edge of their seats depending on whether the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 move to a state where they can be seen (whether the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 appear or not), making it possible to execute movable effects that can be more entertaining for the player.

In addition, the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100, which has the gaming area 5a in front of it, is made opaque and translucent, so when a player looks inside the gaming area 5a, the front of the panel board 1110A tends to come into focus, and so simply by looking at the panel board 1110A, the player will naturally focus on the gaming ball B circulating within the gaming area 5a. At this time, as described above, the panel board 1110A appears to be self-illuminating due to light from the outside or light from the emitting LED 1130a, etc., and the game ball B circulating within the play area 5a is made to look like a silhouette by the light from the rear panel board 1110A, making the game ball B circulating within the play area 5a easier to see, allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B and preventing a decline in interest, and making it easier to make subtle adjustments to the impact strength of the game ball B, allowing the player to enjoy playing the pachinko machine 1 main body by devising ways to impact the game ball B.

Furthermore, because the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100 is made of an opaque, milky white material (synthetic resin) that is translucent, it is possible to use a lower grade synthetic resin compared to when the panel board is made transparent, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, because the panel board 1110A is an opaque milky white with translucency, the color of the decorative elements provided on this pachinko machine 1 stands out relatively, enhancing the decorative effect of the decorative elements. This makes it possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that is capable of strongly attracting the attention of players. Furthermore, when the LEDs 1130a on the panel decorative substrate 1130 or the decorative elements provided at the rear of the gaming panel 1100 are illuminated, the emitted color can be transmitted forward, allowing players to enjoy a colorful illumination effect.

Furthermore, because the panel board 1110A is opaque and milky white with translucency, decorative elements (e.g., the rear front left decorative unit 3120) located behind the gaming panel 1100 can be made invisible from the front (player's side). Furthermore, when the decorative elements located behind the gaming panel 1100 are illuminated, light from the decorative elements passes forward through the translucent gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110A), allowing the gaming panel 1100 to be partially illuminated and alerting the player to the presence of the decorative elements located behind. Furthermore, when the decorative elements located behind the gaming panel 1100 are moved to a position behind the opening 1112 penetrating the panel board 1110A, the decorative elements can be made visible from the front through the opening 1112, allowing the player to see the decorative elements disappear and appear. In this way, a variety of lighting effects and moving effects can be presented to players, preventing them from getting bored and losing interest.

Furthermore, the translucent, opaque, milky-white panel board 1110A diffuses light from the LEDs 1130a and other components of the panel decoration substrate 1130, allowing the gaming panel 1100 to be softly and luminously decorated, brightening the gaming area 5a like indirect lighting while also reducing the glare of the LEDs 1130a, providing a pachinko machine 1 that is gentle on the player's eyes.

In addition, the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100 can be illuminated and decorated using the LEDs 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130. For example, LEDs 1130a can be provided on the left and right sides of the panel board 1110A, allowing each to illuminate independently. By illuminating the right side according to the game situation (progress), the right side of the gaming area 5a will be illuminated via the panel board 1110A, thereby drawing the player's attention to the right side of the gaming area 5a and encouraging them to shoot the gaming ball B into the right side of the gaming area 5a ("hit to the right"). On the other hand, by illuminating the left side, the left side of the gaming area 5a will be illuminated via the panel board 1110A, thereby drawing the player's attention to the left side of the gaming area 5a and encouraging them to shoot the gaming ball B into the left side of the gaming area 5a ("hit to the left"). In this way, by illuminating the LEDs 1130a in appropriate positions, the illuminated decoration on the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110A) can be intuitively understood as advising the player to "hit left" or "hit right," allowing the player to enjoy the operation of shooting the gaming ball B, and also entertaining the player with a new type of illuminated effect not found in previous pachinko machines 1.

In addition, the gaming panel 1100 is composed of a plate-shaped panel plate 1110A (panel plate 1110) and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that is thicker than panel plate 1110A and holds the outer periphery of panel plate 1110A. Therefore, if the thickness of the panel holder 1120 is made the same as that of the gaming panel of a conventional pachinko machine, the thickness of panel plate 1110A (panel plate 1110), at the front of which the gaming area 5a is located, can be made thinner than that of a conventional gaming panel. This reduces the amount of material used in the gaming panel 1100 (panel plate 1110, panel plate 1110A), thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, because the gaming panel 1100 is composed of the panel plate 1110 or panel plate 1110A and the panel holder 1120, the panel plate 1110A and the panel holder 1120 can be detached, making it possible to use the panel holder 1120 as a common, general-purpose part. This allows for mass production of the panel holder 1120, thereby reducing the cost of the panel holder 1120, and by manufacturing panel plates 1110 or 1110A that correspond to each model, the costs associated with new models and model changes can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be accommodated on the game board 5 via the holding member 1060 by accommodating the magnetic sensor 1050 in the accommodating section 1061 having the elastic claw 1062 in the holding member 1060 and engaging the elastic claw 1062 with the magnetic sensor 1050. Also, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be accommodated on the game board 5 via the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072 by accommodating the magnetic sensor 1050 in the holding container 1072 having the elastic claw 1072a and engaging the elastic claw 1072a with the engaging section 1071a of the holding member 1071. In this case, because the holding members 1060, 1071, and holding container 1072 are made of non-magnetic materials, when the magnet 1055 is brought close to the play area 5a, the holding members 1060 and the like are prevented from attracting the magnetic field lines from the magnet 1055, and a decrease in the magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050 can be prevented. This makes it easier to detect magnetism acting on the play area 5a, allowing for early detection of fraudulent activity using the magnet 1055, and dissuading players from engaging in fraudulent activity by reporting suspicious magnetic activity detected by the magnetic sensor 1050, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly effective in deterring fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, as described above, the holding member 1060, holding member 1071, and holding container 1072, which are made of a non-magnetic material, avoid attracting magnetic field lines from the magnet 1055 and prevent a decrease in the magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050. This makes it possible to effectively detect the magnetic field acting on the play area 5a with fewer magnetic sensors 1050 than in conventional pachinko machines, allowing for a smaller number of magnetic sensors 1050 than in conventional pachinko machines, thereby suppressing increases in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by elastically deforming the elastic claws 1062 of the storage section 1061 and the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached to and detached from the locking sections 1071a of the holding members 1060 and 1071. This means that the magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached using the elastic claws 1062 and 1072a without using metal screws made of magnetic material, as in conventional pachinko machines. This also simplifies the assembly of the pachinko machine 1, thereby minimizing the cost increase associated with the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by providing the holding member 1071 with multiple locking portions 1071a in advance and locking the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072 containing the magnetic sensor 1050 to the locking portions 1071a at appropriate positions, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be installed in any position or its position can be easily changed. Therefore, since the position of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily changed or additional sensors can be installed, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can easily accommodate design changes and model changes while suppressing increases in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the magnetic sensor 1050 is biased into the housing 1061 by the protrusion 1063 on the holding member 1060, which can prevent the magnetic sensor 1050 from vibrating finely due to the biasing force of the protrusion 1063. This reduces the likelihood of the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1050 becoming detached or of poor contact occurring due to such vibration, ensuring reliable operation of the magnetic sensor 1050.

Furthermore, the magnetic sensor 1050 is held visibly by the holding member 1060, the holding member 1071, and the holding container 1072. Furthermore, because the sensor case 1053 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is transparent, the sensor main body 1051 mounted on the sensor board 1052 can be seen by the player through the transparent sensor case 1053. In this case, because the surface of the sensor board 1052 on which the sensor main body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor main body 1051, which is a different color (e.g., black), can be made to stand out. This makes it clear to the player that the magnetic sensor 1050 is genuine and not a dummy. The visibility of the magnetic sensor 1050 can discourage those who would otherwise commit fraud using the magnet 1055, and can increase the deterrent effect against fraud. This reduces the burden on the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, even if the sensor body 1051 is visible through the transparent sensor case 1053, an average player will not pay much attention to the presence of the magnetic sensor 1050 and will not find it bothersome. In contrast, someone attempting to commit fraud will focus their attention on the playing area 5a, and the contrast between the white sensor board 1052 and the black sensor body 1051 will make the magnetic sensor 1050 highly visible. Therefore, noticing the presence of the magnetic sensor 1050 will discourage players from committing fraud using magnets, providing a pachinko machine 1 with a strong deterrent effect.

Furthermore, in the magnetic sensor 1050, the surface of the sensor board 1052 on which the sensor main body 1051 is mounted is white, making the sensor board 1052 less noticeable and preventing it from being mistaken for a decorative board on which an LED is mounted. Therefore, even if the sensor board 1052 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is visible, it will not bother a typical player, and the appearance of the play area 5a is not marred.

Furthermore, because the sensor body 1051 of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be seen from the outside, it is possible to check from the outside whether the sensor body 1051 is damaged, which simplifies the maintenance work required for the pachinko machine 1 and reduces the burden on the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, because the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached to the gaming board 5 via the non-magnetic retaining member 1060, retaining member 1071, retaining container 1072, etc., if the retaining member 1060 or retaining member 1071 is attached to the gaming board 5 using a magnetic material such as a screw, the portion of the retaining member 1060 or retaining member 1071 that is attached to the gaming board 5 can be located away from the magnetic sensor 1050 or outside the magnetic detection range of the playing area 5a. This minimizes the influence of magnetic materials such as screws, allowing the magnetic sensor 1050 to reliably detect magnetic fields acting on the playing area 5a, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly deterrent to fraudulent activity using the magnet 1055.

[21. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 in accordance with the progress of play on the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 210 to 215. Figure 210 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side power-on processing, Figure 211 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of Figure 210, Figure 212 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing, Figure 213 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing, Figure 214 is a flowchart showing an example of setting value confirmation display processing, and Figure 215 is a flowchart showing an example of error display processing. First, various random numbers used in game control will be described, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, setting value confirmation display processing, and error display processing.

[21-1. Various random numbers]
Various random numbers used for game control include special random numbers used to determine whether or not a jackpot game state or a small jackpot game state will occur, initial value determination random numbers for hit determination used to determine the initial value of these special random numbers, reach determination random numbers used to determine whether or not a reach (missed reach) will occur when a jackpot game state is not generated, variable display pattern random numbers used to determine the variable display pattern of the special patterns that are variably displayed on the first special pattern display device and second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400, pattern random numbers used to determine the jackpot pattern or small jackpot pattern (determine the type of win) that is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device and second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 when a jackpot game state is generated, and initial value determination random numbers for jackpot pattern used to determine the initial value of these pattern random numbers. In addition to these random numbers, there are also prepared random numbers for determining whether or not to open or close the second starting port door 2411, which can guide the game ball B to the second starting port 2004, random numbers for determining the initial value of the ...

Of the various random numbers used in this type of game control, special random numbers are updated by hardware, while other random numbers are updated by software.

[21-2. Operation of the initial value update type counter]
For example, the special random number is updated directly by hardware using a main control built-in hardware random number circuit built into the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is reset, this main control built-in hardware random number circuit first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as its initial value and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. After extracting all values within the predetermined numerical range, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit again extracts a value within the predetermined numerical range and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit repeatedly performs such rapid lottery drawing, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit at the time of obtaining a value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit as the special random number.

In contrast, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range spanning from a minimum value to a maximum value, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control timer interrupt process described below is performed. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won. Once the counter has finished counting up the range spanning from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won, the initial value determination random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won is updated. This type of counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter." The initial value determination random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won.

In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch (RWM switch 633d) on the payout control board 633 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the checksum value (sum value) obtained by treating various information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as numerical values and calculating their sum during the main control side power-on process (described below) does not match the checksum value (sum value) stored during the main control side power-off process (when power is turned off), and all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for specific areas, the main control MPU 1310a retrieves an ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM and executes an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal pattern win determination random number based on this retrieved ID code, and this derived fixed value is set. In other words, the normal pattern win determination random number is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code when the initial value derivation process is executed. In this way, the value set in the initial value determination random number for determining normal symbol wins is derived using the ID code, and analysis is prevented by taking two security measures: a first security measure in which the ID code cannot be rewritten even using an external device when it is stored in non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer that produced the main control MPU 1310a; and a second security measure in which an initial value derivation process is executed when all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area are cleared, thereby deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code.

Here, we explain the advantages of extracting an ID code from the nonvolatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a and using this extracted ID code as the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol has been hit. For example, even if someone attempting to illegally acquire a prize ball were to somehow obtain and disassemble a gaming board 5, illegally obtain an ID code pre-stored in the nonvolatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and determine the timing at which the counter value updating the random number for determining whether a normal symbol has been hit matches the normal symbol hit determination value, this ID code would be uniquely coded for individual identification and would be completely different from the ID codes pre-stored in the nonvolatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a' of other gaming boards 5'. In other words, the timing at which the counter value updating the random number for determining whether a normal symbol has been hit matches the normal symbol hit determination value on the other gaming boards 5' would also be completely different from that on the obtained gaming board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the acquired game board 5 is completely useless on other game boards 5', i.e., other pachinko machines 1', and therefore even if momentary power outages are caused at the predetermined intervals obtained by disassembly and analysis, and game balls are allowed to pass through gate 2003 at those predetermined intervals, it is not possible to open and close second starting gate door 2411 and create a state in which game ball B can be guided to second starting gate 2004.

[21-3. Processing when power is turned on on the main control side]
First, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that a stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default when power is applied to the pachinko machine 1. This stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the contents of a memory element (register) currently in use, or an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the return address of this routine when a subroutine is terminated and the routine is returned to, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is filled.

Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, the main control side power-on processing is performed as shown in Figures 210 and 211. When this main control side power-on processing begins, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access permissions (step S10). This RAM access permission setting allows updates to be made to the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S10, the main control MPU 1310a performs a power outage clearing process (step S12). This power outage clearing process involves a wait timer process to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input from the power outage monitoring circuit. Between power-on and reaching a predetermined voltage, the voltage does not rise immediately. On the other hand, during a power outage or momentary power outage (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and if it falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit as a power outage warning. Similarly, between power-on and reaching a predetermined voltage, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit. Therefore, the wait timer process waits until the voltage exceeds the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes after power-on. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S12, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S14). The RAM clear switch has three functions (RAM clear switch, setting switch, and error reset switch). In this case, it functions as a RAM clear switch to completely erase information stored in a specified area of the main control's internal RAM. In this determination, if the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HIGH, the main control MPU 1310a determines that RAM clearing should be performed and determines that the RAM clear switch has not been operated. However, if the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that RAM clearing should be performed and determines that the RAM clear switch has been operated. Note that the period from the start of the main control power-on processing routine to the determination in step S14 is extremely short, so in reality, the person pressing the RAM clear switch's pressing operation portion will actually power on the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the RAM clear switch's pressing operation portion.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S16A). On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S16B). In other words, the main control MPU 1310a is in a state in which it can execute the RAM clear process (step S38), which initializes the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a (i.e., the main control built-in RAM), for a predetermined period of time after power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is a flag indicating whether or not to erase various information stored in the main control MPU 1310a's built-in RAM, including game information related to gameplay such as probability fluctuations and unpaid prize balls, and other information (e.g., information indicating the value of a counter for determining the output of main prize ball count information). It is set to 1 when various information is to be erased, and to 0 when various information is not to be erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a. When the RAM clear process (step S38) is executed to initialize the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a (i.e., the main control built-in RAM), the RAM clear switch must be operated and the setting key switch 1311a must not be set to the setting key ON position when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, which is a "predetermined initialization process execution condition."

Following step S16A or step S16B, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the main frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON (step S18). This determination is based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b, which detects the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a, which occurs when a setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key cylinder is turned ON by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise from its initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). Note that the period from when the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, begins until the judgment in step S18 is extremely short, so in reality, the person who turns on the setting key switch 1311a will turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 1311a.

In the judgment of step S18, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b and determines that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned on based on the setting key ON signal, it sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of 1 (step S20A). On the other hand, in the judgment of step S18, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main frame 4 is not open relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b and/or determines that the setting key switch 1311a has not been turned on based on the setting key ON signal, it sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of 0 (step S20B). The setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to permit changes to or confirmation displays of the current setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) stored in a specified area (a setting value-dedicated area in a specific area, described below) of the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. It is set to 1 when setting value changes and confirmation displays are permitted, and to 0 when setting value changes and confirmation displays are not permitted. The value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG set in steps S20A and S20B is stored in a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU 1310a performs a wait time standby process (step S22). This wait time standby process waits until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 starts up (boots). In this embodiment, the standby time until booting (boot timer) is set to 2.5 seconds (s). When the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process, the peripheral control board 1510 is ready to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). Note that, when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process, the dispensing control board 633 completes booting in a shorter time than the peripheral control board 1510, so the dispensing control board 633 is ready to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a).

Following step S22, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, if the voltage drops below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit as a power outage warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. If, in the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it returns to the determination in step S24 and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. Note that a detailed explanation of the fact that the determination in step S24 is made following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be provided later.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has not been input, it determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to value 1 (step S25). By determining that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to value 1, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is met.

If, in step S25, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not equal to 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not equal to 1, it then determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is equal to 0 (step S26). Having determined that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is equal to 0, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not met, but that various information should be erased in the same way as if the predetermined setting value change permission condition were met.

If, in step S26, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not equal to 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not equal to 0, it calculates a checksum (step S29). This checksum is calculated by treating the various information stored in the main control's built-in RAM as numerical values.

Following step S29, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored during the main control side power-off processing (when power is off) described below (step S30). In step S30, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is set to value 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG is a flag that indicates whether game backup information such as various information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG was stored and retained in the main control's built-in RAM during the main control side power-off processing described below, and is set to value 1 when the main control side power-off processing has been completed successfully, and to value 0 when the main control side power-off processing has not been completed successfully. A detailed explanation of the calculation of the checksum in step S29 and the determination in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is first powered on for inspection after production during the inspection process on the main control board 1310 production line will be provided later.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), i.e., that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, it performs error display processing (step S33) and enters an infinite loop. This infinite loop causes the state in which the error display processing has been completed to remain unchanged, making it impossible to continue playing the game. Consequently, the pachinko machine 1 must be powered off and then powered on again. This error display processing, the details of which will be explained later, determines that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control's internal RAM, or that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally at the time of power-off, and displays an error message to that effect, indicating that the contents stored in the main control's internal RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error indication.

Furthermore, after the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from its initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) to turn it ON, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned ON while operating the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch on the payout control board 633, and this routine, the main control side power-on processing, is started again. The main control MPU 1310a determines in the above-mentioned step S14 that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch has been operated, and sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 in the above-mentioned step S16A. Also, in the above-mentioned step S18, it determines that the main frame 4 has been opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b, and determines that the setting key switch 1311a has been set to setting key ON based on the setting key ON signal, and sets the setting key ON flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 in the above-mentioned step S20A. To set CS-FLG to a value of 1, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the determination of step S25 described above. This determines that the predetermined setting value change permission conditions are met, and following the setting change process of step S37 described below, in the process of step S38 described below, all areas of the main control internal RAM are cleared except for specific areas, thereby canceling the RAM error and allowing gameplay to continue (hereinafter referred to as the "first RAM error cancellation method").

As an alternative to this first RAM error clearing method, power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and with the setting key cylinder in its initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch on the payout control board 633. This will restart the main control side power-on processing routine. In the judgment of step S14 described above, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch has been operated, and sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 in step S16A described above. However, in step S18 described above, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main frame 4 has not been opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b, and/or determines that the setting key switch 1311a has not been set to the setting key ON position based on the setting key ON signal, then in step S20B described above, it sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of 0. To set the value to 0, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 0 in step S26 described above. This means that the predetermined conditions for allowing a change to the setting value are not met, but it is determined that various information should be erased in the same way as if the predetermined conditions for allowing a change to the setting value were met. In step S38, described below, all areas of the main control internal RAM are cleared except for specific areas, thereby canceling the RAM error and allowing gameplay to continue (hereinafter referred to as the "second RAM error cancellation method").

In this embodiment, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed successfully, it displays an error message in step S33 to inform the user that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are unreliable). This can be done using two methods: the first RAM error reset method and the second RAM error reset method. As a result, if there is no need to change the setting values at all, the RAM error can be reset by using the second RAM error reset method using the RAM clear switch.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value of 1, i.e., that the main control side power outage processing has been completed normally, it sets the working area of the main control's internal RAM as the time of power recovery (step S34). This setting is performed by reading power recovery information from the ROM (i.e., the main control's internal ROM) built into the main control MPU 1310a and setting this power recovery information in the working area of the main control's internal RAM. This allows various information to be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this information to be stored in a specified memory area of the main control's internal RAM. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a will proceed with the game based on the setting values stored in a dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control's internal RAM. Note that "power restoration" refers not only to the state in which power is turned on after being cut off, but also to the state in which power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and the state in which high frequency waves from fraudulent means (for example, a high frequency output device hidden in the hem of an individual's arm) are irradiated onto the main control board 1310, causing the main control MPU 1310a to reset itself, and then recover.

Following step S34, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). This causes various information, checksum values (sum values), etc. to change as various processes are performed thereafter. Therefore, unless the main control power-off process described below is successfully completed and the backup flag BK-FLG is not set to a value of 1, all areas of the main control's internal RAM will be cleared except for specific areas, as described below.

Following the determination in step S36, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 1 (step S27). By determining that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 1, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is met.

In step S27, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 1, and that the predetermined setting value display permission conditions are met, it performs setting value confirmation display processing (step S28). This setting value confirmation display processing, the details of which will be described later, displays the setting values stored in a dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control internal RAM on the setting display 1310g.

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S25 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1, i.e., that the predetermined setting value change permission conditions are met, it performs a setting change process (step S37). This setting change process, the details of which will be described later, is performed based on a signal from the RAM clear switch on the dispensing control board 633. As mentioned above, the RAM clear switch has three combined functions (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error reset switch), and here it functions as a setting switch button for selecting and switching setting values. Each time the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch is operated, a signal indicating this (setting value selection switching signal) is input, the setting value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is changed from ON to OFF, the changed setting value is determined based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a and stored in a specified area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a.

In the processing of step S37 or the judgment of step S26, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 0, i.e., the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not met but the main control MPU 1310a determines to erase various information as if the predetermined setting value change permission condition were met, it clears all areas of the main control internal RAM except for a specific area (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a does this by writing a value of 0 to a specified area of the main control internal RAM (the entire area of the main control internal RAM excluding the specific area). In this embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not set to 0 (i.e., the main control MPU 1310a determines to erase various information), and also when the setting change processing is terminated, the main control MPU 1310a always clears all areas of the main control internal RAM except for the specific area (the specified area of the main control internal RAM (the entire area of the main control internal RAM excluding the specific area)). Here, the "specific area" is composed of a dedicated setting value area in which setting values are stored, and a dedicated out ball count area in which the counting results (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008, first sub-out port 2021, and second sub-out port 2022 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 are stored. The dedicated setting value area stores setting values that are changed in the setting change process described below, and the dedicated out ball count area stores the counting results (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008, first sub-out port 2021, and second sub-out port 2022 that are counted in the ball counting process described below.

The main control MPU 1310a may read and set a predetermined value from the main control's built-in ROM as the initial value. Furthermore, when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch on the payout control board 633 has been operated indicates that RAM should be cleared and various information should be erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, the main control MPU 1310a retrieves a unique ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining a normal symbol win based on this retrieved ID code, and sets this fixed value as the initial value determination random number for determining a normal symbol win, which is used to determine the initial value of the random number for determining a normal symbol win described above.

Following step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets the working area of the main control's built-in RAM as the initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control's built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM. This initializes the game backup information, and for example, the value of the counter used to determine the output of main prize ball count information is set to the initial value of 0. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a will proceed with the game based on the setting values stored in the dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S36, S28, or S40, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial setting and startup settings for the main control's built-in WDT (step S41). Here, to set an initial value for the main control's built-in WDT, which monitors whether the main control MPU 1310a's operation (system) is normal, a timer setting value is set in the watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT control register") built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control's built-in WDT is started, starting the timer count until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control's built-in WDT is started, the main control's built-in WDT starts counting. If the timer clear setting value is not set in the watchdog timer clear register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT clear register") built into the main control MPU 1310a before the counted time reaches the timer setting value, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT. In contrast, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and begins timing, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time reached by the timer setting value, the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and timing begins again. In this way, by repeatedly clearing the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT before the time reached by the timer setting value and then starting timing again, it is possible to monitor whether the main control MPU 1310a (system) is operating normally.

Following step S41, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt period when the main control timer interrupt processing described below is performed. In this embodiment, this is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, the transmission serial port prescaler corresponding to the various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU 1310a (for example, the serial input/output ports (receive channels and transmit channels) for the dispensing control board 633 and the serial input/output ports (receive channels and transmit channels) for the peripheral control board 1510) is set to the communication speed and whether or not parity is enabled, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and enable transmission.

Following step S44, the main control MPU 1310a initializes the test signal output port (step S46). Here, the gaming machine testing laboratory initializes the test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information when the power is turned on (setting it to OFF data output).

Following step S46, the main control MPU 1310a performs startup settings for the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit (step S48). Here, settings are made to latch and acquire special random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state, among various random numbers related to the game, in the hard random number control register built into the main control MPU 1310a in order to update them by hardware, and startup settings for the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit are also configured in the hard random number setting register. When these settings are performed, the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit is started, and based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, it rapidly extracts other values within a predetermined numerical range without overlapping, one after another. Once all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts a value within the predetermined numerical range, and based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, it rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping, one after another. When the main control MPU 1310a obtains a random number (random number value) from the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit, and obtains the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit when this latch signal is input from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets this obtained random number value as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU 1310a reserves commands to be sent when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery information set in the main control's internal RAM's work area in step S34, a power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command, all of which are classified as power-on, are created to notify the user that power has been turned on (restored). These commands are then stored in the main control's internal RAM's transmission information storage area as transmission information. In some cases, the main control's internal RAM's transmission information storage area may contain various commands corresponding to various information read from the game backup information during the main control's internal RAM's work area setting in step S34. In such cases, after the various commands corresponding to the game information are first transmitted, the power-on status command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball information output determination counter notification command are transmitted. These commands are sent during the main control timer interrupt process, which will be described later. The details of how the commands to be sent when the power is turned on are scheduled in step S50 will be explained later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). This setting causes the main control side timer interrupt processing, described below, to be repeated at the interrupt period set in step S42, i.e., every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, as described above, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

If, in step S54, the main control MPU 1310a determines that no power outage warning signal has been input, it performs a non-win/lose random number update process (step S56). This non-win/lose random number update process updates the random numbers for reach determination, variable display pattern, initial value determination random numbers for jackpot symbols, and initial value determination random numbers for small win symbols, etc., as described above. In this way, the non-win/lose random number update process updates random numbers that are not related to win/lose determination (jackpot determination) by software. Note that the random numbers for normal symbol win determination, initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol win determination, and normal symbol variable display pattern random numbers, etc., as described above, are also updated by this non-win/lose random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54, where the main control MPU 1310a determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If no power outage warning signal has been input, the process performs a non-win/lose random number update process in step S56, and repeats steps S54 to S56. The process of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as the "main process on the main control side."

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S54 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets the interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). This setting prevents the main control timer interrupt processing described below from being performed, prevents writing to the main control's built-in RAM, and protects the rewriting of various information, including the game information and other information mentioned above.

Following step S58, the main control MPU 1310a starts outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same processing is performed as when the power outage clear signal was started to be output in the power outage clear processing in step S12.

Following step S60, the main control MPU 1310a stops the drive signals being output to, for example, the various displays of the function display unit 1400, the start port solenoid 2412, the attacca solenoid 2414, the bonus prize port solenoid 2612, the V-distribution solenoid 3007, the special monitor, etc. (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by treating the game information in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control's internal RAM, thereby preventing updates to the contents of the main control's internal RAM.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT that was started in step S41, clearing the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT and making it impossible to start timekeeping again, resulting in the main control MPU 1310a being forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. The main control MPU 1310a then performs this main control side power-on processing again. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing."

As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is affected by electrical noise, it is forcibly reset by its built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a is unable to make the judgment in step S54 and is unable to perform the main control side power-off processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by its built-in reset circuit, it is reset without performing the main control side power-off processing, and will once again perform the main control side power-on processing. In other words, because the main control side power-off processing is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) from the main control side power-off processing based on the time immediately before the built-in reset circuit was forcibly reset is not stored. Therefore, the checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power-off processing was executed the previous time power was cut off and the checksum value (sum value) calculated in step S29 when the built-in reset circuit is forcibly reset and restarted will not match, resulting in a checksum (sum value) error in the main control's built-in RAM, and in the processing of step S38, all areas of the main control's built-in RAM will be completely erased (cleared) except for specific areas.

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, and then performs the main control side power-on processing when power is restored.

In step S30, the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM is checked to see if it is correct, and then in step S32, it is checked to see if the main control's power-off processing was completed normally. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM, it is checked to see if the game backup information was stored as a result of fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, if the determination in step S25 is that the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (is 1), i.e., if a setting change of the setting value is permitted, the setting change process is performed in step S37, and in step S38, all areas of the main control internal RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area. If the determination in step S26 is that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), i.e., if it is determined that various information should be erased, all areas of the main control internal RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area. In this way, if the pressing operation unit is operated when power is restored (more precisely, if the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch), and if a setting change that can change the setting value is performed (if the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process), the main control MPU 1310a always clears the specified area of the main control internal RAM. This is because when the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch is pressed, for example, when the gaming hall closes its business and the pachinko machine 1 is in a state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a state in which it has won with a variable probability (probability change)), the above-mentioned gaming backup information needs to be erased (cleared) before the next business day begins, so a staff member or other attendant at the gaming hall needs to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch. Furthermore, when a setting value is changed, once the setting change process is performed (even if the current setting value is ultimately maintained), it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information, including various information such as game information obtained using the setting value before the setting change process, from the main control's built-in RAM. As mentioned above, the setting key is an important key that can be used to change the setting value as well as check the current setting value. Therefore, only a limited number of people, including the amusement hall manager, are permitted to possess it, and it is limited to two or three people. In this embodiment, even if the setting value is not changed, that is, even if there is no setting key that is possessed only by a limited number of specific people, a staff member such as an amusement hall employee can erase (clear) the game backup information from the main control's built-in RAM by turning on the power to the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch when it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information.

Here, we will explain the fact that the determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, we will explain the problem that occurs when the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal is not determined in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 after the wait time standby process in step S22 and subsequent processing is carried out.

As mentioned above, when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and power is cut off from the island equipment in the amusement hall, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary power outage. In other words, even if power from the island equipment in the amusement hall is cut off due to a momentary or power outage, the charge stored in the hardware electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V, allowing the main control side power outage processing to be completed within approximately 7 ms after power from the island equipment in the amusement hall is cut off. This ensures that the main control side power outage processing can be completed reliably even if a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and power from the island equipment in the amusement hall is cut off while a player is playing, that is, while the main control side main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing described below is being performed.

However, in extremely rare cases, when power is restored, the wait time standby process in step S22 begins timing the wait time (boot timer: set to 2.5 seconds in this embodiment) until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). If a momentary or power outage occurs just before this wait time is reached, the charge stored in the hardware electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. However, within a period of approximately 7 ms, the interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. This causes the main control timer interrupt process described below to be performed, and even if the contents of the main control's internal RAM are updated, the main control's power-on process during power-off may not be able to be completed. As a result, the checksum calculated based on the contents of the main control's internal RAM is not stored, and the main control's power-on process will begin again when power is restored.

As a result, when power is restored, the main control side power-on processing begins, and the wait time standby processing in step S22 is completed without any momentary or power outage. Then, in step S30, a checksum calculated based on the contents of the main control's built-in RAM in step S29 is compared with the value stored in the main control's built-in RAM immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred. The checksum values will not match, and in step S38, all areas of the main control's built-in RAM will be cleared except for specific areas. In other words, when power is restored, the RAM clear switch is operated by an amusement hall staff member or other attendant, and the above-mentioned gaming backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM will be forcibly erased (cleared) even if the amusement hall staff member or other attendant does not express an intention to clear the RAM.

In this embodiment, therefore, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided in step S24 to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and the determination of step S24 is repeated as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. This prevents game progress. Although a value is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, as described above, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents of the main control internal RAM (game information) are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided in step S24 to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input (i.e., if it is determined in step S24 that power to the pachinko machine 1 has been cut off after the wait time standby process of step S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24. As long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is repeated, preventing game play from progressing. This prevents various information, including game information and other information (e.g., information indicating the value of the counter used to determine the output of main prize ball information), from being updated, and prevents fluctuations in the checksum calculation results. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it determines that the checksum calculation result of step S29 matches the checksum value calculated and stored in step S64, and therefore does not initialize the game information stored in the main control's internal RAM immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage. This prevents game information from being initialized immediately before a momentary or power outage occurs when power is restored.

In addition, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided as step S24 to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input. When a power outage warning signal has not been input (i.e., when it is determined by the judgment of step S24 that power to the pachinko machine 1 has not been cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of step S22), even if power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is progressing a game, power is supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, by electrolytic capacitor MC2, so that game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output judgment) relating to the progress of the game can be output. Because the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is able to complete the main control side power outage processing, which consists of steps S58 to S68, a backup process for storing various information including information indicating the value of a power counter (e.g., information indicating the value of a power counter), and an infinite loop, when restarted, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum calculation result of step S29 matches the checksum calculation result of the backup process (i.e., the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64). This means that the game information stored in the main control's internal RAM immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurs is not initialized. In other words, the main control board 1310 can be started up with the game information restored to the state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurred.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT, thereby allowing the main control side power outage processing to be started again without any updating of the contents of the main control's built-in RAM.On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, the main control side power outage processing can be reliably completed within the ``power supply assurance period during momentary power outage or power outage'' of approximately 7 ms, as before, determined by hardware. In other words, in this embodiment, if a momentary or power outage occurs while the main control side is performing power-on processing upon power restoration and the power from the island equipment in the gaming hall is cut off, and the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary power outage. Therefore, if the main control side power-off processing cannot be completed within the "momentary or power supply assurance period" of approximately 7 ms set by the hardware electrolytic capacitor MC2, then immediately after the wait time standby processing of step S22, step S24 determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is repeated, preventing game play from continuing.

This software prevents the game from progressing, preventing progression to steps after step S24 (specifically, the control flow in which interrupt initial settings are made in step S42, and then interrupt permission is set in step S52 to start the main control timer interrupt processing described below), thereby preventing the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the main prize ball number information output) from being updated). In this way, when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and the power is cut off from the island equipment in the gaming hall, the system is divided into two parts: one part is handled by software to prevent any changes to the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter used to determine the output of main prize ball information)) and the other part is handled by hardware to ensure that the main control side power outage processing is completed and any changes to the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter used to determine the output of main prize ball information)) are prevented reliably.

Next, we will explain how the reservation setting for the command to be sent when power is turned on is performed in step S50. As described above, in step S50, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command are created to notify that power has been turned on (restored), and these are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. This power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2412 and information indicating the drive state of the attacca solenoid 2414. Here, we will first explain the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command does not include information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2412 and information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2414; in other words, the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command in step S50 does not schedule the command to be sent when power is turned on.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a jackpot game status screen (e.g., a jackpot game performance screen) on the display area of the performance display device 1600, and the main control board 1310 is driving the attacca solenoid 2414 and the large prize opening 2005 is open by the opening/closing member, if a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the main control board 1310 will be restored to the game status immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, and will begin driving the attacca solenoid 2414, causing the large prize opening 2005 to transition from a state in which it is closed by the opening/closing member to a state in which it is open.

However, when a momentary or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Therefore, when a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored while the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot gaming state as the gaming state, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover by displaying a screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, but it cannot at all indicate which round in the jackpot gaming state it is. In other words, even if, for example, a gaming ball enters the large prize opening 2005 and is detected by the large prize opening sensor 2402, and the main control board 1310 sends a large prize opening 1 count display command to the peripheral control board 1510 indicating the number of gaming balls that have entered the large prize opening 2005, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the number of gaming balls that have entered the large prize opening 2005 on the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving status, but it cannot at all display which round in the jackpot gaming state (i.e. which round) it is.

In such a situation, for example, when the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state ends, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacca solenoid 2414 and sends a large prize opening 1 closed display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, instructing the large prize opening 2005 to transition from an open state to a closed state by the opening/closing member (i.e., the start of closing the large prize opening 2005 of the first attacca unit 2400 between rounds), and when the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, it starts driving the attacca solenoid 2414 and sends a large prize opening 5th open display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, instructing the large prize opening 2005 to transition from an open state to an open state by the opening/closing member (i.e., the start of opening the large prize opening 2005 for the fifth round). As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches from the screen corresponding to the probability and time-saving state described above to a screen indicating the start of five rounds of the jackpot game state, and displays it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a screen on the display area of the effect display device 1600 that informs the player that the game state has become favorable to the player, allowing game balls to be received into the second starting port 2004 (for example, a screen informing the player that the second starting port door 2411 is open), and the main control board 1310 drives the starting port solenoid 2412 to open the second starting port door 2411, allowing game ball B to be guided to the second starting port 2004, if a momentary power outage or power failure occurs and power is then restored, the main control board 1310 will be restored to the game state it was in immediately before the momentary power outage or power failure based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, and will begin driving the starting port solenoid 2412 to close the second starting port door 2411 and transition to a state in which the second starting port 2004 is closed.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 is designed to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 and recover when power is restored.Therefore, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and power is then restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state where a gaming ball can be received at the second starting port 2004, creating a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, if a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be able to return to normal by displaying a screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, but the peripheral control board 1510 will not be able to display at all in the display area of the performance display device 1600 a screen informing the player that the gaming state has become such that a gaming ball can be received at the second starting port 2004, creating a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. For this reason, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine may be surprised by the occurrence of a momentary or power outage and forget that when power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred was one in which game balls could be received into second starting port 2004. In such cases, even though the game state at the time of power restoration is restored to one in which game balls can be received into second starting port 2004, the screen instructing the game (i.e., the screen instructing the game to place a game ball into second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600 when power is restored, which causes the player to become confused about what game to play.

As such, in the two examples mentioned above, there was a problem in that the gaming state immediately before the momentary or blackout could not be quickly restored after power was restored. In other words, when a momentary or blackout occurs and power is subsequently restored, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine may mistakenly believe that the pachinko machine's system has frozen, or in other words, that it has malfunctioned.

In this embodiment, in order for the main control board 1310 to transmit a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and power is restored), in step S50, the power-on status command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted during the main control's timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

As a result, based on the power-on state command and power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the example described above, if a momentary or power outage occurs during the fourth round of the jackpot game state and power is then restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can communicate to the peripheral control board 1510 that the main control board 1310 will return to its original state by starting to drive the attacca solenoid 2414 and transitioning the jackpot opening 2005 from a closed state to an open state by the opening/closing member. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen specifying that it is the fourth round of the jackpot game state (i.e., a screen indicating which round it is), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but it can display a screen informing that it is a jackpot game state, that the attacca solenoid 2414 has started to be driven, and that the large prize opening 2005 has been opened by the opening/closing member (for example, a screen saying "It's a jackpot. The large prize opening is open. Please play so that the game ball enters the large prize opening."). A message (a screen for conveying a message to the player) can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to instruct the player seated in front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which a game ball is to be placed in the big winning port 2005 after power is restored. Also, for example, in the above example, in a state where a game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 and the game is in an advantageous state for the player, if an instantaneous power outage or a blackout occurs and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 starts driving the starting port solenoid 2412 as the return destination. The peripheral control board 1510 then displays a screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 informing the player that the second starting gate door 2411 has been opened and that it is now possible to guide game ball B into the second starting gate 2004 (for example, a screen that tells the player the message "The second starting gate door 2411 is open. Please play so that the game ball enters the second starting gate."), and can instruct the player seated in front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which the game ball will enter the second starting gate 2004 after power is restored.

This allows the main control board 1310 to give detailed instructions on where the peripheral control board 1510 should return to when power is restored after a momentary or power outage. Therefore, once power is restored, the game can be quickly restored to the state it was in immediately before the momentary or power outage. In other words, when a momentary or power outage occurs and power is restored, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine will see that the pachinko machine's system has frozen, preventing them from mistaking it for a malfunction.

Next, we will explain the calculation of the checksum in step S29 and the judgment in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since being manufactured for inspection during the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the main control board 1310 manufacturing line. When the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since being manufactured for inspection during the main control board inspection process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and the main control side power-off processing consisting of an infinite loop. Therefore, even if a checksum is calculated based on the contents of the main control internal RAM in step S29, the checksum values will never match when compared in step S30, and all areas of the main control internal RAM except for a specific area will necessarily be cleared in step S38.

As a result, when the reservation setting for the commands to be sent when the power is turned on is made in step S50, the power-on status command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. This results in only three commands being stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM: the power-on status command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command. These commands are then transmitted first in the main control timer interrupt processing described below: the power-on status command, followed by the power-on main control return destination command, followed by the power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command. Using this, during the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since being manufactured for inspection, the power-on status command is transmitted as the first command from the main control board 1310 to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

The power-on state command consists of information instructing the player to clear the RAM when the RAM clear switch is operated upon power-on (including not only power-on but also power restoration after a power outage or momentary power interruption), information instructing which state (probability and time-saving state) to return to upon power-on (including not only power-on but also power restoration after a power outage or momentary power interruption), among the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, we will explain the problems that arise when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

The model code of a pachinko machine can be used to identify which copyright of a work it refers to and what game specifications it has when creating the so-called max type, mid type, or sweet type of pachinko machine 1 (or more accurately, the main control board 1310) (for example, a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, or a game specification in which the number of times the special pattern changes is limited (for example, 30 or 70 times) and a probability change occurs (a so-called ST machine)).

On the production line of a manufacturer that produces pachinko machines 1, main control boards 1310 for multiple copyrights may be mixed when they are produced. This can lead to workers on the production line not knowing which of the multiple copyrights (for example, the copyrights for Movie A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F) the main control board 1310 is being sent down the line to manufacture for which of the multiple copyrights. Furthermore, even if the main control board 1310 is being sent down the line to manufacture a main control board 1310 for one of the multiple copyrights (for example, the copyright for Movie D), they may mistakenly believe that the main control board 1310 is being sent down the line to manufacture a main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright for Manga F).

For this reason, when main control boards 1310 for multiple different work copyrights are manufactured on the production line of a manufacturer that produces pachinko machines 1, if main control boards 1310 for multiple work copyrights are mixed together, workers on the production line will not be able to confirm which work copyright the main control board 1310 manufactured on the production line belongs to, and even for the same work copyright, they will not be able to confirm which model type (max type, mid type, sweet type) or what game specifications it has (a game specification in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, or an ST machine).

As a result, if main control boards 1310 for multiple different work copyrights are mixed when manufacturing main control boards 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that produces pachinko machines 1, the main control boards 1310 for multiple different work copyrights will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control boards 1310 to the game boards 5. As a result, workers on the game board assembly line may attach a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 for the work copyright. This results in a problem of reduced production efficiency of the game boards 5.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (this includes not only power-on but also power recovery after a power outage or momentary power outage), it sends a power-on status command containing information indicating the pachinko machine model code to the peripheral control board 1510. In order to do this, in step S50, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then sent during the main control's timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

As a result, during the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the production line, a worker on the production line of the manufacturer that produces pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310, and based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine contained in the power-on status command received by the inspection device from the main control board 1310, the inspection device derives the following information that constitutes the model code of the pachinko machine: a series code that identifies the model type (max type, middle type, or sweet type) as described above; a copyright code that identifies the copyright of the work; and game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs). By visually inspecting the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on a game specification code that identifies the game specification whereby a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of special symbol changes (such as an ST machine) in addition to the game specification whereby a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of special symbol changes, it is possible to determine which copyright of the work the main control board 1310 corresponds to, and even for the same copyright of the work, it is possible to determine which model type (max type, mid type, or sweet type) and what game specification (such as an ST machine or a game specification where when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs).

As a result, even if main control boards 1310 for multiple different game copyrights are mixed together when manufacturing main control boards 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that produces pachinko machines 1, workers in the main control board inspection process on the production line can visually check the inspection monitor to accurately determine the model type, game copyright, and game specifications of the main control board 1310, allowing them to be separated into game copyright-specific main control boards 1310 and sent to the subsequent game board assembly line. Workers on the game board assembly line can then reliably attach main control boards 1310 that correspond to game boards 5 for the game copyrights to the game boards 5, preventing a decline in game board 5 production efficiency caused by attaching main control boards 1310 that do not correspond to game boards 5 for the game copyrights to game boards 5. This can therefore contribute to improving game board 5 production efficiency.

[21-4. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in Figures 210 and 211.

When the main control side timer interrupt processing starts, the main control MPU 1310a switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 212 (step S100). The general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks: a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the second register bank is used in this routine, the main control side timer interrupt processing. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in this routine, the main control side timer interrupt processing, the register bank is switched from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing to the second register bank. Note that in this embodiment, when this routine, the main control side timer interrupt processing, starts, there is no need to save each register to a stack.

Following step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). This timer subtraction processing, for example, manages the time for which the first special symbol display device and second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric device control processing described below, the time for which the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the normal symbol variable display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric device control processing described below, as well as the ACK signal input determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether a payer ACK signal has been input, which indicates that the payout control board 633 has successfully received various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). Specifically, when the change time of the variable display pattern or normal symbol change display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the change time is subtracted by 4 ms, and when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the change time of the variable display pattern or normal symbol change display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes 0. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a reads, for example, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general prize opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second start opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the large prize opening sensor 2402, the detection signal from the out sensor 664, the detection signal from the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch, the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b, the signal from the setting key switch 1311a, the signal from the setting switch button, and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 which indicates that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the prize ball command sent in the prize ball control process described below, and stores this as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Additionally, when the detection signal from the first start gate sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start gate sensor 2401 are read, the corresponding start gate winning command classified as "other" is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. In other words, when a detection signal is received from the first start gate sensor 3002, the corresponding start gate winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM, and when a detection signal is received from the second start gate sensor 2401, the corresponding start gate winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

In this embodiment, when the switch input process begins, the input states of all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including those for which vacant terminal processing has been performed) are first read a first time, and then, after a predetermined time (e.g., 10 μs) has elapsed, they are read again a second time. The result of this second read is then compared with the result of the first read. A determination is made as to whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, then the result is read a third time, and the result of this third read is compared with the result of the second read. A determination is again made as to whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, then the result is read a fourth time, and the result of this fourth read is compared with the result of the third read. A determination is again made as to whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, then it is treated as if no game ball has entered the game, or the input is ignored.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the input status of all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including those that have been subjected to vacant terminal processing) is compared twice in two steps: the first to third double reading and the second to fourth double reading. This makes it possible to avoid false detections due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc. Therefore, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2403, etc. This can improve the reliability of the detection signal from 01, the detection signal from the large prize opening sensor 2402, the detection signal from the out sensor 664, the first ball sensor 703, and the second ball sensor 704, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch, the detection signal from the door frame open switch, the detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b, the signal from the setting key switch 1311a, the signal from the setting switch button, and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 which indicates that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the prize ball command sent in the prize ball control process described below.

Following step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs input terminal malfunction monitoring processing (step S105). This input terminal malfunction monitoring processing checks the status of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a that have been treated as vacant terminals based on the information acquired in the switch input processing of step S104. Specifically, for example, input terminal PA7 of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to ground (GND) as a vacant terminal, so its logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal malfunction monitoring processing, it checks whether the logic state of the input terminals of the various input ports that have been treated as vacant terminals is LOW based on the information acquired in the switch input processing of step S104. When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the logical state of the input terminal that has been subjected to the vacant terminal processing is not LOW, it stores a malfunction command classified as a notification display, which notifies the user that a malfunction has occurred in the peripheral circuitry of the main control MPU 1310a, as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU 1310a performs a win/loss random number update process (step S106). This win/loss random number update process updates the pattern random numbers described above. In addition to these random numbers, the MPU also updates the random numbers for determining the initial values for the jackpot pattern and the random numbers for determining the initial values for the small win pattern, which are updated in the non-win/loss random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 211. These random numbers for determining the initial values for the jackpot pattern and the random numbers for determining the initial values for the small win pattern are updated in the main control side main process and this main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby further increasing randomness. In contrast, since the pattern random numbers are random numbers related to win/loss determination (win determination), the respective counters count up only each time this win/loss random number update process is performed. In addition, the random numbers used to determine whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol and the random numbers used to determine the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol, as described above, are also updated by this winning/losing random number update process.

For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol is an initial value update type counter that is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from a minimum value to a maximum value, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. It counts up from the initial value determination random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol. Once the counter has finished counting up the range of the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol from its minimum value to its maximum value, the initial value determination random number for determining whether a win is a winning symbol is updated by this win/loss random number update process. The initial value determination random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol.

In this embodiment, the random numbers used to determine the initial values for the jackpot symbol and the random numbers used to determine the initial values for the small win symbol are updated by the non-win/lose random number update process in step S56 of the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing) shown in FIG. 211, and the win/lose random number update process in step S106 of the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine. However, if the processing time for this routine fluctuates each time the interrupt timer is generated and the main control side main processing is repeatedly executed within the time remaining until the next interrupt timer is generated, causing the number of times the non-win/lose random number update process in step S56 is executed to become random, the random numbers used to determine the initial values for the jackpot symbol and the random numbers used to determine the initial values for the small win symbol can be updated only in the non-win/lose random number update process in step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs a ball counting process (step S107). In this ball counting process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, the game balls that are discharged from the game board 5 in response to a detection signal from the out sensor 664 and flow through the out ball passage 663 (game balls that are shot into the game area 5a and accepted by a prize opening such as the general prize opening 2001, the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the big prize opening 2005, the special prize opening 2006, etc. and discharged from the game board 5, and game balls that are shot into the game area 5a and When the out sensor 664 detects a game ball that has been received into the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, or the second sub-out port 2022 and discharged from the game board 5 without being received into any winning port after being received into the winning port, a calculation is performed to add (increment) the value of the total recovered ball counter by 1, and a detection signal is input from the first ball sensor 703 to detect the game ball that has been received into the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, or the second sub-out port 2022. When the first ball sensor 703 detects a game ball that has been collected and is flowing through the first ball path 701, a calculation is performed to add (increment) a value of 1 to the value of the out ball counter, which counts the number of game balls that have been collected by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022, that is, the so-called out balls. A detection signal is input from the second ball sensor 704, and the game ball is shot into the game area 5a and is sent to the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, When the second ball sensor 704 detects a game ball that has been accepted into a prize opening such as the second starting opening 2004, the large prize opening 2005, or the special prize opening 2006 and is circulating through the second ball path 702, an operation is performed to add (increment) the value of a safe ball counter, which counts the number of game balls, so-called safe balls, that have been accepted into prize openings such as the general prize opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the large prize opening 2005, or the special prize opening 2006. In other words, in the ball counting process, the out sensor 664 detects both game balls received in the winning ports such as the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, and the special winning port 2006, as well as game balls received in the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022; the first ball sensor 703 detects game balls collected by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022; and the second ball sensor 704 detects game balls received in the winning ports such as the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, and the special winning port 2006.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a stores the value of the total recovered ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the total number of game balls received in the winning ports such as the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the large winning port 2005, the special winning port 2006, etc., and the game balls received in the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022 in a dedicated area for counting total recovered balls in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and stores the value of the out ball counter in an out The total number of out balls collected by the main prize opening 1008, first sub-out opening 2021, and second sub-out opening 2022 is stored in an area dedicated to counting out balls in a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM, and the value of the safe ball counter is stored in an area dedicated to counting safe balls in a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM as the total number of safe balls accepted by prize openings such as the general prize opening 2001, first start opening 2002, second start opening 2004, large prize opening 2005, and special prize opening 2006. The ratio of the number of payouts (total number of prize balls paid out) to the value of the total collected ball counter, i.e., the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of prize balls paid out) to the total number of game balls inserted, is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in a base calculation area in a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM. The output of a lighting signal to be displayed on the special monitor is also set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Furthermore, when the value of the total recovered ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, whenever the total number of game balls recovered at the winning ports such as the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the large winning port 2005, and the special winning port 2006, as well as the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022, reaches 10 balls, the main control MPU 1310a creates a ball recovery command to notify this fact and stores it in the output information storage area as transmission information. Note that when the calculation results, that is, the recovered ball counter value, the out ball counter value, and the safe ball counter value, each reach their maximum value (65,535 in this embodiment) and the main control MPU 1310a further adds (increments) the recovered ball counter value, the out ball counter value, and the safe ball counter value by 1, the recovered ball counter value, the out ball counter value, and the safe ball counter value overflow to 0, and the calculation is performed to add from this value 0.

Following step S107, the main control MPU 1310a performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above and a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on this input information, and a self-check command is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. The created prize ball command and self-check command are then sent to the payout control board 633 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 2005, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 prize balls; and since the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify this, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 633. If a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has successfully received this prize ball command is not input within a specified time, a self-check command is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and sent to the payout control board 633.

In addition, in the prize ball control process of step S108, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, if the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, a main prize ball number information output command classified as "other" is created to communicate this fact, and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of this counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information is calculated by reading input information from the input information storage area described above, and counting the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on this input information, that is, based on the game balls that have entered the various prize openings (hereinafter referred to as "various prize openings provided on the game board 5") such as the general prize opening 2001, the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the large prize opening 2005, and the special prize opening 2006 provided on the game board 5, and is stored and updated in the prize ball planned information storage area of the main control built-in RAM during the prize ball control process in step S108. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM is read, and input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and added to this read value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter by the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on this input information. If the value indicating this added number of balls exceeds 10 (in other words, if the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to notify this fact and stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. The value indicating the exceeded number of balls is then stored and updated as the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs a slot command reception process (step S110). The dispensing control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified as status indications (e.g., slot status 1 command, error clearance navigation command, and slot status 2 command). During the slot command reception process, when various commands are successfully received as payer serial data, information informing the payer control board 633 of this fact is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. The main control MPU 1310a also formats the commands successfully received as payer serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (various commands classified as status indications (slot status 1 command, error clearance navigation command, and slot status 2 command)) and stores them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S110, the main control MPU 1310a performs a fraud detection process (step S112). During this fraud detection process, it checks for any abnormalities related to the winning balls. If it determines that fraud involving radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation cheating") is occurring, it increments the value of the radio wave irradiation cheating counter by one. The value of this radio wave cheating counter is incremented each time the fraud detection process determines that a radio wave irradiation cheating has occurred. When the RAM is cleared, the initial value is set to 0 (zero). When the value of the radio wave irradiation cheating counter reaches its upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to 250 based on the 4 ms interrupt period during which the fraud detection process performs the main control timer interrupt process), it creates a radio wave irradiation cheating notification command classified as a notification display indicating that a radio wave irradiation cheating has occurred, and stores this command as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, input information is read from the input information storage area described above. When a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, it is determined that fraud using a magnet (hereinafter referred to as "magnet goto") is occurring, and the value of the magnet goto counter is incremented by one. This magnet goto counter value is incremented each time a radio wave irradiation goto is determined to have occurred in the fraud detection process. It is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, it is set to a value of 0 (zero) as its initial value. When the magnet goto counter value reaches its upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to 250 based on the 4 ms interrupt period during which the fraud detection process performs the main control timer interrupt process), a magnet goto notification command is created that is classified as a notification display indicating that a radio wave irradiation goto is occurring, and this command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In this embodiment, this mechanism reliably detects and notifies the user of magnet gouges, helping game parlor staff and other attendants to discover magnet gouges at an early stage.

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when an abnormal entry into the large prize entry port occurs, such as when a detection signal is input from the large prize entry port sensor 2402 when the game is not in a jackpot game state (when a game ball enters the large prize entry port 2005), an abnormal entry display command is created that is classified as an alert display as an abnormal condition, and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information, or the value of the safe ball counter stored in the safe ball counting dedicated area is counted as a general entry. If the total number of game balls detected by the opening sensor 3001, first start opening sensor 3002, second start opening sensor 2401, large prize opening sensor 2402, and special prize opening sensor 2601 differs from the total number of game balls actually received in the winning openings such as the general prize opening 2001, first start opening 2002, second start opening 2004, large prize opening 2005, and special prize opening 2006, an abnormal winning display command classified as an alarm display is created as an abnormal condition, and is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In the fraud detection process of step S112, if radio wave irradiation and/or magnet strikes are detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value of 1 to indicate that fraud has been detected. However, if radio wave irradiation and magnet strikes are not detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value of 0 to indicate that no fraud has been detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when RAM is cleared, the initial value is set to 0 (zero). Furthermore, if an abnormal win at the large prize slot is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG may also be set to a value of 1 to indicate that fraud has been detected.

Following step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs a launch permission signal setting process (step S113). In this launch permission signal setting process, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to inform the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of game ball B is permitted. Specifically, based on the value of the aforementioned fraudulent activity detection flag FD-FLG, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the fraudulent activity detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value of 0, i.e., that no fraudulent activity has been detected, the main control MPU 1310a sets the logic of the launch permission signal to a launch permission logic and stores this as output information in the aforementioned output information storage area. On the other hand, when the fraudulent activity detection flag FD-FLG is not set to a value of 0 (i.e., a value of 1), i.e., that fraudulent activity has been detected, the main control MPU 1310a sets the logic of the launch permission signal to a launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the launch permission logic, and stores this as output information in the aforementioned output information storage area. The main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the input information storage area and, based on this input information, if a detection signal is input from the door frame opening switch and the door frame opening switch detects that the door frame 3 is open relative to the main frame 4, or if a detection signal is input from the main frame opening switch 4b and the main frame opening switch 4b detects that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, sets the logic of the fire permission signal to a fire stop logic (fire non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the fire permission logic, and stores this as output information in the output information storage area. The logic of the fire permission signal is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that it is set to the fire stop logic (fire non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the fire permission logic as the initial value (default) from the time the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (or restored) until the fire permission signal setting process of step S113 in the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started.

Following step S113, the main control MPU 1310a performs special symbol and special electric feature control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric feature control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit when the latch signal is input is obtained from the built-in hardware random number latch register in the main control MPU 1310a, and this obtained random number value is set as the special random number. It then determines whether the special random number (i.e., the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot determination value pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM (determines whether a jackpot gaming state will occur (called a "special lottery")), or it retrieves the value of the counter that updates the pattern random number and determines whether it matches one of the win type determination values pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM according to the jackpot type or small win type (determines the win type).

If these judgment results (lottery results) are determined by the first start opening sensor 3002, various commands related to the special symbol 1 synchronization effect are created, while if the judgment result (lottery results) are determined by the second start opening sensor 2401, various commands related to the special symbol 2 synchronization effect are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information memory area. In addition, the special symbol variable display pattern is determined based on the random number for the variable display pattern described above, and the output of a lighting signal to the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is set to light up the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 in accordance with the determined special symbol variable display pattern, and this is stored as output information in the output information memory area described above. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a jackpot game state is reached, various commands classified as jackpot-related (jackpot opening command, command to display Nth time that large prize entrance 1 is opened, command to display closure of large prize entrance 1, command to display count of large prize entrance 1, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or, for example, the output of a drive signal to the attacca solenoid 2414 to open and close the opening and closing member is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or, when the number of times (rounds) that the large prize entrance 2005 changes from a closed state to an open state is two, At one time, the function display unit 1400 sets the output of a lighting signal to the 2-round indicator lamp to light up the 2-round indicator lamp, and stores this as output information in the output information storage area; when there are 15 rounds, the function display unit 1400 sets the output of a lighting signal to the 15-round indicator lamp to light up the 15-round indicator lamp, and stores this as output information in the output information storage area; or the function display unit 1400 sets the output of a lighting signal to the status indicator to light up a specified color to indicate whether or not a time reduction has occurred, and stores this as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs normal symbol and normal electric device control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric device control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and normal prize slot winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this normal prize slot winning processing, it is determined from the input information whether a detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on the result of this determination, if a detection signal has been input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter that updates the random number used to determine whether the normal symbol has been won described above is extracted and stored as normal prize slot winning information in the normal prize slot winning information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

This regular prize slot winning information storage area has four sections, Sections 0 through 3, with regular prize slot winning information stored in Section 0, Section 1, Section 2, and Section 3 in that order. For example, if regular prize slot winning information is stored in Sections 0 through 2 of the regular prize slot winning information storage area, when a detection signal from gate sensor 2801 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the regular prize slot winning information is stored in Section 3 of the regular prize slot winning information storage area.

Regular prize slot winning information stored in Section 0 of the regular prize slot winning information memory is set in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM. When this regular prize slot winning information is set, the regular prize slot winning information in Section 1 of the regular prize slot winning information memory is shifted to Section 0 of the regular prize slot winning information memory, the regular prize slot winning information in Section 2 of the regular prize slot winning information memory is shifted to Section 1 of the regular prize slot winning information memory, and the regular prize slot winning information in Section 3 of the regular prize slot winning information memory is shifted to Section 2 of the regular prize slot winning information memory, and Section 3 of the regular prize slot winning information memory becomes empty. For example, if regular prize winning information is stored in the first and second sections of the regular prize winning information storage, the regular prize winning information in the first section of the regular prize winning information storage is shifted to the zeroth section of the regular prize winning information storage, and the regular prize winning information in the second section of the regular prize winning information storage is shifted to the first section of the regular prize winning information storage, leaving the second section of the regular prize winning information storage and the third section of the regular prize winning information storage empty. If regular prize winning information is stored in the first, second, and third sections of the regular prize winning information storage, the output of the lighting signal for the regular reserve indicator of the functional display unit 1400 is set based on the regular prize winning information described above, so that the total number of stored regular prize winning information is treated as reserved balls and the regular reserve indicator of the functional display unit 1400 is illuminated, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Following the normal prize slot winning process, the normal prize slot winning information set in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for determining whether a normal symbol has been won is extracted from this read normal prize slot winning information and a determination is made as to whether it matches the normal symbol winning determination value pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM (referred to as the "normal lottery"). The result of this determination (the result of the normal lottery) determines whether or not to open or close the second starting gate door 2411. If this decision is made to open or close the second starting gate door 2411, the second starting gate door 2411 will be opened, creating a game state in which game balls can be received into the second starting gate 2004, providing an advantageous game state for the player. The normal symbol variable display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the normal symbol variable display pattern random number described above, and various commands related to normal symbol synchronization performance are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In addition, a lighting signal is output to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 so that the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 lights up according to the determined normal symbol variable display pattern, and this is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

Furthermore, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol has been hit matches the normal symbol hit determination value pre-stored in the ROM built into the main control, various commands related to the normal electric role presentation are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information memory area, and a drive signal is set to be output to the start port solenoid 2412 to open and close the second start port door 2411, and this is stored as output information in the output information memory area mentioned above. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol has been hit does not match the normal symbol hit determination value pre-stored in the ROM built into the main control, a normal symbol change display pattern is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol change display pattern mentioned above, and various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization presentation are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information memory area mentioned above. In addition, a lighting signal is set to be output to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 so as to light up the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 in accordance with the determined normal symbol change display pattern, and this is stored as output information in the output information memory area mentioned above. In this example, the probability of winning the regular lottery (the probability of winning normally) is 1 in 50.

Following step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above and output various signals based on this output information from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a. For example, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 633 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information when various commands from the payout control board 633 have been successfully received; when a jackpot game is in progress, it outputs a drive signal to the attacca solenoid 2414 which opens and closes the opening and closing member of the large prize opening 2005; and when a jackpot game is in progress, it outputs a drive signal to the start opening solenoid 2412 which opens and closes the second start opening door 2411 to open and close the second start opening 2004. In addition, it also outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a small jackpot information output signal, ...2-round jackpot information output signal, a 15-round jack It outputs various game-related information (game information) signals to the payout control board 633, such as a winning information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time-saving information output signal, and a starting hole winning information output signal, and outputs a launch permission signal set to launch permission logic or launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) to the payout control board 633, outputs a display signal to a special monitor that displays the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of prize balls paid out) to the total number of game balls inserted, and outputs a lighting signal to display the setting value stored in a dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g.

Following step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified as related to special prize 1 synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to special prize 2 synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to big wins (for example, a large prize entrance 1 count display command equivalent to a large prize entrance count command based on a detection signal from the large prize entrance sensor 2402 when a game ball entering the large prize entrance 2005 is detected), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal prize synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to normal electric role effects, various commands classified as notification displays, various commands classified as status displays, various commands classified as test-related, and various other commands (for example, a message indicating that the main control board 1310 will pay out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various prize entrances provided on the game board 5 every time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, The main control serial data includes a main prize ball number output command that instructs the hall computer to transmit a main prize ball number information output signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 as main prize ball number information, and various commands classified as specific histories (for example, a ball collection command that notifies the user whenever the number of game balls collected at the winning ports such as the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the large winning port 2005, and the special winning port 2006, the outlet port 1008, the first sub-outlet 2021, and the second sub-outlet 2022 reaches 10 balls, a setting change command that notifies the user that a setting value has been changed, an error display command that notifies the user that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable), and a setting key ON operation command that notifies the user to check the setting value stored in a setting value-dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, which will be described later). Each packet of main serial data consists of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main serial data consists of a status indicating the type of command with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating the variation of the effect with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values; this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the following order: status, mode, and sum value. As mentioned above, in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main serial transmission port built into the main control MPU 1310a is capable of at least transferring the command set in its transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register via the serial management unit and completing transmission from the transmission shift register as main serial data. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption occurs after power is turned on, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent when power is turned on in step S50 of the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 211, in order to inform that power has been restored, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information memory area of the main control built-in RAM, and as main serial data, the power-on status command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main control return destination command, and then the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. In addition, when setting the working area of the main control's built-in RAM in step S34 of the main control's power-on processing, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this information may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. In such cases, after various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information have been sent, a power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command are sent.

When the number of game balls collected at the general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, large winning opening 2005, special winning opening 2006, etc., or at the out opening 1008, first sub-out opening 2021, and second sub-out opening 2022 reaches 10 balls, a ball collection command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the fact. The CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 then sends a ball collection command to the general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, large winning opening 2005, special winning opening 2006, etc., for each ball collection command received. The number of game balls collected at the winning openings such as general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, large winning opening 2005, special winning opening 2006, etc., and at the outlet 1008, first sub-outlet 2021 and second sub-outlet 2022 is counted, and the ball collection information (information correlating the counted value (i.e., the total number of game balls collected at the winning openings such as general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, large winning opening 2005, special winning opening 2006, etc., and at the outlet 1008, first sub-outlet 2021 and second sub-outlet 2022) with the date and time of the update) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) is updated. If the pachinko machine 1 is powered off when the business hours of the game hall are closed without receiving the ball collection command, the ball collection information, which associates the last counted value (i.e., the total number of game balls collected at the winning ports such as the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the large winning port 2005, the special winning port 2006, the outlet port 1008, the first sub-outlet port 2021, and the second sub-outlet port 2022) with the updated date and time, is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on when the game hall opens for business, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 creates ball collection information again from the day the business started, using the ball collection information stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the ball collection information is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) as ball collection history information. The counted value stored and held as ball recovery information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) may be the value counted from 0 (zero) on that day, or it may be both the value counted from 0 (zero) on that day and the sum of the values counted up to that point.

Following step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control's built-in WDT (step S122) and ends this routine. The main control's built-in WDT in step S122 is cleared by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the timekeeping by the main control's built-in WDT. Then, by restarting the timekeeping by the main control's built-in WDT, the main control MPU 1310a is not forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT.

As described above, the main control board 1310 can execute and complete the above-mentioned backup process for storing game information as the game progresses while the game is in progress, before power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and when power is restored, based on the game information for which the backup process was executed, the main control board 1310 can output a power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, which instructs the drive state of the starting port solenoid 2412 and the attacca solenoid 2414, which are the electrical drive sources, via the port output process of step S118 in this routine when power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, as the destination to which the game progress will be returned by the main control board 1310. In other words, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 211, the main control board 1310 creates a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command based on the power-on information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same processing shown in FIG. 210, and stores these as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. This is stored in the transmission information storage area, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the main serial data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on status command, followed by the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main control return destination command, which are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in that order, and then the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in that order.

For this reason, based on the main control return destination command from the main control board 1310 at power-on, the peripheral control board 1510 can display in the display area of the effect display device 1600 the destination to which the main control board 1310 will return game progress when power is restored. As a result, when a momentary or power outage occurs while a player is playing and power is subsequently restored, the game can be quickly restored to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage, and the destination to which the main control board 1310 will return game progress can be notified by displaying in the display area of the effect display device 1600, thereby preventing the pachinko machine 1 system from appearing frozen to the player and being mistaken for a malfunction. Therefore, by quickly restoring the game to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage after power is restored, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a malfunction.

Furthermore, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process on the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after production for inspection, as described above, step S38 in the main control side power-on processing shown in Fig. 210 always clears all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for specific areas. As a result, when the reservation setting for commands to be sent at power-on is made in step S50 of the same processing shown in Fig. 211, a power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. By doing so, only the power-on status command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are cleared as transmission information in the main control's built-in RAM. The data is stored in the transmission information memory area of M, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the main serial data is transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on status command, followed by the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main control return destination command, followed by the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process is configured to display detailed model information on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process based on the information indicating the pachinko machine's model code contained in the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310. This information includes the series code that identifies the model type (max type, mid type, or sweet type) described above, the copyright code that identifies the copyright of the work, and the game specification code that identifies the game specifications (for example, a game specification in which, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, and in which the probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times for special symbols to fluctuate (ST machine)).

[21-5. Setting change processing]
Next, the setting change process will be described. This setting change process is performed in step S37 of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG.

When the setting change process begins, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the current setting values, as shown in FIG. 213 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the setting values stored in a dedicated area for setting values in a specific area of the main control internal RAM. When acquiring these setting values, they may be read or extracted; however, when extracting the setting values, the extracted setting values are set in a specified area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is calculated by treating the various information stored in the main control's built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating their sum. This is the same process as the checksum calculation performed in step S29 of the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 210.

Following step S202, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored during the main control side power-off processing (when power is off) in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 211 (step S204). If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S204 that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S206). The determinations in steps S204 and S206 are the same as the determinations in steps S30 and S32, respectively, in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 210. As mentioned above, the backup flag BK-FLG is a flag that indicates whether game backup information such as various information, checksum values (sum values), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG has been stored in the main control's built-in RAM during the main control's power-off processing described below. It is set to a value of 1 when the main control's power-off processing has been completed successfully, and to a value of 0 when the main control's power-off processing has not been completed successfully.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S204 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S206 that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), i.e., that the main control side power-off processing has not completed normally, it determines whether the setting value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). Here, the "normal range" refers to the value to which the setting value can be changed, and in this embodiment, it is preset to values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. If the flowchart proceeds to the determination in step S208, it means that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control's internal RAM, or that the main control side power-off processing has not completed normally at the time of power interruption. Therefore, the contents stored in the main control's internal RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). Therefore, in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM acquired in step S200 is within the normal range of setting values 1 to 6, and if it determines that it is within the normal range, it uses that setting value as is.

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S208 that the set value is not within the normal range, it sets the set value acquired in step S200 to the default set value of 1 (step S210). Note that in step S208, it determines whether the set value acquired in step S200 and stored in the set value-dedicated area in a specific area of the main control internal RAM is within the normal range of set values 1 to 6. However, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S204 that the checksum values do not match, or if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S206 that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), i.e., that the main control side power-off processing has not ended normally, it may proceed to step S210 and set the set value acquired in step S200 to the default set value of 1.

In step S206, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is equal to 1, i.e., that the main control side power-off processing has been completed normally, or in step S208, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the value is within the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to light up the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g, thereby displaying the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214).

Following step S214, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting switching button has been operated (step S216). This determination is made by reading the detection signal from the setting switching button and determining whether a detection signal has been input from the setting switching button. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button has been operated when a detection signal has been input from the setting switching button, and determines that the setting switching button has not been operated when a detection signal has not been input from the setting switching button.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S216 that the setting switch button has been operated, it performs a calculation to add (increment) the setting value by 1, updating it (step S218). At this time, if the setting value stored in a dedicated area for setting values in a specific area of the main control internal RAM was retrieved and set in a predetermined area when the setting value was obtained in step S200, the setting value set in this predetermined area will be added (incremented) by 1.

Following step S218, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting display 1310g, thereby displaying the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S220).

Following step S220, or in the determination of step S216, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switch button has not been operated, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the enter key has been operated (step S222). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting key has been inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder has been rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key switch 1311a ON (i.e., the setting key switch 1311a has been rotated counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF)). By rotating the key 60 degrees clockwise to turn it off, and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it on a second time, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on as the enter key, and this is done based on the enter key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a; when the enter key ON signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the enter key has been operated, but when the enter key ON signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the enter key has not been operated.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S222 that the Enter key has not been operated, it returns to the determination in step S216 and determines whether the setting switch button has been operated. If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S216 that the setting switch button has been operated, it performs the processing of steps S218 and S220 again and makes the determination in step S222. If it determines that the Enter key has not been operated, it returns to the determination in step S216. Each time the setting switch button is operated until the Enter key is operated, the setting value is incremented by one and updated, and displayed on the setting display 1310g. If the setting switch button is not operated, the setting value updated when the setting switch button was operated immediately before is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Furthermore, even if a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and is then restored before step S222 determines that the Enter key has been operated, the setting value updated immediately before the power outage or momentary power outage is not stored in the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and is therefore discarded, and the setting value stored in the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM remains unchanged.

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S222 that the Enter key has been operated, it stores the updated setting value in a dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control internal RAM (step S224). At this time, if the setting value stored in the dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control internal RAM was retrieved and set in a specified area when the setting value was acquired in step S200, the setting value set in this specified area will be updated, and this updated setting value will be returned to the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM. Even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and power is restored after the processing of step S224 is completed, the updated setting value when the Enter key was operated before the power outage or momentary interruption occurred will be stored in the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM.

Following step S224, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting key has been turned OFF (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key has been turned OFF when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the enter key ON to its initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This OFF operation turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key has been turned OFF when an OFF signal is received from the setting key switch 1311a, but determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF when an OFF signal is not received from the setting key switch 1311a.

If, in the judgment of step S226, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF, it returns to the judgment of step S226 and repeats the judgment of step S226 until the setting key is turned OFF.

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S226 that the setting key has been turned OFF, it stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g, thereby preventing the updated setting value from being displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU 1310a stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

Following step S230, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to 0 (step S232). As described above, this setting change permission flag CS-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to permit changes to the current setting value (the value among setting values 1 to 6 set at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned ON) stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control internal RAM. It is set to 1 when permitting changes to the setting value, and to 0 when not permitting changes to the setting value. In step S232, setting the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to 0 prohibits future changes to the setting value.

Following step S232, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The "normal range" is the same as that determined in step S208, and as described above, in this embodiment, it is pre-set to values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. In the determination of step S233, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting value stored in the setting value-dedicated area in a specific area of the main control internal RAM in step S224 is within the normal range of setting values 1 to 6, in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is an abnormal value. If it is determined to be within the normal range, the setting value is used as is.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S233 that the value is within the normal range, it performs serial communication initialization (step S234), then creates a setting change command and sets the transmission information (step S236), and then performs peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in which the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as main-circuit serial data (step S238), thereby terminating this routine. The serial communication initialization in step S234 is the same processing as the serial communication initialization in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 211, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 212. Here, the serial communication initialization in step S234 precedes the serial communication initialization in step S44. In the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 is transmitted as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510. This is because the setting change command notifies the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed, taking priority over the reservation of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 211. The setting change command is a command that notifies the peripheral control board 1510 of the changed setting value and completion of setting value storage. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the setting value history information (information associating setting values with date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S233 that the value is outside the normal range, it performs error display processing (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. This infinite loop causes the state after the error display processing has ended to be maintained, making it impossible to continue playing the game, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 must be turned off and then on again. This error display processing, which will be explained in detail later, determines that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control's internal RAM, or that the main control's power-off processing did not end normally when the power was turned off, and displays an error message to that effect, stating that there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control's internal RAM (or that the contents are unreliable). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error message.

In the example above, the setting change process was shown to set one of multiple setting values, setting value 1 to setting value 6, but it is not limited to setting one of multiple setting values. It is also possible to have only one setting value and execute the process to set this one setting value during the setting change process, or to have multiple setting values but execute the process to set only one predetermined setting value during the setting change process (it is possible to set only to one predetermined setting value and not to set to any other setting value). In this case, the setting value is not changed during the setting change process, and is set to the same setting value before and after the setting change process.

[21-6. Setting value confirmation display process]
Next, the setting value confirmation display process will be described. This setting value confirmation display process is performed in step S28 of the main control side power-on process shown in Figures 210 and 211.

When the setting value confirmation display process is initiated, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 214 (step S350). This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the setting value stored in a dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, and to a value of 0 when the setting value is not being displayed for confirmation. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays, for example, "Power being restored" on a black background on the performance display device 1600 as the startup mode. When the setting value confirmation display process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sends a setting value confirmation display start command to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data, informing the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value confirmation display will begin.When the setting value confirmation display process is ended, a setting value confirmation display end command is sent as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510.This allows "Power being restored" to be displayed followed by "Checking settings," or "Checking settings" to be displayed instead of "Power being restored."

In the judgment of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to a value of 0, i.e., when the setting value is not being displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the main frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON (step S352). In this judgment, the main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, it checks whether the main frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON by detecting a detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and whether the setting key has been inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder has been rotated 60 degrees clockwise from its initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a) to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a ON, and the setting key switch 1311a ON. Based on the setting key ON signal from switch 11a, it is determined that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, and based on the setting key ON signal, it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned ON, thereby determining that the predetermined setting value display permission conditions are met. However, based on the detection signal from main frame open switch 4b, it is determined that the main frame 4 is not open relative to the outer frame 2, and/or based on the setting key ON signal, it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a has not been turned ON, thereby determining that the predetermined setting value display permission conditions are not met.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S352 that the predetermined conditions for permitting display of setting values are not met, it simply terminates this routine. However, if it determines that the predetermined conditions for permitting display of setting values are met, it sets the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG to a value of 1 to display the setting values for confirmation (step S354), and then acquires the current setting values (step S356). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the setting values stored in a dedicated area for setting values in a specific area of the main control internal RAM.

Following step S356, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The "normal range" is the same as the determination in step S208 and step S233 in the setting change processing of FIG. 213, and as described above, in this embodiment, it is pre-set to values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. In the determination in step S357, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting value acquired in step S356 (i.e., the setting value stored in the setting value-dedicated area in a specific area of the main control internal RAM) is within the normal range of values 1 to 6, in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is an abnormal value. If it is determined to be within the normal range, that setting value is used as is.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S357 that the setting value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range, it outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU 1310a creates a setting key ON operation command and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM, sets the setting key ON operation command (step S360), and terminates this routine. This setting key ON operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 212. The setting key ON operation command is a command that indicates that this routine, the setting value confirmation display processing, has begun (i.e., that the setting values stored in the setting value-dedicated area in a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM should be confirmed).

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a setting key ON operation command, it updates the setting key ON operation history information (information associating the fact that the setting value was confirmed with the date and time) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

Furthermore, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a setting key ON operation command, a predetermined specific history information display permission condition is met, which allows the display of specific history information such as the ball collection history information, setting value history information, error display history information, and setting key ON operation history information, as described above. When this predetermined specific history information display permission condition is met, the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display area of the performance display device 1600 to switch from the image that was previously displayed to a specific history information display image that selectively displays the specific history information, by rotating the touch operation unit 302 and pressing the pressing operation unit 303 by the person checking the specific history information.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not set to value 0 (is set to value 1), that is, when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting key has been turned OFF (step S362). To make this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the input information storage area described above and, based on this input information, determines whether the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the enter key ON to its initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a OFF. This is done based on an OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and if an OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it determines that the setting key has been turned OFF, but if an OFF signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S362 that the setting key has not been pressed OFF, it terminates the routine. However, if it determines that the setting key has been pressed OFF, it sets the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG to 0 (step S364), indicating that the setting value will not be displayed for confirmation (step S366). It then stops outputting the illumination signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g, thereby hiding the acquired setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S366). It then creates a setting key OFF command and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's internal RAM, setting the setting key OFF command (step S368), and terminates the routine. This setting key OFF command is transmitted during the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 of the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 212. The setting key OFF command is a command that indicates that this routine, the setting value confirmation and display process, has ended (i.e., that the setting values stored in the dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control internal RAM have been confirmed).

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key OFF operation command, the aforementioned predetermined specific history information display permission condition is no longer met. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 was controlling the display of the aforementioned specific history information display image in the display area of the performance display device 1600, it will control the display to switch back to the image that was displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 immediately before switching to the specific history information display image, thereby returning to the original image.

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S357 that the value is not within the normal range, it disables the interrupt (step S370). This setting stops the main control timer interrupt process shown in Figure 212, which is repeated every 4 ms.

Following step S370, the main control MPU 1310a performs error display processing (step S372) and then enters an infinite loop in which it continues clearing the main control's built-in WDT (step S374). This infinite loop causes the main control's built-in WDT to be continuously cleared. Because the main control's built-in WDT cannot be stopped once activated, continuing to clear the main control's built-in WDT clears the timer count by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a, and restarts the timer count by the main control's built-in WDT. This prevents the main control MPU 1310a from being forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT. Furthermore, this infinite loop maintains the state in which the error display processing has ended, making it impossible to play the game. Consequently, the power to the pachinko machine 1 must be shut off and then turned back on. This error display process, which will be explained in detail later, determines that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or that the main control power-off processing did not end normally when the power was shut off, and displays an error message indicating that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are unreliable). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error message.

In addition, as described above, if the device is configured to have only one setting value and to execute the setting change process to set this one setting value, or if the device has multiple setting values but executes the setting change process to set only one predetermined setting value (it is possible to set only to one predetermined setting value and not to set to other setting values), then only the one setting value that has been set may be displayed when the setting value confirmation display process is executed.

[21-7. Error display processing]
Next, the error display process will be described. This error display process is performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in Fig. 210, in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in Fig. 210 (in step S240 in the setting change process shown in Fig. 213), and in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in Fig. 214.

When the error display process is initiated, the main control MPU 1310a stops the launch permission signal (step S400), as shown in FIG. 215. As described above, the launch permission signal conveys permission to launch the game ball B to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633. When this logic is set to launch permission logic, it can convey that launch is permitted, while when this logic is set to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is the inverse of the launch permission logic, it can convey that launch is stopped (not permitted).

When this error display processing routine is initiated as one of the processes performed in step S33 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 210 or step S37 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 210 (specifically, step S240 of the setting change processing shown in FIG. 213), the main control MPU 1310a is unable to perform the interrupt permission setting in step S52 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 211, and therefore is unable to perform the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 212, and is unable to perform the launch permission signal setting processing in step S113 of the same processing. The launch permission signal is output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit with reset function to the launch control unit 633b of the dispensing control board 633. Therefore, when power is restored, the main control output circuit with reset function is reset, and its logic becomes launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is the inverse of the launch permission logic.

Therefore, when this routine, the error display processing, is started as one of the processes performed in step S33 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 210 or step S37 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 210 (specifically, the process performed in step S240 of the setting change processing shown in FIG. 213), the main control MPU 1310a sets the logic of the launch permission signal to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in step S400 to reliably prevent game ball B from being launched even after power is restored and this routine, the error display processing, is started, and outputs it from the output terminal of its specified output port to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with reset function.

When this error display processing routine is started as the processing performed in step S372 of the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 214, the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S357 of the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 214 that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control internal RAM. Although the main control MPU 1310a has already performed the interrupt permission setting in step S52 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 211, the interrupt non-permission setting was already performed in step S370 of the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 214 before this error display processing routine was started. Therefore, when this error display processing routine is terminated, as described above, an infinite loop occurs, and the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 212 cannot be performed, and the launch permission signal setting processing in step S113 of the same processing cannot be performed.

Therefore, when this routine, the error display processing, is started as processing performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 214, the main control MPU 1310a, in step S400, sets the logic of the launch permission signal to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) to reliably prevent game ball B from being launched when there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, and outputs it from the output terminal of its specified output port to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with reset function.

Following step S400, a lighting signal is output to the setting display 1310g to display the letter E as an error message on the setting display 1310g, thereby displaying an error message on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU 1310a displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In step S404, a lighting signal is output to the function display unit 1400 to light up all of the various indicators on the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

Following step S404, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initial settings (step S406), then creates an error display command and sets the transmission information (step S408), and then performs peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing to transmit the transmission information (error display command) set in step S406 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data (step S410), and then ends this routine.

The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change processing shown in Figure 213 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 211, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410 is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 in the setting change processing shown in Figure 213 and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 212. This routine, the error display processing, starts and ends as the processing performed in step S33 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 210, the processing performed in step S37 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 210 (the processing performed in step S240 of the setting change processing shown in FIG. 213), and the processing performed in step S372 of the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 214, and as described above, enters an infinite loop, which causes the state after the error display processing has ended to be maintained, making it impossible to progress in the game.

Therefore, in this embodiment, serial communication initialization is performed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410.

The error display command is a command that notifies the user that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are unreliable). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, it updates the error display history information (information that associates the error display command with the date and time it was received) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

Furthermore, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives an error display command, it controls the display of a message image in white text on a blue background in the display area of the performance display device 1600, reading "A RAM error has occurred. Please call an attendant.", and controls the announcement "A RAM error has occurred. Please call an attendant" to be forcibly set to maximum volume and played from various speakers (top center speaker, top side speakers, main frame speaker of main frame 4, etc.) regardless of the volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch on the peripheral control board 1510. The process of issuing a RAM error notification via an error display command has the highest priority, and if the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives an error display command after receiving a command to notify of another error, it will issue a RAM error notification as the highest priority.

[22. Various control processes of the dispensing control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the dispensing control board 633 will be described with reference to Figs. 216 to 219. Fig. 216 is a flowchart showing an example of the dispensing control unit power-on process, Fig. 217 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the dispensing control unit power-on process in Fig. 216, Fig. 218 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the dispensing control unit power-on process following Fig. 217, and Fig. 219 is a flowchart showing an example of the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process. First, the dispensing control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process.

[22-1. Processing when power is turned on for the dispensing control unit]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633, as shown in Figures 216 to 218. When this payout control unit power-on processing starts, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of the payout control MPU's interrupts. In this embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is set to the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt processing occurs, it is processed with priority.

Following step S500, the dispensing control MPU performs input/output settings (I/O input/output settings) (step S502). This I/O input/output setting involves setting various input ports and output ports of the dispensing control MPU.

Following step S502, the dispensing control MPU performs wait timer process 1 (step S506) and determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately between power-on and reaching the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, during a power outage or momentary power outage (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops. If the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power outage warning. Similarly, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage between power-on and reaching the predetermined voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process that waits until the voltage exceeds the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes after power-on. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). The determination in step S508 is based on the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the dispensing control MPU determines whether the RAM clear switch on the dispensing control board 633 has been operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch. If the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, it is determined that this does not instruct RAM clearing, and the RAM clear switch is not operated. However, if the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, it is determined that this instructs RAM clearing, and the RAM clear switch is operated.

If the dispensing control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, it sets the dispensing RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S514). In other words, the dispensing control MPU is in a state where it can execute the RAM clear process (step S38), which initializes the RAM built into the dispensing control MPU (i.e., the dispensing control built-in RAM), for a predetermined period of time after power is turned on.

On the other hand, if the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to erase payout information related to payouts stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, such as various flags and various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, the prize ball stock count PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command count DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY signal output setting information, which sets the logic state of the PRDY signal, stored in the CR communication information storage area). It is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased, and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the payout control MPU's general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register).

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs a setting to allow access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). This setting allows access to the payout control built-in RAM, allowing, for example, writing (storing) or reading payout information.

Following step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer, for example, indicates the address pushed onto the stack to temporarily store the contents of a memory element (register) currently in use, or the address pushed onto the stack to temporarily store the return address of this routine when terminating a subroutine and returning to this routine. The stack pointer advances each time a stack is pushed onto the stack. In step S520, the stack pointer is set to the initial address, and the register contents, return address, etc. are pushed onto the stack from this initial address. The stack pointer then returns to the initial address by reading the stack items in order from the last to the first pushed.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is to be erased, and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not to be erased.

In step S522, if the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 0, meaning that the payout information is not to be erased, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum calculates the sum of the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, treating it as a numerical value.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored during the payout control unit power-off processing (when power is turned off), described below (step S526). In step S526, if the payout control MPU determines that the values match, it determines whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is set to 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag that indicates whether payout backup information such as payout information and checksum values was stored and retained in the payout control internal RAM during the payout control unit power-off processing, described below, and is set to 1 when the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed successfully, and to 0 when the payout control unit power-off processing has not been completed successfully.

In the judgment of step S528, when the dispensing backup flag HBK-FLG is set to a value of 1, i.e., when the dispensing control unit power outage processing is determined to have been completed normally, the dispensing control MPU sets the working area of the dispensing control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the dispensing backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 0, power recovery information is read from the ROM built into the dispensing control MPU (i.e., the dispensing control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the working area of the dispensing control built-in RAM. This sets information to be used for various processes based on payout information related to payouts, such as the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, and various information stored in the various information storage areas (for example, the prize ball stock count PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command count DRV, and mismatch counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area, the PRDY signal output setting information that sets the logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area, and the mismatch counter reset determination time stored in the time management information storage area). Note that "power restoration" includes not only the state when power is turned on after being cut off, but also the state when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage.

On the other hand, if the dispensing control MPU determines in step S522 that the dispensing RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), i.e., that the dispensing information should be erased, or if the dispensing control MPU determines in step S526 that the checksum values do not match, or if the dispensing control MPU determines in step S528 that the dispensing backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), i.e., that the dispensing control unit power-off processing has not been completed successfully, it clears the entire area of the dispensing control internal RAM (step S532). This clears the dispensing backup information stored in the dispensing control internal RAM.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the working area of the payout control built-in RAM as the initial setting (step S534). This setting is done by reading initial information from the payout control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the working area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the dispensing control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt period when the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process described below is performed. In this embodiment, this is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the dispensing control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). This setting causes the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process to be repeated at the interrupt period set in step S536, i.e., every 2 ms.

Following step S538, the dispensing control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by sequentially setting values A, B, and C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or there is a power outage or momentary power outage, as described above, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power outage warning. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

In step S540, if the dispensing control MPU determines that no power outage warning signal has been input, it determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process, which is processed every 2 ms, as described below, and is set to a value of 1 when 2 ms have elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms have not yet elapsed.

In the judgment of step S542, if the dispensing control MPU determines that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is equal to 0, that is, that 2 ms have not elapsed, it returns to step S540, and the dispensing control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input.

On the other hand, if the dispensing control MPU determines in step S542 that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is equal to 1, i.e., that 2 ms have elapsed, it sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to 0 (step S544).

Following step S544, the dispensing control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the dispensing control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output processing, various information is read from the output information storage area of the dispensing control built-in RAM, and various signals based on this information are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the dispensing control MPU. The output information storage area stores various information such as payout master ACK information indicating that various payout-related commands (prize ball commands and self-check commands) from the main control board 1310 have been successfully received, drive information for controlling the drive of the payout motor 584, prize ball number information indicating the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information to be displayed on the error LED indicator. Based on this output information, when various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 have been successfully received, the payout control MPU outputs a payout master ACK signal to the main control board 1310 from the output terminal of a specified output port, outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584, or outputs the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information output signal (in this embodiment, the payout motor 584 outputs a prize ball number information output signal to the external terminal board 558 every time it actually pays out 10 game balls).

Specifically, a prize ball number information output determination counter is provided to determine whether or not to output prize ball number information. This prize ball number information output determination counter counts the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input processing of step S550, which will be described later. This number is then stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) not shown in the figures for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584.

In a process (program) not shown for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by this payout motor 584, the value of the counter for determining the output of prize ball number information stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is updated by adding the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described below.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the counter for determining the output of prize ball number information is read from this prize ball information storage area, and if the value of this read counter for determining the output of prize ball number information exceeds the value of 10 (in other words, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10), a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (at this time, the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated as the value of the counter for determining the output of prize ball number information in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM mentioned above), and an indication signal is output to the error LED indicator.

Following step S548, the dispensing control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the dispensing control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the dispensing control's built-in RAM. For example, the operation signal of the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal from the CR unit, and the main dispensing ACK signal from the main control board 1310 indicating that the main control board 1310 has successfully received the various commands sent in the command sending processing described below are each read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update process, the following conditions are set: ball jamming determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether a ball jam state has occurred by the payout blades 589 to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted; skip determination time, which is set when the fixed position determination of the payout blades 589 is not performed; full determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls; and ball jamming time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether the game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 by the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574. In addition to managing time such as the ball run-out determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether the number of game balls received and dispensed in the ball container 589b of the dispenser blade 589 exceeds a predetermined number, the inconsistency counter reset determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether to reset the inconsistency counter INCC, which monitors whether inconsistent balls are being repeatedly dispensed due to a discrepancy between the number of game balls received and dispensed in the ball container 589b of the dispenser blade 589 and the number of balls actually detected by the dispenser detection sensor 591, is also managed. For example, when the ball jamming determination time is set to 5005 ms and the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, the ball jamming determination time is subtracted by 2 ms each time the timer is updated. The ball jamming determination time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes 0. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, it determines whether various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) have been input from the CR unit. Based on the various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the working area of the payout control internal RAM in step S530, as described above, information used for various processing is set based on payout information related to payout, such as various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage area (e.g., the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY signal output setting information, which sets the logic state of the PRDY signal, etc. stored in the CR communication information storage area).

With this processing, even if there is a momentary or power outage, for example, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration can be restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored as payout backup information immediately before the momentary or power outage. As a result, even if there is a momentary or power outage while the payout device 580 is performing a payout operation of game balls and the payout operation cannot be continued, the payout operation can be continued when power is restored, so that game balls can be paid out to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 without any surplus or shortage. In other words, during the CR communication process, while the payout control MPU is exchanging various signals with the CR unit and paying out game balls to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202, if there is an instantaneous or power outage that interrupts the exchange of various signals with the CR unit and makes it impossible to continue paying out game balls, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration are restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored as payout backup information immediately before the instantaneous or power outage, so that the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before the instantaneous or power outage can be continued after power is restored, and payout of game balls can continue.

In this way, even if the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is interrupted or stopped, when power is restored it is restored to the state it was in immediately before the interruption or stoppage, and the effects of the interruption or stoppage do not affect the various signals exchanged between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit. This increases the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit.

In addition, the various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication processing, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which was set in the process of setting the working area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, and if this read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of a PRDY signal that indicates, for example, that a payout operation to pay out loaned balls is impossible, the PRDY signal is output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU. Then, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process, which is performed as part of the main operation setting process, a determination is made as to whether the value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information, is less than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH. If the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not less than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, it is determined that the retry operation is operating abnormally, that is, that the payout operation of the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, and the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 1. In the payout ball operation determination setting process, the error status output to the CR unit is set, for example, by setting the logic state (LOW) of the PRDY signal, which indicates that the payout operation to pay out loaned balls is impossible when there is no communication with the CR unit, as PRDY signal output setting information and storing this in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, at the next timer interrupt after power is restored, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the payout device 580 to dispense game balls was in an abnormal state immediately before a momentary power outage, that state is restored when power is restored, so that a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation to dispense loan balls is impossible can be output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU very soon after power is restored, and the CR unit can be informed that the payout operation of the payout device 580 to dispense game balls is in an abnormal state. This makes it possible to prevent the CR unit from outputting an unnecessary loan ball request signal, BRDY, very soon after power is restored.

In addition, in the CR communication processing, in the port input processing of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on this CR connection signal, when its logic is HI, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, the logic state of the PRDY signal is output as HI from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit to indicate that the payout operation to pay out loaned balls is possible, while when its logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the logic state of the PRDY signal is output as LOW from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit to indicate that the payout operation to pay out loaned balls is not possible. The logic state of the EXS signal, which indicates that a single dispensing operation has started or ended, is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the dispensing control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and the CR connection signal, which indicates whether the dispensing control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, is stored in the status information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and ball exhaustion check process (step S556). In this full tank and ball exhaustion check process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, it determines whether the lower tray 202 described above is full of stored game balls based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, and determines whether the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 described above is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the ball exhaustion detection sensor 574. For example, to determine whether the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls, a timer interrupt period of 2 ms is used. When the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in the current full tank/out-of-ball check process and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous full tank/out-of-ball check process (2 ms ago), that is, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 transitions from OFF to ON, the timer update process of step S552 starts timing the above-mentioned full tank determination time. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time has arrived, it is determined whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in this full tank/out-of-ball check process. In this determination, if the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls, and full tank information indicating this is stored in the above-mentioned status information storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is not full of stored game balls, and full tank information indicating this is stored in the status information storage area.

The 2 ms timer interrupt period is also used to determine whether the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. When the detection signal from the bulb out switch is ON during the current full tank and bulb out check process and the detection signal from the bulb out switch is OFF during the previous full tank and bulb out check process (2 ms ago), that is, when the detection signal from the bulb out detection sensor 574 transitions from OFF to ON, the timer update process in step S552 begins timing the above-mentioned bulb out determination time. Then, when the bulb out determination time becomes 0 during the timer update process, that is, when the bulb out determination time has arrived, the full tank and bulb out check process determines whether the detection signal from the bulb out detection sensor 574 is ON. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 is ON, the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and ball out information indicating this is stored in the status information storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 is OFF, the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is less than the predetermined number, and ball out information indicating this is stored in the status information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs a command reception process (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payouts (prize ball commands and self-check commands) are received from the main control board 1310. When these various commands are received successfully, payer ACK information informing this fact is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the various commands are not received successfully, connection abnormality information informing that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in the various command signals) is stored in the status information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the dispensing control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the dispensing control's built-in RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs a main operation setting process (step S562). This main operation setting process sets up operations such as prize balls, loan balls, ball removal, and ball jamming, determines whether to perform a retry, and monitors the number of unpaid balls (number of prize balls in stock).

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs an LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the status information storage area described above, and display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created and stored in the output information storage area described above as LED display information. For example, the above-mentioned out-of-ball information is read from the status information storage area, and based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is less than a predetermined number, corresponding display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (the number "1")) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the status information storage area described above, and based on this information, various commands classified as status displays (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command) are created and sent to the main control board 1310. For example, when out-of-ball information is read from the status information storage area, if the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is less than a predetermined number, a frame status 1 command is created and sent to the main control board 1310 based on this out-of-ball information.

Following step S566, the dispensing control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is set to the values A, B, and C in that order, clearing the watchdog timer.

Following step S568, the process returns to step S539, where the dispensing control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and determines in step S540 whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If this power outage warning signal has not been input, it determines in step S542 whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, if 2 ms have elapsed, it sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 0 in step S544, sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, and then returns to step S548. Port output processing is performed in step S550, port input processing is performed in step S552, timer update processing is performed in step S554, CR communication processing is performed in step S556, full tank and bulb out check processing is performed in step S558, command reception processing is performed in step S560, command analysis processing is performed in step S562, main operation setting processing is performed in step S564, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S566, command transmission processing is performed in step S568, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The processing of steps S539 to S568 is referred to as the "dispensing control unit main processing."

The processing content of the payout control unit main processing changes depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. As a result, the time required for processing by the payout control MPU will vary. Therefore, in the port output processing of step S548, the payout control MPU prioritizes outputting a payout master ACK signal to the main control board 1310, indicating that various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 have been successfully received. This ensures that the payout control MPU has enough processing time to perform other processing that may vary.

On the other hand, if the dispensing control MPU determines in step S540 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets the interrupt prohibition setting (step S570). This setting prevents the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing described below from being performed, prevents writing to the dispensing control internal RAM, and protects the dispensing information described above from being overwritten.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). This stops the payout of game balls.

Following step S574, the dispensing control MPU clears the watchdog timer (step S576). As described above, this clearing is performed by sequentially setting values A, B, and C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S576, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by treating the payout information in the working area of the payout control internal RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, and calculating its sum.

Following step S578, the dispensing control MPU sets the dispensing backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of dispensing backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU prohibits access to the payout control internal RAM (step S582). This prohibits access to the payout control internal RAM, making writing and reading impossible, and protecting the payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM.

Following step S582, the dispensing control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared because the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is not sequentially set to values A, B, and C. This resets the dispensing control MPU, and then the dispensing control unit power-on processing is performed again. The processing from step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as the "dispensing control unit power-off processing."

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, and when power is subsequently restored, the payout control unit performs power-on processing.

In step S526, it is checked whether the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is correct, and then in step S528 it is checked whether the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed normally. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is checked whether the payout backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

[22-2. Dispense control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This dispensing control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the dispensing control unit power-on process shown in Figures 216 to 218.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt processing begins, the payout control MPU disables timer interrupts and switches (saves) the register (step S590), as shown in Figure 219. Here, the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) used in the payout control unit main processing described above is switched to an auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the values in the general-purpose register are no longer overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control unit main processing from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the dispensing control MPU sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 1 (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms each time the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process is performed, i.e., every 2 ms. It is set to a value of 1 when 2 ms have elapsed and to a value of 0 when 2 ms have not yet elapsed.

Following step S592, the payout control MPU switches (restores) the register (step S594). This restoration switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the values in the auxiliary register are no longer overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the dispensing control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596) and terminates this routine.

[23. Various control processes on peripheral control boards]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 220 to 224. FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control board power-on processing, FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control board V blank interrupt processing, FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control board 1 ms timer interrupt processing, FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control board command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control board power failure warning signal interrupt processing. First, the peripheral control board power-on processing will be described, followed by the peripheral control board V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control board 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control board command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control board power failure warning signal interrupt processing. Note that in this embodiment, the priority of interrupt processing is set highest for the peripheral control board power failure warning signal interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control board 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control board command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control board V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510") integrates a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I/O interfaces onto a single semiconductor chip.

[23-1. Processing when peripheral control unit power is turned on]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 220 . When power is applied to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control unit power-on processing is performed under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. 220 . When this peripheral control unit power-on processing begins, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an initialization process (step S1000). This initialization process includes initializing the peripheral control IC itself, determining whether it is a hot start or a cold start, setting a wait timer after reset, and transferring various control information (peripheral data). The CPU of the peripheral control IC first initializes the peripheral control IC itself, but the time required for initializing the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), making it possible to initialize the peripheral control IC in an extremely short time. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is enabled for interrupts, enabling it to receive various commands, such as commands related to game presentation control and commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1, output from the main control board 1310 during the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described below.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the year, month, and day and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current calendar information and current time information are set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once, when the power is turned on. After performing this current time information acquisition process, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT (not shown) to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag used to determine whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit routine processing described below. It is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit routine processing is not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 during the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described below, which is executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC, indicating that the peripheral control IC's CPU is ready to accept screen data (information defining the screen configuration). In step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting it to a value of 0. In addition, after the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0, it outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1 (step S1006). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not equal to 1 (it is equal to 0), it returns to step S1006 and repeatedly determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1. By repeating this determination, the CPU enters a standby state until the peripheral control unit's regular processing is executed. After determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

In step S1006, if the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1, i.e., if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that peripheral control unit steady-state processing is to be executed, it first sets the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 1 (step S1008). This steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to 0 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs 1 ms interrupt timer start processing (step S1010). This 1 ms interrupt timer start processing starts the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described below, and also initializes the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN by setting the value 1 to count the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer has started and executed the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs performance operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this presentation operation unit monitoring process, in the presentation operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, various information (for example, rotation (direction of rotation) history information of the contact operation unit 302 and operation history information of the press operation unit 303 created based on detection signals from various detection sensors such as the first rotation detection sensor 347, second rotation detection sensor 348, press detection sensor 381, and lift detection sensor 382 provided in the presentation operation unit 300 (hereinafter referred to as "various sensors provided in the presentation operation unit 300")) is set, and the rotation direction of the contact operation unit 302 and whether or not the press operation unit 303 has been operated are monitored based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and it is appropriately determined whether or not the rotation direction of the contact operation unit 302 and the operation state of the press operation unit 303 should be reflected in the game presentation. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the performance operation unit information acquisition process, the sound generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted brightness. This allows volume and brightness adjustments to be reflected in real time, and the performance will proceed with the adjusted volume and brightness.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs lamp palette setting processing as part of the performance operation unit monitoring processing. In the lamp palette setting processing, the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light and the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light are set based on a lamp palette setting table consisting of brightness specification values, normal palette values, and special palette values. When the lamp palette setting processing is executed while a performance is in progress and a player (or an attendant such as a game hall staff member) operates the performance operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set a brightness specification value ranging from the first brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value, which is the maximum brightness, the above-mentioned gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC can be updated to match the set brightness specification value.

Here, we will briefly explain the brightness designation values, normal palette values, and special palette values that make up the lamp palette setting table. The brightness designation value is a value that can be set to one of 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value, which is the minimum brightness (off), to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the maximum brightness. The normal palette values and special palette values, described below, are pre-set corresponding to the 0th (zero) brightness designation value through the 31st brightness designation value. A player (or an attendant such as a game hall staff member) can operate the operable effect operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set one of the brightness designation values ranging from the 1st brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the maximum brightness.

For example, when a player (or an attendant such as a game parlor staff member) rotates the touch operation unit 302 clockwise and the current brightness is set to the first brightness designated value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness designated value, which is the minimum brightness (off), the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light and the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light will increase in accordance with a predetermined mathematical formula (e.g., a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve) from the first brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value, which is the maximum brightness. On the other hand, when the player rotates the touch operation unit 302 counterclockwise and the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light and the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light will decrease in accordance with a predetermined mathematical formula (e.g., a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve) from the 31st brightness designated value, which is the maximum brightness, to the first brightness designated value. When a player (or a game hall staff member, etc.) rotates the touch operation unit 302 to select the desired brightness and then presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is confirmed. In this embodiment, a case is provided in which the player (or a game hall staff member, etc.) can set the brightness while a performance is in progress. In this case, the player (or a game hall staff member, etc.) can set the desired brightness by operating the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. When a player (or a game hall staff member, etc.) operates the touch operation unit 302 while a performance is in progress, a bar-shaped indicator indicating the positions of the first brightness designation value through the thirty-first brightness designation value is displayed at a predetermined position in the display area of the performance display device 1600, thereby visually indicating the player's (or a game hall staff member, etc.) desired brightness level. In this embodiment, the fourteenth brightness designation value is set as the initial (default) value.

Normal palette values are set as the above-mentioned gradation information, representing the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side and the various decorative boards on the door frame side that are illuminated as direct light. Normal palette values are selected from 17 levels in 5% increments from the minimum palette value (20%), which is the smallest value, to the maximum palette value (100%), which is the largest value. Within the 32-level range of brightness designations from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which are the brightness designations mentioned above, the palette value corresponding to each brightness designation is set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is 20% of the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one brightness specification within the 32-step range of brightness specification values from 0 (zero) to 31 (the above-mentioned brightness specification values). Similarly, for other palette values, the values (%) written in parentheses are the values relative to the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one brightness specification within the 32-step range of brightness specification values from 0 (zero) to 31 (the above-mentioned brightness specification values).

In this embodiment, the normal palette value is the maximum palette value (100%), which is pre-selected and set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the various decorative boards provided on the gaming board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side that are illuminated as direct light, and the palette value (50%) is pre-selected and set as the above-mentioned gradation information for a specific decorative board (not shown) (LEDs that are dazzling to players) among the various decorative boards provided on the gaming board side that are illuminated as direct light.

Special palette values are used to set the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used in light guide plates that emit indirect light as the gradation information described above. Unlike normal palette values, special palette values have only one level, and within the 32-level range of brightness designation values, from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value described above, the palette value corresponding to one brightness designation is set as the gradation information described above according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve).

As mentioned above, if the brightness of the LEDs used for indirect light were the same as the brightness of the LEDs used for direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate would be dimmer than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the LEDs used for indirect light is set using special palette values rather than the normal palette values set for the brightness of the LEDs used for direct light. The first brightness designation value, which is the next highest level of brightness after the 0th (zero) brightness designation value, which represents the minimum brightness (off), is set as the lowest brightness at which the light guide plate can be visually recognized as emitting light from indirect light, and is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th brightness designation value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). Within the range from the first brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, the palette value corresponding to each designated brightness value is set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve).

In this way, in the lamp palette setting process, when setting the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light and the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light based on a lamp palette setting table consisting of a brightness specification value, a normal palette value, and a special palette value, the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light is set by the player (or an attendant such as a game hall clerk) according to the normal palette value corresponding to the brightness specification value operated by the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, while the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is set by the player (or an attendant such as a game hall clerk) according to the special palette value corresponding to the brightness specification value operated by the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. As a result, if the player finds the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light too dazzling and operates the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to reduce the brightness, even if the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light is set to the lowest brightness (i.e., the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value, which is the minimum brightness (off)), and the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (i.e., the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value, which is the minimum brightness (off)), the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), so the lowest brightness at which the light guide plate can be seen emitting indirect light is set.

In addition, programmers who design the light-emitting patterns do not have to individually set the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards mounted on the game board and the door frame for the LEDs used as direct light.They can simply set the light-emitting patterns in accordance with the flow of the presentation, watch the flow of the presentation based on the light-emitting patterns of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards mounted on the game board and the door frame, and then set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for specific decorative boards that are too dazzling (or that a slightly darker brightness would produce a better presentation effect), and set the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for other decorative boards, thereby extremely easily changing the balance of the overall light-emitting patterns. In other words, even if a player (or an attendant such as a game hall staff member) operates the operable effect operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set a single brightness specification value ranging from the first brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value, which is the maximum brightness, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the single brightness specification value will be set for a specific decorative board, while the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to the single brightness specification value will be set for other decorative boards, making it possible to adjust brightness extremely easily without disrupting the relationship between the set light emission modes (bright or dark).

Furthermore, although it is more difficult to adjust the brightness of indirect light from a light guide plate than direct light, it is possible to set the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light using special palette values that are different from the normal palette values (i.e., independent of the normal palette values). As a result, the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is managed by the special palette values, while the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light is managed by the normal palette values, making it easy to adjust the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light and the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output processing, in the display data creation processing described below, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data generated on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC to the liquid crystal output board 1530. This allows various screens (images) to be drawn (displayed) on the performance display device 1600. Note that in the display data output processing, if drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP of the peripheral control IC, the output of the generated one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data is canceled. This prevents delays in processing time, but may result in dropped frames. However, it is a system that allows for priority to be given to performances using music, sound effects, and other sound effects that are tailored to various performances, output from various speakers (hereinafter referred to as "various speakers") such as the top center speaker, top side speakers, and main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4, via the sound data output process described below.

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads sound data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the sound data creation processing described below, and outputs the data to various speakers from the set output channels. As a result, music, sound effects, and other sounds that match various performances are played from the various speakers.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). This scheduler update process updates various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. For example, the scheduler update process updates a pointer to indicate which screen data, from the first screen data, among the screen data arranged in chronological order that make up the schedule data for screen generation, is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

In addition, the scheduler update process updates a pointer to indicate which light emission data, from the first light emission data, is to be output among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that make up the schedule data for generating light emission modes.

In addition, the scheduler update process updates a pointer to indicate which sound command data, starting from the first sound command data, should be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC among the sound command data that indicates sound data for musical effects, sound effects, and other dramatic sounds, as well as sound data for alarms and announcements, arranged in chronological order to make up the sound generation schedule data.

The scheduler update process also updates a pointer to indicate which drive data, starting from the first drive data, of the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data is to be output. The drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is executed repeatedly every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, as described below. This motor and solenoid drive process, which is executed repeatedly every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, drives the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in chronological order, and updates the pointer each time its own process is executed. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Therefore, even if for some reason the pointer in the motor and solenoid drive process changes from the drive data it was originally supposed to point to to other drive data, the scheduler update process will forcibly update it to point to the drive data it was originally supposed to point to.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, various commands sent from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described below, and the received commands are analyzed, while also updating the random numbers used for various performance settings (for example, random numbers used for performances related to hold pre-reading). Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In this received command analysis processing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC reads (extracts) the screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed commands, and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs lamp palette setting processing as part of the received command analysis processing. In the lamp palette setting processing, the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light and the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light are set based on a lamp palette setting table consisting of the above-mentioned brightness specification values, normal palette values, and special palette values. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, and based on the analyzed commands, reads (extracts) schedule data for generating light emission modes from the peripheral control ROM and executes the lamp palette setting processing. When a player (or an attendant such as a game hall staff member) operates the effect operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set a brightness specification value ranging from the first brightness specification value to the thirty-first brightness specification value, which is the maximum brightness, the above-mentioned gradation information can be updated to match the set brightness specification value and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also analyzes whether the command received from the main control board 1310 during this peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start port winning command to instruct the start of a start port winning effect, a normal pattern memory command to identify the number of reserved normal patterns (0 to 4), a variable pattern command to instruct the start of a variable effect such as the variable display of decorative patterns on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of special patterns, a pattern memory command output when the start port pending number changes, or a large prize port 1 count display command output each time a game ball is received by the large prize port 2005, and recognizes the current game state.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The received command analysis process analyzes the various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. These commands include commands related to special 1 synchronization effects, special 2 synchronization effects, jackpot-related commands, power-on commands, regular synchronization effects, regular electric effects, notification displays, status displays, test-related commands, and other commands. Based on the received commands, the peripheral control board 1510 executes lottery processing related to announcements, etc., and, based on the results of the lottery, reads (extracts) screen generation schedule data, light-emitting mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. This will allow the peripheral control board 1510 to execute a performance based on the lottery results.

The peripheral control ROM pre-stores the peripheral control unit 1511, various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, etc., various data, various control data, and various schedule data. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the performance display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating the light emission modes of various LEDs, sound generation schedule data for generating performance sounds such as music and sound effects, and electrical drive source schedule data for generating the drive modes of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is composed of screen data that specifies the configuration of the screen, arranged in chronological order, and specifies the order in which the screens are drawn on the performance display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is composed of light emission mode data that specifies the light emission modes of various LEDs, arranged in chronological order. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data that is arranged in chronological order, and specifies the order in which the music and sound effects are played. This sound command data specifies an output channel number that indicates which of the multiple output channels in the peripheral control IC's built-in sound source to use, and a track number that indicates which of the multiple tracks in the peripheral control IC's built-in sound source to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects into.The electric drive source schedule data is composed of drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order, and specifies the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). During this warning processing, if the commands analyzed in the received command analysis processing of step S1022 include various commands classified as notification displays, the screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data, which are set as abnormality display modes for executing various abnormality notifications, are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Note that during the warning processing, if multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, abnormality notifications are first issued in order of highest pre-registered priority, and once that abnormality is resolved, the system automatically transitions to the remaining abnormality notifications. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another abnormality occurred after one abnormality occurred but before the first abnormality was resolved.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an RTC acquisition information update process (step S1026). This RTC acquisition information update process updates the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. This RTC acquisition information update process updates the hour, minute, and second information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and updates the year, month, and date calendar information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC based on this updated time information.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer from the chronologically arranged screen data that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on this input screen data and generates one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data in the built-in VRAM to be drawn (displayed) on the performance display device 1600.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update processing of step S1020, and the sound command data indicated by the pointer, among the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the sound generation schedule data, is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and sets the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

Note that during the sound data creation process, the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is identified based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch each time this sound data creation process is performed (i.e., each time the peripheral control unit performs steady-state processing). The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC to achieve a volume that corresponds to the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch, and during the sound data output process of step S1018, the sound data is output to the various speakers from the output channel set during this sound data creation process. This allows sounds such as music and sound effects that match the various performances to be played from the various speakers.

Specifically, the resistance value varies when the volume adjustment switch is rotated, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, which is then converted into 1024 levels ranging from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024 levels are divided into seven levels and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute, and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume, with the volume increasing from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled to achieve the volume set for board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker and top side speakers on the door frame 3 and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker and top side speakers on the door frame 3 and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation of the volume adjustment switch.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data. In addition to sound data for music, sound effects, and other sound effects and sub-volume values for adjusting their volume, the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC also incorporate sound data for alarm sounds that alert parlor staff and others of malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 and sub-volume values for adjusting their volume.

Specifically, for the sound effects, the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume control switch as described above is set as the sub-volume value, while for the notification sounds, the maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value, completely independent of volume adjustment based on the volume control switch. The sub-volume value for the sound effects can be adjusted by operating the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the sound effects operation unit 300, except for a predetermined period after power-on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a certain period when the special symbol display (first special symbol display unit, second special symbol display unit) starts or stops displaying the changing special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) (in this example, from the time the peripheral control unit receives the changing pattern command until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the changing decorative symbol display, and from the time the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the final display of the decorative symbol).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, except for a predetermined period after power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), and a certain period when the special symbol display (first special symbol display unit, second special symbol display unit) starts or stops the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) (in this example, from the time the peripheral control unit receives the variable pattern command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or from the time the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the final display of the decorative symbol), By operating the touch operation unit 302 or pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch during the sound data creation process is converted into one of seven board volume values, 0 to 6.Furthermore, by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch depending on the operation of the touch operation unit 302 or pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the board volume value can be increased or decreased to set the board volume, thereby adjusting the sub-volume value of the performance sound.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the multiple output channels in the peripheral control IC's built-in sound source combine the sound data of the effect sound incorporated into the track to be used out of the multiple tracks in the peripheral control IC's built-in sound source with a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the effect sound incorporated into the track to be used.The volume of this combined effect sound is amplified to the master volume value, which is the volume that actually flows from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker for low frequencies on the main frame 4, and this amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized sound effect is at its maximum, it is amplified up to the master volume value so that the volume coming from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4 is the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the sound effect, the sound data for the sound effect incorporated into the track being used out of multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC is synthesized with the board volume adjusted by rotating a volume adjustment switch set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the sound effect incorporated into the track being used, and the volume of this synthesized sound effect is amplified up to the master volume value that actually becomes the volume coming from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4, and this amplified sound effect is serialized and played. For the alarm sound, the sound data for the alarm sound incorporated into the track being used is combined with the maximum volume that is not dependent on volume adjustment based on the rotation of the volume adjustment switch, which is set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the alarm sound incorporated into the track being used, and the volume of this combined alarm sound is amplified to the master volume value that actually becomes the volume played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker for low frequencies on the main frame 4, and this amplified alarm sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, briefly explaining the control of playing an alarm sound to alert parlor staff and others of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 when the sound effect is being played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4, first, the sub-volume value of the track into which the sound effect is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and then the sound data of the track into which this sound effect is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track into which the alarm sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value for which the volume of the alarm sound is set to maximum volume are combined, and the volume of this combined sound effect and alarm sound are amplified to the master volume value that will actually be the volume played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4, and these amplified sound effect and alarm sounds are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, the only sound that actually comes from the top center speaker and top side speakers on the door frame 3 and the low-pitched main frame speaker on the main frame 4 is the notification sound at maximum volume. At this time, the special sound is muted, so although it does not come from the top center speaker and top side speakers on the door frame 3 and the low-pitched main frame speaker on the main frame 4, the special sound is still proceeding according to the sound generation schedule data described above.

In this embodiment, the alarm sound is played for a predetermined period (e.g., 90 seconds) from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4. After this predetermined period has elapsed, the volume of the sound effect, which has been progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that was previously forcibly muted, is reset to the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch as a sub-volume value (if the volume of the sound effect has been adjusted by operating the touch operation unit 302 or pressing operation unit 303 of the sound effect operation unit 300, the volume is set to the adjusted sub-volume value), and the sound is played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4.

In this way, when sound effects are being played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4, and an alarm sound is played to alert parlor staff or others to a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1, the volume of the sound effects is muted and the alarm sound is played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4.However, since this muted sound effects progress according to the sound generation schedule data, when the alarm sound stops being played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4 after a predetermined period of time has passed, the sound effects will not resume from the point where the alarm sound started, but will resume from the point where it progressed according to the sound generation schedule data up until the point where the predetermined period of time had passed since the alarm sound started.

Alert sounds and notification sounds are played completely independently of volume adjustments based on the rotation of the volume adjustment switch. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC through a program to adjust the volume from mute to maximum volume. The volume adjusted by this program is designed to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if an amusement hall staff member or other attendant turns the volume adjustment switch to set the volume low, the music, sound effects, and other sound effects played from the various speakers will be reduced in volume. However, if a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is engaging in fraudulent activity, the alert sounds set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the sound effects is reduced, it is possible to prevent the alert sounds from making it difficult for the amusement hall staff member or other attendant to notice a malfunction or a player's fraudulent activity.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM for backup.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 0 (step S1038), indicating that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. Then, the CPU returns to step S1004, initializes the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG by setting it to 0, and repeats the determination of step S1006 until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described below. In other words, step S1006 waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1. If step S1006 determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, steps S1008 to S1038 are performed, and the process returns to step S1004. In this way, if step S1006 determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady-state processing."

This peripheral control unit routine processing begins in step S1008 by setting the routine processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 1, indicating that the peripheral control unit routine processing is currently being executed. Then, in step S1010, a 1 ms interrupt timer is started. Then, in step S1014, ..., step S1036 are executed, and finally, in step S1038, the routine is completed by setting the routine processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 0, indicating that the peripheral control unit routine processing has been completed. The peripheral control unit routine processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in step S1006. As mentioned above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 during the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described below, which is executed when a V blank signal, indicating that the peripheral control IC's CPU is ready to accept screen data, is input from the peripheral control IC's VDP to the peripheral control IC's CPU. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the performance display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit's regular processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[23-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, we will explain the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC, indicating that the peripheral control IC's CPU is ready to accept screen data. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to 0 (step S1045), as shown in Fig. 221. As described above, this steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Fig. 220 is being executed, and to 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been executed.

In step S1045, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1), i.e., that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, it simply ends this routine. On the other hand, in step S1045, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, i.e., that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been executed, it sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 1 (step S1050) and ends this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag used to determine whether or not to execute peripheral control unit steady-state processing, and is set to 1 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed and to 0 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing is not being executed.

In this embodiment, step S1045 determines whether the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0, i.e., whether the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. When the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, step S1050 sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 1. This is because, when a V blank signal is input and the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 while the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 220 determines that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing will be executed, and the currently executing peripheral control unit steady-state processing will be forcibly canceled midway and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing will be started from the beginning. In order to prevent this, the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 220 is set to a value of 1. In step S1008 of the power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 1, thereby informing this routine, the peripheral control unit V blanking signal interrupt processing, that peripheral control unit steady-state processing is currently being executed. In addition, in step S1038 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing) in FIG. 220, the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0, thereby informing this routine, the peripheral control unit V blanking signal interrupt processing, that peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. Step S1045 of this routine, the peripheral control unit V blanking signal interrupt processing, determines whether the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is 0, i.e., whether peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. In other words, this is the procedure to be taken when peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed between the input of a V blanking signal and the input of the next V blanking signal, resulting in a so-called processing delay.

As a result, if the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing fails to complete within approximately 33.3 ms and stalls, step S1006 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 220 will determine that the processing will wait until the next V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing that stalled will be approximately 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described below, which is executed repeatedly each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing) in Figure 220, is executed 32 times for each peripheral control unit steady-state processing. However, if the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing stalled as described above exists, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times, not 64 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady-state processing stalls, consistency between the performance progress due to the peripheral control unit steady-state processing and the performance progress due to the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing slows down, the progress of the presentation can be reliably maintained.

[23-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing will be described, which is repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Fig. 220. When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33, as shown in Fig. 222 (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is a counter that counts the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Fig. 220 and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the performance display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed 32 times before the next peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, followed by the second, ..., and 32nd 1 ms timer interrupts.

In step S1100, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33, i.e., that the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing has begun, it simply terminates this routine. In this embodiment, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, even though the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing has a higher interrupt processing priority than the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. In other words, in this embodiment, because the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the V blank signal is generated, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing, and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started again when a new 1 ms timer interrupt is generated for the first time.

On the other hand, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1100 that the number of 1 ms timer interrupt executions STN is less than 33, it adds 1 to the number of 1 ms timer interrupt executions STN (increments it, step S1102). By adding 1 to the number of 1 ms timer interrupt executions STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 220, and the number of times this routine, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, has been executed increases by 1.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the motors, solenoids, and other electric drive sources are driven in accordance with the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data for the motors, solenoids, and other electric drive sources arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The pointer is also updated to the next drive data specified in chronological order, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed. As a result, electric drive sources such as motors, solenoids, and other electric drive sources managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, electric drive sources provided in the door frame 3 and electric drive sources provided in various performance units provided on the game board 5) are driven in accordance with the electric drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs movable body information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition processing, history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (e.g., original position history information, movable position history information, etc.) is created by determining whether detection signals have been input from the various sensors provided in the various presentation units provided on the gaming board 5, and this information is set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines the movable positions by setting the original positions (standby positions) of the various movable bodies provided in the various presentation units provided on the gaming board 5 and acquiring their movable positions.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a performance operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108). This performance operation unit information acquisition process determines whether detection signals have been input from the various sensors provided in the performance operation unit 300, and creates history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (e.g., rotation (direction) history information of the touch operation unit 302 and operation history information of the press operation unit 303, etc.) and sets this information in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The operation or non-operation of the touch operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 can be obtained from the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, by operating the performance operation unit 301, it is possible to adjust the volume of the performance sounds output from the top center speaker, top side speakers, and main frame speaker of the main frame 4, and to adjust the brightness of the various LEDs mounted in multiple numbers on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110) and terminates this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up to a backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied and backed up to a backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAM. Note that in this embodiment, the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set to different areas, and the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAM and the backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM are set to different areas.

In this way, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, various processes related to the performance in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed within a period of 1 ms to progress the performance. In contrast, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 220, various processes related to the performance in steps S1014 to S1032 are executed within a period of approximately 33.3 ms to progress the performance. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, if the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 in step S1100, i.e., if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is initiated, the routine is terminated. Therefore, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs by chance before the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled, and the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is initiated due to the first new 1 ms timer interrupt. In other words, consistency is maintained between the performance progress due to the peripheral control unit regular processing and the performance progress due to the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control. This ensures reliable consistency of performance progress.

As mentioned above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the LCD size of the performance display device 1600, and the interval at which the V blank signal is output may also vary slightly depending on the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly, the time lag caused by the slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt.

[23-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, we will explain the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process that receives various commands from the main control board 1310. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC starts transmitting various commands as serial data from the main control board 1310, it uses this as a trigger to import one byte (8 bits) of main serial data into a receive buffer at the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC, and when this import is complete, an interrupt occurs and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is performed. One packet of main serial data is composed of three bytes, with the first byte assigned to the status, the second byte assigned to the mode, and the third byte assigned to a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process begins, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200), as shown in FIG. 223. This 1-byte reception period timer sets the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of information can be received from the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

In step S1200, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, that it is within the period in which it can receive 1 byte (8 bits) of main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, it retrieves the received 1 byte of information from the receive buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC (step S1202) and increments the receive counter SRXC by 1 (step S1204). This receive counter SRXC indicates the number of times data has been retrieved from the receive buffer. The value is 1 when the status, the first byte of the main serial data, is retrieved from the receive buffer; 2 when the mode, the second byte of the main serial data, is retrieved from the receive buffer; and 3 when the sum, the third byte of the main serial data, is retrieved from the receive buffer. The receive counter SRXC is initially set to 0 when the power is turned on, etc.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the receive counter SRXC is at a value of 3, i.e., whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has been retrieved from the receive buffer (step S1206). This determines whether the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, have been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order.

If, in step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the receive counter SRXC is not equal to 3, that is, that the status (the first byte of the main serial data), the mode (the second byte of the main serial data), and the sum value (the third byte of the main serial data) have not yet been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order, it sets a 1-byte receive period timer (step S1208) and ends this routine. Setting the 1-byte receive period timer in step S1208 sets the period during which the mode (the second byte of the main serial data) or the sum value (the third byte of the main serial data) can be received.

On the other hand, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1206 that the receive counter SRXC is equal to 3, that is, that it has retrieved from the receive buffer the status (the first byte of the main serial data), the mode (the second byte of the main serial data), and the sum value (the third byte of the main serial data) in that order, it sets the receive counter SRXC to an initial value of 0 (step S1210) and calculates the sum value (step S1212). This calculation regards the status (the first byte of the main serial data) and the mode (the second byte of the main serial data) already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 as numerical values, and calculates their sum (sum value).

Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data from the main control board 1310, and therefore should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, pachinko machine 1 receives game balls from the island equipment in the gaming hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, electrostatic discharge occurs, generating noise, so pachinko machine 1 is in an environment where it is subject to noise.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 treats the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data as numerical values, calculates their sum (sum value), and determines whether this calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data from the main control board 1310. This allows the CPU of the peripheral control IC to determine whether the main serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has been affected by noise and changed to incorrect main serial data.

If, in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, it stores the status assigned to the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned to the second byte of the main serial data in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216), and terminates this routine.

On the other hand, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1200 that the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, that the period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received has been exceeded, or if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1214 that the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, it immediately terminates this routine.

[23-5. Peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, we will explain the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process that is executed when a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. When this peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300), as shown in Figure 224, and determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S1302). In the determination of step S1302, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that a power outage warning signal has not been input, it simply ends this routine.

On the other hand, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it determines whether 2 microseconds have passed (step S1304). In this determination, the timer started in step S1300 determines whether 2 microseconds have passed. In step S1304, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that 2 microseconds have not passed, it returns to step S1302 and determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If it determines that a power outage warning signal has not been input, it simply ends this routine. However, if it determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it again determines in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have passed. In other words, in step S1304, it determines whether a power outage warning signal has been continuously input for 2 microseconds since the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, was started.

In step S1304, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage warning signal has been input continuously for 2 microseconds since the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, began, it performs power-saving processing (step S1306). This power-saving processing reduces power consumption throughout the pachinko machine 1 system by sequentially turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off excitation to the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs, thereby ensuring stable operation for the 20 millisecond period during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a command reception standby process (step S1308). This command reception standby process assumes that the main control board 1310 is currently sending various commands, and waits for at least 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control IC can receive the command being sent. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is initiated, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup processing, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is copied and backed up to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S1312). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it performs a WDT clear process (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

On the other hand, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that a power outage warning signal has not been input, or following step S1314, it returns to step S1312 and determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input. In other words, it continues to determine indefinitely whether a power outage warning signal has been input. By continuing to determine indefinitely in this way, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that a power outage warning signal has not been input, it is no longer able to output a clear signal to the external WDT, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset. On the other hand, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it performs WDT clear processing in step S1314, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset. Note that when the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 220 is restarted.

In this way, if step S1312 determines that the power outage warning signal continues to be input in the infinite loop, step S1314 executes the WDT clear process, preventing the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset immediately before a power outage occurs. In contrast, if step S1312 determines that the power outage warning signal is not continuing to be input in the infinite loop but is released, the WDT clear process is not executed, and the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously initiated due to noise or other reasons, and the noise occurs for more than 2 microseconds, causing the determination in step S1302 to be passed, if step S1312 determines that the power outage warning signal is not continuing to be input in the infinite loop but is released, the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed, causing the CPU of the peripheral control IC to be reset. Therefore, such noise can be dealt with by automatically returning to reset.

[Control processing on the main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. Fig. 225 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric role control processing (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used in the various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. 225, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes a first start gate passing process, such as obtaining a first special random number for the first special symbol from the random number counter and storing it in a first special symbol reserve memory area of RAM (step S232), on the condition that the detection signal from the first start gate sensor 3002 is on (a ball has entered the first start gate 2002) (step S231). Also, on the condition that the detection signal from the second start gate sensor 2401 is on (a ball has entered the second start gate 2004) (step S233), it executes a second start gate passing process, such as obtaining a second special random number for the second special symbol from the random number counter and storing it in a second special symbol reserve memory area of RAM (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether a jackpot in progress flag, indicating that control is being exercised in the jackpot gaming state, is set (step S235). If the jackpot in progress flag is set, a jackpot control process (step S235A) is executed to control the jackpot gaming state. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) stops indicates a mode suggesting a "15R jackpot," a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the jackpot opening 2005 in accordance with the 15R jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, when the mode indicates a "5R jackpot," a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the jackpot opening 2005 in accordance with the 5R jackpot gaming state, and when the mode indicates a "2R jackpot," a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the jackpot opening 2005 in accordance with the 2R jackpot gaming state.

Furthermore, in the jackpot control process (step S235A), after controlling the opening of the large prize slot 2005, the time-saving flag and the time-saving count counter are set. The time-saving flag is a flag indicating the time-saving state, and is set when the 2R jackpot gaming state ends because the result of the lottery process when the first special symbol stops varying during the time-saving state indicates a "2R jackpot," when the 5R jackpot gaming state ends because the result indicates a "5R jackpot," or when the 15R jackpot gaming state ends during the time-saving state or non-time-saving state. The time-saving flag is then reset when the next jackpot occurs or when the counter value of the time-saving count counter reaches "0" by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 236 (described below) or the second special symbol stop process (not shown).

The time-saving counter indicates the remaining number of times the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) will continue in the time-saving state. If the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot gaming state, the number of times the time-saving state will continue is set when the jackpot gaming state ends. The time-saving counter counts down each time the variable display of the special symbols is executed until the counter value reaches "0." However, if the next jackpot occurs before the counter value reaches "0," it is reset (the counter value is returned to "0") by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 236 (described later) or the second special symbol stop process (not shown).

Furthermore, if the jackpot execution flag is not set, then, on condition that the value of the second special reserve number counter, which indicates the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special pattern reserve memory area, is "0" (step S237), a first special pattern process is executed (step S238), including a lottery process for determining the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops, and, on condition that the value of the second special reserve number counter, which indicates the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special pattern reserve memory area, is not "0" (step S237), a second special pattern process is executed (step S239), including a lottery process for determining the display mode when the variable display of the second special pattern stops. In this way, in this example, the system is configured so that when the value of the second special reserve number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special pattern is executed with priority.

Figure 226 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passage process (step S232).

Now, assuming that in the processing of step S231, the first start hole sensor 3002 is in the ON state and it is determined that a gaming ball has entered the first start hole 2002, as shown in FIG. 226, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first pattern random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as processing of step S241.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 then obtains from the main control's built-in RAM the counter value of the first special reserved number counter, which indicates the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area, and determines whether the first reserved memory number is its maximum value (upper limit value) of "4" based on this counter value (step S242). If it is determined in step S242 that the first reserved memory number is not its maximum value, the following steps S243 to S245 are performed to place the first special symbol variable display control in a new reserved state. That is, first, in step S243, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, in step S244, each random number obtained in step S241 is stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the main control's built-in RAM that corresponds to the counter value of the first special reserved number counter.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs a performance pre-determination process to determine, based on the first special random number, reach random number, first pattern random number, and variable random number obtained in step S241, whether the display result of the first special pattern variable display will be a jackpot, and if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, whether to execute a reach effect as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, and the type of mode (type of variable pattern) of the game effect to be executed, before starting the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S245), and then terminates processing.

However, if it is determined in step S242 that the first reserved memory count is at its maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the process without executing steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved.

In addition, when the first reserved memory number changes based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 2002, the lighting status of the two LEDs of the first special reserved memory number display in the function display unit 1400 is updated to correspond to the first reserved memory number, and a command indicating the first reserved memory number (first reserved number designation command 0-4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0-4)) is set and sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). Furthermore, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the performance display device 1600 based on receiving the first reserved number designation command 0-4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0-4).

Figure 227 is a flowchart showing the steps for the above-mentioned effect pre-determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, it compares the random numbers obtained in step S241 above, specifically the first special random number, first pattern random number, reach random number, and variable random number, with a pre-determination table (not shown) to determine whether a jackpot will occur, and if so, the type of jackpot. If not, it determines whether a reach effect will be executed as a game effect to be executed by the effect display device 1600, and the type of game effect to be executed (step S261).

A pre-determination command is then set according to the identified pre-determination information (whether a jackpot will occur, the type of jackpot if a jackpot will occur, whether a reach effect will be executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 if a jackpot will not occur, the type of game effect to be executed, etc.), the type of special random number obtained (first special random number), and the number of reserved memories stored corresponding to the obtained special random number (value of the reserved number counter). For example, in the effect pre-determination process for the first special pattern executed in step S245 of the first start port passing process, a first special pattern pre-determination command is set according to the identified pre-determination information, the fact that the first special random number has been obtained, and the first reserved memory number (value of the first special reserved number counter) (step S262).

Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), a pre-determination command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, allowing the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 to grasp pre-determination information such as the number of reserved memories stored corresponding to the first start slot 2002 where the start winning occurred, as well as whether the display result of the special pattern variable display based on the start winning that occurred will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot, whether a reach effect will be executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 if it is not a jackpot, and the type of game effect to be executed, before the variable display corresponding to the start winning begins.

When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first reserved memory area that stores pre-determination information regarding the variable display of the first special pattern.

The first reserved memory area has memory areas 1 to 4, corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control IC stores the preliminary judgment information indicated by the received preliminary judgment command in order, starting with the first (earliest) memory area. Then, when a preliminary judgment command is received while preliminary judgment information is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) memory area, the notified preliminary judgment information is stored in the n+1th (n = 1 to 3) memory area. When a first variation pattern command notifying the start of the first special symbol variable display is received, the preliminary judgment information stored in the first memory area of the first reserved memory area is discarded in accordance with the received first variation pattern command, and the preliminary judgment information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) memory area is moved to the N-1th (N = 2 to 4) memory area (shifting the preliminary judgment information stored in the reserved memory areas). This allows the preliminary judgment information for the first special symbol to be stored in a manner that allows the order in which the variable display start suspension occurred to be identified, and the preliminary judgment information is discarded in order, starting with the earliest one.

In this way, when variable display control is placed on hold, even though the variable display control remains in an unexecuted state (on hold), the expected jackpot probability (pseudo-winning probability) of that variable display control can be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, such as when the reserved display is newly output or when the reserved display is shifted in response to the consumption of the reserved display.

Figure 228 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passage process (step S234).

Now, assuming that in the processing of step S233, the second start hole sensor 2401 is in the ON state and it is determined that a gaming ball has entered the second start hole 2004, as shown in FIG. 228, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second pattern random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as processing of step S251.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 then obtains the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control's built-in RAM and, based on this counter value, determines whether the second reserved memory number is its maximum value (upper limit value), "1" (step S252). If it is determined in step S252 that the second reserved memory number is not its maximum value, the following steps S253 to S254 are performed to set the variable display control of the second special symbol to a new reserved state. That is, first, in step S253, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, in step S254, the random numbers obtained in step S251 are stored in the second special symbol reserved memory area of the main control's built-in RAM that corresponds to the counter value of the second special reserved number counter.

However, if it is determined in step S252 that the second reserved memory count is at its maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the process without executing steps S253 to S254, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved.

In addition, when the second reserved memory number changes based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 2004, the lighting status of the two LEDs of the second special reserved memory number display in the function display unit 1400 is updated to correspond to the second reserved memory number, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number (second reserved number designation command 0-1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0-1)) is set and sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command sending process (step S120). Furthermore, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on receiving the second reserved number designation command 0-1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0-1).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the first reserved memory number based on game balls entering the first start port 2002 is set to "4," while the upper limit of the second reserved memory number based on game balls entering the second start port 2004 is set to "1." Furthermore, since the second start port 2004 is capable of accepting a large number of game balls during the time-saving mode and the time it takes for the second special symbol to change is shorter than in the normal mode, even if the upper limit of the second reserved memory number is set to "1," it is possible to prevent a long period of time in which the second special symbol change display is not performed, or a long period of time in which the second reserved memory number is at its upper limit, resulting in a player not getting a chance to win a jackpot even if a game ball enters the second start port 2004, which would be disadvantageous to the player.

Figure 229 is a flowchart showing the steps for the first special symbol process (step S238). Note that the first special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S239 of the special symbol process are similar program modules, and only differ in the random numbers and tables used for judgment. Therefore, only the first special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes will be selectively executed depending on the first special symbol process flag described above.

1. First special symbol normal processing (step S280) in which the first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process for determining the display mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the read first special random number.
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which a process for determining the display mode when the first special symbol variable control is stopped is performed based on the result of a lottery process regarding the display mode when the first special symbol variable control is stopped.
3. A first variation pattern setting process (step S282) in which a lottery process is performed on the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the variation random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed in response to the special symbol on the effect display device 1600.
4. First special symbol variation process (step S283) in which the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 waits until the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped.
5. A first special symbol stop process (step S284) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol so that the display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol, determined based on the result of the lottery process for stopping the variable control of the first special symbol, is displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400.

The first special symbol process flag is set to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S280) should be performed during the main control side power-on processing (see Figure 210).

Figure 230 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that normal processing of the first special symbol should be performed, as shown in FIG. 230, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines, in step S301, based on the counter value of the first special reserved number counter, whether there is variable display control of the reserved first special symbol. If it is determined that there is variable display control of the reserved first special symbol, then, in step S302, the random number stored in the earliest memory area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (e.g., first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read from the RAM. Next, in steps S303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the random numbers (first special random number, first pattern random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops, which are stored in each memory area of the first special pattern reserved memory area in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, are shifted in a first-in, first-out manner.

Specifically, the first special symbol reserve memory area has four memory areas, 1 through 4, and stores random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of a starting winning combination in order, starting with the first (earliest) area. When a starting winning combination occurs while a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 through 3) memory area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n = 1 through 3) memory area. When the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out, and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N = 2 through 4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N = 2 through 4) memory area. This allows the order in which the reserves for the variable display control of the first special symbol occurred to be stored in a specific order, and the reserves for the variable display control are released in order, starting with the earliest reserve (the reserve that occurred earliest).

Then, in step S305, a win determination process is performed, which is a lottery process for determining whether or not the jackpot will be won, based on the first special random number of the first special symbol that was read out. This process then ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S306) to transition to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

Figure 231 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the winning determination table shown in Figure 232 (A) with the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 if the first special symbol normal processing is being performed, or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing if the second special symbol normal processing is being performed) (step S311).

The hit determination table shown in Figure 232 (A) includes, for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number), a low-probability jackpot determination table to be used when the game state is low probability (normal state (low-probability non-time-saving state) and time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state)), and a high-probability jackpot determination table to be used when the game state is high probability (high-probability time-saving state). In the low probability hit determination table that is referenced for comparison with the first special random number, the first special random numbers are associated with each other so that they match the hit determination value indicating that the first special random number has won a big hit with a hit probability of 1/319 when the setting value is 1, 1/309 when the setting value is 2, 1/299 when the setting value is 3, 1/289 when the setting value is 4, 1/279 when the setting value is 5, and 1/269 when the setting value is 6, they match the hit determination value indicating that the first special random number has won a small hit with a small hit probability of 3/319, and other first special random numbers match the miss determination value indicating that the first special random number is a miss. In addition, in this example, within the second special pattern process processing, the low probability hit determination table that is referenced for comparison with the second special random number is associated with the second special random number so that it matches the big hit determination value indicating that the second special random number has won a big hit with a hit probability of 1/319 when the setting value is 1, 1/309 when the setting value is 2, 1/299 when the setting value is 3, 1/289 when the setting value is 4, 1/279 when the setting value is 5, and 1/269 when the setting value is 6, matches the small hit determination value indicating that the second special random number has won a small hit with a small hit probability of 144/319, and matches the miss determination value indicating that any other second special random number is a miss. In other words, the hit determination table referenced for comparison with the second special random number is configured to have a higher probability of determining a small hit than the hit determination table referenced for comparison with the first special random number, so that the player is placed in a more advantageous position when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed based on a start winning entry into the second start opening 2004 than when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed based on a start winning entry into the first start opening 2002. Furthermore, the hit determination table for high probability is configured to increase the probability of a big hit for each setting value by 10 times compared to the hit determination table for low probability.

If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that a jackpot has occurred as a result of comparing the hit determination table with the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing) (step S312), it sets a jackpot flag indicating that the variation has resulted in a jackpot (step S313) and ends the hit determination process.

Furthermore, if the result of comparing the selected win determination table with the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing) is that a small win has occurred (step S314), a small win flag is set indicating that the variation has resulted in a small win (step S315), and the win determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if neither a big win nor a small win has been won, i.e., if it is determined to be a miss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM and includes a time-saving reach determination table for use when the game state is in a time-saving state, and a non-time-saving reach determination table for use when the game state is not in a time-saving state. In the time-saving reach determination table, the reach random numbers are associated with one type of reach random number so that it matches a reach determination value indicating a reach has occurred, and 71 types of reach random numbers so that it matches a reach determination value indicating a non-reach has occurred.

Furthermore, in the reach determination table for the non-time-shortened state, five types of reach random numbers, including the same reach random numbers as those set in the reach determination table for the time-shortened state, are associated with the reach determination values indicating a reach will occur, and 67 types of reach random numbers are associated with reach determination values indicating a non-reach will occur. Thus, in this embodiment, the reach determination values indicating a reach will occur are higher in the non-time-shortened state than in the time-shortened state.

If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316) and determines that the reach has been missed (step S317), it sets a reach flag indicating that the change is a reach and terminates processing (step S318).

Figure 233 is a flowchart showing the steps for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 233, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol stops, i.e., the result of the win determination process (step S305). The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether the big win flag is set (step S321) or whether the small win flag is set (step S324).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a determines the type of jackpot by comparing the first pattern random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern with the jackpot pattern determination table shown in Figure 232 (B), and determines the mode of the first special pattern when the variable control of the first special pattern stops (the stopping pattern of the first special pattern) corresponding to the determined type of jackpot (step S322).

in particular,
1. A 15R guaranteed jackpot in which the opening and closing pattern, which closes the large prize opening 2005 after it has been open for a long period of time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005, is repeated 15 times (15 rounds), thereby controlling the state to a 15R jackpot gaming state in which it is possible (easy) for game balls to enter the large prize opening 2005, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, the execution period of the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is shortened from the normal state until the variable display of the special symbols has been executed 77 times, and the state is controlled to a high probability time-shortened state in which the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than normal. 2. a 5R time-saving jackpot in which the period during which the game balls can (easily) enter the large prize opening 2005 is shortened from the normal period after the large prize opening 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005, by repeating an opening/closing pattern five times (five rounds); and
3. A 2R jackpot in which the opening and closing pattern is repeated twice (two rounds) to close the large prize opening 2005 after the large prize opening 2005 has been left open for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005, and the game state is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the large prize opening 2005; if the game state is controlled to a time-shortening state before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the game state is controlled to a time-shortening state which is ended if a jackpot does not occur within 77 executions of the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) after the jackpot game state ends; and if the game state is controlled to a non-time-shortening state before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the game state is controlled to a normal state after the jackpot game state ends.
The jackpot will be determined from one of the three types of jackpots.

In addition, if the jackpot flag is set in the second special pattern stopping pattern setting process, the type of jackpot is determined by comparing the second pattern random number read in the second special pattern normal processing with the jackpot pattern determination table shown in Figure 232 (B), and the mode of the second special pattern when the variable control stops corresponding to the determined type of jackpot (the stopping pattern of the second special pattern) is determined.
in particular,
1. A 15R guaranteed jackpot in which the opening and closing pattern, which closes the large prize opening 2005 after it has been open for a long period of time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005, is repeated 15 times (15 rounds), thereby controlling the state to a 15R jackpot gaming state in which it is possible (easy) for game balls to enter the large prize opening 2005, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, the execution period of the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is shortened from the normal state until the variable display of the special symbols has been executed 77 times, and the state is controlled to a high probability time-shortened state in which the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than normal. 2. a 5R time-saving jackpot in which the period during which the game balls can (easily) enter the large prize opening 2005 is shortened from the normal period after the large prize opening 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005, by repeating an opening/closing pattern five times (five rounds); and
3. A 2R jackpot in which the opening and closing pattern is repeated twice (two rounds) to close the large prize opening 2005 after the large prize opening 2005 has been left open for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005, and the game state is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the large prize opening 2005; if the game state is controlled to a time-shortening state before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the game state is controlled to a time-shortening state which is ended if a jackpot does not occur within 77 executions of the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) after the jackpot game state ends; and if the game state is controlled to a non-time-shortening state before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the game state is controlled to a normal state after the jackpot game state ends.
The jackpot will be determined from one of the three types of jackpots.

The jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number allocates 8 judgment values for a 15R probability jackpot, 100 judgment values for a 5R time-limited jackpot, and 92 judgment values for a 2R jackpot. In other words, if a jackpot result is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 4% chance of a 15R jackpot, a 50% chance of a 5R jackpot, and a 46% chance of a 2R jackpot. Similarly, the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number allocates 92 judgment values for a 15R probability jackpot, a 100 judgment value for a 5R time-limited jackpot, and 8 judgment values for a 2R jackpot. In other words, if a lottery result based on the second special random number indicates a jackpot, there is a 46% chance of a 15R jackpot, a 50% chance of a 5R jackpot, and a 4% chance of a 2R jackpot. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is configured so that the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number has a higher probability of determining a 15R jackpot than the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number, and the player is more favored when the variable display of the second special symbol based on a start winning entry into the second start opening 2004 is executed than when the variable display of the first special symbol based on a start winning entry into the first start opening 2002 is executed.

In addition, once the type of jackpot is determined, the stopping pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the manner in which the first special pattern will stop. Specifically, if a 2R jackpot is determined, the 2R jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern; if a 5R jackpot is determined, the 5R jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern; and if a 15R jackpot is determined, the 15R jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern.

In addition, if the big win flag is not set in step S131 but the small win flag is set (step S324), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of small win by comparing the first pattern random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern with the small win pattern determination table shown in Figure 232 (C), and determines the mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special pattern corresponding to the determined type of big win (the stopping pattern of the first special pattern) (step S325).

in particular,
1. An opening and closing pattern in which the device winning opening 200 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed twice to control the state to a small win game in which a game ball can (easily) enter the device winning opening 200, and when a game ball received in the device winning opening 2006 is sorted to the V winning opening 2007 and detected by the V winning opening sensor 3003, the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or after the game ball has entered the large winning opening 2005. When the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 balls have entered the large prize opening, the opening and closing pattern is repeated 14 times to control the state to a 15R large prize game state in which it is possible (easy) for the game ball to enter the large prize opening 2005, and after the large prize game state ends, the execution period of the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) is shortened more than usual until the variable display of the special patterns is executed 77 times, and the state is controlled to a high probability time-shortened state in which the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than usual. An opening and closing pattern is executed twice to open the device winning opening 200 for a short time (e.g., 80 ms) and then close it, thereby controlling the game to a small win game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the device winning opening 200, and when the game ball received in the device winning opening 2006 is distributed to the V winning opening 2007 and detected by the V winning opening sensor 3003, the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (e.g., 29 seconds) or after the game ball has entered the large winning opening 2005. When the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 balls have won, an opening and closing pattern is repeated 14 times to control the state to a 15R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for the game ball to enter the large prize opening 2005, and if the state was controlled to a time-shortening state before the start of the 15R jackpot game state, the state is controlled to a time-shortening state which is ended if a jackpot is not achieved within 77 times of the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) being executed, after the jackpot game state ends, and if the state was controlled to a non-time-shortening state before the start of the 15R jackpot game state, the state is controlled to a normal state after the jackpot game state ends, and one of two types of small wins is determined to be a second small win.

The small win symbol determination table, which is compared with the first symbol random number, allocates 200 judgment values in the event of a first small win. In other words, if a lottery result based on the first special random number indicates a small win, there is a 100% chance of a first small win, and no second small win. On the other hand, the small win symbol determination table, which is compared with the second symbol random number, allocates 20 judgment values in the event of a first small win, and 180 judgment values in the event of a second small win. In other words, if a lottery result based on the second special random number indicates a small win, there is a 10% chance of a first small win, and a 90% chance of a second small win.

In addition, once the type of small win is determined, the stopping pattern corresponding to the type of small win is determined as the pattern when the first special pattern stops. Specifically, if the first small win is determined, the first small win pattern is determined as the small win pattern, and if the second small win is determined, the second small win pattern is determined as the small win pattern.

If neither the big win flag nor the small win flag is set, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the symbol to be a lose symbol (step S327). After this determination process for the stopped symbol has been completed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result so that the lottery result (indicating the type of big win, small win, reach miss, or miss (which may also indicate the type of stopped symbol of the first special symbol)) is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S328). Then, in step S329, the first special symbol process flag is updated to transition to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282), at which point this process ends.

The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the performance display device 1600 based on the received judgment result notification command and variation pattern command (variably displaying the left, center, and right decorative patterns and displaying them in a static manner in the order of left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → center decorative pattern (note that the left, center, and right decorative patterns may also be displayed in a synchronized dynamic manner as the same pattern and displayed in a static manner at the same time)). Specifically, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines the mode (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern displayed on the performance display device 1600 when it stops changing to be a small win pattern ("final battle") if it identifies a small win or a 2R jackpot from the received judgment result notification command, a 5R time-limited jackpot pattern (a combination in which the left, center, and right decorative patterns are the same even number pattern from "0" to "9") if it identifies a 5R time-limited jackpot, and a 15R time-limited jackpot pattern (a combination in which the left, center, and right decorative patterns are the same odd number pattern from "0" to "9") if it identifies a 15R special jackpot. Furthermore, if a reach miss is identified, a miss pattern accompanied by a reach (a combination of the same left and right decorative patterns between "0" and "9" but with a different center decorative pattern; a reach miss pattern) is determined, and if a miss is identified, a miss pattern not accompanied by a reach (a combination of the left, center, and right decorative patterns in which at least the left and right decorative patterns are different) is determined, and when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (when the game presentation ends), the determined stopped pattern is controlled and displayed on the presentation display device 1600.

In this example, the pachinko machine 1 can be controlled to the time-shortened state after a jackpot gaming state until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed a maximum of 77 times, but the time-shortened state may also be terminated based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of jackpots after being controlled to transition to the time-shortened state. Specifically, if the time-shortened state is controlled after a jackpot gaming state and a predetermined number of jackpots (for example, two) occur thereafter, the machine may be controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the time-shortened state after the end of the predetermined number of jackpot gaming states. Furthermore, even if the number of jackpots that occur is less than the predetermined number, the machine may be controlled to the non-time-shortened state during the jackpot gaming state, and then controlled to the time-shortened state again after the jackpot gaming state.

Figure 234 is a flowchart showing the steps for the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 234, if the jackpot flag is set (step S341), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a jackpot corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S342); if the small jackpot flag is set (step S343), it selects a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a small jackpot corresponding to the type of small jackpot determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S344); if the reach flag is set (step S345), it selects a variation pattern table at the time of reach (not shown) (step S346); and if neither the jackpot flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, if it is a normal miss (a miss where the reach performance is not executed), it selects a variation pattern table at the time of a miss (not shown) (step S347).

Then, the selected variation pattern table is compared with the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing to determine the variation pattern to be executed (step S348), and a variation pattern command is set to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the determined variation pattern will be started, thereby starting the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 (step S349). Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer (step S350). As a result, performance control is performed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 for the variation time determined in this manner.

In this example, multiple types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the pattern random number (first pattern random number, second pattern random number). Furthermore, the variation patterns set in each variation pattern table are stored in association with multiple pieces of variation time information indicating the predetermined time (variation time) required to control the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern). The main control MPU 1310a compares the selected variation pattern table from multiple types of variation pattern tables corresponding to the determination results based on the special random number and the pattern random number with the variable random number read in step S302 of the first special pattern normal processing, and obtains the variation time information associated with the read variable random number from this table to determine the variation pattern of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern). This allows a lottery process to be performed for the variation pattern of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern). The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, the variable pattern table for reach in this example is set up to determine the type of reach effect to be executed by comparing a judgment value indicating which reach effect to execute with a variable random number. For example, among reach effects, the super reach effect has a higher chance of winning a jackpot than the normal reach effect, and when a super reach effect is executed, the player's chances of winning a jackpot game state increase.

Furthermore, once control of the variable display of the first special symbol has begun, the next step in step S351 is to determine whether the counter value of the time-saving count counter, which sets the number of times the time-saving state continues, is "0." If this counter value is not "0," the time-saving count counter is counted down (step S352), and then it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous time-saving count counter is "0" (step S353). If the counter value is "0," a time-saving end flag is set (step S354), indicating that control of the time-saving state (time-saving control) is to end.

If the processing in step S351 determines that the counter value of the time-saving count counter is "0," or if the processing in step S353 determines that the time-saving count counter is not "0," the processing proceeds to step S355. Then, this processing ends when the first special pattern process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first special pattern change processing (step S283).

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table for when a loss occurs, the fluctuation time information for the special symbols, which is set to about 1 second when in the time-saving state, is associated with the special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol), while the fluctuation time information for the special symbols, which is set to about 12 seconds when in the non-time-saving state, is associated with the special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol). In other words, the fluctuation time information for the special symbols is set so that the time required to control the fluctuation display of the special symbols is extremely short for the fluctuation pattern selected for when a loss occurs when the time-saving state is selected, compared to the fluctuation pattern selected for when a loss occurs when the time-saving state is not selected.

Figure 235 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol change process (step S283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol fluctuation processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 235, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, in step S371, subtracts 1 from the fluctuation timer, which is set to the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery processing for the fluctuation pattern (step S282). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, i.e., the lottery-determined fluctuation time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in step S373, the process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated to transition to the first special symbol stop processing (step S284).

Figure 236 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 236, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs display control in step S381 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and sets a stop display command to the peripheral control board 1510 instructing the performance display device 1600 to derive and display the display result of a decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol (step S382).

Next, if the time-saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time-saving end flag (step S384) and also resets the time-saving flag (step S385). As a result, when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) have been displayed in varying states a predetermined number of times (77 times in this example), the time-saving control (control in the time-saving state) is terminated and non-time-saving control (control in the normal state) is initiated.

Furthermore, when the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating the start of jackpot play (step S387) and sets the waiting time until the start of jackpot play (the time during which a message indicating the start of jackpot play is displayed, etc.) in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, step S388 also executes a process to set the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot in a jackpot counter, which indicates the remaining number of rounds. The jackpot counter is decremented by one each time a round is played in the jackpot control process described below. When the jackpot counter reaches "0," the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the specified number of rounds has been played and controls the jackpot play to end. Specifically, in the jackpot control process described below, the pre-opening process for the large prize opening (step S401) and the process during the opening of the large prize opening (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the jackpot counter reaches "0", and when the round ends in the process during the opening of the large prize opening (step S402), the jackpot counter is decremented by 1 and, based on the fact that it reaches "0", the process proceeds to the post-opening process for the large prize opening (step S403) and the jackpot game is ended.

Then, a jackpot execution flag is set to indicate that a jackpot game is in progress (step S389). The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually for each type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (15R certain jackpot start command, 5R time-limited jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R certain jackpot, 5R time-limited jackpot, 2R jackpot) is set. As a result, the jackpot game effects corresponding to the type of jackpot indicated by the jackpot start command are executed by the effect display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speaker, etc. Similarly, the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing also sets a jackpot start command (15R special jackpot start command, 5R time-limited jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) according to the type of jackpot (15R special jackpot, 5R time-limited jackpot, 2R jackpot).

In addition, the jackpot in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, is reset when the jackpot game ends, specifically when the post-opening large prize opening process (step S403) of the jackpot control process (step S235A) has completed the opening and closing control of the large prize opening 2005 according to the type of jackpot (for example, opening and closing control that repeats an opening and closing pattern two, five, or fifteen times to close the large prize opening 2005 after it has been opened for a long period of time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005) according to the type of jackpot (all rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game). By resetting the jackpot execution flag, the jackpot control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special pattern and special electric device control process (step S114), but the function display unit 1400 is able to display the first special pattern change on the first special pattern display and the second special pattern change on the second special pattern display of the function display unit 1400.

Also, if the big win flag is not set (step S386), but the small win flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a small win start command indicating the start of small win gameplay (step S391) and sets the interval timer for the waiting time until the start of small win gameplay (the time during which a message indicating the start of small win gameplay is displayed, etc.) (step S392). Then, a small win execution flag indicating that small win gameplay is in progress is set (step S393). The small win start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510 and is prepared individually for each type of small win. In step S391, a small win start command (first small win start command, second small win start command) corresponding to the type of small win (first small win, second small win) is set. As a result, the small win game presentation corresponding to the type of small win indicated by the small win start command is executed by the presentation display device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speakers, etc. Similarly, the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing also sets a small win start command (first small win start command, second small win start command) corresponding to the type of small win (first small win, second small win).

The small win in progress flag, which indicates that a small win game is in progress, is reset when the small win game ends, specifically when the opening and closing control of the bonus prize opening 200 according to the type of small win (for example, opening the bonus prize opening 200 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it twice) is completed during the small win in progress process (step S411) of the small win control process (step S236A) described below. Resetting the small win in progress flag prevents the small win control process (step S236A) from being executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric bonus device control process (step S114), while enabling the display of a changing first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the display of a changing second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400.

Also, if the small win flag is not set, i.e., if a miss occurs, the interval timer is set to the waiting time until the next variable display of the special symbol begins (the time during which the static special symbol is displayed) (step S394), and the process proceeds to step S395.

After executing the processing of steps S386 to S394, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process transitions to the initial value of first special symbol normal processing (step S395), and then terminates this processing.

Figure 237 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S235A). During the jackpot control process, one of the following three processes is selectively executed depending on the jackpot process flag.

1. A pre-opening process for a big prize opening (step S401) in which the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the game will transition to the big prize game state based on the fact that the state of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) when the variable display stops becomes a big prize symbol, or the next round starts.
2. A process during which the large prize opening 2005 is controlled to an open state based on the fact that the mode of the special symbol when the variable display stops becomes a large winning symbol, or the large prize opening 2005 is controlled to an open state based on the fact that the next round is about to start, and the large prize opening 2005 is closed after being opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005 (step S402).
3. A post-opening process of the big prize opening (step S403) that waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the big prize game state has ended when all rounds have ended.

The jackpot process flag is set in step S42 to indicate that the pre-opening process for the large prize opening (step S401) should be performed. Furthermore, in the open-opening process for the large prize opening (step S402), a jackpot round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is set at the start of a round in which the large prize opening 2005 is controlled to be open, and a jackpot round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set at the end of a round in which the large prize opening 2005 is controlled to be closed. The jackpot round start command and jackpot round end command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the jackpot game effects corresponding to the number of rounds specified by the jackpot round start command and jackpot round end command are executed by the effect display device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speaker, etc.

[Rainbow-colored effect]
Next, we will explain the rainbow effect that is executed when there is a high probability of a jackpot (for example, when a jackpot is reached (jackpot confirmation effect) or when the decorative pattern is in reach (reach notice)). In this example, the rainbow effect is an effect in which a predetermined form (pattern, character, letter, etc.) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 using multiple colors, and then the display color in any display area of the effect display device 1600 is transitioned in a short period of time, and in conjunction with the transition of the display color on the effect display device 1600, the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5 are illuminated in multiple light colors (at least two or more light colors), and the light colors are transitioned in a short period of time. Below, we will show a rainbow effect that is executed by linking the effect display device 1600 with all of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, and causing the display color of a predetermined form displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the light emission color of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 to transition in a short period of time, but it may also be a device that causes the display color or light emission color to transition in a short period of time using any one or any combination of the effect display device 1600, the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, and the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 238 (A), when a rainbow effect is executed in this example, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into five areas, first display area a to fifth display area e, and a rainbow effect display mode is displayed in which each area has a different color. Then, as the change time passes, the display colors of first display area a to fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, as well as the size and shape of first display area a to fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, are changed in a short period of time.

In addition, the form of the rainbow effect displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be a form in which the entire area of the effect display device 1600 does not have information such as characters or letters, for example, as shown in Figure 238 (A), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into multiple areas by multiple striped lines (in the example shown in Figure 238 (A), five display areas from the first display area a to the fifth display area e), or as shown in Figure 238 (B), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into multiple areas by multiple radial lines (in the example shown in Figure 238 (B), five display areas from the first display area a to the sixth display area f), and the first display area a to the fifth display area are colored in different colors for each area, and the colors of some or all of these multiple areas can be changed in a short period of time. Alternatively, a plurality of characters (people, plants, animals, objects, landscapes, etc.) or letters may be colored in different colors for each character and/or each letter (each block (component) having a meaning, such as a character, letter, or word) (for example, the letters "CHANCE" may be displayed with the first "C" in "white," the "H" in "yellow," the "A" in "green," the "N" in "blue," the second "C" in purple, and the "E" in red), or a single character or letter may be divided into a plurality of regions and colored in different colors for each region (for example, each petal may be displayed in a different color, or the skin of a person may be displayed in a striped pattern of multiple colors, or the letters "CHANCE" may be displayed in a first region using seven imaginary lines, lines 1 to 7, as shown in FIG. 238(C)). The word "CHANCE" is divided into six regions, region a (the region surrounded by lines 1 and 2 in the word "CHANCE") to sixth region f (the region surrounded by lines 6 and 7 in the word "CHANCE"), and each region is displayed in a different color, thereby displaying each word "CHANCE" in a striped pattern using multiple colors (for example, first region a (the region surrounded by lines 1 and 2 in the word "CHANCE") in "white," second region b (the region surrounded by lines 2 and 3 in the word "CHANCE") in "yellow," third region c (the region surrounded by lines 3 and 4 in the word "CHANCE") in "green," and fourth region d (the region surrounded by lines 4 and 5 in the word "CHANCE") in "blue"). , fifth area e (the area of the letters "CHANCE" surrounded by lines 5 and 6) is displayed in purple, sixth area f (the area of the letters "CHANCE" surrounded by lines 6 and 7) is displayed in red), etc.), the color or shape of these shapes, or both the color and shape of the shapes, may be changed in a short period of time, or the size or shape of each of multiple areas displayed in a specific color may be changed, or the display position may be changed (moved) to change the display color in any display area of the performance display device 1600 (areas where the background other than the letters "CHANCE" is displayed may not be displayed in the same way as the letters "CHANCE" (such as by changing the display in a short period of time)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 239 and 240, the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5 are divided into multiple groups, and the light emission can be controlled for each group. When the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5 are made to emit light in a predetermined light color for each group. The light emission color of each group is then changed in a short period of time as the variable time passes.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 239, the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 include the multiple LEDs mounted on the upper front left decorative board 3129 for illuminating and decorating the upper front left logo decoration 3122, which constitute the first board illumination group; the multiple LEDs mounted on the upper front left decorative board 3128 for illuminating and decorating the upper front left logo decoration 3121, the upper front left logo decoration 3122, and the lower front left sub-decorative part 3123, which constitute the second board illumination group; the multiple LEDs mounted on the lower front logo decoration board 3173 for illuminating and decorating the lower front logo decoration 3167, which constitute the third board illumination group; the lower front middle decorative board 3168 for illuminating and decorating the lower front middle decoration 3161; the lower front left inner decorative board 3169 for illuminating and decorating the lower front left inner decoration 3163; and the lower front left outer decoration 3164. the back front lower left outer decorative board 3170 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower right inner decorative board 3171 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165; and the back front lower right outer decorative board 3172 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 are divided into a fourth board illumination group, the multiple LEDs mounted on the back front lower right decorative board 3152 for illuminating and decorating the back front right logo decoration 3141 are divided into a fifth board illumination group, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the back front upper right decorative board 3151 for illuminating and decorating the back front upper right logo decoration 3142 are divided into a sixth board illumination group, and when the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs are controlled to emit light for each group, with the LEDs in the same group emitting the same color and the LEDs in different groups emitting different colors.

In addition, among the various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5 for creating rainbow-colored effects, it is not limited to dividing multiple LEDs mounted on the same board into the same group and controlling the light emission for each group, but LEDs mounted on the same board can also be divided into different groups and the light emission can be controlled for each group. For example, the multiple LEDs mounted on the back-front-lower logo decoration board 3173 for lighting up and decorating the back-front-lower logo decoration 3167 bearing the letter "Queen" may be divided into different groups for each letter and the lighting may be controlled for each group, or each letter may be divided into multiple regions by predetermined virtual lines and grouped together and the lighting may be controlled for each group (for example, the letter "Queen" may be divided into three regions, top, middle, and bottom, and the LEDs in the top region of the multiple LEDs mounted on the back-front-lower logo decoration board 3173 may be collectively controlled to light up as the top group, the LEDs in the middle region of the multiple LEDs mounted on the back-front-lower logo decoration board 3173 may be collectively controlled to light up as the middle group, and the LEDs in the bottom region of the multiple LEDs mounted on the back-front-lower logo decoration board 3173 may be collectively controlled to light up as the bottom group, thereby controlling the lighting of the letters "Queen" in a striped pattern).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 240, the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 are: a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 of the door frame top unit 450 constitute frame lighting group A; a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420 constitute frame lighting group B; a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame left side unit 420 and the dish left decorative board 273 provided behind the dish left decorative lens 272 constitute frame lighting group C; a plurality of LEDs mounted on the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 of the performance operation unit 300 constitute frame lighting group D; 20a, the multiple LEDs 355a mounted on the circular outer button decorative board 355 and the LEDs 364a on the inner button decorative board 364 are divided into frame lighting group D, the multiple LEDs mounted on the lower right door frame decorative board 433 of the right door frame unit 430 and the right dish decorative board 278 located behind the right dish decorative lens 277 are divided into frame lighting group E, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the upper right door frame decorative board 432 of the right door frame unit 430 are divided into frame lighting group F. When the rainbow effect is performed, the LEDs are controlled to emit light for each group, with the LEDs in the same group emitting the same light color and the LEDs in different groups emitting different light colors.

Figure 241 is a timing diagram showing an example of a rainbow effect. As described above, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it starts a variation effect, such as a variation display of decorative patterns, on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special pattern, and controls the illumination of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5 in conjunction with the display on the effect display device 1600 (timing t0).

When the variation pattern command received from the main control board 1310 is a variation pattern that executes a rainbow effect, when the elapsed time from the start of the display of the decorative pattern variation reaches a predetermined timing t1, among the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, at least the multiple LEDs 320a mounted on the outer decorative board 320 of the performance operation unit 300, the multiple LEDs 355a mounted on the circular outer button decorative board 355, the LED 364a on the inner button decorative board 364, and the rear upper movable decorative board All lights are turned off except for the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the first decorative section 3211 on the upper rear of the body 3210, where five 7-segment display sections are lined up on the left and right, and the performance display device 1600 executes a button operation promotion performance in which a display (for example, "Press the button!") is displayed to prompt the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300, and the illumination of multiple LEDs 320a mounted on the performance operation section outer decorative board 320 of the performance operation unit 300, multiple LEDs 355a mounted on the annular outer button decorative board 355, and LED 364a on the inner button decorative board 364 is controlled.

Then, at timing t2, the player presses the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, or when the button valid period (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed without the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed (timing t2), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into first display area a to fifth display area e, and a rainbow effect display mode is displayed in which first display area a to fifth display area e are each displayed in a different display color. The LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 are divided into the above-mentioned frame lighting group A to frame lighting group F, and the LEDs included in each group of frame lighting group A to frame lighting group F are made to emit light in a different light color for each group. The LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 are divided into the above-mentioned first board lighting group to sixth board lighting group, and the LEDs included in each group are made to emit light in a different light color for each group.

In addition, as the variable time elapses, the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the performance display device 1600, the light emission colors of each of the frame light emission groups A to F, and the light emission colors of each of the first board light emission group to the sixth board light emission group are changed every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds) (timing t2 to t100).

In this example, when the player presses the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 at timing t2, the button operation prompt effect being executed by the effect display device 1600 (in this example, the effect displaying "Press the button!") is terminated, the varying decorative pattern is reduced in size and displayed in the upper right corner of the effect display device 1600, and "white" is displayed in the first display area a of the effect display device 1600, "yellow" in the second display area b, "green" in the third display area c, "blue" in the fourth display area d, and "purple" in the fifth display area e. Every predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds), the display area displaying "white" is changed to "yellow," the display area displaying "yellow" is changed to "green," the display area displaying "green" is changed to "blue," the display area displaying "blue" is changed to "purple," the display area displaying "purple" is changed to "red," and the display area displaying "red" is changed to "white."

In addition, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, the first board lighting group provided on the game board 5 is illuminated in "white," the second board lighting group in "yellow," the third board lighting group in "green," the fourth board lighting group in "blue," the fifth board lighting group in "purple," and the sixth board lighting group in "red," and every predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds), the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group illuminating in "white" is changed to "yellow," the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group illuminating in "yellow" is changed to "green," the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group illuminating in "green" is changed to "blue," the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group illuminating in "blue" is changed to "purple," the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group illuminating in "purple" is changed to "red," and the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group illuminating in "red" is changed to "white."

Similarly, when the player presses the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, frame lighting group A on the door frame 3 is illuminated in "white," frame lighting group B in "yellow," frame lighting group C in "green," frame lighting group D in "blue," frame lighting group E in "purple," and frame lighting group F in "red." Every predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds), the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "white" light is changed to "yellow," the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "yellow" light is changed to "green," the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "green" light is changed to "blue," the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "blue" light is changed to "purple," the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "purple" light is changed to "red," and the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "red" light is changed to "white."

In this way, by controlling the light emission colors of the LEDs on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 and game board 5 to switch between multiple light emission colors in a short unit of light emission time, it becomes possible to visually perceive the colors of the rainbow as being emitted, and to create an impactful light emission effect. Furthermore, by controlling the display of the effect display device 1600, the LEDs on the various decorative boards on the game board 5, and the LEDs on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 in conjunction with each other, it is possible to display multiple colors on the effect display device 1600, or to make the LEDs on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit multiple colors, and by switching the display and light emission colors in an even shorter time, it is possible to create an effect with more impact than usual.

In this example, the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to frame light emission groups A to F provided on the door frame 3, and the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the first board light emission groups to the sixth board light emission groups provided on the game board 5 are changed regularly in a predetermined order for each display area or group. However, the display colors and light emission colors may be changed irregularly for any combination of one or more (or all) of the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to frame light emission groups A to F provided on the door frame 3, and the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the first board light emission groups to the sixth board light emission groups provided on the game board 5, and the remaining colors may be changed regularly.

Furthermore, the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the performance display device 1600, the light-emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to frame lighting groups A to F, and the light-emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to the first board lighting group to the sixth board lighting group are not limited to being changed in the same order. Any combination of one or more (or all) of the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the performance display device 1600, the light-emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to frame lighting groups A to F, and the light-emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to the first board lighting group to the sixth board lighting group may be changed in a different order (for example, the light-emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to frame lighting groups A to F may be changed in the order of "white → yellow → green → blue → purple → red → white → yellow → ...", and the light-emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to the first board lighting group to the sixth board lighting group may be changed in the order of "red → purple → blue → green → yellow → white → red → purple → ...").

Furthermore, any combination of one or more (or all) of the display colors of the first display area a to fifth display area e of the performance display device 1600, the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to frame light emission groups A to F, and the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the first board light emission group to the sixth board light emission group may be a combination of multiple colors in which at least some of the colors are different (for example, the LEDs belonging to frame light emission groups A to F may be controlled to emit light in one of the light emission colors "white," "yellow," "green," "blue," "purple," or "red," and the LEDs belonging to the first board light emission group to the sixth board light emission group may be controlled to emit light in one of the light emission colors "white," "orange," "yellow-green," "blue," "pink," or "red").

Furthermore, the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to frame light emission groups A to F provided on the door frame 3, and the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the first board light emission groups to the sixth board light emission groups provided on the game board 5 are not limited to being changed at the same time (the timing of changing the colors is synchronized). Instead, any combination of one or more of the following (or all of them) may be changed at the same time (for example, after 1 second), with the remaining changes being made at different times (for example, every 1.5 seconds).

Furthermore, the period (predetermined period) until the display color of the first display area a to fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, the light emission color of the LEDs belonging to frame light emission groups A to F provided on the door frame 3, and the light emission color of the LEDs belonging to the first board light emission group to the sixth board light emission group provided on the game board 5 is changed does not have to be constant at all times, and some or all of the period may be made different. For example, the display color and light emission color may be changed every second at odd timings (t1, t3, t5, t7, t9, t11, t99) among timings t2 to t100, and every two seconds at even timings (t2, t4, t6, t8, t10, t98, t100).

In this example, prior to the rainbow effect, the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the first upper back decorative part 3211, where the five 7-segment display units of the upper back decorative body 3210 are lined up on the left and right, are controlled to illuminate. Specifically, as shown in Figure 241, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310 and controls the first upper back decorative part 3211, where the five 7-segment display units of the upper back decorative body 3210 are lined up on the left and right, to an off state during the period from timing t0 to timing t1, when the variation effect, such as the display of varying decorative patterns, is started on the effect display device 1600, until the button promotion effect is executed; and when the button promotion effect is executed at timing t1, the first upper back decorative part 3211, where the five 7-segment display units of the upper back decorative body 3210 are lined up on the left and right, is controlled to illuminate in a light emission pattern corresponding to the rainbow effect. In this example, when the button operation prompt performance begins (timing t1 to timing t2), the five 7-segment display units on the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 are controlled to emit red light, and the word "Hot!" is repeatedly displayed from right to left on the five 7-segment display units on the rear upper first decorative unit 3211.

Furthermore, when the button operation prompt effect is being executed and the player presses the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, or the button valid period (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed without the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed, the button operation prompt effect ends, and then the rainbow effect begins (timing t2), the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 maintain their red luminous color without changing their luminous color, and the words "Rainbow Chance!" are repeatedly displayed from right to left on the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 until the rainbow effect ends (timing t2 to timing t100). As described above, in this example, the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 are controlled to emit red light. Furthermore, in the rainbow effect, the LEDs belonging to frame lighting groups A to F and the LEDs belonging to board lighting groups 1 to 6 are controlled to emit the same red light as the five 7-segment display units on the rear upper first decorative portion 3211. Therefore, although the light color of the five 7-segment display units on the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is not changed, the player can recognize that light emission control related to the rainbow effect is being performed.

In addition, LEDs (decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted) belonging to frame lighting groups A to F, which are provided on the door frame 3, and LEDs (decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted) belonging to board lighting groups 1 to 6, which are provided on the game board 5, are provided around the rear upper first decorative part 3211, where the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are lined up on the left and right. When the button operation promotion effect ends, it gives the impression that the luminous decoration is spreading around the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper first decorative part 3211, which are lit up in red, thereby enhancing the effect and increasing interest in the game.

In this example, even after the rainbow effect ends (timing t100 to timing t101), the light emission control of the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 continues without changing the light emission color. Specifically, after the rainbow effect ends (timing t100), for example, the light emission control is performed so that the word "Reach!" repeatedly flows from right to left on the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 in response to the occurrence of a reach decorative pattern. Alternatively, the light emission control is performed so that the word "Super Hot!" repeatedly flows from right to left on the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 during the reach decorative pattern reach effect. Furthermore, in this example, the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 are controlled to an off state upon the cessation of the variable display of the decorative pattern. This allows the player to recognize that the variable display has ended. Furthermore, after the varying display of the decorative patterns has stopped, the five 7-segment display units of the back-upper first decorative unit 3211 may be controlled to an off state when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, in which case the moving display of letters on the five 7-segment display units of the back-upper first decorative unit 3211 may be stopped when the varying display of the decorative patterns has stopped. In this case too, the player can recognize that the varying performance has ended when the moving display of letters on the five 7-segment display units of the back-upper first decorative unit 3211 has stopped.

In this way, the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 are controlled to illuminate prior to the rainbow effect, and the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 continue to be controlled to illuminate even after the rainbow effect has ended. Therefore, the control of illumination of the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 that is executed in advance can increase anticipation for the start of the rainbow effect, and the control of illumination of the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 can increase anticipation for a jackpot even after the rainbow effect has ended.

In addition, the light emission control of the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 must be started at least prior to the rainbow effect and continue to be executed even after the rainbow effect has ended, and may be started at any time between timing t0 when the changing display of the decorative pattern begins and timing t2 when the rainbow effect begins (including when light emission control is started at timing t0), or may be ended at any time between timing t100 when the rainbow effect ends and timing t101 when the changing display of the decorative pattern stops (including when light emission control is stopped at timing t101). Furthermore, even if the display of the decorative patterns has stopped, if the display of the decorative patterns starts again before the specified period has elapsed, the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 may not be controlled to an off state. In this case, when the display of the decorative patterns has stopped, the moving display of characters on the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 may be stopped (timing t101), and when the display of the decorative patterns starts, the characters displayed on the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 may be updated and the moving display of the characters may be resumed from right to left on the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 (timing t0). Even in this case, the presence or absence of the moving display of the decorative patterns can be determined by the presence or absence of the moving display of characters on the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211.

In addition, the display modes on the first upper rear decorative section 3211 during the execution of the rainbow effect are not limited to those described above. For example, the display mode of the changing pattern may be displayed as a supplement to the decorative pattern changing effect being executed on the effect display device 1600, which becomes difficult to see due to the execution of the rainbow effect, or multiple LEDs may be controlled to flash in a predetermined lighting pattern to derive a mode corresponding to the special lottery result after the execution of the rainbow effect (for example, when the decorative pattern is displayed stationary). Alternatively, the number of lit LEDs may be changed when a predetermined increase or decrease condition is met, such as when the player operates the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 during the execution of the changing effect. This makes it possible to avoid anxiety that the changing decorative pattern display is not being executed due to the execution of the rainbow effect, or that the special lottery result will not be derived. Furthermore, the display of the decorative pattern on the effect display device 1600 may be hidden during the execution of the rainbow effect, which also helps to avoid the above-mentioned anxiety.

In addition, in the above example, the rainbow effect is initiated when the button operation prompt effect ends (when the player presses the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 while the button operation prompt effect is being executed, or when the button valid period (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed without the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed), but the rainbow effect may also be initiated when a specified execution condition is met, without the execution of the button operation prompt effect. For example, the rainbow effect may be initiated when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, or when a non-variable effect period in which no variable effect is executed after the variable effect has ended has reached a predetermined period of time.

In addition, in this example, when the rainbow effect ends, decorative symbols are displayed in a reach state with a high probability (including symbols that do not result in a reach state (so-called false symbols)) (timing t100). Then, when the rainbow effect ends, the rainbow effect display mode of the effect display device 1600 is turned off to execute the reach effect, and light emission control of the rainbow effect of the LEDs belonging to the 1st board light-emitting group through the 6th board light-emitting group provided on the game board 5 and the LEDs belonging to the frame light-emitting groups A through F provided on the door frame 3 is terminated, and light emission control is performed in a light-emitting mode corresponding to the reach effect displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In this example, a rainbow effect is displayed as a reach preview during the period from when the decorative symbol changes until the reach state is displayed. It should be noted that the rainbow effect may be displayed at a predetermined rate even when the decorative symbol does not reach (this may be a case where the decorative symbol does not reach and results in a jackpot, or a case where the decorative symbol does not reach and results in a miss), or when the decorative symbol reaches and does not result in a jackpot, or it may be displayed only when a jackpot is guaranteed (as a jackpot confirmation effect). The timing of the rainbow effect is also not limited to reach previews; it may be displayed as a reach preview during the period from when the decorative symbol reaches and until the decorative symbol is displayed stationary, or it may be displayed as a pre-read preview or other effect before the decorative symbol starts to change, or it may be displayed regardless of the decorative symbol change (for example, as a customer waiting demo effect when the decorative symbol change display does not start for a predetermined period of time).

As mentioned above, the rainbow effect is executed when there is a high probability of a jackpot, and is an important effect that increases the player's expectations. Therefore, in this example, the LED mounting surface of the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted is designed to have features that make the color of the LEDs, which are controlled to emit light during the rainbow effect, more vivid. Specifically, the game board 5 is provided with a plurality of decorative boards each mounting LEDs that are controlled to emit light in a rainbow effect, namely, a back-front upper left decorative board 3129 for illuminating and decorating the back-front upper left logo decoration 3122, a back-front left decorative board 3128 for illuminating and decorating the back-front left logo decoration 3121, the back-front upper left logo decoration 3122, and the back-front left sub-decorative board 3123, a back-front lower logo decoration board 3173 for illuminating and decorating the back-front lower logo decoration 3167, a back-front lower middle decorative board 3168 for illuminating and decorating the back-front lower middle decoration 3161, a back-front lower left inner decorative board 3169 for illuminating and decorating the back-front lower left inner decoration 3163, and a back-front lower left outer decoration board 3164 for illuminating and decorating the back-front lower left outer decoration 3165. The back front lower left outer decorative substrate 3170, the back front lower right inner decorative substrate 3171 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, the back front lower right outer decorative substrate 3172 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, the back front lower right decorative substrate 3152 for illuminating and decorating the back front right logo decoration part 3141, and the back front upper right decorative substrate 3151 for illuminating and decorating the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 have their surfaces coated with a white solder resist (protective material), and letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative substrates are screen printed using ink of a bright and saturated color (e.g., yellow). In other words, the surfaces of the multiple decorative boards mounted on the game board 5 and carrying LEDs that are controlled to emit light in a rainbow effect are coated with a white solder resist (protective material), which is the color with the highest reflective efficiency, and letters and symbols to prevent confusion between the mounted LEDs and other electronic components and other decorative boards are screen-printed using ink in a bright, saturated color (for example, yellow).

In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with multiple decorative boards that implement LEDs that are controlled to emit light in a rainbow color effect, namely, the door frame top central decorative board 455 of the door frame top unit 450, the door frame top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame left side unit 420, the dish left decorative board 273 provided behind the dish left decorative lens 272, and the door frame right side unit The surfaces of the lower right door frame decorative board 433 of the unit 430, the right dish decorative board 278 provided behind the right dish decorative lens 277, and the upper right door frame decorative board 432 of the right door frame unit 430 are coated with white solder resist (protective material), and letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards are screen-printed using ink of a high brightness and saturation (e.g., yellow). In other words, the surfaces of the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and mounting LEDs controlled to emit rainbow-colored light are coated with white solder resist (protective material), which is the color with the highest reflective efficiency, and letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards are screen-printed using ink of a high brightness and saturation (e.g., yellow).

The upper rear first decorative board (not shown), which is equipped with LEDs to illuminate and decorate the upper rear first decorative part 3211, where the five 7-segment display units of the upper rear movable decorative body 3210 are arranged side by side, is also coated with a white solder resist (protective material) on its surface, and letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards are screen-printed using ink of a high brightness and saturation (e.g., yellow). However, while full-color LEDs are mounted on the multiple decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3 and which are equipped with LEDs that are controlled to emit light in a rainbow effect, the upper rear first decorative board is equipped with LEDs that emit a single color (red in this example). Therefore, even when a rainbow effect is performed by lighting up the LEDs installed on the game board 5 or door frame 3, the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 do not change their luminous color, and only perform an effect in which letters, numbers, pictures, etc. are displayed on the five 7-segment display units using the same luminous color (red in this example). In other words, even when a rainbow effect is performed on the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 that display letters, numbers, pictures, etc., by not changing their luminous color, the letters, numbers, pictures, etc. displayed are displayed in a manner that is easy for players to see, preventing incorrect information from being conveyed to players.

In this way, in this example, the LED mounting surface of the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted is coated with a white solder resist (protective material) to increase reflection efficiency, so even when multiple full-color LEDs are used to emit a wide variety of colors, all light can be reflected uniformly to produce vivid colors.The back front upper left logo decoration 3122, back front left logo decoration 3121, back front upper left logo decoration 3122, back front left sub-decoration 3123, back front lower logo decoration 3167, back front lower middle decoration 3161, and back front lower left inner decoration 3163 provided on the game board 5 are The rear front lower left outer decorative element 3164, the rear front lower right inner decorative element 3165, the rear front lower right outer decorative element 3166, the rear front right logo decorative element 3141, and the rear front upper right logo decorative element 3142 can each be made to glow more brightly, and the door frame top unit 450, door frame left side unit 420, door frame left side unit 420, dish left decorative lens 272, door frame right side unit 430, dish right decorative lens 277, and door frame right side unit 430, which are installed on the door frame 3, can each be made to glow more brightly and vividly (clearly), enhancing the presentation effect. Furthermore, the five 7-segment display elements of the rear upper first decorative element 3211, which only glows in a single color (red in this example), can also be made to glow more brightly and vividly, enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, by screen-printing letters and symbols to avoid confusion with mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards using inks of high brightness and saturation (e.g., yellow), it is possible to approximate the reflection efficiency of the white solder resist (protective material) and the screen-printed letters and symbols, thereby achieving a nearly uniform reflection efficiency on the board surface. This allows all light to be reflected uniformly, even when multiple full-color LEDs are used to emit a wide variety of colors, reducing uneven illumination in the illuminated decoration and enhancing the presentation effect. Furthermore, by reducing the contrast between the white solder resist (protective material) and the screen-printed letters and symbols, the screen-printed letters and symbols on the surface of the decorative board are less noticeable when viewed through the lens covering the decorative board, regardless of whether the LEDs are emitting light. This prevents players from viewing information unrelated to the game and losing interest in the game when they are forced to look directly at the LED-mounted surface of these decorative boards. Furthermore, with conventional decorative substrates where letters and symbols are applied by screen printing using inks of low brightness and saturation (dark colors), such as black, even if the letters and symbols are not clearly visible when viewed through the lens covering the decorative substrate, the lens itself may appear dark, which can result in a poor appearance. However, by screen printing letters and symbols using inks of high brightness and saturation, the lens appears brighter, and the appearance is not impaired. It is desirable to use yellow, which has the closest reflection efficiency to white, as a color with high brightness and saturation, but any color other than low brightness and saturation colors (dark colors such as black and brown), such as yellow-green or light blue, can also achieve the above-mentioned effects.

In the above example, all of the multiple decorative boards mounted with LEDs whose light emission is controlled to produce a rainbow effect are coated on their surfaces with a white solder resist (protective material), but this is not limited to this. Some of the multiple decorative boards mounted with LEDs whose light emission is controlled to produce a rainbow effect may be coated on their surfaces with a solder resist (protective material) other than white (for example, green or black), or some or all of the multiple decorative boards mounted with LEDs whose light emission is controlled to produce a rainbow effect may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material) only on the surfaces where the LEDs are mounted, and the back surfaces where the LEDs are not mounted may be coated with a solder resist (protective material) other than white (for example, green or black).

In addition, letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted LEDs and other electronic components and other decorative boards are not limited to being applied by screen printing to the LED mounting surface using ink of a high brightness and saturation color (e.g., yellow). For some of the multiple decorative boards that mount LEDs whose light emission is controlled in a rainbow effect, they may be applied by screen printing to the LED mounting surface using ink of a low brightness and saturation color (e.g., black). For all or some of the multiple decorative boards that mount LEDs whose light emission is controlled in a rainbow effect, letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted LEDs and other electronic components and other decorative boards may be formed as foil-cut letters (i.e., cut-out letters formed by creating letters with a copper foil wiring pattern on the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed and then cutting out the copper foil around them), and the surface of these foil-cut letters may be coated with white solder resist (protective material) that is applied to the LED mounting surface. For some of the multiple decorative boards that mount LEDs whose light emission is controlled in a rainbow effect, they may be coated with two coats of white solder resist. The letters may be formed as white resist cut-out letters using solder resist (after coating the entire LED mounting surface with white solder resist (first layer), the letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards, and then the entire area excluding these is coated again with white solder resist (second layer), so that the masked area, i.e., the letters and symbols, are formed as white resist cut-out letters), or for all or some of the multiple decorative boards mounting LEDs that are controlled to emit light in a rainbow effect, the letters and symbols may be formed by means other than screen printing using ink of a high brightness and saturation color (e.g., yellow) on the surface on which the LEDs are mounted, for example, by screen printing using ink of a predetermined color (not only high brightness and saturation colors but also colors with low brightness and saturation) on the back side on which the LEDs are not mounted, or by forming them as foil cut-out letters, or by forming them as white resist cut-out letters using two coats of white resist, etc., in order to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards. Even in these cases, it is possible to prevent a decrease in reflection efficiency on the surface on which the LEDs are mounted, and by making the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface approximately uniform, it is possible to achieve uniform light emission, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

The LEDs mounted on the decorative board are electronic components whose packaging is white or close to white (e.g., ivory, beige, cream), and only packaged LEDs are mounted on the LED mounting surface of these decorative boards; no other electronic components are mounted. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 in this example is able to prevent a decrease in reflection efficiency due to the LED packaging, thereby achieving uniform light emission on the LED mounting surface. Furthermore, in addition to connectors for connecting electrical wiring to the decorative board, one or more electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and circuits for controlling the light emission of multiple LEDs (e.g., constant current drive circuits) may be mounted on the non-LED mounting surface. The connector is an electronic component whose housing is white or a color close to white (e.g., ivory, beige, or cream), the constant current drive circuit is an electronic component that is a surface-mounted (SMD) LED driver IC housed in an IC package that may be black as an integrated circuit, the resistor is an SMD electronic component that is black, blue, or white, etc., and the capacitor is an SMD electronic component that is black, brown, gray, or white, etc. Note that in the decorative board described above, electronic components with low brightness or saturation, such as black, brown, or gray, are only required to be mounted on the non-LED mounting surface without being mounted on the LED mounting surface, while electronic components with high brightness or saturation, such as white or a color close to white (e.g., ivory, beige, or cream), may be mounted on the LED mounting surface. This makes the electronic components mounted on the surface of the decorative board less noticeable when viewed through the lens covering the board, and it also prevents a decrease in the reflection efficiency of the LED mounting surface, making the reflection efficiency approximately uniform, thereby achieving highly efficient, uniform light emission and enhancing the presentation effect.

In this example, the light intensity adjustment button 228 is also operated when a rainbow effect is executed as a variable effect, and the light intensity of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5 can be changed (adjusted) at the timing when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated. Specifically, when one of the two light intensity adjustment buttons 228 with the "+" symbol is pressed, the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5 immediately become brighter (increase in light intensity), and when the button with the "-" symbol is pressed, the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5 immediately become dimmer (decrease in light intensity).

As shown in Figure 241, when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of a variable effect that produces a rainbow effect, the light intensity of the LEDs that produce the rainbow effect lighting decoration (also called rainbow light emission) of the multiple LEDs in the 1st board lighting group to the 6th board lighting group and the multiple LEDs in frame lighting group A to frame lighting group F is immediately changed regardless of whether the LEDs are in an off state or not, and the light emission of the multiple LEDs in the 1st board lighting group to the 6th board lighting group and the multiple LEDs in frame lighting group A to frame lighting group F is controlled with the changed light intensity. In this example, while the button operation promotion effect is being executed, the multiple LEDs of the first board light-emitting group to the sixth board light-emitting group, the multiple LEDs of the frame light-emitting groups A to C, and the multiple LEDs of the frame light-emitting groups E to F are controlled to be in an off state, but the multiple LEDs of the frame light-emitting group D (the multiple LEDs 320a mounted on the outer peripheral decorative board 320 of the effect operation unit 300, the multiple LEDs 355a mounted on the annular outer button decorative board 355, and the LED 364a of the middle button decorative board 364) are kept in an on state, and when the player operates the light intensity adjustment button 228, the multiple LEDs of the outer peripheral decorative board 320 of the effect operation unit 300 are kept in an on state. The multiple LEDs 320a mounted on 320, the multiple LEDs 355a mounted on the annular outer button decorative board 355, and the LEDs 364a on the inner button decorative board 364 are immediately controlled to emit light at the changed light intensity, so it is possible to adjust the light intensity of all the LEDs in the first board lighting group to the sixth board lighting group and the multiple LEDs in the frame lighting group A to frame lighting group F while observing changes in the light intensity of the multiple LEDs 320a mounted on the outer button decorative board 320 of the performance operation unit 300, the multiple LEDs 355a mounted on the annular outer button decorative board 355, and the LEDs 364a on the inner button decorative board 364.

On the other hand, for the LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decorative board provided on the game board 5, which is provided on the rear upper first decorative part 3211 where the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are lined up on the left and right, and which do not provide rainbow color effect illumination decoration, the light intensity will not be changed (adjusted) even if the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of the variable effect that produces the rainbow color effect (the light intensity is fixed). In this way, during the execution of the variable effect that executes the rainbow effect, the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decorative board provided on the rear upper first decorative part 3211 where the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are lined up on the left and right cannot be changed (adjusted), and the light intensity (brightness) remains constant regardless of whether the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated or not.Therefore, it can be used as a standard when changing the light intensity of the multiple LEDs in the 1st board lighting group to the 6th board lighting group and the multiple LEDs in the frame lighting group A to frame lighting group F, and the difference between the brightness of these LEDs and the brightness of the LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decorative board provided on the rear upper first decorative part 3211 becomes clear, making it easy to adjust the brightness to the player's preference. Furthermore, the LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decorative board provided on the rear upper first decorative part 3211 where the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are lined up on the left and right may be made so that the light intensity cannot be changed (adjusted) at any time, even when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, regardless of whether or not a variable effect that produces a rainbow effect is being performed.

In addition, in this example, the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is provided with a rear upper first decorative board on which LEDs whose light intensity (brightness) cannot be adjusted and which do not produce rainbow-colored illumination are mounted. Around the rear upper first decorative board 3211 on which five 7-segment displays are lined up on the left and right, LEDs (decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted) belonging to frame lighting groups A to F mounted on the door frame 3 and LEDs (decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted) belonging to board lighting groups 1 to 6 mounted on the game board 5 are provided, with adjustable light intensity (brightness). In this way, the LEDs that serve as the basis for adjusting the light intensity (brightness) and the LEDs that change the light intensity (brightness) are positioned close to each other, making it easy to compare the light intensity (brightness) and adjust the light intensity (brightness) to the player's preference.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 in this example executes the rainbow effect when there is a high probability of a jackpot, but there are situations in which the rainbow effect cannot be executed properly depending on the state of the gaming machine. In such cases, not only is it impossible to expect the excitement-boosting effect of the rainbow effect to be lost, but it may actually decrease interest in the game.

For example, if an abnormality occurs that makes it difficult for the effect display device 1600 to display the rainbow effect display mode (such as an abnormality where the LEDs (which may be some or all) of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 do not emit light, or an abnormality where the display is disrupted due to noise, etc.), or if an abnormality occurs that makes it difficult to control the light emission of the rainbow effect from the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or game board 5 (such as an abnormality where the LEDs (which may be some or all) of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or game board 5 do not emit light, or an abnormality where the light emission mode is disrupted due to noise, etc.), the rainbow effect cannot be achieved in the complete form as designed using the display by the effect display device 1600 and the light emission by the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or game board 5, and an incomplete rainbow effect will be executed, with some of the display by the effect display device 1600 and the light emission by the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or game board 5 missing.

When this kind of incomplete rainbow effect is executed, not only is it impossible to hope for the exciting effect that the original rainbow effect would have, but it could also lead to the player perceiving that an effect other than the rainbow effect is being executed, which could lead to misunderstanding. In this example, we have done everything possible to prevent such misunderstandings from occurring to the player. This will be explained with reference to Figure 242.

In this example, in the pachinko machine 1, if an abnormal state occurs at timing t6 while a rainbow effect is being executed, in which one of the following occurs: an abnormality that makes it difficult to display the rainbow effect display mode on the effect display device 1600; an abnormality that makes it difficult to control the rainbow effect light emission of the LEDs on the various decorative boards mounted on the door frame 3; or an abnormality that makes it difficult to control the rainbow effect light emission of the LEDs on the various decorative boards mounted on the game board 5, the rainbow effect light emission decoration using the multiple LEDs in the 1st board light-emitting group through the 6th board light-emitting group mounted on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs in frame light-emitting groups A through F mounted on the door frame 3 is terminated, the multiple LEDs in the 1st board light-emitting group through the 6th board light-emitting group are controlled to an off state, and the multiple LEDs in frame light-emitting groups A through F are controlled to an abnormality alert light-emitting mode (in this example, a mode in which they flash red at maximum brightness (light amount)) to alert the occurrence of an abnormality.

As shown in FIG. 242, in the event of an abnormal state in which any of the following occurs at any time between timing t0 and timing t2 before the start of the rainbow effect in the variable effect that executes the rainbow effect: an abnormality that makes it difficult to display the rainbow effect display mode on the effect display device 1600; an abnormality that makes it difficult to control the rainbow effect light emission of the LEDs on the various decorative boards attached to the door frame 3; or an abnormality that makes it difficult to control the rainbow effect light emission of the LEDs on the various decorative boards attached to the game board 5, even at timing t2 when the rainbow effect would normally start, the rainbow effect light emission decoration using the multiple LEDs in the first board light emission group through the sixth board light emission group attached to the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs in frame light emission group A through frame light emission group F attached to the door frame 3 will not begin, and the multiple LEDs in the first board light emission group through the sixth board light emission group will be controlled to an off state, and the multiple LEDs in frame light emission group A through frame light emission group F will be controlled to emit an abnormality alert light emission mode (in this example, a mode in which they flash red at maximum brightness (light amount)) to alert the occurrence of an abnormality.

Furthermore, if the above-mentioned abnormality occurs at timing t6 during the execution of a variable performance that executes a rainbow-colored effect, the display of the rainbow-colored effect display mode on the performance display device 1600 will disappear, and a display will be displayed to notify the user that the abnormality has occurred. Similarly, if the above-mentioned abnormality occurs at any timing between timing t0 and timing t2 before the start of the rainbow-colored effect in the variable performance that executes a rainbow-colored effect, a display will be displayed to notify the user that the abnormality has occurred without starting to display the rainbow-colored effect display mode on the performance display device 1600. Note that it is also possible to not execute some of the rainbow-colored effect display modes, and even in this case, the display notifying the user that an abnormality has occurred will allow the user to recognize that an abnormality has occurred.

In this way, in this example, the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to stop or not start the rainbow effect if it cannot be achieved in the complete form as designed using the display by the effect display device 1600 and the illumination by the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5. This makes it possible to prevent the rainbow effect from being executed in an incomplete form, thereby preventing players from being misled.

In addition, even if an abnormal condition occurs during the execution of a variable effect that produces a rainbow effect, the LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decorative board provided on the rear upper first decorative part 3211, where the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are lined up left and right, may continue to be controlled to emit light corresponding to the variable effect that produces the rainbow effect, without being controlled to an off state or an abnormality notification light mode. In this case, even if the occurrence of an abnormal condition prevents the rainbow effect light-emitting decoration produced by the multiple LEDs in the first board light-emitting group through the sixth board light-emitting group provided on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs in frame light-emitting group A through frame light-emitting group F provided on the door frame 3 from ending or starting, or even if the multiple LEDs in frame light-emitting group A through frame light-emitting group F are controlled to emit light in an abnormality notification light mode, the player can be made to recognize that the variable effect is continuing, and the player will not mistakenly believe that the variable effect has ended.

In addition, the first decorative part 3211 on the rear upper back may be turned off or not depending on the type of abnormal condition (degree of urgency). For example, an error that has little impact on the game or the execution of the rainbow effect (a minor error: when the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 is detected (when the opening of the door frame 3 makes it difficult to see the light emitted by the LEDs on the various decorative boards attached to the door frame 3)), or when a vibration sensor (not shown) detects vibration of the game board 5 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) (when an action such as hitting the pachinko machine 1 is performed) may be turned off. When it is detected that the pachinko machine 1 is full of game balls, when it is detected that the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and the display of the performance display device 1600 are blurred and difficult to see due to the vibration of the pachinko machine 1, when a detection signal is input from the full-tank detection sensor 154 (when it is detected that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls), when a detection signal is input from the ball-out detection sensor 574 (when it is detected that there are no game balls in the guide passage 570a), etc., it is possible that cheating is occurring. For errors with a low probability of occurring, the LEDs mounted on the upper back first decorative board provided on the upper back first decorative part 3211 are controlled to light up without being turned off. On the other hand, for errors with a serious impact on the game or the execution of the rainbow effect (serious errors: errors that are likely to indicate cheating, such as when radio wave interference is detected (when electromagnetic waves or the like cause noise in the illumination of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or game board 5, or when noise is present in the display on the effect display device 1600), when magnetic interference is detected, when a detection signal is input from the second start hole sensor 2401 when the second start hole 2004 is not open, or when a detection signal is input from the large prize hole sensor 2402 when the game is not in a jackpot or small prize game state), the upper back first decorative part 3211 is controlled to light off, thereby suspending or ending the variable effect even while it is being executed. This allows the control state of the upper back first decorative part 3211 to be changed depending on the severity of the error, making it possible to determine whether an abnormality has occurred.

In addition, whether or not the rainbow effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 is erased may be varied depending on the type of abnormal condition (degree of urgency). For example, for errors that have a small impact on the execution of the above-mentioned games or rainbow effects, the rainbow effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 may not be erased, and a warning display (e.g., "Door Open") may be displayed that partially overlaps the rainbow effect display mode. On the other hand, for errors that have a significant impact on the execution of the above-mentioned games or rainbow effects, the rainbow effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 may be erased, and only a warning display (e.g., "Illegal Winning Occurred!") may be displayed, thereby suspending or terminating the display of the rainbow effect (rainbow effect display mode) even while the rainbow effect is being executed. This allows the display mode of the effect display device 1600 to be varied depending on the severity of the error, making it possible to determine whether an abnormality has occurred. Furthermore, when an error that has a significant impact on the execution of the above-mentioned game or rainbow effects is controlled to turn off the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and to erase the display of the rainbow effect display mode on the effect display device 1600, the effect display of the rainbow effect display mode, etc. on the effect display device 1600 may be terminated a predetermined period later than the timing of turning off the rear upper first decorative portion 3211. In this case, sudden changes in the display content on the effect display device 1600 can be prevented, and the display content can be changed while the impression of the rainbow effect display mode, etc., remains.

Furthermore, when an abnormal state occurs, depending on the type of abnormal state (degree of urgency), any one or any combination of two or more (including all) of the following may be executed: a display on the effect display device 1600 notifying that an abnormal state has occurred; a notification by controlling the LED on the door frame 3 to emit light in an error mode; and a notification by audio output that an abnormal state has occurred. For example, when a minor error that has little impact on gameplay occurs, any one or any combination of two of the following may be executed: a display on the effect display device 1600 notifying that an abnormal state has occurred; a notification by controlling the LED on the door frame 3 to emit light in an error mode; and a notification by audio output that an abnormal state has occurred. Furthermore, when a serious error that has a serious impact on gameplay occurs, all of the following may be executed: a display on the effect display device 1600 notifying that an abnormal state has occurred; a notification by controlling the LED on the door frame 3 to emit light in an error mode; and a notification by audio output that an abnormal state has occurred.

In addition, in this example, if an abnormality occurs during the execution of the rainbow effect (timing t6) or before the start of the rainbow effect (any timing between timing t0 and timing t2) in a variable effect that executes a rainbow effect, and the abnormality is resolved during the execution of the rainbow effect (before the rainbow effect ends) and the state returns to normal from the abnormal state, the abnormality notification light-up mode by the multiple LEDs in frame lighting groups A to F will end, but the rainbow effect illumination decoration by the multiple LEDs in the 1st board lighting group to the 6th board lighting group provided on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs in frame lighting groups A to F provided on the door frame 3 will not be executed (the rainbow effect illumination decoration will not resume (will not return to the rainbow effect illumination decoration)).

In other words, if the rainbow effect illumination decoration is terminated or not started due to an abnormality such as noise that disrupts the light emission behavior of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or game board 5, it is possible that noise will occur again even if it is determined that the abnormality has been resolved. In such a case, if the rainbow effect illumination decoration is controlled to resume upon resolution of the abnormality, there is a risk that the rainbow effect illumination decoration will be repeatedly executed and terminated, which could confuse the player. For this reason, in this example, if the rainbow effect illumination decoration is terminated or not started due to the occurrence of an abnormality, the rainbow effect illumination decoration will not be executed or resumed even if the abnormality is resolved during the rainbow effect execution period.

For example, as shown in FIG. 242, if an abnormality occurs at timing t6 during the execution of a variable rainbow effect in which noise or the like makes it difficult to control the illumination of the rainbow effect by any of the multiple LEDs in the first board illumination group through the sixth board illumination group provided on the gaming board 5, the illumination decoration of the rainbow effect provided by the multiple LEDs in the first board illumination group through the sixth board illumination group provided on the gaming board 5 and the multiple LEDs in frame illumination groups A through F provided on the door frame 3 will be terminated, the illumination of the multiple LEDs in the first board illumination group through the sixth board illumination group will be controlled to an off state, and the illumination of the multiple LEDs in frame illumination groups A through F will be controlled in an abnormality alert illumination mode in which they flash red at maximum brightness (light output).

At this time, the effect display device 1600 will erase the rainbow effect display mode and display a warning (such as "An abnormality has occurred"), but the control data for this rainbow effect display mode is updated according to the scheduler. Also, the LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decorative board provided on the rear upper first decorative part 3211, where the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are lined up horizontally, do not perform the rainbow effect light-emitting decoration, but continue to control the light emission corresponding to the variable effect that executes the rainbow effect, so that the player can be made aware that the variable effect is continuing even if the rainbow effect display mode display on the effect display device 1600 disappears. Also, in the abnormal state described above, a warning sound is output, allowing players and game store staff to recognize that an abnormal state has occurred by listening to the warning sound.

Furthermore, at time t10 after the abnormal state has occurred, when the noise or other issues are resolved and the game board 5 is returned to a state where it is possible to control the light emission of the rainbow effect of the multiple LEDs in the first board light-emitting group through the sixth board light-emitting group (time t10), the effect display device 1600 ends the warning display and resumes displaying the rainbow effect display mode. As described above, even during an abnormal state, the control data for the rainbow effect display mode is updated according to the scheduler, and the rainbow effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a mode corresponding to the elapsed time since the start of the variable effect. This means that the rainbow effect display mode corresponding to time t10, when the noise or other issues are resolved and the game board 5 is restored from the abnormal state, is displayed, rather than the rainbow effect display mode that was displayed at time t6 when an abnormality occurred that made it difficult to control the light emission of the rainbow effect by any of the multiple LEDs in the first board light-emitting group through the sixth board light-emitting group on the game board 5.

In addition, in this example, even if the abnormality is resolved at timing t10, the abnormality alert light-emitting mode, in which the multiple LEDs in frame light-emitting group A to frame light-emitting group F flash red at maximum brightness (light output), continues for a certain period (e.g., 30 seconds) (timing t10 to timing t11). In other words, if an abnormality occurs again before the certain period has passed after the abnormality is resolved (timing t10), the abnormality alert light-emitting mode will not be terminated at the timing when the certain period has passed, but will continue even after the certain period has passed. As a result, if abnormalities frequently occur and are resolved, the abnormality alert light-emitting mode can be continuously activated without repeatedly terminating and resuming the light-emitting control in the abnormality alert light-emitting mode each time, making it easier for game store staff and others to notice.

Furthermore, if an abnormality occurs at timing t6, the multiple LEDs in the first board lighting group through the sixth board lighting group provided on the gaming board 5 are turned off (timing t6), and even after the abnormality is resolved at timing t10, the multiple LEDs in the first board lighting group through the sixth board lighting group provided on the gaming board 5 will remain turned off and will not return to the rainbow-colored lighting decoration (timing t10 to timing t100).

Similarly, if an abnormality occurs at timing t6, the LEDs in frame lighting groups A to F on the door frame 3 are controlled to emit light in an abnormality notification light mode (timing t6), and then if the abnormality is resolved at timing t10 and a certain period of time passes without another abnormality occurring, the LEDs in frame lighting groups A to F on the door frame 3 are controlled to an off state and do not return to the rainbow-colored lighting decoration (timing t10 to timing t100).

Then, at timing t100, when the rainbow effect ends and the reach effect begins, light emission control is executed for the multiple LEDs in the 1st board light-emitting group through the 6th board light-emitting group provided on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs in the frame light-emitting groups A through F provided on the door frame 3, causing them to emit light in a manner appropriate to the reach effect. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example does not return to the rainbow effect light-emitting decoration even if an abnormality is resolved during the execution of the rainbow effect, so it is possible to determine whether an abnormality has occurred during the execution of the rainbow effect. Note that if an abnormality occurs before the start of the rainbow effect and the abnormality is resolved before the start of the rainbow effect, the rainbow effect light-emitting decoration may be started at timing t2, when the rainbow effect is to begin.

Furthermore, it is not limited to starting light emission control of the multiple LEDs in the 1st board light-emitting group to the 6th board light-emitting group provided on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs in the frame light-emitting group A to the frame light-emitting group F provided on the door frame 3 at time t100 when the rainbow effect ends (the time when the effect executed next after the rainbow effect (in this example, the reach effect) starts), rather than at time t10 when the abnormality is resolved (not limited to starting light emission control at time t100), but may also be when a variable effect executing a rainbow effect ends, when a variable effect executing a rainbow effect ends and the next variable effect starts, when a demo effect starts after a variable effect executing a rainbow effect ends without the next variable effect starting, etc. Even in this case, it is possible to determine that an abnormality occurred during the execution of the rainbow effect or the execution of the variable effect in question.

In addition, if the abnormality is resolved after the variable effect that executes the rainbow effect has ended, light emission control may be initiated for at least the multiple LEDs in the first board lighting group through the sixth board lighting group provided on the game board 5, out of the multiple LEDs in the first board lighting group through the sixth board lighting group provided on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs in the frame lighting groups A through F provided on the door frame 3, at the time the abnormality is resolved.In this case, if the abnormality is resolved during the execution of a variable effect different from the variable effect in which the abnormality occurred, and a rainbow effect is being executed at the time the abnormality is resolved, control may be made to the light emission mode of the rainbow effect at that time.

Furthermore, when the abnormality is resolved, some of the LEDs may be returned to rainbow-colored illumination. For example, when the abnormality is resolved, among the LEDs in the first to sixth board illumination groups provided on the game board 5, the LEDs in the fourth board illumination group may be returned to rainbow-colored illumination, and after a certain period of time has passed since the abnormality was resolved, among the LEDs in the frame illumination groups A to F provided on the door frame 3, frame illumination group A may be returned to rainbow-colored illumination. In this case, the schedule data for the illumination control pattern for items that were not subject to illumination control during the abnormal state is advanced, and illumination is resumed from the illumination mode at the time the abnormality was resolved, rather than the illumination mode at the time the abnormality occurred. In this way, when the abnormality is resolved, some of the LEDs are returned to rainbow-colored illumination and other LEDs are turned off, making it possible to determine that an abnormality occurred during the execution of the rainbow-colored illumination, since only some of the LEDs are illuminated with rainbow-colored illumination.

In addition, in this example, even during an abnormal state, the light intensity adjustment button 228 can be operated to change the light intensity (brightness) settings for the multiple LEDs in the first board lighting group through the sixth board lighting group and the multiple LEDs in the frame lighting group A through frame lighting group F.

However, in a normal state where no abnormality has occurred, the light intensity (brightness) of the multiple LEDs in the 1st board lighting group to the 6th board lighting group and the multiple LEDs in the frame lighting group A to the frame lighting group F is immediately changed when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, and the light emission of the multiple LEDs in the 1st board lighting group to the 6th board lighting group and the multiple LEDs in the frame lighting group A to the frame lighting group F is controlled with the changed light intensity (brightness). In contrast, in a state where an abnormality has occurred, the light intensity (brightness) setting of the multiple LEDs in the 1st board lighting group to the 6th board lighting group and the multiple LEDs in the frame lighting group A to the frame lighting group F is immediately changed when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated. Although the set value is changed, the multiple LEDs in the 1st board lighting group to the 6th board lighting group and the multiple LEDs in frame lighting group A to frame lighting group F do not emit light at the changed light intensity (brightness) at the time the operation is accepted. Instead, after the abnormality is resolved, specifically, the multiple LEDs in the 1st board lighting group to the 6th board lighting group are controlled to emit light at the changed light intensity (brightness) from time t10 when the door frame 3 is closed and the abnormality is resolved, and the multiple LEDs in frame lighting group A to frame lighting group F are controlled to emit light at the changed light intensity (brightness) from time t11 when the door frame 3 is closed and the abnormality is resolved and a certain period of time has passed.

In this way, even if the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated when an abnormality occurs, the light intensity (brightness) of the multiple LEDs in the 1st board lighting group through the 6th board lighting group and the multiple LEDs in the frame lighting group A through frame lighting group F will not change, preventing the abnormality notification light-emitting mode from becoming difficult to notice. Furthermore, even when an abnormality occurs, the light intensity (brightness) setting is changed by accepting operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228, and this is reflected in the actual LED light-emitting state after the abnormality is resolved, so the player's opportunity to adjust the light intensity (brightness) is not taken away even when an abnormality occurs.

In this example, a first decorative board on the rear upper back is provided on which multiple LEDs that cannot be adjusted in light intensity (hereinafter referred to as a non-dimming LED group) that illuminate and decorate the above-mentioned 7-segment display are mounted, separate from multiple decorative boards on which multiple LEDs that can be adjusted in light intensity (hereinafter referred to as a dimming LED group) belonging to the first board lighting group through the sixth board lighting group are mounted, and which are provided on the game board 5. However, this is not limited to this, and LEDs that illuminate and decorate the 7-segment display may be mounted on part of any of the multiple decorative boards on which multiple LEDs belonging to the first board lighting group through the sixth board lighting group are mounted. In other words, multiple LEDs that can be adjusted in light intensity (dimming LED group) and multiple LEDs that cannot be adjusted in light intensity (non-dimming LED group) may be mounted on a single decorative board.

For example, a dimmable LED group consisting of multiple LEDs with adjustable light intensity and a non-dimmable LED group consisting of multiple LEDs with non-adjustable light intensity may be arranged at a predetermined interval. In this case, the distance between adjacent LEDs in the dimmable LED group and the distance between adjacent LEDs in the non-dimmable LED group may be arranged closer than the distance between the dimmable LED group and the non-dimmable LED group. This configuration makes it easier to distinguish between the dimmable LED group and the non-dimmable LED group, and to compare the brightness of the LEDs with adjustable light intensity and the LEDs with non-adjustable light intensity.

In addition, LEDs with adjustable light intensity (hereinafter referred to as dimmable LEDs) and LEDs without adjustable light intensity (hereinafter referred to as non-dimmable LEDs) can be packaged in plastic of the same or a similar color (white in this example), or the same type of packaging can be used.This allows the dimmable LEDs and non-dimmable LEDs to emit light under similar conditions, so by comparing the brightness of the dimmable LEDs with that of the non-dimmable LEDs, the difference between the brightness of the dimmable LEDs after brightness adjustment and the brightness of the non-dimmable LEDs becomes clear, making it easier for players to adjust the brightness to their liking.

In addition, multiple through holes may be formed between the dimmable LED group and the non-dimmable LED group. In the area of the decorative board surface where the through holes are formed, the light emitted from the LEDs is not reflected and leaks to the back side of the decorative board (the surface where the LEDs are not mounted). Therefore, by forming through holes between the dimmable LED group and the non-dimmable LED group, interference between the light from the dimmable LEDs and the light from the non-dimmable LEDs is suppressed, making it possible to visually recognize the light from each LED individually. This allows brightness to be adjusted based on the light from the dimmable LED group alone, and it also makes it possible to use the light from the non-dimmable LED group alone as an indicator for brightness adjustment, improving the accuracy of the comparison and making it easier to adjust the brightness to the player's preference. Furthermore, by forming through holes with a smaller outer diameter than the outer diameters of the dimmable and non-dimmable LEDs (the proportion (area) of one through hole on the LED mounting surface (front surface) of the decorative board is less than the proportion (area) of one dimmable LED or one non-dimmable LED), it is possible to prevent unnecessary leakage of light from the dimmable and non-dimmable LEDs from the through holes to the back surface (non-LED mounting surface) of the decorative board. In this case, by making the number of through holes formed between the dimmable and non-dimmable LEDs greater than the number of dimmable LEDs or non-dimmable LEDs mounted to the side of the through holes, it is possible to suppress reflection and interference of light emitted from the dimmable and non-dimmable LEDs while preventing unnecessary reduction in the brightness of the dimmable and non-dimmable LEDs.

Furthermore, by providing a three-dimensional object (such as an electronic component or structure having a predetermined thickness) on the LED mounting surface (front surface) of the decorative board that separates part or all of the dimmable LED group from the non-dimmable LED group, reflection and interference of light emitted from the dimmable LEDs and non-dimmable LEDs may be suppressed. For example, electronic components mounted on circuit boards such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, ICs, and LED drivers may be mounted between the dimmable LEDs and non-dimmable LEDs on the LED mounting surface (front surface) of the decorative board. In this way, by providing electronic components with a predetermined thickness that protrude from the LED mounting surface (front surface) of the decorative board between the dimmable LEDs and non-dimmable LEDs, part or all of the dimmable LEDs and non-dimmable LEDs may be separated, thereby suppressing reflection and interference of light emitted from the dimmable LEDs and non-dimmable LEDs.

In addition, the electronic components placed between the dimmable LED and the non-dimmable LED may have a dark appearance (black, gray, green, blue, brown, etc.) with low reflectivity (they may also have some parts that are not dark (for example, metallic parts such as silver, or transparent parts)). This can further enhance the effect of suppressing reflection and interference of light emitted from the dimmable LED and the non-dimmable LED.

In addition, in the above example, the upper rear first decorative part 3211, in which five 7-segment display parts are arranged side by side on the upper rear first decorative board on which non-dimmable LEDs are mounted, is formed to a size that extends to the left and right ends of the performance display device 1600, making it easy for players to notice the letters, numbers, pictures, etc. displayed by the 7-segment display part of the upper rear first decorative part 3211. However, it is also possible to execute a performance that is less noticeable to players by, for example, forming the upper rear first decorative part 3211 with a single 7-segment display part, or by providing a decorative board that is smaller than the other decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted. In this case, players who notice the presence of the 7-segment display part can be given further enjoyment by the performance executed by the 7-segment display part in addition to the performance by the performance display device 1600, etc. Furthermore, if the surface of a single decorative substrate on which multiple LEDs are mounted is configured to be divided into an area where multiple LEDs that illuminate and decorate the decorative body covering the decorative substrate are mounted, and an area where multiple LEDs that illuminate and decorate a 7-segment display unit provided on part of the decorative body are mounted, the area where multiple LEDs that illuminate and decorate the 7-segment display unit provided on part of the decorative body are mounted can be narrower than the area where multiple LEDs that illuminate and decorate the decorative body covering the decorative substrate are mounted.

In this way, the non-dimmable LEDs that serve as the basis for brightness adjustment and the dimmable LEDs that change brightness are mounted close together on a single decorative board, making it possible to place the dimmable LEDs and non-dimmable LEDs closer together than if they were mounted on different boards, making it easier to compare the brightness of the dimmable LEDs and non-dimmable LEDs.

In addition, in the above example, the brightness of the LEDs that provide the rainbow effect illumination, specifically the LEDs included in the first board illumination group through the sixth board illumination group and the LEDs included in frame illumination groups A through F, is adjustable, while the brightness of the LEDs that do not provide the rainbow effect illumination, specifically the LEDs that illuminate the upper back rear first decorative section 3211 where the five 7-segment display sections of the upper back rear decorative body 3210 are lined up left and right, is not adjustable. However, in addition to the LEDs that illuminate the upper back rear first decorative section 3211, one or more non-rainbow LEDs that do not provide the rainbow effect illumination may also be provided on the door frame 3 or game board 5. These non-rainbow LEDs are controlled to be turned off when the rainbow effect is executed, or controlled to provide illumination different from the rainbow effect illumination. Although they do not provide the rainbow effect illumination, their brightness is adjustable, unlike the LEDs that illuminate the upper back rear first decorative section 3211. In this way, the results of brightness adjustments made during the rainbow effect can be reflected even in non-rainbow LEDs that do not perform rainbow effect lighting decorations, so these non-rainbow LEDs can also be made to light up at the player's preferred brightness (light intensity) in the lighting decorations that are performed after the rainbow effect.

Furthermore, when the above-mentioned dimmable LEDs are performing rainbow-colored illumination, the emitted color changes (flickers) in a short period of time, making it difficult to accurately determine the light intensity (brightness) based on the light from these dimmable LEDs. Therefore, even if the player thinks they have adjusted the light intensity (brightness) to their liking, the problem is that the light intensity (brightness) may actually be set to a different level than the player's preferred level. As mentioned above, if non-rainbow-colored LEDs that do not perform rainbow-colored illumination even during rainbow-colored illumination are provided to perform illumination decorations different from rainbow-colored illumination, the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5 can be accurately determined based on the light from the non-rainbow-colored LEDs, making it easy to adjust the light intensity (brightness) to the player's preferred level.

In addition, the lighting decoration used when the non-rainbow-colored LEDs are performing the rainbow effect can be anything that switches lighting color at a longer unit lighting time than at least the LEDs that perform the rainbow effect lighting decoration, specifically the LEDs included in the first board lighting group through the sixth board lighting group and the LEDs included in frame lighting group A through frame lighting group F, or anything that performs lighting decoration with the same lighting color without switching lighting color.

In addition, the light emission of non-rainbow color LEDs (which may be full-color LEDs controlled to emit a different light color from the five 7-segment display units of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210, or monochromatic LEDs that emit a different light color from the five 7-segment display units of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210) can be controlled with a different light color from the five 7-segment display units of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210, on which the rear-upper first decorative board is mounted and on which non-dimmable LEDs that do not produce rainbow color illumination and whose light intensity (brightness) cannot be adjusted as described above are mounted. In this case, it is easy to distinguish between non-rainbow color LEDs and non-dimmable LEDs, and it is easy to compare the light intensity (brightness) when adjusting the light intensity (brightness), allowing the light intensity (brightness) to be easily adjusted to the player's preference.

In the above example, the surface of the upper back first decorative board on which the monochromatic LEDs (non-dimmable LEDs) that illuminate and decorate the upper back first decorative part 3211, which has five 7-segment display units lined up horizontally on the upper back movable decorative body 3210, which does not use rainbow-colored illumination, i.e., illumination that changes color in a short period of time, are mounted, is also coated with a white solder resist (protective material) with the highest reflective efficiency, and letters and symbols to prevent confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards are screen-printed using ink with a high brightness and saturation (for example, a color with a reflective efficiency similar to white, such as yellow), thereby increasing the reflective efficiency of the surface on which the LEDs of the upper back first decorative board are mounted. However, in addition to or instead of this, it is also possible to suppress light interference on the surface of the upper back first decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted, thereby clarifying the light emitted by each LED and making it possible to more clearly display the letters, numbers, patterns, etc. displayed on the segment display units.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 243 (A), the upper rear rear movable decorative body 3210 contains a first upper rear decorative board on which LEDs are mounted to illuminate and decorate the first upper rear decorative part 3211, on which the five 7-segment display parts of the upper rear rear movable decorative body 3210 are lined up on the left and right, and a second upper rear decorative board on which LEDs are mounted to illuminate and decorate the second upper rear decorative part 3212, which is provided on the back side of the first upper rear decorative part 3211 and on which predetermined characters (here, "JACKPOT") are lined up.The upper rear rear movable decorative body 3210 is formed to a predetermined thickness (approximately 10 mm in this example) from an opaque (white in this example) resin or the like that does not have translucency, except for the five 7-segment display parts of the first upper rear decorative part 3211 and the predetermined characters of the second upper rear decorative part 3212.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 243 (B), the 7-segment display section of the upper rear first decorative part 3211 has cylindrical through-holes corresponding to each segment, and the surface on which the multiple LEDs of the upper rear first decorative board are mounted is partitioned so that one or more LEDs are arranged within these through-holes. Furthermore, the upper rear second decorative part 3212 has cylindrical through-holes corresponding to each of the specified characters (here, "JACKPOT"), and the surface on which the multiple LEDs of the upper rear second decorative board are mounted is partitioned so that one or more LEDs are arranged within these through-holes.

In addition, the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 is formed so that it can be divided into two decorative bodies, a front and a back, and the inside of one decorative body is in close contact with the surface of the rear-upper first decorative board on which multiple LEDs are mounted, and the inside of the other decorative body is in close contact with the surface of the rear-upper second decorative board on which multiple LEDs are mounted, and the two divided decorative bodies are assembled (fixed) to form the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210.

This prevents light emitted from the LEDs located within the through-holes corresponding to each segment of the seven-segment display unit of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 from leaking into the through-holes corresponding to other segments, thereby suppressing interference between light emitted from each of the multiple segments of the seven-segment display unit, making it easier to individually identify the information (letters, numbers, designs, etc.) displayed by each of the multiple segments of the seven-segment display unit of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211. Furthermore, because light from the LEDs located within the through-holes can be emitted from each segment of the seven-segment display unit of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 without leaking outside the through-hole, a decrease in the amount of light (brightness) within the through-hole can be suppressed.

Similarly, light emitted from the LEDs located within the through-holes corresponding to each predetermined character (here, "JACKPOT") on the upper rear second decorative portion 3212 is prevented from leaking into the through-holes corresponding to other characters, thereby suppressing interference between the light emitted from each predetermined character, making it easier to individually identify each predetermined character on the upper rear second decorative portion 3212. Furthermore, light from the LEDs located within the through-holes can be emitted from each predetermined character (here, "JACKPOT") on the upper rear second decorative portion 3212 without leaking outside the through-hole, thereby suppressing a decrease in the amount of light (brightness) within the through-hole.

In addition to the structure of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 described above, or separately from the structure of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 described above (without adopting the structure of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210), the surfaces on which the multiple LEDs are mounted on the rear-upper first decorative board on which LEDs are mounted that illuminate and decorate the rear-upper first decorative part 3211 on which the five 7-segment display parts of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged left and right, and the rear-upper second decorative board on which LEDs are mounted that illuminate and decorate the rear-upper second decorative part 3212 on which a predetermined character (here, "JACKPOT") is arranged in a row, may be coated with a dark-colored solder resist (protective material) with low reflective efficiency (black, purple, navy blue, dark green, etc.) instead of a white solder resist (protective material). In this case, although the reflection efficiency is reduced on the LED mounting surface of the rear upper first decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the rear upper first decorative part 3211 are mounted, and on the LED mounting surface of the rear upper second decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the rear upper second decorative part 3212 are mounted, the light from each through-hole can be emitted independently without interference, so letters, numbers, patterns, etc. displayed on the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper first decorative part 3211, as well as specified letters on the rear upper second decorative part 3212, can be clearly displayed, and this information can be accurately conveyed to the player.

In addition, even if the LED mounting surface of the rear upper first decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the rear upper first decorative part 3211 are mounted and the LED mounting surface of the rear upper second decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the rear upper second decorative part 3212 are mounted are coated with a dark colored solder resist (protective material), the LED non-mounting surface of the rear upper first decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the rear upper first decorative part 3211 are not mounted and the LED non-mounting surface of the rear upper second decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the rear upper second decorative part 3212 are mounted may be coated with a solder resist (protective material) of a color other than dark (for example, white or green). Furthermore, it is also possible to coat only the inner regions of the through-holes on the LED mounting surface of the upper back first decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the upper back first decorative part 3211 are mounted, and on the LED mounting surface of the upper back second decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the upper back second decorative part 3212 are mounted, with a white solder resist (protective material), or to form a white coating by silk printing or the like, and coat the outer regions of the through-holes with a dark solder resist (protective material), or to form a dark coating by silk printing or the like. In this case, the reflection efficiency of the board surface is reduced to suppress light interference from each through-hole, while reflecting a high proportion of the light emitted from the LEDs located within the through-holes, allowing each segment of the five 7-segment display parts of the upper back movable decorative body 3210 and the specified characters (here, "JACKPOT") on the upper back second decorative part 3212 to be brightly illuminated and decorated.

In addition, the surface of the upper rear rear movable decorative body 3210 (the portion where the perforations are formed) corresponding to each of the five segments of the seven-segment display section of the upper rear rear movable decorative body 3210 and the predetermined characters (here, "JACKPOT") on the upper rear rear second decorative part 3212 may be provided with a cover formed of a translucent film (in this example, a cloudy frosted glass-like film) or a translucent resin (in this example, red, etc.). This prevents direct viewing of the light from the LEDs that illuminate the upper rear rear first decorative part 3211 and the LEDs that illuminate the upper rear rear second decorative part 3212, preventing players from feeling dazzled. Furthermore, by making the above-mentioned film or cover surface-emitting, the light source of the LEDs that illuminate the upper rear rear first decorative part 3211 and the LEDs that illuminate the upper rear rear second decorative part 3212 can be made less noticeable when they emit light.

In addition, the LED mounting surface of the first decorative board on the upper rear back, on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the first decorative part 3211 are mounted, and the LED mounting surface of the second decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the second decorative part 3212 are mounted, are screen-printed with letters and symbols in a bright, saturated color (e.g., yellow) to avoid confusion with electronic components such as LEDs mounted on other decorative boards. In addition, for one or both of the LED mounting surface of the first upper back decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the first upper back decorative part 3211 are mounted, and the LED mounting surface of the second upper back decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the second upper back decorative part 3212 are mounted, ink of a low brightness and saturation color (e.g., green, etc.) may be applied by screen printing to the LED mounting surface, or letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards may be formed as foil-cut letters (i.e., cut-out letters formed by creating letters with a wiring pattern that is copper foil on the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and cutting out the copper foil around it), and the surface of these foil-cut letters may be coated with a dark-colored solder resist (protective material) that is coated on the LED mounting surface, or they may be applied by screen printing to the non-LED mounting surface (rear surface) using ink of a predetermined color (not only colors with high brightness and saturation but also colors with low brightness and saturation). In this case, too, it is possible to suppress optical interference between the LED mounting surface of the first upper rear decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the first upper rear decorative part 3211 are mounted, and the LED mounting surface of the second upper rear decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the second upper rear decorative part 3212 are mounted.

In addition, the rear-upper first decorative board on which LEDs that illuminate and decorate the rear-upper first decorative part 3211 are mounted, and the rear-upper second decorative board on which LEDs that illuminate and decorate the rear-upper second decorative part 3212 are mounted, may be firmly attached to the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 (such as in an irreversible attachment state that makes removal difficult, such as by destroying at least a portion of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210, the rear-upper first decorative board, or the rear-upper second decorative board by welding, etc.). This allows the LED mounting surfaces of the rear-upper first decorative board and the rear-upper second decorative board to be protected by the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210, thereby preventing malfunctions of the LEDs mounted on the rear-upper first decorative board or the rear-upper second decorative board due to tampering, etc.

In addition, when mounting LEDs for illuminating and decorating a 7-segment display on part of one of multiple decorative boards on which multiple LEDs belonging to the first through sixth board illumination groups are mounted, i.e., when mounting multiple LEDs with adjustable light output (dimmable LED group) and multiple LEDs without adjustable light output (non-dimmable LED group) on a single decorative board, a decorative body with the above-mentioned through-hole formed on the LED mounting surface of the non-dimmable LED group can be provided. In this case, the effect of suppressing reflection and interference of light emitted from the dimmable LEDs and non-dimmable LEDs can be further improved.

As described above, the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 display information such as letters, numbers, and pictures, and can play an important role in game presentations, such as displaying important information. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 may directly control the rear upper first decorative board on which LEDs for illuminating and decorating the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 are mounted, or the rear upper second decorative board on which LEDs for illuminating and decorating the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 are mounted (either one may be sufficient). In this case, the occurrence of malfunctions (such as content different from the intended content being displayed) can be reduced compared to when the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and player-related disadvantages can be prevented.

In addition, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 performs peripheral control unit routine processing approximately every 33.3 ms, while the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs main control side timer interrupt processing every 4 ms.Therefore, the display content of the back rear upper first decorative unit 3211 and the back rear upper second decorative unit 3212 can be updated at a shorter interval than when the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the back rear upper first decorative unit 3211 and the back rear upper second decorative unit 3212 based on control signals from the main control board 1310.Even if a malfunction occurs and content different from the content originally displayed on the back rear upper first decorative unit 3211 or the back rear upper second decorative unit 3212 is displayed, the display content can be updated immediately (after 4 ms) and changed to the original display content, so that players, etc. are not disadvantaged. In other words, for the rear upper first decorative part 3211 and the rear upper second decorative part 3212, which display important information (high importance), control signals are output at a shorter cycle to update the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting means (LED) than for the luminous decorative parts that do not display important information (low importance).Therefore, even if a problem occurs with the display content of the rear upper first decorative part 3211 or the rear upper second decorative part 3212, which display important information, the display content can be immediately changed to normal, thereby preventing content different from what was intended from being displayed and causing inconvenience to the player. Furthermore, if the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to control the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 based on control signals from the main control board 1310, there is a risk of a communication error occurring between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, resulting in a malfunction in the information displayed by the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and the rear upper second decorative portion 3212. However, in this example, the main control board 1310 directly controls the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and the rear upper second decorative portion 3212, making it less likely that a malfunction will occur in the information displayed by the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 compared to when the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and the rear upper second decorative portion 3212, thereby preventing any disadvantage to the player.

[Rainbow effect variation 1]
Next, a modified example of the rainbow effect will be described. In this example, the player can determine the probability of winning by pressing the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 while the rainbow effect is being executed. Note that in Modification 1, only the differences from the above embodiment will be described, and redundant explanations will not be provided.

Specifically, when a rainbow effect is being executed as shown in FIG. 244, if a variable display with a high probability of a jackpot is being executed, such as when the decorative pattern becomes a reach symbol after the rainbow effect, even if the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed at timing t6 during the execution of the rainbow effect, the rainbow effect will continue to be executed until timing t100 without terminating the rainbow effect.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 245, when a rainbow effect is being executed, unless a variable display with a high probability of a jackpot is being executed, such as when the decorative symbols do not reach a reach after the rainbow effect, if the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed at timing t6 while the rainbow effect is being executed, the rainbow effect being executed will end at timing t6 when the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed, and a predetermined effect mode (such as a variable display of decorative symbols) will be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 will be controlled to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (which may include turning off some or all of them).

This makes it possible to determine the possibility of a jackpot when the rainbow effect is being executed, and encourages the player to actively press the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 during the period from timing t2 to timing t100 when the rainbow effect is being executed. Furthermore, if the player presses the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 during the period from timing t2 to timing t100 when the rainbow effect is being executed and determines that there is a high likelihood of a jackpot, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, after the rainbow effect being executed ends based on pressing the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 while the rainbow effect is being executed, the effect display device 1600 may be configured to execute an effect display unrelated to the rainbow effect. This allows the player to be aware that the rainbow effect has ended and to recognize that the likelihood of a jackpot is low. Furthermore, when an effect display unrelated to the rainbow effect is executed by the effect display device 1600, the effect display unrelated to the rainbow effect may also be terminated in response to operation of the effect operation unit 300, or the effect display unrelated to the rainbow effect may be terminated if the effect operation unit 300 is not operated for a predetermined period while the effect display unrelated to the rainbow effect is being executed. Furthermore, after the effect display unrelated to the rainbow effect being executed by the effect display device 1600 ends, the rainbow effect may be restarted if a predetermined start condition is met (for example, if the effect operation unit 300 is not operated for a predetermined period, or if a non-variable effect period during which no variable effect is being executed has reached a predetermined period). This imprints the light emission and display modes of the rainbow effect in the player's mind, and allows the player to operate the effect operation unit 300 with the expectation that when a rainbow effect is executed in a subsequent variable effect, a variable effect with a high probability of winning is being executed.

In addition, in Figure 245, if the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed while a rainbow effect is being executed, the rainbow effect illumination decoration on the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 ends, and then the effect display, such as the rainbow effect display mode, on the effect display device 1600 ends at a timing that is delayed by a predetermined period from the timing at which the rainbow effect illumination decoration ends. This prevents the display content on the effect display device 1600 from being suddenly switched, and makes it possible to switch the display content while leaving behind the lingering impression of the rainbow effect display mode or other effect display.

Furthermore, a predetermined sound may be output when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed while the rainbow performance is being performed. In this case, after outputting the predetermined sound based on the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 being pressed, the performance display, such as the rainbow performance display mode, on the performance display device 1600 may be terminated a predetermined period of time (the same period as the predetermined period from the end of the rainbow performance if the predetermined sound is output at the same time as the end of the rainbow performance illumination, or a different period from the predetermined period from the end of the rainbow performance illumination if the predetermined sound is output at a different time from the end of the rainbow performance illumination). In this case, too, the display content on the performance display device 1600 is prevented from being suddenly switched, and the display content can be switched while the impact of the rainbow performance display mode or other performance display remains.

Furthermore, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed while a rainbow effect is being performed, the rainbow effect illumination decoration of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5 and the door frame 3 may be terminated, and then the rainbow effect illumination decoration of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5 and the door frame 3 may be restarted. In this case, after the rainbow effect illumination decoration of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5 and the door frame 3 is terminated, the rainbow effect illumination decoration of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5 and the door frame 3 may be restarted (while the rainbow effect display mode, etc. on the effect display device 1600 is continuing) before the rainbow effect display mode, etc. on the effect display device 1600 is terminated. This can increase the interest of a player who has become disappointed because they believe that the likelihood of winning a jackpot is low due to the end of the rainbow effect illumination decoration, and can bring their attention back to the rainbow effect.

In addition to the above examples, the likelihood of a jackpot may be determined by varying the sound output mode during the execution of the rainbow effect. For example, if the above-mentioned rainbow effect is being executed and a variable display with a high likelihood of a jackpot is being executed, such as when the decorative symbols become ready after the rainbow effect, sound output may be executed in a mode corresponding to the rainbow effect. On the other hand, if the variable display with a high likelihood of a jackpot is not being executed, such as when the decorative symbols do not become ready after the rainbow effect, sound output may not be executed in a mode corresponding to the rainbow effect, and a different sound output mode may be executed, or no sound output may be executed at all. In this case, the likelihood of a jackpot can be determined based on the execution of the rainbow effect and the sound output mode, and if it is determined that the likelihood of a jackpot is high, interest in the game can be increased.

[Rainbow effect variation 2]
Although the rainbow effect described above does not involve the movement of the movable body, the movable body that is illuminated and decorated in the rainbow effect described above may always or at a predetermined rate perform an operation linked to the rainbow effect in addition to the illumination decoration in the rainbow effect. This is shown below as Variation 2. Note that in Variation 2, only the parts that differ from the above embodiment will be explained, and a duplicate explanation will not be provided.

As shown in FIG. 246, when the rainbow effect is initiated at timing t2, either by the player pressing the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, or the button valid period (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed without the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed (timing t2), multiple LEDs mounted on the back, front, lower, and center decorative board 3168 belonging to the fourth board illumination group are made to emit a predetermined emission color (blue in this example), and then controlled to change the emission color every predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds) (in this example, "blue" → "purple" → "red" → "white" → "yellow" → "green" → "blue" → "purple" → ...).

Furthermore, at timing t2, when the player presses the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300, or the button valid period (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed without the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 being pressed, the rainbow performance begins, and the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the back front lower performance unit 3160, on which the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 is mounted, rises from its normal standby position as shown in FIG. 164, stops at an elevated position in front of the performance display device 1600 (in this example, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 rises so that part of it overlaps the front of the performance display device 1600. Note that it may also be configured to rise so that the entire back front lower middle decorative body 3161 overlaps the front of the performance display device 1600, for example by rising to near the center of the performance display device 1600), and rotates around a longitudinal axis.

As a result, when the rainbow effect is being performed, LED illumination and movement by the movable body (back front lower middle decorative board 3168) are performed in front of the effect display device 1600, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 that illuminates and decorates the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 change their light color every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds), allowing for the execution of a highly eye-catching effect. In addition, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 appears in front of the effect display device 1600 and rotates with a portion of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 overlapping with the effect display device 1600, making the player think that something good is about to happen and increasing their anticipation for the game.

Furthermore, when the rainbow effect ends (timing t99), the rear front lower middle decorative element 3161 stops rotating around its longitudinal axis and descends from the front of the effect display device 1600, stopping at the normal standby position. In this example, a decorative pattern reach occurs on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the movement of the rear front lower middle decorative element 3161 to its normal standby position. In this way, by rotating the rear front lower middle decorative element 3161 that appears in front of the effect display device 1600 while illuminating it, part of the effect display device 1600 is obscured and attention is drawn to the rear front lower middle decorative element 3161. This surprises the player when a decorative pattern reach occurs on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the movement of the rear front lower middle decorative element 3161 to its normal standby position, increasing the player's anticipation of a jackpot.

As mentioned above, if an abnormal condition occurs during the execution of the variable effect that executes the rainbow effect, the rainbow effect illumination decoration using the multiple LEDs mounted on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 that illuminates and decorates the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 will be terminated. This prevents the rainbow effect from being performed in an incomplete form.

On the other hand, even if an abnormal condition occurs during the execution of the rainbow effect, the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 will not stop operating, but will continue to operate as if no abnormal condition had occurred. Furthermore, even if an abnormal condition occurs before the start of a variable effect that executes a rainbow effect, the rainbow effect will continue to operate at the timing of the original start of the rainbow effect, as if no abnormal condition had occurred. In other words, if the light-emitting control of the rainbow effect cannot be fully realized as designed, the light-emitting decoration using the multiple LEDs mounted on the rear front lower middle decorative board 3168 will be stopped or not executed, but operations that do not affect the light-emitting decoration of the rainbow effect will be executed as scheduled (as designed) without being stopped. This allows the player to recognize that the variable effect is continuing, and prevents the player from mistaking the cancellation of the rainbow effect for the end of the variable effect.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 247, if an abnormality occurs at timing t6 while the rainbow effect is being performed, the rainbow effect illumination decorations of the multiple LEDs in the first board illumination group to the sixth board illumination group provided on the game board 5, including the multiple LEDs mounted on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 that illuminates and decorates the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, are terminated and controlled to an off state. Furthermore, even if the door frame 3 is closed during the rainbow effect and the abnormality is resolved, the rainbow effect illumination decorations will not return (the rainbow effect illumination decorations will not resume).

On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs at timing t6 when the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 is operating in conjunction with the rainbow effect (timing t6), the operation of the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 linked to the rainbow effect is not stopped, and the predetermined operation linked to the rainbow effect continues (timing t6 to timing t100). In this way, if an abnormality occurs during the execution of the rainbow effect, the luminous decoration of the rainbow effect is terminated while the operation of the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 continues. Therefore, the continued operation of the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 allows the player to recognize that the variable effect is continuing, and does not cause anxiety.

In addition, even if an abnormality occurs in the variable performance that executes the rainbow effect, and the abnormality is resolved before the end of the rainbow effect and the state returns from the abnormal state to normal, the rainbow effect illumination decoration using the multiple LEDs mounted on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 that illuminates and decorates the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 will not resume. In other words, if an abnormality occurs during the execution of the rainbow effect in a variable performance that executes the rainbow effect, and the abnormality is resolved before the end of the rainbow effect and the state returns from the abnormal state to normal, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 will operate in an unlit state, not illuminated, in conjunction with the rainbow effect. As a result, when the rainbow effect display mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600, it is possible to determine that an abnormal state has occurred in the variable performance that executes the rainbow effect, depending on whether or not the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 is illuminated, and the occurrence of fraudulent behavior, etc. can be prevented.

In addition, whether or not to continue or start the operation linked to the rainbow-colored effect of the rear front, lower, and middle decorative body 3161 may be varied depending on the type of abnormal condition (degree of urgency). For example, for errors that have a small impact on gameplay as described above, the operation linked to the rainbow-colored effect of the rear front, lower, and middle decorative body 3161 may be continued or the operation linked to the rainbow-colored effect may be executed as scheduled (operating at the timing set in the scheduler). For errors that have a significant impact on gameplay, the operation linked to the rainbow-colored effect of the rear front, lower, and middle decorative body 3161 may be stopped (after stopping the operation linked to the rainbow-colored effect, it may be returned to its normal standby position and stopped), or the operation linked to the rainbow-colored effect that has been scheduled in advance (set in the scheduler) may be controlled not to be executed, thereby interrupting or ending the variable effect even while it is being executed. This allows the operating state of the rear front, lower, and middle decorative body 3161 to be varied depending on the severity of the error, making it possible to determine whether an abnormality has occurred.

In addition, whether or not the rainbow effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 is erased may be varied depending on the type of abnormal condition (degree of urgency). For example, for errors that have a small impact on gameplay as described above, the rainbow effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 is not erased, and a warning display (e.g., "Door open") is displayed so that it partially overlaps the rainbow effect display mode. On the other hand, for errors that have a significant impact on gameplay, the rainbow effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 is erased and only a warning display (e.g., "Illegal win occurred!") is displayed, thereby suspending or terminating the display of the rainbow effect (rainbow effect display mode) even while the rainbow effect is being executed. This allows the display mode on the effect display device 1600 to differ depending on the severity of the error, making it possible to determine whether an abnormality has occurred.

Furthermore, as shown in Variation 1 of the rainbow effect above, when a variable display with a high probability of a jackpot is being executed, such as when the decorative pattern becomes a reach after the rainbow effect, the rear front, lower, and middle decorative body 3161 is made to operate in conjunction with the rainbow effect, either always or at a predetermined rate; and when a variable display with a high probability of a jackpot is not being executed, such as when the decorative pattern does not become a reach after the rainbow effect, the rear front, lower, and middle decorative body 3161 may not operate in conjunction with the rainbow effect. This makes it possible to increase expectations for a jackpot if the rear front, lower, and middle decorative body 3161 operates in conjunction with the rainbow effect, and even when the rear front, lower, and middle decorative body 3161 does not operate in conjunction with the rainbow effect, there is a possibility that a variable display with a high probability of a jackpot is being executed, so expectations for a jackpot will not be lost.

Furthermore, while the above embodiments (all embodiments including variants 1 and 2) are related to rainbow effects, this technical concept can also be applied to effects other than rainbow effects. For example, in variant 2, the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 is not limited to operating in conjunction with the rainbow effect, but can also be applied to operating in conjunction with other effects.

The present invention has been described above using preferred embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements and design modifications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

For example, in the above embodiment, the separation holes (separation holes 1023, 1822c, 2531b, 2810d, 1823c, 1827c, 1828c, etc.) that allow decorative objects such as stickers to be separated are shown as penetrating holes, but this is not limited to this and slit-shaped or notched holes are also acceptable.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, a pachinko machine was used as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines such as mahjong machines and arrange ball machines, and can also be applied to slot machines that use gaming medals to spin multiple drums (cylinders or reels). Here, slot machines will be described with reference to Figure 209. Figure 209 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

As shown in Figure 209, the slot machine 6000 is composed of a front door (front frame) 6002 and a main body (box) 6004. The front door (front frame) 6002 and the main body (box) 6004 are interconnected via a hinge (not shown). The front door (front frame) 6002 can be opened from the main body (box) 6004 by inserting a key into the keyhole 6005 of the metal locking device located on the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and turning it clockwise, using this hinge as the center of rotation.

The metal locking device is attached to the cylinder mounting frame of a metal door frame reinforcement unit (not shown) of the front door (front frame) 6002 and cooperates with a locking unit (not shown) to lock and open the main body (box) 6004 and the front door (front frame) 6002. The metal locking device includes a cylindrical metal cylinder body (not shown) extending forward and backward, a metal keyhole 6005 formed in the front end face of the cylinder body, and a metal rotation transmission member (not shown) attached to the rear side of the cylinder body. The metal locking device's cylinder body penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcement unit from the rear, with its rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member is cylindrical (more specifically, conical, with a diameter increasing toward the rear) with an open rear end and has a pair of notches cut forward from the rear end at opposite positions across the central axis. The rotation transmission member is configured so that when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed relative to the main body (box) 6004, a metal transmission cylinder of a metal locking unit (not shown) can be inserted from the rear, and when a pair of protrusions on the transmission cylinder are inserted into a pair of cutouts, the rotation of the rotation transmission member (key inserted in the keyhole 6005) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder, causing it to rotate. When the rotation transmission member of the metal locking device and the transmission cylinder of the locking unit are in contact with each other while the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed relative to the main body (box) 6004, the metal locking device and the locking unit are electrically connected.

In addition to reinforcing the front door (front frame) 6002 and adding rigidity, the door frame reinforcement unit also functions as a door frame metal earth, electrically connected to an earth board installed inside the main body (box) 6004 via a door frame metal earth wire (not shown). In other words, the metal door frame reinforcement unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side. This earth board (not shown) is capable of temporarily collecting electromagnetic noise generated in various locations and grounding (earthing) the island equipment of the amusement hall, and is electrically connected to the earth of the island equipment of the amusement hall via an island equipment earth wire (not shown).

An opening switch (not shown) capable of detecting the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 relative to the main body (box) 6004 is located on the main body (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. This opening switch does not detect the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 relative to the main body (box) 6004 due to the input of an electrical signal resulting from the opening or closing operation of the metal locking device, but rather detects the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 relative to the main body (box) 6004 independently of the opening or closing operation of the metal locking device. Furthermore, the opening switch is not located near the metal locking device, but is located below the metal locking device on the main body (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002 to avoid being affected by electromagnetic noise that may have entered the metal locking device. In this way, even if electromagnetic noise enters a metal locking device, the signal transmission line from the opening switch is not affected by this electromagnetic noise.

The front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front of the slot machine 6000 and includes various decorative elements. Some decorative elements are completely unplated, while others are plated on the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is made of precious metals such as chrome or hard gold, and is conductive, which may allow electromagnetic noise to penetrate. Those decorative elements plated on the entire front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit that constitutes the front door 6002 via wiring (not shown). (Some decorative elements are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), while others are electrically connected by electrically conductive members attached directly to the metal door frame reinforcement unit.) This allows electromagnetic noise that penetrates the decorative elements to be transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit, preventing it from penetrating the board ground of the decorative boards provided on the decorative elements. Furthermore, electromagnetic noise that penetrates into the various decorative parts that have decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), then via the door frame metal ground wire to the earth board installed inside the main body (box) 6004, and then from the earth board via the island equipment ground wire to the ground of the island equipment in the gaming hall, and is removed from the slot machine 6000. In other words, as described above, the metal door frame reinforcement unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side.

An anti-static pad may be provided as an anti-static section at a predetermined location on the front of the front door (front frame) 6002, or it may be provided as an anti-static section on the open side opposite the side where the hinges are located (closed side) when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened from the main body (box) 6004. The anti-static pad can remove noise (electromagnetic noise) generated by electrostatic discharge.

Furthermore, the front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front of the slot machine 6000 and includes various decorative elements. Some of these decorative elements have no decorative plating at all, while others have decorative plating covering the entire front and back surfaces. Those decorative elements with decorative plating covering the entire front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown). While the earth board provided inside the main body (box) 6004 was previously electrically connected to the ground of the island equipment in the amusement hall via the island equipment earth wire, the door frame metal earth wire may not be electrically connected to the earth board, but may be electrically connected to a terminal on the power board of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004, thereby electrically connecting the metal door frame reinforcement unit to the power board. The power board receives 24V AC from the island equipment in the amusement hall. This 24V AC has L (live) and N (neutral). The L terminal of the power supply board, to which L (live) is input, is connected to the ungrounded side, while the N terminal of the power supply board, to which N (neutral) is input, is connected to the grounded side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) is installed on the power supply board to protect against transient excessive voltage. This surge protection element (surge absorber) normally has high resistance and conducts almost no current. However, when excessive voltage (abnormal voltage) enters, its resistance instantly decreases, allowing current to flow. Once the excessive voltage disappears, it returns to its original normal resistance (high resistance). As a result, electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcement unit is transmitted from the terminal of the power supply board by the surge protection element (surge absorber) to the N terminal of the power supply board and the ground side (earth), thereby removing it from the slot machine 6000.

A game panel 6006 is provided on the upper half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and a protrusion that protrudes forward from the game panel 6006 is formed on the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002. A medal insertion slot 6008, bet buttons 6010, 6012, start lever 6014, left stop button 6016, center stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, etc. are arranged on this protrusion along the lower edge of the game panel 6006. In addition, a savings settlement button 6022 and a decorative panel 6024 are arranged on the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative panel 6024. These bet buttons 6010, 6012, start lever 6014, left stop button 6016, center stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, and accumulated settlement button 6022 are electrically connected to a main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. The main control board 1310 is housed in a main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300, and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004.

This main control board box 1320 houses not only the main control board 1310 but also a setting change board 1311 equipped with a setting key switch 1311a that allows setting values to be changed. In other words, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body part (box) 6004, so that the setting key switch 1311a is located inside the main body part (box) 6004. The setting change board 1311 may be housed in a board box separate from the main control board box 1320 and attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body part (box) 6004, or it may be attached and fixed to the housing of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the main body part (box) 6004. In addition to the setting key switch 1311a, the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311 may also be equipped with a setting switch button for selecting and switching setting values, a setting display 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot), and the setting change permission lamp 1310z described above.

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed in approximately the center of the gaming panel 6006, and through this display window it is possible to see three variable rotors (not shown) and a performance device (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000. The three variable rotors (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body-side mounting member (not shown) located inside the main body portion (box) 6004. In contrast, the performance device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side mounting member (not shown) located on the back side of the front door (front frame) 6002.

These variable rotors have translucent pattern bands affixed to their cylindrical frames, on which multiple types of symbols (e.g., bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as symbol information. These cylindrical variable rotors are called reels or drums in gaming machines such as slot machines, and each variable rotor is connected to the output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown). These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and as the output shaft of the stepping motor rotates, multiple types of symbols appear to change continuously from top to bottom through the display window mentioned above.

The performance device comprises multiple movable performance bodies (not shown), the performance display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards (not shown) on which multiple LEDs are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. Based on various commands from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1500 controls the progress of the performance by performing various controls such as operating the multiple movable performance bodies, drawing control of the performance display device 1600, and lighting control of the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards. The peripheral control unit 1500 comprises the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

When a predetermined number of medals are inserted as gaming media into the medal slot 6008, the main control board 1310 begins the display of varying symbol information based on the operation of the start lever 6014, and stops the display of varying symbol information based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, center stop button 6018, or right stop button 6020, or the passage of a predetermined amount of time. Then, when the symbol information assumes a predetermined specific display mode, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-awarding state (jackpot gaming state) and pays out a large amount of medals as gaming media into the tray 6026.

In the hybrid gaming machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes the ball slot 6008', and the main control board 1310 starts the display of varying symbol information based on the operation of the start lever 6014 after a predetermined number of symbol balls are inserted into the ball slot 6008' as gaming media, and stops the display of varying symbol information based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, center stop button 6018, or right stop button 6020 or the passage of a predetermined period of time. Then, when the symbol information reaches a predetermined specific display mode, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-awarding state (jackpot gaming state) and pays out a large amount of symbol balls as gaming media into the tray 6026.

(Solution 1)
The gaming machine has a game board with a game area where game balls can flow down, conducts a lottery based on the establishment of a start condition, and awards a profit based on the result of the lottery. It includes a specific mounting area where multiple light-emitting elements are mounted and a white coating is applied to the mounting surface, a display means for displaying images, and a control means for controlling the effects. The display means controls the display means to display specific effect images and can perform multi-color light emission control, which causes the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the specific mounting area to simultaneously emit light in different colors. When a predetermined adjustment means is operated during light emission under multi-color light emission control, the brightness of the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the specific mounting area can be changed while the light emission under multi-color light emission control continues. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 1, the white coating is applied to the mounting surface where the multiple light-emitting elements are mounted, thereby improving the reflection efficiency of the light from the light-emitting elements on the mounting surface and suppressing uneven illumination. This avoids a reduction in the effect of the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the specific mounting area simultaneously emitting light in different colors. Furthermore, since the player can change the brightness of the light emitted during the multi-color light emission control, which is executed with the white coating film improving the reflection efficiency, the player can execute the multi-color light emission control at the brightness of their choice, which reduces the annoyance and difficulty of viewing the light emitted during the multi-color light emission control. This eliminates factors that reduce interest in the light emitted during the multi-color light emission control, and prevents a decrease in interest in the game.

(Solution 2)
In the gaming machine described in Solution 1, a special mounting area is provided, separate from the specific mounting area, with a white coating formed on the mounting surface on which multiple light-emitting bodies are mounted, and the performance control means controls the performance display means to display a specific performance image, and when performing multi-color light emission control to cause multiple light-emitting bodies mounted in the specific mounting area to simultaneously emit light in different light colors, it is possible to perform control separate from the multi-color light emission control on the multiple light-emitting bodies mounted in the special mounting area, and when a specified adjustment means is operated during light emission by multi-color light emission control, it is possible to change the brightness of the multiple light-emitting bodies mounted in the specific mounting area while continuing to emit light by the multi-color light emission control, and further, while the brightness of the multiple light-emitting bodies mounted in the specific mounting area is adjusted in response to operation of the adjustment unit, the multiple light-emitting bodies mounted in the special mounting area are not subject to brightness adjustment, and control separate from the multi-color light emission control continues at a predetermined constant brightness. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 2, it is possible to use the light emitted by the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the special mounting area as an indicator for adjusting brightness, thereby increasing the accuracy of the comparison between the light emitted by the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the specific mounting area and the light emitted by the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the special mounting area, making it easier to adjust the brightness to the player's preference.

(Solution 3)
The gaming machine described in Solution 1 has a plurality of special mounting areas in which control separate from the multi-color light emission control is performed, and in a first special mounting area among the plurality of special mounting areas, while the brightness of the plurality of light-emitting elements emitting light under the multi-color light emission control is adjusted in response to an operation on the adjustment unit, the plurality of light-emitting elements mounted in the first special mounting area are not subject to brightness adjustment, and a first control separate from the multi-color light emission control is continued at a predetermined constant brightness, and in a second special mounting area among the plurality of special light-emitting area sections, while the brightness of the plurality of light-emitting elements emitting light under the multi-color light emission control is adjusted in response to an operation on the adjustment unit, the brightness of the plurality of light-emitting elements mounted in the second special mounting area is also adjusted in synchronization, and a second control separate from the multi-color light emission control is continued. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 3, it is possible to use the light emitted by the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the special mounting area as an indicator for adjusting brightness, thereby increasing the accuracy of the comparison between the light emitted by the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the specific mounting area and the light emitted by the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the special mounting area, making it easier to adjust the brightness to the player's preference.

(Solution 4)
A gaming machine has a game board with a game area where game balls can flow down, conducts a lottery based on the establishment of a start condition, and awards a profit based on the result of the lottery. The gaming machine includes a specific mounting area where multiple light-emitting elements are mounted and a white coating is applied to the mounting surface, a display means for displaying images, a control means for controlling the effects, and a state detection means for detecting the state of the gaming machine. The display means controls the display means to display a specific effect image and can perform multi-color light emission control, which causes the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the specific mounting area to simultaneously emit light in different colors. If the state detection means detects a specific state during light emission under multi-color light emission control, some or all of the multiple light-emitting elements emitting light under multi-color light emission control are turned off. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 4, the white coating is applied to the mounting surface where the multiple light-emitting elements are mounted, thereby improving the reflection efficiency of the light from the light-emitting elements on the mounting surface and suppressing uneven illumination. This avoids a reduction in the effect of the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the specific mounting area simultaneously emitting light in different colors. Furthermore, if the state detection means detects a specific state during light emission under multi-color light emission control, some or all of the light emitters emitting light under multi-color light emission control are turned off, so that, for example, if the state of the gaming machine is such that light emission effects under multi-color light emission control cannot be properly performed, an incomplete light emission effect can be executed, preventing a decrease in interest in the game (see, for example, paragraphs 2869 to 2891, Figures 238 to 242, etc.).

(Solution 5)
In the gaming machine described in Solution 4, a special light-emitting area section is provided as the light-emitting area section, separate from the specific light-emitting area section, and the special light-emitting area section has a mounting surface on which the light-emitting body is mounted and is coated with a white coating; the effect control means controls the light-emitting body mounted in the specific light-emitting area section to emit light in a predetermined rainbow mode in relation to the specific effect image displayed on the effect display device, while being able to control the light-emitting body mounted in the special light-emitting area section to emit light in a mode other than the rainbow mode; and further, when the state detection means detects a specific state within a specific light-emitting period during which the light-emitting body mounted in the specific light-emitting area section emits light in the rainbow mode, the state detection means controls the light-emitting body mounted in the special light-emitting area section to end the light emission in the rainbow mode regardless of whether the specific light-emitting period remains, while the light-emitting body mounted in the special light-emitting area section continues to emit light in the other mode until the specific light-emitting period has elapsed, without ending the light emission in the other mode, even if the state detection means detects a specific state within the specific light-emitting period. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 5, even if the state of the gaming machine has entered a specific state and some or all of the multiple light-emitting elements are turned off, it is possible to determine that the specific light-emitting period remains by the fact that the light-emitting elements mounted in the special light-emitting area continue to emit light, and the player is not given the mistaken impression that the specific light-emitting period has ended.

(Solution 6)
The gaming machine according to Solution 4 or Solution 5 is characterized in that it has a plurality of special light-emitting area sections in which light-emitting bodies emit light in a manner different from the rainbow manner as the special light-emitting area sections, and a first special light-emitting area section among the plurality of special light-emitting area sections is capable of emitting light in the special manner within a specific light-emitting period, and even if the state detection means detects that a specific state is present within the specific light-emitting period, the light-emitting body is controlled to continue emitting light in the special manner until the specific light-emitting period has elapsed without terminating the light-emitting in the special manner, and a second special light-emitting area section among the plurality of special light-emitting area sections is capable of emitting light in a special manner different from the special manner within the specific light-emitting period, and if the state detection means detects that a specific state is present within the specific light-emitting period, the light-emitting body mounted in the second special light-emitting area is controlled to terminate the light-emitting in the special manner as well as terminating the light-emitting in the rainbow manner. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 6, even if the state of the gaming machine has changed to a specific state and some or all of the multiple light-emitting elements are turned off, it is possible to determine that the specific light-emitting period remains by the fact that the light-emitting elements mounted in the special light-emitting area continue to emit light, and the player is not given the mistaken impression that the specific light-emitting period has ended.

(Solution 7)
A gaming machine having a gaming board with a gaming area where gaming balls can flow down, which draws a lottery when a starting condition is met and awards a profit based on the result of the lottery, includes a specific mounting area where multiple light emitters are mounted and a white coating is formed on the mounting surface, a display means for displaying images, a control means for controlling the effects, and a state detection means for detecting the state of the gaming machine, wherein the display means controls the display means to display a specific effect image and is capable of generating a specific period in which multiple light emitters mounted in the specific mounting area simultaneously emit light in different colors, and when the state detection means detects a specific state during the specific period, the multicolor light emission control is terminated regardless of whether the specific period remains, and the multicolor light emission control is not resumed even if the specific state returns to normal within the specific period. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 7, the white coating is formed on the mounting surface where the multiple light emitters are mounted, thereby improving the reflection efficiency of the light from the light emitters on the mounting surface and suppressing uneven illumination, etc. This prevents the visual effect of simultaneously illuminating multiple light-emitting elements mounted in a specific mounting area with different colors from being diminished. Furthermore, if the state detection means detects a specific state during multicolor light emission control, the multicolor light emission control is terminated, and even if the specific state returns to normal within the specific period, the multicolor light emission control is not resumed. This prevents a loss of interest in the game due to an incomplete light emission effect being executed when, for example, the gaming machine's state is incapable of properly implementing the multicolor light emission control. Furthermore, even if the normal state is restored, it is possible to determine that a specific state occurred within the specific period until the specific period has elapsed (see, for example, paragraphs 2869-2891, Figures 238-242, etc.).

(Solution 8)
In the gaming machine described in Solution 7, a special light-emitting area section is provided as the light-emitting area section, separate from the specific light-emitting area section, and the special light-emitting area section has a mounting surface on which the light-emitting body is mounted and is coated with a white film; the effect control means controls the light-emitting body mounted in the specific light-emitting area section to emit light in a predetermined rainbow mode in relation to the specific effect image displayed on the effect display device, while being able to control the light-emitting body mounted in the special light-emitting area section to emit light in a mode other than the rainbow mode; and further, when the state detection means detects a specific state within the specific period during which the light-emitting body mounted in the specific light-emitting area section emits light in the rainbow mode, the state control means controls to terminate the light emission in the rainbow mode regardless of whether the specific period remains, and controls to prevent the light emission from returning to the rainbow mode even if the state changes from the specific state to a normal state within the specific period; on the other hand, the light-emitting body mounted in the special light-emitting area section continues to emit light in a different mode without terminating it even if the state detection means detects a specific state within the specific period, and controls to continue emitting light in a different mode even after the state changes from the specific state to the normal state within the specific period. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 8, even if the state of the gaming machine has entered a specific state and some or all of the multiple light-emitting elements are turned off, it is possible to determine that the specific period remains because the light-emitting elements implemented in the special light-emitting area continue to emit light in a manner other than the rainbow-colored manner, and the player is not given the mistaken impression that the specific period has ended.

(Solution 9)
In the gaming machine described in Solution 8, the effect control means is characterized in that it can control the light emitters mounted in the specific light-emitting area to emit light in a predetermined rainbow pattern in association with a specific effect image that is displayed on the effect display device when the state changes from a specific state to a normal state after the lapse of a specific period of time. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 9, it is possible to control the light emitters to emit light in a predetermined rainbow pattern in association with a specific effect image that is displayed on the effect display device when the state changes from a specific state to a normal state after the lapse of a specific period of time, and therefore it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game by controlling the light emission in a rainbow pattern.

(Solution 10)
This gaming machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed through which gaming balls can flow down, conducts a lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and executes a winning game based on the result of the lottery, and is equipped with a specific mounting area in which a plurality of light-emitting bodies are mounted and a white coating is formed on the mounting surface, and a performance control means for controlling the performance, and the performance control means is capable of performing first light-emitting control, which causes the plurality of light-emitting bodies mounted in the specific mounting area to simultaneously emit light of the same color, and second light-emitting control, which causes the plurality of light-emitting bodies mounted in the specific mounting area to simultaneously emit light of different colors, as controls to notify the player of the possibility of executing a winning game, and the second light-emitting control notifies the player that the possibility of executing a winning game is higher than that of the first light-emitting control, and further, separately from the second light-emitting control, it is capable of performing third light-emitting control, which causes the plurality of light-emitting bodies mounted in the specific mounting area to simultaneously emit light of different light colors, and the third light-emitting control is a control that is performed when there is no possibility of executing a winning game. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 10, a white coating is applied to the mounting surface on which the multiple light emitters are mounted, improving the reflectivity of the light from the light emitters on the mounting surface and reducing uneven illumination. This avoids the reduction in the visual effect of simultaneously emitting different colors of light from the multiple light emitters mounted in a specific mounting area. Furthermore, while a second light-emitting control, which simultaneously emits different colors from the multiple light emitters mounted in the specific mounting area, rather than a first light-emitting control, which simultaneously emits the same color, indicates a higher likelihood of a winning game, a third light-emitting control, which simultaneously emits different colors from the multiple light emitters mounted in the specific mounting area, similar to the second light-emitting control, indicates a lower likelihood of a winning game. Therefore, while the second light-emitting control can heighten expectations for a winning game, it can also create anxiety about the possibility of the third light-emitting control being executed, drawing attention and enhancing the player's interest in the game. (See, e.g., paragraphs 2921-2929, Figures 244-245, etc.)

(Solution 11)
In the gaming machine described in Solution 10, when the light-emitting body implemented in the specific light-emitting area emits light in a predetermined rainbow pattern by the third control, the light emission in the rainbow pattern can be terminated in response to the player's operation of a predetermined effect operation unit, but when the light-emitting body implemented in the specific light-emitting area emits light in a predetermined rainbow pattern by the second control, the light emission in the rainbow pattern cannot be terminated even if the player operates the predetermined effect operation unit. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 11, when the light-emitting body implemented in the specific light-emitting area emits light in a predetermined rainbow pattern, the player can be induced to operate the effect operation unit, thereby increasing the gaming enjoyment when operating the effect operation unit.

(Solution 12)
The gaming machine described in Solution 11 is characterized in that, after the light emission in the rainbow mode is ended in response to operation of a predetermined effect operation unit by the player during execution of the third control, light emission in the rainbow mode is disabled until a specific period of time has elapsed, and light emission in the rainbow mode is enabled after the specific period of time has elapsed. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 11, if the light emission in the rainbow mode is ended in response to operation of a predetermined effect operation unit by the player during execution of the third control, light emission in the rainbow mode is disabled until the specific period of time has elapsed, so it is possible to prevent the player from missing the end of the light emission in the rainbow mode.

(Solution 13)
A gaming machine having a gaming board with a gaming area formed thereon through which gaming balls can flow, which draws a lottery when a starting condition is met, and awards a profit based on the result of the lottery, the gaming machine comprising: a first specific mounting area in which a plurality of light-emitting elements are mounted and a white coating is formed on the mounting surface thereof; a second specific mounting area in which a plurality of light-emitting elements are mounted and a dark coating is formed on the mounting surface thereof; and a display means for displaying an image, wherein when a specific effect image is displayed on the display means, the light-emitting elements mounted in the first specific mounting area are capable of multicolor emission, causing the light-emitting elements to simultaneously emit light in different colors, and the light-emitting elements mounted in the second specific mounting area are capable of emitting a monochromatic light different from the multicolor emission, even when the light-emitting elements mounted in the first specific mounting area are performing multicolor emission. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 13, the white coating is formed on the mounting surface on which the light-emitting elements are mounted, thereby improving the reflection efficiency of the light from the light-emitting elements on the mounting surface and suppressing uneven illumination, etc. This prevents the visual effect of simultaneously emitting light of different colors from the multiple light emitters mounted in the first specific mounting area, which has a white coating formed on its mounting surface. Furthermore, even if the multiple light emitters mounted in the first specific mounting area emit multiple colors, a dark coating is formed on the mounting surface of the second specific mounting area, which allows for monochromatic light emission, unlike the multicolored light. This reduces interference between the light emitted by the multiple light emitters mounted on the mounting surface of the second specific mounting area, allowing for clearer light emission from each of the multiple light emitters. (See, for example, paragraphs 2913 to 2916, Figure 243, etc.)

(Solution 14)
A gaming machine having a gaming board with a gaming area formed into which gaming balls can flow, which draws a lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and awards profits based on the results of the lottery, and which is equipped with a performance control means for controlling the performance, a movable body that can operate in a predetermined operating mode, a plurality of specific decorative boards on which a plurality of light-emitting elements are mounted and on whose mounting surfaces a white coating is formed, and a state detection means for detecting the state of the gaming machine, wherein the specific decorative boards are also provided on the movable body, and the performance control means operates the movable body in a predetermined operating mode and is capable of performing multi-color light emission control that causes the multiple light-emitting elements mounted on the multiple specific decorative boards to simultaneously emit light in different colors, and when the state detection means detects a specific state while the multi-color light emission control is being executed, it turns off some or all of the multiple light-emitting elements mounted on the multiple specific decorative boards, while allowing the movable body to continue operating in the predetermined operating mode. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 14, a white coating is formed on the mounting surfaces of multiple specific decorative boards on which multiple light emitters are mounted, improving the light reflection efficiency of the light emitters on the mounting surfaces of the specific decorative boards and reducing uneven illumination. This avoids the reduction in the visual effect of simultaneously emitting different colors of light from multiple light emitters mounted on specific mounting boards with white coatings on their mounting surfaces. Furthermore, when the state detection means detects a specific state during multi-color light emission control, some or all of the light emitters mounted on the multiple specific decorative boards are turned off while the movable body continues to operate in a predetermined operating mode. Therefore, even if some or all of the light emitters are turned off due to the gaming machine entering a specific state, the continued operation of the movable body in a predetermined operating mode indicates that the multi-color light emission control is still in operation, preventing player confusion or anxiety. (See, for example, paragraphs 2930-2942, Figures 246-247, etc.)

[Split game board]
The pachinko machine 1 is a frame body consisting of a door frame 3 and a main body frame 4, and can be changed to a pachinko machine 1 with different specifications by removing the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 and attaching a new game board 5 to the main body frame 4. As described above, the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 includes a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that defines the rear end of the play area 5a, and various units and components are attached to the front and rear of this plate-shaped game panel 1100. By dividing the plate-shaped game panel 1100 and attaching various units and components to each, it is possible to easily consider design combinations and appearances during the development stage and to accommodate changes in the number and arrangement of various winning slots provided on the game board 5, the shape of the decorative components, the shape of the play area 5a, etc.

A completely new gaming board 5A (hereinafter, sometimes referred to simply as "split gaming board 5A." The "A" stands for A specification) is described with reference to Figures 248 to 250. Figure 248 is a schematic front view of the split gaming board (a), and a schematic rear view of the split gaming board (b). Figure 249 is a rear perspective view of the split gaming board (a), seen from the lower left rear, of the split gaming board before the right and left gaming boards that make up the split gaming board are combined, and a rear perspective view of the split gaming board (b), seen from the lower left rear. Figure 250 is a schematic front view of the split gaming board in Figure 248(a) after the split gaming board has been redecorated. It should be noted that Figures 248 to 250 omit the various units and components that correspond to the various units and components that are attached to the gaming board 5 already described in Figure 129, etc.

The split gaming board 5A is composed of the aforementioned front component 1000, which defines the outer periphery of the playing area 5a and has a generally rectangular exterior when viewed from the front, and the aforementioned plate-like gaming panel 1100, which is attached to the rear of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the playing area 5a. The split gaming board 5A is divided into two halves, a left gaming board 5AL and a right gaming board 5AR. The left gaming board 5AL is approximately three-quarters the length of the split gaming board 5A in the left-right direction, while the right gaming board 5AR is approximately one-quarter the length of the split gaming board in the left-right direction. Where the left gaming board 5AL and right gaming board 5AR join, the right side of the left gaming board 5AL and the left side of the right gaming board 5AR have a spigot-jointed structure, with the right side of the left gaming board 5AL being convex and the right gaming board 5AR being concave. After the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR are joined together, unillustrated bolts are passed through and tightened from one side of the connecting members (not shown) provided on the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR to the other. This automatically makes the surface of the game area 5a where the game balls roll, which is the connecting part between the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR, flush (i.e., no steps are created), and the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR are fixed together.

The split game board 5A is formed by combining the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR and then fastening bolts (not shown) from one side to the other of connecting members (not shown) provided on the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR to secure the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR, and attaching the split game board 5A to the main frame 4. However, the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR may also be configured to be individually secured to the main frame 4. Even in this case, the surface of the play area 5a where the game balls roll, which is the connecting portion between the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR, automatically becomes flush (i.e., no steps are created) when the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR are secured to the main frame 4.

The left-side gaming board 5AL has a function display unit 1400, which can display the game status using LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310, located on the front (surface) of the upper left region of the previous component 1000. In contrast, the left-side gaming board 5AL has a sub-function display unit 2250 (the "sub-function display unit" will be referred to as the "fourth symbol"), which can display the game status using LEDs based on control signals from the peripheral control board 1510, located on the lower left side of the inner rail 1002 of the previous component 1000, protruding toward the game area 5a. Note that while the sub-function display unit 2250 was located on the lower left side of the inner rail 1002 of the previous component 1000, protruding toward the game area 5a, it may instead be located on any of the units or components that make up the front unit 2000 described above. Furthermore, the game status displayed on the sub-function display unit 2250 includes at least the first special symbol display and/or the second special symbol display displayed on the function display unit 1400, and the game information displayed on the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a predetermined lighting pattern, or may be displayed in the same lighting pattern as the game information displayed on the function display unit 1400.

The left-side gaming board 5AL has a plate-shaped front component 1000 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "left-side front component 1000L") and a plate-shaped gaming panel 1100 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "left-side gaming panel 1100L") arranged on the back side of the left-side front component 1000L. The right-side gaming board 5AR has a plate-shaped front component 1000 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "left-side front component 1000R") and a plate-shaped gaming panel 1100 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right-side gaming panel 1100R") arranged on the back side of the right-side front component 1000R. The above-mentioned back unit 3000 is arranged on the back side of the divided gaming board 5A, that is, on the back sides of the left-side gaming panel 1100L and the right-side gaming panel 1100R. When the divided gaming board 5A is viewed from the front, the right side (the side facing the right gaming panel 1100R) of the rear box 3010 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "left rear box 3010L") of the rear unit 3000 located behind the left gaming panel 1100L on the left gaming board 5AL is open (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right-side opening of the left rear box 3010L"), and the left side (the side facing the left gaming panel 1100L) of the rear box 3010 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right-side rear box 3010R") of the rear unit 3000 located behind the right gaming panel 1100R on the right gaming board 5AR is open (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "left-side opening of the right rear box 3010R").

Behind the left rear box 3010L are located the detachably attached performance display device 1600 described above, the peripheral control unit 1500 housing the peripheral control board 1510 described above, the main control unit 1300 housing the main control board 1310 described above, and the left drive board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "left drive board unit 1700L") housing various other boards (e.g., various relay boards, decorative boards with various LEDs mounted on them that are attached to the various performance units housed in the left rear box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.). The main control board 1310 is also equipped with the setting key switch 1311a described above, which allows the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 to be changed and confirmed.

Behind the right rear box 3010R is located the right drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right drive board unit 1700R"), which houses various boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to the various performance units housed in the right rear box 3010R, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.).

In this way, the split gaming board 5A has the main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510, boards on which microprocessors are mounted, located behind the left gaming board 5AL, while the decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted, and drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., for the various presentation units housed in the right rear box 3010R are located behind the right gaming board 5AR. In other words, the split gaming board 5A is composed of the left gaming board 5AL, which is a board on which a microprocessor is mounted, and the right gaming board 5AR, which is a board on which a microprocessor is not mounted. Furthermore, while only the control objects of the peripheral control board 1510 (e.g., movable bodies on the game board, etc.) are provided in front of the right-side game board 5AR to execute game effects, the front of the left-side game board 5AL is provided with not only the control objects of the peripheral control board 1510 (sub-function display unit 2250, etc.) but also the control objects of the main control board 1310 (function display unit 1400) to display information directly related to the progress of the game (information regarding wins and losses, information regarding the type of jackpot, etc.). In this way, the right-side game board 5AR is configured so that only boards without microprocessors are provided in the rear, and only the control objects of the peripheral control board 1510 are provided in the front, making it easy to modify the right-side game board 5AR in response to changes in design, specifications, etc.

In addition to the main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 described above, the left-side gaming board 5AL is also equipped with a panel relay board 1710, a general prize opening sensor 3001, a first start opening sensor 3002, a second start opening sensor 2401, a gate sensor 2801, a large prize opening sensor 2402, a special prize opening sensor 2601, a V prize opening sensor 3003, a loss opening sensor 3004, a start opening solenoid 2412, an attacca solenoid 2414, a special prize opening solenoid 2612, a V distribution solenoid 3007, a magnetic sensor 1050, a base monitor 1310h, and the like. In other words, in this example, even if the right-side gaming board 5AR is not connected to the left-side gaming board 5AL or if the combination of the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR is incompatible, it is possible to play using the left-side gaming board 5AL alone.

[Drawer connector]
As described above, the left drive board unit 1700L, located behind the left rear box 3010L, houses various relay boards. Among these relay boards, the left game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW, which mounts two left game board drawer connectors LDRW vertically, is located at the upper rear of the left rear box 3010L near the right opening of the left rear box 3010L. The two left game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW are convex. The left game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 either directly or via various relay boards. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 is further electrically connected to various relay boards, and is electrically connected via various relay boards or directly to decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., which are attached to various performance units in the left-side drive board unit 1700L, and is also electrically connected to the sub-function display unit 2250.

Furthermore, as described above, the right-side drive board unit 1700R, located behind the right-side rear box 3010R, houses various relay boards. Of these various relay boards, the right-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW, on which the right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW are mounted, is located at the upper rear of the right-side rear box 3010R, near the left-side opening of the right-side rear box 3010R, in positions corresponding to the two left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW located on the left-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW. The two right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW are recessed. The decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted, drive motors, drive solenoids, and other drive boards attached to the various performance units in the right-side drive board unit 1700R, are electrically connected to the right-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW either directly or via the various relay boards.

Below the left rear box 3010L of the left gaming board 5AL, in the center of the bottom edge of the divided gaming board 5A, which combines the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR, is a lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW, on which two lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW are mounted in the left-right direction. The two lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW are convex. The lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 directly or via various relay boards. Two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) are provided on a main frame side relay board (not shown) on the front of the main frame 4 at positions corresponding to the two lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW provided on the left rear box 3010L of the left gaming board 5AL. The two main frame drawer connectors are recessed. The various boards provided in the door frame 3 (decorative boards and various relay boards provided in the tray unit 200, left side unit 420, right side unit 430, and top unit 450. These relay boards include those that relay detection signals from various sensors in the performance operation unit 300 of the tray unit 200) are electrically connected to the main frame drawer connectors.

Here, we will explain drawer connectors such as the left-side game board drawer connector LDRW (convex type), the right-side game board drawer connector RDRW (concave type), the lower game board drawer connector UDRW (concave type), and the main frame side drawer connector (concave type). The left-side game board drawer connector LDRW (convex type) and the right-side game board drawer connector RDRW (concave type) are connectors that can automatically establish an electrical connection between the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR simply by combining the two. The lower game board drawer connector UDRW (convex type) and the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) are connectors that can automatically establish an electrical connection between the main frame 4 and the divided game board 5A simply by attaching the divided game board 5A to the main frame 4.

[Drawer connector for left-side game board, drawer connector for right-side game board]
When the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR are combined, the drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW for the left-side gaming board mounted on the convex type drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left-side gaming board of the left-side gaming board 5AL are guided and fitted into the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right-side gaming board mounted on the concave type drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW for the right-side gaming board of the right-side gaming board 5AR, and each terminal of the drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW for the left-side gaming board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left-side gaming board of the left-side gaming board 5AL is electrically connected to each terminal of the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right-side gaming board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW for the right-side gaming board of the right-side gaming board 5AR.

When the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR are combined, the terminals of the left-side gaming board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left-side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side gaming board 5AL are electrically connected to the terminals of the right-side gaming board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right-side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right-side gaming board 5AR, forming a control signal line that transmits various control signals between the peripheral control board 1510 located behind the left-side rear box 3010L on the left-side gaming board 5AL and the various boards located behind the right-side rear box 3010R on the right-side gaming board 5AR. A ground (GND) line is formed that electrically connects the grounds (GND, circuit ground) of the various control boards and other boards located behind the left rear box 3010L on the left gaming board 5AL to the grounds (GND, circuit ground) of the various boards located behind the right rear box 3010R on the right gaming board 5AR. In addition, various power supply lines are formed that supply various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, +24V) to the various boards located behind the right rear box 3010R on the right gaming board 5AR via the various control boards and/or other boards located behind the left rear box 3010L on the left gaming board 5AL.

Mounting through-holes are formed in the insulating exterior of the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW and the insulating exterior of the right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW. The left-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side game board 5AL, on which the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW are mounted, has a through-hole in a position corresponding to the insulating mounting through-hole of the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW. Furthermore, the right-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right-side game board 5AR, on which the right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW are mounted, has a through-hole in a position corresponding to the insulating mounting through-hole of the right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW.

When mounting the drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW for the left-side gaming board on the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left-side gaming board 5AL, first insert each terminal of the drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW for the left-side gaming board 5AL into the terminal through-holes formed in the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left-side gaming board 5AL from the mounting surface of the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left-side gaming board 5AL towards the soldering surface of the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW, and solder each terminal of the drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW for the left-side gaming board protruding from the soldering surface to the land portion of the terminal through-hole. Rivets are then inserted into mounting through-holes formed in the insulating exterior of the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW, and the ends of the rivets are crimped, causing the rivets to plastically deform. As a result, the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW are fixed to the land portions of the terminal through-holes by soldering each terminal of the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW, and the insulating exterior of the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW is fixed to the left-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side game board 5AL by rivet crimping.

By fixing them in this way, when the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR are combined, the load generated when the left-side game board drawer connector LDRW (convex type) is guided into and mated with the right-side game board drawer connector RDRW (concave type) prevents the land portions of the terminal through holes to which the terminals of the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW are soldered from peeling off from the base material of the left-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side game board 5AL.

When mounting the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right-side gaming board on the drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW for the right-side gaming board on the right-side gaming board 5AR, first connect the terminals of the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right-side gaming board on the right-side gaming board 5AR to the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left-side gaming board on the left-side gaming board 5AL. The right-side game board 5AR is inserted from the mounting surface of the right-side game board 5AR's drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW toward the soldering surface of the right-side game board 5ARDRW into the terminal through-holes formed in the drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW, and each terminal of the right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW protruding from the soldering surface is soldered to the land portion of the terminal through-hole. Then, rivets are inserted into mounting through-holes formed in the insulating exterior parts of the right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW, and the ends of the rivets are crimped to plastically deform the rivets. As a result, the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right-side game board are fixed to the land portions of the terminal through holes by soldering the terminals of the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right-side game board, and further, the insulating exterior portion of the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right-side game board is fixed to the drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW for the right-side game board 5AR with rivets.

By fixing them in this way, when the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR are combined, the load generated when the left-side game board drawer connector LDRW (convex type) is guided into and mated with the right-side game board drawer connector RDRW (concave type) prevents the land portions of the terminal through holes to which the terminals of the right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW are soldered from peeling off from the base material of the right-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right-side game board 5AR.

[Drawer connector for lower game board, drawer connector for main frame]
When the divided gaming board 5A is attached to the main frame 4, the drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW for the lower gaming board mounted on the convex type drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW for the lower gaming board of the left gaming board 5AL are guided and fitted into two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, which is a concave type, so that the terminals of the drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW for the lower gaming board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW for the left gaming board 5AL are electrically connected to the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

When the split gaming board 5A is attached to the main frame 4, the terminals of the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left gaming board 5AL are electrically connected to the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. This allows the peripheral control board 1510 located behind the left rear box 3010L of the left gaming board 5AL and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 (decorative boards and various relay boards provided on the tray unit 200, door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, and door frame top unit 450). The various relay boards receive signals from various sensors of the performance operation unit 300 of the tray unit 200. These include relays for transmitting detection signals and control signals that transmit various information. A control signal line is formed to transmit various control signals between the left gaming board 5AL and the power supply board 630. A ground (GND) line is also formed to electrically connect the grounds (GND, circuit ground) of the various control boards and other boards located behind the left rear box 3010L of the left gaming board 5AL to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the power supply board 630 located on the main frame 4. Various power supply lines are also formed to supply various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, and +24V) created by the power supply board 630 located on the main frame 4 to the various control boards and other boards located behind the left rear box 3010L of the left gaming board 5AL.

In addition, when the split gaming board 5A is attached to the main frame 4, the terminals of the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left gaming board 5AL are electrically connected to the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, thereby forming a control signal line that transmits various control signals between the main control board 1310 located behind the left rear box 3010L on the left gaming board 5AL and the payout control board 633 provided on the main frame 4.

Mounting through holes are formed in the insulating exterior parts of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW and the main frame side drawer connector. The lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left game board 5AL, on which the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW are mounted, has through holes in positions corresponding to the insulating mounting through holes of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW. Furthermore, the main frame side relay board (not shown), on which the main frame side drawer connector is mounted, has through holes in positions corresponding to the insulating mounting through holes of the main frame side drawer connector.

Here, for example, when mounting the drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW for the lower game board on the drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW for the lower game board of the left-side game board 5AL, first, each terminal of the drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW for the lower game board is inserted into the terminal through-hole formed in the drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW for the lower game board of the left-side game board 5AL from the mounting surface of the drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW for the lower game board of the left-side game board 5AL towards the soldering surface of the drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW for the lower game board of the left-side game board, and each terminal of the drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW for the lower game board protruding from the soldering surface is soldered to the land portion of the terminal through-hole. Rivets are then inserted into mounting through-holes formed in the insulating exterior of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW, and the ends of the rivets are crimped, causing the rivets to plastically deform. As a result, the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW are fixed to the land portions of the terminal through-holes by soldering each terminal of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW, and the insulating exterior of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW is fixed to the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left game board 5AL by rivet crimping.

By fixing them in this way, when the split gaming board 5A is attached to the main frame 4, the load generated when the lower gaming board drawer connector UDRW (convex type) is guided into and mated with the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) prevents the land portions of the terminal through holes to which the terminals of the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW are soldered from peeling off from the base material of the lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left gaming board 5AL.

In this embodiment, the main control board 1310, which is equipped with the main control MPU 1310a, a microprocessor, transmits various commands to the control board equipped with the microprocessor, including a self-identification code (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID") that can identify itself. In other words, the various commands from the main control board 1310 are configured to include an ID. In other words, in this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands that include an ID to the control board equipped with the microprocessor, allowing the microprocessor of the receiving control board to determine the compatibility (integrity) of the combination of the main control board 1310 and the receiving control board.

The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) with connectors on both ends, and various commands are sent in one direction from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 extracts the ID from the various received commands and determines whether the combination of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is compatible (matched). This determination is made in the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 220.

If the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the received command analysis process of step S1022 that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is incompatible (mismatched), it passes the received command as a command classified as a notification display to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 220. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC as modes indicating incompatibility (mismatch), thereby setting a process to stop the progression of the performance.

As mentioned above, the main control board 1310 can only transmit in one direction from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so the peripheral control board 1510 cannot obtain a determination result regarding the compatibility (integrity) of the combination of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and the game will continue.

In contrast, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are electrically connected between the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left game board 5AL when the divided game board 5A is attached to the main frame 4, and the terminals of the two main frame drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame relay boards (not shown) of the main frame 4. This allows various commands to be sent in both directions between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 via these drawer connectors. The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 extracts IDs from the received commands and determines whether the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (matched). This determination is made in the command analysis process of step S560 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 218.

When the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633 determines in the command analysis process of step S560 that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 is incompatible (inconsistent), it sets information indicating that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 is incompatible (inconsistent) in the status information storage area of the dispensing control built-in RAM, and sets information to stop the dispensing operation in the output information storage area of the dispensing control built-in RAM, and passes this to the LED display data creation process of step S564 in the dispensing control unit main processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 218, and the command sending process of step S566 in the dispensing control unit main processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 218. In the LED display data creation process of step S564, the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633 creates display data (e.g., display data displaying the letter "H") to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the dispensing control board 633 as a form of incompatibility (inconsistency) and sets this as LED display information in the output information storage area of the dispensing control built-in RAM. In the command transmission process of step S566, it creates an incompatibility command (inconsistency command) notifying of the incompatibility (inconsistency) and sends it to the main control board 1310. In addition, in the port output process of step S548 in the dispensing control board main process of the dispensing control board power-on process shown in FIG. 218, the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633 stops the dispensing operation of the dispensing motor 584 and outputs display data (e.g., the letter "H") to be displayed on the error LED indicator.

As described above, the main control board 1310 receives various commands bidirectionally from the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633. This allows the dispensing control board 633 to obtain a judgment result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633, and transmits this judgment result as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 performs a judgment result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 in the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 220. If this judgment result is incompatibility (inconsistency), a warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 220 is set to notify this fact. At this time, the performance may continue to progress, or the performance may be stopped.

The main control board 1310 also receives the judgment result from the payout control board 633 regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and if the received judgment result is incompatibility (inconsistency), the game may continue to progress as is or may be stopped.

The gaming board 5A shown in Figures 248 and 249 is composed of a left-side gaming board 5AL and a right-side gaming board 5AR, which constitute an A specification. Here, when changing the A specification of the split gaming board 5A to an A2 specification (here, although the shape of the decorative members on the right-side gaming board and the shape of the playing area 5a differ from those of the A specification, the various data and programs required for the main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 are the same as the contents of the various ROMs, and the right-side gaming board is simply redecorated), as shown in Figure 250, the gaming board 5A2 is composed of a left-side gaming board 5AL and a right-side gaming board 5A2R. The A2 specification is a redecoration of the right-side gaming board in the A specification, and the left-side gaming board 5AL in the A specification can be used in common. Simply replacing the A specification right-side gaming board 5AR with the A2 specification right-side gaming board 5A2R (i.e., replacing only the right-side gaming board) is sufficient.

In addition, various components that can be used in common across various specifications, such as the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, and various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various performance units housed in the left rear box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.), may be placed on the left-side gaming board 5AL. Specifically, the various data and programs required for the main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 can be placed on the left-side gaming board 5AL by simply changing the contents of the various ROMs. Furthermore, of the various winning holes, those whose placement and number are fixed regardless of the specifications are placed on the left-side gaming board 5AL. Furthermore, the shapes of the decorative components and the shape of the playing area 5a that can be used in common across various specifications are placed on the left-side gaming board 5AL. Additionally, various other boards that can be used in common regardless of specifications (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to the various performance units housed in the left rear box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.) are placed on the left game board 5AL.

In contrast, parts that depend on the specifications may be placed on the right-hand gaming board 5AR. Specifically, of the various winning openings, winning openings that depend on the specifications are placed on the right-hand gaming board 5AR. Furthermore, the shape of the decorative members and the shape of the gaming area 5a that depend on the specifications are placed on the right-hand gaming board 5AR.

[Self-identification code of the right-side gaming board in a divided gaming board]
As described above, the split game board employs a configuration in which the left game board and the right game board are combined, and a microprocessor is mounted on the left game board, while no microprocessor is mounted on the right game board.

However, while such split gaming boards allow the left and right gaming boards to be simply combined, there is also the possibility of human error, such as the worker assembling the split gaming board accidentally assembling an incorrect combination of the left and right gaming boards (an incompatible (mismatched) combination). If such an incompatible (mismatched) split gaming board is attached to the main frame 4 of a pachinko machine 1 in an island facility in an amusement hall and a player plays on it, for example, it could result in a loss of uniformity in the design of the entire pachinko machine, reducing the player's interest in the game. It is also undesirable because it could result in a pachinko machine that differs from the one whose specifications were submitted to the application authority and approved being installed in the amusement hall. Furthermore, if, due to human error, the decorative elements corresponding to the old gaming board remain instead of being replaced with those corresponding to the new gaming board, the uniformity of the entire gaming machine could be lost, reducing the player's interest in the game.

[ID output circuit]
Therefore, in this embodiment, the right-side gaming board 5AR (right-side gaming board 5A2R) is provided with an ID output circuit that can output a self-identification code (ID) that can identify itself to the left-side gaming board 5AL. Here, the ID output circuit will be described with reference to Fig. 251. Fig. 251 is a circuit diagram showing an example of an ID output circuit.

The right-side gaming board 5AR is equipped with an ID output circuit IDC that can identify itself. This ID output circuit IDC may be mounted on a dedicated board located at the rear of the right-side gaming board 5AR, or it may be mounted on one of the various relay boards, or it may be mounted together with LEDs mounted on a decorative board, or it may be mounted together with electronic components mounted on another board.

The ID output circuit IDC is primarily composed of a parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa. The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa is an electronic component that is primarily composed of multiple flip-flop circuits (8 flip-flop circuits), is assembled into a chip, and can be connected in a daisy chain. It has eight ID setting terminals, A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H, that can set the ID (i.e., there are eight parallel input terminals that can set the ID in 8-bit width), a CK terminal to which an ID acquisition clock signal is input, a non-inverting QH terminal that takes in the information set in the eight ID setting terminals A to H and outputs it as serial data without inverting it, an inverting QH terminal (shown in the diagram with a solid line above the letter "Q") that takes in the information set in the eight ID setting terminals A to H and inverts it and outputs it as serial data, and a CK terminal that prohibits the input of a clock signal. It mainly consists of an INH terminal, an S/inverted L terminal (shown in the diagram as a solid line above the letter "L") that switches between shift operation based on the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal and parallel operation in which each flip-flop circuit takes in information set in the eight ID setting terminals A to H, an SI terminal to which serial data is input, a power supply terminal Vcc to which control power is supplied, and a GND terminal that is electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground).

The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa has a power supply terminal Vcc electrically connected to +5V, and a GND terminal, CK INT terminal, and SI terminal electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground). The non-inverting QH terminal is left unconnected, and the inverting QH terminal outputs serial data converted from the ID, which is parallel data set in the eight ID setting terminals, as an ID code signal.

The S/inverted L terminal receives an SH/LD switching signal from outside the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa. When the logic of the SH/LD switching signal is parallel operation logic (logic LOW, electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground)), each flip-flop circuit of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa captures and stores (holds) the information currently set in the eight ID setting terminals (A terminal to H terminal). On the other hand, when the logic of the SH/LD switching signal is shift operation logic (logic HI, electrically connected to +5V), which is the inverse of the parallel operation logic, and the CK INT terminal is electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground), the captured information is shifted sequentially at the rising edge of the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal.

The SH/LD switching signal input to the S/inverted L terminal may be output from the peripheral control board 1510, or it may be output from a delay circuit provided together with the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa. This delay circuit is implemented on the board together with the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa as a circuit that constitutes the ID output circuit IDC, and is a circuit that sets the logic of the SH/LD switching signal to parallel operation logic for a predetermined time after the pachinko machine is turned on, and can switch from parallel operation logic to shift operation logic once this predetermined time has elapsed.

In this embodiment, the "predetermined time" is set to, for example, 30 milliseconds. When the pachinko machine is powered on and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 starts the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 220, the initial setting processing of step S1000 and then the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 are completed within this predetermined time. This is because the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 needs to acquire an ID code signal by outputting an ID acquisition clock signal in the ID determination processing described below, and determine the compatibility (matching) of the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR.

When the SH/LD switching signal input to the S/inverted L terminal is configured to be output from the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 can adjust the timing at which it starts to retrieve the information set in the eight ID setting terminals, A terminal to H terminal, making it possible to check the parallel operation of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa (fault inspection). However, it is necessary to provide a path for transmitting the SH/LD switching signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa.

In contrast, if the SH/LD switching signal input to the S/inverted L terminal is configured to be output from a delay circuit, the period during which each flip-flop circuit of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa begins to retrieve the information set in the eight ID setting terminals A through H is limited to a predetermined time (e.g., 30 milliseconds) from when the pachinko machine is powered on. While the peripheral control board 1510 cannot check the parallel operation of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa (test for defects), there is no need to provide a path for transmitting the SH/LD switching signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa. When transmitting various control signals via a drawer connector, the number of terminals on the drawer connector is limited, so the number of control signals must be reduced as much as possible. When the SH/LD switching signal input to the S/inverted L terminal is configured to be output from the delay circuit, there is no need to provide a path for transmitting the SH/LD switching signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa, which helps reduce the number of control signals transmitted via the drawer connector.

In this embodiment, the eight ID setting terminals on the right-side gaming board 5AR have terminals A, B, C, and D electrically connected to +5V, and terminals E, F, G, and H electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground). In other words, the ID of the right-side gaming board 5AR, expressed as an 8-bit width with terminal A as the most significant bit and terminal H as the least significant bit, is 11110000B (the letter "B" represents a binary number), and expressed in hexadecimal as F0H (the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number). In contrast, the eight ID setting terminals on the right-side gaming board 5A2R shown in FIG. 250 have terminals A, B, C, D, and H electrically connected to +5V, and terminals E, F, and G electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground). In other words, the ID of the right-side game board 5A2R, when expressed in 8 bits with the A terminal as the most significant bit and the H terminal as the least significant bit, becomes 11110001B (the letter "B" represents a binary number), and when expressed in hexadecimal, becomes F1H (the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number). In this way, the ID of the right-side game board 5AR and the ID of the right-side game board 5A2R are preset to be different. In this embodiment, as described above, the A specification and A2 specification split gaming boards 5A differ in the shape of the decorative members on the right-side gaming board and the shape of the gaming area 5a. However, the various data and programs required for the main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 are the same as the contents of the various ROMs, and the right-side gaming board can be redecorated. Therefore, the combination of the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR is compatible (matched), and the combination of the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5A2R is also compatible (matched).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the S/inverted L terminal is electrically connected to +5V, the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa has each flip-flop circuit shifting sequentially at the rising edge of the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal (that is, information input to the A terminal → information input to the B terminal → information input to the C terminal → information input to the D terminal → information input to the E terminal → information input to the F terminal → information input to the G terminal → information input to the H terminal → shifting one bit at a time from the non-inverted QH terminal and inverted QH terminal to output the ID code signal as serial data), so the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa operates as an 8-bit shift register.

By combining the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR, as described above, the terminals of the left-side gaming board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left-side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side gaming board 5AL are electrically connected to the terminals of the right-side gaming board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right-side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right-side gaming board 5AR, thereby forming a control signal line that transmits various control signals between the peripheral control board 1510 located behind the left-side rear box 3010L on the left-side gaming board 5AL and the various boards located behind the right-side rear box 3010R on the right-side gaming board 5AR. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and an ID acquisition clock signal is input from the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL via the terminals of the right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right-side game board 5AR and the terminals of the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side game board 5AL, the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right-side game board 5AR can transmit an ID code signal that can identify itself based on this input ID acquisition clock signal to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL. The peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL can acquire the ID code signal by outputting the ID acquisition clock signal at a predetermined timing and determine the compatibility (matching) of the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR. This prevents the overall design of the pachinko machine from losing its sense of unity, and prevents players from losing interest in the game. This determination will be explained later.

The ID output circuit IDC provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR is capable of transmitting an ID code signal to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side gaming board 5AL via a drawer connector consisting of the terminals of the right-side gaming board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right-side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right-side gaming board 5AR, and the terminals of the left-side gaming board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left-side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side gaming board 5AL. However, instead of this, The right-side gaming board 5AR and the connector relay board 5ALDRW may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) with connectors on both ends, so that the ID code signal from the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side gaming board 5AL. Alternatively, the board on which the ID output circuit IDC is mounted and the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side gaming board 5AL may be directly electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) with connectors on both ends, so that the ID code signal from the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side gaming board 5AL.

The ID acquisition clock signal and SH/LD switching signal to the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right-side gaming panel 5AR, and the ID code signal from the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right-side gaming panel 5AR may be transmitted via one of the two drawer connectors, or may be transmitted separately to both drawer connectors.

[Detection signals from photosensors that detect the positions of various movable bodies provided on the right-side gaming board]
Next, the detection signals from the photosensors that detect the positions (home position and operating position) of various movable bodies when they are provided on the right-side game board 5AR will be described with reference to Fig. 252. Fig. 252 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a photosensor information serial output circuit.

As shown in Figure 252, detection signals from photosensors that detect the positions (home position and operating position) of the various movable bodies provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR are collected in the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO. The photosensor information serial output circuit PSO is primarily composed of a parallel-serial conversion circuit PSOa. The parallel-serial conversion circuit PSOa in this photosensor information serial output circuit PSO is the same circuit as the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC described above, and so explanations of each terminal, parts with identical circuit configurations, and operation will be omitted here.

The detection signals from the photosensors that detect the positions (home positions and operating positions) of the various movable bodies provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR are input as signals corresponding to eight input terminals: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H (i.e., there are eight parallel input terminals that can set an ID with an 8-bit width). If the number of photosensors that detect the positions (home positions and operating positions) of the various movable bodies provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR is less than eight, the input terminals corresponding to the remaining number are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground).

The inverted QH terminal (shown by a solid line above the letter "Q" in the diagram) takes in the information set at the eight input terminals A through H, inverts it, and outputs it serially as serial data. It is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC described above. In other words, the parallel-serial conversion circuit PSOa and the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC are daisy-chain connected.

The S/inverted L terminal (shown in the diagram with a solid line above the letter "L") switches between shift operation based on the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal and parallel operation in which each flip-flop circuit takes in information set in the eight input terminals A to H, and receives the SH/LD switching signal from the peripheral control board 1510. The SH/LD switching signal is input to the S/inverted L terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO, as well as the S/inverted L terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC.

When the S/inverted L terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO on the right-side gaming panel 5AR and the S/inverted L terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC are electrically connected to +5V, the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO and the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC shift sequentially at the rising edge of the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal of each flip-flop circuit in the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO and the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC. (That is, information input to terminal A → information input to terminal B → information input to terminal C → information input to terminal D → information input to terminal E → information input to terminal F → information input to terminal G → information input to terminal H → the ID code signal is output as serial data by shifting one bit at a time from the non-inverted QH terminal and inverted QH terminal), so it operates as a 16-bit shift register made up of an 8-bit shift register made up of the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO and an 8-bit shift register made up of the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC.

By combining the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR, as described above, the terminals of the left-side gaming board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left-side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side gaming board 5AL are electrically connected to the terminals of the right-side gaming board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right-side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right-side gaming board 5AR, thereby forming a control signal line that transmits various control signals between the peripheral control board 1510 located behind the left-side rear box 3010L on the left-side gaming board 5AL and various boards on the right-side gaming board 5AR. As a result, when viewed from the peripheral control board 1510 located behind the left rear box 3010L on the left gaming board 5AL, the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC on the right gaming board 5AR becomes the front-stage 8-bit shift register, and the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO on the right gaming board 5AR becomes the back-stage 8-bit shift register. In other words, the contents held by each flip-flop of the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC on the right gaming board 5AR, which becomes the front-stage 8-bit shift register, are input to the peripheral control board 1510, followed by the contents held by each flip-flop of the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO on the right gaming board 5AR, which becomes the back-stage 8-bit shift register, one bit at a time, as serial data.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and an ID acquisition clock signal is input from the peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL via the drawer connectors formed by the terminals of the right gaming board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right gaming board 5AR and the terminals of the left gaming board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left gaming board 5AL, the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right gaming board 5AR and the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO provided on the right gaming board 5AR can transmit an ID code signal that can identify itself based on this input ID acquisition clock signal and a detection signal that detects the positions of various movable bodies provided on the right gaming board 5AR as a single serial signal, a photo and ID code signal, to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL. The peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL acquires photo and ID code signals by outputting an ID acquisition clock signal at a predetermined timing, thereby determining the compatibility (matching) between the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR and grasping the positions of various movable bodies. For example, in the movable body information acquisition process of step S1106 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 222, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 sets and outputs the logic of the SH/LD switch signal to switch to parallel operation and then serial operation, and then outputs an ID acquisition clock signal, thereby acquiring photo and ID code signals to determine the compatibility (matching) between the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR and grasping the positions of various movable bodies.

The ID output circuit IDC provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR is capable of transmitting photo and ID code signals to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side gaming board 5AL via a drawer connector consisting of the terminals of the right-side gaming board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right-side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right-side gaming board 5AR, and the terminals of the left-side gaming board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left-side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side gaming board 5AL. However, instead of this, The left-side game board 5AL's drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) with connectors on both ends, allowing the photo and ID code signals to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL, or the board mounting the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right-side game board 5AR may be directly electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL via electrical wiring (harness) with connectors on both ends, allowing the photo and ID code signals to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL.

In addition, by electrically connecting the inverted QH terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO in the right-side gaming board 5AR and the SI terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC, as described above, it operates as a 16-bit shift register, and the photo and ID code signal is configured as a serial signal containing information on the detection signal from the photosensor that detects the positions (original position and operating position) of the various movable bodies provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR and information on the ID of the right-side gaming board 5AR. Previously, signals were transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side gaming board 5AL via a drawer connector formed by the terminals of the LDRW, LDRW terminals. However, instead, the inverted QH terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO on the right-side gaming board 5AR and the SI terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC may be treated as separate serial systems, and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side gaming board 5AL via a drawer connector formed by the terminals of the right-side gaming board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right-side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right-side gaming board 5AR, and the terminals of the left-side gaming board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left-side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side gaming board 5AL.

[Self-identification code when the right-side game board is further divided]
Here, the ID output circuit when the right-side gaming board 5AR is further divided into an upper and lower part, that is, an upper right gaming board 5ART and a lower right gaming board 5ARU, will be described with reference to Fig. 253. Fig. 253 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a plurality of ID output circuits.

The right-side gaming board 5AR can be assembled by combining the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU. After combining the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU, the right-side gaming board 5AR is assembled by passing a bolt (not shown) through one end of the connecting member (not shown) provided on the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU and tightening it from the other end. This automatically makes the surface of the playing area 5a where the game balls roll, which is the connecting portion between the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU, flush (i.e., prevents any steps from occurring), and secures the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU in place.

The right-side game board 5AR is fixed by fastening the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU together after combining them, and then fastening bolts (not shown) from one side to the other of the connecting members (not shown) provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU. Furthermore, after combining the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR, The left-hand gaming board 5AL and the right-hand gaming board 5AR are secured together and the split gaming board 5A is attached to the main frame 4 by passing bolts (not shown) through connecting members (not shown) provided on the gaming board 5AL and the right-hand gaming board 5AR from one side to the other and tightening them. However, the left-hand gaming board 5AL, the upper-right gaming board 5ART, and the lower-right gaming board 5ARU may each be secured individually to the main frame 4. Even in this case, the surfaces of the game areas 5a where the game balls roll, which are the connecting portions between the left-hand gaming board 5AL, the upper-right gaming board 5ART, and the lower-right gaming board 5ARU, automatically become flush (i.e., no steps are created) and the left-hand gaming board 5AL, the upper-right gaming board 5ART, and the lower-right gaming board 5ARU are secured to the main frame 4.

The upper right gaming board 5ART is provided with a right side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW on which the above-mentioned right side gaming board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW are mounted. The two right side gaming board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW are of the concave type. The upper right gaming board 5ART is also provided with a right side gaming board drawer connector relay board on which two upper right side gaming board drawer connectors (not shown) are mounted. The two upper right side gaming board drawer connectors are of the convex type. The decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted, and the drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., which are attached to the various performance units on the upper right gaming board 5ART, are electrically connected to the right side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW either directly or via various relay boards.

The lower right gaming board 5ARU is equipped with a drawer connector relay board for the lower right gaming board, on which two drawer connectors for the lower right gaming board (not shown) are mounted in positions corresponding to the two drawer connectors for the upper right gaming board located on the drawer connector relay board for the upper right gaming board (not shown). The two drawer connectors for the lower right gaming board are of the concave type. The decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted, and the drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., which are attached to the various performance units on the lower right gaming board 5ARU, are electrically connected to the drawer connector relay board for the lower right gaming board (not shown) either directly or via various relay boards.

The two drawer connectors (convex type) for the upper right gaming board (not shown) and the two drawer connectors (concave type) for the lower right gaming board (not shown) are connectors that automatically electrically connect the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU simply by combining the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU.

When the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU are combined, the two upper right gaming board drawer connectors mounted on the upper right gaming board drawer connector relay board of the upper right gaming board 5ART, which is a convex type, are guided and fitted into the two lower right gaming board drawer connectors mounted on the lower right gaming board drawer connector relay board of the lower right gaming board 5ARU, which is a concave type, so that the terminals of the two upper right gaming board drawer connectors mounted on the upper right gaming board drawer connector relay board of the upper right gaming board 5ART are electrically connected to the terminals of the two lower right gaming board drawer connectors mounted on the lower right gaming board drawer connector relay board of the lower right gaming board 5ARU. This electrical connection forms control signal lines that transmit various control signals between the various boards on the upper right gaming board 5ART and the various boards on the lower right gaming board 5ARU, forms ground (GND) lines that electrically connect the grounds (GND, circuit ground) of the various boards on the upper right gaming board 5ART with the grounds (GND, circuit ground) of the various boards on the lower right gaming board 5ARU, and forms various power supply lines that supply various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, +24V) to the various boards on the lower right gaming board 5ARU via the various boards on the upper right gaming board 5ART.

The insulating exterior parts of the two drawer connectors for the upper right game board and the insulating exterior parts of the two drawer connectors for the lower right game board are each formed with a mounting through-hole, similar to the drawer connectors for the right game board RDRW, RDRW described above. By inserting rivets into the mounting through-holes and crimping the ends of the rivets, the two drawer connectors for the upper right game board are fixed to the upper right game board drawer connector relay board of the upper right game board 5ART, and the two drawer connectors for the lower right game board are fixed to the lower right game board drawer connector relay board of the lower right game board 5ARU.

By fixing them in this manner, when the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU are combined, the load generated when the upper right gaming board drawer connector (convex type) is guided into and mated with the lower right gaming board drawer connector (concave type) prevents the land portions of the terminal through holes to which the terminals of the upper right gaming board drawer connector are soldered from peeling off from the base material of the upper right gaming board drawer connector relay board on the upper right gaming board 5ART, and also prevents the land portions of the terminal through holes to which the terminals of the lower right gaming board drawer connector are soldered from peeling off from the base material of the lower right gaming board drawer connector relay board on the lower right gaming board 5ARU.

The upper right gaming board 5ART is provided with an ID output circuit IDCT that can identify itself, and the lower right gaming board 5ARU is provided with an ID output circuit IDCU that can identify itself. The ID output circuit IDCT of the upper right gaming board 5ART may be mounted on a dedicated board located behind the upper right gaming board 5ART, or it may be mounted on one of the various relay boards of the upper right gaming board 5ART, or it may be mounted together with LEDs mounted on a decorative board of the upper right gaming board 5ART, or it may be mounted together with electronic components mounted on other boards of the upper right gaming board 5ART. The ID output circuit IDCU of the lower right gaming board 5ARU may be mounted on a dedicated board located behind the lower right gaming board 5ARU, or may be mounted on one of the various relay boards of the lower right gaming board 5ARU, or may be mounted together with LEDs mounted on a decorative board of the lower right gaming board 5ARU, or may be mounted together with electronic components mounted on other boards of the lower right gaming board 5ARU.

The ID output circuits IDCT and IDCU have the same circuit configuration as the ID output circuit IDC described above, and although detailed explanation will be omitted, they are primarily composed of parallel-serial conversion circuits IDCTa and IDCUa, respectively. The ID output circuit IDCT of the upper right gaming board 5ART is the ID output circuit IDC described above, and the ID of the upper right gaming board 5ART, expressed as an 8-bit width with the A terminal as the most significant bit and the H terminal as the least significant bit, is 11110000B (the letter "B" represents a binary number), and expressed in hexadecimal as F0H (the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number). In contrast, the ID of the lower right gaming board 5ARU, when expressed as an 8-bit width with the A terminal as the most significant bit and the H terminal as the least significant bit, is 11111000B (the letter "B" represents a binary number), and when expressed in hexadecimal, it is F8H (the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number).

The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right gaming board 5ART is identical to the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC described above, except that the SI terminal is not electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground), and detailed explanation will be omitted. When the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU are combined, as described above, the CK terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right gaming board 5ARU is automatically electrically connected by the drawer connectors, consisting of the two upper right gaming board drawer connectors (convex type) (not shown) on the upper right gaming board 5ART and the two lower right gaming board drawer connectors (concave type) (not shown) on the lower right gaming board 5ARU. Therefore, via these drawer connectors, it is electrically connected to the CK terminal and S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right gaming board 5ART, and an ID acquisition clock signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is input.

The S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right gaming board 5ARU receives an SH/LD switching signal from the delay circuit in the lower right gaming board 5ARU. In other words, the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right gaming board 5ART receives an SH/LD switching signal from the delay circuit in the upper right gaming board 5ART, while the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right gaming board 5ARU receives an SH/LD switching signal from the delay circuit in the lower right gaming board 5ARU, and the S/inverted L terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuits IDCTa and IDCUa each receive an SH/LD switching signal from a different delay circuit. As mentioned above, the delay circuit on the upper right gaming panel 5ART and the delay circuit on the lower right gaming panel 5ARU are circuits that set the logic of the SH/LD switching signal to parallel operation logic for a predetermined time after the pachinko machine is powered on, and can switch from parallel operation logic to shift operation logic once this predetermined time has elapsed.

In addition, instead of this, the SH/LD switching signal from the delay circuit in the upper right game board 5ART may be input to the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU via a drawer connector consisting of two drawer connectors (convex type) for the upper right game board (not shown) in the upper right game board 5ART and two drawer connectors (concave type) for the lower right game board (not shown) in the lower right game board 5ARU. In addition, the SH/LD switching signal from the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL is transmitted to the upper right game board 5ART via a drawer circuit consisting of the terminals of the left game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left game board 5AL and the terminals of the right game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right game board 5AR. The signal is input to the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART, and may further be input to the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU via drawer connectors consisting of two drawer connectors (convex type) for the upper right game board (not shown) in the upper right game board 5ART and two drawer connectors (concave type) for the lower right game board (not shown) in the lower right game board 5ARU.

The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU has its SI terminal electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground), and its inverted QH terminal electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART via drawer connectors consisting of two drawer connectors (convex type) for the upper right game board (not shown) in the upper right game board 5ART and two drawer connectors (concave type) for the lower right game board (not shown) in the lower right game board 5ARU. In other words, the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU and the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART are daisy-chain connected.

When the S/inverted L terminal is electrically connected to +5V, the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU shift sequentially at the rising edge of the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal (i.e., information input to the A terminal → information input to the B terminal → information input to the C terminal). (Information input to the D terminal → information input to the E terminal → information input to the F terminal → information input to the G terminal → information input to the H terminal → an ID code signal is output as serial data by shifting one bit at a time from the non-inverted QH terminal and inverted QH terminal), so it operates as a 16-bit shift register consisting of an 8-bit shift register made up of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and an 8-bit shift register made up of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU.

By combining the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR (i.e., combining the left-side gaming board 5AL, the upper right gaming board 5ART, and the lower right gaming board 5ARU), as described above, the terminals of the left-side gaming board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left-side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side gaming board 5AL are electrically connected to the terminals of the right-side gaming board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right-side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the upper right gaming board 5ART, thereby forming control signal lines that transmit various control signals between the peripheral control board 1510 located behind the left-side rear box 3010L on the left-side gaming board 5AL and the various boards on the upper right gaming board 5ART and the various boards on the lower right gaming board 5ARU. As a result, when viewed from the peripheral control board 1510 located behind the left rear box 3010L on the left gaming board 5AL, the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa on the upper right gaming board 5ART becomes the front-stage 8-bit shift register, and the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa on the lower right gaming board 5ARU becomes the back-stage 8-bit shift register. In other words, the contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa on the upper right gaming board 5ART, which becomes the front-stage 8-bit shift register, are input to the peripheral control board 1510, followed by the contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa on the lower right gaming board 5ARU, which becomes the back-stage 8-bit shift register, one bit at a time, as serial data.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and an ID acquisition clock signal is input from the peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL via the terminals of the right gaming board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right gaming board on the right gaming board 5ART, and the terminals of the left gaming board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left gaming board 5AL, the ID output circuit IDCT provided on the upper right gaming board 5ART and the ID output circuit IDCU provided on the lower right gaming board 5ARU can transmit an ID code signal that can identify itself based on this input ID acquisition clock signal to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL. The peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL acquires an ID code signal by outputting an ID acquisition clock signal at a predetermined timing, and can determine the compatibility (matching) between the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR.

The ID output circuit IDCT provided on the upper right gaming board 5ART is capable of transmitting an ID code signal to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL via a drawer connector consisting of the terminals of the right gaming board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right gaming board 5AR, and the terminals of the left gaming board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left gaming board 5AL. However, instead of this, the ID code signal can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL via a drawer connector consisting of the terminals of the right gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW and the left gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left gaming board 5AL. The ID output circuit IDCT on the upper right gaming board 5ART may be electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL via electrical wiring (harness) with connectors on both ends, so that an ID code signal can be transmitted from the ID output circuit IDCT on the upper right gaming board 5ART to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL. Alternatively, the board on which the ID output circuit IDCT on the upper right gaming board 5ART is mounted may be directly electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL via electrical wiring (harness) with connectors on both ends, so that an ID code signal can be transmitted from the ID output circuit IDCT on the upper right gaming board 5ART to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL.

The ID output circuit IDCU provided on the lower right gaming board 5ARU transmits an ID code signal to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL via a first drawer connector consisting of the terminals of the two lower right gaming board drawer connectors mounted on the lower right gaming board drawer connector relay board of the lower right gaming board 5ARU and the terminals of the two upper right gaming board drawer connectors mounted on the upper right gaming board drawer connector relay board of the upper right gaming board 5ART, and via a second drawer connector consisting of the terminals of the right side gaming board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right side gaming board 5AR and the terminals of the left side gaming board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left side gaming board 5AL. Alternatively, the ID code signal can be transmitted from the ID output circuit IDCU provided on the lower right gaming board 5ARU to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL via electrical wiring (harness) with connectors on both ends between the drawer connector relay board for the lower right gaming board and the left gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left gaming board 5AL, or the board mounting the ID output circuit IDCU provided on the lower right gaming board 5ARU and the peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL can be directly electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) with connectors on both ends, allowing the ID code signal to be transmitted from the ID output circuit IDCU provided on the lower right gaming board 5ARU to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL.

The first drawer connector and the second drawer connector each consist of two drawer connectors, but the ID acquisition clock signal and SH/LD switching signal sent to the ID output circuit IDCT provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the ID output circuit IDCU provided on the lower right game board 5ARU, and the ID code signal from the ID output circuit IDCT provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the ID output circuit IDCU provided on the lower right game board 5ARU, may be transmitted via one of the two drawer connectors in the first drawer connector, or may be transmitted in a distributed manner to both drawer connectors, or may be transmitted via one of the two drawer connectors in the second drawer connector, or may be transmitted in a distributed manner to both drawer connectors.

When combining the upper right gaming board with the lower right gaming board, the upper right gaming board 5ART is supposed to be combined with the lower right gaming board 5ARU, but when it is combined with another lower right gaming board that is not compatible (matched) with the upper right gaming board 5ART, since the left gaming board 5AL and the upper right gaming board 5ART are compatible (matched), the various LEDs on the upper right gaming board 5ART will change their light emission pattern as the performance progresses, but the various LEDs on the other lower right gaming board that is not compatible (matched) with the upper right gaming board 5ART will be turned off (all turned off). Alternatively, when the upper right gaming board and the lower right gaming board are combined, and the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU are to be combined, but instead another lower right gaming board that is not compatible (matched) with the upper right gaming board 5ART is combined, even if the left side gaming board 5AL and the upper right gaming board 5ART are compatible (matched), the various LEDs provided on the upper right gaming board 5ART and the various LEDs provided on the other lower right gaming board that is not compatible (matched) with the upper right gaming board 5ART may be turned off (all off).

[ID Determination Process]
In this embodiment, the presentation operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 may be replaceable to match the specifications of the divided game board. In this case, the presentation operation unit 300 may be treated as a component of the game board 5. In other words, the game frame side component, which is made up of the outer frame 2, door frame 3, and main frame 4, is provided with a game board side component, which is made up of the game board 5 equipped with a microprocessor and the presentation operation unit 300 not equipped with a microprocessor, in an easily detachable state (for example, a state in which it can be attached and detached without using a tool such as a screwdriver). The game board 5 and the presentation operation unit 300 are provided with various LEDs, which are driven by various LED drivers.

In contrast, the door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3 are provided in a state that makes them difficult to attach and detach (for example, fastened with screws or the like, making them difficult to attach and detach without a tool such as a screwdriver) and are not replaced (or may be made non-replaceable) to suit the specifications of the split game board. They are used in common with any split game board specifications, regardless of the split game board specifications. The split game board and door frame units are provided with various LEDs and are driven by various LED drivers. Here, we will explain, with reference to Figures 254 and 255, the combinations of the performance operation unit provided on the door frame 3 and the split game board that are compatible (matched) as pachinko machine A and the combinations that are compatible (matched) as pachinko machine B. Fig. 254 is a table showing a table of compatibility (matching)/incompatibility (mismatching) of combinations, and Fig. 255 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power-on process capable of ID determination. The peripheral control unit power-on process in Fig. 255 performs almost the same processing as the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in Fig. 220, and in Fig. 255, steps performing the same processing are indicated by the same names and step numbers. Note that detailed explanations of the same names and step numbers will be omitted. Additionally, in the following description, door frame units such as the left-side unit 420, right-side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3 are shown as not being replaceable (or may be non-replaceable) to match the specifications of the divided game board. However, instead of or in addition to the presentation operation unit 300, specific door frame units (one or more of the door frame units) from among the left-side unit 420, right-side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3 may be treated as components of the game board 5. In other words, the game board side components may be composed of the game board 5 equipped with a microprocessor and the presentation operation unit 300 and/or specific door frame units that do not equipped with a microprocessor.

Here, the above-mentioned ID output circuit is provided, which can identify itself as a presentation operation unit 300 that can be replaced to suit the specifications of the divided game board. The ID used for pachinko machine A is set to 00110000B in binary (the letter "B" represents a binary number) and 30H in hexadecimal (the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number) (hereinafter, the presentation operation unit used for pachinko machine A will be referred to as "presentation operation unit 300A"). The ID used for pachinko machine B is set to 00110001B in binary (the letter "B" represents a binary number) and 31H in hexadecimal (the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number) (hereinafter, the presentation operation unit used for pachinko machine B will be referred to as "presentation operation unit 300B").

The combination of split game boards in pachinko machine A is set to specification A (for example, a type with a setting key or a type that is not a so-called "Ama-degi" type), and the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR described above are compatible (matched); the combination of split game boards in pachinko machine B is set to specification B, which is different from specification A (for example, a type that does not have a setting key or a so-called "Ama-degi" type), and the new left-side game board 5BL and the right-side game board 5AR described above are compatible (matched).

In this case, as a combination of the presentation operation unit and divided game board provided on the door frame 3 in pachinko machine A, the left-side game board 5AL is compatible (matched) with the right-side game board 5AR and presentation operation unit 300A, as shown in Figure 254(a). Also, as a combination of the presentation operation unit and divided game board provided on the door frame 3 in pachinko machine B, the left-side game board 5BL is compatible (matched) with the right-side game board 5AR and presentation operation unit 300B, as shown in Figure 254(b). As mentioned above, the door frame units such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3 are not intended to be replaced to suit the specifications of the split game board, but are used in common with all split game board specifications, regardless of the split game board specifications. Therefore, as shown in Figures 254 (a) and (b), in specification A, they are not the subject of compatibility (matching) for the combination of the left side game board 5AL and door frame unit, and in specification B, they are not the subject of compatibility (matching) for the combination of the left side game board 5BL and door frame unit.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side gaming board 5AL acquires an ID from the ID code signals transmitted from each ID output circuit at a predetermined timing after power-on, and determines whether the combination of the effect operation unit and the divided gaming board provided on the door frame 3 is compatible (matched). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the peripheral control unit power-on processing begins, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs an initial setup process in step S1000, followed by a current time information acquisition process in step S1002, as shown in FIG. 255. Next, the peripheral control IC 1510a performs an ID determination process in step S1003. In this ID determination process, to acquire the ID of the right-side gaming board and the ID of the effect operation unit, it outputs an ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the right-side gaming board) to the right-side gaming board and an ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the effect operation unit) to the effect operation unit, respectively. The peripheral control IC 1510a acquires the ID code signal from the right-hand gaming board (ID code signal dedicated to the right-hand gaming board) and the ID code signal from the presentation operation unit (ID code signal dedicated to the presentation operation unit) via separate serial systems, and determines (compares) the combination of the split gaming boards (that is, the combination of the right-hand gaming board (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left-hand gaming board (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) by referring to a combination table (Fig. 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, and determines (compares) the combination of the presentation operation unit and the split gaming board by referring to a combination table (Fig. 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM.

In addition, this ID determination process may perform the determination (comparison) of the above-mentioned combination of divided game boards (i.e., the combination of the right-side game board (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left-side game board (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) and the determination (comparison) of the combination of the performance operation unit and the divided game board multiple times (for example, five times). In this case, if a match (integrity) is obtained as the determination result three times in a row, the process will proceed to the next step as a match (integrity), whereas if a match (integrity) is not obtained three times in a row as a determination result, the process will proceed to the next step as an incompatibility (inconsistency).

When the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 that the combination of divided game boards is incompatible (mismatched), that is, when the determination result of the combination of the right game board (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left game board (peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor) is incompatible (mismatched), it passes a command classified as a notification display to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit's regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC as modes indicating incompatibility (mismatch), thereby setting various processing related to the presentation.

Furthermore, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 that the combination of the effect operation unit and the divided game board is incompatible (inconsistent), it passes a command classified as a notification display to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit's regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC as modes indicating incompatibility (inconsistency), thereby setting various processes related to the effect.

Because the peripheral control board 1510 needs to receive various commands from the main control board 1310, when the pachinko machine is powered on, its system is designed to complete startup before the main control board 1310 system starts up. Therefore, if the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is incompatible (inconsistent), the mode in which the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is incompatible (inconsistent) will take precedence until a command is received informing the user that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (inconsistent). If the peripheral control board 1510 subsequently receives a command indicating that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (inconsistent), the mode in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (inconsistent) will take precedence over the mode in which the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is incompatible (inconsistent). The combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is such that the main control board 1310 is placed on the divided game board, while the payout control board 633 is placed on the main frame 4, and the divided game board is attached to the main frame 4; in other words, it is a combination of a divided game board and a main frame.

In the past, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performed the ID determination process only once when the power was turned on (including when power was restored after a power outage or when power was restored after a momentary power outage (instantaneous blackout)) before the peripheral control unit normal processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing began. However, to enable the ID determination process to be performed at any time, it may be performed as part of the peripheral control unit normal processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (for example, following the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing of step S1010, the ID determination process is performed as the processing of step S1012, followed by the performance operation unit monitoring processing of step S1014). This allows the peripheral control IC 1510a to check the combination of the performance operation unit and the divided game board multiple times at any time.

Furthermore, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 outputs an SH/LD switching signal to the right-side game board and the presentation operation unit (this may be configured as an SH/LD switching signal dedicated to the right-side game board and an SH/LD switching signal dedicated to the presentation operation unit, or one SH/LD switching signal may be branched into two signals and input to the right-side game board and the presentation operation unit, respectively). In this case, in the ID determination process, the logic of the SH/LD switching signal is first set to parallel operation logic for a predetermined time (a time sufficient for the parallel-serial conversion circuit of the ID output circuit on the right-side game board and the parallel-serial conversion circuit of the ID output circuit on the presentation operation unit to take in and store (hold) the information set to the eight ID setting terminals through parallel operation, for example, 2 milliseconds), and then, during this predetermined time, After this time has elapsed, it switches from parallel operation logic to shift operation logic, and then outputs an ID acquisition clock signal to the right-hand game board (ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the right-hand game board) and an ID acquisition clock signal to the performance operation unit (ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the performance operation unit). It then acquires the ID code signal from the right-hand game board (ID code signal dedicated to the right-hand game board) and the ID code signal from the performance operation unit (ID code signal dedicated to the performance operation unit) via separate serial systems, and determines the combination of the split game boards (that is, the combination of the right-hand game board (a board without a microprocessor) and the left-hand game board (peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)), as well as the combination of the performance operation unit and the split game board.

Next, returning to Figure 254, we will explain the state, behavior, and countermeasures of the pachinko machine depending on the compatibility (matching)/incompatibility (mismatch) of the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board, and the combination of the divided game board and the main frame. As mentioned above, the door frame units such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3 are not replaced to suit the specifications of the divided game board, and are used commonly for all divided game board specifications regardless of the specifications of the divided game board. Therefore, they have no effect on the compatibility (matching)/incompatibility (mismatch) of the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board, and the combination of the divided game board and the main frame.

Here, we will explain the details of Pachinko Machine A, and as the details of Pachinko Machine B are the same as those of Pachinko Machine A, we will omit them with some exceptions (Figure 254 (c) also shows the code for Pachinko Machine A followed by the code for Pachinko Machine B in parentheses).

The combination of the split game boards in pachinko machine A and the combination of the split game boards and the presentation operation unit in pachinko machine A are determined in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 255, while the combination of the split game board 5A and the main frame is determined in the command analysis process of step S560 in the payout control unit main processing of the payout control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 218. In other words, the combination of the split game boards in pachinko machine A and the combination of the split game boards and the presentation operation unit in pachinko machine A are determined by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 placed on the split game board, while the combination of the split game board 5A and the main frame is determined by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 provided on the main frame 4 to which the split game board is attached. The determination result made by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 is transmitted as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. For this reason, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 holds information on the combination of divided game boards in pachinko machine A, information on whether the combination of divided game boards and performance operation units in pachinko machine A is compatible (matched), and information on whether the combination of divided game board 5A and the main body frame is compatible (matched).

The combination of the split game board and presentation operation unit in pachinko machine A is set as specification A (for example, a type with a setting key or one that is not the so-called sweet type), and the split game board combination that is compatible (matched) is a split game board 5A consisting of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR, and the combination of the split game board and presentation operation unit in pachinko machine A that is compatible (matched) is one consisting of a split game board 5A and a presentation operation unit 300A. Furthermore, the combination of split game boards in pachinko machine B, and the combination of split game boards and presentation operation units in pachinko machine B, are set to B specifications (for example, those without setting keys or so-called mild types), and the split game board combination that is compatible (matches) is split game board 5B consisting of left game board 5BL and right game board 5AR, and the combination of split game boards and presentation operation units in pachinko machine B that is compatible (matches) is one consisting of split game board 5B and presentation operation unit 300B.

As shown in Figure 254 (c), there are 10 possible states of the pachinko machine, from state 1 to state 10, depending on whether the combination of the performance operation unit 300A and the divided game board 5A, and the combination of the divided game board 5A and the main frame, are compatible (matched) or incompatible (mismatched).

State 1: Normal Combination of divided game boards: Composed of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR, and in a compatible (matched) state.
Combination of split game board and presentation operation unit: A state in which the split game board 5A and the presentation operation unit 300A are configured and matched (aligned).
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (aligned).
Behavior of the pachinko machine during an error: Normal operation (no error response).
Solution: None as it is working normally.

Status 2: ID error 1 (mismatch of right game board)
Combination of split game boards: A state in which the game board is not composed of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR and is incompatible (mismatched).
Combination of split game board and presentation operation unit: A state in which the split game board 5A and the presentation operation unit 300A are configured and matched (aligned).
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (aligned).
Behavior of pachinko machine during an error: Error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Solution: After powering off, replace with a compatible ID product (matched ID product).

Status 3: ID error 2 (incompatibility (mismatch) of the production operation unit)
Combination of split game boards: A state in which the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are configured and matched (aligned).
Combination of a divided game board and a presentation operation unit: A state in which the divided game board 5A and the presentation operation unit 300A are not configured and are incompatible (mismatched).
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (aligned).
Behavior of pachinko machines during errors: Error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Solution: Replace with a compatible ID part (matched ID part) (replacement is possible even with the power on).

Status 4: ID error 3 (mismatch between main control board and dispensing control board)
Combination of split game boards: A state in which the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are configured and matched (aligned).
Combination of split game board and presentation operation unit: A state in which the split game board 5A and the presentation operation unit 300A are configured and matched (aligned).
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (mismatched).
Behavior of pachinko machine during error: Error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Solution: After powering off, replace with a compatible ID product (matched ID product).

Status 5: ID error 4 (mismatch (mismatch) of the right game board + mismatch (mismatch) of the performance operation unit)
Combination of split game boards: A state in which the game board is not composed of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR and is incompatible (mismatched).
Combination of a divided game board and a presentation operation unit: A state in which the divided game board 5A and the presentation operation unit 300A are not configured and are incompatible (mismatched).
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (aligned).
Behavior of pachinko machines during errors: Error handling 4.
Solution: After powering off, replace with a compatible ID product (matched ID product).

Status 6: ID error 1, 3 (mismatch (mismatch) of the right game board + mismatch (mismatch) between the main control board and the payout control board)
Combination of split game boards: A state in which the game board is not composed of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR and is incompatible (mismatched).
Combination of split game board and presentation operation unit: A state in which the split game board 5A and the presentation operation unit 300A are configured and matched (aligned).
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (mismatched).
Behavior of pachinko machines during errors: Error handling 5.
Solution: After powering off, replace with a compatible ID product (matched ID product).

Status 7: ID error 2, 3 (mismatch (mismatch) between the performance operation unit + mismatch (mismatch) between the main control board and the payout control board)
Combination of split game boards: A state in which the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are configured and matched (aligned).
Combination of a divided game board and a presentation operation unit: A state in which the divided game board 5A and the presentation operation unit 300A are not configured and are incompatible (mismatched).
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (mismatched).
Behavior of pachinko machines during errors: Error handling 6.
Solution: After powering off, replace with a compatible ID product (matched ID product).

Status 8: Unconnected error 1 (connection to the right game board cannot be confirmed)
Combination of split game boards: There is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR (the input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR cannot be confirmed), and a malfunction such as a short circuit or broken wire has occurred in the transmission path that transmits various signals, making it impossible to confirm the connection.
Combination of split game board and presentation operation unit: A state in which the split game board 5A and the presentation operation unit 300A are configured and matched (aligned).
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (aligned).
Behavior of pachinko machines during errors: Error handling 7.
Solution: Check the connection after powering off.

Status 9: Unconnected error 2 (Cannot confirm connection with the production operation unit)
Combination of split game boards: A state in which the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are configured and matched (aligned).
Combination of a split game board and a presentation operation unit: A state in which there is no input of an ID code signal from the presentation operation unit 300A (the input of an ID code signal from the presentation operation unit 300A cannot be confirmed), and a malfunction such as a short circuit or break has occurred in the transmission path that transmits various signals, making it impossible to confirm the connection.
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (aligned).
Behavior of pachinko machines during errors: Error handling 8.
Solution: Check the connection after powering off.

Status 10: Unconnected error 3 (Cannot confirm connection with the right game board + Cannot confirm connection with the performance operation unit)
Combination of split game boards: There is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR (the input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR cannot be confirmed), and a malfunction such as a short circuit or broken wire has occurred in the transmission path that transmits various signals, making it impossible to confirm the connection.
Combination of a split game board and a presentation operation unit: A state in which there is no input of an ID code signal from the presentation operation unit 300A (the input of an ID code signal from the presentation operation unit 300A cannot be confirmed), and a malfunction such as a short circuit or break has occurred in the transmission path that transmits various signals, making it impossible to confirm the connection.
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (aligned).
Behavior of pachinko machines during errors: Error handling 9.
Solution: Check the connection after powering off.

Next, Error Response 1 to Error Response 9, which are the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error shown in Figure 254 (c), will be explained with reference to Figures 256 to 258 as Specific Example 1, and with reference to Figures 259 to 261 as Specific Example 2, for cases where there is no magnetic detection (so-called magnetic goto) when the power is turned on (including recovery from a power outage and recovery from a momentary power outage; the same applies below), when the presentation is progressing after the power is turned on (for example, when the presentation is progressing based on the game ball entering one of the various winning slots) or when waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being held or a still image is displayed), and cases where there is magnetic detection (magnetic goto) when the presentation is progressing after the power is turned on (for example, when the presentation is progressing based on the game ball entering one of the various winning slots) or when waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being held or a still image is displayed). Fig. 256 is a table showing various error responses when the power is turned on (specific example 1), Fig. 257 is a table showing various error responses (specific example 1) that do not involve magnetic detection while the performance is progressing after the power is turned on or while waiting for customers, Fig. 258 is a table showing various error responses (specific example 1) that involve magnetic detection while the performance is progressing after the power is turned on or while waiting for customers. Also, Fig. 259 is a table showing various error responses (specific example 2) when the power is turned on, Fig. 260 is a table showing various error responses (specific example 2) that do not involve magnetic detection while the performance is progressing after the power is turned on or while waiting for customers, and Fig. 261 is a table showing various error responses (specific example 2) that involve magnetic detection while the performance is progressing after the power is turned on or while waiting for customers. Various ID errors (including individual ID errors such as ID error 1, ID error 2, and ID error 3 shown in Figure 254(c), as well as combinations of these ID errors) hinder gameplay to a greater extent than various unconnection errors (unconnection error 1, unconnection error 2, and unconnection error 3 shown in Figure 254(c)). Furthermore, while magnetic detection is resolved after a certain amount of time has passed, ID errors and unconnection errors are not resolved even after a certain amount of time has passed.

In addition, among the items listed in the upper row of the tables in Figures 256 to 261, "Error response number" corresponds to Error Response 1 to Error Response 9, which are the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 254 (c); "Audio" indicates the type of audio played from the various speakers provided in the pachinko machine; "Various LEDs on the door frame unit (various LEDs related to performance (various decorative LEDs))" indicates the light emission mode of the various LEDs (various LEDs related to performance (various decorative LEDs)) provided on the door frame units such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3; and "Various LEDs on the game board (various LEDs related to performance (various decorative LEDs))" indicates the various LEDs (various LEDs related to performance (various decorative LEDs)) provided on the game board (divided game board). indicates the light emission mode of the "performance display device", "performance display device" indicates the display mode of the performance display device 1600 provided on the game board (split game board), "sub-performance display device" is provided on the game board (split game board) or door frame unit separately from the performance display device 1600 provided on the game board (split game board), and indicates the display mode of the sub-performance display device, "function display unit" indicates the display mode of the function display unit 1400 provided on the game board (split game board), "sub-function display unit" indicates the display mode of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the game board (split game board), "game board side movable body (movable body related to performance)" indicates the operation of various movable bodies (movable body related to performance) provided on the game board (split game board), and "door frame side" indicates the operation of various movable bodies provided on the door frame unit.

Of the above items, "audio," "various LEDs on the door frame unit (various LEDs related to effects (various decorative LEDs))," "various LEDs on the game board (various LEDs related to effects (various decorative LEDs))," "effect display device," "sub-effect display device," "sub-function display unit," "game board side movable body (movable body related to effects)," and "game frame side movable body" are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board (split game board), while the "function display unit" is controlled by the main control board 1310 provided on the game board (split game board). Note that if a sub-effect display device is not provided in a pachinko machine, the content displayed on the sub-effect display device is displayed on the effect display device 1600 provided on the game board (split game board).

Furthermore, as described above, the door frame unit is equipped with a presentation operation unit 300 in the tray unit 200. Some presentation operation units 300 do not have the ID output circuit described above; in other words, some presentation operation units 300 are not equipped with any ID for self-identification and are used commonly by all presentation operation units 300 specifications. In such cases, when the presentation operation unit 300 is equipped with a movable body such as the presentation operation section 301, the movable body equipped in the presentation operation unit 300 is treated as included in the "game frame side movable body," and the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on the various decorative boards (e.g., presentation operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320, button outer decorative board 355, button inner decorative board 364, etc.) equipped in the presentation operation unit 300 are treated as included in the "various LEDs of the door frame unit."

"Gaming board side movable body" refers to the various movable bodies provided on the left gaming board in Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 compatible) and Error Response 7, and to the various movable bodies provided on the left gaming board and/or the various movable bodies provided on the right gaming board in Error Response 2 (ID Error 2 compatible) and Error Response 8.

When Error Response 1 to Error Response 9 occurs, which is the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 254 (c), in order to deal with these various errors, it is necessary to release the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 and release the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4. At this time, although the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where the door is open, it does not notify the user that the door is open in order to prioritize the notification of Error Response 1 to Error Response 9.

Furthermore, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum values in step S30 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 210 do not match after power is applied to the pachinko machine 1, it determines that there is a RAM error in the main control's built-in RAM, displays an error in step S33 of the same processing, and then restarts the machine. Even after restarting, the contents of the main control's built-in RAM are not updated at all, and the machine again proceeds to the error display processing in step S33 based on the determination in step S30, and restarts are repeated, resulting in a state where play is stopped.

When such a RAM error occurs, even if error response 1 to error response 9 occurs, which is the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 254(c), only a notification (error display) is made to inform the user that a RAM error has occurred, whereas the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 254(c) is such that no notification is made to inform the user that error response 1 to error response 9 has occurred.

In order to prevent repeated restarts, it is necessary to insert the setting key into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turn it ON, then operate the power switch 630a on the power supply board 630 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d on the payout control board 633 to power on the pachinko machine 1. This operation causes the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 to perform the setting change process in step S37 of the main control side power-on process, clear the entire RAM area in step S38, and then proceed with the game using the main control side timer interrupt process shown in Figure 212. Because the setting key is an important key, only a limited number of people, including the arcade manager, are permitted to possess it, and it is limited to two to three people.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays, for example, "Power being restored" against a black background on the performance display device 1600 as a startup mode. At this time, "Power being restored" may be followed by "Setting up", or "Setting up" may be displayed instead of "Power being restored". In this case, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing, it must send a setting change start command to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data, indicating that the setting change is about to begin.

After the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has completed the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing, that is, when it receives a setting change command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will use this as an opportunity to issue a notification to inform the user that error response 1 to error response 9 has occurred, as shown in Figure 254 (c) as the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error. In other words, even if Error Response 1 to Error Response 9 occurs as part of the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 254 (c), if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turned ON, causing the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to perform the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process (until the specified period until this setting change process is completed has elapsed, in other words, until the setting change command from the main control board 1310 is received (analyzed)), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 can change the error notification start time that notifies the user of this by operating the setting key held by a limited number of people in the amusement hall, even if an ID error or unconnection error in Error Response 1 to Error Response 9 has occurred.

[Specific example 1: When power is turned on]
First, referring to FIG. 256, we will explain error responses 1 to 9, which are the behavior of a pachinko machine in the event of an error as shown in FIG. 254(c) when the power is turned on.
[Error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling)]
Audio: After the start-up music ends, an announcement saying "Please call an attendant" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound seven times. This audio pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: Displays notification text such as "Power being restored" and "Please wait" on a black background, and when the startup music ends, displays the performance image.
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the start-up music starts, a notification message saying "Game board ID error" is displayed on a specified background image.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Movable body on the game board: No operation such as returning to original position (not in operation).
Movable body on game frame side: No operation such as returning to original position (not operating).

[Error handling 2 (ID error 2 handling)]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the start-up music starts, a notification message saying "Performance operation button ID error" is displayed on a specified background image.
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling)]
Audio: After the start-up music ends, an announcement saying "Please call an attendant" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound twice. This audio pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the start-up music starts, a specified background image is displayed with the warning message "Main Payout ID Error" indicating that there is an inconsistency in the combination of the main control board provided on the game board (split game board) and the payout control board provided on the main frame 4 to which the game board (split game board) is attached.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Movable body on the game board: Has operations such as returning to the original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: Has operations such as returning to the original position (operation).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the start-up music starts, the notification text "Game board ID error" and "Performance operation button ID error" are displayed on a specified background image (this is a combination of the contents of Error Response 1 (ID error 1 compatible) and Error Response 2 (ID error 2 compatible) (Error Response 1 (ID error 1 compatible) + Error Response 2 (ID error 2 compatible))).
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the startup music starts, the notification text "Main payout ID error" and "Game board ID error" are displayed on a specified background image (this is a combination of the contents of error response 3 (ID error 3 response) and error response 1 (ID error 1 response) (error response 3 (ID error 3 response) + error response 1 (ID error 1 response))).
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the startup music starts, the notification text "Main payment ID error" and "Performance operation button ID error" are displayed on a specified background image (this is a combination of the contents of error response 3 (ID error 3 response) and error response 2 (ID error 2 response) (error response 3 (ID error 3 response) + error response 2 (ID error 2 response))).
Function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).

[Error handling 7]
Sound: After the start-up music ends, an announcement saying "Game board not connected" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times. This sound pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flashes red.
Performance display device: Displays the notification text "Power is being restored" and "Please wait a moment" on a black background, and also displays notification text "The game board cable has been detected as not being inserted" and "Please turn off the power before inserting the cable", and when the startup music ends, displays the image from the performance.
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the start-up music starts, a notification message saying "Game board not connected" is displayed on a specified background image.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Movable body on the game board: No operation such as returning to original position (not in operation).
Movable body on game frame side: No operation such as returning to original position (not operating).

[Error handling 8]
Audio: After the start-up music ends, an announcement will be made saying "The production operation unit is not connected" and a predetermined error notification sound will be played four times. This audio pattern will be played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flashes red.
Performance display device: Displays the notification text "Power restoration in progress" and "Please wait a moment" on a black background, and also displays notification text "The performance operation unit cable has been detected as not being inserted" and "Please turn off the power before inserting the cable", and when the startup music ends, displays the image from the performance.
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the start-up music starts, a notification message saying "Performance operation unit not connected" is displayed on a specified background image.
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

[Error handling 9]
Audio: After the start-up music ends, the first announcement sound "The game board is not connected" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times, followed by a second announcement sound "The performance operation unit is not connected" and then a predetermined error notification sound four times. These audio modes are played repeatedly (combining the contents of Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red (same as error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Various LEDs on the game board: Flash red (same as error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Performance display device: Displays the notification text "Power being restored" and "Please wait a moment" on a black background, and also displays the notification text "It has been detected that the game board cable is not inserted", "It has been detected that the performance operation unit cable is not inserted", and "Please turn off the power before inserting the cable", and when the startup music ends, displays the image from the performance (combining the contents of error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the start-up music starts, a specified background image is displayed with the notification text "Game board not connected" and "Performance operation unit not connected" (this is a combination of the contents of error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

[Example 1: When magnetic detection (so-called magnet goto) is not performed during the performance after power-on or while waiting for customers]
Next, referring to Figure 257, we will explain error responses 1 to 9 as the behavior of a pachinko machine during an error shown in Figure 254(c) when there is no magnetic detection (so-called magnetic goto) while the performance is progressing after the power is turned on (for example, when the performance progresses based on the game ball entering various winning slots) or while waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or a still image is displayed).

[Error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling)]
Voice: An announcement saying "Please call an attendant" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound seven times. This type of voice is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: Displays the message "Please wait a moment" on the image during the performance (such as an image displayed as the performance progresses, the same applies below) or on the image while customers are waiting (such as an image displayed as the demonstration progresses, the same applies below).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the message "Game board ID error" on the image during the performance or on the image while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Movable body on the game board: No operation such as returning to the original position (not operating). Note that if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the performance and the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, it may stop at the time this error occurs or may return to the original position.
Movable body on the game frame: No operation such as returning to the original position (not operating). Note that if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers in addition to the progress of the performance, it may stop at the time this error occurs or may return to the original position.

[Error handling 2 (ID error 2 handling)]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the warning text "Performance operation button ID error" on the image during performance or on the image while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling)]
Audio: An announcement saying "Please call an attendant" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound twice. This audio pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-performance display device: In the image during performance or the image while waiting for customers, a warning message "Main payout ID error" is displayed, indicating that there is an inconsistency in the combination of the main control board provided on the game board (split game board) and the payout control board provided on the main frame 4 to which the game board (split game board) is attached.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up (when waiting for customers: off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board: In addition to progressing the performance, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and moves to return to its original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: In addition to progressing the performance, it also operates in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and operates to return to its original position (operation).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the warning text "Game board ID error" and "Performance operation button ID error" on the image during performance or the image while waiting for customers (combining the contents of Error Response 1 (ID error 1 compatible) and Error Response 2 (ID error 2 compatible) (Error Response 1 (ID error 1 compatible) + Error Response 2 (ID error 2 compatible))).
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the warning text "Main payout ID error" and "Game board ID error" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers (combining the contents of error response 3 (ID error 3 response) and error response 1 (ID error 1 response) (error response 3 (ID error 3 response) + error response 1 (ID error 1 response))).
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the warning text "Main payment ID error" and "Performance operation button ID error" on the image during the performance or the image while customers are waiting (this is a combination of the contents of error response 3 (ID error 3 response) and error response 2 (ID error 2 response) (error response 3 (ID error 3 response) + error response 2 (ID error 2 response))).
Function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).

[Error handling 7]
Sound: An announcement saying "Game board not connected" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times. This sound pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flashes red.
Performance display device: Displays notification text such as "The game board cable has been detected as not being inserted" and "Please turn off the power before inserting the cable" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Sub-performance display device: Displays the notification text "Game board not connected" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Movable body on the game board: No operation such as returning to the original position (not operating). Note that if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the performance and the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, it may stop at the time this error occurs or may return to the original position.
Movable body on the game frame: No operation such as returning to the original position (not operating). Note that if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers in addition to the progress of the performance, it may stop at the time this error occurs or may return to the original position.

[Error handling 8]
Audio: An announcement sound saying "The performance operation unit is not connected" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times. This type of audio is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flashes red.
Performance display device: Displays warning messages such as "The performance operation unit cable has been detected as not being inserted" and "Please turn off the power before inserting the cable" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Sub-performance display device: Displays the notification text "Performance operation unit not connected" on the image during performance or on the image while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

[Error handling 9]
Audio: The first announcement sound "The game board is not connected" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times, followed by a second announcement sound "The performance operation unit is not connected" and then a predetermined error notification sound four times. This audio pattern is repeatedly played (combining the contents of Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: (same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the game board: (same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Performance display device: Displays warning messages such as "The game board cable has been detected as not being inserted,""The performance operation unit cable has been detected as not being inserted," and "Please turn off the power before inserting the cable" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers (combining the contents of error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the notification text "Game board not connected" or "Performance operation unit not connected" on the image during performance or the image while waiting for customers (combining the contents of error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

[Example 1: When magnetic detection (magnetic goto) occurs during a performance or while waiting for customers after powering on]

Next, Error Responses 1 to 9 will be described with reference to Figure 258 as the behavior of a pachinko machine during an error shown in Figure 254(c) when magnetic detection (magnetic gobbling) is involved during the progression of a presentation after power-on (for example, when a presentation is progressing based on a game ball entering one of the various winning slots) or while waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being held or a still image is displayed). Note that when magnetic detection (magnetic gobbling) ceases, the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error (Error Responses 1 to 9) will be as shown in Figure 257 when magnetic detection (magnetic gobbling) is not involved during the progression of a presentation after power-on (for example, when a presentation is progressing based on a game ball entering one of the various winning slots) or while waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being held or a still image is displayed).

[Error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling)]
Voice: An announcement saying "Please call an attendant" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound three times. This type of voice is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: Displays images during the performance (images displayed as the performance progresses, etc., the same applies below) or images while customers are waiting (images displayed as the demonstration progresses, etc., the same applies below).
Sub-performance display device: Displays notification text such as "Magnet detected" and "Game board ID error" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Movable body on the game board: No operation such as returning to the original position (not operating). Note that if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the performance and the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, it may stop at the time this error occurs or may return to the original position.
Movable body on the game frame: No operation such as returning to the original position (not operating). Note that if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers in addition to the progress of the performance, it may stop at the time this error occurs or may return to the original position.

[Error handling 2 (ID error 2 handling)]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the warning text "Magnet detected" or "Performance operation button ID error" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling)]
Audio: An announcement saying "Please call an attendant" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound twice. This audio pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-performance display device: In the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers, the device displays the warning text "Main payout ID error" and "Magnet detected" to indicate that there is an inconsistency in the combination of the main control board provided on the game board (split game board) and the payout control board provided on the main frame 4 to which the game board (split game board) is attached.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up (when waiting for customers: off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board: In addition to progressing the performance, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and moves to return to its original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: In addition to progressing the performance, it also operates in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and operates to return to its original position (operation).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the warning text "Magnet detected,""Game board ID error," and "Performance operation button ID error" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers (combining the contents of Error Response 1 (ID error 1 compatible) and Error Response 2 (ID error 2 compatible) (Error Response 1 (ID error 1 compatible) + Error Response 2 (ID error 2 compatible))).
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the warning text "Main payout ID error,""Game board ID error," and "Magnet detected" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers (combining the contents of Error Response 3 (ID error 3 response) and Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) (Error Response 3 (ID error 3 response) + Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response))).
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the warning text "Main pay ID error,""Performance operation button ID error," and "Magnet detected" on the image during the performance or the image while customers are waiting (combining the contents of Error Response 3 (ID error 3 compatible) and Error Response 2 (ID error 2 compatible) (Error Response 3 (ID error 3 compatible) + Error Response 2 (ID error 2 compatible))).
Function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).

[Error handling 7]
Sound: An announcement saying "Game board not connected" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times. This sound pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flashes red.
Performance display device: Displays notification text such as "The game board cable has been detected as not being inserted" and "Please turn off the power before inserting the cable" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Sub-performance display device: Displays notification text such as "Magnet detected" and "Game board not connected" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Movable body on the game board: No operation such as returning to the original position (not operating). Note that if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the performance and the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, it may stop at the time this error occurs or may return to the original position.
Movable body on the game frame: No operation such as returning to the original position (not operating). Note that if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers in addition to the progress of the performance, it may stop at the time this error occurs or may return to the original position.

[Error handling 8]
Audio: An announcement sound saying "The performance operation unit is not connected" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times. This type of audio is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flashes red.
Performance display device: Displays warning messages such as "The performance operation unit cable has been detected as not being inserted" and "Please turn off the power before inserting the cable" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Sub-performance display device: Displays warning text such as "Magnet detected" and "Performance operation unit not connected" on the image during performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

[Error handling 9]
Audio: An announcement saying "The game board is not connected" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times, followed by an announcement saying "The performance operation unit is not connected" and a predetermined error notification sound four times. This audio pattern is repeatedly played (combining the contents of Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: (same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the game board: (same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Performance display device: Displays warning messages such as "The game board cable has been detected as not being inserted,""The performance operation unit cable has been detected as not being inserted," and "Please turn off the power before inserting the cable" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers (combining the contents of error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Sub-performance display device: Displays warning text such as "Magnet detected,""Game board not connected," and "Performance operation unit not connected" on the image during performance or the image while waiting for customers (combining the contents of error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

[Specific example 2: When power is turned on]
Next, we will explain error responses 1 to 9, which are the behavior of a pachinko machine in the error state shown in Figure 254 (c) when the power is turned on, with reference to Figure 259.
[Error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling)]
Audio: When the power is turned on, there is no start-up music and the sound is muted, then a predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying "A connection error has occurred on the game board. Please turn off the power and check the game board." This type of audio is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: After displaying "Power being restored" on a black background, it displays the following notification text: "Game board error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Game board connection error," and "Please turn off the power and check the game board," and also displays an image in which the game board connection error part of the pachinko machine is lit up.
Sub-performance display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Movable body on the game board: Has actions such as returning to the original position and progressing the performance (actions).
Movable body on game frame side: No operation such as returning to original position (not operating).

[Error handling 2 (ID error 2 handling)]
Audio: When the power is turned on, there is no start-up music and the sound is muted, then a predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying "A connection error has occurred in the production operation unit. Please turn off the power and check the production operation unit." This type of audio is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: After displaying "Power being restored" on a black background, it displays the following notification text: "Performance operation unit error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Performance operation unit connection error," and "Please turn off the power and then check the performance operation unit," and displays an image in which the performance operation unit connection error part of the pachinko machine is lit up.
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the start-up music starts, a notification message saying "Performance operation button ID error" is displayed on a specified background image.
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling)]
Audio: When the power is turned on, there is no start-up music and the sound is muted. After that, a predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying "Please call an attendant." This audio pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: After displaying "Power being restored" on a black background, it indicates that there is an inconsistency in the combination of the main control board on the game board (split game board) and the payout control board on the main frame 4 to which the game board (split game board) is attached, and displays warning messages such as "Main payout error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Main payout connection error," and "Please turn off the power and then check the main control and payout control," and displays an image indicating that the game board and frame cannot be combined.
Sub-performance display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Movable body on the game board: Has operations such as returning to the original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: Has operations such as returning to the original position (operation).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).

[Error handling 7]
Sound: When the power is turned on, there is no start-up music and the sound is muted. After that, a predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement sound saying "The game board is not connected." This sound pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: flash white.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: After displaying "Power being restored" on a black background, the display switches to the image during the performance (such as the image displayed as the performance progresses, same below), and displays the notification text "Error number:" and "Game board unconnected error."
Sub-performance display device: Displays images during performance.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Movable body on the game board: Has operations such as returning to the original position (operation).
Movable body on game frame side: No operation such as returning to original position (not operating).

[Error handling 8]
Audio: When the power is turned on, there is no start-up music and the sound is muted. After that, a predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement sound saying "The performance operation unit is not connected." This audio pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: flash white.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: After displaying "Power restoration in progress" on a black background, the display switches to the image of the performance and displays the warning text "Error number:" and "Performance operation unit not connected error."
Sub-performance display device: Displays images during performance.
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

[Error handling 9]
Sound: When the power is turned on, there is no start-up music and the sound is muted, then a specified error alert sound is played once, followed by an announcement sound saying "The game board is not connected," followed by a specified error alert sound once, followed by an announcement sound saying "The presentation operation unit is not connected" (this combines the contents of error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: flash white (same as error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off) (same as error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Performance display device: After displaying "Power being restored" on a black background, it switches to the image during the performance, displays the notification text "Error number:" and "Game board unconnected error", and displays the notification text "Error number:" and "Performance operation unit unconnected error" (combining the contents of Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Sub-performance display device: Displays images during performance (combining the contents of error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

In addition, if the performance operation unit 300 is not provided with any ID for identifying itself and can be used in common with any specifications, in Specific Example 2: Error Responses 1 to 6 when power is turned on, the various LEDs on the door frame unit flash red, and therefore the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit also flash red, but only some of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (the various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) may be turned off (all turned off), or all of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit may be turned off (all turned off). Also, in Example 2: Error Responses 7 to 9 when power is turned on, the various LEDs on the door frame unit flash white, and therefore the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit also flash white. However, only some of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (the various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) may be turned off (all off), or all of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit may be turned off (all off). In other words, when only some of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (the various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) are turned off (all off), there is no restriction to turning off (all off) the various LEDs other than some of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (the various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards).

[Example 2: When magnetic detection (so-called magnet goto) is not performed during the performance after power-on or while waiting for customers]
Next, referring to Figure 260, we will explain error responses 1 to 9 as the behavior of a pachinko machine during an error shown in Figure 254(c) when there is no magnetic detection (so-called magnetic goto) while the performance is progressing after the power is turned on (for example, when the performance is progressing based on the game balls entering various winning slots) or while waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or a still image is displayed).

[Error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying, "A connection error has occurred on the game board. Please turn off the power and check the game board." This type of audio is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: Displays the following notification text on a black background: "Game board error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Game board connection error," and "Please turn off the power and check the game board," and also displays an image in which the game board connection error part of the pachinko machine is lit up.
Sub-performance display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up (when waiting for customers: off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board: In addition to progressing the performance, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and moves to return to its original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: No operation such as returning to the original position (not operating). Note that if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers in addition to the progress of the performance, it may stop at the time this error occurs or may return to the original position.

[Error handling 2 (ID error 2 handling)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying, "A connection error has occurred in the production operation unit. Please turn off the power and then check the production operation unit." This type of audio is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: Displays the following warning text on a black background: "Performance operation unit error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Performance operation unit connection error," and "Please turn off the power and then check the performance operation unit," and also displays an image in which the performance operation unit connection error part of the pachinko machine is lit up.
Sub-performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying "Please call an attendant." This audio pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: On a black background, it displays warning messages such as "Main payout error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Main payout connection error," and "Please turn off the power and then check the main control and payout control" to indicate that there is an inconsistency in the combination of the main control board on the game board (split game board) and the payout control board on the main frame 4 to which the game board (split game board) is attached, and also displays an image indicating that the game board and frame cannot be combined.
Sub-performance display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up (when waiting for customers: off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board: In addition to progressing the performance, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and moves to return to its original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: In addition to progressing the performance, it also operates in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and operates to return to its original position (operation).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).

[Error handling 7]
Audio: Along with the sound effects, a predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement sound saying "The game board is not connected." These audio patterns are repeatedly played along with the sound effects.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: flash white.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: Displays images during the performance (images displayed as the performance progresses, etc., the same applies below) or images while customers are waiting (images displayed as the demonstration progresses, etc., the same applies below).
Sub-performance display device: Displays images during performances or images while customers are waiting.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up (when waiting for customers: off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board: In addition to progressing the performance, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and moves to return to its original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: In addition to progressing the performance, it also operates in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and operates to return to its original position (operation).

[Error handling 8]
Audio: Along with the sound effect, a predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement sound saying "The sound effect operation unit is not connected." This type of audio is played repeatedly along with the sound effect.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: flash white.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: Displays images during performances or images while customers are waiting.
Sub-performance display device: Displays images during performances or images while customers are waiting.
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

[Error handling 9]
Audio: Along with the sound effect, a predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement sound saying "The game board is not connected," followed by a predetermined error notification sound once, followed by an announcement sound saying "The operation unit is not connected." This audio pattern is repeatedly played along with the sound effect (combining the contents of Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: (same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the game board: (same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Performance display device: (same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Sub-performance display device: (same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

In addition, if the performance operation unit 300 is not provided with any ID for identifying itself and can be used in common with any specifications, in Specific Example 2: Error Responses 1 to 6 when there is no power-on (magnetic gouge), the various LEDs on the door frame unit flash red, and therefore the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit also flash red, but only some of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (the various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) may be turned off (all turned off), or all of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit may be turned off (all turned off). Also, in specific example 2: Error response 7 to error response 9 when there is no power-on (magnetic goto), the various LEDs of the door frame unit flash white, so the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit also flash white, but only a portion of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) may be turned off (all off), or all of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit may be turned off (all off). In other words, when only a portion of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) are turned off (all off), there is no restriction that the other various LEDs be turned off (all off) except for a portion of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards).

[Example 2: When magnetic detection (magnetic goto) occurs during a performance or while waiting for customers after powering on]

Next, Error Responses 1 to 9 will be described with reference to Figure 261 as the behavior of a pachinko machine during an error shown in Figure 254(c) when magnetic detection (magnetic gobbling) is involved during the progression of a presentation after power-on (for example, when a presentation is progressing based on a game ball entering one of the various winning slots) or while waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being held or a still image is displayed). Note that when magnetic detection (magnetic gobbling) ceases, the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error (Error Responses 1 to 9) will be as shown in Figure 260 when magnetic detection (magnetic gobbling) is not involved during the progression of a presentation after power-on (for example, when a presentation is progressing based on a game ball entering one of the various winning slots) or while waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being held or a still image is displayed).

[Error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying, "A connection error has occurred on the game board. Please turn off the power and check the game board." This type of audio is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: Displays the following notification text on a black background: "Game board error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Game board connection error," and "Please turn off the power and check the game board," and also displays an image in which the game board connection error part of the pachinko machine is lit up.
Sub-performance display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up (when waiting for customers: off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board: In addition to progressing the performance, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and moves to return to its original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: No operation such as returning to the original position (not operating). Note that if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers in addition to the progress of the performance, it may stop at the time this error occurs or may return to the original position.

[Error handling 2 (ID error 2 handling)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying, "A connection error has occurred in the production operation unit. Please turn off the power and then check the production operation unit." This type of audio is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the following warning text on a black background: "Performance operation unit error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Performance operation unit connection error," and "Please turn off the power and then check the performance operation unit," and also displays an image in which the performance operation unit connection error part of the pachinko machine is lit up.
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying "Please call an attendant." This audio pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: On a black background, it displays warning messages such as "Main payout error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Main payout connection error," and "Please turn off the power and then check the main control and payout control" to indicate that there is an inconsistency in the combination of the main control board on the game board (split game board) and the payout control board on the main frame 4 to which the game board (split game board) is attached, and also displays an image indicating that the game board and frame cannot be combined.
Sub-performance display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up (when waiting for customers: off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board: In addition to progressing the performance, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and moves to return to its original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: In addition to progressing the performance, it also operates in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and operates to return to its original position (operation).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).

[Error handling 7]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying "Magnetic sensor error." This audio pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: Displays an image during the performance (such as an image displayed as the performance progresses, the same applies below) or an image while waiting for customers (such as an image displayed as the demonstration progresses, the same applies below), and displays the warning text "Error number:" and "Magnetic sensor error."
Sub-performance display device: Displays images during performances or images while customers are waiting.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up (when waiting for customers: off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board: In addition to progressing the performance, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and moves to return to its original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: In addition to progressing the performance, it also operates in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and operates to return to its original position (operation).

[Error handling 8]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

[Error handling 9]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

In addition, if the performance operation unit 300 is not provided with any ID for identifying itself and can be used in common with any specifications, in Specific Example 2: Error Responses 1 to 9 when there is no power-on (magnetic gouge), the various LEDs on the door frame unit flash red, and therefore the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit also flash red, but only some of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (the various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) may be turned off (all turned off), or all of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit may be turned off (all turned off). In other words, when only some of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs from among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) are turned off (all turned off), there is no restriction to turning off (all turned off) the other various LEDs excluding some of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs from among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards).

Furthermore, in error responses 7, 8, and 9 in Figures 256 to 261, which correspond respectively to state 8: unconnected error 1, state 9: unconnected error 2, and state 10: unconnected error 3 in Figure 254 (c), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, as another example, each time performs the following check on the various LED drivers that drive the various LEDs and the various electrical drive source drivers (e.g., solenoid drive circuits, motor drive circuits, etc.) that drive the various electrical drive sources that are provided on the right-side game board 5AR and the performance operation unit 300A (300B) where the connection cannot be confirmed: No-operation data (data to turn off various LEDs and data to stop the electrical drive source) may be sent, or no-operation data (data to turn off various LEDs and data to stop the electrical drive source) may be sent only once when a no-connection error occurs, or reset data (data to reset various LED drivers and various electrical drive source drivers (for example, solenoid drive circuits, motor drive circuits, etc.)) may be included in the transmitted data to reset the various LED drivers and various electrical drive source drivers.

[Combination of game board and door frame]
As described above, door frame units (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 are attached to the door frame 3. The door frame units are designed based on a unified concept. The relationship between the game board 5 and the door frame 3 must be submitted to and approved by the application authority. However, when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, human error may result in the relationship (combination) between the game board 5 and the door frame 3 differing from that submitted and approved by the application authority. This would undesirably result in a pachinko machine being installed in the gaming hall that differs from the specifications submitted and approved by the application authority.

In this embodiment, one of the decorative boards provided on the door frame unit (hereinafter referred to as the "frame-side decorative board") is given a self-identification code (ID) that allows it to identify itself, and an ID comparison circuit is provided that can determine the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit and output the determination result. Here, the ID comparison circuit will be explained with reference to Figure 262. Figure 262 is a circuit diagram showing an example of an ID comparison circuit. Note that since combinations of the game board 5 and door frame units can be compatible (matched) or incompatible (mismatched), there are cases in which a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is treated as a component of the game board 5. In other words, the game board component provided on the main frame 4 is composed of a game board 5 equipped with a microprocessor and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units not equipped with a microprocessor. The game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and the specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units is attached to a door frame 3 that is supported on the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. In other words, the game frame component, which is composed of the outer frame 2, door frame 3, and main frame 4, is provided with a game board 5 equipped with a microprocessor and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units not equipped with a microprocessor. Various LEDs are provided on the game board 5 and the specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units, and are driven by various LED drivers.

[Various lines formed between the game board and the door frame]
First, to briefly explain the various lines formed between the gaming board 5 and the door frame 3, a lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW (not shown) is located in the lower center of the rear box 3010 of the gaming board 5 shown in FIG. 132, etc., on which two lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW are mounted in the left-right direction. The two lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW are of the convex type. The lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 directly or via various relay boards. Two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) are provided on a main frame side relay board (not shown) on the front of the main frame 4 at positions corresponding to the two lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW provided on the rear box 3010 of the gaming board 5. The two main frame side drawer connectors are of the concave type. The various boards provided in the door frame 3 (decorative boards and various relay boards provided in the dish unit 200, door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, and door frame top unit 450. The various relay boards include those that relay detection signals from various sensors in the performance operation unit 300 of the dish unit 200) are electrically connected to the drawer connector on the main frame side.

When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the convex type lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the gaming board 5 are guided and fitted into two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the concave type main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, electrically connecting the terminals of the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the gaming board 5 to the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 are electrically connected to the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. This allows the peripheral control board 1510 located behind the rear box 3010 of the game board 5 and various boards provided on the door frame 3 (decorative boards and various relay boards provided on the tray unit 200, door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, and door frame top unit 450). The various relay boards include the tray unit 200's performance operation unit 300. These include those that relay detection signals from various sensors and control signals that transmit various information.), and a ground (GND) line is formed that electrically connects the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the various control boards and other boards arranged behind the back box 3010 of the gaming board 5 to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the power supply board 630 provided on the main frame 4, and various power supply lines are formed that supply various power sources (DC power sources of +5V, +12V, +24V, etc.) created by the power supply board 630 provided on the main frame 4 to the various control boards and other boards arranged behind the back box 3010 of the gaming board 5. In addition, various power supply lines (DC power supplies such as +5V, +12V, and +24V) generated by the power supply board 630 provided in the main frame 4, and a ground (GND) line electrically connecting to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the power supply board 630, are provided via electrical wiring to the various boards provided in the door frame 3 (decorative boards and various relay boards provided in the dish unit 200, door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, and door frame top unit 450. The various relay boards include those that relay detection signals from the various sensors in the performance operation unit 300 of the dish unit 200 and control signals that transmit various information).

In addition, when the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the terminals of the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the gaming board 5 are electrically connected to the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. This forms a control signal line via the drawer connectors that transmits various control signals between the main control board 1310 located behind the rear box 3010 on the gaming board 5 and the payout control board 633 provided on the main frame 4.

Mounting through holes are formed in the insulating exterior portions of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW and the main frame side drawer connector. The lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 on which the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW are mounted has through holes in positions corresponding to the insulating mounting through holes of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW. Furthermore, the main frame side relay board (not shown) on which the main frame side drawer connector is mounted has through holes in positions corresponding to the insulating mounting through holes of the main frame side drawer connector.

[ID comparison circuit]
The ID comparison circuit WIDC provided on the frame side decorative board WKB as one of the decorative boards provided in a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units is mainly composed of an LED driver WIDCa and an 8-bit digital comparator circuit WIDCb (hereinafter referred to as the ``comparator circuit WIDCb''), as shown in Figure 262.

The LED driver WIDCa has 24 output channels electrically connected to LED elements, and is a sink-type constant current drive circuit capable of supplying a constant current to each channel. The maximum output current is set by an output current setting circuit WIDCc provided external to the LED driver WIDCa. The LED driver WIDCa is assigned a self-identification code (ID) that allows it to identify itself, and the ID is set to one of the values between 1 and 64 by an address setting circuit WIDCd provided external to the LED driver WIDCa.

The output current setting circuit WIDCc is electrically connected to the maximum output current setting terminals Rx1, Rx2, and Rx3 of the LED driver WIDCa, and by electrically connecting a specified resistor to each, it is possible to set the maximum output current for each output channel. In other words, in this embodiment, the maximum output current is set by a hardware configuration, and cannot be changed by software (program).

The address setting circuit WIDCd is electrically connected to the ID setting terminals ID1, ID2, and ID3 of the LED driver WIDCa, and the voltage applied to each terminal sets one of the setting values from setting value 1 to setting value 64. In other words, in this embodiment, the ID of the LED driver WIDCa is set using a hardware configuration, and the ID of the LED driver WIDCa cannot be changed using software (programs).

In this embodiment, the ID of the LED driver WIDCa is set to a set value of 64. This is because LED drivers are mounted not only on the door frame unit but also on various decorative boards and boards provided on the game board 5, and the number of LED drivers varies depending on the model. Therefore, when developing a program, it is necessary to prevent confusion between the LED driver WIDCa of the ID comparison circuit WIDC and other LED drivers. Therefore, for the frame-side decorative board WKB on which the ID comparison circuit WIDC is installed, the ID of the LED driver WIDCa is always fixed to a set value of 64.

The LED driver WIDCa's reset terminal RST and ground terminal GND are electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the frame-side decorative board WKB, and its power supply terminal Vcc is electrically connected to +5V. Of the LED driver WIDCa's 24 output terminals, OUT0 to OUT23, eight output terminals, OUT0 to OUT7, output to the comparator circuit WIDCb, while the remaining 16 output terminals, OUT8 to OUT23, are either unconnected or electrically connected to LED elements. For single-color LEDs, one LED element is packaged and its cathode terminal is electrically connected to one output terminal. For full-color LEDs, three LED elements (red, green, and blue) are packaged and their cathode terminals are electrically connected to the corresponding three output terminals. The anode terminals of the LED elements are electrically connected to +12V. Heat generation by the LED element may be suppressed by inserting a resistor between the cathode terminal of the LED element and the output terminal of the LED driver WIDCa (i.e., by electrically connecting the cathode terminal of the LED element to one end of the resistor, and electrically connecting the other end of this resistor to the output terminal of the LED driver WIDCa).

The SDA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the LED driver WIDCa, receives a light emission information signal, which is serial data from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the gaming board 5. This signal is input via the drawer connectors, which are electrically connected to the terminals of the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the gaming board 5 when the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and to the terminals of two main frame drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. There are multiple serial communication lines electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to multiple serial communication lines for sending and receiving various serial data to and from the various boards and door units within the gaming board 5.

The SCLK terminal, which is the clock signal input terminal of the LED driver WIDCa, receives the light emission information clock signal, which is the clock signal used to transmit the light emission information signal from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the gaming board 5. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the terminals of the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the gaming board 5 are electrically connected to the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, and are input via these drawer connectors.

The light-emission information signal input to the SDA terminal of the LED driver WIDCa based on the light-emission information clock signal input to the SCLK terminal of the LED driver WIDCa is composed of an ID code that indicates which LED driver the light-emission information signal is for, and light-emission data that indicates the LED light-emission mode. When the ID code included in the light-emission information signal matches the ID set by the address setting circuit WIDCd, the LED driver imports the light-emission data included in the light-emission information signal and controls the light-emission modes of the various LEDs electrically connected to the 24 output terminals OUT0 to OUT23 based on this imported light-emission data. On the other hand, when the ID code included in the light-emission information signal does not match the ID set by the address setting circuit WIDCd, the LED driver does not import but discards the light-emission data included in the light-emission information signal, and maintains the light-emission modes of the various LEDs electrically connected to the 24 output terminals OUT0 to OUT23 based on the previously imported light-emission data.

As mentioned above, the light emission information signal sent to the LED driver WIDCa consists of an ID code and light emission data, with the light emission data including the ID of the frame-side decorative board WKB. In other words, the light emission data consists of information compared by the comparator circuit WIDCb using signals output from the eight output terminals OUT0 to OUT7, and information output from the 16 output terminals OUT8 to OUT23.

The signals output from the eight output terminals OUT0 to OUT7 of the LED driver WIDCa are input to the eight input terminals P0 to P7 of the comparator circuit WIDCb. The eight setting terminals Q0 to Q7 of the comparator circuit WIDCb correspond one-to-one with the eight input terminals P0 to P7 of the comparator circuit WIDCb, and are the original sources referenced.

In this embodiment, the eight reference source setting terminals, Q0 to Q7, are expressed as 8 bits with Q0 as the most significant bit and Q7 as the least significant bit, resulting in 11110000B (the letter "B" represents a binary number), which is expressed in hexadecimal as F0H (the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number).

The inverted G terminal, which is the enable terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb (shown in the diagram as a solid line above the letter "G"), and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb, are electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the frame-side decorative board WKB. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb, is electrically connected to +5V.

When the logic of the signals input to the eight input terminals P0 to P7 (the terminals to be compared) match the logic set to the eight reference setting terminals Q0 to Q7, comparator circuit WIDCb sets the logic of the ID valid signal from the output terminal inverted P=Q terminal (shown in the diagram with a solid line above the English symbol "P=Q") to valid logic (logic LOW) and outputs it. On the other hand, when the logic of the signals input to the eight input terminals P0 to P7 (the terminals to be compared) do not match the logic set to the eight reference setting terminals Q0 to Q7, comparator circuit WIDCb sets the logic of the ID valid signal from the output terminal inverted P=Q terminal to invalid logic (logic HI), which is the inverse of the valid logic (logic LOW), and outputs it.

In this way, when the logic of the ID valid signal is set to valid logic, it is possible to convey a determination result that the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is compatible (matched), whereas when the logic of the ID valid signal is set to invalid logic, it is possible to convey a determination result that the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is not compatible (matched).

The ID valid signal output from the inverted P=Q terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb is transmitted from the frame side decorative board WKB via electrical wiring (harness) to the relay board TKB provided on the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3. In addition, the light emission information signal and light emission information clock signal from the peripheral control board 1510 input to the frame side decorative board WKB are transmitted to other frame side decorative boards via electrical wiring (harness).

[Relay board provided in the dish unit]
Next, we will explain the relay board TKB provided in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, to which the ID valid signal output from the inverted P=Q terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb in the frame side decorative board WKB is input via electrical wiring (harness), with reference to Figure 263. Figure 263 is a circuit diagram showing an example of the circuit of the relay board provided in the tray unit.

The relay board TKB provided in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 is equipped with a door frame side information output circuit TOC which receives detection signals from various sensors provided in the performance operation unit 300 attached to the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, as well as detection signals from various sensors provided in other units of the door frame 3 (for example, if a movable body is provided in the door frame 3, detection signals from a photosensor which detects the original position or moved position of the movable body, and detection signals from a distance measuring sensor which detects the player's actions at the door frame 3 (holding up their hand, waving their hand, etc.)).

The door frame side information output circuit TOC is mainly composed of two parallel-serial conversion circuits TOCa and TOCb. The parallel-serial conversion circuits IDCa and TOCb are electronic components made into chips mainly consisting of multiple flip-flop circuits (8 flip-flop circuits), and are the same electronic component as the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC shown in Figure 251, etc.

The door frame side information output circuits TOCa and TOCb have eight input terminals, A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H (i.e., eight 8-bit parallel input terminals), a CK terminal to which an information acquisition clock signal is input, a non-inverting QH terminal that takes in the information input to the eight input terminals A to H and outputs it as serial data without inverting it, an inverting QH terminal (shown in the diagram with a solid line above the letter "Q") that takes in the information set in the eight input terminals A to H and outputs it as serial data after inverting it, and a CK terminal that prohibits the input of a clock signal. It mainly consists of an INH terminal, an S/inverted L terminal (shown in the diagram as a solid line above the letter "L") that switches between shift operation based on the information acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal and parallel operation in which each flip-flop circuit takes in information set in the eight input terminals A to H, an SI terminal to which serial data is input, a power supply terminal Vcc to which control power is supplied, and a GND terminal that is electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground).

The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa's eight input terminals, A through H, and the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCb's eight input terminals, A through D, receive detection signals from various sensors installed in the performance operation unit 300 attached to the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, as well as detection signals from various sensors installed in other units of the door frame 3. Of the eight input terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCb, three, E through G, are leftover terminals and are electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground). (Of the eight input terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCb, three, E through G, may also be electrically connected to +5V.) The remaining input terminal, H, of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCb's eight input terminals, receives an ID enable signal from the frame-side decorative board WKB.

The power supply terminal Vcc of the parallel-serial conversion circuits IDCa and IDCb is electrically connected to +5V, the GND terminal and CK INT terminal are electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground), and the non-inverting QH terminal is unconnected.

The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa has its SI terminal electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground), and outputs serial data converted from parallel data input to its eight input terminals from its inverted QH terminal.

The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCb has its SI terminal electrically connected to the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa, and outputs serial data converted from the parallel data input to its eight input terminals from the inverted QH terminal.

An information acquisition switch signal is input to the S/inverted L terminal from outside the parallel-serial conversion circuits IDCa and IDCb. When the logic of the information acquisition switch signal is parallel operation logic (logic LOW, electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground)), each flip-flop circuit of the parallel-serial conversion circuits IDCa and IDCb acquires and stores (holds) the information currently input to the eight input terminals, A terminal to H terminal. On the other hand, when the logic of the information acquisition switch signal is shift operation logic (logic HI, electrically connected to +5V), which is the inverse of the parallel operation logic, and the CK INT terminal is electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground), the acquired information is shifted sequentially at the rising edge of the information acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal.

The two parallel-serial conversion circuits TOCa and TOCb have an inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit TOCa electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit TOCb, and therefore each flip-flop circuit of the two parallel-serial conversion circuits IDCa and IDCb shifts sequentially at the rising edge of the information acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal (that is, information input to the A terminal → information input to the B terminal → information input to the C terminal → information input to the D terminal → information input to the E terminal → information input to the F terminal → information input to the G terminal → information input to the H terminal → shifts one bit at a time from the non-inverted QH terminal and the inverted QH terminal to output serial data). Therefore, the parallel-serial conversion circuits TOCa and TOCb operate as a 16-bit shift register consisting of an 8-bit shift register formed by the parallel-serial conversion circuit TOCa and an 8-bit shift register formed by the parallel-serial conversion circuit TOCb, and the door frame side information signal is output as serial data from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit TOCb to the peripheral control board 1510.

The information acquisition clock signal and information acquisition switching signal from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the gaming board 5 are transmitted to the relay board TKB provided on the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 via this drawer connector by electrically connecting the terminals of the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the gaming board 5 when the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. In addition, the door frame side information signal from the door frame side information output circuit TOC of the relay board TKB provided on the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 is transmitted to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 via this drawer connector, by electrically connecting the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

In the performance operation unit information acquisition process of step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 222, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 sets and outputs the logic of the information acquisition switch signal input to the S/inverted L terminal to operate in parallel and then serial mode, and then outputs an information acquisition clock signal to acquire the door frame side information signal, and can grasp the player's operations and the operation of the movable body (performance body) on the performance operation unit 300 attached to the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, grasp the movable body (performance body) and player operations on other units of the door frame 3, and obtain a judgment result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units).

The timing for obtaining the judgment result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units may be performed only the first time after power is turned on, during the performance operation unit information acquisition process described above, or it may be performed constantly or intermittently during the performance operation unit information acquisition process described above after power is turned on. By constantly or intermittently obtaining the judgment result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units during the performance operation unit information acquisition process described above after power is turned on, it is possible to check whether the transmission path from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame side decorative board WKB is affected by noise, depending on the judgment results.

In addition, the timing for obtaining a determination result regarding the compatibility (integrity) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units may be the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 255, performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 only the first time after power is turned on.

In addition, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines based on the results of its determination of the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units that the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is not compatible (consistent), it will take error response 1 (ID error 1 response) shown in Figures 256 to 258 or Figures 259 to 261.

In this way, the ID of the frame-side decorative board WKB is included in the light-emitting data that indicates the LED light-emitting mode for compatibility (matching) of the combination of the gaming board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units). This eliminates the need to provide dedicated terminals for transmitting the ID of the frame-side decorative board WKB to each terminal of the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the gaming board 5, and each terminal of the two main frame-side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame-side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

In addition, each terminal of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5, and each terminal of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, are provided with extra unused terminals to accommodate the specifications of the game board 5. However, even if a terminal is unused in one specification of the game board 5, all terminals may be used in another specification of the game board 5. In such a case, if the number of terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 is increased, it would also be necessary to increase the number of terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. This would require the main frame 4 (actually, the outer frame 2, door frame 3, and the entire main frame 4) to be replaced, which would increase costs and would eliminate the convenience of electrically connecting the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 to the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4 by attaching the game board 5 to the main frame 4 regardless of the game board 5's specifications.

In this embodiment, the ID of the frame-side decorative board WKB is included in the light-emitting data that indicates the LED light-emitting mode for compatibility (matching) of the combination of the gaming board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units). This eliminates the need to increase the number of terminals for the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the gaming board 5, and the number of terminals for the two main frame-side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame-side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

The information acquisition clock signal and the light emission information clock signal may be transmitted using a common transmission line (door frame side clock signal transmission line) among the transmission lines electrically connecting the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 and the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. In this case, the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a control signal to a hardware clock signal switching circuit on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW or the peripheral control board 1510, and transmits either the information acquisition clock signal or the light emission information clock signal to the common transmission line (door frame side clock signal transmission line). This helps to prevent an increase in the number of terminals for the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5, and the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

As shown in Figure 254, the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of split game boards and the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of split game boards and effect operation buttons is determined by a microprocessor called the peripheral control IC 1510a based on an 8-bit ID sent to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, whereas the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) shown in Figure 262 is determined by a circuit on the frame side decorative board WKB called the ID comparison circuit WIDC, which does not have a microprocessor and is composed of an LED driver WIDCa and a comparator circuit WIDCb, and which does not have a microprocessor.

[Configuration that does not communicate the compatibility (integrity) of the combination of the game board and the door frame unit to the peripheral control board]
As described above, the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 with a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units is determined by a circuit that does not have a microprocessor, called the ID comparison circuit WIDC, which is composed of an LED driver WIDCa and a comparator circuit WIDCb on the frame side decorative board WKB, and the determination result is output as an ID valid signal to the relay board TKB provided on the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, where it is serialized together with other information as a door frame side information signal. This door frame side information signal is transmitted to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 via the drawer connectors electrically connected between the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4 and the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. However, instead of this, the ID valid signal may be output to another frame side decorative board rather than to the relay board TKB provided on the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3. In other words, the compatibility (integrity) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) may be configured not to be communicated to the peripheral control board 1510. Figure 264 shows an example of a modified circuit of Figure 262. The circuit in Fig. 264 is basically the same as that in Fig. 262, but differs in that it has multiple LED drivers with external address setting circuits and output current setting circuits, and that the output destination of the ID valid signal is different. Here, the differences will be explained. Note that in Fig. 264, the same parts as in Fig. 262 are given the same reference numerals.

In addition to the LED driver WIDCa, the frame-side decorative board WKB also has LED drivers WIDCaa to WIDCan (multiple LED drivers). As described above, the light-emitting information signal and light-emitting information clock signal from the peripheral control board 1510 are input to the frame-side decorative board WKB via the drawer connectors (UDRW, UDRW) mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4. This is electrically connected to the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors (UDRW, UDRW) mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5, and to the terminals of the two main frame-side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame-side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. The light emission information signal and light emission information clock signal from the peripheral control board 1510 input to the frame side decorative board WKB are input to the SDA terminal and SCLK terminal of each LED driver, LED driver WIDCaa, and LED drivers WIDCaaa to WIDCan (multiple LED drivers), and then transmitted to other subsequent frame side decorative boards. Each LED driver WIDCaa, and LED drivers WIDCaaa to WIDCan (multiple LED drivers) is assigned a unique self-identification code (ID) that is unique and cannot be duplicated.

As described above, the RST terminal of LED driver WIDCa is electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the frame-side decorative board WKB. In contrast, the RST terminals of LED drivers WIDCaa to WIDCan (multiple LED drivers) receive an ID valid signal from the inverted P=Q terminal of comparator circuit WIDCb, which is then transmitted to other subsequent frame-side decorative boards. When the logic of the ID valid signal is set to valid logic (logic LOW), as described above, it conveys a determination result that the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is compatible (matched). On the other hand, when the logic of the ID valid signal is set to invalid logic (logic HI), it conveys a determination result that the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is not compatible (matched).

In other words, if the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is not compatible (matched) and the logic of the ID valid signal is set to invalid logic (logic HI), the voltage applied to the RST terminals of LED driver WIDCaa to LED driver WIDCan (multiple LED drivers) is raised to the logic HI side, resetting LED driver WIDCaa to LED driver WIDCan (multiple LED drivers), and also resetting the LED drivers provided on the subsequent frame side decorative board. On the other hand, when the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is compatible (matched) and the logic of the ID valid signal is set to valid logic (logic LOW), the voltage applied to the RST terminals of LED drivers WIDCaa to WIDCan (multiple LED drivers) is pulled down to the logic LOW side, releasing the reset state of LED drivers WIDCaa to WIDCan (multiple LED drivers), and also releasing the reset state of the LED drivers provided on the subsequent frame-side decorative board.

As a result, if the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is not compatible (matched), LED driver WIDCaaa to LED driver WIDCan (multiple LED drivers) are reset, and the LED drivers provided on the subsequent frame-side decorative board are also reset, causing the LED elements controlled by each LED driver to be turned off. Although the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 cannot obtain a determination result regarding the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units), it is able to prevent the door frame unit from continuing the illumination effect even if the effect is progressing. Furthermore, if the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is not compatible (aligned), the door frame unit will turn off, thereby notifying game hall staff and other attendants, as well as the worker installing the game board 5 in the main frame 4, whether the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is compatible (aligned).

[Replacement of LED driver with serial-parallel conversion circuit]
Next, referring to Fig. 265, we will explain the case where the LED driver WIDCa constituting the ID comparison circuit WIDC provided in the frame-side decorative board WKB shown in Fig. 262 is replaced with a serial-parallel conversion circuit. Fig. 265 is a circuit diagram showing an example where the LED driver constituting the ID comparison circuit provided in the frame-side decorative board shown in Fig. 262 is replaced with a serial-parallel conversion circuit. In Fig. 265, the various terminals of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' that have the same functions as the LED driver WIDCa in Fig. 262 are indicated by the same reference numerals. Here, we will mainly explain the serial-parallel conversion circuit, and will omit some explanations of parts that have the same reference numerals as the LED driver WIDCa. In FIG. 262, the 24 output terminals OUT0 to OUT23 of the LED driver WIDCa are constant current outputs whose maximum current is set by the output current setting circuit WIDCc, whereas the 8 output terminals OUT0 to OUT7 of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa′ are not constant current outputs whose maximum current is set by the output current setting circuit WIDCc, but are determined by the absolute maximum rated output current of the logic IC.

The serial-to-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' is an electronic component that is primarily composed of multiple flip-flop circuits (8 flip-flop circuits) on a chip that can be daisy-chained. It is a circuit that can convert (restore) externally input serial data to parallel data and output it from eight output terminals, OU0 terminal to OUT7 terminal.

The SDA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', receives a light-emitting information signal, which is serial data from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the gaming board 5. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the terminals of the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the gaming board 5 are electrically connected to the terminals of the two main frame drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, and are input via these drawer connectors.

The SCLK terminal, which is the clock signal input terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', receives the light emitting information clock signal, which is the clock signal for transmitting the light emitting information signal from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the gaming board 5. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the terminals of the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the gaming board 5 are electrically connected to the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, and are input via these drawer connectors.

The latch signal from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the gaming board 5 is input to the LAT terminal, which is the latch signal input terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', via this drawer connector, by electrically connecting the terminals of the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the gaming board 5 when the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. When the latch signal logic of each flip-flop circuit in the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' is parallel operation logic (logic LOW, electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground)), it sequentially shifts the information (serial data) taken in from the SDA terminal at the rising edge of the light-emitting information clock signal input to the SCLK terminal, and outputs the serial data from the SO terminal, which is the serial data output terminal, to multiple subsequent serial-parallel conversion circuits daisy-chained with this serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' (for example, other serial-parallel conversion circuits provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' or multiple subsequent serial-parallel conversion circuits daisy-chained with other frame-side decorative boards). On the other hand, when the latch signal logic is shift operation logic that is the inverse of the parallel operation logic (logic HI), which is electrically connected to +5V, it converts the information taken in at this time (information compared by the comparator circuit WIDCb) into parallel data and outputs it from each of the eight output terminals OUT0 to OUT7.

The inverted G terminal (shown in the diagram as a solid line above the letter "G"), which is the enable terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', is electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the frame-side decorative board WKB. The inverted CLR terminal (shown in the diagram as a solid line above the letter "CLR"), which is the reset terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', is electrically connected to +5V.

The light emission information signal input to the SDA terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' based on the light emission information clock signal input to the SCLK terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' is composed of light emission data. The light emission data for the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' is compared by the comparator circuit WIDCb and output as light emission data from the peripheral control board 1510. The light emission data for the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' is output from the peripheral control board 1510 following the light emission data for multiple subsequent serial-parallel conversion circuits daisy-chained with the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa'. Note that if the multiple subsequent serial-parallel conversion circuits daisy-chained with the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' drive electrical drive sources (solenoids, stepping motors) in addition to illuminating various LEDs, the drive data for the electrical drive sources is output as light emission data from the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, the light emission information signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 includes not only light emission data for the various LEDs, but also information compared by the comparator circuit WIDCb, and may also include drive data for the electrical drive source.

The latch signal, light emission information clock signal, and light emission information signal from the SO terminal, which is the daisy chain connection terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', are transmitted from this frame-side decorative board WKB to other frame-side decorative boards. Furthermore, if this frame-side decorative board WKB has a subsequent serial-parallel conversion circuit daisy chain connected to the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', the latch signal and light emission information clock signal are input along with the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', and the light emission information signal from the SO terminal, which is the daisy chain connection terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', is input to the SDA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the subsequent serial-parallel conversion circuit. The light emission information signal from the SO terminal of this subsequent serial-parallel conversion circuit is output to the other frame-side decorative board.

In this way, by replacing the LED driver WIDCa that makes up the ID comparison circuit WIDC on the frame-side decorative board WKB with a serial-parallel conversion circuit, it becomes necessary to include an ID code in the light-emitting information signal that indicates which LED driver it corresponds to.

[Configuration in which each door frame unit has a self-identification code]
262 and 263, as described above, the door frame 3 is equipped with door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the left-side door frame unit 420, the right-side door frame unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the top door frame unit 450, and one of the decorative boards (hereinafter referred to as the "frame-side decorative board") provided on a specific one of the door frame units (one or more of the door frame units) has a self-identification code (ID) that can identify it, and is equipped with an ID comparison circuit WIDC that can determine the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific one of the door frame units (one or more of the door frame units) and output the determination result. In other words, one ID comparison circuit WIDC is provided for a specific one of the door frame units (one or more of the door frame units). Here, a configuration in which each door frame unit that is the subject of judgment as to compatibility (matching) with the game board 5 has a self-identification code (ID) will be described with reference to Figures 266 and 267. Figure 266 is a schematic diagram showing the allocation of each unit, and Figure 267 is a circuit diagram showing an example of an ID output circuit in each unit. In the following, we will explain how all door frame units (in this example, all of the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450) are used to determine whether they are compatible (matched) with the game board 5, and how each is given a self-identification code (ID). However, some door frame units (for example, the door frame left side unit 420 and tray unit 200) may not be used to determine whether they are compatible with the game board 5. In this case, some of the door frame units (for example, the door frame left side unit 420 and tray unit 200) that are not used to determine whether they are compatible with the game board 5 may not be given self-identification codes (IDs), and only the door frame units (for example, the door frame right side unit 430 and door frame top unit 450) that are used to determine whether they are compatible with the game board 5 may be given self-identification codes (IDs).

The door frame unit is composed of a door frame left side unit 420, a door frame right side unit 430, a tray unit 200, and a door frame top unit 450. Each unit can be attached and detached from the door frame 3, allowing for changes to the design or gaming specifications to be installed. As mentioned above, the relationship between the game board 5 and the door frame 3 must be submitted to and approved by the application agency. However, human error when replacing the door frame unit may result in the relationship (combination) between the game board 5 and the door frame 3 differing from that submitted and approved by the application agency, which would undesirably result in a pachinko machine being installed in the gaming hall that differs from the specifications submitted and approved by the application agency.

Therefore, it is possible to consider a configuration in which one of the decorative boards provided in each unit of the door frame unit has a self-identification code (ID) that allows it to identify itself, and an ID comparison circuit is provided that can determine the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit and output the determination result.

Here, as shown in Figure 266, the door frame units are assigned as four units, Unit A to Unit D, with the tray unit 200 as Unit A, the door frame right side unit 430 as Unit B, the door frame top unit 450 as Unit C, and the door frame left side unit 420 as Unit D.

One of the decorative boards provided in Unit A (hereinafter referred to as "frame-side decorative board A") is equipped with a parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of an ID output circuit that can identify itself.

One of the decorative boards provided in Unit B (hereinafter referred to as "frame-side decorative board B") is equipped with a parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of an ID output circuit that can identify itself.

One of the decorative boards provided in Unit C (hereinafter referred to as "frame-side decorative board C") is equipped with a parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa of an ID output circuit that can identify itself.

One of the decorative boards provided in Unit D (hereinafter referred to as the "frame-side decorative board D") is equipped with a parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa of an ID output circuit that can identify itself.

The parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuits provided on frame-side decorative boards A to D, respectively, are the same circuits as the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC shown in Figure 251, and explanations of each terminal, parts with identical circuit configurations, and operations will be omitted here.

The ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided on frame-side decorative board A are electrically connected to +5V at the A, B, C, D, E, F, and G terminals, and to ground (GND, circuit ground) at the H terminal. In other words, the ID of frame-side decorative board A (i.e., the ID of Unit A, which is the dish unit 200) is expressed as 8 bits wide, with the A terminal as the most significant bit and the H terminal as the least significant bit, as 11111110B (the letter "B" represents binary), and expressed in hexadecimal as FEH (the letter "H" represents hexadecimal).

The ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit provided on frame-side decorative board B are electrically connected to +5V at the A, B, C, D, E, and F terminals, and to ground (GND, circuit ground) at the G and H terminals. In other words, the ID of frame-side decorative board B (i.e., the ID of Unit B, the door frame right-side unit 430), expressed as an 8-bit width with the A terminal as the most significant bit and the H terminal as the least significant bit, is 11111100B (the letter "B" represents a binary number), and expressed in hexadecimal as FCH (the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number).

The ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board C are electrically connected to +5V at the A, B, C, D, and E terminals, and to ground (GND, circuit ground) at the F, G, and H terminals. In other words, the ID of the frame-side decorative board C (i.e., the ID of Unit C, the door frame top unit 450), expressed as an 8-bit width with the A terminal as the most significant bit and the H terminal as the least significant bit, is 11111000B (the letter "B" represents a binary number), and expressed in hexadecimal as F8H (the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number).

The ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa of the ID output circuit provided on frame-side decorative board D are electrically connected to +5V at terminals A, B, C, and D, and to ground (GND, circuit ground) at terminals E, F, G, and H. In other words, the ID of frame-side decorative board D (i.e., the ID of Unit D, the door frame left-side unit 420), expressed as an 8-bit width with terminal A as the most significant bit and terminal H as the least significant bit, is 11110000B (the letter "B" represents a binary number), and expressed in hexadecimal as F0H (the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number).

The S/inverted L terminals (shown by a solid line above the letter "L" in the diagram) of the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative boards A to D are shifted based on the compatibility determination clock signal input to the CK terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative boards A to D, and each flip-flop circuit of the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative boards A to D is set to the eight input terminals A to H. When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 are electrically connected to the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, and the compatibility determination switch signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is input via this drawer connector.

The SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board D of Unit D, the door frame left-side unit 420, is electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the frame-side decorative board D, and the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board D of Unit D, the door frame left-side unit 420, is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board C of Unit C, the door frame top unit 450 (this may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) or via the drawer connector). This daisy-chain connects the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board D of Unit D, the door frame left-side unit 420, and the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board C of Unit C, the door frame top unit 450.

The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board C of Unit C, the door frame top unit 450, is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board B of Unit B, the door frame right-side unit 430 (this may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) or via a drawer connector). This results in a daisy-chain connection between the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board C of Unit C, the door frame top unit 450, and the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board B of Unit B, the door frame right-side unit 430.

The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit provided on frame-side decorative board B in Unit B, the door frame right-side unit 430, is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided on frame-side decorative board A in Unit A, the dish unit 200 (this may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) or via the drawer connector). As a result, the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit provided on frame-side decorative board B in Unit B, the door frame right-side unit 430, and the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided on frame-side decorative board A in Unit A, the dish unit 200, are daisy-chain connected.

In this way, the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa of the ID output circuit provided on frame-side decorative board D of Unit D, the left door frame unit 420, to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa of the ID output circuit provided on frame-side decorative board C of Unit C, the top door frame unit 450, to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit provided on frame-side decorative board B of Unit B, the right frame unit 430, and finally to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided on frame-side decorative board A of Unit A, the dish unit 200, are daisy-chain connected.

Since each flip-flop circuit of the four parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa shifts sequentially at the rising edge of the compatibility determination clock signal input to the CK terminal (i.e., information input to the A terminal → information input to the B terminal → information input to the C terminal → information input to the D terminal → information input to the E terminal → information input to the F terminal → information input to the G terminal → information input to the H terminal → serial data is output by shifting one bit at a time from the non-inverted QH terminal and inverted QH terminal), the 8-bit shift register of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa, the 8-bit shift register of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa, and the parallel The parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa operates as an 8-bit shift register, and the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa operates as an 8-bit shift register, and the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa outputs an ID code signal as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 via the drawer connectors, which are electrically connected to the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and to the terminals of the two main frame drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

As described above, the tray unit 200 is equipped with the presentation operation unit 300. Therefore, during the presentation operation unit information acquisition process of step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 222, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 sets and outputs the logic of the compatibility determination switching signal input to the S/inverted L terminal to operate in parallel and then serial mode, and then outputs a compatibility determination clock signal to acquire an ID code signal and obtain a determination result regarding the compatibility (integrity) of the combination of the game board 5 and door frame unit.

The timing for obtaining the judgment results regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the gaming board 5 and the door frame unit may be performed only the first time after power is turned on, using the performance operation unit information acquisition process described above, or it may be performed constantly or intermittently using the performance operation unit information acquisition process described above after power is turned on. By constantly or intermittently obtaining the judgment results regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the gaming board 5 and the door frame unit using the performance operation unit information acquisition process described above after power is turned on, it is possible to check whether the transmission path from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame side decorative board WKB is affected by noise, depending on the judgment results.

In addition, the timing for obtaining a judgment result regarding the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit may be the first time after power is turned on, during the ID judgment process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 255 by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the gaming board 5 and the door frame unit is not compatible (matched) based on the results of its determination of the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the gaming board 5 and the door frame unit, it may take error response 1 (ID error 1 response) shown in Figures 256 to 258 or Figures 259 to 261 on the entire door frame unit, or it may take error response 1 (ID error 1 response) shown in Figures 256 to 258 or Figures 259 to 261 on units of the door frame unit that are not compatible (matched) (for example, Unit A to Unit D, and then Unit C (door frame top unit 450)).

[Configuration in which each door frame unit has a manufacturer identification code along with a self-identification code]
The door frame 3 can be configured to be shared by multiple manufacturers. In this case, if the self-identification codes (IDs) assigned to each unit of the door frame unit by one manufacturer (manufacturer) happen to match the self-identification codes (IDs) assigned to each unit of the door frame unit by another manufacturer (manufacturer), when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the control board may determine that the relationship (combination) between the game board 5 and the door frame 3 is one that was submitted to the application organization and approved, even though it is different from the relationship (combination) that was submitted to the application organization and approved. This is undesirable, as it would result in a pachinko machine that differs from the specification content that was submitted to the application organization and approved being installed in the game hall.

As such, it is possible to consider a configuration in which each door frame unit has a manufacturer identification code (manufacturer identification value) in addition to a self-identification code (ID), and an ID comparison circuit is provided that can determine the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit and output the determination result. Here, a configuration in which each door frame unit has a manufacturer identification code (manufacturer identification value) and a self-identification code (ID) will be described with reference to Figure 268. Figure 268 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a circuit in which the ID output circuit in each unit of Figure 267 further includes a manufacturer identification code (manufacturer identification value). Figure 268 is basically the same circuit as the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuit provided on frame-side decorative boards A to D in Figure 267, and therefore, explanations of each terminal, parts with identical circuit configurations, and operation will be omitted here.

Parallel-serial conversion circuits UAap-UDap are provided downstream of the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa-UDa of the ID output circuits provided on frame-side decorative boards A-D, respectively. A manufacturer's identification code (manufacturer's identification value) is set in the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAap-UDap.

Specifically, the ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAap-UDap, which are located downstream of the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa-UDa of the ID output circuits provided on frame-side decorative boards A-D, respectively, are electrically connected to the A, B, C, and E terminals (+5V), while the D, F, G, and H terminals are electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground). In other words, the manufacturer identification codes of frame-side decorative boards A-D (i.e., the manufacturer identification codes (manufacturer identification values) of Units A-D) are expressed as 8-bit widths with the A terminal as the most significant bit and the H terminal as the least significant bit, resulting in 11101000B (the letter "B" represents binary), and in hexadecimal notation, E8H (the letter "H" represents hexadecimal).

The S/inverted L terminals (shown by a solid line above the letter "L" in the diagram) of the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative boards A to D and the subsequent parallel-serial conversion circuits UAap to UDap are shifted based on the compatibility determination clock signal input to the CK terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative boards A to D and the subsequent parallel-serial conversion circuits UAap to UDap. Each flip-flop circuit Aap to UDap switches between parallel operation, which takes in information set in the eight input terminals A to H, and the compatibility determination switch signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is input via this drawer connector by electrically connecting the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

The SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDap subsequent to the ID output circuit provided on frame-side decorative board D in Unit D, the door frame left-side unit 420, is electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of frame-side decorative board D, and the inverted QH terminal of this subsequent parallel-serial conversion circuit UDap is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the preceding parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa. The inverted QH terminal of this preceding parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCap subsequent to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa of the ID output circuit provided on frame-side decorative board C in Unit C, the door frame top unit 450 (this may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) or via a drawer connector). This results in a daisy chain connection from the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDap at the rear of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board D provided on Unit D, the door frame left side unit 420, to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa at the front of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board D provided on Unit D, the door frame left side unit 420, and finally to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCap at the rear of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board C provided on Unit C, the door frame top unit 450.

The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCap, which is the downstream side of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board C provided on Unit C, the door frame top unit 450, is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the upstream parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa. The inverted QH terminal of this upstream parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBap, which is the downstream side of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board B provided on Unit B, the door frame right-side unit 430 (this may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) or via a drawer connector). This results in a daisy chain connection from the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCap at the rear of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board C provided on Unit C, the door frame top unit 450, to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa at the front of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board C provided on Unit C, the door frame top unit 450, and to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBap at the rear of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board B provided on Unit B, the door frame right side unit 430.

The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBap subsequent to the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board B of Unit B, the door frame right-side unit 430, is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa preceding it. The inverted QH terminal of this parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa preceding it is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAap subsequent to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board A of Unit A, the dish unit 200 (this may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) or via a drawer connector). This results in a daisy chain connection from the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBap at the rear of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board B of Unit B, the door frame right side unit 430, to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa at the front of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board B of Unit B, the door frame right side unit 430, and finally to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAap at the rear of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board A of Unit A, the dish unit 200.

The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAap, which is the subsequent stage of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board A provided on Unit A, which is the dish unit 200, is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the preceding parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa. As a result, the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAap, which is the subsequent stage of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board A provided on Unit A, which is the dish unit 200, and the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa, which is the preceding stage of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board A provided on Unit A, which is the dish unit 200, are daisy-chain connected.

In this way, from the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDap at the rear of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board D provided on Unit D, which is the door frame left-side unit 420, to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa at the front of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board D provided on Unit D, which is the door frame left-side unit 420, the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCap at the rear of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board C provided on Unit C, which is the door frame top unit 450, the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa at the front of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board C provided on Unit C, which is the door frame top unit 450, and the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa at the front of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board C provided on Unit C, which is the door frame right-side unit 430. The parallel-serial conversion circuit UBap is connected in the subsequent stage of the ID output circuit provided in the frame-side decorative board B provided in Unit B, which is the door frame right-side unit 430; the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa is connected in the previous stage of the ID output circuit provided in the frame-side decorative board B provided in Unit B, which is the door frame right-side unit 430; the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAap is connected in the subsequent stage of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame-side decorative board A provided in Unit A, which is the dish unit 200; and the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa is connected in the previous stage of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame-side decorative board A provided in Unit A, which is the dish unit 200, all connected in a daisy chain.

The flip-flop circuits of the eight parallel-serial conversion circuits UAap, UAa, UBap, UBa, UCap, UCa, UDap, and UDa shift sequentially at the rising edge of the compatibility determination clock signal input to the CK terminal (that is, information input to the A terminal → information input to the B terminal → information input to the C terminal → information input to the D terminal → information input to the E terminal → information input to the F terminal → information input to the G terminal → information input to the H terminal → shift one bit at a time from the non-inverted QH terminal and inverted QH terminal to output serial data), so the 8-bit shift register of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAap, the 8-bit shift register of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa, the 8-bit shift register of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBap, and the 8-bit shift register of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa The circuit operates as a 64-bit shift register consisting of an 8-bit shift register using the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCap, an 8-bit shift register using the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa, an 8-bit shift register using the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDap, and an 8-bit shift register using the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa. An ID code signal is output as serial data from the inverting QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa to the peripheral control board 1510 via the drawer connectors, which are electrically connected to the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW and UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and to the terminals of the two main frame drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

[ID error determination switch]
Of the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR that make up the split gaming board 5A shown in Figure 248, the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side gaming board 5AL acquires an ID from the ID code signal transmitted from each ID output circuit at a predetermined timing after power-on and determines whether the combination of the presentation operation unit provided in the door frame 3 and the split gaming board is compatible (matched). This determination result can be triggered by pressing the pressing operation portion of the ID error judgment switch. Figure 269 is a schematic front view (a) of a split gaming board provided with an ID error judgment switch, and a schematic rear view (b) of the split gaming board provided with an ID error judgment switch. Note that in Figures 269(a) and (b), components similar to those in Figures 248(a) and (b) are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions are omitted.

Furthermore, the main control board 1310 in FIG. 248(b) is provided with a setting switch 1311a, whereas the main control board 1310 in FIG. 269(b) is not provided with a setting switch; and the main control board 1310 in FIG. 248(b) is not provided with an ID error determination switch, whereas the main control board 1310 in FIG. 269(b) is provided with an ID error determination switch 1310v.

The ID error determination switch 1310v provided on the main control board 1310 has its pressing operation part exposed (not shown) from the cover of the main control board box 1320 described above. When an attendant such as a game hall staff member presses the pressing operation part of the ID error determination switch 1310v, a detection signal from the ID error determination switch 1310v is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the system of the main control board 1310 and repeatedly performs the main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 211 and the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 212.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the pressing operation section of the ID error determination switch 1310v has been pressed based on the detection signal from the ID error determination switch 1310v during the switch input processing of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 212 (specifically, the logic of the detection signal from the ID error determination switch 1310v includes operation logic and non-operation logic, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the pressing operation section of the ID error determination switch 1310v has been pressed when operation logic is input, and determines that the pressing operation section of the ID error determination switch 1310v has not been pressed when non-operation logic, which is the inverted operation logic, is input), the main control MPU 1310a sends an ID error determination result notification start command to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command sending processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 212.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 starts up the system of the peripheral control board 1510 and repeatedly performs the peripheral control unit regular processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing shown in Figure 221, and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 222 (if there is a command from the main control board 1310, it also performs the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing shown in Figure 223).

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255. In this ID determination process, in order to obtain the ID of the right-side game board and the ID of the presentation operation unit, an ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the right-side game board) is output to the right-side game board, and an ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the presentation operation unit) is output to the presentation operation unit. The peripheral control IC 1510a acquires the ID code signal from the right-hand gaming board (ID code signal dedicated to the right-hand gaming board) and the ID code signal from the presentation operation unit (ID code signal dedicated to the presentation operation unit) via separate serial systems, and determines (compares) the combination of the split gaming boards (that is, the combination of the right-hand gaming board (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left-hand gaming board (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) by referring to a combination table (Fig. 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, and determines (compares) the combination of the presentation operation unit and the split gaming board by referring to a combination table (Fig. 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM.

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing shown in Figure 223, and analyzes it in the received command analysis processing of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255.This triggers the peripheral control IC 1510a to start notifying the ID error determination result.When the determination result made on the combination of divided game boards in the ID determination processing of step S1003 is incompatible (inconsistent), that is, when the determination result made on the combination of the right game board (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left game board (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor) is incompatible (inconsistent), the peripheral control IC 1510a passes a command classified as a notification display to the warning processing of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing. As a result, in the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) from the peripheral control ROM the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, and the electrical drive source schedule data, etc., as a mode indicating incompatibility (mismatch), and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, thereby setting various processes related to the presentation, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 notifies that a corresponding error has occurred among Error Responses 1 to 9 as the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error shown in Figure 254(c). Note that when the determination result made on the combination of divided game boards is compatible (matched), the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error shown in Figure 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), and since the countermeasure is "none," there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, if the device is operating normally (no error handling is performed), no notification will be given and the dedicated notification sound will not be played from the speaker.

In this way, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 makes a judgment on the combination of divided game boards in the ID judgment processing of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, unless it receives the ID error judgment result notification start command from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing shown in Figure 223 and analyzes it in the received command analysis processing of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, it cannot use this as an opportunity to pass the command classified as notification display to the warning processing of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, and it cannot start notifying the ID error judgment result. In other words, even if error response 1 through error response 9 has occurred, the error notification start time for notifying the user of this can be changed by an attendant, such as a game hall staff member, pressing the pressing operation portion of the ID error determination switch 1310v until the ID error determination result notification start command is received (analyzed) from the main control board 1310.

In addition, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing shown in Figure 223, and analyzes it in the received command analysis processing of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255.This triggers the peripheral control IC 1510a to start notifying the ID error determination result.If the determination result made in the ID determination processing of step S1003 regarding the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is incompatible (inconsistent), the peripheral control IC 1510a passes the command classified as a notification display to the warning processing of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing. As a result, in the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) from the peripheral control ROM the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, and the electrical drive source schedule data, etc., as a mode indicating incompatibility (mismatch), and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, thereby setting various processes related to the performance, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 notifies that a corresponding error has occurred among error responses 1 to 9 as the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in Figure 254 (c). Note that when the determination result made regarding the combination of the performance operation unit and the divided game board is compatible (matched), the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in Figure 254 (c) is normal operation (no error response), and since the countermeasure is "none," there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, if the device is operating normally (no error handling is performed), no notification will be given and the dedicated notification sound will not be played from the speaker.

In this way, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the determination result on the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 255, unless it receives the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process shown in FIG. 223 and analyzes it in the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 255, it cannot use this as an opportunity to pass the command classified as notification display to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit normal processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, and it cannot start notifying the ID error determination result.

In addition, an ID error judgment switch 1310v is provided on the main control board 1310, but the ID error judgment switch 1310v can be replaced by a setting key switch 1311a, which can switch the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 and check the setting values. In this case, a setting key switch 1311a as shown in Figure 248 (b) is provided, and the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 is not sent to the peripheral control board 1510, but after inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turning it ON, the power switch 630a provided on the power supply board 630 is operated to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633, thereby starting the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing, and based on the setting key inserted into the setting key switch 1311a being turned OFF, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S238 in the setting change processing is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumferential serial data. When the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a setting change command from the main control board 1310, it uses this as an opportunity to issue a notification if error response 1 to error response 9 occurs, which is the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 254 (c). Because the setting key is an important key, only a limited number of people, including the arcade manager, are permitted to possess it, and it is limited to two or three people.

Specifically, after inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 in Figure 248 (b) and turning it ON, the power switch 630a on the power supply board 630 is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d on the payout control board 633. The main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 then transmits the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 of the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 of the setting change process shown in Figure 213 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. This setting change command is a command that conveys the changed setting value and the completion of setting value storage. When the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it regards this as the receipt of an ID error determination result notification start command, and uses this as an opportunity to proceed with the process of starting notification of the ID error determination result.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the setting change process in step S37 during the main control side power-on process, then clears the entire RAM area in step S38, and then performs the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process shown in Figure 212.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays, for example, "Power being restored" against a black background on the performance display device 1600 as a startup mode. At this time, "Power being restored" may be followed by "Setting up", or "Setting up" may be displayed instead of "Power being restored". In this case, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing, it must send a setting change start command to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data, indicating that the setting change is about to begin.

After the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has completed the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing, that is, when it receives a setting change command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 recognizes that it has received an ID error determination result notification start command, and using this as an opportunity, if error response 1 to error response 9 has occurred as the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 254 (c), it will issue a notification to that effect. In other words, even if Error Response 1 through Error Response 9 occur as a result of the pachinko machine's behavior during an error shown in FIG. 254(c), if the setting key is inserted and turned ON on the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310, causing the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to perform the setting change process in step S37 of the main control side power-on process (until the predetermined period of time until this setting change process is completed has elapsed; in other words, until a setting change command is received (analyzed) from the main control board 1310), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will not be able to notify the user that Error Response 1 through Error Response 9 have occurred. In other words, until a setting change command is received (analyzed) from the main control board 1310, the start time of the error notification that notifies the user that Error Response 1 through Error Response 9 have occurred can be changed by operating the setting key held by a limited number of people at the amusement hall.

In contrast, if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turned ON, and then the power switch 630a on the power supply board 630 is operated without pressing the push-button of the RWM switch 633d on the payout control board 633, the pachinko machine 1 will be powered on without performing the setting change processing of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing, and without clearing the entire RAM area of step S38, and will then perform the main control side main processing and the main control side timer interrupt processing of Fig. 212. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 will, as a startup mode, display "Power being restored" on a black background on the performance display device 1600, for example, and if Error Response 1 to Error Response 9 occurs as the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error shown in Fig. 254(c), will issue a notification to that effect. In other words, even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turned ON, if the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 does not perform the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is able to notify the user that error response 1 to error response 9 has occurred, as shown in Figure 254 (c) as the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error.

In other words, even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turned ON, if the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 does not perform the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will not be able to notify the user of error response 1 to error response 9 until a predetermined period has elapsed (until a setting change command is received (analyzed) from the main control board 1310), or it will be able to notify the user of this regardless of the predetermined period.

In this way, when the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310, which serves as the operating unit, is operated, a notification can be issued based on the results of the determination of whether the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR are aligned. This makes it possible to immediately determine if the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR are misaligned, preventing incomplete effects from being executed when the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR are misaligned. This therefore prevents a decline in interest in the game.

[Summary A]
A0:
A gaming machine includes a gaming frame-side component having an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame attached to the main frame so as to be openable and closable, and a gaming board-side component detachably attached to the gaming frame-side component, wherein the gaming board-side component is composed of a first gaming board-side component and a second gaming board-side component. The first gaming board-side component is composed of multiple boards, including a presentation control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes game presentations. The second gaming board-side component has a specific board that does not have a microprocessor. The specific board has an eigenvalue that can identify it as the second gaming board-side component, and an eigenvalue transmission means that transmits the eigenvalue to the presentation control board. The presentation control board is capable of comparing the eigenvalue transmitted from the eigenvalue transmission means with its own eigenvalue. The first gaming board-side component and the second gaming board-side component are each individually fixed to the gaming frame-side component.

Specifically, for example, pachinko machine 1 comprises an outer frame 2, which is a gaming frame-side component, a door frame 3 that opens and closes the front of outer frame 2, a main frame 4 that supports door frame 3 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a divided gaming board 5A (Fig. 248), which is a gaming board-side component. The divided gaming board 5A is composed of a left-side gaming board 5AL, which is a first gaming board-side component, and a right-side gaming board 5AR, which is a second gaming board-side component. The left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, is composed of multiple boards including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a presentation control board equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, which is a microprocessor that can execute game presentations (a main control unit 1300 that houses the main control board 1310, and a left side drive board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "left side drive board unit 1700L") that houses various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various presentation units housed in the left side rear box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.). The right-side game board 5AR, which is a component on the second game board side, is equipped with a specific board that does not have a microprocessor (one of the right-side drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right-side drive board unit 1700R") that houses various boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to the various performance units housed in the right-side rear box 3010R, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.)). One of the various boards that is a specific board is equipped with a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify it as the right-side game board 5AR, which is a component on the second game board side, and an ID output circuit IDC (see FIG. 251), which is a unique value transmission means that transmits the unique self-identification code (ID) to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board.

The peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board, is capable of comparing the self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value transmitted from the ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmission means, with its own unique value (combination table (Fig. 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM) in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Fig. 255.

The left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are each individually and detachably attached to the main frame 4, which is the gaming frame component.

In this way, the ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmission means provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component, transmits a signal of a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component, to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a presentation control board provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board side component.Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510, which is a presentation control board, can determine the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board side component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component. This makes it possible to immediately determine when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, become misaligned, preventing incomplete effects from being executed when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are misaligned. This prevents a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

A1:
The game machine includes a game frame-side component having an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame attached to the main frame so as to be openable and closable, and a game board-side component detachably attached to the game frame-side component. The game board-side component is composed of a first game board-side component and a second game board-side component. The first game board-side component includes a plurality of boards, including a sub-control board equipped with a microprocessor capable of executing game effects. The second game board-side component includes a board not equipped with a microprocessor, a unique value identifying the second game board-side component, and unique value transmission means for transmitting the unique value. Furthermore, the first game board-side component and the second game board-side component are electrically connected and fixed to the game frame-side component. The unique value transmission means is capable of transmitting to the sub-control board using serial communication. The unique value transmission means is electrically connected to the sub-control board of the first game board-side component. The sub-control board can compare the unique value from the unique value transmission means with the unique value it holds.

Specifically, for example, it comprises a main frame 4, which is the gaming frame-side component, and a split gaming board 5A (see Figure 248), which is the gaming board-side component. The split gaming board 5A is composed of a left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board-side component, and a right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board-side component. The left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board-side component, comprises multiple boards (main control unit 1300, which houses the main control board 1310, and left-side drive board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "left-side drive board unit 1700L"), which houses various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various performance units housed in the left rear box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.)) including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, which is a microprocessor that can execute game effects. The right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is equipped with a board that does not have a microprocessor (a right-side drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right-side drive board unit 1700R") that houses various boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to the various performance units housed in the right-side rear box 3010R, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.), a self-identification code (ID) which is a unique value that identifies the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, and an ID output circuit IDC (see Figure 251) which is a unique value transmission means that transmits the unique value self-identification code (ID).

Furthermore, the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are electrically connected and fixed to the main frame 4, which is the gaming frame component.

The ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmission means, is capable of transmitting to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board, using serial communication. The ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmission means, is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board of the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board side component. The peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board, is able to compare the self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value from the ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmission means, with its own unique value (combination table (Figure 254) stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM), in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 255.

In this way, the ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmitting means provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component, transmits a unique value, i.e., a self-identification code (ID), which is an unique value that identifies the gaming board as the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component, to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board side component, using serial communication, so that the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board, can determine the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board side component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component. This makes it possible to immediately determine when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, become misaligned, preventing incomplete effects from being executed when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are misaligned. This prevents a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

A2:
Furthermore, the serial communication signal includes a unique value and a signal related to the game presentation generated in the second game board side component, and further comprises a first serial communication means for transmitting and receiving signals between the main control board and the payout control board, and a second serial communication means for transmitting and receiving signals between the first game board side component and the second game board side component, and if the comparison judgment in the first serial communication means is false, balls will not be paid out, and if the comparison judgment in the second serial communication means is false, the decorative presentation of the second game board side component will not be performed.

Specifically, for example, the photo and ID code signal in Figure 252, which is a serial communication signal, includes a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value, and a signal related to the game presentation generated on the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component (a detection signal from a photosensor that detects the positions of various movable bodies and is input to the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO in Figure 252), and further includes a first serial communication means for transmitting and receiving signals between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and a second serial communication means for transmitting and receiving signals between the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board side component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component.

If the comparison result in the first serial communication means is false, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes a self-identification code (ID) that identifies itself when sending various commands to the control board equipped with a microprocessor. Therefore, when the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 determines that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (inconsistent) during the command analysis process of step S560 in the payout control main process of the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 218, it sets information indicating that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (inconsistent) in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and sets information to stop the payout operation in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. This prevents the payout of game balls. In other words, if the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 becomes incompatible (mismatched) due to an operator error, even if the player is able to play and progress in the game, the payout operation will be stopped and no game balls will be paid out to the player. This will allow the player to be notified that some kind of malfunction has occurred with the pachinko machine, and the player can inform an attendant such as a game hall staff member that the pachinko machine is in a state where game balls are not being paid out. This can contribute to the early detection of a mismatch (mismatch) between the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

If the comparison judgment by the second serial communication means is false, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 acquires the ID code signal (ID code signal exclusive to the right-side game board) from the right-side game board in the ID judgment processing of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Figure 255, and judges (compares) the combination of the divided game boards (i.e., the combination of the right-side game board (board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left-side game board (peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) by referring to the combination table (Figure 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, and if it judges that there is an incompatibility (mismatch), it passes a command classified as an alert display to the warning processing of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing as error response 1 (ID error 1 response) of Figures 256 to 261, which becomes State 2: ID error 1 of Figure 254 (c). In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) from the peripheral control ROM the schedule data for generating the screen, the schedule data for generating the light emission mode, the schedule data for generating the sound, and the schedule data for the electrical drive source as incompatible (mismatched) data and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, thereby setting various processes related to the presentation. As a result, the various LEDs of the divided game board 5A (various LEDs of the game board) are turned off, and the decorative presentation of the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, is not performed. In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards that make up the divided game board 5A becomes incompatible (mismatched) due to an operator error, when the pachinko machine is turned on, the various LEDs on the divided game board 5A (various game board LEDs) will turn off and the decorative effects on the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, will no longer be displayed, which can contribute to early detection of an incompatible (mismatched) combination of the left and right game boards.

A3:
Furthermore, if a RAM error and an ID error occur simultaneously, only the RAM error is reported, and no ID error is reported. Also, no LED error is reported in the decorative unit. Specifically, if a RAM error in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and Status 2: ID Error 1 in Figure 254(c) (Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261) occur simultaneously, only a report is made to inform the user that a RAM error has occurred, but no report is made to inform the user that Status 2: ID Error 1 in Figure 254(c) (Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261) has occurred. This is because if a RAM error occurs in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the progress of the game by the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly stopped, so in order to notify this, even if state 2: ID error 1 in Figure 254 (c) (error response 1 (corresponding to ID error 1) in Figures 256 to 261) occurs, the RAM error in the main control built-in RAM, which is the most important error, is notified as the highest priority regardless of the occurrence of other errors.

If the ID is determined to be normal within a specified period of time after power-on, no notification is issued. However, if the ID is determined to be abnormal within a specified period of time after power-on, the notification mode may change if the state changes. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode changes when the state returns to normal. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not issue a notification (target method in the same figure: none) if it determines that the ID is normal, i.e., State 1 in FIG. 254(c): ID error 1 (Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response) in FIGS. 256 to 261), i.e., an abnormal ID, but maintains the notification of Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response). If the ID is determined to be normal, i.e., a normal ID, after the countermeasure in FIG. 254(c): replacement with a compatible ID after power-off, the notification is no longer issued. In other words, if the combination of the left and right gaming boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right gaming boards will not be determined at all thereafter, and even if the combination of the left and right gaming boards becomes incompatible (inconsistent), no notification will be issued to convey that the ID is abnormal due to the incompatibility (inconsistency). In this way, by limiting the determination of the combination of the left and right gaming boards to within a specified period of time after power-on, this can contribute to reducing the processing load on the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 for the progression of the presentation.

All but a few notifications are terminated. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIGS. 256 to 261), in other words, an abnormal ID, it saves this as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) implemented on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved linked to the date and time. Then, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and the correct combination of left and right game boards is attached to the main frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on again, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 1: Normal (FIG. 254(c)), i.e., a normal ID, it may display a history of "ID abnormality" on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, and this history may be displayed for a predetermined period of time or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

Once a normal state has been restored, the notification mode will not change even if an abnormality occurs again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected, at which point the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (turned off), cutting off the power supply to the peripheral control board, and the game board must be reinserted and the pachinko machine must be powered on again. When the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID etc. of the performance operation unit can be confirmed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255. Therefore, when the pachinko machine is powered on, if the ID is confirmed by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255 and notification processing is performed, which continues until the power to the pachinko machine is turned off, then there is no need to control the ID confirmation or notification processing thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when the pachinko machine 1 system has completed startup and is ready to proceed with game play and presentation), the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Figure 255 is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 222, and when the presentation operation unit is attached or detached to or from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 4, if a presentation operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID even once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is replaced with another presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID (or if a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with a presentation operation unit with a normal ID, and then once determined to have a normal ID in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is returned to a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID), as a result, even if the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent), the presentation will continue to proceed and no notification will be made that the presentation operation unit has an abnormal ID. Therefore, once the system has returned to normal, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again.

A4:
The first game board side component and the second game board side component are electrically connected by connecting connectors to each other. Specifically, the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, are electrically connected to each other via drawer connectors, which are connectors, that is, terminals of the right game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right game board 5AR, and terminals of the left game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left game board 5AL. This drawer connector allows automatic electrical connection between the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, simply by combining them.

[Summary B]
B0:
A gaming machine comprising a game frame-side component having an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame attached to the main frame so as to be openable and closable, and a game board-side component detachably attached to the game frame-side component, wherein the game board-side component is made up of a first game board-side component and a second game board-side component and is fixed to the game frame-side component. The first game board-side component is made up of multiple boards including a presentation control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes game presentations. The second game board-side component is equipped with a specific board not equipped with a microprocessor. The specific board has a unique value that can identify it as the second game board-side component and a unique value transmission means for signal-transmitting the unique value to the presentation control board. The presentation control board is capable of reporting a first error that occurs when a unique value cannot be received from the second game board side component within a predetermined time, and a second error that occurs when the unique value transmitted from the second game board side component is not a predetermined value.

Specifically, for example, a pachinko machine 1 comprises a main frame 4, which is the gaming frame side component, and a divided gaming board 5A, shown in Figure 248, which is the gaming board side component. The divided gaming board 5A is made up of a left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board side component, and a right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component, and is fixed to the main frame 4, which is the gaming frame side component. The left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, is composed of multiple boards including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a presentation control board equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, which is a microprocessor that can execute game presentations (a main control unit 1300 that houses the main control board 1310, and a left side drive board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "left side drive board unit 1700L") that houses various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various presentation units housed in the left side rear box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.). The right-side gaming board 5AR, which is a component on the second gaming board side, is equipped with a specific board that does not have a microprocessor (one of the right-side drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right-side drive board unit 1700R") that houses various boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various performance units housed in the right-side rear box 3010R, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.)). One of the various specific boards is equipped with a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify it as the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is a component on the second gaming board side, and an ID output circuit IDC (see FIG. 251), which is a unique value transmission means that transmits the unique self-identification code (ID) to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board.

The peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board, is configured to notify the following: the first error, which occurs when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the unique ID code (ID) from the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, within a predetermined time (the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255), resulting in error response 7 in FIGS. 256 to 261, which becomes state 8 in FIG. 254(c): unconnected error 1; and the second error, which occurs when the unique ID code (ID) is received from the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, and is not a predetermined value, resulting in error response 1 in FIGS. 256 to 261, which becomes state 2 in FIG. 254(c): ID error 1 (ID error 1 response).

In other words, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 passes a command classified as a notification display to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, as error response 7 in Figures 256 to 261, which corresponds to the first error, State 8 in Figure 254(c): Unconnected Error 1. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC as a mode indicating unconnected, thereby setting various processing related to the presentation.

The command classified as a notification display for Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261, which is State 2: ID Error 1 in Figure 254 (c), which is the second error, is passed to the warning process in step S1024 of the peripheral control unit's regular processing during peripheral control unit power-on processing. In the warning process in step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) the screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC as incompatible (mismatched) conditions, thereby setting various processing related to the presentation.

In this way, the ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmission means provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component, transmits a signal of the self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component, to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board side component. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board, transmits the signal of the ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmission means provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component, to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board, within a predetermined time (the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is the peripheral control unit If the unique ID code (ID) is not received during the ID determination process in step S1003 of the power-on process, a first error, State 8 in FIG. 254(c): Unconnected Error 1, error response 7 in FIGS. 256-261, can be generated. If the unique ID code (ID) is received within a predetermined time but is not the predetermined value, a second error, State 2 in FIG. 254(c): ID Error 1, error response 1 in FIGS. 256-261 (ID Error 1 response), can be generated. This makes it possible to immediately determine if the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are inconsistent, preventing incomplete effects from being executed when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are inconsistent. This prevents a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

B1:
The game machine includes a game frame-side component and a game board-side component. The game board-side component is composed of a first game board-side component and a second game board-side component. The first game board-side component includes multiple boards, including a sub-control board equipped with a microprocessor capable of executing game effects. The second game board-side component includes a board not equipped with a microprocessor, a unique value identifying the second game board-side component, and unique value transmitting means for transmitting the unique value. Furthermore, the first game board-side component and the second game board-side component are electrically connected and fixed to the game frame-side component. The first game board-side component includes a first error that occurs when the unique value from the second game board-side component is not received within a predetermined time, and a second error that occurs when the unique value received from the second game board-side component is not the predetermined value.

Specifically, for example, it comprises a main frame 4, which is the gaming frame-side component, and a split gaming board 5A (see Figure 248), which is the gaming board-side component. The split gaming board 5A is composed of a left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board-side component, and a right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board-side component. The left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board-side component, comprises multiple boards (main control unit 1300, which houses the main control board 1310, and left-side drive board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "left-side drive board unit 1700L"), which houses various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various performance units housed in the left rear box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.)) including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, which is a microprocessor that can execute game effects. The right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is equipped with a board that does not have a microprocessor (a right-side drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right-side drive board unit 1700R") that houses various boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to the various performance units housed in the right-side rear box 3010R, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.), a self-identification code (ID) which is a unique value that identifies the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, and an ID output circuit IDC (see Figure 251) which is a unique value transmission means that transmits the unique value self-identification code (ID).

Furthermore, the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are electrically connected and fixed to the main frame 4, which is the gaming frame component. The work of attaching the gaming board 5 to the main frame 4 and the work of attaching the door frame unit to the door frame 3, which is supported on the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, are separate tasks. For this reason, when attaching the gaming board 5 to the main frame 4, it is possible that the relationship (combination) between the gaming board 5 and the door frame unit may not be compatible (aligned) due to human error.

The left-hand gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, is equipped with error response 7 in FIGS. 256 to 261, which is state 8 in FIG. 254(c): unconnected error 1, which is the first error that occurs when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the unique ID code (ID) from the right-hand gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, within a predetermined time (the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255), and error response 1 in FIGS. 256 to 261, which is state 2 in FIG. 254(c): ID error 1, which is the second error that occurs when the unique ID code (ID) is received from the right-hand gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, and is not a predetermined value.

The left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, i.e., the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, passes a command classified as a notification display to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, as error response 7 in Figures 256 to 261, which is the first error, State 8 in Figure 254 (c): Unconnected Error 1. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC as modes indicating unconnection, thereby setting various processing related to the effects.

The command classified as a notification display for Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261, which is State 2: ID Error 1 in Figure 254 (c), which is the second error, is passed to the warning process in step S1024 of the peripheral control unit's regular processing during peripheral control unit power-on processing. In the warning process in step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) the screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC as incompatible (mismatched) conditions, thereby setting various processing related to the presentation.

In this way, the ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmission means provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component, transmits a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that identifies the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component, to the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board side component. Therefore, the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board side component, will notify the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board side component, within a predetermined time (the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is the step in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 255). If the unique ID code (ID) is not received during the ID determination process (step S1003), a first error, State 8 in FIG. 254(c): Unconnected Error 1, error response 7 in FIGS. 256-261, can occur. If the unique ID code (ID) received within a predetermined time is not the predetermined value, a second error, State 2 in FIG. 254(c): ID Error 1, error response 1 in FIGS. 256-261 (ID Error 1 response), can occur. This makes it possible to immediately determine if the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are inconsistent, preventing incomplete effects from being executed when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are inconsistent. This prevents a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

B2:
Furthermore, the various ID errors that are second errors (ID errors) (including not only the individual ID errors ID error 1, ID error 2, and ID error 3 shown in Figure 254(c) but also ID errors that are combinations of these) hinder gameplay to a greater extent than the various unconnection errors that are first errors (unconnection errors) (unconnection error 1, unconnection error 2, and unconnection error 3 shown in Figure 254(c)).

Furthermore, the third error (magnetic detection) is resolved after a certain period of time, but the first error (disconnection error) and the second error (ID error) are not resolved even after a certain period of time has passed. Among these various error notifications, the third error (magnetic detection) detects and reports the so-called magnetic interference behavior, and therefore is resolved after a certain period of time has passed. In contrast, the first error (disconnection error) and the second error (ID error) are caused by operator errors. For the first error (disconnection error), the fit of structural components and the connection of the drawer connector must be carefully checked after a power outage, and the second error (ID error) must be replaced with a compatible ID product after a power outage, so they are not resolved even after a certain period of time has passed.

Furthermore, when a second error (ID error) occurs, the decorative effect on the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, is not performed. This is because the second error (ID error) is a work error made by an operator, resulting in an incompatibility (mismatch) between the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component. If the decorative effect on the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, were performed in this state, there is a risk of electrical failure of the right-side gaming board 5AR.

Furthermore, even if a third error (magnetic detection) occurs when a second error (ID error) occurs, the second error (ID error) warning sound will remain. In other words, even if a third error (magnetic detection) occurs when a second error (ID error) occurs, as shown in Figures 258 and 261, the audio for Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) is to repeatedly play the error notification sound and announcement sound. This is because the third error (magnetic detection) detects and notifies the user of the so-called magnetic tampering and is resolved after a certain period of time has passed since the detection of the error, whereas the second error (ID error) is an operator error and requires replacement with a compatible ID product after a power outage, so the second error (ID error) warning sound will remain even after a certain period of time has passed.

B3:
Furthermore, if a RAM error and an ID error occur simultaneously, only the RAM error is reported, and no ID error is reported. Also, no LED error is reported in the decorative unit. Specifically, if a RAM error in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and Status 2: ID Error 1 in Figure 254(c) (Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261) occur simultaneously, only a report is made to inform the user that a RAM error has occurred, but no report is made to inform the user that Status 2: ID Error 1 in Figure 254(c) (Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261) has occurred. This is because if a RAM error occurs in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the progress of the game by the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly stopped, so in order to notify this, even if state 2: ID error 1 in Figure 254 (c) (error response 1 (corresponding to ID error 1) in Figures 256 to 261) occurs, the RAM error in the main control built-in RAM, which is the most important error, is notified as the highest priority regardless of the occurrence of other errors.

If the ID is determined to be normal within a specified period of time after power-on, no notification is issued. However, if the ID is determined to be abnormal within a specified period of time after power-on, the notification mode may change if the state changes. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode changes when the state returns to normal. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not issue a notification (target method in the same figure: none) if it determines that the ID is normal, i.e., State 1 in FIG. 254(c): ID error 1 (Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response) in FIGS. 256 to 261), i.e., an abnormal ID, but maintains the notification of Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response). If the ID is determined to be normal, i.e., a normal ID, after the countermeasure in FIG. 254(c): replacement with a compatible ID after power-off, the notification is no longer issued. In other words, if the combination of the left and right gaming boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right gaming boards will not be determined at all thereafter, and even if the combination of the left and right gaming boards becomes incompatible (inconsistent), no notification will be issued to convey that the ID is abnormal due to the incompatibility (inconsistency). In this way, by limiting the determination of the combination of the left and right gaming boards to within a specified period of time after power-on, this can contribute to reducing the processing load on the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 for the progression of the presentation.

All but a few notifications are terminated. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIGS. 256 to 261), in other words, an abnormal ID, it saves this as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) implemented on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved linked to the date and time. Then, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and the correct combination of left and right game boards is attached to the main frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on again, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 1: Normal (FIG. 254(c)), i.e., a normal ID, it may display a history of "ID abnormality" on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, and this history may be displayed for a predetermined period of time or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

Once a normal state has been restored, the notification mode will not change even if an abnormality occurs again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected, at which point the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (turned off), cutting off the power supply to the peripheral control board, and the game board must be reinserted and the pachinko machine must be powered on again. When the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID etc. of the performance operation unit can be confirmed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255. Therefore, when the pachinko machine is powered on, if the ID is confirmed by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255 and notification processing is performed, which continues until the power to the pachinko machine is turned off, then there is no need to control the ID confirmation or notification processing thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when the pachinko machine 1 system has completed startup and is ready to proceed with game play and presentation), the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Figure 255 is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 222, and when the presentation operation unit is attached or detached to or from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 4, if a presentation operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID even once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is replaced with another presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID (or if a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with a presentation operation unit with a normal ID, and then once determined to have a normal ID in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is returned to a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID), as a result, even if the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent), the presentation will continue to proceed and no notification will be made that the presentation operation unit has an abnormal ID. Therefore, once the system has returned to normal, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again.

B4:
When the third error (magnetic detection) occurs, the sub-function display unit 2250, which is the fourth symbol, lights up and changes, a predetermined LED. Specifically, when the third error (magnetic detection) occurs, and various ID errors (including individual ID errors such as ID error 1, ID error 2, and ID error 3 shown in FIG. 254(c) as well as combinations of these ID errors) occur, as shown in FIGS. 258 and 261, the sub-function display unit 2250, which is the fourth symbol, lights up and changes, a predetermined LED. In other words, when the third error (magnetic detection) occurs, and various ID errors (including individual ID errors such as ID error 1, ID error 2, and ID error 3 shown in FIG. 254(c) as well as combinations of these ID errors) occur, the predetermined LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 lights up and changes, so that the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 continues to perform the effects.

In the event of a second error (ID error), the decorative sound will not be played even if the pattern is changed. Specifically, when various ID errors that are second errors (ID errors) occur (including the individual ID errors ID error 1, ID error 2, and ID error 3 shown in Figure 254 (c) as well as combinations of these), as shown in Figures 257 and 260, even if the game progresses and the patterns on the function display unit 1400 change, error notification sounds and announcement sounds will be played repeatedly, and decorative sound for the effect will not be played. This is because a second error (ID error) is a work error made by an operator, and since a second error (ID error) requires that the ID be replaced with a compatible product after the power is cut off, the decorative sound will not be played and the warning sound for the second error (ID error) will remain.

The third error (magnetic detection), which is a magnetic sensor error, is resolved after a certain period of time has passed, but the error of the right-side gaming board 5AR not being installed as a decorative unit (i.e., a non-connection error) and the ID error of the right-side gaming board 5AR as a decorative unit are not resolved even after a certain period of time has passed. These error notifications are based on the fact that the magnetic sensor error detects and notifies the user of the so-called magnetic cheating behavior, and so is resolved after a certain period of time has passed after the behavior is detected. In contrast, the non-connection error and ID error are caused by operator error. For the non-connection error, the fit of structural components and the connection of the drawer connector must be carefully checked after a power outage, and the ID error must be replaced with a compatible ID product after a power outage, so they are not resolved even after a certain period of time has passed.

[Summary C]
C0:
A gaming machine includes a game frame-side component having an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame attached to the main frame so as to be openable and closable, and a game board-side component detachably attached to the game frame-side component. The game board-side component is composed of a first game board-side component and multiple second game board-side components and is fixed to the game frame-side component. The first game board-side component is composed of multiple boards, including a presentation control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes game presentations. The second game board-side component includes a specific board not equipped with a microprocessor. The specific board has a unique value that can identify it as the second game board-side component and unique value transmission means for signal-transmitting the unique value to the presentation control board. The multiple second game board-side components each have a different unique value, and if it is determined that the unique value of at least one second game board-side component is not a predetermined value, the power-on operation of the multiple second game board-side components will be different from normal operation.

Specifically, for example, a pachinko machine 1 comprises a main frame 4, which is a gaming frame-side component, and a divided gaming board 5A, shown in Figure 248, which is a gaming board-side component. The divided gaming board 5A is made up of a left-side gaming board 5AL, which is a first gaming board-side component, and multiple right-side gaming boards 5AR, which are second gaming board-side components (upper right gaming board 5ART in Figure 253 and lower right gaming board 5ARU in Figure 253), and is fixed to the main frame 4, which is a gaming frame-side component. The left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, is composed of multiple boards including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a presentation control board equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, which is a microprocessor that can execute game presentations (a main control unit 1300 that houses the main control board 1310, and a left side drive board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "left side drive board unit 1700L") that houses various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various presentation units housed in the left side rear box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.). The right-side gaming board 5AR, which is a component of the second gaming board, includes a specific board that does not have a microprocessor (a specific board among the right-side drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right-side drive board unit 1700R") that houses various boards (e.g., various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various performance units housed in the right-side rear box 3010R, and drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.)). This specific board among the various specific boards includes a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify it as the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is a component of the second gaming board, and an ID output circuit IDCT of the upper right gaming board 5ART that constitutes the right-side gaming board 5AR and an ID output circuit IDCU of the lower right gaming board 5ARU that constitutes the right-side gaming board 5AR, which are unique value transmission means that transmit the unique self-identification code (ID) to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board, as shown in FIG. 253.

The door frame 3, which is supported by the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, is fitted with door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the left side unit 420, the right side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the top unit 450.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 253, the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is a component of the second gaming board, is composed of a top right gaming board 5ART and a bottom right gaming board 5ARU, and there are multiple right-side gaming boards 5AR, each of which has a different unique value. In the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the self-identification code, which is the unique value of at least one of the top right gaming board 5ART and the bottom right gaming board 5ARU (ID of the top right gaming board 5ART: 11110000B, ID of the bottom right gaming board 5ARU: 11111000B), is not a predetermined value. If the power is cut off, the state will become State 2: ID error 1 in Figure 254 (c), which is Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figure 256 or Figure 259, and the power-on operation of the right-side game board 5AR, which is one of the multiple second game board components, will be different from normal operation (illumination, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.), and the various LEDs on the divided game board 5AR (various game board LEDs) will turn off, so the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, will turn off.

In this way, the ID output circuit IDCT and ID output circuit IDCU, which are unique value transmission means provided on the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU that constitute the right gaming board 5AR, which are multiple second gaming board side components, respectively, transmit a signal of a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify the right gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component, to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board side component. If it is determined that the self-identification code (ID of the upper right game board 5ART: 11110000B, ID of the lower right game board 5ARU: 11111000B), which is a unique value of at least one of the multiple second game board side components, is not a predetermined value, the state will become state 2: ID error 1 in Figure 254 (c) or error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figure 256 or Figure 259, and the power-on operation of the right game board 5AR, which is one of the multiple second game board side components, will be in a mode (off) different from the normal operation (lighting, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.). This makes it possible to immediately determine when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which are multiple second gaming board components, become inconsistent (including when the combination of the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU becomes inconsistent), and prevents incomplete effects from being executed when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which are multiple second gaming board components, become inconsistent (including when the combination of the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU become inconsistent).This therefore prevents a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

C1:
The game machine includes a game frame-side component having an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame attached to the main frame so as to be openable and closable, and a game board-side component detachably attached to the game frame-side component. The game board-side component is composed of a first game board-side component and a second game board-side component. The first game board-side component has a plurality of boards including a sub-control board equipped with a microprocessor capable of executing game effects. The second game board-side component has a board not equipped with a microprocessor, a unique value identifying the second game board-side component, and unique value transmitting means for transmitting the unique value. Furthermore, the first game board-side component and the second game board-side component are electrically connected and fixed to the game frame. There are multiple second game board side components, each with a different inherent value, and if it is determined that the inherent value of at least one second game board side component is not a predetermined value, the power-on operation of the second game board side component will be different from normal operation.

Specifically, for example, it comprises a main frame 4, which is the gaming frame-side component, and a split gaming board 5A (see Figure 248), which is the gaming board-side component. The split gaming board 5A is composed of a left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board-side component, and a right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board-side component. The left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board-side component, comprises multiple boards (main control unit 1300, which houses the main control board 1310, and left-side drive board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "left-side drive board unit 1700L"), which houses various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various performance units housed in the left rear box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.)) including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, which is a microprocessor that can execute game effects. The right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, is equipped with a board that does not have a microprocessor (a right-side drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right-side drive board unit 1700R") that houses various boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various performance units housed in the right-side rear box 3010R, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.), a self-identification code (ID) that is a unique value that identifies the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, and unique value transmission means that transmits the unique value self-identification code (ID), which are the ID output circuit IDCT of the upper right gaming board 5ART that constitutes the right-side gaming board 5AR in FIG. 253 and the ID output circuit IDCU of the lower right gaming board 5ARU that constitutes the right-side gaming board 5AR.

Furthermore, the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are electrically connected and fixed to the main frame 4, which is the gaming frame. Door frame units such as the left-side door frame unit 420, the right-side door frame unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") are attached to the door frame 3, which is supported on the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The work of attaching the gaming board 5 to the main frame 4 and the work of attaching the door frame units to the door frame 3, which is supported on the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, are separate tasks. For this reason, when attaching the gaming board 5 to the main frame 4, it is possible that the relationship (combination) between the gaming board 5 and the door frame units may not be compatible (aligned) due to human error.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 253, the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component, is made up of multiple upper right gaming boards 5ART and lower right gaming boards 5ARU, each of which has a different unique value. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 255 that the self-identification code, which is the unique value of at least one of the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU (ID of the upper right gaming board 5ART: 11110000B, ID of the lower right gaming board 5ARU: 11111000B), is not a predetermined value. If this is determined to be the case, the state will become State 2: ID error 1 in Figure 254 (c) and Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figure 256 or Figure 259 will occur, and the power-on operation of the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, will be different from normal operation (illumination, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.), and the various LEDs on the split game board 5AR (various LEDs on the game board) will turn off, so the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, will turn off.

In this way, the ID output circuit IDCT and ID output circuit IDCU, which are unique value transmission means provided on the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU that constitute the right gaming board 5AR, which are multiple second gaming board side components, respectively, transmit a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that identifies it as the right gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component, to the left gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board side component. If it is determined that the self-identification code (ID of the upper right game board 5ART: 11110000B, ID of the lower right game board 5ARU: 11111000B), which is a unique value of at least one of the multiple second game board side components, is not a predetermined value, the state will become state 2: ID error 1 in Figure 254 (c) or error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figure 256 or Figure 259, and the power-on operation of the right game board 5AR, which is one of the multiple second game board side components, will be in a mode (off) different from the normal operation (lighting, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.). This makes it possible to immediately determine when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which are multiple second gaming board components, become inconsistent (including when the combination of the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU becomes inconsistent), and prevents incomplete effects from being executed when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which are multiple second gaming board components, become inconsistent (including when the combination of the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU become inconsistent).This therefore prevents a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

C2:
Furthermore, if it is determined that the characteristic value of at least one second game board side component is not a predetermined one (predetermined value), the power-on operation of other second game board side components whose characteristic values are determined to be normal will also be different from normal operation. Specifically, for example, if the self-identification code (ID) of the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU does not match the value for the upper right game board 5ART (judgment value for the upper right game board), even if the self-identification code (ID) of the lower right game board 5ARU matches the value for the lower right game board 5ARU (judgment value for the lower right game board), the various LEDs of the upper right game board 5ART that differ from normal operation (lit, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.) are turned off when the upper right game board 5ART is powered on, and the various LEDs of the lower right game board 5ARU that differ from normal operation (lit, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.) are turned off when the lower right game board 5ARU is powered on. Also, for example, if the self-identification code (ID) of the lower right game board 5ARU does not match the value for the lower right game board 5ARU (judgment value for the lower right game board), even if the self-identification code (ID) of the upper right game board 5ART matches the value for the upper right game board 5ART (judgment value for the upper right game board), the various LEDs of the lower right game board 5ARU that differ from normal operation (lit, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.) are turned off when the lower right game board 5ARU is powered on, and the various LEDs of the upper right game board 5ART that differ from normal operation (lit, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.) are turned off when the upper right game board 5ART is powered on.

In other words, if the self-identification code (ID) of one of the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU does not match the predetermined value (predetermined value: upper right gaming board determination or lower right gaming board determination), this is an operator error that results in an incompatible (mismatched) combination with the left gaming board 5AL, and since it must be replaced with a compatible ID product after the power is cut off, this is a different mode from normal operation.

In addition, if it is determined that the self-identification code (ID of the upper right gaming board 5ART: 11110000B, ID of the lower right gaming board 5ARU: 11111000B), which is a unique value of at least one of the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU, is not a predetermined value, the state will become State 2: ID error 1 in Figure 254 (c) or Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figure 256 or Figure 259 will occur, and the power-on operation of the right gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, will be in a mode different from normal operation (lighting, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.), and the various LEDs of the divided gaming board 5AR (various LEDs of the gaming board) will be turned off. However, if the self-identification code (ID) of the upper right gaming board 5ART is different from the right If the value for the upper game board 5ART (judgment value for the upper right game board) does not match, the power-on operation of the upper right game board 5ART may be to turn off various LEDs on the upper right game board 5ART that are different from their normal operation (lit, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.), while the power-on operation of the lower right game board 5ART may be to set them to their normal operation (lit, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.), and if the self-identification code (ID) of the lower right game board 5ARU does not match the value for the lower right game board 5ARU (judgment value for the lower right game board), the power-on operation of the lower right game board 5ARU may be to turn off various LEDs on the lower right game board 5ARU that are different from their normal operation (lit, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.), while the power-on operation of the upper right game board 5ARU may be to set them to their normal operation (lit, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.). This way, you can communicate which parts are incompatible (inconsistent) and which parts are compatible (consistent).

The left-hand gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, is equipped with error response 7 in FIGS. 256 to 261, which is state 8 in FIG. 254(c): unconnected error 1, which is the first error that occurs when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the unique ID code (ID) from the right-hand gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, within a predetermined time (the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255), and error response 1 in FIGS. 256 to 261, which is state 2 in FIG. 254(c): ID error 1, which is the second error that occurs when the unique ID code (ID) is received from the right-hand gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, and is not a predetermined value.

The left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, i.e., the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, passes a command classified as a notification display to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, as error response 7 in Figures 256 to 261, which is the first error, State 8 in Figure 254 (c): Unconnected Error 1. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC as modes indicating unconnection, thereby setting various processing related to the presentation.

The command classified as a notification display for Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261, which is State 2: ID Error 1 in Figure 254 (c), which is the second error, is passed to the warning process in step S1024 of the peripheral control unit's regular processing during peripheral control unit power-on processing. In the warning process in step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) the screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC as incompatible (mismatched) conditions, thereby setting various processing related to the presentation.

In this way, the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, can generate error response 7 in Figures 256 to 261, which is the first error, State 8 in Figure 254(c): Unconnected error 1, if it does not receive the unique identification code (ID) within a predetermined time (the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process in Figure 255), or it can generate error response 1 in Figures 256 to 261, which is the second error, State 2 in Figure 254(c): ID error 1, if the unique identification code (ID) received within the predetermined time is not the predetermined value.

Furthermore, the various ID errors that are second-type errors (ID errors) (including individual ID errors such as ID Error 1, ID Error 2, and ID Error 3 shown in Figure 254(c) as well as combinations of these ID errors) hinder gameplay to a greater extent than the various unconnection errors that are first-type errors (unconnection error 1, unconnection error 2, and unconnection error 3 shown in Figure 254(c)).

Furthermore, the third error (magnetic detection) is resolved after a certain period of time, but the first error (disconnection error) and the second error (ID error) are not resolved even after a certain period of time has passed. Among these various error notifications, the third error (magnetic detection) detects and reports the so-called magnetic interference behavior, and therefore is resolved after a certain period of time has passed. In contrast, the first error (disconnection error) and the second error (ID error) are caused by operator errors. For the first error (disconnection error), the fit of structural components and the connection of the drawer connector must be carefully checked after a power outage, and the second error (ID error) must be replaced with a compatible ID product after a power outage, so they are not resolved even after a certain period of time has passed.

Furthermore, when a second error (ID error) occurs, the decorative effect on the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, is not performed. This is because the second error (ID error) is a work error made by an operator, resulting in an incompatibility (mismatch) between the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component. If the decorative effect on the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, were performed in this state, there is a risk of electrical failure of the right-side gaming board 5AR.

Furthermore, even if a third error (magnetic detection) occurs when a second error (ID error) occurs, the second error (ID error) warning sound will remain. In other words, even if a third error (magnetic detection) occurs when a second error (ID error) occurs, as shown in Figures 258 and 261, the audio for Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) is to repeatedly play the error notification sound and announcement sound. This is because the third error (magnetic detection) detects and notifies the user of the so-called magnetic tampering and is resolved after a certain period of time has passed since the detection of the error, whereas the second error (ID error) is an operator error and requires replacement with a compatible ID product after the power is cut off, so the second error (ID error) warning sound will remain even after a certain period of time has passed.

C3:
Furthermore, if a RAM error and an ID error occur simultaneously, only the RAM error is reported, and no ID error is reported. Also, no LED error is reported in the decorative unit. Specifically, if a RAM error in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and Status 2: ID Error 1 in Figure 254(c) (Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261) occur simultaneously, only a report is made to inform the user that a RAM error has occurred, but no report is made to inform the user that Status 2: ID Error 1 in Figure 254(c) (Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261) has occurred. This is because if a RAM error occurs in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the progress of the game by the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly stopped, so in order to notify this, even if state 2: ID error 1 in Figure 254 (c) (error response 1 (corresponding to ID error 1) in Figures 256 to 261) occurs, the RAM error in the main control built-in RAM, which is the most important error, is notified as the highest priority regardless of the occurrence of other errors.

If the ID is determined to be normal within a specified period of time after power-on, no notification is issued. However, if the ID is determined to be abnormal within a specified period of time after power-on, the notification mode may change if the state changes. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode changes when the state returns to normal. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not issue a notification (target method in the same figure: none) if it determines that the ID is normal, i.e., State 1 in FIG. 254(c): ID error 1 (Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response) in FIGS. 256 to 261), i.e., an abnormal ID, but maintains the notification of Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response). If the ID is determined to be normal, i.e., a normal ID, after the countermeasure in FIG. 254(c): replacement with a compatible ID after power-off, the notification is no longer issued. In other words, if the combination of the left and right gaming boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right gaming boards will not be determined at all thereafter, and even if the combination of the left and right gaming boards becomes incompatible (inconsistent), no notification will be issued to convey that the ID is abnormal due to the incompatibility (inconsistency). In this way, by limiting the determination of the combination of the left and right gaming boards to within a specified period of time after power-on, this can contribute to reducing the processing load on the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 for the progression of the presentation.

All but a few notifications are terminated. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIGS. 256 to 261), in other words, an abnormal ID, it saves this as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) implemented on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved linked to the date and time. Then, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and the correct combination of left and right game boards is attached to the main frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on again, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 1: Normal (FIG. 254(c)), i.e., a normal ID, it may display a history of "ID abnormality" on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, and this history may be displayed for a predetermined period of time or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

Once a normal state has been restored, the notification mode will not change even if an abnormality occurs again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected, at which point the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (turned off), cutting off the power supply to the peripheral control board, and the game board must be reinserted and the pachinko machine must be powered on again. When the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID etc. of the performance operation unit can be confirmed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255. Therefore, when the pachinko machine is powered on, if the ID is confirmed by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255 and notification processing is performed, which continues until the power to the pachinko machine is turned off, then there is no need to control the ID confirmation or notification processing thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when the pachinko machine 1 system has completed startup and is ready to proceed with game play and presentation), the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Figure 255 is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 222, and when the presentation operation unit is attached or detached to or from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 4, if a presentation operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID even once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is replaced with another presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID (or if a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with a presentation operation unit with a normal ID, and then once determined to have a normal ID in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is returned to a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID), as a result, even if the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent), the presentation will continue to proceed and no notification will be made that the presentation operation unit has an abnormal ID. Therefore, once the system has returned to normal, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again.

[Summary D]
D0:
The gaming machine includes a game frame-side component having an outer frame, a main frame mounted on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame mounted on the main frame so as to be openable and closable, and a game board-side component detachably mounted on the game frame-side component, wherein the game board-side component is composed of a first game board-side component and a second game board-side component. The first game board-side component is equipped with a presentation control board capable of executing serial communication for executing game presentations and transmitting and receiving signals with the outside. The second game board-side component has light emitters, decoration drive means capable of driving the light emitters and receiving decoration data via serial communication, a second ID code uniquely assigned to the decoration drive means, and a first ID code uniquely assigned to the decoration drive means. At least one of the serial communication lines connected to the presentation control board is configured so that the first ID code and the second ID code are included in the serial communication data.

Specifically, for example, the device comprises a main frame 4 as a gaming frame-side component and a gaming board 5 as a gaming board-side component. Door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as a left-side door frame unit 420, a right-side door frame unit 430, a tray unit 200, and a door frame top unit 450 are attached to a door frame 3 supported by the main frame 4 so as to be able to open and close. Because the combination of the gaming board 5 and the door frame units can be compatible (matched) or incompatible (mismatched), the door frame units may be treated as components of the gaming board 5. In other words, the gaming board-side components provided on the main frame 4 are composed of the gaming board 5, which is a first gaming board-side component equipped with a microprocessor, and specific door frame units (a combination of one or more (or all) of the door frame units) which are second gaming board-side components not equipped with a microprocessor. The gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and the door frame units are attached to the door frame 3 supported by the main frame 4 so as to be able to open and close. In this case, assuming that the door frame unit is treated as a component of the gaming board 5, the gaming board 5 is composed of the gaming board 5, which is the first gaming board component, and a specific door unit, which is the second gaming board component. The gaming board 5, which is the first gaming board component, is equipped with a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board that executes game performances and is capable of serial communication for sending and receiving signals with the outside. The specific door unit, which is the second gaming board component, has various LEDs, which are light emitters, an LED driver WIDCa mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB of Figure 262, which is a decoration drive means that drives the various LEDs, which are light emitters, and is capable of receiving decoration data via serial communication, a uniquely assigned first ID code, and a uniquely assigned second ID code for the LED driver WIDCa mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB of Figure 262, which is a decoration drive means.

The LED driver WIDCa mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB, which serves as the decorative drive means, has a setting value of 64 set by the address setting circuit WIDCd mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB of Figure 262, which is a uniquely assigned first ID code. A specific door unit, which is the second game board component, has 8-bit information: 11110000B, with the eight setting terminals Q0 to Q7 of the comparator circuit WIDCb mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB of Figure 262, which is a uniquely assigned second ID code, electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground). There are multiple serial communication lines connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board (for example, between the peripheral control board 1510 and various boards within the game board 5, or between the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame unit, etc.). At least one of the serial communication lines connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board, contains in its serial communication data a setting value 64 (an ID code indicating the LED driver WIDCa contained in the light emission information signal for the LED driver WIDCa) set by the address setting circuit WIDCd implemented on the frame side decorative board WKB, which is the first ID code, and 8-bit information (information compared in the comparator circuit WIDCb with signals output from the OUT0 terminal to OUT7 terminal, which are the eight output terminals of the LED driver WIDCa contained in the light emission information signal for the LED driver WIDCa), which is the second ID code, that is, 8-bit information indicating that the Q0 terminal to Q7 terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb implemented on the frame side decorative board WKB are each electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground). In other words, the serial communication line (i.e., the serial communication data) that transmits the illumination data that indicates the LED illumination mode, which is decorative data for a specific door frame unit that is the second game board component, contains the ID of the LED driver WIDCa as the first ID code (ID code that indicates the LED driver WIDCa: set value 64), and the ID of the frame side decorative board WKB as the second ID code (8-bit information: 11110000B indicating that the eight setting terminals Q0 to Q7 of the comparator circuit WIDCb are each electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground)).

In this way, the serial communication data in at least one of the serial communication lines connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board, contains the setting value 64, which is the first ID code uniquely assigned to the LED driver WIDCa, and the second ID code 11110000B, which is uniquely assigned to the door unit, which is the second game board component. Therefore, in addition to the serial communication line that transmits the light emission data that instructs the light emission modes of various LEDs, which is decorative data, the LED driver WIDCa This eliminates the need to provide separate serial communication lines connecting the peripheral control board 1510, which is the effect control board, for transmitting the setting value 64, which is the first ID code uniquely assigned to the first game board component, and the second ID code 11110000B, which is the second ID code uniquely assigned to the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board component. This allows the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5, which is the first game board component, and the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board component, to be determined by the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board component. This makes it possible to immediately determine if the game board 5, which is the first game board component, and the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board component, are incompatible, preventing incomplete effects from being executed when the game board 5, which is the first game board component, and the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board component, are incompatible. This prevents a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

D1:
The game machine comprises a game frame-side component having an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame attached to the main frame so as to be openable and closable, and a game board-side component detachably attached to the game frame-side component. The game board-side component comprises a light emitter and a decoration driver that drives the light emitter. The game board-side component is composed of a first game board-side component and a second game board-side component. The first game board-side component comprises a sub-control board capable of executing serial communication for executing game presentations and sending and receiving signals with the outside. The second game board-side component comprises a decoration driver that receives decoration data via serial communication. The decoration driver has a uniquely assigned first ID code. The second game board-side component has a uniquely assigned second ID code. There are multiple serial communication lines connected to the sub-control board. The serial communication line that transmits the decoration data to the second game board side component contains the first ID code and the second ID code.

Specifically, for example, the device comprises a main frame 4, which is a component on the game frame side, and a game board 5, which is a component on the game board side. Door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as a left-side door frame unit 420, a right-side door frame unit 430, a tray unit 200, and a top door frame unit 450 are attached to a door frame 3 supported on the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. Since combinations of the game board 5 with specific door frame units (combinations of one or more (or all) of the door frame units) are compatible (matched)/incompatible (mismatched), specific door frame units may be treated as components of the game board 5. In other words, the game board components provided on the main frame 4 are comprised of a game board 5, which is a first game board component equipped with a microprocessor, and a specific door frame unit, which is a second game board component not equipped with a microprocessor. The game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and the specific door frame unit is attached to a door frame 3 that is supported on the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. In this case, assuming that the specific door frame unit is treated as a component of the game board 5, the game board 5 is comprised of the game board 5, which is a first game board component, and a door unit, which is a second game board component. The game board 5 and the specific door frame unit are equipped with various LEDs that are light-emitting elements and an LED driver, which is a decorative driver that drives the various LEDs that are light-emitting elements. The game board 5, which is the first game board component, is equipped with a peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board that executes game effects and is capable of serial communication for sending and receiving signals to and from the outside. The door unit, which is a component of the second game board, includes an LED driver WIDCa mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB (Fig. 262), which is a decorative driver that receives illumination data (decorative data indicating the LED illumination mode) via serial communication. The LED driver WIDCa mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB (Fig. 262) has a setting value of 64 set by an address setting circuit WIDCd mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB (Fig. 262), which is a uniquely assigned first ID code. The door unit, which is a component of the second game board, has eight setting terminals, Q0 to Q7, of a comparator circuit WIDCb mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB (Fig. 262), which is a uniquely assigned second ID code, each electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground), and contains 8-bit information: 11110000B. There are multiple serial communication lines connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board (for example, between the peripheral control board 1510 and various boards within the game board 5, or between the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame unit, etc.). The serial communication line that transmits the light emission data that indicates the LED light emission mode, which is decorative data for a specific door frame unit that is the second game board side component, contains a setting value 64 (an ID code that indicates the LED driver WIDCa included in the light emission information signal for the LED driver WIDCa) that is set by the address setting circuit WIDCd implemented on the frame side decorative board WKB, which is the first ID code, and 8-bit information in which the eight setting terminals Q0 terminal to Q7 terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb implemented on the frame side decorative board WKB are each electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground) (information that is compared in the comparator circuit WIDCb with signals output from the eight output terminals OUT0 terminal to OUT7 terminal of the LED driver WIDCa included in the light emission information signal for the LED driver WIDCa). In other words, the serial communication line that transmits the illumination data that indicates the LED illumination mode, which is decorative data for a specific door frame unit that is the second game board component, contains the ID of the LED driver WIDCa as the first ID code (ID code that indicates the LED driver WIDCa: set value 64), and the ID of the frame side decorative board WKB as the second ID code (8-bit information: 11110000B indicating that the eight setting terminals Q0 to Q7 of the comparator circuit WIDCb are each electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground)).

In this way, for the LED driver WIDCa, which is a decorative driver that drives the various LEDs that are light emitters in the door unit, which is the second game board component, the setting value 64, which is the first ID code uniquely assigned to the LED driver WIDCa, which is a decorative driver, and the second ID code 11110000B, which is the second ID code uniquely assigned to the door unit, which is the second game board component, are included in the serial communication line that transmits the light emission data that instructs the light emission modes of the various LEDs, which is the decorative data for the door unit, which is the second game board component. In addition to the serial communication line for transmitting the setting value 64, which is the first ID code uniquely assigned to the LED driver WIDCa, which is the decorative driver, and the second ID code 11110000B, which is the second ID code uniquely assigned to the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board component, there is no need to provide a serial communication line connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the sub-control board, and the compatibility (integrity) of the combination of the game board 5, which is the first game board component, and the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board component, can be determined in the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board component. This makes it possible to immediately determine if the game board 5, which is the first game board component, and the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board component, have become incompatible, preventing incomplete effects from being executed when the game board 5, which is the first game board component, and the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board component, are incompatible. This helps prevent players from losing interest in the game.

D2:
Furthermore, in the serial communication between the first game board side component and the second game board side component, a second ID code is provided (included) in the data area that decorates the light-emitting body, and a decoration driver is used as a second ID code expansion means that expands (restores) the second ID code from the serial signal into a parallel signal. Specifically, in serial communication between the game board 5, which is the first game board side component, and a specific door frame unit, which is the second game board side component, the light emission data, which is a data area that decorates various LEDs, which are light emitters, and which indicates the light emission mode of the LEDs, contains (includes) the ID of the frame side decorative board WKB as a second ID code (8-bit information: 11110000B, with the eight setting terminals Q0 to Q7 of the comparator circuit WIDCb electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground) respectively), and an LED driver WIDCa implemented on the frame side decorative board WKB, which is a decorative driver, is used as second ID code expansion means for expanding (restoring) the second ID code 11110000B from the serial signal to a parallel signal. This means that there is no need to provide a dedicated second ID code expansion means on the frame side decorative board WKB to expand (restore) the second ID code 11110000B into a parallel signal, and the LED driver WIDCa that drives various LEDs can be used directly as the second ID code expansion means and output to the comparator circuit WIDCb.

Furthermore, although the first game board component and the second game board component are electrically connected, they are each independently fixed to the game frame component. Specifically, although the game board 5, which is the first game board component, and the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board component, are electrically connected, they are each independently fixed to the main frame 4, which is the game frame component. In other words, the task of attaching the game board 5 to the main frame 4 and the task of attaching the specific door frame unit to the door frame 3, which is supported on the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, are separate tasks. For this reason, when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, it is possible that the relationship (combination) between the game board 5 and the specific door frame unit will not match (align) due to human error.

D3:
Furthermore, the serial signals from the sub-control board and the serial signals to the sub-control board are communicated using the same area as various data related to game presentation. Specifically, the light-emitting information signal, which is a serial signal from the peripheral control board 1510, which is the sub-control board, to the frame-side decorative board WKB in the specific door frame unit of Fig. 262, and the door-frame-side information signal, which is a serial signal from the relay board TKB provided in the tray unit 200 in the specific door frame unit of Fig. 263, to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the sub-control board, are communicated using the same area as various data related to game presentation, and the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4 are electrically connected to the terminals of the two main frame-side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame-side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, so that they are exchanged (communicated) via this drawer connector. This allows the existing serial line to be used as is for the drawer connector, so that an ID for determining whether the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit is authentic can be sent from the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board, without increasing the number of drawer connectors, and the determination result for the specific door frame unit can be received.

In a system capable of determining the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit shown in Figures 262 and 263, if a normal ID is determined within a predetermined period of time after power is turned on, no notification is issued, but if an abnormal ID is determined within a predetermined period of time after power is turned on, the notification mode can be changed if the status changes. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode is changed when the status returns to normal. Specifically, in the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the performance operation unit information acquisition process (only the first time after power-on) of step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in Figure 222, or the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 255, if it determines that the ID is normal, i.e., state 1 of Figure 254(c): normal, no alert is issued (target method in the same figure: none), whereas if it determines that the ID is abnormal, i.e., state 2 of Figure 254(c): ID error 1 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261), the alert for this error response 1 (ID error 1 response) is maintained, and if it determines that the ID is normal, i.e., normal, after the replacement with a compatible ID product after power-off, as in the countermeasure in the same figure (c), no alert is issued. In other words, if the combination of the gaming board 5 and a specific door frame unit is determined to be normal and a normal ID is given within a specified period after power-on, the state of the combination of the gaming board 5 and the specific door frame unit will not be determined at all thereafter, and even if the combination of the gaming board 5 and the specific door frame unit becomes incompatible (inconsistent), no notification will be issued to convey that the combination is incompatible (inconsistent) and an abnormal ID. In this way, by limiting the determination of the combination of the gaming board 5 and a specific door frame unit to within a specified period after power-on, this can contribute to reducing the processing load on the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 for the progression of the presentation.

All but a few notifications are terminated. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIGS. 256 to 261), in other words, an abnormal ID, it saves this as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) implemented on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved linked to the date and time. Then, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and the correct combination of left and right game boards is attached to the main frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on again, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 1: Normal (FIG. 254(c)), i.e., a normal ID, it may display a history of "ID abnormality" on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, and this history may be displayed for a predetermined period of time or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

Once a normal state has been restored, the notification mode will not change even if an abnormality occurs again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected, at which point the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (turned off), cutting off the power supply to the peripheral control board, and the game board must be reinserted and the pachinko machine must be powered on again. When the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID etc. of the performance operation unit can be confirmed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255. Therefore, when the pachinko machine is powered on, if the ID is confirmed by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255 and notification processing is performed, which continues until the power to the pachinko machine is turned off, then there is no need to control the ID confirmation or notification processing thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when the pachinko machine 1 system has completed startup and is ready to proceed with game play and presentation), the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Figure 255 is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 222, and when the presentation operation unit is attached or detached to or from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 4, if a presentation operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID even once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is replaced with another presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID (or if a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with a presentation operation unit with a normal ID, and then once determined to have a normal ID in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is returned to a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID), as a result, even if the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent), the presentation will continue to proceed and no notification will be made that the presentation operation unit has an abnormal ID. Therefore, once the system has returned to normal, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again.

D4:
The result of the true/false determination is transmitted by another serial communication means. Specifically, the LED driver WIDCa of the frame-side decorative board WKB in the door unit transmits light emission data instructing the light emission mode of the LED as a light emission information signal through a serial communication line (light emission information signal serial communication line) output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame-side decorative board WKB, while the ID valid signal from the comparator circuit WIDCb of the frame-side decorative board WKB is input to the door frame side information output circuit TOC of the relay board TKB provided in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 4, and is output from the door frame side information output circuit TOC to the peripheral control board 1510 through a serial communication line (a door frame side information signal serial communication line that is a different system from the light emission information signal serial communication line)) that transmits the serialized door frame side information signal together with detection signals from various sensors such as the performance operation unit 300. In other words, the ID valid signal from the comparator circuit WIDCb of the frame side decorative board WKB, which is the result of the authenticity determination, is transmitted via the serial communication line for the door frame side information signal, which is a separate serial communication means different from the serial communication line for the light emission information signal.

The first ID code uses the last number that can be set. Specifically, a set value of 64 is set as the ID of the LED driver WIDCa of the frame-side decorative board WKB in the door unit. This is because LED drivers are implemented not only in specific door frame units, but also on various decorative boards and boards provided on the game board 5, and the number of LED drivers changes depending on the model. Therefore, when developing a program, it is necessary to prevent confusion between the LED driver WIDCa of the ID comparison circuit WIDC and other LED drivers. Therefore, for frame-side decorative boards WKBs on which the ID comparison circuit WIDC is installed, the ID of the LED driver WIDCa is always fixed to a set value of 64.

The LED is driven by a decorative driver used for the second ID code expansion means. Specifically, in serial communication between the game board 5, which is the first game board component, and a specific door frame unit, which is the second game board component, the light emission data, which is the data area that decorates the various LEDs that are light emitters and indicates the light emission mode of the LEDs, contains (contains) the ID of the frame side decorative board WKB as the second ID code (8-bit information: 11110000B, indicating that the eight setting terminals Q0 to Q7 of the comparator circuit WIDCb are each electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground)), and an LED driver WIDCa implemented on the frame side decorative board WKB, which is the decorative driver, is used as the second ID code expansion means that expands (restores) the second ID code 11110000B from the serial signal to a parallel signal. This eliminates the need to provide the frame-side decorative board WKB with a dedicated second ID code expansion means for expanding (restoring) the second ID code 11110000B into a parallel signal; the LED driver WIDCa that drives the various LEDs can be used directly as the second ID code expansion means and output to the comparator circuit WIDCb. Furthermore, the LED driver WIDCa can control the emission of various LEDs electrically connected to the other output terminals (16 output terminals) that are not electrically connected to the eight input terminals of the comparator circuit WIDCb based on the emission data.

The drawer connector is divided into a main connector and a sub-connector. Specifically, the information acquisition clock signal and information acquisition switch signal from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the gaming board 5 are transmitted via this drawer connector to the relay board TKB provided on the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 by electrically connecting the terminals (main connectors or sub-connectors) of the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the gaming board 5 when the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame 4 with the terminals (sub-connectors or main connectors) of the two main frame drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. In addition, the door frame side information signal from the door frame side information output circuit TOC of the relay board TKB provided on the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 is transmitted to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 via this drawer connector, by electrically connecting the terminals (main side connectors or sub-side connectors) of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4 and the terminals (sub-side connectors or main side connectors) of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

When the false (incompatible) state changes to true (compatible), the game becomes playable (noise prevention). Specifically, for example, in the performance operation unit information acquisition process of step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 222, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 sets and outputs the logic of the information acquisition switch signal input to the S/inverted L terminal to operate in parallel and then serial mode, and then outputs an information acquisition clock signal to acquire the door frame side information signal, and can grasp the player's operations and the operation of the movable body (performance body) on the performance operation unit 300 attached to the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, grasp the movement of the movable body (performance body) and the player's actions on other units of the door frame 3, and obtain a judgment result regarding the compatibility (integrity) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit. In this way, if the judgment result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the gaming board 5 and a specific door frame unit changes from false (incompatible) to true (compatible), that is, if the result of the change is reversed, it is assumed that although the combination of the gaming board 5 and the specific door frame unit is compatible (compatible), part of the door frame side information signal (the part indicating the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the gaming board 5 and the specific door frame unit) has been corrupted due to the influence of noise, and the performance proceeds as if the combination of the gaming board 5 and the specific door frame unit is compatible (consistent).

While the false mismatch (inconsistency) is present, data to turn off the LEDs is sent to the decorative unit. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 sends light emission data to the various LED drivers to turn off (all off) the various LEDs (various LEDs related to the effects (various decorative LEDs)) on the game board (divided game board) and/or the various LEDs (various LEDs related to the effects (various decorative LEDs)) on a specific door frame unit.

If the false incompatibility (mismatch) is resolved, data for lighting the LEDs is sent to the decorative unit. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 sends light emission data to the various LED drivers so that the various LEDs (various LEDs related to the performance (various decorative LEDs)) on the game board (divided game board) and/or the various LEDs (various LEDs related to the performance (various decorative LEDs)) on a specific door frame unit will emit light in accordance with the progress of the performance.

[Summary E]
E1:
The game device comprises a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be able to open and close, and a door frame attached to the main frame so as to be able to open and close, and a game board side component attached to the game frame side component, wherein the game board side component is made up of a first game board side component and a second game board side component, and further comprises an alignment determination means for determining alignment between the first game board side component and the second game board side component, and an operation unit attached to the first game board side component, and when the operation unit is operated, an alert can be issued according to the determination result of the alignment determination means.

Specifically, for example, it comprises a main frame 4, which is a gaming frame-side component, and a divided gaming board 5A (Fig. 248), which is a gaming board-side component provided on the main frame 4, which is a gaming frame-side component. The divided gaming board 5A, which is a gaming board-side component, is composed of a left-side gaming board 5AL (Fig. 248), which is a first gaming board-side component, and a right-side gaming board 5AR (Fig. 248), which is a second gaming board-side component. It also comprises an ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Fig. 255), which is a consistency determination means for determining consistency between the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board-side component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board-side component, and an ID error determination switch 1310v on the main control board 1310, which is an operation unit provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board-side component (Fig. 269). When the ID error determination switch 1310v on the main control board 1310, which is the operation unit, is operated, a notification can be issued according to the determination result of the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 255, which is the consistency determination means.

After the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, when a staff member or other attendant at the gaming hall presses the pressing operation part of the ID error judgment switch 1310v provided on the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects a detection signal from the ID error judgment switch 1310v in the switch input process of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in Figure 212 (specifically, the logic of the detection signal from the ID error judgment switch 1310v has an operation logic and a non-operation logic, and when the operation logic is input, the main control MPU 1310a detects an ID error). When it is determined that the pressing operation section of the ID error determination switch 1310v has been pressed based on this, and when non-operation logic with the operation logic inverted is input, it is determined that the pressing operation section of the ID error determination switch 1310v has not been pressed. Based on this, when it is determined that the pressing operation section of the ID error determination switch 1310v has been pressed, an ID error determination result notification start command that starts notification of the ID error determination result is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 212.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255. In this ID determination process, in order to obtain the ID of the right-side game board and the ID of the presentation operation unit, an ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the right-side game board) is output to the right-side game board, and an ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the presentation operation unit) is output to the presentation operation unit. The peripheral control IC 1510a acquires the ID code signal from the right-hand gaming board (ID code signal dedicated to the right-hand gaming board) and the ID code signal from the presentation operation unit (ID code signal dedicated to the presentation operation unit) via separate serial systems, and determines (compares) the combination of the split gaming boards (that is, the combination of the right-hand gaming board (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left-hand gaming board (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) by referring to a combination table (Fig. 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, and determines (compares) the combination of the presentation operation unit and the split gaming board by referring to a combination table (Fig. 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM.

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing shown in Figure 223, and analyzes it in the received command analysis processing of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255.This triggers the start of notification of the ID error determination result, and when the determination result determined in the ID determination processing of step S1003 is incompatible (inconsistent), the command classified as notification display is passed to the warning processing of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing. As a result, in the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) from the peripheral control ROM the schedule data for generating the screen, the schedule data for generating the light emission mode, the schedule data for generating the sound, and the electrical drive source schedule data, etc., as indications of incompatibility (mismatch) and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, thereby setting various processes related to the presentation, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will notify that a corresponding error has occurred, from Error Response 1 to Error Response 9, as the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 254 (c).

In this way, when the push operation portion of the ID error determination switch 1310v provided on the main control board 1310, which is the operation portion, is pressed, a notification can be issued in response to the determination result of the alignment between the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component. This makes it possible to immediately determine if the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are misaligned, preventing incomplete effects from being executed when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are misaligned. This can therefore prevent a decline in interest in the game.

E2:
In the case of an ID error or a non-connection error, the error notification start time can be changed by pressing the pressing operation portion of the ID error determination switch 1310v. Specifically, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the determination result made on the combination of divided game boards in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in Fig. 255, unless it receives the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process shown in Fig. 223 and analyzes it in the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in Fig. 255, it cannot use this as an opportunity to pass the command classified as notification display to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit normal process of the peripheral control unit power-on process, and cannot start notifying the ID error determination result. In other words, even if error response 1 to error response 9 occurs, the time when the error notification start time for notifying the user of the occurrence of the error can be changed by a staff member such as an amusement hall employee pressing the pressing operation part of the ID error determination switch 1310v until the ID error determination result notification start command is received (analyzed) from the main control board 1310.

ID errors and unconnected errors can be detected at any time after power-on. Specifically, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the determination result on the combination of divided game boards, etc., in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 255, if an attendant such as a game clerk presses the pressing operation portion of the ID error determination switch 1310v, the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 is received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process shown in FIG. 223 and analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 255, the command classified as a notification display cannot be passed on to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit normal processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, and notification of the ID error determination result cannot be initiated. In other words, a staff member at the gaming hall or other attendant can be notified of an ID error or unconnected error at any time after powering on the pachinko machine 1 (any time after the pachinko machine 1 system has finished starting up).

When Error Response 1 to Error Response 9 do not occur as part of the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error shown in Figure 254(c), that is, when the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error shown in Figure 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 sets the response method to "none," so there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, when the pachinko machine is operating normally (no error response), no notification is given and no special notification sound is played from the speaker.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the pressing operation portion of the ID error determination switch 1310v on the main control board 1310 is pressed, this may trigger an alarm sound (e.g., a beep) to be emitted from the speaker under control of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and a setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turned ON, this may trigger an alert sound (e.g., a "beep") to be played from the speaker under control of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510. Note that if settings are changed by pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d on the payout control board 633, an alert sound (e.g., a "beep") may be played from the speaker under control of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 each time the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d is pressed.

E3:
A predetermined self-identification code (ID) is assigned to the right-side game board 5AR by hardware (a hardware circuit). Specifically, the eight ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of Fig. 251 provided on the right-side game board 5AR are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground) to assign an ID setting value (11110000B).

The ID assigned to the right-side gaming board 5AR by hardware (using a hardware circuit) is compared with the determination ID code, and if they are identical, a valid signal is output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC (Fig. 251) provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR is input to the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL (Fig. 249). The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right-side gaming board 5AR from this input ID code signal and determines (compares) it by referring to a combination table (Fig. 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, which is the determination ID code. The combination of the split gaming boards is performed in the ID determination process of step S1003 during the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Fig. 255). If the combination of the split game boards is compatible (aligned), and the other IDs shown in Figure 254 (c) are also compatible, the state changes to State 1: Normal, and the effects are played by the door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3, and the split game board 5A. The peripheral control board 1510 outputs, for example, a control signal that lights up a specific LED in the sub-function display unit 2250 of the split game board 5A as an enable signal to play the effects.

The ID assigned to the right-side gaming board 5AR by hardware (using a hardware circuit) is compared with the determination ID code, and if they are not identical, a valid signal is not output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC (Fig. 251) provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR is input to the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL (Fig. 249). The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right-side gaming board 5AR from this input ID code signal and determines (compares) it by referring to a combination table (Fig. 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, which is the determination ID code. The combination of the split gaming boards is performed in the ID determination process of step S1003 during the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Fig. 255). If the combination of divided game boards is not compatible (matched), for example, when the peripheral control board 1510 reaches State 2: ID error 1 shown in Figure 254 (c), in Error Response 1 after power-on (ID error 1 response) in Figure 257, it does not output a control signal to light up a specified LED in the sub-function display unit 2250 of the divided game board 5A as an enable signal to proceed with the presentation, and turns off the sub-function display unit 2250 (all lights off).

In some cases, no notification will be issued even if the control unit is operated at any time after power-on (if the ID is valid). Specifically, if Error Responses 1 through 9 are not occurring as shown in FIG. 254(c) when the pachinko machine is operating normally (no error response) during an error, as shown in FIG. 254(c), and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the setting change process of step S37 in the main control power-on process due to the setting key being inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turned ON (until the specified period of time until this setting change process is completed) the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is unable to notify the user of normal operation (no error response). Furthermore, if the pachinko machine is operating normally (no error response) during an error as shown in FIG. 254(c), the countermeasure is "none," so there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, if the operation is normal (no error handling occurs), no notification will be given.

Note that, if the valid ID, ID error, or unconnection error is to be detected at any time after power-on, that is, as shown in FIG. 254(c), the pachinko machine's behavior during an error is normal operation (no error response), and ID errors and unconnection errors such as Error Responses 1 to 9 are determined during a predetermined period after power-on, as determined by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 255. However, the valid ID, ID error, or unconnection error may be detected at any time after power-on. Specifically, the valid ID, ID error, or unconnection error may be determined by performing the ID determination process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing in FIG. 222. The valid ID, ID error, or unconnection error related to the presentation operation unit may be determined in step S presentation operation unit information acquisition processing in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing in FIG. 222. In either case, if the pachinko machine's behavior during an error as shown in FIG. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), the corrective action is "none," so there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, if the device is operating normally (no error handling is performed), no notification will be given.

If the ID is determined to be genuine, no notification will be issued even if the operating unit is operated thereafter. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 255 that the ID is in State 1: Normal in Figure 254 (c), i.e., a genuine ID, no notification will be issued (target method in the same figure: None). In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right game boards will not be determined at all thereafter. Even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 at this time and turned on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 211 and the main control side timer interrupt processing of FIG. 212, and is therefore unable to perform the setting change processing of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing, so the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will not be able to notify that it is operating normally (no error handling).

If it is determined that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), the notification will continue at least until it becomes normal. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 of FIG. 254(c) (Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) of FIG. 256 to FIG. 261), that is, that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), the notification of Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) will be maintained until the corrective action of FIG. 254(c): power is turned off and the ID is replaced with a compatible ID. This notification makes it difficult to play while the left-side gaming board and right-side gaming board are incompatible (inconsistent) in combination.

If the ID is determined to be normal within a specified period of time after power-on, no notification is issued. However, if the ID is determined to be abnormal within a specified period of time after power-on, the notification mode may change if the state changes. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode changes when the state returns to normal. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not issue a notification (target method in the same figure: none) if it determines that the ID is normal, i.e., State 1 in FIG. 254(c): ID error 1 (Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response) in FIGS. 256 to 261), i.e., an abnormal ID, but maintains the notification of Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response). If the ID is determined to be normal, i.e., a normal ID, after the countermeasure in FIG. 254(c): replacement with a compatible ID after power-off, the notification is no longer issued. In other words, if the combination of the left and right gaming boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right gaming boards will not be determined at all thereafter, and even if the combination of the left and right gaming boards becomes incompatible (inconsistent), no notification will be issued to convey that the ID is abnormal due to the incompatibility (inconsistency). In this way, by limiting the determination of the combination of the left and right gaming boards to within a specified period of time after power-on, this can contribute to reducing the processing load on the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 for the progression of the presentation.

All but a few notifications are terminated. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIGS. 256 to 261), in other words, an abnormal ID, it saves this as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) implemented on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved linked to the date and time. Then, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and the correct combination of left and right game boards is attached to the main frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on again, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 1: Normal (FIG. 254(c)), i.e., a normal ID, it may display a history of "ID abnormality" on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, and this history may be displayed for a predetermined period of time or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

Once a normal state has been restored, the notification mode will not change even if an abnormality occurs again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected, at which point the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (turned off), cutting off the power supply to the peripheral control board, and the game board must be reinserted and the pachinko machine must be powered on again. When the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID etc. of the performance operation unit can be confirmed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255. Therefore, when the pachinko machine is powered on, if the ID is confirmed by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255 and notification processing is performed, which continues until the power to the pachinko machine is turned off, then there is no need to control the ID confirmation or notification processing thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when the pachinko machine 1 system has completed startup and is ready to proceed with game play and presentation), the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Figure 255 is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 222, and when the presentation operation unit is attached or detached to or from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 4, if a presentation operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID even once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is replaced with another presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID (or if a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with a presentation operation unit with a normal ID, and then once determined to have a normal ID in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is returned to a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID), as a result, even if the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent), the presentation will continue to proceed and no notification will be made that the presentation operation unit has an abnormal ID. Therefore, once the system has returned to normal, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again.

E4:
In the event of a mismatch, an abnormality is displayed on the LCD. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left-side game board and the right-side game board is incompatible (mismatched) during the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255, for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on in FIG. 256, the performance display device 1600 displays notification text such as "Power is being restored" and "Please wait a moment" on a black background, and when the startup music ends, an image during the performance (for example, when a performance progresses based on the entry of game balls into various winning slots) is displayed. Then, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in FIG. 257, the performance display device 1600 displays notification text such as "Please wait a moment" on an image during the performance (for example, when a performance progresses based on the entry of game balls into various winning slots) or an image while waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or when a still image is displayed).

In the event of a mismatch, no control is performed by the presentation control means. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which is the presentation control means, determines that the combination of the left-side game board and the right-side game board is incompatible (mismatched) during the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 255, then, for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in FIG. 257, the various LEDs of the specific door frame unit controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 and the various LEDs of the game board are turned off (all turned off), and the game board-side movable body and game frame-side movable body controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are not returned to their original positions or otherwise operated (are not operated).

In the event of a mismatch, an audio error is issued. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left-side game board and the right-side game board is incompatible (mismatched) during the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process in Figure 255, for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on in Figure 256, after the start-up music has finished, an announcement sound saying "Please call an attendant" is played and a specified error notification sound is played seven times. This type of audio is played repeatedly. Then, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in Figure 257, an announcement sound saying "Please call an attendant" is played and a specified error notification sound is played seven times. This type of audio is played repeatedly.

In the event of a mismatch, the door frame lamp (which may be a lamp attached to a removable decorative member or a lamp attached to a non-removable decorative member) is illuminated in an abnormal state. Specifically, first, the door frame 3, which is supported on the main frame 4 so as to be able to open and close, is equipped with door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450. If the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 255 that the combination of the left-side game board and the right-side game board is incompatible (mismatched), for example, in error response 1 after power-on (ID error 1 response) of Figure 259, the various LEDs of the door frame unit flash red in an abnormal state. The various LEDs in the door frame unit may be provided on various units (various decorative members) that are detachable from the door frame 3, or on various decorative members that are attached and fixed to the door frame 3.

If there are multiple second game board side components, if even one of them does not have a valid ID, all of the multiple second game board side components will not be driven. Specifically, if the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, is further divided into an upper and lower part, as shown in Figure 253, and is composed of an upper right game board 5ART and a lower right game board 5ARU, the upper right game board 5ART is provided with an ID output circuit IDCT that can identify itself, and the lower right game board 5ARU is provided with an ID output circuit IDCU that can identify itself. The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU are daisy-chain connected, and operate as a 16-bit shift register consisting of the 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU. The contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART, which serves as the preceding 8-bit shift register, are input to the peripheral control board 1510, followed by the contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU, which serves as the following 8-bit shift register, one bit at a time, as serial data. The peripheral control board 1510 can acquire the ID code signal and determine the compatibility (matching) of the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR. When combining the upper right gaming board with the lower right gaming board, if the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU are supposed to be combined, but another lower right gaming board that is incompatible (matched) with the upper right gaming board 5ART is combined, even if the left side gaming board 5AL and the upper right gaming board 5ART are compatible (matched), the various LEDs provided on the upper right gaming board 5ART and the various LEDs provided on the other lower right gaming board that is incompatible (matched) with the upper right gaming board 5ART will be turned off (all lights off).

[Summary F]
F1:
The game machine is provided with a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be able to open and close, and a door frame attached to the main frame so as to be able to open and close, a game board side component attached to the game frame side component and having a first game board side component and a second game board side component, a matching determination means for determining matching between the first game board side component and the second game board side component, a lottery means for executing a lottery process based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and a plurality of display units for displaying the lottery results of the lottery means. When the matching determination means determines that there is a mismatch, the display of the lottery results on some of the plurality of display units is restricted.

Specifically, for example, the main frame 4, which is a gaming frame side component, the divided gaming board 5A of FIG. 248, which is a gaming board side component provided on the main frame 4, which is a gaming frame side component, and which has the left gaming board 5AL of FIG. 248, which is a first gaming board side component, and the right gaming board 5AR of FIG. 248, which is a second gaming board side component, and step S1 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255, which is an alignment determination means for determining alignment between the left gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board side component, and the right gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component. 212 which is a lottery means that executes lottery processing based on the establishment of lottery conditions, and a function display unit 1400 of Fig. 248 controlled by the main control board 1310 and a sub-function display unit 2250 of Fig. 248 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 which are multiple display units that display the lottery results of the special symbol and special electric feature control processing which is the lottery means. When an inconsistency is determined by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Fig. 255 which is a consistency determination means, the display of the lottery results on the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 which is a part of the multiple display units, the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 and the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, is restricted. For example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in FIG. 257 , the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 lights up a predetermined LED, while the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 turns off (all lights off). If it is determined that the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are inconsistent, the display of the lottery result on one or both of the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 and the performance display device 1600 may be restricted. In this case, the display of the lottery result may be restricted by turning off the sub-function display unit 2250, stopping the flashing light emission and emitting light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, all lights on), turning off the performance display device 1600, or displaying notification text or the like (such as "Please call an attendant") on the performance display device 1600 to cover the display of the changing decorative patterns.

In this way, if there is a mismatch between the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, the display of the lottery results on the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, which is one of the multiple display units that display the lottery results of the special pattern and special electric device control processing of step S114 in the main control side timer interrupt processing of Figure 212, which is the lottery means, is restricted. This makes it possible to immediately determine when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, become misaligned, preventing incomplete effects from being executed when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are misaligned. This therefore prevents a decline in interest in the game.

F2:
The device further includes a connection determination means for determining the connection state of the second game board side component, and does not restrict the display of lottery results on the multiple display units even when the connection determination means determines that the second game board side component is in an unconnected state.

Specifically, it further includes an ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255, which is a connection determination means for determining the connection status of the right-side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board side (in other words, the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255 functions as a consistency determination means for determining the consistency between the left-side game board 5AL, which is a component of the first game board side, and the right-side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board side, and It also functions as a connection determination means for determining the connection status with the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is a component of the second gaming board. Even if the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, which serves as the connection determination means, determines that the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is a component of the second gaming board, is in an unconnected state, the display of the lottery results on the multiple display units, the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 and the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, is not restricted. For example, in error response 7 after power-on in Figure 257 (state 8 in Figure 254 (c): unconnection error, connection with the right-side gaming board 5AR cannot be confirmed), a specified LED is lit on the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310, and a specified LED is lit on the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

The first game board side component comprises a game control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means for controlling presentations based on signals from the game control means. The game control means controls a first display unit among the multiple display units to display the lottery results, and the presentation control means controls a second display unit among the multiple display units to display the lottery results. If the consistency determination means determines that there is an inconsistency, the display of the lottery results on the second display unit controlled by the presentation control means is restricted, but the display of the lottery results on the first display unit controlled by the game control means is not restricted.

Specifically, the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, is equipped with a main control board 1310, which is a gaming control means that controls the progress of the game, and a peripheral control board 1510, which is a presentation control means that controls presentations based on signals (various commands) from the main control board 1310, which is a gaming control means. The main control board 1310, which is a gaming control means, has multiple display units, including a functional display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 and a sub-functional display unit 2 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. 250, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the function display unit 1400, which is the first display unit of the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, which is a part of the display unit, to display the special symbol and the lottery result of the special electric role control process of step S114 in the main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. 212, and the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control means, controls the function display unit 1400, which is the first display unit, of the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, which is a part of the display unit, to display the special symbol and the lottery result of the special electric role control process of step S114 in the main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. The sub-function display unit 2250, which is the second display unit among the sub-function display units 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, which is a display unit among the main control board 1310 and the main control board 1310, receives the command sent in the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process of Figure 212 to receive the lottery results for the special pattern and special electric role control process in step S114 in the main control side timer interrupt process of Figure 212, and displays the lottery results based on this received command.If an inconsistency is determined by the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 255, which is the consistency determination means, the display of the lottery results on the sub-function display unit 2250, which is the second display unit controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control means, is restricted, but the display of the lottery results on the function display unit 1400, which is the first display unit controlled by the main control board 1310, which is the game control means, is not restricted. For example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in Figure 257, the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 turns off (all lights off), while the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 turns on a specified LED.

F3:
A predetermined self-identification code (ID) is assigned to the right-side game board 5AR by hardware (a hardware circuit). Specifically, the eight ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of Fig. 251 provided on the right-side game board 5AR are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground) to assign an ID setting value (11110000B).

The ID assigned to the right-side gaming board 5AR by hardware (using a hardware circuit) is compared with the determination ID code, and if they are identical, a valid signal is output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC (Fig. 251) provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR is input to the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL (Fig. 249). The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right-side gaming board 5AR from this input ID code signal and determines (compares) it by referring to a combination table (Fig. 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, which is the determination ID code. The combination of the split gaming boards is performed in the ID determination process of step S1003 during the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Fig. 255). If the combination of the split game boards is compatible (aligned), and the other IDs shown in Figure 254 (c) are also compatible, the state changes to State 1: Normal, and the effects are played by the door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3, and the split game board 5A. The peripheral control board 1510 outputs, for example, a control signal that lights up a specific LED in the sub-function display unit 2250 of the split game board 5A as an enable signal to play the effects.

The ID assigned to the right-side gaming board 5AR by hardware (using a hardware circuit) is compared with the determination ID code, and if they are not identical, a valid signal is not output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC (Fig. 251) provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR is input to the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL (Fig. 249). The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right-side gaming board 5AR from this input ID code signal and determines (compares) it by referring to a combination table (Fig. 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, which is the determination ID code. The combination of the split gaming boards is performed in the ID determination process of step S1003 during the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Fig. 255). If the combination of divided game boards is not compatible (matched), for example, when the peripheral control board 1510 reaches State 2: ID error 1 shown in Figure 254 (c), in Error Response 1 after power-on (ID error 1 response) in Figure 257, it does not output a control signal to light up a specified LED in the sub-function display unit 2250 of the divided game board 5A as an enable signal to proceed with the presentation, and turns off the sub-function display unit 2250 (all lights off).

In some cases, no notification will be issued even if the control unit is operated at any time after power-on (if the ID is valid). Specifically, if Error Responses 1 through 9 are not occurring as shown in FIG. 254(c) when the pachinko machine is operating normally (no error response) during an error, as shown in FIG. 254(c), and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the setting change process of step S37 in the main control power-on process due to the setting key being inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turned ON (until the specified period of time until this setting change process is completed) the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is unable to notify the user of normal operation (no error response). Furthermore, if the pachinko machine is operating normally (no error response) during an error as shown in FIG. 254(c), the countermeasure is "none," so there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, if the operation is normal (no error handling occurs), no notification will be given.

Note that, if the valid ID, ID error, or unconnection error is to be detected at any time after power-on, that is, as shown in FIG. 254(c), the pachinko machine's behavior during an error is normal operation (no error response), and ID errors and unconnection errors such as Error Responses 1 to 9 are determined during a predetermined period after power-on, as determined by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 255. However, the valid ID, ID error, or unconnection error may be detected at any time after power-on. Specifically, the valid ID, ID error, or unconnection error may be determined by performing the ID determination process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing in FIG. 222. The valid ID, ID error, or unconnection error related to the presentation operation unit may be determined in step S presentation operation unit information acquisition processing in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing in FIG. 222. In either case, if the pachinko machine's behavior during an error as shown in FIG. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), the corrective action is "none," so there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, if the device is operating normally (no error handling is performed), no notification will be given.

If the ID is determined to be genuine, no notification will be issued even if the operating unit is operated thereafter. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 255 that the ID is in State 1: Normal in Figure 254 (c), i.e., a genuine ID, no notification will be issued (target method in the same figure: None). In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right game boards will not be determined at all thereafter. Even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 at this time and turned on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 211 and the main control side timer interrupt processing of FIG. 212, and is therefore unable to perform the setting change processing of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing, so the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will not be able to notify that it is operating normally (no error handling).

If it is determined that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), the notification will continue at least until it becomes normal. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 of FIG. 254(c) (Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) of FIG. 256 to FIG. 261), that is, that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), the notification of Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) will be maintained until the corrective action of FIG. 254(c): power is turned off and the ID is replaced with a compatible ID. This notification makes it difficult to play while the left-side gaming board and right-side gaming board are incompatible (inconsistent) in combination.

If the ID is determined to be normal within a specified period of time after power-on, no notification is issued. However, if the ID is determined to be abnormal within a specified period of time after power-on, the notification mode may change if the state changes. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode changes when the state returns to normal. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not issue a notification (target method in the same figure: none) if it determines that the ID is normal, i.e., State 1 in FIG. 254(c): ID error 1 (Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response) in FIGS. 256 to 261), i.e., an abnormal ID, but maintains the notification of Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response). If the ID is determined to be normal, i.e., a normal ID, after the countermeasure in FIG. 254(c): replacement with a compatible ID after power-off, the notification is no longer issued. In other words, if the combination of the left and right gaming boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right gaming boards will not be determined at all thereafter, and even if the combination of the left and right gaming boards becomes incompatible (inconsistent), no notification will be issued to convey that the ID is abnormal due to the incompatibility (inconsistency). In this way, by limiting the determination of the combination of the left and right gaming boards to within a specified period of time after power-on, this can contribute to reducing the processing load on the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 for the progression of the presentation.

All but a few notifications are terminated. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIGS. 256 to 261), in other words, an abnormal ID, it saves this as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) implemented on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved linked to the date and time. Then, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and the correct combination of left and right game boards is attached to the main frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on again, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 1: Normal (FIG. 254(c)), i.e., a normal ID, it may display a history of "ID abnormality" on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, and this history may be displayed for a predetermined period of time or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

Once a normal state has been restored, the notification mode will not change even if an abnormality occurs again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected, at which point the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (turned off), cutting off the power supply to the peripheral control board, and the game board must be reinserted and the pachinko machine must be powered on again. When the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID etc. of the performance operation unit can be confirmed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255. Therefore, when the pachinko machine is powered on, if the ID is confirmed by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255 and notification processing is performed, which continues until the power to the pachinko machine is turned off, then there is no need to control the ID confirmation or notification processing thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when the pachinko machine 1 system has completed startup and is ready to proceed with game play and presentation), the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Figure 255 is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 222, and when the presentation operation unit is attached or detached to or from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 4, if a presentation operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID even once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is replaced with another presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID (or if a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with a presentation operation unit with a normal ID, and then once determined to have a normal ID in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is returned to a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID), as a result, even if the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent), the presentation will continue to proceed and no notification will be made that the presentation operation unit has an abnormal ID. Therefore, once the system has returned to normal, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again.

F4:
In the event of a mismatch, an abnormality is displayed on the LCD. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left-side game board and the right-side game board is incompatible (mismatched) during the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255, for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on in FIG. 256, the performance display device 1600 displays notification text such as "Power is being restored" and "Please wait a moment" on a black background, and when the startup music ends, an image during the performance (for example, when a performance progresses based on the entry of game balls into various winning slots) is displayed. Then, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in FIG. 257, the performance display device 1600 displays notification text such as "Please wait a moment" on an image during the performance (for example, when a performance progresses based on the entry of game balls into various winning slots) or an image while waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or when a still image is displayed).

In the event of a mismatch, no control is performed by the presentation control means. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which is the presentation control means, determines that the combination of the left-side game board and the right-side game board is incompatible (mismatched) during the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 255, then, for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in FIG. 257, the various LEDs of the door frame unit and the various LEDs of the game board that are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are turned off (all turned off), and the game board-side movable body and game frame-side movable body that are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are not returned to their original positions or otherwise operated (are not operated).

In the event of a mismatch, an audio error is issued. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left-side game board and the right-side game board is incompatible (mismatched) during the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process in Figure 255, for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on in Figure 256, after the start-up music has finished, an announcement sound saying "Please call an attendant" is played and a specified error notification sound is played seven times. This type of audio is played repeatedly. Then, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in Figure 257, an announcement sound saying "Please call an attendant" is played and a specified error notification sound is played seven times. This type of audio is played repeatedly.

In the event of a mismatch, the door frame lamp (which may be a lamp attached to a removable decorative member or a lamp attached to a non-removable decorative member) is illuminated in an abnormal state. Specifically, first, the door frame 3, which is supported on the main frame 4 so as to be able to open and close, is equipped with door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450. If the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 255 that the combination of the left-side game board and the right-side game board is incompatible (mismatched), for example, in error response 1 after power-on (ID error 1 response) of Figure 259, the various LEDs of the door frame unit flash red in an abnormal state. The various LEDs in the door frame unit may be provided on various units (various decorative members) that are detachable from the door frame 3, or on various decorative members that are attached and fixed to the door frame 3.

If there are multiple second game board side components, if even one of them does not have a valid ID, all of the multiple second game board side components will not be driven. Specifically, if the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, is further divided into an upper and lower part, as shown in Figure 253, and is composed of an upper right game board 5ART and a lower right game board 5ARU, the upper right game board 5ART is provided with an ID output circuit IDCT that can identify itself, and the lower right game board 5ARU is provided with an ID output circuit IDCU that can identify itself. The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU are daisy-chain connected, and operate as a 16-bit shift register consisting of the 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU. The contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART, which serves as the preceding 8-bit shift register, are input to the peripheral control board 1510, followed by the contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU, which serves as the following 8-bit shift register, one bit at a time, as serial data. The peripheral control board 1510 can acquire the ID code signal and determine the compatibility (matching) of the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR. When combining the upper right gaming board with the lower right gaming board, if the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU are supposed to be combined, but another lower right gaming board that is incompatible (matched) with the upper right gaming board 5ART is combined, even if the left side gaming board 5AL and the upper right gaming board 5ART are compatible (matched), the various LEDs provided on the upper right gaming board 5ART and the various LEDs provided on the other lower right gaming board that is incompatible (matched) with the upper right gaming board 5ART will be turned off (all lights off).

[Summary G]
G1:
The device comprises a game frame side component having a movable decorative body that operates in a predetermined operating mode, a game board side component provided on the game frame side component and having a first game board side component and a second game board side component, an alignment determination means for determining alignment between the first game board side component and the second game board side component, and a plurality of light-emitting elements provided on the second game board side component, and if the alignment determination means determines that there is an inconsistency, the light emission of the plurality of light-emitting elements provided on the second game board side component is restricted, and although the movable decorative body provided on the game frame side component is not subject to determination by the alignment determination means, its operation is restricted if it is determined that there is an inconsistency between the first game board side component and the second game board side component.

Specifically, for example, a game board is attached to the main frame 4, and door frame units such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") are attached to the door frame 3, which is supported on the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The tray unit 200 is equipped with a performance operation unit 300. The performance operation unit 300 is equipped with the performance operation unit 301 shown in Figure 52 and is a movable decorative element that operates in a predetermined operating mode. The game frame side component, which is made up of the door frame 3 and main frame 4, is equipped with the game board side component, and the performance operation unit 300 equipped with the performance operation unit 301, which is a movable decorative element that operates in a predetermined operating mode.

It also includes a divided gaming board 5A (Fig. 248) which is a gaming board side component provided on the main frame 4, which is a gaming frame side component, and which has a left-side gaming board 5AL (Fig. 248) which is a first gaming board side component, and a right-side gaming board 5AR (Fig. 248) which is a second gaming board side component; an ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Fig. 255) which is a matching determination means for determining matching between the left-side gaming board 5AL which is the first gaming board side component and the right-side gaming board 5AR which is the second gaming board side component; and various LEDs which are multiple light-emitting elements provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR which is the second gaming board side component.

This presentation operation unit 300 does not have any ID for self-identification and can be used in common with any specifications. It is provided with a movable body such as the presentation operation section 301 shown in Figure 52. Movable bodies such as the presentation operation section 301 provided in the presentation operation unit 300 are treated as being included in the "game frame side movable body" shown in Figures 256 to 261.

When a mismatch is determined by the ID determination process of step S1003 during the peripheral control unit power-on processing, which serves as a consistency determination means, the illumination of the various LEDs, which are multiple light-emitting elements provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, is restricted. Although the presentation operation unit 300, which is a movable decorative element provided on the door frame 3, which is the gaming frame component, is not subject to determination by the ID determination process of step S1003 during the peripheral control unit power-on processing, which serves as a consistency determination means, its operation is restricted when a mismatch is determined between the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component. For example, in Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) when power is turned on in Figure 256, the gaming frame movable body does not perform any operation such as returning to its original position (is not operated). Furthermore, when it is determined that the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are mismatched, the mode of restricting the drive of the movable decorative elements (in this example, the performance operation unit 300) provided on the door frame 3, which is the gaming frame component, may be controlled in a different manner than when it is determined that the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are matched. For example, some or all of the movable decorative elements provided on the door frame 3, which is the gaming frame component, may be driven in a specific drive mode (such as rotating at a constant speed), or some or all of the movable decorative elements provided on the door frame 3, which is the gaming frame component, may be controlled so as not to be driven.

In this way, if the left-hand gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-hand gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are mismatched, the operation of the effect operation unit 300, which is a movable decorative element attached to the door frame 3, which is a gaming frame component that is not subject to the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, which is the mismatch determination means, is restricted. This makes it possible to immediately determine that the left-hand gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-hand gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are mismatched, preventing incomplete effects from being executed when the left-hand gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-hand gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are mismatched. This therefore prevents a decline in interest in the game.

G2:
If the matching determination means determines a match within a predetermined period after power-on, the operation of the movable decorative element will not be restricted even if a mismatch subsequently occurs. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines the match between the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component. If it determines that the combination of the left-side gaming board and the right-side gaming board is matched (matched), it will not subsequently determine the match (matching) between the left-side gaming board and the right-side gaming board. Even if the combination of the left-side gaming board and the right-side gaming board becomes incompatible (mismatched), the operation of the performance operation unit 300, which is the movable decorative element, will operate without being restricted. In other words, the performance operation unit 301 will be driven and operated in a predetermined operating mode (in line with the progress of the performance).

If the consistency determination means determines that there is a mismatch within a specified period of time after power-on, the restrictions on the movable decorative object are lifted based on the fact that there is a match. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Figure 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines the consistency of State 2: ID Error 1 in Figure 254 (c) (Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response) in Figures 256 to 261), that is, the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, and determines that the combination of the left-side gaming board and the right-side gaming board is incorrect. If it is determined that they are compatible (mismatched), the notification of Error Response 1 (ID Error 1) will be maintained, and the solution in Figure 254 (c): After the power is turned off and the ID is replaced with a compatible product, the status in Figure 254 (c): Normal is displayed, meaning the consistency between the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, is determined, and if it is determined that the combination of the left-side gaming board and the right-side gaming board is compatible (matched), the notification will be canceled.

G3:
A predetermined self-identification code (ID) is assigned to the right-side game board 5AR by hardware (a hardware circuit). Specifically, the eight ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of Fig. 251 provided on the right-side game board 5AR are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground) to assign an ID setting value (11110000B).

The ID assigned to the right-side gaming board 5AR by hardware (using a hardware circuit) is compared with the determination ID code, and if they are identical, a valid signal is output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC (Fig. 251) provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR is input to the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL (Fig. 249). The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right-side gaming board 5AR from this input ID code signal and determines (compares) it by referring to a combination table (Fig. 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, which is the determination ID code. The combination of the split gaming boards is performed in the ID determination process of step S1003 during the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Fig. 255). If the combination of the divided game boards is compatible (aligned), providing that the other IDs shown in Figure 254 (c) are compatible, the state will change to State 1: Normal, and the performance will proceed using the door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3, and the divided game board 5A. The peripheral control board 1510 outputs a control signal to the performance operation unit 300, for example, to drive and operate the performance operation section 301 in a predetermined operating mode, as an enable signal to proceed with the performance.

The ID assigned to the right-side gaming board 5AR by hardware (using a hardware circuit) is compared with the determination ID code, and if they are not identical, a valid signal is not output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC (Fig. 251) provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR is input to the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL (Fig. 249). The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right-side gaming board 5AR from this input ID code signal and determines (compares) it by referring to a combination table (Fig. 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, which is the determination ID code. The combination of the split gaming boards is performed in the ID determination process of step S1003 during the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Fig. 255). If the combination of divided game boards is not compatible (matched), for example, when the peripheral control board 1510 reaches State 2: ID error 1 shown in Figure 254 (c), in Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power is turned on in Figure 256, the control signal that drives and operates the movable body on the game frame in a specified operating mode is not output as an effective signal to progress the performance, and the movable body on the game frame does not perform any operation such as returning to its original position (is not operating).

In some cases, no notification will be issued even if the control unit is operated at any time after power-on (if the ID is valid). Specifically, if Error Responses 1 through 9 are not occurring as shown in FIG. 254(c) when the pachinko machine is operating normally (no error response) during an error, as shown in FIG. 254(c), and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the setting change process of step S37 in the main control power-on process due to the setting key being inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turned ON (until the specified period of time until this setting change process is completed) the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is unable to notify the user of normal operation (no error response). Furthermore, if the pachinko machine is operating normally (no error response) during an error as shown in FIG. 254(c), the countermeasure is "none," so there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, if the operation is normal (no error handling occurs), no notification will be given.

Note that, if the valid ID, ID error, or unconnection error is to be detected at any time after power-on, that is, as shown in FIG. 254(c), the pachinko machine's behavior during an error is normal operation (no error response), and ID errors and unconnection errors such as Error Responses 1 to 9 are determined during a predetermined period after power-on, as determined by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 255. However, the valid ID, ID error, or unconnection error may be detected at any time after power-on. Specifically, the valid ID, ID error, or unconnection error may be determined by performing the ID determination process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing in FIG. 222. The valid ID, ID error, or unconnection error related to the presentation operation unit may be determined in step S presentation operation unit information acquisition processing in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing in FIG. 222. In either case, if the pachinko machine's behavior during an error as shown in FIG. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), the corrective action is "none," so there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, if the device is operating normally (no error handling is performed), no notification will be given.

If the ID is determined to be genuine, no notification will be issued even if the operating unit is operated thereafter. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 255 that the ID is in State 1: Normal in Figure 254 (c), i.e., a genuine ID, no notification will be issued (target method in the same figure: None). In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right game boards will not be determined at all thereafter. Even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 at this time and turned on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 211 and the main control side timer interrupt processing of FIG. 212, and is therefore unable to perform the setting change processing of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing, so the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will not be able to notify that it is operating normally (no error handling).

If it is determined that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), the notification will continue at least until it becomes normal. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 of FIG. 254(c) (Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) of FIG. 256 to FIG. 261), that is, that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), the notification of Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) will be maintained until the corrective action of FIG. 254(c): power is turned off and the ID is replaced with a compatible ID. This notification makes it difficult to play while the left-side gaming board and right-side gaming board are incompatible (inconsistent) in combination.

If the ID is determined to be normal within a specified period of time after power-on, no notification is issued. However, if the ID is determined to be abnormal within a specified period of time after power-on, the notification mode may change if the state changes. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode changes when the state returns to normal. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not issue a notification (target method in the same figure: none) if it determines that the ID is normal, i.e., State 1 in FIG. 254(c): ID error 1 (Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response) in FIGS. 256 to 261), i.e., an abnormal ID, but maintains the notification of Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response). If the ID is determined to be normal, i.e., a normal ID, after the countermeasure in FIG. 254(c): replacement with a compatible ID after power-off, the notification is no longer issued. In other words, if the combination of the left and right gaming boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right gaming boards will not be determined at all thereafter, and even if the combination of the left and right gaming boards becomes incompatible (inconsistent), no notification will be issued to convey that the ID is abnormal due to the incompatibility (inconsistency). In this way, by limiting the determination of the combination of the left and right gaming boards to within a specified period of time after power-on, this can contribute to reducing the processing load on the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 for the progression of the presentation.

All but a few notifications are terminated. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIGS. 256 to 261), in other words, an abnormal ID, it saves this as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) implemented on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved linked to the date and time. Then, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and the correct combination of left and right game boards is attached to the main frame 3, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 1: Normal (FIG. 254(c)), i.e., a normal ID, it may display a history of "ID abnormality" on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, and this history may be displayed for a predetermined period of time or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

Once a normal state has been restored, the notification mode will not change even if an abnormality occurs again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected, at which point the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (turned off), cutting off the power supply to the peripheral control board, and the game board must be reinserted and the pachinko machine must be powered on again. When the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID etc. of the performance operation unit can be confirmed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255. Therefore, when the pachinko machine is powered on, if the ID is confirmed by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255 and notification processing is performed, which continues until the power to the pachinko machine is turned off, then there is no need to control the ID confirmation or notification processing thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when the pachinko machine 1 system has completed startup and is ready to proceed with game play and presentation), the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Figure 255 is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 222, and when the presentation operation unit is attached or detached to or from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 4, if a presentation operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID even once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is replaced with another presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID (or if a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with a presentation operation unit with a normal ID, and then once determined to have a normal ID in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is returned to a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID), as a result, even if the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent), the presentation will continue to proceed and no notification will be made that the presentation operation unit has an abnormal ID. Therefore, once the system has returned to normal, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again.

G4:
In the event of a mismatch, an abnormality is displayed on the LCD. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left-side game board and the right-side game board is incompatible (mismatched) during the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255, for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on in FIG. 256, the performance display device 1600 displays notification text such as "Power is being restored" and "Please wait a moment" on a black background, and when the startup music ends, an image during the performance (for example, when a performance progresses based on the entry of game balls into various winning slots) is displayed. Then, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in FIG. 257, the performance display device 1600 displays notification text such as "Please wait a moment" on an image during the performance (for example, when a performance progresses based on the entry of game balls into various winning slots) or an image while waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or when a still image is displayed).

In the event of a mismatch, no control is performed by the presentation control means. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which is the presentation control means, determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 255 that the combination of the left-side game board and the right-side game board is incompatible (mismatched), then, for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in FIG. 257, the various LEDs of the door frame unit and the various LEDs of the game board that are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are turned off (all turned off), and the game board-side movable body and game frame-side movable body that are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are not returned to their original positions or otherwise operated (are not operated).

In the event of a mismatch, an audio error is issued. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left-side game board and the right-side game board is incompatible (mismatched) during the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process in Figure 255, for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on in Figure 256, after the start-up music has finished, an announcement sound saying "Please call an attendant" is played and a specified error notification sound is played seven times. This type of audio is played repeatedly. Then, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in Figure 257, an announcement sound saying "Please call an attendant" is played and a specified error notification sound is played seven times. This type of audio is played repeatedly.

In the event of a mismatch, the door frame lamp (which may be a lamp attached to a removable decorative member or a lamp attached to a non-removable decorative member) is illuminated in an abnormal state. Specifically, first, the door frame 3, which is supported on the main frame 4 so as to be able to open and close, is equipped with door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450. If the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 255 that the combination of the left-side game board and the right-side game board is incompatible (mismatched), for example, in error response 1 after power-on (ID error 1 response) of Figure 259, the various LEDs of the door frame unit flash red in an abnormal state. The various LEDs in the door frame unit may be provided on various units (various decorative members) that are detachable from the door frame 3, or on various decorative members that are attached and fixed to the door frame 3.

If there are multiple second game board side components, if even one of them does not have a valid ID, all of the multiple second game board side components will not be driven. Specifically, if the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, is further divided into an upper and lower part, as shown in Figure 253, and is composed of an upper right game board 5ART and a lower right game board 5ARU, the upper right game board 5ART is provided with an ID output circuit IDCT that can identify itself, and the lower right game board 5ARU is provided with an ID output circuit IDCU that can identify itself. The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU are daisy-chain connected, and operate as a 16-bit shift register consisting of the 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU. The contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART, which serves as the preceding 8-bit shift register, are input to the peripheral control board 1510, followed by the contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU, which serves as the following 8-bit shift register, one bit at a time, as serial data. The peripheral control board 1510 can acquire the ID code signal and determine the compatibility (matching) of the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR. When combining the upper right gaming board with the lower right gaming board, if the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU are supposed to be combined, but another lower right gaming board that is incompatible (matched) with the upper right gaming board 5ART is combined, even if the left side gaming board 5AL and the upper right gaming board 5ART are compatible (matched), the various LEDs provided on the upper right gaming board 5ART and the various LEDs provided on the other lower right gaming board that is incompatible (matched) with the upper right gaming board 5ART will be turned off (all lights off).

[Summary H]
H1:
The game board comprises a game board side component having a plurality of frame light-emitting means, a game board side component provided on the game board side component and having a first game board side component and a second game board side component, an alignment determination means for determining alignment between the first game board side component and the second game board side component, and a plurality of board light-emitting means provided on the second game board side component, and when the alignment determination means determines that there is a misalignment, the light emission of the plurality of board light-emitting means provided on the second game board side component is restricted, and although the plurality of frame light-emitting means provided on the game board side component are not subject to determination by the alignment determination means, when it is determined that there is a misalignment between the first game board side component and the second game board side component, at least some of the light emission is restricted.

Specifically, for example, a game board is attached to the main frame 4, and the door frame 3, which is supported on the main frame 4 so as to be able to open and close, is fitted with door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450. The tray unit 200 is equipped with a performance operation unit 300. The performance operation unit 300 is provided with various decorative boards (e.g., performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, button outer decorative board 355, button middle decorative board 364, etc.) on which the various LEDs shown in Figure 53 (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) are mounted. The game frame side component, which is made up of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, is provided with a game board side component, which includes a game board and a performance operation unit 300 having various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) that serve as multiple frame light-emitting means.

It also includes a divided gaming board 5A (FIG. 248) which is a gaming board side component provided on the main frame 4, which is a gaming frame side component, and which has a left-hand gaming board 5AL (FIG. 248) which is a first gaming board side component, and a right-hand gaming board 5AR (FIG. 248) which is a second gaming board side component; an ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (FIG. 255) which is a matching determination means for determining matching between the left-hand gaming board 5AL which is the first gaming board side component and the right-hand gaming board 5AR which is the second gaming board side component; and various LEDs which are multiple board light-emitting means provided on the right-hand gaming board 5AR which is the second gaming board side component (for example, various LEDs mounted on decorative boards in various presentation units housed in the right rear box 3010R located behind the right-hand gaming board 5AR).

This performance operation unit 300 is not provided with any ID for self-identification and can be used in common with any specifications. It is provided with various decorative boards (e.g., performance operation unit outer decorative board 320, button outer decorative board 355, button inner decorative board 364, etc.) on which the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) shown in Figure 53 are mounted. The various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on the various decorative boards (e.g., performance operation unit outer decorative board 320, button outer decorative board 355, button inner decorative board 364, etc.) provided on the performance operation unit 300 are treated as being included in the "various LEDs of the door frame unit" shown in Figures 256 to 261.

When an inconsistency is determined by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing, which is the consistency determination means, the light emission of the various LEDs mounted on the decorative boards in the various presentation units housed in the right rear box 3010R located behind the right side game board 5AR, which are multiple board light-emitting means provided on the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, is restricted.Although the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on the various decorative boards in the presentation operation unit 300, which are multiple frame light-emitting means provided on the door frame 3, which is the game frame side component, are not subject to determination by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing, which is the consistency determination means, when an inconsistency is determined between the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, the light emission of at least some of them (e.g., LED 364a) is restricted. For example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) when power is turned on in Figure 259, the various LEDs of the door frame unit flash red, but only some of the LEDs (e.g., LED 364a) among the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300 are turned off (all turned off). In addition, when it is determined that the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, are inconsistent, the manner in which the light emission of the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300, which is multiple frame light-emitting means provided in the door frame 3, which is the game frame side component, is regulated may be controlled in a manner different from that when it is determined that the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, are consistent. For example, some or all of the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300, which is multiple frame light-emitting means provided on the door frame 3, which is a component of the gaming frame, may be turned off, or some or all of the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300, which is multiple frame light-emitting means provided on the door frame 3, which is a component of the gaming frame, may be made to emit light in a specific light-emitting mode (such as flashing red).

In this way, if the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are mismatched, the emission of some (e.g., LED 364a) of the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on the various decorative boards in the effect operation unit 300, which is the frame light-emitting means and is not subject to ID determination processing in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, which is the mismatch determination means, is restricted. This makes it possible to immediately determine that the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are mismatched, preventing incomplete effects from being executed when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are mismatched. This therefore prevents a decline in interest in the game.

H2:
If the matching determination means determines that the left side gaming board 5AL is a first gaming board component and the right side gaming board 5AR is a second gaming board component in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines the matching between the left side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, and if it determines that the combination of the left side gaming board and the right side gaming board is matching (matching), it does not subsequently determine the matching (matching) between the left side gaming board and the right side gaming board. Even if the combination of the left side gaming board and the right side gaming board becomes incompatible (mismatched), the light emission of the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300, which is the frame light emitting means, is not restricted. In other words, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300, which is the frame light-emitting means, will emit light in a predetermined light-emitting manner (in line with the progress of the performance).

If the consistency determination means determines that there is a mismatch within a predetermined period of time after power-on, the restrictions on the board light-emitting means and frame light-emitting means are lifted based on the fact that there is a match. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines the consistency of State 2: ID Error 1 in FIG. 254(c) (Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Correspondence) in FIGS. 259 to 261), that is, the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board side component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component, and if it determines that the combination of the left-side gaming board and the right-side gaming board is incompatible (mismatched), it issues a notification of this Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Correspondence) (mounted on the decorative board in the various performance units housed in the right-side rear box 3010R located behind the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the board light-emitting means). The various LEDs on the game board are turned off (all turned off), and only some of the LEDs (for example, LED 364a) mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300, which serves as the frame light-emitting means (for example, multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) are turned off (all turned off). The solution in Figure 254(c) is maintained: After the power is turned off and the product is replaced with a compatible ID product, State 1 in Figure 254(c): Normal is achieved. In other words, the consistency between the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is determined, and the combination of the left-side game board and the right-side game board is determined to be compatible (matched), and the alarm is canceled.

Once a matching state has been reached, the illumination of the board light-emitting means and frame light-emitting means will not be restricted even if a mismatch state occurs again before the power is cut off. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines the matching between the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, and if it determines that the combination of the left-side gaming board and the right-side gaming board is compatible (matched), it will not thereafter determine the compatibility (matching) of the left-side gaming board and the right-side gaming board at all. Even if the combination with the right gaming board becomes incompatible (mismatched), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative boards in the various presentation units housed in the right rear box 3010R located behind the right gaming board 5AR, which serves as the board light-emitting means, will not be restricted from emitting light as the various LEDs of the gaming board, and the light emission of the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on the various decorative boards in the presentation operation unit 300, which serves as the frame light-emitting means, will not be restricted. In other words, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative boards in the various presentation units housed in the right rear box 3010R located behind the right gaming board 5AR, which serves as the board light-emitting means, will emit light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern (as the presentation progresses) as the various LEDs of the gaming board, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the presentation operation unit 300, which serves as the frame light-emitting means, will emit light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern (as the presentation progresses).

H3:
A predetermined self-identification code (ID) is assigned to the right-side game board 5AR by hardware (a hardware circuit). Specifically, the eight ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of Fig. 251 provided on the right-side game board 5AR are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground) to assign an ID setting value (11110000B).

The ID assigned to the right-side gaming board 5AR by hardware (using a hardware circuit) is compared with the determination ID code, and if they are identical, a valid signal is output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC (Fig. 251) provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR is input to the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL (Fig. 249). The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right-side gaming board 5AR from this input ID code signal and determines (compares) it by referring to a combination table (Fig. 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, which is the determination ID code. The combination of the split gaming boards is performed in the ID determination process of step S1003 during the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Fig. 255). If the combination of split game boards is compatible (aligned), providing that the other IDs shown in Figure 254 (c) are compatible, the state will change to State 1: Normal, and the effects will proceed using the door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3, and the split game board 5A. The peripheral control board 1510 outputs, for example, a control signal to the effect operation unit 300 to cause the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on the various decorative boards in the effect operation unit 300 to emit light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern, as an enable signal to proceed with the effects.

The ID assigned to the right-side gaming board 5AR by hardware (using a hardware circuit) is compared with the determination ID code, and if they are not identical, a valid signal is not output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC (Fig. 251) provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR is input to the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL (Fig. 249). The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right-side gaming board 5AR from this input ID code signal and determines (compares) it by referring to a combination table (Fig. 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, which is the determination ID code. The combination of the split gaming boards is performed in the ID determination process of step S1003 during the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Fig. 255). If the combination of divided game boards is not compatible (matched), for example, when the peripheral control board 1510 reaches State 2: ID error 1 shown in Figure 259 (c), in Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power is turned on in Figure 259, control signals for the illumination of some of the various LEDs (for example, multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300 are not output to the performance operation unit 300 as valid signals for progressing the performance, and the illumination of some of these LEDs (for example, LED 364a) is turned off (all lights off).

In some cases, no notification will be issued even if the control unit is operated at any time after power-on (if the ID is valid). Specifically, if Error Responses 1 through 9 are not occurring as shown in FIG. 254(c) when the pachinko machine is operating normally (no error response) during an error, as shown in FIG. 254(c), and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the setting change process of step S37 in the main control power-on process due to the setting key being inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turned ON (until the specified period of time until this setting change process is completed) the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is unable to notify the user of normal operation (no error response). Furthermore, if the pachinko machine is operating normally (no error response) during an error as shown in FIG. 254(c), the countermeasure is "none," so there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, if the operation is normal (no error handling occurs), no notification will be given.

Note that, if the valid ID, ID error, or unconnection error is to be detected at any time after power-on, that is, as shown in FIG. 254(c), the pachinko machine's behavior during an error is normal operation (no error response), and ID errors and unconnection errors such as Error Responses 1 to 9 are determined during a predetermined period after power-on, as determined by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 255. However, the valid ID, ID error, or unconnection error may be detected at any time after power-on. Specifically, the valid ID, ID error, or unconnection error may be determined by performing the ID determination process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing in FIG. 222. The valid ID, ID error, or unconnection error related to the presentation operation unit may be determined in step S presentation operation unit information acquisition processing in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing in FIG. 222. In either case, if the pachinko machine's behavior during an error as shown in FIG. 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), the corrective action is "none," so there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, if the device is operating normally (no error handling is performed), no notification will be given.

If the ID is determined to be genuine, no notification will be issued even if the operating unit is operated thereafter. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 255 that the ID is in State 1: Normal in Figure 254 (c), i.e., a genuine ID, no notification will be issued (target method in the same figure: None). In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right game boards will not be determined at all thereafter. Even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 at this time and turned on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 211 and the main control side timer interrupt processing of FIG. 212, and is therefore unable to perform the setting change processing of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing, so the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will not be able to notify that it is operating normally (no error handling).

If it is determined that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), the notification will continue at least until it becomes normal. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 of FIG. 254(c) (Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) of FIG. 256 to FIG. 261), that is, that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), the notification of Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) will be maintained until the corrective action of FIG. 254(c): power is turned off and the ID is replaced with a compatible ID. This notification makes it difficult to play while the left-side gaming board and right-side gaming board are incompatible (inconsistent) in combination.

If the ID is determined to be normal within a specified period of time after power-on, no notification is issued. However, if the ID is determined to be abnormal within a specified period of time after power-on, the notification mode may change if the state changes. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode changes when the state returns to normal. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not issue a notification (target method in the same figure: none) if it determines that the ID is normal, i.e., State 1 in FIG. 254(c): ID error 1 (Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response) in FIGS. 259 to 261), i.e., an abnormal ID, but maintains the notification of Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response). If the ID is determined to be normal, i.e., normal, after the replacement with a compatible ID product after power-off, as in the countermeasure in the same figure (c), the notification will no longer be issued. In other words, if the combination of the left and right gaming boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right gaming boards will not be determined at all thereafter, and even if the combination of the left and right gaming boards becomes incompatible (inconsistent), no notification will be issued to convey that the ID is abnormal due to the incompatibility (inconsistency). In this way, by limiting the determination of the combination of the left and right gaming boards to within a specified period of time after power-on, this can contribute to reducing the processing load on the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 for the progression of the presentation.

All but a few notifications are terminated. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIGS. 256 to 261), in other words, an abnormal ID, it saves this as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) implemented on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved linked to the date and time. Then, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and the correct combination of left and right game boards is attached to the main frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on again, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 255 that the ID is State 1: Normal (FIG. 254(c)), i.e., a normal ID, it may display a history of "ID abnormality" on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, and this history may be displayed for a predetermined period of time or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

Once a normal state has been restored, the notification mode will not change even if an abnormality occurs again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected, at which point the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (turned off), cutting off the power supply to the peripheral control board, and the game board must be reinserted and the pachinko machine must be powered on again. When the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID etc. of the performance operation unit can be confirmed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255. Therefore, when the pachinko machine is powered on, if the ID is confirmed by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 255 and notification processing is performed, which continues until the power to the pachinko machine is turned off, then there is no need to control the ID confirmation or notification processing thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when the pachinko machine 1 system has completed startup and is ready to proceed with game play and presentation), the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Figure 255 is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 222, and when the presentation operation unit is attached or detached to or from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 4, if a presentation operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID even once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is replaced with another presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID (or if a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with a presentation operation unit with a normal ID, and then once determined to have a normal ID in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is returned to a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID), as a result, even if the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent), the presentation will continue to proceed and no notification will be made that the presentation operation unit has an abnormal ID. Therefore, once the system has returned to normal, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again.

H4:
In the event of a mismatch, an abnormality is reported on the LCD. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left and right game boards is incompatible (mismatched) during the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255, for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on in FIG. 259, the effect display device 1600 displays "Power Restoring" on a black background, followed by notification text such as "Game Board Error Occurred,""ErrorNumber:,""Game Board Connection Error," and "Please Turn Off the Power and Check the Game Board," and displays an image in which the game board connection error portion of the pachinko machine is lit. Then, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in FIG. 260, the effect display device 1600 displays notification text such as "Game Board Error Occurred,""ErrorNumber:,""Game Board Connection Error," and "Please Turn Off the Power and Check the Game Board," on a black background, and displays an image in which the game board connection error portion of the pachinko machine is lit.

In the event of a mismatch, no control is performed by the presentation control means. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which is the presentation control means, determines that the combination of the left-side game board and the right-side game board is incompatible (mismatched) during the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 255, then, for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in FIG. 260, the various LEDs of the door frame unit controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will flash red, the various LEDs on the game board will be turned off (all off), and the movable body on the game frame side controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will not perform any operation such as returning to its original position (will remain unoperated).

In the event of a mismatch, an audio notification of the abnormality is issued. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left and right game boards is incompatible (mismatched) during the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 255, for example, in error response 1 at power-on (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 259, the startup music at power-on is muted and a specified error notification sound is then played once, followed by an announcement sound saying, "A game board connection error has occurred. Please turn off the power and check the game board." This type of audio is played repeatedly. Then, in error response 1 after power-on (ID error 1 response) in FIG. 260, the specified error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement sound saying, "A game board connection error has occurred. Please turn off the power and check the game board." This type of audio is played repeatedly.

In the event of a mismatch, the door frame lamp (which may be a lamp attached to a removable decorative member or a lamp attached to a non-removable decorative member) is illuminated in an abnormal state. Specifically, first, the door frame 3, which is supported on the main frame 4 so as to be able to open and close, is equipped with door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450. If the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 255 that the combination of the left-side game board and the right-side game board is incompatible (mismatched), for example, in error response 1 after power-on (ID error 1 response) of Figure 259, the various LEDs of the door frame unit flash red in an abnormal state. The various LEDs in the door frame unit may be provided on various units (various decorative components) that are detachable from the door frame 3, or on various decorative components that are attached and fixed to the door frame 3.

If there are multiple second game board side components, if even one of them does not have a valid ID, all of the multiple second game board side components will not be driven. Specifically, if the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, is further divided into an upper and lower part, as shown in Figure 253, and is composed of an upper right game board 5ART and a lower right game board 5ARU, the upper right game board 5ART is provided with an ID output circuit IDCT that can identify itself, and the lower right game board 5ARU is provided with an ID output circuit IDCU that can identify itself. The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU are daisy-chain connected, and operate as a 16-bit shift register consisting of the 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU. The contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART, which serves as the preceding 8-bit shift register, are input to the peripheral control board 1510, followed by the contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU, which serves as the following 8-bit shift register, one bit at a time, as serial data. The peripheral control board 1510 can acquire the ID code signal and determine the compatibility (matching) of the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR. When combining the upper right gaming board with the lower right gaming board, if the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU are supposed to be combined, but another lower right gaming board that is incompatible (matched) with the upper right gaming board 5ART is combined, even if the left side gaming board 5AL and the upper right gaming board 5ART are compatible (matched), the various LEDs provided on the upper right gaming board 5ART and the various LEDs provided on the other lower right gaming board that is incompatible (matched) with the upper right gaming board 5ART will be turned off (all lights off).

[Layout of the board on which the ID output circuit IDC is mounted]
In the above embodiment, the ID output circuit IDC, which mainly comprises a parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa having eight flip-flop circuits that generate a self-identification code (ID), may be mounted on a dedicated board behind the right-side gaming panel 5AR, or may be mounted on one of various relay boards, or may be mounted together with LEDs mounted on a decorative board, or may be mounted together with electronic components mounted on other boards. However, the ID output circuit IDC may also be mounted on a decorative board housed in the right-side rear box 3010R of the rear unit 3000, or on a decorative board provided in the door frame unit. Below, an embodiment will be described in which the ID output circuit IDC is mounted on a decorative board on which various LEDs and the like are mounted, the decorative board is housed in the right-side rear box 3010R of the rear unit 3000, and the ID output circuit IDC is located behind the right-side gaming panel 1100R. In addition, when the ID output circuit IDC is implemented on a decorative board provided in a door frame unit, it may be implemented on any of the multiple decorative boards mentioned above (the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame of the left side unit 420, and the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame of the right side unit 430).

Figure 270 is a schematic exploded oblique view of the right-side gaming board 5AR disassembled into the right-side gaming panel 1100R and the right-side rear box 3010R of the rear unit 3000, viewed from the front (the front side of the pachinko machine 1 with the right-side gaming board 5AR fixed to the main body frame 4). As shown in Figure 270, in an embodiment in which a decorative substrate 4100 on which an ID output circuit IDC is mounted is housed in the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000, and the ID output circuit IDC is attached to the rear of the right-side gaming panel 1100R, the decorative substrate 4100 is attached to the right-side rear box 3010R so that the ID output circuit IDC including a parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa that generates a self-identification code (ID) mounted on its surface (front surface, front mounting surface) and various LEDs 4120 face forward of the pachinko machine 1. The decorative board 4100 may be attached to the rear of the right-side gaming panel 1100R inside the right-side rear box 3010R, for example, via fixing members such as screws or pins, or may be attached to the rear of the right-side gaming panel 1100R inside the right-side rear box 3010R via an engagement portion formed on the decorative board 4100 and the right-side rear box 3010R.

As described above, the right-side gaming panel 1100R and right-side front component 1000R of the right-side gaming board 5AR are transparent, allowing the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 to be viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 when the right-side gaming board 5AR is fixed to the main frame. A cover, at least a portion of which is opaque or translucent (such as a cover made opaque or translucent by applying a sticker, a cover made opaque or translucent using a resin material such as an opaque or translucent resin, or a cover made opaque or translucent by coloring, painting, printing, etc.) may be provided between the right-side gaming panel 1100R and the decorative board 4100. In this case, electronic components such as the ID output circuit IDC and LEDs mounted on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 can be prevented from being seen by the player, thereby preventing the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 from being disrupted and reducing interest in the game. Furthermore, when the ID output circuit IDC is mounted on a decorative board provided in a door frame unit, a cover may be provided in front of the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100, at least a portion of which is opaque or translucent (it may be made opaque or translucent by adhering a sticker, by using an opaque or translucent resin material, or by coloring, painting, printing, etc.). In this case, too, it is possible to prevent players from seeing the ID output circuit IDC, LEDs, and other electronic components mounted on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100, preventing the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 from being disrupted and reducing interest in playing the game.

A light-colored resist is formed on at least the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 (or on both the surface (front, front mounting surface) and back (rear) of the decorative substrate 4100) using a light-colored coating film over the entire area, excluding the pads, through-holes, lands, etc. to which electronic components such as the ID output circuit IDC, each LED 4120, and connectors are soldered. In this embodiment, the light-colored resist is a white resist, and is formed using a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist liquid. The light-colored resist may also be a yellow or pink resist. A light-colored resist may also be formed on at least a portion of the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 where copper foil such as lands is exposed. In this case, the copper foil such as lands becomes less noticeable, preventing the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 from being disrupted and reducing interest in the game due to the copper foil such as lands being visible. The reflectance on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 can be made uniform, preventing uneven light emission and improving the presentation effect. A light-colored resist may also be formed on a portion of the back surface (rear surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 where copper foil such as lands is exposed. In this case, the reflectance on the back surface (rear surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 can be made uniform, achieving uniform reflection when the decorative substrate 4100 functions as a reflector for other decorative substrates on which LEDs are mounted.

Furthermore, on the surface (front, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, near the mounted surface-side electronic components such as the ID output circuit IDC and various LEDs 4120, a surface-side indicia indicating the attributes of the surface-side electronic components, such as the component number of the surface-side electronic component and an area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component is to be placed (which may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and model number of the surface-side electronic component), is silk-screened on a solid white resist using a light yellow paint that is not easily noticeable against white. Note that if the light-colored resist is yellow or pink, the surface-side indicia may be silk-screened using a white, yellow, or pink paint that is a different color from the resist.

Here, we will explain why we used white for the resist liquid and yellow for the silk printing paint. First, the reflectance of a color increases as it approaches white and decreases as it approaches black. For example, the reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of yellow. Yellow's reflectance is low compared to the reflectance of white, but it still has a high reflectance. Therefore, when combining white and red, the red stands out against a white background, and when the front-side marking (rear-side marking) is red, the red front-side marking (red rear-side marking against white resist) stands out against the white resist. However, when combining white and yellow (the configuration of this embodiment), the yellow does not stand out against a white background, and when the front-side marking (rear-side marking) is yellow, the yellow front-side marking (yellow rear-side marking against white resist) is less noticeable.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 creates a dazzling lighting effect through illumination by multiple light-emitting elements such as LEDs mounted on each decorative board. Therefore, the multiple LEDs 4120 mounted on the front (surface) of the decorative board 4100 are, for example, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, and their light emission patterns change in various ways depending on whether they are turned on (light-emitting) or off. For this reason, as described above, the entire front (surface) of the decorative board 4100, excluding the pads, through-holes, lands, etc. to which the multiple LEDs are soldered, is coated with a white resist liquid to form a white coating (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). Furthermore, a surface-side indicia that identifies the full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors is silk-screened with yellow paint on this solid white resist. This makes it possible to make the yellow surface-side indicia less noticeable against the white resist when the full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors are turned off, and prevents players from seeing information unrelated to the game. In addition to preventing the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 from being disrupted and interest in playing from decreasing due to the light being visible, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned on (emitting light), the combination of a highly reflective solid white resist and a surface-side marking portion silk-screened with yellow paint that is very close to the reflectance of white makes it possible to maintain a high reflectance on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, and by combining the resist and surface-side marking portion with similar reflectances, it is possible to uniform the reflectance on the front (surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, thereby suppressing uneven light emission and improving the presentation effect.

On the back (rear) surface of the decorative substrate 4100, although not shown, near the connectors and other back-side electronic components, there is a back-side marking indicating the attributes of the back-side electronic components, such as the component number of the back-side electronic component and an area indicating the position where the back-side electronic component will be placed (which may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the back-side electronic component, and model number of the back-side electronic component). This is silk-screened in yellow paint, a light color that is not easily noticeable against white, onto a solid white resist. Note that if the light-colored resist is yellow or pink, the back-side marking may be printed in white, yellow, or pink paint, a different color from the resist.

The front-side indicia formed on the front (surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 is not limited to those applied to the LED mounting surface by screen printing using ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (e.g., yellow), but may also be formed as foil-punched characters (i.e., punched characters formed by creating characters using a copper foil wiring pattern on the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and punching out the copper foil around them), and the surface of these foil-punched characters is then coated with white solder resist (protective material) to be applied to the LED mounting surface to form the indicia. Alternatively, the indicia may be formed as white resist-punched characters using a double coat of white resist (after coating the entire LED mounting surface with white solder resist (first layer), masking out characters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted LEDs and other electronic components and other decorative substrates, and then coating the entire area excluding these with white solder resist again (second layer), thereby forming the masked areas, i.e., the characters and symbols, as white resist-punched characters). The indicia may also be formed by A marking indicating the part numbers of electronic parts such as LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the attributes of electronic parts such as areas indicating the positions where these electronic parts are to be arranged (which may further include the shape, size, mounting direction (mounting direction) of the electronic parts, and model of the electronic parts) may be formed on the back surface on which no LEDs are mounted by screen printing using ink of a predetermined color (not only colors with high brightness and saturation but also colors with low brightness and saturation), foil cut-out characters, white resist cut-out characters using two coats of white resist, etc. In these cases, In this case, the front-side markings become less noticeable and cannot be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 1, which prevents the player from seeing information unrelated to the game, disrupting the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 and reducing interest in the game. This also prevents a decrease in reflectivity on the front surface (surface) of the decorative board 4100 on which the LEDs are mounted, and makes it possible to uniform the reflectivity on the front surface (surface) of the decorative board 4100 on which the LEDs are mounted, thereby preventing uneven light emission and improving the presentation effect.

A partition cover 4130 is attached to the surface (front, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100. The partition cover 4130 divides the surface (front, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 into multiple areas, and has multiple openings formed therein to separate the ID output circuit IDC from electronic components such as various LEDs 4120, as shown in Figure 270. In other words, only the ID output circuit IDC is mounted in the specific area of the decorative substrate 4100 divided by the partition cover 4130, and other electronic components are mounted in areas of the decorative substrate 4100 other than the specific area divided by the partition cover 4130. In the example shown in Figure 270, the surface (front surface, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 is divided into three areas by the partition cover 4130, and the ID output circuit IDC is mounted in a specific area of these three areas (the central area in Figure 270), and multiple LEDs 4120 are mounted in each of the other two areas; however, the number of divided areas is not limited to that described above, as long as the partition cover 4130 divides at least the surface (front surface, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 into an area where only the ID output circuit IDC is mounted, and an area where other electronic components are mounted.

Here, if there is unauthorized access to the decorative board 4100 that implements the ID output circuit IDC, there is a risk that the effects produced by the decorative board 4100 will not be executed properly, and this inability to execute the effects produced by the decorative board 4100 properly may reduce interest in playing the game. The partition cover 4130 of this embodiment covers the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 and separates the ID output circuit IDC, which includes a parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa that generates a self-identification code (ID), from other electronic components (such as various LEDs 4120).This makes it easier to find the electronic component to be checked (in this case, the ID output circuit ICD) when unauthorized access is made to the decorative substrate 4100 while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, preventing the decorative substrate 4100 from performing normal presentations, or when investigating whether or not fraud has occurred while the pachinko machine 1 is powered off.This makes it possible to immediately identify the ID output circuit IDC mounted on the decorative substrate 4100 and return the self-identification code (ID) generated by the ID output circuit IDC to a normal state, allowing the decorative substrate 4100 to perform normal presentations, or to determine whether or not fraud has occurred in the ID output circuit IDC, thereby contributing to improved security. In this way, it is possible to easily find the electronic component (in this case, the ID output circuit ICD) that should be checked when investigating whether or not there has been any fraud, so that it is possible to determine whether or not fraudulent access has been made to the decorative board 4100 before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, which could prevent the decorative board 4100 from performing its effects properly, and return the self-identification code (ID) generated by the ID output circuit IDC to a normal state, or to immediately return the self-identification code (ID) generated by the ID output circuit IDC to a normal state if fraudulent access has been made to the decorative board 4100 while the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, preventing the decorative board 4100 from performing its effects properly. Furthermore, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to constantly determine whether the self-identification code (ID) generated by the ID output circuit IDC is normal (for example, by executing an ID determination process each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed), when the decorative board 4100 is accessed illegally while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and normal performance cannot be performed by the decorative board 4100, the self-identification code (ID) generated by the ID output circuit IDC can be returned to a normal state, immediately restoring the decorative board 4100 to a state where performance can be performed normally, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in playing due to the decorative board 4100 not being able to perform performance normally.

In addition, the compartment cover 4130 in this example has an opening that exposes the ID output circuit IDC mounted on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100. Therefore, when the right-side gaming panel 1100R, right-side front component 1000R, and right-side rear box 3010R, which are provided in front of the decorative board 4100, are released from their attached state, the ID output circuit IDC can be operated to set a self-identification code (ID) without removing the compartment cover 4130 from the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100. Furthermore, because the ID output circuit IDC is positioned on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 so as to be separated from other electronic components (such as various LEDs 4120), the ID output circuit IDC can be easily identified when visually viewing the decorative board 4100 from the surface (front, front mounting surface) side. It is sufficient that the compartment cover 4130 has an opening that exposes at least a portion of the ID output circuit IDC (such as a switch that sets the self-identification code (ID)) mounted on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100; other electronic components (such as the LED 4120 in this example) may be covered by the compartment cover 4130, or an opening that exposes at least a portion of the other electronic component (such as the LED 4120 in this example) (for example, the light-emitting element of the LED 4120) may be formed in the compartment cover 4130. Furthermore, if an LED 4120 is disposed as the other electronic component, by forming an opening in the compartment cover 4130 that exposes a portion of the LED 4120 (for example, the light-emitting element of the LED 4120), the light emitted from the LED 4120 can be irradiated forward of the pachinko machine 1 without being reduced by the compartment cover 4130, making it possible to produce effects with increased light intensity.

In addition, the compartment cover 4130 in this example is formed from an opaque material (e.g., opaque or translucent PP, etc.), and although the surface (front surface, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 cannot be seen through the compartment cover 4130, electronic components such as the ID output circuit IDC and various LEDs 4120 can be seen through openings formed in the compartment cover.

The compartment cover 4130 may be formed from a transparent material (e.g., a colorless transparent or colored transparent material such as PS or PET) so that the surface (front surface, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 can be seen through the compartment cover 4130. Even in this case, an opening may be formed in the compartment cover 4130 that exposes at least a portion of the ID output circuit IDC (e.g., a switch that sets the self-identification code (ID)) mounted on the surface (front surface, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 and covers everything else. Other electronic components (e.g., the LED 4120 in this example) may be covered by the compartment cover 4130, or an opening may be formed in the compartment cover 4130 that exposes at least a portion of the other electronic component (e.g., the LED 4120's light-emitting element) (e.g., the LED 4120). As a result, the compartment cover 4130 protects electronic components such as the ID output circuit IDC and various LEDs 4120, preventing unauthorized access and enhancing security, and since the compartment cover 4130 is made of a transparent material, the light emitted from the LEDs 4120 can be directed forward of the pachinko machine 1 without being reduced as much as possible by the compartment cover 4130, making it possible to perform effects with increased light intensity. Furthermore, when the compartment cover 4130 is made of a transparent material, a partition wall extending from the back surface of the compartment cover 4130 toward the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 may be formed around all or part of the ID output circuit IDC to separate the area on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 where the ID output circuit IDC is mounted from other areas, or printing or attaching a sticker or the like may be performed on the surface of the compartment cover 4130 to surround all or part of the area where the ID output circuit IDC is mounted. Furthermore, while the above effects can be achieved even when the compartment cover 4130 is formed as a colored transparent material, forming it as a colorless transparent material improves the translucency of the light emitted by the various LEDs 4120 and the visibility of the ID output circuit IDC compared to forming it as a colored transparent material, and prevents the compartment cover 4130 from emphasizing light of a specific color (the same color as the compartment cover 4130), allowing all emitted colors to be emitted under the same conditions, achieving uniform light emission without unevenness.

In addition, the decorative board 4100, on whose surface (front, front mounting surface) the various LEDs 4120 are mounted, is positioned so that its surface (front, front mounting surface) faces the front of the pachinko machine 1 (the front side of the pachinko machine 1) (so that its surface (front, front mounting surface) faces the player) when the right-side game board 5AR is fixed to the main body frame 4, and the ID output circuit IDC and various LEDs 4120 mounted on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 are also positioned so that they face the front of the pachinko machine 1 (the direction facing the player).

As described above, if there is unauthorized access to the decorative board 4100 corresponding to the new right-side gaming board 5AR, the effects of the decorative board 4100 may not be executed properly, which may reduce interest in the game. In this embodiment, the decorative board 4100 is positioned so that its surface (front, front mounting surface) faces the front of the pachinko machine 1 (facing the player), and the ID output circuit IDC and various LEDs 4120 mounted on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 are also positioned so that they face the front of the pachinko machine 1 (facing the player). Therefore, anyone attempting unauthorized access to the decorative board 4100 (ID output circuit IDC, various LEDs, etc.) will be accessing it from the front of the pachinko machine 1, making them more visible to the gaming hall's island equipment and gaming hall employees during unauthorized access, making it easier to detect unauthorized access. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from the outside, preventing unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from the outside from causing the decorative board 4100 to be unable to properly execute its effects, and preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the decorative board 4100 being unable to properly execute its effects.

In this example, the pachinko machine 1 is configured to make it difficult to access the decorative substrate 4100 from the back side. Specifically, a plate-shaped member is disposed behind the decorative substrate 4100 on the right-side gaming board 5AR on which the decorative substrate 4100 is mounted. The plate-shaped member of the right-side gaming board 5AR is attached along part or all of the outer surface of the back member (back surface member) of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 in which the decorative substrate 4100 is housed. The plate-shaped member of the right-side gaming board 5AR increases the strength of the rear box 3010 against external impacts and reduces the workability of the rear box 3010, such as by forming an opening in the back member (back surface member) of the rear box 3010. For example, an opening can be formed in the back member (back surface member) of the rear box 3010, preventing unauthorized access to the decorative substrate 4100 housed within the rear box 3010 through the opening. This prevents unauthorized external access to the ID output circuit IDC from causing the decorative board 4100 to be unable to properly execute its effects, and prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the decorative board 4100 not being able to properly execute its effects. Furthermore, the plate-like member of the right-side gaming board 5AR is preferably made of metal, for example, an alloy such as aluminum or iron, in order to increase the strength of the back box 3010 against external impacts and to reduce the workability of the back box 3010, such as when forming openings in the back member of the back box 3010.

Furthermore, the metal plate-like member of the right-side gaming board 5AR need only be positioned behind the decorative board 4100 so as to overlap at least a portion of the decorative board 4100. It may be attached along part or all of the inner surface of the back member (back surface member) of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 in which the decorative board 4100 is housed, or part or all of the back member (back surface member) of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 may be made of metal. Similar to a member attached along part or all of the outer surface of the back member (back surface member) of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000, this increases the strength of the rear box 3010 against external impacts and reduces the workability of the rear box 3010, such as by forming an opening in the back member (back surface member) of the rear box 3010. This prevents unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from the outside, preventing the decorative board 4100 from being unable to properly execute effects, and prevents a decrease in game enjoyment due to the decorative board 4100 not being able to properly execute effects.

As described above, a white resist is formed on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100. The LEDs 4120 mounted on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 have white packages (not limited to white, but including colors similar to white, such as off-white and beige). Furthermore, on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, near the mounted ID output circuit IDC and various LEDs 4120, a surface-side notation indicating the attributes of the surface-side electronic components, such as the component number of the surface-side electronic components and an area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic components are to be placed (which may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic components, and model number of the surface-side electronic components), is silk-screened on a solid white resist using yellow paint, a light color that is not easily noticeable against white. In contrast, the ID output circuit IDC has a dark-colored exterior (black in this embodiment, but not limited to black, and can be a color that contrasts well with white, such as navy blue or purple) (it is sufficient if most of it is dark, or it can have a light-colored exterior in part, or light-colored letters (such as a model number) written on part of the exterior). Furthermore, of the multiple electronic components mounted on the decorative board 4100, electronic components with dark-colored exteriors, excluding the ID output circuit IDC, such as resistors and capacitors, are mounted on the back mounting surface of the decorative board 4100.

Therefore, on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 on which a white resist is formed, the ID output circuit IDC, which has a dark exterior with high contrast (light and dark), can be easily identified, for example, by visual inspection. In other words, the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 is configured to have a low contrast combination except for the ID output circuit IDC, so the ID output circuit IDC stands out when the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 is viewed visually, drawing attention to the ID output circuit IDC when the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 is viewed visually. This makes it easy to identify the ID output circuit IDC, so if there is unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside and the decorative board 4100 is unable to properly perform its effects due to this unauthorized access, an amusement hall employee can easily visually identify the dark ID output circuit IDC from the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 and immediately determine whether or not there has been unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC. This means that if there is unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC, the ID output circuit IDC can be corrected, preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the decorative board 4100 being unable to properly perform its effects.

Of the multiple electronic components mounted on the decorative board 4100, electronic components (e.g., resistors, capacitors, etc.) with dark exteriors, excluding the ID output circuit IDC, are configured to be mounted on the back surface (rear surface, back mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100. However, it is sufficient that the configuration is such that electronic components with dark exteriors different from the ID output circuit IDC are not placed in the area where the ID output circuit IDC is placed among the areas on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 partitioned by the partition cover 4130, and electronic components with dark exteriors different from the ID output circuit IDC may be placed in the area where the ID output circuit IDC is not placed. In addition, the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, partitioned by the partition cover 4130, is shown to be divided into an area where only the ID output circuit IDC is arranged and an area where the ID output circuit IDC is not arranged. However, the area of the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, partitioned by the partition cover 4130 where the ID output circuit IDC is mounted, may also be used to arrange an electronic component, separate from the ID output circuit IDC, whose exterior color contrasts poorly with the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100. In this case, the ID output circuit IDC can still be made to stand out. Furthermore, the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, partitioned by the partition cover 4130, may also be divided into an area where only the ID output circuit IDC is arranged and an area where multiple types of electronic components other than the ID output circuit IDC are arranged. In this case, too, the arrangement of only the ID output circuit IDC allows differentiation from other areas, making it easier to identify the area where the ID output circuit IDC is arranged.

In addition, in this embodiment, the compartment cover 4130 is formed in the same white color as the resist formed on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100. Therefore, in addition to the resist formed on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, the surface-side markings, and the LEDs 4120 mounted on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, the compartment cover 4130 also has a low contrast with the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, and only the ID output circuit IDC has a high contrast with the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100. As a result, when the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 is visually inspected, the ID output circuit IDC stands out, making it easier to identify the ID output circuit IDC. The entire compartment cover 4130 is not limited to being a color (white, yellow, off-white, beige, etc.) that contrasts poorly with the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100; as long as the surface of the decorative substrate 4100 (the surface facing the front of the pachinko machine 1) is a color that contrasts poorly with the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, the surface of the compartment cover 4130 may be colored, painted, printed, etc. in a color that contrasts poorly with white (white, yellow, off-white, beige, etc.), or may have a sticker attached thereto in a color that contrasts poorly with white (white, yellow, off-white, beige, etc.). Furthermore, even when the compartment cover 4130 is formed colorless and transparent, the color of the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, including the compartment cover 4130, can be a low-contrast combination in the area excluding the ID output circuit IDC.

Here, on the surface (front, mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, where the area other than the ID output circuit IDC is a combination of light colors with low contrast, the ID output circuit IDC, which has a black exterior and high contrast on the surface (front, mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, is visible to the player, disrupting the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 and reducing interest in the game. In this embodiment, the ID output circuit IDC is mounted on the same surface as the various LEDs 4120 on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100. This makes it difficult to look directly at the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 due to the light emitted by the various LEDs 4120, making the ID output circuit IDC less noticeable. This prevents the player from seeing information unrelated to the game, disrupting the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 and reducing interest in the game.

[Another aspect of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa that generates a self-identification code (ID)]
In the above embodiment, a parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa is used as an example of a unique value generating unit that generates a unique value that can identify the right-side gaming board 5AR, and it has been explained that a self-identification code (ID) that is preset in the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa is transmitted as a signal from the ID output circuit IDC to the peripheral control board 1510. However, the unique value generating unit of the present invention is not limited to the form of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa, and may be, for example, a form that is composed of a switch mechanism using at least one dip switch mounted on the decorative board 4100 attached to the right-side gaming board 5AR, or a form that is composed of a photosensor mechanism in which the self-identification code (ID) is mechanically set when the right-side gaming board 5AR is assembled.

Figure 271 is a schematic oblique view of a portion of the right rear box 3010R of the rear unit 3000 of the right gaming board 5AR, viewed from the front. As shown in Figure 271, the switch mechanism has at least one dip switch mounted on the decorative board 4100 of the right gaming board 5AR. In this embodiment, the switch mechanism has two dip switches 4110A, 4110B. The dip switch 4110A is a rotary switch that can set a binary value by rotating the operating part, and in this embodiment, the dip switch 4110A can be set to a value between 0 and 15. In addition, the dip switch 4110B is an on/off switch that can be switched on and off by operating the operating part. The switch mechanism of this embodiment has a dip switch 4110A that can be set to a value between 0 and 15, and a dip switch 4110B that can be turned on and off. By operating the operation parts of each dip switch 4110A, 4110B, 32 different self-identification codes (IDs) can be generated. The self-identification codes (IDs) are preset by operating the operation parts of each dip switch 4110A, 4110B.

The self-identification code (ID) generated by the switch mechanism is transmitted as a signal to the peripheral control board 1510 via the ID output circuit IDC. Therefore, in the configuration using the switch mechanism, similar to the configuration in which a preset self-identification code (ID) is transmitted to the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa of the present embodiment, human error, such as leaving the right-side gaming board corresponding to the old left-side gaming board 5AL instead of replacing it with the right-side gaming board 5AR corresponding to the new left-side gaming board 5AL, is prevented. This prevents the loss of consistency throughout the gaming machine when a human error occurs, and reduces a decline in gaming interest. Furthermore, in the configuration using the switch mechanism, the self-identification code (ID) can be easily set by operating the operating parts of each DIP switch 4110A, 4110B.

Figure 272 is a schematic exploded oblique view of a portion of the right-side gaming board 5AR disassembled into the right-side gaming panel 1100R and the right-side rear box 3010R, viewed from the front. As shown in Figure 272, the photosensor mechanism has at least one photosensor 4110C mounted on the decorative substrate 4100 of the right-side gaming board 5AR, and a shielding portion 4110C4 attached to the right-side gaming panel 1100R of the right-side gaming board 5AR and capable of shielding the light guided by the photosensor 4110C. The photosensor mechanism of this embodiment has three photosensors 4110C and two shielding portions 4110C4. The photosensor 4110C, for example, has a light-emitting unit 4110C2 that emits light and a light-receiving unit 4110C3 that receives light emitted from the light-emitting unit 4110C2, and is switched on and off depending on whether the light-receiving unit 4110C3 receives light emitted from the light-emitting unit 4110C2. In the photosensor mechanism of this embodiment, three photosensors 4110C are mounted side by side on the surface (front surface, upper mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 of the right-side gaming board 5AR, and each photosensor 4110C is on when its light-receiving unit 4110C3 receives light. In the photosensor mechanism of this embodiment, eight different self-identification codes (IDs) can be generated by switching the three photosensors 4110C on and off.

The shielding portion 4110C4 can be attached to the back surface of the right-side gaming panel 1100R in a position facing each photosensor 4110C, and has a shielding member that extends from the back surface of the right-side gaming panel 1100R between the light-emitting portion 4110C2 and the light-receiving portion 4110C3 of the opposing photosensor 4110C, blocking the light-receiving portion 4110C3 from receiving light emitted from the light-emitting portion 4110C2. In this embodiment, the shielding portion 4110C4 is attached to a position facing the photosensors 4110C on both sides, excluding the center, of the three photosensors 4110C mounted side by side on the decorative board 4100 of the right-side gaming board 5AR. If the shielding portion 4110C4 is not provided, a self-identification code (ID) will be generated in which all three photosensors 4110C are turned on. However, since all three photosensors 4110C will also be turned on when the right-side gaming panel 1100R is not attached to the right-side gaming board 5AR, it is preferable not to use a self-identification code (ID) in which all three photosensors 4110C are turned on.

The self-identification code (ID) generated by the photosensor mechanism is transmitted as a signal to the peripheral control board 1510 via the ID output circuit IDC. Therefore, in the configuration using the photosensor mechanism, similar to the configuration in which a preset self-identification code (ID) is transmitted to the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa of the present embodiment, human error, such as leaving the right-side gaming board corresponding to the old left-side gaming board 5AL instead of replacing it with the right-side gaming board 5AR corresponding to the new left-side gaming board 5AL, can be prevented. This prevents the loss of consistency across the entire gaming machine when a human error occurs, and reduces a decline in gaming interest. Furthermore, in the configuration using the photosensor mechanism, it is difficult to change the mounting position of the shielding portion 4110C4 attached to the right-side gaming panel 1100R, making it difficult to easily change the self-identification code (ID) setting, thereby preventing unauthorized changes to the self-identification code (ID).

[Summary A1]
A gaming machine includes a gaming frame-side component having an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a gaming board-side component attached to the gaming frame-side component and having a first gaming board-side component and a second gaming board-side component, the gaming board-side component being attached to the gaming frame-side component and including the first gaming board-side component and the second gaming board-side component. The first gaming board-side component includes a presentation control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes game presentations. The second gaming board-side component includes an eigenvalue generating means capable of generating an eigenvalue that can identify the second gaming board-side component, an eigenvalue transmitting unit that transmits the eigenvalue generated by the eigenvalue generating means to the presentation control board, and a specific board on which multiple electronic components are mounted. The eigenvalue generating means is provided on the first board surface side of the specific board, and the presentation control board is capable of executing an unconnected notification process that notifies of an unconnected state when an eigenvalue is not input from the eigenvalue transmitting unit. The second game board side component has a partition section that partitions the first board surface of the specific board into a specific area including an area where the eigenvalue generating means is provided and a non-specific area that does not include an area where the eigenvalue generating means is provided.

Specifically, for example, pachinko machine 1 comprises a main frame 4, which is the gaming frame component, and a divided gaming board 5A fixed to the main frame 4 of FIG. 248, which is the gaming board component. The divided gaming board 5A is composed of a left gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and a right gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component. The left gaming board 5AL is composed of multiple boards (e.g., main control board 1310 housed in main control unit 1300), including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board that executes game performances and is equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, a microprocessor that integrates a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, and various I/O interfaces on a single semiconductor chip. The right-side gaming board 5AR is equipped with a parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa, which is a unique value generating means that generates a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify it as the right-side gaming board 5AR; an ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmitting unit that transmits the self-identification code (ID) generated by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa, to the peripheral control board 1510; and a specific board (decorative board 4100 on which electronic components such as various LEDs 4120 are mounted) on the first board surface of which are mounted multiple electronic components (such as various LEDs 4120) including an IDC output circuit IDC that primarily consists of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa.

The peripheral control board 1510 is capable of executing an unconnected notification process (for example, the power-on error response 7 described above) that notifies of an unconnected state (for example, the power-on state 8 described above) when there is no self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC (for example, the power-on unconnected error 1 described above). The right-side game board 5AR has a partition cover 4130, which is a partition that separates the ID output circuit IDC from other electronic components (such as the various LEDs 4120) among the multiple electronic components mounted on the first board surface of the decorative board 4100.

In this way, when there is no self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC (e.g., in the case of the above-mentioned power-on unconnection error 1), it is possible to execute a disconnection notification process (e.g., the above-mentioned power-on error response 7) that notifies of an unconnected state (e.g., the above-mentioned power-on state 8). This prevents incomplete effects from being executed when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are not connected, thereby preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the game. The partition cover 4130 covers the first board surface of the decorative board 4100 and separates the ID output circuit IDC, which generates the self-identification code (ID), from other electronic components (such as the various LEDs 4120). This prevents unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from the outside, preventing unauthorized effects from being executed, and preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, because an opening is formed in the compartment cover 4130, when the right-side gaming panel 1100R and right-side front component 1000R are disassembled from the right-side rear box 3010R, electronic components such as the ID output circuit IDC and various LEDs 4120 can be seen through the opening, even when the compartment cover 4130 is attached to the front of the right-side gaming panel 1100R. In addition, because the ID output circuit IDC is separated from other electronic components (such as the various LEDs 4120), the ID output circuit IDC can be easily identified.

[Summary A2]
A gaming machine includes a gaming frame-side component having an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a gaming board-side component attached to the gaming frame-side component and having a first gaming board-side component and a second gaming board-side component, the gaming board-side component being attached to the gaming frame-side component and including the first gaming board-side component and the second gaming board-side component. The first gaming board-side component includes a presentation control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes game presentations. The second gaming board-side component includes an eigenvalue generating means capable of generating an eigenvalue that can identify the second gaming board-side component, an eigenvalue transmitting unit that transmits the eigenvalue generated by the eigenvalue generating means to the presentation control board, and a specific board on which multiple electronic components are mounted. The eigenvalue generating means is provided on the first board surface side of the specific board, and the presentation control board is capable of executing an unconnected notification process that notifies of an unconnected state when an eigenvalue is not input from the eigenvalue transmitting unit. The specific board is arranged so that the first board surface faces the front of the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, pachinko machine 1 comprises a main frame 4, which is the gaming frame component, and a divided gaming board 5A fixed to the main frame 4 (Fig. 248), which is the gaming board component. The divided gaming board 5A is composed of a left gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and a right gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component. The left gaming board 5AL is composed of multiple boards (e.g., main control board 1310 housed in main control unit 1300), including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board that executes game performances and is equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, a microprocessor that integrates a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, and various I/O interfaces on a single semiconductor chip. The right-side gaming board 5AR is equipped with a parallel-serial circuit IDCa, which is a unique value generating means that generates a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify it as the right-side gaming board 5AR; an ID output circuit IDC (see Figure 251), which is a unique value transmitting unit that transmits the self-identification code (ID) generated by the parallel-serial circuit IDCa to the peripheral control board 1510; and a specific board (decorative board 4100 on which various LEDs 4120 are mounted) on the first board surface of which multiple electronic components (such as various LEDs 4120) including the ID output circuit IDC are mounted.

The peripheral control board 1510 is capable of executing an unconnected notification process (for example, the power-on error response 7 described above) that notifies of an unconnected state (for example, the power-on state 8 described above) when no self-identification code (ID) is input from the ID output circuit IDC (for example, the power-on unconnected error 1 described above). The decorative board 4100, on which the various LEDs 4120 are mounted, is positioned so that its first board surface faces the front of the pachinko machine 1.

In this way, when there is no input of the self-identification code (ID) from the ID output circuit IDC (for example, in the case of the unconnected error 1 at power-on described above), it is possible to execute an unconnected notification process (for example, the error response 7 at power-on described above) that notifies of an unconnected state (for example, the state 8 at power-on described above).This prevents incomplete presentations from being executed when the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are unconnected, thereby preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, the decorative board 4100 on which the various LEDs 4120 are mounted is positioned so that its first board surface faces the front of the pachinko machine 1. This makes it easier for the island equipment in the amusement hall and employees to visually detect any unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside, suppressing unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside and preventing unauthorized effects from being executed through unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

[Summary A3]
A gaming machine includes a gaming frame-side component having an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a gaming board-side component attached to the gaming frame-side component and having a first gaming board-side component and a second gaming board-side component, the gaming board-side component being attached to the gaming frame-side component and including the first gaming board-side component and the second gaming board-side component. The first gaming board-side component includes a presentation control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes game presentations. The second gaming board-side component includes an eigenvalue generating means capable of generating an eigenvalue that can identify the second gaming board-side component, an eigenvalue transmitting unit that transmits the eigenvalue generated by the eigenvalue generating means to the presentation control board, and a specific board on which multiple electronic components are mounted. The eigenvalue generating means is provided on the first board surface side of the specific board, and the presentation control board is capable of executing an unconnected notification process that notifies of an unconnected state when an eigenvalue is not input from the eigenvalue transmitting unit. A light-colored white resist is formed on the first substrate surface of the specific substrate, and the eigenvalue generating means provided on the first substrate surface side on which the white resist is formed has a dark exterior.

Specifically, for example, pachinko machine 1 comprises a main frame 4, which is the gaming frame component, and a divided gaming board 5A fixed to the main frame 4 (Fig. 248), which is the gaming board component. The divided gaming board 5A is composed of a left gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and a right gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component. The left gaming board 5AL is composed of multiple boards (e.g., main control board 1310 housed in main control unit 1300), including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board that executes game performances and is equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, a microprocessor that integrates a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, and various I/O interfaces on a single semiconductor chip. The right-side gaming board 5AR is equipped with a parallel-serial circuit IDCa, which is a unique value generating means that generates a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify it as the right-side gaming board 5AR; an ID output circuit IDC (see Figure 251), which is a unique value transmitting unit that transmits the self-identification code (ID) generated by the parallel-serial circuit IDCa to the peripheral control board 1510; and a specific board (decorative board 4100 on which various LEDs 4120 are mounted) on the first board surface of which multiple electronic components (such as various LEDs 4120) including the ID output circuit IDC are mounted.

The peripheral control board 1510 is capable of executing an unconnected notification process (for example, the power-on error response 7 described above) that notifies of an unconnected state (for example, the power-on state 8 described above) when no self-identification code (ID) is input from the ID output circuit IDC (for example, the power-on unconnected error 1 described above). A white resist is formed as a light color on the first board surface of the decorative board 4100 on which the various LEDs 4210 are mounted, and the ID output circuit IDC has a dark black exterior.

In this way, when there is no self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC (for example, in the case of the power-on unconnection error 1 described above), it is possible to execute an unconnection notification process (for example, the power-on error response 7 described above) that notifies of an unconnected state (for example, the power-on state 8 described above). This prevents an incomplete effect from being executed when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are unconnected, thereby preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, because a white resist is formed on the first board surface of the decorative board 4100 and the exterior of the ID output circuit IDC is black, even if there is unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside and an unauthorized effect is executed as a result of this unauthorized access, the black ID output circuit IDC against the white decorative board 4100 can be easily identified visually, for example, by an amusement hall employee. This prevents the execution of unauthorized effects by modifying the ID output circuit IDC, thereby preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[Summary B1]
A gaming machine comprising: a gaming frame-side component having an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a gaming board-side component attached to the gaming frame-side component and having a first gaming board-side component and a second gaming board-side component, the gaming board-side component being attached to the gaming frame-side component and having a first gaming board-side component and a second gaming board-side component, the first gaming board-side component comprising a presentation control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes game presentations, the second gaming board-side component comprising: eigenvalue generating means capable of generating a eigenvalue that can be identified as the second gaming board-side component; an eigenvalue transmitting unit that transmits the eigenvalue generated by the eigenvalue generating means to the presentation control board; and a specific board on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted. The unique value generating means is provided on the first board surface side of the specific board, and the performance control board is capable of executing an abnormal connection notification process that notifies of an abnormal connection state when the unique value input from the unique value transmission unit is not a preset value. The second game board side component has a partition unit that partitions the first board surface of the specific board into a specific area including an area where the unique value generating means is provided and a non-specific area that does not include the area where the unique value generating means is provided.

Specifically, for example, pachinko machine 1 comprises a main frame 4, which is the gaming frame component, and a divided gaming board 5A fixed to the main frame 4 (Fig. 248), which is the gaming board component. The divided gaming board 5A is composed of a left gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and a right gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component. The left gaming board 5AL is composed of multiple boards (e.g., main control board 1310 housed in main control unit 1300), including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board that executes game performances and is equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, a microprocessor that integrates a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, and various I/O interfaces on a single semiconductor chip. The right-side gaming board 5AR is equipped with a parallel-serial circuit IDCa, which is a unique value generating means that generates a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify it as the right-side gaming board 5AR; an ID output circuit IDC (see Figure 251), which is a unique value transmitting unit that transmits the self-identification code (ID) generated by the parallel-serial circuit IDCa to the peripheral control board 1510; and a specific board (decorative board 4100 on which various LEDs 4120 are mounted) on the first board surface of which multiple electronic components (such as various LEDs 4120) including the ID output circuit IDC are mounted.

The peripheral control board 1510 is capable of executing an abnormal connection notification process (for example, the above-mentioned power-on error response 1) that notifies of an abnormal connection state (for example, the above-mentioned power-on state 2) when the self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC is not a preset value (for example, the above-mentioned power-on ID error 1). The right-side game board 5AR has a partition cover 4130, which is a partition that separates the ID output circuit IDC from other electronic components (such as the various LEDs 4120) among the multiple electronic components mounted on the first board surface of the decorative board 4100.

In this way, if the self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC is not a preset value (e.g., in the case of the above-mentioned ID error 1 upon power-on), an abnormal connection notification process (e.g., the above-mentioned power-on error response 1) can be executed to notify of an abnormal connection state (e.g., the above-mentioned power-on state 2). This prevents incomplete effects from being executed due to an abnormal connection state between the left gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, and reduces a decrease in the player's interest in the game. The partition cover 4130 covers the first board surface of the decorative board 4100 and separates the ID output circuit IDC, including the parallel-serial circuit IDCa that generates the self-identification code (ID), from other electronic components (such as the various LEDs 4120). This prevents unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside, preventing the execution of unauthorized effects and reducing a decrease in the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, because an opening is formed in the compartment cover 4130, when the right-side gaming panel 1100R and right-side front component 1000R are disassembled from the right-side rear box 3010R, electronic components such as the ID output circuit IDC and various LEDs 4120 can be seen through the opening, even when the compartment cover 4130 is attached to the front of the right-side gaming panel 1100R. In addition, because the ID output circuit IDC is separated from other electronic components (such as the various LEDs 4120), the ID output circuit IDC can be easily identified.

[Summary B2]
A gaming machine comprising: a gaming frame-side component having an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a gaming board-side component attached to the gaming frame-side component having a first gaming board-side component and a second gaming board-side component, the gaming board-side component being attached to the gaming frame-side component and having a first gaming board-side component and a second gaming board-side component, the first gaming board-side component comprising a presentation control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes game presentations, the second gaming board-side component comprising: eigenvalue generating means capable of generating a eigenvalue that can be identified as the second gaming board-side component; an eigenvalue transmitting unit that transmits the eigenvalue generated by the eigenvalue generating means to the presentation control board; and a specific board on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted. The specific board is arranged so that the first board surface faces the front of the gaming machine, and the performance control board is capable of executing an abnormal connection notification process that notifies the player that an abnormal connection state exists when the specific value input from the specific value transmission unit is not a preset value.

Specifically, for example, pachinko machine 1 comprises a main frame 4, which is the gaming frame component, and a divided gaming board 5A fixed to the main frame 4 (Fig. 248), which is the gaming board component. The divided gaming board 5A is composed of a left gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and a right gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component. The left gaming board 5AL is composed of multiple boards (e.g., main control board 1310 housed in main control unit 1300), including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board that executes game performances and is equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, a microprocessor that integrates a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, and various I/O interfaces on a single semiconductor chip. The right-side gaming board 5AR is equipped with a parallel-serial circuit IDCa, which is a unique value generating means that generates a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify it as the right-side gaming board 5AR; an ID output circuit IDC (see Figure 251), which is a unique value transmitting unit that transmits the self-identification code (ID) generated by the parallel-serial circuit IDCa to the peripheral control board 1510; and a specific board (decorative board 4100 on which various LEDs 4120 are mounted) on the first board surface of which multiple electronic components (such as various LEDs 4120) including the ID output circuit IDC are mounted.

The peripheral control board 1510 is capable of executing an abnormal connection notification process (for example, the above-mentioned power-on error response 1) that notifies of an abnormal connection state (for example, the above-mentioned power-on state 2) when the self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC is not a preset value (for example, the above-mentioned power-on ID error 1). The decorative board 4100, on which the various LEDs 4120 are mounted, is positioned so that the first board surface faces the front of the pachinko machine 1.

In this way, if the self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC is not a preset value (for example, in the case of ID error 1 at power-on described above), it is possible to execute an abnormal connection notification process (for example, error response 1 at power-on described above) that notifies of an abnormal connection state (for example, state 2 at power-on described above).This prevents incomplete presentations from being executed when the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are in an abnormal connection state, and prevents a decrease in the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, the decorative board 4100 on which the various LEDs 4120 are mounted is positioned so that its first board surface faces the front of the pachinko machine 1. This makes it easier for the island equipment in the amusement hall and employees to visually detect any unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside, suppressing unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside and preventing unauthorized effects from being executed through unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

[Summary B3]
A gaming machine comprising: a gaming frame-side component having an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a gaming board-side component attached to the gaming frame-side component and having a first gaming board-side component and a second gaming board-side component, the gaming board-side component being attached to the gaming frame-side component and having a first gaming board-side component and a second gaming board-side component, the first gaming board-side component comprising a presentation control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes game presentations, the second gaming board-side component comprising: eigenvalue generating means capable of generating a eigenvalue that can be identified as the second gaming board-side component; an eigenvalue transmitting unit that transmits the eigenvalue generated by the eigenvalue generating means to the presentation control board; and a specific board on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted. The unique value generating means is provided on the first board surface side of the specific board, and the performance control board is capable of executing an abnormal connection notification process that notifies of an abnormal connection state when the unique value input from the unique value transmission unit is not a preset value. A light-colored white resist is formed on the first board surface of the specific board, and the unique value generating means provided on the first board surface side on which the white resist is formed has a dark-colored exterior.

Specifically, for example, pachinko machine 1 comprises a main frame 4, which is the gaming frame component, and a divided gaming board 5A fixed to the main frame 4 (Fig. 248), which is the gaming board component. The divided gaming board 5A is composed of a left gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and a right gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component. The left gaming board 5AL is composed of multiple boards (e.g., main control board 1310 housed in main control unit 1300), including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board that executes game performances and is equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, a microprocessor that integrates a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, and various I/O interfaces on a single semiconductor chip. The right-side gaming board 5AR is equipped with a parallel-serial circuit IDCa, which is a unique value generating means that generates a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify it as the right-side gaming board 5AR; an ID output circuit IDC (see Figure 251), which is a unique value transmitting unit that transmits the self-identification code (ID) generated by the parallel-serial circuit IDCa to the peripheral control board 1510; and a specific board (decorative board 4100 on which various LEDs 4120 are mounted) on the first board surface of which multiple electronic components (such as various LEDs 4120) including the ID output circuit IDC are mounted.

The peripheral control board 1510 is capable of executing an abnormal connection notification process (for example, the above-mentioned power-on error response 1) that notifies of an abnormal connection state (for example, the above-mentioned power-on state 2) when the self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC is not a preset value (for example, the above-mentioned case of ID error 1 at power-on). A white resist is formed as a light color on the first board surface of the decorative board 4100 on which the various LEDs 4120 are mounted, and the ID output circuit IDC has a black exterior as a dark color.

In this way, if the self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC is not a preset value (for example, in the case of ID error 1 at power-on described above), it is possible to execute an abnormal connection notification process (for example, error response 1 at power-on described above) that notifies of an abnormal connection state (for example, state 2 at power-on described above).This prevents incomplete presentations from being executed when the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are in an abnormal connection state, and prevents a decrease in the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, because a white resist is formed on the first substrate surface of the decorative substrate 4100 and the exterior of the ID output circuit IDC is black, even if there is unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside and unauthorized performances are executed as a result of the unauthorized access, the black ID output circuit IDC can be easily identified visually from the white decorative substrate 4100, for example, by an amusement hall employee, and modification of the ID output circuit IDC can be prevented to execute unauthorized performances, preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[Setting change and split game board ID error]
Next, the combination of the divided game board 5A (that is, the combination of the right game board 5AR (having only a board on which a microprocessor is not mounted) and the left game board 5AL (having a peripheral control board 1510 or a main control board 1310 on which a microprocessor is mounted, and a board on which a microprocessor is not mounted)) is in an incompatible (mismatched) state (incompatible state or mismatched state. In this example, the right game board 5AR having an ID different from the regular ID and the left game board 5AL having the regular ID are connected.) or the right game board 5AR An example of behavior will be described below when changing the setting value in a disconnected state (disconnected state; in this example, a state in which the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side gaming board 5AL, regardless of whether the right-side gaming board 5AR has a valid ID), where there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming board 5AL (the input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming board 5AR cannot be confirmed), causing a malfunction such as a short circuit or disconnection in the transmission path for transmitting various signals. For comparison, an example of behavior will also be described below when changing the setting value in a compatible (matched) state (matched state) state for the combination of the split gaming board 5A (i.e., a combination of the right-side gaming board 5AR (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left-side gaming board 5AL (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)). Figure 273 is an example of behavior when the setting value is changed when the split gaming board 5A, which is composed of a left gaming board 5AL and a right gaming board 5AR, is compatible (matched) as a combination of split gaming boards 5A; Figure 274 is an example of behavior when the setting value is changed when the combination of split gaming boards 5A is incompatible (mismatched); and Figure 277 is an example of behavior when the setting value is changed when the right gaming board 5AR is not connected.

[Change of setting value when compatible]
As shown in FIG. 273, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 sends "power
On the other hand, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR, and the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left gaming board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 are turned off. Furthermore, as described above, if the predetermined setting value change permission conditions are met when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 starts (in this example, after inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turning it ON, the power switch 630a on the power supply board 630 is operated while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1), then after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes a setting change process (step S37), making it possible to select and determine the setting value. In addition, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, and some or all of the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 may also be made to light up in a predetermined manner, making it easier to determine that power supply to the pachinko machine 1 has started.

In addition, when the setting change process is initiated, a setting change start command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, informing the user that a setting change of the setting value has begun. When the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change start command, it causes the performance display device 1600 to display a setting change notification (in this example, "Setting change in progress") (this may be displayed until the setting change process is completed, or may be displayed for a certain period of time and then terminated), and it also causes the various speakers to repeatedly output a setting change notification sound (an announcement saying "Setting change in progress" and a warning sound such as a "ding dong") at a predetermined volume (this may be the maximum volume that can be set, or a default volume adjusted using a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510). (This may be output repeatedly until the setting change process is completed, or may be output repeatedly a certain number of times (e.g., five times) or for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) and then stop output.)

In addition, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 lights up the various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) and the various LEDs (some or all) mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR in a setting change notification light-emitting mode (in this example, the various LEDs of the door frame unit and the right-side gaming board 5AR are lit in the same color and the light color is switched in a short period of time) according to the setting change (they may be lit in the setting change notification light-emitting mode until the setting change process is completed, or they may be lit in the setting change notification light-emitting mode for a certain period of time and then the setting change notification light-emitting mode is terminated and the lights are turned off or lit in a different light-emitting mode). This notifies the user that a setting value change process is being performed, allowing any unauthorized changes to the setting value to be immediately discovered.

It should be noted that the volume of the setting change notification sounds output from the various speakers while the setting change process is being executed cannot be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227. As mentioned above, the player can adjust the volume of the sounds output from the various speakers by operating the volume adjustment button 227, but the volume of the setting change notification sounds output while the setting change process is being executed cannot be adjusted by the player operating the volume adjustment button 227. As a result, the setting change notification sounds can be output at a predetermined volume while the setting change process is being executed, and the sounds output from the various speakers can reliably notify the player that a setting change is being made. This makes it possible to immediately detect any fraudulent setting changes and prevents fraudulent changes to setting values.

The light intensity of the setting change notification light-emitting mode that is performed during the setting change process cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228. As described above, the player can adjust the light intensity (brightness) of some of the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. However, the setting change notification light-emitting mode that is performed during the setting change process cannot be adjusted by the player operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, during the setting change process, the LEDs on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A are controlled to emit a predetermined light intensity (brightness), enabling the setting change notification light-emitting mode. This setting change notification light-emitting mode reliably notifies the player that a setting change is being made, allowing fraudulent setting changes to be immediately detected and preventing fraudulent changes to setting values.

The LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided gaming board 5A are divided into LEDs (dimmable LEDs) whose light intensity is adjusted when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during normal times (game mode), and LEDs (non-dimmable LEDs) whose light intensity is not adjusted at all times, even when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, regardless of whether it is during normal times (game mode). For example, LEDs that display information about winning or losing, such as the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL, are non-dimmable LEDs, and most of the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, except for the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250, are dimmable LEDs. Furthermore, some of the various LEDs provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be non-dimmable LEDs. In this case, brightness can be adjusted based on the non-dimmable LEDs, making it easier to adjust to the desired brightness.

In addition, in this example of the pachinko machine 1, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated during normal play (play mode), a scale corresponding to the current volume is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 (for example, "The volume has been changed") is output from the various speakers at the volume set in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227. In addition, when the light intensity adjustment button 222 is operated during normal play (play mode), a scale corresponding to the current light intensity (brightness) is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the light intensity adjustment button 222 (for example, "The brightness has been changed") is output from the various speakers at the volume set in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227. In addition, the scales displayed on the effect display device 1600 are provided corresponding to each of the volume adjustment button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 222, and the scales corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) can be changed by operating the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 222 while the scales corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) are displayed.

On the other hand, while the setting change process is being performed, operating the volume adjustment button 227 or light adjustment button 228 does not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) on the performance display device 1600, nor does it output a confirmation sound in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228. Because the performance display device 1600 does not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness), the scale does not change even if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated multiple times. This prevents the scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) from interfering with the visibility of the display of the setting change notification mode on the performance display device 1600, and prevents the confirmation sound in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 from making the setting change notification sound difficult to hear, making it possible to immediately detect any unauthorized setting changes.

In the above description, the performance display device 1600 displays a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) (the volume or light intensity adjusted based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 222) in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 222. However, the scale is not limited to the above, as long as it indicates the degree (level) of the volume or light intensity adjusted in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 222. For example, the degree (level) of the volume or light intensity adjusted in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 222 may be indicated by a change in color or a change in the character (strengthened equipment, change in height, change in body shape, etc.).

Furthermore, during the setting change process, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, and the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left gaming board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 are turned off. In other words, although the pachinko machine 1 of this example comprises a split gaming board 5A made up of the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR, during the setting change, all of the various LEDs provided on the left gaming board 5AL are turned off regardless of whether they are controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, and only the various LEDs provided on the right gaming board 5AR and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are turned on. In this way, while the setting change process is being executed, the light emission patterns of the various LEDs provided on the divided game board 5A are made different between the various LEDs provided on the left game board 5AL and the various LEDs provided on the right game board 5AR, which gives a sense of discomfort to anyone viewing the pachinko machine 1 and makes them immediately aware that the setting change process is being executed. Furthermore, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board mounted on the left-hand gaming board 5AL, and the various LEDs mounted on the functional display unit 1400 and sub-functional display unit 2250 may be configured to light up in a different notification light mode (for example, red flashing) when the setting is changed than the various LEDs on the door frame unit and the right-hand gaming board 5AR. Alternatively, one or both of the LEDs on the functional display unit 1400 and the sub-functional display unit 2250 that display information about winning or losing may be configured to light up in a notification light mode when the setting is changed. In this case, the light emission mode of the LEDs on the right-hand gaming board 5AR can be made different from the light emission mode of the LEDs on the left-hand gaming board 5AL, making it possible to immediately notice that the setting change process is being carried out.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 stores the determined setting value in a specific area of RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a based on the setting value determination operation (in this example, an OFF operation that returns the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 to its initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a)), and sends a setting change command to the peripheral control board 1510 notifying that the setting change process has been terminated.

In addition, when the setting value is confirmed, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs a power-on operation check for a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds). Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the LEDs (such as the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board on the left gaming board 5AL and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board on the right gaming board 5AR, and the various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 mounted on the door frame 3)) to light up in a predetermined light-emitting mode (light-emitting mode during power-on operation check). The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 also controls the drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to operate the movable body in a predetermined operating mode (operating mode during power-on operation check), and performs a power-on operation check to confirm whether the LEDs can be turned on normally and whether the drive motors and drive solenoids can be driven to operate the movable body normally.

In this example, movable bodies that operate by driving drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. using the peripheral control IC 1510a of the performance control board 1510 include, for example, the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the divided game board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, the rear-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3. In the above-mentioned power-on operation check, the peripheral control IC 1510a drives the drive motor, drive solenoid, etc., to move the upper rear movable decorative body 3210 from the raised position to the lowered position while the upper rear first decorative part 3211 is facing forward, and then rotate it around the left-right axis, and then move the upper rear movable decorative body 3210 from the lowered position to the raised position while the upper rear first decorative part 3211 is facing forward, and a confirmation operation is performed in which the left rear movable decorative body 3301 and the right rear movable decorative body 3302 of the lower rear performance unit 3300 are moved from a retracted position that does not cover the front of the performance display device 1600 to the performance display device. The following confirmation operations are performed: the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160 is moved from the normal standby position to an elevated position in front of the performance display device 1600, then moved to a retracted position; the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160 is moved from the normal standby position to an elevated position in front of the performance display device 1600, then rotated around the longitudinal axis and then moved to the standby position; the vibration motor 356 is driven to vibrate the performance operation unit 301 and then stopped; and the operation button lifting drive motor 367 is driven to lift and lower the performance operation unit 301 relative to the performance operation unit cover unit 310. At this time, the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000, the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the rear lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear lower front performance unit 3160, and multiple LEDs 320a that illuminate and decorate the upper part (unit upper cover 312) of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 are each controlled in a predetermined light emission mode.

In addition, in this example, during the power-on operation check, all of the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are lit in a predetermined lighting mode (light-emitting mode during power-on operation check), except for the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 that displays information regarding whether the result was a success or failure. During the power-on operation check, the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 may also be lit to check for any abnormalities. Of the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, all LEDs excluding the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 may not be lit, and some may not be lit. Furthermore, the drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not be driven, and some may not be driven. In addition, when executing the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), some or all of the LEDs (such as the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR, and the various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 mounted on the door frame 3) except for the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding winning or losing, which are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, may not be lit in a predetermined light-emitting mode (light-emitting mode when operation is confirmed when the power is turned on), but may be lit in a light-emitting mode (for example, a RAM clear notification light-emitting mode) that notifies that all areas of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared except for a specific area. Furthermore, in this example, when checking operation at power-on, all of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are configured to be driven, but some of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not be driven.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 completes the setting change process, it sends a setting change command to the peripheral control board 1510 and initiates a process (step S38) to clear all areas of the main control internal RAM except for specific areas. Furthermore, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, that is, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 changes the LEDs (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, various LEDs of the door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, door frame top unit 450, etc. provided on the door frame 3) etc.) except for the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that displays information about winning or losing, to a predetermined light-emitting mode (light-emitting mode when power is turned on to check operation, in this example, whitish purple). The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 lights up the main control internal RAM (illuminated), and drives drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 to perform a power-on operation check in which the movable body operates in a predetermined operating mode (operating mode during power-on operation check), and repeatedly outputs a RAM clear notification sound (an announcement voice saying "Memory has been cleared" and a warning sound such as "ding dong") from various speakers at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set, or may be a default volume adjusted by a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510) (the sound may be repeatedly output until the process of clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except for a specific area and the power-on operation check are completed, or the sound may be repeatedly output a certain number of times (e.g., five times) or for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) and then the output may stop). Meanwhile, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the effect mode on the effect display device 1600, i.e., decorative patterns and background images during normal times (game mode), and does not notify that all areas of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared except for a specific area. Furthermore, if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the message "Door open" may be displayed as a door open abnormality notification display mode to notify this until the main frame 4 is closed. The door open abnormality notification display mode may be any mode that corresponds to the error content, and may be one or any combination of letters, numbers (e.g., error codes), marks, etc.

The effect display device 1600 may also be configured to notify that all areas of the main control's built-in RAM will be cleared except for a specific area. In this case, it may be possible to only display a notification that all areas of the main control's built-in RAM will be cleared except for a specific area, without displaying decorative patterns or background images for normal play (when playable), or to display both the appearance during effect (decorative patterns, background images for normal play (when playable), etc.) and a notification that all areas of the main control's built-in RAM will be cleared except for a specific area. If both the appearance during effect (decorative patterns, background images for normal play (when playable), etc.) and a notification that all areas of the main control's built-in RAM will be cleared except for a specific area are displayed, a notification that all areas of the main control's built-in RAM will be cleared except for a specific area may be displayed in an upper layer that overlaps the display of the appearance during effect (decorative patterns, background images for normal play (when playable), etc.). Furthermore, one or both of the LEDs on the sub-function display unit 2250, which displays information about whether the result was received or not, and the LEDs on the function display unit 1400, which are controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, which are among the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, may be made to emit light in a manner that indicates that all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area will be cleared, or in a manner that indicates operation confirmation when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when a power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process is completed, that is, when a power-on operation check is performed that involves a process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the LEDs (excluding the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information about winning or losing among the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, the door frame unit (door frame 3 The volume of the sound output from the speakers cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment button 227. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the volume of the sound output from the speakers can be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment button 227. However, the volume of the RAM clear notification sound output during the process of clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except for a specific area, which is executed after the setting change process is completed, cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment button 227. Therefore, when the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area begins, a RAM clear alert sound can be output at a predetermined volume, and the sound output from various speakers can reliably notify the user that the main control built-in RAM has been cleared, making it possible to immediately detect any unauthorized clearing of the main control built-in RAM. Furthermore, even if the user does not notice that the setting value has been changed unauthorizedly, the subsequent process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area can make the user aware that the main control built-in RAM has been cleared unauthorizedly, and therefore that there is a possibility that the setting has been changed unauthorizedly, thereby preventing unauthorized changes to the setting value.

Similarly, if a power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process is completed, that is, if a power-on operation check is performed that involves a process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), then after the setting change process is completed, the LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, excluding the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information about winning or losing (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL and the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR, and the door frame unit (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the door frame 3), will remain in the ON/OFF state until the power-on operation check is completed. The power-on operation check is executed by lighting the various LEDs, etc., of the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., in a predetermined light-emitting mode (light-emitting mode during power-on operation check, in this example, whitish-purple), and driving the drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, to operate the movable body in a predetermined operating mode (operating mode during power-on operation check), and the light intensity (brightness) cannot be adjusted by the light intensity adjustment button 228 until the lighting in the predetermined light-emitting mode and operation in the predetermined mode are completed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A can be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228, but the light intensity (brightness) controlled during the power-on operation check, which is executed after the setting change process is completed, cannot be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, when the power-on operation check begins, the LEDs on the various decorative boards attached to the door frame 3 and divided game board 5A can be controlled to emit light at a predetermined light intensity (brightness), reliably signaling that power supply to the pachinko machine 1 has begun. This makes it possible to immediately detect any fraudulent attempts, such as restarting power supply to the pachinko machine 1 after it has been cut off to change a setting value. Furthermore, even if the fraudulent change to the setting value is not noticed, the subsequent power-on operation can make the user aware that power supply to the pachinko machine 1 has been fraudulently started, and thus that a setting change may have been made to the energization, thereby preventing fraudulent changes to the setting value.

Furthermore, if a power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process is completed, that is, if a power-on operation check is performed that involves a process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), then until the power-on operation check is completed after the setting change process is completed, the performance display device 1600 will not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) even if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated. Also, because the performance display device 1600 does not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness), the scale will not change even if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated multiple times. Furthermore, even if a power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process is completed, after the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) is completed and the interrupt permission setting is performed (step S52), it becomes possible for the ball launcher 540 to launch game balls, and detection of game balls at various receiving ports (first starting port 2002, first starting port 2002, large prize port 2005, general prize port 2001, gate 2003) is enabled, making it possible to play the game. In this example, the performance display device 1600 does not display scales corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) until the operation check at power-on is completed, and the scales do not change even if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated multiple times.This prevents the scales corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) from interfering with the visibility of part or all of the display of the performance state (decorative patterns, background images during normal play (when playable state), etc.) on the performance display device 1600, making it easier to determine whether the performance display device 1600 is normal when checking its operation at power-on. That is, when the volume adjustment button 227 or the light adjustment button 228 is operated during normal play (playable state), the effect display device 1600 displays a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) superimposed on top of the display of the effect mode (decorative patterns, background images in normal play (playable state), etc.), and the scale can be changed by operating the volume adjustment button 227 or the light adjustment button 228 multiple times. However, during the power-on operation check to confirm whether the display of the effect display device 1600 is normal, the effect display device 1600 does not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness), so as not to interfere with checking whether the effect mode (decorative patterns, background images in normal play (playable state), etc.) is being displayed normally.

On the other hand, if a power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process is completed, that is, if a power-on operation check is performed that involves a process of clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except for a specific area (step S38), a special confirmation sound (e.g., a beep) different from normal confirmation sounds is output at a predetermined volume (different from the volume set in response to operation of the volume control button 227) as a confirmation sound in response to operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 after the setting change process is completed and until the power-on operation check is completed. However, while the confirmation sound in normal operation is output at a volume changed by the volume adjustment button 227 (the volume of the confirmation sound changes when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated), the special confirmation sound output during the power-on operation check is output at a predetermined volume (the volume does not change when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated). This makes it easy to determine whether the volume adjustment button 227 and light adjustment button 228 are operating normally when the power is turned on, and the output of a special confirmation sound makes it easy to understand that the process of clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except for a specific area (step S38) is being carried out.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 completes the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), and the interrupt permission setting (step S52) is performed, allowing the ball launcher 540 to launch game balls, and control of the illumination of the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250, which display information about winning or losing, is initiated. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is designed so that game balls are not launched by the ball launcher 540 while the setting value change process (step S37) is being executed. It should be noted that any device may be used to control the illumination of the LED of the function display unit 1400 and the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250, and is not limited to devices that immediately light up one or both of the LED of the function display unit 1400 and the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 in a predetermined manner when the ball launcher 540 becomes capable of launching a gaming ball. The device may also light up one or both of the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250 in an illumination mode for displaying special symbol variations or in an illumination mode for a variation presentation when the conditions for starting the variation presentation are met (a gaming ball entering the start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004), or may light up in an illumination mode for displaying special symbol variations or in an illumination mode for a variation presentation after the illumination mode that notifies of an abnormal state or the like has ended, or may be set to an illumination controllable state for displaying special symbol variations or in an illumination mode for a variation presentation.

In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed and the main body frame 4 remains closed, the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR, and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL undergo a process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (step S38), and when the power-on operation check is completed, the light emission mode at the time of power-on operation check and the operating mode at the time of power-on operation check are checked. Based on the completion of the operation (which may be based on the completion of the light-emitting mode during power-on operation check if the operation mode during power-on operation check is configured to end earlier than the light-emitting mode during power-on operation check, or based on the completion of the operation mode during power-on operation check if the operation mode during power-on operation check is configured to end later than the light-emitting mode during power-on operation check), the various LEDs of the door frame unit and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR are controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode, while the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL are controlled to be turned off. Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds, in this example, which is longer than the period from when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 starts checking the operation at power-on until it finishes checking the operation at power-on) has elapsed after the main frame 4 is closed, the light emission control of the serious abnormality warning light emission modes of the various LEDs of the door frame unit and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR and the light-off control of the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL are terminated, and the light emission can be controlled in a light emission mode corresponding to the game status (light emission mode during presentation), just as during game mode. It is sufficient that the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR, and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL are brought into a state in which they can be controlled to emit light when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the main frame 4 is closed, and the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR, and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL are immediately turned on based on the elapse of a predetermined period of time since the main frame 4 is closed. The lighting is not limited to lighting some or all of the various LEDs mounted on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 mounted on the door frame 3), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR, and some or all of the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL, but may be lit in a lighting mode for a variable presentation when the start condition for the variable display is met (a game ball entering the start port (first start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and second start port 2004)), or may be lit in a lighting mode for a variable presentation after the lighting mode that notifies of an abnormal state or the like has ended, or may be set to a state in which the lighting can be controlled to the lighting mode for the presentation.

As described above, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a and the first ON operation is performed, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is met. In other words, the setting change process is executed with the main frame 4 open relative to the outer frame 2, and when the setting change process is completed, the main frame 4, which was opened relative to the outer frame 2, is closed.

In addition, in this example, when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 during normal play (in game mode), a door-opening notification sound (an announcement voice saying "The door is open" and a warning sound such as "ding dong") is repeatedly output from various speakers at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set, or a default volume adjusted using a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510) for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds; in this example, this is shorter than the time required to check operation when the power is turned on), or the output is stopped when the main frame 4 that was opened relative to the outer frame 2 is closed (note that if the main frame 4 is continuously opened relative to the outer frame 2, the output may be stopped after repeated output a certain number of times (e.g., 5 times), or the output may be stopped when the main frame 4 that was opened relative to the outer frame 2 is closed, or the outer frame The output may be stopped when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds, which may be shorter than the period from the start of the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the power-on operation check by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 until both the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the power-on operation check are completed) has elapsed after the main frame 4, which was open to the frame 2, has been closed. In addition, various LEDs of the door frame units (the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3, etc.) and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR are switched to a serious abnormality warning light emitting mode (in this example, a red light of maximum brightness is lit and turned off in a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) The serious abnormality alert light emitting mode is ended when a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds, which in this example is longer than the period from the start of the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the power-on operation check by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 until both the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the power-on operation check) has elapsed after the main frame 4, which has been open to the outer frame 2, is closed (the serious abnormality alert light emitting mode may be ended when the main frame 4, which has been open to the outer frame 2, is closed, or may be ended when the serious abnormality alert light emitting mode is repeatedly executed a certain number of times (for example, 5 times) or for a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) after the main frame 4, which has been open to the outer frame 2, is closed, or When the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed, the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode is terminated and the light is repeatedly controlled to a quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (a mode in which the light is switched between maximum brightness red on and off over a long period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) (slow flashing mode)), and the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode is terminated when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode or when the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode has been repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 times). Furthermore, when the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL are controlled to an extinguished state and the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode if the light is controlled to the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode) is terminated (when the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL are controlled to emit light in a light-emitting mode appropriate to the game situation.

On the other hand, while the setting change process is being executed with the main frame 4 open relative to the outer frame 2, the output of door open alert sounds from the various speakers and the control of the serious abnormality alert light emission mode, which are caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, are not executed. In other words, if the predetermined setting value change permission conditions are met when power is first supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the output of door open alert sounds from the various speakers and the control of the serious abnormality alert light emission mode, which are caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, are not executed, and the output of setting change alert sounds from the various speakers and the control of the setting change alert light emission mode are not executed. Furthermore, in this example, even during the process (step S38) of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 after the setting change process is completed, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performing the power-on operation check, the output of door open alarm sounds from various speakers caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 and the light emission control of the serious abnormality alarm light emission mode (including the semi-serious abnormality alarm light emission mode when the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alarm light emission mode after the serious abnormality alarm light emission mode) are prevented. Therefore, when the setting change process is executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and after the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has finished checking the operation at power-on, it becomes possible to output a door open alert sound from various speakers caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, and to control the light emission of a serious abnormality alert light (including a semi-serious abnormality alert light when the light emission is controlled to a semi-serious abnormality alert light after the serious abnormality alert light).

In addition, if the setting change process is terminated after the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed, that is, if the main frame 4 is closed while the setting change process is being executed and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, even after the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has completed the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has completed the power-on operation check, the output of door open alert sounds from various speakers and the serious abnormality alert light emission mode (including the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode when the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode) caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 will not be executed. However, when changing the setting value, the manager of the gaming parlor or other person in charge normally performs the operation to change the setting value from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 with the main frame 4 open relative to the outer frame 2, and after the setting change process is completed, the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed.

In addition, when the time that has elapsed since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 reaches a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds; in this example, this is shorter than the time required to check operation when the power is turned on), or when the main frame 4 that has been opened relative to the outer frame 2 is closed, the output of the door opening notification sound from the various speakers stops, and the device is placed in a state where sound output during the performance (the output of a performance sound that is performed when the start condition for the variable display is met (the game ball enters the start port (first start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and second start port 2004)) can be executed).For this reason, normally, when the setting change process is executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area when the power is turned on. After the operation check is complete, if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 and the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 has not yet reached a predetermined period, both the output of a door open alert sound from the various speakers caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 and the light emission control of the serious abnormality alert light mode (including the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode when the light emission control is changed to the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode) are executed; if the main frame 4 that was open relative to the outer frame 2 is closed or if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 and the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 has not yet reached a predetermined period, only the light emission control of the serious abnormality alert light mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 is executed.

In addition, in this example, when the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR of the divided gaming board 5A are illuminated in a serious abnormality alert illumination mode (including a semi-serious abnormality alert illumination mode when the illumination is controlled to a semi-serious abnormality alert illumination mode after the serious abnormality alert illumination mode), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL are turned off. This makes it easy for anyone who sees them to notice that an abnormality has occurred (in this case, that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2). In addition, the serious abnormality alert light emitting mode of the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR (when the light emission is controlled to the quasi-serious abnormality alert light emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light emitting mode, the quasi-serious abnormality alert light emitting mode may be included, or the quasi-serious abnormality alert light emitting mode may not be included. In other words, when the light emission is controlled to the serious abnormality alert light emitting mode, the LEDs of the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL whose light emission is controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may also be made to emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode, and even when the light emission is controlled in the quasi-serious abnormality alert light emitting mode, the light emission in the predetermined light emitting mode may be continued, or when the light emission is controlled in the quasi-serious abnormality alert light emitting mode, the LEDs of the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL whose light emission is controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 The LEDs may be configured to stop emitting light in a predetermined light-emitting mode and be controlled to emit light in a light-emitting mode (light-emitting mode during presentation) that corresponds to the game status, as in normal play (when play is possible). In synchronization with this light emission, the LEDs mounted on the decorative board on the left gaming board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may also be configured to emit light in a predetermined light-emitting mode. In this case, the LEDs may be configured to emit light in a different light-emitting mode (for example, a red light (not flashing) at a predetermined brightness (which may be maximum brightness, a brightness lower than maximum brightness, or a brightness in which the light intensity cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228)) than the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (including the semi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode when the light intensity is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode). This also makes it easy for viewers to notice that an abnormality has occurred.

The volume of the door-opening notification sounds output from the various speakers due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 cannot be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227. As mentioned above, the player can adjust the volume output from the various speakers by operating the volume adjustment button 227, but the volume of the door-opening notification sounds output from the various speakers due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 cannot be adjusted by the player operating the volume adjustment button 227. As a result, a door open notification sound can be output at a predetermined volume when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, and even if the pachinko machine 1 is not visible, the sound output from the various speakers can alert the user that the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2. This makes it possible to immediately alert the user when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, and to prevent fraudulent acts such as illegally inserting game balls into the ball entry ports (starting ports (first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004), large prize entry port 2005, general prize entry port 2001, etc.) or replacing the board with an illegal one.

In addition, the light intensity of the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (including the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode when the light is controlled to the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode) that is controlled to emit light when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228. As described above, the player can adjust the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A by operating the volume adjustment button, but the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (including the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode when the light is controlled to the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode) that is controlled to emit light when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 cannot be adjusted by the player operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A are controlled to emit light at a predetermined light amount (brightness), making it possible to perform a serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode, and even when the main frame 4 that was open relative to the outer frame 2 is closed, the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A are controlled to emit light at a predetermined light amount (brightness) until a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, making it possible to perform a serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (a quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode when light emission is controlled to a quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode), and the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (a quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode) is activated. This can reliably notify that an abnormality has occurred in the outer frame 2 (in this case, that the main frame 4 is open, or that the main frame 4 was open), so that if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the player is immediately made aware of the situation and can prevent fraudulent acts such as illegally inserting game balls into ball entry ports (starting ports (first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004), large prize entry port 2005, general prize entry port 2001, etc.) or replacing the board with an illegal one, and even if the player does not realize that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the player is made aware that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, and can recognize the possibility that fraudulent acts have occurred.

Furthermore, when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the performance display device 1600 displays scales corresponding to the current volume and light intensity (brightness) based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228, but no confirmation sound is output in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the light emission is controlled at a light intensity (brightness) corresponding to the operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228 after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode (or the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode, if the light emission mode is changed to the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode) that is executed due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 has ended, and the door opening alert sound that is executed due to the main frame 4 being opened has stopped being output at a volume corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227. This allows the volume and light intensity (brightness) of the variable performance to be adjusted in advance without taking away the opportunity to adjust the volume and light intensity (brightness) even when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, and also prevents the door opening notification sound from becoming difficult to hear due to the confirmation sound made in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228, so that when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, it is immediately noticed and it is possible to prevent the player from illegally entering the ball entry ports ((starting ports (first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004), large prize entry port 2005, general prize entry port This can prevent fraudulent acts such as sending game balls into the slots (e.g., slots 2001) or replacing them with fraudulent boards. Furthermore, when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the scales corresponding to the current volume and light intensity (brightness) may not be displayed on the performance display device 1600 based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228. In this case, it is possible to prevent the scales corresponding to the current volume and light intensity (brightness) from obscuring the display on the performance display device 1600 and obstructing visibility.

On the other hand, during the period when a setting change process is being executed, when the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas is being executed, or when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is executing a power-on operation check, the door open alarm sound caused by the main frame 4 being opened and the light emission control in the serious abnormality alarm light mode (including the semi-serious abnormality alarm light mode when the light emission control is changed to the semi-serious abnormality alarm light mode after the serious abnormality alarm light mode) are not executed. This makes it possible to immediately notice if a setting change process is being executed improperly, or if a setting value is improperly changed and the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas is executed, thereby improving security.

In addition, in this example, the light emission control for the serious abnormality alert light emission mode is started based on the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and the period from closing the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, to ending the serious abnormality alert light emission mode (or the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode if the light emission control is changed to the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode) is longer than the period during which the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 perform a power-on operation check. Therefore, when the setting change process is completed, the main frame 4 that was open to the outer frame 2 is closed, and then the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area and the period during which the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the power-on operation check are completed. When this period ends, the various LEDs of the door frame units (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the plate unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR are cleared. The ED is controlled to emit light by switching from the RAM clear notification mode to the serious abnormality notification light mode (semi-serious abnormality notification light mode if the light is controlled to emit light to the semi-serious abnormality notification light mode after the serious abnormality notification light mode), and then, when the period since the main body frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, is closed reaches a predetermined period, the serious abnormality notification light mode (semi-serious abnormality notification light mode if the light is controlled to emit light to the semi-serious abnormality notification light mode after the serious abnormality notification light mode) is ended and light emission control in the game mode (light mode during presentation) is started. In this way, by continuing the light emission control in the serious abnormality alert light mode (semi-serious abnormality alert light mode if the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode) even after the game mode is entered when the setting change process is executed, it becomes possible to prevent the serious abnormality alert light mode (semi-serious abnormality alert light mode if the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode) from being overlooked if the main frame 4 is illegally opened relative to the outer frame 2, thereby improving security. In this case, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250, which are not subject to light emission control in the serious abnormality alert light mode (or the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode if light emission control is performed to the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode) even when the game mode is entered, are placed in a state in which light emission can be controlled. However, this is not limited to lighting up one or both, or some or all, of the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250 when the game mode is entered, and they may remain off or in a predetermined lighting mode until the start condition for the variable display is met (a game ball enters the start port (first start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and second start port 2004)), and when the start condition for the variable display is met, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 are controlled to light up in a predetermined lighting mode.

[Changing the setting value when it is incompatible]
Next, an example of behavior when changing the setting value when the combination of the split gaming board 5A (i.e., the combination of the right gaming board 5AR (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left gaming board 5AL (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) is in an incompatible (mismatched) state (mismatched state) will be described with reference to FIG. 274. Note that only the parts that differ from when it is compatible will be described below, and redundant explanations will not be provided.

As shown in FIG. 274, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will not output control signals to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR, and the electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR will be in a non-driven state (for example, the various LEDs will be turned off) regardless of whether a setting change is being made or not.

Furthermore, in this example, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible during the ID determination process (step S1003), the fact that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible will not be reported until the setting change process is completed (until the setting change command is received from the main control MPU 1310a). In other words, while the setting change process is being executed, the effect display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs (which may be only some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled in the same manner as when the setting change process was executed when compatible (they may be completely identical, or almost all may be the same with only some differences).

When the setting change process is completed, the main control MPU 1310a sends a setting change command to the peripheral control board 1510 and starts a process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38). When the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, that is, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts a process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), it controls the various speakers and various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, door frame top unit 450, etc. provided on the door frame 3) to the main control when appropriate. The display device 1600 is controlled in the same manner as when the process to clear the internal RAM (step S38) was executed (this may be completely the same, or almost entirely the same with only some differences), while the display device 1600 does not display decorative patterns or the background image used in normal times (when play is possible), but instead displays an abnormal background image (for example, black) on the entire screen and the display device 1600 displays "Right side game board incompatible error occurred" as an incompatible error notification display mode, to notify the user that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible.

The incompatibility error notification display mode in the performance display device 1600 is a still image that does not change over time, and continues until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. Even if the condition for starting the variable display is met (a game ball entering the start port (first start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and second start port 2004)) and the function display unit 1400 starts displaying a variable special pattern, or the sub-function display unit 2250 starts displaying a variable fourth pattern, the performance display device 1600 continues to display the incompatibility error notification display mode and does not perform any variable display such as a variable decorative pattern display. Also, the performance display device 1600 The display format for the incompatible error notification may be any format appropriate to the error content, and may be one or a combination of letters, numbers (e.g., error codes), marks, etc. In this way, during the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas after the setting change process (step S38), the display on the effect display device 1600 notifies the user that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in a static format that does not change over time. This makes it possible to notify the user that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible without interfering with the confirmation process during the power-on operation check.

In addition, in the power-on operation check that is performed in parallel with the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), not only is the power-on operation check not performed on the drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., that are provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR that has been determined to be non-compliant and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, but also on the movable body that performs the power-on operation check (the rear upper rear of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the divided gaming board 5A). Operation checks are also not performed when power is turned on for the drive motors and drive solenoids that drive the performance operation units 301 that are provided on the door frame units (such as the movable decorative body 3210, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear lower performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) and are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003).

Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, even if the power-on operation check is started, the LEDs on the right-side game board 5AR determined to be incompatible will not be controlled to light up in the light-emitting mode used in the power-on operation check, or the movable body will not be controlled to operate in the mode used in the power-on operation check (a control signal will not be output to the right-side game board 5AR), or will not be able to be controlled (a control signal will be output but not input to the right-side game board 5AR). In addition, the drive motors and drive solenoids on the turntable unit 200 (in this example, the performance operation unit 300) that is provided on the door frame 3 and not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) will not be driven to operate the performance operation unit 301 on the performance operation unit 300.

In other words, if the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an incompatible state, there is a risk that some or all of the movable bodies provided on the door frame unit that is not the subject of ID determination will also be deemed incompatible, and when a control signal is input from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, there is a risk that the movable bodies will operate in a manner different from their intended operation.Therefore, some or all of the movable bodies provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR that has been determined to be incompatible or on the door frame unit that is not the subject of ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) and that are operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will not be driven, thereby preventing the movable bodies from operating in a manner different from their intended operation, which could result in damage to the movable bodies or door frame unit, or failure of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable bodies. However, even in this case, LEDs provided on the door frame unit that are not subject to ID determination (for example, multiple LEDs 320a for illuminating and decorating the upper part (unit upper cover 312) of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in a predetermined manner, just as when compatible. This makes it possible to determine that the operation check is being carried out correctly when the power is turned on.

As described above, the game board side components may be configured to include the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit from among the door frame units. In this case, the specific door frame unit is subject to ID determination, and if it is determined to be incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), some or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in door frame units that are not subject to ID determination (non-specific door frame units) and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may also be prevented from being driven. In addition to this, or separately from this, if there are multiple specific door frame units (for example, the right door frame If a part of the door frame (for example, one of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top unit 450) is determined to be incompatible, all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in the specific door frame unit and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be prevented from being driven, or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in all door frame units, including the specific door frame unit, and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be prevented from being driven.

On the other hand, the movable bodies (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear-front-lower performance unit 3160, etc.) provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is equipped with a peripheral control board 1510 on which a peripheral control IC 1510a that executes the ID determination process (step S1003) is implemented, operate in the same manner as normal (when the combination of the divided gaming board 5A is determined to be compatible) when operation confirmation begins upon power-on. In addition, the LEDs mounted on the boards provided on the movable bodies provided on the left side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front lower performance unit 3160) are controlled to emit light in the light emission mode when operation is confirmed when the power is turned on. That is, if the right-side game board 5AR is determined to be incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), as in normal cases (when the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be compatible), the movable bodies provided on the left-side game board 5AL (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left-side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear-front-lower performance unit 3160) are operated in the operating mode when power is turned on, and the LEDs provided on the movable bodies provided on the left-side game board 5AL are controlled to emit light in the lighting mode when power is turned on. This makes it easy to identify the game board (in this case, the left-side game board 5AL) on which the peripheral control board 1510 of the divided game board 5A is provided. In addition, if the right-side game board 5AR is determined to be in an incompatible state in the ID determination process (step S1003), the LEDs mounted on the boards of the movable bodies (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 of the left-side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear-front-lower performance unit 3160) mounted on the boards of the movable bodies are not controlled to emit light in the light emission mode when the power is turned on and the operation is confirmed, and the right-side game board 5AR is determined to be in an incompatible state in the ID determination process (step S1003). If it is determined that the skill board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the LEDs mounted on the circuit boards of the movable bodies provided on the left gaming board 5AL (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left gaming board 5AL of the divided gaming board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160) may be controlled to emit light in the light emission mode when power is turned on to check operation, making it possible to determine whether the right gaming board 5AR is in an incompatible state or is unconnected.

In addition, in this example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, no control is performed to operate the performance operation unit 301 by driving the drive motor or drive solenoid mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame unit (in this example, the tray unit 200) that is not the subject of ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), but the various LEDs mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 are controlled in the same manner as normal (when the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be compatible) during the power-on operation check. That is, when a power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the various LEDs mounted on the boards provided in the presentation operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light in the same light-emitting mode as when the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible. Note that the presentation operation unit 300 may be the specific door frame unit that is the subject of ID determination. Even in this case, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that a specific door frame unit other than the presentation operation unit 300 or the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the drive motors and drive solenoids mounted on the boards provided in the presentation operation unit 300 are not driven to operate the presentation operation unit 301, while the various LEDs mounted on the boards provided in the presentation operation unit 300 may be controlled to emit light in the light-emitting mode when the power is turned on.

In addition, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the LEDs mounted on some of the multiple LEDs mounted on multiple boards provided on the door frame unit that are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), or some of the multiple LEDs mounted on one board, may not be controlled to emit light in the light emission mode at the time of power-on operation check, and some movable bodies may not operate in the operating mode at the time of power-on operation check (for example, power-on operation check may not be performed on some or all of the LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the door frame unit and the drive motors, drive solenoids, LEDs, etc. provided on the movable bodies provided on the door frame unit).

In addition, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the right-side game board 5AR determined to be incompatible and some or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in door frame units not subject to ID determination and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not be driven until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, not just during the power-on operation check, or until the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible. In this case, it is possible to prevent the movable bodies from operating in a manner different from their intended operation, which could result in damage to the movable bodies or door frame unit, or failure of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable bodies.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 completes the power-on operation check (the LED's light-emitting mode during power-on operation check ends and is turned off or lit in a specified light-emitting mode, and the movable body's operating mode during power-on operation check ends and it enters a standby state (a state in which it is stopped (housed) in a predetermined standby position)), thereby completing the power-on operation check. If the power-on operation check operation mode is configured to end earlier than the light-emitting mode during the power-on operation check, the power-on operation check will end when the light-emitting mode during the power-on operation check ends; if the power-on operation check operation mode is configured to end later than the light-emitting mode during the power-on operation check, the power-on operation check will end when the power-on operation check operation mode ends (the movable body operates in the power-on operation check operation mode and then stops (retracts) in the standby position).

Then, when the power-on operation check, which involves a process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), is completed and the game mode is entered, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the incompatibility error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600, repeatedly outputs a game board incompatibility notification sound (an announcement voice saying "An incompatibility error has occurred on the right-side game board. Please turn off the power and check." and a warning sound such as a "ding dong" sound) at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set, or a default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510) from various speakers until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (the output may be stopped after being output repeatedly a certain number of times (e.g., 5 times) or for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds)), and also The various LEDs (some or all) of the frame units (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450 of the door frame 3) are repeatedly controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality warning mode (in this example, they alternate between turning on and off in maximum brightness red in a short period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (high-speed flashing mode)), and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board on the left gaming board 5AL are controlled to an off state, while the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 on the left gaming board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 on the left gaming board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are set to a state in which they can be controlled to emit light in the same way as when they are matched (they may be lit in a specified mode).

The game board incompatibility alert sound is not a single alert sound (such as a "beep") that is output intermittently, but is made up of multiple sounds with different tones, and is further controlled to alternate between a mute state and an on state. Furthermore, the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode is not fixed to a lit state, but is controlled to alternate between a lit state and an off state to change the light intensity. In other words, the various speakers and LEDs dynamically alert the player that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, with the tone, volume, light intensity, etc. changing over time. This makes it easier to notice that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible once the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except for specific areas (step S38), is completed and a game mode that does not require confirmation is initiated.

In this example, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible during the ID determination process (step S1003), when changing the setting values, the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas after the setting change process is completed (step S38), immediately notifies the player that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, without notifying the player of an abnormality in response to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2. In other words, when the setting change process is completed and the game mode is entered, the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, and a game board incompatible alert sound is output without outputting a door open alert sound, regardless of whether the predetermined period has elapsed since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2. Furthermore, when the setting change process is completed and the game mode is entered, the light is controlled to emit a serious abnormality notification light, but this is not due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, but rather due to an incompatible combination of the divided game boards 5A. Therefore, when the setting change process is completed and the game mode is entered, the light is always controlled to emit a serious abnormality notification light, regardless of whether a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the main frame 4 was closed.

In addition, when the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (mismatched), even if the start condition for the variable display is met (when a game ball enters the start hole (first start hole 2002 or one of the first start hole 2002 and second start hole 2004)), the effect display device 1600, various speakers, various LEDs on the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), and the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, The LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250 are configured to notify the user of an abnormality without performing the variable effects of the various LEDs mounted on the unit. On the other hand, when the interrupt permission setting (step S52) is made after the setting change process (step S37) is completed, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 are controlled to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode based on the establishment of the variable display start condition (a game ball entering the start port (first start port 2002 or either the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004)), and are able to display information regarding the result.

In addition, the volume of the game board incompatibility notification sounds output from the various speakers cannot be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227. As described above, the player can adjust the volume output from the various speakers by operating the volume adjustment button 227, but the volume of the game board incompatibility notification sound output when the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible (inconsistent) cannot be adjusted by the player operating the volume adjustment button 227. As a result, when the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible (inconsistent), the game board incompatibility notification sound can be output at a predetermined volume, and the sounds output from the various speakers can reliably convey that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible (inconsistent), preventing the player from being disadvantaged or the game from progressing in a manner unintended by the designer.

In addition, when the game board incompatibility alarm sound is being output, it is also not possible to adjust the light intensity (brightness) using the light intensity adjustment button 228. As described above, the player can adjust the light intensity of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. However, the light intensity (brightness) of the serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode, which is controlled when the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (mismatched), cannot be adjusted by the player operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, when the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (mismatched), the light intensity can be controlled to the serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode at a predetermined light intensity (brightness). The serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode reliably notifies the player that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (mismatched), preventing the player from being disadvantaged or the game from progressing in a manner not intended by the designer.

In addition, when the game board incompatibility notification sound is being output, operating the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 will not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) on the effect display device 1600. Also, because the effect display device 1600 does not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness), the scale will not change even if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated multiple times. This prevents the scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) from interfering with the visibility of some or all of the incompatibility error notification display mode displayed on the effect display device 1600, and makes it possible to reliably communicate that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent).

In addition, when the game board incompatibility notification sound is being output, the confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is also not output. This prevents the game board incompatibility notification sound from being difficult to hear due to the confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228, and ensures that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent).

Furthermore, even if the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 that display information regarding whether the game has been won or lost are not turned off, but are controlled to emit light in the same way as under normal circumstances (when playable). In other words, by notifying the player that game play cannot begin if the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (mismatched), it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged or the game from proceeding in a manner not intended by the designer, while if game play begins when the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (mismatched), the light emission of the LEDs that display information about winning or losing is controlled to allow the game to proceed and prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In addition, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the LED of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will be displayed. It is sufficient that at least one of the LEDs displaying the information be controlled to emit light in the same way as in normal times (when play is possible); for example, the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left gaming board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be turned off or lit in an emission mode unrelated to the satisfaction of the start condition without being controlled to emit light, even when the start condition is met (a gaming ball enters the start port (first start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and second start port 2004)).

In addition, in this example, even if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is in an incompatible (mismatched) state when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the timing of the light emission control in the serious abnormality alert light emission mode corresponding to the incompatible (mismatched) state of the combination of the divided game boards 5A and the timing of the output of the game board incompatible alert sound will differ depending on whether or not the setting values are changed and whether or not a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area)).

Specifically, if neither the setting change nor the process of clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area)) is performed, and the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent), the effect display device 1600 will display "power on" for a predetermined period of time upon the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1, and then, when power-on operation check begins, the various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) will be controlled to emit a serious abnormality alert light in a lighting mode, and the various speakers will start to output a game board incompatibility alert sound.

On the other hand, when either changing the setting value or clearing a process to clear a specific area from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area)) is performed, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area (step S38) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs a power-on operation check, during which the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 210 provided on the door frame 3) Instead of starting the light emission control in a serious abnormality alert mode by the various LEDs (which may be some or all) of the door frame unit 450, etc., or the output of the game board incompatibility alert sounds from the various speakers, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and after the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has finished checking the operation at power-on, the light emission control in a serious abnormality alert mode by the various LEDs (which may be some or all) of the door frame unit and the output of the game board incompatibility alert sounds from the various speakers are started in response to the fact that the right-side game board 5AR is in a non-compliant state.

In this way, even if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed to be incompatible (mismatched) when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the timing of the light emission control in the serious abnormality alert light emission mode corresponding to the incompatible state of the right-side game board 5AR and the timing of the output of the game board incompatible alert sound can be varied depending on whether or not the setting values are changed or whether or not a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (a specified area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area)), thereby prioritizing the notification of more important information and preventing malfunctions and fraudulent behavior from occurring. In other words, since there is a risk of damage to the gaming facility if the setting values are changed fraudulently or the main control's built-in RAM is cleared, the damage can be prevented from spreading by notifying that the setting values have been changed fraudulently or that the main control's built-in RAM has been cleared, taking priority over notifying that the combination of the divided gaming board 5A is in an incompatible (mismatched) state.

In addition, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be incompatible (inconsistent) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the timing of displaying the abnormal background image (e.g., black) on the performance display device 1600 and the incompatibility error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600 is the same regardless of whether or not the setting value is changed and whether or not a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (a specified area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area)). That is, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) or when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 starts checking the operation at power-on, the performance display device 1600 displays a background image (e.g., black) in the event of an abnormality and a mismatch error notification display mode. This allows for priority execution of notifications of high importance, while also allowing the performance display device 1600 to notify and address other notifications. Furthermore, the timing of displaying the background image (e.g., black) in the event of an abnormality on the performance display device 1600 and the mismatch error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600 may vary depending on whether or not the setting value is changed, or whether or not to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area)). In this case, information of increasing importance can be notified in order and addressed sequentially, ensuring that each piece of information is conveyed and addressed reliably.

In addition, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the combination of the divided game board 5A is set to a compatible (matched) state, and after the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is compatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not execute the ID determination process (step S1003).Therefore, even if the combination of the divided game board 5AR becomes incompatible (mismatched) after execution of the ID determination process (step S1003), no notification (game board incompatible notification sound, incompatible error notification display mode, serious abnormality notification light emission mode, etc.) corresponding to the fact that the right-side game board 5AR is in a mismatched state is not executed. Therefore, LEDs (such as various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250) provided in at least the areas excluding the right game board 5AR and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a, performance display device 1600, various speakers, etc. are controlled in the same manner as when the right game board 5AR is fitted. In addition, a control signal is output from the peripheral control board 1510 assuming that a right game board 5AR having a regular ID is provided, and the LEDs, drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided on the divided game board 5AR are driven based on this control signal. However, if the layout configuration of the incompatible divided game board 5AR and the compatible right-side game board 5AR differs, the LEDs, drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided on the incompatible divided game board 5AR may operate in a manner different from their design (a manner different from the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided on the right-side game board 5AR with a legitimate ID, decorative board, decorative body, etc. and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (inconsistent) when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), even if an abnormality is detected by an abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the setting change process, the detection is invalid (it may be that the process to check whether or not there is a detection is not executed, or it may be that the process to check whether or not there is a detection is executed but the process (such as an alert) based on the detection is not executed).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 275, even if an illegal magnetic field is generated during the setting change process and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the detection signal is discarded without issuing an abnormality alert based on the detection of the illegal magnetic field. In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, and if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during execution of the setting change process, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored (the input of the detection signal may not be confirmed, or even if the input of the detection signal is confirmed, processing based on that input may not be executed), and after the setting change process is completed, control is executed as if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had not been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (inconsistent) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (e.g., sensors or switches that input a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc.) during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting change process is completed, that is, if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the power-on operation check that involves the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the detection by the abnormality detection means is also disabled (it may be that the process of checking whether or not there is a detection is not executed, or it may be that the process of checking whether or not there is a detection is executed but no process (such as an alert) based on the detection is executed).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 276, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the combination of the divided game board 5A is in an incompatible (mismatched) state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting change process is completed, the detection signal is discarded without issuing an abnormality alert based on the detection of an illegal magnetism. In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting change process is completed, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control continues as if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had not been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

In addition, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed to be incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc., which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, the detection by the abnormality detection means is disabled (it may not execute a process to check whether or not there is a detection, or it may execute a process to check whether or not there is a detection but not execute a process (such as an alert) based on the detection).

Specifically, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is deemed to be incompatible (mismatched), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, the detection signal is discarded without issuing an abnormality alert based on the detection of an illegal magnetism. In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed to be incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control continues as if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had not been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

In this way, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is in an incompatible (mismatched) state when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), no abnormality alert will be issued even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, sensors or switches such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc., which input a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310).

In other words, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible, gameplay may proceed in a manner not intended by the designer, potentially causing harm to the gaming establishment and players, and may even result in a deviation from the original specifications, potentially causing a loss of trust among players, so it is necessary to ensure that play is stopped. Therefore, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible, an alert is issued in priority over alerts resulting from abnormality detection by the abnormality detection means (e.g., sensors and switches such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, and door frame open switch, which input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), thereby preventing play and minimizing harm to the gaming establishment and players.

In addition, some LEDs may be controlled to emit different light depending on the type of abnormality detection means. For example, when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, one or both of the LEDs on the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250 may be turned off (putting them in a state where light emission control is not possible).

Furthermore, rather than being limited to determining whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible only when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be configured to periodically (for example, constantly determine each time the peripheral control unit's regular processing is executed) determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started. In this case, it will be possible to notify the user that the combination of the divided game boards 5A has become incompatible after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, thereby preventing the occurrence of disadvantages.

In addition, even if an ID determination process is periodically executed to determine whether the combination of the divided game board 5A is compatible, the ID determination process may not be executed while the setting change process is being executed.Also, even if the ID determination process is executed while the setting change process is being executed and it is determined that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, no notification may be issued indicating that the right-side game board 5AR is in an incompatible state while the setting change process is being executed.

Furthermore, when an ID determination process is periodically executed to determine whether the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible, a notification (game board incompatible notification sound, incompatible error notification display mode, serious abnormality notification light emission mode, etc.) indicating that the right-side game board 5AR is in an incompatible state may be initiated based on the determination that the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible, and then the notification indicating that the right-side game board 5AR is in an incompatible state may be terminated based on the determination that the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible, or a notification indicating that the right-side game board 5AR is in an incompatible state may be initiated based on the determination that the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible after the ID determination process determines that the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible.

In addition, if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible, when the ID determination process is performed during the power-on operation check after the setting change process or before the setting change process is started and it is determined that the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible, the display device 1600 will display a message indicating that the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible during the power-on operation check, just as when the compatibility of the combination of the split game board 5A is determined only when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, while various The speakers and the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) may not emit a game board incompatibility alarm sound or light up a serious abnormality alarm light to notify that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, but may instead emit a game board incompatibility alarm sound and light up a serious abnormality alarm light to notify that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible when the power-on operation check is completed and the game mode is entered.

Furthermore, even if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game board 5A is compatible, even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the setting change process, the detection is invalid (the system may not execute a process to check whether there is a detection, or it may execute a process to check whether there is a detection but not execute a process (such as an alert) based on the detection). Therefore, even after the setting change process, an abnormality alert based on detection during the setting change process by the abnormality detection means may not be executed.

In addition, when the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be incompatible during the power-on operation check after the setting change process and an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) may issue a notification that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, taking priority over an alarm that the abnormality detection means has detected the combination. If the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible, an alarm that the abnormality detection means has detected the combination may be issued.

[Changing settings when not connected]
Next, an example of behavior when changing the setting value in a disconnected state (disconnected state) in which the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side gaming board 5AL, such as when there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming board 5AR (the input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming board 5AR cannot be confirmed) and a malfunction such as a short circuit or disconnection occurs in the transmission path for transmitting various signals, will be described with reference to Fig. 277. Note that, below, only the parts that differ from when there is a match or when there is a mismatch will be described, and redundant explanations will not be given.

As shown in FIG. 277, if there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming board 5AR during the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, i.e., if the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected, a control signal from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is not input to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board of the right-side gaming board 5AR, and therefore the electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR are in a non-driven state (for example, the various LEDs are turned off) regardless of whether a setting change is being performed. Note that if it is determined in the ID determination process (step S1003) that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming board 5AR, it is also possible not to output a control signal from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR.

Furthermore, in this example, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that no ID code signal has been input from the right-side gaming board 5AR, it will not notify that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected until the setting change process is completed. In other words, while the setting change process is being executed, the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled in the same manner as when the setting change process was executed at the time of adaptation (they may be completely identical, or almost all may be the same with only some differences).

Then, when the setting change process is completed and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts a process (step S38) of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the various speakers and various LEDs (which may be only some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) in the same manner as when the process (step S38) of clearing the main control built-in RAM was executed upon adaptation (which may be completely identical, or almost entirely identical with only some differences). Furthermore, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 not only displays the display mode (normal mode) (decorative patterns, background images during normal mode (when playable), etc.) on the display device 1600 in the same manner as when matched, but also displays "Right side game board unconnection error occurred" as an unconnection error notification display mode on the display device 1600 to notify that the right side game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left side game board 5AL.

In this way, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected, when a power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process (step S37) is completed, the top center speaker, top side speakers, various LEDs such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3, and the main frame speaker 622 provided on the main frame 4 are controlled in the same manner (which may be completely the same, or almost entirely the same with only some differences) as when the process (step S38) to clear the main control built-in RAM is performed upon matching, so that the fact that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected is not notified.

On the other hand, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected, when the power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process (step S37) is completed, the effect display device 1600 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL will display "Right-side gaming board unconnected error occurred" as an unconnected error notification display mode, thereby notifying the user that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected.

In other words, during the power-on operation check, which involves the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executing a process (step S38) to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, the various speakers and LEDs serving as frame-side presentation means provided on the door frame 3 and main frame 4 do not indicate that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, while the presentation display device 1600 serving as game board-side presentation means provided on the left-side game board 5AL indicates that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected. At this time, the various speakers and LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and main frame 4 indicate that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is executing a process (step S38) to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. Note that while only the presentation display device 1600 is shown as the game board-side presentation means, the game board-side presentation means also includes the various LEDs provided on the left-side game board 5AL. Furthermore, while the various LEDs provided on the left gaming board 5AL do not indicate that the right gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected during the power-on operation check, which involves the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executing a process (step S38) that clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, the effect display device 1600 is configured to indicate that the right gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected, and the entire left gaming board 5AL including the effect display device 1600 (gaming board side effect means) is configured to indicate that the right gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected. In other words, a portion of the gaming board side effect means is configured to indicate that the right gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected.

If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs a process (step S38) to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, there is a risk that a setting change process (step S37) may be performed fraudulently or the game status before power was restored may be fraudulently reset, causing disadvantages to players and gaming parlors. Furthermore, because the door frame 3 and main body frame 4 are positioned around the divided game board 5A, they can be easily seen even from a distance from the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, regardless of whether the setting change process (step S38) has been executed or not, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has executed the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), various speakers and various LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 will notify the game store staff that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has executed the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), informing the game store staff that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has executed the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), in other words, that an illegal setting change process (step S37) has been performed or the game status before power was restored has been reset, thereby preventing the occurrence of fraudulent behavior. Note that the board-side presentation means may be provided with presentation means other than the various speakers and various LEDs described above. For example, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 may be configured to have display devices. In this case, during the power-on operation check, which involves the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executing the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the display devices on the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 may also be configured to notify that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, but to notify that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is executing the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38). Alternatively, the display devices may not notify either that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected or that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is executing the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38).

On the other hand, the left-side game board 5AL is equipped with game board-side presentation means such as the presentation display device 1600, various movable bodies, and various LEDs that attract the player's attention during play. When the power is turned on, the operation check is performed to confirm whether the game board-side presentation means can be operated normally. In other words, when the operation of the game board-side presentation means is being checked from a position close to the pachinko machine 1, even if only the presentation display device 1600 notifies the operator that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, the operator can easily notice that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected. Furthermore, for game board-side presentation means other than the presentation display device 1600, the system controls them in the same manner (which may be completely identical, or may be almost entirely identical with only some differences) as when the process of clearing the main control built-in RAM upon compatibility (step S38) is executed, without notifying the operator that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, thereby confirming whether they can be operated normally, and ensuring that presentations are executed without any problems when a game is played.

The unconnection error notification display mode in the performance display device 1600 is a still image that does not change over time, and continues until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. However, when the conditions for starting the variable display are met (a game ball entering the start port (first start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and second start port 2004)) and the variable display of a special pattern is started in the function display unit 1400, or the variable display of a fourth pattern is started in the sub-function display unit 2250, a variable display such as a variable display of a decorative pattern is performed with the unconnection error notification display mode displayed on the performance display device 1600. The notification display mode may be any mode appropriate to the error content, and may be a combination of letters and numbers (for example, an error code), a mark, or the like. In this way, during the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas after the setting change process (step S38), the display on the effect display device 1600 notifies the user that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side gaming board 5AL in a static mode that does not change regardless of the passage of time. This makes it possible to notify the user that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side gaming board 5AL without interfering with the confirmation process during the power-on operation check.

In addition, in the power-on operation check that is performed in parallel with the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), not only is the power-on operation check not performed for the drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., that are provided on the right gaming board 5AR and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which are determined to be in an unconnected state, but also for the movable body that performs the power-on operation check (the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the divided gaming board 5A). When power is turned on, no operation checks are performed on the drive motors and drive solenoids that drive the performance operation unit 301 that is provided on the door frame units (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear lower front performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) and is not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003).

As described above, the game board side components may be configured to include the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit from among the door frame units. In this case, the specific door frame unit is the subject of ID determination, and if it is determined to be in an unconnected state in the ID determination process (step S1003), some or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in door frame units that are not the subject of ID determination (non-specific door frame units) and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may also be prevented from being driven. In addition to this, or separately from this, if there are multiple specific door frame units (for example, the right door frame If it is determined that some (for example, one of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top unit 450) are disconnected, all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in the specific door frame unit and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be prevented from being driven, or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in all door frame units, including the specific door frame unit, and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be prevented from being driven.

Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is not electrically connected, even when the power-on operation check is started, the LEDs provided on the right-side gaming panel 5AR that were determined to be not connected will not be controlled to light up in the light-emitting mode during the power-on operation check, or the movable body will not be controlled to operate in the mode during the power-on operation check (a control signal is not output to the right-side gaming panel 5AR), or this control will not be possible (a control signal is output but not input to the right-side gaming panel 5AR). In addition, the drive motor or drive solenoid provided on the tray unit 200 (in this example, the performance operation unit 300) that is provided on the door frame 3 and not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) will not be driven to operate the performance operation unit 301 provided on the performance operation unit 300.

In other words, when the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, there is a risk that some or all of the movable bodies provided on the door frame unit that is not subject to ID determination will also have poor connections, and the control signal output from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be changed to a different signal from the original due to noise, etc., and input, causing the movable bodies to operate in an abnormal manner. Therefore, some or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided on the door frame unit and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 that are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) are not driven, thereby preventing the movable bodies from operating in an operating mode different from the original, which could result in damage to the movable bodies or door frame unit, or failure of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable bodies. However, even in this case, LEDs provided on the door frame unit that are not subject to ID determination (for example, multiple LEDs 320a for illuminating and decorating the upper part (unit upper cover 312) of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in a predetermined manner, just as when compatible. This makes it possible to determine that the operation check is being carried out correctly when the power is turned on.

On the other hand, the movable bodies (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear-front-lower performance unit 3160, etc.) provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is equipped with a peripheral control board 1510 on which a peripheral control IC 1510a that executes the ID determination process (step S1003) is implemented, operate in the same manner as normal (when the combination of the divided gaming board 5A is determined to be compatible) when operation confirmation begins upon power-on. In addition, the LEDs mounted on the boards provided on the movable bodies provided on the left side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front lower performance unit 3160) are controlled to emit light in the light emission mode when operation is confirmed when the power is turned on. In other words, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, as in the normal case (when the combination of the divided gaming board 5A is determined to be compatible), the movable elements on the left-side gaming board 5AL (such as the rear-upper movable decorative element 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 on the left-side gaming board 5AL of the divided gaming board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative element 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative element 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160) are operated in the operating mode during power-on operation check, and the LEDs on the movable elements on the left-side gaming board 5AL are controlled to emit light in the lighting mode during power-on operation check. This makes it easy to identify the gaming board on which the peripheral control board 1510 of the divided gaming board 5A is installed (in this case, the left-side gaming board 5AL).

In addition, in this example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, no control is performed to drive the drive motor or drive solenoid mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame unit (in this example, the tray unit 200) that is not the subject of ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) to operate the performance operation unit 301, but the various LEDs mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 are controlled in the same manner as normal (when the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be compatible) during the power-on operation check. In other words, when a power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, the various LEDs mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light in the same light emission mode as when the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be compatible.

In addition, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, the LEDs mounted on some of the multiple LEDs mounted on multiple boards provided on the door frame unit that are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), or some of the multiple LEDs mounted on one board, may not be controlled to emit light in the light emission mode at the time of power-on operation check, and some movable bodies may not operate in the operating mode at the time of power-on operation check (for example, power-on operation check may not be performed on some or all of the LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the door frame unit and the drive motors, drive solenoids, LEDs, etc. provided on the movable bodies provided on the door frame unit).

In addition, if it is determined in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the divided game board 5A is not connected, the right-side game board 5AR determined to be not connected and some or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in door frame units not subject to ID determination and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not be driven until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, not just during the power-on operation check, or until the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible. In this case, it is possible to prevent the movable bodies from operating in a manner different from their intended operation, which could result in damage to the movable bodies or door frame unit, or failure of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable bodies.

In addition, if the main body frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed and the main body frame 4 remains closed thereafter, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 completes the power-on operation check (the LED's light-emitting mode during power-on operation check ends and is turned off or turned on in a predetermined light-emitting mode), the movable body's operation mode during power-on operation check ends and it enters a standby state (stopped at a predetermined standby position (housed) The power-on operation check ends when the movable body is placed in the power-on operation check (state where the movable body is in the power-on operation check). Note that if the power-on operation check is configured to end earlier in the operation mode than the light-emitting mode, the power-on operation check ends when the light-emitting mode ends; if the power-on operation check is configured to end later in the operation mode than the light-emitting mode, the power-on operation check ends when the power-on operation check ends (the movable body operates in the power-on operation check operation mode and then stops (retracts) in the standby position).

Then, when the power-on operation check, which involves a process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), is completed and the game mode is entered, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the unconnected error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600, repeatedly outputs a game board unconnected notification sound (an announcement voice saying "The right-side game board is not connected" and a warning sound such as "ding dong") from various speakers at a volume adjusted by the volume adjustment button 227 until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (the output may be stopped after being output repeatedly a certain number of times (e.g., 5 times) or for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds)), and also outputs the sound from the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430 provided in door frame 3) The various LEDs (some or all of them) of the door unit 430, tray unit 200, door frame top unit 450, etc.) are repeatedly controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality alert light mode (or in a semi-serious abnormality alert light mode if the light is controlled to emit light in a semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode), and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL are controlled to an off state, while the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are made to emit light in a controllable state similar to when adapted (they may be lit in a specified mode).

The game board disconnection alert sound is not a single alert sound (such as a "beep") that is output intermittently, but is composed of multiple sounds with different tones, and is further controlled to alternate between a mute state and an on state. Furthermore, the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode is not fixed to a lit state, but is controlled to alternate between a lit state and an off state to change the light intensity. In other words, the various speakers and LEDs dynamically alert the player that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side game board 5AL, with the tone, volume, light intensity, etc. changing over time. This makes it easier to notice that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side game board 5AL when the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except for specific areas (step S38), is completed and a game mode that does not require any checking is initiated.

In addition, the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (or the semi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode if the light-emitting mode is controlled to a semi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode) of the various LEDs (which may be some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) whose light-emitting mode is controlled due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 continues until a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, was closed. In addition, in this example, the period from when the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed to when the light emission control of the serious abnormality alert light emission mode is terminated is set to be longer than the period required to perform the power-on operation check.Therefore, if the main frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed, regardless of whether the main frame 4 continues to be closed thereafter, when the power-on operation check, which involves a process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), is completed and the game mode is started, the light emission will be controlled to the serious abnormality alert light emission mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, without being controlled to the minor abnormality alert light emission mode caused by the right-side game board 5AR not being electrically connected (a mode in which the light switches between maximum brightness white lighting and extinguishing in a short period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (rapid flashing mode)). Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, was closed, the light emission control changes to a minor abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the right-side game board 5AR not being electrically connected, and the light emission control continues in the minor abnormality notification light emission mode until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

In addition, the period from closing the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, to ending the light emission control of the serious abnormality notification light mode may be set to a period shorter than the period required to perform the power-on operation check.In this case, if the main frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, when the power-on operation check, which involves a process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), is completed and the game mode is started, the light emission will not be controlled to the serious abnormality notification light mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, but will be controlled to the minor abnormality notification light mode caused by the right-side game board 5AR not being electrically connected. Even in this case, after the setting change process is completed, the main frame 4 is closed and then opened again, and the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), is completed and the game mode is started. If the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened from the outer frame 2 does not reach a predetermined period, the light emission will be controlled to a minor abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the right-side game board 5AR not being electrically connected, but a serious abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened from the outer frame 2. When a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the main frame 4, which was open from the outer frame 2, was closed, the light emission will be changed to a minor abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the right-side game board 5AR not being electrically connected, and the light emission will be controlled.

In addition, in this example, even if the light emission control of the minor abnormality alert light-emitting mode and the output of the game board unconnected alert sound are being executed due to the right-side game board 5AR not being electrically connected, when the main frame 4, which was closed against the outer frame 2, is opened, the alert due to the right-side game board 5AR not being electrically connected (light emission control of the minor abnormality alert light-emitting mode and output of the game board unconnected alert sound) is terminated and an alert due to the main frame 4 being opened against the outer frame 2 (light emission control of the major abnormality alert light-emitting mode and output of the door open alert sound) is executed, and when a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the main frame 4 was opened against the outer frame 2, the output of the door open alert sound is stopped and the output of the game board unconnected alert sound is started again, and when a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the main frame 4, which was open against the outer frame 2, was closed, the light emission control of the major abnormality alert light-emitting mode is terminated and the light emission control of the minor abnormality alert light-emitting mode is started again. In this way, notification that the main frame 4 is open takes priority over notification that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected, thereby preventing fraudulent activity.

In addition, in this example, the output period of the door-opening alarm is shorter than the period required for power-on operation confirmation. Therefore, if the main frame 4 is opened at the start of the setting change process and closed at the end of the setting change process, and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, the door-opening alarm will not be output, and a game board unconnection alarm will be output. Note that the output period of the door-opening alarm may be longer than the time required for power-on operation confirmation. For example, if the main frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed and remains closed thereafter, or if the main frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed and then opened again, even if the output period of the door-opening alarm is shorter than the time required for power-on operation confirmation, the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened from the outer frame 2 will be a predetermined value when the power-on operation confirmation, which involves a process of clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except for a specific area (step S38), is completed and the game mode is started. If the period has not been reached, a door open alarm sound may be output, and a game board unconnected alarm sound may be output based on the fact that the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 has reached a predetermined period. Alternatively, if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 when the power-on operation check, which involves a process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), is completed and the game mode is started, a door open alarm sound may be output, and a game board unconnected alarm sound may be output regardless of whether the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 has reached a predetermined period. Furthermore, if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 when the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), is completed and the game mode is started, or if the elapsed time since the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, was closed has not yet reached a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds), even if the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 has reached a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds), the game board unconnected alert sound may not be output until the main frame 4 is closed or until the light emission control of the serious abnormality alert light emission mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 is completed.

In this way, in this example, the setting value is changed in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and if the main frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, the various speakers will issue an abnormality alert in response to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state, while the various LEDs (which may be only some or all) of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) will issue an abnormality alert in response to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2. In other words, although abnormality alerts are issued for the various speakers, the various LEDs on the door frame unit, and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-hand gaming board 5AR, the causes of the abnormalities are different (for the various speakers, an abnormality alert is issued due to a disconnection, and for the various LEDs on the door frame unit and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-hand gaming board 5AR, an abnormality alert is issued due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2).

Note that the volume of the game board unconnection alert sound output from the various speakers when the right-side game board 5AR is not connected can be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227, unlike the setting change alert sound, RAM clear alert sound, door open alert sound, and game board incompatibility alert sound. In other words, because there is little risk of causing harm to the player or the gaming facility when the right-side game board 5AR is not connected and it is not an emergency, the volume can be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227. Note that the game board unconnection alert sound output from the various speakers when the right-side game board 5AR is not connected may also not be adjustable using the volume adjustment button 227. In this case, the game board unconnection alert sound can be output at a predetermined volume, which reliably notifies the player that the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, thereby preventing any harm to the player.

In addition, during the period when the light emission is controlled to the minor abnormality notification light emission mode due to the right-side gaming board 5AR being in a disconnected state, it is not possible to adjust the light intensity (brightness) using the light intensity adjustment button 228. As described above, by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228, the player can adjust the light intensity (brightness) of some of the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided gaming board 5A. However, the minor abnormality notification light emission mode that is activated due to the right-side gaming board 5AR being in a disconnected state cannot be adjusted by the player operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, when the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided gaming board 5A are controlled to emit a predetermined amount of light (brightness), enabling a minor abnormality notification light-up mode. The minor abnormality notification light-up mode can notify that some kind of abnormality has occurred, allowing the player to visually check the divided gaming board 5A and making them aware that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, preventing any disadvantage to the player.

In addition, when the game board unconnected alert sound is being output, scales corresponding to the current volume and light intensity (brightness) are displayed on the effect display device 1600 in response to operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228. This makes it possible to recognize that operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is valid, and the displayed scales allow the player to know the level of volume and light intensity (brightness). Furthermore, as described above, the light intensity (brightness) cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228 in the minor abnormality alert light-emitting mode, but even when the light emission is controlled to the alert light-emitting mode for security purposes, it is possible to prevent the opportunity to adjust the light intensity (brightness) from being taken away. Note that when the game board unconnected alert sound is being output, the effect display device 1600 may not display scales corresponding to the current volume and light intensity (brightness) even if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated.

In addition, when the game board unconnection notification sound is output, a confirmation sound is also output in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, the confirmation sound in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 makes it possible to recognize that the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 is valid, and the volume of the confirmation sound makes it possible to understand the volume after operating the volume adjustment button 227. Note that it is also possible not to output the confirmation sound in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 even if the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated when the game board unconnection notification sound is output.

As described above, the light intensity of the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (including the semi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode when the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode) that is controlled due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228. Furthermore, in this example, during the period from when the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed to when the light emission control of the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (including the semi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode when the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode) is terminated, the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 start to check the power-on operation, followed by the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the process of checking the power-on operation, Since this is longer than the period until both of these are completed, when the setting change process is executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and after the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has finished checking the operation at power-on, light emission control is executed to change the serious abnormality alert light mode caused by the main frame 4 being released from the outer frame 2 (if light emission control is changed to the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode, the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode).

In other words, when the right-side game board 5AR is not connected and the setting change process is executed, after the main frame 4 that was open to the outer frame 2 is closed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 completes the power-on operation check, the various speakers output a game board unconnection alert sound, and a serious abnormality alert light-emitting pattern (serious abnormality alert) is displayed due to the main frame 4 being opened to the outer frame 2. When the light emission mode is changed to the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode, the light emission control for the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode is executed, and the volume of the game board unconnection alert sound output from the various speakers can be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227, but for the serious abnormality alert light emission mode (including the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode when the light emission mode is changed to the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode), which is controlled to emit light due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, it is not possible to adjust the light intensity using the light intensity adjustment button 228.

Therefore, when the right-side game board 5AR is not connected and the setting change process is being executed, after the main frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, is closed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 checks the operation at power-on. When this is completed, the light can be controlled to emit a serious abnormality alert light at a predetermined brightness (or a semi-serious abnormality alert light if the light is controlled to emit a semi-serious abnormality alert light after the serious abnormality alert light), and if the setting change alert light is overlooked during the execution of the setting change process, or if a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, the light can be controlled to emit a serious abnormality alert light at a predetermined brightness (or a semi-serious abnormality alert light if the light is controlled to emit a semi-serious abnormality alert light after the serious abnormality alert light). Even if the RAM clear notification is overlooked during the process of clearing all but a specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) and the power-on operation check, the serious abnormality notification light emission mode (or the semi-serious abnormality notification light emission mode if the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality notification light emission mode after the serious abnormality notification light emission mode) can be seen afterwards, making it possible to be aware that a setting change process or a process of clearing all but a specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) may have been performed. At the same time, the volume can be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227 to prevent the player from being annoyed by the fact that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is not connected, which is unlikely to cause any disadvantage to the player or the gaming facility.

In addition, when the light emission is controlled to the serious abnormality alert light emission mode due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 (including the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode when the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode), a scale corresponding to the volume or light intensity (brightness) is displayed on the performance display device 1600 based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228, and the scale may be changed by operating the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 222 while the scale is displayed. Alternatively, when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 and the light emission is controlled to the serious abnormality alert light emission mode, the volume adjustment button Even when the section button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, the performance display device 1600 does not display a scale corresponding to the volume or light intensity (brightness). Instead, when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 and the light emission is controlled to the serious abnormality alert light emission mode (or the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode when the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode), the performance display device 1600 may display a scale corresponding to the volume or light intensity (brightness) based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228, and the scale may be changed by operating the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 222 while the scale is displayed. In this case, after the light emission control for the serious abnormality alert light emission mode or the output of the door open alert sound has ended, the performance sound may be output or the light emission performance may be executed at a volume or light intensity (brightness) corresponding to the scale changed based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 222.

In addition, when the light emission is controlled to the serious abnormality alert light mode (including the quasi-serious abnormality alert light mode when the light emission is controlled to the quasi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode) due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, a confirmation sound based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 may be output at a volume set in accordance with the operation of the volume adjustment button 227.Alternatively, when the light emission is controlled to the serious abnormality alert light mode when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, no confirmation sound may be output even if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated.However, when the light emission is controlled to the serious abnormality alert light mode (including the quasi-serious abnormality alert light mode when the light emission is controlled to the quasi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode) when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2, a confirmation sound may be output based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228. Furthermore, when the light emission is controlled to a serious abnormality alert light mode (including a semi-serious abnormality alert light mode when the light emission is controlled to a semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode) due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, the performance display device 1600 may display a scale according to the volume or light intensity (brightness) and output a confirmation sound, or may only do one of these, based on the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 being operated.

In this case, a scale corresponding to the light intensity (brightness) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228, and even if the scale is changed by further operating the light intensity adjustment button 228, the light intensity (brightness) of the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (including the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode when the light is controlled to the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode) does not change. On the other hand, the minor abnormality light-emitting mode, which is executed after the light-emitting control of the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (including the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode when the light is controlled to the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode) has ended, in response to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state, is controlled to emit light at the light intensity (brightness) changed in response to the operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228. In this example, when the setting change process is executed while the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, if the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 and the light emission is controlled to the serious abnormality alert light emission mode (semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode if the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode) when the power-on operation check, which involves the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), is completed and the game mode is started, the light intensity (brightness) of the light emission mode that is controlled to emit light after the end of the serious abnormality alert light emission mode (semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode if the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode) can be adjusted during the light emission control of the serious abnormality alert light emission mode (semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode if the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode). This prevents players from being deprived of an opportunity to adjust the light intensity (brightness) in situations where they can start playing, even if the light is controlled to the serious abnormality alert light mode (if the light is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode), and prevents a decline in interest in playing.

In addition, when there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR and the condition for starting the variable display is met (a gaming ball enters the start port (first start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and second start port 2004)), the occurrence of an abnormality is not reported without performing the variable display effects using the various speakers, the various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, if the period from closing the main frame 4 that was open relative to the outer frame 2 to ending the serious abnormality alert light emission mode (or the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode if the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode) is shorter than the period from starting the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the power-on operation check by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 to ending both the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the power-on operation check, if the main frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 420, door ... right side unit 420, door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 420, door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit The various LEDs (which may be some or all) of the right-side game board 5AR (such as the main unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450) are not controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality notification light mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, but are controlled to emit light in a minor abnormality notification light mode corresponding to the fact that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state as soon as the power-on operation check, which involves the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), is completed and the game mode is started, so that the LED light emission mode can immediately notify the fact that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state as soon as the power-on operation check, which involves the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), is completed and the game mode is started.

In addition, even when the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input, after the power-on operation check is performed, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which display information regarding whether the game is a win or a loss, are not turned off, but are controlled to emit light in the same way as under normal circumstances (when play is possible). In other words, when there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR and the game is not connected, the system notifies the player that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not connected, preventing the game from proceeding in a manner not intended by the designer. However, even if the game starts in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR, the LEDs that display information about winning or losing are controlled to light up, allowing the game to proceed as normal, preventing the player from being disadvantaged.

In addition, in this example, the right-side gaming board 5AR is not provided with ball entry ports (starting ports (first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004), big prize port 2005, general prize port 2001, etc.) or gates 2003, and these are provided only on the left-side gaming board 5AL, so there is little risk of the player being disadvantaged even if the game is played in an unconnected state where there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR.In other words, if the divided gaming board 5A does not have a right-side gaming board 5AR and only has a left-side gaming board 5AL, nothing is provided in the area corresponding to the right-side gaming board 5AR, so although there is a risk of the player being disadvantaged by playing the game, it is easy to recognize visually that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, a player who senses an abnormality will likely avoid playing. On the other hand, if the divided gaming board 5A has both a right gaming board 5AR and a left gaming board 5AL but the right gaming board 5AR is disconnected due to a connection failure or other reason, it is difficult to visually recognize that an abnormality has occurred, so the player will continue to play, but since the right gaming board 5AR does not have an entrance or gate that would affect the player's advantage, there is little risk of the player being disadvantaged. In this way, a state in which the right gaming board 5AR is disconnected is less likely to cause a disadvantage to the player than a state in which it is deemed incompatible, so although a notification of the disconnection is displayed, the player can continue playing as if it were compatible.

In addition, the right-side gaming board 5AR is not equipped with any detection means, such as an entrance or gate 2003, or a magnetic sensor 1050 for detecting fraudulent activity; all of these are provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL. In other words, electronic components related to the profits of players and gaming parlors (general prize opening sensor 3001, first start opening sensor 3002, second start opening sensor 2401, gate sensor 2801, large prize opening sensor 2402, special prize opening sensor 2601, V prize opening sensor 3003, losing opening sensor 3004, magnetic sensor 1050, start opening solenoid 2412, attacca solenoid 2414, special prize opening solenoid 2612, V distribution solenoid 3007, etc.), ball entrances (general prize opening 2001, first start opening 2002, gate 2003, second start opening 2004, large prize opening 2005, etc.), gate 2003, etc. are all provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL. Therefore, even if fraudulent activity occurs in an unconnected state where no ID code signal is input from the right-side gaming board 5AR, the detection means provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL can detect the fraudulent activity, and the gaming establishment will not suffer any disadvantage.

In addition, in an unconnected state where there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR, it is sufficient that at least one of the LEDs displaying information regarding wins or losses on the LED of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is controlled to emit light in the same manner as normal (when play is possible).For example, even when the start condition is met (a game ball enters the start hole (first start hole 2002 or one of the first start hole 2002 and second start hole 2004)), the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be turned off or lit in an emission mode unrelated to the satisfaction of the start condition without being controlled to emit light.

In addition, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the timing of the light emission control in the minor abnormality alert light emission mode corresponding to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state and the timing of the output of the game board unconnected alert sound differ depending on whether or not the setting values are changed and whether or not a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (a specified area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area)).

Specifically, when the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input, and neither a change to the setting value nor a process to clear a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area) is performed, the effect display device 1600 will display "power on" for a specified period of time based on the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1, and then a power-on operation check will be initiated, and while this power-on operation check is being performed, light emission control will be initiated in a minor abnormality alert light emission mode using various LEDs (which may be only some or all) of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), and the output of a game board unconnected alert sound will be initiated from various speakers. In other words, when the power-on operation check begins, if there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and it is in an unconnected state, light emission control will be initiated in a minor abnormality notification light mode, and the output of a game board unconnected notification sound will be initiated from various speakers.

On the other hand, when the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no input of an ID code signal, and either a change in the setting value or a process to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area)) is performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs a process to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for the specific area (step S38), and while the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is performing a power-on operation check, light emission control is performed in a minor abnormality notification light emission mode due to the unconnected state with no input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming board 5AR, and a game board unconnected notification sound is output by various speakers. Without starting the power supply, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and at the timing after the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has finished checking the operation at power-on (in this example, at the timing when the game mode is started, a game board unconnected alert sound is output due to the fact that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and the game is in an unconnected state, and light emission control for the minor abnormality alert light emission mode is started after the game mode is started), light emission control in the minor abnormality alert light emission mode due to the fact that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and the game board unconnected alert sound is output from various speakers.

In this way, by varying the timing of the light emission control in the minor abnormality alert light emission mode and the timing of the output of the game board unconnection alert sound depending on whether or not to change the setting values even when there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, and whether or not to clear a specific area from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area)), it is possible to prioritize the notification of information of high importance and prevent malfunctions and fraudulent activity. In other words, since there is a risk of damage to the gaming parlor if the setting values are changed fraudulently or the main control built-in RAM is cleared, the damage can be prevented from spreading by prioritizing the notification of an illegal change in the setting values or the clearing of the main control built-in RAM over the notification of an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR.

When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input, the timing at which the display device 1600 displays "Right-side gaming board unconnected error" as an unconnection error notification display mode is the same regardless of whether the setting value is changed or whether the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area)). In other words, the display device 1600 displays "Right-side gaming board unconnected error" as an unconnection error notification display mode when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the process of clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) or the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 starts checking operation at power-on. This allows for priority execution of high-importance notifications, while the display device 1600 can also notify and handle other notifications. Furthermore, the timing of the display of "Right side game board unconnection error occurred" as an unconnection error notification display mode on the effect display device 1600 can be varied depending on whether or not the setting value is changed, or whether or not a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area)). In this case, information of increasing importance can be notified in order and dealt with in sequence, ensuring that each piece of information is conveyed and dealt with reliably.

As described above, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the combination of the divided game board 5A is set to a compatible (matched) state, and after the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is compatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not execute the ID determination process (step S1003).Therefore, even if the divided game board 5AR enters an unconnected state with no ID code signal input after the ID determination process (step S1003) is executed, the above-mentioned alerts (game board unconnected alert sound, unconnected error alert display mode, minor abnormality alert light emission mode, etc.) are not executed. Therefore, at least the LEDs (such as the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250) provided in areas other than the right game board 5AR are controlled in the same manner as when the right game board 5AR is fitted.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 begins, the machine is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, and if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, even if an abnormality is detected by an abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the setting change process, the detection is invalid (it may be that no process is executed to check whether or not there is a detection, or it may be that a process is executed to check whether or not there is a detection but no process (such as an alert) based on the detection is executed).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 278, even if an illicit magnetic field is generated during the setting change process and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the detection signal is discarded without issuing an abnormality alert based on the detection of the illicit magnetic field. In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the setting change process, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and after the setting change process is completed, control is executed as if no detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 was input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

In this way, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, if an abnormality is detected by an abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball out detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, etc., which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during execution of the setting change process, then after the setting change process is completed, a notification due to the unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from the right-side game board 5AR is given priority over an abnormality notification due to detection by the abnormality detection means. In other words, even if fraudulent behavior is committed in a non-playable state before play can begin, such as during the execution of a setting change process, there is little risk of a disadvantage occurring when the game mode is switched to. However, if there is an unconnected state where no ID code signal is being input from the right-side game board 5AR, there is a risk of a disadvantage occurring when play is started when the game mode is switched to. Therefore, if both a detection by the abnormality detection means and an unconnected state where no ID code signal is being input from the right-side game board 5AR occur during the execution of a setting change process, a notification due to the unconnected state where no ID code signal is being input from the right-side game board 5AR is given priority after the setting change process is completed, thereby preventing the occurrence of a disadvantage.

On the other hand, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, indicating an unconnected state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state. If an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (e.g., a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch) during the power-on operation check, which is executed after the setting change process is completed, that is, when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the power-on operation check, which involves the process of clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except for specific areas (step S38), the detection by the abnormality detection means is valid, but some abnormality alerts are not issued during the power-on operation check, and are issued after the power-on operation check is completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 279, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, indicating an unconnected state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state. If a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting change process is completed, the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) will not be controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality alert light mode due to the detection of an illegal magnetism, and magnetic detection alert sounds (e.g., "Magnetic detection error occurred.") will not be repeatedly output from the various speakers during the power-on operation check.

When the power-on operation check is complete, the various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in a major abnormality alert light mode due to the detection of unauthorized magnetism, and a magnetic detection alert sound is output from the various speakers. The abnormality alert due to the detection of unauthorized magnetism is configured to end when a predetermined period of time has passed since the detection of the unauthorized magnetism. When the abnormality alert due to the detection of unauthorized magnetism ends, if no other abnormalities have been detected, the various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in a minor abnormality alert light mode due to the right-side game board 5AR being unconnected, and a game board unconnection alert sound is repeatedly output from the various speakers.

In this way, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, and if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting change process is completed, control continues as if no detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 has been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310a of the main control board 1310 for the various LEDs and speakers of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), and an abnormality alert is issued due to the detection of an unauthorized magnetism based on the completion of the power-on operation check.

In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, and if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (e.g., a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc.) during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting change process is completed, then an abnormality alert resulting from detection by the abnormality detection means will be given priority over an alert resulting from the unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR after the power-on operation check is completed.

In other words, since game mode begins immediately after the power-on operation check is completed, there is the possibility of similar fraudulent behavior in game mode. On the other hand, if there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game panel 5AR and the game is in an unconnected state, there is less likelihood of disadvantages occurring compared to fraudulent behavior. Therefore, if both a detection by the abnormality detection means and an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game panel 5AR occur during the execution of the power-on operation check, the occurrence of disadvantages is suppressed by prioritizing the execution of a notification due to the detection by the abnormality detection means after the power-on operation check is completed (or, in some cases, while the power-on operation check is being executed).

In addition, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and if a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 of the abnormality detection means (e.g., magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc.) during the execution of the power-on operation check, When an abnormality is detected by the sensors and switches (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), an abnormality alert is issued to the various LEDs and speakers of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) when the operation check at power-on is completed, but an abnormality alert is issued to the performance display device 1600 (for example, "magnetic error occurred" is displayed as a magnetic detection error alert mode) when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means. That is, when a detection signal from the abnormality detection means is input to the main control board 1310 (or when the value of the magnet goto counter reaches its upper limit), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sends a command to the peripheral control board 1510 to start an abnormality notification (for example, a magnet goto notification command classified as a notification display indicating that radio wave irradiation goto is occurring), and when the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the command to start the abnormality notification (magnet goto notification command), it starts control related to the abnormality notification. Furthermore, even when an abnormality notification due to detection by the abnormality detection means is displayed on the performance display device 1600, an abnormality notification due to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state (unconnection error notification display mode) is displayed on the performance display device 1600. That is, when both detection by the abnormality detection means and the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state occur simultaneously, an abnormality notification is displayed on the performance display device 1600 to notify the respective abnormalities.

Note that, as abnormality detection means, sensors and switches such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, and door frame open switch that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 have been shown. However, for some sensors and switches, even if a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during a power-on operation check or after the setting change process has ended (including during power-on operation check and game mode), no abnormality alert may be sent to the performance display device 1600. Alternatively, for all sensors and switches, even if a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during a power-on operation check or after the setting change process has ended (including during power-on operation check and game mode), no abnormality alert may be sent to the performance display device 1600.

Furthermore, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, and if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (e.g., sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc.) during play mode after the power-on operation check is completed, that is, when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during play mode, the detection by the abnormality detection means is still valid, but unlike when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the power-on operation check, an abnormality alert is issued at the time the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means.

Specifically, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, and the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, an abnormality alert due to detection by the abnormality detection means is issued by the effect display device 1600 and the various LEDs and speakers of the door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, door frame top unit 450, etc. provided on the door frame 3).

In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and if a detection signal is input from an abnormality detection means (e.g., a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc.) to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, then an abnormality alert resulting from detection by the abnormality detection means will be given priority over an alert resulting from the unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from the right-side gaming board 5AR.

Therefore, during a gaming mode where there is a high risk of disadvantages occurring if fraudulent activity is committed, if both a detection by the abnormality detection means and an unconnected state where no ID code signal is input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR occur, the occurrence of disadvantages can be prevented by giving priority to the notification resulting from the detection by the abnormality detection means.

Furthermore, rather than determining whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible only when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may periodically (for example, each time the peripheral control unit's regular processing is executed) execute an ID determination process to determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started. In this case, it will be possible to notify the user of the disconnected state in which no ID code signal is input from the right-side game board 5AR after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, thereby preventing the occurrence of any disadvantages.

In addition, even if an ID determination process is periodically executed to determine whether the combination of the split gaming boards 5A is compatible, the ID determination process may not be executed while the setting change process is being executed.Also, even if the ID determination process is executed while the setting change process is being executed and it is determined that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR and that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, no notification may be issued indicating that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state while the setting change process is being executed.

Furthermore, when an ID determination process is periodically executed to determine whether the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible, a notification (game board unconnected notification sound, unconnection error notification display mode, minor abnormality notification light emission mode, etc.) corresponding to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state may be initiated based on a determination that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and then the notification corresponding to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state may be terminated based on a determination that the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible, or a notification corresponding to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state may be initiated based on a determination that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR after the ID determination process determines that the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible.

In addition, if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible, when the ID determination process is performed during the power-on operation check after the setting change process or before the setting change process is started and it is determined that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and that the game is in an unconnected state, the display device 1600 will display a message indicating that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and that the game is in an unconnected state, just as when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and it is determined whether the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible or not, while various screens are displayed. The various LEDs on the speaker and door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) may not emit a game board unconnection alert sound or light up in a minor abnormality alert light mode to alert that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and that there is an unconnected state, but may instead emit a game board unconnection alert sound and light up in a minor abnormality alert light mode to alert that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR when the power-on operation check is completed and the playable state is initiated.

Furthermore, even if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game board 5A is compatible, even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the setting change process, the detection is invalid (the system may not execute a process to check whether there is a detection, or it may execute a process to check whether there is a detection but not execute a process (such as an alert) based on the detection). Therefore, even after the setting change process, an abnormality alert based on detection during the setting change process by the abnormality detection means may not be executed.

In addition, if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible, if the right game board 5AR is disconnected during the power-on operation check after the setting change process and an abnormality is detected by an abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a bulb out detection sensor 574, or a door frame opening switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), the performance display device 1600 will report both the disconnected state with no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR during the power-on operation check and the fact that the abnormality was detected by the abnormality detection means. While a display indicating this is displayed, the various speakers and the various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) may not notify that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR and that there has been detection by the abnormality detection means, and instead, when the power-on operation check is completed and the game mode is started, notifications of detection by the abnormality detection means in the various speakers and door frame units may be given priority over notifications of there being no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR and that there is no connection.

In this example, when the setting change process is executed, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the machine is controlled to one of three game states: a first game state during which the setting change process is being executed, a second game state during which the power-on operation check is being executed, and a third game state as the game mode after the power-on operation check is completed. Furthermore, even if the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected or the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the first game state, the machine is not notified of the disconnection state in which there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR or the incompatible combination of the divided game board 5A. In other words, during the first game state, the effect display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs (some or all of them) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are not controlled in a manner that notifies that there is no ID code signal input from the right game board 5AR and that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible.

In addition, during the second game state after the first game state, the various speakers and the various LEDs (which may be only some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are not controlled in a manner that notifies that they are in an unconnected state where there is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR or that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, while the performance display device 1600 is controlled in a manner that notifies that they are in an unconnected state where there is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR or that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible. In addition, if during the second game state there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and the game is in an unconnected state, the fact that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR is indicated only by displaying text information on the display device 1600. If the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the fact that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible is indicated by displaying text information and image information on the display device 1600. In this way, in the second game state, the fact that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and the fact that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible are indicated only by the display on the display device 1600, but the intensity of the indication varies depending on the degree of disadvantage. This makes it easier to notice an incompatible combination of the divided game boards 5A, which has a higher degree of disadvantage compared to an unconnected state where there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR.

Furthermore, during the third game state following the end of the first and second game states, in addition to the effect display device 1600, various speakers and various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled in a manner that notifies the player that there is no ID code signal input from the right game board 5AR and that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible.

In other words, the first gaming state is a period during which work is done to change the setting values, and since the gaming performance (ease of winning, etc.) is determined, the worker needs to concentrate and work carefully. Therefore, even if the right-side gaming board 5AR is not connected or the combination of the divided gaming board 5A is incompatible, the system does not notify the user that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR and that the combination of the divided gaming board 5A is incompatible, so as not to interfere with the work to change the setting values. In the first game state, not only is there no notification of an unconnected state where there is no ID code signal input from the right game board 5AR, or of an incompatible combination of the divided game board 5A, but there is also no notification of other abnormalities (for example, detection by sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, or situations where an abnormality is not actually detected but could be detected (for example, when vibration is occurring but the vibration sensor is disabled and no vibration is detected)).

Furthermore, the second game state after the first game state is a period to check whether it is possible to light up the LEDs normally and whether it is possible to drive the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. to operate the movable bodies normally. Although the checking work requires concentration, it does not determine game performance, so only notifications that do not interfere with the checking work (such as notifications on the performance display device 1600 in this example) are made, and attention-grabbing notifications such as flashing LEDs or outputting notification sounds from various speakers are not made. Furthermore, in the second game state, it is possible to check whether the various LEDs can emit light normally by repeatedly controlling the illumination of the various LEDs mounted in multiple numbers on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and divided game board 5A to a special illumination mode that is executed only in the second game state. In addition, in the second game state, only the performance display device 1600 notifies that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR and that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, and not only does not notify the various speakers and the various LEDs (which may be only some or all) of the door frame units (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), but also notifies the other abnormalities (for example, the main ones such as the magnetic sensor 1050, the vibration sensor, the full tank detection sensor 154, the bulb out detection sensor 574, the door frame open switch, etc.). Even when there is detection by a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310, or when there is a situation where there is no actual detection but it could be detected (for example, when vibration is occurring but the vibration sensor is disabled and no vibration is detected), an alert is issued only by the performance display device 1600, and no alert is issued by the various speakers or the various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3).

Furthermore, since the third game state following the end of the first and second game states does not involve any confirmation work or work to determine game performance, the operator is alerted using the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) to ensure that they do not miss the fact that the right game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input, or that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible.

In other words, in this example pachinko machine 1, when the game state changes from the first game state to the second game state and then to the third game state, the level of notification that there is no ID code signal input from the right game board 5AR and that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible changes; in the first game state, no notification is made, a weak notification is made in the second game state, and a strong notification is made in the third game state. This makes it possible to issue appropriate notifications according to the game state and work situation.

In addition, in the second gaming state, as described above, the operation of the effect operation unit 301, volume adjustment switch, light intensity adjustment switch, etc. of the effect operation unit 300, which serves as the operating means located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, outputs special modes that are not executed in the first gaming state and the third gaming state. Specifically, special sounds are output from various speakers based on the operation of the volume adjustment switch or light intensity adjustment switch, the color of the light emitted by various LEDs is changed based on the operation of the effect operation unit 301, volume adjustment switch, or light intensity adjustment switch of the effect operation unit 300, and specific displays are displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on specific operations (e.g., pressing the volume adjustment switch and light intensity adjustment switch simultaneously for a predetermined period of time) performed on the effect operation unit 301, volume adjustment switch, or light intensity adjustment switch of the effect operation unit 300. This makes it possible to confirm whether the effect operation unit 301, volume adjustment switch, light intensity adjustment switch, etc. of the effect operation unit 300, which serves as the operating means located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, are able to normally accept operations.

[Setting value confirmation display and split game board ID error]
Next, we will explain an example of behavior when the setting value confirmation display is performed in a state where the combination of the split game board 5A (i.e., the combination of the right game board 5AR (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left game board 5AL (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) is in an incompatible (mismatched) state (mismatched state, mismatched state) or where the right game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left game board 5AL (unconnected state), such as when no ID code signal is input from the right game board 5AR (the input of the ID code signal from the right game board 5AR cannot be confirmed) and a malfunction such as a short circuit or break occurs in the transmission path for transmitting various signals. For comparison, we will also explain an example of behavior when the combination of the split game board 5A (i.e., the combination of the right game board 5AR (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left game board 5AL (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) is in a compatible (matched) state (matched state). Fig. 280 is an example of behavior when a setting value confirmation display is performed when the split gaming board 5A, which is composed of a left gaming board 5AL and a right gaming board 5AR, is compatible (matched) as a combination of the split gaming board 5A, Fig. 281 is an example of behavior when a setting value confirmation display is performed when the combination of the split gaming board 5A is incompatible (mismatched), and Fig. 284 is an example of behavior when a setting value confirmation display is performed when the right gaming board 5AR is not connected. Below, only the parts that differ from when the setting change process is executed will be explained, and duplicate explanations will not be given.

[Display of setting value confirmation when compatible]
As shown in FIG. 280, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 sends "power
On the other hand, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR, and the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left gaming board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 are turned off. Furthermore, as described above, when the predetermined setting value display permission conditions are met when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 starts (in this example, after inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turning it on, the power switch 630a provided on the power supply board 630 is operated to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 without pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes a setting value confirmation display process (step S28), and the current setting value stored in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on for the first time) can be displayed on the setting display 1310g (or the base monitor 1310h which also functions as a setting display).

In addition, when the setting value confirmation display process is initiated, a setting value confirmation display start command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, informing the peripheral control IC 1510 that the setting value confirmation display will begin. Upon receiving the setting value confirmation display start command, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 causes the performance display device 1600 to display a setting confirmation notification (in this example, "Setting confirmation in progress") (this may be displayed until the setting value confirmation display process is terminated, or may be displayed for a certain period of time and then terminated), and causes the various speakers to repeatedly output a setting value confirmation display notification sound (an announcement voice saying "Setting confirmation in progress" and a warning sound such as a "ding dong") at a predetermined volume (this may be the maximum volume that can be set, or a default volume adjusted using a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510). (This may be output repeatedly until the setting value confirmation display process is terminated, or may be output repeatedly a certain number of times (e.g., five times) or for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) and then stop output.)

In addition, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the illumination of the various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) and the various LEDs (some or all) mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR) to a setting confirmation notification illumination mode (in this example, the various LEDs of the door frame unit and the right-side game board 5AR switch between blue and white illumination colors in a short period of time) when the setting value confirmation display is being displayed (they may be lit in the setting confirmation notification illumination mode until the setting value confirmation display process is completed, or they may be lit in the setting confirmation notification illumination mode for a certain period of time and then the setting confirmation notification illumination mode is terminated and the lights are turned off or lit in a different illumination mode). This notifies the user that the setting value confirmation display is being performed, allowing for immediate detection of any improper setting value confirmation.

As described above, in this example, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is met when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turned ON, and then the power switch 630a on the power supply board 630 is operated to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 without pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f. In other words, the setting value confirmation display process is executed with the main body frame 4 open relative to the outer frame 2, and when the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the main body frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed.

However, in this example, the pachinko machine 1 is configured so that, while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, the output of door-opening alarm sounds from the various speakers caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 and the light emission control of the serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode are not executed. In other words, if the predetermined setting value display permission conditions are met when power is first supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the output of door-opening alarm sounds from the various speakers caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 and the light emission control of the serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode are not executed, and the setting value confirmation display alarm sounds are output from the various speakers and the light emission control of the setting confirmation alarm light-emitting mode is executed. Therefore, when the setting value confirmation display process is executed, after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the output of door-opening alarm sounds from the various speakers caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 and the light emission control of the serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode (including the quasi-serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode if the light emission control is to be changed to the quasi-serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode) can be executed.

Note that if the setting value confirmation display process is terminated after the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed, i.e., if the main frame 4 is closed while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, the door open alarm sounds caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 will not be output from the various speakers and the serious abnormality alarm light emission mode (including the semi-serious abnormality alarm light emission mode if the light emission mode is changed to the semi-serious abnormality alarm light emission mode after the serious abnormality alarm light emission mode) will not be executed even after the setting value confirmation display process is terminated. However, when checking and displaying the setting value, the amusement hall manager or other person in charge will normally open the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 from the front of the pachinko machine 1 and perform an operation to check and display the setting value, so the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, will be closed after the setting value confirmation display process is terminated. Furthermore, as described above, when the main frame 4, which is open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed or when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 and a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 (e.g., 30 seconds, which is shorter than the time required for power-on operation confirmation in this example), the door open alarm sound is stopped and muted. Therefore, normally, when the setting value confirmation display process is executed and the setting value confirmation display process is completed, if the predetermined period of time has not elapsed since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2, both the door open alarm sound output from the various speakers due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 and the light emission control of the serious abnormality alarm light mode (including the semi-serious abnormality alarm light mode if the light emission control is switched to the semi-serious abnormality alarm light mode after the serious abnormality alarm light mode) are executed; however, if the predetermined period of time has elapsed since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2, only the light emission control of the serious abnormality alarm light mode due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 is executed.

In addition, the volume of the setting value confirmation display notification sound output from the various speakers while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed cannot be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227. As described above, the player can adjust the volume output from the various speakers by operating the volume adjustment button 227, but the volume of the setting value confirmation display notification sound output while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed cannot be adjusted by the player operating the volume adjustment button 227. As a result, the setting value confirmation display notification sound can be output at a predetermined volume while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, and the sound output from the various speakers can reliably notify the player that a setting value confirmation display is being executed. This makes it possible to immediately detect when a setting value confirmation display is being executed, and prevents fraudulent confirmation of setting values.

The light intensity of the setting confirmation notification light-emitting mode performed during the setting value confirmation display process cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228. As described above, the player can adjust the light intensity (brightness) of some of the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. However, the setting confirmation notification light-emitting mode performed during the setting value confirmation display process cannot be adjusted by the player operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, during the setting value confirmation display process, the LEDs on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A are controlled to emit a predetermined light intensity (brightness), allowing the setting confirmation notification light-emitting mode to be performed. This setting confirmation notification light-emitting mode reliably notifies the user that a setting value confirmation display is being performed, allowing for immediate detection of any fraudulent setting value confirmation displays and preventing fraudulent setting value confirmation.

Furthermore, while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, operating the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 does not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) on the performance display device 1600, nor does it output a confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228. Because the performance display device 1600 does not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness), the scale does not change even if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated multiple times. This prevents the scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) from interfering with the visibility of the setting confirmation notification mode on the performance display device 1600, and prevents the confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 from making the setting value confirmation display notification sound difficult to hear, making it possible to immediately detect any unauthorized setting value confirmation display.

In addition, while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, and the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 are turned off. In other words, in this example of the pachinko machine 1, although the split gaming board 5A is made up of the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR, during setting confirmation all of the various LEDs provided on the left gaming board 5AL are turned off regardless of whether they are controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, and only the various LEDs provided on the right gaming board 5AR and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are turned on.

In this way, while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, the light emission patterns of the various LEDs provided on the divided gaming board 5A are made different between the various LEDs provided on the left gaming board 5AL and the various LEDs provided on the right gaming board 5AR, which gives a sense of discomfort to anyone viewing the pachinko machine 1 and makes them immediately aware that the setting value confirmation display process is being executed. Furthermore, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board mounted on the left gaming board 5AL, the function display unit 1400, and the sub-function display unit 2250 may be illuminated in a different light-emitting mode from the various LEDs on the door frame unit and the right gaming board 5AR (for example, illuminated red (not flashing) at a predetermined brightness (which may be maximum brightness, a brightness lower than maximum brightness, or a brightness such that the light intensity cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228)). Alternatively, one or both of the LEDs on the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding winning or losing may be illuminated in a setting confirmation notification light-emitting mode. In this case, the light-emitting mode of the LEDs on the right gaming board 5AR and the left gaming board 5AL can be made different, making it possible to immediately notice that the setting value confirmation display process is being executed.

In addition, when an operation to end the setting value confirmation display (in this example, an OFF operation to return the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 to its initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF)) is performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 hides the setting values stored in a dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM that is being displayed on the setting display 1310g (or the base monitor 1310h that also functions as a setting display), and sends a setting value confirmation display end command to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify that the setting value confirmation display process has ended.

In addition, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a setting value confirmation display end command from the main control MPU 1310a, it performs a power-on operation check to confirm whether the drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are driven in a predetermined manner and can be turned on and operate normally. During the power-on operation check, the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, except for the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding whether the game is won or lost (such as the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR, and the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 mounted on the door frame 3)), are illuminated in a predetermined illumination mode (illumination mode during power-on operation check). However, when the setting value confirmation display process is executed, the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, except for the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding whether the game is won or lost, are illuminated in a predetermined illumination mode (illumination mode during power-on operation check) only if the illumination control for the serious abnormality notification illumination mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 is not performed.

As described above, the light emission control of the serious abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 is not executed even after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process if the main frame 4 is closed while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter. In other words, if the main frame 4 is closed while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, except for the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information about whether a win or loss occurred (the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR), are lit in a predetermined light emission mode (light emission mode during power-on operation confirmation) as a power-on operation confirmation. On the other hand, If the main frame 4 is closed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the light emission is controlled to a serious abnormality notification light mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, and when a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds, in this example, longer than the period from when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 starts checking power-on operation to when the power-on operation check is completed) has elapsed since the main frame 4 was closed, the light emission control for the serious abnormality notification light mode is terminated, and light emission control begins in a light emission mode corresponding to the game status (light emission mode during presentation), as in normal times (when playable).

Furthermore, after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the mode of the performance (decorative patterns, background images during normal times (when playable), etc.) is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and when the power-on operation confirmation is completed, the LED of the function display unit 1400 and the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding winning or losing are lit in a predetermined light-emitting mode, and based on the start condition of the variable display being met (a game ball entering the start port (first start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and second start port 2004)), the light emission is controlled in a predetermined light-emitting mode (light-emitting mode during variable performance (lights up in a predetermined light-emitting mode after flashing for a predetermined period)). Also, as mentioned above, in this example, the output period of the door opening notification sound is determined based on the power-on operation confirmation. Since this is shorter than the period required for confirmation, if the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 when the setting value confirmation display process is started and the main frame 4 is still open relative to the outer frame 2 when the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened will have already reached a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds). Therefore, even if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 when the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the door open notification sound will not be output from the various speakers, and the sound output during the effect (the output of the effect sound that is performed when the start condition for the variable display is met (the game ball enters the start port (first start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and second start port 2004))) can be executed.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 ends the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) and performs an interrupt permission setting (step S52), enabling the ball launcher 540 to launch game balls, and starts controlling the illumination of the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250, which display information about winning or losing. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, game balls are not launched by the ball launcher 540 while the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is being executed. It should be noted that any device may be used to control the illumination of the LED of the function display unit 1400 and the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250, and is not limited to devices that immediately light up one or both of the LED of the function display unit 1400 and the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 in a predetermined manner when the ball launcher 540 becomes capable of launching a gaming ball. The device may also light up one or both of the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250 in an illumination mode for displaying special symbol variations or in an illumination mode for a variation presentation when the conditions for starting the variation presentation are met (a gaming ball entering the start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004), or may light up in an illumination mode for displaying special symbol variations or in an illumination mode for a variation presentation after the illumination mode that notifies of an abnormal state or the like has ended, or may be set to an illumination controllable state for displaying special symbol variations or in an illumination mode for a variation presentation.

[Display of setting value confirmation in case of non-compliance]
Next, an example of behavior when a setting value confirmation display is performed when the combination of the divided gaming board 5A (i.e., the combination of the right gaming board 5AR (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left gaming board 5AL (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) is in an incompatible (mismatched) state (mismatched state) will be described with reference to FIG. 281. Note that the following only explains the parts that are different from when the setting change process is executed or when the setting value confirmation display process is executed when compatible, and will not provide a duplicated explanation.

As shown in FIG. 281, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not output control signals to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR, and the electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR are set to a non-driven state (e.g., the various LEDs are turned off) regardless of whether the setting value confirmation display is being performed. Also, in this example, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL are also turned off regardless of whether the setting value confirmation display is being performed.

In addition, in this example, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the system does not notify the user that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible until the setting value confirmation display process is completed (until the setting value confirmation display end command is received from the main control MPU 1310a), but instead notifies the user that the setting value confirmation display process is being executed. In other words, while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, the performance display device 1600 displays a setting confirmation notification mode (in this example, "setting confirmation in progress") (this may be displayed until the setting value confirmation display process is completed, or may be displayed for a certain period of time and then terminated), and the setting value confirmation display notification sound (an announcement voice saying "setting confirmation in progress" and a warning sound such as a "ding dong") is output at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set, or may be a default volume adjusted using a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510). The various LEDs on the door frame unit are controlled to emit light in a setting confirmation notification light-emitting mode when displaying the setting value confirmation, while the various LEDs mounted on the decorative boards on the right game board 5AR and left game board 5AL, the LEDs on the function display unit 1400, and the LEDs on the sub-function display unit 2250 are turned off.

Then, when the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the main control MPU 1310a sends a setting value confirmation display end command to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting value confirmation display end command, it repeatedly outputs a game board incompatibility notification sound (an announcement voice saying "A right-side game board incompatibility error has occurred. Please turn off the power and check." and a warning sound such as a "ding dong" sound) at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set, or a default volume adjusted by a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510) from various speakers until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. and controls the various LEDs (which may be some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) to repeatedly emit light in a serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode (in this example, a mode in which the light is switched between being lit in red at maximum brightness and being turned off in a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (high-speed blinking mode)). Also, the performance display device 1600 does not display decorative patterns or background images used in normal times (when playable), but instead displays a background image (for example, black) in an abnormal state and "Right side game board incompatible error occurred" as an incompatible error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600 to notify that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible. Meanwhile, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative boards on the right-side game board 5AR and left-side game board 5AL, the LEDs on the function display unit 1400, and the LEDs on the sub-function display unit 2250 are controlled to remain off.

The game board incompatibility alert sound is not a single alert sound (such as a "beep") that is output intermittently, but is made up of multiple sounds with different tones, and is further controlled to alternate between a mute state and an on state. Furthermore, the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode is not fixed to a lit state, but is controlled to alternate between a lit state and an off state to change the light intensity. In other words, the various speakers and LEDs dynamically alert the player that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, with the tone, volume, light intensity, etc. changing over time. This makes it easier to notice that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible when the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except for specific areas (step S38), is completed and a game mode that does not require confirmation is initiated.

In addition, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has completed its power-on operation check and the game mode has begun, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 continues to output the game board incompatibility alarm sound, control the light emission of the serious abnormality alarm light emission mode of the door frame unit, and display the incompatibility error alarm display mode of the performance display device 1600, while also causing the LED of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 to be able to control the light emission in the same way as when they are compatible (they may also be lit in a predetermined manner). In other words, when the conditions for starting the variable display are met (a game ball enters the start port (first start port 2002 or either first start port 2002 or second start port 2004)), the LED of the function display unit 1400 and the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 flash in a predetermined manner, and then light up in a predetermined light-emitting manner, making it possible to display information about whether the game has been won or lost.

The incompatibility error notification display mode in the effect display device 1600 is a still image that does not change over time and continues until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. Even if the condition for starting the variable display is met (a game ball entering the start port (first start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and second start port 2004)), and the variable display of a special symbol is started in the function display unit 1400, or the variable display of a fourth symbol is started in the sub-function display unit 2250, the effect display device 1600 continues to display the incompatibility error notification display mode and does not perform any variable effects such as the variable display of decorative symbols. In addition, the effect display device 16 The display format for the incompatible error notification in 00 may be any format appropriate to the error content, such as a combination of letters and numbers (for example, an error code) or a mark. In this way, during the power-on operation check that does not involve the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38) after the setting value confirmation display process, the display device 1600 notifies the user that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in a static format that does not change over time. This makes it possible to notify the user that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible without interfering with the confirmation process during the power-on operation check.

In this way, in this example, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the system immediately notifies the user that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible without issuing an abnormality notification in response to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 after the setting value confirmation display process is completed. In other words, after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, a game board incompatible notification sound is output without issuing a door open notification sound, regardless of whether the predetermined period has elapsed since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2. Furthermore, although the light emission is controlled to a serious abnormality notification light mode after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, this is executed due to the combination of the divided game board 5A being incompatible, not due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2. Therefore, after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the light emission is always controlled to the serious abnormality notification light emission mode regardless of whether a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the main body frame 4 was closed.

In addition, when the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (mismatched), even if the start condition for the variable display is met (when a game ball enters the start hole (first start hole 2002 or one of the first start hole 2002 and second start hole 2004)), the effect display device 1600, various speakers, various LEDs on the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), and the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, The LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250 are configured to notify the user of an abnormality without performing the variable effects of the various LEDs mounted on the unit. On the other hand, when the interrupt permission setting (step S52) is made after the setting change process (step S37) is completed, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 are controlled to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode based on the establishment of the variable display start condition (a game ball entering the start port (first start port 2002 or either the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004)), and are able to display information regarding the result.

Furthermore, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be incompatible (mismatched) when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the fact that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible (mismatched) is notified at the same time, regardless of whether a setting value confirmation display is performed. Specifically, regardless of whether a setting value confirmation display is performed, when the power-on operation check is performed, the various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are illuminated in a serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode, and various speakers are output to output a game board incompatible notification sound, and the performance display device 1600 is timed to display a background image (e.g., black) and an incompatible error notification display mode in the event of an abnormality. This allows information of higher importance (in this case, an announcement that the setting value confirmation display is being executed) to be reported in sequence so that it can be dealt with, ensuring that each piece of information is reliably communicated and dealt with. The timing of the start of some or all of the following may be varied depending on whether the setting value confirmation display is executed: the control of the light emission in the serious abnormality notification light emission mode by the various LEDs (some or all may be used) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), the output of the game board incompatibility notification sound by the various speakers, and the timing of the display of the background image (e.g., black) and incompatibility error notification display mode in the event of an abnormality on the performance display device 1600.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, when the power-on operation check is being performed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, that is, when only the power-on operation check is being performed without the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), the volume cannot be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to adjust the volume output from the various speakers by operating the volume adjustment button 227, but the volume of the game board incompatibility notification sound output after the setting change process is completed cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment button 227. Therefore, when the setting value confirmation display process is completed, a game board incompatibility notification sound can be output at a predetermined volume, and the sound output from the various speakers can reliably communicate that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, preventing any disadvantage to the player or the gaming facility.

Similarly, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, when the power-on operation check is being performed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, i.e., when only the power-on operation check is being performed without the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), the light intensity (brightness) cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs on the door frame 3 and various decorative boards provided on the divided game board 5A can be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228, but the serious abnormality warning light emission mode, which is controlled after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, cannot be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, when the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the LEDs on the various decorative boards attached to the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A can be controlled to emit light at a predetermined light intensity (brightness), and the light emission pattern can reliably convey that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, preventing any disadvantage to the player or the game parlor.

Furthermore, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, when the power-on operation check is being performed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, that is, when only the power-on operation check is being performed without the process of clearing all but a specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), the scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 even if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated. Furthermore, because the scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) is not displayed on the effect display device 1600, the scale does not change even if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) from interfering with the visibility of some or all of the incompatibility error notification display mode on the effect display device 1600, and it is possible to reliably communicate that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible.

Furthermore, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, when the power-on operation check is being performed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, that is, when only the power-on operation check is being performed without the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), the confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is not output. This prevents the confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 from making the game board incompatible notification sound difficult to hear, and ensures that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (inconsistent) when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the detection is invalidated (it may be that the process to check whether or not there is a detection is not executed, or it may be that the process to check whether or not there is a detection is executed but the process (such as an alert) based on the detection is not executed).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 282, even if an illegal magnetic field is generated during the setting value confirmation display process and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the detection signal is discarded without issuing an abnormality alert based on the detection of the illegal magnetic field. In other words, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is in an incompatible (mismatched) state when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the setting value confirmation display process, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control is executed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed as if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had not been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (e.g., a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch) during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, that is, if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the power-on operation check that does not involve the process of clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the detection by the abnormality detection means is also disabled (it may be that the process of checking whether or not there is a detection is not executed, or it may be that the process of checking whether or not there is a detection is executed but no process (such as an alert) based on the detection is executed).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 283, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the combination of the divided game board 5A is deemed to be incompatible (mismatched), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the execution of the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the detection signal is discarded without issuing an abnormality alert based on the detection of an illegal magnetism. In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed to be incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control continues as if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had not been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

In addition, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed to be incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc., which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, the detection by the abnormality detection means is disabled (it may not execute a process to check whether or not there is a detection, or it may execute a process to check whether or not there is a detection but not execute a process (such as an alert) based on the detection).

Specifically, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is deemed to be incompatible (mismatched), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, the detection signal is discarded without issuing an abnormality alert based on the detection of an illegal magnetism. In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed to be incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control continues as if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had not been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

In this way, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is in an incompatible (mismatched) state when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), no abnormality alert will be issued even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, sensors or switches such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc., which input a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310).

In other words, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible, gameplay may proceed in a manner not intended by the designer, potentially causing harm to the gaming establishment and players, and may even result in a deviation from the original specifications, potentially causing a loss of trust among players, so it is necessary to ensure that play is stopped. Therefore, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible, an alert is issued in priority over alerts resulting from abnormality detection by the abnormality detection means (e.g., sensors and switches such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, and door frame open switch, which input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), thereby preventing play and minimizing harm to the gaming establishment and players.

In addition, some LEDs may be controlled to emit different light depending on the type of abnormality detection means. For example, when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, one or both of the LEDs on the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250 may be turned off (putting them in a state where light emission control is not possible).

Furthermore, as described above, in this example, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is set to a compatible (matched) state when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), then even if the combination of the divided game boards 5AR subsequently becomes incompatible (mismatched), no notification (game board incompatible notification sound, incompatible error notification display mode, serious abnormality notification light emission mode, etc.) will be issued in response to the right-side game board 5AR being in a non-compatible state. However, this is not limited to determining whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible only when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may periodically (for example, constantly determine each time the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed) execute an ID determination process to determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started. In this case, after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, it will be possible to notify the player that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, thereby preventing the occurrence of disadvantages.

In addition, even if an ID determination process is periodically executed to determine whether the combination of the divided game board 5A is compatible, the ID determination process may not be executed while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed.Also, even if the ID determination process is executed while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed and it is determined that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, no notification may be issued indicating that the right-side game board 5AR is in an incompatible state while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed.

In addition, if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible, when the ID determination process is executed during the power-on operation check after the setting value confirmation display process or before the setting value confirmation display process is started and it is determined that the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible, the display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) may be configured to notify the user that the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible during the power-on operation check, just as when the compatibility of the combination of the split game boards 5A is determined only when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started.

Furthermore, even if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game board 5A is compatible, even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the detection is invalid (the system may not execute a process to check whether there is a detection, or it may execute a process to check whether there is a detection but not execute a process (such as an alert) based on the detection). Therefore, even after the setting value confirmation display process, an abnormality alert based on detection during the setting value confirmation display process by the abnormality detection means may not be executed.

In addition, when the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be incompatible during the power-on operation check after the setting value confirmation display process and an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) may issue a notification that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, taking priority over a notification of detection by the abnormality detection means, and if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible, a notification of detection by the abnormality detection means may be issued.

In addition, in the power-on operation check that is performed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed (after receiving the setting value confirmation display end command from the main control MPU 1310a), not only is the power-on operation check not performed for the drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., that are provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR that has been determined to be non-compliant and that are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, but also for the movable body that performs the power-on operation check (the back of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 provided on the divided gaming board 5A). Operation checks are also not performed when power is turned on for the drive motors and drive solenoids that drive the performance operation units 301 that are provided on the door frame units (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear lower front performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) and are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003).

Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, even if the power-on operation check is started, the LEDs on the right-side game board 5AR determined to be incompatible will not be controlled to light up in the light-emitting mode used in the power-on operation check, or the movable body will not be controlled to operate in the mode used in the power-on operation check (a control signal will not be output to the right-side game board 5AR), or will not be able to be controlled (a control signal will be output but not input to the right-side game board 5AR). In addition, the drive motors and drive solenoids on the turntable unit 200 (in this example, the performance operation unit 300) that is provided on the door frame 3 and not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) will not be driven to operate the performance operation unit 301 on the performance operation unit 300.

In other words, if the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an incompatible state, there is a risk that some or all of the movable bodies provided on door frame units that are not subject to ID determination will also be deemed incompatible, and if a control signal is input from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, there is a risk that the movable bodies will operate in a manner different from their intended operation. Therefore, some or all of the movable bodies provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR that has been determined to be incompatible or on door frame units that are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) and that are operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will not be driven, thereby preventing the movable bodies from operating in a manner different from their intended operation, which could damage the movable bodies or door frame unit, or prevent the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable bodies from failing.

As described above, the game board side components may be configured to include the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit from among the door frame units. In this case, the specific door frame unit is subject to ID determination, and if it is determined to be incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), some or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in door frame units that are not subject to ID determination (non-specific door frame units) and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may also be prevented from being driven. In addition to this, or separately from this, if there are multiple specific door frame units (for example, the right door frame If a part of the door frame (for example, one of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top unit 450) is determined to be incompatible, all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in the specific door frame unit and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be prevented from being driven, or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in all door frame units, including the specific door frame unit, and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be prevented from being driven.

On the other hand, the movable bodies (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear-front-lower performance unit 3160, etc.) provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is equipped with a peripheral control board 1510 on which a peripheral control IC 1510a that executes the ID determination process (step S1003) is implemented, operate in the same manner as normal (when the combination of the divided gaming board 5A is determined to be compatible) when operation confirmation begins upon power-on. In addition, the LEDs mounted on the boards of the movable bodies provided on the left side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front lower performance unit 3160) are not controlled to emit light in the light emission mode when the power is turned on to check operation. In other words, if the right-side gaming board 5AR is determined to be in an incompatible state in the ID determination process (step S1003), the movable elements on the left-side gaming board 5AL (such as the rear-upper movable decorative element 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 on the left-side gaming board 5AL of the split gaming board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative element 3301 and rear-right movable decorative element 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative element 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160) are operated in the operating mode during power-on operation check, but the LEDs on the movable elements on the left-side gaming board 5AL are not controlled to emit light in the operating mode during power-on operation check, but are turned off and operated in the operating mode during power-on operation check. This makes it easy to identify the gaming board on which the peripheral control board 1510 of the split gaming board 5A is installed (in this case, the left-side gaming board 5AL).

In addition, in this example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, not only is control not performed to drive the drive motor or drive solenoid mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame unit (in this example, the tray unit 200) that is not the subject of ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) to operate the performance operation unit 301, but the various LEDs mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 are also not controlled to emit light in the light emission mode when operation is confirmed when the power is turned on. That is, when the power-on operation check is performed after the setting confirmation display process is completed, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the various LEDs mounted on the boards provided in the presentation operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality alert mode due to the incompatible combination of the divided game boards 5A. The presentation operation unit 300 may be the specific door frame unit subject to ID determination. Even in this case, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that a specific door frame unit other than the presentation operation unit 300 or the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the drive motors and drive solenoids mounted on the boards provided in the presentation operation unit 300 are not driven to operate the presentation operation unit 301, and the various LEDs mounted on the boards provided in the presentation operation unit 300 may be controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality alert mode rather than in the light emission mode used for the power-on operation check.

In addition, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the right-side game board 5AR determined to be incompatible and some or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in door frame units not subject to ID determination and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not be driven until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, not just during the power-on operation check, or until the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible. In this case, it is possible to prevent the movable bodies from operating in a manner different from their intended operation, which could result in damage to the movable bodies or door frame unit, or failure of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable bodies.

[Setting value confirmation display when not connected]
Next, an example of behavior when a setting value confirmation display is performed in an unconnected state (disconnected state) in which the right-side gaming panel 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side gaming panel 5AL, such as when there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming panel 5AR (the input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming panel 5AR cannot be confirmed) and a malfunction such as a short circuit or disconnection occurs in the transmission path for transmitting various signals, will be described with reference to Fig. 284. Note that the following only describes the parts that are different from when a setting change process is performed or when a setting value confirmation display process is performed when the setting is compatible or incompatible, and redundant explanations will not be provided.

As shown in FIG. 284, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming board 5AR during the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, i.e., if the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected, a control signal from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is not input to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR, and therefore the electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR are in a non-driven state (e.g., the various LEDs are turned off) regardless of whether or not the setting value confirmation display is being performed. Note that if it is determined during the ID determination process (step S1003) that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming board 5AR, it is also possible not to output a control signal from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR. Furthermore, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that no ID code signal has been input from the right-side gaming board 5AR, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL are also turned off regardless of whether or not the setting value is being displayed for confirmation.

In addition, in this example, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming board 5AR, it does not notify that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected until the setting value confirmation display process is completed (until it receives a setting value confirmation display end command from the main control MPU 1310a), but instead notifies that the setting value confirmation display process is being executed. In other words, while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, the effect display device 1600 displays a setting confirmation notification mode (in this example, "setting confirmation in progress") (this may be displayed until the setting value confirmation display process is completed, or may be displayed for a certain period of time and then terminated), and the setting value confirmation display notification sound (an announcement voice saying "setting confirmation in progress" and a warning sound such as a "ding dong") is played at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set, or may be a default volume adjusted using a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510). The various LEDs on the door frame unit are controlled to emit light in a setting confirmation notification light-emitting mode when displaying the setting value confirmation, while the various LEDs mounted on the decorative boards on the right game board 5AR and left game board 5AL, the LEDs on the function display unit 1400, and the LEDs on the sub-function display unit 2250 are turned off.

Then, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a setting value confirmation display end command from the main control MPU 1310a indicating that the setting value confirmation display process has ended, it repeatedly outputs a game board unconnection notification sound (an announcement voice saying "The right-side game board is not connected" and a warning sound such as "ding dong") caused by the right-side game board 5AR not being electrically connected from various speakers at a volume adjusted by the volume adjustment button 227 until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (the output may be stopped after being output repeatedly a certain number of times (e.g., 5 times) or for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds)). Meanwhile, the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 42 provided on the door frame 3) 0, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc.) are repeatedly controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality alert light mode (a semi-serious abnormality alert light mode when the light emission is controlled to a semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode) caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, and when a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the main frame 4, which had been open relative to the outer frame 2, was closed, the light emission is controlled to a minor abnormality alert light mode (a mode in which the light is switched between maximum brightness white light and off in a short period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) (high-speed flashing mode)) caused by the right-side game board 5AR not being electrically connected. Furthermore, the effect display device 1600 displays the effect (normal) mode (decorative symbols, background images for normal times (when play is possible), etc.) as in the case of compatibility, and also displays "Right-side game board unconnection error occurred" as an unconnection error notification display mode on the effect display device 1600 to notify that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side game board 5AL. The various LEDs mounted on the decorative boards provided on the right-side game board 5AR and left game board 5AL, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400, and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 are controlled to remain off.

The game board disconnection alert sound is not a single alert sound (such as a "beep") that is output intermittently, but is composed of multiple sounds with different tones, and is further controlled to alternate between a mute state and an on state. Furthermore, the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode is not fixed to a lit state, but is controlled to alternate between a lit state and an off state to change the light intensity. In other words, the various speakers and LEDs dynamically alert the player that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side game board 5AL, with the tone, volume, light intensity, etc. changing over time. This makes it easier to notice that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side game board 5AL when the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except for specific areas (step S38), is completed and a game mode that does not require any checking is initiated.

In addition, the unconnected error notification display mode in the performance display device 1600 is a still image that does not change over time and continues until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. However, when the start condition for the variable display is met (a game ball enters the start port (first start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and second start port 2004)) and the variable display of a special symbol is started in the function display unit 1400, or the variable display of a fourth symbol is started in the sub-function display unit 2250, a variable display such as a variable display of a decorative symbol is performed with the unconnected error notification display mode displayed on the performance display device 1600. The display format may be any format appropriate to the error content, such as a combination of letters and numbers (for example, an error code) or a mark. In this way, during the power-on operation check that does not involve the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) after the setting value check display process, the display on the effect display device 1600 notifies the user that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side gaming board 5AL in a static format that does not change over time. This makes it possible to notify the user that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side gaming board 5AL without interfering with the confirmation process during the power-on operation check.

Furthermore, as described above, the period from when the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed to when the light emission control for the serious abnormality notification light mode is terminated is longer than the period required to perform the power-on operation check. Therefore, if the main frame 4 is closed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the light emission control for the serious abnormality notification light mode will continue even after the game mode is started, regardless of whether the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter. When a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, was closed, the light emission control for the serious abnormality notification light mode will be terminated and the light emission control for the minor abnormality notification light mode will be switched to.

As described above, the light intensity cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228 for both the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode, which is controlled to emit light when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 (including the semi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode when the light is controlled to emit light in the semi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode), and the minor abnormality alert light-emitting mode, which is caused by the right-side gaming board 5AR not being electrically connected. Therefore, even when the setting value confirmation display process is completed and the gaming mode is started, the light intensity cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228.

In other words, when the setting value confirmation display process is executed while the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, a game board unconnected notification sound is output from the various speakers, and light emission control is executed for the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode (if the light emission control is changed to the semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode, the semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode) caused by the main body frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, and the volume of the game board unconnected notification sound output from the various speakers can be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227. However, it is not possible to adjust the light intensity using the light intensity adjustment button 228 for the serious abnormality alert light emission mode, which is controlled to emit light due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 (including the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode when the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode), or the minor abnormality alert light emission mode, which is controlled to emit light due to the right-side game board 5AR not being electrically connected after the end of the serious abnormality alert light emission mode, which is caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2.

For this reason, when the right-side gaming panel 5AR is not connected and the setting value confirmation display process is executed, the light can be controlled to emit a serious abnormality alert light at a predetermined brightness after the setting value confirmation display process is completed (or a semi-serious abnormality alert light if the light is controlled to emit a semi-serious abnormality alert light after the serious abnormality alert light). Even if the setting confirmation display process is overlooked during execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the serious abnormality alert light can be seen after the setting value confirmation display process is completed (or a semi-serious abnormality alert light if the light is controlled to emit a semi-serious abnormality alert light after the serious abnormality alert light). This makes it possible to be aware that the setting value confirmation display process may have been executed. Meanwhile, when the right-side gaming panel 5AR is not connected, which is unlikely to cause any harm to the player or the gaming facility, the volume can be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227 to prevent discomfort to the player.

In addition, based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 during light emission control of the minor abnormality notification light emission mode, the performance display device 1600 may be configured to display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness), or to output a confirmation sound based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228, or both.

In the example shown in Figure 284, the output period for the door open alert sound (30 seconds in this example) elapses before the setting value confirmation display process is terminated. However, if the setting value confirmation display process is terminated before the output period for the door open alert sound elapses, the door open alert sound is output after the setting value confirmation display process is terminated until the output period for the door open alert sound is reached. Then, once the output period for the door open alert sound has elapsed, the game board unconnected alert sound is output. Furthermore, if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 after the setting value confirmation display process is terminated, or if the elapsed time since the main frame 4 that was open relative to the outer frame 2 was closed has not yet reached a predetermined time period (e.g., 60 seconds), the game board unconnected alert sound may not be output until the main frame 4 is closed or until the light emission control for the serious abnormality alert light emission mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 is terminated, even if the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 has reached a predetermined time period (e.g., 30 seconds).

In this way, in this example, when the setting value confirmation display is performed in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR, if the main frame 4 is closed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, different alarm sounds are output from the various speakers depending on the time elapsed since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2, while the various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are configured to issue an abnormality alarm in response to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, taking priority over an abnormality alarm in response to the right-side gaming board 5AR being in an unconnected state.

In other words, although abnormality alerts are provided for the various speakers, the various LEDs on the door frame unit, and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-hand gaming board 5AR, there are cases where a common abnormality (an abnormality caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2) is alerted depending on the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2, and cases where different abnormalities (an abnormality caused by a disconnection for the various speakers, and an abnormality caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 for the various LEDs on the door frame unit and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-hand gaming board 5AR) are alerted. Therefore, if the setting value confirmation process is completed relatively quickly after the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, for example, when a setting value confirmation display is made in a short time due to fraudulent activity, the various LEDs on the door frame unit are controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality notification light mode, and door open notification sounds are output from the various speakers, thereby reliably communicating that the main frame 4 has been opened relative to the outer frame 2 and that a setting value may have been confirmed fraudulently. On the other hand, if the setting value is confirmed legitimately by a game hall manager or the like, it is possible to notify that the main frame 4 has been opened relative to the outer frame 2 simply by controlling the various LEDs on the door frame unit to emit light in a serious abnormality notification light mode.

In addition, even when the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input, after the power-on operation check is performed, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which display information regarding whether the game is a win or a loss, are not turned off, but are controlled to emit light in the same way as under normal circumstances (when play is possible). In other words, when there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR and the game is not connected, the system notifies the player that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not connected, preventing the game from proceeding in a manner not intended by the designer. However, even if the game starts in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR, the LEDs that display information about winning or losing are controlled to light up, allowing the game to proceed as normal, preventing the player from being disadvantaged.

In addition, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the timing of the light emission control in the minor abnormality notification light emission mode corresponding to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state and the timing of the output of the game board unconnected notification sound differ depending on whether or not a setting value confirmation display is performed.

Specifically, when there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR and the system is in an unconnected state and the setting value confirmation display is not executed, "power on" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 for a predetermined period of time based on the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1, and then a power-on operation check is initiated. During the power-on operation check, light emission control in a minor abnormality alert light emission mode and the output of a game board unconnected alert sound from the various speakers are initiated, which are caused by the system being in an unconnected state and no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR. In other words, at the timing when the power-on operation check is initiated, light emission control in a minor abnormality alert light emission mode and the output of a game board unconnected alert sound from the various speakers are initiated, which are caused by the system being in an unconnected state and no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR.

On the other hand, when the setting value confirmation display is executed in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from the right-side gaming board 5AR, the light emission control in the minor abnormality alert light emission mode and the output of the game board unconnected alert sound from the various speakers, which are caused by the unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from the right-side gaming board 5AR, are not initiated at the timing when the power-on operation check begins.Instead, the light emission control in the minor abnormality alert light emission mode and the output of the game board unconnected alert sound from the various speakers, which are caused by the unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from the right-side gaming board 5AR, are initiated after the power-on operation check begins (in this example, the game board unconnected alert sound is output after the power-on operation check begins but before the game mode starts, and the light emission control in the minor abnormality alert light emission mode is initiated when the power-on operation check ends and the game mode starts).

In this way, the timing of the light emission control in the minor abnormality notification light emission mode and the timing of the output of the game board unconnected notification sound differ depending on whether or not a setting value confirmation display is performed even when there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and the machine is in an unconnected state when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started. This allows for priority notification of information of greater importance, thereby preventing malfunctions and fraudulent activity. In other words, since an unauthorized setting value confirmation display could cause damage to the gaming parlor, this setting value confirmation display is given priority over a notification of an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, preventing the spread of damage caused by an unauthorized setting value confirmation display.

When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, indicating an unconnected state, the timing at which the display device 1600 displays "Right-side gaming panel unconnected error" as an unconnection error notification is the same regardless of whether a setting value confirmation display is performed. That is, the display device 1600 displays "Right-side gaming panel unconnected error" as an unconnection error notification display mode at the timing when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 begins checking the power-on operation. This allows notifications of higher importance to be executed with priority, while the display device 1600 can also notify and address other notifications. The timing at which the display device 1600 displays "Right-side gaming panel unconnected error" as an unconnection error notification display mode may also differ depending on whether a setting value confirmation display is performed. In this case, information of higher importance can be notified in order and addressed in sequence, ensuring that each piece of information is conveyed and addressed reliably.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and that the machine is in an unconnected state, the volume can be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227 after the setting value confirmation display process is completed. However, if a door open alert sound is output after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the volume can be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227 after the output of the door open alert sound has stopped. In other words, if a door open alert sound is output after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the volume cannot be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227 while the door open alert sound is being output, but the volume can be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227 during the period when the game board unconnection alert sound is being output after the output of the door open alert sound has stopped. This makes it possible to adjust the volume of the effect sounds output during variable effects in advance.

Furthermore, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR and that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the light intensity (brightness) cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228 when the power-on operation check is being performed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, i.e., when only the power-on operation check is being performed without the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38). As described above, in this example of pachinko machine 1, the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided gaming board 5A can be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. However, the serious abnormality alarm light emission mode, which is controlled by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, cannot be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, when the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided gaming board 5A can be controlled to emit a predetermined light intensity (brightness). This light emission mode reliably communicates that there is no ID code signal input from the right gaming board 5AR and that the game is in an unconnected state, thereby preventing any disadvantage to the player or the gaming parlor. Furthermore, if the light emission mode is not controlled to the serious abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, or if the light emission mode control for the serious abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 is completed during the power-on operation check, the light intensity (brightness) can be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228 even during the power-on operation check. In other words, if the light emission mode is controlled to the minor abnormality notification light emission mode after the light emission mode control for the serious abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 is completed, the light intensity (brightness) for the minor abnormality notification light emission mode can be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228.

Furthermore, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR and that the state is unconnected, when the power-on operation check is being performed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, i.e., when only the power-on operation check is being performed without the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), operating the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 will display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) on the performance display device 1600, and will output a confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, the display of the scale and the output of a confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 will allow the user to recognize that the volume or light intensity (brightness) has been changed. Furthermore, after one or both of the light emission control of the serious abnormality alert light mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 and the output of the door open alert sound have been completed, it may be possible to display a scale according to the current volume and light intensity (brightness) and/or output a confirmation sound according to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the machine is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, and if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the detection is invalid (it may be that the process to check whether or not there is a detection is not executed, or it may be that the process to check whether or not there is a detection is executed but no process (such as an alert) based on the detection is executed).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 285, even if an illicit magnetic field is generated during the setting value confirmation display process and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the detection signal is discarded without issuing an abnormality alert based on the detection of the illicit magnetic field. In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the setting value confirmation display process, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control is executed as if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 was not input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 after the setting value confirmation display process is completed.

In this way, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, if an abnormality is detected by an abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as a magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, door frame opening switch, etc.) during execution of the setting value confirmation display process, after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, a notification due to the unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from the right-side game board 5AR is given priority over an abnormality notification due to detection by the abnormality detection means. In other words, even if fraudulent activity is committed in a state where play is not possible before play can begin, such as during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process, there is a low likelihood of a disadvantage occurring after the game mode has started. However, if there is an unconnected state where no ID code signal is being input from the right-side game board 5AR, there is a high likelihood of a disadvantage occurring when play is started after the game mode has started. Therefore, if both detection by the abnormality detection means and an unconnected state where no ID code signal is being input from the right-side game board 5AR occur during execution of the setting value confirmation display process, a notification due to the unconnected state where no ID code signal is being input from the right-side game board 5AR is given priority after the setting value confirmation display process has ended, thereby preventing the occurrence of a disadvantage.

On the other hand, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side gaming panel 5AR is not receiving an ID code signal and is in an unconnected state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, and if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (e.g., sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc.) during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, that is, if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the power-on operation check that does not involve the process of clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except for specific areas (step S38), the detection by the abnormality detection means is validated, and an abnormality alert is issued when the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 286, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, indicating an unconnected state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state. If a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, an abnormality alert due to detection by the abnormality detection means will be issued by the performance display device 1600 and the various LEDs and speakers of the door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, door frame top unit 450, etc. provided on the door frame 3).

When the abnormality alert caused by the input of a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 ends, if no other abnormalities are detected, the various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) will be controlled to emit light in a minor abnormality alert light mode caused by the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state, and the game board unconnected alert sound will be repeatedly output from the various speakers.

In this way, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, and the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, at the time the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input, an abnormality alert caused by the input of the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is issued by the various LEDs, speakers, and effect display device 1600 of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3).

In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, and if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (e.g., a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc.) during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, then an abnormality alert resulting from detection by the abnormality detection means will be given priority over an alert resulting from the unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR.

In other words, while the likelihood of incurring a disadvantage if fraudulent behavior occurs during the power-on operation check is low, because game mode begins immediately after the power-on operation check is completed, there is a high likelihood of similar fraudulent behavior occurring in game mode as well. On the other hand, if there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game panel 5AR, resulting in an unconnected state, the likelihood of incurring a disadvantage is lower than if fraudulent behavior were to occur. Therefore, if both a detection by the abnormality detection means and an unconnected state, resulting in no ID code signal input from the right-side game panel 5AR, occur during the execution of the power-on operation check, the occurrence of a disadvantage is suppressed by immediately issuing a notification due to the detection by the abnormality detection means.

Note that sensors and switches such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, and door frame open switch that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 are shown as abnormality detection means. However, for some sensors and switches, even if a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during power-on operation check or after the setting value check display process has ended (including during power-on operation check and game mode), no abnormality alert may be sent to the performance display device 1600. Alternatively, for all sensors and switches, even if a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during power-on operation check or after the setting value check display process has ended (including during power-on operation check and game mode), no abnormality alert may be sent to the performance display device 1600.

In addition, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, and if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (e.g., sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc.) during the game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, that is, when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the game mode, the detection by the abnormality detection means is also valid, and an abnormality alert is issued at the time the abnormality is detected, just as when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the power-on operation check.

Specifically, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, and the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, an abnormality alert due to detection by the abnormality detection means is issued by the effect display device 1600 and the various LEDs and speakers of the door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, door frame top unit 450, etc. provided on the door frame 3).

In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and if a detection signal is input from an abnormality detection means (e.g., a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc.) to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, then an abnormality alert resulting from detection by the abnormality detection means will be given priority over an alert resulting from the unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from the right-side gaming board 5AR.

Therefore, during a game mode in which there is a high probability that a disadvantage will occur if fraudulent activity is committed, if both a detection by the abnormality detection means and an unconnected state in which no ID code signal is input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR occur, the occurrence of a disadvantage can be reduced by prioritizing the issuance of a notification due to detection by the abnormality detection means.

As described above, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the combination of the divided game boards 5A is set to a compatible (matched) state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible in the ID determination process (step S1003).After that, even if the divided game boards 5AR subsequently enter an unconnected state in which no ID code signal is input from them, no notification (game board unconnected notification sound, unconnected error notification display mode, minor abnormality notification light emission mode, etc.) is executed in response to the unconnected state in which no ID code signal is input from them.However, this is not limited to determining whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible only when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may periodically (for example, each time the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed) execute an ID determination process to determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started. In this case, after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 has started, it will be possible to notify the user of the disconnected state where no ID code signal is input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, thereby preventing any disadvantages from occurring.

In addition, even if an ID determination process is periodically executed to determine whether the combination of the split gaming board 5A is compatible, the ID determination process may not be executed while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed.Also, even if the ID determination process is executed while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed and it is determined that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR and that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, no notification may be issued indicating that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed.

In addition, if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible, when the ID determination process is performed during power-on operation check after the setting value confirmation display process or before the setting value confirmation display process is started and it is determined that there is no ID code signal input from the right game board 5AR and that the game board is in an unconnected state, a notification of detection by the abnormality detection means using the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) may be given priority over a notification that the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible, just as when the system is configured to determine whether the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible only when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started.

Furthermore, even if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game board 5A is compatible, even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the detection is invalid (the system may not execute a process to check whether there is a detection, or it may execute a process to check whether there is a detection but not execute a process (such as an alert) based on the detection). Therefore, even after the setting value confirmation display process, an abnormality alert based on detection during the setting value confirmation display process by the abnormality detection means may not be executed.

In addition, when the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible, if the right game board 5AR is not electrically connected during the power-on operation check after the setting value confirmation display process, and an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), the notification of the detection by the abnormality detection means using the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) may be given priority over the notification that the right game board 5AR is not electrically connected, and once the notification of the detection by the abnormality detection means has ended, a notification that the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible may be issued.

In addition, the power-on operation check that is performed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed (after receiving the setting value confirmation display end command from the main control MPU 1310a) does not only not check the power-on operation of the drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., that are provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which are determined to be in an unconnected state, but also does not check the power-on operation of the movable body that performs the power-on operation check (the rear upper performance unit 320 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the divided gaming board 5A). When power is turned on, no operation check is performed on the drive motors and drive solenoids that drive the performance operation unit 301 that is provided on the door frame units (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and rear right movable decorative body 3302 of rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear lower middle decorative body 3161 of rear lower front performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on door frame 3) and is not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003).

Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, even when the power-on operation check is initiated, the LEDs provided on the right-side gaming panel 5AR determined to be in an unconnected state will not be controlled to light up in the light-emitting mode used in the power-on operation check, or the movable body will not be controlled to operate in the mode used in the power-on operation check (a control signal is not output to the right-side gaming panel 5AR), or this control will not be possible (a control signal is output but not input to the right-side gaming panel 5AR). In addition, the drive motor or drive solenoid provided on the turntable unit 200 (in this example, the performance operation unit 300) provided on the door frame 3 and not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) will not be driven to operate the performance operation unit 301 provided on the performance operation unit 300.

In other words, when the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, there is a risk that some or all of the movable bodies provided on the door frame unit that is not the subject of ID determination will also be poorly connected, and the control signal output from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be changed to a different signal due to noise or the like and input, causing the movable bodies to operate in an abnormal manner. Therefore, some or all of the movable bodies provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR that is determined to be in an unconnected state or on the door frame unit that is not the subject of ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) and operated by the drive motor or drive solenoid controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are not driven, thereby preventing the movable bodies from operating in a different manner than they should, which could result in damage to the movable bodies or door frame unit, or failure of the drive motor or drive solenoid that operates the movable bodies.

As described above, the game board side components may be configured to include the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit from among the door frame units. In this case, the specific door frame unit is the subject of ID determination, and if it is determined to be in an unconnected state in the ID determination process (step S1003), some or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in door frame units that are not the subject of ID determination (non-specific door frame units) and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may also be prevented from being driven. In addition to this, or separately from this, if there are multiple specific door frame units (for example, the right door frame If it is determined that some (for example, one of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top unit 450) are disconnected, all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in the specific door frame unit and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be prevented from being driven, or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in all door frame units, including the specific door frame unit, and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be prevented from being driven.

On the other hand, the movable bodies (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear-front-lower performance unit 3160, etc.) provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is equipped with a peripheral control board 1510 on which a peripheral control IC 1510a that executes the ID determination process (step S1003) is implemented, operate in the same manner as normal (when the combination of the divided gaming board 5A is determined to be compatible) when operation confirmation begins upon power-on. In addition, the LEDs mounted on the boards of the movable bodies provided on the left side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front lower performance unit 3160) are not controlled to emit light in the light emission mode when the power is turned on to check operation. In other words, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side gaming board 5AR is disconnected, the movable elements on the left-side gaming board 5AL (such as the rear-upper movable decorative element 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 on the left-side gaming board 5AL of the split gaming board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative element 3301 and rear-right movable decorative element 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative element 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160) are operated in the operating mode during power-on operation check, but the LEDs on the movable elements on the left-side gaming board 5AL are not controlled to emit light in the operating mode during power-on operation check, but are turned off and operated in the operating mode during power-on operation check. This makes it easy to identify the gaming board on which the peripheral control board 1510 of the split gaming board 5A is installed (in this case, the left-side gaming board 5AL).

In addition, in this example, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, not only is control not performed to drive the drive motor and drive solenoid mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame unit (in this example, the tray unit 200) that is not the subject of ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) to operate the performance operation unit 301, but the various LEDs mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 are also not controlled to emit light in the light emission mode when operation is confirmed when the power is turned on. In other words, when a power-on operation check is performed after the setting confirmation display process is completed, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, the various LEDs mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality notification light mode caused by the main body frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, or in a minor abnormality notification light mode caused by the right-side game board 5AR not being connected. The presentation operation unit 300 may be the specific door frame unit that is the subject of ID determination. Even in this case, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that a specific door frame unit other than the presentation operation unit 300 or the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, the drive motor or drive solenoid mounted on the circuit board provided in the presentation operation unit 300 will not be driven to operate the presentation operation unit 301, and the various LEDs mounted on the circuit board provided in the presentation operation unit 300 may not be controlled to emit light in the light emission mode used to check operation when the power is turned on, but may be controlled to emit light in the light emission mode indicating a serious abnormality caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, or in the light emission mode indicating a minor abnormality caused by the right-side game board 5AR not being connected.

In addition, if the right-side gaming board 5AR is determined to be in an unconnected state in the ID determination process (step S1003), the right-side gaming board 5AR determined to be in an unconnected state and some or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in door frame units not subject to ID determination and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not be driven until the power is turned off, not just during the power-on operation check, or until the combination of the divided gaming boards 5A is determined to be compatible. In this case, it is possible to prevent the movable bodies from operating in a manner different from their intended operation, which could result in damage to the movable bodies or door frame unit, or failure of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable bodies.

In the example of the setting change and split game board ID error described above, a setting change process is performed to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area; in other words, a process is performed to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area after the setting change process if the setting value change permission condition is met when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. However, this is not limited to this. A process to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area that is performed when the setting value change permission condition is not met when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, in other words, a process to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area that is performed when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the first ON operation is not performed, but only the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, may also be controlled to a state similar to the example described above.

[Summary A]
a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable; a game board side component detachably provided on the game frame side component; lottery means for conducting a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions; setting determination possible state control means for controlling setting information related to the lottery of the lottery means to a setting determination possible state in which it is possible to determine setting information; a presentation control board for controlling the presentation of games; and a magnetic detection sensor capable of detecting magnetism, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component; The presentation control board has a non-connection notification means capable of issuing a notification when the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, and a magnetic detection abnormality notification means capable of issuing a notification when the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism, and even if the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected within a predetermined period after power supply to the gaming machine starts and the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism, no notification is issued by the non-connection notification means and the magnetic detection abnormality notification means during the setting determination possible state.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of an amusement hall, a door frame 3 that opens and closes the front of the outer frame 2, and a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and is attached to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed. A split game board 5A consisting of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR is detachably provided as a game board component on the game frame side component.

The left-side gaming board 5AL is also equipped with multiple magnetic sensors 1050 that detect illicit magnetic fields within the gaming area 5a. It is also equipped with a lottery means that executes a win determination process (step S305) based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, and a main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 as setting determination state control means that executes a setting change process to set the setting value related to the lottery to a setting determination state (a state from when the setting value change permission condition is met to when the setting value change termination condition is met).

In addition, the device has a function to control the effect display device 1600, various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main frame speaker of the main frame 4, etc.), various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR to perform game effects, and as an unconnection notification means, when the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the device displays an unconnection error notification display mode on the effect display device 1600, outputs a game board unconnection notification sound from the various speakers, and outputs an unconnection notification sound from the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3). The peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 has the following functions: control the illumination of various LEDs in the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, provided on the door frame 3) to a minor abnormality alert illumination mode; and, as a magnetic detection abnormality alert means, display a magnetic detection error alert mode on the performance display device 1600 and output magnetic detection alert sounds from various speakers based on receiving a magnet goto alert command classified as an alert display that indicates that radio wave irradiation goto is occurring from the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, even if the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR are not connected and the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism during a predetermined period after the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the period from when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started until the setting change process is started, the period from when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started until the setting change process is ended, or the period from when the setting change process is started until the setting change process is ended), no notification will be issued by the disconnection notification means and magnetic detection abnormality notification means of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the setting change process.

In other words, even if the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism before the setting change process is started or while the setting value change process is being executed, or if the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR are not electrically connected, it is not possible to start playing, so there is little risk of any disadvantage to the gaming parlor. Furthermore, the setting change process is performed based on the operation of the gaming parlor staff, and if an alarm is issued by the unconnected notification means or magnetic detection abnormality notification means when the setting change process is started and an operation to determine the setting value is being performed, there is a risk that the staff member will be distracted by the alarm and make an error in determining the setting value. If an unintended setting value is selected by mistake, this could cause disadvantage to the gaming parlor or player. According to the above invention, when the setting value change process is being executed, staff can focus on determining the setting value, preventing the unintended setting value from being selected by mistake, and no disadvantage to the gaming parlor or player will be caused.

In addition, even if the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism before the setting value change process is started or while the setting value change process is being executed, if the magnetism is no longer detected before the setting value change process is terminated, this means that the magnetism was detected only when it was not possible to start playing, and there is little risk of causing harm to the gaming establishment.However, if the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR are not electrically connected before the setting value change process is started or while the setting value change process is being executed, there is a high possibility that this disconnection will continue even after the setting value change process is executed, and if play is started in such a state, the game will proceed in a manner not intended by the designer, which may cause harm to the gaming establishment and players. Therefore, if the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR are not connected within a predetermined period after the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the period from when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started until the setting change process is started, the period from when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started until the setting change process is finished, or the period from when the setting change process is started until the setting change process is finished), then after the setting change process is finished, only a notification by the unconnection notification means may be issued, or the notification by the unconnection notification means may be given priority over a notification by the magnetic detection abnormality notification means.

[Summary B]
a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable; a game board side component detachably provided on the game frame side component; lottery means for conducting a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions; setting determination possible state control means for controlling setting information relating to the lottery of the lottery means to a setting determination possible state in which setting information can be determined; a presentation control board for controlling the presentation of games; and a magnetic detection sensor capable of detecting magnetism, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component, and the presentation control board is composed of the first game board side component and the second game board side component. The game device has a connection determination means for determining whether or not they are connected, a non-connection notification means capable of issuing a notification when the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, and a magnetic detection abnormality notification means capable of issuing a notification when the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism, and if the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected and the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism within a specific period after the setting determination possible state has ended, both the non-connection notification means and the magnetic detection abnormality notification means have their functions restricted to issue a notification.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of an amusement hall, a door frame 3 that opens and closes the front of the outer frame 2, and a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and is attached to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed. A split game board 5A consisting of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR is detachably provided as a game board component on the game frame side component.

The left-side gaming board 5AL is also equipped with multiple magnetic sensors 1050 that detect illicit magnetic fields within the gaming area 5a. It is also equipped with a lottery means that executes a win determination process (step S305) based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, and a main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 as setting determination state control means that executes a setting change process to set the setting value related to the lottery to a setting determination state (a state from when the setting value change permission condition is met to when the setting value change termination condition is met).

In addition, the device has a function to control the performance display device 1600, various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main frame speaker of the main frame 4, etc.), various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR to perform game performances; a function to execute an ID determination process (step S1003) as a connection determination means; and a function to display an unconnection error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600, output a game board unconnection notification sound from the various speakers, and output an unconnection error notification sound from the door frame unit 5AR as an unconnection notification means when the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state. The peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 has the following functions: control the illumination of various LEDs in the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) to a minor abnormality alert illumination mode; and, as magnetic detection abnormality alert means, display a magnetic detection error alert mode on the performance display device 1600 and output magnetic detection alert sounds from various speakers based on receiving a magnet goto alert command classified as an alert display that indicates that radio wave irradiation goto is occurring from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

If the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side game board 5AR is in an electrically disconnected state, and if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a magnetic goto alarm command classified as an alarm display indicating that a radio wave irradiation goto is being performed from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 based on the input of a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 within a specific period after the setting change process (for example, within the period during which the power-on operation check is performed), the performance display device 1600 will display an unconnected error alarm display mode and a magnetic detection error alarm mode, but will not output an unconnected game board alarm sound or a magnetic detection alarm sound from the various speakers, and will not control the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) to emit light in a minor abnormality alarm light-emitting mode or a major abnormality alarm light-emitting mode. In other words, the functions of the disconnection notification means and magnetic detection abnormality notification means are partially restricted when issuing a notification.

In other words, if the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism within a specific period after the setting change process is completed (for example, within the period during which the power-on operation check is performed), or if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR are not electrically connected, the situation is not one in which play can begin and there is little risk of any disadvantage to the gaming establishment. However, since there is only a short period of time left until play can begin, a warning is issued only on the performance display device 1600, and no warning is issued from the various speakers and various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3). Furthermore, the power-on operation check is important for confirming whether the pachinko machine 1 operates as intended by the designer, and if an alarm is issued by the unconnected alarm means or magnetic detection abnormality alarm means while this power-on operation check is being performed, there is a risk that the player's attention will be drawn to the alarm and that abnormal behavior will be overlooked if it deviates from normal. If abnormal behavior is overlooked, there is a risk that it will cause disadvantages to the gaming parlor and players. The above invention allows players to focus on the power-on operation check, preventing abnormal behavior from being overlooked and preventing disadvantages to the gaming parlor and players.

In addition, if the magnetic detection abnormality notification means' notification period remains after a specific period (e.g., the period during which the power-on operation check is performed) has elapsed following the completion of the setting change process, the restricted function may be released and a notification may be issued. Furthermore, if the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism, there is a possibility that fraudulent activity directly related to prize balls is occurring. However, if the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR are not electrically connected, there is a low possibility that fraudulent activity directly related to prize balls is occurring. Therefore, in this case, the restricted function of the magnetic detection abnormality notification means may be released and a notification may be issued, while the unconnection notification means may continue to have its function restricted. After the notification period of the magnetic detection abnormality notification means has elapsed, the restricted function of the unconnection notification means may be released and a notification may be issued. In other words, notifications by the magnetic detection abnormality notification means may be given priority over notifications by the unconnection notification means.

[Summary C]
A gaming machine comprising: a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable; a game board side component detachably provided on the game frame side component; lottery means for conducting a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions; setting confirmation state control means for controlling the lottery means to a setting confirmation state in which setting information related to the lottery can be confirmed; a presentation control board for controlling the presentation of games; and a magnetic detection sensor capable of detecting magnetism, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component. The presentation control board has a non-connection notification means capable of issuing a notification when the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, and a magnetic detection abnormality notification means capable of issuing a notification when the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism, and even if the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected within a predetermined period after the start of power supply and the magnetic sensor detects magnetism, no notification is issued by the non-connection notification means and the magnetic detection abnormality notification means during the setting confirmation state.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of an amusement hall, a door frame 3 that opens and closes the front of the outer frame 2, and a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and is attached to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed. A split game board 5A consisting of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR is detachably provided as a game board component on the game frame side component.

The left-side gaming board 5AL is also equipped with multiple magnetic sensors 1050 that detect any illicit magnetic fields acting within the gaming area 5a. It is also equipped with a lottery means that executes a win determination process (step S305) based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, and a main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 as setting confirmation state control means that executes a setting value confirmation display process to control the setting value related to the lottery to a setting confirmation state (a state from when the setting value display permission condition is met to when the setting value display termination condition is met) in which the setting value related to the lottery can be confirmed.

In addition, the device has a function to control the effect display device 1600, various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main frame speaker of the main frame 4, etc.), various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR to perform game effects, and as an unconnection notification means, when the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the device displays an unconnection error notification display mode on the effect display device 1600, outputs a game board unconnection notification sound from the various speakers, and outputs an unconnection notification sound from the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3). The peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 has the following functions: control the illumination of various LEDs in the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, provided on the door frame 3) to a minor abnormality alert illumination mode; and, as a magnetic detection abnormality alert means, display a magnetic detection error alert mode on the performance display device 1600 and output magnetic detection alert sounds from various speakers based on receiving a magnet goto alert command classified as an alert display that indicates that radio wave irradiation goto is occurring from the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, even if the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR are not connected and the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism during a predetermined period after the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the period from when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started until the setting value confirmation display process is started, the period from when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started until the setting value confirmation display process is ended, or the period from when the setting value confirmation display process is started until the setting value confirmation display process is ended), no notification will be issued by the disconnection notification means and magnetic detection abnormality notification means of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the setting value confirmation display process.

In other words, even if the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism or the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR are not electrically connected before the setting value confirmation display process is started or while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, it is not possible to start playing, so there is little risk of any disadvantage to the gaming parlor. Furthermore, the setting value confirmation display process is performed based on the operation of the gaming parlor staff. When the setting value confirmation display process is started and an operation to determine the setting value is being performed, an alarm is issued by the unconnected alarm means or the magnetic detection abnormality alarm means, which may draw the player's attention to the alarm and cause them to mistakenly confirm the setting value. If the player mistakenly confirms a setting value that is different from the actual setting, this could cause disadvantage to the gaming parlor or player. According to the above invention, when the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, the player can focus on confirming the setting value, preventing the player from mistakenly selecting a setting value that is different from the actual setting, and no disadvantage to the gaming parlor or player occurs.

In addition, even if the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism before the setting value confirmation display process is started or while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, if the magnetism is no longer detected before the setting value confirmation display process is terminated, this means that magnetism was detected only when it was not possible to start playing, and there is little risk of causing harm to the gaming establishment.However, if the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR are not electrically connected before the setting value confirmation display process is started or while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, there is a high possibility that this disconnection will continue even after the setting value confirmation display process is executed, and if play is started in such a state, the game will proceed in a manner not intended by the designer, which may cause harm to the gaming establishment and players. Therefore, if the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR are not connected and the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism within a predetermined period after the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the period from when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started until the setting value confirmation display process is started, the period from when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started until the setting value confirmation display process is ended, or the period from when the setting value confirmation display process is started until the setting value confirmation display process is ended), then only a notification by the unconnection notification means may be issued after the setting value confirmation display process is ended, or the notification by the unconnection notification means may be given priority over a notification by the magnetic detection abnormality notification means.

[Summary D]
a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable; a game board side component detachably provided on the game frame side component; lottery means for conducting a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions; setting confirmation state control means for controlling the lottery means to a setting confirmation state in which setting information related to the lottery can be confirmed; a presentation control board for controlling the presentation of games; and a magnetic detection sensor capable of detecting magnetism, wherein the game board side component is made up of a first game board side component and a second game board side component, and the presentation control board is connected to the first game board side component and the second game board side component. the first game board side component and the second game board side component are electrically connected, a non-connection notification means capable of issuing a notification when the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, and a magnetic detection abnormality notification means capable of issuing a notification when the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism; and if the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected and the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism within a specific period after the setting confirmation state has ended, the non-connection notification means limits its function to issue a notification, while the magnetic abnormality notification means issues a notification without limiting its function.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of an amusement hall, a door frame 3 that opens and closes the front of the outer frame 2, and a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and is attached to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed. A split game board 5A consisting of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR is detachably provided as a game board component on the game frame side component.

The left-side gaming board 5AL is also equipped with multiple magnetic sensors 1050 that detect illicit magnetic fields within the gaming area 5a. It is also equipped with a lottery means that executes a win determination process (step S305) based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, and a main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 as setting confirmation state control means that executes a setting value confirmation display process to control the setting value related to the lottery to a setting confirmation state (a state from when the setting value display permission condition is met to when the setting value display termination condition is met) in which the setting value related to the lottery can be confirmed.

In addition, the device has a function to control the performance display device 1600, various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main frame speaker of the main frame 4, etc.), various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR to perform game performances; a function to execute an ID determination process (step S1003) as a connection determination means; and a function to display an unconnection error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600, output a game board unconnection notification sound from the various speakers, and output an unconnection error notification sound from the door frame unit 5AR as an unconnection notification means when the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state. The peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 has the following functions: control the illumination of various LEDs in the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) to a minor abnormality alert illumination mode; and, as magnetic detection abnormality alert means, display a magnetic detection error alert mode on the performance display device 1600 and output magnetic detection alert sounds from various speakers based on receiving a magnet goto alert command classified as an alert display that indicates that radio wave irradiation goto is occurring from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

If the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side game board 5AR is in an electrically disconnected state, and a detection signal is input from the magnetic sensor 1050 within a specific period after the setting value confirmation display process (for example, within the execution period of the power-on operation check), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sends a magnet goto notification command classified as a notification display that radio wave irradiation goto is being performed to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. When this signal is received, the performance display device 1600 displays the unconnected error notification display mode and the magnetic detection error notification mode, but the various speakers output only the magnetic detection notification sound without outputting the game board unconnected notification sound, and the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit only the serious abnormality notification light mode without controlling the light emission in the minor abnormality notification light mode. In other words, the unconnected notification means issues a notification with some of its functions restricted, while the magnetic detection abnormality notification means issues a notification without restricting its functions.

In other words, if the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism within a specific period after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process (for example, within the period during which the power-on operation check is performed), or if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR are not electrically connected, it is not possible to start playing, and so there is little risk of a disadvantage to the gaming parlor. However, if the remaining time until the situation becomes such that play can begin is short, and if the magnetic sensor 1050 further detects magnetism, it is possible that there has been fraudulent activity directly related to the prize balls. While there is a possibility that fraudulent activity is taking place when the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR are not electrically connected, there is a low possibility that fraudulent activity directly related to prize balls is taking place. Therefore, while both the unconnected notification means and the magnetic detection abnormality notification means issue warnings, the magnetic detection abnormality notification means, which notifies of the possibility of fraudulent activity directly related to prize balls, does not restrict its function; in other words, notifications by the magnetic detection abnormality notification means are given priority over notifications by the unconnected notification means.

Note that, because the power-on operation check is important for confirming whether the pachinko machine 1 is operating as intended by the designer, the power-on operation check may be performed with some functions restricted even when an alarm is being issued by the magnetic detection abnormality alarm means. For example, the LED may be controlled to emit light in the light-emitting mode for the power-on operation check, while the movable body may not operate in the light-emitting mode for the power-on operation check; alternatively, the movable body may be operated in the light-emitting mode for the power-on operation check, while the LED may not be controlled to emit light in the light-emitting mode for the power-on operation check. This makes it possible to perform the power-on operation check and check behavior, even though some functions are restricted, thereby preventing abnormal behavior from being overlooked and preventing disadvantages to gaming parlors and players.

[Summary E]
A gaming machine comprising: a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main body frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main body frame so as to be openable and closable; a game board side component provided detachably on the game frame side component; a light emitting unit capable of emitting light in a predetermined light emitting manner; a sound output unit capable of outputting a predetermined sound; and a performance control board for controlling the performance of a game, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component, and the performance control board is configured to cause a specific light emitting unit of the light emitting units to indicate an unconnected state when the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected. The device is equipped with an unconnected notification means capable of emitting light in a certain mode and outputting an unconnected notification sound from the sound output unit, a volume change means capable of changing the volume of the sound output unit in response to a first operation, and a brightness change means capable of changing the brightness of the specific light-emitting unit in response to a second operation, and when the unconnected notification sound is being output from the unconnected notification means, the volume of the unconnected notification sound can be changed in response to the first operation, while when the specific light-emitting unit is emitting light in the unconnected notification mode, the brightness of the unconnected notification mode will not be changed and the light will be emitted at a constant brightness even if the second operation is performed.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of an amusement hall, a door frame 3 that opens and closes the front of the outer frame 2, and a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and is attached to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed. A split game board 5A consisting of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR is detachably provided as a game board component on the game frame side component.

The left gaming board 5AL is also equipped with multiple magnetic sensors 1050 that detect illicit magnetic fields within the gaming area 5a. It also has various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) as light-emitting units, various LEDs mounted on a decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on a decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR, and various speakers (such as a top center speaker, top side speakers, and a main frame speaker on the main frame 4) as sound output units.

In addition, the device has a function to control the effect display device 1600, various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main frame speaker of the main frame 4, etc.), various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR to execute game effects, and as an unconnection notification means, when the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the device displays an unconnection error notification display mode on the effect display device 1600, outputs a game board unconnection notification sound from the various speakers, and controls the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) as a specific light-emitting unit. The peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 has the following functions: a function to control the illumination of the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the top center speaker, top side speaker, and main frame speaker of the main frame 4) in response to operation of the volume adjustment button 227; and a function to adjust the brightness of the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR in response to operation of the light adjustment button 228.

When the game board unconnected alert sound is being output from the various speakers, the volume of the game board unconnected alert sound can be changed by operating the volume adjustment button 227. When the various LEDs of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) serving as specific light-emitting elements are controlled to emit light in a minor abnormality alert mode, the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) will emit light at a predetermined constant brightness without changing its brightness, even if the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated.

In other words, even when the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR are not electrically connected, the volume of the gaming board unconnection alert sound output from the various speakers can be changed, while the brightness of the minor abnormality alert light-emitting modes of the various LEDs in the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, platter unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) acting as specific light-emitting units cannot be changed. This prevents excessive discomfort to the player, while still making the player aware that the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR are not electrically connected through light-emitting control of the minor abnormality alert light-emitting modes of the various LEDs in the door frame units acting as specific light-emitting units.

[Summary F]
A gaming machine comprising: a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable; a game board side component provided detachably on the game frame side component; lottery means for conducting a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions; setting determination possible state control means for controlling setting information relating to the lottery of the lottery means to a setting determination possible state in which setting information can be determined; and a presentation control board for controlling the presentation of a game, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component, and the presentation control board is composed of the first game board side component. and the second game board side component, and a non-connection notification means capable of issuing a notification when the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, and when the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, the non-connection notification means can issue a first notification at a first timing after the end of the setting determination possible state, and can issue a second notification that is stronger than the first notification at a second timing that is later than the first timing.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of an amusement hall, a door frame 3 that opens and closes the front of the outer frame 2, and a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and is attached to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed. A split game board 5A consisting of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR is detachably provided as a game board component on the game frame side component.

The main control board 1310 also includes a lottery means for executing a winning determination process (step S305) based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, and a main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 as a setting determination state control means for executing a setting change process to control the setting related to the lottery to a setting determination state (a state from when the setting value change permission condition is met to when the setting value change termination condition is met).

In addition, the device has a function to control the performance display device 1600, various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main frame speaker of the main frame 4, etc.), various LEDs of the door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR to perform game performance, and a function to perform ID determination processing (step S1003) as a connection determination means. The peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a having the following functions: as an unconnection notification means, when the right-side game board 5AR is determined to be in an unconnected state in the ID determination process (step S1003), the effect display device 1600 displays an unconnection error notification display mode, various speakers output an unconnection game board notification sound, and various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in a minor abnormality notification light emission mode.

If the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side game board 5AR is electrically disconnected, at the first timing after the setting change process (for example, when the power-on operation check begins), the effect display device 1600 displays a disconnection error notification display mode, while not outputting a game board disconnection notification sound from the various speakers and not outputting the sound from the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 430 provided in the door frame 3). At a second timing after the setting change process (for example, when the power-on operation check is completed), the effect display device 1600 displays the unconnected error notification display mode, the various speakers output the game board unconnected notification sound, and the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in the minor abnormality notification light mode.

In other words, if it is determined that the left gaming panel 5AL and the right gaming panel 5AR are not electrically connected after the setting change process is completed, the situation is not one in which game play can begin and there is little risk of a disadvantage to the gaming parlor. However, because there is only a short time left until game play can begin, a first alert is issued at the first timing only on the performance display device 1600 to call attention, and no alerts are issued from the various speakers and LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3). Furthermore, the power-on operation check is important for confirming whether the pachinko machine 1 operates as intended by the designer. If an alert is issued by the unconnected alert means while this power-on operation check is being performed, players may be drawn to the alert and miss any abnormal behavior that deviates from normal. If unusual behavior is overlooked, it could cause harm to the gaming establishment or the player. The above invention allows staff to focus on checking operation when the power is turned on, preventing abnormal behavior from being overlooked and preventing harm to the gaming establishment or the player.

Furthermore, if the connection status does not improve after issuing a warning using the display on the effect display device 1600 at the first timing, a second warning is issued at the second timing by outputting various speakers and illuminating various LEDs on the door frame unit in addition to the display on the effect display device 1600. This allows the warning to be strengthened in stages according to the degree of risk of harm, thereby preventing the occurrence of harm. In other words, if it is not possible to start play, such as while the power-on operation check is being performed, the risk of harm to the gaming establishment is low, so the first warning is issued by issuing a warning using only the effect display device 1600. However, if play can be started after the power-on operation check is completed, the risk of harm to the gaming establishment is high, so the second warning is issued by issuing a warning using multiple warning means (performance means), such as outputting various speakers and illuminating various LEDs on the door frame unit in addition to the display on the effect display device 1600. This allows the warning to be strengthened in stages, thereby preventing the occurrence of harm.

[Summary G]
a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable; a game board side component detachably provided on the game frame side component; lottery means for conducting a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions; setting determination possible state control means for controlling the lottery means to a setting determination possible state in which setting information related to the lottery can be determined; a light emitting unit capable of emitting light in a predetermined light emitting manner; a display unit capable of displaying an image; a movable unit operated in a predetermined manner; and an effect control board for controlling the light emitting unit, the display unit, and the movable unit, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component, and the effect control board is composed of the first game board side component and the second game board side component. the display unit includes a connection determination means for determining whether the first game board side component and the second game board side component are connected; a non-connection notification means for displaying a notification display mode on the display unit when the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, and for causing a specific light-emitting unit among the light-emitting units to emit light in a notification light-emitting mode; and a drive control means for operating the movable unit in a specific mode after the setting determination state has ended, wherein when the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, the notification display mode is displayed while the movable unit is operating in the specific mode, but the notification light-emitting mode is not emitted while the movable unit is operating in the specific mode.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of an amusement hall, a door frame 3 that opens and closes the front of the outer frame 2, and a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and is attached to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed. A split game board 5A consisting of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR is detachably provided as a game board component on the game frame side component.

It also includes a lottery means for executing a winning determination process (step S305) based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and a main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 as a setting determination state control means for executing a setting change process to control the setting value related to the lottery to a setting determination state (a state from when the setting value change permission condition is met to when the setting value change termination condition is met) in which the setting value related to the lottery can be determined. In addition, the light-emitting section includes various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR. The display section includes a performance display device, and the movable section includes movable bodies provided on the left gaming board 5AL (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left gaming board 5AL of the divided gaming board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160).

In addition, the performance display device 1600, various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main frame speaker of the main frame 4, etc.), various LEDs on the door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR, a function of controlling the movable bodies (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear-front-lower performance unit 3160) to perform game performances; a function of executing an ID determination process (step S1003) as a connection determination means; and a function of notifying the user of an unconnected state by executing the ID determination process (step S1004). In step S1003, when it is determined that the right side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the display device 1600 displays an unconnected error notification display mode, various speakers are output to sound an unconnected game board notification, and various LEDs of the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided in the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in a minor abnormality notification light emission mode. The peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a that has the function of operating movable bodies provided on the left gaming board 5AL in the operating mode when the power is turned on and operation is confirmed (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left gaming board 5AL of the divided gaming board 5A, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front lower performance unit 3160).

If the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an electrically disconnected state, the display device 1600 will display an unconnected error notification display mode while the movable bodies on the left-side gaming board 5AL (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 of the left-side gaming board 5AL of the divided gaming board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160) are operating in the operating mode at the time of power-on operation check, while the various LEDs on the door frame unit are not controlled to emit light in the minor abnormality notification light emission mode during that period.

In other words, the power-on operation check is important for confirming whether the pachinko machine 1 operates as intended by the designer. If an alarm is issued by the unconnected alarm means while this power-on operation check is being performed, there is a risk that the player's attention will be drawn to the alarm and that abnormal behavior that deviates from normal will be overlooked. If abnormal behavior is overlooked, there is a risk that it will cause harm to the gaming parlor and players. The above invention allows players to focus on the power-on operation check, preventing abnormal behavior from being overlooked and preventing harm to the gaming parlor and players.

In addition, as an operating mode when checking operation upon power-on, some or all of the movable bodies provided on the left gaming board 5AL (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left gaming board 5AL of the divided gaming board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160, etc.) may be made to appear in front of the performance display device 1600, which makes it easier to notice the unconnected error notification display mode displayed on the performance display device 1600.

[Summary H]
a game frame side component having an outer frame (e.g., outer frame 2), a main body frame (e.g., main body frame 4) provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame (e.g., door frame 3) provided on the main body frame so as to be openable and closable;
A game board side component (for example, a divided game board 5A) that is detachably provided on the game frame side component;
a special state generating means (a part of the main control MPU 1310a that executes the RAM clearing process (step S38)) that can generate a special state (a state in which the RAM clearing process (step S38) and the power-on operation check are executed) based on a predetermined special operation (an operation that satisfies the initialization process execution condition); and
A gaming machine comprising:
The game board side component has a first game board side component (e.g., a left game board 5AL) and a second game board side component (e.g., a right game board 5AR) that are individually fixed to the game frame side component,
A notification means (for example, a combination of any one or more (may be all) of various speakers, a performance display device 1600, various LEDs, etc.) capable of notifying when the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected is provided,
The notification means is
Static notifications whose notification mode does not change over time (for example, output sounds from various speakers with constant pitch and volume, fixed notification displays on the performance display device 1600, light emitted from various LEDs with constant light intensity and color, etc.)
Dynamic notifications in which the notification mode changes over time (for example, output sounds from various speakers whose scale and volume change, notification displays whose display content changes on the performance display device 1600, and light emitted from various LEDs whose light intensity and color change, etc.) can be implemented.
When the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, the static notification can be performed during the special state, and the static notification and dynamic notification can be performed after the special state.
It is characterized by:
By configuring it in this manner, a static notification is issued during the special state to prevent it from interfering with work, etc., during the special state, and a dynamic notification is issued after the special state has ended to make it easy to notice that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected.

In addition, the device further includes a display means (for example, a performance display device 1600) and a sound output means (for example, various speakers) or a light emitting means (for example, various LEDs),
The notification means may perform the static notification by displaying still image information on the display means, and may perform the dynamic notification by outputting a notification sound with at least a change in volume from the sound output means or by causing the light-emitting means to emit a notification light with at least a change in light intensity.
By configuring it in this manner, still image information is displayed so as not to interfere with work etc. in the special state, and after the special state has been reached, the alarm sound output from the sound output means and the light emitted by the light emitting means make it easy to notice that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected.

The special state may also be configured to end automatically (without any special operation) after a certain period of time has elapsed. This configuration eliminates the need for unnecessary operations such as ending the special state, reducing the amount of work required during special states in gaming parlors where multiple pachinko machines 1 are installed, and shortening the time required for operations during special states.

The pachinko machine 1 may also have an operation unit (operation confirmation switch 1310j) located on the rear side of the machine that can accept specified operations, and the special state may be triggered in response to an operation on the operation unit. By configuring the machine in this way, a special state can be triggered when an operation unit located on the rear side of the machine 1 that is difficult for a player to operate is operated, thereby preventing unnecessary special states from being triggered.

[Summary I]
a game frame side component having an outer frame (e.g., outer frame 2), a main body frame (e.g., main body frame 4) provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame (e.g., door frame 3) provided on the main body frame so as to be openable and closable;
A game board side component (for example, a divided game board 5A) that is detachably provided on the game frame side component;
A game frame side performance means provided in the game frame side component (for example, various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main frame speaker of the main frame 4, etc.), various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, door frame top unit 450, etc. provided in the door frame 3), etc.)
A game board side performance means (for example, a performance display device 1600, various LEDs mounted on a decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, etc.) provided in the game board side component;
A performance control means (for example, a peripheral control IC 1510a) for controlling the game frame side performance means and the game board side performance means;
A special state generating means (a part of the main control MPU 1310a that executes the RAM clearing process (step S38)) that can generate a special state (a state in which the RAM clearing process (step S38) and the power-on operation check are executed) based on a predetermined special operation;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game board side component has a first game board side component (e.g., a left game board 5AL) and a second game board side component (e.g., a right game board 5AR) that are individually fixed to the game frame side component,
The performance control means
When the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, the game frame side performance means outputs a game frame side notification mode (for example, a minor abnormality notification light emitting mode), and the game board side performance means outputs a game board side notification mode (for example, a non-connection error notification display mode in the performance display device 1600),
When the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected during the special state, the game board side performance means is caused to output a game board side notification mode, but the game frame side performance means is not caused to output a game frame side notification mode.
It is characterized by:
By configuring it in this manner, the game board side presentation means outputs the game board side notification mode during a special state, but the game frame side presentation means does not output the game frame side notification mode, thereby preventing interference with work, etc. during the special state.

The presentation control means is characterized in that it can cause the game slot side presentation means to output a game slot side notification mode after the special state occurs.
By configuring it in this manner, after a special state has occurred, the game frame side presentation means can output a game frame side notification mode, making it easy to notice that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected.

In addition, the game board side performance means has a display means (for example, a performance display device 1600),
The game frame side performance means has a sound output means (for example, various speakers) or a light emitting means (for example, various LEDs),
The presentation control means may be configured to cause the display means to display the game board side notification mode when the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected during the special state, but not cause the sound output means and the light emitting means to output the game frame side notification mode.
By configuring in this manner, the game board side notification mode is displayed on the display means so as not to interfere with work etc. in the special state, and after the special state has been reached, the game frame side notification mode is output from the sound output means or light emitting means, making it easy to notice that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected.

The special state may also be configured to end automatically (without any special operation) after a certain period of time has elapsed. This configuration eliminates the need for unnecessary operations such as ending the special state, reducing the amount of work required during special states in gaming parlors where multiple pachinko machines 1 are installed, and shortening the time required for operations during special states.

The pachinko machine 1 may also have an operation unit (operation confirmation switch 1310j) located on the rear side of the machine that can accept specified operations, and the special state may be triggered in response to an operation on the operation unit. By configuring the machine in this way, a special state can be triggered when an operation unit located on the rear side of the machine 1 that is difficult for a player to operate is operated, thereby preventing unnecessary special states from being triggered.

[Summary J]
A gaming machine having a gaming frame (for example, a main frame 4) and a gaming board (for example, a divided gaming board 5A),
The gaming machine has a first gaming machine state (for example, a state in which a setting change process (step S37) is executed) in which the gaming performance of the gaming machine can be determined;
A second gaming machine state (for example, a state in which RAM clear processing (step S38) and power-on operation confirmation are performed) in which a game can be played and a specific sound (for example, a RAM clear notification sound) can be output by a sound notification means (for example, various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main body frame speaker of the main body frame 4, etc.));
A third gaming machine state in which a game can be played (for example, a state in which a gaming mode is executed after the RAM clear process (step S38) and the power-on operation check are completed),
The game board has a first game board side component (e.g., a left game board 5AL) and a second game board side component (e.g., a right game board 5AR),
A transition can be made from the first gaming machine state to the second gaming machine state, and further from the second gaming machine state to the third gaming machine state, and each gaming machine state does not reverse;
The first game board side component and the second game board side component are individually fixed to the game frame,
The first game board side component is composed of a plurality of boards including a performance control board (e.g., performance control board 1510) equipped with a microprocessor (e.g., peripheral control IC 1510a) that executes the performance of the game,
The second game board side component includes a specific board (for example, a board on which an ID output circuit IDC is mounted) that does not have a microprocessor mounted thereon,
The specific board has a unique value that can be identified as the second game board side component (for example, a unique value that can be identified as the right game board 5AR),
When an eigenvalue error state occurs when the first game board side component cannot receive the eigenvalue transmitted from the second game board side component,
In the first gaming machine state, no error notification corresponding to the eigenvalue error state is made,
In the second gaming machine state, an error notification corresponding to the eigenvalue error state is made, but the error notification by the sound notification means is not made;
In the third gaming machine state, an error notification corresponding to the eigenvalue error state is performed, including an error notification by the sound notification means.
It is characterized by:
By configuring in this manner, during the first gaming machine state in which the gaming performance of the gaming machine can be determined, no error notification corresponding to the eigenvalue error state is made, thereby preventing the determination work from being hindered; during the second gaming state in which the sound notification means outputs a specific sound, no error notification is made by the sound notification means, thereby preventing the work of checking whether the sound notification means is normal; and during the third gaming state in which the work of determining the gaming machine's gaming performance or the work of checking the sound notification means is not involved, an error notification corresponding to the eigenvalue error state, including an error notification by the sound notification means, is made, thereby preventing the eigenvalue error state from being overlooked.

Furthermore, the performance control board may be equipped with an eigenvalue transmission means for transmitting the eigenvalue as a signal from the specific board, and may be capable of comparing the eigenvalue transmitted from the eigenvalue transmission means with the eigenvalue it possesses.
By configuring it in this manner, the performance control board can determine whether or not there is an inherent value error state and notify the error.

[Pachinko machine confirmation mode]
Next, a modified example will be described in which a transition control is performed to a confirmation mode for checking whether various functions and operations of the pachinko machine 1 are normal or possible. Fig. 287 is a schematic diagram of the main control board 1310 in the modified example, and Fig. 288 shows an example of behavior when a transition control is performed to a confirmation mode in a state in which the divided game board 5A, which is composed of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR, is compatible (matched) as a combination of the divided game board 5A. Note that, below, only the parts that differ from the above embodiment will be described, and a duplicated description will not be provided.

In this example, the pachinko machine 1 has an operation confirmation switch 1310j with a push operation unit located near the center of the lower edge of the main control board 1310 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 287. Only arcade staff and other personnel can operate the switch. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, if the "confirmation mode transition condition" is met, the machine is controlled to transition to confirmation mode. The "confirmation mode transition condition" may be that the push operation unit of the operation confirmation switch 1310j is operated; that the push operation unit of the operation confirmation switch 1310j is operated and the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2; or that the push operation unit of the operation confirmation switch 1310j is operated and the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, and that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON position. In other words, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, transition to confirmation mode may be controlled if the "confirmation mode transition condition" is met that the pressing operation portion of the operation confirmation switch 1310j is operated; alternatively, transition to confirmation mode may be controlled if the "confirmation mode transition condition" is met that the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 and the pressing operation portion of the operation confirmation switch 1310j is operated; or transition to confirmation mode may be controlled if the "confirmation mode transition condition" is met that the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, a setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to setting key ON, and the pressing operation portion of the operation confirmation switch 1310j is operated.

In addition, in this example, the confirmation mode includes an external terminal board output confirmation mode for checking whether the output to the external terminal board 558 is normal, and various operation units provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (operation units such as the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300, volume adjustment button 227, light intensity adjustment button 228, etc.), various LEDs provided on the left game board 5AL and right game board 5AR, door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3, etc.) It is possible to control the transition to an operation check mode to check whether some or all of the various LEDs, speakers, and movable bodies provided on the left-side game board 5AL (back-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the back-upper performance unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, back-left movable decorative body 3301 and back-right movable decorative body 3302 of the back-lower performance unit 3300, and back-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the back-front lower performance unit 3160) and various movable bodies provided on the door frame 3 (performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300) are operating normally.

In this example, the transition conditions for the external terminal board output confirmation mode and the operation confirmation mode are different. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, the transition to the external terminal board output confirmation mode is controlled if the "first confirmation mode transition condition" is met, that is, the main body frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a is set to the ON position, and the pressing operation portion of the operation confirmation switch 1310j is operated. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, the transition to the operation confirmation mode is controlled if the "second confirmation mode transition condition" is met, that is, the main body frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, and the pressing operation portion of the operation confirmation switch 1310j is operated. Furthermore, in this example, the transition to the operation confirmation mode is always controlled after the transition to the external terminal board output confirmation mode. In other words, if the "first check mode transition condition" is met, the system sequentially transitions to external terminal board output check mode and operation check mode, and if the "second check mode transition condition" is met, the system transitions only to operation check mode. This eliminates the need to cut off power to the pachinko machine 1 after the external terminal board output check mode and then restore power when the "second check mode transition condition" is met, preventing a deterioration in operability. Furthermore, because operation check mode automatically ends after a certain period of time, there is no need to perform unnecessary operations such as ending operation check mode even if there is no need to transition to operation check mode.

In addition, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, and the pressing operation part of the operation confirmation switch 1310j is operated, and the above-mentioned "first confirmation mode transition condition" is met, thereby controlling the transition to the external terminal board output confirmation mode.Then, the "external terminal board output confirmation mode termination condition" is met, whereby the setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the decision key on to its original position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), thereby turning off the setting key switch 1311a. In other words, the system controls the transition to external terminal board output confirmation mode in response to an operation by an administrator such as the amusement hall manager, and ends the external terminal board output confirmation mode and starts the operation confirmation mode in response to an operation by an administrator such as the amusement hall manager during the external terminal board output confirmation mode.

The locations of the pachinko machines 1 and the hall computers vary from one amusement hall to another. The pachinko machines 1 and the hall computers may be installed far apart, or the journey from the pachinko machine 1 location to the hall computer location may require passing through a narrow passageway. Furthermore, when checking whether the output to the external terminal board 558 is normal on multiple pachinko machines 1, the time required from first satisfying the first confirmation mode transition condition to arriving at the hall computer's location is long. Therefore, if the external terminal board output confirmation mode were configured to end after a fixed period, there is a risk that the external terminal board output confirmation mode would end before the hall computer could confirm whether the output to the external terminal board 558 is normal. Furthermore, extending the period of the external terminal board output confirmation mode would result in a longer operation time. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 in this example is configured to end the external terminal board output confirmation mode in response to an operation by an administrator, such as the amusement hall manager. This ensures that the hall computer can reliably check the output to the external terminal board 558 and prevents delays in the administrator's work.

As shown in Figure 288, in the external terminal board output confirmation mode, an output confirmation signal is output from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the amusement hall. Then, by confirming that the output confirmation signal has been input in the hall computer installed in the amusement hall, it is possible to confirm that the signal output from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the amusement hall is normal. Note that the output confirmation signal is only output during the external terminal board output confirmation mode. Therefore, it is possible to confirm that the output confirmation signal has been output without confusing it with other signals output from the external terminal board 558.

In addition, the output confirmation signal output from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall is turned on (output state) when controlling the transition to the external terminal board output confirmation mode, and is turned off (output stopped state) when a certain period of time has passed after the external terminal board output confirmation mode has ended. In other words, not only is the output confirmation signal turned on (output state) during control of the external terminal board output confirmation mode, but the output confirmation signal is also turned on (output state) for a certain period of time after the external terminal board output confirmation mode has ended.

As described above, the external terminal board output confirmation mode is terminated in response to an operation by an administrator, such as the manager of the amusement hall. Therefore, if the administrator mistakenly terminates the external terminal board output confirmation mode too quickly, the output period of the output confirmation signal will be shortened, and the hall computer installed in the amusement hall may not be able to confirm that the output confirmation signal was input. In such a case, it will be necessary to turn off the power to the pachinko machine 1 and then restore it to meet the "first confirmation mode transition condition," which will increase the workload. In this example, the output confirmation signal continues to be output for a certain period of time after the external terminal board output confirmation mode is terminated. Therefore, even if the administrator mistakenly terminates the external terminal board output confirmation mode too quickly, the hall computer installed in the amusement hall can reliably confirm that the output confirmation signal was input.

In addition, during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the launch permission signal that informs the payout control board 633 that it is permitted to launch game ball B is set to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), prohibiting the ball launcher 540 from launching game balls. After the external terminal board output confirmation mode ends, the launch permission signal that informs the payout control board 633 that it is permitted to launch game ball B is set to launch permission logic, permitting the ball launcher 540 to launch game balls. Note that if the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38) is executed after the external terminal board output confirmation mode ends, the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38) by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 ends, and when the interrupt permission setting (step S52) is performed, the launch permission signal that informs the payout control board 633 that it is permitted to launch game ball B is set to launch permission logic, permitting the ball launcher 540 to launch game balls.

In this way, during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the ball launcher 540 is prohibited from firing game balls, halting the progress of the game. This prevents a signal different from the output confirmation signal (a command indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1) from being sent from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, which would interfere with the confirmation work of the signal confirmation output.

In addition, the system is not limited to halting game progress by prohibiting the ball launcher 540 from launching game balls during the external terminal board output confirmation mode. It is also possible to disable detection by the first start gate sensor 3002 and the second start gate sensor 2401 (by either prohibiting detection by the first start gate sensor 3002 and the second start gate sensor 2401 or by disabling detection by the first start gate sensor 3002 and the second start gate sensor 2401 without prohibiting the ball launcher 540 from launching game balls during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, or by prohibiting detection by the ball launcher 540 during the external terminal board output confirmation mode without executing processing in response to the detection). In this case, the display of the special symbol variations can be prevented from starting, thereby halting game progress and preventing a signal different from the output confirmation signal (a command indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1) from being sent from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, which would interfere with the confirmation of the signal confirmation output.

In addition, when the external terminal board output confirmation mode is initiated, an external terminal board output confirmation mode start command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, informing the peripheral control board that the external terminal board output confirmation mode has begun. When the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the output confirmation mode start command, it causes the performance display device 1600 to display an output confirmation mode notification mode (in this example, "Output confirmation in progress") (this may be displayed until the output confirmation mode is terminated, or may be displayed for a certain period of time and then terminated), and it also causes the various speakers to repeatedly output an output confirmation mode notification sound (an announcement voice saying "Output confirmation in progress" and a warning sound such as a "ding dong") at a predetermined volume (this may be the maximum volume that can be set, or may be a default volume adjusted using a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510) (this may be output repeatedly until the output confirmation mode is terminated, or may be output repeatedly a certain number of times (e.g., five times) or for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) and then stop the output).

In addition, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 lights up the various LEDs (which may be some or all) of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) and the various LEDs (which may be some or all) mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR in an output confirmation mode notification light-emitting mode corresponding to the output confirmation mode (in this example, the various LEDs of the door frame unit and the right-side game board 5AR are lit in the same color and the light color is switched in a short period of time) (they may be lit in the output confirmation mode notification light-emitting mode until the output confirmation mode is ended, or they may be lit in the output confirmation mode notification light-emitting mode for a certain period of time and then the output confirmation mode notification light-emitting mode is ended and the lights are turned off or lit in a different light-emitting mode). This notifies you that an output check of the external terminal board 558 is being performed, making it possible to check whether the output signal from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall is normal.

The volume of the output check mode notification sound output from the various speakers during the external terminal board output check mode cannot be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227. As mentioned above, the player can adjust the volume output from the various speakers by operating the volume adjustment button 227, but the volume of the output check mode notification sound output during the external terminal board output check mode cannot be adjusted by the player operating the volume adjustment button 227. Therefore, during the external terminal board output check mode, the output check mode notification sound can be output at a predetermined volume, and the sound output from the various speakers can reliably convey that an output check signal is being output from the external terminal board 558, making it possible to check whether the output signal is normal.

In addition, the light intensity of the output confirmation mode notification light-emitting mode performed during the external terminal board output confirmation mode cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228. As described above, the player can adjust the light intensity (brightness) of some of the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and divided game board 5A by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. However, the output confirmation mode notification light-emitting mode performed during the external terminal board output confirmation mode cannot be adjusted by the player operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and divided game board 5A are controlled to emit a predetermined light intensity (brightness), enabling the output confirmation mode notification light-emitting mode to be performed. This output confirmation mode notification light-emitting mode reliably communicates that an output confirmation signal is being output from the external terminal board 558, allowing the player to check whether the output signal is normal.

Furthermore, when in external terminal board output confirmation mode, operating the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 does not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) on the performance display device 1600, nor does it output a confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228. Furthermore, because the performance display device 1600 does not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness), the scale does not change even if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated multiple times. This prevents the scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) from interfering with the visibility of the display of the output confirmation mode notification state on the performance display device 1600, and prevents the confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 from making the output confirmation mode notification sound difficult to hear, ensuring that the output confirmation signal is being output from the external terminal board 558.

In addition, during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, and the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left-side game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 are turned off. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, although the divided game board 5A is composed of the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR, during output confirmation, all of the various LEDs provided on the left game board 5AL are turned off regardless of whether they are controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, and only the various LEDs provided on the right game board 5AR and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are turned on. In this way, during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, of the various LEDs provided on the divided game board 5A, the various LEDs provided on the left game board 5AL and the various LEDs provided on the right game board 5AR have different light-emitting modes, so that a person viewing the pachinko machine 1 feels strange and can immediately notice that the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed. Furthermore, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board mounted on the left-hand gaming board 5AL, and the various LEDs mounted on the functional display unit 1400 and sub-functional display unit 2250 may be configured to light up in a different notification light mode (for example, red flashing) when the setting is changed than the various LEDs on the door frame unit and the right-hand gaming board 5AR, or one or both of the LEDs on the functional display unit 1400 and the sub-functional display unit 2250 that display information about winning or losing may be configured to light up in a notification light mode when the setting is changed. In this case, too, the light emission mode of the LEDs on the right-hand gaming board 5AR and the light emission mode of the LEDs on the left-hand gaming board 5AL can be made different, so it is possible to reliably communicate that an output confirmation signal is being output from the external terminal board 558.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sends an output confirmation mode end command to the peripheral control board 1510 notifying it of the end of the external terminal board output confirmation mode based on the operation to end the external terminal board output confirmation mode (in this example, an OFF operation to return the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 to its initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a)).

In addition, in this example, when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 during normal play (playable state), a door-opening notification sound (an announcement voice saying "The door is open" and a warning sound such as "ding dong") is repeatedly output from various speakers at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set, or a default volume adjusted using the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510) for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds; in this example, this is shorter than the time required for operation check mode), or the output is stopped when the main frame 4 that was opened relative to the outer frame 2 is closed (note that if the main frame 4 is continuously opened relative to the outer frame 2, the output is stopped after being output repeatedly a certain number of times (e.g., five times)). Alternatively, the output may be stopped when the main frame 4 that was open to the outer frame 2 is closed, or the output may be stopped when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds; it may be shorter than the period from when the operation check mode is started to when the operation check mode is ended) has elapsed since the main frame 4 that was open to the outer frame 2 was closed.) In addition, various LEDs of the door frame units (the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3, etc.) and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR are switched to a serious abnormality alert light emitting mode (in this example, a red light of maximum brightness is lit and turned off in a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) The serious abnormality alert light emitting mode is ended when a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds, which in this example is longer than the period from when the operation check mode is started to when the operation check mode is ended) has elapsed since the main body frame 4 that was open to the outer frame 2 is closed (the serious abnormality alert light emitting mode may be ended when the main body frame 4 that was open to the outer frame 2 is closed, or the serious abnormality alert light emitting mode may be ended when the serious abnormality alert light emitting mode is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) or for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) since the main body frame 4 that was open to the outer frame 2 is closed, or the serious abnormality alert light emitting mode is ended when the main body frame 4 that was open to the outer frame 2 is closed, and the serious abnormality alert light emitting mode is changed to a semi-serious abnormality alert light emitting mode (red light of maximum brightness) The light emission control may be repeated in a mode in which the light is switched on and off over a long period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) (slow flashing mode), and the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode may be terminated when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the light emission control in the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode, or when the control has been repeated a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 times). The various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL are controlled to an off state, and when the serious abnormality alert light emission mode (the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode if the light emission control is changed to the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode) is terminated (when the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL are controlled to emit light in a mode appropriate to the game situation.

On the other hand, during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, even if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the output of door-opening alarm sounds from the various speakers and the control of the serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode, which are caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, are not executed. In other words, if the predetermined "first confirmation mode transition condition" is met when power is first supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the output of output confirmation mode alarm sounds from the various speakers and the control of the output confirmation mode alarm light-emitting mode are not executed, without the output of door-opening alarm sounds from the various speakers and the control of the serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode, which are caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2. Furthermore, in this example, even during the operation confirmation mode executed after the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the output of door-opening alarm sounds from the various speakers and the control of the serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode (including the semi-serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode when the serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode is followed by the semi-serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode) caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 are not executed. Therefore, when the external terminal board output confirmation mode is executed, after the operation confirmation mode, it is possible to output a door open alert sound from various speakers caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, and to control the lighting of a serious abnormality alert (including the semi-serious abnormality alert lighting mode when lighting is controlled to a semi-serious abnormality alert lighting mode after the serious abnormality alert lighting mode). This makes it less likely that an abnormality will be overlooked due to a lack of attention when checking the output signal from the external terminal board 558 in the external terminal board output confirmation mode or when checking operation in the operation confirmation mode.

In addition, if the external terminal board output check mode is ended or the external terminal board output check mode is not executed, and the "second check mode transition condition" is met when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, and the main body frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 and the pressing operation portion of the operation check switch 1310j is operated, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will enter the operation check mode for a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds).

Specifically, among the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs excluding the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information about winning or losing (such as the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR, and the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 mounted on the door frame 3)) are controlled in a predetermined light-emitting mode (in this example, an operation confirmation light-emitting mode that is only performed in operation confirmation mode and is not performed in game presentation), and the peripheral control board 1510 The peripheral control IC 1510a drives drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the IC to control movable bodies (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left-side game board 5AL, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, the rear-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) in a predetermined operating mode (operation mode during operation confirmation), and outputs operation confirmation alarm sounds from various speakers (in this example, alarm sounds that are only output in operation confirmation mode and are not output during game performance).

In operation confirmation mode, by executing control to light up the LEDs (such as the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR, and the various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 mounted on the door frame 3)) controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 in a predetermined light-emitting mode (operation confirmation light-emitting mode), it is possible to check whether the various LEDs on the left gaming board 5AL, right gaming board 5AR and door frame units are able to emit light normally.If an abnormality (not emitting light normally) is discovered, repairs can be made to return them to a normal state, allowing the light-emitting effects of the various LEDs to be performed as designed, thereby preventing a decrease in the presentation effect. In addition, in the operation check mode, the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 may also be turned on to check for abnormalities, and all of the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, excluding the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, may not be turned on, and some of the LEDs may not be turned on.

In addition, in the operation confirmation mode, drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are driven to execute control to operate the movable bodies (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left-side game board 5AL, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, the rear-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) in a predetermined operating mode (operation mode during operation confirmation), thereby making it possible to check whether the movable bodies provided on the left-side game board 5AL and the door frame 3 are capable of operating normally, and if an abnormality (not operating normally) is discovered, repairs can be made to restore the normal state, thereby enabling the movable bodies to perform the movable performance as designed, thereby preventing a decline in the performance effect. In operation check mode, it is sufficient that at least a portion of the movable body on the left gaming panel 5AL and the movable body on the door frame 3 is operated in a predetermined operation mode (operation check operation mode). Furthermore, the operation check operation mode may be executable only during operation check mode. In this case, when the operation check operation mode is executed, it can be found without being confused with the operation mode executed in the variable presentation executed in connection with the variable display of the special pattern, making it easy to determine whether the movable part is operable normally.

In addition, when the movable body is operated in operation confirmation mode, the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000, the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the rear lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear lower front performance unit 3160, and multiple LEDs 320a that illuminate and decorate the upper part (unit upper cover 312) of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are all controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light-emitting mode, making it possible to check not only the operation of the movable body but also whether the LEDs mounted on the movable body are able to emit light normally.

In addition, in operation confirmation mode, by executing control to output operation confirmation notification sounds from the various speakers at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set or the default volume adjusted using the volume adjustment switch on the peripheral control board 1510), it is possible to confirm whether the various speakers are capable of outputting sound normally. If an abnormality (sound is not being output normally) is discovered, repairs can be performed to restore the normal state, thereby enabling sound to be output from the various speakers as designed, thereby preventing a decrease in the presentation effect. In this example, by sequentially executing the following controls, the abnormal speaker can be immediately identified: a control to output "This is the top center speaker" from the pair of top center speakers located on the front of the door frame top base 451, a control to output "This is the top left speaker" from the left top side speaker located on the outer left of the top center speaker, a control to output "This is the top right speaker" from the right top side speaker located on the outer right of the top center speaker, and a control to output "This is the bottom speaker" from the main frame speaker 622.

Furthermore, when the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during operation check mode, a special sound (such as a "beep") is output at a predetermined volume in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 (this volume is different from the volume set in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227, and the volume does not change even when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated). This makes it possible to check whether the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is able to accept operation normally, and if an abnormality is discovered (the special sound is not being output), repairs can be made to return the device to a normal state, allowing sounds to be output from the various speakers at the player's preferred volume, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to sounds being output from the various speakers at a volume that the player finds unpleasant.

In this example, the volume cannot be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227 until the operation check mode has ended. As described above, in this example of pachinko machine 1, it is possible to adjust the volume output from the various speakers by operating the volume adjustment button 227, but the volume of the operation check notification sound output during operation check mode cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment button 227. Therefore, when operation check mode has started, the operation check notification sound can be output at a predetermined volume, and the operation check notification sound output from the various speakers can be used to check whether the various speakers are able to output sound normally, making it possible to immediately discover any abnormalities (sound not being output normally).

In addition, the light intensity (brightness) cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228 until the operation check mode has ended. As described above, in this example of pachinko machine 1, the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and divided game board 5A can be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228, but the light emission pattern controlled in operation check mode cannot be adjusted even by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, when operation check mode is started, the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and divided game board 5A can be controlled to emit light at a predetermined light intensity (brightness), and it can be confirmed whether the various LEDs are able to emit light normally, making it possible to immediately discover abnormalities (not emitting light normally).

In addition, when the operation check mode is initiated, the effect display device 1600 displays the appearance of the effect, i.e., decorative patterns and background images during normal times (when play is possible), etc. This makes it possible to check whether the effect display device 1600 is capable of displaying images normally, and if an abnormality (images are not displayed normally) is discovered, repairs can be made to return the effect display device 1600 to a normal state, allowing images to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 as designed, thereby preventing a decrease in the effect of the effect.

In addition, the performance display device 1600 is configured so that scales corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) will not be displayed even if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated until the operation check mode is terminated. Also, because the performance display device 1600 does not display scales corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness), the scales will not change even if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated multiple times. Furthermore, if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during operation check mode, the performance display device 1600 may be configured to execute a special display that is only displayed during operation check mode. For example, if the volume adjustment button 227 or the light adjustment button 228 is operated during operation check mode, a special display may be displayed to indicate that the volume adjustment button 227 or the light adjustment button 228 is being operated normally. This makes it possible to check whether the volume adjustment button 227 or the light adjustment button 228 is able to accept operation normally. If an abnormality is discovered (the special display is not displayed), repairs can be made to return the device to a normal state, allowing sounds to be output from the various speakers at a volume preferred by the player and various LEDs to be illuminated at a light intensity preferred by the player. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by sounds being output from the various speakers at a volume that the player finds uncomfortable or various LEDs to be illuminated at a light intensity that the player finds uncomfortable.

In addition, when an operating unit such as the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is operated during operation confirmation mode, the light emission color of the various LEDs (such as the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR, and the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) excluding the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 that displays information regarding winning or losing, which are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 and are controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light emission mode) may be changed. For example, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated with the button marked with the letter "+", various LEDs that are controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light-emitting mode may be changed to "red", when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated with the button marked with the letter "-", various LEDs that are controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light-emitting mode may be changed to "green", when the light intensity adjustment button 228 with the letter "+" is operated, various LEDs that are controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light-emitting mode may be changed to "blue", and when the light intensity adjustment button 228 with the letter "-" is operated, various LEDs that are controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light-emitting mode may be changed to "white". This makes it possible to check whether the volume adjustment button 227 and light intensity adjustment button 228 are able to accept operation normally, and if an abnormality is discovered (a special mode is not displayed), repairs can be made to return them to normal, allowing sound to be output from the various speakers at a volume preferred by the player and various LEDs to emit light at an intensity preferred by the player. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to sound being output from the various speakers at an uncomfortable volume or various LEDs emitting light at an intensity that the player finds uncomfortable, and also makes it possible to check whether the lighting state of the emitted color in response to operation of the volume adjustment button 227 and light intensity adjustment button 228 is normal.

In addition, if the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated during operation check mode, the performance operation section unit 350 may be vibrated or moved upward from its normal position. In this case, it is possible to confirm that the operation of the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 is being accepted normally, thereby preventing a reduction in the performance effect due to the operation of the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 not being accepted and the performance corresponding to the operation of the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 not being executed.

The operation check mode is transition-controlled in response to an administrator's operation, and unlike the external terminal board output check mode, it checks whether some or all of the devices installed in the pachinko machine 1 are operating normally near the pachinko machine 1, making it less likely that the administrator will miss the operation of the devices installed in the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, if the operation check mode were configured to end in response to an administrator's operation, operation would be required after the operation check, which would take time to complete. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 in this example is configured to automatically end the operation check mode after a certain period of time has passed, so as not to delay the administrator's work.

[Pachinko machine confirmation mode when incompatible]
Next, an example of behavior when the combination of the divided game board 5A (i.e., the combination of the right game board 5AR (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left game board 5AL (a peripheral control board 1510 equipped with a microprocessor or a main control board 1310)) is in an incompatible (mismatched) state (mismatched state) and the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to transition to the confirmation mode (external terminal board output confirmation mode, operation confirmation mode) will be described with reference to FIG. 289. Note that the following will only explain the compatible state and the parts that differ from the above-mentioned embodiment, and will not provide a duplicated explanation.

As shown in FIG. 289, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not output control signals to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR, and the electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR are set to a non-driven state (for example, the various LEDs are turned off) regardless of whether the external terminal board output confirmation mode is in effect or not.

In addition, in this example, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided gaming boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the external terminal board 558 outputs an output confirmation signal to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall during execution of the external terminal board output confirmation mode or for a certain period of time after the external terminal board output confirmation mode has been entered, without outputting an incompatibility error signal indicating that the combination of the divided gaming boards 5A is incompatible. In other words, during execution of the external terminal board output confirmation mode or for a certain period of time after the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the external terminal board 558 outputs an output confirmation signal, just as when it is compatible. This prevents an incompatibility error signal from being sent from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, which would interfere with the output confirmation signal confirmation process.

In addition, in this example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided gaming board 5A is incompatible during the ID determination process (step S1003), the external terminal board 558 is not configured to output an incompatibility error signal indicating that the combination of the divided gaming board 5A is incompatible to the hall computer installed in the amusement hall, even during the operation check mode. In other words, the output check signal output from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the amusement hall in response to the start of the external terminal board output check mode is also output for a certain period after the external terminal board output check mode, i.e., for a certain period during the operation check mode. Therefore, if an incompatibility error signal is output during the operation check mode, the incompatibility error signal and the output check signal will overlap and be output from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the amusement hall. In this case, it becomes difficult to determine whether the signal input to the hall computer is an incompatibility error signal or an output check signal, which may make it difficult to determine whether the output to the external terminal board 558 is normal. For this reason, in this example, even during operation check mode, an incompatibility error signal is not output from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, and an incompatibility error signal can be output after the operation check mode is complete. Note that if the combination of divided gaming boards 5A is incompatible, the incompatibility error signal may not be output from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, regardless of whether operation check mode is in progress, and in this case, a notification issued by the pachinko machine 1 may let the player know that the combination of divided gaming boards 5A is incompatible.

Furthermore, in this example, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the fact that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible will not be reported until the external terminal board output confirmation mode is ended (until the output confirmation mode end command is received from the main control MPU 1310a). In other words, while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed, the various LEDs (some or all) of the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled in the same manner as when the external terminal board output confirmation mode is executed when compatible (these may be completely identical, or almost all may be the same with only some differences).

When the external terminal board output confirmation mode ends, the main control MPU 1310a sends an output confirmation mode end command to the peripheral control board 1510 and starts the operation confirmation mode. When the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the output confirmation mode end command, it controls the various speakers and the various LEDs (which may be some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) in the same manner as when the operation confirmation mode was executed during compatibility (they may be completely identical, or almost all may be the same with only some differences), while the effect display device 1600 displays an abnormal background image (e.g., black) on the entire screen without displaying decorative patterns or the background image used during normal play (when playable), and displays "Right side game board incompatible error" on the effect display device 1600 as an incompatible error notification display mode, thereby notifying the user that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible.

In other words, when the operation check mode is started, the LEDs (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR, various LEDs of the door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450, etc. mounted on the door frame 3) are illuminated in a predetermined light-emitting pattern (in this example, this is only performed in the operation check mode and is not performed in the game presentation), except for the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that displays information about winning or losing, which are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 (this may be completely the same, or almost all may be the same with only some differences). It controls the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 to light up the LEDs in a predetermined operation mode (operation confirmation light emission mode that is not output during operation confirmation), drives drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 to operate movable bodies (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left-side game board 5AL, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, the rear-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) in a predetermined operation mode (operation confirmation operation mode), and outputs operation confirmation alarm sounds from various speakers (in this example, alarm sounds that are output only in operation confirmation mode and are not output during game performance).

In addition, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during operation check mode, a special sound (such as a "beep") will be output at a predetermined volume in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 (this volume is different from the volume set in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227, and the volume does not change even when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated).

On the other hand, among the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs excluding the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding winning or losing (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR, various LEDs of the door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3, etc.)), and the drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 The performance display device 1600, which drives the movable elements (such as the rear-upper movable decorative element 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 on the left-side game board 5AL, the rear-left movable decorative element 3301 and rear-right movable decorative element 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative element 3161 of the rear-front-lower performance unit 3160) and various speakers, volume control button 227, and light intensity control button 228, is configured to notify users that the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible by displaying "Right-side game board incompatible error" as an incompatible error notification display mode. This makes it possible to notify users that the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible without interfering with the confirmation work in operation confirmation mode.

In this way, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), during operation confirmation mode, only a part of the performance display device 1600 displays "Right side game board incompatible error" as an incompatible error notification display mode, and the LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, except for the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information about winning or losing (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left side game board 5AL and the decorative board provided on the right side game board 5AR, the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420 mounted on the door frame 3), , door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450, etc.), various movable bodies provided on the left gaming board 5AL (back-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the back-upper performance unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 provided on the left gaming board 5AL, back-left movable decorative body 3301 and back-right movable decorative body 3302 of the back-lower performance unit 3300, back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the back-front-lower performance unit 3160, etc.), and various speakers are not controlled in a manner that notifies that the combination of the divided gaming board 5A is incompatible, but are controlled in the same manner as when the operation check mode is executed when it is compatible (this may be completely identical, or almost entirely the same with only some differences).

For this reason, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided gaming board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), it is possible to check whether the movable body on the left gaming board 5AL is capable of operating normally, and if an abnormality (not operating normally) is discovered, repairs can be made to return the movable body to a normal state, thereby enabling the movable body to perform the moving effect as designed, thereby preventing a decrease in the presentation effect. The LEDs mounted on the movable body are also controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light-emitting mode without being controlled to an off state, preventing a situation where it becomes impossible to check whether the LEDs mounted on the movable body are capable of emitting light normally. If an abnormality (not emitting light normally) is found during the check, repairs can be made to return the movable body to a normal state, allowing the movable body to emit light as designed, thereby preventing a decrease in the presentation effect.

In addition, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the LEDs of the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, except for the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 that displays information regarding winning or losing, are not controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode that notifies that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, but are controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light-emitting mode. This prevents the inability to check whether LEDs, excluding the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 that displays information about winning or losing, are able to emit light normally, and if an abnormality (not emitting light normally) is found when checking whether LEDs are able to emit light normally, repairs can be made to return them to a normal state so that they can emit light as designed, thereby preventing a decrease in the presentation effect and preventing the serious abnormality notification light-up mode, which lights up at high brightness, from making it difficult to see the operation of the movable body on the left-hand gaming board 5AL or the light emitted by the LED mounted on the movable body, which can hinder checking operations.

Furthermore, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), an operation confirmation alarm sound is output without outputting an incompatible game board alarm sound, thereby preventing the inability to confirm whether the various speakers are able to output sound normally.If an abnormality (sound is not being output normally) is found after checking whether sound can be output normally, repairs can be made to return the speakers to a normal state, allowing sound to be output from the various speakers as designed, thereby preventing a decrease in the presentation effect. Furthermore, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), a special sound is output when the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, preventing the player from being unable to confirm whether the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 can normally accept operation. If an abnormality (special sound is not output) is found after checking whether operation can be normally accepted, repairs can be made to return the device to a normal state, allowing sound to be output from the various speakers at the player's preferred volume, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to sound being output from the various speakers at a volume that the player finds unpleasant.

In addition, in the operation check mode, not only are the drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., provided on the right-side game board 5AR that has been determined to be incompatible and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, not operated in a predetermined operating mode (operation mode during operation check), but also the movable bodies (the rear-upper rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the split game board 5A) that operate in a predetermined operating mode (operation mode during operation check) in the operation check mode, which is performed when the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible, The drive motors and drive solenoids that drive the performance operation units 301 that are provided on the door frame units (such as the moving decorative body 3210, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear lower front performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) and are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) are also prevented from operating in a predetermined operating mode (operating mode during operation confirmation).

Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), even if the operation check mode is started, the LED provided on the right-side game board 5AR determined to be incompatible will not be controlled to light up in the operation check light-emitting mode or the movable body will not be controlled to operate in the operation check mode (a control signal will not be output to the right-side game board 5AR), or this control will not be possible (a control signal will be output but not input to the right-side game board 5AR).In addition, no control will be performed to drive the drive motor or drive solenoid provided on the tray unit 200 (in this example, the performance operation unit 300) provided on the door frame 3 and not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), thereby operating the performance operation unit 301 provided on the performance operation unit 300. This prevents the movable body from operating in a manner different from its intended operation, which could result in damage to the movable body or door frame unit, or failure of the drive motor or drive solenoid that operates the movable body. However, even in this case, LEDs provided on the door frame unit that are not subject to ID determination (for example, multiple LEDs 320a that illuminate and decorate the upper part (unit upper cover 312) of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in the same predetermined manner as when compatible. This makes it possible to determine that the operation check mode is being executed normally.

On the other hand, when the operation confirmation mode is initiated, the movable bodies (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 of the left side of the divided game board 5AL, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160, etc.) provided on the left side of the game board 5AL, which is placed on the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC 1510a that executes the ID determination process (step S1003) is implemented, operate in the same manner as normal (when the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be compatible) when the operation confirmation mode is initiated. In addition, the LEDs mounted on the boards provided on the movable bodies provided on the left side game board 5AL (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160) are controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light-emitting mode. That is, if the right-side game board 5AR is determined to be in an incompatible state in the ID determination process (step S1003), as in normal cases (when the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be compatible), the movable bodies provided on the left-side game board 5AL (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left-side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear-front-lower performance unit 3160) are operated in an operation confirmation operation mode, and the LEDs provided on the movable bodies provided on the left-side game board 5AL are controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light emission mode. This makes it easy to identify the game board (in this case, the left-side game board 5AL) on which the peripheral control board 1510 of the divided game board 5A is provided. In addition, when the right-side game board 5AR is determined to be in an incompatible state in the ID determination process (step S1003), the LEDs mounted on the boards of the movable bodies (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 of the left-side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear-front-lower performance unit 3160) mounted on the boards of the movable bodies mounted on the left-side game board 5AL are not controlled to emit light in the operation confirmation light emitting mode, and the ID determination process (step S1003) is performed. ) and it is determined that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the LEDs mounted on the circuit boards of the movable bodies provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL of the divided gaming board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160) may be controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light-emitting mode, so that it is possible to determine whether the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state or not.

In addition, in this example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, when the operation check mode is initiated, no control is performed to operate the performance operation unit 301 by driving the drive motor or drive solenoid mounted on the board provided on the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame unit (in this example, the tray unit 200) that is not the subject of ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), but the various LEDs mounted on the board provided on the performance operation unit 300 are controlled in the same manner as normal (when the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be compatible) during the operation check mode. In other words, when the operation check mode is executed, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the various LEDs mounted on the boards provided in the presentation operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light in the operation check light-emitting mode, just as if the combination of the divided game boards 5A was determined to be compatible. Note that the presentation operation unit 300 may be the specific door frame unit that is the subject of ID determination. Even in this case, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the combination of a specific door frame unit other than the presentation operation unit 300 or the divided game board 5A is incompatible, the drive motor or drive solenoid mounted on the board provided in the presentation operation unit 300 is not driven to operate the presentation operation unit 301, while the various LEDs mounted on the board provided in the presentation operation unit 300 may be controlled to emit light in the operation check light-emitting mode.

In addition, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the LEDs mounted on some of the multiple LEDs mounted on some of the multiple boards provided on the door frame unit that are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), or some of the multiple LEDs mounted on one board, may not be controlled to emit light in the operation confirmation light-emitting mode, and some movable bodies may not be operated in the operation confirmation operating mode (for example, some or all of the LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the door frame unit and the drive motors, drive solenoids, LEDs, etc. provided on the movable bodies provided on the door frame unit may not operate or be driven in the operation confirmation mode).

In addition, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the right-side game board 5AR determined to be incompatible and some or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in door frame units not subject to ID determination and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not be driven until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, regardless of whether it is in operation check mode, or until the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible. In this case, it is possible to prevent the movable bodies from operating in a manner different from their intended operation, which could result in damage to the movable bodies or door frame unit, or failure of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable bodies.

In addition, when the operation check mode ends (the LED's operation check light-emitting mode ends and the light is turned off or turned on in a predetermined light-emitting mode, and the movable body's operation check mode ends and the movable body enters a standby state (stopped (stored) in a predetermined standby position)), and the game mode begins, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the incompatibility error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600, repeatedly outputs a game board incompatibility notification sound (an announcement voice saying "An incompatibility error has occurred on the right-side game board. Please turn off the power and check." and a warning sound such as a "ding dong" sound) at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set, or a default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510) from various speakers (repeated for a certain number of times (e.g., 5 times) or for a certain period (e.g., 30 seconds)) until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. (It may be one that repeatedly outputs and then stops the output), and the various LEDs (which may be some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are repeatedly controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality warning light mode (in this example, a mode in which the lights are switched between maximum brightness red on and off in a short period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (high-speed flashing mode)), and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL are controlled to an off state, while the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left gaming board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left gaming board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are brought into a state in which they can be controlled to emit light in the same way as when they were matched (they may be lit in a predetermined mode).

The game board incompatibility notification sound is not the same notification sound (such as a "beep") that is output intermittently, but is made up of multiple sounds with different tones, and is further controlled to alternate between a mute state and an on state. Furthermore, the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode is not fixed to a lit state, but is controlled to alternate between a lit state and an off state to change the amount of light. In other words, the various speakers and LEDs dynamically change the tone, volume, light intensity, etc. over time to notify that the combination of divided game boards 5A is incompatible. This makes it easier to notice that the combination of divided game boards 5A is incompatible when the operation check mode ends and a game mode that does not require confirmation is initiated.

In this example, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), when controlling the transition to operation check mode, the system immediately notifies the user that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, without issuing an abnormality alert in response to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 after the operation check mode. In other words, when the operation check mode ends and the game mode begins, the system outputs a game board incompatible combination alert sound without outputting a door open alert sound, regardless of whether the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 and whether the predetermined period has elapsed since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2. Furthermore, when the operation check mode ends and the game mode begins, the system controls the illumination to a serious abnormality alert illumination mode, but this is not due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, but is due to the combination of the divided game board 5A being incompatible. Therefore, when the operation check mode ends and the game mode begins, the light emission is always controlled to the serious abnormality notification light emission mode regardless of whether a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the main body frame 4 was closed.

In addition, when the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (mismatched), even if the start condition for the variable display is met (when the game ball enters the start hole (first start hole 2002 or either the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004)), the effect display device 1600, various speakers, various LEDs on the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), and decorations provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, The system is designed to notify users that an abnormality has occurred without performing any variable effects using the various LEDs mounted on the board. On the other hand, when the interrupt permission setting (step S52) is made after the external terminal board output confirmation mode ends, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 are controlled to emit light in a predetermined light-emitting mode based on the fulfillment of the variable display start condition (a game ball entering the start port (first start port 2002 or either the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004)), making it possible to display information regarding the result.

In addition, in this example, even if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is in an incompatible (mismatched) state when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the timing of light emission control in the serious abnormality alert light emission mode corresponding to the incompatible (mismatched) combination of the divided game boards 5A and the timing of the output of the game board incompatible alert sound will differ depending on whether or not control is exercised to transition to the external terminal board output confirmation mode or whether or not control is exercised to transition to the operation confirmation mode.

Specifically, if the transition control to either the external terminal board output check mode or the operation check mode is not performed and the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible (mismatched), the effect display device 1600 will display "power on" for a predetermined period of time based on the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1, and then the various LEDs (some or all of which may be) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) will start to emit light in a serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode, and the various speakers will start to output game board incompatible alert sounds.

On the other hand, when either the external terminal board output check mode or the operation check mode is executed, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (mismatched), the various LEDs (which may be some or all) of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) will not be controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality alert mode or the game board incompatibility alert sound will be output from the various speakers during the external terminal board output check mode or operation check mode. Instead, after the operation check mode, the various LEDs (which may be some or all) of the door frame unit will be controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality alert mode and the game board incompatibility alert sound will be output from the various speakers in response to the right-side game board 5AR being in a mismatched state.

In this way, even if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is in an incompatible (mismatched) state when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the timing of the light emission control in the serious abnormality notification light emission mode corresponding to the incompatible state of the right-side game board 5AR and the timing of the output of the game board incompatible notification sound can be varied depending on whether or not to control the transition to the external terminal board output confirmation mode or whether or not to control the transition to the operation confirmation mode, thereby prioritizing the notification of more important information and preventing malfunctions and fraudulent behavior from occurring. In other words, if the output to the external terminal board 558 is not normal, the hall computer may not be able to detect fraudulent activity even if it is taking place, which could result in damage to the gaming parlor, and if there is an abnormality in the devices installed in the pachinko machine 1, there is a risk that the pachinko machine 1 may be damaged. Therefore, by giving priority to reporting this rather than a mismatch (inconsistency) in the combination of the divided game board 5A, it is possible to prevent the damage from spreading and damage to the pachinko machine 1 from occurring.

When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the timing at which the background image (e.g., black) for an abnormality and the incompatibility error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600 are displayed is the same regardless of whether or not control is exercised to transition to the external terminal board output confirmation mode, or whether or not control is exercised to transition to the operation confirmation mode. In other words, the background image (e.g., black) for an abnormality and the incompatibility error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600 are displayed at the timing at which the operation confirmation mode is started. This allows for priority execution of notifications of high importance, while also allowing the performance display device 1600 to notify and handle other notifications. Furthermore, the timing of the background image (e.g., black) displayed when an abnormality occurs on the performance display device 1600 and the display mode of the incompatibility error notification on the performance display device 1600 may differ depending on whether or not control is exercised to transition to external terminal board output confirmation mode, or whether or not control is exercised to transition to operation confirmation mode. In this case, information of increasing importance can be notified in order and dealt with in sequence, ensuring that each piece of information is conveyed reliably and dealt with.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed to be incompatible (inconsistent) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), even if there is a detection by an abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed, the detection is invalidated (it may be that no process is executed to check whether or not there is a detection, or it may be that a process is executed to check whether or not there is a detection but no process (such as an alert) based on the detection is executed).

Specifically, even if an abnormal magnetic field is generated while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the detection signal is discarded without issuing an abnormality alert based on the detection of the abnormal magnetic field. In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored (the input of the detection signal may not be confirmed, or even if the input of the detection signal is confirmed, processing based on the input may not be executed), and after the external terminal board output confirmation mode ends, control of the operation confirmation mode is executed as if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had not been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

In addition, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch) during operation check mode, that is, when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during operation check mode, the detection by the abnormality detection means is also disabled (it may not execute a process to check whether or not there is a detection, or it may execute a process to check whether or not there is a detection but not execute a process (such as an alert) based on the detection).

Specifically, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the combination of the divided game board 5A is deemed to be incompatible (mismatched), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during operation confirmation mode, the detection signal is discarded without issuing an abnormality alert based on the detection of an illegal magnetism. In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, and if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during operation check mode, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control in the operation check mode continues as if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had not been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

In addition, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the game mode after the operation check mode has ended, the detection by the abnormality detection means will be disabled (it may not execute a process to check whether or not there is a detection, or it may execute a process to check whether or not there is a detection but not execute a process (such as an alert) based on the detection).

Specifically, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the game mode after the operation check mode has ended, the detection signal is discarded without issuing an abnormality alert based on the detection of an illegal magnetism. In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the game mode after the operation check mode has ended, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control continues as if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had not been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

In this way, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), no abnormality alert will be issued even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, sensors or switches such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc., which input a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), regardless of whether the control is in the external terminal board output confirmation mode or the operation confirmation mode.

In other words, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible, gameplay may proceed in a manner not intended by the designer, potentially causing harm to the gaming establishment and players, and may even result in a loss of player trust due to deviations from the original specifications. Therefore, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible, regardless of whether the game is controlled in the external terminal board output confirmation mode or the operation confirmation mode, a warning is issued in priority over a warning resulting from detection of an abnormality by the abnormality detection means (e.g., sensors and switches such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, and door frame open switch, which input a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), thereby preventing gameplay and preventing harm to the gaming establishment and players.

In addition, some LEDs may be controlled to emit different light depending on the type of abnormality detection means, regardless of whether they are controlled to external terminal board output confirmation mode or operation confirmation mode. For example, when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, one or both of the LEDs on the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250 may be turned off (putting them in a state where light emission control is not possible).

Furthermore, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to periodically (for example, constantly determine each time the peripheral control unit normal processing is executed) determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the ID determination process may not be executed while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed, and even if the ID determination process is executed while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed and it is determined that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, no notification may be issued indicating that the right-side game board 5AR is in an incompatible state while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed.

In addition, when the configuration is such that the combination of the split game boards 5A is periodically determined to be compatible or not, if the ID determination process is executed before starting the external terminal board output confirmation mode or during the operation confirmation mode and it is determined that the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible, just as in the case where the combination of the split game boards 5A is determined to be compatible or not only when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, during the operation confirmation mode, the performance display device 1600 will display a message indicating that the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible, while the various speakers and various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) will not output a game board incompatible alarm sound or light up a serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode to indicate that the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible, and when the operation confirmation mode ends and the game mode is entered, the game board incompatible alarm sound and serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode to indicate that the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible may be output.

Furthermore, even if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible, even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed, the detection is invalid (it may not execute a process to check whether there is a detection, or it may execute a process to check whether there is a detection but not execute a process (such as an alert) based on the detection). Therefore, even after the external terminal board output confirmation mode is entered, an abnormality alert based on detection by the abnormality detection means during the external terminal board output confirmation mode may not be executed.

Furthermore, when the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be incompatible during operation check mode and an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) may issue a notification that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, taking priority over an alert that the abnormality detection means has detected the combination; and if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible, an alert that the abnormality detection means has detected the combination may be issued.

[Pachinko machine confirmation mode when not connected]
Next, an example of behavior when controlling transition to the confirmation mode (external terminal board output confirmation mode, operation confirmation mode) of the pachinko machine 1 in an unconnected state (unconnected state) in which the right-side gaming panel 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side gaming panel 5AL, such as when there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming panel 5AR (the input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming panel 5AR cannot be confirmed) and a malfunction such as a short circuit or disconnection occurs in the transmission path for transmitting various signals, will be described with reference to Fig. 290. Note that the following will only describe the cases of compatibility and incompatibility and the parts that differ from the above-mentioned embodiment, and will not provide a duplicated description.

As shown in FIG. 290, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming board 5AR during the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, i.e., if the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected, control signals from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are not input to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board of the right-side gaming board 5AR, and therefore the electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR are in a non-driven state (for example, the various LEDs are turned off) regardless of whether the external terminal board output confirmation mode is in effect. Note that if it is determined during the ID determination process (step S1003) that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming board 5AR, it is also possible not to output control signals from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR.

In addition, in this example, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected in the ID determination process (step S1003), the external terminal board 558 outputs an output confirmation signal to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall during execution of the external terminal board output confirmation mode or for a certain period of time after the external terminal board output confirmation mode has been activated, without outputting a non-connection error signal indicating that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected. In other words, during the external terminal board output confirmation mode or for a certain period of time after the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the external terminal board 558 outputs an output confirmation signal, just as when compatible. This prevents a non-connection error signal from being sent from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, which would interfere with the output confirmation signal confirmation process.

Furthermore, in this example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected, the external terminal board 558 does not output a non-connection error signal indicating that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected to the hall computer installed in the amusement hall, even during the operation check mode. In other words, the output check signal output from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the amusement hall in response to the start of the external terminal board output check mode is also output for a certain period after the external terminal board output check mode, i.e., for a certain period during the operation check mode. Therefore, if a non-connection error signal is output during the operation check mode, the non-connection error signal and the output check signal will overlap and be output from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the amusement hall. In this case, it becomes difficult to determine whether the signal input to the hall computer is a non-connection error signal or an output check signal, which may make it difficult to determine whether the output to the external terminal board 558 is normal. For this reason, in this example, even during operation check mode, the external terminal board 558 is not outputting a non-connection error signal to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, and it is possible to output a non-connection error signal after the operation check mode has finished. Note that if the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected, the external terminal board 558 may not output a non-connection error signal to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, regardless of whether the operation check mode is in progress, and in this case, the pachinko machine 1 may notify the user that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected.

In addition, in this example, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, it is not notified that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is not electrically connected until the external terminal board output confirmation mode is terminated. In other words, while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed, the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled in the same manner as when the external terminal board output confirmation mode was executed at the time of adaptation (these may be completely identical, or almost all may be the same with only some differences).

When the external terminal board output confirmation mode ends, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the various speakers and the various LEDs (which may be some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) in the same manner as when the operation confirmation mode was executed during compatibility (they may be completely identical, or almost entirely identical with only some differences). Furthermore, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 not only displays the performance (normal) mode (decorative patterns, normal (playable) background image, etc.) on the performance display device 1600 as during compatibility, but also displays "Right side game board unconnected error" as an unconnection error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600 to notify the user that the right side game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left side game board 5AL.

In other words, when the operation check mode is started, the LEDs (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR, various LEDs of the door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450, etc. mounted on the door frame 3) are illuminated in a predetermined light-emitting pattern (in this example, this is only performed in the operation check mode and is not performed in the game presentation), except for the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that displays information about winning or losing, which are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 (this may be completely the same, or almost all may be the same with only some differences). It controls the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 to light up the LEDs in a predetermined operation mode (operation confirmation light emission mode that is not output during operation confirmation), drives drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 to operate movable bodies (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left-side game board 5AL, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, the rear-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) in a predetermined operation mode (operation confirmation operation mode), and outputs operation confirmation alarm sounds from various speakers (in this example, alarm sounds that are output only in operation confirmation mode and are not output during game performance).

In addition, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during operation check mode, a special sound (such as a "beep") will be output at a predetermined volume in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 (this volume is different from the volume set in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227, and the volume does not change even when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated).

On the other hand, among the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs excluding the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding winning or losing (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR, various LEDs of the door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450, etc. mounted on the door frame 3), and drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 The display device 1600, which drives the display device 1600 to check the operation of the movable bodies (such as the rear-upper movable decorative element 3210 of the rear-upper decorative element 3200 of the rear unit 3000 on the left-side gaming board 5AL, the rear-left movable decorative element 3301 and rear-right movable decorative element 3302 of the rear-lower decorative element 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative element 3161 of the rear-front-lower decorative element 3160), various speakers, volume control button 227, and light intensity control button 228, displays the message "Right side gaming board unconnected error occurred" as an unconnected error notification display mode, thereby notifying the user that the right side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected. This allows the user to be notified that the right side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected without interfering with the confirmation process in operation check mode.

In this way, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected, during the operation confirmation mode, only a part of the performance display device 1600 displays "Right-side gaming board unconnected error occurred" as an unconnected error notification display mode, and the LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, except for the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding winning or losing (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL, various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR, and the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420 mounted on the door frame 3), are not displayed. , door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450, etc.), various movable bodies provided on the left gaming board 5AL (back-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the back-upper performance unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 provided on the left gaming board 5AL, back-left movable decorative body 3301 and back-right movable decorative body 3302 of the back-lower performance unit 3300, back-front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the back-front lower performance unit 3160, etc.), and various speakers are not controlled in a manner that notifies that the right gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected, but are controlled in the same manner as when the operation check mode is executed upon compatibility (which may be completely identical, or may be almost entirely identical with only some differences).

For this reason, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected, it is possible to check whether the movable body on the left-side gaming board 5AL is operating normally, and if an abnormality (not operating normally) is discovered, repairs can be made to return the movable body to its normal state, thereby enabling the movable body to perform the moving effect as designed, thereby preventing a decrease in the presentation effect. The LED mounted on the movable body is also controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light-emitting mode without being controlled to an off state, preventing a situation where it becomes impossible to check whether the LED mounted on the movable body is capable of emitting light normally. If an abnormality (not emitting light normally) is found when checking whether the LED is capable of emitting light normally, repairs can be made to return the LED to its normal state, thereby enabling the LED to emit light as designed, thereby preventing a decrease in the presentation effect.

Furthermore, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, except for the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 that displays information regarding winning or losing, are not controlled to emit light in a minor abnormality notification light-emitting mode that notifies that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, but are controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light-emitting mode. This prevents the inability to check whether the LEDs, excluding the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 that displays information about the winnings and losses, are able to emit light normally, and if an abnormality (not emitting light normally) is found when checking whether the LEDs are able to emit light normally, repairs can be made to return them to a normal state so that they can emit light as designed, thereby preventing a decrease in the presentation effect and preventing the minor abnormality notification light-up mode, which lights up at high brightness, from making it difficult to see the operation of the movable body on the left-hand gaming board 5AL or the light emitted by the LED mounted on the movable body, which can hinder checking operations.

Furthermore, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected in the ID determination process (step S1003), an operation confirmation notification sound is output without outputting a game board unconnection notification sound, thereby preventing the inability to confirm whether the various speakers are able to output sound normally.If an abnormality (sound is not being output normally) is found after checking whether sound is able to be output normally, repairs can be made to return the speakers to a normal state, allowing sound to be output from the various speakers as designed, thereby preventing a reduction in the presentation effect. Furthermore, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected, a special sound is output when the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, preventing a situation where it is not possible to confirm whether the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is able to accept operation normally. If an abnormality (special sound is not being output) is discovered after checking whether operation is being accepted normally, repairs can be made to return the device to a normal state, allowing sounds to be output from the various speakers at the player's preferred volume, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to sounds being output from the various speakers at a volume that the player finds unpleasant.

In addition, in the operation check mode, not only is the operation check mode not performed for the drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., that are provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR and are determined to be in an unconnected state and are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, but the operation check mode is also not performed for the drive motors and drive solenoids that operate the performance operation unit 301 that is provided on the door frame unit among the movable bodies that execute the operation check mode (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the divided gaming board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, the rear-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear-front-lower performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) and that are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003).

Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is not electrically connected, even if the operation check mode is started, the LED on the right-side gaming panel 5AR will not be controlled to light up in the operation check light-emitting mode or the movable body will not be controlled to operate in the operation check mode (a control signal will not be output to the right-side gaming panel 5AR), or it will not be possible to do this (a control signal will be output but not input to the right-side gaming panel 5AR). In addition, the drive motor or drive solenoid on the tray unit 200 (in this example, the performance operation unit 300) that is provided on the door frame 3 and is not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) will not be driven to operate the performance operation unit 301 on the performance operation unit 300.

In other words, when the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, there is a risk that some or all of the movable bodies provided on the door frame unit that is not subject to ID determination will also have poor connections, and the control signal output from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be changed to a different signal from the original due to noise, etc., and input, causing the movable bodies to operate in an abnormal manner. Therefore, some or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided on the door frame unit and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 that are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) are not driven, thereby preventing the movable bodies from operating in an operating mode different from the original, which could result in damage to the movable bodies or door frame unit, or failure of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable bodies. However, even in this case, LEDs provided on the door frame unit that are not subject to ID determination (for example, multiple LEDs 320a used to illuminate and decorate the upper part (unit upper cover 312) of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in a specified manner, just as when compatible. This makes it possible to determine that the operation check mode is being executed normally.

On the other hand, when the operation confirmation mode is initiated, the movable bodies (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 of the left side of the divided game board 5AL, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160, etc.) provided on the left side of the game board 5AL, which is placed on the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC 1510a that executes the ID determination process (step S1003) is implemented, operate in the same manner as normal (when the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be compatible) when the operation confirmation mode is initiated. In addition, the LEDs mounted on the boards provided on the movable bodies provided on the left side game board 5AL (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160) are controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light-emitting mode. In other words, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, as in the normal case (when the combination of the divided gaming board 5A is determined to be compatible), the movable elements on the left-side gaming board 5AL (such as the rear-upper movable decorative element 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 on the left-side gaming board 5AL of the divided gaming board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative element 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative element 3161 of the rear-front-lower performance unit 3160) are operated in an operation confirmation operating mode, and the LEDs on the movable elements on the left-side gaming board 5AL are controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light-emitting mode. This makes it easy to identify the gaming board on which the peripheral control board 1510 of the divided gaming board 5A is installed (in this case, the left-side gaming board 5AL).

In addition, in this example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, no control is performed to drive the drive motor or drive solenoid mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame unit (in this example, the tray unit 200) that is not the subject of ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) to operate the performance operation unit 301, but the various LEDs mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 are controlled in the same manner as normal (when the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be compatible) during the operation confirmation mode. In other words, when the operation check mode is executed, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, the various LEDs mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light in the operation check light-emitting mode, just as if the combination of the divided game board 5A was determined to be compatible.

In addition, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, the LEDs mounted on some of the multiple LEDs mounted on multiple boards provided on the door frame unit that are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), or some of the multiple LEDs mounted on one board, may not be controlled to emit light in the operation confirmation light-emitting mode, and some movable bodies may not be operated in the operation confirmation operating mode (for example, some or all of the LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the door frame unit and the drive motors, drive solenoids, LEDs, etc. provided on the movable bodies provided on the door frame unit may not operate or be driven in the operation confirmation mode).

In addition, if it is determined in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the divided game board 5A is not connected, the right-side game board 5AR determined to be not connected and some or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in door frame units not subject to ID determination and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not be driven until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, regardless of whether it is in operation check mode, or until the combination of divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible. In this case, it is possible to prevent the movable bodies from operating in a manner different from their intended operation, which could result in damage to the movable bodies or door frame unit, or failure of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable bodies.

In addition, when the external terminal board output confirmation mode ends (the LED's operation confirmation light-emitting mode ends and the light is turned off or turned on in a predetermined light-emitting mode, and the movable body's operation confirmation operation mode ends and the movable body enters a standby state (stopped (stored) in a predetermined standby position)), and the game mode begins, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the unconnection error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600, repeatedly outputs a game board unconnection notification sound (an announcement voice saying "The right-side game board is not connected" and a warning sound such as "ding dong") from various speakers at a volume adjusted by the volume adjustment button 227 until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (the output may be stopped after being output repeatedly a certain number of times (e.g., 5 times) or for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds)), and The various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are repeatedly controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality alert mode (or in a semi-serious abnormality alert mode if the light is controlled to emit light in a semi-serious abnormality alert mode after the serious abnormality alert mode), and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL are controlled to an off state, while the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left-side game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left-side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are set to a state in which they can be controlled to emit light in the same way as when they were matched (they may be lit in a specified mode).

The game board unconnection alert sound is not a single alert sound (such as a "beep") that is output intermittently, but is made up of multiple sounds with different tones, and is further controlled to alternate between a mute state and an on state. Furthermore, the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode is not fixed to a lit state, but is controlled to alternate between a lit state and an off state to change the light intensity. In other words, the various speakers and LEDs dynamically change the tone, volume, light intensity, etc. over time to alert the player that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side game board 5AL. This makes it easier to notice that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side game board 5AL when the operation check mode ends and a game mode that does not require confirmation is initiated.

In this way, in this example, when the system is controlled to transition to operation check mode in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, the various speakers issue an abnormality alert in response to the right-side gaming panel 5AR being in a disconnected state, while the various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) issue an abnormality alert in response to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2. In other words, although abnormality alerts are issued for the various speakers, the various LEDs of the door frame units, and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming panel 5AR, the underlying abnormalities are different (the various speakers issue an abnormality alert due to a disconnection, while the various LEDs of the door frame units and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming panel 5AR issue an abnormality alert due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2).

In other words, if the right-side game board 5AR is not connected and the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 during operation check mode, a game board unconnection alert sound is output from the various speakers, and light emission control is executed for the serious abnormality alert light mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 (semi-serious abnormality alert light mode if the light emission control is switched to the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode). While the volume of the game board unconnection alert sound output from the various speakers can be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227, the light intensity cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228 for the serious abnormality alert light mode (including the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode if the light emission control is switched to the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode) that is controlled by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2.

In this case, a scale corresponding to the light intensity (brightness) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228, and even if the scale is changed by further operating the light intensity adjustment button 228, the light intensity (brightness) of the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (including the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode when the light is controlled to the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode) does not change. On the other hand, the minor abnormality light-emitting mode, which is executed after the light-emitting control of the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (including the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode when the light is controlled to the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode) has ended, in response to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state, is controlled to emit light at the light intensity (brightness) changed in response to the operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228. In this example, when the operation check mode is executed with the right-side game board 5AR not connected, if the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 when the operation check mode ends and the game mode starts and the light emission is controlled to the serious abnormality alert light mode (semi-serious abnormality alert light mode if the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode), then during the light emission control of the serious abnormality alert light mode (semi-serious abnormality alert light mode if the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode), the light intensity (brightness) of the light emission mode that is controlled to emit light after the end of the serious abnormality alert light mode (semi-serious abnormality alert light mode if the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode) can be adjusted. This prevents players from being deprived of an opportunity to adjust the light intensity (brightness) in situations where they can start playing, even if the light is controlled to the serious abnormality alert light mode (if the light is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode), and prevents a decline in interest in playing.

In addition, if the period from closing the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, to ending the serious abnormality alert light mode (or the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode if the light is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode) is set shorter than the period from starting the operation check mode to ending the operation check mode, if the main frame 4 is closed after the external terminal board output check mode has ended and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, and dish unit 440 provided on the door frame 3) will not be affected by the light. The various LEDs (some or all of which may be used) of the right-side game board 5AR (such as the main frame 200 and door frame top unit 450) are not controlled to emit light in a manner that indicates a serious abnormality caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, but are controlled to emit light in a manner that indicates a minor abnormality in response to the fact that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state immediately when the operation check mode ends and the game mode begins, so that the LED light emission can immediately notify the user that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state when the operation check mode ends and the game mode begins.

In addition, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the timing of light emission control in the minor abnormality alert light emission mode corresponding to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state and the timing of output of the game board unconnected alert sound differ depending on whether or not control is made to transition to the external terminal board output confirmation mode or whether or not control is made to transition to the operation confirmation mode.

Specifically, when transition control is not performed to either the external terminal board output check mode or the operation check mode, if there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and the game board is in an unconnected state, the effect display device 1600 will display "power on" for a predetermined period of time based on the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1, and then the various LEDs (some or all of which may be LEDs) of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) will start to emit light in a minor abnormality alert light-emitting mode, and the various speakers will start to output a game board unconnected alert sound.

On the other hand, when executing either the external terminal board output check mode or the operation check mode, if there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and the game board is in an unconnected state, the light emission control in the minor abnormality notification light emission mode and the output of the game board unconnected alert sound from the various speakers due to the fact that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR will not be initiated during the external terminal board output check mode or operation check mode, but after the operation check mode, the light emission control in the minor abnormality notification light emission mode and the output of the game board unconnected alert sound from the various speakers due to the fact that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and the game board is in an unconnected state will be initiated.

In this way, even if the pachinko machine 1 is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from the right-side game board 5AR when power supply to the machine is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input, by varying the timing of the light emission control in the minor abnormality notification light emission mode and the timing of the output of the game board unconnected notification sound depending on whether or not to control the transition to the external terminal board output confirmation mode or whether or not to control the transition to the operation confirmation mode, it is possible to prioritize the notification of information of higher importance and prevent malfunctions and fraudulent behavior from occurring. In other words, if the output to the external terminal board 558 is not normal, the hall computer may not be able to detect fraudulent activity even if it is taking place, which could result in damage to the gaming parlor, and if there is an abnormality in the devices installed in the pachinko machine 1, there is a risk that the pachinko machine 1 may be damaged. Therefore, by giving priority to reporting this rather than a mismatch (inconsistency) in the combination of the divided game board 5A, it is possible to prevent the damage from spreading and damage to the pachinko machine 1 from occurring.

When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input, and if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input, the timing at which the effect display device 1600 displays "Right-side gaming panel unconnected error" as an unconnection error notification display mode is the same regardless of whether or not control is exercised to transition to the external terminal board output confirmation mode, or whether or not control is exercised to transition to the operation confirmation mode. In other words, the effect display device 1600 displays "Right-side gaming panel unconnected error" as an unconnection error notification display mode when the operation confirmation mode is started. This allows priority to be given to notifications of higher importance, while the effect display device 1600 can also notify and handle other notifications. Furthermore, the timing of the display of "Right side game board unconnection error occurred" as an unconnection error notification display mode on the effect display device 1600 may differ depending on whether or not control is exercised to transition to external terminal board output check mode, or whether or not control is exercised to transition to operation check mode. In this case, information of increasing importance can be notified in order and dealt with in sequence, ensuring that each piece of information is reliably conveyed and dealt with.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 begins, the machine is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, and if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, even if there is a detection by an abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed, the detection is invalid (it may be that no process is executed to check whether or not there is a detection, or it may be that a process is executed to check whether or not there is a detection but no process (such as an alert) based on the detection is executed).

Specifically, even if an illicit magnetic field is generated during execution of the external terminal board output confirmation mode and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the detection signal is discarded without issuing an abnormality alert based on the detection of the illicit magnetic field. In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during execution of the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control is executed as if no detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 was input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 after the external terminal board output confirmation mode ends.

In addition, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, indicating an unconnected state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, and an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc.) during operation check mode, that is, when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during operation check mode, the detection by the abnormality detection means is valid, but some abnormality alerts are not issued while the power-on operation check is being executed, and are issued after the operation check mode ends.

Specifically, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during operation check mode, the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are not controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality alert light mode due to the detection of an illegal magnetism, and magnetic detection alert sounds (e.g., "Magnetic detection error occurred.") are not repeatedly output from the various speakers.

When the operation check mode ends, the various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in a major abnormality alert light mode due to the detection of unauthorized magnetism, and a magnetic detection alert sound is output from the various speakers. The abnormality alert due to the detection of unauthorized magnetism is configured to end when a predetermined period of time has passed since the detection of the unauthorized magnetism. When the abnormality alert due to the detection of unauthorized magnetism ends, if no other abnormalities have been detected, the various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in a minor abnormality alert light mode due to the right-side game board 5AR being unconnected, and a game board unconnection alert sound is repeatedly output from the various speakers.

In this way, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during operation check mode, the various LEDs and speakers of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) continue to be controlled as if no detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 has been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and an abnormality alert is issued due to the detection of an unauthorized magnetism based on the end of the operation check mode.

In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 begins, if the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (e.g., a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc.) during the operation check mode, an abnormality notification resulting from detection by the abnormality detection means will be given priority over an alarm resulting from the right-side gaming board 5AR being in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input after the operation check mode ends.

In other words, while there is little risk of incurring a disadvantage even if fraudulent behavior is committed in operation check mode, because game mode begins immediately after operation check mode ends, there is a possibility of similar fraudulent behavior being committed in game mode. On the other hand, if there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and the game is in an unconnected state, there is less likelihood of incurring a disadvantage than if the game was fraudulent. Therefore, if both detection by the abnormality detection means and an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR occur during operation check mode, the occurrence of a disadvantage is suppressed by prioritizing the issuance of a notification due to detection by the abnormality detection means after operation check mode ends (or, in some cases, during operation check mode).

In addition, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 of the abnormality detection means (e.g., magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc.) during the operation confirmation mode, When an error is detected by the sensors and switches (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), an error is reported from the various LEDs and speakers on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) when the operation check mode ends, but the performance display device 1600 is configured to report an error (for example, display "magnetic error occurred" as a magnetic detection error reporting mode) when an error is detected by the error detection means.

In other words, when a detection signal from the abnormality detection means is input to the main control board 1310 (or when the value of the magnet goto counter reaches its upper limit), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sends a command to the peripheral control board 1510 to start an abnormality alert (for example, a magnet goto alert command classified as an alert display indicating that radio wave irradiation goto is occurring), and when the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the command to start the abnormality alert (magnet goto alert command), it starts control related to the abnormality alert. In addition, even if an abnormality alert due to detection by the abnormality detection means is displayed on the performance display device 1600, an abnormality alert due to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state (unconnected error alert display mode) is displayed on the performance display device 1600. In other words, when both detection by the abnormality detection means and the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state occur simultaneously, an abnormality alert reporting the respective abnormalities is displayed on the performance display device 1600.

Note that, as abnormality detection means, sensors and switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, and door frame open switch, have been shown. However, for some sensors and switches, even if a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during operation check mode or after the external terminal board output check mode has ended (including during operation check mode and game mode), no abnormality notification may be sent to the performance display device 1600. Alternatively, for all sensors and switches, even if a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during operation check mode or after the external terminal board output check mode has ended (including during operation check mode and game mode), no abnormality notification may be sent to the performance display device 1600.

Furthermore, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, indicating an unconnected state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state. If an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (e.g., magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, or other sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the game mode after the operation check mode has ended, i.e., when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the game mode, the detection by the abnormality detection means is still valid. However, unlike when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the operation check mode, an abnormality alert is issued at the time the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means.

Specifically, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, and the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during game mode after the operation check mode has ended, an abnormality alert due to detection by the abnormality detection means is issued by the effect display device 1600 and the various LEDs and speakers of the door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, door frame top unit 450, etc. provided on the door frame 3).

In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, and if a detection signal is input from an abnormality detection means (e.g., a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc.) to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the game mode after the operation check mode has ended, then an abnormality alert resulting from detection by the abnormality detection means will be given priority over an alert resulting from the unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR.

Therefore, in a game mode where there is a high probability of disadvantages occurring if fraudulent activity is committed, if both a detection by the abnormality detection means and an unconnected state where no ID code signal is input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR occur, the occurrence of disadvantages can be prevented by giving priority to the notification resulting from the detection by the abnormality detection means.

Furthermore, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to periodically (for example, each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed) execute an ID determination process to determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the ID determination process may not be executed while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed, and even if the ID determination process is executed while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed and it is determined that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, no notification may be issued indicating that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed.

In addition, when an ID determination process is periodically executed to determine whether the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible, a notification (game board unconnected notification sound, unconnection error notification display mode, minor abnormality notification light emission mode, etc.) corresponding to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state may be initiated based on a determination that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and then the notification corresponding to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state may be terminated based on a determination that the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible, or a notification corresponding to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state may be initiated based on a determination that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR after the ID determination process determines that the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible.

In addition, if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible, when the ID determination process is performed before starting the external terminal board output confirmation mode or during the operation confirmation mode and it is determined that there is no ID code signal input from the right game board 5AR and that the game is in an unconnected state, the performance display device 1600 will display a message indicating that there is no ID code signal input from the right game board 5AR and that the game is in an unconnected state, just as when it is determined whether the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible only when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, while various spin The various LEDs on the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) may not emit a game board unconnection alert sound or light up in a minor abnormality alert light mode to alert that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and that there is an unconnected state, but may instead emit a game board unconnection alert sound and light up in a minor abnormality alert light mode to alert that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and that there is an unconnected state when the operation check mode ends and the game mode is entered.

Furthermore, even if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible, even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed, the detection is invalid (it may not execute a process to check whether there is a detection, or it may execute a process to check whether there is a detection but not execute a process (such as an alert) based on the detection). Therefore, even after the external terminal board output confirmation mode is entered, an abnormality alert based on detection by the abnormality detection means during the external terminal board output confirmation mode may not be executed.

In addition, when the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible, if the right game board 5AR is disconnected during operation check mode and an abnormality is detected by an abnormality detection means (e.g., a sensor or switch such as a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball out detection sensor 574, or a door frame opening switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), the display device 1600 will notify both the unconnected state with no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR and the fact that an abnormality has been detected by the abnormality detection means during operation check mode. On the other hand, the various speakers and the various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) may not notify that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR and that there has been detection by the abnormality detection means, and when the operation check mode ends and the game mode is entered, notifications of detection by the abnormality detection means in the various speakers and door frame units may be given priority over notifications of there being no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR and that there is no connection.

In the above example, if the "first confirmation mode transition condition" is met within a predetermined period of time after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 starts, the mode is controlled to transition to the external terminal board output confirmation mode, and if the "second confirmation mode transition condition" is met within a predetermined period of time after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 starts, the mode is controlled to transition to the operation confirmation mode. However, for example, it is also possible to control the mode to transition to the external terminal board output confirmation mode if the "first confirmation mode transition condition" is met within a predetermined period of time after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 starts, such as during standby (demo) when the function display unit 1400 has not displayed the changing special symbols for a predetermined period of time, and to control the mode to transition to the operation confirmation mode if the "second confirmation mode transition condition" is met within a predetermined period of time after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 starts.

In addition, in the above example, a new operation confirmation switch 1310j was provided, and the "first confirmation mode transition condition" and "second confirmation mode transition condition" required the operation of the operation confirmation switch 1310j. However, the operation confirmation switch 1310j may not be provided, and the RAM clear switch 1310f may be used instead. In this case, the RAM clear switch 1310f may be placed on the main control board 1310, or on the dispensing control board 633 or power supply board 630. Furthermore, if the operation confirmation switch 1310j is not provided and is configured to be replaced by the RAM clear switch 1310f, the ``condition for allowing setting value change'' and the ``condition for transitioning to the first confirmation mode'' are the same condition, and the ``condition for executing the process (step S38) of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area'' and the ``condition for transitioning to the second confirmation mode'' are the same condition.In this case, when the setting change process is executed, the external terminal board output confirmation mode may also be executed, and when the process (step S38) of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area is executed, the operation confirmation mode may also be executed. Furthermore, in this case, the same control as the example of behavior when changing the setting value in a state where the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side gaming board 5AL, such as when the combination of the divided gaming boards 5A is incompatible or when there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming board 5AR and a malfunction such as a short circuit or break in the transmission path for transmitting various signals, may be executed in the external terminal board output confirmation mode, and the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area after the setting change process (step S38) and the same control as the example of behavior when checking operation at power-on may be executed in the operation confirmation mode.

Furthermore, the output signals, light emission modes, display modes, sound output modes, etc. shown in the above-described multiple embodiments are merely examples, and the output signals, light emission modes, display modes, sound output modes, etc. are not limited to those described above as long as they do not deviate from the technical concept of the present invention (for example, the output period, output timing, etc. are similar). For example, while the above-described example shows an output confirmation signal being output when the external terminal board output confirmation mode is initiated, other signals may also be output. For example, if the external terminal board output confirmation mode is also executed when a setting change process is executed, a signal indicating that the setting change process has been executed may be output.

[Summary 1]
a game frame side component having an outer frame (e.g., outer frame 2), a main body frame (e.g., main body frame 4) provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame (e.g., door frame 3) provided on the main body frame so as to be openable and closable;
A game board side component (for example, a divided game board 5A) that is detachably provided on the game frame side component;
A mode output means capable of outputting a predetermined mode (for example, a combination of any one or more (may be all) of various speakers, performance display devices 1600, various LEDs, etc.);
A mode control means (e.g., a peripheral control IC 1510a) for controlling the mode output means;
a first operating means (for example, an operation confirmation switch 1310j) provided on the rear side of the gaming machine and inoperable by a player;
A second operating means (for example, a performance operating section 301 of the performance operating unit 300, a volume control switch, a light intensity control switch, etc.) that is provided on the front side of the gaming machine and can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising:
The device further includes a special state generating means (a portion that executes control of the operation check mode by the peripheral control IC 1510a) capable of generating a predetermined special state in response to a special operation on the first operating means,
The game board side component has a first game board side component (e.g., a left game board 5AL) and a second game board side component (e.g., a right game board 5AR) that are individually fixed to the game frame side component,
The mode control means
When the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, the mode output means can output a notification mode,
outputting a special mode in response to the second operating means being operated during the special state;
When the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected during the special state, the mode output means suppresses and outputs the notification mode.
It is characterized by:
By configuring in this manner, it is possible to check whether or not the operation of the second operating means is valid during a special state, and it is possible to determine that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected without interfering with the work of checking whether or not the operation of the second operating means is valid, so that the game can be played without any problems, preventing a decline in interest in the game and preventing any disadvantage to the player or the game parlor.

The mode control means may also be capable of outputting the special mode (such as a special sound from various speakers, a special mode of the performance display device 1600, or changing the light color of various LEDs) only during the special state. By configuring it in this way, it becomes easy to determine that the operation of the second operating means is valid when a special mode is output during a special state. In other words, since the special mode can be found without being confused with other modes executed during variable performances, etc., it becomes easy to determine that the operation of the second operating means is valid.

The mode output means may also include a display means (e.g., the effect display device 1600) and a sound output means (e.g., various speakers) or a light-emitting means (e.g., various LEDs), and when the first game board component and the second game board component are not electrically connected during the special state, the display means may display a notification mode, while the sound output means and light-emitting means may output a special mode without outputting a notification mode. This configuration allows the various sound output means and light-emitting means that would interfere with the confirmation work in a special state to output a special mode without outputting a notification mode, and only the display means that does not interfere with the confirmation work in a special state to display a notification mode, thereby reducing errors in the confirmation work.

The special state may also be configured to end automatically (without any special operation) after a certain period of time has elapsed. This configuration eliminates the need for unnecessary operations such as ending the special state, reducing the effort required for confirmation work in gaming centers with multiple gaming machines and shortening the time required for confirmation work.

[Summary 2]
a game frame side component having an outer frame (e.g., outer frame 2), a main body frame (e.g., main body frame 4) provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame (e.g., door frame 3) provided on the main body frame so as to be openable and closable;
A game board side component (for example, a divided game board 5A) that is detachably provided on the game frame side component;
a light-emitting unit (e.g., various LEDs) capable of emitting light in a predetermined light-emitting mode;
a light emission control means (e.g., a peripheral control IC 1510a) for controlling the light emission of the light emitting unit;
A special light-emitting state generating means (for example, a part that controls the operation check mode using the peripheral control IC 1510a) that can generate a special light-emitting state based on a predetermined special operation;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game board side component has a first game board side component (e.g., a left game board 5AL) and a second game board side component (e.g., a right game board 5AR) that are individually fixed to the game frame side component,
The light emission control means
When the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, the light emitting unit can be made to emit light in an alert light emitting mode (for example, a minor abnormality alert light emitting mode),
During the special light-emitting state, the light-emitting unit emits light in a special mode (for example, an operation confirmation light-emitting mode),
During the special light-emitting state, even if the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, the light-emitting unit can be made to emit light in the special mode without being made to emit light in the notification light-emitting mode.
It is characterized by:
By configuring it in this way, it is possible to check whether the light emitting section can light up normally during the special light emitting state, so that the game can be played without any problems and a decline in interest in the game can be prevented.

The light emission control means may also be capable of emitting light in the special mode only during the special light emission state. By configuring it in this way, it becomes easy to determine that the light emission unit can light up normally when it emits light in the special mode during the special light emission state. In other words, since the special mode can be found without being confused with other light emission modes executed during variable effects, etc., it becomes easy to determine that the light emission unit can light up normally.

The device may also include a display means (e.g., effect display device 1600), and if the first game board component and the second game board component are not electrically connected during the special light-emitting state, the display means may display a notification mode, and the light-emitting unit may emit light in the notification light-emitting mode after the special light-emitting state is entered. This configuration allows the light-emitting unit that would interfere with the confirmation process during the special light-emitting state to emit light in a special mode without emitting light in the notification light-emitting mode, and only displays the notification mode on the display means that does not interfere with the confirmation process during the special light-emitting state, thereby reducing errors in the confirmation process. Furthermore, after the special light-emitting state, in addition to displaying the notification mode on the display means, the light-emitting unit may emit light in the notification light-emitting mode, making it easy to recognize that the first game board component and the second game board component are not electrically connected.

The special light-emitting state may also be configured to end automatically (without any special operation) after a certain period of time has elapsed. This configuration eliminates the need for unnecessary operations such as ending the special light-emitting state, reducing the effort required for confirmation work in gaming parlors where multiple pachinko machines 1 are installed and shortening the time required for confirmation work.

The pachinko machine 1 may also have an operation unit (operation confirmation switch 1310j) located on the rear side of the machine that can accept specified operations, and the special light-emitting state may be triggered in response to an operation on the operation unit. By configuring the machine in this way, the special light-emitting state can be triggered when an operation unit located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 that is difficult for a player to operate is operated, thereby preventing the special light-emitting state from being triggered unnecessarily.

[Summary 3]
a game frame side component having an outer frame (e.g., outer frame 2), a main body frame (e.g., main body frame 4) provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame (e.g., door frame 3) provided on the main body frame so as to be openable and closable;
A game board side component (for example, a divided game board 5A) that is detachably provided on the game frame side component;
a sound output unit (e.g., various speakers) capable of outputting a predetermined sound format;
a sound output control means (e.g., a peripheral control IC 1510a) for controlling the sound output of the sound output unit;
A special sound output state generating means (for example, a part that executes control of the operation check mode by the peripheral control IC 1510a) that can generate a special sound output state based on a predetermined special operation;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game board side component has a first game board side component (e.g., a left game board 5AL) and a second game board side component (e.g., a right game board 5AR) that are individually fixed to the game frame side component,
The sound output control means
When the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, the sound output unit can output a notification sound output mode (for example, a game board unconnection notification sound),
outputting a special sound (e.g., a special sound) from the sound output unit during the special sound output state;
During the special sound output state, even if the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, the special sound can be output without outputting the notification sound output mode from the sound output unit.
Features By configuring it in this way, it is possible to check whether the sound output unit is able to output sound normally during the special sound output state, so that the game can be played without any problems and a decline in interest in the game can be prevented.

The sound output control means may also be capable of outputting the special sound only during the special sound output state. This configuration makes it easy to determine that the sound output unit is capable of normal sound output when a special sound is output during the special sound output state. In other words, the special sound can be distinguished without being confused with other sound output modes executed during variable effects, etc., making it easy to determine that the sound output unit is capable of normal sound output.

The device may also be provided with a display means (e.g., effect display device 1600), and if the first game board component and the second game board component are not electrically connected during the special sound output state, the display means may display an alert mode, and the sound output unit may output an alert sound output mode after the special sound output state is entered. This configuration allows the sound output unit's output, which would interfere with the confirmation process during the special sound output state, to be output as a special sound without being output in the alert sound output mode, and only the alert mode is displayed on the display means that does not interfere with the confirmation process during the special sound output state, thereby reducing errors in the confirmation process. Furthermore, after the special sound output state is entered, the display means not only displays the alert mode, but also causes the sound output unit to output in the alert sound output mode, making it easy to recognize that the first game board component and the second game board component are not electrically connected.

The special sound output state may also be configured to end automatically (without any special operation) after a certain period of time has elapsed. This configuration eliminates the need for unnecessary operations such as ending the special sound output state, reducing the effort required for confirmation work in gaming parlors where multiple pachinko machines 1 are installed and shortening the time required for confirmation work.

The pachinko machine 1 may also have an operation unit (operation confirmation switch 1310j) located on the rear side of the machine that can accept specified operations, and the special sound output state may be triggered in response to an operation on the operation unit. By configuring the machine in this way, the special sound output state can be triggered when an operation unit located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 that is difficult for a player to operate is operated, thereby preventing the special sound output state from being triggered unnecessarily.

[Summary 4]
a game frame side component having an outer frame (e.g., outer frame 2), a main body frame (e.g., main body frame 4) provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame (e.g., door frame 3) provided on the main body frame so as to be openable and closable;
A game board side component (for example, a divided game board 5A) that is detachably provided on the game frame side component;
A movable part that can operate in a predetermined operating mode (for example, a movable body provided on the left gaming board 5AL (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left gaming board 5AL of the divided gaming board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear-front-lower performance unit 3160, etc.)),
A movable control means for controlling the movable part (for example, a part for controlling the movable body provided on the left game board 5AL of the peripheral control IC 1510a),
a light-emitting unit (e.g., various LEDs) capable of emitting light in a predetermined light-emitting mode;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission of the light emitting unit (for example, a part for controlling the light emission of various LEDs of the peripheral control IC 1510a),
A special operating state generating means (for example, a part that executes control of the operation check mode by the peripheral control IC 1510a) that can generate a special operating state based on a predetermined special operation;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game board side component has a first game board side component (e.g., a left game board 5AL) and a second game board side component (e.g., a right game board 5AR) that are individually fixed to the game frame side component,
The light emission control means
When the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, the light emitting unit can be made to emit light in an alert light emitting mode (for example, a minor abnormality alert light emitting mode),
The movable control means is
During the special movable state, the movable unit is operated in a special movable mode (for example, an operation confirmation operation mode),
During the special movable state, even if the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, the light emitting unit is not caused to emit light in the notification light emitting mode.
It is characterized by:
By configuring it in this way, it is possible to check whether the movable part is able to move normally during the special movable state, so that the game can be played without any problems and a decline in interest in the game can be prevented.

Furthermore, the movement control means may be capable of causing the moving part to operate in a special moving mode only during the special moving state. By configuring it in this way, it becomes easy to determine that the moving part is able to move normally when it operates in a special moving mode during the special moving state. In other words, since the special moving mode can be found without being confused with other moving modes executed during a variation performance, etc., it becomes easy to determine that the moving part is able to move normally.

The device may also be provided with a display means (e.g., performance display device 1600), and if the first game board component and the second game board component are not electrically connected during the special movement state, the display means may display a notification mode, and the light-emitting unit may emit light in the notification light-emitting mode after the special movement state is entered. This configuration prevents the light-emitting unit from emitting light in the notification light-emitting mode that would interfere with the confirmation process during the special movement state. Instead, the display means only displays the notification mode in a way that does not interfere with the confirmation process during the special movement state, and the light-emitting unit emits light in the notification light-emitting mode after the special movement state is entered. This reduces mistakes in the confirmation process, and after the special movement state, in addition to displaying the notification mode on the display means, the light-emitting unit emits light in the notification light-emitting mode, making it easy to recognize that the first game board component and the second game board component are not electrically connected.

The special operating state may also be configured to end automatically (without any special operation) after a certain period of time has elapsed. This configuration eliminates the need for unnecessary operations such as terminating the special operating state, reducing the effort required for confirmation work in gaming parlors where multiple pachinko machines 1 are installed and shortening the time required for confirmation work.

The pachinko machine 1 may also have an operation unit (operation confirmation switch 1310j) located on the rear side of the machine that can accept specified operations, and the special movable state may be triggered in response to an operation on the operation unit. By configuring the machine in this way, the special movable state can be triggered when an operation unit located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 that is difficult for a player to operate is operated, thereby preventing the special movable state from being triggered unnecessarily.

[Summary 5]
a game frame side component having an outer frame (e.g., outer frame 2), a main body frame (e.g., main body frame 4) provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame (e.g., door frame 3) provided on the main body frame so as to be openable and closable;
A game board side component (for example, a divided game board 5A) that is detachably provided on the game frame side component;
An information output means capable of outputting information about the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine (for example, a part that outputs information about the gaming machine, such as the number of gaming balls B actually paid out by the payout control MPU, from an external terminal board 558 to a hall computer installed on the gaming hall side);
A special state generating means (for example, a part that executes control of the external terminal board output confirmation mode of the dispensing control MPU) that can generate a special state based on a predetermined special operation;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game board side component has a first game board side component (e.g., a left game board 5AL) and a second game board side component (e.g., a right game board 5AR) that are individually fixed to the game frame side component,
The information output means
It is possible to output special information (e.g., an output confirmation signal) during the special state;
At least during the special state, even if the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, the special information is output without outputting information indicating the non-connection to the outside of the gaming machine.
It is characterized by:
By configuring it in this manner, it is possible to confirm whether information about the gaming machine can be output normally from the information output means during a special state, and information about the gaming machine, such as fraudulent activities, can be collected by the hall computer, etc., thereby improving the security of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing the deterrent effect against fraudulent activities.

The information output means may be capable of outputting the special information only during the special state.
By configuring in this way, when special information is output during a special state, it becomes easy to determine whether the information output means is able to normally output information about the gaming machine. In other words, since the special information can be confirmed without being confused with other information executed during variable presentations, etc., it becomes easy to determine whether the information output means is able to normally output information about the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the information output means may be configured to continue outputting the special information for a predetermined period of time even after the special state has ended, without outputting the information indicating the disconnection to an external device. This configuration makes it possible to check the special information even if the special state has ended in a short period of time.

a launching means (e.g., a ball launching device 540) capable of launching game balls based on a predetermined operation;
Further provided is a firing control means (for example, a firing control unit 633b of the dispensing control board 633) for controlling the firing means,
The launch control means does not launch game balls even if the operation is performed during the special state.
It is characterized by:
By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent information about the gaming machine caused by the launch of a gaming ball during a special state from being output from the information output means, making it difficult to determine whether or not special information is being output.

An entrance (e.g., a first starting entrance 2002, a second starting entrance 2004, etc.) capable of receiving game balls;
A lottery means (a part that executes the winning determination process (step S305) of the main control MPU 1310a) that performs a lottery based on the reception of a game ball into the ball entrance;
and a game control means (a part that executes special symbol process processing of the main control MPU 1310a) that controls the progress of the game based on the lottery result of the lottery means.
The game control means stops the progress of the game during the special state regardless of whether a game ball is received in the ball entrance.
It is characterized by:
By configuring in this manner, the game does not proceed even if a game ball enters the ball entrance during a special state, so it is possible to prevent information different from special information from being output during a special state, and when special information is output, it becomes easy to determine that the information output means can normally output information about the game machine.

The pachinko machine 1 may also have an operation unit (operation confirmation switch 1310j) located on the rear side of the machine that can accept specified operations, and the special state may be triggered in response to an operation on the operation unit. By configuring the machine in this way, a special state can be triggered when an operation unit located on the rear side of the machine 1 that is difficult for a player to operate is operated, thereby preventing unnecessary special states from being triggered.

[Delay in the start of specific effects]
Next, a modified example will be described in which the start timing of a specific effect performed by the effect display device 1600 or the like can be delayed by a player's operation. Figure 291 is a time chart showing the start timing of a specific effect. Note that only the differences from the above embodiment will be explained below, and redundant explanations will not be provided.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 291(A), the pachinko machine 1 establishes the conditions for starting a special effect when a preset period T1 has elapsed after the start of the variable symbol display, and the special effect begins based on the establishment of these conditions. In other words, when a variable symbol pattern command instructing the start of variable symbol display is received, a timer is started to measure the period from the reception of the variable symbol pattern command. When this measured period reaches the preset period T1, it is determined that the conditions for starting the special effect have been established, and the special effect begins. For example, as shown in FIG. 291(A), after the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variable symbol pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to instruct the start of a variable symbol display, the effect display device 1600 begins a variable symbol display, such as a variable decorative symbol display (t1), and when the preset period T1 has elapsed (t2), the timer begins measuring and the special effect is executed for a set period T2.

The special effect ends after a set period of time T2 (t3). Alternatively, a timer can be started after the special effect is executed, and the special effect can be restarted when the measured period reaches a preset period of time T1. The timer is reset when the period of time T is reached, and restarts counting from its initial value (e.g., "0") after the special effect ends. If the timer can measure the period from when counting begins until it is interrupted individually, the timer value can be added cumulatively without being reset each time it reaches the period of time T. The start condition for the special effect may be a single period of time T1 (where the period until the special effect begins is always constant (e.g., the special effect always begins after 10 seconds have elapsed)), or multiple periods of time (where the period until the special effect begins varies (e.g., a period of 5, 10, or 15 seconds can be selected and the special effect can begin after this determined period has elapsed, or multiple periods can be switched in a predetermined order so that the period until the special effect begins is not always constant)).

In addition, it is not limited to determining whether the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met based on the period of time that has elapsed since the variable pattern command was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, i.e., determining whether the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met by measuring the period of time that has elapsed since the variable pattern command was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 using a timer, but also includes the period from receiving the variable pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 until the start winning command is received (the timer value is reset based on the reception of the start winning command), the period until the handle touch sensor 192 detects contact by the player (the timer value is reset based on the detection of contact by the player by the handle touch sensor 192), The system may also be configured to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific performance are met based on any one or a combination of the following: the period until rotation is detected by the handle rotation detection sensor 189 (which resets the timer value based on the detection of rotation by the handle rotation detection sensor 189), the period until a contact operation of the contact operation section 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is detected (which resets the timer value based on the detection of a contact operation of the contact operation section 302 of the performance operation unit 300), the period until operation of the volume adjustment button 227 is detected (which resets the timer value based on the detection of operation of the volume adjustment button 227), the period until operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228 is detected (which resets the timer value based on the detection of operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228), etc. In other words, whether the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met may be determined based on whether the elapsed time since receiving the variation pattern command reaches T1, or/and whether the start gate entry command is received before the elapsed time reaches T1, whether the handle touch sensor 192 detects contact by the player, whether the handle rotation detection sensor 189 detects rotation, whether the touch operation of the touch operation section 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is detected, whether the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 is detected, whether the operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228 is detected, etc.

If the system is configured to determine whether the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met based on any one or a combination of the following: the period from when the variation pattern command is received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 until the start gate winning command is received, the period until the handle touch sensor 192 detects contact by the player, and the period until the handle rotation detection sensor 189 detects rotation, it is possible to prevent so-called stop shots, which stop the release of game balls, and improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In this example, the determination of whether the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met is triggered by receiving a variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, this is not limiting; the determination of whether the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met may also be triggered by receiving a specific control command sent from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. For example, the determination of whether the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met may be based on the elapsed time since the start hole winning command was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (the elapsed time since the start hole winning command was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is measured by a timer), or the elapsed time since the stop display command was received (the elapsed time since the stop display command was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is measured by a timer). In this case, the start timing of the specific effect can be changed, preventing players from getting bored.

In this example, a dynamic effect is displayed in which a character or the like appears as a special effect, performing a predetermined action, and changing the character's appearance over time. For example, a special effect is performed in which a character or the like appears according to the likelihood of a jackpot, and the character that appears indicates the likelihood of a jackpot. However, because the special effect is performed relatively early after the start of the variable effect, if a player realizes early after the start of the variable effect that a jackpot will not occur or that the likelihood of a jackpot is low, they may lose interest in the variable effect currently in progress. Therefore, the pachinko machine in this example allows the player to delay the start of the special effect through player operation, making it difficult for the player to determine the likelihood of a jackpot early after the start of the variable effect, preventing them from losing interest in the variable effect at an early stage.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 291 (B), before the preset period T1 has elapsed since the start of the display of the changing patterns, that is, based on the reception of a changing pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the timer begins measuring, and if the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 performs a specific operation (for example, an operation to start a special period during which the start timing of the specific performance can be delayed (a pressing operation in this example)) before the period T1 has elapsed during which the conditions for starting a specific performance have been met (t2'), a special period during which the start timing of the specific performance can be delayed is started in accordance with the operation of the performance operation unit 300 (performance operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303)), and the specific performance will not start even after the preset period T1 has elapsed since the start of the display of the changing patterns (t2). Furthermore, when a specific operation is performed on the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the performance display device 1600 displays static text information (such as "Specific performance delayed") that is different from abnormality information (text information indicating the nature of the abnormality (such as "Door open error")). This makes it easy to recognize that the start timing of the specific performance is being delayed.

The special period ends (t2") in response to a special operation of the presentation operation unit 300 (for example, an operation to end the special period (end operation)), and when a preset period T1 has elapsed since the special period ended in response to the special operation of the presentation operation unit 300, the conditions for starting the specific presentation are met and the specific presentation begins (t3'). In other words, by starting the special period through player operation and ending the special period through the player's own operation, the start timing of the specific presentation can be delayed throughout the special period. The timer value is reset when the special period begins, and timer measurement is suspended during the special period, with measurement restarting from the initial value (for example, "0") after the special period ends. In this way, not only are specific presentations not executed during the special period, but whether or not the conditions for starting the specific presentation are met is also determined based on the period calculated from the end of the special period. In other words, the timer value is reset when the special period begins, and the timer does not start measurement until the special period ends, but instead restarts measurement from the initial value upon the end of the special period. This allows the start timing of a special effect to be delayed for a period of time determined by the player, allowing the special effect to begin at a time determined by the player himself, preventing the special effect from being executed at a time unintended by the player and reducing the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, if a special operation is performed on the effect operation unit 300 during the special period, that is, when the special period ends, the display of the above-mentioned text information (for example, "Special effect delayed") will cease. This makes it easy to recognize that the special period has ended.

During the special period, the special period will not end even if an operation means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 (for example, the touch operation unit 302, volume adjustment button 227, or light intensity adjustment button 228 of the presentation operation unit 300) is operated until the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is specially operated. This prevents the special period from ending at a time unintended by the player. This prevents the special period from ending at a time unintended by the player. Furthermore, during the special period, a predetermined display other than the variable effect may be executed. This allows players to easily recognize that the special period has begun, or in other words, that the start timing of a specific effect has been delayed. Furthermore, when a predetermined display is executed during the special period, the predetermined display may be changed by operating the presentation operation unit 300 while the predetermined display is being executed. For example, a character or the like may be displayed during the special period, and part of the character or the like may change depending on the operation of the presentation operation unit 300 or the like. This prevents players from becoming bored during the special period, when the start timing is extended.

In this example, the special period does not begin even if the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated after the variable pattern command is received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (starting the variable display of the pattern) and before the start conditions for the specific performance are met. However, when the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, the system determines whether the start conditions for the specific performance are met based on the period calculated from the end of operation of the touch operation unit 302, rather than the period calculated from the start of the variable display of the pattern (receiving the specific control command (in this example, the variable pattern command) from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310). In other words, if the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated after the variable pattern command is received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (starting the variable display of the pattern) and before the start conditions for the specific performance are met, the timer value is reset, but measurement by the timer is restarted from the initial value without being interrupted.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 291 (C), before the period T1 has elapsed since a specific control command (in this example, a variation pattern command) was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, that is, before the period T1 has elapsed since the specific control command (in this example, a variation pattern command) was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, measurement by the timer is started, and if the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated (t2') before the period T1 has elapsed, during which the condition for starting the specific performance is met, the specific performance is not executed even though the preset period T1 has elapsed since the specific control command (in this example, a variation pattern command) was received, and the specific performance is started (t3') based on the preset period T1 having elapsed since the operation of the touch operation unit 302 was stopped.

In this case, it becomes possible to delay the start timing of the specific effect within the preset period T1. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game by delaying the start timing of the specific effect even in cases where a player who is attempting to delay the start timing of the specific effect by performing a specific operation (in this example, a press operation) on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 accidentally operates the touch operation unit 302, or in cases where it is desired to delay the start timing of the specific effect for only a short period within the period T.

In addition to, or separate from, the touch operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300, it is also possible to determine whether the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met based on the period starting from when the handle touch sensor 192 no longer detects the player's touch, rather than the period starting from when the variable display of symbols begins when the handle touch sensor 192 detects the player's touch. In other words, the timer value may be reset based on the detection of the player's touch by the handle touch sensor 192, and measurement by the timer may be suspended while the handle touch sensor 192 detects the player's touch, and measurement may be restarted from the initial value when the handle touch sensor 192 no longer detects the player's touch. In this case, it is possible to prevent the so-called stop shot, which stops the release of game balls, and improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In addition, while the above example shows the special period being terminated by player operation, the special period may also be terminated if the presentation operation unit 300 is not operated for a certain period of time. In other words, in addition to the player operation described above as a condition for terminating the special period, a timer may be started from its initial value when the special period begins or when operation of the presentation operation unit 300 ends, whichever occurs later, and the establishment of the special period termination condition may be determined based on the period measured by the timer. In this case, the period for determining that the special period termination condition is met may be set to a period longer than the period T1 for determining that the specific presentation start condition is met. This makes it possible to delay the start timing of the specific presentation for a period longer than the period corresponding to the operation of an operation means other than the pressing operation unit 303 (e.g., the touch operation unit 302, the steering wheel touch sensor 192, etc.). As mentioned above, in this example, the conditions for starting the special effect are met and the special effect begins when a preset period T1 has elapsed since the end of the special period. Therefore, even if the special period ends because an end condition other than that imposed by the player's operation is met, such as the period calculated from the later of when the special period started or when the operation of the effect operation unit 300 ended reaching a preset period, the special effect will not begin immediately. Therefore, although the start timing of the special effect can be roughly determined, it is difficult to pinpoint the exact timing, which can increase interest in the execution of the special effect.

In addition to the player operations described above as conditions for ending the special period, the special period may be ended when the handle touch sensor 192 detects contact or when a ball is detected entering one of the ball entry ports (for example, all or specific ball entry ports (for example, first start port 2002 and second start port 2004) among the general entry port 2001, first start port 2002, gate 2003, second start port 2004, and large entry port 2005)), thereby satisfying the conditions for ending the special period and restarting the timer from the initial value. In this case, no operation is required to end the special period, which can be done to avoid inconvenience to players and encourage participation in games, thereby preventing a decline in the utilization rate of gaming machines.

Furthermore, if a specific operation is performed on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 while a specific effect is being executed, the currently executing specific effect may be terminated. In this case, a special period may be started after the specific effect has ended (the timer value may be reset based on the specific operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and measurement by the timer may be suspended until the special period has ended), or the special period may not be executed after the specific effect has ended.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 292 (A), when a preset period T1 has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the symbols, a special effect begins (t2). Then, if a special operation is performed on the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 while the special effect is being executed (t3'), the special effect being executed may be terminated even if it is in the middle of being executed. In other words, if a special operation is performed on the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 before all of the effects preset as special effects have been executed, the special effect being executed may be terminated midway.

In this case, if a special effect starts without the player having performed a specific operation (a press in this example) on the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the player can end the special effect simply by performing a specific operation (a press in this example) on the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. Furthermore, if the special period ends because an end condition other than a player operation is met, such as the period calculated from the start of the special period or the end of the operation of the effect operation unit 300, whichever is later, reaching a predetermined period, even if the special effect starts at a timing not intended by the player, the player can end the special effect simply by performing a specific operation (a press in this example) on the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, eliminating any inconvenience to the player.

In addition to the above, a specific effect may also be terminated when one or any combination of the following is detected: when contact by the player is detected by the handle touch sensor 192; when rotation is detected by the handle rotation detection sensor 189; when a contact operation is detected on the contact operation section 302 of the effect operation unit 300; when operation of the volume adjustment button 227 is detected; when operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228 is detected; when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated to change the volume; when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated to change the light intensity (brightness). If the specific effect is configured to end when the handle touch sensor 192 detects contact by the player or when the handle rotation detection sensor 189 detects rotation, the specific effect can be ended simply by touching or rotating the handle 195 to play the game without any special operation, thereby preventing inconvenience to the player. If the specific effect is configured to end when a contact operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is detected, or when operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is detected, the specific effect can be ended with the simple operation of operating the contact operation unit 302, volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228, which will encourage players to play and prevent a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, if a special effect is to be started after the special period ends when the conditions for starting the special effect are met, it may be possible to start from the first effect of the special effect, rather than from the effect where the special effect was interrupted. In other words, when the conditions for starting a special effect are met, the special effect may always be executed from the beginning. In this case, the entire content of the special effect will be executed regardless of when the special effect was interrupted, making it possible to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot.

Also, as shown in Figure 292 (B), when a preset period T1 has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the symbols, a special effect begins (t2). Then, if a specific operation is performed on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 while the special effect is being executed (t3'), the special effect being executed may be terminated and a special period may be started even if the special effect is in the middle of being executed. In other words, if a specific operation is performed on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 before all of the effects preset as special effects have been executed, the special effect being executed may be terminated midway and the special period may be started.

In this case, if a specific effect starts without the player performing a specific operation (a press operation in this example) on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the player can end the specific effect and start the special period simply by performing a specific operation (a press operation in this example) on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, allowing the special period to be executed without causing inconvenience to the player. The start timing of the specific effect can be delayed for a period determined by the player, allowing the specific effect to start at a timing determined by the player. Furthermore, if the special period ends based on the establishment of an end condition different from player operation, such as the period calculated from the start of the special period or the end of operation of the effect operation unit 300, whichever is later, reaching a predetermined period, even if the specific effect starts at a timing not intended by the player, the player can end the specific effect and start the special period simply by performing a specific operation (a press operation in this example) on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, allowing the special period to be executed and the start timing of the specific effect to be delayed without causing inconvenience to the player.

In addition, if the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is subjected to a specific operation (pressing operation in this example) intermittently, the specific performance may not be started, or even if the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is subjected to a specific operation (pressing operation in this example) intermittently, the special period may be started at the timing when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is subjected to a specific operation (pressing operation in this example), and the special period may be ended when a certain period has elapsed since the start of the special period (when a certain period has elapsed since the pressing operation unit 303 was subjected to a specific operation (pressing operation in this example)), allowing the specific performance to be started. In other words, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently operated in a specific manner (pressing in this example), the timer value may be reset and timer measurement may be suspended until the specific operation (pressing in this example) is completed. Alternatively, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently operated in a specific manner (pressing in this example), the timer value may be reset, but timer measurement may be resumed from the initial value without being suspended. In a configuration in which a specific performance is not started when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently operated in a specific manner (pressing in this example), the special period may be started when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner (pressing in this example), the special period may be ended by performing a special operation after the specific operation (pressing in this example) of the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is completed, and the start conditions for the specific performance may be determined based on the period calculated from the end of the special period.

Furthermore, in addition to or separately from the above, a specific performance may not be started when a special operation means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated intermittently, or a specific performance may be started when a certain period of time has passed since the operation of the special operation means began, even when a special operation means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated intermittently. In other words, the timer value may be reset when a special operation means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, and if the operation is performed intermittently, the timer value may be reset when a special operation means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, but even if the operation is performed intermittently, the timer may measure the elapsed period from when the operation was first performed without resetting the timer value or interrupting the timer measurement.

If the system is configured so that a specific performance will not start when a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated intermittently, it may be determined whether or not the conditions for starting the specific performance are met based on the period of time calculated from when the operation of the special operating means is stopped. Alternatively, if the system is configured so that a specific performance will start even when a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated intermittently, it may be determined whether or not the conditions for starting the specific performance are met based on the period of time calculated from when operation of the special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is started. In other words, when a special operation means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, the timer value may be reset, and timer measurement may be suspended for the period during which the operation continues, with the timer measuring the period that has elapsed since the operation ended to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific performance have been met; alternatively, when a special operation means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, the timer value may be reset, but even if the operation continues, the timer value may not be reset or measurement may not be suspended, and the timer may measure the period that has elapsed since the operation was first performed to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific performance have been met.

In addition, the special operation means may be provided with multiple special operation means, for example, a configuration may be provided with a first special operation means and a second special operation means, and the specific effect may not be started when the first special operation means is operated intermittently, while the specific effect may be started even when the second special operation means is operated intermittently, or the specific effect may not be started when either the first special operation means or the second special operation means is operated intermittently, or the specific effect may be started even when either the first special operation means or the second special operation means is operated intermittently. In other words, when the first special operation means is operated, the timer value may be reset, and timer measurement may be suspended for the period during which the operation is continuing, and the timer may measure the period of time that has passed since the operation was completed, to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met; on the other hand, when the second special operation means is operated, the timer value may be reset, but even if the operation is continuing, the timer may not reset the timer value or suspend measurement, and the timer may measure the period of time that has passed since the operation was first performed, to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met; when either the first special operation means or the second special operation means is operated, the timer value may be reset, and timer measurement may be suspended for the period during which the operation is continuing, and the timer may measure the period of time that has passed since the operation was completed, to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met; or when either the first special operation means or the second special operation means is operated, the timer value may be reset, but even if the operation is continuing, the timer may not reset the timer value or suspend measurement, and the timer may measure the period of time that has passed since the operation was first performed, to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met.

Furthermore, in addition to or separately from the above, when a non-special operation means different from the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 and the special operation means described above is operated, the start timing of the specific performance may be started even before a preset period T has elapsed since the non-special operation means was operated, without delaying the start timing of the specific performance, regardless of whether the operation is intermittent or not. In other words, even if a non-special operation means is operated, the timer may continue measuring without resetting the value. In this way, the device may be equipped with one or any combination (or all) of a specific operation means (in this example, the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300) that can delay the start timing of at least the specific performance for a first period, a special operation means that can delay the start timing of the specific performance for a second period shorter than the first period, and a non-special operation means that cannot delay the start timing of the specific performance.

The special operation means may be any one or any combination of the handle 195 (handle touch sensor 192, handle rotation detection sensor 189), the touch operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300, the volume adjustment button 227, the light intensity adjustment button 228, etc. Furthermore, if the system is configured to not start a specific effect when the handle 195 is touched and the handle touch sensor 192 intermittently detects the player's contact, or when the handle 195 is rotated and the handle rotation detection sensor 189 intermittently detects the rotation, then the specific effect can be prevented from starting simply by touching or rotating the handle 195 to play, without any special operation, which is not bothersome to the player. Furthermore, if the system is configured to not start a specific effect when the touch operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is intermittently touched, the volume adjustment button 227 is intermittently operated, or the light intensity adjustment button 228 is intermittently operated, then the specific effect can be prevented from starting with just a simple operation.

In addition, the possibility of delaying the start timing of a specific effect may be varied depending on whether or not there is a possibility of a jackpot. For example, in a non-win effect execution state where there is absolutely no possibility of a jackpot, it may be possible to delay the start timing of a specific effect by, for example, pressing the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, as described above. However, in a win effect execution state where there is a higher possibility of a jackpot (higher expectation of a jackpot) than in a non-win effect execution state, it may be impossible to delay the start timing of a specific effect by, for example, pressing the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent unnecessary effects (specific effects) that are unpleasant to the player from being executed immediately when there is absolutely no possibility of a jackpot, while it is possible to achieve the gameplay intended by the designer when there is a possibility of a jackpot.

In addition, when a special effect is being executed, whether or not the special effect being executed is terminated may be determined depending on whether or not there is a possibility of a jackpot. For example, in a non-winning effect execution state where there is absolutely no possibility of a jackpot, it may be possible to terminate the special effect mid-execution by performing a specific operation (in this example, a press operation) on the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 while the special effect is being executed, as described above. However, in a winning effect execution state where there is a higher possibility of a jackpot (higher expectation of a jackpot) than in a non-winning effect execution state, it may be impossible to terminate the special effect mid-execution by performing a specific operation (in this example, a press operation) on the press operation unit 300.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 292(C), when the variable symbol display begins in the win-possible effect execution state, which has a higher probability of a jackpot (higher jackpot expectation) than the non-win-possible effect execution state, a specific effect begins (t2) after a preset period T1 has elapsed (after a variable pattern command is received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310). Furthermore, if a specific operation is performed on the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 (t3') after the specific effect execution period T2 has elapsed (before the specific effect ends), unlike the non-win-possible effect execution state, the currently running specific effect will continue without ending. In other words, in the win-possible effect execution state, which has a higher probability of a jackpot (higher jackpot expectation) than the non-win-possible effect execution state, the currently running specific effect will not end until all of the effects preset as specific effects have been executed, even if the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated. By configuring it in this way, if there is absolutely no chance of a jackpot, unpleasant and unnecessary effects (specific effects) are immediately ended to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game, while if there is a chance of a jackpot, the game can be played as intended by the designer.

The examples of special effects and special periods (display of text information) described above are merely examples, and the specific effects and special periods are not limited to those described above. For example, the specific effects may be effects that are unrelated to the likelihood of a jackpot, such as introducing gaming machines or characters, or the special period may not be limited to displaying text information (such as "Special effect delayed") notifying that the start timing of the specific period has been delayed, but may also be controlled during the period for selecting a game mode or determining game-related settings.

Furthermore, the specific effects performed in the non-winning effect execution state and the specific effects performed in the winning effect execution state described above do not have to be identical, and some of the display, sound, light emission, etc. may be the same or similar, or the specific effects performed in the non-winning effect execution state may be different from the specific effects performed in the winning effect execution state. Furthermore, the specific effects do not have to be performed during periods when variable effects are being performed, but may be performed during periods when variable effects are not being performed. In this case, the establishment of the start conditions for the specific effect may be determined based on any one or combination of the following: the period from when a stop display command is received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to when a variable pattern command is received, the period from when a start winning command is received, the period from when a player's contact is detected by the handle touch sensor 192, the period from when rotation is detected by the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the period from when operation of the volume adjustment button 227 is detected, the period from when operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228 is detected, etc. In other words, regardless of whether a variable effect is being performed or not, any implementation is acceptable as long as it allows for delaying the start timing of a special effect, or allows for a special effect currently being performed to be terminated midway. Furthermore, the mode of the special effect performed when an abnormal state is occurring may be different from the mode of the special effect performed when an abnormal state is not occurring.

Furthermore, the special period that takes place in the non-winning effect execution state and the special period that takes place in the winning effect execution state do not have to be the same; some of the displays, sounds, lighting, etc. may be the same or similar, and the mode of the special period that takes place in the non-winning effect execution state may be different from the mode of the special period that takes place in the winning effect execution state. Furthermore, the special period does not have to take place during a period in which a variable effect is being performed, but may take place during a period in which a variable effect is not being performed. In other words, the implementation form is not important as long as it makes it possible to delay the start timing of the special period, regardless of whether a variable effect is being performed or not. Furthermore, the mode of the special period that takes place in the non-winning effect execution state may be different from the mode of the special period that takes place in the winning effect execution state.

In addition, the above examples show devices that delay the start timing of a specific effect or terminate a specific effect that is currently being executed, but when controlling the effect display device 1600, multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5, and multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame in a specific effect mode as a specific effect, it is also possible to delay the start timing of a specific effect or terminate (interrupt) part of a specific effect that is currently being executed for some of the effect display device 1600, multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5, and multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame.

Furthermore, in a gaming machine that has an auxiliary display device different from the effect display device 1600 in addition to the effect display device 1600, if the machine is configured to control the auxiliary display device in a specific effect mode in addition to the effect display device 1600 as a specific effect, the start timing of the specific effect may be delayed only for the auxiliary display device, or only the specific effect being executed on the auxiliary display device may be terminated.

In addition, if the performance display device 1600, the auxiliary display device, and some of the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame are configured to delay the start timing of a specific performance or to terminate (interrupt) part of a specific performance, when the specific performance for this part is started or resumed, it will be controlled by a specific performance mode that is synchronized with the specific performance mode being executed in the electronic components (the performance display device 1600, the auxiliary display device, and some of the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame) whose start timing has not been delayed or whose currently executing specific performance has not been terminated (interrupted). As a result, even if the start timing of a specific effect is delayed for some of the LEDs mounted on the effect display device 1600, the auxiliary display device, the various decorative boards on the game board 5, and the various decorative boards on the door frame, or if a specific effect that is currently being executed is only partially terminated (interrupted), it is possible to execute a unified specific effect across the effect display device 1600, the auxiliary display device, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board 5, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame.

[Specific effects when an abnormality occurs]
Next, a modified example will be described in which the start timing of the specific effect can be delayed by a predetermined operation when an abnormal state occurs. Figure 293 is a time chart showing an example of an abnormal state in which the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism. Note that only the differences from the above embodiment will be described below, and redundant explanations will not be provided.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 in this example detects abnormal states (a door open abnormal state in which the door frame open switch or main frame open switch detects that the door frame 3 has been opened relative to the main frame 4 or that the main frame 4 has been opened relative to the outer frame 2; a vibration detection abnormal state in which the vibration sensor detects vibration of the game board 5 for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds); a lower tray full abnormal state in which a detection signal is input from the full tank detection sensor 154; a ball out abnormal state in which a detection signal is input from the ball out detection sensor 574; a radio wave detection abnormal state in which the radio wave sensor detects unauthorized radio waves; a magnetic detection abnormal state in which the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetic fields acting illegally within the game area 5a; a detection signal is input from the second start port sensor 2401 when the second start port 2004 is not open, or a game is not in a big hit game state or a small hit game state. When an abnormal state (such as an illegal winning detection state in which a detection signal is input from the large winning slot sensor 2402) occurs, an abnormality is alerted by the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) (for example, abnormality information (text information indicating the nature of the abnormality (for example, "door open error")) is displayed in a static state in a part of the performance display device 1600, alert sounds are output from the various speakers, and the various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit abnormality alert light in an abnormality alert light mode (minor abnormality alert light mode, serious abnormality alert light mode), etc.).

The specific effect can also be executed when a specific abnormal condition among the multiple abnormal conditions mentioned above (for example, a door open abnormal condition or a magnetic detection abnormal condition, and may be all of the multiple abnormal conditions mentioned above, or one of the multiple abnormal conditions, or any combination of multiple abnormal conditions mentioned above) occurs.

In addition, the area of the effect display device 1600 where characters, etc. are displayed when a specific effect is executed and the area where abnormality information is displayed when an abnormal condition occurs overlap, and the abnormality information is displayed on a higher layer than the characters, etc. displayed in the specific effect (the abnormality information is displayed superimposed on the characters, etc. displayed in the specific effect). In other words, if an abnormal condition occurs while the above-mentioned specific effect is being executed on the effect display device 1600, the characters, etc. in the specific effect will be displayed as the background image for the abnormality information (such as an image displayed in the background of the pattern).

As mentioned above, the specific effects of this example display dynamic behaviors, such as displaying a character or the like on the effect display device 1600 and performing a predetermined action, changing the behavior of the character or the like over time. Therefore, if an abnormal condition occurs while the specific effect is being performed on the effect display device 1600 and abnormal information is displayed in a partial area of the effect display device 1600, the abnormal information may be difficult to see because the character or the like is displayed as a background image for the abnormal information, making it difficult to understand the content of the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this case, even if fraudulent activity is being committed, it may be difficult to identify the content of the fraudulent activity from the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600, or the player may not realize that a malfunction has occurred in the progress of the game, causing a disadvantage to the player. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, if abnormal information is displayed in a partial area of the effect display device 1600 while a specific effect is being performed, the specific effect can be terminated so that the abnormal information is easily visible, or the start timing of the specific effect can be delayed so that the abnormal information is not difficult to see when it is being displayed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 293 (A), before the preset period T1 has elapsed since the start of the display of the changing patterns (since the change pattern command has been received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), that is, before the time period T1 has elapsed in which the conditions for starting a specific effect are met, measurement by the timer is started based on the reception of the change pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and if an abnormal state occurs (t1') before the period T1 has elapsed in which the conditions for starting a specific effect are met, abnormal information is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The example shown in Figure 293 (A) shows an example of an abnormal state in which the magnetic sensor 1050 has detected a magnetic field acting improperly within the play area 5a, resulting in an abnormal magnetic detection state.

In addition, if the timer starts measuring before the predetermined period T1 has elapsed (before the specific effect starts) after the display of the changing patterns has begun (after the change pattern command has been received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) (before the specific effect starts), that is, if the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated specifically (t2') before the period T1 has elapsed, during which the conditions for starting the specific effect are met, a special period is started that allows the start timing of the specific effect to be delayed, and the specific effect will not start even if the predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the display of the changing patterns began (t2).

Furthermore, if the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner (for example, an operation (press operation) to start a special period that can delay the start timing of a specific performance) and then the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a special manner (for example, an operation to end a special period (end operation)) (t2"), the special period ends and the specific performance begins when a preset period T1 has elapsed since the special operation (t3'). When the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner, that is, when a special period begins, text information different from the abnormality information (for example, "Specific performance delayed") is displayed in a static state on the performance display device 1600, and if the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a special manner during the special period, that is, when the special period ends, the display of the above-mentioned text information ceases. This makes it easy to recognize that the start timing of a specific performance has been delayed or that the special period has ended.

Note that although the background image displayed on the effect display device 1600 during normal times (when no specific effect or reach effect is being executed, and when waiting for fluctuations to begin) does change in some areas, the changes are smaller than the display mode of specific effects. Also, of the background image displayed on the effect display device 1600 during normal times, the area around (contacting parts, boundary areas) the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600 is in a static mode with no change in appearance (or with an extremely small change in appearance). Therefore, when the background image for normal times is displayed, it is easier to visually recognize the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600 than when a specific effect is being executed as the background image.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example can delay the start timing of a special effect if an abnormal condition occurs, and the delay period can be appropriately set by the player or gaming facility staff depending on the timing of the special operation (end operation). In other words, even if an abnormal condition occurs, the timer value is reset when a special period begins, and timer measurement is suspended during the special period, and measurement resumes from the initial value (e.g., "0") after the special period ends. Not only are special effects not executed during the special period, but the fulfillment of the conditions for starting a special effect is also determined based on the period calculated from the end of the special period. In other words, even if an abnormal condition occurs, the timer value is reset when a special period begins, and timer measurement does not begin until the special period ends. Upon the end of the special period, timer measurement resumes from the initial value. This makes it possible to delay specific effects for a period of time determined by the player or gaming facility staff, and by displaying the normal background image as the background image for the abnormality information displayed on the effect display device 1600 when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality information is easier to see than when a special period is in progress, and the abnormality information displayed on the effect display device 1600 makes it easier to recognize the details of the abnormality. This makes it easy to recognize the occurrence of fraudulent activity, and makes it easy to recognize that an abnormality that is detrimental to the player has occurred, preventing the player from being disadvantaged.

Furthermore, during the special period, the special period will not end even if an operation means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 (for example, the touch operation unit 302, volume adjustment button 227, light intensity adjustment button 228, etc. of the presentation operation unit 300) is operated until the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is specially operated. This prevents the special period from ending at a time unintended by the player or gaming facility staff in an abnormal state, ensuring that abnormal information is recognized reliably. Furthermore, during the special period, a predetermined display other than the variable effect may be displayed. This makes it easy to recognize that the special period has begun, or in other words, that the start timing of a specific effect has been delayed. Furthermore, when a predetermined display is to be displayed during the special period, the predetermined display may be changed by operating the presentation operation unit 300, etc. while the predetermined display is being displayed. For example, a character, etc. may be displayed during the special period, and part of the character, etc. may change depending on the operation of the presentation operation unit 300, etc.

Even in an abnormal state, if the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated after the variable pattern command is received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (starting the variable display of the pattern) and before the start conditions for the specific performance are met, the special period will not start. However, when the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, the system determines whether the start conditions for the specific performance are met based on the period calculated from the end of operation of the touch operation unit 302, rather than the period calculated from the start of the variable display of the pattern (receiving the specific control command (in this example, the variable pattern command) from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310). In other words, even in an abnormal state, if the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated after the variable pattern command is received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (starting the variable display of the pattern) and before the start conditions for the specific performance are met, the timer value is reset, but measurement by the timer is restarted from the initial value without being interrupted.

Specifically, in an abnormal state, the timer starts measuring before the period T1 has elapsed since a specific control command (in this example, a fluctuation pattern command) was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, i.e., based on the reception of a specific control command (in this example, a fluctuation pattern command) from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310; if the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated before the period T1 has elapsed, at which point the conditions for starting a specific performance are met, the specific performance will not be executed even if the preset period T1 has elapsed since the specific control command (in this example, a fluctuation pattern command) was received; instead, the specific performance will start based on the preset period T1 having elapsed since the operation of the touch operation unit 302 ended.

In this case, it becomes possible to delay the start timing of the specific effect within the preset period T1. This makes it possible to delay the start timing of the specific effect even in cases where a player or gaming facility staff member is attempting to delay the start timing of the specific effect by performing a specific operation (in this example, a press operation) on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 in an abnormal state but accidentally operates the touch operation unit 302, or in cases where it is desired to delay the start timing of the specific effect for only a short period within the period T. This makes it easy to see the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the event of an abnormal state, and the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600 makes it easy to recognize the nature of the abnormal state.

In addition to, or separate from, the touch operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300, when the handle touch sensor 192 detects player contact in an abnormal state, it may be possible to determine whether the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met based on the period starting from when the handle touch sensor 192 no longer detects player contact, rather than the period starting from when the variable symbol display begins. In other words, the timer value may be reset based on the detection of player contact by the handle touch sensor 192 in an abnormal state, and measurement by the timer may be suspended during the period when the handle touch sensor 192 detects player contact, and measurement may be restarted from the initial value when the handle touch sensor 192 no longer detects player contact. In this case, even if an abnormal state occurs, simply playing normally by touching the handle touch sensor 192 can delay the start of the specific effect, making the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600 easier to see, and the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600 can easily identify the nature of the abnormal state.

In addition, while the above example shows a special period initiated under an abnormal condition being terminated by player operation, the special period may also be terminated if the effect operation unit 300 is not operated for a certain period of time. In other words, in addition to the above-mentioned player operation as a condition for terminating the special period, a timer may be started from an initial value when the special period is initiated or when operation of the effect operation unit 300 is terminated, whichever occurs later, and the establishment of the special period termination condition may be determined based on the period measured by the timer. In this case, the period for determining that the special period termination condition is met may be set to a period longer than the period T1 for determining that the start condition of a specific effect is met. This delays the start timing of the specific effect for a period longer than the period corresponding to the operation of an operation unit other than the pressing operation unit 303 (e.g., the touch operation unit 302 or the steering wheel touch sensor 192, etc.), making it easier to visually recognize the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600. The abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600 allows the user to easily recognize the nature of the abnormal condition. Even in an abnormal state, if a preset period T1 has elapsed since the end of the special period, the conditions for starting the specific effect are met and the specific effect will begin. Therefore, even if the special period ends because an end condition other than a special operation (end operation) by the player or gaming facility staff is met, such as the period calculated from the later of starting the special period in an abnormal state or ending operation of the effect operation unit 300 reaching a preset period, it is possible to prevent the specific effect from starting immediately. In the event of an abnormal state, the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600 until the specific effect begins is easily visible, and the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600 allows the content of the abnormal state to be easily recognized.

In addition to the player operations described above as conditions for ending the special period, the special period may be terminated when the handle touch sensor 192 detects contact or when a ball is detected entering one of the ball entry ports (for example, all or specific ball entry ports (for example, first starting port 2002 and second starting port 2004) among the general entry port 2001, first starting port 2002, gate 2003, second starting port 2004, and large entry port 2005)), thereby satisfying the conditions for ending the special period and restarting the timer from the initial value. In this case, no special operation is required to end a special period that was initiated in an abnormal state, and the player can resume play without any inconvenience after recognizing the nature of the abnormal state from the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Also, even in an abnormal state, if a specific operation is performed on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 while a specific effect is being executed, the currently executing specific effect may be terminated. In this case, the special period may be started after the specific effect has ended (the timer value may be reset based on the specific operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and measurement by the timer may be suspended until the special period has ended), or the special period may not be started after the specific effect has ended.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 293 (B), once a preset period T1 has elapsed since the start of the display of the changing symbols (since the change pattern command is received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), the special effect begins (t2). If an abnormal condition occurs during the execution of the special effect (t1'), abnormal information is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Furthermore, even in an abnormal state, if a specific operation is performed on the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 before the execution period T2 of the specific effect has elapsed (before the specific effect has ended) (t3'), the specific effect currently being executed may be terminated even if it is in the middle of being executed. In other words, if a specific operation is performed on the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 in an abnormal state before all of the effects previously set as specific effects have been executed, the specific effect currently being executed may be terminated midway.

In this case, if an abnormal condition occurs, the player or gaming store employee can terminate the specific effect and change the background image of the abnormal information from the dynamic appearance of the characters in the specific effect to the normal static appearance simply by operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. This makes it easy to see the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600 allows the player to easily recognize the details of the abnormal condition. Furthermore, if the special period ends unintended by the player or gaming store employee due to the establishment of an end condition different from the player's or gaming store employee's end operation, such as the period calculated from the later of when the special period began or when the operation of the effect operation unit 300 was terminated reaching a predetermined period, even if the specific effect begins after the end of the special period, the player or gaming store employee can terminate the specific effect and change the background image of the abnormal information from the dynamic appearance of the characters in the specific effect to the normal static appearance. This makes it easy to see the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600 allows the player to easily recognize the details of the abnormal condition.

In addition to the above, a specific effect may also be terminated when one or any combination of the following is detected: when contact by the player is detected by the handle touch sensor 192; when rotation is detected by the handle rotation detection sensor 189; when a contact operation is detected on the contact operation section 302 of the effect operation unit 300; when operation of the volume adjustment button 227 is detected; when operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228 is detected; when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated to change the volume; when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated to change the light intensity (brightness). When the specific effect is configured to end when the handle touch sensor 192 detects contact by the player or when the handle rotation detection sensor 189 detects rotation, the specific effect can be ended by simply touching the handle 195 to play or by rotating the handle 195 without any special operation, and even when an abnormal condition occurs, the specific effect can be ended by playing the game, and the background image of the abnormal information can be changed from the dynamic state of the characters in the specific effect to the normal static state, making it easy to see the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the content of the abnormal condition can be easily recognized from the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600. Furthermore, if the configuration is such that a specific performance is terminated when a touch operation of the touch operation section 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is detected, when operation of the volume adjustment button 227 is detected, or when operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228 is detected, then when an abnormal condition occurs, the specific performance can be terminated with a simple operation of operating the touch operation section 302, the volume adjustment button 227, or the light intensity adjustment button 228, and the background image of the abnormality information can be changed from the dynamic state of characters in the specific performance to the normal static state, making it easier to see the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600, and the content of the abnormal condition can be easily recognized from the abnormality information displayed on the performance display device 1600.

Furthermore, if a special effect is to be started after the special period has ended based on the fulfillment of the conditions for starting the special effect, it may be possible to start from the first effect of the special effect rather than from the effect where it was interrupted. In other words, if the conditions for starting a special effect are fulfilled, the special effect may always be executed from the beginning. In this case, the contents of the special effect can be executed in their entirety regardless of when it was interrupted, so the contents of the special effect (in this example, an indication of the likelihood of a jackpot) can be reliably recognized, and it is easier to obtain cooperation in ending the special effect when an abnormal state occurs, so that players who are focusing on the contents of the special effect can easily see the abnormal information.

In addition, even if a specific effect is terminated during execution of a specific effect due to a specific operation being performed on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 in an abnormal state, a special period may be initiated, and the start timing of the specific effect may be delayed for a period determined arbitrarily by the player or gaming store staff. In this case, even if a specific effect is terminated midway due to an abnormal state, the start timing of the specific effect may be delayed for a period determined arbitrarily by the player or gaming store staff, making the abnormality information displayed on the effect display device 1600 easier to see, and the abnormality information displayed on the effect display device 1600 allows the content of the abnormal state to be easily recognized.

In addition, in an abnormal state, if a specific operation (pressing operation in this example) is performed intermittently on the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the specific performance may not be started, or even if a specific operation (pressing operation in this example) is performed intermittently on the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the special period may be started at the timing when the specific operation (pressing operation in this example) is performed on the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, and the special period may be ended when a certain period has elapsed since the start of the special period (when a certain period has elapsed since the specific operation (pressing operation in this example) of the pressing operation unit 303 is performed), allowing the specific performance to be started. In other words, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently operated in a specific manner (a pressing operation in this example), the timer value may be reset and timer measurement may be suspended until the specific operation (a pressing operation in this example) is completed. Alternatively, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently operated in a specific manner (a pressing operation in this example), the timer value may be reset, but measurement may be resumed from the initial value without being suspended. In a configuration in which a specific performance is not started when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently operated in a specific manner (a pressing operation in this example), a special period may be started when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner (a pressing operation in this example), the special period may be ended by operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 in a special manner after the specific operation (a pressing operation in this example) is completed, and the start conditions for the specific performance may be determined based on the period calculated from the end of the special period.

Furthermore, in addition to or separately from the above, a specific performance may not be started if a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated intermittently in an abnormal state, or a specific performance may be started when a certain period of time has passed since the operation of the special operating means began, even if a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated intermittently in an abnormal state. In other words, the timer value may be reset when a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, and if the operation is performed intermittently, the timer value may be reset when a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, but even if the operation is performed intermittently, the timer may measure the elapsed period from when the operation was first performed without resetting the timer value or interrupting the timer measurement.

If the system is configured so that a specific performance will not start when a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is being operated intermittently in an abnormal state, it may be determined whether or not the conditions for starting the specific performance are met based on the period calculated from when the operation of the special operating means is stopped. Alternatively, if the system is configured so that a specific performance will start even when a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is being operated intermittently in an abnormal state, it may be determined whether or not the conditions for starting the specific performance are met based on the period calculated from when operation of the special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is started. In other words, when a special operation means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, the timer value may be reset, and timer measurement may be suspended for the period during which the operation continues, with the timer measuring the period that has elapsed since the operation ended to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific performance have been met; alternatively, when a special operation means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, the timer value may be reset, but even if the operation continues, the timer value may not be reset or measurement may not be suspended, and the timer may measure the period that has elapsed since the operation was first performed to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific performance have been met.

In addition, the special operation means may be provided with multiple special operation means, for example, a configuration may be provided with a first special operation means and a second special operation means, and a specific effect may not be started if the first special operation means is operated intermittently in an abnormal state, while a specific effect may be started even if the second special operation means is operated intermittently in an abnormal state, or a configuration may be provided in which a specific effect is not started if either the first special operation means or the second special operation means is operated intermittently in an abnormal state, or a specific effect may be started even if either the first special operation means or the second special operation means is operated intermittently in an abnormal state. That is, when the first special operating means is operated in an abnormal state, the value of the timer is reset, and the timer measurement is suspended for the period during which the operation continues, and the timer measures the period that has elapsed since the operation ended, and it is determined whether or not the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met; on the other hand, when the second special operating means is operated in an abnormal state, the value of the timer is reset, but even if the operation continues, the timer value is not reset or the timer measurement is not suspended, and the timer measures the period that has elapsed since the operation was first performed, and it is determined whether or not the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met; The timer value may be reset when either the first or second special operating means is operated, and timer measurement may be suspended for the duration of the operation, with the timer measuring the period elapsed since the operation ended to determine whether the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met. Alternatively, the timer value may be reset when either the first or second special operating means is operated in an abnormal state, but even if the operation continues, the timer value may not be reset or measurement may not be suspended, and the timer may measure the period elapsed since the operation was first performed to determine whether the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met.

Furthermore, in addition to or separately from the above, when a non-special operation means different from the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 and the special operation means described above is operated, the start timing of the specific performance may be started even before a preset period T has elapsed since the non-special operation means was operated, without delaying the start timing of the specific performance, regardless of whether the operation is intermittent or not. In other words, even if a non-special operation means is operated, the timer may continue measuring without resetting the value. In this way, the device may be equipped with one or any combination (or all) of a specific operation means (in this example, the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300) that can delay the start timing of at least the specific performance for a first period, a special operation means that can delay the start timing of the specific performance for a second period shorter than the first period, and a non-special operation means that cannot delay the start timing of the specific performance.

The special operating means may be any one or any combination of the handle 195 (handle touch sensor 192, handle rotation detection sensor 189), the touch operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300, the volume adjustment button 227, the light intensity adjustment button 228, etc. Furthermore, if a specific effect is configured to not start when the handle 195 is touched in an abnormal state and the handle touch sensor 192 intermittently detects the player's contact, or when the handle 195 is rotated in an abnormal state and the handle rotation detection sensor 189 intermittently detects the rotation, the specific effect can be prevented from starting simply by touching or rotating the handle 195 to play the game, without any special operation. A static background image is maintained to make the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600 easily visible, and the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600 allows the user to easily recognize the nature of the abnormal state. Furthermore, if the configuration is such that a specific performance is not started when the touch operation section 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is being touched intermittently, when the volume adjustment button 227 is being operated intermittently, or when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is being operated intermittently, then a simple operation can be used to prevent the specific performance from starting, and the static background image can be maintained to make the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600 easier to see, and the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600 can be easily seen, allowing the content of the abnormal condition to be easily recognized from the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600.

Furthermore, even in an abnormal state, the possibility of delaying the start timing of a specific effect may be varied depending on whether or not there is a possibility of a jackpot. For example, if an abnormal state occurs in a non-winning effect execution state where there is absolutely no possibility of a jackpot, the start timing of the specific effect may be delayed by performing a specific operation (in this example, a press operation) on the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, as described above. On the other hand, if an abnormal state occurs in a winning effect execution state where there is a higher possibility of a jackpot (higher expectation of a jackpot) than in a non-winning effect execution state, it may be impossible to delay the start timing of the specific effect by performing a specific operation (in this example, a press operation) on the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. This configuration prevents unnecessary effects (specific effects) that are unpleasant to the player from being immediately executed if an abnormal state occurs when there is absolutely no possibility of a jackpot, making it easier to visually recognize higher-priority abnormal information. On the other hand, if there is a possibility of a jackpot, the game can be played as intended by the designer, preventing any disadvantage to the player.

Furthermore, when a specific effect is being executed in an abnormal state, whether or not the specific effect being executed is terminated may be determined depending on whether or not there is a possibility of a jackpot. For example, if an abnormal state occurs in a non-winning effect execution state where there is absolutely no possibility of a jackpot, the specific effect can be terminated midway through execution by performing a specific operation (in this example, a press operation) on the press operation unit 300 while the specific effect is being executed, as described above. On the other hand, if an abnormal condition occurs in a winning effect execution state where there is a higher possibility of a jackpot (higher expectation of a jackpot) than in a non-winning effect execution state, it may be impossible to terminate the specific effect midway through execution by performing a specific operation (in this example, a press operation) on the press operation unit 300. With this configuration, if an abnormal state occurs in a non-winning effect execution state where there is absolutely no possibility of a jackpot, the unpleasant and unnecessary effect (specific effect) can be immediately terminated and higher-priority abnormal information can be notified to the player. On the other hand, if there is a possibility of a jackpot, the game can be played as intended by the designer.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 293 (C), once a preset period T1 has elapsed since the variable symbol display began in the winning effect execution state (since the variable pattern command was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), i.e., since the variable pattern command was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, measurement by the timer begins, and once the period T1 during which the start condition for the specific effect is met has elapsed, the specific effect will begin (t2). If an abnormal state occurs during the execution of the specific effect (t1'), abnormal information will be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Furthermore, if the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner (t3') before the execution period T2 of the specific effect has elapsed (before the specific effect has ended) in the win-possible effect execution state in an abnormal state, the specific effect that is being executed will continue without being terminated, unlike in the non-win-possible effect execution state. In other words, in the win-possible effect execution state, which has a higher possibility of a jackpot (higher expectation of a jackpot) than the non-win-possible effect execution state, the specific effect that is being executed will continue and the background image of the abnormality information will not change from a dynamic to a static mode until all of the effects that have been preset as specific effects have been executed, even if the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner.

The examples of special effects and special periods (display of text information) described above are merely examples, and the specific effects and special periods are not limited to those described above. For example, the specific effects may be effects that are unrelated to the likelihood of a jackpot, such as introducing gaming machines or characters, or the special period may not be limited to displaying text information (such as "Special effect delayed") notifying that the start timing of the specific period has been delayed, but may also be controlled during the period for selecting a game mode or determining game-related settings.

Furthermore, the specific effects performed in the non-winning effect execution state and the specific effects performed in the winning effect execution state described above do not have to be identical, and some of the display, sound, light emission, etc. may be the same or similar, or the specific effects performed in the non-winning effect execution state may be different from the specific effects performed in the winning effect execution state. Furthermore, the specific effects do not have to be performed during periods when variable effects are being performed, but may be performed during periods when variable effects are not being performed. In this case, the establishment of the start conditions for the specific effect may be determined based on any one or any combination of the following: the period from when a stop display command is received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to when a variable pattern command is received, the period until a start winning command is received, the period until a player's contact is detected by the handle touch sensor 192, the period until rotation is detected by the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the period until operation of the volume adjustment button 227 is detected, the period until operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228 is detected, etc. In other words, regardless of whether a variable effect is being performed or not, any implementation is acceptable as long as it makes it possible to delay the start timing of a specific effect during an abnormal state, or to end a specific effect that is being performed midway if it is being performed during an abnormal state. Furthermore, the mode of the special period performed in the non-winning effect execution state may be made different from the mode of the special period performed in the winning effect execution state. Furthermore, the mode of the specific effect performed during an abnormal state may be made different from the mode of the specific effect performed when no abnormal state is occurring.

Furthermore, the special period performed in the non-winning effect execution state and the special period performed in the winning effect execution state do not have to be the same; some of the displays, sounds, lighting, etc. may be the same or similar, and the mode of the special period performed in the non-winning effect execution state may be different from the mode of the special period performed in the winning effect execution state. Furthermore, the special period does not have to be performed during a period in which a variable effect is being performed, but may be performed during a period in which a variable effect is not being performed. In other words, any implementation is acceptable as long as it makes it possible to delay the start timing of the special period during an abnormal state, regardless of whether a variable effect is being performed or not. Furthermore, the mode of the special period performed in the non-winning effect execution state may be different from the mode of the special period performed in the winning effect execution state. Furthermore, the mode of the special period performed during an abnormal state may be different from the mode of the special period performed when an abnormal state is occurring.

In addition, the above examples show delays in the start timing of a specific effect during an abnormal state and termination of a specific effect that is currently being executed during an abnormal state. However, when the effect display device 1600, multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards on the gaming board 5, and multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards on the door frame are controlled in a specific effect mode as a specific effect, the start timing of a specific effect may be delayed during an abnormal state for some of the effect display device 1600, multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards on the gaming board 5, and multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards on the door frame, or a specific effect currently being executed may be terminated (interrupted) during an abnormal state. In addition, in a gaming machine that includes an auxiliary display device different from the effect display device 1600 in addition to the effect display device 1600, if the auxiliary display device is configured to be controlled in a specific effect mode in addition to the effect display device 1600 as a specific effect, the start timing of a specific effect only for the auxiliary display device may be delayed during an abnormal state, or only a specific effect currently being executed on the auxiliary display device may be terminated during an abnormal state.

In addition, as described above, during an abnormal state, an abnormality alert is provided by the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) (for example, abnormality information (text information indicating the nature of the abnormality (for example, "door open error")) is displayed in a static state in a certain area of the performance display device 1600, alert sounds are output from the various speakers, and the various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit abnormality alert light in an abnormality alert light-emitting mode (minor abnormality alert light-emitting mode, serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode), etc.). Furthermore, even if the start timing of a specific effect is delayed or a specific effect is terminated (interrupted) for some of the effect display device 1600, the auxiliary display device, the multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, and the multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame, priority is given to abnormality notification. In other words, when the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5 and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame are illuminated in the abnormality alert light-emitting mode, if the start timing of a specific effect is delayed, the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5 and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame will continue to emit the abnormality alert light-emitting mode for at least a predetermined period without executing the light-emitting mode of the specific effect at the time the specific effect is started, or when the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5 and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame are illuminated in the abnormality alert light-emitting mode, and when the specific effect is ended (interrupted), the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5 and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame will continue to emit the abnormality alert light-emitting mode for at least a predetermined period. However, if it is possible to delay or terminate (interrupt) a specific effect for electronic components that do not issue abnormality alerts or that only partially issue abnormality alerts among the effect display device 1600, the auxiliary display device, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame, when starting or resuming a specific effect, the specific effect may be controlled in the same manner as when the specific effect is not delayed or terminated (interrupted) (for example, a specific effect mode that is synchronized with the specific effect mode being executed by electronic components (the effect display device 1600, the auxiliary display device, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame) that have not delayed or terminated (interrupted) the specific effect in progress), or if there are no electronic components continuing the specific effect, the specific effect may be started from the beginning.

[Delay of specific effects to make text information easier to see]
Next, we will explain a modified example in which the start timing of a specific effect that displays a substantially single color in the display area of the effect display device 1600 can be delayed. Figure 294 is a time chart showing an example when a preview display is executed. Note that, below, we will only explain the parts that are different from the above embodiment, and will not provide a duplicate explanation.

In this example, specific effects are displayed in a whiteout mode, in which almost the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 is turned white, and in a blackout mode, in which almost the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 is turned black.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is capable of displaying text information such as numerical values and character dialogue in a portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600 to display a preview indicating the likelihood of a jackpot. The background image for the preview display may be displayed in a whiteout mode, in which the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 is white, or in a blackout mode, in which the entire display area is black during a specific effect. By displaying the background image for the preview display in a whiteout or blackout mode, which is an approximately single color, the text information in the preview display is easier to see.

However, because the preview display is displayed relatively early after the start of the variable effect, if the player realizes that a jackpot will not occur or that the jackpot expectation is low early after the start of the variable effect based on the jackpot expectation suggested by the preview display, there is a risk that the player will lose interest in the variable effect currently being performed. Therefore, in this example pachinko machine, the player can delay the start of the specific effect through operation, and by using a normal background image instead of a specific effect as the background image for the preview display, it becomes more difficult to see the text information in the preview display compared to when a specific effect is being performed as the background image for the preview display. This makes it difficult to understand the jackpot expectation early after the start of the variable effect, preventing the player from losing interest in the variable effect at an early stage.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 294(A), before the preset period T1 has elapsed since the start of the display of the changing patterns (since the change pattern command has been received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), i.e., based on the reception of the change pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the timer begins measuring; and if the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner (e.g., an operation to start a special period during which the start timing of the special performance can be delayed (a pressing operation in this example)) before the period T1 has elapsed during which the start timing of the special performance is met (t1'), a special period during which the start timing of the special performance can be delayed is started in accordance with the operation of the performance operation unit 300 (performance operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303)). Note that when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner, text information different from the preview display (e.g., "Special performance delayed") is displayed in a static state on the performance display device 1600. This makes it easy to recognize when the start timing of a specific effect is delayed.

In addition, if a specific operation is performed on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 (t2') before the predetermined period T1 has elapsed (before the specific effect starts) after the display of the changing patterns has begun (after the change pattern command has been received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), that is, before the period T1 has elapsed, during which the conditions for starting the specific effect are met, a special period is initiated that allows the start timing of the specific effect to be delayed, and the specific effect will not start even if the predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the display of the changing patterns began.

Specifically, in this example, as shown in FIG. 294(A), after the display of the changing patterns begins (after the change pattern command is received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), that is, after the timer starts measuring based on the reception of the change pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, a pre-set period T1 has elapsed, and a warning display is displayed on the effect display device 1610, and text information indicating the likelihood of a jackpot (for example, "30%, "0%, "50%, etc., or "Super Hot!", "Win Confirmed!", "Lose Confirmed...", etc.) is displayed in a static state (t2').

In addition, if the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner (t1') before the preset period T1 has elapsed since the start of the display of the changing patterns (after receiving a changing pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), i.e., before the start of a specific effect, a special period is initiated that allows the start timing of the specific effect to be delayed, and the specific effect will not start even if the preset period T1 has elapsed since the start of the display of the changing patterns.

Furthermore, as described above, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is specifically operated, that is, when the special period begins, text information different from the preview display (for example, "Specific performance delayed") is displayed in a static state in a portion of the display area of the performance display device 1600 (this may be different from the area where the text information as the preview display is displayed, or some of the areas may overlap), and if the performance operation unit 300 is specifically operated during the special period, that is, when the special period ends, the display of the above-mentioned text information ceases. This makes it easy to recognize that the start timing of the specific performance has been delayed or that the special period has ended.

Furthermore, if the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner (for example, an operation (pressing operation) to start a special period that can delay the start timing of a specific performance) and then the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a special manner (for example, an operation (ending operation) to end the special period) (t2''), the special period ends, and the specific performance begins when a preset period T1 has elapsed since the special operation (t3').

As described above, during special effects, a whiteout or blackout effect is displayed, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a generally uniform, single-color mode in which characters, scenery, etc. are not displayed. (If a reserved number is displayed on the effect display device 1600, this reserved number may be displayed during special effects, or if a corresponding decorative pattern smaller than the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600 is displayed on the periphery of the effect display device 1600, this corresponding decorative pattern may be displayed during special effects. In other words, it is sufficient that the area overlapping with the text information or the specified range including the text information is displayed in a generally uniform, single-color mode in which characters, scenery, etc. are not displayed.) Therefore, when used as a background image for text information displayed in a portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600 as a preview, only this text information is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a different color, making the text information easily visible. On the other hand, during normal times (when no special effects or reach effects are being executed, and when waiting for the start of a fluctuation), the background image displayed on the effect display device 1600 displays characters, scenery, etc. in various colors (multi-color mode). Additionally, the appearance of the text information displayed as a preview does not change between when a specific effect is being performed and during the special period. In other words, the image displayed in the background of the text information has a significant impact on the visibility of the text information. Therefore, by changing the background image of the text information between a state in which a substantially uniform single color is displayed and a state in which characters, scenery, etc. are displayed in various colors (multi-colored state) when a specific effect is being performed and when the special period begins after the specific effect has ended, the text information becomes more difficult to see during the special period than when a specific effect is displayed as the background image of the text information displayed in the preview during the specific effect.

In other words, for players who want to see the text information displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a preview indicating the likelihood of a jackpot, the text information can be easily recognized by executing a specific effect as a background image for the text information displayed on a portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600 as a preview without specifically operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. On the other hand, for players who do not want to see the text information displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a preview indicating the likelihood of a jackpot, the start timing of the specific effect can be delayed by specifically operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 before the start of the specific effect, preventing the specific effect from being executed as a background image for the text information displayed on a portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600 as a preview. Furthermore, the text information can be made more difficult to see than when a specific effect is being executed by displaying a normal background image as a background image for the text information displayed on a portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600 as a preview. This allows for games that suit the player's preferences and prevents a decline in interest in the game.

In this example, a whiteout or blackout mode is displayed across the entire display area of the performance display device 1600 as a specific effect, but it is sufficient that a substantially uniform single color is displayed around (contacting parts, boundaries) the text information displayed in at least a portion of the display area of the performance display device 1600, with no characters, scenery, or other features displayed; it is also possible for characters, scenery, or other features to be displayed in a color different from the whiteout or blackout mode in a portion of the performance display device 1600. Furthermore, the specific effect is not limited to only executing a whiteout or blackout mode, and as long as there is a period in which a whiteout or blackout mode is displayed as part of the specific effect, there may also be a period in which a mode other than the whiteout or blackout mode is displayed.

Furthermore, even during the special period in this example, the special period will not end if an operation means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 (for example, the touch operation unit 302, volume adjustment button 227, light intensity adjustment button 228, etc. of the presentation operation unit 300) is operated until the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is specially operated. This prevents the special period from ending at a time unintended by the player or gaming facility staff while the preview display is being executed, and ensures that the text information displayed as a preview display is difficult to see.

Furthermore, even during the special period in this example, if the touch operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated after the display of changing patterns has begun but before the conditions for starting the specific effect are met, it will be difficult to delay the specific effect for a period arbitrarily determined by the player, etc. However, whether or not the conditions for starting the specific effect have been met will be determined based on the period calculated from the end of operation of the touch operation unit 302, rather than the period calculated from the start of the display of changing patterns.

Specifically, if the touch operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated before the period T1 has elapsed since the variable pattern command was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, that is, before the conditions for starting a specific effect are met after the variable display of the symbols has begun, the specific effect will not be executed even if the preset period T1 has elapsed since the variable display of the symbols began, but will start based on the fact that the preset period T1 has elapsed since the operation of the touch operation unit 302 ended.

In this case, it becomes possible to delay the start timing of the specific effect within the preset period T1. This makes it possible to delay the start timing of the specific effect even in cases where a player, etc. who is attempting to delay the start timing of the specific effect by performing a specific operation (in this example, a press operation) on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, accidentally operates the touch operation unit 302, or in cases where it is desired to delay the start timing of the specific effect for only a short period within the period T, and when the preview display is executed, the normal background image is displayed, making the text information used as the preview display more difficult to see than when the specific effect is being executed.

In addition to, or separate from, the touch operation section 302 of the effect operation unit 300, it is also possible to determine whether the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met based on the period calculated from when the handle touch sensor 192 no longer detects the player's touch, rather than the period calculated from when the variable display of symbols begins when the handle touch sensor 192 detects the player's touch. In this case, simply performing normal play by touching the handle touch sensor 192 can delay the start timing of the specific effect, and when a preview display is executed, the normal background image can be displayed, making it difficult to see the text information used as a preview display.

In addition, while the above example shows the special period being terminated by a player operation, the special period may also be terminated if the presentation operation unit 300 is not operated for a certain period of time. In other words, in addition to the above-mentioned player operation as the condition for terminating the special period, the fulfillment of the special period termination condition may be determined based on the period calculated from the later of when the special period started or when operation of the presentation operation unit 300 ended. In this case, the period for determining that the special period termination condition is fulfilled may be set to a period longer than the period T1 for determining that the start condition of the specific presentation is fulfilled. This makes it possible to ensure that the specific presentation is not displayed as a background image when a preview display is executed by delaying the start timing of the specific presentation for a period longer than the period corresponding to the operation of an operation unit other than the pressing operation unit 303 (e.g., the touch operation unit 302 or the steering wheel touch sensor 192, etc.), thereby making it difficult to see the text information used as a preview display. Furthermore, when a preset period T1 has elapsed since the end of the special period, the conditions for starting the special effect are met and the special effect begins. Therefore, even if the special period ends because an end condition other than the player's special operation (end operation) is met, such as the period calculated from the later of starting the special period or ending operation of the effect operation unit 300 reaching a preset period, it is possible to prevent the special effect from starting immediately, and to reliably prevent the special effect from being displayed as a background image, making it difficult to see the text information used as a preview display.

In addition to the player's operation described above as a condition for ending the special period, the special period may be ended when the handle touch sensor 192 detects contact or when a ball enters one of the ball entry ports (for example, all or specific ball entry ports (for example, first start port 2002 and second start port 2004) among the general entry port 2001, first start port 2002, gate 2003, second start port 2004, and large entry port 2005)), thereby satisfying the condition for ending the special period and restarting the timer from the initial value. In this case, no special operation is required to end the special period, and the special period can be ended without causing any inconvenience to the player after the preview display has ended.

Furthermore, if a specific operation is performed on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 while a specific effect is being executed, the currently executing specific effect may be terminated. In this case, a special period may be started after the specific effect has ended (the timer value may be reset based on the specific operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and measurement by the timer may be suspended until the special period has ended), or the special period may not be started after the specific effect has ended.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 294 (B), when a preset period T1 has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display (since the variation pattern command has been received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), the special effect begins (t2). In addition, in this example, a preview display also begins when the special effect begins, and text information suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Then, if the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner (t3') before the execution period T2 of this specific effect has elapsed (before the specific effect has ended), the specific effect currently being executed may be terminated even if it is in the middle of being executed. In other words, if the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner before all of the effects previously set as specific effects have been executed, the specific effect currently being executed may be terminated in the middle, and the background image of the preview display may be changed from the specific effect to the normal background image.

In this case, when the preview display and the specific effect are being executed simultaneously, the player can terminate the specific effect by simply performing a specific operation on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, changing the background image of the preview display from a state in which a substantially uniform, single color is displayed, with no display of the characters, scenery, etc. in the specific effect, to a state in which the normal character, etc., is displayed in various colors. This makes it difficult to see the text information displayed as the preview display on the effect display device 1600 compared to when the specific effect is being executed. Furthermore, if the special period ends at a time unintended by the player, such as when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the later of the start of the special period or the end of the operation of the effect operation unit 300, the specific effect can be terminated by a specific operation by the player, even if the specific effect begins after the end of the special period, and the background image of the preview display can be changed from a state in which a substantially uniform, single color is displayed, with no display of the characters, scenery, etc. in the specific effect, to a state in which the normal character, etc., is displayed in various colors. This makes it difficult to see the text information displayed as the preview display on the effect display device 1600 compared to when the specific effect is being executed.

In addition to the above, a specific effect may also be terminated when one or any combination of the following is detected: when contact by the player is detected by the handle touch sensor 192; when rotation is detected by the handle rotation detection sensor 189; when a contact operation is detected on the contact operation section 302 of the effect operation unit 300; when operation of the volume adjustment button 227 is detected; when operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228 is detected; when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated to change the volume; when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated to change the light intensity (brightness). When the specific effect is configured to end when the handle touch sensor 192 detects contact by the player or when the handle rotation detection sensor 189 detects rotation, the specific effect can be ended by simply touching the handle 195 to play the game or by rotating the handle 195 without any special operation, and the background image of the preview display can be changed from a state in which a substantially uniform single color is displayed in which the aspects of characters, scenery, etc. in the specific effect are not displayed, to a state in which the aspects of characters, etc. in normal times are displayed in various colors. Therefore, it is possible to make the text information displayed as the preview display on the effect display device 1600 more difficult to see than when the specific effect is being executed, and the touch operation unit 30 of the effect operation unit 300 If the specific effect is configured to end when touch operation 2 is detected, when operation of volume adjustment button 227 is detected, or when operation of light intensity adjustment button 228 is detected, then if the preview display and the specific effect are being executed simultaneously, the specific effect can be ended with a simple operation of operating touch operation unit 302, volume adjustment button 227, or light intensity adjustment button 228, and the background image of the preview display can be changed from a state in which a substantially uniform single color is displayed that does not display the aspects of characters, scenery, etc. in the specific effect, to a state in which the aspects of characters, etc. in normal times are displayed in various colors, making it possible to make the text information displayed as a preview display on effect display device 1600 more difficult to see than when the specific effect is being executed.

Furthermore, if a special effect is to be started after the special period has ended based on the fulfillment of the conditions for starting the special effect, it may be possible to start from the first special effect, rather than from the effect where the special effect was interrupted. In other words, if the conditions for starting a special effect are met, the special effect may always be executed from the beginning. In this case, the contents of the special effect can be executed in their entirety regardless of when the special effect was interrupted, making it possible to achieve the effects of the special effect (such as attracting attention) as designed.

In addition, even if a specific effect is terminated based on a specific operation performed on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 while the specific effect is being executed, a special period may be initiated, and the start timing of the specific effect may be delayed for a period determined arbitrarily by the player, etc. In this case, even if the specific effect is terminated midway, the start timing of the specific effect may be delayed for a period determined arbitrarily by the player, etc., making it more difficult to see the text information displayed as a preview on the effect display device 1600 compared to when the specific effect is being executed, thereby ensuring that a game that suits the player's preferences can be played.

In addition, if the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is subjected to a specific operation (pressing operation in this example) intermittently, the specific performance may not be started, or even if the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is subjected to a specific operation (pressing operation in this example) intermittently, the special period may be started at the timing when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is subjected to a specific operation (pressing operation in this example), and the special period may be ended when a certain period has elapsed since the start of the special period (when a certain period has elapsed since the pressing operation unit 303 was subjected to a specific operation (pressing operation in this example)), allowing the specific performance to be started. In other words, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently operated in a specific manner (a pressing operation in this example), the timer value may be reset and timer measurement may be suspended until the specific operation (a pressing operation in this example) is completed. Alternatively, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently operated in a specific manner (a pressing operation in this example), the timer value may be reset, but measurement may be resumed from the initial value without being suspended. In a configuration in which a specific performance is not started when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently operated in a specific manner (a pressing operation in this example), a special period may be started when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner (a pressing operation in this example), the special period may be ended by operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 in a special manner after the specific operation (a pressing operation in this example) is completed, and the start conditions for the specific performance may be determined based on the period calculated from the end of the special period.

Furthermore, in addition to or separately from the above, when text information is displayed as a preview display, a specific performance may not be started when a special operation means other than the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently operated. Alternatively, when text information is displayed as a preview display and a special operation means other than the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently operated, a specific performance may be started when a certain period of time has passed since the operation of the special operation means began. In other words, when a special operation means other than the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, the timer value may be reset, and if the operation is performed intermittently, the timer may not start measuring. Alternatively, when a special operation means other than the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, the timer value may be reset, but even if the operation is performed intermittently, the timer may measure the elapsed period from when the operation was first performed without resetting the timer value or interrupting the timer measurement.

If the system is configured so that a specific performance will not start if a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated intermittently when text information is displayed as a preview display, it may be determined whether or not the conditions for starting the specific performance are met based on the period of time calculated from when operation of the special operating means is stopped.Alternatively, if the system is configured so that a specific performance will start even if a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated intermittently when text information is displayed as a preview display, it may be determined whether or not the conditions for starting the specific performance are met based on the period of time calculated from when operation of the special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is started. In other words, when a special operation means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, the timer value may be reset, and timer measurement may be suspended for the period during which the operation continues, with the timer measuring the period that has elapsed since the operation ended to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific performance have been met; alternatively, when a special operation means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, the timer value may be reset, but even if the operation continues, the timer value may not be reset or measurement may not be suspended, and the timer may measure the period that has elapsed since the operation was first performed to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific performance have been met.

The special operation means may also be provided with multiple special operation means. For example, a configuration may be provided with a first special operation means and a second special operation means, and a specific effect may not be started if the first special operation means is operated intermittently when text information is displayed as a preview display, while a specific effect may be started even if the second special operation means is operated intermittently when text information is displayed as a preview display. Alternatively, a specific effect may not be started if either the first special operation means or the second special operation means is operated intermittently when text information is displayed as a preview display. Alternatively, a specific effect may be started even if either the first special operation means or the second special operation means is operated intermittently when text information is displayed as a preview display. In other words, when the first special operation means is operated, the timer value may be reset, and timer measurement may be suspended for the period during which the operation is continuing, and the timer may measure the period of time that has passed since the operation was completed, to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met; on the other hand, when the second special operation means is operated, the timer value may be reset, but even if the operation is continuing, the timer may not reset the timer value or suspend measurement, and the timer may measure the period of time that has passed since the operation was first performed, to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met; when either the first special operation means or the second special operation means is operated, the timer value may be reset, and timer measurement may be suspended for the period during which the operation is continuing, and the timer may measure the period of time that has passed since the operation was completed, to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met; or when either the first special operation means or the second special operation means is operated, the timer value may be reset, but even if the operation is continuing, the timer may not reset the timer value or suspend measurement, and the timer may measure the period of time that has passed since the operation was first performed, to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met.

Furthermore, in addition to or separately from the above, when a non-special operation means different from the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 and the special operation means described above is operated, the start timing of the specific performance may be started even before a preset period T has elapsed since the non-special operation means was operated, without delaying the start timing of the specific performance, regardless of whether the operation is intermittent or not. In other words, even if a non-special operation means is operated, the timer may continue measuring without resetting the value. In this way, the device may be equipped with one or any combination (or all) of a specific operation means (in this example, the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300) that can delay the start timing of at least the specific performance for a first period, a special operation means that can delay the start timing of the specific performance for a second period shorter than the first period, and a non-special operation means that cannot delay the start timing of the specific performance.

The special operation means may be any one or any combination of the handle 195 (handle touch sensor 192, handle rotation detection sensor 189), the touch operation section 302 of the effect operation unit 300, the volume adjustment button 227, the light intensity adjustment button 228, etc. Furthermore, if the system is configured to prevent a specific effect from starting when text information is displayed as a preview and the player touches the handle 195 and the handle touch sensor 192 intermittently detects the player's contact, or when text information is displayed as a preview and the handle 195 is rotated and the handle rotation detection sensor 189 intermittently detects the rotation, then the specific effect can be prevented from starting simply by touching or rotating the handle 195 to play the game, without any special operation, and the text information as a preview can be made more difficult to see than when the specific effect is being executed. Furthermore, if a specific performance is configured not to start when the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is touched intermittently while text information is displayed as a preview, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated intermittently while text information is displayed as a preview, or when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated intermittently while text information is displayed as a preview, then a simple operation can be used to prevent the specific performance from starting, making the text information displayed as a preview more difficult to see than when the specific performance is being executed.

In addition, the possibility of delaying the start timing of a specific effect may be varied depending on whether or not there is a possibility of a jackpot. For example, when text information is displayed as a preview in a non-win effect execution state where there is absolutely no possibility of a jackpot, the start timing of the specific effect can be delayed by performing a specific operation (in this example, a press operation) on the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, as described above. On the other hand, when text information is displayed as a preview in a win effect execution state where there is a higher possibility of a jackpot (higher jackpot expectation) than in a non-win effect execution state, it may be impossible to delay the start timing of the specific effect by performing a specific operation (in this example, a press operation) on the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. By configuring it in this way, displaying text information as a preview when there is absolutely no possibility of a jackpot is an unpleasant and unnecessary effect for the player. Therefore, by delaying the start timing of the specific effect, the text information as a preview is more difficult to see than when a specific effect is being executed. On the other hand, when text information is displayed as a preview when there is a possibility of a jackpot, the gameplay intended by the designer can be realized and the player's attention can be drawn to the effect being executed.

Furthermore, whether or not a specific effect currently being executed is terminated may be varied depending on whether or not there is a possibility of a jackpot. For example, when text information is displayed as a preview during a non-win performance execution state where there is absolutely no possibility of a jackpot, it is possible to terminate the specific effect midway through its execution by performing a specific operation (in this example, a press operation) on the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, as described above. On the other hand, when text information is displayed as a preview during a win performance execution state where there is a higher possibility of a jackpot (higher jackpot expectation) than during a non-win performance execution state, it is possible to prevent the specific effect from being terminated midway through its execution by performing a specific operation (in this example, a press operation) on the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300. By configuring it in this way, displaying text information as a preview when there is absolutely no possibility of a jackpot is an unpleasant and unnecessary effect for the player. Therefore, by pausing the specific effect, the text information as a preview is made more difficult to see than when the specific effect is being executed. On the other hand, when text information is displayed as a preview during a possible jackpot, the game can be played as intended by the designer, and the player's attention can be drawn to the effect being executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 294(C), once a preset period T1 has elapsed since the variable symbol display began in the win possibility effect execution state (since the variable pattern command was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), that is, since the variable pattern command was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, measurement by the timer begins based on the reception of the variable pattern command, and once the period T1 during which the start condition for the specific effect is met has elapsed, the specific effect will start (t2). In addition, when the specific effect starts, a preview display also begins, and text information suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Furthermore, if the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated (t3') before the execution period T2 of the specific effect in this win-possible effect execution state has elapsed (before the specific effect has ended), the specific effect that is currently being executed will continue without being terminated, unlike in the non-win-possible effect execution state. In other words, in the win-possible effect execution state, which has a higher possibility of a jackpot (higher expectation of a jackpot) than the non-win-possible effect execution state, the specific effect that is currently being executed will continue and the specific effect will be displayed as the background image for the preview effect until all of the effects previously set as specific effects have been executed, even if the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated, and the background image will not change to the normal background image.

The examples of effects (display of text information) during the specific effects and special periods described above are merely examples, and the specific effects and special periods are not limited to those described above. For example, if a specific effect has a period in which a whiteout or blackout mode is displayed as part of the effect, it may be an effect that introduces a gaming machine or character, or it may not be limited to a special period that displays text information (such as "Specific effect delayed") notifying that the start timing of the specific period has been delayed, but may also be a period for selecting a game mode or a period for determining game-related settings.

Furthermore, the specific effects performed in the non-winning effect execution state and the specific effects performed in the winning effect execution state described above do not have to be identical, and some of the display, sound, light emission, etc. may be the same or similar, or the specific effects performed in the non-winning effect execution state may be different from the specific effects performed in the winning effect execution state. Furthermore, the specific effects do not have to be performed during periods when variable effects are being performed, but may be performed during periods when variable effects are not being performed. In this case, the establishment of the start conditions for the specific effect may be determined based on any one or any combination of the following: the period from when a stop display command is received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to when a variable pattern command is received, the period until a start winning command is received, the period until a player's contact is detected by the handle touch sensor 192, the period until rotation is detected by the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the period until operation of the volume adjustment button 227 is detected, the period until operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228 is detected, etc. In other words, regardless of whether a variable effect is being performed or not, any implementation is possible as long as it makes it possible to delay the start timing of a specific effect when a preview display begins, or to end a specific effect that is currently being performed when a specific effect and a preview display are being performed simultaneously. Additionally, the mode of the special period performed in the non-winning effect execution state may be different from the mode of the special period performed in the winning effect execution state.

Furthermore, the special period performed in the non-winning effect execution state and the special period performed in the winning effect execution state do not have to be the same; some of the displays, sounds, lighting, etc. may be the same or similar, and the mode of the special period performed in the non-winning effect execution state may be different from the mode of the special period performed in the winning effect execution state. Furthermore, the special period does not have to be performed during a period in which a variable effect is being performed, but may be performed during a period in which a variable effect is not being performed. In other words, regardless of whether a variable effect is being performed or not, any implementation form is acceptable as long as it makes it possible to delay the start timing of the special period when the preview display begins. Furthermore, the mode of the special period performed in the non-winning effect execution state may be different from the mode of the special period performed in the winning effect execution state.

In addition, the above examples show devices that delay the start timing of a specific effect when a preview display is initiated, and devices that end a specific effect that is currently being executed when a specific effect and a preview display are being executed simultaneously, but when controlling the effect display device 1600, multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5, and multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame in a specific effect mode as a specific effect, devices may also be used that delay the start timing of a specific effect when a preview display is initiated for some of the effect display device 1600, multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5, and multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame, or that end (interrupt) part of a specific effect when a specific effect and a preview display are being executed simultaneously. Furthermore, in gaming machines that are equipped with an auxiliary display device different from the effect display device 1600 in addition to the effect display device 1600, if the machine is configured to control the auxiliary display device in a specific effect mode in addition to the effect display device 1600 as a specific effect, it is possible to delay the start timing of the specific effect only on the auxiliary display device when a preview display starts, or to end only the specific effect being executed on the auxiliary display device when the specific effect and the preview display are being executed simultaneously.

In addition, if the configuration is such that when a preview display is initiated, the start timing of a specific effect is delayed for some of the effect display device 1600, the auxiliary display device, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame, or if a specific effect and a preview display are being executed simultaneously and a specific effect is terminated (interrupted) for part of the specific effect, when the specific effect for this part is started or resumed, the start timing of the specific effect is delayed or the specific effect being executed is controlled in a specific effect mode that is synchronized with the specific effect mode being executed in the electronic components (the effect display device 1600, the auxiliary display device, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame) for which the specific effect being executed has not been terminated (interrupted) midway. As a result, when a preview display is initiated, the start timing of a specific effect can be delayed for some of the LEDs mounted on the effect display device 1600, the auxiliary display device, the various decorative boards on the game board 5, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame, or even if a specific effect currently being executed is only partially terminated (interrupted) when a specific effect and a preview display are being executed simultaneously, a unified specific effect can be executed across the effect display device 1600, the auxiliary display device, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board 5, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame.

In addition, when a specific operation is performed on the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 while a specific effect is being executed, at least the mode (whiteout mode, blackout mode) displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a specific effect may be terminated, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame may be configured to continue the light-emitting mode being executed during the specific effect (which may be a light-emitting mode that is executed as a specific effect for at least a certain period of time after the mode displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a specific effect has ended, or a light-emitting mode that is displayed as an abnormality alert for at least a certain period of time after the mode displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a specific effect has ended if an abnormal condition has occurred).

In addition, in the above example, when text information as a preview display and a specific effect are displayed simultaneously on the effect display device 1600, the start timing of the specific effect is delayed or the specific effect is ended. However, the text information displayed on the effect display device 1600 is not limited to that corresponding to the preview display, as long as it is more difficult to see when a normal background image when no effect is being executed is displayed than when a specific effect is being displayed as the background image. For example, when abnormality information (text information indicating the nature of the abnormality (for example, "door open error")) is displayed in a static state as text information on the effect display device 1600 when an abnormal condition occurs, this abnormality information may be more difficult to see when a normal background image is being displayed than when a specific effect is being executed.

[Button operation and display modes]
Next, a modified example will be described in which the display mode of the effect display device 1600 varies depending on the operation mode of the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. FIG. 295 is a timing chart showing an example of the display mode of the effect display device 1600, and FIG. 296 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display mode of the effect display device 1600. Note that only the differences from the above embodiment will be described below, and redundant explanations will not be provided. Furthermore, the following modified example may be implemented in combination with the above-mentioned embodiment; for example, a specific effect that has the possibility of a jackpot in the above embodiment may be implemented as the following first specific effect, and a specific effect that does not have the possibility of a jackpot in the above embodiment may be implemented as the following second specific effect, or it may be implemented as a different effect from the specific effect of the above embodiment.

The pachinko machine 1 in this example is capable of executing a first specific presentation that has the potential for a jackpot and a second specific presentation that does not have the potential for a jackpot. It is possible to distinguish between the first specific presentation that has the potential for a jackpot and the second specific presentation that does not have the potential for a jackpot by pressing the press operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 295(A), if the press operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is pressed during the period from the start of the second specific presentation that does not have the potential for a jackpot (ts) to the end of the second specific presentation (te) (t1), the non-win mode is displayed on the presentation display device 1600 until the period T1 has elapsed since the press operation unit 303 was pressed (t2). In this way, in this example, the non-win mode is displayed when the press operation unit 303 is pressed, allowing the player to recognize that the second specific presentation that does not have the potential for a jackpot is being executed.

In addition, in this example, the non-winning mode is displayed on the performance display device 1600 based on the pressing of the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 during the second specific performance which does not have the possibility of a jackpot (t1), and if the press operation unit 303 is subsequently continuously pressed for a certain period of time (for example, a period longer than period T1) without being released, the non-winning mode displayed on the performance display device 1600 is hidden (the display of the non-winning mode disappears) based on the fact that the preset period T1 has elapsed since the press operation of the press operation unit 303 began, even while the press operation of the press operation unit 303 is still in progress (t2). In other words, the non-winning mode displayed on the performance display device 1600 is hidden at a timing (t2) prior to the timing (t3) when the press operation of the press operation unit 303 is released.

In this example, as shown in Figures 296 (A) to (D), after the second specific effect has started (A), if the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed (B), a crying character and the words "Sorry! You've Lost" are displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the non-winning mode 1600a. Furthermore, if the pressing operation unit 303 remains pressed for a preset period T1, the non-winning mode 1600a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is hidden (C), and the second specific effect ends (D). In this way, if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed during the second specific effect, the non-winning mode 1600a is displayed, making it easy for the player to recognize that there is no possibility of a jackpot. Furthermore, when the press operation unit 303 is pressed and a preset period T1 has elapsed, the display of the non-winning mode 1600a disappears from the effect display device 1600. This allows for an effect that takes into consideration players who become disappointed when the non-winning mode 1600a is displayed based on their press of the press operation unit 303 and are unable to release the press operation of the press operation unit 303, and does not excessively reduce their interest in the game. Furthermore, if the press operation unit 303 is pressed again during the execution of the second specific effect after the display of the non-winning mode 1600a from the effect display device 1600 has disappeared, the non-winning mode 1600a may be displayed again on the effect display device 1600, allowing the player to visually confirm that there is no possibility of a jackpot by seeing the non-winning mode 1600a that is displayed again.

In addition, as shown in Figure 295 (B), when the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during a second specific performance in which there is no possibility of a jackpot, the non-winning state is displayed on the performance display device 1600 (t1), and if the press operation of the press operation unit 303 subsequently repeatedly changes between a released state and a pressed state in a short period of time (at least a period shorter than T1) (t1 to t3'), the non-winning state displayed on the performance display device 1600 continues to be displayed without being hidden (t2) even if the press operation of the press operation unit 303 is released when the predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the start of the press operation of the press operation unit 303. In other words, after the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 begins (t1), the non-winning mode displayed on the performance display device 1600 continues to be displayed without being hidden even after the period T1 has elapsed (t2), and after the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed (t3'), the non-winning mode displayed on the performance display device 1600 is hidden (the display of the non-winning mode disappears) based on the elapse of the preset period T1 (t4).

In other words, in Figure 296 (B), the non-winning state 1600a is displayed on the performance display device 1600 based on the pressing of the press operation unit 303, and if the pressing of the press operation unit 303 subsequently changes repeatedly between a released state and a pressed state in a short period of time (at least a period shorter than T1), such as when the press operation unit 303 is pressed repeatedly, the non-winning state 1600a displayed on the performance display device 1600 continues to be displayed without being hidden even if the pressing of the press operation unit 303 is released in Figure 296 (C), and if the press operation unit 303 is not pressed again before the predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the pressing of the press operation unit 303 was pressed, the non-winning state 1600a displayed on the performance display device 1600 is hidden (the display of the non-winning state is erased). In this way, when the press operation unit 303 is pressed during the second specific effect, the non-winning mode 1600a is displayed, and if the press operation unit 303 is subsequently pressed repeatedly, the non-winning mode 1600a displayed on the effect display device 1600 continues to be displayed without being hidden, even if the period during which the press operation unit 303 is repeatedly pressed is longer than the preset period T1. This makes it possible to warn a player who is angry at the display of the non-winning mode 1600a and is hitting the press operation unit 303, and it is possible to protect the press operation unit 300 and prevent it from malfunctioning or being destroyed.

In addition, based on the pressing operation unit 303 being pressed during the second specific performance, the non-winning state 1600a is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and if the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 repeatedly changes between a released state and a pressed state in a short period of time (at least a period shorter than T1), such as when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed repeatedly, the non-winning state 1600a displayed on the performance display device 1600 is changed. For example, each time the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed a predetermined number of times (which may be once or twice or more), the face of the character displayed as the non-winning state 1600a may be changed (for example, gradually changing from a crying face to an angry face), the text displayed as the non-winning state 1600a may be changed (for example, changing from "Sorry! You lost" to "You lost," "It won't change even if you hit it," etc.), and each time the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed a predetermined number of times (which may be once or multiple times), the non-winning state 1600a may be switched between a state in which it is displayed on the performance display device 1600 and a state in which it is hidden from the performance display device 1600 (the number of operations A of the pressing operation unit 303 when switching from a state in which the non-winning state 1600a is displayed on the performance display device 1600 to a state in which it is hidden, and the number of times when the non-winning state 1600a is displayed on the performance display device 1600 to a state in which it is hidden, etc., may be changed). The number of times A' of operating the pressing operation unit 303 when switching between the non-winning state and the special non-winning state (e.g., display of a character, etc.) may be different from the number of times B of operating the pressing operation unit 303 when switching between the non-winning state and the special non-winning state (e.g., display of a character, etc.) each time the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed a predetermined number of times (which may be once or multiple times). The number of times A' of operating the pressing operation unit 303 when switching from the state in which the non-winning state 1600a is displayed on the performance display device 1600 to the state in which the special non-winning state is displayed on the performance display device 1600 may be different from the number of times B of operating the pressing operation unit 303 when switching from the state in which the special non-winning state is displayed on the performance display device 1600 to the state in which the non-winning state 1600a is displayed (e.g., once for A and twice for B). This allows the player to be warned by varying the level of the warning depending on the number of times the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed repeatedly, or by highlighting the non-winning mode 1600a by displaying or disappearing the non-winning mode 1600, thereby protecting the pressing operation unit 303 and preventing it from malfunctioning or being destroyed. Furthermore, if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed again during the execution of the second specific effect after the display of the non-winning mode 1600a has disappeared from the effect display device 1600, the non-winning mode 1600a may be displayed again on the effect display device 1600, thereby providing reassurance that there is no possibility of a jackpot, and allowing a warning to be issued to a player who repeatedly presses the pressing operation unit 303 again after the display of the non-winning mode 1600a has disappeared, thereby protecting the pressing operation unit 303 and preventing it from malfunctioning or being destroyed.

On the other hand, if the non-winning state is displayed on the performance display device 1600 based on the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 being pressed during the second specific performance (t1), and the pressing operation on the press operation unit 303 is then continued for a certain period of time (for example, a period longer than period T1) without being released, the non-winning state 1600a displayed on the performance display device 1600 is not changed, and the non-winning state displayed on the performance display device 1600 is hidden (the display of the non-winning state is erased) based on the elapse of the preset period T1 from the start of the pressing operation on the press operation unit 303. In this way, if there is no risk of malfunction or destruction of the press operation unit 303, no warning is given to the player, thereby preventing discomfort to the player and further damage to an already disappointed player.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 295 (C), when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed (t1) during the first specific effect which has the potential for a jackpot, the non-winning mode is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 regardless of the timing of the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, by not displaying the non-winning mode, the player can recognize that the first specific effect which has the potential for a jackpot is being executed, making the player hope for a jackpot and drawing attention to the first specific effect, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In other words, as shown in Figure 296 (A')-(D'), during the first specific presentation that has the potential for a jackpot (A'), the presentation display device 1600 does not display the non-winning mode (B')-(D') even if the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is pressed. Furthermore, because the non-winning mode is not displayed on the presentation display device 1600 regardless of the timing of the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, the player can be sure that the first specific presentation that has the potential for a jackpot is being executed, and can attract attention to the first specific presentation displayed on the presentation display device 1600, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game. Furthermore, if the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is pressed during a preset period while the first specific presentation is being executed, a winning indication mode (a mode suggesting a win or the possibility of a win) different from the non-winning mode may be displayed. This allows the player to visually see the winning indication and recognize that the first specific effect, which has the potential to result in a jackpot, is being executed, making the player look forward to a jackpot and drawing their attention to the first specific effect displayed on the effect display device 1600, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, Figures 296 (A') to (D') show examples in which the first specific effect is executed and results in a jackpot, but the first specific effect will also be executed in the event of a loss. In other words, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed, the effect display device 1600 does not display the non-win mode, so even if a first specific effect that has the potential to result in a jackpot is executed, it is not possible to determine whether it will result in a jackpot or a loss. This prevents players who recognize that the first specific effect is being executed from losing interest in the first specific effect that is currently being executed, and prevents a decline in interest in the game by having them focus on the first specific effect displayed on the effect display device 1600 until the result (the jackpot symbol or the loss symbol) is determined.

In addition, in this example, the first or second specific effect is executed in response to the receipt of a variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, this is not limiting, and the first or second specific effect (or just one of them) may be executed in response to the receipt of a specific control command transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. For example, the determination of whether to execute the first or second specific effect (or just one of them) may be made based on the elapsed time since the start hole winning command was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (the elapsed time since the start hole winning command was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is measured by a timer), the elapsed time since the stop display command was received (the elapsed time since the stop display command was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is measured by a timer), etc. In this case, the start timing of the first specific effect or the second specific effect (or just one of them) can be changed, preventing players from getting bored.

In addition, when a non-winning mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the non-winning mode displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be hidden (the display of the non-winning mode may disappear) by performing an operation other than the above-described pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. That is, the non-winning mode may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on a first operation (in this example, a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303) being performed on the effect display device 1600 during the second specific effect, and the non-winning mode displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be hidden (the display of the non-winning mode may disappear) based on a second operation (e.g., a predetermined operation on the touch operation unit 302, or a first ending operation on the touch operation unit 302 and a second ending operation on the pressing operation unit 303) being performed on the effect display device 1600 while the non-winning mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600. This makes it possible to implement effects that take into consideration players who feel uncomfortable when the non-winning mode is displayed, without excessively reducing their interest in the game.

In addition, when a predetermined operation unit other than the effect operation unit 300 (for example, any one or a combination of any two or more (or all) of the handle 195, volume adjustment button 227, light intensity adjustment button 228, etc.) is operated, the effect display device 1600 may display a special mode that is different from the non-winning mode not only during the second specific effect but also during the first specific effect, making it difficult to determine whether or not a jackpot is possible. In this case, the player may be disappointed when the special mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600 even though the first specific effect is being executed, but if the player realizes that this is not the non-winning mode, their expectations for a jackpot can be suddenly raised, and if a jackpot occurs without the player realizing that this is not the non-winning mode, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced by the sudden occurrence of something unexpected. In this case, the special mode may be changed in response to the operation of the predetermined operation unit, and the change in the special mode may suggest that it is different from the non-winning mode.

Furthermore, because the second specific effect described above does not have the potential to result in a jackpot, its execution could discourage the player and reduce their interest in the game. For this reason, in this example, the second specific effect is executed only when certain conditions are met, preventing an excessive decrease in interest in the game. Specifically, the second specific effect can be executed when a jackpot has not been achieved and a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the handle touch sensor 192 stopped detecting the player's contact. This prevents the so-called "stop shot," which stops the release of game balls, and improves the operating rate of the gaming machine. Alternatively, or in addition to the above conditions, the second special effect may be executed when a predetermined period of time has passed since the handle rotation detection sensor 189 stopped detecting rotation even if a jackpot has not been achieved, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the stop display command was received even if a jackpot has not been achieved, or when the reserved numbers of first special symbols and second special symbols (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number) are 0. This also prevents stop shots and improves the operating rate of the gaming machine.

The second specific effect and non-winning mode described above are merely examples and are not limited to those described above. For example, the second specific effect may display a mode unrelated to the changing display of the symbols, such as an introduction to a gaming machine or character, and the non-winning mode may not be limited to a notification that a jackpot will not be won, but may also display a mode unrelated to the changing display of the symbols (such as a setting display) on the effect display device 1600.

Furthermore, the first specific effect that has the potential for a jackpot and the second specific effect that does not have the potential for a jackpot may be the same or similar in some or all aspects (e.g., rainbow light emission, rainbow effect display, etc.) of the display mode of the effect display device 1600, the sound output mode of the speaker 122, and the light emission modes of the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3, or the first specific effect and the second specific effect may be different aspects. Furthermore, one or both of the first specific effect and the second specific effect do not have to be performed during periods when variable effects are being performed, but may also be performed during periods when variable effects are not being performed, and may be executed as effects such as the above-mentioned pre-reading notices, for example. This increases the variety of effects and can increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in gaming machines equipped with an auxiliary display device capable of displaying images separate from the effect display device 1600, the non-winning state may be displayed on the auxiliary display device based on the pressing operation unit 303 being pressed during the second specific effect, or a special state may be displayed on the auxiliary display device based on the operation of a specified operation unit different from the effect operation unit 300. In this case, it becomes possible to display the non-winning state or special state without interfering with the visibility of the second specific effect executed by the effect display device 1600.

In addition, if the non-winning state is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the pressing operation unit 303 being pressed during the second specific effect, the second specific effect may be interrupted (ended midway through execution). In this case, the non-winning state can be displayed in place of the second specific effect displayed on the effect display device 1600, making it easier to see the non-winning state displayed on the effect display device 1600 and allowing immediate notice when the non-winning state is displayed. In addition, after the specific effect is interrupted when the non-winning mode is displayed (t1), the second specific effect may be started based on the disappearance of the display of the non-winning mode (t2 in Figure 295(A) and t4 in Figure 295(B)), or after the specific effect is interrupted when the non-winning mode is displayed (t1) and the display of the non-winning mode is disappeared, an effect different from the second specific effect (which may not be a special effect, as with the display waiting for the start of variation) may be performed, and the second specific effect may be started when a predetermined period has passed since the display of the non-winning mode disappeared or since the pressing operation unit 303 was last operated (for example, t2 + n seconds (for example, n = 30) in Figure 295(A) or t1 + T1 + n seconds (for example, T1 + n = 30) in Figure 295(A), t4 + n seconds (for example, n = 30) in Figure 295(B) or t3' + T1 + n seconds (for example, n = 30) in Figure 295(B)). Furthermore, if a special mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the operation of a specific operation unit other than the effect operation unit 300 during the second specific effect, the second specific effect may be continued without interruption. This makes it possible to make the player aware that a special mode has been displayed, i.e., that it is not a non-winning mode.

In addition, the first and second specific effects displayed on the effect display device 1600 involve the display of varying patterns, and the display mode changes over time. On the other hand, the non-winning mode displayed on the effect display device 1600 does not change its display mode over time, but rather changes its display mode in response to the operation of the effect operation unit 300. In other words, videos are displayed as the first and second specific effects, and a still image is displayed as the non-winning mode. Therefore, when the non-winning mode is displayed instead of the second specific effect displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the pressing operation unit 303 being pressed during the second specific effect, the effect display device 1600 changes from a state in which a video is displayed to a state in which a still image is displayed. In this way, by significantly changing the display mode on the effect display device 1600 from a state in which a video is displayed to a state in which a still image is displayed, it becomes easier to notice that the winning mode has been displayed. Furthermore, when the non-winning mode is ended and the non-winning mode is displayed on the performance display device 1600, it is sufficient that at least the non-winning mode is displayed as a still image, and the display mode of some of the background display, etc. displayed in a layer below the non-winning mode may change over time.

In addition, in the above example, if the pressing operation unit 300 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during the second specific performance, the non-winning state 1600a is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed continuously for a certain period of time, the non-winning state is hidden based on the fact that a predetermined period T1 has passed since the pressing operation unit 303 was operated, even while the pressing operation unit 303 is being operated, and if the pressing operation unit 303 repeatedly changes between a pressed state and a released state, the non-winning state is hidden unless the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed again before the predetermined period T1 has passed since the pressing operation unit 303 was pressed (based on the fact that a predetermined period T1 has passed since the pressing operation unit 303 was last operated). In the above example, the non-winning mode is not displayed, but if the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is continuously pressed for a certain period of time after the non-winning mode 1600a is displayed on the performance display device 1600, the non-winning mode 1600a will continue to be displayed, but a predetermined display or a predetermined performance will be executed based on the elapse of a preset period T1 since the press operation unit 303 was operated, and if the press operation unit 303 repeatedly changes between a pressed state and a released state after the non-winning mode 1600a is displayed on the performance display device 1600, the predetermined display or a predetermined performance will be executed unless the press operation unit 303 is pressed again before the preset period T1 has elapsed since the press operation unit 303 was pressed.

For example, similar to the delay in the start of the specific performance described above, if the press operation unit 300 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during a specific display performance, the specific display performance will continue and the start of the second specific performance will be delayed; however, if the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is continuously pressed for a certain period of time, the specific display performance will be terminated and the specific performance will be started based on the fact that a preset period T1 has passed since the press operation unit 303 was operated, even if the press operation unit 303 is still being pressed; and if the press operation unit 303 repeatedly changes between a pressed state and a released state, the specific display performance will be terminated and the specific performance will be started if the press operation unit 303 is not pressed again before the preset period T1 has passed since the press operation unit 303 was pressed. In this case, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed, the non-winning state 1600a may be displayed on the performance display device 1600. In addition, as described above in [Button operation mode and display mode], the timing at which the display of the non-winning state 1600a ends may be varied depending on whether the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed continuously for a certain period of time or whether it is changed between a pressed state and a non-pressed state in a short period of time, or control related to this control (for example, control to change the state of the non-winning state 1600a by operating the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) may be executed. Furthermore, the specified display mode is not limited to a changing pattern mode, and may also be a standby display waiting for the changing display to begin, etc.

In addition, in the above example, the end and start times of a predetermined display (e.g., non-winning state 1600a) and a predetermined presentation (e.g., second specific presentation) are shown to differ depending on whether the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is pressed continuously for a certain period of time or whether it is changed between a pressed state and a non-pressed state in a short period of time. However, this is not limited to when the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is pressed, but can also be achieved when the touch operation unit 302 of the presentation operation unit 300 is continuously touched for a certain period of time or The start and end times of a predetermined display (for example, non-winning mode 1600a) or a predetermined effect (for example, second specific effect) may be different when there is a change between a contact operated state and a non-contact operated state in a short period of time, or the start and end times of a predetermined display (for example, non-winning mode 1600a) or a predetermined effect (for example, second specific effect) may be different when there is continuous contact with the handle touch sensor 192 for a certain period of time and when there is a change between a contact state and a non-contact state in a short period of time.

[Specific abnormal conditions]
Next, we will explain modified examples in the event that a specific abnormal condition occurs during the execution of a first specific effect that has the potential for a jackpot or a second specific effect that does not have the potential for a jackpot. Figure 297(A) is a timing chart showing an example of the effect mode during the second specific effect, Figure 297(B) is a timing chart showing an example of the effect mode during the first specific effect, and Figure 298(C) is a timing chart showing an example of a modified effect mode during the second specific effect. Note that only differences from the above embodiment will be described below, and redundant explanations will not be provided. Furthermore, the following modified examples may be implemented in combination with the above-described example. For example, the specific effect in the above example that has the potential for a jackpot may be implemented as the first specific effect below, and the specific effect in the above example that does not have the potential for a jackpot may be implemented as the second specific effect below, or they may be implemented as effects separate from the specific effects of the above-described example.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of this example detects abnormal states (door open abnormal state in which the door frame open switch detects that the door frame 3 has been opened relative to the main frame 4 or that the main frame open switch has detected that the main frame 4 has been opened relative to the outer frame 2; vibration detection abnormal state in which the vibration sensor detects vibration of the game board 5 for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds); lower tray full abnormal state in which a detection signal is input from the full tank detection sensor 154; ball out abnormal state in which a detection signal is input from the ball out detection sensor 574; radio wave detection abnormal state in which the radio wave sensor detects unauthorized radio waves; When an abnormal magnetic detection state occurs in which a magnetic field acting illegally is detected within the door frame 5a, when a detection signal is input from the second start opening sensor 2401 when the second start opening 2004 is not open, or when a detection signal is input from the large winning opening sensor 2402 when the game is not in a big winning game state or a small winning game state, an abnormality notification display mode (text information showing the content of the abnormality (for example, "door open"), etc.) is displayed on the performance display device 1600, an alarm sound is output from various speakers 622, or various decorative boards (in this example, the door frame unit) provided on the door frame side are turned on. The various LEDs mounted on the unit (including the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3, and in the case of the divided game board 5A, various decorative boards provided on the right game board 5AR) are illuminated in an abnormality notification illumination mode, and the various decorative boards provided on the game board side (in this example, the rear upper decorative board 1402 on the rear upper side on which LEDs for illuminating and decorating the rear upper first decorative part 3211 of the decorative boards (the functional display board 1402 is not included in the decorative boards because it does not perform decoration) provided on the game board 5 are mounted) are illuminated in an abnormality notification illumination mode. An abnormal condition is alerted by turning off various LEDs mounted on decorative boards other than the first decorative board and the rear upper second decorative board (only one of which may be installed) on which LEDs for illuminating and decorating the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 are mounted, or in the case of a divided gaming board 5A, on the decorative boards on the left gaming board 5AL other than the rear upper first decorative board on which LEDs for illuminating and decorating the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 are mounted and the rear upper second decorative board (only one of which may be installed) on which LEDs for illuminating and decorating the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 are mounted. Note that the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the gaming board side may also be illuminated in an abnormality alert illumination mode. In other words, when an abnormal condition occurs, it is sufficient that the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various decorative boards on the gaming board side are controlled to a preset illumination mode, including extinguishing, as an abnormality illumination mode (abnormality alert illumination mode).

In addition, the second specific effect can be executed with some functions restricted if a specific abnormal condition from among the abnormal conditions described above occurs (in this example, a door open abnormal condition is shown, but it could also be all of the multiple abnormal conditions mentioned above, or one or any combination of the multiple abnormal conditions mentioned above). For example, if a specific abnormal condition occurs while the second specific effect is being executed in the effect display device 1600, an abnormality alert display mode is displayed on the highest layer (top layer) of the effect display device 1600, but the second specific effect continues to be displayed on a layer below the abnormality alert display mode on the effect display device 1600. In other words, the area on the effect display device 1600 that displays the second specific effect and the area that displays the abnormality alert display mode based on the occurrence of a specific abnormal condition overlap, and by displaying the abnormality alert display mode on the highest layer and the second specific effect on a layer below the abnormality alert display mode, the second specific effect and the abnormality alert display mode are displayed simultaneously.

In this example, if the above-mentioned specific abnormal condition occurs while the first or second specific effect is being executed, the various LEDs (which may be all or some) mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various decorative boards provided on the game board side are interrupted from their light-emitting mode corresponding to the first specific effect (first specific light-emitting mode) or their light-emitting mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light-emitting mode), the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side are made to emit light in an abnormality alert light-emitting mode, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side are turned off. Then, when the abnormal condition is resolved (in this example, the door frame opening switch detects that the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4, or the main frame opening switch detects that the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2), the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side cease to emit light in the abnormality notification light mode, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side cease to light up, and if a first specific effect is being played, they resume emitting light in the light mode corresponding to the first specific effect (first specific light mode), or if a second specific effect is being played, they resume emitting light in the light mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light mode).

When the light emission mode corresponding to the first specific effect (first specific light emission mode) or the light emission mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light emission mode) is resumed based on the elimination of the abnormal condition, the light emission mode corresponding to the time elapsed since the start of the first specific effect or the second specific effect is set to the light emission mode corresponding to the time elapsed since the start of the first specific effect or the second specific effect, rather than the light emission mode at the time of interruption. In other words, when the light emission mode corresponding to the first specific effect (first specific light emission mode) or the light emission mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light emission mode) is started, a timer is started to measure light emission in the light emission mode corresponding to the timer, and the timer continues to measure light emission without interruption between the interruption and resumption of the light emission in the light emission mode corresponding to the first specific effect (first specific light emission mode) or the light emission mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light emission mode), and the light emission is resumed in the light emission mode corresponding to the timer when the light emission mode corresponding to the first specific effect (first specific light emission mode) or the light emission mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light emission mode) is started.

In addition, in this example, even after the specific abnormal condition is resolved, for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds), the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side are illuminated in an abnormality alert light-emitting mode, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are extinguished. In other words, after a certain period of time has passed since the specific abnormal condition is resolved, if a first specific effect is being executed, illumination is resumed in the light-emitting mode corresponding to the first specific effect (first specific light-emitting mode), and if a second specific effect is being executed, illumination is resumed in the light-emitting mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light-emitting mode). Meanwhile, the abnormality alert display mode displayed on the effect display device 1600 is hidden when the specific abnormal condition is resolved. As a result, not only can the occurrence of a specific abnormal condition be grasped in real time through the abnormality notification display mode displayed on the performance display device 1600, but even after the specific abnormal condition has been resolved, it can be grasped that the specific abnormal condition has been occurring for a certain period of time through the abnormality notification light emission mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards installed on the door frame side, making it easier to detect when fraudulent activity is occurring or has occurred, and to deter the occurrence of fraudulent activity.

In addition, in this example, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during the second specific effect, which does not have the possibility of a jackpot, the light emission mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side, which emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light emission mode), is changed. Specifically, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during the second specific effect, the light emission mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light emission mode) by the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side is terminated, and the various LEDs are caused to emit light in a special light emission mode different from the light emission mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light emission mode). In this example, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side emit white light as the special light emission mode.

The light emitted by the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side is easily visible to players and is noticeable over a wide area of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, if the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are emitting light in a light-emitting mode (second specific light-emitting mode) corresponding to a second specific presentation that does not have the possibility of a jackpot, the light may be visible to players and cause discomfort. Therefore, in this example, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to terminate the light-emitting mode (second specific light-emitting mode) corresponding to the second specific presentation when the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are emitting light in accordance with the second specific presentation, thereby preventing the unpleasant light from continuing and reducing a decline in interest in the game.

The special light-emitting mode is not limited to the above, as long as it is a light-emitting mode that is different from the second specific light-emitting mode. Furthermore, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side may emit different light colors, or one of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side may emit light in a specified color while the other is turned off.

In addition, in this example, even if the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during a door opening abnormal state, which is a specific abnormal state that occurs during the second specific performance that does not have the possibility of a jackpot, it is possible to change the light emission mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 297 (A), if a door open abnormality occurs at a predetermined timing (t1) between the start of the second specific effect (which does not have the possibility of a jackpot) (ts) and the end of the second specific effect (te), where the door frame opening switch detects that the door frame 3 has been opened relative to the main frame 4 or that the main frame opening switch has opened the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, the second specific effect displayed on the effect display device 1600 will continue, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various decorative boards on the game board will cease to emit light in the light emission mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light emission mode) (t1), the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side will emit light in the abnormality notification light emission mode, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side will be turned off.

In addition, although not shown, in an abnormal door open state, a door open notification sound (an announcement voice saying "The door is open" and a warning sound such as a "ding dong") is repeatedly output from various speakers at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set, or a default volume adjusted using a volume adjustment switch on the peripheral control board 1510) for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds), or the output stops when the main frame 4 that was open relative to the outer frame 2 is closed. (Note that the output may stop after a certain number of repeated outputs (e.g., five times) even if the main frame 4 continues to be open relative to the outer frame 2 or the door frame 3 continues to be open relative to the main frame 4, or the output may continue until the main frame 4 that is open relative to the outer frame 2 or the door frame 3 that is open relative to the main frame 4 is closed, or the output may continue until a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the main frame 4 that is open relative to the outer frame 2 or the door frame 3 that is open relative to the main frame 4 is closed.)

When the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during the abnormal door opening state (t2), the light emission modes of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side do not change. However, after the abnormal door opening state is resolved and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side have ceased to emit light in the abnormality notification light emission mode and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board have ceased to emit light (t4), the LEDs are changed to a special light emission mode different from the light emission mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light emission mode).

In this example, if a door open abnormal condition occurs as a specific abnormal condition during the second specific performance which does not have the possibility of a jackpot, causing the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards mounted on the door frame side to light up in an abnormality notification light-emitting mode and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards mounted on the game board side to turn off, by pressing the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the door open abnormal condition will be resolved, causing the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards mounted on the door frame side to stop lighting up in the abnormality notification light-emitting mode and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards mounted on the game board side to stop lighting up in the abnormality notification light-emitting mode, and then causing the various LEDs to light up in a special light-emitting mode rather than in the light-emitting mode corresponding to the second specific performance (second specific light-emitting mode). Therefore, for players who do not want the light to continue in the light emission mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light emission mode), which does not have the possibility of a jackpot, it is possible to change the light emission mode by pressing the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, even during the door open abnormal state, which is a specific abnormal state, and since there is no limit to the period during which the light emission in the light emission mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light emission mode) can be ended, it is possible to prevent players from feeling anxious or uncomfortable.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 298 (C), if the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during the above-mentioned specific abnormal state that occurs during the second specific performance (t2), the display of the second specific performance being executed by the performance display device 1600 may be terminated and the display of the special performance may be started. In this case, if a special effect is being displayed when the abnormal door opening state is resolved and the illumination of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side in the abnormality alert illumination mode and the extinguishing of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are terminated, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are made to illuminate in the special illumination mode; if a second specific effect is being displayed, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are made to illuminate in an illumination mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific illumination mode); if a first specific effect is being displayed, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are made to illuminate in an illumination mode corresponding to the first specific effect (first specific illumination mode); and if another display such as standby is being displayed, the various LEDs are made to illuminate in an illumination mode corresponding to another state (which may be extinguished).

The special effect may be set to end when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 was pressed. In this case, the second specific effect may be executed again after the special effect has ended, or another effect (which may not execute a special effect, as with the variation start waiting display) may be executed after the special effect has ended, and then the second specific effect may be executed again if predetermined effect conditions are met. In other words, the second specific effect may not be executed while the special effect is being executed, but the second specific effect may be executed after the special effect has ended, or the second specific effect may be executed again if predetermined effect conditions are met after the special effect has ended. Furthermore, if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed again while the second specific effect is being executed, a special effect may be executed again, causing the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side to emit light in a special light-emitting mode. This provides an opportunity for players who do not wish the second specific effect to continue or who do not wish the light to continue in the light-emitting mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light-emitting mode) to change the effect or the light-emitting mode, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game. Furthermore, when the door opening abnormal state is resolved and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side are turned off in the abnormality notification light emitting mode and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side are turned off, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side are turned on in the special light emitting mode based on the fact that the special effect display is being performed. Alternatively, when the door opening abnormality is resolved and the illumination of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side in the abnormality alert illumination mode and the extinguishing of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are terminated, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side may be caused to illuminate in an illumination mode corresponding to the second specific illumination (second specific illumination mode) according to the second specific illumination. In this case, pressing the pressing operation unit 303 again may end the second specific illumination and enable the special illumination, and the illumination mode corresponding to the second specific illumination (second specific illumination mode) of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side may be terminated and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side may be caused to illuminate in the special illumination mode. Furthermore, if the performance operation unit 300 is operated to end during a special performance, it is possible to end the special performance, and if the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a manner different from the end operation, the period until the special performance ends can be extended; in other words, the time when the second specific performance starts can be delayed. In this case, by operating the performance operation unit 300 in a manner different from the end operation during a special performance, it becomes possible to delay the time when light emission in the light emission mode corresponding to the second specific performance (second specific light emission mode) starts.

In addition, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during the second specific effect, text information such as letters and symbols may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. For example, the effect display device 1600 may display the non-winning state in which there is no possibility of a jackpot, or the fact that the second specific effect is continuing as a special display state, or, when the second specific effect is ended based on the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, that the second specific effect has ended, or that a special effect is being executed in place of the second specific effect. This makes it easy for the player to recognize that the second specific effect is being executed, that there is no possibility of a jackpot, that the second specific effect has ended, etc. In addition, some of the text information displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be changed depending on the operation of the effect operation unit 300. This allows players to kill time until the second specific effect ends, and if the period until the special effect ends is extended based on operating the effect operation unit 300 in a manner different from the end operation, the player will be able to recognize that the period until the special effect ends has been extended, in other words, that the start of the second specific effect has been reliably delayed, giving the player a sense of security and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, a special effect that is beneficial to the player may be executed. That is, since the second specific effect does not offer the possibility of a jackpot and is therefore useless to the player, and only serves to discourage and annoy the player, it may be possible to terminate the second specific effect when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed. On the other hand, the special effect that is executed in place of the second specific effect when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed may be one that is beneficial to the player, allowing the player to customize the game to their liking or enjoy the game. For example, the special effect may introduce a character, introduce a reach effect, notify the player of the probability of winning, set the volume, set the light intensity, select the effect mode, or the like. This reduces the player's annoyance when the second specific effect, which does not offer the possibility of a jackpot, is terminated and a special effect is initiated, preventing an excessive decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, in this example, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is pressed during the first specific presentation which has the possibility of a jackpot, the light emission modes of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side, which emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the first specific presentation (first specific light emission mode), are not changed; and even when the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is pressed during a door open abnormal state, which is a specific abnormal state that occurs during the first specific presentation which has the possibility of a jackpot, the light emission modes of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side are not changed. Furthermore, if the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during a preset period while the first specific effect is being executed, the first specific effect may be continued without executing the special effect, but the display mode of the effect display device 1600 may be changed (for example, a winning suggestion mode may be displayed that suggests that a win has occurred or that there is a possibility of a win), or the light emission data may be changed by updating a pointer indicating the light emission data arranged in time series that constitutes the schedule data for generating a light emission mode that indicates the light emission mode (first specific light emission mode) corresponding to the first specific effect by the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side (the first specific light emission mode is continued, but the light emission data is changed to other light emission data from the schedule data for generating a light emission mode as the first specific light emission mode), or the effect display device 1600 may be configured to display a winning suggestion mode (a mode that suggests that a win has occurred or that there is a possibility of a win) that is different from the display of the special effect. This allows the player to visually confirm the winning indication and recognize that the first specific effect, which has the potential for a jackpot, is being executed, thereby creating anticipation for a jackpot and drawing attention to the first specific effect displayed on effect display device 1600, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game. Even if the second specific effect is terminated and a special effect is executed when press operation unit 303 of effect operation unit 300 is pressed during the second specific effect, the first specific effect may not be terminated and the special effect may not be initiated if press operation unit 303 of effect operation unit 300 is pressed during the first specific effect, which has the potential for a jackpot. Furthermore, the first specific effect may not be terminated and the special effect may not be initiated even if press operation unit 303 of effect operation unit 300 is pressed during a door-open abnormal state, which is a specific abnormal state that occurs during the first specific effect, which has the potential for a jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 297 (B), if a door open abnormality occurs at a predetermined timing (t1) between the start of a first specific effect with the possibility of a jackpot (ts) and the end of the first specific effect (te), where the door frame opening switch detects that door frame 3 has been opened relative to main frame 4 or that main frame 4 has been opened relative to outer frame 2, the effect display device 1600 continues to display the first specific effect while displaying "Door Open" as a door open abnormality notification display mode, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various decorative boards on the game board side cease to emit light in the light emission mode corresponding to the first specific effect (first specific light emission mode) (t1), the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side emit light in the abnormality notification light emission mode, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are turned off.

If the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during the door opening abnormal state (t2), the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board continue to emit light in the abnormality alert light mode without changing the light emission mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the game board side, and the first specific effect displayed on the effect display device 1600 continues without terminating. If the first specific effect is still being executed (t4) after the light emission in the abnormality alert light mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the extinguishing of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board have terminated based on the resolution of the door opening abnormal state, the light emission mode corresponding to the first specific effect (first specific light emission mode) is again activated.

In this example, if a door-open abnormality occurs as a specific abnormal condition during the first specific presentation, which has the potential for a jackpot, causing the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame to illuminate in an abnormality alert light-emitting mode and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board to be extinguished, even if the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is pressed, the door-open abnormality condition is resolved, and after the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame have ceased to illuminate in an abnormality alert light-emitting mode and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board have ceased to be extinguished, they are again caused to illuminate in an illumination mode corresponding to the first specific presentation (first specific illumination mode). Furthermore, even if the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is pressed during the door-open abnormality, which is a specific abnormal condition that occurs during the first specific presentation, which has the potential for a jackpot, the first specific presentation displayed on the presentation display device 1600 continues without terminating. Therefore, after the emission in the abnormality notification emission mode has ended, the emission in the emission mode corresponding to the first specific effect (first specific emission mode) continues, giving the player a sense of security that the first specific effect is being executed, and drawing attention to the display of the first specific effect executed by the effect display device 1600, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, if the first specific effect is not being executed when the door opening abnormality state is resolved and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side are turned off and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are turned off, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side may be made to emit light in an emission mode different from that of the first specific effect (which may be an emission mode (including off) that is executed when no special effect is being executed, as with the variation start waiting display). In other words, if the first specific effect has already ended, the special lottery result is displayed and the display of the varying symbols has ended, so unnecessary emission in an emission mode corresponding to the first specific effect (first specific emission mode) can be suppressed, and the various LEDs may be made to emit light in an emission mode that corresponds to the state of play when the door opening abnormality state is resolved and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side are turned off and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are turned off.

In addition, in this example, even if a specific abnormal condition, such as a door-open abnormality, occurs during a first specific performance that has the potential for a jackpot or a second specific performance that does not, the various decorative boards provided on the gaming board, including the first upper rear decorative board on which LEDs are mounted to illuminate the first upper rear decorative portion 3211 and the second upper rear decorative board on which LEDs are mounted to illuminate the second upper rear decorative portion 3212 (only one of these is acceptable), will continue to emit light during the first or second specific performance until the first or second specific performance ends. This allows the player to recognize that the first or second specific performance is continuing, preventing the player from feeling anxious or distrustful.

Furthermore, even if the effect display device 1600 is configured to display text information such as letters and symbols when the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during the second specific effect, it is possible to prevent text information such as letters and symbols from being displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the fact that the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during the first specific effect. This allows the player to recognize that the second specific effect is being executed and, therefore, that there is no possibility of a jackpot by visually recognizing the text information such as letters and symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed. Furthermore, if the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed but no text information such as letters and symbols is displayed on the effect display device 1600, expectations for a jackpot can be increased, and this can draw attention to the first specific effect executed by the effect display device 1600 and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when a predetermined operation unit other than the effect operation unit 300 (for example, any one or a combination of multiple (including all) of the handle 195, volume control button 227, light intensity control button 228, etc.) is operated, special character information such as characters or symbols different from the character information such as characters or symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be displayed regardless of whether the second or first specific effect is in progress. In this case, although there is a risk that the display of special character information on the effect display device 1600 during the first specific effect may lead to the mistaken belief that the second specific effect is being executed, if a player who mistakenly believes the second specific effect is being executed realizes (after the end of the specific abnormal condition) that the first specific effect is being executed, this can immediately increase their expectations for a jackpot. Furthermore, if the result of the special jackpot lottery is displayed when the first specific effect ends without the player realizing that the first specific effect is being executed, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced by the sudden occurrence of an unexpected jackpot. In this case, the display mode of the special character information displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be changed in response to operation of a specified operation unit, and a player who notices that the first specific effect is being executed may be able to enjoy the changes in the special character information by operating a specified operation unit in the hope of hitting a jackpot. Alternatively, the display mode of the special character information may be changed in a manner different from the character information such as letters and symbols that is displayed based on pressing the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 during the second specific effect, making it easier to visually distinguish the special character information from the character information such as letters and symbols that is displayed based on pressing the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 during the second specific effect.

Furthermore, because the second specific effect described above does not have the potential to result in a jackpot, its execution could discourage the player and reduce their interest in the game. For this reason, in this example, the second specific effect is executed only when certain conditions are met, preventing an excessive decrease in interest in the game. Specifically, the second specific effect can be executed when a jackpot has not been achieved and a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the handle touch sensor 192 stopped detecting the player's contact. This prevents the so-called "stop shot," which stops the release of game balls, and improves the operating rate of the gaming machine. Alternatively, or in addition to the above conditions, the second special effect may be executed when a predetermined period of time has passed since the handle rotation detection sensor 189 stopped detecting rotation even if a jackpot has not been achieved, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the stop display command was received even if a jackpot has not been achieved, or when the reserved numbers of first special symbols and second special symbols (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number) are 0. This also prevents stop shots and improves the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the first specific effect that has the potential for a jackpot and the second specific effect that does not have the potential for a jackpot may be the same or similar in some or all aspects (e.g., rainbow light emission, rainbow effect display, etc.) of the display mode of the effect display device 1600, the sound output mode of the speaker 122, and the light emission modes of the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3, or the first specific effect and the second specific effect may be different aspects. Furthermore, one or both of the first specific effect and the second specific effect do not have to be performed during the period when a variable effect is being performed, but may also be performed during the period when a variable effect is not being performed, and may be executed as an effect such as the above-mentioned pre-reading notice. This increases the variety of effects and can increase the enjoyment of the game.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the light-emitting data groups that specify the light-emitting modes of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are serially output as serial data from the serial communication line from the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, among the light-emitting data groups arranged in chronological order that make up the schedule data for generating light-emitting modes, the light-emitting data groups indicated by the pointer that indicates which light-emitting data group from the first light-emitting data group updated in the scheduler update process is to be output are serially output to the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side each time the peripheral control unit executes its regular processing (approximately every 33.3 ms in this example). In this way, because the light-emitting data groups are output at regular intervals, normal light emission can be quickly restored even in the event of abnormal light emission due to noise, etc., thereby improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1. Note that this is output not only when the light emission data group pointed to by the pointer after the pointer update differs from the light emission data group pointed to by the pointer before the pointer update, but also when they are identical. Therefore, if the pointer points to a light emission data group that indicates light emission in a predetermined light emission mode for a certain period of time, even if light emission is caused to change due to noise or the like, the light emission mode can be quickly restored to the predetermined light emission mode, improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1. Incidentally, serial data is transmitted one bit at a time at regular intervals synchronized with the clock input to the SCLK terminal of the LED driver.

[Alternative performance]
Next, we will explain a modified example in which, for the first specific effect that has the possibility of a jackpot and the second specific effect that does not have the possibility of a jackpot, a sound effect corresponding to the first specific effect is output from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1 during the first specific effect, and a sound effect corresponding to the second specific effect is not output from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1 during the second specific effect. Figure 299(A) is a timing chart showing an example of the effect mode during the second specific effect, Figure 299(B) is a timing chart showing an example of the effect mode during the first specific effect, Figures 300(A) to (D) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the effect display device 1600 during the second specific effect, and Figures 300(A') to (D') are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the effect display device 1600 during the first specific effect. Note that, below, only the differences from the above embodiment will be explained, and redundant explanations will not be provided. Furthermore, the following modified examples may be implemented in combination with the above-described embodiments; for example, a specific effect that has the potential for a jackpot in the above-described embodiments may be implemented as the first specific effect below, and a specific effect that does not have the potential for a jackpot in the above-described embodiments may be implemented as the second specific effect below, or they may be implemented as effects separate from the specific effects in the above-described embodiments.

As described above, during the first specific effect, which has the potential for a jackpot, the pachinko machine 1 controls the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards on the door frame side and the game board side to emit light in a light-emitting mode (first specific light-emitting mode) corresponding to the first specific effect, and outputs sound effects corresponding to the first specific effect from the speaker (speaker 622) provided on the pachinko machine 1. Meanwhile, during the second specific effect, which does not have the potential for a jackpot, the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards on the door frame side and the game board side to emit light in a light-emitting mode (second specific light-emitting mode) corresponding to the second specific effect, and does not output sound effects corresponding to the second specific effect from the speaker (speaker 622) provided on the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, if the pressing operation unit 300 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during the execution of the second specific effect, which does not have the potential for a jackpot, the second specific effect is terminated. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 299 (A), a second specific effect that does not have the possibility of a jackpot is started, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side are controlled to emit light in a light emission mode (second specific light emission mode) corresponding to the second specific effect, and the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to not output sound effects (ts), and if the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during the period (te) until the second specific effect is ended (t1), the second specific effect that does not involve output of sound effects from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1 is ended, and the light emission mode (second specific light emission mode) corresponding to the second specific effect by the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side is ended. This not only makes it possible to end the second special effect, which lacks excitement because no sound effect is output from the speaker (speaker 622) installed in the pachinko machine 1, but also makes it possible to end the second special effect, which is useless to the player as it does not have the potential to result in a jackpot, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the second special effect.

In addition, in this example, after the second specific effect is terminated based on the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, an effect similar to the special effect described above is executed, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are controlled to emit light in an illumination mode (special illumination mode) corresponding to the special effect, and the second specific effect is not executed while the special effect is being executed (t1). As described above, the special effect may also be executed to be beneficial to the player. In this case, the special effect is executed in place of the second specific effect, which is not beneficial to the player because it does not output any effect sound from the speaker (speaker 622) installed in the pachinko machine 1 and therefore not only lacks excitement but also has no possibility of a jackpot. This prevents the second specific effect, which is not beneficial to the player, from being executed for a long period of time, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game. Furthermore, the player's discomfort caused by the execution of the second specific effect is reduced, preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this example, when the special effect is executed after the second specific effect has ended, a sound effect corresponding to the special effect is output from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, when the second specific effect ends and the special effect begins at timing t1 in Figure 299 (A), a special effect is executed that involves the output of a sound effect from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1. This makes it possible to execute an exciting effect by outputting a sound effect from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1 in addition to the display of the special effect executed by the effect display device 1600, and to prevent a decline in interest in playing the game.

In this example, as shown in Figures 300(A)-(D), after the second specific effect has started (A), when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed (B), the effect display device 1600 displays a crying-face character and the text "Sorry! Lose!" as the non-winning mode 1600a, and displays a stopped decorative symbol, ending the second specific effect and terminating the light-emitting mode (second specific light-emitting mode) corresponding to the second specific effect, which is achieved by the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side. Thereafter, a special effect is executed in place of the second specific effect, and a sound corresponding to the special effect is output from the speaker (speaker 622) mounted on the pachinko machine 1, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are controlled to emit light in the light-emitting mode (special light-emitting mode) corresponding to the special effect ((C), (D)). In this way, if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed during the second specific effect, the non-winning mode 1600a is displayed to notify the player that there is no possibility of a jackpot, and then the second specific effect is ended and a special effect is executed in place of the second specific effect. This reduces the player's discomfort caused by the execution of a useless specific effect and prevents a decrease in interest in the game. Furthermore, because the non-winning mode 1600a displayed on the effect display device 1600 disappears after a specified period of time, an effect that is considerate of the player can be executed and does not excessively decrease interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the special effects described above are implemented to customize the game to the player's liking or to enhance the player's enjoyment, the special effects can be further enhanced by the output of sound effects from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1. This reduces the player's discomfort at the execution of a useless second specific effect that not only does not involve the output of sound effects but also has no possibility of resulting in a jackpot, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In the above example, a special effect is executed that involves the output of sound effects from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1 when the second specific effect is terminated based on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed during the second specific effect that does not involve the output of sound effects. However, the present technical concept is not limited to the above, as long as the second specific effect is terminated based on the establishment of a predetermined condition during the second specific effect that does not involve the output of sound effects from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1. For example, when the second specific effect is terminated based on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed during the second specific effect that does not involve the output of sound effects from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1, a special effect is executed in place of the second specific effect, but sound effects corresponding to the special effect may not be output from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1 during the special effect. In addition, when the handle touch sensor 192 detects a touch by the player during the second specific performance that does not involve the output of a performance sound from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1, a special performance may be executed instead of the second specific performance (the second specific performance is ended), and a performance sound corresponding to the special performance may be output from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1, or the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 may be output during the second specific performance that does not involve the output of a performance sound from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1. When a gaming ball enters the slot (when a start winning occurs), a special effect may be executed instead of the second specific effect (the second specific effect may be ended), and a sound effect corresponding to the special effect may be output from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1. Alternatively, a first specific effect which has the possibility of a jackpot based on the results of a special lottery drawn when a gaming ball is received in the first starting slot 2002 or the second starting slot 2004 may be executed, and a sound effect corresponding to the first specific effect may be output from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1. This prevents players from stopping their shots and improves the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, as described above, the special effect may be executed for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds), or the second specific effect may be executed again after the special effect has ended, or another effect (which may not execute a special effect, as with the fluctuation start waiting display) may be executed after the special effect has ended, and then the second specific effect may be executed again if predetermined effect conditions are met. In other words, the second specific effect may not be executed while the special effect is being executed, and the second specific effect may be executed after the special effect has ended, or the second specific effect may be executed again if predetermined effect conditions are met after the special effect has ended. Furthermore, if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed again during the execution of the second specific effect, the special effect may be executed again, thereby reducing the player's discomfort caused by the execution of a special effect that is not beneficial to the player and preventing a decline in interest in the game. Furthermore, if the performance operation unit 300 is operated to end the special performance during the special performance, the special performance can be ended, and if the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a manner different from the end operation, the period until the special performance ends can be extended; in other words, the time when the second specific performance starts can be delayed. In this case, by operating the performance operation unit 300 in a manner different from the end operation during the special performance, it becomes possible to delay the time when light emission in the light emission mode corresponding to the second specific performance (second specific light emission mode) starts.

In addition, in a special effect that is executed based on pressing the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 during the second specific effect, text information such as letters and symbols may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. For example, the above-mentioned non-winning state in which there is no possibility of a jackpot, or the effect display device 1600 may display a special display state indicating that the second specific effect has ended, or that a special effect is being executed in place of the second specific effect, etc. This makes it easy for the player to recognize that there is no possibility of a jackpot, that the second specific effect has ended, etc. Furthermore, part of the text information displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be changed in response to operation of the effect operation unit 300 (e.g., a touch operation of the touch operation unit 302), or the text information may be switched between being displayed and not displayed on the effect display device 1600 in response to operation of the effect operation unit 300 (e.g., a press operation of the pressing operation unit 303). This makes it possible to kill time during the special effect, and if the period until the special effect ends is extended based on operating the effect operation unit 300 in a manner different from the end operation, the player will be able to recognize that the period until the special effect ends has been extended, in other words, that the start of the second specific effect has been reliably delayed, giving the player a sense of security and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in this example, during the first specific performance which has the potential for a jackpot, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side are controlled to emit light in a light emission mode (first specific light emission mode) corresponding to the first specific performance, and a performance sound corresponding to the first specific performance is output from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1.If the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during this first specific performance, the first specific performance is continued without being terminated, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side are controlled to emit light in a light emission mode (first specific light emission mode) corresponding to the first specific performance, and the performance sound corresponding to the first specific performance is continued to be output from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1. Similarly, even if the handle touch sensor 192 detects contact by the player during a first specific effect in which a sound corresponding to the first specific effect is output from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1, the first specific effect continues without ending, and further, even if a game ball enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004 (in the case of a start winning) during a first specific effect in which a sound corresponding to the first specific effect is output from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1, the first specific effect continues without ending.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 299 (B), the speaker (speaker 622) outputs a sound corresponding to the first specific effect, and the first specific effect, which has the possibility of a jackpot, is initiated, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side are controlled to emit light in a light-emitting mode (first specific light-emitting mode) corresponding to the first specific effect, and the speaker (speaker 622) provided on the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to output a sound corresponding to the first specific effect (ts), and this continues for a predetermined time until the first specific effect ends (te). Even if the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed at timing (t1), the first specific effect continues, accompanied by the output of effect sounds corresponding to the first specific effect from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1, light emission control of the light emission mode (first specific light emission mode) corresponding to the first specific effect by the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side continues, and the output of effect sounds corresponding to the first specific effect from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1 continues.

In this example, as shown in Diagram 300 (A') to (D'), after the first specific effect has started (A'), if the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed (B'), the decorative patterns displayed in a variable manner on the effect display device 1600 continue without stopping ((B') to (C')), and the decorative patterns are displayed in a static manner based on the reception of a static display command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (D'). In this way, because the display of the variable decorative patterns continues even if the press operation unit 303 is pressed during the first specific effect, it is possible to increase a player's anticipation of a jackpot and draw their attention to the first specific effect when they recognize that there is a possibility of a jackpot.

In addition, the first specific performance may have a period during which no sound effect is output, or the second specific performance may have a period during which sound effect is output, or the second specific performance may not output sound effect from the speaker (speaker 622) throughout the entire period, while the first specific performance may output sound effect from the speaker (speaker 622) for at least a portion of the period. In other words, the present technical concept is applicable to any device that, while a first specific effect is being played, if the press operation unit 303 is pressed while a sound effect corresponding to the first specific effect is being output, or if the handle touch sensor 192 detects player contact, or if the game ball enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004 (a start winning event occurs), the first specific effect will continue without ending; and if the press operation unit 303 is pressed while a sound effect is not being output during the second specific effect, or if the handle touch sensor 192 detects player contact, or if the game ball enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004 (a start winning event occurs), the second specific effect will end (but is not limited to these).

Furthermore, even if the press operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is pressed during the first specific presentation, the non-winning mode 1600a is not displayed. Therefore, even if there is a period during the first specific presentation when the presentation sound is not output, by pressing the press operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 during that period, it becomes possible to determine whether the first specific presentation or the second specific presentation is being performed. If it is determined that the first specific presentation is being performed, expectations for a jackpot increase, and it becomes possible to draw attention to the first specific presentation being performed by the presentation display device 1600 and prevent a decline in interest in the game. If the press operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is pressed during a predetermined period during the performance of the first specific presentation, a winning indication mode (a mode suggesting that a win has occurred or that there is a possibility of a win) different from the non-winning mode 1600a may be displayed. This allows the player to visually see the winning indication and recognize that the first specific effect, which has the potential to result in a jackpot, is being executed, making the player look forward to a jackpot and drawing their attention to the first specific effect displayed on the effect display device 1600, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when a predetermined operation unit other than the effect operation unit 300 (for example, any one or a combination of any two or more (or all) of the handle 195, volume adjustment button 227, light intensity adjustment button 228, etc.) is operated, it may be possible to display special character information such as characters or symbols that are different from the character information such as characters or symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600, regardless of whether the first specific effect, the second specific effect, or the special effect is in progress. In this case, too, the display of special character information on the effect display device 1600 may lead to the mistaken belief that the second specific effect is being executed, but when the special jackpot lottery result is displayed, the player's interest in the game can be increased by the sudden occurrence of a jackpot that the player did not expect. The display mode of the special character information displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be changed in response to operation of a predetermined operation unit. A player who notices that the first specific effect is being executed can enjoy the change in the special character information by operating the predetermined operation unit in anticipation of a jackpot. Alternatively, the display mode of the special character information may be changed in a different manner from the character information, such as letters and symbols, displayed in response to operation of the press operation unit during the second specific effect, thereby making it easier to visually distinguish the special character information from the character information, such as letters and symbols, displayed in response to operation of the press operation unit during the second specific effect. Furthermore, the special character information need not always be displayed when the predetermined operation unit is operated. It may also be displayed when the predetermined operation unit is operated during any period during the execution of any one or any combination of the first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the special effect (or all of them). In other words, there may be a period during which the special character information is not displayed, even if the predetermined operation unit is operated during the execution of the first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the special effect.

Furthermore, because the second specific effect described above does not have the potential to result in a jackpot, its execution could discourage the player and reduce their interest in the game. For this reason, in this example, the second specific effect is executed only when certain conditions are met, preventing an excessive decrease in interest in the game. Specifically, the second specific effect can be executed when a jackpot has not been achieved and a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the handle touch sensor 192 stopped detecting the player's contact. This prevents the so-called "stop shot," which stops the release of game balls, and improves the operating rate of the gaming machine. Alternatively, or in addition to the above conditions, the second special effect may be executed when a predetermined period of time has passed since the handle rotation detection sensor 189 stopped detecting rotation even if a jackpot has not been achieved, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the stop display command was received even if a jackpot has not been achieved, or when the reserved numbers of first special symbols and second special symbols (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number) are 0. This also prevents stop shots and improves the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the first specific effect, which has the possibility of a jackpot and is accompanied by the output of sound effects, and the second specific effect, which does not have the possibility of a jackpot and is not accompanied by the output of sound effects, may be the same or similar in some or all of the display modes of the effect display device 1600 (for example, a rainbow effect display mode (see Figure 238) in which three or more of the display areas of the effect display device 1600 in the above-mentioned embodiment are each displayed in different colors to achieve a display of three or more colors, and the display colors of the multiple areas are switched sequentially), or the light emission modes of the multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 or door frame 3 (for example, rainbow light emission (see Figure 241) in which multiple LED groups are made to emit light in different light colors to achieve light emission of three or more colors by the multiple LED groups, and multi-color light emission control is performed to switch the light colors of the multiple LED groups sequentially), or the first specific effect and the second specific effect may be different modes (for example, rainbow light emission and rainbow light emission are different modes, or rainbow effect display mode and rainbow effect display mode are different display modes). Furthermore, one or both of the first and second specific effects do not have to be performed during periods when variable effects are being performed, but may be performed during periods when variable effects are not being performed, and may be performed as effects such as the above-mentioned pre-reading notices, for example. This increases the variety of effects and can increase interest in the game.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 described above may be configured to transition to a game restriction state in which some or all of the game is restricted when the number of balls (also known as the difference between the number of balls dispensed) between a specified value (plus or minus zero, a lower limit for the number of payouts minus the number of shots (number of outs), etc.) and the upper limit for the number of payouts minus the number of shots (number of outs) reaches a preset upper limit. For example, in the game restriction state, one or any combination of the following may be performed: prohibiting the ball launcher 540 from firing game balls; disabling detection by the first start sensor 3002 and the second start sensor 2401; preventing the start of processing related to the variable display of special symbols (in this example, special symbol process processing, etc.); turning off LEDs related to lottery processing, such as the special symbol display devices (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) of the function display unit 1400, or illuminating them in a manner corresponding to the game restriction state; or hiding decorative symbols on the performance display device 1600 and displaying them in a manner corresponding to the game restriction state. Additionally, the game restriction state may be released by a specific operation (turning the power OFF and then ON + clearing the RAM, turning the power OFF and then ON, etc.).

In addition, the controls in the above-described embodiments, such as controls relating to specific effects, first specific effects, second specific effects, and special effects, may be executable even in a game restriction state. That is, control relating to a modified example in which the start timing of a specific effect is delayed by player operation in a game restriction state, control relating to a modified example in which the start timing of a specific effect is delayed by a predetermined operation when an abnormal condition occurs in a game restriction state, control relating to a modified example in which the start timing of a specific effect that displays a substantially single color in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a game restriction state is delayed, control relating to a modified example in which the display mode of the effect display device 1600 is changed depending on the operation mode of the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 in a game restriction state, control relating to a modified example in which a third effect that has the possibility of a jackpot in a game restriction state is delayed The controls in the above-described embodiments may also be executable in the game restricted state, such as control regarding a modified example when a specific abnormal condition occurs during the execution of the first specific effect or the second specific effect that has no possibility of a jackpot, control regarding a modified example in which a special effect is executed instead of the second specific effect in the game restricted state, and control regarding a modified example in which a sound corresponding to the first specific effect is not output from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1 during the first specific effect in the game restricted state and a sound corresponding to the second specific effect is not output from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1 during the second specific effect in the game restricted state. Also, in the game restricted state, the specific effect and the first specific effect that have the possibility of a jackpot may be disabled, while the specific effect, the second specific effect, and the special effect that do not have the possibility of a jackpot may be enabled. Alternatively, in the game restricted state, the specific effect and the second specific effect that do not have the possibility of a jackpot may also be disabled, just like the specific effect and the first specific effect that have the possibility of a jackpot, and only the special effect may be enabled.

In addition, if a game play restriction state occurs while the above-mentioned specific effect, first specific effect, second specific effect, or special effect is being executed, the effect display device 1600 may display a special display corresponding to the game play restriction state (a display notifying that a game play restriction state has occurred, "Game play restriction state in progress"), or the speaker (speaker 622) may output a special notification sound corresponding to the game play restriction state (a sound notifying that a game play restriction state has occurred, "Game play restriction state has occurred"), or the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side may be made to emit light in a special light-emitting pattern corresponding to the game play restriction state (for example, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side may flash red, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side may be turned off). In addition, if a game restriction state occurs during the execution of a specific effect or a first specific effect that has the possibility of a jackpot, the specific effect or the first specific effect that has the possibility of a jackpot may be interrupted, or if a game restriction state occurs during the execution of a specific effect or a second specific effect or a special effect that does not have the possibility of a jackpot, the specific effect or the second specific effect or the special effect that does not have the possibility of a jackpot may be interrupted, or if a game restriction state occurs during the execution of a specific effect or a first specific effect that has the possibility of a jackpot, the specific effect or the first specific effect that has the possibility of a jackpot may be interrupted, while the possibility of a jackpot may be If a play restriction state is entered during the execution of a specific effect, second specific effect, or special effect that has no possibility of a jackpot, the specific effect, second specific effect, or special effect that has no possibility of a jackpot may not be interrupted; alternatively, if a play restriction state is entered during the execution of a specific effect, second specific effect, or special effect that has no possibility of a jackpot, the specific effect, second specific effect, or special effect that has no possibility of a jackpot may be interrupted, while if a play restriction state is entered during the execution of a specific effect or first specific effect that has the possibility of a jackpot, the specific effect or first specific effect that has the possibility of a jackpot may not be interrupted.

The above describes embodiments for implementing the present invention, but the above embodiments can be modified as appropriate without departing from the technical concept of the present invention. In other words, the technical concept of the present invention can be applied even if some of the above embodiments are modified or multiple embodiments are combined.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1804 Decorative body (decorative body)
1804a Chamfered portion 1804b Glue surface (glue surface)
1805 Decorative body (decorative body)
1805a chamfered portion 1806 decorative body (decorative body)
1806a Notch 1807L Decoration left (decoration)
1807R Decoration right (decoration)
1808 Decorative body (decorative body)
1809 Decorative body (decorative body)
1809a Notch 1823 First member (base member)
1823a Flat plate part (flat plate part)
1823b Mounting recess (mounting recess)
1823c Separation hole (separation hole)
1823e Misapplication prevention unit (misapplication prevention unit)
1824 First member (base member)
1824a Flat plate part (flat plate part)
1824b Mounting recess (mounting recess)
1824c Misapplication prevention unit (misapplication prevention unit)
1825 First member (base member)
1825a Flat plate part (flat plate part)
1825b Mounting recess (mounting recess)
1825c Misapplication prevention part (misapplication prevention part)
1826L First member left (base member)
1826R First member right (base member)
1826a Flat plate part (flat plate part)
1826b Mounting recess (mounting recess)
1826c Misapplication prevention unit (misapplication prevention unit)
1827 First member (base member)
1827a Flat plate part (flat plate part)
1827b Mounting recess (mounting recess)
1827c Separation hole (separation hole)
1827d Misapplication prevention part (misapplication prevention part)
1828 First member (base member)
1828a Flat plate part (flat plate part)
1828b Mounting recess (mounting recess)
1828c Separation hole (separation hole)
1828d Misapplication prevention part (misapplication prevention part)
2000 Front unit 2810 Gate body (base member)
2810a Front plate part (flat plate part)
2810b Adhesion recess (mounting recess)
2810c Mis-attachment prevention unit (mis-attachment prevention unit)
2810d Separation hole (separation hole)
2811 Gate Seal (decorative body)
2811a Notch 3000 Back unit 4100 Decorative board 4130 Partition cover IDC ID output circuit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that awards a benefit based on the result of a predetermined lottery,
image display means capable of displaying an image;
a performance control means for controlling a display related to the performance performed by the image display means;
A specific operation means operable by a player,
The performance control means
A specific effect that is performed when there is no possibility of granting the benefit;
A special performance that is performed when there is a possibility of granting the benefit;
and an abnormality notification that displays abnormality notification information when a specific abnormal state occurs.
The display regarding the specific effect and the display regarding the special effect are not the same or similar displays, but are different displays,
The specific effects and the special effects can be executed even when a specific abnormal state occurs,
When the specific operation means is operated during the execution of the specific effect and the abnormality notification, it is possible to terminate only the specific effect being executed and continue the abnormality notification,
When the specific operation means is operated during the execution of the special effect and the abnormality notification, the special effect and the abnormality notification can be continued without terminating the special effect currently being executed,
Furthermore, when the specific performance and the abnormality notification are being performed, if the specific performance is terminated based on the operation of the specific operation means and then the specific performance is executed again, the specific performance that is executed again is configured to be executed from the beginning, rather than being resumed from the point at which it was terminated based on the operation of the specific operation means,
Furthermore, the gaming machine is characterized in that, at least when the specific effect is not being performed, based on the operation of the specific operation means, the specific effect can be executed at a timing later than the execution timing of the specific effect when the specific operation means is not operated.